BRAKE SYSTEM
SECTION
BR
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS ...............................................................4
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR
BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″...............4
Precautions for SRS ″Air Bag″ and ″SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER″ Service.........................................4
Precautions for Brake System.....................................4
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnoses....................5
PREPARATION ...............................................................6
Special Service Tools ..................................................6
Commercial Service Tools ...........................................6
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................................7
NVH Troubleshooting Chart.........................................7
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ..................................................8
Checking Brake Fluid Level.........................................8
Checking Brake Line ...................................................8
Changing Brake Fluid ..................................................8
Bleeding Brake System ...............................................9
BRAKE HYDRAULIC LINE ...........................................10
Hydraulic Circuit.........................................................10
Removal.....................................................................11
Inspection...................................................................11
Installation..................................................................11
PROPORTIONING VALVE ............................................12
Inspection...................................................................12
Removal and Installation ...........................................12
BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET..................................13
Removal and Installation ...........................................13
Inspection...................................................................13
Adjustment .................................................................13
MASTER CYLINDER.....................................................15
Removal.....................................................................15
Disassembly...............................................................16
MODELS WITHOUT VDC .........................................16
MODELS WITH VDC ................................................16
Inspection...................................................................16
Assembly ...................................................................17
MODELS WITHOUT VDC .........................................17
MODELS WITH VDC ................................................17
Installation..................................................................18
BRAKE BOOSTER........................................................19
On-vehicle Service.....................................................19
OPERATING CHECK ...............................................19
AIRTIGHT CHECK ...................................................19
Removal.....................................................................19
Inspection...................................................................19
OUTPUT ROD LENGTH CHECK ..............................19
Installation..................................................................20
VACUUM PIPING...........................................................21
Vacuum Hose ............................................................21
Removal and Installation ...........................................21
Inspection...................................................................21
HOSES AND CONNECTORS ...................................21
CHECK VALVE ........................................................21
FRONT DISC BRAKE ...................................................22
Components...............................................................22
Pad Replacement ......................................................22
Removal.....................................................................23
Disassembly...............................................................24
Inspection...................................................................24
CALIPER .................................................................24
ROTOR ...................................................................24
Assembly ...................................................................25
Installation..................................................................25
Brake Burnishing Procedure......................................25
REAR DRUM BRAKE ...................................................26
Components...............................................................26
Removal.....................................................................26
Inspection...................................................................27
WHEEL CYLINDER ..................................................27
Wheel Cylinder Overhaul...........................................28
Inspection...................................................................28
DRUM .....................................................................28
LINING ....................................................................28
Installation..................................................................28
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL ......................................30
Components...............................................................30
Removal and Installation ...........................................30
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
CONTENTS
Inspection...................................................................30
Adjustment .................................................................31
ABS
DESCRIPTION ...............................................................32
Purpose......................................................................32
Operation ...................................................................32
ABS Hydraulic Circuit ................................................32
System Components .................................................33
System Description....................................................33
SENSOR .................................................................33
CONTROL UNIT (BUILT-IN ABS ACTUATOR AND
ELECTRIC UNIT) .....................................................33
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT ....................33
G SENSOR (4WD MODELS ONLY) ..........................34
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location .....................................................................35
Schematic ..................................................................36
Wiring Diagram - ABS - .............................................37
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION ...............................................................41
Self-diagnosis ............................................................41
FUNCTION ..............................................................41
SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE ..............................41
HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
(MALFUNCTION CODES) ........................................42
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
(MALFUNCTION CODES) ........................................42
CONSULT-II ...............................................................43
CONSULT-II APPLICATION TO ABS..........................43
ECU (ABS CONTROL UNIT) PART NUMBER
MODE .....................................................................43
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure............................44
SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE ..............................44
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS MODE.......................45
DATA MONITOR PROCEDURE ................................46
ACTIVE TEST PROCEDURE ....................................47
DATA MONITOR MODE ...........................................48
ACTIVE TEST MODE ...............................................48
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION..................49
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick
and Accurate Repair ..................................................49
INTRODUCTION ......................................................49
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION ...........50
Preliminary Check......................................................50
Ground Circuit Check ................................................53
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT GROUND.....53
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL
DESCRIPTION ...............................................................54
Malfunction Code/Symptom Chart.............................54
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
ITEMS.............................................................................56
Wheel Sensor or Rotor..............................................56
(Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .....................................56
ABS Actuator Solenoid Valve or Solenoid Valve
Relay..........................................................................59
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .....................................59
Motor Relay or Motor.................................................61
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .....................................61
Low Voltage ...............................................................63
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .....................................63
G Sensor and Circuit .................................................65
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .....................................65
Control Unit................................................................67
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .....................................67
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS .................68
1. ABS Works Frequently ..........................................68
2. Unexpected Pedal Action ......................................68
3. Long Stopping Distance ........................................70
4. ABS Does Not Work..............................................70
5. Pedal Vibration and Noise.....................................71
6. Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When
Ignition Switch Is Turned On .....................................72
7. Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch
Is Turned On..............................................................74
8. Vehicle Vibrates Excessively When ABS Is
Operating ...................................................................77
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .................................80
Front Wheel Sensor...................................................80
Rear Wheel Sensor ...................................................80
Front Sensor Rotor ....................................................81
REMOVAL ...............................................................81
INSTALLATION........................................................81
Rear Sensor Rotor.....................................................81
REMOVAL ...............................................................81
INSTALLATION........................................................81
G Sensor....................................................................81
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit..................................82
REMOVAL ...............................................................82
INSTALLATION........................................................82
VDC/TCS/ABS
PRECAUTIONS .............................................................83
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR
BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″.............83
Precautions for SRS ″Air Bag″ and ″SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER″ Service.......................................83
Precautions for Brake System...................................83
Precautions for Brake Control ...................................84
Diagnosis Precaution.................................................84
CAN SYSTEM .........................................................84
Precaution for Harness Repair ..................................84
CAN SYSTEM .........................................................84
PREPARATION .............................................................86
Commercial Service Tools .........................................86
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ................................................87
BR-2
CONTENTS
Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral
Position ......................................................................87
Calibration of Decel G Sensor...................................87
GENERAL INFORMATION ...........................................89
Fail-Safe.....................................................................89
ABS SYSTEM ..........................................................89
VDC/TCS SYSTEM ..................................................89
Hydraulic Circuit Diagram..........................................89
ABS Function.............................................................89
TCS Function.............................................................90
VDC Function ............................................................90
System Diagram ........................................................90
CAN COMMUNICATION ...............................................91
System Description....................................................91
CAN Communication Unit..........................................91
TYPE 1 (ALL-MODE 4WD MODELS) .........................91
TYPE 2 (EXCEPT ALL-MODE 4WD MODELS) ...........93
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES................................................94
How to Proceed with Diagnosis ................................94
BASIC CONCEPT ....................................................94
DIAGNOSIS FLOWCHART .......................................95
ASKING COMPLAINTS ............................................96
EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET ...........................96
Component Installation Location ...............................97
Schematic ..................................................................98
Wiring Diagram - VDC - ............................................99
Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard..............104
STANDARDS BY CONSULT-II ................................104
CONSULT-II Functions ............................................106
CONSULT-II MAIN FUNCTION ................................106
SELF-DIAGNOSIS .................................................108
DATA MONITOR.................................................... 111
ACTIVE TEST ........................................................114
For Fast and Accurate Diagnosis ............................116
PRECAUTIONS FOR DIAGNOSIS ..........................116
Basic Inspection.......................................................118
BASIC INSPECTION 1: BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
AND LEAK INSPECTION........................................118
BASIC INSPECTION 2: INSPECTION FOR
LOOSENESS OF POWER SYSTEM TERMINALS ....118
BASIC INSPECTION 3: INSPECTION OF ABS
WARNING LAMP, VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP
AND SLIP INDICATOR LAMP .................................118
Inspection 1 Wheel Sensor System ........................119
INSPECTION PROCEDURE ...................................119
Inspection 2 Engine System....................................121
Inspection 3 VDC/TCS/ABS Control Unit System...121
Inspection 4 VDC Pressure Sensor System ...........122
Inspection 5 Steering Angle Sensor System...........123
Inspection 6 Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor
System .....................................................................124
(Cont’d)
Inspection 7 Solenoid Valve, VDC Switch-over
Solenoid Valve and Circuit ......................................126
Inspection 8 ABS Actuator Relay or ABS Motor
Relay Power System ...............................................128
Inspection 9 Stop Lamp Switch and Circuit ............129
Inspection 10 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit) Power Circuit.....................................130
Inspection 11 When ″SHIFT POSITION ERROR″
Appears in Self-Diagnosis Results Display .............132
Inspection 12 When ″ST ANG SEN COM CIR″
Appears on Self-Diagnosis Results Display............133
Inspection 13 Brake Fluid Level of Reservoir
Tank .........................................................................133
Inspection 14 CAN Communications System .........134
Inspecting Components ...........................................134
VDC OFF SWITCH ................................................134
Symptom 1 ABS Works Frequently. ........................135
Symptom 2 Unexpected Pedal Reaction ................135
Symptom 3 Long Stopping Distance.......................136
Symptom 4 ABS Does Not Work. ...........................137
Symptom 5 Pedal Vibration and Noise ...................137
Symptom 6 VDC OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not
Illuminate..................................................................138
Symptom 7 SLIP Indicator Lamp Does Not
Illuminate..................................................................139
Symptom 8 Vehicle Behaves Jerkily During VDC/
TCS/ABS Operation.................................................140
WHEEL SENSORS......................................................142
Removal and Installation .........................................142
REMOVAL .............................................................142
INSTALLATION......................................................142
SENSOR ROTOR ........................................................144
Removal and Installation .........................................144
REMOVAL .............................................................144
INSTALLATION......................................................144
VDC/TCS/ABS ACTUATOR........................................145
Removal and Installation .........................................145
G SENSOR ..................................................................146
Removal and Installation .........................................146
REMOVAL .............................................................146
INSTALLATION......................................................146
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .......147
General Specifications.............................................147
Disc Brake ...............................................................147
Drum Brake..............................................................147
Brake Pedal .............................................................147
Parking Brake Control .............................................148
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-3
PRECAUTIONS
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR
BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
NABR0206
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL R50 is as follows (The composition
varies according to optional equipment.):
I For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
pre-tensioners, diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
I For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of front side air bag module (located in the outer side of front
seat), side curtain air bag module (locating in the headliner side of front and rear seat), satellite sensor,
diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring harness, warning lamp
(one of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
WARNING:
I To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be performed by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
I Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.
I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified with yellow and/or orange harness connector (and with yellow harness protector or yellow insulation tape before the harness connectors).
Precautions for SRS “Air Bag” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” Service
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NABR0207
Do not use electrical test equipment to check SRS circuits unless instructed to in this Service Manual.
Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch “OFF”, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3
minutes.
For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag and seat belt
pre-tensioner to deploy. Therefore, do not work on any SRS connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes
have passed.
Diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with their arrow marks “g” pointing towards the front of
the vehicle for proper operation. Also check diagnosis sensor unit for cracks, deformities or rust before
installation and replace as required.
The spiral cable must be aligned with the neutral position since its rotations are limited. Do not attempt to
turn steering wheel or column after removal of steering gear.
Handle air bag module carefully. Always place driver and passenger air bag modules with the pad side
facing upward and place side air bag module standing with stud bolt side setting bottom.
Conduct self-diagnosis to check entire SRS for proper function after replacing any components.
After air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly should be replaced if damaged.
Precautions for Brake System
I
I
I
I
I
NABR0002
Use brake fluid “DOT 3”.
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it
may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on
painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
To clean master cylinder parts, disc brake caliper parts or
wheel cylinder parts, use clean brake fluid.
Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. They
will ruin rubber parts of hydraulic system.
SBR686C
BR-4
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Brake System (Cont’d)
I
Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake
tubes.
I Always torque brake lines when installing.
WARNING:
I Clean brakes with a vacuum dust collector to minimize
risk of health hazard from powder caused by friction.
GI
MA
EM
LC
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnoses
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
I GI-11, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”
I EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” for power distribution circuit
When you perform trouble diagnoses, refer to the following:
I GI-35, “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”
I GI-24, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”
EC
NABR0003
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-5
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
Special Service Tools
NABR0004
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV40106500
(J25852-B)
Rear wheel bearing
puller
Removing rear wheel sensor rotor
NT724
Commercial Service Tools
Tool name
Description
Removing and installing each brake piping
a: 10 mm (0.39 in)
1 Flare nut crowfoot
2 Torque wrench
NT360
Brake fluid pressure
gauge
Measuring brake fluid pressure
NT151
Rear wheel sensor rotor
drift
Installing rear wheel sensor rotor
a: 75 mm (2.95 in) dia.
b: 63 mm (2.48 in) dia.
NT509
BR-6
NABR0005
—
×
Rotor or drum damage
—
×
Rotor or drum runout
BR-24, 28
×
Rotor or drum deformation
—
×
Rotor or drum deflection
—
×
Rotor or drum rust
—
×
Rotor thickness variation
BR-25
×
Drum out of round
BR-28
×
PROPELLER SHAFT
PD-4
×
DIFFERENTIAL
PD-4
×
DRIVE SHAFT
AX-3
×
AXLE
AX-3
×
SUSPENSION
SU-4
×
TIRES
SU-4
×
ROAD WHEEL
SU-4
×
STEERING
ST-6
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
NABR0085
×
Rotor or drum imbalance
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
×
BR-22
NABR0085S01
×
Shims damaged
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
×
BR-26
×
BR-22, 28
Return spring damaged
×
Linings or pads - uneven wear
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
Noise
Shake
Shimmy, Judder
BR-22, 28
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
Reference page
BRAKE
Possible cause and
SUSPECTED PARTS
Symptom
×: Applicable
BR-7
Linings or pads - damaged
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Checking Brake Fluid Level
Checking Brake Fluid Level
I
I
I
NABR0006
Check fluid level in reservoir tank. It should be between Max
and Min lines on reservoir tank.
If fluid level is extremely low, check brake system.
If the brake warning lamp comes on, check brake fluid level
switch and parking brake switch.
SBR451D
Checking Brake Line
NABR0007
CAUTION:
If leakage occurs around joints, retighten or, if necessary,
replace damaged parts.
1. Check brake lines (tubes and hoses) for cracks, deterioration
or other damage. Replace any damaged parts.
2. Check for oil leakage by fully depressing brake pedal while
engine is running.
SBR389C
Changing Brake Fluid
SBR419C
NABR0008
CAUTION:
I Refill with new brake fluid “DOT 3”.
I Always keep fluid level higher than minimum line on reservoir tank.
I Never reuse drained brake fluid.
I Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it
may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on
painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
1. Clean inside of reservoir tank, and refill with new brake fluid.
2. Connect a vinyl tube to each air bleeder valve.
3. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing
brake pedal.
4. Refill until brake fluid comes out of each air bleeder valve.
Use same procedure as in bleeding hydraulic system to refill
brake fluid.
Refer to “Bleeding Brake System”, BR-9.
BR-8
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Bleeding Brake System
Bleeding Brake System
SBR995
=NABR0009
CAUTION:
I Carefully monitor brake fluid level at master cylinder during bleeding operation.
I If master cylinder is suspected to have air inside, bleed air
from master cylinder first. Refer to “Installation”, “MASTER CYLINDER”, BR-18.
I Fill reservoir with new brake fluid “DOT 3”. Make sure it is
full at all times while bleeding air out of system.
I Place a container under master cylinder to avoid spillage
of brake fluid.
I Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator
and electric unit connectors or battery ground cable.
I Bleed air in the following order.
1. Left rear brake
2. Right rear brake
3. Left front brake
4. Right front brake
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Connect a transparent vinyl tube to air bleeder valve.
Fully depress brake pedal several times.
With brake pedal depressed, open air bleeder valve to release
air.
Close air bleeder valve.
Release brake pedal slowly.
Repeat steps 2. through 5. until clear brake fluid comes out of
air bleeder valve.
Tighten air bleeder valve.
: 7 - 9 N·m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 in-lb)
SBR419C
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-9
BRAKE HYDRAULIC LINE
Hydraulic Circuit
Hydraulic Circuit
NABR0010
SBR058F
SBR059F
BR-10
BRAKE HYDRAULIC LINE
Removal
Removal
SBR992
NABR0011
CAUTION:
I Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it
may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on
painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
I All hoses must be free from excessive bending, twisting
and pulling.
1. Connect vinyl tube to air bleeder valve.
2. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing
brake pedal.
3. Remove flare nut connecting brake tube and hose, then withdraw lock spring.
4. Cover openings to prevent entrance of dirt whenever disconnecting brake line.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
Inspection
AT
NABR0012
Check brake lines (tubes and hoses) for cracks, deterioration or
other damage. Replace any damaged parts.
TF
PD
AX
SU
Installation
SBR686C
NABR0013
CAUTION:
I Refill with new brake fluid “DOT 3”.
I Never reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Tighten all flare nuts and connecting bolts.
Flare nut: (M10)
: 15 - 17 N·m (1.5 - 1.8 kg-m, 11 - 13 ft-lb)
Flare nut: (M12)
: 17 - 19 N·m (1.7 - 2.0 kg-m, 12 - 14 ft-lb)
Connecting bolt:
: 17 - 19 N·m (1.7 - 2.0 kg-m, 12 - 14 ft-lb)
2. Refill until new brake fluid comes out of each air bleeder valve.
3. Bleed air. Refer to “Bleeding Brake System”, BR-9.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-11
PROPORTIONING VALVE
Inspection
Inspection
SBR822BA
NABR0116
CAUTION:
I Carefully monitor brake fluid level at master cylinder.
I Use new brake fluid “DOT 3”.
I Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it
may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on
paint areas, wash it away with water immediately.
I Depress pedal slowly when raising front brake pressure.
I Check rear brake pressure 2 seconds after front brake
pressure reaches specified value.
I Disconnect harness connectors from ABS actuator and
electric unit before checking.
1. Remove front LH tire.
2. Connect tool to air bleeders on front LH brake caliper and rear
LH or RH brake wheel cylinder.
3. Install front LH tire.
Before installing front LH tire, confirm the tool is not touching
the front LH wheel.
4. Bleed air from the tool.
5. Check fluid pressure by depressing brake pedal.
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
SBR823BA
Applied pressure (Front brake)
Output pressure (Rear brake)
D1
D2
6,375 (65, 924)
3,432 - 3,825
(35 - 39, 498 - 555)
If output pressure is out of specifications, replace master cylinder
assembly.
6. Bleed air after disconnecting the tool. Refer to “Bleeding Brake
System”, BR-9.
7. Install front LH tire.
SBR705AA
Removal and Installation
NABR0117
Always replace together with master cylinder as an assembly.
I Refer to “MASTER CYLINDER”, BR-15.
BR-12
BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
NABR0016
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SBR520E
Inspection
MT
AT
NABR0017
Check brake pedal for following items.
I Brake pedal bend
I Clevis pin deformation
I Crack of any welded portion
I Crack or deformation of clevis pin stopper
TF
PD
AX
SU
Adjustment
NABR0018
Check brake pedal free height from metal panel.
H: Free height
Refer to SDS (BR-147).
D: Depressed height
Refer to SDS (BR-147).
Under force of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) with engine running
C1, C2: Clearance between pedal stopper and
threaded end of stop lamp switch and ASCD switch
0.3 - 1.0 mm (0.012 - 0.039 in)
A: Pedal free play
1 - 3 mm (0.04 - 0.12 in)
If necessary, adjust brake pedal free height.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SBR463CC
BR-13
BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET
Adjustment (Cont’d)
1.
SBR824B
Loosen lock nut and adjust pedal free height by turning brake
booster input rod. Then tighten lock nut.
Make sure that tip of input rod stays inside.
2. Adjust clearance “C1” and “C2” with stop lamp switch and
ASCD switch respectively. Then tighten lock nuts.
3. Check pedal free play.
Make sure that stop lamp is off when pedal is released.
4. Check brake pedal’s depressed height while engine is running.
If depressed height is below specified value, check brake system for leaks, accumulation of air or any damage to components (master cylinder, wheel cylinder, etc.). Then make necessary repairs.
BR-14
MASTER CYLINDER
Removal
Removal
NABR0019
CAUTION:
I Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it
may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on
painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
I In the case of brake fluid leakage from the master cylinder,
disassemble the cylinder. Then check piston cups for
deformation or scratches and replace necessary parts.
1. Connect a vinyl tube to air bleeder valve.
2. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve, depressing brake
pedal to empty fluid from master cylinder.
3. Remove brake pipe flare nuts.
4. Remove master cylinder mounting nuts.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
SBR060F
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Reservoir cap
Oil filter
Float
Reservoir tank
Seal
Cylinder body
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
O-ring
Piston stopper
Secondary piston assembly
Primary piston assembly
Stopper cap
O-ring
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Plate
Guide assembly
Plate
Snap ring
Pressure sensor
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-15
MASTER CYLINDER
Disassembly
Disassembly
MODELS WITHOUT VDC
1.
NABR0020
NABR0020S01
Bend claws of stopper cap outward.
SBR938A
2. Remove piston stopper while piston is pushed into cylinder.
3. Remove piston assemblies.
If it is difficult to remove secondary piston assembly, gradually apply compressed air through fluid outlet.
4. Draw out reservoir tank.
SBR231C
MODELS WITH VDC
NABR0020S02
1.
2.
Remove the snap ring in pushing primary piston.
Holding the rod of the primary piston, remove the primary piston assembly, the plate and the guide with pulling straight to
prevent the cup from being caught by the inner wall of the cylinder.
3. Remove the plate and the guide from the primary piston.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the rod from the inner wall of the
plate.
BRA0561D
4.
Remove piston stopper while secondary piston is pushed into
cylinder.
5. Remove secondary piston assemblies.
If it is difficult to remove secondary piston assembly, gradually apply compressed air through fluid outlet.
6. Draw out reservoir tank.
SBR231C
Inspection
NABR0021
Check master cylinder inner wall for pin holes or scratches.
Replace if damaged.
BR-16
MASTER CYLINDER
Assembly
Assembly
MODELS WITHOUT VDC
1.
NABR0022
GI
NABR0022S01
Insert secondary piston assembly. Then insert primary piston
assembly.
Pay attention to direction of piston cups in figure at left.
Also, insert pistons squarely to avoid scratches on cylinder bore.
Pay attention to alignment of secondary piston slit with
valve stopper mounting hole of cylinder body.
MA
2. Install stopper cap.
Before installing stopper cap, ensure that claws are bent
inward.
3. Push reservoir tank seals into cylinder body.
4. Push reservoir tank into cylinder body.
EC
I
I
EM
LC
SBR354C
FE
CL
MT
SBR940A
5.
Install piston stopper while piston is pushed into cylinder.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SBR435B
MODELS WITH VDC
1.
I
I
NABR0022S02
Insert secondary piston assembly. Then insert primary piston
assembly.
Pay attention to direction of piston cups in figure at left.
Also, insert pistons squarely to avoid scratches on cylinder bore.
Pay attention to alignment of secondary piston slit with
valve stopper mounting hole of cylinder body.
ST
RS
BT
SBR061F
2.
Install valve stopper while piston is pushed into cylinder.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SBR435B
BR-17
MASTER CYLINDER
Assembly (Cont’d)
3. Install the plate and the guide into the cylinder body.
CAUTION:
I Be careful not to damage the rod of the primary piston.
I Pay attention to the orientation of the guide.
I Do not drop the O-ring.
SFIA0701E
4.
Be careful not to damage the rod of the primary piston with
covering the close. Then insert snap ring to cylinder with pushing primary piston.
CAUTION:
I Be careful to check the snap ring in the inner tip of the
cylinder body.
I Do not reuse the snap ring.
5. Push reservoir tank seals into cylinder body.
6. Push reservoir tank into cylinder body.
BRA0561D
Installation
ABR190
NABR0023
CAUTION:
I Refill with new brake fluid “DOT 3”.
I Never reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Place master cylinder onto brake booster and secure mounting nuts lightly.
2. Torque mounting nuts.
: 7.8 - 10.8 N·m (0.8 - 1.1 kg-m, 69 - 95 in-lb)
3. Fill up reservoir tank with new brake fluid.
4. Plug all ports on master cylinder with fingers to prevent air
suction while releasing brake pedal.
5. Have driver depress brake pedal slowly several times until no
air comes out of master cylinder.
6. Fit brake lines to master cylinder.
7. Tighten flare nuts.
: 15 - 17 N·m (1.5 - 1.8 kg-m, 11 - 13 ft-lb) (M10)
: 17 - 19 N·m (1.7 - 2.0 kg-m, 12 - 14 ft-lb) (M12)
8. Bleed air. Refer to “Bleeding Brake System”, BR-9.
BR-18
BRAKE BOOSTER
On-vehicle Service
On-vehicle Service
OPERATING CHECK
1.
2.
SBR002A
2.
GI
NABR0024S01
Depress brake pedal several times with engine off. After
exhausting vacuum, make sure there is no change in pedal
stroke.
Depress brake pedal, then start engine. If pedal goes down
slightly, operation is normal.
AIRTIGHT CHECK
1.
NABR0024
NABR0024S02
Start engine, and stop it after one or two minutes. Depress
brake pedal several times slowly. Booster is airtight if pedal
stroke is less each time.
Depress brake pedal while engine is running, and stop engine
with pedal depressed. The pedal stroke should not change
after holding pedal down for 30 seconds.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SBR365AA
Removal
AT
NABR0025
CAUTION:
I Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it
may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on
painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
I Be careful not to deform or bend brake pipes, during
removal of booster.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SBR242F
Inspection
OUTPUT ROD LENGTH CHECK
1.
2.
3.
NABR0026
NABR0026S01
Apply vacuum of −66.7 kPa (−500 mmHg, −19.69 inHg) to
brake booster with a hand vacuum pump.
Add preload of 19.6 N (2.0 kg, 4.4 lb) to output rod.
Check output rod length.
Specified length:
10.275 - 10.525 mm (0.4045 - 0.4144 in)
ST
RS
BT
SBR208E
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-19
BRAKE BOOSTER
Installation
Installation
SBR062F
=NABR0027
CAUTION:
I Be careful not to deform or bend brake pipes during installation of booster.
I Replace clevis pin if damaged.
I Refill with new brake fluid “DOT 3”.
I Never reuse drained brake fluid.
I Take care not to damage brake booster mounting bolt
thread when installing. Due to the narrow angle of
installation, the threads can be damaged by the dash
panel.
1. Before fitting booster, temporarily adjust clevis to dimension
shown.
2. Fit booster, then secure mounting nuts (brake pedal bracket to
brake booster) lightly.
3. Connect brake pedal and booster input rod with clevis pin.
4. Secure mounting nuts.
Specification: 13 - 16 N·m (1.3 - 1.6 kg-m, 9 - 12 ft-lb)
5. Install master cylinder. Refer to “Installation” in “MASTER
CYLINDER”, BR-18.
6. Adjust brake pedal height and free play. Refer to “Adjustment”
in “BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET”, BR-13.
7. Secure lock nut for clevis.
: 16 - 22 N·m (1.6 - 2.2 kg-m, 12 - 16 ft-lb)
8. Bleed air. Refer to “Bleeding Brake System”, BR-9.
BR-20
VACUUM PIPING
Vacuum Hose
Vacuum Hose
NABR0028
GI
MA
EM
LC
SBR063F
EC
Removal and Installation
NABR0029
CAUTION:
When installing vacuum hoses, pay attention to the following
points.
I Do not apply any oil or lubricants to vacuum hose and
check valve.
I Insert vacuum tube into vacuum hose as shown.
FE
CL
MT
SBR225B
I
AT
Install check valve, paying attention to its direction.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SBR064F
Inspection
NABR0030
HOSES AND CONNECTORS
NABR0030S01
Check vacuum lines, connections and check valve for airtightness,
improper attachment chafing and deterioration.
ST
RS
BT
CHECK VALVE
NABR0030S02
Check vacuum with a vacuum pump.
Connect to booster side
Vacuum should exist.
Connect to engine side
Vacuum should not exist.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SBR844B
BR-21
FRONT DISC BRAKE
Components
Components
NABR0031
SBR385DC
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Main pin
Pin boot
Torque member fixing bolt
Torque member
Shim cover
Inner shim
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Inner pad
Pad retainer
Outer pad
Outer shim
Connecting bolt
Copper washer
Pad Replacement
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Main pin bolt
Bleed valve
Cylinder body
Piston seal
Piston
Piston boot
NABR0032
WARNING:
Clean brakes with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the
hazard of airborne particles or other materials.
CAUTION:
I When cylinder body is open, do not depress brake pedal,
or piston will pop out.
I Be careful not to damage piston boot or get oil on rotor.
Always replace shims when replacing pads.
I If shims are rusted or show peeling of the rubber coat,
replace them with new shims.
I It is not necessary to remove connecting bolt except for
disassembly or replacement of caliper assembly. In this
case, suspend cylinder body with wire so as not to stretch
brake hose.
I Carefully monitor brake fluid level because brake fluid will
return to reservoir when pushing back piston.
BR-22
FRONT DISC BRAKE
Pad Replacement (Cont’d)
1.
2.
Remove master cylinder reservoir cap.
Remove lower pin bolt.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SBR383D
3.
Open cylinder body upward. Then remove pad retainers, and
inner and outer shims.
Standard pad thickness:
11.0 mm (0.433 in)
Pad wear limit:
2.0 mm (0.079 in)
Carefully monitor brake fluid level because brake fluid will
return to reservoir when pushing back piston.
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SBR384D
Removal
NABR0033
WARNING:
Clean brake pads with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the
hazard of airborne particles or other materials.
CAUTION:
Suspend caliper assembly with wire so as not to stretch brake
hose.
ST
RS
BT
Remove torque member fixing bolts and connecting bolt.
It is not necessary to remove connecting bolt except for disassembly or replacement of caliper assembly. In this case,
suspend caliper assembly with wire so as not to stretch brake
hose.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SBR386D
BR-23
FRONT DISC BRAKE
Disassembly
Disassembly
NABR0034
WARNING:
Do not place your fingers in front of piston.
CAUTION:
Do not scratch or score cylinder wall.
1. Push out piston with dust seal with compressed air.
2. Remove piston seal with a suitable tool.
SBR085A
Inspection
CALIPER
Cylinder Body
I
NABR0035
NABR0035S01
NABR0035S0101
Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust, wear, damage
or presence of foreign objects. If any of the above conditions
are observed, replace cylinder body.
I Minor damage from rust or foreign objects may be eliminated
by polishing surface with a fine emery paper. Replace cylinder
body if necessary.
CAUTION:
Use brake fluid to clean. Never use mineral oil.
Piston
NABR0035S0102
Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign
objects. Replace if any of the above conditions are observed.
CAUTION:
Piston sliding surface is plated. Do not polish with emery
paper even if rust or foreign objects are stuck to sliding surface.
Slide Pin, Pin Bolt and Pin Boot
NABR0035S0103
Check for wear, cracks, rust or other damage. Replace if any of the
above conditions are observed.
ROTOR
Runout
SBR019B
NABR0035S02
NABR0035S0201
1. Secure rotor to wheel hub with at least two nuts (M12 × 1.25).
2. Check runout using a dial indicator.
Make sure that wheel bearing axial end play is within the
specifications before measuring. Refer to AX-4, “Front Wheel
Bearing”.
Maximum runout:
0.1 mm (0.004 in)
3. If the runout is out of specification, find minimum runout position as follows:
a. Remove nuts and rotor from wheel hub.
b. Shift the rotor one hole and secure rotor to wheel hub with
nuts.
c. Measure runout.
d. Repeat steps a. to c. so that minimum runout position can be
found.
4. If the runout is still out of specification, turn rotor with on-car
brake lathe (“MAD, DL-8700”, “AMMCO 700 and 705” or
equivalent).
BR-24
FRONT DISC BRAKE
Inspection (Cont’d)
Thickness
NABR0035S0202
Thickness variation (At least 8 positions):
Maximum 0.015 mm (0.0006 in)
If thickness variation exceeds the specification, turn rotor with oncar brake lathe.
Rotor repair limit:
26.0 mm (1.024 in)
GI
MA
EM
LC
SBR020B
Assembly
1.
2.
3.
EC
NABR0036
Insert piston seal into groove on cylinder body.
With piston boot fitted to piston, insert piston boot into groove
on cylinder body and install piston.
Properly secure piston boot
FE
CL
MT
SBR574
Installation
AT
NABR0037
CAUTION:
I Refill with new brake fluid “DOT 3”.
I Never reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Install caliper assembly.
2. Install brake hose to caliper securely.
3. Install all parts and secure all bolts.
4. Bleed air. Refer to “Bleeding Brake System”, BR-9.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SBR387D
Brake Burnishing Procedure
NABR0086
When experiencing soft brake pedal feel at very low mileage, or
after replacing the rotor, burnish the brake pad contact surfaces
according to the following procedures.
CAUTION:
Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution.
1. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at 50 km/h (31
MPH).
2. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a
complete stop from 50 km/h (31 MPH). Adjust brake pedal/foot
pressure such that vehicle stopping time equals 3 to 5 seconds.
3. To cool the brake system, drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31
MPH) for 1 minute without stopping.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 10 times or more to complete the burnishing procedure.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-25
REAR DRUM BRAKE
Components
Components
NABR0038
SBR757DA
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Shoe hold pin
Plug
Back plate
Check plug
Spring
Shoe (leading side)
Air bleeder
Spring
Piston cup
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Piston
Boot
Retainer ring
Toggle lever
Wave washer
Shoe (trailing side)
Adjuster
Boot
Piston
Removal
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
Piston cup
Wheel cylinder
Adjuster lever
Spring seat
Shoe hold spring
Retainer
Adjuster spring
Return spring (upper)
Return spring (lower)
NABR0039
WARNING:
Clean brake lining with a vacuum dust collector to minimize
the hazard of airborne asbestos or other materials.
CAUTION:
Make sure parking brake lever is released completely.
1.
a.
Release parking brake lever fully, then remove drum.
If drum is hard to remove, the following procedures
should be carried out.
Remove plug. Then shorten adjuster to make clearance
between brake shoe and drum as shown.
SBR264CA
BR-26
REAR DRUM BRAKE
Removal (Cont’d)
b.
Tighten the two bolts gradually.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SBR093A
2.
After removing shoe hold pin by rotating push retainer, remove
leading shoe then remove trailing shoe. Remove spring by
rotating shoes in direction arrow.
Be careful not to damage wheel cylinder piston boots.
3. Remove adjuster.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SBR266CA
4. Disconnect parking brake cable from toggle lever.
Be careful not to damage parking brake cable when separating it.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SBR267CA
5.
Remove retainer ring with a suitable tool. Then separate toggle
lever and brake shoe.
ST
RS
BT
SBR093B
Inspection
WHEEL CYLINDER
I
I
Check wheel cylinder for leakage.
Check for wear, damage and loose conditions.
Replace if any such condition exists.
NABR0040
HA
NABR0040S01
SC
EL
IDX
SBR816B
BR-27
REAR DRUM BRAKE
Wheel Cylinder Overhaul
Wheel Cylinder Overhaul
I
I
NABR0041
Check all internal parts for wear, rust and damage. Replace if
necessary.
Pay attention so as not to scratch cylinder when installing pistons.
SBR215B
Inspection
DRUM
I
I
I
SBR095A
NABR0042
NABR0042S01
Maximum inner diameter: 296.5 mm (11.67 in)
Out-of-roundness: 0.03 mm (0.0012 in) or less
Contact surface should be fine finished with No. 120 to 150
emery paper.
Using a drum lathe, lathe brake drum if it shows scoring, partial wear or stepped wear.
After brake drum has been completely reconditioned or
replaced, check drum and shoes for proper contact pattern.
LINING
NABR0042S02
Check lining thickness.
Standard lining thickness:
6.1 mm (0.240 in)
Lining wear limit (A):
1.5 mm (0.059 in)
SBR021A
Installation
NABR0043
Always perform shoe clearance adjustment. Refer to BR-31.
1. Fit toggle lever to brake shoe (trailing side) with retainer ring.
SBR092B
2.
Apply brake grease to the contact areas (indicated by arrows
and hatching) shown at left.
ABR371
BR-28
REAR DRUM BRAKE
Installation (Cont’d)
3.
I
Shorten adjuster by rotating it.
Pay attention to direction of adjuster.
Wheel
Left
Right
GI
Screw
Depression
Left-hand thread
Yes
Right-hand thread
No
MA
EM
LC
SBR217B
SBR279B
4. Connect parking brake cable to toggle lever.
5. Install all parts.
Be careful not to damage wheel cylinder piston boots.
6. Check all parts are installed properly.
Pay attention to direction of adjuster assembly.
7. Install brake drum.
8. When installing new wheel cylinder or overhauling wheel
cylinder, bleed air. Refer to “Bleeding Brake System”, BR-9.
9. Adjust parking brake. Refer to “Adjustment”, “PARKING
BRAKE CONTROL”, BR-31.
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-29
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL
Components
Components
NABR0044
SBR667E
Removal and Installation
NABR0045
1.
2.
3.
To remove parking brake cable, first remove center console.
Disconnect warning lamp connector.
Remove bolts, slacken off and remove adjusting nut.
4.
Disconnect cable. Refer to “Removal”, “REAR DRUM BRAKE”,
BR-26.
SBR390D
SBR391D
Inspection
1.
2.
3.
4.
NABR0046
Check control lever for wear or other damage. Replace if necessary.
Check wires for discontinuity or deterioration. Replace if necessary.
Check warning lamp and switch. Replace if necessary.
Check parts at each connecting portion and, if deformed or
damaged, replace.
BR-30
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL
Adjustment
Adjustment
1.
a.
b.
2.
NABR0047
Adjust clearance between shoe and drum as follows:
Release parking brake lever and loosen adjusting nut.
Depress brake pedal fully at least 10 times with engine running.
Pull control lever 4 - 5 notches. Then adjust control lever by
turning adjusting nut.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SBR042D
3.
Pull control lever with specified amount of force. Check lever
stroke and ensure smooth operation.
Number of notches: 6 - 8
EC
FE
CL
MT
SBR073D
4.
I
I
Bend warning lamp switchplate to ensure:
Warning lamp comes on when lever is lifted “A” notches.
Warning lamp goes out when lever is fully released.
Number of “A” notches: 1 or less
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-31
DESCRIPTION
ABS
Purpose
Purpose
NABR0087
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) consists of electronic and hydraulic components. It allows for control of
braking force so locking of the wheels can be avoided.
1) Improves proper tracking performance through steering wheel operation.
2) Eases obstacle avoidance through steering wheel operation.
3) Improves vehicle stability.
Operation
I
I
I
NABR0088
When the vehicle speed is less than 10 km/h (6 MPH) this system does not work.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) has a self-test function. The system turns on the ABS warning lamp
for 1 second each time the ignition switch is turned “ON”. After the engine is started, the ABS warning lamp
turns off. The system performs a test the first time the vehicle reaches 6 km/h (4 MPH). A mechanical noise
may be heard as the ABS performs this self-test. This is a normal part of the self-test feature. If a malfunction is found during this check, the ABS warning lamp will stay on.
While driving, a mechanical noise may be heard during ABS operation. This is a normal condition.
ABS Hydraulic Circuit
NABR0089
SBR859D
1.
2.
3.
Inlet solenoid valve
Outlet solenoid valve
Reservoir
4.
5.
6.
Pump
Motor
Inlet valve
BR-32
7.
8.
9.
Outlet valve
Bypass check valve
Damper
DESCRIPTION
ABS
System Components
System Components
NABR0090
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SBR447EB
System Description
SENSOR
AT
NABR0091
NABR0091S01
The sensor unit consists of a gear-shaped sensor rotor and a sensor element. The element contains a bar magnet around which a
coil is wound. The front sensors are installed on the front spindles
and the rear sensors are installed on the rear spindles. As the
wheel rotates, the sensor generates a sine-wave pattern. The frequency and voltage increase(s) as the rotating speed increases.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SBR124B
CONTROL UNIT (BUILT-IN ABS ACTUATOR AND
ELECTRIC UNIT)
SBR676E
MT
NABR0091S02
The control unit computes the wheel rotating speed by the signal
current sent from the sensor. Then it supplies a DC current to the
actuator solenoid valve. It also controls ON-OFF operation of the
valve relay and motor relay. If any electrical malfunction should be
detected in the system, the control unit causes the warning lamp
to light up. In this condition, the ABS will be deactivated by the
control unit, and the vehicle’s brake system reverts to normal
operation. (For control unit layout, refer to ABS ACTUATOR AND
ELECTRIC UNIT, BR-33.)
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT
The ABS actuator and electric unit contains:
I An electric motor and pump
I Two relays
I Six solenoid valves, each inlet and outlet for
— LH front
— RH front
— Rear
I ABS control unit
SBR065F
BR-33
NABR0091S03
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DESCRIPTION
ABS
System Description (Cont’d)
This component controls the hydraulic circuit and increases, holds
or decreases hydraulic pressure to all or individual wheels. The
ABS actuator and electric unit is serviced as an assembly.
ABS Actuator Operation
Inlet solenoid
valve
Outlet solenoid
valve
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
Master cylinder brake fluid pressure is directly
transmitted to caliper via the inlet solenoid valve.
Pressure hold
ON (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
Hydraulic circuit is shut off to hold the caliper
brake fluid pressure.
Pressure
decrease
ON (Closed)
ON (Open)
Caliper brake fluid is sent to reservoir via the outlet solenoid valve. Then it is pushed up to the
master cylinder by pump.
OFF (Closed)
Master cylinder brake fluid pressure is transmitted
to caliper.
Normal brake operation
ABS operation
NABR0091S0301
Pressure increase OFF (Open)
G SENSOR (4WD MODELS ONLY)
NABR0091S05
The G sensor senses deceleration during braking to determine
whether the vehicle is being driven on a high µ road (asphalt road,
etc.) or a low µ road (snow-covered road, etc.). It then sends a
signal to the ABS control unit.
The reed switch turns on when it is affected by a magnetic field.
During sudden deceleration (braking on a high µ road), the weight
moves and the magnet in the weight moves away from the reed
switch. The magnetic field then diminishes and the reed switch
turns off.
SBR076F
BR-34
DESCRIPTION
ABS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location
GI
NABR0147
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SBR075F
BR-35
IDX
DESCRIPTION
ABS
Schematic
Schematic
NABR0093
MBR624A
BR-36
DESCRIPTION
ABS
Wiring Diagram — ABS —
Wiring Diagram — ABS —
NABR0094
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MBR625A
BR-37
IDX
DESCRIPTION
ABS
Wiring Diagram — ABS — (Cont’d)
MBR626A
BR-38
DESCRIPTION
ABS
Wiring Diagram — ABS — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MBR479A
IDX
BR-39
DESCRIPTION
ABS
Wiring Diagram — ABS — (Cont’d)
MBR584A
BR-40
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ABS
Self-diagnosis
Self-diagnosis
FUNCTION
I
NABR0095
NABR0095S01
When a problem occurs in the ABS, the warning lamp on the
instrument panel comes on. To start the self-diagnostic results
mode, ground the self-diagnostic (check) terminal located on
data link connector. The location of the malfunction is indicated
by the warning lamp flashing.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
NABR0095S02
1.
2.
Drive vehicle over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
3.
Ground terminal 9 of data link connector with a suitable harness.
Turn ignition switch ON while grounding terminal 9.
Do not depress brake pedal.
4.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SBR665E
5.
SBR676E
After 3.0 seconds, the warning lamp starts flashing to indicate
the malfunction code No. (See NOTE.)
6. Verify the location of the malfunction with the malfunction code
chart. Refer to BR-54. Then make the necessary repairs following the diagnostic procedures.
7. After the malfunctions are repaired, erase the malfunction
codes stored in the control unit. Refer to BR-42.
8. Rerun the self-diagnostic results mode to verify that the malfunction codes have been erased.
9. Disconnect the check terminal from the ground. The self-diagnostic results mode is now complete.
10. Check warning lamp for deactivation after driving vehicle over
30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute.
11. After making certain that warning lamp does not come on, test
the ABS in a safe area to verify that it functions properly.
NOTE:
The indication terminates after 5 minutes.
However, when the ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON, the
indication starts flashing again.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-41
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ABS
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
(MALFUNCTION CODES)
1.
2.
3.
4.
=NABR0095S03
Determine the code No. by counting the number of times the
warning lamp flashes on and off.
When several malfunctions occur at one time, up to three code
numbers can be stored; the latest malfunction will be indicated
first.
The indication begins with the start code 12. After that a maximum of three code numbers appear in the order of the latest
one first. The indication then returns to the start code 12 to
repeat (the indication will stay on for five minutes at the most).
The malfunction code chart is given on page BR-54.
SBR457D
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
(MALFUNCTION CODES)
1.
2.
3.
NABR0095S04
Disconnect the check terminal from ground (ABS warning lamp
will stay lit).
Within 12.5 seconds, ground the check terminal three times.
Each terminal ground must last more than 1 second. The ABS
warning lamp goes out after the erase operation has been
completed.
Perform self-diagnosis again. Refer to BR-41. Only the startcode should appear, no malfunction codes.
ABR256
BR-42
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ABS
CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II
=NABR0128
CONSULT-II APPLICATION TO ABS
GI
NABR0128S03
MA
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Front right wheel sensor
×
×
—
Front left wheel sensor
×
×
—
Rear right wheel sensor
×
×
—
Rear left wheel sensor
×
×
—
DECEL G-sensor 1
×
×
×
DECEL G-sensor 2
×
×
×
ABS sensor
×
—
—
Stop lamp switch
—
×
—
Front right inlet solenoid valve
×
×
×
Front right outlet solenoid valve
×
×
×
Front left inlet solenoid valve
×
×
×
Front left outlet solenoid valve
×
×
×
Rear inlet solenoid valve
×
×
×
Rear outlet solenoid valve
×
×
×
Actuator solenoid valve relay
×
×
—
Actuator motor relay
(ABS MOTOR is shown on the Data Monitor
screen.)
×
×
×
PD
ABS warning lamp
—
×
—
AX
Battery voltage
×
×
—
Control unit
×
—
—
ABS operating signal
—
×
×
ITEM
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SU
×: Applicable
—: Not applicable
ECU (ABS CONTROL UNIT) PART NUMBER MODE
NABR0128S04
Ignore the ECU part number displayed in the ECU PART NUMBER MODE. Refer to parts catalog to order
the ECU.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-43
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ABS
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
=NABR0129
NABR0129S01
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute.
5.
Stop vehicle with engine running and touch “START” on CONSULT-II screen.
6.
Touch “ABS”.
7.
I
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
The screen shows the detected malfunction and how many
times the ignition switch has been turned ON since the malfunction.
Make the necessary repairs following the diagnostic procedures.
SBR665E
PBR455D
SBR670E
8.
SBR636E
9.
After the malfunctions are repaired, erase the self-diagnostic
results stored in the control unit by touching “ERASE”.
10. Check warning lamp for deactivation after driving vehicle over
30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute.
11. Test the ABS in a safe area to verify that it functions properly.
NOTE:
“SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen shows the detected malfunction
and how many times the ignition switch has been turned since the
malfunction.
PBR950C
BR-44
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ABS
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure (Cont’d)
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS MODE
Diagnostic item
Diagnostic item is detected when ...
NABR0129S07
GI
Reference Page
MA
FR RH SENSOR★1
[OPEN]
I Circuit for front right wheel sensor is open.
(An abnormally high input voltage is entered.)
BR-56
FR LH SENSOR★1
[OPEN]
I Circuit for front left wheel sensor is open.
(An abnormally high input voltage is entered.)
BR-56
EM
RR RH SENSOR★1
[OPEN]
I Circuit for rear right sensor is open.
(An abnormally high input voltage is entered.)
BR-56
LC
RR LH SENSOR★1
[OPEN]
I Circuit for rear left sensor is open.
(An abnormally high input voltage is entered.)
BR-56
FR RH SENSOR★1
[SHORT]
I Circuit for front right wheel sensor is shorted.
(An abnormally low input voltage is entered.)
BR-56
FR LH SENSOR★1
[SHORT]
I Circuit for front left wheel sensor is shorted.
(An abnormally low input voltage is entered.)
BR-56
RR RH SENSOR★1
[SHORT]
I Circuit for rear right sensor is shorted.
(An abnormally low input voltage is entered.)
BR-56
RR LH SENSOR★1
[SHORT]
I Circuit for rear left sensor is shorted.
(An abnormally low input voltage is entered.)
BR-56
MT
ABS SENSOR★1
[ABNORMAL SIGNAL]
I Teeth damage on sensor rotor or improper installation of wheel sensor.
(Abnormal wheel sensor signal is entered.)
BR-56
AT
FR RH IN ABS SOL
[OPEN, SHORT]
I Circuit for front right inlet solenoid valve is open.
(An abnormally low output voltage is entered.)
BR-59
FR LH IN ABS SOL
[OPEN, SHORT]
I Circuit for front left inlet solenoid valve is open.
(An abnormally low output voltage is entered.)
BR-59
FR RH OUT ABS SOL
[OPEN, SHORT]
I Circuit for front right outlet solenoid valve is open.
(An abnormally low output voltage is entered.)
BR-59
FR LH OUT ABS SOL
[OPEN, SHORT]
I Circuit for front left outlet solenoid valve is open.
(An abnormally low output voltage is entered.)
BR-59
RR IN ABS SOL
[OPEN, SHORT]
I Circuit for rear inlet solenoid valve is shorted.
(An abnormally high output voltage is entered.)
BR-59
RR OUT ABS SOL
[OPEN, SHORT]
I Circuit for rear outlet solenoid valve is shorted.
(An abnormally high output voltage is entered.)
BR-59
ABS ACTUATOR RELAY
[ABNORMAL]
I Actuator solenoid valve relay is ON, even if control unit sends off signal.
I Actuator solenoid valve relay is OFF, even if control unit sends on signal.
BR-59
ABS MOTOR RELAY
[ABNORMAL]
I Circuit for ABS motor relay is open or shorted.
I Circuit for actuator motor is open or shorted.
I Actuator motor relay is stuck.
BR-61
EC
FE
CL
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BATTERY VOLT
[VB-LOW]
I Power source voltage supplied to ABS control unit is abnormally low.
CONTROL UNIT
I Function of calculation in ABS control unit has failed.
BR-67
FR & RR G-SEN
[ABNORMAL]
I DECEL G sensor output is abnormally higher or lower than specifications.
BR-65
HA
FR & RR G-SEN TEST
[ABNORMAL]
I Output voltage is always constant due to G sensor malfunction.
BR-65
SC
G-SEN TEST
[ABNORMAL]
I G sensor malfunction is detected during self-diagnosis.
BR-65
EL
BR-63
★1: If one or more wheels spin on a rough or slippery road for 40 seconds or more, the ABS warning lamp will illuminate. This does
not indicate a malfunction. Only in the case of the short-circuit (Code Nos. 26, 22, 32 and 36), after repair the ABS warning lamp also
BR-45
BT
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ABS
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure (Cont’d)
illuminates when the ignition switch is turned ON. In this case, drive the vehicle at speeds greater than 30 km/h (19 MPH) for approximately 1 minute as specified in “SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE”, BR-41. Check to ensure that the ABS warning lamp goes out while
the vehicle is being driven.
DATA MONITOR PROCEDURE
NABR0129S03
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector for CONSULT-II.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Touch “START” on CONSULT-II screen.
5.
Touch “ABS”.
6.
Touch “DATA MONITOR”.
7.
Touch “SETTING” on “SELECT MONITOR ITEM” screen.
PBR455D
SBR670E
SBR636E
SBR637E
BR-46
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ABS
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure (Cont’d)
ACTIVE TEST PROCEDURE
I
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
=NABR0129S04
When conducting Active test, vehicle must be stationary.
When ABS warning lamp stays on, never conduct Active test.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector.
Start engine.
Touch “START” on CONSULT-II screen.
GI
MA
EM
LC
PBR455D
5.
Touch “ABS”.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SBR670E
6.
Touch “ACTIVE TEST”.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SBR636E
7.
Select active test item by touching screen.
ST
RS
BT
SBR234F
8.
9.
Touch “START”.
Carry out the active test by touching screen key.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SBR230F
BR-47
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ABS
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure (Cont’d)
DATA MONITOR MODE
NABR0129S08
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
FR RH SENSOR
FR LH SENSOR
RR RH SENSOR
RR LH SENSOR
Drive vehicle.
(Each wheel is rotating.)
Wheel speed signal
(Almost the same speed as speedometer.)
STOP LAMP SW
Brake is depressed.
Depress the pedal: ON
Release the pedal: OFF
FR & RR G SEN
Vehicle is driven.
Vehicle is stopped.
Brake is applied.
During sudden braking while driving on high µ roads (asphalt
roads, etc.): OFF
While vehicle is stopped or during constant-speed driving: ON
1. Drive vehicle at speeds
over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at
least 1 minute.
2. Engine is running.
Operating conditions for each solenoid valve are indicated. ABS
is not operating: OFF
FR RH IN SOL
FR RH OUT SOL
FR LH IN SOL
FR LH OUT SOL
RR IN SOL
RR OUT SOL
MOTOR RELAY
ABS is not operating: OFF
ABS is operating: ON
ACTUATOR RELAY
Ignition switch ON (Engine stops): OFF
Engine running: ON
WARNING LAMP
Ignition switch is ON or
engine is running.
ABS warning lamp is turned on: ON
ABS warning lamp is turned off: OFF
BATTERY VOLT
Power supply voltage for control unit
ABS OPER SIG
ABS is not operating: OFF
ABS is operating: ON
ACTIVE TEST MODE
TEST ITEM
CONDITION
NABR0129S09
JUDGEMENT
Brake fluid pressure control operation
FR RH SOLENOID
FR LH SOLENOID
RR SOLENOID
Engine is running.
G SENSOR
OUT SOL
UP (Increase):
OFF
OFF
KEEP (Hold):
ON
OFF
DOWN (Decrease):
ON
ON
ABS actuator motor
ON: Motor runs (ABS motor relay ON)
OFF: Motor stops (ABS motor relay OFF)
ABS MOTOR
ABS OPER SIG
IN SOL
Ignition switch is ON or
engine is running.
ON: Set ABS OPER SIG “ON” (ABS is operating.)
OFF: Set ABS OPER SIG “OFF” (ABS is not operating.)
Ignition switch is ON.
G SENSOR
ON: Set G SENSOR MONITOR “ON” (G sensor circuit is
closed.)
OFF: Set G SENSOR MONITOR “OFF” (G sensor circuit is
open.)
NOTE:
Active test will automatically stop ten seconds after the test starts. (TEST IS STOPPED monitor shows ON.)
BR-48
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
ABS
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick
and Accurate Repair
GI
INTRODUCTION
MA
NABR0098
SEF233G
SEF234G
NABR0098S01
The ABS system has an electronic control unit to control major
functions. The control unit accepts input signals from sensors and
instantly drives the actuators. It is essential that both kinds of signals are proper and stable. It is also important to check for conventional incidents: such as air leaks in booster lines, lack of brake
fluid, or other incidents with the brake system.
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
caused by poor electric connections or faulty wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspicious circuits may help prevent the
replacement of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents, so a
road test should be performed.
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with
a customer who approaches with an ABS complaint. The customer
is a very good source of information on such incidents; especially
intermittent ones. By talking to the customer, find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. Start your
diagnosis by looking for “conventional” incidents first. This is one
of the best ways to troubleshoot brake incidents on an ABS controlled vehicle.
Also check related Service bulletins for information.
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-49
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
ABS
Preliminary Check
Preliminary Check
1
NABR0099
CHECK BRAKE FLUID
Check brake fluid for contamination.
Has brake fluid been contaminated?
Yes
©
Replace. GO TO 2.
No
©
GO TO 2.
2
CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
Check brake fluid level in reservoir tank.
Low fluid level may indicate brake pad wear or leakage from brake line.
SBR451D
Is brake fluid filled between MAX and MIN lines on reservoir tank?
Yes
©
GO TO 3.
No
©
Fill up brake fluid. GO TO 3.
3
CHECK BRAKE LINE
Check brake line for leakage.
SBR389C
Is leakage present at or around brake lines, tubes or hoses or are any of these parts cracked or damaged?
Yes
©
Repair. GO TO 4.
No
©
GO TO 4.
BR-50
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
ABS
Preliminary Check (Cont’d)
CHECK BRAKE BOOSTER OPERATION
GI
Check brake booster for operation and air tightness.
Refer to “On-vehicle Service”, “BRAKE BOOSTER”, BR-19.
MA
4
EM
LC
EC
SBR058C
FE
Is brake booster airtight and functioning properly?
Yes
©
GO TO 5.
No
©
Replace. GO TO 5.
CL
MT
5
CHECK BRAKE PAD AND ROTOR
Check brake pad and rotor.
Refer to (BR-22, BR-24).
AT
TF
PD
AX
SBR059C
SU
Are brake pads and rotors functioning properly?
Yes
©
GO TO 6.
No
©
Replace.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-51
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
ABS
Preliminary Check (Cont’d)
6
RECHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
Check brake fluid level in reservoir tank again.
SBR451D
Is brake fluid filled between MAX and MIN lines on reservoir tank?
Yes
©
GO TO 7.
No
©
Fill up brake fluid.
7
CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION
Check warning lamp activation.
SBR677E
Does warning lamp turn on when ignition switch is turned ON?
Yes
©
GO TO 8.
No
©
Check fuse, warning lamp bulb and warning lamp circuit.
8
CHECK WARNING LAMP DEACTIVATION
Check warning lamp for deactivation after engine is started.
Does warning lamp turn off when engine is started?
Yes
©
GO TO 9.
No
©
Go to Self-diagnosis (BR-41, BR-44).
9
DRIVE VEHICLE
Drive vehicle at speeds over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute.
Does warning lamp remain off after vehicle has been driven at 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute?
Yes
©
INSPECTION END
No
©
Go to Self-diagnosis (BR-41, BR-44).
BR-52
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
ABS
Ground Circuit Check
Ground Circuit Check
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT GROUND
I
=NABR0130
GI
NABR0130S01
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit connector terminals and ground.
Continuity should exist.
MA
EM
LC
SBR690EA
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-53
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ABS
Malfunction Code/Symptom Chart
Malfunction Code/Symptom Chart
Code No. (No. of warning lamp flashes)
12
Malfunctioning part
Self-diagnosis could not detect any malfunctions.
NABR0150
Reference Page
—
17 ★4
G sensor and circuit
BR-65
18 ★1
Sensor rotor
BR-56
21 ★1
Front right sensor (open-circuit)
BR-56
22 ★1
Front right sensor (short-circuit)
BR-56
25 ★1
Front left sensor (open-circuit)
BR-56
26 ★1
Front left sensor (short-circuit)
BR-56
31 ★1
Rear right sensor (open-circuit)
BR-56
32 ★1
Rear right sensor (short-circuit)
BR-56
35 ★1
Rear left sensor (open-circuit)
BR-56
36 ★1
Rear left sensor (short-circuit)
BR-56
41
Actuator front right outlet solenoid valve
BR-59
42
Actuator front right inlet solenoid valve
BR-59
45
Actuator front left outlet solenoid valve
BR-59
46
Actuator front left inlet solenoid valve
BR-59
55
Actuator rear outlet solenoid valve
BR-59
56
Actuator rear inlet solenoid valve
BR-59
57 ★2
Power supply (Low voltage)
BR-63
61 ★3
Actuator motor or motor relay
BR-61
63
Solenoid valve relay
BR-59
64
FR & RR G sensor
BR-65
65
FR & RR G sensor input signal abnormal
BR-65
66
FR & RR G sensor test abnormal
BR-65
71
Control unit
BR-67
ABS works frequently
—
BR-68
Unexpected pedal action
—
BR-68
Long stopping distance
—
BR-70
ABS does not work
—
BR-70
Pedal vibration and noise
—
BR-71
Warning lamp does not come on
when ignition switch is turned ON.
Warning lamp stays on when ignition
switch is turned ON.
Fuse, warning lamp bulb or warning lamp circuit
Control unit
BR-72
Control unit power supply circuit
Warning lamp bulb circuit
Control unit or control unit connector
Solenoid valve relay stuck
Power supply for solenoid valve relay coil
BR-74
Vehicle vibrates excessively when ABS is
ABS control unit to TCM circuit
operating.
BR-77
★1: If one or more wheels spin on a rough or slippery road for 40 seconds or more, the ABS warning lamp will illuminate. This does
not indicate a malfunction. Only in the case of the short-circuit (Code Nos. 26, 22, 32 and 36), after repair the ABS warning lamp also
BR-54
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ABS
Malfunction Code/Symptom Chart (Cont’d)
illuminates when the ignition switch is turned ON. In this case, drive the vehicle at speeds greater than 30 km/h (19 MPH) for approximately 1 minute as specified in “SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE”, BR-44. Check to ensure that the ABS warning lamp goes out while
the vehicle is being driven.
★2: The trouble code “57”, which refers to a low power supply voltage, does not indicate that the ABS control unit is malfunctioning. Do
not replace the ABS control unit with a new one.
★3: The trouble code “61” can sometimes appear when the ABS motor is not properly grounded. If it appears, be sure to check the
condition of the ABS motor ground circuit connection.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-55
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
ABS
Wheel Sensor or Rotor
Wheel Sensor or Rotor
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
NABR0132
Malfunction code No. 21, 22, 25, 26, 31, 32, 35, 36 or 18
NOTE:
Wheel position should be distinguished by code No. except code
No. 18 (sensor rotor).
1
INSPECTION START
Wheel sensor inspection
SBR691E
©
2
GO TO 2.
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect connectors from ABS actuator and electric unit and wheel sensor of malfunction code No. Check terminals
for damage or loose connection. Then reconnect connectors.
2. Carry out self-diagnosis again.
Does warning lamp activate again?
Yes
©
GO TO 3.
No
©
INSPECTION END
BR-56
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
ABS
Wheel Sensor or Rotor (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK WHEEL SENSOR ELECTRICAL
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector.
2. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit connector E111 terminals.
Code No. 21 or 22 (Front RH wheel)
Terminals 10 and 25
Code No. 25 or 26 (Front LH wheel)
Terminals 8 and 23
Code No. 31 or 32 (Rear RH wheel)
Terminals 14 and 29
Code No. 35 or 36 (Rear LH wheel)
Terminals 12 and 27
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SBR692EB
Resistance:
Front 0.9 - 1.1 kΩ
Rear 1.44 - 1.76 kΩ
AT
Is front resistance 0.9 - 1.1 kΩ and rear resistance 1.44 - 1.76 kΩ?
Yes
©
GO TO 5.
No
©
GO TO 4.
4
TF
PD
CHECK WHEEL SENSOR
AX
Check each sensor for resistance.
SU
ST
SBR693E
Resistance:
Front 0.9 - 1.1 kΩ
Rear 1.44 - 1.76 kΩ
RS
BT
Is front resistance 0.9 - 1.1 kΩ and rear resistance 1.44 - 1.76 kΩ?
Yes
No
©
©
Check the following.
If NG, repair harness or connectors.
I Harness connectors E111, E14, E51, B8, B69
I Harness for open or short between wheel sensor connectors and ABS actuator and
electric unit
Replace wheel sensor.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-57
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
ABS
Wheel Sensor or Rotor (Cont’d)
5
CHECK TIRE
Check for inflation pressure, wear and size of each tire. (See NOTE.)
Are tire pressure and size correct and is tire wear within specifications?
Yes
©
GO TO 6.
No
©
Adjust tire pressure or replace tire(s). (See NOTE.)
6
CHECK WHEEL BEARING
Check wheel bearing axial end play. (See NOTE.)
Is wheel bearing axial end play within specifications?
Yes
©
GO TO 7.
No
©
Check wheel bearing. Refer to AX-19, AX-4, “Front wheel bearing” and “Rear wheel
bearing”.
7
CHECK SENSOR ROTOR
Check sensor rotor for teeth damage. (See NOTE.)
Is sensor rotor free from damage?
Yes
©
Check ABS actuator and electric unit pin terminals for damage or the connection of ABS
actuator and electric unit harness connector. Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit
harness connector. Then retest.
No
©
Replace sensor rotor. (See NOTE.)
BR-58
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
ABS
ABS Actuator Solenoid Valve or Solenoid Valve Relay
ABS Actuator Solenoid Valve or Solenoid Valve GI
Relay
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
MA
=NABR0133
Malfunction code No. 41, 45, 55, 42, 46, 56, 63
1
INSPECTION START
EM
Solenoid valve relay inspection
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SBR243F
©
2
GO TO 2.
PD
CHECK FUSIBLE LINK
Check 40A fusible link c. For fusible link layout, refer to EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”.
AX
Is fusible link OK?
Yes
©
GO TO 3.
No
©
GO TO 6.
3
SU
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect connector from ABS actuator and electric unit. Check terminals for damage or loose connection. Then
reconnect connector.
2. Carry out self-diagnosis again.
Does warning lamp activate again?
Yes
©
GO TO 4.
No
©
INSPECTION END
4
ST
RS
BT
CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
HA
Refer to “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT GROUND” in “Ground Circuit Check”, BR-53.
Is ground circuit OK?
Yes
©
GO TO 5.
No
©
Repair harness or connector.
SC
EL
IDX
BR-59
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
ABS
ABS Actuator Solenoid Valve or Solenoid Valve Relay (Cont’d)
5
CHECK SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector.
2. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit connector E111 terminal 15 and ground.
SBR695EB
Does battery voltage exist?
Yes
©
Replace ABS actuator and electric unit.
No
©
Check the following.
If NG, repair harness or connectors.
I Harness connector E111
I Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit and fusible link
6
REPLACE FUSIBLE LINK
Replace fusible link.
Does the fusible link blow out when ignition switch is turned ON?
Yes
©
GO TO 7.
No
©
INSPECTION END
7
CHECK SOLENOID VALVE RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
1. Disconnect battery cable and ABS actuator and electric unit connector.
2. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit connector E111 terminal 15 and ground.
SBR696EB
Continuity should not exist.
Does continuity exist?
Yes
©
Check the following.
If NG, repair harness or connector.
I Harness connector E111
I Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit and fusible link
No
©
Replace ABS actuator and electric unit.
BR-60
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
ABS
Motor Relay or Motor
Motor Relay or Motor
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
GI
=NABR0134
Malfunction code No. 61
1
MA
INSPECTION START
ABS motor relay inspection
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
SBR067F
©
2
PD
CHECK FUSIBLE LINK
Check 40A fusible link d. For fusible link layout, refer to EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”.
Is fusible link OK?
Yes
©
GO TO 3.
No
©
GO TO 6.
3
AX
SU
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector. Check terminals for damage or loose connection. Then reconnect
connector.
2. Carry out self-diagnosis again.
Does warning lamp activate again?
Yes
©
GO TO 4.
No
©
INSPECTION END
4
TF
GO TO 2.
ST
RS
BT
CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
Refer to “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT GROUND” in “Ground Circuit Check”, BR-53.
HA
Is ground circuit OK?
SC
Yes
©
GO TO 5.
No
©
Repair harness or connector.
EL
IDX
BR-61
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
ABS
Motor Relay or Motor (Cont’d)
5
CHECK MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector.
2. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit connector E111 terminal 1 and ground.
SBR698EB
Does battery voltage exist?
Yes
©
Replace ABS actuator and electric unit.
No
©
Check the following.
If NG, repair harness or connector.
I Harness connector E111
I Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit and fusible link
6
REPLACE FUSIBLE LINK
Replace fusible link.
Does the fusible link blow out when ignition switch is turned ON?
Yes
©
GO TO 7.
No
©
INSPECTION END
7
CHECK ABS ACTUATOR MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
1. Disconnect battery cable and ABS actuator and electric unit connector.
2. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit connector E111 terminal 1 and ground.
SBR699EB
Continuity should not exist.
Does continuity exist?
Yes
©
Check the following.
If NG, repair harness or connector.
I Harness connector E111
I Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit and fusible link
No
©
Replace ABS actuator and electric unit.
BR-62
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
ABS
Low Voltage
Low Voltage
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
GI
NABR0135
Malfunction code No. 57
1
MA
INSPECTION START
ABS actuator and electric unit power supply and ground circuit inspection
EM
LC
EC
FE
SBR068F
©
2
GO TO 2.
CL
MT
CHECK FUSE
Check 10A fuse No. 7. For fuse layout, refer to EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”.
Is fuse OK?
Yes
©
GO TO 3.
No
©
GO TO 6.
3
AT
TF
PD
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector. Check terminals for damage or loose connections. Then reconnect connector.
2. Carry out self-diagnosis again.
AX
Does warning lamp activate again?
SU
Yes
©
GO TO 4.
No
©
INSPECTION END
4
CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
Refer to “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT GROUND” in “Ground Circuit Check”, BR-53.
ST
Is ground circuit OK?
Yes
©
GO TO 5.
No
©
Repair harness or connector.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-63
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
ABS
Low Voltage (Cont’d)
5
CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector.
2. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit connector E111 terminal 17 and ground.
SBR701EB
Does battery voltage exist when ignition switch is turned ON?
Yes
©
Replace ABS actuator and electric unit.
No
©
Check the following.
If NG, repair harness or connector.
I Harness connector E111
I Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit and fuse
6
REPLACE FUSE
Replace fuse.
Does the fuse blow out when ignition switch is turned ON?
Yes
©
GO TO 7.
No
©
INSPECTION END
7
CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
1. Disconnect battery cable and ABS actuator and electric unit connector.
2. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit connector E111 terminal 17 and ground.
SBR702EB
Does continuity exist?
Yes
©
Check the following.
If NG, repair harness or connector.
I Harness connector E111
I Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit and fuse
No
©
Replace ABS actuator and electric unit.
BR-64
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
ABS
G Sensor and Circuit
G Sensor and Circuit
GI
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
=NABR0151
Malfunction code No. 17, 64, 65, 66, 68
1
MA
INSPECTION START
G sensor inspection
EM
LC
EC
FE
SBR069F
©
2
GO TO 2.
MT
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit and G sensor connectors. Check terminals for damage or loose connection.
Then reconnect connectors.
2. Carry out self-diagnosis again.
Does warning lamp active again?
Yes
©
GO TO 3.
No
©
INSPECTION END
3
CL
AT
TF
PD
CHECK G SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
AX
1. Disconnect G sensor connector B58.
2. Check voltage between G sensor connector terminals 4 and ground.
SU
ST
RS
SBR244F
Does battery voltage exist?
Yes
©
GO TO 4.
No
©
Check the following. If NG, repair harness or connectors.
I Harness connectors E111, B58
I Harness for open or short between G sensor and ABS actuator and electric unit.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-65
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
ABS
G Sensor and Circuit (Cont’d)
4
CHECK G SENSOR ELECTRICAL
1. Connect G sensor body side terminal and sensor side terminal with suitable harness.
2. Check voltage between terminals 1 and 2, 1 and 3 under the following conditions.
SBR245F
MTBL0661
Is voltage OK?
Yes
©
Check ABS actuator and electric unit pin terminals for damage or the connection of ABS
actuator and electric unit harness connector. Then retest.
No
©
Replace G sensor.
BR-66
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
ABS
Control Unit
Control Unit
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
GI
=NABR0137
Malfunction code No. 71
1
MA
INSPECTION START
ABS actuator and electric unit power supply and ground circuit inspection
EM
LC
EC
FE
SBR071F
©
2
GO TO 2.
MT
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector.
Check terminals for damage or loose connection. Then reconnect connector.
2. Carry out self-diagnosis again.
Does warning lamp activate again?
Yes
©
GO TO 3.
No
©
INSPECTION END
3
AT
TF
PD
CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage. Refer to “5. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT” in “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, “Low Voltage”, BR-63.
Does battery voltage exist when ignition switch is turned ON?
Yes
©
GO TO 4.
No
©
Repair.
4
CL
CHECK WARNING LAMP INDICATION
AX
SU
ST
Does warning lamp indicate code No. 71 again?
Yes or No
Yes
©
Replace ABS actuator and electric unit.
No
©
Inspect the system according to the code No.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-67
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ABS
1. ABS Works Frequently
1. ABS Works Frequently
1
NABR0138
CHECK BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE
Check brake fluid pressure distribution.
Refer to BR-12, “Inspection”, “PROPORTIONING VALVE”.
Is brake fluid pressure distribution normal?
Yes
©
GO TO 2.
No
©
Repair. Then perform Preliminary Check.
Refer to BR-50.
2
CHECK WHEEL SENSOR
1. Check wheel sensor connector for terminal damage or loose connections.
2. Perform wheel sensor mechanical check.
Refer to “7. CHECK SENSOR ROTOR” in “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, “Wheel Sensor or Rotor”, BR-56.
Is wheel sensor mechanism OK?
Yes
©
GO TO 3.
No
©
Repair.
3
CHECK FRONT AXLE
Check front axles for excessive looseness. Refer to AX-4, “Front Wheel Bearing”.
Is front axle installed properly?
Yes
©
Go to “3. CHECK WARNING LAMP INDICATION” in “2. Unexpected Pedal Action”,
BR-68.
No
©
Repair.
2. Unexpected Pedal Action
1
NABR0139
CHECK BRAKE PEDAL STROKE
Check brake pedal stroke.
SBR540A
Is brake pedal stroke excessively large?
Yes
©
Perform Preliminary Check. Refer to BR-50.
No
©
GO TO 2.
BR-68
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ABS
2. Unexpected Pedal Action (Cont’d)
2
GI
CHECK MECHANICAL BRAKE SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector and check whether brake is effective.
MA
Does brake system function properly when brake pedal is depressed?
Yes
©
GO TO 3.
No
©
Perform Preliminary Check. Refer to BR-50.
3
EM
CHECK WARNING LAMP INDICATION
LC
Ensure warning lamp remains off while driving.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SBR677E
Is warning lamp turned off?
Yes
©
GO TO 4.
No
©
Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BR-41, BR-44.
4
CHECK WHEEL SENSOR
1. Check wheel sensor connector for terminal damage or loose connection.
2. Perform wheel sensor mechanical check. Refer to “7. CHECK SENSOR ROTOR” in “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,
“Wheel Sensor or Rotor”, BR-56.
AT
TF
PD
AX
Is wheel sensor mechanism OK?
Yes
©
Check ABS actuator and electric unit pin terminals for damage or the connection of ABS
actuator and electric unit harness connector.
Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit harness connector.
Then retest.
No
©
Repair.
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-69
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ABS
3. Long Stopping Distance
3. Long Stopping Distance
1
=NABR0140
CHECK MECHANICAL BRAKE SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector and check whether stopping distance is still long.
Does brake system function properly when brake pedal is depressed?
Yes
©
Perform Preliminary Check and air bleeding (if necessary).
No
©
Go to “3. CHECK WARNING LAMP INDICATION” in “2. Unexpected Pedal Action”,
BR-68.
NOTE:
Stopping distance may be longer for vehicles without ABS when
road condition is slippery.
4. ABS Does Not Work
1
NABR0141
CHECK WARNING LAMP INDICATION
Does the ABS warning lamp activate?
Yes or No
Yes
©
Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BR-41, BR-44.
No
©
Go to “3. CHECK WARNING LAMP INDICATION” in “2. Unexpected Pedal Action”,
BR-68.
NOTE:
ABS does not work when vehicle speed is under 10 km/h (6 MPH).
BR-70
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ABS
5. Pedal Vibration and Noise
5. Pedal Vibration and Noise
1
NABR0142
GI
INSPECTION START
MA
Pedal vibration and noise inspection
EM
LC
EC
SAT797A
©
FE
GO TO 2.
CL
2
CHECK SYMPTOM
1. Apply brake.
2. Start engine.
MT
Does the symptom appear only when engine is started?
Yes
©
Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BR-41, BR-44.
AT
No
©
Go to “3. CHECK WARNING LAMP INDICATION” in “2. Unexpected Pedal Action”,
BR-68.
TF
NOTE:
ABS may operate and cause vibration under any of the following
conditions.
I Applying brake gradually when shifting or operating clutch.
I Low friction (slippery) road.
I High speed cornering.
I Driving over bumps and pot holes.
I Engine speed is over 5,000 rpm with vehicle stopped.
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-71
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ABS
6. Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On
6. Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When
Ignition Switch Is Turned On
1
NABR0143
INSPECTION START
Warning lamp circuit inspection
SBR072F
©
2
GO TO 2.
CHECK FUSE
Check 10A fuse No. 8. For fuse layout, refer to EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”.
Is fuse OK?
Yes
©
GO TO 3.
No
©
Replace fuse.
3
CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATE
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector.
SBR677E
Does the warning lamp activate?
Yes
©
Replace ABS actuator and electric unit.
No
©
GO TO 4.
BR-72
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ABS
6. Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector and combination meter connector M24.
2. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit connector E111 terminal 2.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SBR708EB
Continuity should not exist.
FE
Does continuity exist?
Yes
©
Repair harness or connectors.
CL
No
©
Check combination meter.
Refer to EL-139, “WARNING LAMPS”.
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-73
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ABS
7. Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On
7. Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition
Switch Is Turned On
1
=NABR0144
INSPECTION START
ABS control unit inspection
SBR073F
©
2
GO TO 2.
CHECK FUSE
Check 10A fuse No. 7. For fuse layout, refer to EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”.
Is fuse OK?
Yes
©
GO TO 3.
No
©
GO TO 8.
3
CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check ABS actuator and electric unit pin terminals for damage or bad connection of ABS actuator and electric unit harness
connector. Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit harness connector. Then retest.
Does warning lamp stay on when ignition switch is turned ON?
Yes
©
GO TO 4.
No
©
INSPECTION END
4
CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
Refer to “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT GROUND” in “Ground Circuit Check”, BR-53.
Is ground circuit OK?
Yes
©
GO TO 5.
No
©
Repair harness or connector.
BR-74
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ABS
7. Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On (Cont’d)
CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
GI
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector.
2. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit connector E111 terminal 17 and ground.
MA
5
EM
LC
EC
SBR701EB
FE
Does battery voltage exist when ignition switch is turned ON?
Yes
©
GO TO 6.
No
©
Check the following.
If NG, repair harness or connector.
I Harness connector E111
I Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit and fuse
6
CL
MT
AT
CHECK WARNING LAMP
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connector.
2. Connect suitable wire between ABS actuator and electric unit connector E111 terminal 2 and ground.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SBR713EB
Does the warning lamp deactivate?
Yes
©
Replace ABS actuator and electric unit.
No
©
GO TO 7.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-75
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ABS
7. Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On (Cont’d)
7
CHECK ABS WARNING LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1. Disconnect combination meter connector M24.
2. Check continuity between combination meter connector M24 terminal 10 and ABS actuator and electric unit connector
E111 terminal 2.
NOTE:
Connect positive lead of multimeter to1combination meter connector M24 terminal 10 and negative lead to ABS actuator and electric unit connector E111 terminal 2.
SBR710EB
Continuity should exist.
Does continuity exist?
Yes
©
Check combination meter.
Refer to EL-139, “WARNING LAMPS”.
No
©
Repair harness or connectors.
8
REPLACE FUSE
Replace fuse.
Does the fuse blow out when ignition switch is turned ON?
Yes
©
GO TO 9.
No
©
INSPECTION END
9
CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
1. Disconnect battery cable and ABS actuator and electric unit connector.
2. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit connector E111 terminal 17 and ground.
SBR702EB
Continuity should not exist.
Does continuity exist?
Yes
©
Check the following.
If NG, repair harness or connector.
I Harness connector E111
I Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit and fuse
No
©
Replace ABS actuator and electric unit.
BR-76
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ABS
8. Vehicle Vibrates Excessively When ABS Is Operating
8. Vehicle Vibrates Excessively When ABS Is
Operating
I
I
1
GI
=NABR0145
While ABS is operating, brake pedal vibrates slightly. This is
not a problem.
If vehicle vibration is greater in the AUTO mode than in the
2WD mode, there is the possibility of failure in the communication line between the ABS control unit and transfer control
unit. Check and locate the cause of the problem.
MA
EM
LC
INSPECTION START
Inspection for excessive vibration of vehicle
EC
FE
CL
MT
SBR711E
©
2
AT
GO TO 2.
CARRY OUT SELF-DIAGNOSIS
TF
Perform self-diagnosis for the ABS actuator and electric unit and transfer control unit.
Are there any malfunctions?
Yes
©
GO TO 3.
No
©
GO TO 4.
3
AX
INSPECTION OR REPAIR
Inspect or repair the system according to the self-diagnostic item.
OK
©
PD
SU
GO TO 4.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-77
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ABS
8. Vehicle Vibrates Excessively When ABS Is Operating (Cont’d)
4
CHECK CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect connectors from ABS actuator and electric unit and transfer control unit. Check terminals for damage or
loose connection.
2. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit connector terminal 9 and transfer control unit connector terminal 32.
SBR712EA
Does continuity exist?
Yes
©
GO TO 5.
No
©
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E111, M143
I Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit and transfer control
unit
If NG, repair harness or connectors.
5
CHECK ABS OPERATING SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Reconnect only ABS actuator and electric unit connector.
2. Check continuity between transfer control unit connector terminal 32 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
SBR510E
Does continuity exist?
Yes
©
Replace ABS actuator and electric unit.
No
©
GO TO 6.
BR-78
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ABS
8. Vehicle Vibrates Excessively When ABS Is Operating (Cont’d)
6
GI
CHECK ABS OPERATING SIGNAL
1. Connect CONSULT-II to Data Link Connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Set CONSULT-II in the active test mode to output an ABS operating signal.
(Refer to “ACTIVE TEST PROCEDURE”, “CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure”, BR-47.)
3. An ABS operating signal lasts for 10 seconds. During the time the signal is being output, check resistance between
transfer control unit connector terminal 32 and ground.
Resistance: 0.5Ω, max.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SBR680E
Is resistance within specifications?
Yes
©
CHECK transfer control unit.
Refer to TF-123, “ABS OPERATION SIGNAL”.
No
©
Replace ABS actuator and electric unit.
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-79
=NABR0079
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
ABS
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
When removing the front or rear wheel hub assembly, disconnect the ABS wheel sensor from the assembly and move it
away.
Front Wheel Sensor
NABR0079S01
SBR717E
Rear Wheel Sensor
NABR0079S02
SBR399D
BR-80
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
ABS
Front Sensor Rotor
Front Sensor Rotor
REMOVAL
1.
2.
NABR0079S03
GI
NABR0079S0301
Remove the front wheel hub. Refer to AX-9, “Disassembly”.
Remove the sensor rotor using suitable puller, drift and bearing replacer.
MA
EM
LC
SBR873C
INSTALLATION
EC
NABR0079S0302
Install the sensor rotor using suitable drift and press.
I Always replace sensor rotor with new one.
I Pay attention to the direction of front sensor rotor as shown in
figure.
FE
CL
MT
SBR400DA
Rear Sensor Rotor
REMOVAL
I
AT
NABR0079S04
NABR0079S0401
Remove the sensor rotor using Tool.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SRA800AA
INSTALLATION
NABR0079S0402
Install the sensor rotor using suitable drift and press.
I Always replace sensor rotor with new one.
I Pay attention to the direction of front sensor rotor as shown in
figure.
ST
RS
BT
SBR402D
G Sensor
NABR0079S06
Always replace G sensor if bumped or dropped. Otherwise,
performance characteristics of G sensor will be changed,
which in turn changes ABS control performance characteristics.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SBR076F
BR-81
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
ABS
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
NABR0079S07
SBR074F
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
NABR0079S0701
Disconnect battery cable.
Drain brake fluid. Refer to “Changing Brake Fluid”, BR-8.
Remove mounting bracket fixing bolts and nuts.
Disconnect connector, brake pipes and remove fixing nuts and
actuator ground cable.
INSTALLATION
NABR0079S0702
CAUTION:
After installation, refill brake fluid. Then bleed air. Refer to
“Bleeding Brake System”, BR-9.
1. Tighten actuator ground cable.
Place ground cable at a notch of mounting bracket.
2. Connect brake pipes temporarily.
3. Tighten fixing bolts and nuts.
4. Tighten brake pipes.
5. Connect connector and battery cable.
BR-82
PRECAUTIONS
VDC/TCS/ABS
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR
BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
GI
NABR0208
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL R50 is as follows (The composition
varies according to optional equipment.):
I For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
pre-tensioners, diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
I For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of front side air bag module (located in the outer side of front
seat), (located in the outer side of front seat), side curtain air bag module (locating in the headliner side
of front and rear seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal
collision), wiring harness, warning lamp (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
WARNING:
I To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be performed by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
I Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.
I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified with yellow and/or orange harness connector (and with yellow harness protector or yellow insulation tape before the harness connectors).
Precautions for SRS “Air Bag” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” Service
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
NABR0209
Do not use electrical test equipment to check SRS circuits unless instructed to in this Service Manual.
Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch “OFF”, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3
minutes.
For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag and seat belt
pre-tensioner to deploy. Therefore, do not work on any SRS connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes
have passed.
Diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with their arrow marks “g” pointing towards the front of
the vehicle for proper operation. Also check diagnosis sensor unit for cracks, deformities or rust before
installation and replace as required.
The spiral cable must be aligned with the neutral position since its rotations are limited. Do not attempt to
turn steering wheel or column after removal of steering gear.
Handle air bag module carefully. Always place driver and passenger air bag modules with the pad side
facing upward and place side air bag module standing with stud bolt side setting bottom.
Conduct self-diagnosis to check entire SRS for proper function after replacing any components.
After air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly should be replaced if damaged.
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
Precautions for Brake System
I
I
I
I
NABR0153
Recommended fluid is brake fluid “DOT 3”.
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas such as
body. If brake fluid is splashed, wipe it off and flush area with
water immediately.
Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene to clean.
They will ruin rubber parts and cause improper operation.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-83
PRECAUTIONS
VDC/TCS/ABS
Precautions for Brake System (Cont’d)
I
I
I
I
Using a flare nut torque wrench, securely tighten brake tube
flare nuts.
Brake system is an important safety part. If a brake fluid leak
is detected, always disassemble the affected part. If a malfunction is detected, replace part with a new one.
Before working, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect electrical connectors of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
or battery terminals.
When installing brake piping, be sure to check torque.
SBR686C
Precautions for Brake Control
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NABR0154
During VDC/TCS/ABS operation, brake pedal lightly vibrates and a mechanical noise may be heard. This
is normal.
Just after starting vehicle after ignition switch ON, brake pedal may vibrate or motor operating noise may
be heard from engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check.
Stopping distance may be longer than that of vehicles without ABS when vehicle drives on rough, gravel,
or snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads.
When an error is indicated by ABS or another warning lamp, collect all necessary information from customer (what symptoms are present under what conditions) and check for simple causes before starting
diagnostic servicing. Besides electrical system inspection, check booster operation, brake fluid level, and
oil leaks.
If tire size and type are used in an improper combination, or brake pads are not Genuine NISSAN parts,
stopping distance or steering stability may deteriorate.
If there is a radio, antenna, or antenna lead-in wire (including wiring) near control module, VDC/TCS/ABS
function may have a malfunction or error.
If aftermarket parts (car stereo, CD player, etc.) have been installed, check for incidents such as harness
pinches, open circuits, and improper wiring.
Diagnosis Precaution
CAN SYSTEM
I
I
I
NABR0155S01
Do not apply voltage of 7.0V or higher to terminal to be measured.
Maximum open terminal voltage of tester in use shall be 7.0V
or lower.
Before checking harnesses, turn ignition switch to OFF and
disconnect battery negative cable.
Precaution for Harness Repair
CAN SYSTEM
I
NABR0155
NABR0156
NABR0156S01
Area to be repaired shall be soldered, and wrapped with a tape
[be sure that fraying of twisted wire shall be within 110 mm
(4.33 in)].
PKIA0306E
BR-84
PRECAUTIONS
VDC/TCS/ABS
Precaution for Harness Repair (Cont’d)
I
Do not make a bypass connection to repaired area. (If it is
done, branch part will be removed and characteristics of
twisted wire will be lost.)
GI
MA
EM
LC
PKIA0307E
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-85
PREPARATION
VDC/TCS/ABS
Commercial Service Tools
Commercial Service Tools
Tool name
Description
1. Flare nut crowfoot
2. Torque wrench
Removing and installing each brake piping
a: 10 mm (0.39 in)/12 mm (0.47 in)
S-NT360
BR-86
NABR0157
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
VDC/TCS/ABS
Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position
Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral
Position
GI
NABR0158
I
After replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit),
steering angle sensor, steering components and suspension
components, or after adjusting wheel alignment, make sure to
adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running
vehicle.
CAUTION:
To adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor, make sure
to use CONSULT-II. (Adjustment cannot be done without CONSULT-II.)
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not
start engine).
3. Touch “ABS”, “WORK SUPPORT” and “ST ANGLE SENSOR
ADJUSTMENT” on CONSULT-II screen in this order.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SBR112F
SFIA0793E
4. Touch “START”.
CAUTION:
Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle
sensor.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch “END”. (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.)
6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION:
Be sure to carry out above operation.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then
stop.
8. Select “DATA MONITOR”, “CONTROL MODULE INPUT
ITEM”, and “STEERING ANGLE SIGNAL” on CONSULT-II
screen. Then check that “STEERING ANGLE SIGNAL” is
within 0±3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat
steps 1 to 5.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
Calibration of Decel G Sensor
I
NABR0203
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit), suspension components, or after adjusting
wheel alignment or replacing yaw rate/side/decel G sensor,
make sure to calibrate decel G sensor before running vehicle.
CAUTION:
To calibrate decel G sensor, make sure to use CONSULT-II.
(Adjustment cannot be done without CONSULT-II.)
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-87
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
VDC/TCS/ABS
Calibration of Decel G Sensor (Cont’d)
1.
2.
3.
Stop vehicle horizontally with front wheels in straight-ahead
position.
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not
start engine).
Touch “ABS”, “WORK SUPPORT” and “DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION” on CONSULT-II screen in this order.
SBR112F
SBR231F
4. Touch “START”.
CAUTION:
The vehicle should be set horizontal and stationary.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch “END”. (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.)
6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION:
Be sure to carry out above operation.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then
stop.
8. Select “DATA MONITOR”, “CONTROL MODULE INPUT
ITEM”, and “DECEL G SEN” on CONSULT-II screen. Then
check that “DECEL G SEN” is within ±0.08G. If value is more
than specification, repeat steps 1 to 5.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
BR-88
NABR0199
GENERAL INFORMATION
VDC/TCS/ABS
Fail-Safe
Fail-Safe
ABS SYSTEM
NABR0199S01
GI
NABR0199S0101
If a malfunction occurs in electrical system, ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp, and SLIP indicator
lamp in combination meter turn ON. In this condition, the fail-safe function puts VDC/TCS/ABS and EBD into
one of the following conditions.
1. Only EBD operates. Same condition as that of models without VDC/TCS/ABS.
2. VDC/TCS/ABS and EBD do not operate. All 4 wheels operate as normal brakes.
NOTE:
In step 1 shown above, self-diagnosis when ignition switch is turned ON and when vehicle starts at initial time
is carried out. ABS self-diagnosis noise may be heard as usual.
MA
VDC/TCS SYSTEM
EC
NABR0199S0102
If a malfunction occurs in electrical system, VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp in combination
meter turn on. In this condition, VDC/TCS will be deactivated and it becomes equal to that of models without
VDC/TCS. However, ABS is controlled normally.
If a malfunction occurs in throttle control system, VDC/TCS control will be deactivated and only ABS control
will operate normally.
CAUTION:
If fail-safe mode is initiated, carry out self-diagnosis for VDC/TCS/ABS control system.
Hydraulic Circuit Diagram
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
NABR0199S02
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
ABS Function
SBR137F
HA
NABR0199S03
SC
1. During ABS operation, brake pedal lightly vibrates and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is normal.
2. When starting engine, or just after starting vehicle, brake pedal may vibrate or motor operating noises may
be heard from engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check.
3. Stopping distance may be longer than that of vehicles without ABS when vehicle drives on rough, gravel,
or snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads.
4. EBD is integrated in VDC/TCS/ABS system.
BR-89
EL
IDX
GENERAL INFORMATION
VDC/TCS/ABS
TCS Function
TCS Function
NABR0199S04
1. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) detects a spin at drive wheels by comparing wheel speed signals from all 4 wheels. At this time, output from control unit controls brake fluid pressure to both LH and
RH rear wheels while cutting fuel to engine and closing throttle valve to reduce engine torque. Furthermore,
throttle position is continuously controlled to insure appropriate engine torque at all times.
2. Depending on road circumstances, driver may have a sluggish feel. This is normal, because optimum
traction has highest priority under TCS operation.
3. When vehicle is passing through a road where surface friction coefficient varies, downshifting or depressing accelerator pedal fully may activate TCS temporarily.
4. During TCS operation, it informs driver of system operation by flashing SLIP indicator lamp.
VDC Function
NABR0199S05
1. In addition to TCS/ABS function, VDC detects driver’s steering operation amount and brake pedal travel
from steering angle sensor and pressure sensor. Using information from yaw rate/side G-sensor and wheel
sensor, VDC judges driving condition (conditions of under steer and over steer) to improve stability by
controlling brake application to 4 wheels and engine output.
2. SLIP indicator lamp flashes to inform driver of VDC operation.
3. During VDC operation, body and brake pedal lightly vibrate and mechanical noises may be heard. This is
normal.
4. If vehicle is rotated on turn table, or rolled and rocked on ship, ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator
lamp, and SLIP indicator lamp may turn ON. In this case, start engine on normal road again. If ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp, and SLIP indicator lamp turn OFF after restart, it is normal.
5. When driving in steep slope such as bank, ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp, and SLIP indicator lamp may turn ON. In this case, start engine on normal road again. If ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF
indicator lamp, and SLIP indicator lamp turn OFF after restart, it is normal.
System Diagram
NABR0199S06
SBR113F
BR-90
CAN COMMUNICATION
VDC/TCS/ABS
System Description
System Description
NABR0204
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many
electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with
2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Unit
Body type
Axle
NABR0205
GI
MA
EM
LC
Wide/Wagon
4WD (All-mode)
Engine
4WD (Part time)
2WD
EC
VQ35DE
Transmission
A/T
Brake control
VDC
FE
CL
CAN communication unit
ECM
X
X
X
TCM
X
X
X
MT
Transfer control unit
X
Steering angle sensor
X
X
X
AT
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
X
X
X
Combination meter
X
X
X
CAN communication type (Reference page)
Type 1 (BR-91)
TF
Type 2 (BR-93)
PD
X: Applicable
TYPE 1 (ALL-MODE 4WD MODELS)
System Diagram
NABR0205S01
AX
NABR0205S0101
SU
ST
SEL683Y
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-91
CAN COMMUNICATION
VDC/TCS/ABS
CAN Communication Unit (Cont’d)
Input/Output Signal Chart
=NABR0205S0102
T: Transmit R: Receive
Signals
ECM
TCM
Transfer
control unit
ABS actuaSteering
tor and elec- Combination
angle sensor
tric unit
meter
(control unit)
Engine speed signal
T
R
R
Accelerator pedal position signal
T
R
R
Closed throttle position signal
T
R
Wide open throttle position signal
T
R
VDC operation signal
R
R
T
TCS operation signal
R
R
T
ABS operation signal
R
R
T
Output shaft revolution signal
R
ETC fail signal
T
During shifting signal
R
T
R
R
T
R
Steering wheel angle sensor signal
R
T
Wheel speed sensor signal
R
Stop lamp switch signal
R
R
T
R
T
MIL signal
T
R
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
R
Fuel consumption signal
T
R
T
R
Vehicle speed signal
R
T
Lock-up prohibition signal
T
R
Lock-up signal
R
T
Neutral range switch signal
R
T
Parking range switch signal
R
T
Overdrive control switch signal
R
T
A/C compressor feedback signal
T
R
Fuel level sensor signal
R
T
A/T position indicator signal
T
R
O/D OFF indicator signal
T
R
BR-92
CAN COMMUNICATION
VDC/TCS/ABS
CAN Communication Unit (Cont’d)
TYPE 2 (EXCEPT ALL-MODE 4WD MODELS)
System Diagram
=NABR0205S02
GI
NABR0205S0201
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL682Y
FE
Input/Output Signal Chart
NABR0205S0202
T: Transmit R: Receive
Signals
ECM
TCM
Steering angle
sensor
Combination
meter
R
Engine speed signal
T
R
Accelerator pedal position signal
T
R
Closed throttle position signal
T
R
Wide open throttle position signal
T
R
VDC operation signal
R
T
TCS operation signal
R
T
ABS operation signal
R
T
Steering wheel angle sensor signal
CL
ABS actuator
and electric
unit (control
unit)
MT
AT
TF
T
PD
AX
R
MIL signal
T
R
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
R
Fuel consumption signal
T
R
T
SU
R
Vehicle speed signal
R
T
Stop lamp switch signal
R
Lock-up prohibition signal
T
R
Lock-up signal
R
T
T
ST
RS
Neutral range switch signal
R
T
Parking range switch signal
R
T
Overdrive control switch signal
R
T
A/C compressor feedback signal
T
R
Fuel level sensor signal
R
T
A/T position indicator signal
T
R
O/D OFF indicator signal
T
R
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-93
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
How to Proceed with Diagnosis
How to Proceed with Diagnosis
BASIC CONCEPT
I
NABR0165
NABR0165S01
Most important point to perform diagnosis is to understand
systems (control and mechanism) in vehicle thoroughly.
I
It is also important to clarify customer complaints before
inspection.
First of all, reproduce symptom, and understand it fully.
Ask customer about his/her complaints carefully. In some
cases, it will be necessary to check symptom by driving vehicle
with customer.
NOTE:
Customers are not professionals. Do not assume “maybe customer
means...” or “maybe customer mentioned this symptom”.
SEF234G
I
SEF233G
I
I
I
It is essential to check symptoms right from beginning in order
to repair a malfunction completely.
For an intermittent malfunction, it is important to reproduce
symptom based on interview with customer and past
examples. Do not perform inspection on ad hoc basis. Most
intermittent malfunctions are caused by poor contacts. In this
case, it will be effective to shake suspected harness or connector by hand. When repairs are performed without any
symptom check, no one can judge if malfunction has actually
been eliminated.
After diagnosis, make sure to carry out “erase memory”. Refer
to BR-108.
For an intermittent malfunction, move harness or harness connector by hand to check poor contact or false open circuit.
Always read “GI General Information” to confirm general precautions.
BR-94
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
How to Proceed with Diagnosis (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSIS FLOWCHART
NABR0165S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SBR249F
BR-95
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
How to Proceed with Diagnosis (Cont’d)
ASKING COMPLAINTS
I
I
I
NABR0165S03
Complaints against malfunction vary depending on each person. It is important to clarify customer complaints.
Ask customer about what symptoms are present and under
what conditions. Use information to reproduce symptom while
driving.
It is also important to use diagnosis sheet so as not to miss
information.
SBR339B
EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET
NABR0165S04
SFIA0029E
BR-96
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Component Installation Location
Component Installation Location
NABR0166
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SBR114F
BR-97
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Schematic
Schematic
NABR0167
MBR627A
BR-98
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Wiring Diagram — VDC —
Wiring Diagram — VDC —
NABR0168
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MBR628A
BR-99
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Wiring Diagram — VDC — (Cont’d)
MBR629A
BR-100
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Wiring Diagram — VDC — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MBR630A
IDX
BR-101
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Wiring Diagram — VDC — (Cont’d)
MBR631A
BR-102
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Wiring Diagram — VDC — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MBR632A
IDX
BR-103
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard
Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard
STANDARDS BY CONSULT-II
NABR0169
NABR0169S01
CAUTION:
Items displayed are data calculated by the control unit and
may indicate normal operation even if output circuit (harness)
is open or shorted.
Data monitor
Monitor item
Display content
Condition
Reference value in normal operation
GEAR
A/T gear position
Vehicle running
1 to 4
SLCT LVR POSI
A/T shift position
Select shift position
Shift position: P, R, N or
D
Vehicle stopped
0 [km/h (MPH)]
Vehicle running (Note 1)
Almost in accordance
with speedometer display (within ±10%)
Accelerator pedal not
depressed (ignition switch is
ON)
0%
Depress accelerator pedal
(ignition switch is ON)
0 to 100%
With engine stopped
0 rpm
Engine running
Almost in accordance
with tachometer display
Straight-ahead
Approx. 0 deg
Steering wheel turned
–756 to 756 deg
Vehicle stopped
Approx. 0 d/s
Vehicle running
–100 to 100 d/s
Vehicle stopped
Approx. 0 m/s2
Vehicle running
–16.7 to 16.7 m/s2
FR LH SENSOR
FR RH SENSOR
RR LH SENSOR
RR RH SENSOR
Wheel speed
ACCEL POS SIG
Throttle actuator
opening/closing is displayed (linked with
accelerator pedal)
ENGINE SPEED·
STR ANGLE SIG
YAW RATE SEN
With engine running
Steering angle detected
by steering angle sensor
Yaw rate detected by
yaw rate sensor
Transverse G detected
SIDE G-SENSOR
by side G-sensor
DECEL G-SEN
PRESS SENSOR
BATTERY VOLT
Longitudinal acceleration Vehicle stopped
detected by Decel
During driving
G-Sen
Brake fluid pressure
detected by pressure
sensor
Approx. 0 G
±1.7 G
With ignition switch turned
Approx. 0 bar
ON and brake pedal released
With ignition switch turned
ON and brake pedal
depressed
Battery voltage supplied
to ABS actuator and
Ignition switch ON
electric unit (control unit)
BR-104
0 to 170 bar
10 to 16V
Note: Error inspection
checklist
—
Refer to AT section.
Wheel sensor circuit
[Inspection 1] Refer to
BR-119.
Communication circuit
between ABS actuator
and electric unit (control
unit) and ECM
Engine speed signal circuit
Steering angle sensor
and circuit
[Inspection 5] Refer to
BR-123.
Yaw rate sensor and circuit
[Inspection 6] Refer to
BR-124.
Side G-sensor and circuit
[Inspection 6] Refer to
BR-124.
Decel G sensor and circuit
Pressure sensor and
circuit
[Inspection 4] Refer to
BR-122.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
power supply and
ground circuits
[Inspection 10] Refer to
BR-130.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard (Cont’d)
GI
Data monitor
Monitor item
Display content
Condition
STOP LAMP SW
OFF SW
OFF switch
ON/OFF status
ABS warning lamp ON
condition (Note 2)
MOTOR RELAY
Operation status of
motor and motor relay
OFF LAMP
Brake pedal depressed
ON
Brake pedal not depressed
OFF
VDC OFF switch ON
(When VDC OFF indicator
lamp is ON)
ON
Brake pedal operation
ABS WARN
LAMP
ACTUATOR RLY
Actuator relay operation
status
OFF
ABS warning lamp ON
ON
ABS warning lamp OFF
OFF
Ignition switch ON or engine
running (ABS not operated)
OFF
Ignition switch ON or engine
running (ABS operated)
ON
Vehicle stopped (Ignition
switch ON)
OFF
Vehicle stopped (Engine running)
ON
When VDC OFF indicator
VDC OFF indicator lamp lamp is ON
status (Note 3)
When VDC OFF indicator
FR IN SOL
FR OUT SOL
RR IN SOL
RR OUT SOL
FLUID LEV SW
EBD FAIL SIG
ABS FAIL SIG
TCS FAIL SIG
VDC FAIL SIG
SLIP indicator lamp status (Note 4)
EM
LC
ABS warning lamp harness
ABS motor, motor relay,
and motor circuit
[Inspection 8] Refer to
BR-128.
ABS actuator relay and
circuit
[Inspection 8] Refer to
BR-128.
VDC OFF indicator lamp
circuit
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
OFF
When SLIP indicator lamp is
OFF
OFF
AX
SLIP indicator lamp circuit
SU
ON
Solenoid and circuit
[Inspection 7] Refer to
BR-126.
ST
OFF
When brake fluid level sensor
ON
ON
When brake fluid level sensor
OFF
OFF
Malfunctions condition
(When system failed)
EC
ON
ON
When actuator (solenoid) is
not active and actuator relay
is active (ignition switch ON).
System fail signal status
Stop lamp switch circuit
[Inspection 9] Refer to
BR-129.
TF
When SLIP indicator lamp is
ON
Actuator (solenoid) is active
(“ACTIVE TEST” with CONSULT-II) or actuator relay is
Solenoid valve operation inactive (in fail-safe mode).
ON/OFF status of brake
fluid level sensor
MA
VDC OFF switch circuit
VDC OFF switch OFF
(When VDC OFF indicator
lamp is OFF)
lamp is OFF
SLIP LAMP
Reference value in normal operation
Note: Error inspection
checklist
OFF
Brake fluid level sensor,
brake warning lamp, and
circuit
[Inspection 13] Refer to
BR-133.
EBD system
ABS system
TCS system
VDC system
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-105
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard (Cont’d)
Data monitor
Monitor item
Display content
Condition
CV1
CV2
SV1
SV2
VDC switch-over solenoid valve status
Reference value in normal operation
When the actuator (switchover solenoid valve) is active
(“Active test” with CONSULTII) or the actuator relay is
inactive (when fail-safe
mode).
ON
When the actuator (switchover solenoid valve) is inactive or the actuator relay is
active (ignition switch ON).
OFF
Note: Error inspection
checklist
Switch-over solenoid
valve and circuit
Note 1: Confirm tire pressure is normal.
Note 2: ON/OFF timing of ABS warning lamp
ON: For approximately 1 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected.
OFF: Approximately 1 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal operation) and VDC/TCS function is not
activated.
(Note 3): ON/OFF timing of VDC OFF indicator lamp
ON: For approximately 1 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected and VDC OFF switch is ON.
OFF: Approximately 1 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal operation.) And when VDC OFF switch is
OFF.
Note 4: SLIP indicator lamp ON/OFF timing
ON: For approximately 1 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected and VDC/TCS function is activated while driving.
OFF: Approximately 1 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal operation) and VDC/TCS function is not
activated.
Flashing: VDC/TCS function is active during driving
CONSULT-II Functions
NABR0170
CONSULT-II MAIN FUNCTION
NABR0170S01
In a diagnosis function (main function), there are “WORK
SUPPORT”, “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS”, “DATA MONITOR”,
“CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, “ACTIVE TEST”, “FUNCTION
TEST”, “ECU PART NUMBER”.
Diagnostic test
mode
Function
Reference
WORK SUPPORT
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more
accurately by following the indications on CONSULT-II.
Refer to BR-87.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS
Self-diagnostic results can be read and erased quickly.
Refer to BR-108.
DATA MONITOR
Input/Output data in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) can
be read.
Refer to BR-111.
CAN DIAG SUPThe results of transmit/receive diagnosis of communication can be read.
PORT MNTR
ACTIVE TEST
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart
from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and also shifts some Refer to BR-114.
parameters in a specified range.
BR-106
—
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
CONSULT-II Functions (Cont’d)
Diagnostic test
mode
GI
Function
Reference
FUNCTION
TEST
Conducted by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether
each system is “OK” or “NG”.
—
MA
ECU PART
NUMBER
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number can be read.
—
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-107
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
CONSULT-II Functions (Cont’d)
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Description
=NABR0170S02
NABR0170S0201
If a malfunction is detected in system, ABS warning lamp, VDC
OFF indicator lamp, and SLIP indicator lamp on meter turn on. In
this case, perform self-diagnosis as follows:
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
SBR112F
NABR0170S0202
Perform Refer to BR-118 using information from customer.
After ignition switch is turned OFF, connect CONSULT-II and
CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector (data link
connector is on lower instrument cover).
3. Start engine and drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) for
approximately 1 minute.
4. After stopping vehicle, with engine still idling, touch “START”,
“ABS”, and “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on CONSULT-II screen in
this order.
CAUTION:
Just after starting engine, or turning ignition switch ON,
“ABS” may not be displayed on system selection screen even
if “START” is touched. In this case, start self-diagnosis again
from step 2. If it cannot be shown after several attempts, VDC/
TCS/ABS control unit may have malfunctioned. Repair or
replace control unit.
5. Self-diagnosis result is displayed. (If necessary, touch “PRINT”
to print self-diagnosis result.)
I When “NO FAILURE” is shown, check ABS warning lamp,
VDC OFF indicator lamp, SLIP indicator lamp. Refer to
BR-116.
I CONSULT-II self-diagnosis results are displayed without
regard to occurrence timing. In some cases later ones (timing
value is small) appear on next screen.
6. Go to appropriate “Inspection” chart according to “Display Item
List”, and repair or replace as necessary.
7. Start engine and drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) for
approximately 1 minute.
CAUTION:
Check again to make sure that there is no malfunction on
other parts.
8. Turn ignition switch OFF to prepare for erasing memory.
9. Start engine and touch “START”, “ABS”, “SELF-DIAGNOSIS
RESULTS”, and “ERASE MEMORY” on CONSULT-II screen in
this order to erase memory.
CAUTION:
If memory cannot be erased, go to step 6.
10. Drive vehicle at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) and check
that ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp, and SLIP
indicator lamp stay off.
BR-108
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
CONSULT-II Functions (Cont’d)
Display Item List
Malfunction system
Malfunction detecting condition
FR LH SENSOR-1
Circuit of front LH wheel sensor is open
RR RH SENSOR-1
Circuit of rear RH wheel sensor is open
FR RH SENSOR-1
Circuit of front RH wheel sensor is open
RR LH SENSOR-1
Circuit of rear LH wheel sensor is open
FR LH SENSOR-2
Circuit of front LH wheel sensor is shorted, or sensor power
voltage is unusual. Control unit cannot identify sensor pulses,
because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor.
RR RH SENSOR-2
Circuit of rear RH wheel sensor is shorted, or sensor power
voltage is unusual. Control unit cannot identify sensor pulses,
because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor.
NABR0170S0203
GI
Check system
MA
EM
LC
Wheel sensor and circuit
[Inspection 1] Note 1 Refer to
BR-119.
EC
FE
FR RH SENSOR-2
Circuit of front RH wheel sensor is shorted, or sensor power
voltage is unusual. Control unit cannot identify sensor pulses,
because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor.
RR LH SENSOR-2
Circuit of rear LH wheel sensor is shorted, or sensor power voltage is unusual. Control unit cannot identify sensor pulses,
because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor.
STOP LAMP SW
Stop lamp switch circuit is open.
Stop lamp switch and circuit
[Inspection 9] Refer to
BR-129.
PRESS SEN CIRCUIT
VDC pressure sensor signal line is open or shorted, or VDC
pressure sensor is malfunctioning.
VDC pressure sensor and circuit
[Inspection 4] Refer to
BR-122.
ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT
Neutral position of steering angle sensor is dislocated, or steering angle sensor is malfunctioning.
Steering angle sensor and
circuit
[Inspection 5] Refer to
BR-123.
YAW RATE SENSOR
Yaw rate/Side G-sensor and
Yaw rate sensor has generated an error, or yaw rate sensor sig- circuit
nal line is open or shorted.
[Inspection 6] Refer to
BR-124.
FR LH IN ABS SOL
Circuit of front LH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
FR LH OUT ABS SOL
Circuit of front LH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or
control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
RR RH IN ABS SOL
Circuit of rear RH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
RR RH OUT ABS SOL
Circuit of rear RH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or
control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
FR RH IN ABS SOL
Circuit of front RH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
FR RH OUT ABS SOL
Circuit of front RH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or
control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
RR LH IN ABS SOL
Circuit of rear LH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control
line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
RR LH OUT ABS SOL
Circuit of rear LH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
Solenoid and circuit
[Inspection 7] Refer to
BR-126.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-109
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
CONSULT-II Functions (Cont’d)
Malfunction system
CV1
CV2
SV1
Malfunction detecting condition
Check system
Front side of VDC switch-over solenoid valve (cut valve) is open
circuit or shorted, or the control line is open or shorted to the
power supply or the ground.
Rear side of VDC switch-over solenoid valve (cut valve) is open
circuit or sorted, or the control line is open or shorted to the
VDC switch-over valve and
power supply or the ground.
circuit
Front side of VDC switch-over solenoid valve (suction valve) is [Inspection 7] Refer to
open circuit or shorted, or the control line is open or shorted to BR-126.
the power supply or the ground.
SV2
Rear side of VDC switch-over solenoid valve (suction valve) is
open circuit or shorted, or the control line is open or shorted to
the power supply or the ground.
During actuator motor operation with ON, when actuator motor
turns OFF or when control line for actuator motor relay is open.
PUMP MOTOR (note)
During actuator motor operation with OFF, when actuator motor
turns ON or when control line for relay is shorted to ground.
Actuator motor, motor relay,
and circuit
[Inspection 8] Refer to
BR-128.
LOW POWER VOLTAGE
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) power supply
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power voltage is too
and ground circuits
low.
[Inspection 10] Refer to
BR-130.
ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL
Neutral position correction of steering angle sensor is not finished.
Neutral position adjustment of
steering angle sensor
[Inspection 12] Refer to
BR-133.
ST ANG SEN COM CIR
CAN communication line or steering angle sensor has generated an error.
Steering angle sensor and
CAN communication line
[Inspection 14] Refer to
BR-134.
SIDE G-SEN CIRCUIT
Side G-sensor is malfunctioning, or signal line of side G-sensor
is open or shorted.
Yaw rate/Side G-sensor and
circuit
[Inspection 6] Refer to
BR-124.
CONTROLLER FAILURE
Internal malfunction of ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)
[Inspection 3] Refer to
BR-121.
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
I CAN communication line is open or shorted.
I ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) internal malfunction
I Battery voltage for EMC is suddenly interrupted for approximately 0.5 seconds or more.
Communication line between
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) and other control
units
[Inspection 14] Note 2 Refer
to BR-134.
BR FLUID LEVEL LOW
I Brake fluid level drops or communication line between ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit) and brake fluid level
sensor is open or shorted.
I Communication line
between ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit)
and brake fluid sensor, and
brake warning lamp
I Reservoir tank fluid level
[Inspection 13] Refer to
BR-133.
VARIANT CODING
I V coding is not functioning.
The ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) and circuit
Note 1. If wheel sensor 2 for each wheel is indicated, check control unit power supply voltage in addition to wheel sensor circuit check.
BR-110
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
CONSULT-II Functions (Cont’d)
Note 2. If multiple malfunctions are detected including CAN communication line [U1000], perform diagnosis for CAN communication line
first.
DATA MONITOR
I
NABR0170S03
For details of data monitor function, refer to “CONSULT-II
Instruction Manual”.
Operation Procedure
NABR0170S0301
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect CONSULT-II to DDL2 data link connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Touch “START” on display.
5. Touch “ABS” on display.
NOTE:
Just after starting engine, or turning ignition switch ON, “ABS” may
not be displayed on system selection screen even if “START” is
touched. In this case, start self-diagnosis again from step 2.
6. Touch “DATA MONITOR”.
7. Return to monitor item selection screen, and touch any of
“CONTROL UNIT INPUT ITEM”, “MAIN ITEM” or “ITEM MENU
SELECTION”. Refer to BR-112.
8. Touch “START”.
9. Screen of data monitor is displayed.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-111
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
CONSULT-II Functions (Cont’d)
Display Item List
=NABR0170S0302
Monitor item selection
ECU input signals
Main item
(Monitor item
selector)
Selection from
menu
GEAR
×
×
×
Gear position judged by PNP
switch signal is displayed.
FR RH SENSOR
(km/h (MPH))
×
×
×
Wheel speed calculated by front
RH wheel sensor signal is displayed.
FR LH SENSOR
(km/h (MPH))
×
×
×
Wheel speed calculated by front
LH wheel sensor signal is displayed.
RR RH SENSOR
(km/h (MPH))
×
×
×
Wheel speed calculated by rear RH
wheel sensor signal is displayed.
RR LH SENSOR
(km/h (MPH))
×
×
×
Wheel speed calculated by rear LH
wheel sensor signal is displayed.
BATTERY VOLT (V)
×
×
×
Voltage supplied to ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit) is
displayed.
SLCT LVR POSI
×
×
×
Shift position judged by PNP switch
signal.
ACCEL POS SIG (%)
×
—
×
Throttle actuator opening/closing
status judged by CAN communication signal is displayed.
ENGINE SPEED (rpm)
×
×
×
Engine speed judged by CAN communication signal is displayed.
STR ANGLE SIG (deg)
×
—
×
Steering angle detected by steering
angle sensor is displayed.
YAW RATE SEN (d/s)
×
×
×
Yaw rate detected by yaw rate sensor is displayed.
SIDE G-SENSOR (m/s2)
×
—
×
Transverse acceleration detected
by side G-sensor is displayed.
PRESS SENSOR (bar)
×
—
×
Brake fluid pressure detected by
pressure sensor is displayed.
STOP LAMP SW (ON/OFF)
×
×
×
Stop lamp switch (ON/OFF) status
is displayed.
OFF SW (ON/OFF)
×
×
×
VDC OFF switch (ON/OFF) status
is displayed.
ABS WARN LAMP (ON/OFF)
—
×
×
ABS warning lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
SLIP LAMP (ON/OFF)
—
×
×
SLIP indicator lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
FR LH IN SOL (ON/OFF)
—
×
×
Front LH IN ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
FR LH OUT SOL (ON/OFF)
—
×
×
Front LH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
RR RH IN SOL (ON/OFF)
—
×
×
Rear RH IN ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
Item (Unit)
BR-112
Remarks
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
CONSULT-II Functions (Cont’d)
GI
Monitor item selection
ECU input signals
Main item
(Monitor item
selector)
Selection from
menu
RR RH OUT SOL (ON/OFF)
—
×
×
Rear RH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
EM
FR RH IN SOL (ON/OFF)
—
×
×
Front RH IN ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
LC
×
Front RH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
Item (Unit)
FR RH OUT SOL (ON/OFF)
—
×
Remarks
MA
EC
RR LH IN SOL (ON/OFF)
—
×
×
Rear LH IN ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
RR LH OUT SOL (ON/OFF)
—
×
×
Rear LH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/
OFF) status is displayed.
OFF LAMP (ON/OFF)
—
×
×
OFF Lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
CL
MOTOR RELAY (ON/OFF)
—
×
×
ABS motor relay (ON/OFF) status
is displayed.
MT
ACTUATOR RLY
—
×
×
ABS actuator relay (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
AT
DECEL G-SEN
×
×
×
FLUID LEV SW (ON/OFF)
×
—
—
×: Applicable
—: Not applicable
Brake fluid level sensor (ON/OFF)
status is displayed.
FE
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-113
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
CONSULT-II Functions (Cont’d)
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
=NABR0170S04
NABR0170S0401
CAUTION:
I Do not perform active test while driving the vehicle.
I Make sure to completely bleed air from brake system.
I Active test cannot be performed when ABS warning lamp
is on.
1. Connect the CONSULT-II connector to the vehicle-side data
link connector and start the engine.
2. Touch “START” on the display.
3.
Touch “ABS” and “ACTIVE TEST”.
4.
5.
Test item selection screen is displayed.
Touch necessary test item.
6.
Touch “START” with “MAIN SIGNALS” line inverted.
SBR115F
SFIA2436E
SBR116F
SBR117F
BR-114
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
CONSULT-II Functions (Cont’d)
7.
Active test screen is displayed.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SBR118F
EC
Solenoid Valve
1.
2.
NABR0170S0402
To perform active test of ABS functions, select major items for
each test item. To perform active test of VDC/TCS functions,
select item menu for each test item.
For ABS solenoid valve, touch “UP”, “KEEP”, and “DOWN”.
For ABS solenoid valve (ACT), touch “UP,” “ACT UP,” and
“ACT KEEP”. Use screen monitor to check that solenoid valve
operates as shown in Solenoid Valve Operation Chart. Refer
to “Solenoid Valve Operation Chart”.
SBR118F
CL
MT
AT
Solenoid Valve Operation Chart
ABS solenoid valve
FE
NABR0170S0403
ABS solenoid valve (ACT)
Operation
UP
KEEP
DOWN
UP
ACT UP
ACT KEEP
FR RH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
FR RH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
FR LH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
FR LH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR RH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR RH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR LH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
RR LH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
Front RH ABS S/V
Front LH ABS S/V
TF
PD
AX
SU
Rear RH ABS S/V
Rear LH ABS S/V
ST
*: ON for 1 to 2 seconds after the touch, and then OFF
NOTE:
I If active test is performed with brake pedal depressed, pedal
stroke may change. This is normal.
I “TEST STOP” is displayed approximately 10 seconds after
operation starts.
I After “TEST STOP” is displayed, to perform test again, repeat
step 6.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-115
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
CONSULT-II Functions (Cont’d)
ABS Motor
NABR0170S0404
Touch “ON” and “OFF” on the screen. Check that ABS motor relay
operates as shown in table below.
SFIA0593E
Operation
ON
OFF
ACTUATOR RLY
ON
ON
MOTOR RELAY
ON
OFF
NOTE:
I If active test is performed with brake pedal depressed, pedal
stroke may change. This is normal.
I “TEST STOP” is displayed approximately 10 seconds after
operation starts.
For Fast and Accurate Diagnosis
NABR0171
PRECAUTIONS FOR DIAGNOSIS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NABR0171S01
Before performing diagnosis, always read General Information (GI) to confirm general precautions.
If ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle sensor, steering system parts, suspension
system parts, or tires have been replaced, or if alignment has been adjusted, be sure to adjust neutral
position of steering angle sensor before driving.
When replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), be sure labels on control units are the same
color.
After diagnosis is finished, be sure to erase memory. Refer to BR-108.
When checking continuity and voltage between units, be sure to check for disconnection, looseness, bend,
or collapse of connector terminals. If any non-standard condition is found, repair or replace connector terminals.
For intermittent symptoms, possible cause is malfunction in harness, harness connector, or terminals.
Move harness, harness connector, and terminals to check for poor connections.
If a circuit tester is used for the check, be careful not to forcibly extend any connector terminal.
To use CONSULT-II to perform self-diagnosis of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), active tests,
or work support, first stop work, then connect CONSULT-II and select “ABS”.
CONSULT-II self-diagnosis results are displayed without regard to occurrence timing. In some cases later
ones (timing value is small) appear on the next screen.
While self-diagnosis results of CONSULT-II shows an error, if CONSULT-II active test is performed, an
engine system error may be indicated. In this case, start engine to resume the normal screen.
VDC/TCS/ABS system electronically controls brake operation and engine output. The following symptoms
may be caused by normal operations:
Symptom
Symptom description
Result
This is noise of motor inside VDC/TCS/ABS actuator. Slight noise
may occur during VDC, TCS, and ABS operation.
Motor operation noise
When the vehicle speed goes over 20 km/h (12 MPH), motor and
valve operating noise may be heard. It happens only once after turning ignition switch ON. This is a normal status of the system operation check.
BR-116
Normal
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
For Fast and Accurate Diagnosis (Cont’d)
Symptom
System operation check noise
Symptom description
Result
When the engine starts, slight “click” noise may be heard from engine
Normal
compartment. This is normal and is part of system operation check.
MA
TCS may activate momentarily if wheel speed changes when driving
over location where friction coefficient varies, when downshifting, or
when fully depressing accelerator pedal.
EM
For inspection of speedometer or other instruments, press VDC OFF
SW to turn VDC/TCS function off.
VDC/TCS operation
(SLIP lamp ON)
When accelerator pedal is depressed on a chassis dynamometer
(fixed front-wheel type), vehicle speed will not increase. This is not
normal. It is result of TCS being activated by stationary front wheels.
Warning lamp may also illuminate to indicate “sensor system error”.
This is also normal, and is the result of the stationary front wheels
being detected. To be certain, restart engine, and drive vehicle at 30
km/h or above. Check that warning lamp does not illuminate.
Normal
Cancel the VDC/TCS
function for the inspection on a chassis dynamometer.
MT
Depending on road conditions, driver may feel that feeling of acceleration is insufficient. This is because traction control, which controls
the engine and brakes to achieve optimal traction, has the highest
Normal
priority (for safety). As a result, there may be times when acceleration
is slightly less than usual for the same accelerator pedal operation.
AT
×: ON —: OFF
ABS warning lamp
VDC OFF indicator
SLIP indicator lamp
lamp
PD
AX
—
—
—
—
For Approx. 1 seconds after ignition SW is turned ON
×
×
×
—
Approx. 1 seconds after ignition
switch ON
—
—
—
VDC OFF SW is turned ON.
(VDC function is OFF.)
—
×
—
—
×
×
×
—
×
×
×
There is a ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) error.
(Power or ground malfunction)
—
×
×
—
When VDC/TCS is not functioning normally.
TF
Remarks
Ignition SW OFF
There is a VDC/TCS/ABS error.
EC
CL
ON and OFF Timing for ABS Warning Lamp, VDC OFF Indicator Lamp, and SLIP Indicator
Lamp
NABR0171S0101
Condition
LC
FE
On roads with low friction coefficients, such as snowy roads or gravel
ABS operation (Longer stopping roads, vehicles with ABS may require a longer stopping distance.
Normal
Therefore, when driving on such roads, avoid overconfidence and
distance)
keep speed sufficiently low.
Insufficient feeling of acceleration
GI
SU
Turns OFF 2 seconds after
engine starts.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-117
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Basic Inspection
Basic Inspection
NABR0172
BASIC INSPECTION 1: BRAKE FLUID LEVEL AND
LEAK INSPECTION
NABR0172S01
1.
Check fluid level in the brake reservoir tank. If fluid level is low,
refill the brake fluid.
2. Check for leakage in brake piping and around VDC/TCS/ABS
actuator. If leakage or seepage is found, check as follows.
I If VDC/TCS/ABS actuator connector is loose, tighten piping to
specified torque. Then inspect again and confirm that there is
no leakage.
I If connection flare nuts or screws of VDC/TCS/ABS actuator
are damaged, replace damaged parts. Then inspect again and
confirm that there is no leakage.
I If there is leakage or seepage at any location other than VDC/
TCS/ABS actuator connections, wipe away leakage or seepage with clean cloth. Then inspect again and confirm that there
is no leakage.
I If there is leakage from VDC/TCS/ABS actuator, wipe away
leakage or seepage with clean cloth. Then inspect again. If
there is leakage or seepage, replace VDC/TCS/ABS actuator
unit.
CAUTION:
ABS actuator body cannot be disassembled.
3. Check brake disc rotor and pads.
BASIC INSPECTION 2: INSPECTION FOR LOOSENESS
OF POWER SYSTEM TERMINALS
NABR0172S02
Check battery for looseness on the battery positive/negative terminals and ground connection. If looseness is detected, tighten the
piping to the specified torque. Check that the battery voltage does
not drop and the alternator is normal.
BASIC INSPECTION 3: INSPECTION OF ABS WARNING
LAMP, VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP AND SLIP
INDICATOR LAMP
NABR0172S03
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check that ABS warning lamp illuminates for approximately 1
seconds when ignition switch is turned ON. If it does not
illuminate, inspect ABS warning lamp and circuit, and inspect
combination meter.
Check that VDC OFF indicator lamp illuminates for approximately 1 seconds when ignition switch is turned ON. If it does
not illuminate, inspect VDC OFF indicator lamp and circuit, and
inspect combination meter.
Check that SLIP indicator lamp illuminates for approximately 1
seconds when ignition switch is turned ON. If it does not turn
on, check SLIP indicator lamp and circuit.
With engine running, turn VDC OFF switch ON and OFF.
Check that VDC OFF indicator lamp turns ON and OFF. If
indicator lamp does not turn ON and OFF according to switch
operation, inspect VDC OFF switch and circuit.
BR-118
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Inspection 1 Wheel Sensor System
Inspection 1 Wheel Sensor System
NABR0173
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
NABR0173S01
First use CONSULT-II self-diagnosis results to determine positions
of malfunctioning wheel sensors. Then inspect parts and determine
which parts to replace.
1
GI
MA
EM
STARTING INSPECTION
Perform self-diagnosis.
LC
EC
FE
CL
SFIA0625E
OK or NG
OK
©
Inspection is completed.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
2
MT
AT
CHECKING CONNECTOR
TF
Disconnect control unit connector E142 and connector E14 (FR-LH), E51 (FR-RH), B8 (RR-LH), B69 (RR-RH) of wheel
sensor where malfunction was detected. Check for deformation of terminals and incomplete joining of connectors. Then
reconnect connector. Also check that interference with other parts has not cut wheel sensor cables.
PD
Drive vehicle at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or above for at least 1.0 minute. Did ABS warning lamp turn OFF?
YES
©
Inspection is completed.
NO
©
GO TO 3.
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-119
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Inspection 1 Wheel Sensor System (Cont’d)
3
CHECKING WHEEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect control unit connector E142.
2. Disconnect wheel sensor connector E14 (FR-LH), E51 (FR-RH), B8 (RR-LH), B69 (RR-RH).
3. Check resistance between terminals. (Check resistance when steering wheel is turned right and left, and when sensor
harness inside wheel house is moved.)
SBR119F
Resistance value
Power system: 0 - 0.5 Ω
Signal system: 0 - 0.5 Ω
GND system: ∞Ω
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Repair harness and connectors between control unit and wheel sensor.
4
TIRE INSPECTION
Check air pressure, wear, and size.
Are air pressure, wear, and size within standards?
YES
©
GO TO 5.
NO
©
Adjust air pressure or replace tire.
5
SENSOR ROTOR INSPECTION
Check for damage to sensor rotor teeth and surface of rubber.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Replace sensor rotor.
6
POWER SUPPLY CHECK FOR CONTROL UNIT SENSOR
1. Disconnect wheel sensor connector E14 (FR-LH), E51 (FR-RH), B8 (RR-LH), B69 (RR-RH).
2. Check voltage between wheel sensor harness connector E14 terminal 1 (G), E51 terminal 1 (B), B8 terminal 1 (BR),
B69 terminal 1 (BR) and ground.
Voltage: 8V or more
OK
©
Replace wheel sensor.
NG
©
Replace control unit.
BR-120
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Inspection 2 Engine System
Inspection 2 Engine System
NABR0174
GI
Inspection Procedure
1
CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS (1)
MA
Check self-diagnosis results.
EM
LC
EC
MTBL1338
FE
Do self-diagnosis results indicate anything other than the above?
YES
©
Perform repair or replacement for the item indicated.
NO
©
GO TO 2.
2
CL
CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS (2)
MT
1. Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Repair or replace items indicated, then perform ECM self-diagnosis again.
2. Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
AT
OK or NG
OK
©
Inspection is completed.
NG
©
Repair or replace the items indicated. Then perform self-diagnosis again.
TF
PD
AX
SU
Inspection 3 VDC/TCS/ABS Control Unit
System
NABR0176
Inspection Procedure
1
CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
ST
Check self-diagnosis results.
RS
MTBL1339
BT
Does anything other than “ABS CONTROLLER” appear on self-diagnosis display?
YES
©
Repair or replace the items indicated. Then perform self-diagnosis again.
NO
©
Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Then perform ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-121
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Inspection 4 VDC Pressure Sensor System
Inspection 4 VDC Pressure Sensor System
NABR0177
Inspection Procedure
1
CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS (1)
Check self-diagnosis results.
SBR120F
Does “PRESSURE SENSOR” appear on self-diagnosis display?
YES
©
GO TO 2.
NO
©
Inspection is completed.
2
CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS (2)
1. Disconnect VDC pressure sensor connector E137 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connectors E142.
Then reconnect them securely.
2. Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
OK or NG
OK
©
Poor connection of connectors. Repair or replace suspect connector. Perform self-diagnosis again.
NG
©
GO TO 3.
3
CHECKING PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect VDC pressure sensor connector E137 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connectors E142.
2. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E142 and VDC pressure sensor harness connector E137.
SBR121F
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Open or short in harness. Repair or replace the suspect harness.
BR-122
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Inspection 4 VDC Pressure Sensor System (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECKING PRESSURE SENSOR
Check VDC pressure sensor value on “DATA MONITOR”.
MA
EM
MTBL1340
OK or NG
OK
©
Inspection is completed.
NG
©
VDC pressure sensor malfunction. Replace VDC pressure sensor.
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
Inspection 5 Steering Angle Sensor System
AT
NABR0178
Inspection Procedure
1
TF
CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS (1)
Check self-diagnosis results.
PD
AX
SU
SBR122F
Also perform Inspection 1 for the CAN communication system.
ST
Does “STEERING ANGLE SENSOR” appear on self-diagnosis display?
RS
YES
©
GO TO 2.
NO
©
Inspection is completed.
BT
2
CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS (2)
1. Disconnect steering angle sensor connector E136 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connectors E142.
Then reconnect them securely.
2. Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
OK or NG
OK
©
Poor connection of connectors. Repair or replace suspect connector. Perform self-diagnosis again.
NG
©
GO TO 3.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-123
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Inspection 5 Steering Angle Sensor System (Cont’d)
3
CHECKING STEERING ANGLE SENSOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E142 and steering angle sensor harness
connector E136.
2. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E142 and steering angle sensor harness connector E136.
SBR125F
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Open or short in harness. Repair or replace the suspect harness.
4
DATA MONITOR CHECK
Execute “DATA MONITOR” for “STEERING ANGLE SIGNAL”. Check that results are normal.
MTBL1341
OK or NG
OK
©
Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
NG
©
Replace spiral cable (steering angle sensor) and adjust neutral position of steering angle
sensor. Refer to BR-87.
Inspection 6 Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor
System
Inspection Procedure
BR-124
NABR0179
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Inspection 6 Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor System (Cont’d)
1
GI
CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS (1)
Check self-diagnosis results.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SBR126F
CAUTION:
If vehicle is on turn-table at entrance to parking garage, or on other moving surface, VDC OFF indicator lamp may
illuminate and CONSULT-II self-diagnosis may indicate yaw rate sensor system malfunction. However, in this case
there is no malfunction in yaw rate sensor system. Take vehicle off of turn-table or other moving surface, and
start engine. Results will return to normal.
Do “YAW RATE SENSOR SYSTEM” and “SIDE G-SENSOR SYSTEM” appear on self-diagnosis display?
YES
©
GO TO 2.
NO
©
Inspection is completed.
FE
CL
MT
AT
2
CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS (2)
1. Disconnect yaw rate/side/decel G-sensor harness connector B163 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E142.
2. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E142 and yaw rate/side/decel
G-sensor connector B163.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SBR127F
ST
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Open or short in harness. Repair or replace the suspect harness.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-125
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Inspection 6 Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor System (Cont’d)
3
CHECKING YAW RATE/SIDE G-SENSOR CIRCUIT
Check “DATA MONITOR” for yaw rate/side/decel G-sensor. Check that results are normal.
MTBL1342
OK or NG
OK
©
Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
NG
©
Malfunction of yaw rate/side/decel G-sensor. Replace sensor and perform ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
Inspection 7 Solenoid Valve, VDC Switch-over
Solenoid Valve and Circuit
NABR0200
Inspection procedure
1
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK 1
Check the self-diagnosis results.
SBR149F
Are any self-diagnosis result items above indicated?
©
2
GO TO 2.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK 2
1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Securely connect them again.
2. Perform the self-diagnosis again.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Repair or replace the poorly connected connector.
BR-126
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Inspection 7 Solenoid Valve, VDC Switch-over Solenoid Valve and Circuit (Cont’d)
3
GI
SOLENOID VALVE LINE CHECK
1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
2. Check for the power supply voltage between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E142 and the
ground.
3. Check the continuity of the ground.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SBR150F
OK or NG
OK
©
Perform the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
NG
©
Replace the VDC/TCS/ABS actuator assembly.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-127
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Inspection 8 ABS Actuator Relay or ABS Motor Relay Power System
Inspection 8 ABS Actuator Relay or ABS Motor
Relay Power System
=NABR0201
Inspection procedure
1
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK 1
Check the self-diagnosis results.
MTBL1279
Are “PUMP MOTOR” and “ACTUATOR RLY” (NOTE) indicated in the self-diagnosis results?
©
2
GO TO 2.
NOTE:
“ACTUATOR RLY” on the CONSULT-II self-diagnosis results indicates the malfunction of
the actuator relay and circuit.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK 2
1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Securely connect them again.
2. Perform the self-diagnosis again.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Repair or replace the poorly connected connector.
3
SOLENOID VALVE LINE CHECK
1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
2. Check for the power supply voltage between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E142 and the
ground.
3. Check the continuity of the ground.
SBR150F
OK or NG
OK
©
Perform the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
NG
©
Replace the VDC/TCS/ABS actuator assembly.
BR-128
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Inspection 9 Stop Lamp Switch and Circuit
Inspection 9 Stop Lamp Switch and Circuit
NABR0181
GI
Inspection Procedure
1
CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
MA
Check self-diagnosis results.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SBR128F
Does “STOP LAMP SW SYSTEM” appear in self-diagnosis results display?
YES
©
GO TO 2.
NO
©
Inspection is completed.
2
CL
MT
CHECKING STOP LAMP
1. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector M31 (M/T models) or M154 (A/T models) and ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) connector E142.
2. Reconnect connectors securely.
3. Start engine.
4. Repeat pumping brake pedal carefully several times, then perform self-diagnosis again.
©
GO TO 3.
NO
©
Poor connection. Repair or replace the applicable connector.
3
TF
PD
Do any self-diagnosis items appear?
YES
AT
AX
CHECKING STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
SU
1. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector M31 (M/T models) or M154 (A/T models) and ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) connector E142.
2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector M31 (M/T models) or M154 (A/T models) and ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E142.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SBR129F
OK or NG
OK
©
Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
NG
©
Open or short in harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and stop
lamp switch
SC
EL
IDX
BR-129
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Inspection 10 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Power Circuit
Inspection 10 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit) Power Circuit
NABR0182
Inspection Procedure
1
CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT
Check self-diagnosis results.
MTBL1343
Does “LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE” appear in self-diagnosis results display?
YES
©
GO TO 2.
NO
©
Inspection is completed.
2
STARTING INSPECTION
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E142. Then reconnect it securely.
2. Perform self-diagnosis.
Do any self-diagnosis items appear?
YES
©
GO TO 3.
NO
©
Poor connection. Repair or replace the applicable connector.
3
CHECKING ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SYSTEM (1)
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E142.
2. Turn ignition switch ON (but do not start engine). Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
harness connector E142 and ground.
SBR135F
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
GO TO 5.
BR-130
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Inspection 10 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Power Circuit (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECKING ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ground circuit.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SBR130F
FE
OK or NG
OK
©
Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
NG
©
I Poor installation of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), or harness malfunction
5
CHECKING ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SYSTEM (2)
CL
MT
1. Check fuse 50A or 30A.
2. Check continuity between battery positive terminal and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E142.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SBR136F
OK or NG
OK
©
Check for non-standard conditions in battery (terminal looseness, low voltage, etc.) and
alternator.
NG
©
I Replace fuse 50A or 30A.
I Open or short in harness.
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-131
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Inspection 11 When “SHIFT POSITION ERROR” Appears in Self-Diagnosis Results Display
Inspection 11 When “SHIFT POSITION ERROR”
Appears in Self-Diagnosis Results Display
=NABR0183
Inspection Procedure
1
CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check self-diagnosis results.
MTBL1344
Does “SHIFT POSITION ERROR” appear in self-diagnosis results display?
YES
©
GO TO 2.
NO
©
Inspection is completed.
2
DATA MONITOR CHECK
1. Connect CONSULT-II. Start engine.
2. In “DATA MONITOR” select “ITEM MENU” and then check P position.
MTBL1345
OK or NG
OK
©
Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
NG
©
GO TO 3.
3
CHECKING PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Perform the park/neutral position switch inspection. Refer to AT-263.
Do any self-diagnosis items appear?
YES
©
Repair the indicated items and perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) selfdiagnosis again.
NO
©
Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
BR-132
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Inspection 12 When “ST ANG SEN COM CIR” Appears on Self-Diagnosis Results Display
Inspection 12 When “ST ANG SEN COM CIR”
Appears on Self-Diagnosis Results Display
GI
Inspection Procedure
MA
=NABR0180
1
CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS (1)
Check self-diagnosis results.
EM
LC
MTBL1347
EC
Does anything besides “ST ANG SEN COM CIR” appear on self-diagnosis results display?
YES
©
Inspect and repair the indicated items. Then perform self-diagnosis again.
NO
©
Perform adjustment of steering angle sensor neutral position. Then GO TO 2.
2
FE
CL
CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS (2)
Turn ignition switch OFF, and ON to erase self-diagnosis results, and perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
self-diagnosis again.
Does anything appear on self-diagnosis results display?
YES
©
Replace steering angle sensor. Then perform adjustment of neutral position and perform
self-diagnosis again.
NO
©
Inspection is completed.
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
Inspection 13 Brake Fluid Level of Reservoir
Tank
NABR0202
Inspection procedure
1
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK 1
ST
Check the self-diagnosis results.
RS
MTBL1294
BT
Does the brake warning light turn on?
Yes
©
Check the pad for wear. Check the brake fluid for leakage.
No
©
GO TO 2.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-133
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Inspection 13 Brake Fluid Level of Reservoir Tank (Cont’d)
2
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK 2
1. Disconnect connectors for the brake fluid level warning switch and the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
2. Securely connect connectors. Perform the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
Is the same self-diagnosis item indicated again?
Yes
©
Poor connection of connector. Repair or replace the poorly connected connector.
No
©
GO TO 3.
3
CIRCUIT CHECK BETWEEN BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING SWITCH AND ABS ACTUATOR AND
ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
1. Disconnect connectors for the brake fluid level warning switch and the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
2. Check for continuity between the brake fluid level warning switch (harness connector E28) and the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) (harness connector B142).
SBR151F
OK or NG
OK
©
Perform the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
NG
©
Repair or replace the disconnected harness.
Inspection 14 CAN Communications System
NABR0185
Inspection Procedure
1
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector, and check the terminal
for deformation, disconnection, looseness, and so on. If there is a malfunction, repair or replace the terminal.
2. Reconnect connector to perform self-diagnosis.
Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
Yes
©
Print out the self-diagnostic results, and refer to EL-447.
No
©
Connector terminal connection is loose, damaged, open, or shorted.
Inspecting Components
VDC OFF SWITCH
I
NABR0175
NABR0175S01
Disconnect VDC OFF switch connector M151. Check continuity between terminal No. 2 and terminal No. 3.
No. 2 to No. 3:
Pressing the switch will establish continuity, releasing it will break continuity.
SBR131F
BR-134
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Symptom 1 ABS Works Frequently.
Symptom 1 ABS Works Frequently.
NABR0186
GI
Inspection Procedure
1
STARTING INSPECTION
MA
Inspect wheel sensor system.
I Sensor mounting inspection
I Sensor pick-up inspection for iron chips
I Sensor rotor inspection (e.g. Number of teeth, damaged teeth)
I Sensor connector engagement inspection
EM
LC
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Repair wheel sensor and rotor system.
2
EC
FE
CHECKING FOR LOOSENESS
Check for looseness of front axle.
CL
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO Refer to BR-135
NG
©
Axle inspection and repair
Symptom 2 Unexpected Pedal Reaction
Inspection Procedure
1
BRAKE PEDAL STROKE INSPECTION
Check brake pedal stroke.
Is stroke excessively long?
YES
©
Check bleeding and brake system.
NO
©
GO TO 2.
2
MT
AT
NABR0187
TF
PD
AX
SU
CHECKING PEDAL FORCE
Check that brake is effective with pedal depressed.
Is pedal heavy, but effective?
YES
©
Normal
NO
©
GO TO 3.
3
ST
CONNECTOR AND PERFORMANCE INSPECTION
RS
Disconnect actuator relay unit connector to deactivate ABS function. Check that brake is effective.
Is brake effective?
YES
©
GO TO 4.
NO
©
Brake line inspection
4
BT
HA
CHECKING ABS WARNING LAMP INDICATION
Check that ABS warning lamp illuminates.
OK or NG
OK
©
Execute self-diagnosis.
NG
©
GO TO 5.
SC
EL
IDX
BR-135
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Symptom 2 Unexpected Pedal Reaction (Cont’d)
5
CHECKING WHEEL SENSORS
Inspect wheel sensor system.
I Sensor mounting inspection
I Check sensor pick-up for adhering iron chips.
I Sensor rotor inspection (e.g. Number of teeth, damaged teeth)
I Sensor connector engagement inspection
OK or NG
OK
©
Normal
NG
©
Repair wheel sensor and rotor system.
Symptom 3 Long Stopping Distance
Inspection Procedure
1
STARTING INSPECTION
Check that stopping distance increases only on snowy roads and gravel roads.
OK or NG
OK
©
May be longer than for vehicles without ABS.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
2
CHECKING PERFORMANCE
Disconnect actuator relay box to deactivate ABS function.
Is stopping distance still long?
YES
©
I Brake line air bleeding
I Brake line inspection
NO
©
GO TO 3.
3
CHECKING ABS WARNING LAMP INDICATION
Check that ABS warning lamp illuminates.
OK or NG
OK
©
Perform self-diagnosis.
NG
©
GO TO 4.
4
CHECKING WHEEL SENSORS
Inspect wheel sensor system.
I Sensor mounting inspection
I Check sensor pick-up for adhering iron chips.
I Sensor rotor inspection (e.g. Number of teeth, damaged teeth)
I Sensor connector engagement inspection
OK or NG
OK
©
Normal
NG
©
Repair wheel sensor and rotor system.
BR-136
NABR0188
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Symptom 4 ABS Does Not Work.
Symptom 4 ABS Does Not Work.
NABR0189
GI
Inspection Procedure
1
CHECKING ABS WARNING LAMP INDICATION
MA
Check that ABS warning lamp illuminates.
OK or NG
OK
©
Perform self-diagnosis.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
2
EM
LC
CHECKING WHEEL SENSORS
EC
Inspect wheel sensor system.
I Sensor mounting inspection
I Check sensor pick-up for adhering iron chips.
I Sensor rotor inspection (e.g. Number of teeth, damaged teeth)
I Sensor connector engagement inspection
FE
CL
OK or NG
OK
©
Normal
NG
©
Repair wheel sensor and rotor system.
Symptom 5 Pedal Vibration and Noise
Inspection Procedure
1
INSPECTION (1)
Check brake system for pedal vibration or noise at engine start.
OK or NG
OK
©
Perform self-diagnosis.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
2
MT
AT
NABR0190
TF
PD
AX
SU
INSPECTION (2)
Check for vibration during soft braking (just placing foot on pedal).
CAUTION:
ABS may activate in conditions such as those listed below, when wheel speed changes.
I Gear shifting
I Turning at high speed
I Passing through gusts of wind
ST
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Normal
RS
BT
3
INSPECTION (3)
Does vibration occur during normal braking?
CAUTION:
In addition to activation for sudden braking, ABS may activate in conditions such as those listed below.
I Roads with low surface µ
I Turning at high speed
I Passing through gusts of wind
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Normal
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-137
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Symptom 5 Pedal Vibration and Noise (Cont’d)
4
INSPECTION (4)
Check for vibration when engine speed is increased while vehicle is stopped.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
Normal
CAUTION:
Vibration may occur when vehicle is stopped.
5
INSPECTION (5)
Check for vibration when switches of electrical components are operated.
OK or NG
OK
©
Check for any wireless devices, antennas, or antenna lead near control unit (including
wiring).
NG
©
GO TO 6.
6
CHECKING ABS WARNING LAMP INDICATION
Confirm ABS warning lamp turns on.
OK or NG
OK
©
Execute self-diagnosis.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
7
CHECKING WHEEL SENSORS
Inspect wheel sensor system.
I Sensor mounting inspection
I Sensor pick-up inspection for iron chips (e.g. Number of teeth, damaged teeth)
I Sensor connector engagement inspection
I Inspection of wheel sensor circuit
OK or NG
OK
©
Normal
NG
©
Repair wheel sensor and rotor system.
Symptom 6 VDC OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not
Illuminate.
NABR0191
Inspection Procedure
BR-138
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Symptom 6 VDC OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Illuminate. (Cont’d)
1
GI
CHECKING VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP POWER CIRCUIT
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check that the voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness terminal and ground is battery voltage
(Approx. 12V).
OK or NG
OK
©
Malfunction of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Repair or replace control unit.
NG
©
Malfunction in combination meter system. Inspect combination meter system.
EM
LC
Symptom 7 SLIP Indicator Lamp Does Not
Illuminate.
EC
NABR0192
Inspection Procedure
1
MA
FE
CHECKING FOR BURNED-OUT SLIP INDICATOR LAMP BULB
Check that there is continuity between meter power terminal and SLIP indicator lamp terminal.
CL
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Open or short in SLIP indicator lamp or combination meter circuit
MT
AT
2
CHECKING SLIP INDICATOR LAMP POWER CIRCUIT
Disconnect meter connector. Check that the voltage between meter harness terminal and ground is battery voltage
(Approx. 12V).
TF
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
PD
NG
©
I Fuse inspection
I Check harness and connectors between fuse block and meter.
I Inspect power system (battery, ignition switch circuit).
AX
3
CHECKING SLIP INDICATOR LAMP HARNESS
SU
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and meter harness connectors.
2. Check for open circuit or short circuits in harness between meter and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Open or short in harness. Repair or replace the suspect harness.
ST
RS
4
CHECKING SLIP INDICATOR LAMP CONNECTOR
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and meter harness connectors.
BT
OK or NG
OK
©
Reconnect connectors and perform self-diagnosis. There is an intermediate connector in
vehicle harness. Be sure to refer to vehicle wiring diagram when performing inspection.
NG
©
Connector open, shorted or damaged. Repair or replace connector.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-139
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Symptom 8 Vehicle Behaves Jerkily During VDC/TCS/ABS Operation.
Symptom 8 Vehicle Behaves Jerkily During
VDC/TCS/ABS Operation.
NABR0193
Inspection Procedure
1
CHECKING ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
On CONSULT-II, execute “DATA MONITOR” for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Is engine speed at idle 400 rpm or higher?
YES
©
Normal
NO
©
GO TO 2.
2
CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS (1)
Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis.
Does anything appear on self-diagnosis results display?
YES
©
Inspect and repair items indicated. Then perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) self-diagnosis again.
NO
©
GO TO 3.
3
ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT ITEM CHECK
Perform the ECM self-diagnosis.
Is the result of self-diagnosis “CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR”?
YES
©
Repair or replace crankshaft position sensor system.
NO
©
GO TO 4.
4
CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS (2)
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM connectors. Then reconnect them securely. Perform the
self-diagnosis again.
OK or NG
OK
©
Connector open, shorted or damaged. Repair or replace connector.
NG
©
GO TO 5.
5
CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS (3)
Perform the A/T self-diagnosis.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Repair or replace parts at location indicated.
6
CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS (4)
Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
Does anything appear on self-diagnosis results display?
YES
©
Repair or replace parts at location indicated.
NO
©
GO TO 7.
BR-140
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
VDC/TCS/ABS
Symptom 8 Vehicle Behaves Jerkily During VDC/TCS/ABS Operation. (Cont’d)
7
CHECKING CIRCUIT BETWEEN ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) AND ECM
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM connectors.
2. Check for open circuit or short circuits in engine speed signal harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) and ECM.
3. Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM connectors.
OK or NG
OK
©
Inspection is completed.
NG
©
Reconnect connectors and perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-141
WHEEL SENSORS
VDC/TCS/ABS
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
NABR0194
SBR132F
REMOVAL
NABR0194S01
Pay attention to the following when removing sensor.
CAUTION:
I As much as possible, avoid rotating sensor when removing it. Pull sensors out without pulling on sensor harness.
I Take care to avoid damaging sensor edges or rotor teeth.
Remove wheel sensor first before removing front or rear
wheel hub. This is to avoid damage to sensor wiring and
loss of sensor function.
INSTALLATION
NABR0194S02
Pay attention to the following when installing sensor. Tighten installation bolts and nuts to specified torques.
I When installing, check that there is no foreign material such as
iron chips on pick-up and mounting hole of the sensor. Check
that no foreign material has been caught in the sensor rotor
motor. Remove any foreign material and clean the mount.
BR-142
WHEEL SENSORS
VDC/TCS/ABS
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
I
When installing front sensor, be sure to press rubber grommets
in until they lock at the three locations shown in diagram (2 at
shock absorbers and 1 at body panel). When installed, harness must not be twisted. White line on harness (shaded part)
must be visible from left side.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-143
SENSOR ROTOR
VDC/TCS/ABS
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
Front
1.
2.
NABR0196
NABR0196S01
NABR0196S0101
Remove the front wheel hub. Refer to AX-7.
Remove the sensor rotor using suitable puller, drift and bearing replacer.
SBR873C
Rear
I
NABR0196S0102
Remove the sensor rotor using Tool.
SRA800AA
INSTALLATION
Front
NABR0196S02
NABR0196S0201
Install the sensor rotor using suitable drift and press.
I Always replace sensor rotor with new one.
I Play attention to the direction of front sensor rotor as shown in
figure.
SBR400DA
Rear
NABR0196S0202
Install the sensor rotor using suitable drift and press.
I Always replace sensor rotor with new one.
I Pay attention to the direction of front sensor rotor as shown in
figure.
SBR402D
BR-144
VDC/TCS/ABS ACTUATOR
VDC/TCS/ABS
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
NABR0197
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SBR320F
Pay attention to the following when removing actuator.
CAUTION:
I Before servicing, disconnect battery cables.
I To remove brake tube, use a flare nut wrench to prevent
flare nuts and brake tube from being damaged. To install,
use a brake tube torque wrench (commercial service tool).
I Do not remove and install actuator by holding harness.
I After work is completed, bleed air from brake piping. Refer
to BR-9.
I When replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit), calibrate steering angle sensor neutral position and
decel G sensor. Refer to BR-87.
SU
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BR-145
G SENSOR
VDC/TCS/ABS
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
NABR0198
NABR0198S01
1.
2.
3.
Install center console. Refer to BT-22.
Remove harness connector.
Remove installation bolts. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G-sensor.
CAUTION:
Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G-sensor,
because it has little endurance to impact.
SBR134F
INSTALLATION
NABR0198S02
To install, follow procedure for removal in reverse order.
CAUTION:
Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G-sensor,
because it has little endurance to impact.
BR-146
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications
General Specifications
NABR0118
GI
Unit: mm (in)
Applied model
Without VDC models
Brake model
Pad
Length × width × thickness
Rotor outer diameter × thickness
44.45 (1.7500) × 2
LT30C
Lining length × width × thickness
EC
22.23 (7/8)
296 × 50 × 6.1
(11.65 × 1.97 × 0.240)
Drum inner diameter
FE
295.0 (11.61)
Bore diameter
CL
25.40 (1)
Valve model
Control valve
LC
300 × 28 (11.81 × 1.10)
Cylinder bore diameter
Master cylinder
EM
132.0 × 52.5 × 11
(5.20 × 2.067 × 0.43)
Brake model
Rear brake
MA
AD31VC
Cylinder bore diameter × number of pistons
Front brake
With VDC models
Proportioning valve within master cylinder
Split point
kPa (kg/cm2, psi) × reducing ratio
Booster model
MT
2,942 (30, 427) × 0.2
M215T
Brake booster
C215T
AT
Pri: 230 (9.06)
Sec: 205 (8.07)
Diaphragm diameter
Recommended brake fluid
TF
DOT 3
Disc Brake
NABR0119
Unit: mm (in)
Brake model
PD
AD31VC
Pad wear limit
Minimum thickness
2.0 (0.079)
Rotor repair limit
Minimum thickness
26.0 (1.024)
AX
SU
Drum Brake
NABR0120
Unit: mm (in)
Brake model
Lining wear limit
LT30C
Minimum thickness
1.5 (0.059)
ST
Maximum inner diameter
296.5 (11.67)
Out-of-round limit
0.03 (0.0012)
Drum repair limit
RS
Brake Pedal
NABR0121
Unit: mm (in)
Transmission
Free height “H”*
Depressed height “D”*
[under force of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) with engine running]
Clearance “C” between pedal stopper and threaded end of stop lamp switch or ASCD switch
At clevis
BT
M/T
A/T
165 - 175
(6.50 - 6.89)
175 - 185
(6.89 - 7.28)
HA
65 (2.56)
70 (2.76)
SC
0.3 - 1.0 (0.012 - 0.039)
1.0 - 3.0 (0.039 - 0.118)
EL
Pedal free play
At pedal pad
1 - 3 (0.04 - 0.12)
IDX
*: Measured from surface of metal panel to pedal pad
BR-147
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Parking Brake Control
Parking Brake Control
NABR0084
Unit: notch
Control Type
Center lever
Lever stroke
[under force of 196 N (20 kg, 44 lb)]
6-8
Lever stroke when warning switch comes on
1 or less
BR-148
CLUTCH
SECTION
CL
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS ...............................................................2
Precautions ..................................................................2
PREPARATION ...............................................................3
Special Service Tools ..................................................3
Commercial Service Tools ...........................................3
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................................4
NVH Troubleshooting Chart.........................................4
CLUTCH ...................................................................4
CLUTCH SYSTEM - HYDRAULIC TYPE........................5
Components.................................................................5
On-Vehicle Inspection and Adjustment........................6
ADJUSTING CLUTCH PEDAL ....................................6
Air Bleeding Procedure................................................7
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER.......................................8
Components.................................................................8
Disassembly and Assembly.........................................8
Inspection.....................................................................8
OPERATING CYLINDER.................................................9
Components.................................................................9
Inspection.....................................................................9
CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM ...............................10
Components...............................................................10
Removal.....................................................................10
Inspection...................................................................11
Installation..................................................................11
Lubrication .................................................................11
CLUTCH DISC, CLUTCH COVER AND
FLYWHEEL....................................................................12
Components...............................................................12
Removal.....................................................................12
Inspection and Adjustment ........................................12
CLUTCH DISC.........................................................12
CLUTCH COVER .....................................................13
FLYWHEEL INSPECTION ........................................13
Installation..................................................................13
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .........15
Clutch Control System...............................................15
Clutch Master Cylinder (With damper) ......................15
Clutch Operating Cylinder .........................................15
Clutch Disc.................................................................15
Clutch Cover ..............................................................15
Clutch Pedal ..............................................................15
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions
Precautions
I
I
I
I
I
SBR686C
NACL0001
Recommended fluid is brake fluid “DOT 3”.
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
When removing and installing clutch piping, use Tool.
Use new brake fluid to clean or wash all parts of master
cylinder, operating cylinder and clutch damper.
I Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. It will
ruin the rubber parts of the hydraulic system.
WARNING:
After cleaning the clutch disc, wipe it with a dust collector. Do
not use compressed air.
CL-2
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
Special Service Tools
NACL0002
GI
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
MA
Description
ST20670000
(
—
)
Clutch aligning bar
EM
Installing clutch cover and clutch disc
a: 15 mm (0.59 in) dia.
b: 23 mm (0.91 in) dia.
c: 30 mm (1.18 in)
LC
EC
NT405
FE
MT
Commercial Service Tools
Tool name
AT
NACL0003
TF
Description
1 Flare nut crowfoot
2 Torque wrench
Removing and installing clutch piping
a: 10 mm (0.39 in)
PD
AX
NT360
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
CL-3
2
OPERATING CYLINDER PISTON CUP (Damaged)
CL-9
2
3
4
1
ENGINE MOUNTING (Loose)
Refer to EM-60, “REMOVAL”.
5
CLUTCH DISC (Runout is excessive)
CL-12
5
CLUTCH DISC (Lining broken)
CL-12
5
CLUTCH DISC (Dirty or burned)
CL-12
5
2
CLUTCH DISC (Oily)
CL-12
2
CLUTCH DISC (Worn out)
CL-12
2
CLUTCH DISC (Hardened)
CL-12
5
CLUTCH DISC (Lack of spline grease)
CL-13
6
3
DIAPHRAGM SPRING (Damaged)
CL-13
4
PRESSURE PLATE (Distortion)
CL-13
5
FLYWHEEL (Distortion)
CL-13
2
2
2
7
NACL0027
CL-12
NACL0027S01
5
CLUTCH DISC (Out of true)
NACL0027S0101
CL-10
1
RELEASE BEARING (Worn, dirty or damaged)
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
CL-8
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
2
MASTER CYLINDER PISTON CUP (Damaged)
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
CL-7
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the problem. The numbers indicate the priority of the likely
cause of the problem. Check each part in order. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
1
CLUTCH LINE (Air in line)
1
1
CL-6
CLUTCH
Reference page
Clutch grabs/chatters
Clutch pedal spongy
Clutch noisy
SUSPECTED PARTS
(Possible cause)
Symptom
Clutch slips
Clutch does not disengage
CL-4
CLUTCH PEDAL (Free play out of adjustment)
CLUTCH SYSTEM — HYDRAULIC TYPE
Components
Components
NACL0004
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SCL910
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Clutch pedal bracket
Clutch interlock switch
Clutch master cylinder
Fulcrum pin
Bushing
Clevis pin
Clutch pedal
Lock nut
ASCD cancel switch
Pedal stopper bolt
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Snap pin
Assist spring
Clutch disc
Clutch cover
Release bearing
Withdrawal lever
Dust boot
Operating cylinder
Air bleeder
Clutch damper (not serviceable)
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
Clutch hose
Flare nut
Bushing
Copper washer
Snap pin
Washer
Withdrawal lever shaft
Lock spring
Heat insulator
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
CL-5
CLUTCH SYSTEM — HYDRAULIC TYPE
On-Vehicle Inspection and Adjustment
On-Vehicle Inspection and Adjustment
ADJUSTING CLUTCH PEDAL
1.
NACL0036
NACL0036S01
Adjust pedal height with pedal stopper or ASCD cancel switch.
Pedal height “H”:
176 - 186 mm (6.93 - 7.32 in)
SCL689
2.
Adjust pedal free play with master cylinder push rod. Then
tighten lock nut.
Pedal free play (measured at pedal pad) “A”:
9 - 16 mm (0.35 - 0.63 in)
Pedal free play means the following total measured at position
of pedal pad:
I Play due to clevis pin and clevis pin hole in clutch pedal.
3. Make sure that clevis pin can rotate smoothly. If not, readjust
pedal free play with master cylinder push rod.
SCL690
CL-6
CLUTCH SYSTEM — HYDRAULIC TYPE
On-Vehicle Inspection and Adjustment (Cont’d)
— Models with Clutch Interlock System —
I
NACL0036S0101
Adjust clearance “C” shown in the figure while fully depressing
clutch pedal.
Clearance C:
0.3 - 1.0 mm (0.012 - 0.039 in)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
MT
SCL691-B
Air Bleeding Procedure
SCL854
AT
NACL0037
CAUTION:
I Check the clutch fluid level of the reservoir for shortage.
I Keep clutch fluid away from the coating surface of the
body or other parts. If it adheres, remove it quickly and
flush the area with water.
1. Fill up master cylinder reservoir tank with new clutch fluid.
2. Connect a clear vinyl hose to air bleeder.
3. Carefully depress clutch pedal fully and release it. Repeat the
cycle several times at an interval of 2 or 3 seconds.
4. While depressing clutch pedal, open air bleeder.
5. Close air bleeder.
6. Release clutch pedal, and wait for approx. 5 seconds.
7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 until no air is found in clutch fluid.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
CL-7
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
Components
Components
NACL0006
SCL886
Disassembly and Assembly
I
NACL0007
When removing and installing stopper ring, pry it off with
screwdriver while pushing push rod into cylinder.
Inspection
NACL0008
Check the following items, and replace if necessary.
I Rubbing surface of cylinder and piston, for uneven wear, rust
or damage
I Piston with piston cup, for wear or damage
I Return spring, for wear or damage
I Dust cover, for cracks, deformation or damage
I Reservoir, for deformation or damage
CL-8
OPERATING CYLINDER
Components
Components
NACL0009
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
MT
AT
TF
SCL855-B
PD
AX
SU
Inspection
NACL0010
Check the following items, and replace if necessary.
I Rubbing surface of cylinder and piston, for uneven wear, rust
or damage
I Piston with piston cup, for wear or damage
I Piston spring, for wear or damage
I Dust cover, for cracks, deformation or damage
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
CL-9
CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM
Components
Components
NACL0013
SCL911-A
CAUTION:
Keep the clutch disc facing, pressure plate and flywheel free
of oil and grease.
Removal
1.
2.
3.
NACL0029
Remove manual transmission from the vehicle.
Refer to MT-7, “Removal and Installation”.
Remove withdrawal lever from inside clutch housing.
Press wedge collar on clutch cover toward the engine.
SCL857
4.
Using a flat-head screwdriver or the like, remove release bearing from clutch cover.
SCL858
CL-10
CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM
Inspection
Inspection
NACL0030
Check the following items, and replace the part, if necessary.
I Release bearing seizure, damages, and rough rotation.
I Abnormal wear on contact surfaces of release bearing or withdrawal lever.
I Dust cover cracks.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT148A
Installation
EC
NACL0031
1.
SCL859
Apply clutch sleeve grease to the areas shown by the arrows
in the figure.
2. Install the release bearing to main drive shaft.
3. Install withdrawal lever to fork support, and secure it with withdrawal lever shaft, washer, and snap pin.
4. Operate withdrawal lever to check sliding parts for smooth
movement.
CAUTION:
Remove excessive grease coming-out.
5. Install manual transmission.
Refer to MT-7, “Removal and Installation”.
FE
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
Lubrication
I
I
NACL0016
Apply recommended grease to contact surface and rubbing
surface.
Too much lubricant might damage clutch disc facing.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SCL920
SC
EL
IDX
CL-11
CLUTCH DISC, CLUTCH COVER AND FLYWHEEL
Components
Components
NACL0032
SCL861
Removal
NACL0033
1.
Remove manual transmission from the vehicle.
Refer to MT-7, “Removal and Installation”.
2. Remove release bearing from clutch cover.
3. Loosen mounting bolts on the clutch cover evenly, and remove
clutch cover and clutch disc.
CAUTION:
Do not hold the wedge collar when handling the clutch cover.
SCL862
Inspection and Adjustment
CLUTCH DISC
NACL0019
NACL0019S01
Check the following items, and replace if necessary.
I Clutch disc, for burns, discoloration, oil or grease leakage
I Clutch disc, for wear of facing
Wear limit of facing surface to rivet head:
0.3 mm (0.012 in)
SCL229
I
Clutch disc, for backlash of spline and runout of facing
Maximum backlash of spline (at outer edge of disc):
1.0 mm (0.039 in)
Runout limit:
Less than 0.7 mm (0.028 in)
Distance of runout check point (from hub center):
120 mm (4.72 in)
SCL221
CL-12
CLUTCH DISC, CLUTCH COVER AND FLYWHEEL
Inspection and Adjustment (Cont’d)
CLUTCH COVER
I
SCL863
NACL0019S04
Check parts (wedge collar and wiring) contacting the release
bearing. If any worn or damaged parts are found, replace the
clutch cover as an assembly.
I Check release lever plate for looseness. If necessary, replace
clutch cover as an assembly.
I Check thrust ring of the clutch cover for wear or bending. If
necessary, replace clutch cover as an assembly.
I If seizure mark or discoloration is found with the mating surfaces between pressure plate and clutch disc of clutch cover,
repair them with sand-paper. If surfaces are distorted or
damaged, replace clutch cover as an assembly.
REFERENCE:
I If thrust ring is worn, chattering noise is heard when the
riveted area is lightly hit with a hammer.
I If thrust ring is bent, jangling noise is heard when cover
is swung up and down.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
MT
FLYWHEEL INSPECTION
AT
NACL0019S03
CAUTION:
Do not allow any magnetic materials to contact the ring gear
teeth.
I Inspect contact surface of flywheel for slight burns or discoloration. Clean flywheel with emery paper.
I Check flywheel runout.
Maximum allowable runout:
Refer to EM-73, “Flywheel/Drive plate Runout”.
PD
AX
SU
AEM100
Installation
1.
SCL864
TF
NACL0035
Apply specified Nissan clutch grease to clutch disc and spline
of main drive shaft.
CAUTION:
Always apply grease. If no grease is applied, it may cause
abnormal noise, insufficient disengagement, or damage to the
clutch. Also, always remove excessive grease. If grease is
applied excessively, it may cause sliding or juddering.
2. Install clutch disc and clutch cover. Tighten mounting bolts
temporarily, and install clutch aligning bar (SST).
3. Tighten clutch cover mounting bolts evenly in the order shown
in the figure by two steps.
1st step:
: 10 - 19 N·m (1.0 - 2.0 kg-m, 8 - 14 ft-lb)
Final step:
: 35 - 44 N·m (3.5 - 4.5 kg-m, 26 - 32 ft-lb)
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
CL-13
CLUTCH DISC, CLUTCH COVER AND FLYWHEEL
Installation (Cont’d)
4.
Check that the wire ring of clutch cover is installed securely to
wedge collar pawls.
5. Turn flywheel so that the wire ring opening is positioned as
shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Always perform alignment of the wire ring opening. If transmission is installed without alignment, it may cause clutch
disengagement failure or clutch pedal operation failure.
6. Install manual transmission.
Refer to MT-7, “Removal and Installation”.
SCL865
CL-14
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Clutch Control System
Clutch Control System
Type of clutch control
NACL0028
GI
Hydraulic
Clutch Master Cylinder (With damper)
Inner diameter
MA
NACL0021
EM
15.87 mm (5/8 in)
Clutch Operating Cylinder
Inner diameter
NACL0022
LC
19.05 mm (3/4 in)
Clutch Disc
NACL0023
EC
Unit: mm (in)
Model
250 × 160 × 3.5
(9.84 × 6.30 × 0.138)
Facing size
(Outer dia. x inner dia. x thickness)
Thickness of disc assembly
FE
250
7.9 - 8.3 (0.311 - 0.327)
with 7,355 N (750 kg, 1,654 lb)
With load
Wear limit of facing surface to rivet head
0.3 (0.012)
Runout limit of facing
0.7 (0.028)
Distance of runout check point (from hub center)
120 (4.72)
Maximum backlash of spline (at outer edge of disc)
1.0 (0.039)
MT
AT
TF
Clutch Cover
NACL0024
Unit: mm (in)
Model
PD
250
Set-load
7,355 N (750 kg, 1,654 lb)
Diaphragm spring height
48.2 - 50.2 (1.898 - 1.976)
Uneven limit of diaphragm spring toe height
AX
0.6 (0.024)
SU
Clutch Pedal
NACL0025
Unit: mm (in)
Pedal height “H”*
BR
176 - 186 (6.93 - 7.32)
Pedal free play (at pedal pad)
9 - 16 (0.35 - 0.63)
Clearance between pedal stopper rubber and threaded end of ASCD
switch
0.3 - 1.0 (0.012 - 0.039)
Clearance between pedal stopper rubber and threaded end of clutch
interlock switch (when depressing clutch pedal fully.)
0.3 - 1.0 (0.012 - 0.039)
*: Measured from surface of dash lower panel to pedal pad.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
CL-15
NOTES
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION
EL
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS ...............................................................5
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR
BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″...............5
Precautions for SRS ″AIR BAG″ and ″SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER″ Service...............................5
Precautions for Trouble Diagnosis ..............................5
Precautions for Harness Repair ..................................6
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis.....................6
HARNESS CONNECTOR................................................7
Description ...................................................................7
STANDARDIZED RELAY................................................9
Description ...................................................................9
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING.........................................11
Schematic ..................................................................11
Wiring Diagram - POWER - ......................................12
Inspection...................................................................18
GROUND........................................................................19
Ground Distribution....................................................19
COMBINATION SWITCH ..............................................32
Check.........................................................................32
Replacement..............................................................33
STEERING SWITCH......................................................34
Check.........................................................................34
HEADLAMP (FOR USA) ...............................................35
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location .....................................................................35
System Description....................................................35
Schematic ..................................................................38
Wiring Diagram - H/LAMP -.......................................39
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure............................43
CONSULT-II Application Items ..................................44
Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................44
Bulb Replacement .....................................................47
Aiming Adjustment .....................................................47
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT
SYSTEM - ......................................................................50
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location .....................................................................50
System Description....................................................50
Schematic ..................................................................54
Wiring Diagram - DTRL -...........................................55
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure............................60
CONSULT-II Application Items ..................................60
Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................60
Bulb Replacement .....................................................65
Aiming Adjustment .....................................................65
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS .....................66
System Description....................................................66
Schematic ..................................................................68
Wiring Diagram - TAIL/L -..........................................69
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure............................73
CONSULT-II Application Items ..................................74
Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................74
STOP LAMP ..................................................................76
Wiring Diagram - STOP/L - .......................................76
BACK-UP LAMP............................................................78
Wiring Diagram - BACK/L - .......................................78
FRONT FOG LAMP.......................................................79
System Description....................................................79
Wiring Diagram - F/FOG - .........................................80
Aiming Adjustment .....................................................82
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS .....83
System Description....................................................83
Wiring Diagram - TURN - ..........................................85
Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................87
Electrical Components Inspection .............................87
ILLUMINATION..............................................................88
System Description....................................................88
Schematic ..................................................................90
Wiring Diagram - ILL - ...............................................91
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND
LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS ...........................................97
System Description....................................................97
Schematic ..................................................................99
Wiring Diagram - INT/L - .........................................100
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..........................105
CONSULT-II Application Items ................................106
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer.............108
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
CONTENTS
METERS AND GAUGES.............................................123
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location ...................................................................123
System Description..................................................123
Combination Meter ..................................................125
Schematic ................................................................127
Wiring Diagram - METER - .....................................128
Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter
Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode ........................129
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................130
Electrical Components Inspection ...........................134
COMPASS AND THERMOMETER .............................135
System Description..................................................135
Wiring Diagram - COMPAS -...................................136
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................137
Calibration Procedure for Compass ........................138
WARNING LAMPS ......................................................139
Schematic ................................................................139
Wiring Diagram - WARN - .......................................140
Fuel Warning Lamp Sensor Check .........................148
Electrical Components Inspection ...........................148
WARNING CHIME .......................................................149
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location ...................................................................149
System Description..................................................149
Wiring Diagram - CHIME - ......................................151
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..........................153
CONSULT-II Application Items ................................154
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................155
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER ..................................163
System Description..................................................163
Wiring Diagram - WIPER - ......................................165
Removal and Installation .........................................166
Washer Nozzle Adjustment .....................................167
Washer Tube Layout ...............................................167
REAR WIPER AND WASHER ....................................168
System Description..................................................168
Wiring Diagram - WIP/R -........................................170
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................172
Removal and Installation .........................................172
Washer Nozzle Adjustment .....................................173
Washer Tube Layout ...............................................173
Check Valve.............................................................173
HORN ...........................................................................174
Wiring Diagram - HORN - .......................................174
CIGARETTE LIGHTER................................................175
Wiring Diagram - CIGAR -.......................................175
CLOCK.........................................................................176
Wiring Diagram - CLOCK -......................................176
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER.....................................177
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location ...................................................................177
(Cont’d)
System Description..................................................177
Wiring Diagram - DEF -...........................................179
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..........................183
CONSULT-II Application Items ................................184
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................185
Electrical Components Inspection ...........................188
Filament Check........................................................189
Filament Repair .......................................................190
AUDIO ..........................................................................191
System Description..................................................191
Wiring Diagram - AUDIO -/Base System ................192
Schematic/BOSE System ........................................194
Wiring Diagram - AUDIO -/BOSE System...............195
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................200
Inspection.................................................................201
Audio Unit Removal and Installation .......................201
Wiring Diagram - REMOTE -...................................202
AUDIO ANTENNA .......................................................203
System Description..................................................203
Wiring Diagram - P/ANT - .......................................204
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................205
Location of Antenna.................................................205
Antenna Rod Replacement .....................................205
POWER SUNROOF.....................................................207
System Description..................................................207
Wiring Diagram - SROOF - .....................................208
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..........................210
CONSULT-II Application Items ................................211
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................211
DOOR MIRROR ...........................................................213
Wiring Diagram - MIRROR - ...................................213
GLASS HATCH OPENER ...........................................214
Wiring Diagram - T&FLID -......................................214
POWER SEAT .............................................................215
Wiring Diagram - SEAT - .........................................215
HEATED SEAT ............................................................217
Wiring Diagram - HSEAT - ......................................217
Seatback Heating Unit.............................................220
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER ............................221
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location ...................................................................221
System Description..................................................222
Schematic ................................................................225
Wiring Diagram - AUT/DP - .....................................226
On Board Diagnosis ................................................231
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................233
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) ...256
System Description..................................................256
POWER WINDOW .......................................................257
System Description..................................................257
Schematic ................................................................260
Wiring Diagram - WINDOW - ..................................261
EL-2
CONTENTS
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..........................266
CONSULT-II Application Items ................................267
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................267
POWER DOOR LOCK.................................................276
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location ...................................................................276
System Description..................................................276
Schematic ................................................................277
Wiring Diagram - D/LOCK -.....................................278
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..........................284
CONSULT-II Application Items ................................285
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................286
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM.......................299
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location ...................................................................299
System Description..................................................299
Schematic ................................................................303
Wiring Diagram - KEYLESS -..................................304
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..........................308
CONSULT-II Application Items ................................309
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................310
ID Code Entry Procedure ........................................323
Keyfob Battery Replacement...................................327
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING)
SYSTEM.......................................................................328
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location ...................................................................328
System Description..................................................329
Schematic ................................................................334
Wiring Diagram - VEHSEC - ...................................336
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..........................342
CONSULT-II Application Item ..................................343
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................344
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT .......................362
Description ...............................................................362
CONSULT-II .............................................................364
Schematic ................................................................366
Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table ........368
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER..................371
Wiring Diagram - TRNSCV - ...................................371
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................372
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
- NATS) ........................................................................375
Component Parts and Harness Connetor
Location ...................................................................375
System Description..................................................376
System Composition................................................376
Wiring Diagram - NATS -.........................................377
CONSULT-II .............................................................378
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................381
How to Replace NVIS (NATS) IMMU......................394
NAVIGATION SYSTEM ...............................................395
(Cont’d)
Component Parts Location ......................................395
System Description..................................................396
Schematic ................................................................403
Wiring Diagram - NAVI -..........................................404
Self-diagnosis Mode ................................................407
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode ...............................410
Setting Mode............................................................420
Trouble diagnoses ...................................................428
This Condition is Not Abnormal...............................434
Program Loading .....................................................443
Initialization ..............................................................444
CAN COMMUNICATION .............................................447
System Description..................................................447
CAN Communication Unit........................................447
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)..............................................452
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location ...................................................................452
System Description..................................................452
Wiring Diagram - CAN - ..........................................453
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................455
Component Inspection.............................................475
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)..............................................476
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location ...................................................................476
System Description..................................................476
Wiring Diagram - CAN - ..........................................477
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................479
Component Inspection.............................................497
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)..............................................498
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location ...................................................................498
System Description..................................................498
Wiring Diagram - CAN - ..........................................499
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................500
Component Inspection.............................................510
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)..............................................511
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location ...................................................................511
System Description..................................................511
Wiring Diagram - CAN - ..........................................512
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................513
Component Inspection.............................................516
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION...............................517
Engine Compartment...............................................517
Passenger Compartment.........................................518
HARNESS LAYOUT ....................................................520
How to Read Harness Layout .................................520
Outline......................................................................521
Main Harness...........................................................522
Engine Room Harness ............................................524
Engine Control Harness ..........................................526
Body Harness LH ....................................................528
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-3
CONTENTS
Body Harness RH....................................................529
Back Door Harness .................................................530
Engine and Transmission Harness..........................531
Room Lamp Harness...............................................532
Air Bag Harness ......................................................533
Front Door Harness .................................................534
(Cont’d)
Rear Door Harness..................................................535
BULB SPECIFICATIONS ............................................536
Headlamp.................................................................536
Exterior Lamp ..........................................................536
Interior Lamp............................................................536
WIRING DIAGRAM CODES (CELL CODES).............537
EL-4
PRECAUTIONS
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR
BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
GI
NAEL0001
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL R50 is as follows:
쐌 For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
쐌 For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of side air bag module (located in the outer side of front seat),
side curtain air bag module (locating in the headliner side of front and rear seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring harness, warning lamp (one
of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
WARNING:
쐌 To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
쐌 Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.
쐌 Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connector (and by yellow harness protector or yellow insulation tape before the harness connectors).
Precautions for SRS “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” Service
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
NAEL0485
Do not use electrical test equipment to check SRS circuits unless instructed to in this Service Manual.
Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch “OFF”, disconnect battery ground cable and wait at least 3
minutes.
For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag and seat belt
pre-tensioner to deploy. Therefore, do not work on any SRS connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes
have passed.
Diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with their arrow marks “g” pointing towards the front of
the vehicle for proper operation. Also check diagnosis sensor unit for cracks, deformities or rust before
installation and replace as required.
The spiral cable must be aligned with the neutral position since its rotations are limited. Do not attempt to
turn steering wheel or column after removal of steering gear.
Handle air bag module carefully. Always place driver and passenger air bag modules with the pad side
facing upward and side air bag module standing with the stud bolt side setting bottom.
Conduct self-diagnosis to check entire SRS for proper function after replacing any components.
After air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly should be replaced if damaged.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
Precautions for Trouble Diagnosis
CAN SYSTEM
쐌
쐌
NAEL0458
HA
NAEL0458S01
Do not apply voltage of 7.0V or higher to the measurement
terminals.
Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0V or less.
SC
IDX
EL-5
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Harness Repair
Precautions for Harness Repair
CAN SYSTEM
NAEL0459
NAEL0459S01
쐌
Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted
line must be within 110 mm (4.33 in)]
쐌
Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts.
(The spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of twisted line will be lost.)
PKIA0306E
PKIA0307E
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
쐌 GI-11, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”
쐌 EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” for power distribution circuit
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
쐌 GI-35, “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”
쐌 GI-24, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”
Check for any Service bulletins before servicing the vehicle.
EL-6
NAEL0002
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
쐌
쐌
NAEL0003
GI
NAEL0003S01
The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the
illustration below.
Refer to the next page for description of the slide-locking type connector.
CAUTION:
Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL769D
IDX
EL-7
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description (Cont’d)
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
쐌
=NAEL0003S02
A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those
related to OBD.
쐌 The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection.
쐌 The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below.
CAUTION:
쐌 Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
쐌 Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
SEL769V
EL-8
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
Description
NAEL0004
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS
GI
NAEL0004S01
Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
1M
1 Make
2M
2 Make
1T
1 Transfer
1M·1B
1 Make 1 Break
SEL881H
AT
NAEL0004S02
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL882H
HA
SC
IDX
EL-9
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description (Cont’d)
GEL264
EL-10
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Schematic
Schematic
NAEL0247
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL410R
EL-11
IDX
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Wiring Diagram — POWER —
Wiring Diagram — POWER —
BATTERY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ANY POSITION
NAEL0248
NAEL0248S01
MEL940P
EL-12
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Wiring Diagram — POWER — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL941P
IDX
EL-13
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Wiring Diagram — POWER — (Cont’d)
MEL942P
EL-14
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Wiring Diagram — POWER — (Cont’d)
ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN “ACC” OR “ON”
NAEL0248S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL943P
EL-15
IDX
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Wiring Diagram — POWER — (Cont’d)
IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN “ON” AND/OR “START”
NAEL0248S03
MEL411R
EL-16
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Wiring Diagram — POWER — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL412R
IDX
EL-17
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Inspection
Inspection
FUSE
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
NAEL0249
NAEL0249S01
If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem
before installing new fuse.
Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than
specified rating.
Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse
holder properly.
Remove fuse for “ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)” if vehicle is
not used for a long period of time.
CEL083
FUSIBLE LINK
MEL944F
NAEL0249S02
A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or
by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit
tester or test lamp.
CAUTION:
쐌 If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit
(power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted.
In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of
problem.
쐌 Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. Important: Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness,
vinyl or rubber parts.
CIRCUIT BREAKER (PTC THERMISTOR TYPE)
NAEL0249S03
The PTC thermister generates heat in response to current flow.
The temperature (and resistance) of the thermister element varies
with current flow. Excessive current flow will cause the element’s
temperature to rise. When the temperature reaches a specified
level, the electrical resistance will rise sharply to control the circuit
current.
Reduced current flow will cause the element to cool. Resistance
falls accordingly and normal circuit current flow is allowed to
resume.
SEL109W
EL-18
GROUND
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution
MAIN HARNESS
NAEL0250
GI
NAEL0250S01
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL074Q
EL-19
IDX
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
MEL075Q
EL-20
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL076Q
IDX
EL-21
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
MEL087Q
EL-22
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS
NAEL0250S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL077Q
EL-23
IDX
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
MEL078Q
EL-24
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS
NAEL0250S03
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL080Q
EL-25
IDX
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
BODY HARNESS RH
NAEL0250S04
MEL081Q
EL-26
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
MEL082Q
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-27
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
BODY HARNESS LH
NAEL0250S05
MEL083Q
EL-28
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL911N
IDX
EL-29
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
MEL084Q
EL-30
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
BODY HARNESS
=NAEL0250S06
GI
MA
EM
LC
MEL152M
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-31
COMBINATION SWITCH
Check
Check
NAEL0251
MEL070Q
EL-32
COMBINATION SWITCH
Replacement
Replacement
NAEL0252
For removal and installation of spiral cable, refer to RS-20,
“Installation — Air Bag Module and Spiral Cable”.
쐌 Each switch can be replaced without removing combination
switch base.
GI
MA
EM
LC
MEL912O
쐌
To remove combination switch base, remove base attaching
screw.
EC
FE
CL
MT
MEL326G
쐌
Before installing the steering wheel, align the steering wheel
guide pins with the screws which secure the combination
switch as shown in the left figure.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL151V
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-33
STEERING SWITCH
Check
Check
NAEL0253
MEL071Q
EL-34
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location
GI
NAEL0254
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEL668Y
System Description
AX
NAEL0255
The headlamp operation is controlled by the lighting switch which is built into the combination switch and smart
entrance control unit. And the headlamp battery saver system is controlled by the smart entrance control unit.
OUTLINE
SU
NAEL0255S01
Power is supplied at all times
쐌 to headlamp LH relay terminals 1 and 3
쐌 through 15A fuse (No. 60, located in the fuse and fusible link box), and
쐌 to headlamp RH relay terminals 1 and 3
쐌 through 15A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and fusible link box), and
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 49
쐌 through 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 27
쐌 through 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 26
쐌 through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
Ground is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
POWER SUPPLY TO LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM
When lighting switch is in 2ND or PASS position, ground is supplied
쐌 to headlamp relay (LH and RH) terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 21 and 59
EL-35
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
NAEL0255S02
IDX
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
System Description (Cont’d)
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminals 22 and 60,
쐌 from lighting switch terminal 12
Headlamp relays (LH and RH) are energized and then power is supplied to headlamps (LH and RH).
LOW BEAM OPERATION
NAEL0255S03
When the lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position and placed in LOW (“B”) position, power is supplied
쐌 from terminal 5 of each headlamp relay
쐌 to terminal 3 of each headlamp
Ground is supplied
쐌 to headlamp LH terminal 2
쐌 through lighting switch terminals 7 and 5
쐌 through body grounds E13 and E41, and
쐌 to headlamp RH terminal 2
쐌 through lighting switch terminal 10 and 8
쐌 through body grounds E13 and E41.
With power and ground supplied, the headlamp(s) will illuminate.
HIGH BEAM OPERATION/FLASH-TO-PASS OPERATION
NAEL0255S04
When the lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position and placed in HIGH (“A”) position or PASS (“C”) position,
power is supplied
쐌 from terminal 5 of each headlamp relay
쐌 to terminal 3 of each headlamp, and
쐌 to combination meter terminal 26 for the HIGH BEAM indicator.
Ground is supplied
쐌 to headlamp LH terminal 1, and
쐌 to combination meter terminal 27 for the HIGH BEAM indicator
쐌 through lighting switch terminals 6 and 5
쐌 through body grounds E13 and E41, and
쐌 to headlamp RH terminal 1
쐌 through lighting switch terminals 9 and 8
쐌 through body grounds E13 and E41.
With power and ground supplied, the high beams and the high beam indicator illuminate.
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
Except for Auto Light Control Operation
NAEL0255S05
NAEL0255S0501
Headlamps will remain on for a short while after the ignition switch is turned from ON (or ACC) to OFF.
Continuity between terminals 21 and 22, and between terminals 59 and 60 of smart entrance control unit will
be disturbed after 5 minutes, then the headlamps will be turned off.
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 2ND after headlamps are turned to off by the exterior lamp
battery saver control, ground is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11, and then,
쐌 to headlamp LH and RH relays terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 21 and 59,
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminals 22 and 60 and
쐌 through lighting switch terminal 12.
Then headlamps illuminate again.
Auto light control operation
NAEL0255S0502
While the headlamps are turned ON by “AUTO” operation, the exterior lamp battery saver is activated for 5
minutes when the ignition switch is turned from ON (or ACC) to OFF, and either LH or RH front door switch
is opened.
The smart entrance control unit controls exterior lamp battery saver activation as follows:
쐌 When the door switch signal changes from ON to OFF while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated,
the operation is discontinued, and restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the headlamps will be turned
off.
쐌 When the door switch signal changes from OFF to ON while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated,
the operation discontinued, restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the headlamps will be turned off.
EL-36
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
System Description (Cont’d)
쐌
When the one of four door switch signals changes from OFF to ON while the exterior lamp battery saver
is activated, the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 5 minutes, then the headlamps will be
turned off.
쐌 When all the door switch ON signals are input while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated, the saver
is discontinued and restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the headlamps will be turned off.
Exterior lamp battery saver control time can be changed using “WORK SUPPORT” mode in “HEADLAMP”.
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 2ND after headlamps are turned to off by the exterior lamp
battery saver control, ground is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11, and then,
쐌 to headlamp LH and RH relays terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 21 and 59,
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminals 22 and 60 and
쐌 through lighting switch terminal 12.
Then headlamps illuminate again.
AUTO LIGHT OPERATION
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
NAEL0255S06
The auto light control system has an auto light sensor inside instrument mask that detects outside brightness.
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 23
쐌 from lighting switch terminal 42.
When ignition switch is turned to ″ON″ or “START” position and
쐌 Outside brightness is darker than prescribed level.
After 3 seconds delay, outside brightness becomes darker than prescribed level.
Ground is supplied
쐌 to headlamp relay LH and RH terminals 2
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminals 21, 59 and 43, 64.
Then both headlamp relays and tail lamp relay are energized, headlamps (low or high) and tail lamps are illuminated according to switch position.
Auto light operation allows headlamps and tail lamps to go off when
쐌 Outside brightness is brighter than prescribed level, or
쐌 After 5 seconds delay, outside brightness is brighter than prescribed level.
쐌 Ignition switch is turned to “OFF” position. (Headlamp will be turned OFF by exterior lamp battery saver
control system. Refer to EL-36.)
NOTE:
The delay time changes (maximum of 20 seconds) as the outside brightness changes.
For parking license and tail lamp auto operation, refer to “PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS” (EL-66).
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
NAEL0255S07
The vehicle security system will flash the high beams if the system is triggered. Refer to “VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM” (EL-331).
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-37
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Schematic
Schematic
NAEL0256
MEL946P
EL-38
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —
NAEL0257
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL947P
EL-39
IDX
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP — (Cont’d)
MEL948P
EL-40
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL949P
IDX
EL-41
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP — (Cont’d)
MEL950P
EL-42
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
“HEADLAMP”
1.
2.
NAEL0258
GI
NAEL0258S01
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to
the data link connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEL670Y
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SKIA3098E
5.
Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.
If “SMART ENTRANCE” is not indicated, go to GI-41, “CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit”.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL669Y
6.
Touch “HEADLAMP”.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL751Y
7.
Select diagnosis mode.
“DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST” and “WORK SUPPORT”
are available.
HA
SC
IDX
SEL400Y
EL-43
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
CONSULT-II Application Items
CONSULT-II Application Items
“HEAD LAMP”
Data Monitor
NAEL0453
NAEL0453S01
NAEL0453S0101
Monitored Item
Description
IGN ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ON position.
ACC ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position.
AUTO LIGT SW
Displays status of the lighting switch as judged from the lighting switch signal.
(AUTO position: ON/Other than AUTO position: OFF)
AUTO LIGT SENS
Displays “Illumination outside of the vehicle (close to 5V when light/close to 0V when dark)” as
judged from the auto light sensor signal.
LIGHT SW 1ST
Displays status of the lighting switch as judged from the lighting switch signal.
(1ST or 2ND position: ON/Other than 1ST and 2ND position: OFF)
LIGHT SW 2ND
Displays status of the lighting switch as judged from the lighting switch signal.
(2ND position: ON/Other than 2ND position: OFF)
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.
DOOR SW-AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door switch RH.
DOOR SW-RR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch.
Active Test
NAEL0453S0102
Test Item
Description
TAIL LAMP
Tail lamp relay can be operated by on-off operation of the tail lamp.
HEAD LAMP
Headlamp relay can be operated by on-off operation of the headlamp.
AUTO LIGHT
Night time dimming signal can be operated by on-off operation.
Work Support
NAEL0453S0103
Work Item
Description
AUTO LIGHT SET
Auto light sensitivity can be changed in this mode. Sensitivity can be adjusted in four modes.
쐌 NORMAL/MODE 2 (Sensitive)/MODE 3 (Desensitized)/MODE 4 (Insensitive)
BATTERY SAVER SET
Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed in this mode. Selects exterior lamp
battery saver control mode between two modes.
쐌 MODE 1 (ON)/MODE 2 (OFF)
ILL DELAY SET
Exterior lamp battery saver control time can be changed in this mode. Selects exterior lamp battery saver control time among eight modes.
쐌 MODE 1 (45 sec.)/MODE 2 (OFF)/MODE 3 (30 sec.)/MODE 4 (60 sec.)/ MODE 5 (90 sec.)/
MODE 6 (120 sec.)/MODE 7 (150 sec.)/MODE 8 (180 sec.)
Trouble Diagnoses
Symptom
Neither headlamp operates.
Possible cause
1.
2.
3.
4.
7.5A fuse
Headlamp relay circuit
Lighting switch
Smart entrance control unit
EL-44
NAEL0260
Repair order
1. Check 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block
(J/B)].
Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal
49 of smart entrance control unit.
2. Check between smart entrance control unit and
headlamp relays (LH and RH).
3. Check Lighting switch.
4. Check smart entrance control unit. (EL-368)
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Symptom
Headlamp LH (low and high beam)
does not operate, but headlamp
RH (low and high beam) does
operate.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Possible cause
Repair order
15A fuse
Headlamp LH relay
Headlamp LH relay circuit
Lighting switch ground circuit
1. Check 15A fuse (No. 60, located in fusible link and
fuse box). Verify battery positive voltage is present
at terminals 1 and 3 of headlamp LH relay.
2. Check headlamp LH relay.
3. Check the following.
쐌 Harness between headlamp LH relay and headlamp
LH
쐌 Harness between headlamp LH relay and smart
entrance control unit
4. Check harness between lighting switch and ground.
Headlamp RH (low and high beam) 1. 15A fuse
does not operate, but headlamp LH 2. Headlamp RH relay
(low and high beam) does operate. 3. Headlamp RH relay circuit
LH high beam does not operate,
but LH low beam operates.
1. Bulb
2. Open in the LH high beam circuit
3. Lighting switch
1. Check 15A fuse (No. 59, located in fusible link and
fuse box). Verify battery positive voltage is present
at terminals 1 and 3 of headlamp RH relay.
2. Check headlamp RH relay.
3. Check the following.
쐌 Harness between headlamp RH relay and headlamp
RH
쐌 Harness between headlamp RH relay and smart
entrance control unit
4. Check harness between lighting switch and ground.
1. Check bulb.
2. Check harness between headlamp LH and lighting
switch for open circuit.
3. Check lighting switch.
LH low beam does not operate, but 1. Bulb
LH high beam operates.
2. Open in LH low beam circuit
3. Lighting switch
1. Check bulb.
2. Check harness between headlamp LH and lighting
switch for open circuit.
3. Check lighting switch.
RH high beam does not operate,
but RH low beam operates.
1. Bulb
2. Open in the RH high beam circuit
3. Lighting switch
1. Check bulb.
2. Check harness between headlamp RH and lighting
switch for open circuit.
3. Check lighting switch.
1. Bulb
2. Open in RH low beam circuit
3. Lighting switch
1. Check bulb.
2. Check harness between headlamp RH and lighting
switch for open circuit.
3. Check lighting switch.
RH low beam does not operate,
but RH high beam operates.
High beam indicator does not work. 1. Bulb
2. Open in high beam circuit
Battery saver control does not
operate properly.
1. Door switch LH or RH circuit
2. Lighting switch circuit
3. Smart entrance control unit
1. Check bulb in combination meter.
2. Check the following.
a. Harness between headlamp LH relay and combination meter for an open circuit
b. Harness between high beam indicator and lighting
switch
1. Check the following.
a. Harness between smart entrance control unit and
LH or RH door switch for open or short circuit.
b. LH or RH door switch ground circuit.
c. LH or RH door switch.
2. Check the following.
a. Harness between smart entrance control unit terminals 20 or 58 and lighting switch terminal 11 for
open or short circuit
b. Harness between lighting switch terminal 5 and
ground
c. Lighting switch
3. Check smart entrance control unit. (EL-368)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-45
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Symptom
Possible cause
Repair order
When outside is dark, neither tail
1. 7.5A fuse
lamp nor headlamp turn on by auto 2. Lighting switch “AUTO” check
light operation.
3. Lighting switch circuit check
4. Lighting switch ground circuit
check
5. Auto light sensor check
6. Auto light sensor circuit check
1. Check 7.5A fuse [NO. 11 located in fuse block (J/B)].
Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal
27 of smart entrance control unit.
2. Check lighting switch (AUTO) input signal with
“CONSULT-II” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
When lighting switch is in AUTO:
AUTO LIGHT SWITCH ON
When lighting switch is in OFF:
AUTO LIGHT SWITCH OFF
3. Check harness for open or short between smart
entrance control unit and lighting switch.
4. Check harness for lighting switch and ground.
5. Check auto light sensor input signal.
(With CONSULT-II)
See “AUTO LIGHT SENSOR” in DATA MONITOR
mode. When auto light sensor in stuck by light:
More than 3V
When auto light sensor is not stuck by light:
Approx. 0.5V
(Without CONSULT-II)
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit
terminal 7 and ground. Refer to smart entrance control unit. (EL-368)
6. Check the following.
a. Harness for open or short between smart entrance
control unit terminal 8 and auto light sensor terminal
1
b. Harness for open or short between smart entrance
control unit terminal 7 and auto light sensor terminal
2
c. Harness for open or short between smart entrance
control unit terminal 9 and auto light sensor terminal
3
When outside is dark, tail lamp
turns on but headlamp does not
turn on by auto light operation.
Auto light output check
Check auto light output.
(With CONSULT-II)
See “HEADLAMP” and “TAIL LAMP” in ACTIVE TEST
mode, and headlamp switch to AUTO position.
Headlamp and tail lamp should turn on.
(Without CONSULT-II)
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit terminals 19, 21, 57, 59 and ground. Refer to smart
entrance control unit. (EL-368)
When outside is dark, headlamp
Auto light output check
turns on but tail lamp does not turn
on by auto light operation.
Check auto light output.
(With CONSULT-II)
See “HEADLAMP” and “TAIL LAMP” in ACTIVE TEST
mode, and headlamp switch to AUTO position.
Headlamp and tail lamp should turn on.
(Without CONSULT-II)
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit terminals 19, 21, 57, 59 and ground. Refer to smart
entrance control unit. (EL-368)
Light does not turn off when ignition key switch is turned to “OFF”
(exterior lamp battery saver control
is canceled).
1. 7.5A fuse
2. IGN switch circuit
1. Check 7.5A fuse [NO. 11 located in fuse block (J/B)].
Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal
27 of smart entrance control unit.
2. Check harness for open or short between smart
entrance control unit and fuse.
EL-46
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Symptom
When outside is bright, neither tail
lamps nor headlamps turn off by
auto light operation.
Possible cause
Auto light sensor check
GI
Repair order
Check auto light sensor input signal.
(With CONSULT-II)
See “AUTO LIGHT SENSOR” in DATA MONITOR
mode. When auto light sensor in stuck by light:
More than 3V
When auto light sensor is not stuck by light:
Approx. 0.5V
(Without CONSULT-II)
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit terminal 7 (W/G) and ground. Refer to smart entrance
control unit. (EL-368)
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
Bulb Replacement
AT
NAEL0261
The headlamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen bulb. The bulb can be replaced from the engine compartment side without removing the headlamp body.
쐌 Grasp only the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never
touch the glass envelope.
1. Disconnect the battery cable.
2. Disconnect the harness connector from the back side of the
bulb.
3. Pull off the rubber cap.
4. Remove the headlamp bulb carefully. Do not shake or rotate
the bulb when removing it.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Do not leave headlamp reflector without bulb for a long period
of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering headlamp body
may affect the performance of the headlamp. Remove headlamp bulb from the headlamp reflector just before a replacement bulb is installed.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL107X
Aiming Adjustment
NAEL0262
Before performing aiming adjustment, check the following.
For details, refer to the regulations in your own country.
1) Keep all tires inflated to correct pressures.
2) Place vehicle flat surface.
3) See that there is no-load in vehicle (coolant, engine oil filled up
to correct level and full fuel tank) other than the driver (or
equivalent weight placed in driver’s position).
HA
SC
IDX
EL-47
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Aiming Adjustment (Cont’d)
LOW BEAM
NAEL0262S01
SEL671Y
1.
2.
3.
쐌
Remove aiming adjusting screw cap.
Turn headlamp low beam on.
Use adjusting screws to perform aiming adjustment.
First tighten the adjusting screw all the way and then
make adjustment by loosening the screw.
MEL222P
EL-48
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Aiming Adjustment (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEL376X
If the vehicle front body has been repaired and/or the headlamp
assembly has been replaced, check aiming. Use the aiming chart
shown in the figure.
쐌 Basic illuminating area for adjustment should be within
the range shown on the aiming chart. Adjust headlamps
accordingly.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-49
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location
NAEL0263
SEL668Y
System Description
NAEL0264
The headlamp system for Canada vehicles contains a daytime light control unit that activates the high beam
headlamps at approximately half illumination whenever the engine is running. If the parking brake is applied
before the engine is started the daytime lights will not be illuminated. The daytime lights will illuminate once
the parking brake is released. Thereafter, the daytime lights will continue to operate when the parking brake
is applied.
And battery saver system is controlled by the smart entrance control unit.
Power is supplied at all times
쐌 to headlamp LH relay terminals 1 and 3
쐌 through 15A fuse (No. 60, located in the fuse and fusible link box), and
쐌 to headlamp RH relay terminals 1 and 3
쐌 through 15A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and fusible link box), and
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 49
쐌 through 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
Ground is supplied
쐌 to daytime light control unit terminal 16 and
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is also supplied
쐌 to daytime light control unit terminal 3, and
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 27
쐌 through 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 26
쐌 through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
EL-50
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
System Description (Cont’d)
When the ignition switch is in the START position, power is supplied
쐌 to daytime light control unit terminal 2
쐌 through 7.5A fuse [No. 26, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
HEADLAMP OPERATION
Power Supply to Low Beam and High Beam
GI
MA
NAEL0264S01
NAEL0264S0101
When lighting switch is in 2ND or PASS position, ground is supplied
쐌 to headlamp relay (LH and RH) terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 21 and 59
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminals 22 and 60
쐌 from lighting switch terminal 12.
Headlamp relays (LH and RH) are energized and then power is supplied to headlamps (LH and RH).
Low Beam Operation
EM
LC
EC
NAEL0264S0102
When the lighting switch is turned to 2ND and LOW (“B”) positions, ground is supplied
쐌 to terminal 2 of the headlamp LH
쐌 through daytime light control unit terminals 11 and 15
쐌 through lighting switch terminals 7 and 5
쐌 through body grounds E13 and E41.
Ground is also supplied
쐌 to terminal 2 of the headlamp RH
쐌 through daytime light control unit terminals 8 and 12
쐌 through lighting switch terminals 10 and 8
쐌 through body grounds E13 and E41.
With power and ground supplied, the low beam headlamps illuminate.
High Beam Operation/Flash-to-pass Operation
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
NAEL0264S0103
When the lighting switch is turned to 2ND and HIGH (“A”) or PASS (“C”) positions, ground is supplied
쐌 to terminal 1 of headlamp LH
쐌 through daytime light control unit terminals 10 and 13, and
쐌 to combination meter terminal 27 for the HIGH BEAM indicator
쐌 through lighting switch terminals 6 and 5
쐌 through body grounds E13 and E41.
Ground is also supplied
쐌 to terminal 1 of headlamp RH
쐌 through daytime light control unit terminals 9 and 14
쐌 through lighting switch terminals 9 and 8
쐌 through body grounds E13 and E41.
With power and ground supplied, the high beam headlamps and HIGH BEAM indicator illuminate.
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
Except for Auto Light Control Operation
NAEL0264S02
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
NAEL0264S0201
Headlamps will remain on for a short while after the ignition switch is turned from ON (or ACC) to OFF.
Continuity between terminals 21 and 22, and between terminals 59 and 60 of smart entrance control unit will
be disturbed after 5 minutes, then the headlamps will be turned off.
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 2ND after headlamps are turned to off by the exterior lamp
battery saver control, ground is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11, and then,
쐌 to headlamp LH and RH relays terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 21 and 59,
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminals 22 and 60 and
쐌 through lighting switch terminal 12.
Then headlamps illuminate again.
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-51
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
System Description (Cont’d)
Auto light control operation
NAEL0264S0202
While the headlamps are turned ON by “AUTO” operation, the exterior lamp battery saver is activated for 5
minutes when the ignition switch is turned from ON (or ACC) to OFF, and either LH or RH front door switch
is opened.
The smart entrance control unit controls exterior lamp battery saver activation as follows:
쐌 When the door switch signal changes from ON to OFF while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated,
the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the headlamps will be turned off.
쐌 When the door switch signal changes from OFF to ON while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated,
the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the headlamps will be turned off.
쐌 When the one of four door switch signals changes from OFF to ON while the exterior lamp battery saver
is activated, the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 5 minutes, then the headlamps will be
turned off.
쐌 When all the door switch ON signals are input while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated, the saver
is discontinued and restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the headlamps will be turned off.
Exterior lamp battery saver control time can be changed using “WORK SUPPORT” mode in “HEADLAMP”.
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 2ND after headlamps are turned to off by the exterior lamp
battery saver control, ground is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11, and then,
쐌 to headlamp LH and RH relays terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 21 and 59,
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminals 22 and 60 and
쐌 through lighting switch terminal 12.
Then headlamps illuminate again.
AUTO LIGHT OPERATION
NAEL0264S03
For auto light operation, refer to “HEADLAMP” (EL-37).
DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION
NAEL0264S04
With the engine running, the lighting switch in the OFF or 1ST position and parking brake released, power is
supplied
쐌 through daytime light control unit terminal 7
쐌 to terminal 3 of headlamp RH
쐌 through terminal 1 of headlamp RH
쐌 to daytime light control unit terminal 9
쐌 through daytime light control unit terminal 6
쐌 to terminal 3 of headlamp LH.
Ground is supplied to terminal 1 of headlamp LH.
쐌 through daytime light control unit terminals 10 and 16
쐌 through body grounds E13 and E41.
Because the high beam headlamps are now wired in series, they operate at half illumination.
OPERATION
NAEL0264S05
After starting the engine with the lighting switch in the “OFF” or “1ST” position, the headlamp high beam automatically turns on. Lighting switch operations other than the above are the same as conventional light systems.
Engine
With engine stopped
OFF
1ST
With engine running
2ND
OFF
1ST
2ND
Lighting switch
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
High beam
X
X
O
X
X
O
O
X
O
왕*
왕*
O
왕*
왕*
O
O
X
O
Low beam
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
X
Clearance and tail lamp
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
License and instrument illumination
lamp
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
Headlamp
EL-52
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
System Description (Cont’d)
A: “HIGH BEAM” position
B: “LOW BEAM” position
C: “FLASH TO PASS” position
O : Lamp “ON”
X : Lamp “OFF”
왕 : Lamp dims. (Added functions)
*: When starting the engine with the parking brake released, the daytime light will come ON.
When starting the engine with the parking brake pulled, the daytime light won’t come ON.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-53
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Schematic
Schematic
NAEL0265
MEL951P
EL-54
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Wiring Diagram — DTRL —
Wiring Diagram — DTRL —
NAEL0266
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL952P
EL-55
IDX
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Wiring Diagram — DTRL — (Cont’d)
MEL953P
EL-56
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Wiring Diagram — DTRL — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL954P
IDX
EL-57
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Wiring Diagram — DTRL — (Cont’d)
MEL955P
EL-58
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Wiring Diagram — DTRL — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL956P
IDX
EL-59
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
“HEADLAMP”
NAEL0267
NAEL0267S01
Refer to “HEADLAMP (FOR USA)” (EL-43).
CONSULT-II Application Items
“HEADLAMP”
NAEL0268
NAEL0268S01
Refer to “HEADLAMP (FOR USA)” (EL-44).
Trouble Diagnoses
Symptom
Possible cause
NAEL0269
Repair order
Neither headlamp operates.
1.
2.
3.
4.
7.5A fuse
Lighting switch
Daytime light control unit
Smart entrance control unit
1. Check the following.
a. 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block (J/B)]
Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal
49 of smart entrance control unit.
b. 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in fuse block (J/B)]
Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal
3 of daytime light control unit.
2. Check lighting switch.
3. Check daytime light control unit (EL-63).
4. Check smart entrance control unit. (EL-368)
LH headlamp (low and high beam)
does not operate, but RH headlamp (low and high beam) does
operate.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
15A fuse
Headlamp LH relay
Headlamp LH relay circuit
Headlamp LH ground circuit
Lighting switch circuit
Daytime light control unit
Smart entrance control unit
1. Check 15A fuse (No. 60, located in fusible link and
fuse box). Verify battery positive voltage is present
at terminal 1 and 3 of headlamp LH relay.
2. Check headlamp LH relay.
3. Check the following.
a. Harness between headlamp LH relay and daytime
light control unit
b. Harness between headlamp LH relay and smart
entrance control unit
4. Check harness between headlamp LH and daytime
light control unit.
5. Check harness between smart entrance control unit
and lighting switch.
6. Check daytime light control unit. (EL-63)
7. Check smart entrance control unit. (EL-368)
EL-60
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Symptom
Possible cause
RH headlamp (low and high beam) 1. 15A fuse
does not operate, but LH headlamp 2. Headlamp RH relay
(low and high beam) does operate. 3. Headlamp RH relay circuit
4. Headlamp RH ground circuit
5. Lighting switch circuit
6. Daytime light control unit
7. Smart entrance control unit
LH high beam does not operate,
but LH low beam operates.
Repair order
1. Check 15A fuse (No. 59, located in fusible link and
fuse box). Verify battery positive voltage is present
at terminals 1 and 3 of headlamp RH relay.
2. Check headlamp RH relay.
3. Check the following.
a. Harness between headlamp RH relay and daytime
light control unit
b. Harness between headlamp RH relay and smart
entrance control unit
4. Check harness between headlamp RH and daytime
light control unit.
5. Check harness between smart entrance control unit
and lighting switch.
6. Check daytime light control unit. (EL-63)
7. Check smart entrance control unit. (EL-368)
1. Bulb
2. Headlamp LH high beams circuit
3. Lighting switch
4. Lighting switch circuit
5. Daytime light control unit
1. Check bulb.
2. Check harness between LH headlamp and daytime
light control unit.
3. Check lighting switch.
4. Check harness between daytime light control unit
and lighting switch.
5. Check daytime light control unit. (EL-63)
LH low beam does not operate, but 1. Bulb
LH high beam operates.
2. Headlamp LH high beams circuit
3. Lighting switch
4. Lighting switch circuit
5. Daytime light control unit
1. Check bulb.
2. Check harness between LH headlamp and daytime
light control unit.
3. Check lighting switch.
4. Check harness between daytime light control unit
and lighting switch.
5. Check daytime light control unit. (EL-63)
RH high beam does not operate,
but RH low beam operates.
1. Bulb
2. Open in the RH high beams
circuit
3. Lighting switch
4. Lighting switch circuit
5. Daytime light control unit
1. Check bulb.
2. Check harness between RH headlamp and daytime
light control unit.
3. Check lighting switch.
4. Check harness between daytime light control unit
and lighting switch.
5. Check daytime light control unit. (EL-63)
1. Bulb
2. Open in the RH high beams
circuit
3. Lighting switch
4. Lighting switch circuit
5. Daytime light control unit
1. Check bulb.
2. Check harness between RH headlamp and daytime
light control unit.
3. Check lighting switch.
4. Check harness between daytime light control unit
and lighting switch.
5. Check daytime light control unit. (EL-63)
RH low beam does not operate,
but RH high beam operates.
High beam indicator does not work. 1. Bulb
2. Open in high beam circuit
Battery saver control does not
operate properly.
1. Door switch LH or RH circuit
2. Smart entrance control unit
1. Check bulb in combination meter.
2. Check the following.
a. Harness between headlamp LH relay and combination meter for an open circuit
b. Harness between high beam indicator and lighting
switch
1. Check the following.
a. Harness between smart entrance control unit and
LH or RH door switch for open or short circuit
b. LH or RH door switch ground circuit
c. LH or RH door switch
2. Check smart entrance control unit. (EL-368)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-61
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Symptom
Daytime light control does not
operate properly.
Possible cause
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Fuse check
Parking brake switch
Parking brake switch circuit
Alternator circuit
Daytime light control unit
Repair order
1. Check the following.
a. 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in fuse block (J/B)]
Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal
3 of daytime light control unit.
b. 7.5A fuse [No. 26, located in fuse block (J/B)]
Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal
2 of daytime light control unit.
2. Check parking brake switch.
3. Check harness between parking brake switch and
daytime light control unit.
4. Check harness between alternator and daytime light
control unit.
5. Check daytime light control unit. (EL-63)
When outside is dark, neither tail
1. 7.5A fuse
lamp nor headlamp turn on by auto 2. Lighting switch “AUTO” check
light operation.
3. Lighting switch circuit check
4. Lighting switch ground circuit
check
5. Auto light sensor check
6. Auto light sensor circuit check
1. Check 7.5A fuse [NO. 11 located in fuse block (J/B)].
Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal
27 of smart entrance control unit.
2. Check lighting switch (AUTO) input signal with
“CONSULT-II” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
When lighting switch is in AUTO:
AUTO LIGHT SWITCH ON
When lighting switch is in OFF:
AUTO LIGHT SWITCH OFF
3. Check harness for open or short between smart
entrance control unit and lighting switch.
4. Check harness for lighting switch and ground.
5. Check auto light sensor input signal.
(With CONSULT-II)
See “AUTO LIGHT SENSOR” in DATA MONITOR
mode. When auto light sensor in stuck by light:
More than 3V
When auto light sensor is not stuck by light:
Approx. 0.5V
(Without CONSULT-II)
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit
terminal 7 and ground. Refer to smart entrance control unit. (EL-368)
6. Check the following.
a. Harness for open or short between smart entrance
control unit terminal 8 and auto light sensor terminal
1
b. Harness for open or short between smart entrance
control unit terminal 7 and auto light sensor terminal
2
c. Harness for open or short between smart entrance
control unit terminal 9 and auto light sensor terminal
3
When outside is dark, tail lamp
turns on but headlamp does not
turn on by auto light operation.
Check auto light output.
(With CONSULT-II)
See “HEADLAMP” and “TAIL LAMP” in ACTIVE TEST
mode, and headlamp switch to AUTO position.
Headlamp and tail lamp should turn on.
(Without CONSULT-II)
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit terminals 19, 21, 57, 59 and ground. Refer to smart
entrance control unit. (EL-368)
Auto light output check
EL-62
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Symptom
Possible cause
GI
Repair order
When outside is dark, headlamp
Auto light output check
turns on but tail lamp does not turn
on by auto light operation.
Check auto light output.
(With CONSULT-II)
See “HEADLAMP” and “TAIL LAMP” in ACTIVE TEST
mode, and headlamp switch to AUTO position.
Headlamp and tail lamp should turn on.
(Without CONSULT-II)
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit terminals 19, 57 and ground. Refer to smart entrance control unit. (EL-368)
Light does not turn off when ignition key switch is turned to “OFF”
(exterior lamp battery saver control
is canceled).
1. 7.5A fuse
2. IGN switch circuit
1. Check 7.5A fuse [NO. 11 located in fuse block (J/B)].
Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal
27 of smart entrance control unit.
2. Check harness for open or short between smart
entrance control unit and fuse.
When outside is bright, neither tail
lamps nor headlamps turn off by
auto light operation.
Auto light sensor check
Check auto light sensor input signal.
(With CONSULT-II)
See “AUTO LIGHT SENSOR” in DATA MONITOR
mode. When auto light sensor in stuck by light:
More than 3V
When auto light sensor is not stuck by light:
Approx. 0.5V
(Without CONSULT-II)
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit terminal 7 (W/G) and ground. Refer to smart entrance
control unit. (EL-368)
Wire
color
1
Y/B
Item
Alternator
Condition
When turning ignition switch to “ON”
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
DAYTIME LIGHT CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE
Terminal
No.
MA
NAEL0269S01
Voltage
(Approximate values)
PD
Less than 1V
AX
2
3
Y/R
G
Start signal
Power source
When engine is running
Battery voltage
When turning ignition switch to “OFF”
Less than 1V
BR
When turning ignition switch to “ST”
Battery voltage
ST
When turning ignition switch to “ON” from “ST”
Less than 1V
RS
When turning ignition switch to “OFF”
Less than 1V
BT
When turning ignition switch to “ON”
Battery voltage
HA
When turning ignition switch to “ST”
Battery voltage
SC
When turning ignition switch to “OFF”
Less than 1V
SU
IDX
EL-63
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
4
R/L
5
6
7
9
10
R/W
R
L/R
PU
GY
13
14
L/W
W/R
16
B
17
L/G
Item
Power source
Power source
LH hi beam
RH hi beam
RH hi beam
(ground)
LH hi beam
(ground)
Lighting switch
(Hi beam)
Condition
When turning ignition switch to “ON”
Battery voltage
When turning ignition switch to “OFF”
Battery voltage
When turning ignition switch to “ON”
Battery voltage
When turning ignition switch to “OFF”
Battery voltage
When lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position with
“HI BEAM” position
Battery voltage
When releasing parking brake with engine running and
turning lighting switch to “OFF” (daytime light operation)
CAUTION:
Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in N or P
position.
Approx. half battery
voltage
When lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position with
“HI BEAM” position
Battery voltage
When releasing parking brake with engine running and
turning lighting switch to “OFF” (daytime light operation)
CAUTION:
Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in N or P
position.
Battery voltage
When lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position with
“HI BEAM” position
Less than 1V
When releasing parking brake with engine running and
turning lighting switch to “OFF” (daytime light operation)
CAUTION:
Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in N or P
position.
Approx. half battery
voltage
When lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position with
“HI BEAM” position
Less than 1V
When releasing parking brake with engine running and
turning lighting switch to “OFF” (daytime light operation)
CAUTION:
Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in N or P
position.
Less than 1V
When turning lighting switch to “HI BEAM”
Less than 1V
When turning lighting switch to “FLASH TO PASS”
Less than 1V
Ground
Parking brake
switch
Voltage
(Approximate values)
—
—
When parking brake is released
Battery voltage
When parking brake is set
Less than 1.5V
EL-64
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement
NAEL0270
GI
Refer to “HEADLAMP (FOR USA)” (EL-47).
MA
EM
LC
Aiming Adjustment
EC
NAEL0271
Refer to “HEADLAMP (FOR USA)” (EL-47).
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-65
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
System Description
System Description
NAEL0272
The parking, license and tail lamp operation is controlled by the lighting switch which is built into the combination switch and smart entrance control unit. The battery saver system is controlled by the smart entrance
control unit.
Power is supplied at all times
쐌 to tail lamp relay terminals 1 and 3
쐌 through 10A fuse (No. 61, located in the fuse and fusible link box), and
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 49
쐌 through 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
When ignition switch is in ON or START position, power is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 27
쐌 through 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 26
쐌 through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
Ground is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
LIGHTING OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH
NAEL0272S01
When lighting switch is in 1ST (or 2ND) position, ground is supplied
쐌 to tail lamp relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58, and
쐌 through lighting switch and body grounds E13 and E41.
Tail lamp relay is then energized and the parking, license and tail lamps illuminate.
LIGHTING OPERATION BY AUTO LIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
NAEL0272S02
When lighting switch is in AUTO position, ground is supplied
쐌 to tail lamp relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64, and
쐌 to body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
Tail lamp relay is then energized and the parking, license and tail lamps illuminate.
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
Except for Auto Light Control Operation
NAEL0272S03
NAEL0272S0301
Parking, license and tail lamps will remain on for a short while after the ignition switch is turned from ON (or
ACC) to OFF.
Continuity between terminals 19 and 20, and between terminals 57 and 58 of smart entrance control unit will
be disturbed after 5 minutes, then the parking, license and tail lamps will be turned off.
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 2ND after parking, license and tail lamps are turned to off by
the exterior lamp battery saver control, ground is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11, and then,
쐌 to tail lamp relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57.
Then parking, license and tail lamps illuminate again.
Auto light control operation
NAEL0272S0302
While the parking, license and tail lamps are turned ON by “AUTO” operation, the exterior lamp battery saver
is activated for 5 minutes when the ignition switch is turned from ON (or ACC) to OFF, and either LH or RH
front door switch is opened.
The smart entrance control unit controls exterior lamp battery saver activation as follows:
쐌 When the door switch signal changes from ON to OFF while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated,
the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the parking, license and tail lamps
will be turned off.
쐌 When the door switch signal changes from OFF to ON while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated,
the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the parking, license and tail lamps
will be turned off.
EL-66
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
System Description (Cont’d)
쐌
When the one of four door switch signals changes from OFF to ON while the exterior lamp battery saver
is activated, the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 5 minutes seconds, then the parking,
license and tail lamps will be turned off.
쐌 When all the door switch ON signals are input while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated, the
operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the parking, license and tail lamps will
be turned off.
Exterior lamp battery saver control time can be changed using “WORK SUPPORT” mode in “HEADLAMP”.
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 2ND after parking, license and tail lamps are turned to off by
the exterior lamp battery saver control, ground is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11, and then,
쐌 to tail lamp relays terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57.
Then parking, license and tail lamps illuminate again.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-67
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
Schematic
Schematic
NAEL0273
MEL515P
EL-68
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —
NAEL0274
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL957P
EL-69
IDX
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L — (Cont’d)
MEL958P
EL-70
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL959P
IDX
EL-71
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L — (Cont’d)
MEL960P
EL-72
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
“HEADLAMP”
1.
2.
NAEL0275
GI
NAEL0275S01
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to
the data link connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEL670Y
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SKIA3098E
5.
Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.
If “SMART ENTRANCE” is not indicated, go to GI-41, “CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit”.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL669Y
6.
Touch “HEADLAMP”.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL751Y
7.
Select diagnosis mode.
“DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST” and “WORK SUPPORT”
are available.
HA
SC
IDX
SEL400Y
EL-73
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
CONSULT-II Application Items
CONSULT-II Application Items
“HEAD LAMP”
Data Monitor
NAEL0454
NAEL0454S01
NAEL0454S0101
Monitored Item
Description
IGN ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ON position.
ACC ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position.
AUTO LIGT SW
Displays status of the lighting switch as judged from the lighting switch signal.
(AUTO position: ON/Other than AUTO position: OFF)
AUTO LIGT SENS
Displays “Illumination outside of the vehicle (close to 5V when light/close to 0V when dark)” as
judged from the optical sensor signal.
LIGHT SW 1ST
Displays status of the lighting switch as judged from the lighting switch signal.
(1ST or 2ND position: ON/Other than 1ST and 2ND position: OFF)
LIGHT SW 2ND
Displays status of the lighting switch as judged from the lighting switch signal.
(2ND position: ON/Other than 2ND position: OFF)
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.
DOOR SW-AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door switch RH.
DOOR SW-RR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch.
Active Test
NAEL0454S0102
Test Item
Description
TAIL LAMP
Tail lamp relay can be operated by on-off operation of the tail lamp.
HEAD LAMP
Headlamp relay can be operated by on-off operation of the headlamp.
AUTO LIGHT
Night time dimming signal can be operated by on-off operation.
Work Support
NAEL0454S0103
Work Item
Description
AUTO LIGHT SET
Auto light sensitivity can be changed in this mode. Sensitivity can be adjusted in four modes.
쐌 NORMAL/MODE 2 (Sensitive)/MODE 3 (Desensitized)/MODE 4 (Insensitive)
BATTERY SAVER SET
Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed in this mode. Selects exterior lamp
battery saver control mode between two modes.
쐌 MODE 1 (ON)/MODE 2 (OFF)
ILL DELAY SET
Auto light delay off timer period can be changed in this mode. Selects auto light delay off timer
period among eight modes.
쐌 MODE 1 (45 sec.)/MODE 2 (OFF)/MODE 3 (30 sec.)/MODE 4 (60 sec.)/ MODE 5 (90 sec.)/
MODE 6 (120 sec.)/MODE 7 (150 sec.)/MODE 8 (180 sec.)
Trouble Diagnoses
Symptom
No lamps operate (including headlamps).
Possible cause
1. 7.5A fuse
2. Lighting switch
3. Smart entrance control unit
EL-74
NAEL0277
Repair order
1. Check 7.5A fuse [No. 24, lacated in fuse block
(J/B)]. Verify battery positive voltage is present at
terminal 49 of smart entrance control unit.
2. Check lighting switch.
3. Check smart entrance control unit. (EL-368)
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Symptom
No parking, license and tail lamps
operate, but headlamps do operate.
Exterior lamp battery saver control
does not operate properly.
Auto light malfunctioning
Possible cause
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
10A fuse
Tail lamp relay
Tail lamp relay circuit
Lighting switch
Lighting switch circuit
Smart entrance control unit
1. Driver, passenger or rear door
switch circuit
2. Smart entrance control unit
—
Repair order
1. Check 10A fuse (No. 61, located in fusible and fuse
block). Verify battery positive voltage is present at
terminals 1 and 3 of tail lamp relay.
2. Check tail lamp relay.
3. Check the following.
a. Harness between smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57 and tail lamp relay terminal 2
b. Harness between tail lamp relay terminal 5 and fuse
block
4. Check lighting switch.
5. Check the following.
a. Harness between lighting switch terminal 11 and
smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58
b. Harness between lighting switch terminal 5 and
ground
6. Check smart entrance control unit. (EL-368)
1. Check the following.
a. Harness between smart entrance control unit and
driver, passenger or rear door switch for open or
short circuit
b. Driver passenger or rear door switch ground circuit
c. Driver, passenger or rear door switch
2. Check smart entrance control unit. (EL-368)
Refer to trouble diagnosis in “HEADLAMP”. (EL-44)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-75
STOP LAMP
Wiring Diagram — STOP/L —
Wiring Diagram — STOP/L —
NAEL0278
MEL961P
EL-76
STOP LAMP
Wiring Diagram — STOP/L — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL262M
IDX
EL-77
BACK-UP LAMP
Wiring Diagram — BACK/L —
Wiring Diagram — BACK/L —
NAEL0279
MEL085Q
EL-78
FRONT FOG LAMP
System Description
System Description
OUTLINE
NAEL0280
GI
NAEL0280S01
Power is supplied at all times
쐌 to headlamp RH relay terminals 1 and 3
쐌 through 15A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and fusible link box), and
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 49
쐌 through 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)], and
쐌 to front fog lamp relay terminal 3
쐌 through 15A fuse (No. 53, located in the fuse and fusible link box).
When ignition switch is in ON or START position, power is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 27
쐌 through 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 26
쐌 through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
Ground is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
When lighting switch is in 2ND position, ground is supplied
쐌 to headlamp RH relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 21 and 59.
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminals 22 and 60,
쐌 through lighting switch terminal 12, and
쐌 through body grounds E13 and E41.
Headlamp RH relay is then energized.
FOG LAMP OPERATION
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
NAEL0280S02
The front fog lamp switch is built into the combination switch. The lighting switch must be in the 2ND position
and LOW (“B”) position for front fog lamp operation.
With the front fog lamp switch in the ON position, ground is supplied
쐌 to front fog lamp relay terminal 1
쐌 through the front fog lamp switch, lighting switch and body grounds E13 and E41.
The front fog lamp relay is energized and power is supplied
쐌 from front fog lamp relay terminal 5
쐌 to terminal 1 of each front fog lamp.
Ground is supplied to terminal 2 of each front fog lamp through body grounds E13 and E41.
With power and ground supplied, the front fog lamps illuminate.
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
NAEL0280S03
Front fog lamps will remain on for a short while after the ignition switch is turned from ON (or ACC) to OFF.
Continuity between terminals 21 and 22, and between terminals 59 and 60 of smart entrance control unit will
be disturbed after 5 minutes, then the front fog lamps will be turned off.
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 2ND after front fog lamps are turned off by the battery saver
control, ground is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11, and then
쐌 to headlamp RH relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminal 21 and 59
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminal 22 and 60 from lighting switch terminal 12.
Then the front fog lamps illuminate again.
NOTE:
For Trouble Diagnoses for battery saver control, refer to “HEADLAMP (FOR USA)”, EL-44.
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-79
FRONT FOG LAMP
Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —
Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —
NAEL0281
MEL962P
EL-80
FRONT FOG LAMP
Wiring Diagram — F/FOG — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL963P
IDX
EL-81
FRONT FOG LAMP
Aiming Adjustment
Aiming Adjustment
NAEL0282
Before performing aiming adjustment, make sure of the following.
1) Keep all tires inflated to correct pressure.
2) Place vehicle on level ground.
3) See that vehicle is unloaded (except for full levels of coolant,
engine oil and fuel, and spare tire, jack, and tools). Have the
driver or equivalent weight placed in driver’s seat.
Adjust aiming in the vertical direction by turning the adjusting
screw.
MEL917O
1.
2.
Set the distance between the screen and the center of the fog
lamp lens as shown at left.
Turn front fog lamps ON.
MEL327G
3.
쐌
Adjust front fog lamps so that the top edge of the high intensity zone is 200 mm (7.9 in) below the height of the fog lamp
centers as shown at left.
When performing adjustment, if necessary, cover the headlamps and opposite fog lamp.
MEL328GA
EL-82
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
System Description
System Description
TURN SIGNAL OPERATION
NAEL0283
GI
NAEL0283S01
With the hazard switch in the OFF position and the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
쐌 through 7.5A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 to hazard switch terminal 2
쐌 through terminal 1 of the hazard switch
쐌 to combination flasher unit terminal 1
쐌 through terminal 3 of the combination flasher unit
쐌 to turn signal switch terminal 1.
Ground is supplied to combination flasher unit terminal 2 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and
M157.
MA
LH Turn
FE
NAEL0283S0101
When the turn signal switch is moved to the LH position, power is supplied from turn signal switch terminal 3
to
쐌 front turn signal lamp LH terminal 3
쐌 combination meter terminal 25
쐌 rear combination lamp LH terminal 5.
Ground is supplied to the front turn signal lamp LH terminal 1 through body grounds E13 and E41.
Ground is supplied to the rear combination lamp LH terminal 6 through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
Ground is supplied to combination meter terminal 30 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
With power and ground supplied, the combination flasher unit controls the flashing of the LH turn signal lamps.
RH Turn
NAEL0283S0102
When the turn signal switch is moved to the RH position, power is supplied from turn signal switch terminal
2 to
쐌 front turn signal lamp RH terminal 3
쐌 combination meter terminal 29
쐌 rear combination lamp RH terminal 5.
Ground is supplied to the front turn signal lamp RH terminal 1 through body grounds E13 and E41.
Ground is supplied to the rear combination lamp RH terminal 6 through body grounds B55 and B75.
Ground is supplied to combination meter terminal 30 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
With power and ground supplied, the combination flasher unit controls the flashing of the RH turn signal lamps.
HAZARD LAMP OPERATION
NAEL0283S02
Power is supplied at all times to hazard switch terminal 3 through:
쐌 15A fuse [No. 20, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
With the hazard switch in the ON position, power is supplied
쐌 through terminal 1 of the hazard switch
쐌 to combination flasher unit terminal 1
쐌 through terminal 3 of the combination flasher unit
쐌 to hazard switch terminal 4.
Ground is supplied to combination flasher unit terminal 2 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and
M157.
Power is supplied through terminal 5 of the hazard switch to
쐌 front turn signal lamp LH terminal 3
쐌 combination meter terminal 25
쐌 rear combination lamp LH terminal 5.
Power is supplied through terminal 6 of the hazard switch to
쐌 front turn signal lamp RH terminal 3
쐌 combination meter terminal 29
쐌 rear combination lamp RH terminal 5.
EM
LC
EC
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-83
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
System Description (Cont’d)
Ground is supplied to terminal 1 of each front turn signal lamp through body grounds E13 and E41.
Ground is supplied to terminal 6 of the rear combination lamp LH through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
Ground is supplied to terminal 6 of the rear combination lamp RH through body grounds B55 and B75.
Ground is supplied to combination meter terminal 30 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
With power and ground supplied, the combination flasher unit controls the flashing of the hazard warning
lamps.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION
NAEL0283S03
Power is supplied at all times
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 49
쐌 through 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
Ground is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 43 and 64
쐌 through body ground M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
Refer to “REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM”, EL-299.
When smart entrance control unit receives LOCK or UNLOCK signal from keyfob with all doors closed, power
is supplied
쐌 through terminal 47 of smart entrance control unit
쐌 to front turn signal lamp LH terminal 3
쐌 to combination meter terminal 25
쐌 to rear combination lamp LH terminal 5, and
쐌 through terminal 48 of smart entrance control unit
쐌 to front turn signal lamp RH terminal 3
쐌 to combination meter terminal 29
쐌 to rear combination lamp RH terminal 5.
Ground is supplied to terminal 1 of each front turn signal lamp through body grounds E13 and E41.
Ground is supplied to terminal 6 of the rear combination lamp LH through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
Ground is supplied to terminal 6 of the rear combination lamp RH through body grounds B55 and B75.
Ground is supplied to combination meter terminal 30 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
With power and ground supplied, the smart entrance control unit controls the flashing of the hazard warning
lamps.
EL-84
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — TURN —
Wiring Diagram — TURN —
NAEL0284
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL964P
EL-85
IDX
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — TURN — (Cont’d)
MEL965P
EL-86
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses
Trouble Diagnoses
Symptom
Turn signal and hazard warning
lamps do not operate.
Turn signal lamps do not operate
but hazard warning lamps operate.
Possible cause
1.
2.
3.
4.
GI
Repair order
1. Hazard switch
1. Check hazard switch.
2. Combination flasher unit
2. Refer to combination flasher unit check.
3. Open in combination flasher unit 3. Check wiring to combination flasher unit for open
circuit
circuit.
7.5A fuse
1. Check 7.5A fuse [No. 12, located in fuse block
Hazard switch
(J/B)]. Turn ignition switch ON and verify battery
Combination switch (turn signal)
positive voltage is present at terminal 2 of hazard
Open in combination switch
switch.
(turn signal) circuit
2. Check hazard switch.
3. Check combination switch (turn signal).
4. Check the wire between combination flasher unit
terminal 3 and combination switch (turn signal) terminal 1 for open circuit.
Hazard warning lamps do not oper- 1. 15A fuse
ate but turn signal lamps operate.
2. Hazard switch
3. Open in hazard switch circuit
Front turn signal lamp LH or RH
does not operate.
NAEL0285
1. Check 15A fuse [No. 20, located in fuse block (J/B)].
Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal
3 of hazard switch.
2. Check hazard switch.
3. Check the wire between combination flasher unit
terminal 3 and hazard switch terminal 4 for open
circuit.
1. Bulb
2. Grounds E13 and E41
3. Open in front turn signal lamp
circuit
1. Check bulb.
2. Check grounds E13 and E41.
3. Check harness between front turn signal lamp and
combination switch.
Rear combination lamp LH does
not operate.
1. Bulb
2. Grounds B11, B22 and D210
3. Open in rear combination lamp
LH circuit
1. Check bulb.
2. Check grounds B11, B22 and D210.
3. Check harness between rear combination lamp LH
and hazard switch.
Rear combination lamp RH does
not operate.
1. Bulb
2. Grounds B55 and B75
3. Open in rear combination lamp
RH circuit
1. Check bulb.
2. Check grounds B55 and B75.
3. Check harness between rear combination lamp RH
and hazard switch.
LH and RH turn indicators do not
operate.
1. Grounds M4, M66, M111, M147
and M157
1. Check grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
LH or RH turn indicator does not
operate.
1. Bulb
2. Open in turn indicator circuit
1. Check bulb in combination meter.
2. Check harness between combination meter and
hazard switch.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
Electrical Components Inspection
COMBINATION FLASHER UNIT CHECK
쐌
쐌
NAEL0286
HA
NAEL0286S01
Before checking, ensure that bulbs meet specifications.
Connect a battery and test lamp to the combination flasher
unit, as shown. Combination flasher unit is properly functioning if it blinks when power is supplied to the circuit.
SC
IDX
SEL122E
EL-87
ILLUMINATION
System Description
System Description
NAEL0287
The illumination lamp operation is controlled by the lighting switch which is built into the combination switch
and smart entrance control unit. The battery saver system is controlled by smart entrance control unit.
Power is supplied at all times
쐌 to tail lamp relay terminals 1 and 3
쐌 through 10A fuse (No. 61, located in the fuse and fusible link box), and
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 49
쐌 through 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
When ignition switch is in ON or START position, power is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 27
쐌 through 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
When the ignition switch is in ACC or ON position, power is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 26
쐌 through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
Ground is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
LIGHTING OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH
NAEL0287S01
When lighting switch is 1ST (or 2ND) position, ground is supplied
쐌 to tail lamp relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58, and
쐌 through lighting switch and body grounds E13 and E41.
Tail lamp relay is then energized and illumination lamps illuminate.
The lighting switch must be in the 1ST or 2ND position for illumination.
The illumination control switch that controls the amount of current to the illumination system. As the amount
of current increases, the illumination becomes brighter.
The ground for all of the components except for grove box lamp, ashtray and compass and thermometer are
controlled through terminals 2 and 3 of the illumination control switch and body grounds M4, M66, M111, M145
and M157.
LIGHTING OPERATION BY AUTO LIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
NAEL0287S02
When auto light operation is operated, ground is supplied
쐌 to tail lamp relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64, and
쐌 to body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
Tail lamp relay is then energized and the illumination lamps illuminate.
The illumination control switch that controls the amount of current to the illumination system. As the amount
of current increases, the illumination becomes brighter.
The following chart shows the power and ground connector terminals for the components included in the illumination system.
Component
Connector No.
Power terminal
Ground terminal
Illumination control switch
M19
1
3
4WD shift switch
M141
7
8
1
2
Ashtray (without woody instrument finisher)
Ashtray (with woody instrument finisher)
B76
M155
A/T device
B59
3
4
Cigarette lighter
M57
3
4
Audio unit
M48
8
7
R4
5
2
M35
7
8
Compass and thermometer
Hazard switch
EL-88
ILLUMINATION
System Description (Cont’d)
Component
Connector No.
Power terminal
Ground terminal
M36
5
6
M92, M93
3
5
CD auto changer
M125
2
9
A/C switch illumination
M45
2
1
M117, M118
8
24
A/C auto amp.
M102
24
25
Clock
M40
3
4
Globe box lamp
M30
1
2
Combination meter
M26
64
65
VDC off switch
M151
4
5
Rear window defogger switch
CD player
Display & NAVI control unit
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
The ground for all of the components except for compass and thermometer, glove box lamp and ashtray are
controlled through terminals 2 and 3 of the illumination control switch and body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147
and M157.
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
Except for Auto Light Control Operation
CL
MT
NAEL0287S03
NAEL0287S0301
Illumination lamps will remain on for a short while after the ignition switch is turned from ON (or ACC) to OFF.
Continuity between terminals 19 and 20, and between terminals 57 and 58 of smart entrance control unit will
be disturbed after 5 minutes, then the illumination lamp will be turned off.
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 1ST (or 2ND) after illumination lamps are turned off by the
battery saver control, ground is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11, and
쐌 to tail lamp relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57.
Then illumination lamps illuminate again.
AT
TF
PD
AX
Auto light control operation
NAEL0287S0302
While the illumination lamps are turned ON by “AUTO” operation, the exterior lamp battery saver is activated
for 5 minutes when the ignition switch is turned from ON (or ACC) to OFF, and either LH or RH front door
switch is opened.
The smart entrance control unit controls exterior lamp battery saver activation as follows:
쐌 When the door switch signal changes from ON to OFF while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated,
the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the illumination lamps will be turned
off.
쐌 When the door switch signal changes from OFF to ON while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated,
the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the illumination lamps will be turned
off.
쐌 When the one of four door switch signals changes from OFF to ON while the exterior lamp battery saver
is activated, the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 5 minutes seconds, then the illumination
lamps will be turned off.
쐌 When all the door switch ON signals are input while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated, the
operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the illumination lamps will be turned off.
Exterior lamp battery saver control time can be changed using “WORK SUPPORT” mode in “HEADLAMP”.
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 2ND after illumination lamps are turned to off by the exterior
lamp battery saver control, ground is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11, and then,
쐌 to tail lamp relays terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57.
Then illumination lamps illuminate again.
NOTE:
For Trouble Diagnoses for battery saver control, refer to “PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS”
(EL-74).
EL-89
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
ILLUMINATION
Schematic
Schematic
NAEL0288
MEL966P
EL-90
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL —
Wiring Diagram — ILL —
NAEL0289
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL967P
EL-91
IDX
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL — (Cont’d)
MEL968P
EL-92
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL969P
IDX
EL-93
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL — (Cont’d)
MEL970P
EL-94
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL971P
IDX
EL-95
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL — (Cont’d)
MEL972P
EL-96
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
System Description
System Description
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND
NAEL0290
GI
NAEL0290S01
Power is supplied at all times:
쐌 through 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 to key switch terminal 2 and
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 49.
When the key is removed from ignition key cylinder, power is interrupted:
쐌 through key switch terminal 1
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 25.
With the ignition key switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied:
쐌 through 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 27.
Ground is supplied:
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
When the front driver side door is opened, ground is supplied:
쐌 through body grounds B11, B22 and D210
쐌 to front door switch (LH) terminal 2
쐌 from front door switch (LH) terminal 1
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 1.
When the front passenger side door is opened, ground is supplied:
쐌 through body grounds terminals B55 and B75
쐌 to front door switch (RH) terminal 2
쐌 from front door switch (RH) terminal 1
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 2.
When any other door (except front door) is opened, ground is supplied to smart entrance control unit terminal 3 in the same manner as the front door switch.
When the front LH door is unlocked by front door key cylinder switch, ground is supplied
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157
쐌 to front door key cylinder switch terminal 2
쐌 through front key cylinder switch terminal 1
쐌 to power window main switch terminal 6.
Power window main switch terminal 14 send unlock signal to smart entrance control unit terminal 33 with serial
link communication line.
When back door is unlocked by back door key cylinder switch, ground is supplied
쐌 through body grounds B11, B22 and D210
쐌 to back door key cylinder switch terminal 4
쐌 from back door key cylinder terminal 2
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 10.
When a signal, or combination of signals is received by the smart entrance control unit, ground is supplied:
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminal 31
쐌 to interior lamp terminal 2.
With power and ground supplied, the interior lamp illuminates.
SWITCH OPERATION
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
NAEL0290S02
When interior lamp switch is ON, ground is supplied:
쐌 through case grounds of interior lamp
쐌 to interior lamp.
And power is supplied:
쐌 to interior lamp terminal 1
쐌 from smart entrance control unit terminal 50.
When spot lamp (LH and/or RH) is ON, ground is supplied:
EL-97
SC
IDX
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
System Description (Cont’d)
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157
쐌 to spot lamp terminal 2.
And power is supplied:
쐌 to spot lamp terminal 1
쐌 from smart entrance control unit terminal 50.
When vanity mirror illumination (LH and/or RH) is ON, ground is supplied:
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111 and M147
쐌 to vanity mirror illuminations (LH and RH) terminals 2.
And power is supplied:
쐌 to vanity mirror illuminations (LH and RH) terminals 1
쐌 from smart entrance control unit terminal 50.
With power and ground supplied, interior lamps turn ON.
INTERIOR LAMP TIMER OPERATION
NAEL0290S03
When interior lamp switch is in the “DOOR” position, the smart entrance control unit keeps the interior lamp
illuminated for about 30 seconds when:
쐌 unlock signal is supplied from door lock and unlock switch while all doors are closed and key is out of
ignition key cylinder
쐌 unlock signal is supplied from keyfob or door key cylinder while driver’s door is locked and all doors are
closed
쐌 key is removed from ignition key cylinder while all doors are closed
쐌 driver’s door is opened and then closed while key is out of the iginition key cylinder. (However, if the driver’s door is closed with the key inserted in the ignition key cylinder after the driver’s door is opened with
the key removed, the timer is operated.)
The timer is canceled when:
쐌 driver’s door is locked,
쐌 driver’s door is opened, or
쐌 ignition switch is turned ON.
When driver’s door is locked, interior room lamp timer is canceled as described before.
ON-OFF CONTROL
NAEL0290S04
When the driver side door, front passenger door, rear LH or RH door is opened, the interior room lamp turns
on while the interior room lamp switch is in the “DOOR” position.
INTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER
NAEL0290S05
The lamp turns off automatically when interior lamp, luggage room lamp, spot lamp and/or vanity mirror illumination is illuminated with the ignition key is in OFF position, if the lamp remains lit by the door switch open
signal or if the lamp switch is in ON position for more than 30 minutes.
After lamps turn OFF by the battery saver system, the lamps illuminate again when:
쐌 driver’s door is locked or unlocked,
쐌 door is opened or closed,
쐌 key is removed from ignition key cylinder or inserted in ignition key cylinder.
EL-98
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Schematic
Schematic
NAEL0291
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL407P
EL-99
IDX
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — INT/L —
Wiring Diagram — INT/L —
NAEL0292
MEL973P
EL-100
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — INT/L — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL974P
IDX
EL-101
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — INT/L — (Cont’d)
MEL975P
EL-102
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — INT/L — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL976P
IDX
EL-103
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — INT/L — (Cont’d)
MEL977P
EL-104
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
“INT LAMP”/“BATTERY SAVER”
1.
2.
=NAEL0293
GI
NAEL0293S01
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to
the data link connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEL670Y
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SKIA3098E
5.
Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.
If “SMART ENTRANCE” is not indicated, go to GI-41, “CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit”.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL669Y
6.
Touch “INT LAMP” or “BATTERY SAVER”.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL751Y
7.
Select diagnosis mode.
“DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST” and “WORK SUPPORT”
are available for “INT LAMP” and “BATTERY SAVER”.
HA
SC
IDX
SEL400Y
EL-105
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
CONSULT-II Application Items
CONSULT-II Application Items
“INT LAMP”
Data Monitor
NAEL0294
NAEL0294S01
NAEL0294S0101
Monitored Item
Description
IGN ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
DOOR SW-RR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
KEY ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch.
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.
DOOR SW-AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH.
LOCK SW DR/AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door lock switch.
UNLK SW DR/AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door lock switch.
KEY CYL LK-SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door key cylinder switch.
KEY CYL UN-SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door key cylinder switch.
LK BUTTON/SIG
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob.
UN BUTTON/SIG
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob.
Active Test
NAEL0294S0102
Test Item
Description
INT LAMP
This test enables to check interior lamp operation.
When “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched:
쐌 Interior lamp turns on when the switch is at DOOR.
(Smart entrance control unit supplies power and ground to interior lamp.)
IGN ILLUM
This test enables to check ignition key hole illumination operation. The illumination turns on when
“ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
STEP LAMP
This test enables to check step lamp operation.
The illumination turns on when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
NOTE:
Even though ignition key hole illumination and step lamp are actually displayed on the CONSULT-II screen,
those are not equipped, therefore, they cannot be activated.
Work Support
NAEL0294S0103
Work Item
ROOM LAMP TIMER SET
Description
Interior lamp timer mode can be changed by mode setting. Selects ON-OFF of the room lamp
illumination at the time the driver door is unlocked.
쐌 MODE 1 (ON)/MODE 2 (OFF)
NOTE:
Even though ignition keyhole illumination and step lamp are actually displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, those are not equipped, therefore, they cannot be activated.
“BATTERY SAVER”
Data Monitor
NAEL0294S02
NAEL0294S0201
Monitored Item
Description
IGN ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
DOOR SW-RR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
KEY ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch.
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.
EL-106
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
CONSULT-II Application Items (Cont’d)
Monitored Item
DOOR SW-AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH.
LOCK SW DR/AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door lock switch.
UNLK SW DR/AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door lock switch.
KEY CYL LK-SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door key cylinder switch.
KEY CYL UN-SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door key cylinder switch.
LK BUTTON/SIG
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob.
UN BUTTON/SIG
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob.
Active Test
EM
LC
EC
FE
Description
This test enables to check interior lamp and spot lamp and vanity mirror illuminations operations.
When touch “ON” on CONSULT-II screen.
쐌 Interior lamp turns on when the switch is in ON.
(Smart entrance control unit supplies power to interior lamp.)
쐌 Spot lamp and vanity mirror illuminations turn on when the switch is in ON.
(Smart entrance control unit supplies power to spot lamp, and vanity mirror illuminations.)
CL
MT
AT
Work Support
NAEL0294S0203
Work Item
ROOM LAMP BAT SAV SET
MA
NAEL0294S0202
Test Item
BATTERY SAVER
GI
Description
Description
Interior lamp battery saver control period can be changed by mode setting. Selects interior lamp
battery saver control period between two modes.
쐌 MODE 1 (30 minutes)/MODE 2 (60 minutes)
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-107
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
=NAEL0295
NAEL0295S01
SYMPTOM: Interior lamp timer does not operate.
1
CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check ignition switch ON signal (“IGN ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL318W
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 27 (W/B) and ground.
SEL003Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse
EL-108
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)
2
GI
CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check front door switch LH signal (“DOOR SW-DR”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL319WB
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminal 1 (G/OR) and ground.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEL004YD
PD
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
3
AX
SU
CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH
Check the following.
쐌 Continuity between front door switch LH connector B9 terminals 1 and 2
쐌 Continuity between front door switch LH connector B9 terminal 3 and ground
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL277Y
HA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Front door switch LH ground circuit and condition
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and front door switch
LH
NG
䊳
Replace front door switch LH.
SC
IDX
EL-109
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)
4
CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH RH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check front door switch RH signal (“DOOR SW-AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL153YA
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminal 2 (Y) and ground.
SEL152YB
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
5
CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH RH
Check the following.
쐌 Continuity between front door switch RH connector B68 terminals 1 and 2
쐌 Continuity between front door switch RH connector B68 terminal 3 and ground
SEL278Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Front door switch RH ground circuit and condition
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and front door switch
RH
NG
䊳
Replace front door switch RH.
EL-110
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)
6
GI
CHECK REAR AND BACK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check door switches (“DOOR SW-RR”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL154YB
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminal 3 (R/L) and ground.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEL155YB
PD
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
7
AX
SU
CHECK REAR AND BACK DOOR SWITCHES
1. Disconnect door switch harness connector.
2. Check the following.
쐌 Continuity between rear door switches connector B18 and B71 terminal 1 and ground
쐌 Continuity between back door switch connector D208 terminals 1 and 2
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL279Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Rear LH, RH and/or back door switch ground circuit or door switch ground condition
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and rear LH, RH and/or
back door switch
NG
䊳
Replace rear LH, RH and/or back door switch.
EL-111
SC
IDX
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)
8
CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check key switch (“KEY ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL315W
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 25 (W/R) and ground.
SEL011Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
GO TO 9.
9
CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)
Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2.
SEL308X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and key switch
NG
䊳
Replace key switch.
EL-112
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)
10
GI
CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check door lock/unlock switch (“LOCK SW DR/AS”/“UNLK SW DR/AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL341W
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove key from ignition key cylinder.
2. Check the signal between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 33 (BR) and ground with oscilloscope when door lock/unlock switch is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
3. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec. just after door lock/unlock
switch is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEL699Y
AX
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Door lock/unlock switch is OK.
SU
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Ground circuit for each front power window switch
쐌 Harness for open or short between each front power window switch and smart
entrance control unit connector
If above systems are normal, replace the power window main switch.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-113
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)
11
CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK/UNLOCK SIGNAL)
With CONSULT-II
Check front door key cylinder switch (“KEY CYL LK-SW”/“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULTII.
SEL342W
Without CONSULT-II
1. Check the signal between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 33 (BR) and ground with oscilloscope when key inserted in front key cylinder is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
2. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec. just after key is turned “LOCK”
or “UNLOCK”.
SEL700Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Door key cylinder switch LH is OK.
NG
䊳
GO TO 12.
12
CHECK FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK/UNLOCK SIGNAL)
Check voltage between power window main switch harness connector D6 terminals 4 (Y/L) or 6 (LG) and ground.
SEL792Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG
䊳
GO TO 13.
EL-114
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)
13
GI
CHECK BACK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK/UNLOCK SIGNAL)
With CONSULT-II
Check back door key cylinder switch (“KEY CYL LK-SW”/“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULTII.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL342WB
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminals 10 (LG), 11 (Y) and ground.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEL680Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG
䊳
GO TO 14.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-115
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)
14
CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
1. Disconnect door key cylinder switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between each key cylinder switch terminals.
쐌 Front door key cylinder switch LH harness connector D9
SEL793Y
쐌 Back door key cylinder switch harness connector D201
SEL315X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Front or back door key cylinder switch ground circuit
쐌 Harness for open or short between back door key cylinder switch and smart entrance
control unit connector
쐌 Harness for open or short between front door key cylinder switch LH and power window main switch
NG
䊳
Replace front or back door key cylinder switch.
EL-116
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2
=NAEL0295S02
GI
SYMPTOM: Interior lamp timer does not cancel properly.
1
CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL
MA
With CONSULT-II
Check ignition switch ON signal (“IGN ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL318W
CL
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 27 (W/B) and ground.
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEL995X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-117
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)
2
CHECK FRONT LH DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check driver door switch signal (“DOOR SW-DR”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL319WB
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminal 1 (G/OR) and ground.
SEL004YD
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
3
CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH
Check the following.
쐌 Continuity between front door switch LH connector B9 terminals 1 and 2
쐌 Continuity between front door switch LH connector B9 terminal 3 and ground
SEL277Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Front door switch LH ground circuit and condition
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and front door switch
LH
NG
䊳
Replace front door switch LH.
EL-118
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check door lock/unlock switch (“LOCK SW DR/AS”/“UNLK SW DR/AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL341W
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove key from ignition key cylinder.
2. Check the signal between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 33 (BR) and ground with oscilloscope when door lock/unlock switch is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
3. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec. just after door lock/unlock
switch is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEL699Y
AX
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Door lock/unlock switch is OK.
SU
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Ground circuit for each front power window switch
쐌 Harness for open or short between each front power window switch and smart
entrance control unit connector
If above systems are normal, replace the front power window switch.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-119
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)
5
CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK/UNLOCK SIGNAL)
With CONSULT-II
Check front door key cylinder switch (“KEY CYL LK-SW”/“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULTII.
SEL342W
Without CONSULT-II
1. Check the signal between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 33 (BR) and ground with oscilloscope when key inserted in front key cylinder is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
2. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec. just after key is turned “LOCK”
or “UNLOCK”.
SEL700Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Door key cylinder switch LH is OK.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
6
CHECK FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK/UNLOCK SIGNAL)
Check voltage between power window main switch harness connector D6 terminals 4 (Y/L) or 6 (LG) and ground.
SEL792Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
EL-120
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)
7
GI
CHECK BACK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK/UNLOCK SIGNAL)
With CONSULT-II
Check back door key cylinder switch (“KEY CYL LK-SW”/“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULTII.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL342WB
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminals 10 (LG), 11 (Y) and ground.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEL680Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG
䊳
GO TO 8.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-121
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)
8
CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
1. Disconnect door key cylinder switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between each key cylinder switch terminals.
쐌 Front door key cylinder switch harness connector D9
SEL793Y
쐌 Back door key cylinder switch harness connector D201
SEL315X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Front or back door key cylinder switch ground circuit
쐌 Harness for open or short between back door key cylinder switch and smart entrance
control unit connector
쐌 Harness for open or short between front door key cylinder switch and power window
main switch
NG
䊳
Replace front or back door key cylinder switch.
EL-122
METERS AND GAUGES
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location
GI
NAEL0296
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SEL672Y
MT
System Description
UNIFIED CONTROL METER
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
AT
NAEL0297
NAEL0297S01
Speedometer, odo/trip meter, tachometer, fuel gauge and water temperature gauge are controlled totally
by control unit.
Digital meter is adopted for odo/trip meter.*
*The record of the odo meter is kept even if the battery cable is disconnected. The record of the trip meter
is erased when the battery cable is disconnected.
Odo/trip meter segment can be checked in diagnosis mode.
Meter/gauge can be checked in diagnosis mode.
HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY FOR ODO/TRIP METER
NAEL0297S02
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL175W
NOTE:
Turn ignition switch to the “ON” position to operate odo/trip meter.
EL-123
IDX
METERS AND GAUGES
System Description (Cont’d)
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
NAEL0297S03
Power is supplied at all times
쐌 through 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 to combination meter terminal 62.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
쐌 through 10A fuse [No. 8, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 to combination meter terminal 66.
Ground is supplied
쐌 to combination meter terminal 59
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE
NAEL0297S04
The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. ECM provides an engine coolant
temperature signal to the combination meter for the water temperature gauge with CAN communication line.
The needle on the gauge moves from “C” to “H”.
TACHOMETER
NAEL0297S05
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
ECM provides an engine speed signal to the combination meter for the tachometer with CAN communication
line.
FUEL GAUGE
NAEL0297S06
The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank.
The fuel gauge is regulated by a variable ground signal supplied
쐌 to combination meter terminal 17 for the fuel gauge
쐌 from terminal 3 of the fuel level sensor unit
쐌 through terminal 2 of the fuel level sensor unit and
쐌 through combination meter terminal 23.
SPEEDOMETER
Without VDC
NAEL0297S07
NAEL0297S0701
The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) provides a voltage signal to the combination meter for the
speedometer.
The voltage is supplied
쐌 from combination meter terminal 15 for the speedometer
쐌 to terminal 19 of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
The speedometer converts the voltage into the vehicle speed displayed.
With VDC
NAEL0297S0702
The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) provides a vehicle speed signal to the combination meter for
the speedometer with CAN communication line.
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
NAEL0297S09
Combination meter recieves vehicle speed signal and engine coolant temperature signal etc. from some control units with can communication line. Refer to “CAN COMMUNICATION” (EL-447).
EL-124
METERS AND GAUGES
Combination Meter
Combination Meter
CHECK
NAEL0298
GI
NAEL0298S01
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL073Q
EL-125
IDX
METERS AND GAUGES
Combination Meter (Cont’d)
CONSTRUCTION
NAEL0298S02
SEL482Y
EL-126
METERS AND GAUGES
Schematic
Schematic
NAEL0299
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL072Q
EL-127
IDX
METERS AND GAUGES
Wiring Diagram — METER —
Wiring Diagram — METER —
NAEL0300
MEL978P
EL-128
METERS AND GAUGES
Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode
Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter
Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
쐌
쐌
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
NAEL0301
NAEL0301S01
Odo/trip meter segment can be checked in diagnosis mode.
Meters/gauges can be checked in diagnosis mode.
HOW TO ALTERNATE DIAGNOSIS MODE
1.
GI
MA
EM
NAEL0301S02
Turn ignition switch to ON and change odo/trip meter to “TRIP
A” or “TRIP B”.
Turn ignition switch to OFF.
Turn ignition switch to ON when pushing odo/trip meter switch.
Push odo/trip meter switch 1 second.
Release odo/trip meter switch.
Push odo/trip meter switch more than three times within 7
seconds.
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
7. All odo/trip meter segments should be turned on.
NOTE:
If some segments are not turned on, unified meter control unit with
odo/trip meter should be replaced.
At this point, the unified control meter is turned to diagnosis
mode.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL176W
8.
Push odo/trip meter switch. Indication of each meter/gauge
should be as shown left during pushing odo/trip meter switch
if it is no malfunctioning.
NOTE:
It takes about a few seconds for indication of fuel gauge and water
temperature gauge to become stable.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL177W
HA
SC
IDX
EL-129
METERS AND GAUGES
Trouble Diagnoses
Trouble Diagnoses
NAEL0302
PRELIMINARY CHECK
NAEL0302S01
SEL494Y
*1: Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/
Trip Meter Segment Check in
Diagnosis Mode (EL-129)
*2: POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND
CIRCUIT CHECK (EL-131)
*3: Symptom Chart (EL-130)
SYMPTOM CHART
Symptom
Possible causes
One of speedometer/
tachometer/fuel gauge/
water temp. gauge is malfunctioning.
1. Sensor signal
- Vehicle speed signal
- Engine speed signal
- Fuel gauge
- Water temp. gauge
2. Unified meter control unit
Multiple meter/gauge are
malfunctioning. (except
odo/trip meter)
Unified meter control unit
NAEL0302S02
Repair order
1. Check the sensor for malfunctioning meter/gauge.
INSPECTION/VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL WITH VDC
(Refer to EL-131.)
INSPECTION/VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL WITHOUT
VDC (Refer to EL-132.)
INSPECTION/ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL (Refer to
EL-132.)
INSPECTION/FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT (Refer to
EL-133.)
INSPECTION/WATER TEMPERATURE SIGNAL
(Refer to EL-134.)
2. Replace unified meter control unit assembly.
Before starting trouble diagnoses below, perform PRELIMINARY
CHECK, EL-130.
EL-130
METERS AND GAUGES
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK =NAEL0302S03 GI
Power Supply Circuit Check
NAEL0302S0301
Terminals
SEL179WB
MA
Ignition switch position
(+)
(−)
OFF
ACC
ON
62
Ground
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
EM
66
Ground
0V
0V
Battery
voltage
LC
If NG, check the following.
쐌 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 10A fuse [No. 8, located in fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 Harness for open or short between fuse and combination
meter
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
Ground Circuit Check
NAEL0302S0302
Terminals
TF
(+)
Continuity
(−)
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
M26
59 (B)
Ground
PD
Yes
AX
SU
SEL747Y
INSPECTION/VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL WITH VDC NAEL0302S11
1
CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) OUTPUT
BR
Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis. Refer to BR-106, “CONSULT-II Functions”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace combination meter.
NG
䊳
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BR-94, “Trouble Diagnosis”.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-131
METERS AND GAUGES
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
INSPECTION/VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL WITHOUT =NAEL0302S04
VDC
1
CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) OUTPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Lift up drive wheels.
2. Start engine and drive vehicle at more than 20 km/h (12 MPH).
3. Check signal between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 15 (G/Y) and ground when rotating wheels
with engine at idle. (Use “SIMPLE OSCILLOSCOPE” in “SUB MODE” with CONSULT-II.)
SEL938W
Without CONSULT-II
1. Lift up drive wheels.
2. Start engine and drive vehicle at more than 20 km/h (12 MPH).
3. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 15 (G/Y) and ground when rotating wheels
with engine at idle.
SEL939WA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is OK.
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and
combination meter.
쐌 ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BR-56, “Wheel Sensor or Rotor”.
INSPECTION/ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
1
CHECK ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Refer to EC-86, “Emission-related Diagnostic Information”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace combination meter.
NG
䊳
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for displayed DTC.
EL-132
NAEL0302S05
METERS AND GAUGES
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
INSPECTION/FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT
1
=NAEL0302S06
GI
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Disconnect combination meter connector and fuel level sensor connector.
3. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 23 (B) and fuel level sensor unit harness
connector B12 terminal 2 (B).
4. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 23 and ground.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL794Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
2
CL
MT
AT
CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT
TF
Refer to “FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK” (EL-134).
OK or NG
PD
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Replace fuel level sensor unit.
AX
3
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1. Disconnect combination meter connector and fuel level sensor unit connector.
2. Check continuity between combination meter terminal 17 and fuel level sensor unit terminal 3.
3. Check continuity between combination meter terminal 17 and ground.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL300X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Fuel level sensor unit is OK.
NG
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
HA
SC
IDX
EL-133
METERS AND GAUGES
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
INSPECTION/WATER TEMPERATURE SIGNAL
1
NAEL0302S07
CHECK ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Refer to EC-86, “Emission-related Diagnostic Information”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace combination meter.
NG
䊳
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for display DTC.
Electrical Components Inspection
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK
쐌 For removal, refer to FE-4, “FUEL SYSTEM”.
Check the resistance between terminals 3 and 2.
Ohmmeter
Float position
(+)
3
mm (in)
(−)
2
NAEL0303
NAEL0303S02
Resistance
value Ω
*1
Full
95 (3.74)
Approx. 4 - 6
*2
1/2
184 (7.24)
31 - 34
*3
Empty
265 (10.43)
80 - 83
YEL066K
*1 and *3: When float rod is in contact with stopper.
EL-134
COMPASS AND THERMOMETER
System Description
System Description
NAEL0304
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL713U
This unit displays following items:
쐌 Earth magnetism and heading direction of vehicle.
쐌 Outside air temperature.
쐌 Caution for frozen road surfaces.
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
FE
CL
NAEL0304S01
Push the switch when the ignition key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. The outside temperature will be displayed in “°F”.
쐌 Selecting the indication range
Push the switch to change from “°F” to “°C”.
쐌 When the outside temperature drops below freezing point, ICE is displayed on the unit.
쐌 When the outside temperature is between 55°C (130°F) and 70°C (158°F), the display shows 55°C
(130°F).
쐌 When the outside temperature is lower than −30°C (−20°F) or higher than 70°C (158°F), the display shows
only “---” though it is operating. This is not a problem.
쐌 The indicated temperature on the thermometer is not readily affected by engine heat. It changes only when
one of the following conditions is present.
a) The temperature detected by the ambient air temperature sensor is lower than the indicated temperature
on the thermometer.
b) The difference in temperature detected during a period of 40 seconds is less than 1°C (1.8°F) when vehicle
speed has been greater than 24 km/h (15 MPH) for more than 100 seconds.
(This is to prevent the indicated temperature from being affected by engine heat or cooling fan operation
during low-speed driving.)
c) The ignition key has been turned to the “OFF” position for more than 4 hours. (The engine is cold.)
MT
DIRECTION DISPLAY
ST
NAEL0304S02
Push the switch when the ignition key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. The direction will be displayed.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-135
COMPASS AND THERMOMETER
Wiring Diagram — COMPAS —
Wiring Diagram — COMPAS —
NAEL0305
MEL979P
EL-136
COMPASS AND THERMOMETER
Trouble Diagnoses
Trouble Diagnoses
NAEL0306
PRELIMINARY CHECK FOR THERMOMETER
1
GI
NAEL0306S01
MA
COOL DOWN CHECK
1. Turn the ignition key switch to the “ACC” position.
2. Cool down the ambient air temperature sensor with water or ice, so that the indicated temperature falls.
EM
Does the indicated temperature fall?
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
The system is malfunctioning. Check the system following “INSPECTION/COMPASS
AND THERMOMETER”.
LC
EC
2
WARM UP CHECK
1. Leave the vehicle for 10 minutes, so that the indicated temperature rises.
2. With the ignition key in the “ACC” position, disconnect and reconnect the ambient air temperature sensor connector.
Does the indicated temperature rise?
CL
Yes
䊳
The system is OK.
No
䊳
The system is malfunctioning. Check the system following “INSPECTION/COMPASS
AND THERMOMETER”.
NOTE:
쐌 When the outside temperature is between 55°C (130°F) and 70°C (158°F), the display shows 55°C
(130°F). When the outside temperature is lower than −30°C (−20°F) or higher than 70°C (158°F), the display shows only “---”.
쐌 The indicated temperature on the thermometer is not readily affected by engine heat. It changes only when
one of the following conditions is present.
a) The temperature detected by the ambient air temperature sensor is lower than the indicated temperature
on the thermometer.
b) The difference in temperature detected during a period of 40 seconds is less than 1°C (1.8°F) when vehicle
speed has been greater than 24 km/h (15 MPH) for more than 100 seconds.
(This is to prevent the indicated temperature from being affected by engine heat or cooling fan operation
during low-speed driving.)
c) The ignition key has been turned to the “OFF” position for more than 4 hours. (The engine is cold.)
INSPECTION/COMPASS AND THERMOMETER
Symptom
No display at all
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
NAEL0306S02
Possible causes
Repair order
1. 10A fuse
2. Ground circuit
3. Compass and thermometer
FE
1. Check 10A fuse [No. 9, located in fuse block (J/B)].
Turn the ignition switch ON and verify that battery positive
voltage is at terminal 7 of compass and thermometer.
2. Check ground circuit for compass and thermometer.
3. Replace compass and thermometer.
Forward direction indication slips off the
mark or incorrect.
1. In manual correction mode (Bar
and display vanish.)
2. Zone variation change is not done.
Compass reading
remains unchanged.
1. Vehicle speed signal is not entered. 1. Check harness for open or short between combination meter
2. Compass and thermometer
terminal 13 and compass and thermometer terminal 1.
2. Replace compass and thermometer.
Displays wrong temperature when ambient
temperature is between
−30°C (−20°F) and
55°C (130°F). (See
NOTE above.)
1. Check operation
2. Ambient air temperature sensor
circuit
3. Vehicle speed signal is not entered.
4. Ambient air temperature sensor
5. Compass and thermometer
1. Drive the vehicle and turn at an angle of 90°.
2. Perform the zone variation change.
1. Perform preliminary check shown above.
2. Check harness for open or short between ambient air temperature sensor and compass and thermometer.
3. Check harness for open or short between combination meter
terminal 13 and compass and thermometer terminal 1.
4. Replace ambient air temperature sensor.
5. Replace compass and thermometer.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-137
COMPASS AND THERMOMETER
Calibration Procedure for Compass
Calibration Procedure for Compass
=NAEL0307
The difference between magnetic North and geographical North
can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings.
In order for the compass to operate accurately in a particular zone,
it must be calibrated using the following procedure.
SEL738UA
CORRECTION FUNCTIONS OF COMPASS
NAEL0307S01
The direction display is equipped with automatic correction function. If the direction is not shown correctly, carry out initial correction.
INITIAL CORRECTION PROCEDURE FOR COMPASS
NAEL0307S02
1.
SEL065V
Pushing the “Mode” switch for about 10 seconds will enter the
initial correction mode. The direction bar starts blinking.
2. Turn the vehicle slowly in an open, safe place. The initial correction is completed in one or two turns.
NOTE:
In places where the terrestrial magnetism is extremely disturbed,
the initial correction may start automatically.
EL-138
WARNING LAMPS
Schematic
Schematic
NAEL0308
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL980P
EL-139
IDX
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN —
Wiring Diagram — WARN —
NAEL0309
MEL981P
EL-140
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL982P
IDX
EL-141
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN — (Cont’d)
MEL983P
EL-142
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL984P
IDX
EL-143
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN — (Cont’d)
MEL985P
EL-144
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL986P
IDX
EL-145
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN — (Cont’d)
MEL987P
EL-146
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL988P
IDX
EL-147
WARNING LAMPS
Fuel Warning Lamp Sensor Check
Fuel Warning Lamp Sensor Check
NAEL0310
1.
2.
3.
SEL062WA
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect fuel level sensor unit harness connector B12.
Connect a resistor (80Ω) between fuel tank gauge unit harness
connector terminals 2 and 3.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
The fuel warning lamp should come on.
NOTE:
ECM might store the 1st trip DTC P0180 during this inspection.
If the DTC is stored in ECM memory, erase the DTC after reconnecting fuel tank gauge unit harness connector.
Refer to EC-86, “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”.
Electrical Components Inspection
NAEL0311
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CHECK
MEL425F
Oil pressure
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Continuity
Engine start
More than 10 - 20
(0.1 - 0.2, 1 - 3)
NO
Engine stop
Less than 10 - 20
(0.1 - 0.2, 1 - 3)
YES
Check the continuity between the terminals of oil pressure switch
and body ground.
DIODE CHECK
쐌
쐌
SEL901F
NAEL0311S01
NAEL0311S02
Check continuity using an ohmmeter.
Diode is functioning properly if test results are as shown in the
figure at left.
쐌 Check diodes at the combination meter harness connector
instead of checking them on the combination meter assembly.
Refer to EL-140, “WARNING LAMP” wiring diagrams.
NOTE:
Specification may vary depending on the type of tester. Before
performing this inspection, be sure to refer to the instruction
manual for the tester to be used.
EL-148
WARNING CHIME
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location
GI
NAEL0312
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEL673Y
AX
SU
System Description
NAEL0313
The warning chime is controlled by the smart entrance control unit.
The warning chime is located in the smart entrance control unit.
Power is supplied at all times
쐌 through 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 49 and
쐌 to key switch terminal 2,
쐌 through 10A fuse (No. 61, located in the fuse and fusible link box
쐌 to tail lamp relay terminals 1 and 3.
When the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
쐌 through 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 27.
Ground is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
When a signal, or combination of signals, is received by the smart entrance control unit, the warning chime
will sound.
IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
NAEL0313S01
When the key in the ignition switch in the OFF position, and the driver’s door open, the warning chime will
sound. Power is supplied
EL-149
IDX
WARNING CHIME
System Description (Cont’d)
쐌 from key switch terminal 1
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 25.
Ground is supplied
쐌 from front door switch LH terminal 1
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 1.
Front door switch LH terminal 2 is grounded through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
LIGHT WARNING CHIME
NAEL0313S02
When ignition switch OFF, driver’s door open, and lighting switch in 1ST or 2ND position, warning chime will
sound. Power is supplied.
쐌 from tail lamp relay terminal 2
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 19 and 57.
Ground is supplied
쐌 from front door switch LH terminal 1
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 1.
Front door switch LH terminal 2 is grounded through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME
NAEL0313S03
With ignition switch turned ON and seat belt unfastened (seat belt buckle switch ON), warning chime will sound
for approximately 6 seconds.
Ground is supplied
쐌 from seat belt buckle switch terminal 1
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 28.
Seat belt switch terminal 2 is grounded through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
EL-150
WARNING CHIME
Wiring Diagram — CHIME —
Wiring Diagram — CHIME —
NAEL0314
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL989P
EL-151
IDX
WARNING CHIME
Wiring Diagram — CHIME — (Cont’d)
MEL990P
EL-152
WARNING CHIME
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
=NAEL0315
“KEY WARN ALM”/“LIGHT WARN ALM”/“SEAT BELT
ALM”
NAEL0315S01
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to
the data link connector.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL670Y
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SKIA3098E
5.
Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.
If “SMART ENTRANCE” is not indicated, go to GI-41, “CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit”.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL669Y
6.
Touch “KEY WARN ALM”, “LIGHT WARN ALM” or “SEAT BELT
ALM”.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL023X
7.
Select diagnosis mode.
“DATA MONITOR” and “ACTIVE TEST” are available for the
warning chime.
HA
SC
IDX
SEL322W
EL-153
WARNING CHIME
CONSULT-II Application Items
CONSULT-II Application Items
“KEY WARNING ALARM”
Data Monitor
NAEL0316S0101
Monitored Item
Description
IGN ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
KEY ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch.
DOOR SW DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.
Active Test
NAEL0316S0102
Test Item
Description
This test is able to check key warning chime operation. Key warning chime sounds for 2
seconds after touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen.
CHIME
“LIGHT WARN ALM”
Data Monitor
NAEL0316S02
NAEL0316S0201
Monitored Item
Description
LIGHT SW 1ST
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lighting switch.
IGN ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.
Active Test
NAEL0316S0202
Test Item
Description
This test is able to check light warning chime operation. Light warning chime sounds for 2
seconds after touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen.
CHIME
“SEAT BELT WARM ALM”
Data Monitor
NAEL0316S03
NAEL0316S0301
Monitored Item
Description
IGN ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
SEAT BELT SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of seat belt switch.
Active Test
NAEL0316S0302
Test Item
CHIME
NAEL0316
NAEL0316S01
Description
This test is able to check seat belt warning chime operation. Seat belt warning chime
sounds for 2 seconds after touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen.
EL-154
WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses
Trouble Diagnoses
NAEL0317
SYMPTOM CHART
157
158
159
160
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2
(KEY SWITCH INSERT
SIGNAL CHECK)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3
(SEAT BELT BUCKLE
SWITCH CHECK)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4
Light warning chime does not activate.
X
X
Ignition key warning chime does not
activate.
X
Seat belt warning chime does not
activate.
X
All warning chimes do not activate.
X
SYMPTOM
NAEL0317S01
155
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
(LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT
SIGNAL CHECK)
)
POWER SUPPLY AND
GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
REFERENCE PAGE (EL-
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
X
CL
X
X
X
X
X
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK NAEL0317S02
Power Supply Circuit Check
BR
NAEL0317S0201
Terminals
(+)
SEL989XA
Voltage
Terminal
(Wire color)
(–)
Connector
M123
49 (G/R)
Ground
ST
RS
Battery voltage
If NG, check the following.
쐌 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit
and fuse
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-155
WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Ground Circuit Check
NAEL0317S0202
Terminals
(+)
Continuity
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M122
43 (B)
M123
64 (B)
(–)
Ground
SEL990XA
EL-156
Yes
WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 (LIGHTING SWITCH
GI
INPUT SIGNAL CHECK)
=NAEL0317S03
1
CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
MA
With CONSULT-II
Check lighting switch (“LIGHT SW 1ST”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL991X
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminal 19 (R/G), connector M123 terminal
57 (R) and ground.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEL992XA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 10A fuse (No. 61, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and tail lamp relay
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-157
WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 (KEY SWITCH INSERT
SIGNAL CHECK)
=NAEL0317S04
1
CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check key switch (“KEY ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL315W
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 25 (W/R) and ground.
SEL011Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)
Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2.
SEL308X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and key switch
NG
䊳
Replace key switch.
EL-158
WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 (SEAT BELT BUCKLE
GI
SWITCH CHECK)
=NAEL0317S05
1
CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
MA
With CONSULT-II
Check seat belt buckle switch (“SEAT BELT SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL317W
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 28 (B/Y) and ground.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEL994X
AX
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
SU
CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
BR
Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2 when seat belt is fastened and unfastened.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL381X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Seat belt buckle switch ground circuit
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and seat belt buckle
switch
NG
䊳
Replace seat belt buckle switch.
SC
IDX
EL-159
WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4
1
NAEL0317S06
CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check ignition switch ON signal (“IGN ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL318W
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 27 (W/B) and ground.
SEL995X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse
EL-160
WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
2
GI
CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check driver door switch signal (“DOOR SW-DR”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL319W
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminal 1 (G/OR) and ground.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEL996X
PD
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
3
AX
SU
CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH
Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL383X
OK or NG
OK
NG
䊳
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Driver side door switch ground circuit and condition
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and front door switch
LH
HA
SC
Replace front door switch LH.
IDX
EL-161
WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
4
CHECK WARNING CHIME
With CONSULT-II
Perform “CHIME” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL320W
OK or NG
OK
䊳
System is OK.
NG
䊳
Replace smart entrance control unit.
EL-162
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER
System Description
System Description
WIPER OPERATION
NAEL0318
GI
NAEL0318S01
The front wiper switch is controlled by a lever built into the combination switch.
There are three wiper switch positions:
쐌 LO speed
쐌 HI speed
쐌 INT (Intermittent)
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
쐌 through 20A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 to front wiper motor terminal 1, and
쐌 to front wiper switch terminal 15.
Low and High Speed Wiper Operation
MA
EM
LC
EC
NAEL0318S0101
Ground is supplied to front wiper switch terminal 17 through body grounds E13 and E41.
When the wiper switch is placed in the LO position, ground is supplied
쐌 through terminal 14 of the front wiper switch
쐌 to front wiper motor terminal 5.
With power and ground supplied, the front wiper motor operates at low speed.
When the front wiper switch is placed in the HI position, ground is supplied
쐌 through terminal 16 of the front wiper switch
쐌 to front wiper motor terminal 3.
With power and ground supplied, the front wiper motor operates at high speed.
Auto Stop Operation
FE
CL
MT
AT
NAEL0318S0102
With front wiper switch turned OFF, front wiper motor will continue to operate until wiper arms reach windshield
base.
When wiper arms are not located at base of windshield with front wiper switch OFF, ground is provided
쐌 from terminal 14 of the front wiper switch
쐌 to front wiper motor terminal 5, in order to continue front wiper motor operation at low speed.
Ground is also supplied
쐌 to terminal 13 of the front wiper switch
쐌 through front wiper motor terminal 4
쐌 through terminal 6 of the front wiper motor, and
쐌 through body grounds E13 and E41.
When wiper arms reach base of windshield, front wiper motor terminals 1 and 4 are connected instead of terminals 4 and 6. Wiper motor will then stop wiper arms at the PARK position.
TF
Intermittent Operation
ST
NAEL0318S0103
The front wiper motor operates the wiper arms one time at low speed at a set interval of approximately 2 to
13 seconds. This feature is controlled by the wiper amplifier built in the front wiper switch.
When the front wiper switch is placed in the INT position, ground is supplied
쐌 to wiper amplifier (INT SW)
쐌 from front wiper switch terminal 17
쐌 through body grounds E13 and E41,
쐌 to front wiper motor terminal 5
쐌 through the front wiper switch terminal 14 and
쐌 through wiper amplifier (OUTPUT).
WASHER OPERATION
NAEL0318S02
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
쐌 through 20A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 to front washer motor terminal 1.
When the lever is pulled to the WASH position, ground is supplied
쐌 to front washer motor terminal 2
쐌 through terminal 18 of the front wiper switch
EL-163
PD
AX
SU
BR
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER
System Description (Cont’d)
쐌 through terminal 17 of the front wiper switch, and
쐌 through body grounds E13 and E41.
With power and ground supplied, the front washer motor operates.
When the lever is pulled to the WASH position for one second or more, the front wiper motor operates at low
speed for approximately 3 seconds to clean windshield. This feature is controlled by the wiper amplifier in the
same manner as the intermittent operation.
EL-164
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER
Wiring Diagram — WIPER —
Wiring Diagram — WIPER —
NAEL0319
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL991P
EL-165
IDX
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
WIPER ARMS
1.
2.
3.
4.
SEL543TA
쐌
쐌
NAEL0320
NAEL0320S01
Prior to wiper arm installation, turn on wiper switch to operate
wiper motor and then turn it “OFF” (Auto Stop).
Lift the blade up and then set it down onto glass surface to set
the blade center to clearance “L1” & “L2” immediately before
tightening nut.
Eject washer fluid. Turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor
and then turn it “OFF”.
Ensure that wiper blades stop within clearance “L1” & “L2”.
Clearance “L1”: 29 - 39 mm (1.14 - 1.54 in)
Clearance “L2”: 32 - 42 mm (1.26 - 1.65 in)
Tighten wiper arm nuts to specified torque.
Front wiper: 21 - 26 N·m (2.1 - 2.7 kg-m, 15 - 20 ft-lb)
Before reinstalling wiper arm, clean up the pivot area as
illustrated. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm looseness.
SEL024J
WIPER LINKAGE
NAEL0320S02
MEL840F
EL-166
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Be
NAEL0320S0201
Remove 4 bolts that secure wiper motor.
Detach wiper motor from wiper linkage at ball joint.
Remove wiper linkage.
careful not to break ball joint rubber boot.
NAEL0320S0202
Grease ball joint portion before installation.
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
LC
EC
Washer Nozzle Adjustment
쐌
MA
EM
Installation
쐌
1.
GI
NAEL0321
Adjust washer nozzle with suitable tool as shown in the figure
at left.
Adjustable range: ±10°
FE
CL
MT
MEL582Q
Unit: mm (in)
MEL583Q
*1
251 (9.88)
*6
459 (18.07)
*2
351 (13.82)
*7
256 (10.08)
*3
165 (6.50)
*8
67 (2.64)
*4
269 (10.59)
*9
42 (1.65)
*5
167 (6.57)
AT
TF
PD
AX
*A: The diameters of these circles are less than 80 mm (3.15 in).
*B: The diameters of these circles are less than 138 × 80 mm (5.43 × 3.15 in).
*C: The diameters of these circles are less than 96 × 80 mm (3.78 × 3.15 in).
*D: The diameters of these circles are less than 90 × 80 mm (3.54 × 3.15 in).
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
Washer Tube Layout
NAEL0322
HA
SC
IDX
MEL074H
EL-167
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
System Description
System Description
WIPER OPERATION
Power Supply and Ground
NAEL0323
NAEL0323S01
NAEL0323S0101
Power is supplied at all times
쐌 through 10A fuse [No. 5, located in fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 to rear wiper motor terminal 1.
With ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
쐌 through 10A fuse [No. 29, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 to rear wiper motor terminal 4.
When the glass hatch switch is OPEN, ground is supplied
쐌 to rear wiper motor terminal 6
쐌 through glass hatch switch terminals 1 and 2
쐌 through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
Ground is supplied
쐌 to rear wiper motor terminal 8
쐌 through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
Wiper Operation
NAEL0323S0102
When the rear wiper switch is turned ON, ground is supplied
쐌 to rear wiper motor terminal 2
쐌 through combination switch terminals 22 and 24
쐌 through body grounds E13 and E41.
Then, power is supplied
쐌 to rear wiper motor terminal 4.
Ground is supplied
쐌 to rear wiper motor terminal 8
쐌 through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
With power and ground supplied, the wiper motor operates.
Auto Stop Operation
NAEL0323S0103
With rear wiper switch turned OFF, rear wiper motor will continue to operate until wiper arm reaches rear wiper
stopper.
Then wiper motor turns the other way and wiper arm moves once until wiper arm reaches stopper.
Intermittent Operation
NAEL0323S0104
The rear wiper motor operates the wiper arms at low speed approximately every 7 seconds.
When the wiper switch is placed in the INT position, ground is supplied
쐌 to rear wiper motor terminal 3
쐌 through rear wiper switch terminals 21 and 24
쐌 through body grounds E13 and E41.
Then, power is supplied
쐌 to rear wiper motor terminal 4.
Ground is supplied
쐌 to rear wiper motor terminal 8
쐌 through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
With power and ground supplied, rear wiper operates at intermittent.
WIPER OPERATION PROHIBIT CONTROL
NAEL0323S02
When glass hatch is open with back door key cylinder while rear wiper is operated, wiper operation is stopped.
(Wiper operation prohibit control)
When glass hatch is closed and rear wiper switch turns from OFF and then rear wiper switch is turned to ON,
wiper operation prohibit control is canceled.
WASHER OPERATION
NAEL0323S03
When the rear wiper switch is turned to WASH position, ground is supplied
EL-168
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
System Description (Cont’d)
쐌 to rear wiper motor terminal 5
쐌 through terminals 23 and 24
쐌 through body grounds E13 and E41.
Then, power is supplied
쐌 to rear washer motor terminal 2
쐌 through 10 A fuse [No. 29, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
Ground is supplied
쐌 to rear washer motor terminal 1
쐌 through rear wiper switch terminals 23 and 24
쐌 through body grounds E13 and E41.
With power and ground supplied, the rear washer motor operates.
When the rear wiper switch is turned to WASH position for 0.4 seconds or more, the rear wiper motor operates approximately 3 times after the rear wiper switch is released.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-169
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
Wiring Diagram — WIP/R —
Wiring Diagram — WIP/R —
NAEL0324
MEL992P
EL-170
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
Wiring Diagram — WIP/R — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL993P
IDX
EL-171
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
Trouble Diagnoses
Trouble Diagnoses
NAEL0325
REAR WIPER MOTOR INSPECTION TABLE
NAEL0325S01
(Data are reference values.)
Terminal No.
Item
1
Power supply (BAT)
2
ON switch
Condition
Voltage
(Approximate value)
—
Battery voltage
Rear wiper switch
ON
OFF or INT
3
Intermittent switch
Rear wiper switch
INT
OFF, ON or WASH
4
Power supply (ACC)
5
Washer switch
—
Rear wiper switch
Glass hatch switch
WASH
Glass hatch
Open
Closed
7
8
Park switch
Trunk lid opener
switch
Ground
Battery voltage
Less than 1V
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
OFF, ON or INT
6
Less than 1V
—
Less than 1V
Battery voltage
Less than 1V
5V
ON
11.5V
OFF
Battery voltage
—
NOTE:
Power to the rear wiper motor will be interrupted when the rear glass hatch is opened. In that case, conduct
the inspection of the rear wiper motor with the rear glass hatch closed, unless otherwise indicated.
Removal and Installation
WIPER ARMS
1.
2.
3.
NAEL0326
NAEL0326S01
Prior to wiper arm installation, turn on wiper switch to operate
wiper motor and then turn it “OFF” (Auto Stop).
Install wiper arm to portion A as in figure below and tighten
wiper arm nut to specification.
Then, set wiper arm to portion B.
: 13 - 18 N·m (1.3 - 1.8 kg-m, 9 - 13 ft-lb)
MEL066G
쐌
Before reinstalling wiper arm, clean up the pivot area as
illustrated. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm looseness.
SEL024J
EL-172
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
Washer Nozzle Adjustment
Washer Nozzle Adjustment
쐌
NAEL0327
Adjust washer nozzle with suitable tool as shown in the figure
at left.
Adjustable range: ±10° (In any direction)
GI
MA
EM
LC
MEL584Q
EC
FE
CL
MT
MEL034G
Washer Tube Layout
AT
NAEL0328
TF
PD
AX
SU
MEL067G
Check Valve
쐌
NAEL0329
A check valve is provided in the washer fluid line. Be careful
not to connect check valve to washer tube in the wrong direction.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL411H
HA
SC
IDX
EL-173
HORN
Wiring Diagram — HORN —
Wiring Diagram — HORN —
NAEL0330
MEL994P
EL-174
CIGARETTE LIGHTER
Wiring Diagram — CIGAR —
Wiring Diagram — CIGAR —
NAEL0331
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL995P
EL-175
IDX
CLOCK
Wiring Diagram — CLOCK —
Wiring Diagram — CLOCK —
NAEL0332
MEL996P
EL-176
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location
GI
NAEL0333
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEL674Y
AX
SU
System Description
NAEL0334
The rear window defogger system is controlled by the smart entrance control unit. The rear window defogger
operates only for approximately 15 minutes.
Power is supplied at all times
쐌 to rear window defogger relay terminal 3
쐌 through 20A fuse (No. 56, located in the fuse and fusible link box) and
쐌 to rear window defogger relay terminal 6
쐌 through 20A fuse (No. 57, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 49
쐌 through 7.5A [No. 24, located in fuse block (J/B)].
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
쐌 through 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 to the rear window defogger relay terminal 1, and
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 27.
Ground is supplied
쐌 to terminal 1 of the rear window defogger switch (with auto A/C and NAVI, with manual A/C) or
쐌 to terminal 32 of A/C auto amp. (with auto A/C and without NAVI) and
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
When the rear window defogger switch is turned ON, ground is supplied
EL-177
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
System Description (Cont’d)
쐌 through terminal 2 of the rear window defogger switch (without A/C and NAVI, with manual A/C) or
쐌 through terminal 31 of A/C auto amp. (with auto A/C and without NAVI)
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 14.
Terminal 37 of the smart entrance control unit then supplies ground to the rear window defogger relay terminal 2.
With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger relay is energized.
Power is supplied
쐌 through terminals 5 and 7 of the rear window defogger relay
쐌 to the rear window defogger.
The rear window defogger has an independent ground.
With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger filaments heat and defog the rear window.
When the system is activated, the rear window defogger indicator illuminates in the rear window defogger
switch.
Power is supplied
쐌 to terminal 3 of the rear window defogger switch (with auto A/C and NAVI, with manual A/C) or
쐌 to terminal 30 of A/C auto amp. (with auto A/C and without NAVI)
쐌 from terminal 7 of the rear window defogger relay.
Terminal 4 of the rear window defogger switch (with auto A/C and NAVI, with manual A/C) or terminal 32 of
A/C auto amp. (with auto A/C and without NAVI) is grounded through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147
and M157.
EL-178
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Wiring Diagram — DEF —
Wiring Diagram — DEF —
WITH AUTO A/C AND NAVI, WITH MANUAL A/C
NAEL0335
GI
NAEL0335S01
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL997P
EL-179
IDX
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Wiring Diagram — DEF — (Cont’d)
MEL998P
EL-180
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Wiring Diagram — DEF — (Cont’d)
WITH AUTO A/C AND WITHOUT NAVI
NAEL0335S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL999P
EL-181
IDX
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Wiring Diagram — DEF — (Cont’d)
MEL001Q
EL-182
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
“REAR DEFOGGER”
1.
2.
NAEL0336
GI
NAEL0336S01
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to
the data link connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEL670Y
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SKIA3098E
5.
Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.
If “SMART ENTRANCE” is not indicated, go to GI-41, “CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit”.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL669Y
6.
Touch “REAR DEFOGGER”.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL023X
7.
Select diagnosis mode.
“DATA MONITOR” and “ACTIVE TEST” are available.
HA
SC
IDX
SEL322W
EL-183
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
CONSULT-II Application Items
CONSULT-II Application Items
“REAR DEFOGGER”
Data Monitor
NAEL0337S0101
Monitored Item
Description
IGN ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
REAR DEF SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear window defogger switch.
Active Test
NAEL0337S0102
Test Item
REAR DEFOGGER
NAEL0337
NAEL0337S01
Description
This test is able to check rear window defogger operation. Rear window defogger activates
when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
EL-184
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Trouble Diagnoses
Trouble Diagnoses
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
NAEL0338
NAEL0338S01
SYMPTOM: Rear window defogger does not activate, or does
not go off after activating.
1
GI
CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER OUTPUT SIGNAL
MA
EM
With CONSULT-II
Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “REAR DEFOGGER” with CONSULT-II.
LC
EC
FE
CL
SEL353W
MT
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 37 (G/B) and ground.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEL997X
OK or NG
OK
NG
䊳
䊳
SU
Check the following.
쐌 Rear window defogger relay (Refer to EL-188.)
쐌 Rear window defogger circuit
쐌 Rear window defogger filament (Refer to EL-189.)
BR
GO TO 2.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-185
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
2
CHECK DEFOGGER RELAY COIL SIDE CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
3. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 37 (G/B) and ground.
SEL998X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 Rear window defogger relay
쐌 Harness for open or short between fuse and rear window defogger relay
쐌 Harness for open or short between rear window defogger relay and smart entrance
control unit
EL-186
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Select “REAR DEF SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL352W
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminal 14 (OR) and ground.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEL685Y
PD
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Rear window defogger switch (Refer to EL-188.)
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and rear window defogger switch
쐌 Rear window defogger switch ground circuit
AX
SU
BR
4
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND IGNITION INPUT SIGNAL
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 27 (W/B), M123 terminal 49 (G/R)
and ground.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL001Y
SC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 7.5A fuse [No. 11 or No. 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse
EL-187
IDX
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
5
CHECK CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 43 (B), M123 terminal 64 (B) and
ground.
SEL002Y
Yes
䊳
Replace smart entrance control unit.
No
䊳
Repair harness or connectors.
Electrical Components Inspection
NAEL0339
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
NAEL0339S01
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.
Condition
Continuity
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No current supply
No
SEC202B
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
Auto A/C and NAVI, and With Manual A/C
NAEL0339S02
NAEL0339S0201
Check continuity between terminals when rear window defogger
switch is pushed and released.
Terminals
Condition
Continuity
Rear window defogger
switch is pushed
Yes
Rear window defogger
switch is released
No
1-2
SEL430TB
EL-188
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Electrical Components Inspection (Cont’d)
With Auto A/C and Without NAVI
=NAEL0339S0202
Check voltage between A/C auto amp. and ground, when rear
window switch is pushed and released.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Condition
Terminal
(Wire color)
SEL760Y
M102
31 (OR)
Voltage (V)
(−)
GI
MA
EM
LC
Rear window
defogger switch is
pushed
0
Rear window
defogger switch is
released
Battery voltage
EC
Ground
FE
CL
MT
Filament Check
1.
AT
NAEL0340
Attach probe circuit tester (in volt range) to middle portion of
each filament.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL263
2.
3.
If a filament is burned out, circuit tester registers 0 or 12 volts.
To locate burned out point, move probe to left and right along
filament. Test needle will swing abruptly when probe passes
the point.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
SEL265
EL-189
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Filament Check (Cont’d)
쐌
When measuring voltage, wrap tin foil around the top of
the negative probe. Then press the foil against the wire
with your finger.
SEL122R
Filament Repair
REPAIR EQUIPMENT
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
NAEL0341
NAEL0341S01
Conductive silver composition (Dupont No. 4817 or equivalent)
Ruler 30 cm (11.8 in) long
Drawing pen
Heat gun
Alcohol
Cloth
REPAIRING PROCEDURE
NAEL0341S02
1.
Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with a
cloth dampened in alcohol.
2. Apply a small amount of conductive silver composition to tip of
drawing pen.
Shake silver composition container before use.
3. Place ruler on glass along broken line. Deposit conductive silver composition on break with drawing pen. Slightly overlap
existing heat wire on both sides [preferably 5 mm (0.20 in)] of
the break.
BE540
4.
After repair has been completed, check repaired wire for continuity. This check should be conducted 10 minutes after silver
composition is deposited.
Do not touch repaired area while test is being conducted.
SEL012D
5.
Apply a constant stream of hot air directly to the repaired area
for approximately 20 minutes with a heat gun. A minimum distance of 3 cm (1.2 in) should be kept between repaired area
and hot air outlet. If a heat gun is not available, let the repaired
area dry for 24 hours.
SEL013D
EL-190
AUDIO
System Description
System Description
NAEL0342
GI
Refer to Owner’s Manual for audio system operating instructions.
BASE SYSTEM
NAEL0342S01
Power is supplied at all times
쐌 through 15A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 to audio unit terminal 6, and
쐌 to CD player terminal 4 (with CD player).
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
쐌 through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 to audio unit terminal 10, and
쐌 to CD player terminal 1 (with CD player).
Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit.
When the audio unit power knob is pushed to the ON position, audio signals are supplied
쐌 through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 15 and 16
쐌 to the front and rear speakers.
BOSE SYSTEM
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
NAEL0342S02
Power is supplied at all times
쐌 through 15A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 to audio unit terminal 6,
쐌 to audio amp. relay terminal 3,
쐌 to rear speaker amp. terminal 11 and
쐌 to AUX box terminal 7 (with rear TV).
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
쐌 through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 to audio unit terminal 10,
쐌 to AUX box terminal 6 (with rear TV).
Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit.
Ground is supplied
쐌 to audio amp. relay terminal 2,
쐌 to front door speaker LH terminal 5 and
쐌 to front door speaker RH terminal 5
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157
쐌 to rear speaker amp. terminal 24 and
쐌 to AUX box terminal 8 (with rear TV)
쐌 through body grounds B11, B22 and D210
쐌 to rear TV switch terminal 3
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
When the audio unit POWER button is pressed, power is supplied to rear speaker amp. terminal 9 and audio
amp. relay terminal 1 from audio unit terminal 12. Then audio amp. relay is energized and power is supplied
쐌 to front door speaker LH terminal 4 and
쐌 to front door speaker RH terminal 4.
Audio signals are supplied
쐌 through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 15 and 16
쐌 to terminals 2 and 6 of the LH and RH front speakers and terminals 5, 7, 18 and 20 of the rear speaker
amp.
쐌 to LH and RH tweeters through terminals 1 and 3 of the front door speakers
쐌 to rear LH and RH speakers through terminals 1, 2, 25 and 26 of the rear speaker amp.
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-191
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/Base System
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/Base System
NAEL0343
MEL355N
EL-192
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/Base System (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL038M
IDX
EL-193
AUDIO
Schematic/BOSE System
Schematic/BOSE System
NAEL0344
MEL002Q
EL-194
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/BOSE System
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/BOSE System
NAEL0345
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL003Q
EL-195
IDX
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/BOSE System (Cont’d)
MEL004Q
EL-196
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/BOSE System (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL005Q
IDX
EL-197
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/BOSE System (Cont’d)
MEL006Q
EL-198
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/BOSE System (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL007Q
IDX
EL-199
AUDIO
Trouble Diagnoses
Trouble Diagnoses
NAEL0346
AUDIO UNIT
NAEL0346S01
Symptom
Possible causes
Repair order
Audio unit inoperative (no
digital display and no
sound from speakers).
1. 10A fuse
2. Poor audio unit case ground
3. Audio unit
1. Check 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)].
Turn ignition switch ON and verify that battery positive voltage is present at terminal 10 of audio unit.
2. Check audio unit case ground.
3. Remove audio unit for repair.
Audio unit presets are lost
when ignition switch is
turned OFF.
1. 15A fuse
2. Audio unit
1. Check 15A fuse [No. 4, located in fuse block (J/B)]
and verify that battery positive voltage is present at
terminal 6 of audio unit.
2. Remove audio unit for repair.
AM stations are weak or
noisy (FM stations OK).
1. Antenna
2. Poor audio unit ground
3. Audio unit
1. Check antenna.
2. Check audio unit ground.
3. Remove audio unit for repair.
FM stations are weak or
noisy (AM stations OK).
1. Window antenna
2. Audio unit
1. Check window antenna.
2. Remove audio unit for repair.
Audio unit generates noise 1. Poor audio unit ground
in AM and FM modes with 2. Loose or missing ground bonding
engine running.
straps
3. Ignition condenser or rear window
defogger noise suppressor condenser
4. Alternator
5. Ignition coil or secondary wiring
6. Audio unit
1. Check audio unit ground.
2. Check ground bonding straps.
3. Replace ignition condenser or rear window defogger
noise suppressor condenser.
4. Check alternator.
5. Check ignition coil and secondary wiring.
6. Remove audio unit for repair.
Audio unit generates noise
in AM and FM modes with
accessories on (switch
pops and motor noise).
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Poor audio unit ground
Antenna
Accessory ground
Faulty accessory
Check audio unit ground.
Check antenna.
Check accessory ground.
Replace accessory.
BASE SYSTEM
NAEL0346S02
Symptom
Individual speaker is noisy
or inoperative.
Possible causes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Repair order
1. Check speaker.
2. Check audio unit output voltages.
3. Check wires for open or short between audio unit
and speaker.
4. Remove audio unit for repair.
Speaker
Audio unit output
Speaker circuit
Audio unit
BOSE SYSTEM
NAEL0346S03
Symptom
Audio unit controls are
operational, but no sound
is heard from any speaker.
Possible causes
Repair order
1. 15A fuse
2. Audio unit output
3. Audio unit
1. Check 15A fuse [No. 4, located in fuse block (J/B)].
Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal 3
of audio amp. relay.
2. Check audio unit output voltage (Terminal 12).
3. Remove audio unit for repair.
All front speakers are inop- 1. Audio amp. relay
erative.
2. Audio amp. relay ground
3. Amp. ON signal
1. Check audio amp. relay.
2. Check audio amp. relay ground (Terminal 2).
3. Turn ignition switch ACC and audio unit ON. Verify
battery positive voltage is present at terminal 1 of
audio amp. relay.
Individual front speaker is
noisy or inoperative.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Speaker ground
Power supply
Audio unit output
Speaker
EL-200
Check speaker ground (Terminal 5).
Check power supply for speaker (Terminal 4).
Check audio unit output voltage for speaker.
Replace speaker.
AUDIO
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Symptom
Both rear speakers are
inoperative.
Individual rear speaker is
noisy or inoperative.
Possible causes
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Poor rear speaker amp. ground
Power supply
Amp. ON signal
Rear speaker amp.
Speaker
Audio unit/amp. output
Speaker circuit
Audio unit
1. Check rear speaker amp. ground circuit.
2. Check power supply for rear speaker amp. (Terminal
11).
3. Turn ignition switch ACC and audio unit ON. Verify
battery positive voltage is present at terminal 9 of
rear speaker amp.
4. Remove rear speaker amp. for repair.
1. Check speaker.
2. Check audio unit/amp. output.
3. Check wires for open or short between audio unit/
amp. and speakers.
4. Remove audio unit for repair.
Inspection
AUDIO UNIT AND AMP.
All
쐌
쐌
쐌
GI
Repair order
NAEL0347
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
NAEL0347S01
voltage inspections are made with:
Ignition switch ON or ACC
Audio unit ON
Audio unit and amps. connected (If audio unit or amp. is removed for inspection, supply a ground to the
case using a jumper wire.)
ANTENNA
NAEL0347S02
1. Using a jumper wire, clip an auxiliary ground between antenna and body.
쐌 If reception improves, check antenna ground (at body surface).
쐌 If reception does not improve, check main feeder cable for short circuit or open circuit.
Audio Unit Removal and Installation
MT
AT
TF
NAEL0348
1. Lock the CD changer unit mechanism (if so equipped) prior to removing a malfunctioning CD changer unit.
Refer to “LOCKING CD CHANGER UNIT MECHANISM”, EL-201.
2. Remove CD changer unit. Refer to BT-22, “INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY”.
LOCKING CD CHANGER UNIT MECHANISM
CL
PD
AX
NAEL0348S01
CAUTION:
쐌 Prior to removing a malfunctioning CD changer unit that will be shipped for repair, the changer
mechanism MUST BE LOCKED to prevent the mechanism from being damaged during shipping.
쐌 If a CD is jammed or unable to be removed from the unit, do NOT lock the changer mechanism. If
the unit is to be shipped for repair, carefully package the unit to prevent vibration and shock.
1. Eject and remove any CDs from the CD changer unit.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Wait until CD changer unit display is off and mechanism stops moving (mechanism sound stops).
3. Press any one of the disc selection buttons once. When a display shows on the CD changer unit, press
the same disc selection button again within 5 seconds.
쐌 The changer mechanism will lock itself within 10 seconds.
4. After mechanism stops moving (mechanism sound stops), disconnect the CD changer unit connectors.
NOTE:
After installing a new or remanufactured CD changer unit, switching the CD changer unit ON will automatically unlock the mechanism. A special unlocking procedure is not required.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-201
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — REMOTE —
Wiring Diagram — REMOTE —
NAEL0349
MEL008Q
EL-202
AUDIO ANTENNA
System Description
System Description
NAEL0350
Power is supplied at all times
쐌 through 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 to power antenna terminal 6.
Ground is supplied to the power antenna terminal 2 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
When the audio unit is turned to the ON position, battery positive voltage is supplied
쐌 through audio unit terminal 5
쐌 to power antenna terminal 4.
The antenna raises and is held in the extended position.
When the audio unit is turned to the OFF position, battery positive voltage is interrupted
쐌 from audio unit terminal 5
쐌 to power antenna terminal 4.
The antenna retracts.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-203
AUDIO ANTENNA
Wiring Diagram — P/ANT —
Wiring Diagram — P/ANT —
NAEL0351
MEL009Q
EL-204
AUDIO ANTENNA
Trouble Diagnoses
Trouble Diagnoses
NAEL0352
POWER ANTENNA
Symptom
Power antenna does not
operate.
GI
NAEL0352S01
Possible causes
MA
Repair order
1. 7.5A fuse
2. Audio unit signal
3. Grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and
M157
1. Check 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block
(J/B)]. Verify that battery positive voltage is present
at terminal 6 of power antenna.
2. Turn ignition switch and audio unit ON. Verify that
battery positive voltage is present at terminal 4 of
power antenna.
3. Check grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
Location of Antenna
EM
LC
EC
NAEL0353
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
YEL067K
BT
Antenna Rod Replacement
REMOVAL
1.
NAEL0354
HA
NAEL0354S01
Remove antenna nut and antenna base.
SC
IDX
MEL036G
EL-205
AUDIO ANTENNA
Antenna Rod Replacement (Cont’d)
2.
Withdraw antenna rod while raising it by operating antenna
motor.
MEL037G
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NAEL0354S02
Lower antenna rod by operating antenna motor.
Insert gear section of antenna rope into place with it facing
toward antenna motor.
As soon as antenna rope is wound on antenna motor, stop
antenna motor. Insert antenna rod lower end into antenna
motor pipe.
Retract antenna rod completely by operating antenna motor.
Install antenna nut and base.
MEL038G
EL-206
POWER SUNROOF
System Description
System Description
OUTLINE
NAEL0355
GI
NAEL0355S01
Electric sunroof system consists of
쐌 Sunroof switch
쐌 Sunroof motor
쐌 Smart entrance control unit
Smart entrance control unit controls retained power operation.
OPERATION
MA
EM
NAEL0355S02
The sunroof can be tilted up or down with the tilt switch.
The sunroof can be opened or closed automatically with the sunroof switch.
RETAINED POWER OPERATION
LC
EC
NAEL0355S04
When the ignition switch is turned to OFF position from ON or START position, power is supplied for 45 seconds
쐌 to power window relay terminal 2
쐌 from smart entrance control unit terminal 46.
Ground is always supplied
쐌 to power window relay terminal 1
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
When power and ground are supplied, power window relay continues to be energized, and the electrical sunroof can be operated.
When power is supplied, the electrical sunroof can be operated.
The retained power operation is canceled when the driver or passenger side door is opened.
RAP signal period can be changed by CONSULT-II. (EL-211)
INTERRUPTION DETECTION FUNCTION
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
NAEL0355S05
The CPU of sunroof motor monitors the sunroof motor operation and the sunroof position (full closed or other)
for sunroof by the signals from encoder and limit switch in sunroof motor.
When sunroof motor detects interruption during the following close operation,
쐌 automatic close operation when ignition switch is in the “ON” position
쐌 automatic close operation during retained power operation
sunroof switch controls the motor for open and the sunroof will operate about 150 mm (5.91 in).
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-207
POWER SUNROOF
Wiring Diagram — SROOF —
Wiring Diagram — SROOF —
NAEL0356
MEL010Q
EL-208
POWER SUNROOF
Wiring Diagram — SROOF — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL011Q
IDX
EL-209
POWER SUNROOF
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
“RETAINED PWR”
=NAEL0357
NAEL0357S01
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to
the data link connector.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
5.
Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.
If “SMART ENTRANCE” is not indicated, go to GI-41, “CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit”.
6.
Touch “RETAINED PWR”.
7.
Select diagnosis mode.
“DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST” and “WORK SUPPORT”
are available.
SEL670Y
SKIA3098E
SEL669Y
SEL751Y
SEL400Y
EL-210
POWER SUNROOF
CONSULT-II Application Items
CONSULT-II Application Items
“RETAINED PWR”
Data Monitor
NAEL0455S0101
MA
Description
IGN ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.
DOOR SW-AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH.
EM
LC
Active Test
NAEL0455S0102
Test Item
EC
Description
This test is able to supply RAP signal (power) from smart entrance control unit to power
window system, power sunroof system. Those systems can be operated when turning on
“RETAINED PWR” on CONSULT-II screen even if the ignition switch is tuned OFF.
NOTE:
During this test, CONSULT-II can be operated with ignition switch “OFF” position.
“RETAINED PWR” should be turned “ON” or “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen when
ignition switch is ON. Then turn ignition switch OFF for checking retained power
operation. CONSULT-II might be stuck if “RETAINED PWR” is turned “ON” or “OFF”
on CONSULT-II screen when ignition switch is OFF.
FE
CL
MT
AT
Work Support
NAEL0455S0103
Work Item
RETAINED PWR SET
GI
NAEL0455S01
Monitored Item
RETAINED PWR
NAEL0455
Description
RAP signal’s power supply period can be changed by mode setting. Selects RAP signal’s
power supply period between three steps.
쐌 MODE 1 (45 sec.)/MODE 2 (OFF)/MODE 3 (2 min.)
TF
PD
AX
SU
Trouble Diagnoses
NAEL0456
Symptom
Possible cause
Repair order
Power sunroof cannot be operated
using any switch.
1. 7.5A fuse, 40A fusible link and
M145 circuit breaker
2. Power window relay ground circuit
3. Sunroof motor ground circuit
4. Power window relay
5. Sunroof motor circuit
6. Sunroof switch
7. Sunroof switch circuit
8. Sunroof motor
1. Check 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in fuse block
(J/B)], 40A fusible link (letter f, located in fuse and
fusible link box) and M145 circuit breaker. Turn ignition switch “ON” and verify battery positive voltage is
present at terminals 2 and 3 of power window relay
and terminal 1 of sunroof motor.
2. Check power window relay ground circuit.
3. Check sunroof motor ground circuit.
4. Check power window relay.
5. Check the wire between power window relay and
sunroof motor.
6. Check sunroof switch.
7. Check harness between sunroof switch and sunroof
motor.
8. Check sunroof motor.
Power sunroof cannot be operated
using one of the sunroof switches.
1. Sunroof switch
2. Sunroof switch circuit
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
1. Check sunroof switch.
2. Check the harness between sunroof motor and sunroof switch.
IDX
EL-211
POWER SUNROOF
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Symptom
Power sunroof cannot be opened
or closed fully.
Possible cause
1. Full closed position not initialized
2. Sunroof slide mechanism
3. Sunroof switch
4. Sunroof switch circuit
5. Sunroof motor
Retained power operation does not 1. RAP signal circuit
operate properly.
2. Driver or passenger side door
switch circuit
3. Smart entrance control unit
EL-212
Repair order
1.
2.
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
Initialize full closed position.
Check the following.
Check obstacles in sunroof, etc.
Check worn or deformed sunroof.
Check sunroof sash tilted too far inward or outward.
Check sunroof switch.
Check harness between sunroof motor and sunroof
switch.
5. Replace sunroof motor.
1. Check RAP signal.
a. (With CONSULT-II)
Check RAP signal with CONSULT-II. Use “ACTIVE
TEST” mode, “RETAINED PWR” in “SMART
ENTRANCE”. (Refer to EL-211.)
If NG, go to the step b. below.
b. Verify 12 positive voltage from smart entrance control unit is present at terminal 2 of power window
relay:
쐌 Within 45 seconds after ignition switch turns off.
쐌 When front door LH and RH is closed.
2. Check harness between smart entrance control unit
and driver or passenger side door switch.
Check driver or passenger side door switch.
Check driver or passenger side door switch.
3. Check smart entrance control unit. (EL-368)
DOOR MIRROR
Wiring Diagram — MIRROR —
Wiring Diagram — MIRROR —
NAEL0360
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL012Q
EL-213
IDX
GLASS HATCH OPENER
Wiring Diagram — T&FLID —
Wiring Diagram — T&FLID —
NAEL0460
MEL048Q
EL-214
POWER SEAT
Wiring Diagram — SEAT —
Wiring Diagram — SEAT —
NAEL0361
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL830L
EL-215
IDX
POWER SEAT
Wiring Diagram — SEAT — (Cont’d)
MEL601F
EL-216
HEATED SEAT
Wiring Diagram — HSEAT —
Wiring Diagram — HSEAT —
NAEL0362
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL013Q
EL-217
IDX
HEATED SEAT
Wiring Diagram — HSEAT — (Cont’d)
MEL014Q
EL-218
HEATED SEAT
Wiring Diagram — HSEAT — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL015Q
IDX
EL-219
HEATED SEAT
Seatback Heating Unit
Seatback Heating Unit
NAEL0363
SBT314
EL-220
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location
GI
NAEL0364
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEL701Y
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-221
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
System Description
System Description
=NAEL0365
OPERATIVE CONDITION
NAEL0365S01
The drive position can be set in 2 ways, manually and automatically.
Manual Operation
NAEL0365S0101
The driver’s seat can be adjusted for sliding, reclining, front cushion height and rear cushion height with the
LH power seat switches. The manual operation can be adjusted with the IGN key in any position.
Automatic Operation
NAEL0365S0102
The driver’s seat is adjusted to the proper positions for the driver automatically, in 3 different ways: MEMORY
AUTOMATIC SET, AUTOMATIC EXITING SETTING and AUTOMATIC SET RETURN. (Automatic Drive Positioner = ADP)
CONDITIONS INHIBITING AUTOMATIC OPERATION
NAEL0365S02
Automatic memory setting procedures are suspended under any of the following conditions:
1) When vehicle speed is more than 7 km/h (4 MPH).
2) When driver’s side power seat switch is turned on.
3) When any two of the switches (set switch and memory switches 1 and 2) are turned ON.
4) When cancel switch is turned on.
5) When selector lever is in any position other than “P”.
6) When ignition switch is turned to “START” position.
(Operation resumes when ignition switch is returned to “ON”.)
7) When detention switch malfunction is detected:
쐌 Detention switch failure is sensed when detention switch remains off for at least 2 seconds at a vehicle
speed of greater than 7 km/h (4 MPH).
FAIL-SAFE SYSTEM
Output Failure
NAEL0365S03
NAEL0365S0301
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, if any of the parts (indicated in the following chart) move more
than the specified amount within a period “T2” when no “ON” input is sent from any of the switches (indicated
in the following chart), or an output from the automatic drive positioner is not produced, an output failure is
sensed. Motor operation will be suspended automatically, and all automatic operations will be ineffective. (In
this case, the motor will not operate manually.)
OPERATED PORTION
T2
Allowable measurement
Seat sliding
Approx. 2.5 sec.
Within 6 mm (0.24 in)
Seat reclining
Same as above
Change angle within 1°
Absolving
NAEL0365S0302
When moving selector lever back to “P” position after having moved it to any position except “P”, fail-safe
operation will be canceled.
INITIALIZATION
NAEL0365S04
After reconnecting battery cable, perform initialization procedure A or B. If initialization has not been performed,
automatic drive positioner will not operate.
PROCEDURE A
1) Insert key in the ignition key cylinder. (Ignition switch is in “OFF” position.)
2) Open , close , open driver side door. (Do not perform with the door switch operation.)
3) End
PROCEDURE B
1) Drive the vehicle at more than 25 km/h (16 MPH).
2) End
EL-222
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
System Description (Cont’d)
MEMORY AUTOMATIC SET
=NAEL0365S05
Two drive positions can be retained in the memory. Press memory switch to set driver’s seat to preset position.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEL592W
NOTE:
쐌 When memory switch for which driver’s seat positions are already retained in memory is pressed, new seat
positions will be retained in memory in place of the previously set positions.
쐌 Drive position is erased from the memory when battery cable is disconnected more than 30 seconds. After
connecting battery cable, perform initialization procedures.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL593W
EL-223
IDX
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
System Description (Cont’d)
NOTE:
1) Do not keep cancel switch pressed as it will not operate.
2) Automatic exiting setting will be performed.
3) The driver’s seat position (see the following Table) operates in the order of priority.
The order of priority
Operated portion
1
Seat sliding
2
Seat reclining
3
Seat front lifting
4
Seat rear lifting
AUTOMATIC EXITING SETTING
NAEL0365S06
“Exiting” positions:
Driver’s seat ... Slides about 40 mm (1.57 in) rear from normal sitting position.
SEL594W
AUTOMATIC SET RETURN
NAEL0365S07
With driver’s seat set to the “exiting” position, operating one of the following procedures moves it to the position previously retained in memory.
SEL595W
EL-224
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Schematic
Schematic
NAEL0366
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL016Q
EL-225
IDX
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Wiring Diagram — AUT/DP —
Wiring Diagram — AUT/DP —
NAEL0367
MEL017Q
EL-226
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Wiring Diagram — AUT/DP — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL018Q
IDX
EL-227
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Wiring Diagram — AUT/DP — (Cont’d)
MEL019Q
EL-228
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Wiring Diagram — AUT/DP — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL186M
IDX
EL-229
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Wiring Diagram — AUT/DP — (Cont’d)
MEL187M
EL-230
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
On Board Diagnosis
On Board Diagnosis
NAEL0368
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL354X
HOW TO PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
NAEL0368S01
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL596W
*1: If no malfunction is indicated, self-diagnosis will end after the vehicle speed sensor diagnosis is performed.
*2: Diagnosis ends after self-diagnostic results have been indicated for 10 minutes if left unattended.
EL-231
IDX
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
On Board Diagnosis (Cont’d)
MALFUNCTION CODE TABLE
=NAEL0368S02
In this mode, a malfunction code is indicated by the number of flashes from the automatic drive positioner
indicator lamps (indicator lamp 1, indicator lamp 2) as shown below.
SEL597WA
Code
No.
Detected
items
Diagnostic procedure
Reference
page
1
Seat
sliding
PROCEDURE 2
(Sliding encoder check)
PROCEDURE 6
(Sliding motor check)
2
Seat
reclining
3
Seat
lifting
front
Code
No.
Detected
items
Diagnostic procedure
Reference
page
EL-238
EL-246
4
Seat
lifting
rear
PROCEDURE 5
[Lifting encoder (rear) check]
PROCEDURE 9
[Lifting motor (rear) check]
EL-244
EL-249
PROCEDURE 3
(Reclining encoder check)
PROCEDURE 7
(Reclining motor check)
EL-240
EL-247
9
Vehicle
speed
sensor
PROCEDURE 12
(Vehicle speed sensor check)
EL-252
PROCEDURE 4
[Lifting encoder (front) check]
PROCEDURE 8
[Lifting motor (front) check]
EL-242
EL-248
EL-232
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses
Trouble Diagnoses
WORK FLOW
NAEL0369
GI
NAEL0369S01
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEL599W
*1
EL-231
*2
BT
EL-232
HA
SC
IDX
EL-233
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
PRELIMINARY CHECK
NAEL0369S02
SEL600W
*1: After reconnecting battery cable, perform initialization procedure A or B.
If initialization has not been performed, automatic drive positioner
will not operate.
PROCEDURE A
1) Insert key in the ignition key cylinder. (Ignition switch is in
“OFF” position.)
2) Open , close , open driver side door. (Do not perform with
the door switch operation.)
3) End
PROCEDURE B
1) Drive the vehicle at more than 30 km/h (19 MPH).
EL-234
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
2) End
After performing preliminary check, go to symptom chart
below.
Before starting trouble diagnoses below, perform preliminary
check, EL-234. Symptom numbers in the symptom chart correspond with those of preliminary check.
SYMPTOM CHART
1
No seat system functions operate.
2
Some of the seat
system functions
do not operate
during automatic/
manual operation.
3
240
242
244
246
247
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5
[Lifting encoder (rear) check]
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6
(Sliding motor check)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7
(Reclining motor check)
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
X
Sliding
X
Reclining
TF
X
Lifting (Front)
PD
Lifting (Rear)
AX
No functions operate during automatic operation, and some/all functions do not during manual operation.
Sliding
4
238
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4
[Lifting encoder (front) check]
SYMPTOM
237
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3
(Reclining encoder check)
)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2
(Sliding encoder check)
REFERENCE PAGE (EL-
Diagnostic procedure
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
(Power supply and ground circuit
for Driver’s seat control unit)
PROCEDURE
NAEL0369S03
GI
Some of the seat
system functions Reclining
do not operate
during automatic Lifting (Front)
operation.
Lifting (Rear)
5
No automatic operation functions
operate.
6
Drive position cannot be retained
in the memory.
7
Sliding
Does not operate
during manual
Reclining
operation. (Operates during auto- Lifting (Front)
matic operation.)
Lifting (Rear)
8
Automatic operation cannot be
canceled.
9
Memory indicator does not light up.
SU
X
BR
X
X
X
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
X : Applicable
IDX
EL-235
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
1
No seat system functions operate.
2
Some of the seat
system functions
do not operate
during automatic/
manual operation.
252
255
255
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 14
(Memory indicator check)
251
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 13
(Seat memory switch check)
250
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 12
(Key, park position, door switch
and vehicle speed sensor check)
249
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 11
(Cancel switch check)
SYMPTOM
248
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 10
(Power seat switch check)
)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 9
[Lifting motor (rear) check]
REFERENCE PAGE (EL-
Diagnostic procedure
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 8
[Lifting motor (front) check]
PROCEDURE
Sliding
Reclining
Lifting (Front)
Lifting (Rear)
3
No functions operate during automatic operation, and some/all functions do not during manual operation.
4
Sliding
Some of the seat
system functions Reclining
do not operate
during automatic Lifting (Front)
operation.
Lifting (Rear)
5
No automatic operation functions
operate.
6
Drive position cannot be retained
in the memory.
7
Sliding
Does not operate
during manual
Reclining
operation. (Operates during auto- Lifting (Front)
matic operation.)
Lifting (Rear)
8
Automatic operation cannot be
canceled.
9
Memory indicator does not light up.
X
X
X
(ACC, ON
START
signal)
X
X
X
X
(IGN ON
signal)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X : Applicable
EL-236
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
=NAEL0369S04
GI
(Power supply and ground circuit for driver’s seat control unit)
Power Supply Circuit Check
NAEL0369S0401
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 1 and ground.
Ignition switch position
EM
Terminals
OFF
1 - Ground
SEL601W
ACC
ON
MA
START
Battery voltage
LC
If NG, check the following.
쐌 40A fusible link (letter f, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
쐌 Circuit breaker
쐌 Harness for open or short between circuit breaker and seat
control unit LH
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
Ground Circuit Check
NAEL0369S0402
Check continuity between seat control unit LH terminal 33 and
ground.
Terminals
Continuity
33 - Ground
Yes
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL602W
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-237
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2
=NAEL0369S05
(Sliding encoder check)
1
CHECK SLIDING ENCODER OUTPUT SIGNAL
Measure voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 18 and ground with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope when power seat
slide is operated.
SEL603W
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Sliding encoder is OK.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
CHECK SLIDING ENCODER INPUT SIGNAL
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 17 and ground.
SEL604W
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Replace seat control unit LH.
EL-238
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK SLIDING ENCODER OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect seat control unit LH connector and sliding device LH connector.
2. Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and sliding device LH connector.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL605WA
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair harness.
4
CL
MT
CHECK SLIDING ENCODER SHORT CIRCUIT
Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and ground.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEL606W
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace sliding encoder.
NG
䊳
Repair harness.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-239
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3
=NAEL0369S06
(Reclining encoder check)
1
CHECK RECLINING ENCODER OUTPUT SIGNAL
Measure voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 29 and ground with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope when power seat
reclining is operated.
SEL607W
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Reclining encoder is OK.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
CHECK RECLINING ENCODER INPUT SIGNAL
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 17 and ground.
SEL608W
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Replace seat control unit LH.
EL-240
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK RECLINING ENCODER OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect seat control unit LH connector and reclining device LH connector.
2. Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and reclining LH connector.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL609WA
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair harness.
4
CL
MT
CHECK RECLINING ENCODER SHORT CIRCUIT
Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and ground.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEL610W
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace reclining encoder.
NG
䊳
Repair harness.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-241
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4
=NAEL0369S07
[Lifting encoder (front) check]
1
CHECK LIFTING ENCODER (FRONT) OUTPUT SIGNAL
Measure voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 19 and ground with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope when power seat
lifting (front) is operated.
SEL611W
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Lifting encoder (front) is OK.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
CHECK LIFTING ENCODER (FRONT) INPUT SIGNAL
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 17 and ground.
SEL612W
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Replace seat control unit LH.
EL-242
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK LIFTING ENCODER (FRONT) OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect seat control unit LH connector and front lifting device LH connector.
2. Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and front lifting device LH connector.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL613WA
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair harness.
4
CL
MT
CHECK LIFTING ENCODER (FRONT) SHORT CIRCUIT
Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and ground.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEL614W
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace lifting encoder (front).
NG
䊳
Repair harness.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-243
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5
=NAEL0369S08
[Lifting encoder (rear) check]
1
CHECK LIFTING ENCODER (REAR) OUTPUT SIGNAL
Measure voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 30 and ground with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope when power seat
lifting (rear) is operated.
SEL615W
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Lifting encoder (rear) is OK.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
CHECK LIFTING ENCODER (REAR) INPUT SIGNAL
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 17 and ground.
SEL616W
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Replace seat control unit LH.
EL-244
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK LIFTING ENCODER (REAR) OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect seat control unit LH connector and rear lifting device LH connector.
2. Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and rear lifting device LH connector.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL617WA
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair harness.
4
CL
MT
CHECK LIFTING ENCODER (REAR) SHORT CIRCUIT
Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and ground.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEL618W
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace lifting encoder (rear).
NG
䊳
Repair harness.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-245
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6
=NAEL0369S09
(Sliding motor check)
1
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL TO SLIDING MOTOR
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminals 3 or 10 and ground.
SEL619W
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Replace seat control unit LH.
2
CHECK SLIDING MOTOR
1. Disconnect sliding device LH connector.
2. Apply 12V DC direct current to motor and check operation.
SEL620WA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check harness for operation between seat control unit LH and sliding motor.
NG
䊳
Replace sliding motor.
EL-246
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7
=NAEL0369S10
GI
(Reclining motor check)
1
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL TO RECLINING MOTOR
MA
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminals 4 or 12 and ground.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL621W
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Replace seat control unit LH.
2
CL
MT
CHECK RECLINING MOTOR
AT
1. Disconnect reclining device LH connector.
2. Apply 12V DC direct current to motor and check operation.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL622WA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check harness for operation between seat control unit LH and reclining motor.
NG
䊳
Replace reclining motor.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-247
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 8
=NAEL0369S11
[Lifting motor (front) check]
1
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL TO LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT)
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminals 5 or 13 and ground.
SEL623W
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Replace seat control unit LH.
2
CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT)
1. Disconnect front lifting device LH connector.
2. Apply 12V DC direct current to motor and check operation.
SEL624WA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check harness for operation between seat control unit LH and lifting motor (front).
NG
䊳
Replace lifting motor (front).
EL-248
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 9
=NAEL0369S12
GI
[Lifting motor (rear) check]
1
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL TO LIFTING MOTOR (REAR)
MA
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminals 6 or 7 and ground.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL625W
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Replace seat control unit LH.
2
CL
MT
CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR)
AT
1. Disconnect rear lifting device LH connector.
2. Apply 12V DC direct current to motor and check operation.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL626WA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check harness for operation between seat control unit LH and lifting motor (rear).
NG
䊳
Replace lifting motor (rear).
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-249
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 10
=NAEL0369S13
(Power seat switch check)
1
CHECK POWER SEAT SWITCH
1. Disconnect power seat switch LH connector.
2. Check continuity between power seat switch terminals.
SEL569X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Ground circuit for power seat switch
쐌 Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and power seat switch
NG
䊳
Replace power seat switch.
EL-250
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 11
=NAEL0369S14
GI
(Cancel switch check)
1
CHECK CANCEL SWITCH
MA
1. Disconnect cancel switch connector.
2. Check continuity between cancel switch terminals.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL628WA
OK or NG
OK
NG
䊳
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Ground circuit for cancel switch
쐌 Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and cancel switch
Replace cancel switch.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-251
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 12
=NAEL0369S15
(Key, detention, door switch and vehicle speed signal check)
1
CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 2 and ground.
SEL629W
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 Key switch
쐌 Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse
쐌 Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and key switch
2
CHECK IGNITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (ON AND START)
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminals and ground.
SEL630W
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 7.5A fuse [No. 26, located in fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and fuse
EL-252
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 21 and ground.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL631W
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Park position switch
쐌 Park position switch ground circuit
쐌 Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and park position switch
4
CHECK DRIVER DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
CL
MT
AT
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 9 and ground.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL632W
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Driver door switch
쐌 Driver door switch ground circuit
쐌 Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and driver door switch
5
CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
BR
ST
RS
BT
Does speedometer operate normally?
Yes or No
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Check speedometer and ABS actuator and electric unit circuit. Refer to EL-132.
HA
SC
IDX
EL-253
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
6
CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL PULL UP VOLTAGE
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 32 and ground.
SEL633W
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and combination meter.
NG
䊳
Repair harness.
EL-254
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 13
=NAEL0369S16
GI
(Seat memory switch check)
1
CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH
MA
1. Disconnect seat memory switch connector.
2. Check continuity between seat memory switch terminals.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL634WA
CL
OK or NG
OK
NG
䊳
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Ground circuit for seat memory switch
쐌 Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and seat memory switch
Replace seat memory switch.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 14
AT
NAEL0369S17
(Memory indicator check)
1
MT
TF
CHECK INDICATOR LAMP
Check indicator lamp illumination.
PD
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Replace seat memory switch (indicator lamp).
2
AX
SU
CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR INDICATOR LAMP
1. Disconnect seat memory switch connector.
2. Check voltage between seat memory switch terminal and ground.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL635WA
HA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and seat memory switch
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 7.5A fuse [No. 24 located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 Harness for open or short between fuse and indicator lamp
SC
IDX
EL-255
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
System Description
System Description
NAEL0461
Refer to EC-81, “Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) System” in “ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC
DESCRIPTION CONTROL SYSTEM”.
EL-256
POWER WINDOW
System Description
System Description
NAEL0378
Power is supplied at all times
쐌 from 40A fusible link (letter f, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
쐌 to circuit breaker terminal 1
쐌 through circuit breaker terminal 2
쐌 to power window relay terminal 3,
쐌 to power window main switch terminal 19, and
쐌 to front power window switch RH terminal 10.
With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied
쐌 through 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 27
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 46 and
쐌 to power window relay terminal 2.
Ground is supplied to power window relay terminal 1
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
The power window relay is energized and power is supplied
쐌 through power window relay terminal 5
쐌 to power window main switch terminal 10,
쐌 to front power window switch RH terminal 14 and
쐌 to rear power window switch LH and RH terminals 4.
MANUAL OPERATION
Front Door LH
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
NAEL0378S01
NAEL0378S0101
Ground is supplied
쐌 to power window main switch terminal 17
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
WINDOW UP
When the front LH switch in the power window main switch is pressed in the up position, power is supplied
쐌 to front power window regulator LH terminal 1
쐌 through power window main switch terminal 8.
Ground is supplied
쐌 to front power window regulator LH terminal 3
쐌 through power window main switch terminal 11.
Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released.
WINDOW DOWN
When the LH switch in the power window main switch is pressed in the down position, power is supplied
쐌 to front power window regulator LH terminal 3
쐌 through power window main switch terminal 11.
Ground is supplied
쐌 to front power window regulator LH terminal 1
쐌 through power window main switch terminal 8.
Then, the motor lowers the window until the switch is released.
Front Door RH
NAEL0378S0102
Ground is supplied
쐌 to power window main switch terminal 17
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
NOTE:
Numbers in parentheses are terminal numbers, when power window switch is pressed in the UP and DOWN
positions respectively.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-257
POWER WINDOW
System Description (Cont’d)
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH OPERATION
When front RH switch in the power window main switch is pressed UP or DOWN, power window main switch
sends window up or down signal to front power window switch RH with power window serial link communication line. Refer to “POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK” (EL-259). Signals are supplied
쐌 through power window main switch terminal 14
쐌 to front power window switch RH terminal 16.
The subsequent operation is the same as the front power window switch RH operation.
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH OPERATION
Power is supplied
쐌 through front power window switch RH (8, 9)
쐌 to front power window regulator RH (1, 3).
Ground is supplied
쐌 to front power window regulator RH (3, 1)
쐌 through front power window switch RH (9, 8)
쐌 to front power window RH terminal 11
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
Then, the motor raises or lowers the window until the switch is released.
Rear Door LH
NAEL0378S0103
Ground is supplied
쐌 to power window main switch terminal 17
쐌 through body grounds the M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
NOTE:
Numbers in parentheses are terminal numbers, when the power window switch is pressed in the UP and
DOWN positions.
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH OPERATION
Power is supplied
쐌 through power window main switch terminal (1, 3)
쐌 to rear power window switch LH terminal (5, 2)
The subsequent operation is the same as the rear power window switch LH operation.
REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH
Power is supplied
쐌 through rear power window switch LH (1, 3)
쐌 to rear power window regulator LH (1, 2)
Ground is supplied
쐌 to rear power window regulator LH (2, 1)
쐌 through rear power window switch LH (3, 1)
쐌 to rear power window switch LH terminal (2, 5)
쐌 through power window main switch terminal (3, 1)
Then, the motor raises or lowers the window until the switch is released.
Rear Door RH
NAEL0378S0104
Rear door RH windows will rise and lower in the same manner as the rear door LH window.
AUTO OPERATION
NAEL0378S02
The power window AUTO feature enables the driver or front passenger to open or close the driver’s and front
passenger’s window without holding the window switch in the up or down position.
The AUTO feature only operates on the driver’s and front passenger’s window upward and downward movement.
POWER WINDOW LOCK
NAEL0378S03
The power window lock is designed to lock operation of all windows except for driver’s door window.
When the lock switch is pressed to lock position, the ground of the front and rear power window switches, in
the power window main switch, is disconnected. This prevents the power window motors from operating.
EL-258
POWER WINDOW
System Description (Cont’d)
RETAINED POWER OPERATION
NAEL0378S04
When the ignition switch is turned to OFF position from ON or START position, power is supplied for 45 seconds
쐌 to power window relay terminal 2
쐌 from smart entrance control unit terminal 46.
Ground is always supplied
쐌 to power window relay terminal 1
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
When power and ground are supplied, the power window relay continues to be energized, and the power window can be operated.
The retained power operation is canceled when the driver or passenger side door is opened.
RAP signal’s period can be changed by CONSULT-II. (EL-267)
INTERRUPTION DETECTION FUNCTION
NAEL0378S05
Power window main switch and front power window switch RH monitor the power window regulator motor
operation and the power window position (full closed or other) for driver’s and passenger’s power window by
the signals from encoder and limit switch in front power window regulator LH or RH.
When power window main switch or front power window switch RH detects interruption during the following
close operation in the driver’s or front passenger’s side door,
쐌 automatic close operation when ignition switch is in the “ON” position
쐌 automatic close operation during retained power operation
Power window main switch or front power window switch RH controls driver’s or front passenger’s power window regulator motor for open and the power window will be lowered about 150 mm (5.91 in).
POWER WINDOW OPENED/CLOSED OPERATION WITH KEY CYLINDER
NAEL0378S06
When ignition key switch is OFF, front power window can be opened or closed by turning the front door key
cylinder LH to UNLOCK/LOCK position.
쐌 Power window can be opened as the door key cylinder is kept fully turning to the UNLOCK position.
쐌 Power window can be closed as the door key cylinder is kept fully turning to the LOCK position.
The power window opening stops when the following operations are carried out:
쐌 While performing open/close the window, power window is stopped at the position as the door key cylinder is placed on Neutral.
쐌 When the ignition switch is turned ON while the power window opening is operated.
POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
NAEL0378S07
Power window main switch, front power window switch RH and smart entrance control unit transmit and
receive the signal by power window serial link.
The under-mentioned signal is transmitted from smart entrance control unit to power window main switch or
front power window switch RH.
쐌 Door lock or unlock signal (remote keyless entry system)
쐌 Power window down signal (remote keyless entry system)
The under-mentioned signal is transmitted from power window main switch to front power window switch RH.
쐌 Door lock or unlock signal (remote keyless entry system)
쐌 Power window open/closed operation signal by key cylinder
쐌 Power window lock signal
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-259
POWER WINDOW
Schematic
Schematic
NAEL0379
MEL020Q
EL-260
POWER WINDOW
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW —
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW —
NAEL0380
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL021Q
EL-261
IDX
POWER WINDOW
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (Cont’d)
MEL022Q
EL-262
POWER WINDOW
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL023Q
IDX
EL-263
POWER WINDOW
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (Cont’d)
MEL024Q
EL-264
POWER WINDOW
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL025Q
IDX
EL-265
POWER WINDOW
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
“RETAINED PWR”
NAEL0381
NAEL0381S01
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to
the data link connector.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
5.
Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.
If “SMART ENTRANCE” is not indicated, go to GI-41, “CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit”.
6.
Touch “RETAINED PWR”.
7.
Select diagnosis mode.
“DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST” and “WORK SUPPORT”
are available.
SEL670Y
SKIA3098E
SEL669Y
SEL751Y
SEL400Y
EL-266
POWER WINDOW
CONSULT-II Application Items
CONSULT-II Application Items
“RETAINED PWR”
Data Monitor
GI
NAEL0382S01
NAEL0382S0101
Monitored Item
MA
Description
IGN ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.
DOOR SW-AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH.
EM
LC
Active Test
NAEL0382S0102
Test Item
RETAINED PWR
NAEL0382
EC
Description
This test is able to supply RAP signal (power) from smart entrance control unit to power window
system, power sunroof system and headlamp battery saver control unit. Those systems can be
operated when turning on “RETAINED PWR” on CONSULT-II screen even if the ignition switch is
tuned OFF.
NOTE:
During this test, CONSULT-II can be operated with ignition switch in “OFF” position.
“RETAINED PWR” should be turned “ON” or “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen when ignition
switch is ON. Then turn ignition switch OFF to check retained power operation. CONSULT-II might be stuck if “RETAINED PWR” is turned “ON” or “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen
when ignition switch is OFF.
FE
CL
MT
AT
Work Support
NAEL0382S0103
Work Item
RETAINED PWR SET
TF
Description
Rap signal’s power supply period can be changed by mode setting. Selects rap signal’s power
supply period between three steps.
쐌 MODE 1 (45 sec.)/MODE 2 (OFF)/MODE 3 (2 min.)
PD
AX
SU
Trouble Diagnoses
Symptom
None of the power windows can be
operated using any switch.
Possible cause
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
7.5A fuse, 40A fusible link
M145 circuit breaker
Power window relay
M145 circuit breaker circuit
Power window relay circuit
Ground circuit
Power window main switch
NAEL0383
Repair order
1. Check 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in fuse block
(J/B)], 40A fusible link (letter f, located in fuse and
fusible link box).
2. Check M145 circuit breaker.
3. Check power window relay.
4. Check the following.
a. Harness between M145 circuit breaker and 40A
fusible link
b. Harness between M145 circuit breaker and power
window main switch
5. Check the following.
a. Harness between 7.5A fuse and power window
relay
b. Harness between M145 circuit breaker and power
window relay
6. Check the following.
a. Ground circuit of power window main switch terminal 17
b. Power window relay ground circuit
7. Check power window main switch.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-267
POWER WINDOW
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Symptom
Driver side power window cannot
be operated but other windows can
be operated.
Possible cause
1. Front power window regulator
LH circuit
2. Front power window regulator
LH
3. Power window main switch
Repair order
1. Check harness between power window main switch
and front power window regulator LH for open or
short circuit.
2. Check front power window regulator LH.
3. Check power window main switch.
Passenger side power window can- 1. Power supply for front power
not be operated but other window
window switch RH
can be operated.
2. Front power window switch RH
ground circuit
3. Front power window switch RH
circuit
4. Front power window regulator
RH circuit
5. Front power window regulator
RH
6. Power window main switch
7. Front power window switch RH
1. Check power supply for front power window switch
RH terminals 10 and 14.
2. Check front power window switch RH ground circuit.
3. Check harness between front power window switch
RH and power window main switch.
4. Check harness between front power window switch
RH and front power window regulator RH for open
or short circuit.
5. Check front power window regulator RH.
6. Check power window main switch.
7. Check front power window switch RH.
One or more rear power windows
except front window cannot be
operated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
a.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Rear power window switches
Rear power window regulators
Power window main switch
Rear power window circuit
Check rear power window switches.
Check rear power window regulator.
Check power window main switch.
Check the following.
Harness between the rear power window switches
(LH and RH) terminal 5 and power window relay
terminal 4
b. Harnesses between power window main switch and
rear power window switches for open/short circuit
c. Harnesses between rear power window switches
and rear power window regulator for open/short circuit
Power windows except driver’s side 1. Power window main switch
window cannot be operated using
power window main switch but can
be operated by power window
switches.
1. Check power window main switch.
Driver side power window automatic operation does not function
properly.
1. Power window main switch
2. Encoder and limit switch
1. Check power window main switch.
2. Check encoder and limit switch. (EL-270)
Front passenger side power window automatic operation does not
function properly.
1. Front power window switch RH
2. Encoder and limit switch
1. Check front power window switch RH.
2. Check encoder and limit switch. (EL-270)
EL-268
POWER WINDOW
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Symptom
Retained power operation does not
operate properly.
Possible cause
1. RAP signal circuit
2. Driver or passenger side door
switch circuit
3. Smart entrance control unit
Repair order
1. Check RAP signal.
a. (With CONSULT-II)
쐌 Check RAP signal with CONSULT-II.
Use “WORK SUPPORT” mode, “RETAINED PWR”
in “SMART ENTRANCE”. (Refer to EL-267.)
쐌 Check RAP signal with CONSULT-II.
Use “ACTIVE TEST” mode, “RETAINED PWR” in
“SMART ENTRANCE”.
(Refer to EL-266.)
If NG, go to the step b. below.
b. Verify 12 positive voltage from smart entrance control unit terminal 46 is present at terminal 2 of
power window relay:
쐌 Within 45 seconds after ignition switch turns off.*1
쐌 When front door LH and RH is closed.
2. Check the following.
a. Harness between smart entrance control unit and
driver or passenger side door switch for short circuit
b. Driver or passenger side door switch ground circuit
c. Driver or passenger side door switch
3. Check smart entrance control unit. (EL-368)
Passenger side power window can- 1. Power window main switch
not be operated using power win2. Power window main switch cirdow main switch but can be opercuit
ated by passenger side power window switch.
1. Check power window main switch. (EL-272)
2. Check harness for open or short circuit between
power window main switch terminal 14 and front
power window switch RH terminal 16.
Rear LH power window cannot be
operated using power window main
switch but can be operated by rear
LH power window switch.
1. Power window main switch
1. Check power window main switch. (EL-272)
Rear RH power window cannot be
operated using power window main
switch but can be operated by rear
RH power window switch.
1. Power window main switch
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
1. Check power window main switch. (EL-272)
AX
SU
Power window open/close operation 1. Front door key cylinder switch
with key cylinder does not operate
LH
properly.
2. Front door key cylinder switch
LH circuit
3. Power window main switch
*1: RAP signal’s period can be changed by CONSULT-II. (EL-267)
1. Check front door key cylinder switch LH.
2. Check harness for open or short circuit between
front door key cylinder switch LH and power window main switch.
3. Check power window main switch.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-269
POWER WINDOW
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
ENCODER AND LIMIT SWITCH CHECK
1
=NAEL0383S01
CHECK DOOR WINDOW SLIDE MECHANISM
Check the following.
쐌 Obstacles in window, glass molding, etc.
쐌 Worn or deformed glass molding
쐌 Door sash tilted too far inward or outward
쐌 Door window regulator
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Remove obstacles or repair door window slide mechanism.
2
CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO LIMIT SWITCH
1. Disconnect front power window regulator LH or RH harness connector.
2. Check voltage between power window main switch harness connector D6 terminal 9 (G/W) or front power window
switch RH harness connector D44 terminal 15 (G/W) and ground.
SEL686Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Replace power window main switch or front power window switch RH.
3
CHECK LIMIT SWITCH OPERATION
1. Connect front power window regulator LH or RH harness connector.
2. Check voltage between power window main switch harness connector D6 terminal 9 (G/W) or front power window
switch RH harness connector D44 terminal 15 (G/W) and ground during power window closing operation.
SEL687Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
EL-270
POWER WINDOW
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
4
GI
RESET LIMIT SWITCH
Reset limit switch. Refer to BT-20, “Front Door Glass Limit Switch Reset”. Then check voltage between power window
main switch harness connector D6 terminal 9 (G/W) or front power window switch RH harness connector D44 terminal 15
(G/W) and ground during power window closing operation at least ten times.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL687Y
FE
OK or NG
CL
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Replace power window regulator motor.
MT
5
CHECK ENCODER
Measure voltage between power window main switch harness connector D6 terminal 13 (G/Y) or front power window
switch RH harness connector D44 terminal 12 (G/Y) and ground with oscilloscope when power window is in automatic
closing operation.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL688Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace power window main switch.
NG
䊳
Replace power window regulator motor.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-271
POWER WINDOW
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
MAIN SWITCH OPERATION CHECK
Passenger Side Operation
1
NAEL0383S02
NAEL0383S0201
CHECK POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
2. Turn power window main switch to ON (UP or DOWN).
3. Check signal between power window main switch harness connector D6 terminal 14 (BR) and ground when power window is in open or close operation. (Use “SIMPLE OSCILLOSCOPE” in “SUB MODE” with CONSULT-II.)
SEL689Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
2. Turn power window main switch to ON (UP or DOWN).
3. Check signal between power window main switch harness connector D6 terminal 14 (BR) and ground when power window is in open or close operation.
SEL690Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Replace power window main switch.
EL-272
POWER WINDOW
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
2
GI
CHECK SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Check continuity between power window switch harness connector D6 terminal 14 (BR) and front power window switch
RH harness connector D44 terminal 16 (Y).
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL691Y
FE
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
INSPECTION END
No
䊳
Repair harness or connectors.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-273
POWER WINDOW
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Rear LH Side Window Operation
1
=NAEL0383S0202
CHECK POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
2. Check voltage between power window main switch harness connector D6 terminal 1 (R/B) or 3 (G/W) and ground
when rear power window LH side is in open or close operation.
SEL692Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Replace power window main switch.
2
CHECK SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Disconnect power window main switch connector and rear power window switch LH connector.
3. Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector D6 terminal 3 (G/W) and rear power window
switch LH harness connector D52 terminal 2 (B/W).
4. Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector D6 terminal 1 (R/B) and rear power window
switch LH harness connector D52 terminal 5 (W/B).
SEL796Y
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
INSPECTION END
No
䊳
Repair harness or connectors.
EL-274
POWER WINDOW
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Rear RH Side Window Operation
1
=NAEL0383S0203
GI
CHECK POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH OUTPUT
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
2. Check voltage between power window main switch harness connector D6 terminal 5 (B/W) or 7 (W/B) and ground
when rear power window RH side is in open or close operation.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL694Y
CL
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Replace power window main switch.
2
MT
CHECK SIGNAL CIRCUIT
AT
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Disconnect power window main switch connector and rear power window switch RH connector.
3. Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector D6 terminal 7 (W/B) and rear power window
switch RH harness connector D72 terminal 5 (W/B).
4. Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector D6 terminal 5 (B/W) and rear power window
switch RH harness connector D72 terminal 2 (B/W).
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
SEL795Y
ST
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
INSPECTION END
No
䊳
Repair harness or connectors.
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-275
POWER DOOR LOCK
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location
NAEL0384
SEL675Y
System Description
OPERATION
쐌
쐌
쐌
NAEL0385
NAEL0385S01
The lock/unlock switch (LH and RH) on door trim can lock and unlock all doors.
With the door key inserted in the key cylinder on front LH or back door, turning it to “LOCK”, will lock all
doors; turning it to “UNLOCK” once unlocks the corresponding door; turning it to “UNLOCK” again within
5 seconds after the first unlock operation unlocks all of the other doors. (Signals from door key cylinder
switch)
If the ignition key is in the ignition key cylinder and one or more of doors are open, setting the lock/unlock
switch to “LOCK” locks the doors once but then immediately unlock them. (Combination signals from key
switch and door switches) - (KEY REMINDER DOOR SYSTEM)
EL-276
POWER DOOR LOCK
Schematic
Schematic
NAEL0386
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL431P
EL-277
IDX
POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —
FIG. 1
NAEL0387
NAEL0387S01
MEL026Q
EL-278
POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — (Cont’d)
FIG. 2
NAEL0387S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL027Q
EL-279
IDX
POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — (Cont’d)
FIG. 3
NAEL0387S03
MEL028Q
EL-280
POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — (Cont’d)
FIG. 4
NAEL0387S04
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL434P
EL-281
IDX
POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — (Cont’d)
FIG. 5
NAEL0387S05
MEL852L
EL-282
POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — (Cont’d)
FIG. 6
NAEL0387S06
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL029Q
EL-283
IDX
POWER DOOR LOCK
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
“DOOR LOCK”
=NAEL0388
NAEL0388S01
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to
the data link connector.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Turn “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
5.
Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.
If “SMART ENTRANCE” is not indicated, go to GI-41, “CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit”.
6.
Touch “DOOR LOCK”.
7.
Select diagnosis mode.
“DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST” and “WORK SUPPORT”
are available.
SEL670Y
SKIA3098E
SEL669Y
SEL023X
SEL274W
EL-284
POWER DOOR LOCK
CONSULT-II Application Items
CONSULT-II Application Items
“DOOR LOCK”
Data Monitor
Monitored Item
NAEL0389
GI
NAEL0389S01
NAEL0389S0101
MA
Description
KEY ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch.
LOCK SW DR/AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH.
DOOR SW-RR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door switch (Rear).
UNLK SW DR/AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH.
KEY CYL LK-SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from key cylinder.
KEY CYL UN-SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from key cylinder.
LK BUTTON/SIG
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from keyfob.
UN BUTTON/SIG
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob.
IGN ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.
DOOR SW-AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH.
Active Test
Test Item
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
NAEL0389S0102
AT
Description
TF
ALL D/LK MTR
This test is able to check all door lock actuators lock operation. These actuators lock when
“ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
DR D/UN MTR
This test is able to check front door lock actuator LH unlock operation. The actuator unlocks
when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
PD
NON DR D/UN
This test is able to check door lock actuators (except front door lock actuator LH) unlock operation. These actuators unlock when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
AX
Work Support
Work Item
NAEL0389S0103
SU
Description
DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET
Select unlock mode can be changed in this mode. Selects ON-OFF of select unlock mode.
쐌 MODE 1 (ON)/MODE 2 (OFF)
BR
ANTI-LOCK OUT SET
Key reminder door mode can be changed in this mode. Selects ON-OFF of key reminder door
mode.
쐌 MODE 1 (ON)/MODE 2 (OFF)
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-285
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses
Trouble Diagnoses
NAEL0390
SYMPTOM CHART
287
288
290
291
292
294
296
SYMPTOM
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
DOOR SWITCH CHECK
KEY SWITCH (INSERT) CHECK
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK
FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK
BACK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CHECK
REFERENCE PAGE (EL-
)
NAEL0390S01
Key reminder door system does not operate
properly.
X
X
X
Specific door lock actuator does not operate.
X
Power door lock does not operate with door
lock and unlock switch (LH and RH) on door
trim.
X
Power door lock does not operate with front
door key cylinder operation.
X
Power door lock does not operate with back
door key cylinder operation.
X
X
X
X
X
X
EL-286
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
GI
=NAEL0390S02
Main Power Supply Circuit Check
NAEL0390S0201
Terminals
MA
Ignition switch
(+)
Connector
(–)
OFF
ACC
ON
EM
Ground
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
LC
Terminal
(Wire color)
49 (G/R)
M123
51 (W/R)
SEL007YA
EC
Ground Circuit Check
NAEL0390S0202
Terminals
FE
(+)
Continuity
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M122
43 (B)
M123
64 (B)
(–)
CL
Ground
SEL008Y
Yes
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-287
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DOOR SWITCH CHECK
1
=NAEL0390S03
CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check door switches (“DOOR SW-DR”, “DOOR SW-AS”, “DOOR SW-RR”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL009Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminals 1 (G/OR), 2 (Y) or 3 (R/L) and
ground.
SEL010Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-278.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Door switch is OK.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
EL-288
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
2
GI
CHECK DOOR SWITCH
1. Disconnect door switch connector.
2. Check the following.
쐌 Continuity between front door switch harness connector B9 (LH) or B68 (RH) terminals 1 and 2
쐌 Continuity between front door switch harness connector B9 (LH) or B68 (RH) terminal 3 and ground
쐌 Continuity between back door switch harness connector D208 terminals 1 and 2
쐌 Continuity between rear door switch harness connector B18 (LH) or B71 (RH) terminal 1 and ground
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEL287Y
OK or NG
OK
NG
䊳
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Door switches ground circuit (Front or back door) or rear door switches ground condition
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door switch
PD
AX
Replace door switch.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-289
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
KEY SWITCH (INSERT) CHECK
1
=NAEL0390S04
CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check key switch (“KEY ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL315W
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 25 (W/R) and ground.
SEL011Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-279.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Key switch is OK.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)
Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2.
SEL308X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and key switch
NG
䊳
Replace key switch.
EL-290
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK
1
=NAEL0390S05
GI
CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check door lock/unlock switch (“LOCK SW DR/AS”/“UNLK SW DR/AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL341W
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove key from ignition key cylinder.
2. Check the signal between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 33 (BR) and ground with oscilloscope when door lock/unlock switch is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
3. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec. just after door lock/unlock
switch is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEL699Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-283.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Door lock/unlock switch is OK.
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Ground circuit for each front power window switch
쐌 Harness for open or short between each front power window switch and smart
entrance control unit connector
If above systems are normal, replace the front power window switch.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-291
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK
1
=NAEL0390S06
CHECK FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK/UNLOCK SIGNAL)
With CONSULT-II
Check front door key cylinder switch (“KEY CYL LK-SW”/“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULTII.
SEL342WF
Without CONSULT-II
1. Check the signal between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 33 (BR) and ground with oscilloscope when key inserted in front door key cylinder is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
2. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec. just after key is turned “LOCK”
or “UNLOCK”.
SEL700Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-283.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Front door key cylinder switch LH is OK.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
EL-292
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
CHECK FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
GI
1. Disconnect front door key cylinder switch connector.
2. Check continuity between front door key cylinder switch terminals.
MA
2
EM
LC
EC
SEL313XB
FE
OK or NG
OK
NG
䊳
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Front door key cylinder switch LH ground circuit
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and power window
main switch
쐌 Harness for open or short between power window main switch and front door key cylinder switch LH
Replace front door key cylinder switch LH.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-293
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
BACK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK
1
=NAEL0390S07
CHECK BACK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK/UNLOCK SIGNAL)
With CONSULT-II
Check back door key cylinder switch (“KEY CYL LK-SW”/“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULTII.
SEL342WG
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminals 10 (LG) or 11 (Y) and ground.
SEL286Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-280.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Back door key cylinder switch is OK.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
EL-294
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
2
GI
CHECK BACK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
1. Disconnect back door key cylinder switch connector.
2. Check continuity between back door key cylinder switch terminals.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL315X
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Back door key cylinder switch ground circuit
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and back door key cylinder switch
NG
䊳
Replace back door key cylinder switch.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-295
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CHECK
1
CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
With CONSULT-II
Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “DOOR LOCK” with CONSULT-II.
Select “ALL D/LK MTR” and touch “ON”.
Then, select “DR D/UN MTR” and touch “ON”.
Select “NON DR D/UN” and touch “ON”.
=NAEL0390S08
SEL343W
NOTE:
If CONSULT-II is not available, skip this procedure and go to the next step.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Door lock actuator is OK.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
EL-296
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
2
GI
CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
쐌 Door lock actuator front LH
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M123 terminal 54 (L), 55 (W/PU) and ground.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL014Y
쐌 Door lock actuator front RH and rear
Chcek voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M123 terminal 54 (L), 56 (Y/B) and ground.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEL015Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-281.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Replace smart entrance control unit. (Before replacing smart entrance control unit, perform “DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK”.)
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-297
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
3
CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
1. Disconnect door lock actuator connector.
2. Apply 12V direct current to door lock actuator and check operation.
SEL318X
SEL319X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit connector and door
lock actuator.
NG
䊳
Replace door lock actuator.
EL-298
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location
GI
NAEL0391
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEL676Y
AX
SU
System Description
INPUTS
NAEL0392
NAEL0392S01
Power is supplied at all times
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 49 and
쐌 to key switch terminal 2
쐌 through 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)], and
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 51
쐌 through circuit breaker terminals 2 and 1 and
쐌 through 40A fusible link (letter f, located in fuse and fusible link box).
When the key switch is ON (ignition key is inserted in key cylinder), power is supplied
쐌 through key switch terminal 1
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 25.
When the front door switch LH is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 1
쐌 through front door switch LH terminal 1
쐌 to front door switch LH terminal 2
쐌 through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
When the front door switch RH is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 2
쐌 through front door switch RH terminal 1
EL-299
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
쐌 to front door switch RH terminal 2
쐌 through body grounds B55 and B75.
When the all doors switches are ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 3
쐌 through front door switches terminal 3
쐌 to front door switches case grounds, and
쐌 through rear door switches terminal 1
쐌 to rear door switches case grounds, and
쐌 through back door switch terminal 2
쐌 to back door switch terminal 1
쐌 through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
When lock/unlock switch LH is LOCK/UNLOCK, ground is supplied
쐌 to power window main switch terminal 17
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
Door lock or unlock operation signal is supplied
쐌 through power window main switch terminal 14
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 33.
When lock/unlock switch RH is LOCK/UNLOCK, ground is supplied
쐌 to front power window switch RH terminal 11
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
Door lock or unlock operation signal is supplied
쐌 through power window main switch terminal 14
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 33.
Remote controller signal is inputted to smart entrance control unit (The antenna of the system is combined
with smart entrance control unit).
Smart entrance control unit is connected to power window main switch (door lock and unlock switch) and front
power window switch RH (door lock and unlock switch) as serial link communication line. Refer to “POWER
WINDOW SERIAL LINK” (EL-259).
OPERATION
NAEL0392S02
The remote keyless entry system controls operation of the
쐌 power door lock
쐌 auto door lock
쐌 interior lamp
쐌 panic alarm
쐌 hazard and horn reminder
쐌 power window opener
OPERATED PROCEDURE
Power Door Lock Operation
NAEL0392S03
NAEL0392S0301
Smart entrance control unit receives a LOCK signal from keyfob. Smart entrance control unit locks all doors
with input of LOCK signal from keyfob.
When an UNLOCK signal is sent from keyfob once, driver’s door will be unlocked.
Then, if an UNLOCK signal is sent from keyfob again within 5 seconds, all other door will be unlocked.
Select unlock mode can be changed by CONSULT-II (EL-309).
Auto Door Lock Operation
NAEL0392S0308
Auto lock function signal is sent for operation when any of the following signals are not sent within 5 minutes
after the unlock signal is sent from the keyfob:
쐌 when door switch is turned ON for open.
쐌 when the ignition switch is turned ON.
쐌 when the lock signal is sent from the keyfob.
Auto door lock mode can be changed by CONSULT-II (EL-309).
EL-300
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
Hazard and Horn Reminder
NAEL0392S0302
Power is supplied at all times
쐌 to horn relay terminals 1 and 3
쐌 through 7.5A fuse (No. 52, located in the fusible link and fuse box), and
쐌 to horn relay terminal 6
쐌 through 10A fuse (No. 54, located in the fusible link and fuse box)
When smart entrance control unit receives LOCK or UNLOCK signal from keyfob with all doors closed, ground
is supplied
쐌 to horn relay terminal 2
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminal 42, and
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminals 47 and 48 from hazard warning lamp system.
Horn relay are now energized, and hazard warning lamp flashes and horn sounds as a reminder.
The hazard and horn reminder has C mode (horn chirp mode) and S mode (non-horn chirp mode).
Operating function of hazard and horn reminder
Lock
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
Unlock
CL
Hazard warning lamp
flash
Horn sound
Hazard warning lamp
flash
Horn sound
C MODE
Twice
Once
Once
—
S MODE
Twice
—
—
—
MODE 3
—
—
—
—
MODE 4
Twice
—
Once
—
MODE 5
Twice
Once
—
—
MODE 6
—
Once
Once
—
MT
AT
TF
PD
How to change hazard and horn reminder mode
With CONSULT-II
Hazard and horn reminder can be changed by CONSULT-II (EL-309).
Without CONSULT-II
When LOCK and UNLOCK signals are sent from the keyfob for more than 2 seconds at the same time, the
hazard and horn reminder mode is changed and hazard warning lamp flashes and horn sounds as follows:
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEL153WA
BT
NOTE:
Reminder mode setting cannot be changed without CONSULT-II for MODES 3, 4, 5, and 6. However, C and
S MODES can be changed without CONSULT-II.
HA
Interior Lamp Operation
SC
NAEL0392S0303
When the following input signals are both supplied:
쐌 door switch CLOSED (when all the doors are closed);
쐌 driver’s door LOCKED;
IDX
EL-301
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
remote keyless entry system turns on interior lamp and (for 30 seconds) with input of UNLOCK signal from
keyfob.
For detailed description, refer to “INTERIOR, STEP, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS”
(EL-97).
Panic Alarm Operation
NAEL0392S0304
When key switch is OFF (when ignition key is not inserted in key cylinder), remote keyless entry system turns
horn and headlamp on and off intermittently with input of PANIC ALARM signal from keyfob.
The alarm automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when smart entrance control unit receives any signal
from keyfob.
For detailed description, refer to “VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM” (EL-332).
The panic alarm button’s pressing time on keyfob can be changed with CONSULT-II (EL-309).
Power Window Opener Operation
NAEL0392S0307
The front power windows open when the unlock button on keyfob is activated and kept pressed for more than
3 seconds with the ignition key OFF. The windows keep opening if the unlock button is continuously pressed.
The power window opening stops when the following operations are carried out:
쐌 When the unlock button is kept pressed more than 15 seconds.
쐌 When the ignition switch is turned ON while the power window opening is operated.
쐌 When the unlock button is released.
The unlock button’s pressing time can be changed with CONSULT-II (EL-309).
Door Lock/Unlock and front power window down signal is sent from smart entrance control unit to power window main switch with power window serial link communication link. Refer to “POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK”
(EL-259). Signals are supplied
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminal 33
쐌 to power window main switch terminal 14 and
쐌 to front power window switch RH terminal 16.
EL-302
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Schematic
Schematic
NAEL0393
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL433O
EL-303
IDX
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — KEYLESS —
Wiring Diagram — KEYLESS —
FIG. 1
NAEL0394
NAEL0394S01
MEL030Q
EL-304
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — KEYLESS — (Cont’d)
FIG. 2
NAEL0394S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL031Q
EL-305
IDX
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — KEYLESS — (Cont’d)
FIG. 3
NAEL0394S03
MEL413O
EL-306
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — KEYLESS — (Cont’d)
FIG. 4
NAEL0394S05
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL032Q
EL-307
IDX
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
“MULTI REMOTE ENT”
NAEL0395
NAEL0395S01
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to
the data link connector.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
5.
Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.
If “SMART ENTRANCE” is not indicated, go to GI-41, “CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit”.
6.
Touch “MULTI REMOTE ENT”.
7.
Select diagnosis mode.
“DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST” and “WORK SUPPORT”
are available.
SEL670Y
SKIA3098E
SEL669Y
SEL751Y
SEL274W
EL-308
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
CONSULT-II Application Items
CONSULT-II Application Items
“MULTI REMOTE ENT”
Data Monitor
NAEL0457
GI
NAEL0457S01
NAEL0457S0101
Monitored Item
MA
Description
IGN ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ON position.
ACC ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position.
DOOR SW-RR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch.
KEY ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch.
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.
DOOR SW-AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door switch RH.
LOCK SW DR/AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH.
UNLK SW DR/AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH.
KEY CYL LK-SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from key cylinder switch.
LK BUTTON/SIG
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from keyfob.
UN BUTTON/SIG
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob.
TRUNK BTN/SIG
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk open signal from keyfob.
PANIC BTN
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of panic signal from keyfob.
UN BUTTON ON
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock switch form keyfob.
LK/UN BTN ON
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock/unlock signal at the same time from keyfob.
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
NOTE:
Even though TRUNK BTN/SIG is actually displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, it is not equipped, therefore, they cannot be activated.
Active Test
NAEL0457S0102
Test Item
PD
AX
Description
INT/IGN ILLUM
This test is able to check interior lamp and ignition key hole illumination operation. The interior
lamp and ignition key hole illumination are turned on when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is
touched.
SU
HAZARD
This test is able to check hazard reminder operation. The hazard lamp turns on when “ON” on
CONSULT-II screen is touched.
BR
TRUNK OUTPUT
This test is able to check trunk lid opener actuator operation. The trunk is unlocked when “ON”
on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
ST
HORN
This test is able to check panic alarm and horn reminder operations. The alarm activate for 0.5
seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
RS
HEAD LAMP
This test is able to check headlamps panic alarm operation. The headlamp illuminates for 0.5
seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
PW REMOTE DOWN SET
This test is able to check power window open operation. The front power windows activate for
10 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
NOTE:
Even though TRUNK OUTPUT is actually displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, it is not equipped, therefore, they cannot be activated.
Work Support
NAEL0457S0103
Test Item
BT
HA
SC
Description
REMO CONT ID CONFIR
It can be checked whether keyfob ID code is registered or not in this mode.
REMO CONT ID REGIST
Keyfob ID code can be registered.
REMO CONT ID ERASUR
Keyfob ID code can be erased.
EL-309
IDX
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
CONSULT-II Application Items (Cont’d)
Test Item
Description
MULTI ANSWER BACK SET
Hazard and horn reminder mode can be changed with this mode. Selects hazard and horn
reminder mode among six steps (EL-301).
AUTO LOCK SET
Auto door lock mode can be selected among the following periods:
쐌 MODE 1 (5 min.)/MODE 2 (OFF-Mode)/MODE 3 (1 min.)
PANIC ALARM SET
The panic alarm button’s pressing time on keyfob can be selected among the following periods:
쐌 MODE 1 (0.5 sec.)/MODE 2 (OFF-Mode)/MODE 3 (1.5 sec.)
TRUNK OPENER
The trunk lid opener button’s pressing time on keyfob can be selected among the following periods:
쐌 MODE 1 (0.5 sec.)/MODE 2 (OFF-Mode)/MODE 3 (1.5 sec.)
PW DOWN SET
The unlock button’s pressing time on keyfob can be selected among the following periods:
쐌 MODE 1 (3 sec.)/MODE 2 (OFF-Mode)/MODE 3 (5 sec.)
NOTE:
Even though TRUNK OPENER is actually displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, it is not equipped, therefore, they cannot be activated.
Trouble Diagnoses
NAEL0397
SYMPTOM CHART
NAEL0397S01
NOTE:
쐌 Always check keyfob battery before replacing keyfob.
쐌 The panic alarm operation of remote keyless entry system
does not activate with the ignition key inserted in the ignition
key cylinder.
Symptom
All functions of remote keyless entry system do
not operate.
Diagnoses/service procedure
Reference
page
(EL- )
1. Keyfob battery and function check
312
2. Power supply and ground circuit for smart entrance control
unit check
313
3. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure.
325
NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is
OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning.
The new ID of keyfob cannot be entered.
1. Keyfob battery and function check
312
2. Key switch (insert) check
317
3. Door switch check
315
4. Door lock/unlock switch LH check
318
5. Power supply and ground circuit for smart entrance control
unit check
313
6. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure.
325
NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is
OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning.
Door lock or unlock does not function.
(If the power door lock system does not operate
manually, check power door lock system. Refer to
EL-286)
1. Keyfob battery and function check
312
2. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure.
325
NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is
OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning.
EL-310
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Symptom
Hazard and horn reminder does not activate properly when pressing lock or unlock button of keyfob.
Diagnoses/service procedure
Reference
page
(EL- )
1. Keyfob battery and function check
312
2. Hazard reminder check
319
3. Horn reminder check*
320
*: Horn chirp can be activated or deactivated.
First check the horn chirp setting. Refer to “System Description”,
EL-301.
4. Door switch check
315
5. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure.
325
NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is
OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
Interior room lamp operation do not activate properly.
1. Interior room lamp operation check
322
2. Door switch check
315
Panic alarm (horn and headlamp) does not activate when panic alarm button is continuously
pressed.
1. Keyfob battery and function check
312
2. Theft warning operation check. Refer to “PRELIMINARY
CHECK” in “VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM”.
344
MT
3. Key switch (insert) check
317
AT
4. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure.
325
NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is
OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning.
CL
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-311
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERY AND FUNCTION
CHECK
=NAEL0397S02
1
CHECK REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERY
Remove battery (refer to EL-327) and measure voltage across battery positive and negative terminals, (+) and (−).
Voltage [V]:
2.5 - 3.0
NOTE:
Keyfob does not function if battery is not set correctly.
SEL237W
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Replace battery.
2
CHECK REMOTE CONTROLLER FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
Check keyfob function (“LK BUTTON/SIG”, “UN BUTTON/SIG”, “PANIC BTN”, “UN BUTTON ON” and “LK/UN BTN ON”)
in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL423Y
NOTE:
Even though TRUNK BTN/SIG is actually displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, it is not equipped, therefore, they cannot
be activated.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Keyfob is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to “SYMPTOM CHART”, EL-310.
NG
䊳
Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure.
EL-312
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK =NAEL0397S03 GI
1
CHECK MAIN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M123 terminal 49 (G/R) or 51 (W/R) and ground.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL018Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-304.
CL
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 40A fusible link (letter f, located in fuse and fusible link box)
쐌 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 M145 circuit breaker
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse
2
MT
AT
TF
CHECK IGNITION SWITCH “ACC” CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 26 (G/W) and ground while ignition switch is “ACC”.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL019Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-304.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-313
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
3
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 43 (B) or M123 terminal 64 (B)
and ground.
SEL020Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-304.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Power supply and ground circuits are OK.
NG
䊳
Check ground harness.
EL-314
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DOOR SWITCH CHECK
1
=NAEL0397S04
GI
CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check door switches (“DOOR SW-RR”, “DOOR SW-DR” and “DOOR SW-AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL024Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminals 1 (G/OR), 2 (Y) or 3 (R/L) and
ground.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEL021YD
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-305.
AX
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Door switch is OK.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-315
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
2
CHECK DOOR SWITCH
1. Disconnect door switch harness connector.
2. Check the following.
쐌 Continuity between front door switch harness connector B9 (LH) or B68 (RH) terminals 1 and 2
쐌 Continuity between front door switch harness connector B9 (LH) or B68 (RH) terminal 3 and ground
쐌 Continuity between back door switch harness connector D208 terminals 1 and 2
쐌 Continuity between rear door switch harness connector B18 (LH) or B71 (RH) terminal 1 and ground
SEL287Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Door switch ground circuit (Front or back door) or door switch ground condition (Rear
door)
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door switch
NG
䊳
Replace door switch.
EL-316
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
KEY SWITCH (INSERT) CHECK
1
=NAEL0397S05
GI
CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
MA
With CONSULT-II
Check key switch (“KEY ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL315W
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between control unit harness connector M122 terminal 25 (W/R) and ground.
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEL022Y
PD
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-304.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Key switch is OK.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
AX
SU
CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)
BR
Check continuity between key switch terminals 1 and 2.
ST
RS
BT
SEL308X
HA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and key switch
NG
䊳
Replace key switch.
SC
IDX
EL-317
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH LH CHECK
1
=NAEL0397S06
CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check door lock/unlock switch (“LOCK SW DR/AS”/“UNLK SW DR/AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL341W
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove key from ignition key cylinder.
2. Check the signal between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 33 (BR) and ground with an
oscilloscope when door lock/unlock switch is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
3. Make sure signals shown in the figure below can be detected during the first 10 sec. just after door lock/unlock switch
is turned to “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
SEL699Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-304.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Door lock/unlock switch is OK.
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Ground circuit for each front power window switch
쐌 Harness for open or short between each front power window switch and smart
entrance control unit connector
If above systems are normal, replace the front power window switch.
EL-318
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
HAZARD REMINDER CHECK
1
=NAEL0397S07
GI
CHECK HAZARD INDICATOR
MA
Check if hazard indicator flashes with hazard switch.
Does hazard indicator operate?
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
Check “hazard indicator” circuit.
EM
LC
2
CHECK HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION WITH CONSULT-II
With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “MULTI REMOTE ENT” with CONSULT-II.
2. Select “HAZARD” and touch “ON”.
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEL347W
NOTE: If CONSULT-II is not available, skip this procedure and go to the next step.
TF
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Hazard reminder operation is OK.
NG
䊳
Replace smart entrance control unit.
3
PD
AX
CHECK HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION WITHOUT CONSULT-II
Without CONSULT-II
Apply ground to smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 47 (GY/L) and 48 (GY/R).
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEL027Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-306.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
System is OK.
NG
䊳
Replace smart entrance control unit.
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-319
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
HORN REMINDER CHECK
1
=NAEL0397S08
CHECK HORN
Check if horn sounds with horn switch.
Does horn operate?
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
Check horn circuit.
2
CHECK HORN REMINDER OPERATION WITH CONSULT-II
With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “MULTI REMOTE ENT” with CONSULT-II.
2. Select “HORN” and touch “ON”.
SEL451Y
NOTE: If CONSULT-II is not available, skip this procedure and go to the next step.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Horn reminder operation is OK.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
3
CHECK HORN REMINDER OPERATION WITHOUT CONSULT-II
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector.
2. Apply ground to smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 42 (LG/B).
SEL028Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-306.
Does horn sound?
Yes
䊳
Replace smart entrance control unit.
No
䊳
GO TO 4.
EL-320
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK HORN RELAY
Check horn relay.
MA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Replace horn relay.
5
EM
CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR HORN RELAY
LC
1. Disconnect horn relay harness connector.
2. Check voltage between horn relay harness connector E118 terminal 1 (G/B) and ground.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEL326XA
AT
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 7.5A fuse [No. 52, located in fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 Harness for open or short between horn relay and fuse
6
TF
PD
CHECK HORN RELAY CIRCUIT
AX
1. Disconnect horn relay harness connector.
2. Check voltage between horn relay harness connector E118 terminals 3 (G/B) and 5 (R).
3. Check voltage between horn relay harness connector E118 terminals 6 (LG) and 7 (G).
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEL327XA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and horn relay.
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Harness for open or short between horn relay and fuse
쐌 Harness for open or short between horn relay and horns
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-321
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP OPERATION CHECK
1
=NAEL0397S09
CHECK ROOM INTERIOR LAMP
Check if the interior room lamp switch is in the “ON” position and the lamp illuminates.
Does interior room lamp illuminate?
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and interior room lamp
쐌 Interior room lamp
2
CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “MULTI REMOTE ENT” with CONSULT-II.
2. Select “INT/IGN ILLUM” and touch “ON”.
SEL312Y
Without CONSULT-II
Push unlock button of keyfob with all doors closed and driver’s door locked, and check voltage between smart entrance
control unit harness connector M122 terminal 31 (R/B) and ground.
SEL029Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-304.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
System is OK.
NG
䊳
Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and interior room
lamp.
EL-322
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
ID Code Entry Procedure
ID Code Entry Procedure
KEYFOB ID SET UP WITH CONSULT-II
=NAEL0398
GI
NAEL0398S01
NOTE:
If a keyfob is lost, the ID code of the lost keyfob must be
erased to prevent unauthorized use. When the ID code of a
lost keyfob is not known, all keyfob ID codes should be
erased. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all
remaining and/or new keyfob must be re-registered.
MA
EM
LC
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to
the data link connector.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEL670Y
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SKIA3098E
5.
Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.
If “SMART ENTRANCE” is not indicated, go to GI-41, “CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit”.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL669Y
6.
Touch “MULTI REMOTE ENT”.
HA
SC
IDX
SEL401Y
EL-323
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
ID Code Entry Procedure (Cont’d)
7.
Touch “WORK SUPPORT”.
SEL274W
8.
쐌
SEL424Y
The items are shown on the figure at left can be set up.
“REMO CONT ID CONFIR”
Use this mode to confirm if a keyfob ID code is registered or
not.
쐌 “REMO CONT ID REGIST”
Use this mode to register a keyfob ID code.
NOTE:
Register the ID code when keyfob or smart entrance control
unit is replaced, or when additional keyfob is required.
쐌 “REMO CONT ID ERASUR”
Use this mode to erase a keyfob ID code.
Refer to the EL-309, “WORK SUPPORT” in “CONSULT-II Application Items” for the following items.
쐌 “MULTI ANSWER BACK SET”
쐌 “AUTO LOCK SET”
쐌 “PANIC ALARM SET”
쐌 “TRUNK OPENER”
쐌 “PW DOWN SET”
NOTE:
Even though TRUNK OPENER is actually displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, it is not equipped, therefore, they cannot be activated.
EL-324
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
ID Code Entry Procedure (Cont’d)
KEYFOB ID SET UP WITHOUT CONSULT-II
NAEL0398S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL170YA
EL-325
IDX
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
ID Code Entry Procedure (Cont’d)
NOTE:
쐌 If a keyfob is lost, the ID code of the lost keyfob must be erased
to prevent unauthorized use. A specific ID code can be erased
with CONSULT-II. However, when the ID code of a lost keyfob
is not known, all keyfob ID codes should be erased. After all
ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all remaining and/or new
keyfob must be re-registered.
To erase all ID codes in memory, register one ID code (keyfob)
four times. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all
remaining and/or new keyfob must be re-registered.
쐌 When registering an additional keyfob, the existing ID codes in
memory may or may not be erased. If four ID codes are stored
in memory, when an additional code is registered, only the
oldest code is erased. If less than four ID codes are stored in
memory, when an additional ID code is registered, the new ID
code is added and no ID codes are erased.
쐌 If you need to activate more than two additional new keyfob,
repeat the procedure “Additional ID code entry” for each new
keyfob.
쐌 Entry of maximum four ID codes is allowed. When more than
four ID codes are entered, the oldest ID code will be erased.
쐌 Even if the same ID code that is already in the memory is input,
the same ID code can be entered. The code is counted as an
additional code.
EL-326
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Keyfob Battery Replacement
Keyfob Battery Replacement
NAEL0399
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEL485Y
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-327
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location
NAEL0400
SEL677Y
EL-328
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
System Description
System Description
DESCRIPTION
1. Operation Flow
NAEL0401
GI
NAEL0401S01
NAEL0401S0101
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
2. Setting The Vehicle Security System
SEL334W
AT
NAEL0401S0102
TF
Initial condition
1) Ignition switch is in OFF position.
Disarmed phase
When the vehicle security system is in the disarmed phase, the security indicator lamp blinks every 2.6 seconds.
Pre-armed phase and armed phase
When the following operation 1) or 2) is performed, the vehicle security system turns into the “pre-armed”
phase. (The security indicator lamp illuminates.)
1) Smart entrance control unit receives LOCK signal from key cylinder switch or keyfob after hood, glass
hatch and all doors are closed.
2) Hood, glass hatch and all doors are closed after front doors are locked by key, lock/unlock switch or multiremote controller.
After about 30 seconds, the system automatically shifts into the “armed” phase (the system is set). (The
security indicator lamp blinks every 2.6 seconds.)
3. Canceling The Set Vehicle Security System
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
NAEL0401S0104
Make sure the system is in the armed phase. (The security indicator lamp blinks every 2.6 seconds.)
When the following operation 1) or 2) is performed, the system sounds the horns and flashes the headlamps
for about 50 seconds.
1) Engine hood, glass hatch or any door is opened during armed phase.
2) Disconnecting and connecting the battery connector before canceling armed phase.
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND
AX
NAEL0401S0103
When the following 1) or 2) operation is performed, the armed phase is canceled.
1) Unlock the doors with the key or keyfob.
2) Open the glass hatch with the key or keyfob.
4. Activating The Alarm Operation of The Vehicle Security System
PD
HA
SC
NAEL0401S02
Power is supplied at all times
쐌 through 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 to security indicator lamp terminal 1, and
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 49.
EL-329
IDX
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
쐌 through 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 27.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
쐌 through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 26.
Ground is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
INITIAL CONDITION TO ACTIVATE THE SYSTEM
NAEL0401S03
The operation of the vehicle security system is controlled by the doors, hood and glass hatch.
Pattern A
NAEL0401S0301
To activate the vehicle security system, the smart entrance control unit must receive signals indicating the
doors, hood and glass hatch are closed.
When a door is open, smart entrance control unit terminal 1, 2 or 3 receives a ground signal from each door
switch.
When the hood is open, smart entrance control unit terminal 6 receives a ground signal
쐌 from terminal 1 of the hood switch
쐌 through body grounds E13 and E41.
When the glass hatch is open, smart entrance control unit terminal 13 receives a ground signal
쐌 from terminal 1 of the glass hatch switch
쐌 through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
When smart entrance control unit receives LOCK signal from key cylinder switch or keyfob and none of the
described conditions exist, the vehicle security system will automatically shift to armed mode.
Pattern B
NAEL0401S0302
To activate the vehicle security system, the smart entrance control unit must receive signal indicating any door
(including hood and glass hatch) is opened.
When the front doors are locked with key, lock/unlock switch or keyfob and then all doors are closed, the
vehicle security system will automatically shift to armed mode.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ACTIVATION
Pattern A
NAEL0401S04
NAEL0401S0401
With all doors (including hood and glass hatch) closed, if the key is used to lock doors, smart entrance control unit terminal 33 receives a signal from power window main switch terminal 14.
When key cylinder switch is in LOCK position, ground is supplied
쐌 to power window main switch terminal 6
쐌 from terminal 3 of the front door key cylinder switch LH
쐌 through terminal 2 of front door key cylinder switch LH
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157 or
smart entrance control unit terminal 11 receives a ground signal
쐌 from terminal 1 of the back door key cylinder switch
쐌 through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
If this signal, or lock signal from keyfob is received by the smart entrance control unit, the vehicle security
system will activate automatically.
NOTE:
Vehicle security system can be set even though all doors are not locked.
Pattern B
NAEL0401S0402
With any door (including hood and glass hatch) open, if lock/unlock switch is used to lock doors, smart entrance
control unit terminal 33 receives a LOCK signal
쐌 from terminal 14 of lock/unlock switch LH or
쐌 from terminal 16 of lock/unlock switch RH, or
EL-330
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
With any door (including hood and glass hatch) open if the key is used to lock doors, smart entrance control
unit terminal 33 receives a LOCK signal from power window main front switch terminal 14. Refer to power
window serial link (EL-259).
When key cylinder switch LOCK signal ground is supplied
쐌 to power window main switch terminal 4
쐌 from terminal 3 of the front door key cylinder switch LH
쐌 through terminal 2 of front door key cylinder switch LH
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157, or
smart entrance control unit terminal 11 receives a ground signal
쐌 from terminal 1 of the back door key cylinder switch
쐌 through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
If these signals and lock signal from keyfob are received by the smart entrance control unit, ground signals
of terminals 1, 2 and 3 are interrupted and all doors are closed, the vehicle security system will activate automatically.
NOTE:
Vehicle security system can be set even though the rear door is not locked.
Once the vehicle security system has been activated, smart entrance control unit terminal 38 supplies ground
to terminal 2 of the security indicator lamp.
The security lamp will illuminate for approximately 30 seconds and then blinks every 2.6 seconds.
Now the vehicle security system is in armed phase.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ALARM OPERATION
NAEL0401S05
The vehicle security system is triggered by
쐌 opening a door
쐌 opening the hood or the glass hatch
쐌 detection of battery disconnect and connect.
Once the vehicle security system is in armed phase, if the smart entrance control unit receives a ground signal at terminal 1, 2, 3 (door switch), 13 (glass hatch switch) or 6 (hood switch), the vehicle security system
will be triggered. The headlamps flash and the horn sounds intermittently.
Power is supplied at all times
쐌 through 7.5A fuse (No. 52, located in fuse and fusible link box)
쐌 to horn relay terminals 1 and 3.
쐌 through 10A fuse (No. 54, located in fuse and fusible link box)
쐌 to horn relay terminal 6.
쐌 through 15A fuse (No. 60, located in fuse and fusible link box)
쐌 to headlamp LH relay terminals 1 and 3,
쐌 through 15A fuse (No. 59, located in fuse and fusible link box)
쐌 to headlamp RH relay terminals 1 and 3.
When the vehicle security system is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently
쐌 to headlamp (LH and RH) relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 21 and 59
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64.
When headlamp relays (LH and RH) are energized and then power is supplied to headlamps (LH and RH).
The headlamps flash intermittently.
When the vehicle security system is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently
쐌 from smart entrance control unit terminal 42
쐌 to horn relay terminal 2.
When horn relay are energized, then power is supplied to horn.
The horn sounds intermittently.
The alarm automatically turns off after 50 seconds but will reactivate if the vehicle is tampered with again.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM DEACTIVATION
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
NAEL0401S06
To deactivate the vehicle security system, a door or glass hatch must be unlocked with the key or keyfob.
When the key is used to unlock the door, smart entrance control unit terminal 33 receives an UNLOCK signal from power window main switch terminal 14. Refer to “POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK” (EL-259).
When key cylinder switch is in UNLOCK position, the ground is supplied
EL-331
GI
IDX
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
쐌 to power window main switch terminal 6
쐌 from the front door key cylinder switch LH terminal 1
쐌 through front door key cylinder switch terminal 2,
쐌 through body grounds M4, M66, M111, M147 and M157.
When the key is used to open the glass hatch, smart entrance control unit terminal 12 receives a ground signal from terminal 3 of the back door key cylinder switch.
When the smart entrance control unit receives either one of these signals or unlock signal from keyfob, the
vehicle security system is deactivated. (Disarmed phase)
PANIC ALARM OPERATION
NAEL0401S07
Remote keyless entry system may or may not operate vehicle security system (horn and headlamps) as
required.
When the remote keyless entry system (panic alarm) is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently
쐌 from smart entrance control unit terminals 21 and 59
쐌 to headlamp (LH and RH) relay terminal 2, and
쐌 from smart entrance control unit terminal 42
쐌 to horn relay terminal 2.
The headlamp flashes and the horn sounds intermittently.
The alarm automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when smart entrance control unit receives any signal
from keyfob.
EL-332
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
NOTE:
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-333
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Schematic
Schematic
NAEL0402
MEL873N
EL-334
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Schematic (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL437P
IDX
EL-335
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC —
Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC —
FIG. 1
NAEL0403
NAEL0403S01
MEL033Q
EL-336
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — (Cont’d)
FIG. 2
NAEL0403S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL034Q
EL-337
IDX
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — (Cont’d)
FIG. 3
NAEL0403S03
MEL035Q
EL-338
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — (Cont’d)
FIG. 4
NAEL0403S04
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL036Q
EL-339
IDX
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — (Cont’d)
FIG. 5
NAEL0403S05
MEL037Q
EL-340
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — (Cont’d)
FIG. 6
NAEL0403S06
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL038Q
EL-341
IDX
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
“THEFT WAR ALM”
=NAEL0404
NAEL0404S01
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to
the data link connector.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
5.
Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.
If “SMART ENTRANCE” is not indicated, go to GI-41, “CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit”.
6.
Touch “THEFT WAR ALM”.
7.
Select diagnosis mode.
“DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST” and “WORK SUPPORT”
are available.
SEL670Y
SKIA3098E
SEL669Y
SEL751Y
SEL274W
EL-342
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
CONSULT-II Application Item
CONSULT-II Application Item
“THEFT WAR ALM”
Data Monitor
NAEL0405
GI
NAEL0405S01
NAEL0405S0101
Monitored Item
MA
Description
IGN ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
ACC ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position.
DOOR SW-RR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch.
TRNK OPNR SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door switch.
KEY CYL LK SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from key cylinder switch.
KEY CYL UN SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from key cylinder switch.
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.
DOOR SW-AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH.
TRNK OPN MNTR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door switch.
TRUNK KEY SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door key cylinder switch.
HOOD SWITCH
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of hood switch.
LOCK SW DR/AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door lock/unlock switch LH and RH.
UNLK SW DR/AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door lock/unlock LH and RH.
LK BUTTON/SIG
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from keyfob.
UN BUTTON/SIG
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob.
TRUNK BTN/SIG
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk open signal from keyfob.
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
NOTE:
Even though TRUNK BTN/SIG is actually displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, it is not equipped, therefore, they cannot be activated.
AX
Active Test
NAEL0405S0102
Test Item
Description
SU
THEFT IND
This test is able to check security indicator lamp operation. The lamp will be turned on when
“ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
HORN
This test is able to check vehicle security alarm operation. The alarm will be activated for 0.5
seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
HEAD LAMP
This test is able to check vehicle security alarm headlamp operation. The headlamp illuminates for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
Work Support
NAEL0405S0103
Test Item
BR
ST
RS
Description
THEFT ALM TRG
The switch which triggered theft warning alarm is recorded. This mode is able to confirm and
erase the record of theft waning alarm. The trigger data can be erased by touching “CLEAR”
on CONSULT-II screen.
SECURITY ALARM SET
Theft warning alarm mode can be changed in this mode. Selects ON-OFF of theft warning
alarm mode.
쐌 MODE 1 (ON)/MODE 2 (OFF)
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-343
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses
Trouble Diagnoses
PRELIMINARY CHECK
=NAEL0406
NAEL0406S01
The system operation is canceled by turning ignition switch to
“ACC” at any step between START and ARMED in the following
flow chart.
SEL733W
After performing preliminary check, go to symptom chart
below.
EL-344
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
SYMPTOM CHART
361
310
X
X
Door outside key
X
Back door key
X
Multi-remote control
X
Any door is opened.
X
Any door is unlocked
without using key or
multi-remote controller
X
All function
X
Horn alarm
X
Headlamp alarm
X
Door outside key
X
Back door key
X
Multi-remote control
X
Check “MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL” system.
X
VEHICLE SECURITY HEADLAMP ALARM CHECK
All items
Vehicle security
system cannot
be set by ....
359
VEHICLE SECURITY HORN ALARM CHECK
X
*1 Vehicle security
system does not
alarm when ...
356
BACK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK
SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK
X
DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK
DOOR, HOOD AND GLASS HATCH SWITCH CHECK
4
354
GI
MA
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
3
352
X
Vehicle security indicator does not
illuminate for 30 seconds.
2
347
X
SYMPTOM
1
346
PRELIMINARY CHECK
344
Vehicle security
alarm does not
activate.
)
Vehicle security
system cannot be
canceled by ....
REFERENCE PAGE (EL-
NAEL0406S02
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
X
X
X
X
PD
AX
SU
BR
X
X
ST
X
RS
X
BT
X
X
X : Applicable
*1: Make sure the system is in the armed phase.
Before starting trouble diagnoses above, perform preliminary
check, EL-344.
Symptom numbers in the symptom chart correspond with those of
preliminary check.
HA
SC
IDX
EL-345
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK NAEL0406S03
Power Supply Circuit Check
NAEL0406S0301
Terminals
Ignition switch position
(+)
Terminal
(Wire color)
(−)
OFF
ACC
ON
Connector
M123
49 (G/R)
Ground
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
M122
26 (G/W)
Ground
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
M122
27 (W/B)
Ground
0V
0V
Battery
voltage
If NG, check the following.
쐌 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit
and fuse.
SEL281Y
Ground Circuit Check
NAEL0406S0302
Terminals
(+)
Continuity
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M122
43 (B)
M123
64 (B)
(−)
Ground
SEL282Y
EL-346
Yes
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DOOR, HOOD AND GLASS HATCH SWITCH CHECK
GI
=NAEL0406S04
Door Switch Check
NAEL0406S0401
1
MA
PRELIMINARY CHECK
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and remove key from ignition key cylinder.
“SECURITY” indicator lamp should blink every 2.6 seconds.
2. Close all doors, hood and glass hatch.
3. Lock doors with multi-remote controller from inside the vehicle.
“SECURITY” indicator lamp should turn on for 30 seconds.
4. Unlock any door with the door lock knob and open the door within 30 seconds after door is locked.
“SECURITY” indicator lamp should turn off.
EM
LC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Door switch is OK, and go to hood switch check.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
EC
FE
CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check door switches (“DOOR SW-RR”, “DOOR SW-DR” and “DOOR SW-AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEL024Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminals 1 (G/OR), 2 (Y) or 3 (R/L) and
ground.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEL021YA
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-337.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Door switch is OK, and go to hood switch check.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-347
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
3
CHECK DOOR SWITCH
1. Disconnect door switch connector.
2. Check the following.
쐌 Continuity between front door switch harness connector B9 (LH) or B68 (RH) terminals 1 and 2
쐌 Continuity between front door switch harness connector B9 (LH) or B68 (RH) terminals 3 and ground
쐌 Continuity between back door switch harness connector D208 terminals 1 and 2
쐌 Continuity between rear door switch harness connector B18 (LH) or B71 (RH) terminal 1 and ground
SEL287Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Door switch ground circuit (Front or back) or door switch ground condition
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door switch
NG
䊳
Replace door switch.
EL-348
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Hood Switch Check
1
=NAEL0406S0402
GI
PRELIMINARY CHECK
MA
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and remove key from ignition key cylinder.
“SECURITY” indicator lamp should blink every 2.6 seconds.
2. Close all doors, hood and trunk lid.
3. Lock doors with multi-remote controller from inside the vehicle.
“SECURITY” indicator lamp should turn on for 30 seconds.
4. Unlock hood with hood opener within 30 seconds after door is locked.
“SECURITY” indicator lamp should turn off.
EM
LC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Hood switch is OK, and go to trunk room lamp switch check.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
EC
FE
2
CHECK HOOD SWITCH FITTING CONDITION
CL
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Adjust installation of hood switch or hood.
3
MT
CHECK HOOD SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
AT
With CONSULT-II
Check hood switch (“HOOD SWITCH”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL354W
BR
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminal 6 (Y/B) and ground.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL035Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-336.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Hood switch is OK, and go to glass hatch switch check.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
SC
IDX
EL-349
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
4
CHECK HOOD SWITCH
1. Disconnect hood switch connector.
2. Check continuity between hood switch terminals 1 and 2.
SEL338X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Hood switch ground circuit
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and hood switch
NG
䊳
Replace hood switch.
EL-350
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Glass Hatch Switch Check
1
=NAEL0406S0403
GI
CHECK GLASS HATCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
MA
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminal 13 (L/W) and ground.
EM
LC
EC
SEL326YA
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-336.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Glass hatch switch is OK.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
FE
CL
MT
CHECK GLASS HATCH SWITCH
AT
1. Disconnect glass hatch switch connector.
2. Check continuity between glass hatch switch terminals 1 and 2.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL340X
OK or NG
OK
NG
䊳
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Glass hatch switch ground circuit
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and glass hatch switch
BR
ST
Replace glass hatch switch.
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-351
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK
1
=NAEL0406S05
CHECK INDICATOR LAMP OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “THEFT WAR ALM” with CONSULT-II.
2. Select “THEFT IND” and touch “ON”.
SEL356W
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 38 (BR/Y) and ground.
SEL037Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-336.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Security indicator lamp is OK.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP
1. Disconnect security indicator lamp connector.
2. Apply 12V direct current to security indicator lamp harness connector M20 terminals 1 and 2.
SEL696Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Replace security indicator lamp.
EL-352
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP
1. Disconnect security indicator lamp connector.
2. Check voltage between security indicator lamp harness connector M20 terminal 1 (R/G) and ground.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL697Y
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and smart entrance
control unit.
CL
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 Harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and fuse
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-353
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK
1
=NAEL0406S06
CHECK FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK/UNLOCK SIGNAL)
With CONSULT-II
Check front door key cylinder switch (“KEY CYL LK-SW”/“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULTII.
SEL342WF
Without CONSULT-II
1. Check the signal between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 33 (BR) and ground with oscilloscope when key inserted in front key cylinder is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
2. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec. just after key is turned “LOCK”
or “UNLOCK”.
SEL700Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-338.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Front door key cylinder switch LH is OK.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
EL-354
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
2
GI
CHECK FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
1. Disconnect front door key cylinder switch LH connector.
2. Check continuity between front door key cylinder switch LH terminals.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL313XB
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Front door key cylinder switch LH ground circuit
쐌 Harness for open or short between power window main switch and front door key cylinder switch LH
NG
䊳
Replace front door key cylinder switch LH.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-355
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
BACK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK
1
=NAEL0406S07
CHECK BACK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK/UNLOCK SIGNAL)
With CONSULT-II
Check back door key cylinder switch (“KEY CYL LK-SW”/“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULTII.
SEL342WG
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit terminals 10 (LG), 11 (Y) or 12 (W/PU) and ground.
SEL698Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-339.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Back door key cylinder switch is OK.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
EL-356
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
2
GI
CHECK BACK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
1. Disconnect back door key cylinder switch connector.
2. Check continuity between back door key cylinder switch terminals.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL345X
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Back door key cylinder switch ground circuit
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and back door key cylinder switch
NG
䊳
Replace back door key cylinder switch.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-357
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK
1
=NAEL0406S08
CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check door lock/unlock switch (“LOCK SW DR/AS”/“UNLK SW DR/AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL341W
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove key from ignition key cylinder.
2. Check the signal between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 33 (BR) and ground with oscilloscope when door lock/unlock switch is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
3. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec. just after door lock/unlock
switch is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
SEL699Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-338.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Door lock/unlock switch is OK.
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Ground circuit for each front power window switch
쐌 Harness for open or short between each front power window switch and smart
entrance control unit connector
If above systems are normal, replace the front power window switch.
EL-358
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
VEHICLE SECURITY HORN ALARM CHECK
1
=NAEL0406S09
GI
CHECK VEHICLE SECURITY HORN
MA
With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “THEFT WAR ALM” with CONSULT-II.
2. Select “HORN” and touch “ON”.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL041Y
CL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector.
2. Apply ground to smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 42 (LG/B).
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEL043YC
AX
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-339.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Horn alarm is OK.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
SU
BR
CHECK HORN RELAY
ST
Check horn relay.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Replace horn relay.
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-359
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
3
CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR HORN RELAY
1. Disconnect horn relay connector.
2. Check voltage between horn relay connector E118 terminal 1 (G/B) and ground.
SEL326XA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 7.5A fuse (No. 52, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
쐌 Harness for open or short between horn relay and fuse
4
CHECK HORN RELAY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect horn relay connector.
2. Check voltage between terminals 3 and 5.
3. Check voltage between terminals 6 and 7.
SEL348X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check harness for open or short between horn relay and smart entrance control unit.
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 Harness for open or short between horn relay and fuse
쐌 7.5A fuse (No. 52, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
쐌 10A fuse (No. 54, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
EL-360
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
VEHICLE SECURITY HEADLAMP ALARM CHECK =NAEL0406S10 GI
1
CHECK VEHICLE SECURITY HEADLAMP ALARM OPERATION
MA
With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “THEFT WAR ALM” with CONSULT-II.
2. Select “HEADLAMP” and touch “ON”.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL042Y
CL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit connector.
2. Apply ground to smart entrance control unit harness connector M121, M123 terminals 21 (PU/R) and 59 (PU/W).
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEL198Y
AX
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-340.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Headlamp is OK.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
SU
BR
CHECK HEADLAMP OPERATION
ST
Does headlamp come on when turning lighting switch “ON”?
Yes
䊳
Check harness for open or short between headlamp relay and smart entrance control
unit.
No
䊳
Check headlamp system. Refer to “HEADLAMP”.
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-361
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
Description
Description
OUTLINE
NAEL0407
NAEL0407S01
The smart entrance control unit totally controls the following body electrical system operations.
쐌 Headlamp auto light control system
쐌 Warning chime
쐌 Rear defogger and door mirror defogger timer
쐌 Power door lock
쐌 Remote keyless entry system
쐌 Vehicle security system
쐌 Interior lamp
In addition, the following timer operations are controlled by the smart entrance control unit.
쐌 Battery saver control
쐌 Retained power control
BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
NAEL0407S02
Headlamps/Parking Lamps/License Lamps/Tail Lamps/Fog Lamps/Illumination LampsNAEL0407S0201
While the headlamps (including parking, license, tail, fog and illumination lamps) are turned ON by “1ST” or
“2ND” of lighting switch, the exterior lamp battery saver control is activated when the ignition switch signal
changes from ON (or ACC) to OFF, and either one of LH or RH front door switch ON signal is received. The
headlamps (including parking, license, tail, fog and illumination lamps) are turned off after 5 minutes.
While the headlamps are turned ON by “AUTO” operation, the exterior lamp battery saver control is activated
when the ignition switch is turned from ON (or ACC) to OFF, and either LH or RH front door switch ON signal is input.
The smart entrance control unit controls timer activation as follows:
쐌 When the door switch signal changes from ON to OFF while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated,
the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the headlamps (including parking,
license, tail, fog and illumination lamps) will be turned off.
쐌 When the door switch signal changes from OFF to ON while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated,
the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the headlamps will be turned off.
쐌 When the one of four door switch signals changes from OFF to ON while the exterior lamp battery saver
is activated, the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 5 minutes, then the headlamps (including
parking, license, tail, fog and illumination lamps) will be turned off.
쐌 When all the door switch ON signals are input while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated, the
operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the headlamps (including parking,
license, tail, fog and illumination lamps) will be turned off.
The “45” second timer’s duration can be changed with the function setting mode of CONSULT-II.
Interior Lamp/Luggage Room Lamp/Spot Lamp/Vanity Mirror Illumination
NAEL0407S0202
The lamps turn off automatically when the interior lamp, spot lamp or/and vanity mirror illumination are illuminated with the ignition key in the OFF position, if the lamp remains lit by the door switch open signal or if the
lamp switch is in the ON position for more than 30 minutes.
After lamps are turned off by the battery saver system, the lamps illuminate again when:
쐌 Door is locked or unlocked with keyfob or door lock/unlock switch or door key cylinder.
쐌 Ignition switch ON.
쐌 Door is opened or closed,
쐌 Key is inserted or removed into ignition key cylinder.
Rear Window Defogger/Door Mirror Defogger
NAEL0407S0203
Rear window defogger and door mirror defogger are turned off in approximately 15 minutes after the rear window defogger switch is turned on.
RETAINED POWER CONTROL
NAEL0407S03
When the ignition switch is turned to OFF (or ACC) position from ON or START position, the following systems can be operated for 45 seconds by the RAP signal from the smart entrance control unit terminal 46.
쐌 Electric sunroof
쐌 Power window
The retained power operation is canceled when the driver or passenger side door is opened.
EL-362
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
Description (Cont’d)
INPUT/OUTPUT
NAEL0407S04
System
Input
GI
Output
MA
Door lock and unlock switch LH and RH
Key switch (Insert)
Door switches
Door key cylinder switches
Door lock actuator
Key switch (Insert)
Ignition switch (ACC)
Door switches
Keyfob signal
Door lock/unlock switch LH
Horn relay
Headlamp relay (LH and RH)
Hazard warning lamp
Interior lamp
Power window main switch
Door lock actuator
Opener actuator
Key switch (Insert)
Ignition switch (ON)
Lighting switch (1st)
Seat belt switch (driver’s seat)
Front door switch LH
Warning chime (located in smart entrance
control unit)
Rear window defogger and
door mirror defogger
Ignition switch (ON)
Rear window defogger switch
Rear window defogger relay
Vehicle security
Ignition switch (ACC, ON)
Door switches
Hood switch
Back door switch
Glass hatch switch
Door lock/unlock switches
Door key cylinder switches (lock/unlock)
Horn relay
Headlamp relay
Security indicator
Door switches
Keyfob signal (lock/unlock)
Door lock/unlock switches (lock/unlock)
Door key cylinder switch (lock/unlock)
Ignition switch (ON)
Key switch (Insert)
Interior lamp
Step lamp
Door indicator
Battery saver control for
headlamps/parking lamps/
licence lamps/tail lamps/fog
lamps/illumination lamps
Ignition switch (ON)
Lighting switches
Headlamps
Parking lamps
Licence lamps
Tail lamps
Fog lamps
Illumination lamps
Battery saver control for interior lamp/spot lamp/vanity mirror illumination
Ignition switch (ON)
Front door switches
Lamp switches
Interior lamp
Step lamp
Spot lamp
Vanity mirror illumination
Battery saver control for rear
window defogger and door
mirror defogger
Ignition switch (ON)
Rear window defogger switch
Rear window defogger relay
BT
Retained power control for
electric sunroof
Ignition switch (ON)
Front door switches
Sunroof motor
HA
Retained power control for
power window
Ignition switch (ON)
Front door switches
Power window relay
Headlamp auto light control
Auto light sensor
Lighting switches
Headlamp relay
Tail lamp relay
Power door lock
Remote keyless entry
Warning chime
Interior lamp
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SC
IDX
EL-363
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II
NAEL0408
DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS APPLICATION
Item (CONSULT-II
screen terms)
Diagnosed system
NAEL0408S01
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
WORK SUPPORT
X
DOOR LOCK
Power door lock
X
X
REAR DEFOGGER
Rear window defogger
X
X
KEY WARN ALM
Warning chime
X
X
LIGHT WARN ALM
Warning chime
X
X
SEAT BELT ALM
Warning chime
X
X
INT LAMP
Interior lamps
X
X
X
BATTERY SAVER
Battery saver control for
interior lamp
X
X
X
THEFT WAR ALM
Vehicle security system
X
X
X
RETAINED PWR
Retained power control
X
X
X
MULTI REMOTE ENT
Remote keyless entry
system
X
X
X
HEAD LAMP
Headlamp
X
X
X
X: Applicable
For diagnostic item in each control system, refer to the relevant pages for each system.
DIAGNOSTIC ITEM DESCRIPTION
NAEL0408S02
MODE
Description
DATA MONITOR
Input/output data in the smart entrance control unit can be
read.
ACTIVE TEST
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some systems apart from the smart entrance control unit.
WORK SUPPORT for DOOR LOCK
쐌 Select unlock mode ON-OFF setting can be changed.
쐌 Key reminder door mode ON-OFF setting can be changed.
WORK SUPPORT for INT LAMP
Interior lamp timer mode ON-OFF setting can be changed.
WORK SUPPORT for BATTERY SAVER
Interior lamp battery saver period can be changed.
WORK SUPPORT for THEFT WAR ALM
쐌 The recorded trigger signal when vehicle security system
was activated can be checked.
쐌 Security alarm ON-OFF setting can be changed.
WORK SUPPORT for RETAINED PWR SET
RAP signal’s power supply period can be changed.
WORK SUPPORT for MULTI REMOTE ENT
쐌 ID code of keyfob can be registered and erased.
쐌 Keyless answer back mode can be changed.
쐌 Pressing time of panic alarm, trunk lid opener and door
unlock (for power window down operation) buttons on keyfob
can be changed.
쐌 Auto lock operation starting time can be changed.
WORK SUPPORT for HEADLAMP
쐌 Auto light sensitivity can be changed.
쐌 Exterior lamp battery saver control ON-OFF setting can be
changed.
쐌 Auto light delay off time can be changed.
EL-364
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
NAEL0408S03
Turn the ignition switch “OFF”.
Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to
the data link connector.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL670Y
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SKIA3098E
5.
Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.
If “SMART ENTRANCE” is not indicated, go to GI-41, “CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit”.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL669Y
6.
Perform each diagnostic item according to “DIAGNOSTIC
ITEMS APPLICATION”. Refer to EL-364.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL751Y
HA
SC
IDX
EL-365
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
Schematic
Schematic
NAEL0409
MEL086Q
EL-366
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
Schematic (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL039Q
IDX
EL-367
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table
Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table
NAEL0410
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
1
G/OR
2
Y
3
6
7
Connections
Voltage
(Approximate values)
Operated condition
Driver door switch
OFF (Closed) , ON (Open)
12V , 0V
Passenger door switch
OFF (Closed) , ON (Open)
5V , 0V
R/L
Rear door switch
OFF (Closed) , ON (Open)
5V , 0V
Y/B
Hood switch
ON (Open) , OFF (Closed)
0V , 12V
Auto light sensor (Signal)
Light is applied to auto light senIgnition switch ON sor.
position
Light is not applied to auto light
sensor.
W/G
Less than 1V
8
L/R
Auto light sensor (GND)
9
GY
Auto light sensor (Power)
Ignition switch (OFF , ON)
0V , 5V
10
LG
Back door key cylinder
unlock switch
OFF (Neutral) , ON (Unlocked)
5V , 0V
11
Y
Back door key cylinder lock
switch
OFF (Neutral) , ON (Locked)
5V , 0V
12
W/PU
Back door key cylinder switch OFF (Neutral) , ON (Unlock)
5V , 0V
13
L/W
Glass hatch switch
5V , 0V
14
OR
Rear window defogger switch OFF , ON (Only when pushed)
19
R/G
Tail lamp relay (Output)
—
1 to 5V
—
ON (Open) , OFF (Closed)
Ignition switch
(with lighting
switch 1ST or
2ND)
ON or START
, OFF position
5V , 0V
More than 5
minutes after
ignition switch is
turned to OFF
position
12V
Within 5 minutes after ignition switch is
turned to OFF
position
0V
ON or START position
20
21
G
PU/R
Tail lamp switch
Headlamp LH relay
0V
Headlamps illuminate by auto light control. (Operate
, Not operate)
Less than 1V ,
12V
Light switch (OFF or AUTO , 1ST or 2ND position)
12V , 0V
Ignition switch
(with lighting
switch 2ND)
ON or START
, OFF position
More than 5
minutes after
ignition switch is
turned to OFF
position
12V
Within 5 minutes after ignition switch is
turned to OFF
position
0V
ON or START position
Headlamps illuminate by auto light control. (Operate
, Not operate)
EL-368
0V
Less than 1V ,
12V
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table (Cont’d)
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
Connections
Operated condition
Voltage
(Approximate values)
Except PASS or 2ND position
12V
PASS or 2ND position
0V
GI
MA
Lighting switch
22
SB
Headlamp switch
Headlamps illuminate by auto light control. (Operate
, Not operate)
10V , 12V
LC
23
L/Y
Headlamp switch
Ignition switch
“ON” position
Lighting switch (Except AUTO ,
AUTO position)
12V , 0V
25
W/R
Ignition key switch (Insert)
Key inserted , Key removed from IGN key cylinder
12V , 0V
26
G/W
Ignition switch (ACC)
“ACC” position
12V
27
W/B
Ignition switch (ON)
Ignition key is in “ON” position
12V
28
B/Y
Seat belt buckle switch
Unfastened , Fastened (Ignition key is in “ON” position)
0V , 12V
Interior lamp
When doors are locked using keyfob (Lamp switch in
“DOOR” position)
0V , 12V
31
R/B
BR
Communication interface
G/B
38
FE
CL
Refer to EL-370.
AT
TF
Front door key cylinder switch LH (Neutral ,Lock/
unlock)
37
EC
MT
Door lock and unlock switches (Neutral ,Lock/
unlock)
33
EM
Rear window defogger relay
OFF , ON (Ignition key is in “ON” position)
12V , 0V
BR/Y
Security indicator
Goes off , Illuminates
12V , 0V
42
LG/B
Horn relay
When panic alarm is operated using keyfob (ON ,
OFF)
12V , 0V
43
B
46
R/Y
Power window relay
Retained power operation is operated (ON , OFF)
12V , 0V
47
GY/L
LH turn signal lamp
When door lock or unlock is operated using keyfob
(ON , OFF)
12V , 0V
SU
48
GY/R
RH turn signal lamp
When door lock or unlock is operated using keyfob
(ON , OFF)
12V , 0V
BR
49
G/R
Power source (Fuse)
50
R/W
Battery saver (Interior lamp)
51
W/R
Power source (PTC)
54
L
Door lock actuators
Door lock & unlock switch (Free , Lock)
0V , 12V
55
W/PU
Driver door lock actuator
Door lock & unlock switch (Free , Unlock)
0V , 12V
56
Y/B
Passenger, rear and back
doors lock actuator
Door lock & unlock switch (Free , Unlock)
0V , 12V
Ground
—
—
Battery saver operates , Does not operate (ON
,OFF)
—
—
PD
AX
12V
12V , 0V
12V
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-369
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table (Cont’d)
Terminal
No.
57
Wire
color
R
Connections
Ignition switch
(with lighting
switch 1ST or
2ND)
Tail lamp relay
Voltage
(Approximate values)
Operated condition
ON or START
, OFF position
More than 5
minutes after
ignition switch is
turned to OFF
position
12V
Within 5 minutes after ignition switch is
turned to OFF
position
0V
ON or START position
Headlamps illuminate by auto light control. (Operate
, Not operate)
58
59
G/W
PU/W
Tail lamp switch
Lighting switch OFF or AUTO , 1ST or 2ND
Headlamp RH relay
Ignition switch
(with lighting
switch OFF or
1ST)
ON or START
, OFF position
0V
Less than 1V,
12V
12V , 0V
More than 5
minutes after
ignition switch is
turned to OFF
position
12V
Within 5 minutes after ignition switch is
turned to OFF
position
0V
ON or START position
Headlamps illuminate by auto light control.
(Operate , Not operate)
0V
Less than 1V ,
12V
Except PASS or 2ND position
12V
PASS or 2ND position
0V
Lighting switch
60
L
Headlamp switch
Headlamps illuminate by auto light control. (Operate
, Not operate)
64
B
Ground
—
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SIGNAL
10V , 12V
—
NAEL0410S02
Voltage:
12 V → 9V (10 sec.) measurement by analog circuit
tester.
SEL739Y
EL-370
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
Wiring Diagram — TRNSCV —
Wiring Diagram — TRNSCV —
NAEL0411
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL040Q
EL-371
IDX
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
Trouble Diagnoses
Trouble Diagnoses
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
NAEL0412
NAEL0412S01
SYMPTOM: Homelink universal transceiver does not activate
receiver.
Before conducting the procedure given below, make sure that system receiver (garage door opener, etc.) operates with original,
hand-held transmitter. If NG, receiver or hand-held transmitter is at
fault, not vehicle related.
1
PRELIMINARY CHECK
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Does red light (LED) of homelink universal transceiver illuminate when any button is pressed?
SEL442UA
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
GO TO 3.
2
CHECK HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER FUNCTION
Check homelink universal transceiver with Tool.
For details, refer to Technical Service Bulletin.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Receiver or handheld transmitter fault, not vehicle related.
NG
䊳
Replace homelink universal transceiver with sun visor assembly.
3
CHECK POWER SUPPLY
1. Disconnect homelink universal transceiver connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Check voltage between homelink universal transceiver harness connector R5 terminal 1 (R/G) and ground.
SEL358X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
EL-372
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between homelink universal transceiver harness connector R5 terminal 2 (B) and ground.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL359X
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace homelink universal transceiver with sun visor assembly.
NG
䊳
Repair harness.
5
CL
CHECK MAIN POWER SUPPLY FOR SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
MT
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M123 terminal 49 (G/R) and ground.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEL284Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Check the following.
쐌 7.5A fuse No. 24, located in fuse block (J/B)
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-373
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
6
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 43 (B) or M123 terminal 64 (B)
and ground.
SEL285Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Power supply and ground circuits are OK.
NG
䊳
Check ground harness.
EL-374
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Component Parts and Harness Connetor Location
Component Parts and Harness Connetor
Location
GI
NAEL0413
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SEL678Y
NOTE:
If customer reports a “No Start” condition, request ALL KEYS
to be brought to the Dealer in case of an NVIS (NATS) malfunction.
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-375
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
System Description
System Description
=NAEL0414
NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System) has the following immobilizer functions:
쐌 Since only NVIS (NATS) ignition keys, whose ID nos. have been registered into the ECM and IMMU of
NVIS (NATS), allow the engine to run, operation of a stolen vehicle without an NVIS (NATS) registered
key is prevented by NVIS (NATS).
That is to say, NVIS (NATS) will immobilise the engine if someone tries to start it without the registered
key of NVIS (NATS).
쐌 All of the originally supplied ignition key IDs (except for card plate key) have been NVIS (NATS) registered.
If requested by the vehicle owner, a maximum of five key IDs can be registered into the NVIS (NATS)
components.
쐌 The security indicator blinks when the ignition switch is in “OFF” or “ACC” position. Therefore, NVIS (NATS)
warns outsiders that the vehicle is equipped with the anti-theft system.
쐌 When NVIS (NATS) detects trouble, the security indicator lamp lights up while ignition key is in the “ON”
position.
쐌 NVIS (NATS) trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration of other NVIS (NATS)
ignition key IDs must be carried out using CONSULT-II hardware and CONSULT-II NVIS (NATS) software.
When NVIS (NATS) initialization has been completed, the ID of the inserted ignition key is automatically
NVIS (NATS) registered. Then, if necessary, additional registration of other NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs
can be carried out.
Regarding the procedures of NVIS (NATS) initialization and NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer
to CONSULT-II operation manual, IVIS/NVIS.
쐌 When servicing a malfunction of the NVIS (NATS) (indicated by lighting up of Security Indicator
Lamp) or registering another NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID no., it is necessary to re-register original
key identification. Therefore, be sure to receive ALL KEYS from vehicle owner.
System Composition
NAEL0415
The immobiliser function of the NVIS (NATS) consists of the following:
쐌 NVIS (NATS) ignition key
쐌 NVIS (NATS) immobilizer control unit (IMMU) located in the ignition key cylinder
쐌 Engine control module (ECM)
쐌 Security indicator
SEL085WF
EL-376
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Wiring Diagram — NATS —
Wiring Diagram — NATS —
NAEL0416
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL041Q
EL-377
IDX
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II
NAEL0417
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
NAEL0417S01
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Insert NVIS (NATS) program card into CONSULT-II.
Program card
NATS (AEN02C)
3. Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to
data link connector.
SEL670Y
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Touch “START”.
6.
Select “NATS V.5.0”.
PBR455D
SEL851W
7.
Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service
procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation
Manual, IVIS/NVIS.
SEL363X
CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION NAEL0417S02
CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST
MODE
Description
C/U INITIALIZATION
When replacing any of the following three components, C/U initialization and re-registration
of all NVIS (NATS) ignition keys are necessary.
[NVIS (NATS) ignition key/IMMU/ECM]
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Detected items (screen terms) are as shown in the chart EL-379.
EL-378
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
NOTE:
쐌 When any initialization is performed, all ID previously registered will be erased and all NVIS (NATS) ignition keys
must be registered again.
쐌 The engine cannot be started with an unregistered key. In this
case, the system will show “DIFFERENCE OF KEY” or “LOCK
MODE” as a self-diagnostic result on the CONSULT-II screen.
쐌 In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored as a
self-diagnostic result during key registration procedure, even if
the system is not malfunctioning.
HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
NAEL0417S03
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEL364X
NVIS (NATS) SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM
CHART
P No. Code Malfunction is detected when .....
(Self-diagDetected items (NATS program card
nostic
screen terms)
result of
“ENGINE”
NAEL0417S04
Reference page
SU
BR
ST
ECM INT CIRC-IMMU
NATS MAL- The malfunction of ECM internal circuit of IMMU comFUNCTION munication line is detected.
P1613
EL-383
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU
Communication impossible between ECM and IMMU
NATS MAL(In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored
FUNCTION
during key registration procedure, even if the system is
P1612
not malfunctioning.)
EL-384
DIFFERENCE OF KEY
NATS MAL- IMMU can receive the key ID signal but the result of ID
FUNCTION verification between key ID and IMMU is NG.
P1615
EL-388
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY
NATS MAL- IMMU cannot receive the key ID signal.
FUNCTION
P1614
EL-389
ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM
NATS MAL- The result of ID verification between IMMU and ECM is
FUNCTION NG. System initialization is required.
P1611
EL-390
EL-379
AX
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
P No. Code Malfunction is detected when .....
(Self-diagDetected items (NATS program card
nostic
screen terms)
result of
“ENGINE”
LOCK MODE
DON’T ERASE BEFORE
CHECKING ENG DIAG
When the starting operation is carried out five or more
times consecutively under the following conditions,
NATS MALNVIS (NATS) will shift the mode to one which prevents
FUNCTION
the engine from being started.
P1610
쐌 Unregistered ignition key is used.
쐌 IMMU or ECM’s malfunctioning.
—
All engine trouble codes except NVIS (NATS) trouble
code has been detected in ECM.
EL-380
Reference page
EL-393
EL-381
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses
Trouble Diagnoses
WORK FLOW
NAEL0418
GI
NAEL0418S01
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL004XA
EL-381
IDX
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1
NAEL0418S02
(Self-diagnosis related item)
SYMPTOM
Displayed “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS” on CONSULT-II screen.
ECM INT CIRC-IMMU
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
(Reference page)
PROCEDURE 1
(EL-383)
PROCEDURE 2
(EL-384)
쐌 Security indicator
lighting up*
쐌 Engine cannot be
started.
DIFFERENCE OF KEY
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY
ID DISCORD, IMMECM
LOCK MODE
쐌 MIL staying ON
쐌 Security indicator
lighting up*
DON’T ERASE
BEFORE CHECKING
ENG DIAG
PROCEDURE 3
(EL-388)
PROCEDURE 4
(EL-389)
PROCEDURE 5
(EL-390)
PROCEDURE 7
(EL-393)
WORK FLOW
(EL-381)
SYSTEM
(Malfunctioning part or
mode)
REFERENCE PART NO.
OF ILLUSTRATION ON
NEXT PAGE
ECM
B
In rare case, “CHAIN
OF ECM-IMMU” might
be stored during key
registration procedure,
even if the system is
not malfunctioning.
—
Open circuit in battery
voltage line of IMMU
circuit
C1
Open circuit in ignition
line of IMMU circuit
C2
Open circuit in ground
line of IMMU circuit
C3
Open circuit in communication line between
IMMU and ECM
C4
Short circuit between
IMMU and ECM communication line and battery voltage line
C4
Short circuit between
IMMU and ECM communication line and
ground line
C4
ECM
B
IMMU
A
Unregistered key
D
IMMU
A
Malfunction of key ID
chip
E
IMMU
A
System initialization has
not yet been completed.
F
ECM
F
LOCK MODE
D
Engine trouble data and
NVIS (NATS) trouble
data have been
detected in ECM
—
*: When NVIS (NATS) detects trouble, the security indicator lights up while ignition key is in the “ON” position.
EL-382
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 2
NAEL0418S03
GI
(Non self-diagnosis related item)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
(Reference page)
SYMPTOM
SYSTEM
(Malfunctioning part or mode)
Security ind.
PROCEDURE 6
(EL-391)
Security ind. does not light up.
MA
EM
Open circuit between Fuse and IMMU
Continuation of initialization mode
LC
IMMU
DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM
NAEL0418S04
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEL761Y
AX
SU
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
NAEL0418S05
Self-diagnostic results:
“ECM INT CIRC-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1. Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “ECM INT CIRCIMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen. Ref. part No. B.
2. Replace ECM.
3. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual
IVIS/NVIS”.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL365X
HA
SC
IDX
EL-383
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2
=NAEL0418S06
Self-diagnostic results:
“CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1
CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
NOTE:
In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored during key registration procedure, even if the system is not malfunctioning.
SEL366X
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above?
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
GO TO SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1.
2
CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR IMMU
1. Disconnect IMMU connector.
2. Check voltage between terminal 8 of IMMU and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEL302WD
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Check the following
쐌 7.5A fuse (No. 62, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
쐌 Harness for open or short between fuse and IMMU connector
Ref. Part No. C1
EL-384
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK IGN SW. ON SIGNAL
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between terminal 7 of IMMU and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL303WF
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Check the following
쐌 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 Harness for open or short between fuse and IMMU connector
Ref. part No. C2
4
CL
MT
AT
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR IMMU
1. Turn ignition OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between IMMU connector E113 terminal 4 (B) and ECM connector F203 terminal 67 (B/P).
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL762Y
BR
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair harness. Ref. part No. C3
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-385
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
5
CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect ECM connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 88 and IMMU terminal 1.
SEL740Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
Ref. part No. C4
6
CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE BATTERY SHORT CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 88 or IMMU terminal 1 and ground.
SEL741Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Communication line is short-circuited with battery voltage line or ignition switch ON line.
Repair harness or connectors.
Ref. part No. C4
EL-386
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
7
GI
CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE GROUND SHORT CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between ECM terminal 88 or IMMU terminal 1 and ground.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL742Y
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Communication line is short-circuited with ground line.
Repair harness or connectors.
Ref. part No. C4
8
CL
MT
SIGNAL FROM ECM TO IMMU CHECK
AT
1. Check the signal between ECM harness connector F203 terminal 88 (G) and ground with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope
when ignition switch is turned “ON”.
2. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 750 msec. just after ignition switch is
turned “ON”.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
SEL730W
OK or NG
OK
NG
䊳
䊳
IMMU is malfunctioning.
Replace IMMU. Ref. part No. A
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For the operation of initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual IVIS/NVIS”.
ECM is malfunctioning.
Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For the operation of initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual IVIS/NVIS”.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-387
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3
=NAEL0418S07
Self-diagnostic results:
“DIFFERENCE OF KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1
CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “DIFFERENCE OF KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
SEL367X
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above?
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
GO TO SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1.
2
PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. Re-register all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs.
For initialization and registration of NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NVIS/NVIS”.
SEL297W
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows above message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized and can the engine be started with re-registered NVIS (NATS) ignition key?
Yes
䊳
Ignition key ID was unregistered. Ref. part No. D
No
䊳
IMMU is malfunctioning.
Replace IMMU. Ref. part No. A
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual IVIS/NVIS”.
EL-388
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4
=NAEL0418S08
Self-diagnostic results:
“CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1
CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
GI
MA
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL368X
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above?
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
GO TO SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1.
2
CHECK NVIS (NATS) IGNITION KEY ID CHIP
CL
MT
AT
Start engine with another registered NVIS (NATS) ignition key.
Does the engine start?
Yes
No
3
䊳
䊳
Ignition key ID chip is malfunctioning.
Replace the ignition key.
Ref. part No. E
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual IVIS/NVIS”.
GO TO 3.
TF
PD
AX
SU
CHECK IMMU INSTALLATION
Check IMMU installation.
Refer to “How to Replace IMMU” in EL-394.
BR
OK or NG
OK
䊳
IMMU is malfunctioning.
Replace IMMU. Ref. part No. A
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual IVIS/NVIS”.
NG
䊳
Reinstall IMMU correctly.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-389
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5
=NAEL0418S09
Self-diagnostic results:
“ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1
CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
SEL369X
NOTE:
“ID DISCORD IMMU-ECM”:
Registered ID of IMMU is in discord with that of ECM.
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above?
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
GO TO SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1.
2
PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. Re-register all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual IVIS/NVIS”.
SEL297W
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows above message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized?
Yes
䊳
Start engine. (END)
(System initialization had not been completed. Ref. part No. F)
No
䊳
ECM is malfunctioning.
Replace ECM. Ref. part No. F
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual IVIS/NVIS”.
EL-390
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6
=NAEL0418S10
GI
“SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP”
1
CHECK FUSE
MA
Check 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
Is 10A fuse OK?
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
Replace fuse.
2
EM
LC
CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP
EC
1. Install 10A fuse.
2. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual IVIS/NVIS”.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF.
4. Start engine and turn ignition switch OFF.
5. Check the security indicator lamp lighting.
Security indicator lamp should be blinking.
FE
CL
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
MT
AT
3
CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
TF
1. Disconnect security indicator lamp connector.
2. Check voltage between security indicator lamp connector terminal 1 and ground.
PD
AX
SU
SEL370XA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Check harness for open or short between fuse and security indicator lamp.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-391
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
4
CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP
1. Disconnect security indicator lamp connector.
2. Apply 12V direct current to security indicator lamp harness connector M20 terminals 1 and 2.
SEL696Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Replace security indicator lamp.
5
CHECK IMMU FUNCTION
1. Connect IMMU connector.
2. Disconnect security indicator lamp connector.
3. Check continuity between IMMU terminal 5 and ground.
SEL300WC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and IMMU.
NG
䊳
IMMU is malfunctioning.
Replace IMMU.
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual IVIS/NVIS”.
EL-392
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7
=NAEL0418S11
Self-diagnostic results:
“LOCK MODE” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1
GI
MA
CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “LOCK MODE” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL371X
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above?
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
GO TO SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1.
2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CL
MT
AT
ESCAPE FROM LOCK MODE
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Turn ignition switch ON with registered key. (Do not start engine.) Wait 5 seconds.
Return the key to OFF position.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 twice (total of three cycles).
Start the engine.
TF
PD
Does engine start?
Yes
䊳
System is OK.
(Now system is escaped from “LOCK MODE”.)
No
䊳
GO TO 3.
AX
SU
3
CHECK IMMU ILLUSTRATION
Check IMMU installation. Refer to “How to Replace IMMU” in EL-394.
BR
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Reinstall IMMU correctly.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-393
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
4
PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual IVIS/NVIS”.
SEL297W
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows the above message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized?
Yes
䊳
System is OK.
No
䊳
GO TO DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 to check “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY”, refer to
EL-389.
How to Replace NVIS (NATS) IMMU
NAEL0419
NOTE:
쐌 If NVIS (NATS) IMMU is not installed correctly, NVIS
(NATS) system will not operate properly and SELF-DIAG
RESULTS on CONSULT-II screen will show “LOCK
MODE”.
SEL096WA
EL-394
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Component Parts Location
Component Parts Location
NAEL0420
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL508X
SC
IDX
EL-395
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description
System Description
=NAEL0421
OUTLINE
SEL683V
NAEL0421S01
The Navigation System (Multi-AV System) relies upon three sensing devices in order to determine vehicle location at regular time
intervals.
1. Vehicle speed sensor: Determines the distance the vehicle has
traveled.
2. Gyro (Angular velocity sensor): Determines vehicle steering
angle and directional change.
3. GPS antenna (GPS data): Determines vehicle forward movement and direction.
The data provided by the three sensing functions together with a
comparison of the mapping information read from the CD-ROM
drive permit accurate determination of the vehicle’s current location
and subsequent course (map matching). The information appears
on a liquid crystal display.
This comparison of GPS data (vehicle position sensing) and map
matching permits precise determination of vehicle location.
Position Sensor Operating Principles
SEL684V
NAEL0421S0101
The sensor determines current vehicle location by calculating the
previously sensed position, the distance traveled from this position,
and the directional changes occurring during this travel.
1. Distance traveled
The distance traveled is calculated using signals received from
the vehicle speed sensor. The sensor automatically compensates for the slightly reduced wheel and tire diameter resulting
from tire wear.
2. Forward movement (Direction)
Changes in the direction of forward movement are calculated
by the gyro (angular velocity sensor) and the GPS antenna
(GPS data). Each of these functions has its advantage and
disadvantages. Depending upon conditions, one function takes
precedence over the other to accurately determine the direction of forward movement.
Function type
Advantage
Gyro (Angular
velocity sensor)
쐌 Able to accurately detect
minute changes in steering
angle and direction.
GPS antenna
(GPS data)
쐌 Able to sense vehicle travel 쐌 Unable to detect direction
in four general directions
of vehicle travel at low
(North, South, East, and
vehicle speeds.
West)
EL-396
Disadvantage
쐌 Calculation errors may
accumulate over a long
period of continuous
vehicle travel.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
Map Matching
NAEL0421S0102
Map matching allows the driver to compare the sensed vehicle
location data with the road map contained in the CD-ROM drive.
Vehicle position is marked on the CD-ROM map. This permits the
driver to accurately determine his/her present position on the highway and to make appropriate course decisions.
When GPS data reception is poor during travel, the vehicle position is not amended. At this time, manual manipulation of the CDROM map position marker is required.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL685V
Map matching permits the driver to make priority judgments about
possible appropriate roads other than the one currently being traveled.
If there is an error in the distance or direction of travel, there will
also be an error in the relative position of other routes. When two
routes are closely parallel to one another, the indicated position for
both routes will be nearly the same priority. This is so that, slight
changes in the steering direction may cause the marker to indicate
both routes alternately.
SEL686V
Newly constructed roads may not appear on the CD-ROM map. In
this case, map matching is not possible. Changes in the course of
a road will also prevent accurate map matching.
When driving on a road not shown on the CD-ROM map, the position marker used for map matching may indicate a different route.
Even after returning to a route shown on the map, the position
marker may jump to the position currently detected.
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL687V
GPS (Global Positioning System)
SEL526V
NAEL0421S0103
GPS is the global positioning system developed and operated by
the US Department of Defense. GPS satellites (NAVSTAR) transmit radio waves and orbit around the earth at an altitude of approximately 21,000 km (13,000 miles).
GPS receiver calculates the three-dimensional position of the
vehicle (latitude, longitude, and altitude from the sea level) by the
time difference of the radio wave arriving from more than four GPS
satellites (three-dimensional positioning).
When the radio wave is received from only three GPS satellites, the
two-dimensional position (latitude and longitude) is calculated,
using the altitude from the sea level data calculated by using four
GPS satellites (two-dimensional positioning).
Positioning capability is degraded in the following cases.
쐌 In two-dimensional positioning, when the vehicle’s altitude
from the sea level changes, the precision becomes lower.
쐌 The location detection performance can have an error of about
100 m (300 ft) even in three-dimensional positioning with high
precision. Because the precision is influenced by the location
of GPS satellites used for positioning, the location detection
performance may drop depending on the location of GPS satellites.
쐌 When the radio wave from GPS satellites cannot be received,
EL-397
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
for example, when the vehicle is in a tunnel, in a parking lot
inside building, under an elevated superhighway or near strong
power lines, the location may not be detected. Turbulent/
electric weather conditions may also affect positioning performance. If something is placed on the antenna, the radio wave
from GPS satellites may not be received.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Display & NAVI Control Unit
쐌
쐌
쐌
SEL688V
쐌
NAEL0421S02
NAEL0421S0201
The gyro (angular speed sensor) and the CD-ROM drive are
built-in units that control the navigation functions.
Signals are received from the gyro, the vehicle speed sensor,
and the GPS antenna. Vehicle location is determined by combining this data with the data contained in the CD-ROM map.
Locational information is shown on liquid crystal display panel.
Finger-operated touch switches are positioned on the liquid
crystal display panel for easy operation.
The touch switches used to control the equipment are beneath
a glass sheet and two resistance membranes at the top of the
liquid crystal display panel. The switches are sensitive to resistance value where touched with your finger to detect operating status.
CD-ROM Driver
NAEL0421S0202
Maps, traffic control regulations, and other pertinent information
can be easily red from the CD-ROM disc.
NOTE:
쐌 When removing the CD-ROM, allow it to remain open until the
liquid crystal display locks.
쐌 The liquid crystal display must be closed when the vehicle is
running.
쐌 Do not place cups, cans or other containers containing liquids
on top of the liquid crystal display.
SEL689V
Map CD-ROM
쐌
쐌
NAEL0421S0203
The map CD-ROM has maps, traffic control regulations, and
other pertinent information.
To improve CD-ROM map matching and route determination
functions, the CD-ROM uses an exclusive Nissan format.
Therefore, the use of a CD-ROM provided by other manufacturers cannot be used.
EL-398
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
Gyro (Angular Speed Sensor)
쐌
쐌
쐌
SEL690V
NAEL0421S0204
The oscillator gyro sensor is used to detect changes in vehicle
steering angle.
The oscillator gyro periodically senses oscillatory variation at
the oscillation terminals. This variation is caused by changes
in the vehicle angular velocity. Voltage variations are sensed
by ceramic voltage sensors at the left and right sides of the
terminals. Vehicle angular velocity corresponds directly with
these changes in voltage.
The gyro is built into the display & navigation (NAVI) control
unit.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
BIRDVIEW姞
姞
NAEL0421S0205
The BIRDVIEW provides a detailed and easily seen display of
road conditions covering the vehicle’s immediate to distant area.
FE
CL
MT
MAP DISPLAY
AT
TF
PD
AX
BIRDVIEW R
SU
SEL636X
Description
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
NAEL0421S0206
Display area: Trapezoidal representation showing approximate
distances (Wn, D, and Wd).
Ten horizontal grid lines indicate display width while six vertical grid lines indicate display depth and direction.
Drawing line area shows open space, depth, and immediate
front area. Each area is to a scale of approximately 5:6:25.
When the “ZM−” button is pushed, the view point height is
increased. Pushing the “ZM+” button decreases the height.
Pushing the “ZM−” button or the “ZM+” button during operation
indicates the scale change and the view point height at the
left-hand side of the screen.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
SEL691V
EL-399
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
FUNCTION OF TOUCH SWITCH (SUMMARY)
Display with Pushed “MAP” Switch
=NAEL0421S03
NAEL0421S0301
SEL475Y
The function of each touch switch is as follows:
1) Azimuth indication
2) Position marker
The tip of the arrow shows the current position. The shaft of
the arrow indicates the direction in which the vehicle is traveling.
3) GPS reception signal (indicates current reception conditions)
4) Distance display (shows the distance in a reduced scale)
5) Current location voice information
(this information is available when the route guide is being
activated and the designated route is being traveled.)
6) Switch display from map screen to BIRDVIEW姞 screen
(change to map screen on display when the BIRDVIEW姞 is
being used.)
7) The following items can be set.
쐌 Save Current Location
쐌 Edit Address Book
쐌 Guide Volume
쐌 System Setting
8) The route guide operation can be canceled.
EL-400
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
Display with Pushed “DEST” Switch
=NAEL0421S0302
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SEL581X
The function of each touch switch is as follows:
Icon
MT
AT
Description
Address Book
Favorite place can be saved to memory.
The destination can be selected from the memory.
Address/Street
The destination can be searched from the address.
Point of Interest (POI)
The destination of favorite facility can be searched.
Previous Dest.
The previous ten destinations stored in memory are
displayed.
Intersection
The destination from the intersection name can be
retrieved.
City
The destination can be searched from city name.
Map
The destination can be searched from the map.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-401
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
Display with Toutch Screen
NAEL0421S0303
SEL476Y
The function of each touch switch is as follows:
Icon
Description
Quick Stop
The selected facility is set as the destination or waypoint. (Route guidance has been turned OFF or the
destination has been reached.)
Where am I?
Next, current and previous street names can be displayed.
Route Info.*
The following items can be set.
쐌 Complete Route
쐌 Turn List
쐌 Route Simulation
(Displayed only when the destination area has been
set.)
Detour*
Based on the selected distance, an alternative route is
searched. [Displayed only when the recommended
route (not its reverse) is followed.]
Edit Route*
Change the destination or add the transit points of the
route set in the route guide. (Displayed only when the
automatic reroute function has been turned OFF and
the recommended route is not followed.)
Route Calc.
Search for a recommended route between the vehicle’s current location and the destination area. (Displayed only when the destination area has been set.)
*: When destinations have been entered, route guidance has been turned OFF or
destination has been reached, “Route Info.”, “Detour” and “Edit Route” are not
displayed.
EL-402
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Schematic
Schematic
NAEL0422
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL042Q
EL-403
IDX
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — NAVI —
Wiring Diagram — NAVI —
NAEL0423
MEL043Q
EL-404
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — NAVI — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL044Q
IDX
EL-405
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — NAVI — (Cont’d)
MEL045Q
EL-406
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Self-diagnosis Mode
Self-diagnosis Mode
APPLICATION ITEMS
Mode
Description
NAEL0424
GI
NAEL0424S01
Reference
page
MA
Self-diagnosis for display & NAVI control unit, CD-ROM
and GPS antenna connection.
EL-408
EM
Display Diagnosis
Color and gray gradation of display can be checked in
this mode.
EL-416
LC
Diagnostic Signals from the Car
Several input signals to display & NAVI control unit, can
be monitored in this mode.
EL-414
Check the map CDROM version
The version (parts number) of inserted CD-ROM can be
checked in this mode.
EL-415
History of errors
Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory
(before turning ignition switch ON) are displayed in this
mode. Time and location when/where the errors
occurred are also displayed.
EL-410
Longitude & Latitude
Display the map. Use the joystick to adjust position. Longitude and latitude will be displayed.
EL-417
Adjust the angle
Turning angle of the vehicle on the display can be
adjusted in this mode.
EL-418
Under ordinary conditions, the navigation system distance measuring function will automatically compensate
for minute decreases in wheel and tire diameter caused
by tire wear or low pressure. Speed calibration immediately restores system accuracy in cases such as when
distance calibration is needed because of the use of tire
chains in inclement weather.
EL-419
This mode is for initializing the current location. Use
when the vehicle is transported a long distance on a
trailer, etc.
EL-444
Self Diagnosis
Confirmation/
adjustment
Navigation
Speed Calibration
Initialize Location
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
HOW TO PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
1.
2.
NAEL0424S02
Start the engine.
Push both of “MAP” and “D/N” switches at the same time for
more than 5 seconds.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL583X
3.
쐌
Touch “Self Diagnosis” or “Confirmation/ adjustment”.
For further procedure, refer to the following pages which
describe each application item of the self-diagnosis mode.
HA
SC
IDX
SEL584X
EL-407
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Self-diagnosis Mode (Cont’d)
“Self Diagnosis”
1.
2.
NAEL0424S0201
3.
Start the engine.
Push both “MAP” and “D/N” switches at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
Touch “Self Diagnosis”.
4.
Self-diagnosis will be performed.
5.
Diagnosis results will be displayed. Diagnosis results are indicated by display color. For details refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSIS
RESULTS”.
SEL584X
SEL585X
SEL586X
To obtain detailed diagnosis results on the screen, touch “Navigation” or “GPS Antenna”.
SEL587X
EL-408
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Self-diagnosis Mode (Cont’d)
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Diagnosed
item
Displayed
color
Green
“GPS
Antenna”
(GPS
antenna con- Yellow
nection)
Green
Detailed result
—
Description
GPS antenna is connected to display & NAVI control unit correctly.
Connection to the following unit is abnormal. See GPS antenna connection error is
the Service Manual for
detected.
further diagnosis.
—
No failure is detected.
Display & NAVI control unit is malfunctioning.
Red
[*** is abnormal.]
Gray
Self-diagnosis for CDROM DRIVER of DISP & Any CD-ROM is not inserted or disNAVI was not conducted play & NAVI control unit is malfuncdue to no insertion of
tioning.
CD-ROM.
“Navigation”
(Display &
NAVI control
unit)
Yellow
CD-ROM or CD-ROM
DRIVER of DISP & NAVI
is abnormal. See the
Service Manual for further diagnosis.
Display & NAVI control unit judges
that inserted CD-ROM is malfunctioning.
Map CD-ROM or CD-ROM driver of
the unit is malfunctioning.
CD-ROM is abnormal.
Please check the disc.
Inserted map CD-ROM can not be
read.
Map CD-ROM or CD-ROM driver of
the unit is malfunctioning.
Connection to the following unit is abnormal. See GPS antenna connection error is
the Service Manual for
detected.
further diagnosis.
=NAEL0424S03
Diagnoses/service procedure
Recheck system at each check or
replacement (When malfunction is
eliminated, further repair work is
not required.)
GI
MA
EM
—
1. Check GPS antenna feeder cable
connection at display & NAVI
control unit.
2. Visually check GPS antenna
feeder cable. If NG, replace GPS
antenna assembly.
3. Replace GPS antenna.
LC
EC
FE
—
Replace display & NAVI control unit.
1. Confirm that map CD-ROM is not
inserted into display & NAVI control unit.
2. Replace display & NAVI control
unit.
1. Confirm the disk is installed correctly (not up side down.)
2. Perform “CHECK THE MAP CDROM VERSION” in EL-415 to
confirm whether correct CD-ROM
is inserted or not.
3. Check the disk surface. Are there
any scratches, abrasions or pits
on the surface?
4. Replace the CD-ROM.
5. Replace display & NAVI control
unit.
1. Check GPS antenna feeder cable
connection at display & NAVI
control unit.
2. Visually check GPS antenna
feeder cable. If NG, replace GPS
antenna assembly.
3. Replace GPS antenna.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-409
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode
“HISTORY OF ERRORS” MODE
Description
=NAEL0425
NAEL0425S01
NAEL0425S0101
In this mode, historical errors of the system are displayed with the
following data.
쐌 How many times the error was detected
쐌 The last time data when the error was detected
쐌 The last place where the error was detected
NOTE:
쐌 The number of errors can be counted up to 50 times. More
than 51 times will be indicated as 50 times.
쐌 Malfunction of the GPS board (inside the display & NAVI
control unit) will result in the display of incorrect time
data.
쐌 When an error occurs, an incorrect position marker
appears on the display. The accuracy of the display data
(position marker) will be affected.
How to Perform
1.
2.
NAEL0425S0102
3.
Start the engine.
Push both “MAP” and “D/N” switch at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
Touch “Confirmation/ adjustment”.
4.
Touch “Navigation”.
5.
Touch “Error history”.
SEL584X
SEL588X
SEL453Y
EL-410
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode (Cont’d)
6.
SEL590X
If trouble items are displayed with time count, repair/replace
the system according to “HISTORY OF ERRORS” TABLE,
EL-412.
7. If necessary, touch error item to display the time when the error
was detected and the place where the error was detected.
8. After repairing the system, erase the diagnosis memory.
NOTE:
When the display & NAVI control unit must be replaced, do not
erase the diagnosis memory for further inspection of malfunctions.
a. Start the engine.
b. Push both “Map” and “D/N” switches at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
c. Touch “Confirmation/ adjustment”.
d. Touch “Navigation”.
e. Touch “Error history”.
f. Touch “Delete”.
g. Touch “Yes”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-411
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode (Cont’d)
“HISTORY OF ERRORS” TABLE
Detected items
Description
Diagnosis/service procedure
Reference
page
Perform self-diagnosis to confirm
whether the display & NAVI control unit
is malfunctioning or not. If no failure is
detected, a momentary and/or temporary malfunction may have been caused
by strong electromagnetic wave interference.
EL-407
Gyro sensor disconnected
Communications malfunction between
display & NAVI control unit and internal
gyro
Connection problem of speed
sensor
Check vehicle speed sensor signal in
“DIAGNOSTIC SIGNALS FROM THE
Input malfunction of display & NAVI con- CAR” mode. If the input signal is not
trol unit and speed sensor
detected correctly, check harness for
open or short between combination
meter and display & NAVI control unit.
GPS disconnected
Communications malfunction between
GPS transmission cable malfuncdisplay & NAVI control unit and GPS
tion
board
GPS input line connection error
GPS TCXO over
GPS TCXO under
GPS ROM malfunction
GPS RAM malfunction
GPS RTC malfunction
GPS antenna disconnected
Low voltage of GPS
CD-ROM communication error
The transmission circuit of the GPS
board frequency synchronization oscillator (inside the display & NAVI control
unit) is sending an oscillation frequency
that is greater or less than the set value.
Internal malfunction of GPS board RAM
or ROM inside the display & NAVI control unit.
Malfunction of GPS board clock IC
inside the display & NAVI control unit.
—
Power supply voltage for GPS board
inside the display & NAVI control unit is
low.
CD-ROM driver malfunction (inside the
display & NAVI control unit)
EL-412
=NAEL0425S02
EL-414
Perform self-diagnosis to confirm
whether the display & NAVI control unit
is malfunctioning or not. If no failure is
detected, a momentary and/or temporary malfunction may have been caused
by strong electromagnetic wave interference.
EL-407
A location error occurs. Strong electromagnetic wave interference may have
occurred. The GPS antenna may be in a
very hot or very cold environment. This
is usually a temporary malfunction.
—
Perform self-diagnosis to confirm
whether the display & NAVI control unit
is malfunctioning or not. If no failure is
detected, a momentary and/or temporary malfunction may have been caused
by strong electromagnetic wave interference.
EL-407
Perform self-diagnosis to confirm GPS
antenna connection. If no failure is
detected, a momentary and/or temporary malfunction may have been caused
by a strong impact.
EL-415
1. Check power supply circuits for display & NAVI control unit.
EL-428
2. Perform self-diagnosis to confirm
GPS antenna connection.
EL-407
3. If above diagnosis results are OK, a
momentary and/or temporary malfunction may have been caused by a strong
impact.
—
Perform self-diagnosis to confirm
whether the display & NAVI control unit
is malfunctioning or not. If no failure is
detected, a momentary and/or temporary malfunction may have been caused
by strong electromagnetic wave interference.
EL-407
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode (Cont’d)
Detected items
Loading mechanism malfunction
Description
Diagnosis/service procedure
—
Check that whether the disc can be
inserted and ejected correctly. If the
loading function does not operate
correctly, replace NAVI & display control
unit.
CD-ROM reading error
It is confirmed that the appropriate CDROM disc is positioned in the CD-ROM
loader. However, no data can be read.
Malfunctioning of error correction
for CD-ROM
Erroneous data is read from the CDROM. The errors cannot be corrected.
CD-ROM focus error
CD-ROM data reading beam is out of
focus.
CD-ROM malfunction
—
GI
MA
EM
LC
Perform self-diagnosis to confirm
whether the inserted disc is malfunctioning or not.
Rough road driving might create CD
skipping like music CD audio unit.
Perform self-diagnosis to confirm
whether the inserted disc is malfunctioning or not.
—
Reference
page
EL-407
—
EL-407
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-413
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode (Cont’d)
“DIAGNOSTIC SIGNALS FROM THE CAR” MODE =NAEL0425S03
Description
NAEL0425S0301
In “Diagnostic Signals From the Car” mode, following input signals
to the display & NAVI control unit can be checked on the display.
Item
Vehicle
Speed*
Indication
Vehicle condition
ON
Vehicle speed is greater than 0 km/h (0 MPH).
OFF
Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 MPH).
ON
Lighting switch is in 1st or 2nd position.
OFF
Lighting switch is in “OFF” position.
ON
Ignition switch is in “ON” position.
OFF
Ignition switch is in “ACC” position.
ON
Selector/shift lever is in “Reverse” position.
OFF
Selector/shift lever is in other than “Reverse” position.
Light
IGN
REVERSE*
*: When ignition switch is in “ACC” position, indication will be changed to “-”.
How to Perform
1.
2.
NAEL0425S0302
3.
Start the engine.
Push both “MAP” and “D/N” switches at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
Touch “Confirmation/ adjustment”.
4.
Touch “Diagnostic Signals from the Car”.
5.
Then “Diagnostic Signals from the Car” mode is performed.
SEL584X
SEL588X
SEL591X
EL-414
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode (Cont’d)
“CHECK THE MAP CD-ROM VERSION” MODE
How to Perform
1.
2.
3.
=NAEL0425S04
GI
NAEL0425S0401
Start the engine.
Push both “MAP” and “D/N” switches at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
Touch “Confirmation/ adjustment”.
MA
EM
LC
SEL584X
4.
Touch “Navigation”.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEL588X
5.
Touch “Check the map CD-ROM version”.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL589X
6.
The version (parts number) of CD-ROM loaded to the display
and NAVI control unit will be displayed.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL592X
HA
SC
IDX
EL-415
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode (Cont’d)
“DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS” MODE
Description
=NAEL0425S05
NAEL0425S0501
Use the “Diagnosis Display” mode to check the display color brightness and shading. The display & NAVI control unit must be
replaced if the color brightness and shading are abnormal.
How to Perform
1.
2.
NAEL0425S0502
3.
Start the engine.
Push both “MAP” and “D/N” switches at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
Touch “Confirmation/ adjustment”.
4.
Touch “Display Diagnosis”.
5.
6.
Touch “Display color spectrum bar” or “Display gradation bar”.
Then color bar/gray scale will be displayed.
SEL584X
SEL588X
SEL454Y
SEL455Y
EL-416
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode (Cont’d)
“LONGITUDE & LATITUDE” MODE
Description
NAEL0425S06
GI
NAEL0425S0601
The “Longitude & Latitude” is used to confirm the longitude and
latitude of some optional area point.
MA
EM
LC
How to Perform
1.
2.
3.
EC
NAEL0425S0602
Start the engine.
Push both “MAP” and “D/N” switches at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
Touch “Confirmation/ adjustment”.
FE
CL
MT
SEL584X
4.
Touch “Navigation”.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL588X
5.
Touch “Longitude & Latitude”.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL589X
6.
7.
Adjust the pointer with using the joystick and touch “Set”.
The longitude and latitude are displayed.
HA
SC
IDX
SEL595X
EL-417
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode (Cont’d)
“ADJUST THE ANGLE” MODE
Description
=NAEL0425S07
NAEL0425S0701
If the display indicates a larger or smaller turning angle than the
actual turning angle, the gyro (angular speed sensor) sensing values must be checked.
In case that the vehicle on the display makes larger angle turn than
reality, touch “−”. In case that the vehicle on the display makes
smaller angle turn than reality, touch “+”.
How to Perform
1.
2.
NAEL0425S0702
3.
Start the engine.
Push both “MAP” and “D/N” switches at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
Touch “Confirmation/ adjustment”.
4.
Touch “Navigation”.
5.
Touch “Adjust the angle”.
6.
Touch “Left Turn” to adjust the angle to the left. Touch “Right
Turn” to adjust the angle to the right.
Touch “+” to increase the angle change coefficient or “−” to
reduce the angle change coefficient.
Touch “Set” to save the changed values in memory.
Then the vehicle turning angle on the display has adjusted.
SEL584X
SEL588X
SEL453Y
7.
8.
9.
SEL456Y
EL-418
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode (Cont’d)
SPEED CALIBRATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
=NAEL0425S08
Start the engine.
Push both “MAP” and “D/N” switches at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
Touch “Confirmation/ adjustment”.
Touch “Navigation”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL584X
5.
Touch “Speed Calibration”.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEL453Y
6.
쐌
쐌
7.
Touch “+” or “−” to adjust the distance change coefficient.
To make the distance change coefficient smaller, touch “−”.
To make the distance change coefficient larger, touch “+”.
Touch “Set”.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL457Y
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-419
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Setting Mode
Setting Mode
=NAEL0426
APPLICATION ITEMS
Mode
GPS Information
Description
NAEL0426S01
Reference page
The GPS includes longtitude, latitude and altitude (distance above sea level) of the
present vehicle position, and current date and time for the area in which the vehicle is
being driven.
Also indicated are the GPS reception conditions and the GPS satellite position.
EL-420
Quick Stop Customer One facility of your selection can be added to your Quick Stop.
Setting
EL-423
Route Priorities
Priorities of search request and automatic re-searching can be set for route search.
EL-424
Tracking
Tracking to the present vehicle position can be displayed.
EL-425
Display Setting
The following display settings can be customized.
쐌 Display color (Day mode or Night mode)
쐌 Brightness of display
EL-422
Heading
Heading of the map display can be customized for either north heading or the actual
driving direction of the vehicle.
EL-425
Nearby Display Icons
Icons of facilities can be displayed.
Facilities to be displayed can be selected from the variety of selections.
EL-426
Adjust Current Location
Current location of position marker can be adjusted. Direction of position marker also
can be calibrated when heading direction of the vehicle on the display is not matched
with the actual direction.
EL-421
Avoid Area Setting
Particular area can be avoided when routing.
Beep On/Off
Beep sounds which correspond to the system operation can be activated/deactivated.
EL-422
Clear Memory
Address book, Previous destination or Avoid area can be deleted.
EL-426
HOW TO PERFORM CONTROL PANEL MODE
1.
2.
쐌
—
NAEL0426S02
Start the engine.
Push “MAP” switch.
For further procedures, refer to the following pages which
describe each application item of the control panel mode.
SEL597X
“GPS INFORMATION” SETTING
1.
2.
3.
Start the engine.
Push “MAP” switch.
Touch “Setting”.
SEL598X
EL-420
NAEL0426S03
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Setting Mode (Cont’d)
4.
Touch “System Setting”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL461Y
5.
EC
Touch “GPS Information”.
FE
CL
MT
SEL462Y
6.
AT
Then GPS information will be displayed.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL146W
“ADJUST CURRENT LOCATION” SETTING
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start the engine.
Push “MAP” switch.
Touch “Setting”.
Touch “System Setting”.
NAEL0426S04
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL460Y
5.
Touch “Adjust Current Location”.
HA
SC
IDX
SEL463Y
EL-421
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Setting Mode (Cont’d)
6.
7.
8.
Touch “ ” or “ ” to calibrate the heading direction. (Arrow
marks will rotate corresponding to the calibration key.)
Touch “Set”. Then the vehicle mark will be matched to the
arrow mark.
Display will show “Heading direction has been calibrated” and
then go back to the current location map.
SEL602X
BEEP ON/OFF SETTING
NAEL0426S05
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start the engine.
Push “MAP” switch.
Touch “Setting”.
Touch “System Setting”.
5.
Touch “Beep on/off”.
6.
쐌
쐌
7.
Touch “On” or “Off” icon.
If you want the beep sound, select “ON”.
If you do not want the beep sound, select “OFF”.
Push “MAP” switch, then the display will go back to the current
location map.
SEL460Y
SEL463Y
SEL464Y
DISPLAY SETTING
Description
NAEL0426S06
NAEL0426S0601
The following display setting can be changed in this mode.
쐌 Dimmer operation (when lighting switch is turned on.)
쐌 Display color (Day mode or Night mode)
쐌 Brightness of display
EL-422
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Setting Mode (Cont’d)
DISPLAY COLOR SETTING
NAEL0426S07
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SEL465Y
Start the engine.
Push “MAP” switch.
Touch “Setting”.
Touch “System Setting”.
Touch “Color”. Display color will change to Day mode/Night
mode.
6. Touch “Previous”.
NOTE:
쐌 Display color can be changed independently when lighting switch is turned on and off.
쐌 Initial setting of the color is as follows:
When lighting switch is turned off: Day mode
When lighting switch is turned on: Night mode
Day mode: White background
Night mode: Black background
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
BRIGHTNESS SETTING
SEL465Y
AT
NAEL0426S08
1. Start the engine.
2. Push “MAP” switch.
3. Touch “Setting”.
4. Touch “System Setting”.
5. Touch “Display Setting”.
6. Touch “Bright” or “Dark” to adjust the brightness of display.
7. Touch “Previous”.
NOTE:
Display brightness can be adjusted independently when lighting switch is turned on and off.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
“QUICK STOP CUSTOMER SETTING” MODE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start the engine.
Push the “MAP” switch.
Touch “Setting”.
Touch “System Setting”.
NAEL0426S09
HA
SC
IDX
SEL460Y
EL-423
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Setting Mode (Cont’d)
5.
Touch “Quick Stop Customer Setting”.
6.
Select from the itemized list.
SEL462Y
SEL466Y
“ROUTE PRIORITIES” MODE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start the engine.
Push the “MAP” switch.
Touch “Setting”.
Touch “System Setting”.
5.
Touch “Route Priorities”.
6.
Select from the itemized list.
SEL460Y
SEL467Y
SEL468Y
EL-424
NAEL0426S10
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Setting Mode (Cont’d)
“TRACKING” MODE
1.
2.
3.
4.
NAEL0426S11
Start the engine.
Push the “MAP” switch.
Touch “Setting”.
Touch “System Setting”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL460Y
5.
EC
Touch “Tracking”.
FE
CL
MT
SEL467Y
6.
쐌
쐌
7.
Touch the “On” or “Off” icon.
If you don’t need a trail on the map, select “Off”.
If you need a trail on the map, select “On”.
Push the “MAP” switch to return the display to the current
location map.
NOTE:
When a trail display is turned OFF, trail data is erased from the
memory.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL470Y
“HEADING” MODE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start the engine.
Push the “MAP” switch.
Touch “Setting”.
Touch “System Setting”.
NAEL0426S12
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL460Y
5.
Touch “Heading”.
HA
SC
IDX
SEL467Y
EL-425
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Setting Mode (Cont’d)
6.
쐌
쐌
7.
Touch the “Heading up” or “North up” icon.
To display North up, select “North up”.
To display the car heading up, select “Heading up”.
Push the “MAP” switch, then the display will go back to the
current location map.
SEL470Y
“NEARBY DISPLAY ICONS” MODE
NAEL0426S13
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start the engine.
Push the “MAP” switch.
Touch “Setting”.
Touch “System Setting”.
5.
Touch “Nearby Display Icons”.
6.
7.
Select and touch the itemized list.
Push the “MAP” switch to return the display to the current
location map.
SEL460Y
SEL463Y
SEL471Y
“CLEAR MEMORY” MODE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start the engine.
Push the “MAP” switch.
Touch “Setting”.
Touch “System Setting”.
SEL460Y
EL-426
NAEL0426S14
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Setting Mode (Cont’d)
5.
Touch “Clear Memory”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL462Y
6.
To delete all the stored places in the “Address Book”, “Avoid
Area” and “Previous Dest.”, select “Yes”.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEL472Y
“MAP & A/C” MODE
1.
2.
3.
4.
AT
NAEL0426S15
Start the engine.
Push “MAP” switch.
Touch “Setting”.
Touch “System Setting”.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL460Y
5.
Touch “MAP & A/C”.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL462Y
6.
쐌
SEL474Y
Touch “Map & A/C” or “Map” icon.
To set the split display with both the map and the air conditioner information as the initial setting of the NAVI system,
select “MAP & A/C”.
쐌 To set the map only display as the initial setting of the NAVI
system, select “MAP”.
7. Push “MAP” switch, then the display will go back to the current
location map.
NOTE:
When the enlarged view is displayed, the air conditioner control
screen will not be displayed.
EL-427
HA
SC
IDX
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Trouble diagnoses
Trouble diagnoses
SYMPTOM CHART
Symptom
Any function of the system
does not operate.
Diagnoses/service procedure
NAEL0427
NAEL0427S01
Reference
page
Check power supply and ground circuit for display & NAVI control unit.
EL-431
Strange screen color or
unusual screen brightness.
1. Check “DISPLAY SETTING”.
EL-422
The display is not dimmed
when turning lighting switch
to ON.
1. Check “DISPLAY SETTING”.
EL-422
2. Check lighting switch signal input to display & NAVI control unit correctly in
“DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL FROM THE CAR” MODE.
EL-414
No navigation guide voice
are heard from both front
speakers.
1. Check “Voice Guidance Setting”.
2. Check display in “Diagnosis of Display” MODE.
—
—
2. Check voice guide operation.
EL-432
Beep does not sound when
the system guides route.
Check “BEEP ON/OFF SETTING”.
EL-422
Position marker does not
trace along the route being
traveled.
Go to “WORK FLOW FOR NAVIGATION INSPECTION”.
EL-429
Position marker does not
Check reverse signal input to display & NAVI control unit correctly by “DIAGNOSindicate forward or backward
TIC SIGNAL FROM THE CAR” MODE.
movement.
Radio wave of GPS cannot
be received. (GPS marker
on the display does not
become green color.)
Heading direction of position
marker does not match
vehicle direction.
1. Is there anything obstructing the GPS antenna on the rear parcel finisher?
(GPS antenna located under the rear parcel finisher.)
—
2. Check GPS radio wave receive condition in “GPS INFORMATION SETTING”.
EL-420
3. Check GPS antenna in “Self Diagnosis”.
EL-407
1. Perform “ADJUST CURRENT LOCATION” SETTING.
EL-421
2. Go to “WORK FLOW FOR NAVIGATION INSPECTION”.
EL-429
Stored location in the
address book and other
Stored location in the address book and other memory functions may be lost if the
memory functions are lost
battery is disconnected or becomes discharged. If this should occur, charge or
when battery is disconnected replace the battery as necessary and re-enter the information.
or becomes discharged.
Map appears grey and cannot be scrolled.
EL-414
The current location in the memory is out of the map data area.
Perform “Initialize Location”.
EL-428
—
EL-444
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Trouble diagnoses (Cont’d)
WORK FLOW FOR NAVIGATION INSPECTION
NAEL0427S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
SEL629XA
ST
*1: EL-434
*2: EL-407
*3: EL-410
*4: EL-414
*5: EL-430
*6: EL-409
*7: EL-412
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-429
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Trouble diagnoses (Cont’d)
DRIVING TEST
=NAEL0427S03
During the driving test, diagnose the system by checking the difference of symptoms with each sensor ON or OFF.
Test pattern 1
Test method in which current position adjustment is not made
according to GPS data.
쐌 Remove the GPS antenna connector from the display & NAVI
control unit. Drive the vehicle.
Before driving the vehicle, perform “ADJUST CURRENT
LOCATION” (EL-421).
Test pattern 2
Test procedure in which map matching is not used.
쐌 Before driving the vehicle, perform “ADJUST CURRENT
LOCATION” (EL-421). With the ignition switch OFF and the
map CD-ROM removed from the display & NAVI control unit,
drive the vehicle. After driving the vehicle, reinstall the map
CD-ROM. Compare the saved driving tracks for the vehicle’s
current location with roads on the map.
Example
, Perform test pattern 1.
, Perform test patterns 1 and 2.
쐌 Compare the map and the saved driving tracks. The precision
of the saved driving tracks is within several hundred meters.
, Perform test patterns 1 and 2.
쐌 Make adjustments by driving the vehicle over a known course
(highway or other road where distances are clearly marked).
Calibrate the distance against the known distance. Use the
formula below.
Calibration value = Screen display distance/Actual distance
EL-430
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Trouble diagnoses (Cont’d)
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK FOR
GI
DISPLAY & NAVI CONTROL UNIT
=NAEL0427S04
Power Supply Circuit Check
NAEL0427S0401
MA
Terminal
SEL693VD
Ignition switch
(+)
(−)
OFF
ACC
ON
1
Ground
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
2
Ground
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
5
Ground
0V
0V
Battery voltage
6
Ground
0V
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
If NG, check the following.
쐌 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 15A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 Harness for open or short between fuse and display & NAVI
control unit
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
Ground Circuit Check
NAEL0427S0402
Terminals
Continuity
3 - Ground
Yes
4 - Ground
Yes
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL694VD
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-431
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Trouble diagnoses (Cont’d)
VOICE GUIDE OPERATION CHECK
1
=NAEL0427S05
PRELIMINARY CHECK
1. Turn ignition switch to ACC position.
2. Insert the music CD into the radio and CD player.
3. Try to play the music CD.
Is the sound emitted from all speakers?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
Repair or replace audio system.
Refer to “AUDIO”, EL-173.
2
CHECK NAVI OPERATION ON SIGNAL
1. Disconnect audio unit connector.
2. Push “VOICE” button.
3. Check voltage between terminal 28 and ground.
SEL645XA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace harness or NAVI control unit.
3
CHECK VOICE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Push “VOICE” button.
2. Check voltage between display and NAVI control unit harness connector M118 terminal 30 (G/Y) or 31 (OR/L) and
ground.
SEL797Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace NAVI control unit.
EL-432
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Trouble diagnoses (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK VOICE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display and NAVI control unit connector and AUDIO unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display and NAVI control unit harness connector M118 terminal 30 (G/Y) and AUDIO unit harness connector M139 terminal 36 (G/Y).
4. Check continuity between display and NAVI control unit harness connector M118 terminal 31 (OR/L) and AUDIO unit
harness connector M139 terminal 34 (OR/L).
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL798Y
CL
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Repair or replace audio system.
Refer to “AUDIO”, EL-173.
No
䊳
Repair or replace harness or connector.
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-433
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This Condition is Not Abnormal
This Condition is Not Abnormal
EXAMPLE OF BASIC OPERATIONAL ERRORS
Symptom
No image is displayed.
Possible cause
Repair order
Monitor brightness control is set to full dark.
Map does not appear Map CD is not inserted or inserted upside down.
on display.
Map mode is turned OFF.
No guide tone is
heard.
=NAEL0428
NAEL0428S01
Readjust monitor brightness.
Insert the map CD with the label facing up.
Press the “MAP” button.
Voice guide adjustment OFF/Volume is set to the
lowest or highest level.
Adjust the voice guide level.
Dark display/Slow
image movement
Low vehicle interior temperature
Wait until vehicle interior temperature rises to appropriate level.
Small black or white
dots appear on the
screen.
Unique liquid crystal display phenomena
No problem
“Unable to read CD”
message appears
only during specified
operation.
Map CD surface is tainted/CD surface is partially
scratched.
Voice guide volume
is too high or too low.
Check map CD surface. If dirty, wipe clean with a
soft cloth.
If map CD surface is damaged, replace the CD.
Area place names are not displayed.
If area place names do not appear on the map display, these names may not be available. Use the BIRDVIEW姞 flat surface map display function. Display output may differ. Note the items related to BIRDVIEW姞
below.
쐌 Priority is given to the display of place names in the direction of vehicle travel.
쐌 Extended display of vehicle travel distance for both surfaces and steering angle (flat directional changes).
This phenomenon disappears after the display image has been replaced by another one.
쐌 The names of route and area might vary between the immediate front area and distance front area.
쐌 Alphanumeric display characters are limited to maintain display simplicity and clarity. Display details may
differ with time and place.
쐌 Identical place and road names may appear on the display at more than one location.
EL-434
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This Condition is Not Abnormal (Cont’d)
EXAMPLE OF CURRENT VEHICLE POSITION MARKER ERROR
=NAEL0428S02
The navigation system reads the vehicle distance and steering angle data. Because the vehicle is moving,
there will be an error in the current position indication. After the error appears, drive the vehicle for a short
distance. Stop the vehicle. If the position marker does not return to its original position, perform “ADJUST
CURRENT LOCATION” (EL-421).
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEL698V
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-435
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This Condition is Not Abnormal (Cont’d)
Possible cause
Drive condition
Slippery road surface
On wet, icy, or gravel road where
frequent wheel slippage occurs, distance calculations may be erroneous. The position marker may show
the vehicle to be in inaccurate position.
Slanted area
Hilly areas where the road has
banked curves. When the vehicle
enters these banked curves, there
may be an error in steering angle
measurement. The position marker
may show the vehicle to be in inaccurate position.
Area
Map
data
When the vehicle is driven on a
newly constructed road that does
Map display for a given road does not appear.
not appear on the existing map.
Map marking and calibration are not
possible. The position marker may
indicate inaccurate position in close
proximity to the actual position.
Subsequently, when the vehicle is
driven on a road which is available
as map data, the position marker
SEL699V
may still indicate an inaccurate position.
Service procedure
If the position marker does not
move to the correct position
even after the vehicle has been
driven approximately 10 km (6
miles), perform “ADJUST CURRENT LOCATION” (EL-421). If
necessary, perform “SPEED
CALIBRATION” (EL-419).
The vehicle is driven on a road whose course
has been altered (usually to improve the road or When the map data shown on the
to eliminate some hazard).
display and the actual conditions are
different. Map matching will not be
possible. The position marker may
indicate inaccurate position in close
proximity to the actual position. If
the vehicle is driven on the indicated
road, further errors may occur.
SEL700V
Vehicle
Use of tire chains (Stormy weather)
Tire chains will affect distance sensing. The position marker may indicate inaccurate position.
EL-436
If the position marker does not
move to the correct position
even after the vehicle has been
driven approximately 10 km (6
miles), perform “SPEED CALIBRATION” (EL-419). After
removing the tire chains, sensing accuracy may recover by
itself.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This Condition is Not Abnormal (Cont’d)
Possible cause
Drive condition
Driving immediately after starting engine.
Operation
The gyro (angular velocity sensor)
needs about 15 seconds after the
engine is started to precisely sense
the angular velocity. Directional
sensing errors will occur if the
vehicle is moved immediately after
starting the engine. The position
marker may indicate inaccurate
position.
When the vehicle is driven continuously without stopping over a long
Continuous driving for long distances (non-stop) distance, errors in directional sensing may occur. The position marker
may indicate inaccurate position.
Service procedure
MA
Wait a few moments between
starting the engine and actually
driving the vehicle.
EM
LC
Stop the vehicle. Perform
“SPEED CALIBRATION” (EL419).
EC
FE
If the position marker does not
Wheel spinning (peeling out) or simimove to the correct position
lar rough driving techniques can
even after the vehicle has been
adversely affect sensing accuracy.
driven approximately 10 km (6
The position marker may indicate
miles), perform “ADJUST CURinaccurate position.
RENT LOCATION” (EL-421).
Rough or violent driving
GI
CL
MT
Positional calibration precision
Positional
calibration pro- Position calibration direction
cedures
If current vehicle location is roughly
set, the system may be unable to
locate the road that the vehicle is
traveling on. (This is especially true
in an area where there are many
roads.)
Perform “ADJUST CURRENT
LOCATION” (EL-421) within a
precision standard of 1 mm
(0.04 in) on the display.
Note: During calibration, use
the most detailed map possible.
AT
TF
PD
SEL701V
When calibrating the position, check
the vehicle direction. If the vehicle
direction is not correct, subsequent
precision of current location will be
affected.
SEL702V
AX
Perform “ADJUST CURRENT
LOCATION”, refer to EL-421.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-437
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This Condition is Not Abnormal (Cont’d)
Possible cause:
—: Vehicle running ---: Indication
Drive condition
Service procedure
Y-intersection
In Y-intersections with a very
gradual change in course, a directional sensing may be inaccurate.
This may result in the position
marker giving the wrong road indication.
SEL703V
Spiral road
On loop bridges and similar structures which result in a large and
continuous turn, turning angle may
be sensed inaccurately. As a result,
the position marker may separate
from the route on the map.
SEL704V
Straight road
Road
shapes
Winding road
In long distance driving on a straight
road or road with very gradual
curves, map marking inaccuracies
may occur. In such cases, the position marker may stray from the route
being traveled during subsequent
If the position marker does not
turns due to inaccurate distance cal- move to the correct position
culation.
even after the vehicle has been
SEL705V
driven approximately 10 km (6
miles), perform “Store place”. If
required, also perform
Directional sensing precision errors “ADJUST CURRENT LOCAmay occur when traveling on windTION” (EL-421).
ing roads. During map matching, the
position marker may stray to an
adjacent road having a similar
shape. Subsequent position marker
error may occur.
SEL706V
Grid-like road shape
Directional sensing and distance
sensing, precision errors may occur
because of many roads having a
similar shape in the immediate area.
During map matching, the position
marker may stray to an adjacent
road having a similar shape. Subsequent position marker error may
SEL707V occur.
Parallel roads
When driving on a parallel road,
map matching errors may occur.
Subsequent position marker error
may also occur.
SEL708V
EL-438
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This Condition is Not Abnormal (Cont’d)
GI
Possible cause:
—: Vehicle running ---: Indication
Parking lot or similar area
Location
Turntable
Drive condition
Service procedure
When the vehicle is driven in a parking lot or similar area, such as in an
area not normally marked as a road
on map, during map matching, the
system may select nearby roads.
This error may continue after the
vehicle exits the parking area and
begins to run on ordinary roads.
Vehicle operation in a parking area
may involve frequent turns and up
and/or down operation. Directional
SEL709V sensing errors may occur leading to
subsequent route and position mistakes.
When the ignition switch is OFF (the
usual situation when the vehicle is
on a turntable), the navigation system receives no data from the gyro
(angular velocity sensor). When the
turntable rotates, no directional
change is sensed. During subsequent vehicle operation, directional
SEL710V and route errors may occur.
Position marker displays a completely different location
In circumstances such as those described below, GPS signal reception conditions may result in an erroneous
position of the position marker. Perform “ADJUST CURRENT LOCATION” (EL-421).
NOTE:
쐌 When GPS satellite signal reception conditions are poor, the position of position marker may be erroneous. If correction is not made immediately, the position marker error will be compounded and a completely
different location will be indicated. In an area where GPS satellite signal reception conditions are good,
the system can be returned to normal operation.
쐌 The vehicle is driven aboard a car ferry or is towed for some distance with the ignition switch OFF. Vehicle
movement is not sensed. Current location calculations do not occur and current location data does not
appear on the display screen. Use GPS to accurately determine actual vehicle position. The system can
be returned to normal operation when the GPS satellite signal reception conditions are good.
Position marker jumps
In circumstances such as those described below, the position marker may jump as a result of automatic current location corrections made by the system.
During map matching
쐌 During map matching, the position marker may jump from one spot to another. In this case, it may be corrected to a wrong road or to an area where no road exist.
GPS location correcting
쐌 Vehicle current location is sensed using the GPS data. Positional calibration is performed. The position
marker continues to be in the wrong position. It may jump about from one area of the screen to another.
In this case, it may be corrected to a wrong road or to an area where no road exist.
Position marker indicates that the vehicle is in the middle of an ocean or large river
The navigation system does not distinguish between land and water surfaces. In some cases, a position
marker error may cause the display to show the vehicle above a water surface.
Position of position marker varies when the vehicle is repeatedly operated on the same road
Driving lane and steering wheel movement results in a variety of different positions of the position mark when
traveling on the same road based on sensing results by the GPS antenna and gyro (angular velocity sensor).
Slow locational correction using map matching
쐌 The map matching function requires verification of local data. To make the map matching function, some
distance needs to be driven.
쐌 The map matching function may not provide accurate performance in an area where there are numerous
parallel roads. Until the system judges the road characteristics, an incorrect position may be shown.
EL-439
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This Condition is Not Abnormal (Cont’d)
GPS signal reception conditions are good. However, the position mark does not return to its proper
position.
쐌 he system senses the vehicle location with an error of approximately 100 m (328 ft). Due to the limitation
of precision, the position marker may be inaccurate even if the GPS signal reception condition is good.
쐌 The navigation system uses GPS data to determine vehicle location. GPS data is compared with other
locational sensing data during the map matching process. The system decides which data is more precise and uses that data.
쐌 When the vehicle is stationary, GPS data cannot be used to make system corrections.
Area designations on the map display and the BIRDVIEW姞 display differ.
To prevent the display from becoming congested, alphanumeric information is abridged.
[No problem]
Correct position of your vehicle is not displayed.
Vehicle position changed after ignition key was turned to the OFF position (Vehicle is transported on car ferry,
car train, or by some other means).
[Operate vehicle for short time under GPS receiving conditions.]
The display does not change to night-time mode even though the light switch has been turned ON.
Lights have been turned on. In “DISPLAY CHANGE” mode, night-time mode on display has been switched to
day-time mode and still is.
[Turn lights on again. Set the display to night-time mode. Refer to EL-422.]
Map does not scroll even though the position of your vehicle is changed.
Present area does not appear on the display.
[Press the “MAP” switch.]
Vehicle position marker does not appear.
Present area does not appear on the display.
[Press the “MAP” switch.]
The map surface precision display (GPS satellite marker) still remains gray.
Vehicle is parked inside a building or in the shadow of a large building. This intercepts the GPS signal.
[Move the vehicle to a more open position.]
GPS signal is not received because objects are placed on the rear parcel shelf.
[Remove objects from the rear parcel shelf.]
GPS satellite position is bad.
[Wait until GPS satellite position improves.]
Vehicle position precision is bad.
The map surface precision display (GPS satellite marker) still remains gray.
[Refer to “The map surface precision display (GPS satellite marker) still remains gray” item (Symptoms)]
Vehicle speed and elapsed distance is calculated from the vehicle speed pulse. This pulse is dependent upon
tire size. If tire chains are used on the vehicle, accuracy will be affected (pulse rate will be too fast or too slow).
The same is true if the system installed to your vehicle is removed and installed on another vehicle.
[Drive the vehicle at a speed higher than 30 km/h (19 MPH) for approximately 30 minutes. Automatic readjustment should occur. If it does not (remains too fast or too slow), distance calibration is required. Or, drive
the vehicle for a short distance. Perform “SPEED CALIBRATION” (EL-419). After removing the tire chains,
sensing accuracy may recover by itself.]
Bad map data or system defect (same error consistently occurs in the same area)
ROUTE SEARCH/ROUTE GUIDE
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
NAEL0428S03
If the present location or the destination location is displayed in the avoid area, it is not possible to search
routes.
If the avoid area is set to wide range area, it may not be possible to find appropriate routes or search for
alternate routes.
The automatic re-route calculates a return to the original route. Because of this, it may not be possible to
search appropriate new routes. If you deviate from the original route and wish to select an appropriate new
route, touch “Route Calculation”.
The automatic re-route function may sometimes require considerable time.
Displayed route number and directional information at a highway junction may differ from the information
posted on the actual road signs.
Displayed street name information at a highway exit may differ from the information posted on the actual
road signs.
Street name information displayed on the enlarged intersection map may differ from the information posted
on the actual road signs.
EL-440
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This Condition is Not Abnormal (Cont’d)
쐌
쐌
쐌
The enlarged intersection map may display an “Unknown Street” message at some street intersections.
Because of road configuration, etc. the guide may finish early. If this occurs, follow the marker to reach
your destination.
Destination area side information (left side and right side) may differ from actual conditions because of
data error.
Unable to Set Destination, Way Point, and/or Menu Items
Symptom
NAEL0428S0301
GI
MA
EM
Possible cause
Repair order
A way point already crossed or determined to
have been crossed.
If you desire to pass through a way point for a
second time, reperform route edit.
Route search does not occur.
Set designation areas and perform route
search.
EC
Car marker does not appear on recommended route.
Drive on the recommended route.
FE
Route guide is canceled.
Turn the route guide ON. (Push “VOICE”
switch.)
CL
Automatic search does not function.
Vehicle is not running on search object route
(road indicated by orange, brown or red line).
Drive the vehicle on the search object route
or perform a manual route search. Note that
all routes will be re-searched at this time.
MT
Unable to select detour route.
Vehicle is not running on recommended route.
Use the “RE-ROUTE” mode to search again
or return to the recommended route.
Detour route search results are
identical to previous search.
All possible conditions were considered, but
results are the same.
This is not abnormal.
Unable to set a way point.
More than five way points have been previously set (and not cleared).
More than five way points cannot be specified
at the same time. Break down into smaller
segments and perform search.
Unable to select starting point
during route edit.
Starting point will normally be your present
location during route edit.
This is not abnormal.
Unable to search way points in
re-search mode
Turn list is not displayed.
Cannot select certain menu items. While vehicle is running.
Park the vehicle in a safe area and perform
operation.
Voice guide does not function.
Possible cause
Repair order
PD
AX
BR
Voice guide is only available at certain intersections (marked with ). In some cases, the
guide is not available even when the vehicle
makes a turn.
This is not abnormal.
ST
Vehicle is not running on recommended route.
Return to recommended route or reperform
route search.
RS
Voice guide is OFF.
Set voice guide to the ON position.
Route guide is canceled.
Turn the route guide ON. (Push “VOICE”
switch.)
Operate vehicle following the traffic rules and
regulation.
Route Search Information
Proceeding in desired direction.
However, route search in desired
direction does not function.
TF
NAEL0428S0302
The guide content does not corre- The content of the voice guide may vary
spond to actual conditions.
depending on the type of junction.
Symptom
AT
SU
Voice Guide Information
Symptom
LC
NAEL0428S0303
Possible cause
BT
HA
SC
Repair order
Unable to find appropriate route in the desired
This is not abnormal.
direction.
IDX
EL-441
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This Condition is Not Abnormal (Cont’d)
Symptom
Possible cause
Repair order
No object route is searched near destination
area.
Adjust position to wide road (brown) near destination area. In an area where traffic direction
is displayed separately, pay close attention to
the direction of travel. Set the destination area
and the way point over the road.
Starting point and destination areas are very
near.
Move destination areas away from starting
point on the screen.
No route is displayed.
Recommended route which has
been passed disappears from the
display.
The recommended route is divided into individual control segments. When way point 1 is
This is not abnormal.
passed, the data from the starting point to the
way point 1 is erased.
Search recommends roundabout
route.
There may be special conditions for roads
Slightly change starting point and destination
near the starting point and destination area
(one-way traffic, etc.). A roundabout route may area settings.
be displayed.
Landmark display does not show
actual conditions.
Mistaken or missing map data may result in
erroneous display.
Change map CD.
Recommended route drawn
slightly away from starting point,
way points, and destination area.
Course search data may not exist for closely
positioned starting point, way points, and destination area shown on the map. Route guide
starting point, way point, and destination point
may be separated.
Set the destination area to the general route
(indicated by a thick brown line). However,
even if the selected route is a major one,
appropriate route search data may not be
available.
LOCATION OF CAR MARKER
쐌
쐌
NAEL0428S04
If the vehicle has been parked in a multi-level parking facility or underground parking facility, the car marker
position may be inaccurate immediately after exiting the parking facility.
The GPS accuracy is within ±100 m (300 ft). Even when receiving conditions are excellent, further positional correction may not occur.
STREET INDICATION
쐌
쐌
NAEL0428S05
Street names displayed on the map may differ from the actual street names.
An “Unknown Street” message may appear on the map in place of street name information.
RESEARCH
쐌
쐌
쐌
NAEL0428S06
Position may be searched by house number. However, the displayed position and street may differ from
the actual position and street.
When position is searched using POI, the displayed position may differ from the actual position.
Some data may not be available for new buildings and other structures in a map.
GPS ANTENNA
쐌
쐌
NAEL0428S07
Do not place metal objects above the GPS antenna mounted on the rear parcel shelf. This will cause
interference with signal reception.
Do not place mobile telephones or vehicle radio transceivers in close proximity to the GPS antenna
mounted on the rear parcel shelf. This may cause interference with signal reception.
EL-442
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Program Loading
Program Loading
NAEL0429
GI
MA
Power supply ON
Insert CD-ROM
with designated program.
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
Push for changing version.
MT
AT
No
TF
PD
Yes
AX
SU
* Program loading progress is shown on the bar graph
at the center of the screen.
BR
ST
RS
BT
Map CD-ROM insertion
HA
Position marker screen display
SC
Note: Load the program only after the engine has been started.
EL-443
SEL612X
IDX
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Initialization
Initialization
NAEL0430
This procedure is for initializing the current location. Perform “Initialize Location” when the vehicle is transported a long distance by
trailer, etc.
Map with grey background appears and the vehicle location cannot be adjusted by scrolling the display when the vehicle location
in the memory is out of the area of the inserted map data.
Perform “Initialize Location” when this occurs.
NOTE:
쐌 Only initialize the system when the display & NAVI control
unit is replaced. If the system is initialized in other cases,
it may cause inaccurate positioning of the position marker
for a while.
쐌 Initialize the system outside for receiving the radio wave
from the GPS satellite.
HOW TO PERFORM
NAEL0430S01
1.
Switch the navigation system mode to self-diagnosis by pushing both “MAP” and “D/N” switches at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
2.
Touch “Confirmation/ adjustment”.
3.
Touch “Initialize Location”. Then the previous screen is displayed.
SEL583X
SEL584X
SEL588X
EL-444
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Initialization (Cont’d)
4.
Push “Previous” switch.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL584X
5.
6.
Push the “MAP” switch.
Touch “Setting”.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEL598X
7.
Touch “System Setting”.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL599X
8.
Touch “GPS Information”.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL600X
9.
More than one GPS satellite icon turns green. (It may take 1
to 15 minutes.)
NOTE:
Drive the vehicle for a while* in order to change the receiving
condition of the radio wave from the GPS satellite if the GPS
icon does not turn green.
* The driving distance which is necessary depends on the
receiving condition of the radio wave from the GPS satellite.
HA
SC
IDX
SEL146W
EL-445
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Initialization (Cont’d)
10.
쐌
쐌
쐌
Push “MAP” switch and check the following.
Confirm that the GPS icon on the map turns green.
Then the position marker should show the current location.
Position marker rotates corresponding to the movement of the
vehicle.
11. Initialization is completed.
SEL613X
EL-446
CAN COMMUNICATION
System Description
System Description
NAEL0462
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many
electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with
2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Unit
NAEL0463
Go to CAN system, when selecting your CAN system type from the following table.
Body type
A/T
Brake control
CAN system trouble diagnosis
EM
LC
EC
VQ35DE
Transmission
CAN system type
MA
Wide/Wagon
Engine
Axle
GI
M/T
VDC
4WD
(All-mode)
ABS
4WD
(Part time)
2WD
4WD
(All-mode)
4WD
(Part time)
2WD
4WD
(Part time)
1
2
3
4
(EL-452)
(EL-476)
(EL-498)
(EL-511)
TYPE 1
System Diagram
NAEL0463S01
FE
CL
MT
AT
NAEL0463S0101
TF
PD
AX
SEL683Y
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-447
CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN Communication Unit (Cont’d)
Input/Output Signal Chart
=NAEL0463S0102
T: Transmit R: Receive
Signals
ECM
TCM
Transfer
control unit
ABS actuaSteering
tor and elec- Combination
angle sensor tric unit (conmeter
trol unit)
Engine speed signal
T
R
R
Accelerator pedal position signal
T
R
R
Closed throttle position signal
T
R
Wide open throttle position signal
T
R
VDC operation signal
R
R
T
TCS operation signal
R
R
T
ABS operation signal
R
R
T
Output shaft revolution signal
R
ETC fail signal
T
During shifting signal
R
T
R
R
T
R
Steering wheel angle sensor signal
R
T
Wheel speed sensor signal
R
Stop lamp switch signal
R
R
T
R
T
MIL signal
T
R
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
R
Fuel consumption signal
T
R
T
R
Vehicle speed signal
R
T
Lock-up prohibition signal
T
R
Lock-up signal
R
T
Neutral range switch signal
R
T
Parking range switch signal
R
T
Overdrive control switch signal
R
T
A/C compressor feedback signal
T
R
Fuel level sensor signal
R
T
A/T position indicator signal
T
R
O/D OFF indicator signal
T
R
EL-448
CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN Communication Unit (Cont’d)
TYPE 2
System Diagram
=NAEL0463S02
GI
NAEL0463S0201
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL682Y
FE
Input/Output Signal Chart
NAEL0463S0202
T: Transmit R: Receive
Signals
ECM
TCM
Steering angle
sensor
Combination
meter
R
Engine speed signal
T
R
Accelerator pedal position signal
T
R
Closed throttle position signal
T
R
Wide open throttle position signal
T
R
VDC operation signal
R
T
TCS operation signal
R
T
ABS operation signal
R
T
Steering wheel angle sensor signal
CL
ABS actuator
and electric
unit (control
unit)
MT
AT
TF
T
PD
AX
R
MIL signal
T
R
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
R
Fuel consumption signal
T
R
T
R
SU
BR
Vehicle speed signal
R
T
Stop lamp switch signal
R
Lock-up prohibition signal
T
R
Lock-up signal
R
T
T
ST
RS
Neutral range switch signal
R
T
Parking range switch signal
R
T
Overdrive control switch signal
R
T
A/C compressor feedback signal
T
R
Fuel level sensor signal
R
T
A/T position indicator signal
T
R
O/D OFF indicator signal
T
R
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-449
CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN Communication Unit (Cont’d)
TYPE 3
System Diagram
=NAEL0463S03
NAEL0463S0301
SEL684Y
Input/Output Signal Chart
NAEL0463S0302
T: Transmit R: Receive
Signals
ECM
TCM
Engine speed signal
T
Closed throttle position signal
T
R
Wide open throttle position signal
T
R
Stop lamp switch signal
Combination meter
R
R
Lock-up prohibition signal
T
R
Lock-up signal
R
T
T
Neutral range switch signal
R
T
Parking range switch signal
R
T
Overdrive control switch signal
R
T
MIL signal
T
R
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
R
Fuel consumption signal
T
R
Vehicle speed signal
R
T
A/C compressor feedback signal
T
R
Fuel level sensor signal
R
T
A/T position indicator signal
T
R
O/D OFF indicator signal
T
R
EL-450
CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN Communication Unit (Cont’d)
TYPE 4
System Diagram
=NAEL0463S04
GI
NAEL0463S0401
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL681Y
FE
Input/Output Signal Chart
NAEL0463S0402
T: Transmit R: Receive
Signals
ECM
Combination meter
Engine speed signal
T
R
MIL signal
T
R
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
R
Fuel consumption signal
T
R
Vehicle speed signal
R
T
A/C compressor feedback signal
T
R
Fuel level sensor signal
R
T
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-451
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location
NAEL0464
SEL702Y
System Description
NAEL0465
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many
electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with
2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
EL-452
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Wiring Diagram — CAN —
Wiring Diagram — CAN —
NAEL0466
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL578Q
EL-453
IDX
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Wiring Diagram — CAN — (Cont’d)
MEL579Q
EL-454
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses
Trouble Diagnoses
WORK FLOW
NAEL0467
GI
NAEL0467S01
1. Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “ALL MODE AWD/4WD” and “ABS” displayed on CONSULT-II.
MA
EM
LC
EC
PKIA8260E
2. Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “ALL MODE AWD/4WD” and
“ABS” displayed on CONSULT-II.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PKIA8343E
3. Attach the printed sheet of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” onto the check
sheet. Refer to “CHECK SHEET” (EL-456).
4. Based on the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” results, put “v” marks onto the items with “UNKWN” or “NG”
in the check sheet table. Refer to “CHECK SHEET” (EL-456).
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed
control unit, replace the control unit.
5. According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to “CHECK SHEET RESULTS
(EXAMPLE)” (EL-457).
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-455
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
CHECK SHEET
=NAEL0467S02
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed
control unit, replace the control unit.
PKIA8707E
EL-456
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
=NAEL0467S03
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed
control unit, replace the control unit.
Case 1
NAEL0467S0301
Check harness between TCM and transfer control unit. Refer to “CIRCUIT CHECK BETWEEN TCM AND
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT” (EL-462).
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
PKIA8711E
MT
AT
TF
PD
PKIA8734E
AX
Case 2
NAEL0467S0302
Check harness between transfer control unit and steering angle sensor. Refer to “CIRCUIT CHECK BETWEEN
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT AND STEERING ANGLE SENSOR” (EL-463).
SU
BR
ST
RS
PKIA8712E
BT
HA
SC
IDX
PKIA8735E
EL-457
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Case 3
NAEL0467S0303
Check harness between steering angle sensor and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to
“CIRCUIT CHECK BETWEEN STEERING ANGLE SENSOR AND ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT
(CONTROL UNIT)” (EL-464).
PKIA8713E
PKIA8736E
Case 4
NAEL0467S0304
Check ECM circuit. Refer to “ECM CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-465).
PKIA8714E
PKIA8737E
EL-458
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Case 5
=NAEL0467S0305
GI
Check TCM circuit. Refer to “TCM CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-466).
MA
EM
LC
EC
PKIA8715E
FE
CL
MT
AT
PKIA8738E
TF
Case 6
NAEL0467S0306
Check transfer control unit circuit. Refer to “TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-467).
PD
AX
SU
BR
PKIA8716E
ST
RS
BT
HA
PKIA8739E
SC
IDX
EL-459
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Case 7
=NAEL0467S0307
Check steering angle sensor circuit. Refer to “STEERING ANGLE SENSOR CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-468).
PKIA8717E
PKIA8740E
Case 8
NAEL0467S0308
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT
(CONTROL UNIT) CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-469).
PKIA8718E
PKIA8741E
EL-460
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Case 9
=NAEL0467S0309
GI
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to “COMBINATION METER CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-470).
MA
EM
LC
EC
PKIA8719E
FE
CL
MT
AT
PKIA8742E
TF
Case 10
NAEL0467S0310
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to “CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-471).
PD
AX
SU
BR
PKIA8720E
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-461
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
CIRCUIT CHECK BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
1
NAEL0467S05
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect TCM connector, transfer control unit connector and combination meter connector.
2. Check continuity between TCM harness connector M119 terminals 5 (L), 6 (R) and transfer control unit harness connector M142 terminals 7 (L), 8 (R).
SEL707Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to “Work Flow” (EL-455).
NG
䊳
Repair harness.
EL-462
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
CIRCUIT CHECK BETWEEN TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT AND STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
GI
=NAEL0467S06
1
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check following terminals and connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector-side and harness-side).
쐌 Harness connector M1
쐌 Harness connector E1
MA
EM
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair terminal or connector.
LC
EC
2
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect transfer control unit connector and harness connector M1.
2. Check continuity between transfer control unit harness connector M142 terminals 7 (L), 8 (R) and harness connector
M1 terminals 4m (L), 11r (R).
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEL708Y
PD
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair harness.
3
AX
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
SU
1. Disconnect steering angle sensor connector.
2. Check continuity between harness connector E1 terminals 4m (L), 11r (R) and steering angle sensor harness connector
E136 terminals 3 (L), 4 (R).
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL709Y
HA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to “Work Flow” (EL-455).
NG
䊳
Repair harness.
SC
IDX
EL-463
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
CIRCUIT CHECK BETWEEN STEERING ANGLE SENSOR AND ABS ACTUATOR AND
ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
1
=NAEL0467S07
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect steering angle sensor connector, ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and combination
meter connector.
2. Check continuity between steering angle sensor harness connector E136 terminals 3 (L), 4 (R) and ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) harness connector E142 terminals 11 (L), 15 (R).
SEL710Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to “Work Flow” (EL-455).
NG
䊳
Repair harness.
EL-464
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
ECM CIRCUIT CHECK
1
=NAEL0467S08
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check following terminals and connector for damage, bend and loose connection (control module-side and harnessside).
쐌 ECM
쐌 Harness connector F23
쐌 Harness connector M32
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair terminal or connector.
MA
EM
LC
OK or NG
2
GI
EC
FE
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect ECM connector.
2. Check resistance between ECM harness connector F203 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (R).
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEL711Y
PD
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace ECM.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between ECM and TCM.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-465
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
TCM CIRCUIT CHECK
1
=NAEL0467S09
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the terminals and connector of TCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module-side and harnessside).
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair terminal or connector.
2
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect TCM connector.
2. Check resistance between TCM harness connector M119 terminals 5 (L) and 6 (R).
SEL712Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace ECM.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between TCM and transfer control unit.
EL-466
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT CHECK
1
=NAEL0467S10
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the terminals and connector of transfer control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit-side
and harness-side).
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair terminal or connector.
MA
EM
OK or NG
2
GI
LC
EC
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect transfer control unit connector.
2. Check resistance between transfer control unit harness connector M142 terminals 7 (L) and 8 (R).
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEL713Y
TF
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace transfer control unit.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between transfer control unit and harness connector M1.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-467
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR CIRCUIT CHECK
1
=NAEL0467S11
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the terminals and connector of steering angle sensor for damage, bend and loose connection (sensor-side and
harness-side).
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair terminal or connector.
2
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect steering angle sensor connector.
2. Check resistance between steering angle sensor harness connector E136 terminals 3 (L) and 4 (R).
SEL714Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace steering angle sensor.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between steering angle sensor and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
EL-468
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) CIRCUIT CHECK
1
=NAEL0467S12
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit-side and harness-side).
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair terminal or connector.
MA
EM
OK or NG
2
GI
LC
EC
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
2. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E142 terminals 11 (L) and 15
(R).
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEL715Y
TF
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
PD
NG
䊳
Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and harness connector E1.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-469
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
COMBINATION METER CIRCUIT CHECK
1
=NAEL0467S13
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check following terminals and connector for damage, bend and loose connection (meter-side and harness-side).
쐌 Combination meter.
쐌 Harness connector M1.
쐌 Harness connector E1.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair terminal or connector.
2
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect combination meter connector.
2. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M25 terminals 34 (Y) and 35 (L).
SEL716Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace combination meter.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between combination meter and ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit).
EL-470
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT CHECK
1
=NAEL0467S14
GI
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check following terminals and connector for damage, bend and loose connection (meter-side, control unit-side, sensorside, control module-side and harness-side).
쐌 Combination meter
쐌 ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
쐌 Steering angle sensor
쐌 Transfer control unit
쐌 TCM
쐌 ECM
쐌 Between combination meter and ECM
MA
EM
LC
EC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair terminal or connector.
FE
CL
2
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect ECM connector and harness connector F23.
2. Check continuity between ECM harness connector F203 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (R).
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEL717Y
AX
OK or NG
SU
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between ECM and harness connector F23.
BR
3
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F203 terminals 94 (L), 86 (R) and ground.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL718Y
SC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between ECM and harness connector F23.
IDX
EL-471
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
4
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect TCM connector, transfer control unit connector and harness connector M1.
2. Check continuity between TCM harness connector M119 terminals 5 (L) and 6 (R).
SEL440Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
쐌 Repair harness between TCM and harness connector M1.
쐌 Repair harness between TCM and harness connector M32.
쐌 Repair harness between TCM and transfer control unit.
5
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between TCM harness connector M119 terminals 5 (L), 6 (R) and ground.
SEL441Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
쐌 Repair harness between TCM and harness connector M1.
쐌 Repair harness between TCM and harness connector M32.
쐌 Repair harness between TCM and transfer control unit.
EL-472
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
6
GI
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect steering angle sensor connector and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
2. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E142 terminals 11 (L) and 15
(R).
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL719Y
OK or NG
FE
CL
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
쐌 Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and harness connector E1.
쐌 Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and steering
angle sensor.
MT
AT
7
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E142 terminals 11 (L), 15 (R)
and ground.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
SEL720Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
쐌 Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and harness connector E1.
쐌 Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and steering
angle sensor.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-473
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
8
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect combination meter connector.
2. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M25 terminals 34 (Y) and 35 (L).
SEL721Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between combination meter and harness connector M1.
9
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M25 terminals 34 (Y), 35 (L) and ground.
SEL722Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between combination meter and harness connector M1.
10
ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Check components inspection. Refer to “ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION” (EL-475).
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to “Work Flow” (EL-455).
NG
䊳
Replace ECM and/or combination meter.
EL-474
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Component Inspection
Component Inspection
NAEL0468
ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT
INSPECTION
쐌
쐌
쐌
SEL723Y
=NAEL0468S01
Remove ECM and combination meter from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between combination meter terminals 34
and 35.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
Combination meter
34 - 35
Resistance value (Ω)
GI
MA
EM
LC
Approx. 108 - 132
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-475
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location
NAEL0469
SEL724Y
System Description
NAEL0470
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many
electonic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with
2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
EL-476
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Wiring Diagram — CAN —
Wiring Diagram — CAN —
NAEL0471
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL576Q
EL-477
IDX
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Wiring Diagram — CAN — (Cont’d)
MEL577Q
EL-478
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses
Trouble Diagnoses
WORK FLOW
NAEL0472
GI
NAEL0472S01
1. Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T” and “ABS” displayed on CONSULT-II.
MA
EM
LC
EC
PKIA8260E
2. Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T” and “ABS” displayed on CONSULTII.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PKIA8343E
3. Attach the printed sheet of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” onto the check
sheet. Refer to “CHECK SHEET” (EL-480).
4. Based on the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” results, put “v” marks onto the items with “UNKWN” or “NG”
in the check sheet table. Refer to “CHECK SHEET” (EL-480).
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed
control unit, replace the control unit.
5. According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to “CHECK SHEET RESULTS
(EXAMPLE)” (EL-481).
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-479
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
CHECK SHEET
=NAEL0472S02
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed
control unit, replace the control unit.
PKIA8708E
EL-480
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
=NAEL0472S03
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed
control unit, replace the control unit.
Case 1
NAEL0472S0301
Check harness between TCM and steering angle sensor. Refer to “CIRCUIT CHECK BETWEEN TCM AND
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR” (EL-486).
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
PKIA8721E
MT
AT
TF
PD
PKIA8743E
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-481
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Case 2
=NAEL0472S0302
Check harness between steering angle sensor and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to
“CIRCUIT CHECK BETWEEN STEERING ANGLE SENSOR AND ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT
(CONTROL UNIT)” (EL-487).
PKIA8722E
PKIA8744E
Case 3
NAEL0472S0303
Check ECM circuit. Refer to “ECM CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-488).
PKIA8723E
PKIA8745E
EL-482
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Case 4
=NAEL0472S0304
GI
Check TCM circuit. Refer to “TCM CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-489).
MA
EM
LC
EC
PKIA8724E
FE
CL
MT
AT
PKIA8746E
TF
Case 5
NAEL0472S0305
Check steering angle sensor circuit. Refer to “STEERING ANGLE SENSOR CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-490).
PD
AX
SU
BR
PKIA8725E
ST
RS
BT
HA
PKIA8747E
SC
IDX
EL-483
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Case 6
=NAEL0472S0306
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT
(CONTROL UNIT) CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-491).
PKIA8726E
PKIA8748E
Case 7
NAEL0472S0307
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to “COMBINATION METER CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-492).
PKIA8727E
PKIA8749E
EL-484
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Case 8
=NAEL0472S0308
GI
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to “CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-493).
MA
EM
LC
EC
PKIA8728E
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-485
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
CIRCUIT CHECK BETWEEN TCM AND STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
1
=NAEL0472S06
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check following terminals and connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector-side and harness-side).
쐌 Harness connector M1
쐌 Harness connector E1
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair terminal or connector.
2
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect TCM connector and harness connector M1.
2. Check continuity between TCM harness connector M119 terminals 5 (L), 6 (R) and harness connector M1 terminals 4m
(L), 11r (R).
SEL728Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair harness.
3
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect steering angle sensor connector.
2. Check continuity between harness connector E1 terminals 4m (L), 11r (R) and steering angle sensor harness connector
E136 terminals 3 (L), 4 (R).
SEL709Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to “Work Flow” (EL-479).
NG
䊳
Repair harness.
EL-486
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
CIRCUIT CHECK BETWEEN STEERING ANGLE SENSOR AND ABS ACTUATOR AND
ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
1
GI
=NAEL0472S07
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
MA
1. Disconnect steering angle sensor connector, ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and combination
meter connector.
2. Check continuity between steering angle sensor harness connector E136 terminals 3 (L), 4 (R) and ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) harness connector E142 terminals 11 (L), 15 (R).
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SEL710Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to “Work Flow” (EL-479).
NG
䊳
Repair harness.
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-487
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
ECM CIRCUIT CHECK
1
=NAEL0472S08
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check following terminals and connector for damage, bend and loose connection (control module-side and harnessside).
쐌 ECM
쐌 Harness connector F23
쐌 Harness connector M32
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair terminal or connector.
2
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect ECM connector.
2. Check resistance between ECM harness connector F203 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (R).
SEL711Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace ECM.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between ECM and TCM.
EL-488
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
TCM CIRCUIT CHECK
1
=NAEL0472S09
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the terminals and connector of TCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module-side and harnessside).
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair terminal or connector.
MA
EM
OK or NG
2
GI
LC
EC
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect TCM connector.
2. Check resistance between TCM harness connector M119 terminals 5 (L) and 6 (R).
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEL712Y
TF
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace TCM.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between TCM and harness connector M1.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-489
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR CIRCUIT CHECK
1
=NAEL0472S11
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the terminals and connector of steering angle sensor for damage, bend and loose connection (sensor-side and
harness-side).
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair terminal or connector.
2
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect steering angle sensor connector.
2. Check resistance between steering angle sensor harness connector E136 terminals 3 (L) and 4 (R).
SEL714Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace steering angle sensor.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between steering angle sensor and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
EL-490
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) CIRCUIT CHECK
1
=NAEL0472S12
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit-side and harness-side).
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair terminal or connector.
MA
EM
OK or NG
2
GI
LC
EC
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
2. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E142 terminals 11 (L) and 15
(R).
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEL715Y
TF
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
PD
NG
䊳
Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and harness connector E1.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-491
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
COMBINATION METER CIRCUIT CHECK
1
=NAEL0472S13
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check following terminals and connector for damage, bend and loose connection (meter-side and harness-side).
쐌 Combination meter.
쐌 Harness connector M1.
쐌 Harness connector E1.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair terminal or connector.
2
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect combination meter connector.
2. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M25 terminals 34 (Y) and 35 (L).
SEL716Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace combination meter.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between combination meter and ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit).
EL-492
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT CHECK
1
=NAEL0472S14
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check following terminals and connector for damage, bend and loose connection (meter-side, control unit-side, sensorside, control module-side and harness-side).
쐌 Combination meter
쐌 ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
쐌 Steering angle sensor
쐌 TCM
쐌 ECM
쐌 Between combination meter and ECM
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair terminal or connector.
MA
EM
LC
EC
OK or NG
2
GI
FE
CL
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect ECM connector and harness connector F23.
2. Check continuity between ECM harness connector F203 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (R).
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEL717Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between ECM and harness connector F23.
3
AX
SU
BR
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F203 terminals 94 (L), 86 (R) and ground.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL718Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between ECM and harness connector F23.
SC
IDX
EL-493
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
4
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect TCM connector and harness connector M1.
2. Check continuity between TCM harness connector M119 terminals 5 (L) and 6 (R).
SEL440Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
쐌 Repair harness between TCM and harness connector M1.
쐌 Repair harness between TCM and harness connector M32.
5
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between TCM harness connector M119 terminals 5 (L), 6 (R) and ground.
SEL441Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
쐌 Repair harness between TCM and harness connector M1.
쐌 Repair harness between TCM and harness connector M32.
EL-494
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
6
GI
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect steering angle sensor connector and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
2. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E142 terminals 11 (L) and 15
(R).
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL719Y
OK or NG
FE
CL
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
쐌 Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and harness connector E1.
쐌 Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and steering
angle sensor.
MT
AT
7
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E142 terminals 11 (L), 15 (R)
and ground.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
SEL720Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
쐌 Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and harness connector E1.
쐌 Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and steering
angle sensor.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-495
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
8
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect combination meter connector.
2. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M25 terminals 34 (Y) and 35 (L).
SEL721Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between combination meter and harness connector M1.
9
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M25 terminals 34 (Y), 35 (L) and ground.
SEL722Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between combination meter and harness connector M1.
10
ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Check components inspection. Refer to “ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION” (EL-497).
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to “Work Flow” (EL-479).
NG
䊳
Replace ECM and/or combination meter.
EL-496
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Component Inspection
Component Inspection
=NAEL0473
ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT
INSPECTION
쐌
쐌
쐌
SEL723Y
NAEL0473S01
Remove ECM and combination meter from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between combination meter terminals 34
and 35.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
Combination meter
34 - 35
Resistance value (Ω)
GI
MA
EM
LC
Approx. 108 - 132
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-497
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location
NAEL0474
SEL729Y
System Description
NAEL0475
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many
electonic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with
2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
EL-498
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
Wiring Diagram — CAN —
Wiring Diagram — CAN —
NAEL0476
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL580Q
EL-499
IDX
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
Trouble Diagnoses
Trouble Diagnoses
WORK FLOW
NAEL0477
NAEL0477S01
1. Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE” and “A/T” displayed on CONSULT-II.
PKIA8260E
2. Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE” and “A/T” displayed on CONSULT-II.
PKIA8343E
3. Attach the printed sheet of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” onto the check
sheet. Refer to “CHECK SHEET” (EL-501).
4. Based on the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” results, put “v” marks onto the items with “UNKWN” or “NG”
in the check sheet table. Refer to “CHECK SHEET” (EL-501).
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed
control unit, replace the control unit.
5. According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to “CHECK SHEET RESULTS
(EXAMPLE)” (EL-502).
EL-500
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
CHECK SHEET
=NAEL0477S02
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed
control unit, replace the control unit.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
PKIA8709E
HA
SC
IDX
EL-501
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
=NAEL0477S03
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed
control unit, replace the control unit.
Case 1
NAEL0477S0301
Check ECM circuit. Refer to “ECM CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-504).
PKIA8729E
PKIA8750E
Case 2
NAEL0477S0302
Check TCM circuit. Refer to “TCM CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-505).
PKIA8730E
PKIA8751E
EL-502
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Case 3
NAEL0477S0303
GI
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to “COMBINATION METER CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-506).
MA
EM
LC
EC
PKIA8731E
FE
CL
MT
AT
PKIA8752E
TF
Case 4
NAEL0477S0304
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to “CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-507).
PD
AX
SU
BR
PKIA8732E
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-503
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
ECM CIRCUIT CHECK
1
=NAEL0477S07
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check following terminals and connector for damage, bend and loose connection (control module-side and harnessside).
쐌 ECM
쐌 Harness connector F23
쐌 Harness connector M32
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair terminal or connector.
2
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect ECM connector.
2. Check resistance between ECM harness connector F203 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (R).
SEL711Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace ECM.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between ECM and TCM.
EL-504
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
TCM CIRCUIT CHECK
1
=NAEL0477S08
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the terminals and connector of TCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module-side and harnessside).
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair terminal or connector.
MA
EM
OK or NG
2
GI
LC
EC
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect TCM connector.
2. Check resistance between TCM harness connector M119 terminals 5 (L) and 6 (R).
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEL712Y
TF
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace TCM.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between TCM and harness connector M1.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-505
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
COMBINATION METER CIRCUIT CHECK
1
=NAEL0477S11
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check following terminals and connector for damage, bend and loose connection (meter-side and harness-side).
쐌 Combination meter
쐌 Harness connector M1
쐌 Harness connector E1
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair terminal or connector.
2
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect combination meter connector.
2. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M25 terminals 34 (Y) and 35 (L).
SEL716Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace combination meter.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between combination meter and TCM.
EL-506
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT CHECK
1
=NAEL0477S12
GI
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check following terminals and connector for damage, bend and loose connection (meter-side, control module-side and
harness-side).
쐌 Combination meter
쐌 TCM
쐌 ECM
쐌 Between combination meter and ECM
MA
EM
LC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair terminal or connector.
EC
FE
2
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect ECM connector and harness connector F23.
2. Check continuity between ECM harness connector F203 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (R).
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEL717Y
PD
OK or NG
AX
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between ECM and harness connector F23.
SU
3
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
BR
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F203 terminals 94 (L), 86 (R) and ground.
ST
RS
BT
SEL718Y
HA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between ECM and harness connector F23.
SC
IDX
EL-507
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
4
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect TCM connector and harness connector M1.
2. Check continuity between TCM harness connector M119 terminals 5 (L) and 6 (R).
SEL440Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
쐌 Repair harness between TCM and harness connector M1.
쐌 Repair harness between TCM and harness connector M32.
5
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between TCM harness connector M119 terminals 5 (L), 6 (R) and ground.
SEL441Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
쐌 Repair harness between TCM and harness connector M1.
쐌 Repair harness between TCM and harness connector M32.
EL-508
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
6
GI
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between harness connector E1 terminals 6m (L) and 12m (R).
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL732Y
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between harness connector E1 and harness connector E1.
7
CL
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
MT
Check continuity between harness connector E1 terminals 6m (L), 12m (R) and ground.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEL733Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between harness connector E1 and harness connector E1.
8
SU
BR
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
ST
1. Disconnect combination meter connector.
2. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M25 terminals 34 (Y) and 35 (L).
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL721Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between combination meter and harness connector M1.
EL-509
IDX
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
9
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M25 terminals 34 (Y), 35 (L) and ground.
SEL722Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between combination meter and harness connector M1.
10
ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Check components inspection. Refer to “ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION” (EL-510).
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to “Work Flow” (EL-500).
NG
䊳
Replace ECM and/or combination meter.
Component Inspection
NAEL0478
ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT
INSPECTION
쐌
쐌
쐌
SEL723Y
NAEL0478S01
Remove ECM and combination meter from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between combination meter terminals 34
and 35.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
Combination meter
34 - 35
Resistance value (Ω)
Approx. 108 - 132
EL-510
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location
GI
NAEL0479
MA
EM
LC
SEL734Y
System Description
EC
NAEL0480
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many
electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with
2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-511
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
Wiring Diagram — CAN —
Wiring Diagram — CAN —
NAEL0481
MEL581Q
EL-512
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
Trouble Diagnoses
Trouble Diagnoses
WORK FLOW
NAEL0482
GI
NAEL0482S01
1. Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE” displayed on CONSULT-II.
MA
EM
LC
EC
PKIA8260E
FE
2. Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE” displayed on CONSULT-II.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PKIA8343E
3. Attach the printed sheet of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” onto the check
sheet. Refer to “CHECK SHEET” (EL-514).
4. Based on the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” results, put “v” marks onto the items with “UNKWN” or “NG”
in the check sheet table. Refer to “CHECK SHEET” (EL-514).
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed
control unit, replace the control unit.
5. According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to “CHECK SHEET RESULTS
(EXAMPLE)” (EL-514).
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-513
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
CHECK SHEET
=NAEL0482S02
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed
control unit, replace the control unit.
PKIA8710E
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NAEL0482S03
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed
control unit, replace the control unit.
Case 1
NAEL0482S0301
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to “CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-515).
PKIA8733E
EL-514
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT CHECK
1
NAEL0482S08
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check following terminals and connector for damage, bend and loose connection (meter-side, control module-side and
harness-side)
쐌 Combination meter
쐌 ECM
쐌 Between combination meter and ECM
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair terminal or connector.
MA
EM
LC
OK or NG
2
GI
EC
FE
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect ECM connector and combination meter connector.
2. Check continuity between ECM harness connector F203 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (R).
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEL717Y
PD
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between ECM and combination meter.
3
AX
SU
CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F203 terminals 94 (L), 86 (R) and ground.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL718Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair harness between ECM and combination meter.
HA
SC
IDX
EL-515
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
4
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F203 terminals 94 (L), 86 (R) and combination meter harness connector M25 terminals 34 (Y), 35 (L).
SEL737Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair harness.
5
ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Check components inspection. Refer to “ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION” (EL-516).
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to “Work Flow” (EL-513).
NG
䊳
Replace ECM and/or combination meter.
Component Inspection
NAEL0483
ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT
INSPECTION
쐌
쐌
쐌
SEL723Y
NAEL0483S01
Remove ECM and combination meter from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between combination meter terminals 34
and 35.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
Combination meter
34 - 35
Resistance value (Ω)
Approx. 108 - 132
EL-516
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Engine Compartment
Engine Compartment
NAEL0431
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL063Q
EL-517
IDX
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Passenger Compartment
Passenger Compartment
NAEL0432
MEL064Q
EL-518
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Passenger Compartment (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL065Q
IDX
EL-519
HARNESS LAYOUT
How to Read Harness Layout
How to Read Harness Layout
NAEL0433
SEL252V
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
쐌 Main Harness
쐌 Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment)
쐌 Engine Control Harness
TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NAEL0433S01
Find the desired connector number on the connector list.
Find the grid reference.
On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row.
Find the connector number in the crossing zone.
Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
NAEL0433S02
Main symbols of connector (in Harness Layout) are indicated in the below.
Water proof type
Standard type
Connector type
Male
Female
—
—
쐌 Cavity: Less than 4
쐌 Relay connector
쐌 Cavity: From 5 to 8
쐌 Cavity: More than 9
쐌 Ground terminal etc.
—
EL-520
Male
Female
HARNESS LAYOUT
Outline
Outline
NAEL0434
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
MEL072M
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-521
HARNESS LAYOUT
Main Harness
Main Harness
NAEL0435
MEL051Q
EL-522
HARNESS LAYOUT
Main Harness (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL052Q
IDX
EL-523
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Room Harness
Engine Room Harness
NAEL0436
MEL053Q
EL-524
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Room Harness (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL054Q
IDX
EL-525
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness
Engine Control Harness
NAEL0437
MEL413R
EL-526
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL414R
IDX
EL-527
HARNESS LAYOUT
Body Harness LH
Body Harness LH
NAEL0438
MEL057Q
EL-528
HARNESS LAYOUT
Body Harness RH
Body Harness RH
NAEL0439
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL058Q
EL-529
IDX
HARNESS LAYOUT
Back Door Harness
Back Door Harness
NAEL0440
MEL059Q
EL-530
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine and Transmission Harness
Engine and Transmission Harness
NAEL0441
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL060Q
EL-531
IDX
HARNESS LAYOUT
Room Lamp Harness
Room Lamp Harness
NAEL0442
MEL061Q
EL-532
HARNESS LAYOUT
Air Bag Harness
Air Bag Harness
NAEL0443
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
MEL244M
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-533
HARNESS LAYOUT
Front Door Harness
Front Door Harness
NAEL0444
MEL062Q
EL-534
HARNESS LAYOUT
Rear Door Harness
Rear Door Harness
NAEL0445
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL261M
EL-535
IDX
NAEL0446
BULB SPECIFICATIONS
Headlamp
Headlamp
Item
NAEL0446S01
Wattage W
High/Low (Semi-sealed beam)
60/55 (HB2)
Exterior Lamp
Item
NAEL0446S02
Wattage W
Front fog lamp
55
Front turn signal lamp
21
Parking lamp
5
Turn signal lamp
Rear combination lamp
27
Stop/Tail lamp
21/5
Back-up lamp
18
License plate lamp
5
High-mounted stop lamp
5
Interior Lamp
Item
NAEL0446S03
Wattage W
Interior lamp
10
Vanity mirror lamp
1.4
Spot lamp
8
Luggage room lamp
10
EL-536
NAEL0447
WIRING DIAGRAM CODES (CELL CODES)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring
diagram code stands for.
Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical
index to find the location (page number) of each
wiring diagram.
Code
Section
Wiring Diagram Name
Code
DTRL
Section
Wiring Diagram Name
EL
Headlamp — With Daytime Light
System —
EC
ECM Power supply (Back-up)
ECTS
EC
Engine Coolant Temperature
Sensor
EM
LC
AT
A/T 1ST Signal
2NDSIG
AT
A/T 2ND Signal
ENGSS
AT
Engine Speed Signal
3RDSIG
AT
A/T 3RD Signal
ETC1
EC
Electric Throttle Control Function
4THSIG
AT
A/T 4TH Signal
ETC2
EC
Electric Throttle Control Motor
Relay
A/C, A
HA
Auto Air Conditioner
ETC3
EC
Electric Throttle Control Motor
A/C, M
HA
Manual Air Conditioner
F/FOG
EL
Front Fog Lamp
F/PUMP
EC
Fuel Pump Control
FTS
AT
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor
FTTS
EC
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor
FUELB1
EC
Fuel Injection System Function
(Bank 1)
FUELB2
EC
Fuel Injection System Function
(Bank 2)
H/LAMP
EL
Headlamp
HEATER
HA
Heater
HORN
EL
Horn
HSEAT
EL
Heated Seat
IATS
EC
Intake Air Temperature Sensor
IGNSYS
EC
Ignition Signal
ILL
EL
Illumination
INJECT
EC
Injector
INT/L
EL
Interior, Spot, Vanity Mirror, and
Luggage Room Lamps
IVCB1
EC
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve Bank 1
IVCB2
EC
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve Bank 2
KEYLES
EL
Remote Keyless Entry System
KS
EC
Knock Sensor
LOAD
EC
Electrical Load Signal
LPSV
AT
Line Pressure Solenoid Valve
MAFS
EC
Mass Air Flow Sensor
MAIN
AT
Main Power Supply and Ground
Circuit
MAIN
EC
Main Power Supply and Ground
Circuit
BR
Anti-lock Brake System
APPS1
EC
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 1
APPS2
APPS
EC
EC
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 2
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
ASC/BS
EC
Automatic Speed Control Device
Brake Switch
ASC/SW
EC
Automatic Speed Control Device
Steering Switch
ASCIND
EC
Automatic Speed Control Device
Indicator
ASCBOF
EC
Automatic Speed Control Device
Brake Switch (Off)
AUDIO
EL
Audio
AUT/DP
EL
Automatic Drive Positioner
BA/FTS
AT
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor
and TCM Power Supply
BACK/L
EL
Back-up Lamp
BRK/SW
EC
Brake Switch
BYPS/V
EC
Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve
CAN
AT
CAN Communication Line
CAN
EC
CAN Communication Line
CAN
EL
CAN System
CHARGE
SC
Charging System
CHIME
EL
Warning Chime
CIGAR
EL
Cigarette Lighter
CLOCK
EL
Clock
COMPAS
EL
Compass and Thermometer
D/LOCK
EL
Power Door Lock
DEF
EL
Rear Window Defogger
MA
ECM/PW
1STSIG
ABS
GI
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-537
WIRING DIAGRAM CODES (CELL CODES)
Code
Section
Wiring Diagram Name
METER
EL
Speedometer, Tachometer,
Temp., Oil, and Fuel Gauges
MIL/DL
EC
MIL and Data Link Connectors
MIRROR
EL
Door Mirror
NATS
EL
NVIS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System)
NAVI
EL
NONDTC
O2H1B1
Code
Section
Wiring Diagram Name
SEAT
EL
Power Seat
SEN/PW
EC
Sensor Power Supply
SHIFT
AT
A/T Shift Lock System
SROOF
EL
Sunroof
SRS
RS
Supplemental Restraint System
Navigation System
SSV/A
AT
Shift Solenoid Valve A
AT
Non-detectable Items
SSV/B
AT
Shift Solenoid Valve B
EC
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater
(Bank 1)
START
SC
Starting System
STOP/L
EL
Stop lamp
O2H1B2
EC
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater
(Bank 2)
SWL/V
EC
Swirl Control Valve Control Solenoid Valve
O2H2B1
EC
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater
(Bank 1)
T&FILD
EL
Trunk Lid and Fuel Lid Opener
O2H2B2
EC
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater
(Bank 2)
T/F
TF
Transfer
T/WARN
SU
Low Tire Pressure Warning
TAIL/L
EL
Parking, License and Tail Lamps
O2S1B1
EC
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 (Bank
1)
TCCSIG
AT
A/T TCC Signal (Lock up)
O2S1B2
EC
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 (Bank
2)
TCV
AT
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid
Valve
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Bank
1)
TPS
AT
Throttle Position Sensor
O2S2B1
EC
O2S2B2
EC
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Bank
2)
TPS1
EC
Electric Throttle Control Actuator
(Throttle Position Sensor 1)
OVRCSV
AT
Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve
TPS2
EC
Electric Throttle Control Actuator
(Throttle Position Sensor 2)
P/ANT
EL
Power Antenna
TPS3
EC
PHSB1
EC
Camshaft Position Sensor
(PHASE) Bank 1
Electric Throttle Control Actuator
(Throttle Position Sensor)
TRNSCV
EL
Homelink Universal Transceiver
PHSB2
EC
Camshaft Position Sensor
(PHASE) Bank 2
TRSA/T
AT
Turbine Revolution Sensor
PGC/V
EC
EVAP Canister Purge Volume
Control Solenoid Valve
TURN
EL
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning
Lamps
PNP/SW
EC
Park/Neutral Position PNP Switch
VDC
BR
Vehicle Dynamics control System
PNP/SW
AT
Park/Neutral Position PNP Switch
VEHSEC
EL
Vehicle Security System
POS
EC
Crankshaft Position Sensor
(CKPS) (POS)
VENT/V
EC
EVAP Canister Vent Control
Valve
POWER
EL
Power Supply Routing
VIAS/V
EC
Variable Induction Air Control
System
PRE/SE
EC
EVAP Control System Pressure
Sensor
VSS
EC
Vehicle Speed Sensor
VSSA/T
AT
Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revolution Sensor)
VSSMTR
AT
Vehicle Speed Sensor MTR
WARN
EL
Warning Lamps
WINDOW
EL
Power Window
WIP/R
EL
Rear Wiper and Washer
PS/SEN
EC
Power Steering Pressure Sensor
REMOTE
EL
Audio (Remote Control Switch)
RP/SEN
EC
Refrigerant Pressure
S/VCSW
EC
Swirl Control Valve Control
Vacuum Check Switch
EL-538
WIRING DIAGRAM CODES (CELL CODES)
Code
WIPER
Section
EL
GI
Wiring Diagram Name
Front Wiper and Washer
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-539
NOTES
FRONT & REAR AXLE
SECTION
AX
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CONTENTS
FRONT AXLE ..................................................................2
Precautions ..................................................................2
PRECAUTIONS .........................................................2
Preparation ..................................................................2
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS ........................................2
COMMERCIAL SERVICE TOOLS ................................2
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Troubleshooting ...........................................................3
NVH TROUBLESHOOTING CHART ............................3
On-vehicle Service.......................................................3
FRONT AXLE PARTS ................................................3
FRONT WHEEL BEARING .........................................4
DRIVE SHAFT (4WD).................................................5
Wheel Hub and Rotor Disc..........................................6
COMPONENTS .........................................................6
REMOVAL .................................................................7
INSTALLATION..........................................................9
DISASSEMBLY ..........................................................9
INSPECTION .............................................................9
ASSEMBLY .............................................................10
Knuckle Spindle .........................................................10
REMOVAL ...............................................................10
INSPECTION ...........................................................11
INSTALLATION........................................................11
Drive Shaft (4WD) .....................................................12
COMPONENTS .......................................................12
REMOVAL ...............................................................12
DISASSEMBLY ........................................................13
INSPECTION ...........................................................14
ASSEMBLY .............................................................14
INSTALLATION........................................................15
Service Data and Specifications (SDS).....................16
WHEEL BEARING (FRONT) .....................................16
DRIVE SHAFT (4WD)...............................................16
REAR AXLE...................................................................18
Precautions ................................................................18
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................18
Preparation ................................................................18
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS ......................................18
COMMERCIAL SERVICE TOOLS ..............................19
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Troubleshooting .........................................................19
On-vehicle Service.....................................................19
REAR AXLE PARTS.................................................19
REAR WHEEL BEARING .........................................19
Components...............................................................20
Removal.....................................................................20
Inspection...................................................................22
AXLE SHAFT...........................................................22
BEARING CAGE ......................................................22
REAR AXLE HOUSING ............................................22
Installation..................................................................22
Service Data and Specifications (SDS).....................23
WHEEL BEARING (REAR) .......................................23
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
FRONT AXLE
Precautions
Precautions
PRECAUTIONS
I
I
I
SBR686C
I
NAAX0001
When installing rubber parts, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition* with tires on ground.
*Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack,
hand tools and mats in designated positions.
Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake
tubes.
After installing removed suspension parts, check wheel
alignment and adjust if necessary.
Always torque brake lines when installing.
Preparation
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
NAAX0002
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
ST29020001
(J24319-01)
Ball joint remover
Removing tie-rod outer end and lower ball
joint
a: 34 mm (1.34 in)
b: 6.5 mm (0.256 in)
c: 61.5 mm (2.421 in)
NT694
KV401021S0
(
—
)
Bearing race drift
Installing wheel bearing outer race
NT153
KV40105400
(J36001)
Wheel bearing lock nut
wrench
Removing and installing wheel bearing lock
nut
NT154
COMMERCIAL SERVICE TOOLS
Tool name
NAAX0003
Description
1 Flare nut crowfoot
2 Torque wrench
Removing and installing each brake piping
a: 10 mm (0.39 in)
NT360
Hub cap drift
Installing hub cap (2WD)
a: 85 mm (3.35 in) dia.
b: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia.
Installing hub cap (4WD)
a: 57 mm (2.24 in) dia.
b: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia.
NT115
AX-2
FRONT AXLE
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) Troubleshooting
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Troubleshooting
GI
NAAX0034
NVH TROUBLESHOOTING CHART
NAAX0034S01
Symptom
AXLE
ST-6
BR-7
SU-4
SU-4
SU-4
Refer to AXLE
in this chart.
Refer to DRIVE SHAFT
in this chart.
PD-4
PD-4
AX-4, 19
—
LC
EC
SUSPENSION
TIRES
ROAD WHEEL
BRAKES
STEERING
×
AXLE
AX-6, 20
—
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
DRIVE SHAFT
×
EM
CL
DIFFERENTIAL
Shake
Wheel bearing damage
×
Parts interference
×
MA
FE
PROPELLER SHAFT
DRIVE
SHAFT
Improper installation, looseness
Joint sliding resistance
Noise, Vibration
Possible cause and
SUSPECTED PARTS
Imbalance
Excessive joint angle
Reference page
AX-14
—
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
×
Noise
×
×
×
Shake
×
×
×
×
×
×
Vibration
×
×
×
×
×
×
Shimmy
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Judder
×
×
×
×
×
×
Poor quality ride
or handling
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
MT
AT
TF
PD
×
SU
BR
×: Applicable
ST
RS
BT
On-vehicle Service
FRONT AXLE PARTS
HA
NAAX0004
Check front axle parts for excessive play, cracks, wear and other
damage.
1. Shake each front wheel to check for excessive play.
2. Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque.
Tightening torque:
Refer to “Wheel Hub and Rotor Disc”, AX-6.
SC
EL
IDX
SMA525A
AX-3
FRONT AXLE
On-vehicle Service (Cont’d)
FRONT WHEEL BEARING
1.
2.
3.
NAAX0005
Check that wheel bearings operate smoothly.
Check axial end play.
Axial end play: 0 mm (0 in)
Adjust wheel bearing preload if there is any axial end play or
wheel bearing does not turn smoothly.
SFA747B
Preload Adjustment
NAAX0005S01
Adjust wheel bearing preload after wheel bearing has been
replaced or front axle has been reassembled.
Adjust wheel bearing preload as follows:
1. Before adjustment, thoroughly clean all parts to prevent dirt
entry.
2.
I
I
I
I
Apply multi-purpose grease sparingly to the following parts:
Threaded portion of spindle
Contact surface between wheel bearing lock washer (chamfered side) and outer wheel bearing
Grease seal lip
Wheel hub (as shown at left) — 4WD —
SFA891
3.
4.
5.
6.
Tighten wheel bearing lock nut with Tool.
: 78 - 98 N·m (8 - 10 kg-m, 58 - 72 ft-lb)
Turn wheel hub several times in both directions.
Loosen wheel bearing lock nut so that torque becomes 0 N·m
(0 kg-m, 0 ft-lb).
Retighten wheel bearing lock nut with Tool.
: 0.5 - 1.5 N·m (0.05 - 0.15 kg-m, 4.3 - 13.0 in-lb)
SFA748B
7.
8.
9.
Turn wheel hub several times in both directions.
Retighten wheel bearing lock nut with Tool.
: 0.5 - 1.5 N·m (0.05 - 0.15 kg-m, 4.3 - 13.0 in-lb)
Measure wheel bearing axial end play.
Axial end play: 0 mm (0 in)
SFA747B
AX-4
FRONT AXLE
On-vehicle Service (Cont’d)
10. Measure starting force “A” at wheel hub bolt.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMA580A
SFA830
11. Install lock washer by tightening the lock nut within 15 to 30
degrees.
12. Turn wheel hub several times in both directions to seat wheel
bearing correctly.
13. Measure starting force “B” at wheel hub bolt. Refer to procedure 10.
14. Wheel bearing preload “C” can be calculated as shown below.
C=B−A
Wheel bearing preload “C”:
7.06 - 20.99 N (0.72 - 2.14 kg, 1.59 - 4.72 lb)
15. If wheel bearing preload “C” is outside specifications, remove
lock washer. Tighten or loosen lock nut within ±15 degrees
(Refer to step 11 above). Install lock washer, then repeat steps
12, 13 and 14.
16. Repeat above procedures until correct axial end play and
wheel bearing preload are obtained.
17. Install drive flange (4WD models) and wheel hub cap.
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SU
DRIVE SHAFT (4WD)
I
NAAX0006
Check boot and drive shaft for cracks, wear, damage and
grease leakage.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SFA901
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AX-5
FRONT AXLE
Wheel Hub and Rotor Disc
Wheel Hub and Rotor Disc
COMPONENTS
2WD Model
NAAX0007
NAAX0007S01
SFA976B
AX-6
FRONT AXLE
Wheel Hub and Rotor Disc (Cont’d)
4WD Model
NAAX0007S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SFA908B
PD
SU
REMOVAL
SFA529A
NAAX0008
CAUTION:
Before removing the front axle assembly, disconnect the ABS
wheel sensor from the assembly. Then move it away from the
front axle assembly area. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires and the sensor becoming inoperative.
1. Remove brake caliper assembly.
Brake hose need not be disconnected from brake caliper. In
this case, suspend caliper assembly with wire so as not to
stretch brake hose.
Be careful not to depress brake pedal, or piston will pop out.
Make sure brake hose is not twisted.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AX-7
FRONT AXLE
Wheel Hub and Rotor Disc (Cont’d)
2.
Remove hub cap with suitable tool.
3.
4.
Remove snap ring with suitable tool. — 4WD —
Remove drive flange. — 4WD —
5.
Remove lock washer.
6.
Remove wheel bearing lock nut.
SFA752B
SFA753B
SFA364BA
SFA754B
AX-8
FRONT AXLE
Wheel Hub and Rotor Disc (Cont’d)
7.
Remove wheel hub and wheel bearing.
Be careful not to drop outer bearing.
INSTALLATION
1.
GI
NAAX0009
After installing wheel hub and wheel bearing, adjust wheel
bearing preload.
Refer to “Preload Adjustment”, “FRONT WHEEL BEARING”,
“On-vehicle Service”, AX-4.
MA
EM
LC
SFA832
2.
3.
Pack drive flange groove with grease, apply grease to O-ring
(two places) and mating surface of drive flange, and install
flange. — 4WD —
Install snap ring. — 4WD —
EC
FE
CL
MT
SFA755B
4. Install hub cap using a suitable tool.
Do not reuse hub cap. When installing, replace it with a new
one.
AT
TF
PD
SU
SFA759B
DISASSEMBLY
I
NAAX0010
Remove grease seal and bearing outer races with suitable
brass bar.
BR
ST
RS
BT
FA858
INSPECTION
NAAX0011
Thoroughly clean wheel bearings and wheel hub.
Wheel Bearing
I
Wheel Hub
I
NAAX0011S01
Make sure wheel bearing rolls freely and is free from noise,
crack, pitting and wear.
NAAX0011S02
Check wheel hub for crack by using a magnetic exploration or
dyeing test.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AX-9
FRONT AXLE
Wheel Hub and Rotor Disc (Cont’d)
ASSEMBLY
NAAX0012
1.
Install bearing outer race with Tool until it seats in hub.
2.
Pack multi-purpose grease into wheel hub. — 4WD —
3.
4.
Apply multi-purpose grease to each bearing cone.
Pack grease seal lip with multi-purpose grease, then install it
into wheel hub with suitable drift.
SFA197-A
SFA891
SFA459B
Knuckle Spindle
REMOVAL
1.
NAAX0013
Remove drive shaft. — 4WD —
Refer to “Drive Shaft”, AX-12.
2.
Separate tie-rod end and lower ball joint from knuckle with
Tool.
Install stud nut conversely on stud bolt so as not to damage
stud bolt.
SFA756B
AX-10
FRONT AXLE
Knuckle Spindle (Cont’d)
3.
Separate knuckle from strut.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SFA758B
INSPECTION
Knuckle Spindle
I
NAAX0014S01
Check knuckle spindle for deformation, cracks and other damage by using a magnetic exploration or dyeing test.
Needle Bearing — 4WD —
I
EC
NAAX0014
NAAX0014S02
Check needle bearing for wear, scratches, pitting, flaking and
burn marks.
FE
CL
MT
INSTALLATION
AT
NAAX0015
1. Install needle bearing into knuckle spindle. — 4WD —
Make sure that needle bearing is facing in proper direction.
Apply multi-purpose grease.
2. Install knuckle with wheel hub.
3. Install tie-rod end and lower ball joint.
TF
PD
SU
SFA962
4.
5.
After installing knuckle spindle, adjust wheel bearing preload.
Refer to “Preload Adjustment”, “FRONT WHEEL BEARING”,
“On-vehicle Service”, AX-4.
After installing drive shaft, check drive shaft axial end play. —
4WD —
Do not reuse snap ring once it has been removed.
Refer to “Drive Shaft”, AX-12.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SFA369B
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AX-11
FRONT AXLE
Drive Shaft (4WD)
Drive Shaft (4WD)
COMPONENTS
NAAX0016
SAX018
REMOVAL
1.
NAAX0017
2.
Remove hub cap and snap ring.
Refer to “REMOVAL”, “Wheel Hub and Rotor Disc”, AX-7.
Remove bolts fixing drive shaft to final drive.
3.
Remove transverse link fixing nut and bolts.
SFA236
SFA760B
4.
Separate drive shaft from knuckle by lightly tapping it with a
copper hammer.
Cover boots with shop towel so as not to damage them when
removing drive shaft.
SFA761B
AX-12
FRONT AXLE
Drive Shaft (4WD) (Cont’d)
DISASSEMBLY
Final Drive Side (TS82F)
1.
2.
NAAX0018
GI
NAAX0018S01
Remove plug seal from slide joint housing by lightly tapping
around slide joint housing.
Remove boot bands.
MA
EM
LC
SFA880
3.
Move boot and slide joint housing toward wheel side, and put
matching marks.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SFA963
4.
AT
Remove snap ring.
TF
PD
SU
SFA964
5.
Detach spider assembly with press.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SFA392
6. Draw out boot.
Cover drive shaft serration with tape so as not to damage the
boot.
HA
Wheel Side (ZF100)
SC
NAAX0018S02
CAUTION:
The joint on the wheel side cannot be disassembled.
ZF100 type joint assembly cannot be disassembled because a
plastic boot and special boot band are used. Do not use other
drive shaft boots. If the boot or joint is damaged, replace the
drive shaft assembly.
SFA799
AX-13
EL
IDX
FRONT AXLE
Drive Shaft (4WD) (Cont’d)
INSPECTION
NAAX0019
Thoroughly clean all parts in cleaning solvent, and dry with compressed air. Check parts for evidence of deformation and other
damage.
Drive Shaft
NAAX0019S01
Replace drive shaft assembly if it is twisted or cracked.
Boot (Final drive side)
NAAX0019S02
Check boot for fatigue, cracks, and wear. Replace boot with new
boot bands.
Joint Assembly (Final drive side)
I
I
I
NAAX0019S03
Replace any parts of double offset joint which show signs of
scorching, rust, wear or excessive play.
Check serration for deformation. Replace if necessary.
Check slide joint housing for any damage. Replace if necessary.
Joint Assembly (Wheel side)
NAAX0019S04
Replace drive shaft assembly if joint is deformed or damaged.
ASSEMBLY
I
I
NAAX0020
After drive shaft has been assembled, ensure that it
moves smoothly over its entire range without binding.
Use NISSAN GENUINE GREASE or equivalent after every
overhaul.
Final Drive Side (TS82F)
NAAX0020S01
1.
Install new small boot band, boot and side joint housing to
drive shaft.
Cover drive shaft serration with tape so as not to damage boot
during installation.
SFA800
2.
I
3.
Install spider assembly securely, ensuring marks are properly
aligned.
Press-fit with spider assembly serration chamfer facing
shaft.
Install new snap ring.
SFA397
AX-14
FRONT AXLE
Drive Shaft (4WD) (Cont’d)
4.
5.
Pack with grease.
Specified amount of grease:
95 - 105 g (3.35 - 3.70 oz)
Make sure that boot is properly installed on the drive shaft
groove. Set boot so that it does not swell and deform when its
length is “L1”.
Length “L1”: 95 - 97 mm (3.74 - 3.82 in)
GI
MA
EM
LC
SFA460BA
6.
Lock new larger boot band securely with a suitable tool, then
lock new smaller boot band.
7. Install new plug seal to slide joint housing by lightly tapping it.
Apply sealant to mating surface of plug seal.
Wheel Side (ZF100)
SFA443B
NAAX0020S02
CAUTION:
The joint on the wheel side cannot be disassembled.
ZF100 type joint assembly cannot be disassembled because a
plastic boot and special boot band are used. Do not use other
drive shaft boots. If the boot or joint is damaged, replace the
drive shaft assembly.
INSTALLATION
1.
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
NAAX0021
Apply multi-purpose grease.
TF
PD
SU
SFA887
2.
Install thrust washer onto drive shaft.
Make sure that thrust washer is facing in proper direction,
apply multi-purpose grease.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SFA846-A
3.
a.
When installing drive shaft, adjust drive shaft axial end play by
selecting a suitable snap ring.
Temporarily install new snap ring on drive shaft in the same
thickness as it was installed before removal.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SFA762B
AX-15
FRONT AXLE
Drive Shaft (4WD) (Cont’d)
b.
c.
d.
Set dial gauge on drive shaft end.
Measure axial end play of drive shaft.
Axial end play: 0.45 mm (0.0177 in) or less
If axial end play is not within the specified limit, select another
snap ring.
1.1
1.3
1.5
1.7
mm
mm
mm
mm
(0.043
(0.051
(0.059
(0.067
in)
in)
in)
in)
1.9 mm (0.075 in)
2.1 mm (0.083 in)
2.3 mm (0.091 in)
SFA847
Service Data and Specifications (SDS)
WHEEL BEARING (FRONT)
NAAX0022
Tightening torque
78 - 98 N·m (8 - 10 kg-m, 58 - 72 ft-lb)
Retightening torque after loosening wheel bearing
lock nut
Axial end play
Wheel bearing lock nut
0 mm (0 in)
Starting force at wheel hub bolt N (kg, lb)
Turning angle
A
15° - 30°
Starting force at wheel hub bolt N (kg, lb)
Wheel bearing preload at wheel hub bolt
0.5 - 1.5 N·m (0.05 - 0.15 kg-m, 4.3 - 13.0 in-lb)
B−A
B
7.06 - 20.99 N (0.72 - 2.14 kg, 1.59 - 4.72 lb)
DRIVE SHAFT (4WD)
Drive shaft joint type
NAAX0033
Final drive side
TS82F
Wheel side
ZF100*
Fixed joint axial end play limit
Diameter
1 mm (0.04 in)
Wheel side (D1)
29.0 mm (1.142 in)
Quality
Nissan genuine grease or equivalent
Grease
Specified amount of grease
Final drive side
Drive shaft axial end play
Boot length
95 - 105 g (3.35 - 3.70 oz)
0.45 mm (0.0177 in) or less
Final drive side (L1)
95 - 97 mm (3.74 - 3.82 in)
SAX019
*: ZF100 type joint assembly cannot be disassembled because a plastic boot and special boot band are used. Do not use other drive
shaft boots. If the boot or joint is damaged, replace the drive shaft assembly.
AX-16
FRONT AXLE
Service Data and Specifications (SDS) (Cont’d)
Drive Shaft End Snap Ring
Thickness mm (in)
1.1
1.3
1.5
1.7
(0.043)
(0.051)
(0.059)
(0.067)
=NAAX0033S01
Part No.
Thickness mm (in)
Part No.
39253-88G10
39253-88G11
39253-88G12
39253-88G13
1.9 (0.075)
2.1 (0.083)
2.3 (0.091)
39253-88G14
39253-88G15
39253-88G16
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AX-17
REAR AXLE
Precautions
Precautions
PRECAUTIONS
I
I
I
SBR686C
I
NAAX0023
When installing rubber parts, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition* with tires on ground.
*Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack,
hand tools and mats in designated positions.
Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake
tubes.
After installing removed suspension parts, check wheel
alignment and adjust if necessary.
Always torque brake lines when installing.
Preparation
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
NAAX0024
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV40101000
(J25604-01)
Axle stand
Removing rear axle shaft
NT159
ST36230000
(J25840-A)
Sliding hammer
Removing rear axle shaft
NT126
ST38020000
(
—
)
Bearing lock nut wrench
Removing wheel bearing lock nut
NT160
HT72480000 or
HT72210000
(J25852-B)
Rear axle shaft bearing
puller
Removing wheel bearing
NT161
ST37840000
(
—
)
Rear axle shaft guide
Installing rear axle shaft
NT162
AX-18
REAR AXLE
Preparation (Cont’d)
COMMERCIAL SERVICE TOOLS
Tool name
NAAX0025
GI
Description
MA
Removing and installing each brake piping
a: 10 mm (0.39 in)
1 Flare nut crowfoot
2 Torque wrench
EM
LC
NT360
Rear axle oil seal drift
Installing oil seal
a: 74 mm (2.91 in) dia.
b: 68 mm (2.68 in) dia.
c: 10 mm (0.39 in)
EC
FE
NT163
CL
MT
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Troubleshooting
AT
NAAX0035
Refer to “Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) Troubleshooting”,
“FRONT AXLE”, AX-3.
TF
PD
SU
On-vehicle Service
REAR AXLE PARTS
NAAX0026
Check rear axle parts for excessive play, wear and damage.
1. Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play.
2. Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque.
Tightening torque: Refer to “Components”, AX-20.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMA525A
REAR WHEEL BEARING
1.
2.
Check that wheel bearings operate smoothly.
Check axial end play.
Axial end play:
0 mm (0 in)
NAAX0027
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SRA755A
AX-19
REAR AXLE
Components
Components
NAAX0028
SRA756A
Removal
NAAX0029
CAUTION:
I Before removing the rear axle, disconnect the ABS wheel
sensor from the assembly. Then move it away from the
axle. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor
wires and the sensor becoming inoperative.
I Wheel bearing does not require maintenance.
I If growling noise is emitted from wheel bearing during
operation, replace wheel bearing assembly.
I If the wheel bearing assembly is removed, it must be renewed.
The old assembly must not be re-used.
1. Disconnect parking brake cable and brake tube.
2. Remove nuts securing wheel bearing cage with baffle plate.
SAX002
3. Draw out axle shaft with Tool.
When drawing out axle shaft, be careful not to damage oil seal.
SRA758A
AX-20
REAR AXLE
Removal (Cont’d)
4. Remove oil seal with a screwdriver.
Do not reuse oil seal once it is removed.
Always install new one.
5. Remove ABS sensor rotor.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SRA759A
6. Unbend lock washer with a screwdriver.
Do not reuse lock washer once removed. Always install new
one.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SRA104
7.
Remove bearing lock nut with Tool.
AT
TF
PD
SU
SRA728
8.
Remove wheel bearing together with bearing cage and baffle
plate from axle shaft.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SRA729-B
9. Remove grease seal with a screwdriver.
10. Remove wheel bearing assembly with a brass drift.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SRA106
AX-21
REAR AXLE
Inspection
Inspection
AXLE SHAFT
NAAX0030
NAAX0030S01
Check axle shaft for straightness, cracks, damage, wear and distortion. Replace if necessary.
BEARING CAGE
NAAX0030S02
Check bearing cage for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary.
REAR AXLE HOUSING
NAAX0030S03
Check rear axle housing for yield, deformation and cracks. Replace
if necessary.
Installation
NAAX0031
1.
Press new wheel bearing until it bottoms end face of bearing
cage.
Maximum load P:
39 kN (4 ton, 4.4 US ton, 3.9 Imp ton)
Always press outer race of wheel bearing during installation.
SRA288A
2.
Press new grease seal until it bottoms end face of bearing
cage.
Maximum load P:
8,300 N (847 kg, 1,866 lb)
After installing new grease seal, coat sealing lip with multipurpose grease.
SRA289A
3.
Press axle shaft into inner race of wheel bearing.
Maximum load P:
47.1 kN (4.8 ton, 5.3 US ton, 4.72 Imp ton)
Be careful not to damage and deform grease seal.
SRA761A
4.
5.
Install bearing washer and a new wheel bearing lock washer.
Tighten wheel bearing lock nut to specified torque.
: 245 - 314 N·m (25 - 32 kg-m, 181 - 231 ft-lb)
Fit wheel bearing lock washer lip in wheel bearing lock nut
groove correctly by tightening lock nut. Be sure to bend it up.
SRA762A
AX-22
REAR AXLE
Installation (Cont’d)
6.
a.
b.
Check wheel bearing preload.
Turn bearing cage (with respect to axle shaft) two or three
times. It must turn smoothly.
Attach spring gauge to bearing cage bolt (as shown at left) and
pull it at a speed of 10 rpm to measure preload.
Spring gauge indication:
6.7 - 47 N (0.68 - 4.79 kg, 1.51 - 10.57 lb)
GI
MA
EM
LC
SRA763A
7. Install new oil seal to rear axle housing using a suitable tool.
After installing new oil seal, coat sealing lip with multi-purpose grease.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SRA292A
8.
Press ABS sensor rotor onto axle shaft until it contacts wheel
bearing lock nut.
9. Position axle shafts in rear axle housing with Tool as a guide.
Be careful not to damage oil seal.
AT
TF
PD
SU
SRA012
10. Check axial end play.
a. Check that wheel bearings operate smoothly.
b. Check axial end play.
Axial end play:
0 mm (0 in)
BR
ST
RS
BT
SRA755A
Service Data and Specifications (SDS)
HA
WHEEL BEARING (REAR)
NAAX0032
Wheel bearing axial end play
0 mm (0 in)
Wheel bearing lock nut tightening torque
245 - 314 N·m (25 - 32 kg-m, 181 - 231 ft-lb)
Wheel bearing preload measured at bearing cage bolt
6.7 - 47 N (0.68 - 4.79 kg, 1.51 - 10.57 lb)
SC
EL
IDX
AX-23
NOTES
TRANSFER
SECTION
TF
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CONTENTS
PREPARATION ...............................................................4
Special Service Tools ..................................................4
Commercial Service Tools ...........................................9
TX10A
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................10
NVH Troubleshooting Chart.......................................10
TRANSFER .............................................................10
DESCRIPTION ...............................................................11
Cross-sectional View .................................................11
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ................................................12
Replacing Oil Seal .....................................................12
CENTER CASE OIL SEAL ........................................12
SHIFT SHAFT OIL SEAL ..........................................13
REAR OIL SEAL ......................................................13
Position Switch Check ...............................................14
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .................................15
Removal.....................................................................15
Installation..................................................................15
M/T MODEL ............................................................15
A/T MODEL .............................................................15
OVERHAUL ...................................................................16
Transfer Gear Control................................................16
Case Components .....................................................17
Gear Components .....................................................18
Shift Control Components .........................................19
DISASSEMBLY..............................................................20
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS ...........................24
Mainshaft ...................................................................24
DISASSEMBLY ........................................................24
INSPECTION ...........................................................25
ASSEMBLY .............................................................25
Front Drive Shaft .......................................................26
DISASSEMBLY ........................................................26
INSPECTION ...........................................................26
ASSEMBLY .............................................................26
Counter Gear .............................................................26
DISASSEMBLY ........................................................26
CL
INSPECTION ...........................................................27
ASSEMBLY .............................................................27
Main Gear ..................................................................27
DISASSEMBLY ........................................................27
INSPECTION ...........................................................28
ASSEMBLY .............................................................28
Front Case .................................................................28
REMOVAL ...............................................................28
INSTALLATION........................................................29
Front Case Cover ......................................................29
REMOVAL ...............................................................29
INSTALLATION........................................................29
Bearing Retainer........................................................29
REMOVAL ...............................................................29
INSTALLATION........................................................29
Center Case...............................................................30
REMOVAL ...............................................................30
INSTALLATION........................................................30
Rear Case..................................................................30
REMOVAL ...............................................................30
INSTALLATION........................................................30
Shift Control Components .........................................31
INSPECTION ...........................................................31
ASSEMBLY....................................................................32
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .........39
General Specifications...............................................39
Gear End Play ...........................................................39
Available Snap Ring ..................................................39
MAINSHAFT FRONT BEARING ................................39
MAINSHAFT REAR BEARING ..................................39
MAIN GEAR BEARING.............................................39
Available Shim ...........................................................40
COUNTER GEAR REAR BEARING ...........................40
ATX14A
PRECAUTIONS .............................................................41
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR
BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″.............41
Precautions ................................................................41
Service Notice............................................................42
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
CONTENTS
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...................42
ALL-MODE 4WD SYSTEM ...........................................43
Cross-sectional View .................................................43
Control System ..........................................................44
ALL-MODE 4WD TRANSFER BASIC CONTROL ........45
HYDRAULIC CONTROL CIRCUITS ...........................45
OUTLINE ................................................................45
CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM ................................46
INDICATIONS OF 4WD WARNING LAMP..................46
CAN Communication (With VDC)..............................47
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ..........................................47
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART..............................47
Location of Electrical Parts........................................49
Description of Electrical Parts ...................................50
TRANSFER MOTOR ................................................50
WAIT DETECTION SWITCH .....................................50
2-4WD SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE .............................51
LINE PRESSURE SWITCH .......................................51
Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check.................52
Wiring Diagram - TF -................................................53
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION ...............................................................62
Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II ....................62
DESCRIPTION ........................................................62
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................63
INDICATIONS OF 4WD WARNING LAMP..................64
Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II .........................65
CONSULT-II FUNCTION ...........................................65
SELF-DIAGNOSIS ...................................................65
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS ......................................67
DATA MONITOR......................................................68
DATA MONITOR ITEMS ...........................................70
REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE ......72
WORK SUPPORT ....................................................75
CLUTCH FORCE RELEASE LIMIT ADJUSTMENT .....76
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION..................77
Introduction ................................................................77
DESCRIPTION ........................................................77
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET.....................................77
Work Flow..................................................................79
HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR
QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR .............................79
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION ...........80
Listen to Customer Complaints .................................80
Transfer Fluid Check .................................................80
Road Test...................................................................80
PREPARATION FOR ROAD TEST ............................80
1. CHECK BEFORE ENGINE IS STARTED ...............81
2. CHECK AT IDLE ..................................................82
3. CRUISE TEST .....................................................86
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL
DESCRIPTION ...............................................................89
Transfer Control Unit Terminals and Reference
Value ..........................................................................89
(Cont’d)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF TRANSFER
CONTROL UNIT ......................................................89
INSPECTION OF TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT..........89
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE ....90
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE (WITH
VDC)...............................................................................96
Description .................................................................96
On Board Diagnosis Logic.........................................96
Possible Cause..........................................................96
DTC Confirmation Procedure ....................................96
WITH CONSULT-II ..............................................96
WITH GST .........................................................96
Diagnostic Procedure ................................................97
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (FRONT
REVOLUTION SENSOR) (WITHOUT VDC) .................98
Diagnostic Procedure ................................................98
4WD SOLENOID VALVE.............................................101
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................101
2-4WD SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE AND 4WD
SHIFT SWITCH............................................................103
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................103
TRANSFER MOTOR AND TRANSFER MOTOR
RELAY .........................................................................107
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................107
TRANSFER FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR..........110
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................110
ATP SWITCH, WAIT DETECTION SWITCH AND
NEUTRAL-4LO SWITCH.............................................113
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................113
CLUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH ..................................117
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................117
LINE PRESSURE SWITCH .........................................120
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................120
ABS OPERATION SIGNAL (WITHOUT VDC) ...........123
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................123
DATA ERASE/DISPLAY .............................................125
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................125
SHIFT ACTUATOR......................................................126
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................126
SHIFT ACTUATOR POSITION SWITCH ....................129
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................129
SHIFT ACTUATOR CIRCUIT ......................................131
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................131
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS ...............135
Symptom 1. 4WD Shift Indicator Lamp Does Not
Turn ON ...................................................................135
Symptom 2. 4WD Warning Lamp Does Not Turn
ON............................................................................137
Symptom 3. 4WD Shift Indicator Lamp Does Not
Turn OFF .................................................................139
Symptom 4. ATP Warning Lamp Does Not Turn
ON............................................................................139
TF-2
CONTENTS
Symptom 5. 4LO Indicator Lamp Does Not Turn
ON............................................................................141
Symptom 6. 4WD Shift Indicator Lamp Does Not
Indicate ″4H″............................................................143
Symptom 7. 4WD Shift Indicator Lamp Repeats
Flickering..................................................................144
Symptom 8. Tight Corner Braking Symptom...........145
Symptom 9. 4WD System Does Not Operate.........146
COMPONENT INSPECTION .......................................148
4WD Shift Switch.....................................................148
2-4WD Shift Solenoid Valve and Transfer Fluid
Temperature Sensor ................................................148
4WD Solenoid Valve, Clutch Pressure Switch
and Line Pressure Switch........................................148
Front Revolution Sensor..........................................149
Transfer Dropping Resistor......................................149
ATP Switch, Neutral-4LO Switch and Wait
Detection Switch ......................................................149
Transfer Motor .........................................................150
Transfer Motor Relay ...............................................150
Transfer Sub-harness ..............................................150
FRONT REVOLUTION SENSOR SUB-HARNESS
CONNECTOR ........................................................150
TRANSFER SWITCH ASSEMBLY SUB-HARNESS
CONNECTOR ........................................................151
TRANSFER TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY SUBHARNESS CONNECTOR .......................................151
Transfer Shift Relay (High & low)............................151
Actuator & Actuator Position Switch........................152
ACTUATOR ...........................................................152
ACTUATOR POSITION SWITCH ............................152
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ..............................................153
Replacing Oil Seal ...................................................153
FRONT CASE OIL SEAL ........................................153
SHIFT SHAFT OIL SEAL ........................................154
REAR OIL SEAL ....................................................154
Transfer Motor .........................................................155
REMOVAL .............................................................155
INSTALLATION......................................................155
Transfer Oil Filter .....................................................155
REMOVAL .............................................................155
INSTALLATION......................................................155
(Cont’d)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...............................156
Removal...................................................................156
Installation................................................................156
OVERHAUL .................................................................157
Transfer Gear Control..............................................157
Transfer Components ..............................................158
DISASSEMBLY............................................................160
Rear Case................................................................160
DISASSEMBLY ......................................................160
Center Case.............................................................160
DISASSEMBLY ......................................................160
Front Case ...............................................................170
DISASSEMBLY ......................................................170
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS .........................174
Front Case ...............................................................174
INSPECTION .........................................................174
Center Case.............................................................175
INSPECTION .........................................................175
ASSEMBLY..................................................................178
Front Case ...............................................................178
ASSEMBLY ...........................................................178
Center Case.............................................................182
ASSEMBLY ...........................................................182
Final Assembly.........................................................190
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .......193
General Specifications.............................................193
Inner Gear and Outer Gear .....................................193
SUB-OIL PUMP .....................................................193
MAIN OIL PUMP ....................................................193
Control Valve ...........................................................193
VALVE ..................................................................193
SPRING ................................................................193
Clutch.......................................................................194
DRIVE PLATE .......................................................194
DRIVEN PLATE .....................................................194
RETURN SPRING..................................................194
RETAINING PLATE................................................194
Seal Ring (Mainshaft side) ......................................195
Bearing Race (Thrust needle bearing side) ............195
Snap Ring (Sun gear side)......................................195
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-3
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
Special Service Tools
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV38108300
(J44195)
Companion flange
wrench
Removing companion flange nut
Installing companion flange nut
NT771
ST30021000
(J22912-01)
Puller
Removing low gear
Removing counter gear front bearing
(Use with ST36710010)
Removing L & H hub
a: 110 mm (4.33 in) dia.
b: 68 mm (2.68 in) dia.
NT411
ST30031000
(J22912-01)
Puller
Removing counter gear rear bearing
(Use with ST36710010)
a: 90 mm (3.54 in) dia.
b: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia.
NT411
ST33290001
(J25810-A)
Puller
Removing center case oil seal
Removing rear oil seal
a: 250 mm (9.84 in)
b: 160 mm (6.30 in)
NT414
ST33051001
(J22888)
Puller
Removing companion flange
a: 135 mm (5.31 in)
b: 100 mm (3.94 in)
c: 130 mm (5.12 in)
NT657
ST30720000
1 (J25273)
2 (J25405)
Drift
1 Installing center case oil seal
2 Installing rear oil seal
a: 77 mm (3.03 in) dia.
b: 55.5 mm (2.185 in) dia.
NT658
TF-4
NATF0093
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools (Cont’d)
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
ST36710010
(
—
Drift
GI
Description
Removing counter gear front bearing
(Use with ST30021000)
Removing counter gear rear bearing
(Use with ST30031000)
a: 34.5 mm (1.358 in) dia.
)
NT063
ST33061000
(J8107-2)
Drift
Removing main gear bearing
a: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia.
b: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
NT116
ST30613000
1 (J25742-3)
2 (J34339)
Drift
1 Installing main gear bearing
2 Installing front case cover oil seal
a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia.
b: 48 mm (1.89 in) dia.
CL
MT
NT073
(J35864)
Drift
Installing shift shaft oil seal
a: 26 mm (1.02 in) dia.
b: 20 mm (0.79 in) dia.
c: 150 mm (5.91 in)
AT
NT117
(J26092)
Drift
Seating counter gear assembly
a: 44.5 mm (1.752 in) dia.
b: 38.5 mm (1.516 in) dia.
PD
AX
NT065
(J34291)
Shim setting gauge set
Selecting counter gear rear bearing shim
SU
BR
NT101
(J34291-20)
Plunger-shim setting
gauge
Selecting counter gear rear bearing shim
ST
RS
NT118
BT
KV40100621
(J26091)
Drift
Installing front drive shaft bearing
a: 76 mm (2.99 in) dia.
b: 69 mm (2.72 in) dia.
HA
SC
NT086
EL
IDX
TF-5
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools (Cont’d)
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
ST30032000
(
—
Base
Description
Installing front drive shaft bearing
a: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia.
b: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia.
)
NT660
ST33052000
(
—
Adapter
Removing front drive shaft bearing
a: 28 mm (1.10 in) dia.
b: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia.
)
NT431
ST35271000
(J26091)
Drift
Installing rear oil seal
Removing and installing press flange snap ring
a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia.
b: 63 mm (2.48 in) dia.
NT115
ST27863000
(
—
Support ring
Removing and installing press flange snap ring
a: 74.5 mm (2.933 in) dia.
b: 62.5 mm (2.461 in) dia.
)
NT661
KV40104710
(
—
Support ring
Removing and installing press flange snap ring
a: 76.3 mm (3.004 in) dia.
b: 67.9 mm (2.673 in) dia.
)
NT661
ST35291000
(
—
Remover
Removing mainshaft rear bearing
a: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia.
b: 29.5 mm (1.161 in) dia.
c: 22.5 mm (0.886 in) dia.
)
NT662
TF-6
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools (Cont’d)
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
ST30090010
(
—
Remover
GI
Description
Removing mainshaft rear bearing
a: 165 mm (6.50 in)
b: 25 mm (0.98 in) dia.
c: M16 x P2.0
)
MA
EM
LC
EC
NT663
KV38100500
(
—
Drift
Installing front drive shaft oil seal
a: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia.
b: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
)
FE
CL
NT115
KV40100621
(J25273)
Drift
Installing mainshaft rear bearing
a: 76 mm (2.99 in) dia.
b: 69 mm (2.72 in) dia.
MT
AT
NT104
KV32101100
(
—
Pin punch
Removing and installing L-H fork, 2-4 fork
a: 6 mm (0.24 in) dia.
)
PD
AX
NT410
ST3306S001
(J22888-D)
Differential side bearing
puller set
1: ST33051001
(
—
)
Puller
2: ST33061000
(J8107-2)
Adapter
ST30911000
(
—
Puller
Installing mainshaft rear bearing
Removing sun gear assembly
a: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia.
b: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia.
SU
BR
ST
NT072
Installing mainshaft and planetary carrier assembly
a: 98 mm (3.86 in) dia.
b: 40.5 mm (1.594 in) dia.
)
RS
BT
HA
NT664
SC
EL
IDX
TF-7
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools (Cont’d)
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV381054S0
(
—
)
Outer race puller
Removing rear oil seal
NT665
KV40105230
(
—
Adapter
Installing planetary carrier assembly
a: 92 mm (3.62 in) dia.
b: 86 mm (3.39 in) dia.
c: 12 mm (0.47 in)
)
NT666
KV40105310
(
—
Support ring
Installing planetary carrier assembly
a: 89.1 mm (3.508 in) dia.
b: 80.7 mm (3.177 in) dia.
)
NT661
KV40105500
(
—
Support
Installing planetary carrier assembly
a: 69 mm (2.72 in) dia.
b: 52 mm (2.05 in) dia.
c: 120 mm (4.72 in) dia.
)
NT667
KV38100200
(
—
Drift
Installing transfer cover oil seal
a: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia.
b: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia.
)
NT673
KV31103300
(
—
Drift
Removing and installing press flange snap ring
a: 76.3 mm (3.004 in) dia.
b: 130 mm (5.12 in)
)
NT668
TF-8
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools (Cont’d)
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
GI
Description
KV31103400
(
—
)
Clutch piston attachment
1 Shaft-drift
2 Guide-cylinder
MA
Installing clutch piston
a: 88.5 mm (3.484 in) dia.
b: 158 mm (6.22 in) dia.
EM
LC
EC
NT669
(J35864)
Drift
Installing oil seal
FE
CL
MT
NT671
Commercial Service Tools
Tool name
AT
NATF0094
Description
Puller
Removing front drive shaft front bearing
Removing front drive shaft rear bearing
Removing main gear bearing
PD
AX
NT077
Drift
1 Installing mainshaft rear bearing
2 Installing L & H hub
1 a: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia.
b: 42 mm (1.65 in) dia.
c: 180 mm (7.09 in)
2 a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia.
c: 60 mm (2.36 in)
NT117
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-9
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING
NATF0095
TX10A
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
NATF0095S01
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of inspection.
If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
TRANSFER
Fluid leakage
3
1
Hard to shift or will not shift
1
1
2
TF-19
TF-18
TF-18
SHIFT FORK (Worn)
GEAR (Worn or damaged)
BEARING (Worn or damaged)
TF-17, 19
CHECK SPRING AND CHECK BALL (Worn or damaged)
TF-17
2
OIL SEAL (Worn or damaged)
1
FLUID (Level too high)
FLUID (Wrong)
Noise
FLUID (Level low)
SUSPECTED PARTS
(Possible cause)
TF-17
Reference page
LIQUID GASKET (Damaged)
Refer to MA-22, “Checking
Transfer Fluid”.
NATF0095S0101
3
3
2
Symptom
Jumps out of gear
1
TF-10
2
2
DESCRIPTION
TX10A
Cross-sectional View
Cross-sectional View
NATF0096
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SMT164E
TF-11
IDX
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
TX10A
Replacing Oil Seal
Replacing Oil Seal
CENTER CASE OIL SEAL
1.
NATF0097
NATF0097S01
3.
Remove exhaust front tube and heat insulator. Refer to
“Removal”, TF-15.
Remove front propeller shaft. Refer to PD-8, “Removal and
Installation”.
Remove companion flange nut.
4.
Remove companion flange.
5.
Remove center case oil seal.
6.
I
7.
Install center case oil seal.
Before installing, apply multi-purpose grease to seal lip.
Install companion flange.
2.
SMT844DB
SMT802C
SMT803C
SMT183E
8. Tighten nut to the specified torque.
9. Install front propeller shaft.
10. Install exhaust front tube and heat insulator.
SMT845DB
TF-12
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
TX10A
Replacing Oil Seal (Cont’d)
SHIFT SHAFT OIL SEAL
1.
2.
3.
NATF0097S02
Remove front propeller shaft. Refer to PD-8, “Removal and
Installation”.
Remove companion flange. Refer to center case oil seal,
TF-12.
Remove transfer control lever from transfer outer shift lever.
Then remove outer shift lever.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT863C
4.
I
EC
Remove shift shaft oil seal.
Be careful not to damage cross shaft.
FE
CL
MT
SMT491A
5.
I
6.
7.
8.
Install shift shaft oil seal.
Before installing, apply multi-purpose grease to seal lip.
Install outer shift lever. Then install transfer control lever to
transfer outer shift lever.
Install companion flange. Refer to center case oil seal, TF-12.
Install front propeller shaft.
AT
PD
AX
SU
SMT805C
REAR OIL SEAL
1.
2.
NATF0097S03
Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to PD-8, “Removal and
Installation”.
Remove rear oil seal.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT806C
3.
I
4.
Install rear oil seal.
Before installing apply multi-purpose grease to seal lip.
Install rear propeller shaft.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT807C
TF-13
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
TX10A
Position Switch Check
Position Switch Check
Switch
NATF0098
Gear position
Continuity
4WD
Yes
Except 4WD
No
Neutral
No
Except neutral
Yes
4WD switch
Neutral position switch
SMT790CA
TF-14
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
TX10A
Removal
Removal
NATF0099
1.
2.
SMT800C
Drain fluid from transfer and oil from transmission.
Remove exhaust front and rear tubes. Refer to FE-9, “Removal
and Installation”.
3. Remove front and rear propeller shaft. Refer to PD-8,
“Removal and Installation”.
4. Insert plug into rear oil seal after removing propeller shaft.
I Be careful not to damage spline, sleeve yoke and rear oil
seal, when removing propeller shaft.
5. Disconnect neutral position and 4WD switch harness connectors.
6. Remove transfer control lever from transfer outer shift lever.
7. Remove transfer from transmission.
WARNING:
Support transfer while removing it.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SMT863C
AT
Installation
I
NATF0100
Apply recommended sealant to mating surface to transmission. (M/T model only)
Recommended sealant:
Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent
Refer to TF-17.
PD
AX
SU
SMT495A
I
Tighten bolts securing transfer.
M/T MODEL
NATF0100S01
Bolt No.
Tightening torque
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
1
32 - 42 (3.2 - 4.3, 24 - 31)
60 (2.36)
2
32 - 42 (3.2 - 4.3, 24 - 31)
45 (1.77)
A/T MODEL
SMT496AB
mm (in)
NATF0100S02
Bolt No.
Tightening torque
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
1
32 - 42 (3.2 - 4.3, 24 - 31)
45 (1.77)
2
32 - 42 (3.2 - 4.3, 24 - 31)
45 (1.77)
BR
ST
RS
BT
mm (in)
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-15
OVERHAUL
TX10A
Transfer Gear Control
Transfer Gear Control
NATF0101
SMT184E
TF-16
OVERHAUL
TX10A
Case Components
Case Components
NATF0102
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SMT165E
TF-17
IDX
OVERHAUL
TX10A
Gear Components
Gear Components
NATF0103
SMT185E
TF-18
OVERHAUL
TX10A
Shift Control Components
Shift Control Components
NATF0104
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SMT186E
TF-19
IDX
NATF0105
DISASSEMBLY
TX10A
1.
2.
Remove nut of companion flange.
Remove companion flange.
3.
4.
I
Remove 4WD switch.
Remove rear case.
Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
5.
6.
Remove oil cover and oil gutter.
Remove snap ring and retainer ring from 2-4 shift rod.
7.
I
Remove bolts securing bearing retainer.
This step is necessary to remove mainshaft from center
case.
8.
Remove bolts securing center case to front case and then
separate center case and front case.
SMT846DA
SMT270A
SMT435C
SMT273A
SMT274A
TF-20
DISASSEMBLY
9.
I
TX10A
Measure end play of low gear.
Standard:
0.2 - 0.35 mm (0.0079 - 0.0138 in)
If end play is beyond the maximum value, check low gear
and L & H hub for wear.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT342A
10. Disassemble center case assembly.
a. Remove snap ring from mainshaft.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SMT275A
b.
Pull out low gear with L & H hub.
AT
PD
AX
SU
SMT757A
c.
Remove needle bearing of low gear.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT758A
d.
Make sure of the direction of the drive chain before removing
it. (It must be reinstalled in the same direction.)
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT788C
TF-21
DISASSEMBLY
e.
I
TX10A
Remove mainshaft, front drive and drive chain as a set by
tapping front end of mainshaft and front drive shaft alternately.
Be careful not to bend drive chain.
SMT279A
11. Disassemble front case assembly.
a. Remove neutral position switch, plugs, check springs and
check balls.
SMT822D
b.
Remove outer shift lever.
c.
Remove lock pin of inner shift lever and drive out cross shaft
with plug.
d.
Remove 2-4 shift rod.
SMT867C
SMT282A
SMT283A
TF-22
DISASSEMBLY
e.
TX10A
Remove L & H shift rod and fork assembly with coupling
sleeve.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT284A
f.
Remove needle bearing from main gear.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SMT286A
g.
Remove bolts securing front case cover and then remove
case.
AT
PD
AX
SU
SMT287A
h.
Remove counter gear by tapping lightly.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT759A
i.
Remove main gear by tapping lightly.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT288A
TF-23
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
TX10A
Mainshaft
Mainshaft
DISASSEMBLY
1.
I
NATF0106
Check end play of front drive sprocket.
Standard:
0.2 - 0.35 mm (0.0079 - 0.0138 in)
If end play is beyond the maximum value, check front
drive sprocket and clutch gear for wear.
SMT347A
2.
I
Remove retainer ring, speedometer drive gear and steel ball.
Be careful not to lose the steel ball.
3.
Remove snap ring and spacer.
4.
5.
Press out front drive sprocket with mainshaft rear bearing and
clutch gear together.
Remove needle bearing.
6.
Remove bearing retainer and then remove snap ring.
SMT289A
SMT290A
SMT291A
SMT292A
TF-24
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
TX10A
Mainshaft (Cont’d)
7.
Press out mainshaft front bearing from mainshaft.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT293A
INSPECTION
Gear and Shaft
I
I
I
EC
NATF0107
NATF0107S01
Check gears for excessive wear, chips or cracks.
Check shaft for cracks, wear or bending.
Check coupling sleeve for wear or damage.
FE
CL
MT
SMT348A
Bearing
I
AT
NATF0107S02
Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, crack,
pitting or wear.
PD
AX
SU
SMT042E
ASSEMBLY
1.
I
NATF0108
Press mainshaft front bearing onto mainshaft.
Pay special attention to its direction.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT294A
2.
3.
Select snap ring with proper thickness and install it.
Allowable clearance between snap ring and groove:
0 - 0.15 mm (0 - 0.0059 in)
Available snap ring for mainshaft front bearing:
Refer to SDS, TF-39.
Regarding to further procedures, refer to “ASSEMBLY”, TF-32.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT295A
TF-25
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
TX10A
Front Drive Shaft
Front Drive Shaft
DISASSEMBLY
I
NATF0109
Front drive shaft front bearing and rear bearing
SMT437C
INSPECTION
Sprocket and Shaft
I
I
NATF0110S01
Check sprocket for excessive wear, chips or cracks.
Check shaft for cracks or wear.
Bearing
I
NATF0110
NATF0110S02
Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, crack,
pitting or wear.
SMT357A
ASSEMBLY
I
NATF0111
Press front drive shaft front bearing and rear bearing.
SMT438C
Counter Gear
DISASSEMBLY
NATF0112
1.
Press out counter gear front bearing.
2.
I
Press out counter gear rear bearing.
Remove rear sub-gear, spacer and dish plate (M/T model
only).
SMT300A
SMT301A
TF-26
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
TX10A
Counter Gear (Cont’d)
INSPECTION
Gear and Shaft
I
I
GI
NATF0113S01
Check gears for excessive wear, chips or cracks.
Check shaft for cracks or wear.
Bearing
I
NATF0113
MA
NATF0113S02
Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, crack,
pitting or wear.
EM
LC
SMT358A
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
I
EC
NATF0114
Press on counter gear front bearing.
Install rear sub-gear, dish plate and spacer.
Press on counter gear rear bearing (M/T model only).
FE
CL
MT
SMT439C
AT
Main Gear
DISASSEMBLY
Main Gear Bearing
1.
NATF0115
NATF0115S01
Remove snap ring.
PD
AX
SU
SMT304A
2.
Pull out main gear bearing.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT305A
Plug
I
NATF0115S02
Always replace it with new one whenever it is removed.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT187E
TF-27
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
TX10A
Main Gear (Cont’d)
INSPECTION
Gear and Shaft
I
I
NATF0116S01
Check gears for excessive wear, chips or cracks.
Check shaft for cracks or wear.
Bearing
I
NATF0116
NATF0116S02
Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, crack,
pitting or wear.
SMT359A
ASSEMBLY
Main Gear Bearing
NATF0117
NATF0117S01
1.
Press on main gear bearing.
2.
Select snap ring with proper thickness and install it.
Allowable clearance between snap ring and groove:
0 - 0.15 mm (0 - 0.0059 in)
Available snap ring for main gear bearing:
Refer to SDS, TF-39.
SMT307A
SMT030D
Plug
I
NATF0117S02
Apply sealant to plug and install it.
Sealant:
Refer to Gear Components, TF-18.
SMT188E
Front Case
REMOVAL
Shift Shaft Oil Seal
I
I
I
NATF0118
NATF0118S01
Use a screwdriver to pry out old seal.
Be careful not to damage case.
Always replace with a new one whenever it has been removed.
SMT310A
TF-28
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
TX10A
Front Case (Cont’d)
INSTALLATION
Shift Shaft Oil Seal
I
I
NATF0119
GI
NATF0119S01
Install new shift shaft oil seal until flush with case.
Before installing, apply multi-purpose grease to seal lip.
MA
EM
LC
SMT805C
EC
Front Case Cover
REMOVAL
Cover Oil Seal
I
I
NATF0120
NATF0120S01
Drive out old seal from inside of front case cover.
Be careful not to damage front case cover.
FE
CL
MT
SMT189E
INSTALLATION
Cover Oil Seal
I
I
AT
NATF0121
NATF0121S01
Install new front case cover oil seal until it stops.
Before installing, apply multi-purpose grease to seal lip.
PD
AX
SU
SMT868C
Bearing Retainer
REMOVAL
Oil Catcher
I
I
NATF0122
BR
NATF0122S01
Drive out oil catcher from inside of bearing retainer.
Be careful not to damage bearing retainer.
ST
RS
BT
SMT190E
INSTALLATION
Oil Catcher
I
I
I
NATF0123
HA
NATF0123S01
Install oil catcher until it stops.
Be careful not to damage or distort oil catcher or bearing
retainer.
Before installing, apply multi-purpose grease to seal lip.
SC
EL
IDX
SMT191E
TF-29
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
TX10A
Center Case
Center Case
REMOVAL
Center Case Oil Seal
I
NATF0124
NATF0124S01
Remove center case oil seal.
SMT863D
INSTALLATION
Center Case Oil Seal
I
NATF0125
NATF0125S01
Install center case oil seal.
SMT864D
Rear Case
REMOVAL
Rear Oil Seal
I
NATF0126
NATF0126S01
Pull out rear oil seal.
SMT316A
INSTALLATION
Rear Oil Seal
I
I
NATF0127
NATF0127S01
Install new rear oil seal until it stops.
Before installing, apply multi-purpose grease to seal lip.
SMT317A
Air Breather
I
Install as shown in illustration.
SMT799A
TF-30
NATF0127S02
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
TX10A
Shift Control Components
Shift Control Components
INSPECTION
I
GI
NATF0128
Check contact surface and sliding surface for wear, scratches,
projections or other faulty conditions.
MA
EM
LC
SMT360A
L & H Shift Rod & Fork
I
EC
NATF0128S01
Assemble as shown in illustration.
* Retaining pin is the same size as the one for 2-4 shift rod.
Tool number: KV32101100 ( — )
FE
CL
MT
SMT823D
2-4 Shift Rod & Fork
I
AT
NATF0128S02
Assemble as shown in illustration.
* Retaining pins are the same size.
Tool number: KV32101100 ( — )
PD
AX
SU
SMT320A
I
Pay special attention to the direction of fork guide collar.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT031D
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-31
NATF0129
ASSEMBLY
TX10A
1.
a.
Assemble front case.
Install main gear assembly by tapping lightly.
b.
Apply sealant to the mating surface of front case cover and
install it on front case.
These ten bolts should be coated with sealant.
Tightening torque
A: 20 - 23 N·m (2.0 - 2.4 kg-m, 15 - 17 ft-lb)
B: 24 - 28 N·m (2.4 - 2.9 kg-m, 18 - 20 ft-lb)
(Always replace after every disassembly.)
Sealant:
Refer to Case Components, TF-17.
SMT323A
I
I
SMT166E
c.
Apply gear oil to needle bearing and install it into main gear.
d.
Install counter gear assembly by tapping lightly.
e.
I
Install cross shaft and inner shift lever.
When replacing cross shaft, outer shift lever or lock pin of
outer shift lever, replace them as a set.
SMT326A
SMT327A
SMT032D
TF-32
ASSEMBLY
f.
TX10A
Apply sealant to plug and install it into front case.
Sealant:
Refer to Case Components, TF-17.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT330A
g.
Insert interlock plunger into front case.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SMT331A
h. Install L & H shift rod and fork assembly with coupling sleeve.
CAUTION:
L & H coupling sleeve have directional property. (A/T vehicle
only)
AT
PD
AX
SU
SMT167E
i.
Install 2-4 shift rod.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT333A
j.
I
Install neutral position switch, check balls, check springs and
plugs.
Apply sealant to switches and plugs.
Sealant:
Refer to Case Components, TF-17.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT822D
TF-33
ASSEMBLY
TX10A
2.
a.
Select counter gear rear bearing shim.
Seat counter gear assembly.
b.
Place J34291-1 (bridge), J34291-2 (legs) and J34291-5 (gauging cylinder) on machined surface of center case and allow
gauging cylinder to rest on top outer portion of counter gear
rear bearing. Lock gauging cylinder in place.
c.
Insert J34291-20 (gauging plunger) into J34291-5 (gauging
cylinder).
d.
Place bridge, legs, gauging cylinder and gauging plunger onto
machined surface of front case assembly, and allow gauging
plunger to drop until it contacts counter gear rear bearing mating surface.
SMT033D
SMT591A
SMT592A
SMT034D
TF-34
ASSEMBLY
e.
TX10A
GI
g.
Lock gauging plunger in place and use feeler gauge to measure gap between gauging cylinder and gauging plunger.
Use measured distance and following chart to select correct
shim.
Counter gear end play:
0 - 0.2 mm (0 - 0.008 in)
Counter gear rear bearing shim:
Refer to SDS, TF-40.
Select counter gear rear bearing shim.
3.
4.
Place suitable shim on counter gear rear bearing with grease.
Apply ATF to each part in front case.
EC
f.
MA
EM
LC
SMT035D
FE
CL
MT
SMT036D
5.
a.
I
Assemble center case assembly.
Install mainshaft on center case by tapping lightly.
Apply ATF to mainshaft front bearing.
AT
PD
AX
SU
SMT406A
b.
Install bearing retainer.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT407A
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-35
ASSEMBLY
TX10A
c.
Put drive chain onto the front drive sprocket and front drive
shaft, and then put them in center case.
d.
I
Install front drive shaft by tapping lightly.
Make sure shafts are lined up in the case.
e.
Apply ATF to needle bearings and install them into front drive
sprocket.
These needle bearings can be installed more easily if front
drive sprocket is rotated while installing them.
SMT168E
SMT409A
SMT410A
I
SMT411A
f.
I
Install 2-4 coupling sleeve with 2-4 shift fork.
Pay special attention to direction of coupling sleeve.
SMT412A
TF-36
ASSEMBLY
g.
I
TX10A
Install clutch gear and mainshaft rear bearing.
Place wooden block under mainshaft in order to protect
mainshaft front bearing.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT192E
h.
i.
Install spacer.
Select snap ring with proper thickness and install it.
Allowable clearance between snap ring and groove:
0 - 0.15 mm (0 - 0.0059 in)
Available snap ring for mainshaft rear bearing:
Refer to SDS, TF-39.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SMT414A
j.
I
Install steel ball, speedometer drive gear and retainer ring.
Steel ball is the smallest of check balls for this unit.
AT
PD
AX
SU
SMT415A
k.
I
Install low gear and its bearing to mainshaft.
Apply ATF to needle bearing.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT340A
l.
I
Install L & H hub and snap ring to mainshaft.
Pay special attention to direction of L & H hub.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT193E
TF-37
ASSEMBLY
TX10A
m. Measure end play of low gear.
Standard:
0.2 - 0.35 mm (0.0079 - 0.0138 in)
SMT342A
6.
Apply sealant to mating surface and put center case assembly onto front case and tighten bolts.
Sealant:
Refer to Case Components, TF-17.
7.
Install snap ring to 2-4 shift rod.
8.
9.
Install oil gutter and oil cover.
Apply ATF to each part in center case.
SMT343A
SMT272A
SMT344A
10. Apply sealant to mating surface and install rear case on center case.
11. Install 4WD switch.
I Apply sealant to thread of switch.
Sealant:
Refer to Case Components, TF-17.
SMT037D
TF-38
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
TX10A
General Specifications
General Specifications
NATF0130
Transfer model
GI
TX10A
High
1.000
Low
2.020
MA
Gear ratio
Number of teeth
Main gear
29
Low gear
37
High
38
Low
24
EM
LC
Counter gear
Front drive sprocket
41
Front drive shaft
41
Fluid capacity (US qt, Imp qt)*
EC
FE
2.2 (2-3/8, 2)
*: Refer to MA-12, “Fluids and Lubricants”.
CL
Gear End Play
NATF0131
Unit: mm (in)
Front drive sprocket
0.2 - 0.35 (0.0079 - 0.0138)
Low gear
0.2 - 0.35 (0.0079 - 0.0138)
Counter gear
MT
AT
0 - 0.2 (0 - 0.008)
Available Snap Ring
NATF0132
MAINSHAFT FRONT BEARING
NATF0132S01
Allowable clearance
PD
0 - 0.15 mm (0 - 0.0059 in)
Thickness mm (in)
Part number*
3.10 (0.1220)
3.19 (0.1256)
3.28 (0.1291)
33138-73P10
33138-73P11
33138-73P12
AX
SU
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
MAINSHAFT REAR BEARING
NATF0132S02
Allowable clearance
BR
0 - 0.15 mm (0 - 0.0059 in)
Thickness mm (in)
1.80
1.89
1.98
2.07
2.16
Part number*
(0.0709)
(0.0744)
(0.0780)
(0.0815)
(0.0850)
ST
33138-73P20
33138-73P21
33138-73P22
33138-73P23
33138-73P24
RS
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
BT
MAIN GEAR BEARING
NATF0132S03
Allowable clearance
0 - 0.15 mm (0 - 0.0059 in)
Thickness mm (in)
Part number*
2.60 (0.1024)
2.69 (0.1059)
2.78 (0.1094)
33114-73P00
33114-73P01
33114-73P02
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-39
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
TX10A
Available Shim
Available Shim
NATF0133
COUNTER GEAR REAR BEARING
NATF0133S01
Allowable clearance
0 - 0.2 mm (0 - 0.008 in)
Thickness mm (in)
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
Part number*
(0.004)
(0.008)
(0.012)
(0.016)
(0.020)
(0.024)
33112-C6900
33112-C6901
33112-C6902
33112-C6903
33112-33G00
33112-33G01
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
TF-40
PRECAUTIONS
ATX14A
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR
BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
GI
NATF0001
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS system composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL PATHFINDER is as follows:
I For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
I For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of side air bag module (located in the outer side of front seat),
satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring harness,
warning lamp (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
I To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
I Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the RS section.
I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified with yellow harness connector (and with
yellow harness protector or yellow insulation tape before the harness connectors).
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
Precautions
I
NATF0092
Before connecting or disconnecting the Transfer control
unit harness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative battery terminal. Failure to do so may
damage the Transfer control unit. Because battery voltage
is applied to Transfer control unit even if ignition switch
is turned off.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF289H
I
When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from Transfer control unit, take care not to damage pin
terminals (bend or break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on
Transfer control unit pin terminal, when connecting pin
connectors.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEF291H
TF-41
PRECAUTIONS
ATX14A
Precautions (Cont’d)
I
Before replacing Transfer control unit, perform Transfer
control unit input/output signal inspection and make sure
whether Transfer control unit functions properly or not.
(See page TF-90.)
MEF040DB
Service Notice
NATF0002
1) Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the all-mode 4WD transfer. It is
important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
2) Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
3) Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere with the operation of the all-mode 4WD transfer.
4) Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.
5) All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
reassembly.
6) Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the all-mode 4WD transfer is disassembled.
7) It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.
8) The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced.
Place removed parts in a parts rack in order to replace them in correct positions and sequences. Care will
also prevent springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
9) Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight.
10) Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings
and seals, and to hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease.
11) Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.
12) After overhaul, refill the transfer with new ATF.
13) When the all-mode 4WD transfer drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is drained. Old all-mode
4WD transfer fluid will remain in torque converter and ATF cooling system. Always follow the procedures,
MA-24, “Changing All-mode 4WD Transfer Fluid”.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
I GI-11, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”
I EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
I GI-35, “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS”
I GI-24, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”
TF-42
NATF0003
ALL-MODE 4WD SYSTEM
ATX14A
Cross-sectional View
Cross-sectional View
NATF0006
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SMT953CA
TF-43
IDX
ALL-MODE 4WD SYSTEM
ATX14A
Control System
Control System
NATF0007
SMT169E
TF-44
ALL-MODE 4WD SYSTEM
ATX14A
Control System (Cont’d)
ALL-MODE 4WD TRANSFER BASIC CONTROL
NATF0007S01
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SMT043D
HYDRAULIC CONTROL CIRCUITS
NATF0007S02
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
SMT040D
OUTLINE
NATF0007S03
All-mode 4WD transfer is controlled by the transfer control unit and
sensors.
If a malfunction occurs in the all-mode 4WD system, the 4WD
warning lamp lights up to indicate the system malfunction. There
are two ways to identify the cause of the malfunction.
1) Performing the self-diagnosis. (The 4WD warning lamp will
indicate what kind of malfunction has occurred by flickering.)
2) Performing diagnosis using CONSULT-II.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-45
ALL-MODE 4WD SYSTEM
ATX14A
Control System (Cont’d)
CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM
NATF0007S04
SMT170E
INDICATIONS OF 4WD WARNING LAMP
Condition
Content
NATF0007S05
4WD warning lamp
During self-diagnosis
Indicates the malfunction position by number of flickers.
Flickers at malfunction mode.
Lamp check*
Checks the lamp by turning ON during engine starting. After
engine starts, it turns OFF if there are no malfunctions.
ON
Malfunction in 4WD system*
Turns ON to indicate malfunction. When ignition switch is
turned to “OFF” or the malfunction is corrected, it turns OFF.
ON
When vehicle is driven with different Flickers once every 2 seconds.
diameters of front and rear tires
Turns OFF when ignition switch is “OFF”.
Flickers once every 2 seconds.
High fluid temperature in transfer
unit
When fluid temperature is high or fluid temperature sensor
circuit is shorted, it flickers twice every second.
It turns OFF when fluid temperature becomes normal.
Flickers twice a second.
Other than above (System is normal.)
Lamp is OFF.
OFF
*: When 4WD warning lamp is ON, all the 4WD shift indicator lamps turn OFF.
TF-46
ALL-MODE 4WD SYSTEM
ATX14A
CAN Communication (With VDC)
CAN Communication (With VDC)
=NATF0134
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
GI
NATF0134S01
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many
electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with
2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line). These allow a high rate of information transmission with less
wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SKIA1526E
MT
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
NATF0134S02
T: Transmit R: Receive
Signals
ECM
TCM
ABS actuator
Transfer con- Steering angle and electric
trol unit
sensor
unit (control
unit)
Engine speed signal
T
R
R
Accelerator pedal position signal
T
R
R
Closed throttle position signal
T
R
Shift pattern signal
R
T
VDC operation signal
R
R
T
TCS operation signal
R
R
T
ABS operation signal
R
R
T
Output shaft revolution signal
R
ETC fail signal
T
During shifting signal
R
Combination
meter
R
PD
AX
T
SU
BR
R
R
T
ST
R
Steering wheel angle sensor signal
R
T
Wheel speed sensor signal
R
Brake switch signal
AT
RS
R
T
R
T
MI signal
T
R
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
R
Fuel consumption signal
T
R
T
T
Lock-up prohibition signal
T
R
Lock-up signal
R
T
HA
SC
R
Vehicle speed signal
R
BT
EL
IDX
TF-47
ALL-MODE 4WD SYSTEM
ATX14A
CAN Communication (With VDC) (Cont’d)
Signals
ECM
TCM
Transfer con- Steering angle
trol unit
sensor
ABS actuator
and electric
unit (control
unit)
Combination
meter
Neutral range switch signal
R
T
Parking range switch signal
R
T
O/D off switch signal
R
T
POWER mode signal
R
T
A/C compressor feedback signal
T
R
Fuel level sensor signal
R
T
TF-48
ALL-MODE 4WD SYSTEM
ATX14A
Location of Electrical Parts
Location of Electrical Parts
NATF0008
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SMT171E
TF-49
IDX
ALL-MODE 4WD SYSTEM
ATX14A
Description of Electrical Parts
Description of Electrical Parts
NATF0067
TRANSFER MOTOR
NATF0067S01
1. The transfer motor drives the sub-oil pump to provide proper lubrication and oil pressure control when the
vehicle is at standstill, during low-speed operations or is being driven in reverse.
2. The main oil pump is operated by the driving force of the mainshaft. In other words, sufficient oil pressure
buildup does not occur when the vehicle is at standstill or during low-speed operations. While the vehicle
is being driven in reverse, the main oil pump rotates in the reverse direction. Therefore the main oil pump
does not discharge oil pressure. During any of the above vehicle operations, the transfer motor drives the
sub-oil pump to compensate for insufficient oil pressure.
3. The transfer motor operates as follows:
1) The motor relay turns OFF in the 2WD mode.
2) The motor relay operates as described in the table below in modes other than the 2WD mode.
Table 1
PNP switch “R” position
VFF (Vehicle speed)
A/T position
Motor relay drive command
ON
—
R
ON
0 km/h
Positions other than the “P” or
“N” positions
ON
—
“P” or “N” position (See Table
2.)
—
0 < VFF % 30 km/h
—
ON
30 < VFF < 35 km/h
—
HOLD
35 km/h % VFF
—
OFF
OFF
Table 2
Throttle position
A/T position
N-4L SW
0 - 0.07/8
0.07/8 - 1/8
1/8 - MAX
LOCK (4H)
ON
ON
ON
Positions other than
the LOCK position
(2WD or AUTO)
See NOTE.
HOLD
ON
ON
—
See NOTE.
HOLD
ON
—
—
See NOTE.
HOLD
ON
OFF
N
P
4WD mode
NOTE:
OFF (after 2.5 seconds have elapsed.)
4. 4WD shift switch, PNP switch, Neutral-4LO switch, vehicle speed sensor and throttle position sensor are
used in conjunction with the transfer motor.
WAIT DETECTION SWITCH
NATF0067S02
1. The wait detection switch releases the “booming” torque produced in the propeller shaft. After the release
of the “booming” torque, the wait detection switch helps provide the 4WD lock gear (clutch drum) shifts.
A difference may occur between the operation (“4LO” to “4H” shift only) of the 4WD shift switch and actual
drive mode. At this point, the wait detection switch senses an actual drive mode.
2. The wait detection switch operates as follows:
4WD lock gear (clutch drum) locked: ON
4WD lock gear (clutch drum) released: OFF
3. The wait detection switch senses an actual drive mode and the 4WD shift indicator lamp indicates the
vehicle drive mode.
TF-50
ALL-MODE 4WD SYSTEM
ATX14A
Description of Electrical Parts (Cont’d)
2-4WD SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
NATF0067S03
GI
The 2-4WD shift solenoid valve operates to apply oil pressure to the wet, multiplate clutch, depending on the
drive mode. The driving force is transmitted to the front wheels through the clutch so the vehicle is set in the
4WD mode. Setting the vehicle in the 2WD mode requires no pressure buildup. In other words, pressure force
applied to the wet, multiplate clutch becomes zero.
MA
LINE PRESSURE SWITCH
EM
NATF0067S04
1. With the transfer system design, control of the oil pressure provides the transmission of drive torque to
the front wheels. The main pressure to control the oil pressure is referred to as the line pressure.
The line pressure switch determines whether or not adequate line pressure has built up under different
operating conditions.
2. The line pressure switch turns ON when line pressure is produced.
3. The line pressure switch senses line pressure abnormalities and turns the 4WD warning lamp ON.
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-51
ALL-MODE 4WD SYSTEM
ATX14A
Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check
Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check
NATF0009
MTF171A
TF-52
ALL-MODE 4WD SYSTEM
ATX14A
Wiring Diagram — TF —
Wiring Diagram — TF —
NATF0010
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MTF172A
TF-53
IDX
ALL-MODE 4WD SYSTEM
ATX14A
Wiring Diagram — TF — (Cont’d)
MTF173A
TF-54
ALL-MODE 4WD SYSTEM
ATX14A
Wiring Diagram — TF — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MTF174A
IDX
TF-55
ALL-MODE 4WD SYSTEM
ATX14A
Wiring Diagram — TF — (Cont’d)
MTF175A
TF-56
ALL-MODE 4WD SYSTEM
ATX14A
Wiring Diagram — TF — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MTF176A
IDX
TF-57
ALL-MODE 4WD SYSTEM
ATX14A
Wiring Diagram — TF — (Cont’d)
MTF177A
TF-58
ALL-MODE 4WD SYSTEM
ATX14A
Wiring Diagram — TF — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MTF178A
IDX
TF-59
ALL-MODE 4WD SYSTEM
ATX14A
Wiring Diagram — TF — (Cont’d)
MTF179A
TF-60
ALL-MODE 4WD SYSTEM
ATX14A
Wiring Diagram — TF — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MTF180A
IDX
TF-61
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ATX14A
Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II
Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II
DESCRIPTION
NATF0011
NATF0011S01
If the engine starts when there is something wrong with the allmode 4WD system, the 4WD warning lamp turns ON or flickers in
the combination meter. When the system functions properly, the
warning lamp turns ON when the ignition switch is turned to “ON”,
and it turns OFF after engine starts.
To locate the cause of a problem, start the self-diagnosis function.
The 4WD warning lamp in the combination meter will indicate the
problem area by flickering according to the self-diagnostic results.
As for the details of the 4WD warning lamp flickering patterns, refer
to TF-64.
TF-62
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ATX14A
Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
NATF0011S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SMT993D
*1: TF-137
SC
*2: TF-64
EL
IDX
TF-63
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ATX14A
Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
INDICATIONS OF 4WD WARNING LAMP
Flickering pattern or flickering condition
Malfunction
NATF0011S03
Check items
1
Front revolution sensor circuit is shorted or open.
Revolution sensor (front) circuit,
TF-98.
2
Rear revolution sensor circuit is shorted or open.
Revolution sensor (rear) [Refer to
AT-117, “DTC P0720 Vehicle Speed
Sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor)”.]
3
4WD solenoid valve circuit is shorted or open.
4WD solenoid valve circuit, TF-101.
4
2-4WD shift solenoid valve circuit is shorted or 2WD switch of
4WD shift switch is shorted.
2-4WD shift solenoid valve circuit or
4WD shift switch circuit, TF-103.
5
Transfer motor relay circuit is shorted or open.
Transfer motor relay circuit, TF-107.
6
If unexpected signal is detected because of ABS wheel sensor
malfunction or communications error between the vehicles
Refer to ABS wheel sensor signal
circuit diagnosis.
7
When malfunction in CAN communication system is detected
Refer to CAN communication system
diagnosis.
8
Power supply voltage of throttle position sensor is improper. Or
A/D converter of transfer control unit functions improperly.
Throttle position sensor (Refer to
AT-182, “DTC P1705 Throttle Position Sensor”.)
9
Transfer fluid temperature sensor circuit is open.
Transfer fluid temperature sensor
circuit, TF-110.
10
Neutral-4LO switch circuit is shorted or open.
Neutral-4LO switch circuit, TF-113.
11
2-4WD shift solenoid valve circuit, 2WD switch of 4WD shift
switch circuit or clutch pressure switch circuit is shorted or
open.
2-4WD shift solenoid valve circuit,
4WD shift switch circuit or clutch
pressure switch circuit, TF-103, 117.
12
Line pressure switch circuit is shorted or open.
Line pressure switch circuit, TF-120.
13
Engine speed signal circuit is shorted or open.
Engine speed signal (Refer to
AT-122, “DTC P0725 Engine Speed
Signal”.)
14
Throttle position sensor circuit is shorted or open.
Throttle position sensor (Refer to
AT-182, “DTC P1705 Throttle Position Sensor”.)
15
Malfunction in power supply circuit of transfer control unit.
Power supply of transfer control unit
16
4WD shift switch circuit is shorted.
4WD shift switch circuit, TF-103.
17
ABS operation signal circuit is shorted.
ABS operation signal circuit, TF-123.
18
ATP switch, wait detection switch or neutral-4LO switch circuit is ATP switch, wait detection switch or
shorted or open.
neutral-4LO switch circuit*, TF-113.
19
Transfer control device actuator motor is malfunctioning. (Malfunctions are detected when actuator motor fails to operate
while shifting from “4H” to “4LO” or vice versa.)
Actuator motor and motor circuit,
TF-152, 126.
20
Transfer control device actuator motor arm position sensing
switch is malfunctioning.
Actuator motor arm position sensing
switch and sensing switch circuit,
TF-152, 129.
21
Transfer control device actuator circuit is shorted or open. (Malfunctions are detected when motor relay circuit is open/shorted
or relay monitor circuit is open/shorted.)
Actuator motor, actuator motor arm
position sensing switch and their
associated circuits, TF-151, 152 and
131.
22
If VDC operation signal is being input because of VDC malfuncRefer to VDC C/U diagnosis.
tion or communication error between the vehicles
TF-64
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ATX14A
Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
GI
Flickering pattern or flickering condition
Malfunction
23
If TCS operation signal is being input because of TCS malfunction or communication error between the vehicles
Refer to VDC C/U diagnosis.
MA
24
If unexpected signal is input because of AT PNP switch circuit
or communication error between the vehicles
Refer to AT trouble diagnosis.
EM
Check items
Repeats flickering every
2 to 5 sec.
Circuits that the self-diagnosis covers have no malfunction.
Repeats flickering every
0.25 sec.
I Power supply failure of memory back-up.
I Battery is disconnected for a long time.
I Battery performance is poor.
Data erase/display circuit, TF-125.
PNP switch or 4WD shift switch circuit is shorted or open.
PNP switch (Refer to AT-105, “DTC
P0705 Park/Neutral Position
Switch”.) or 4WD shift switch circuit,
TF-103.
No flickering
—
LC
EC
FE
CL
*: If revolution sensor malfunction is simultaneously detected, check revolution sensor first.
MT
AT
Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode
NATF0012
NATF0012S10
Function
Work support
I This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately
by following the indications on the CONSULT-II unit.
Self-diagnostic results
I Self-diagnostic results can be read and erased quickly.
Data monitor
I Input/Output data in the AWD control unit can be read.
CAN diagnostic support monitor
I The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
Active test
I Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the
AWD control unit and also shifts some parameters in a specified range.
ECU part number
I AWD control unit part number can be read.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT-II Setting Procedure
1.
NATF0012S01
HA
NATF0012S0101
Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
SC
EL
IDX
SAT601J
TF-65
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ATX14A
Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
2.
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector which is located in instrument lower panel on
driver side.
3.
4.
Start engine.
On CONSULT-II screen, touch “START (NISSAN BASED
VHCL)”.
5.
Touch “ALL MODE AWD/4WD” on SELECT SYSTEM screen.
6.
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on SELECT DIAG MODE
screen.
7.
Self-diagnostic results are displayed.
SMT962D
SAIA0450E
SDIA2216E
SMT212E
SMT966D
TF-66
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ATX14A
Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
Detected items
(Screen terms for CONSULT-II,
“SELF-DIAG RESULT” mode)
Malfunction is detected when...
NATF0012S02
Check items
GI
MA
Revolution sensor (front) (Note 3)
(VHCL SPEED SEN·FR)
I Front revolution sensor (installed on T/F) signal is not
input due to open circuit.
I Improper signal is input while driving.
Revolution sensor (front) circuit,
TF-98.
EM
Revolution sensor (rear)
(VHCL SPEED SEN·RR)
I Signal from vehicle speed sensor 1 (installed on A/T)
is not input due to open circuit.
I Improper signal is input while driving.
Revolution sensor (rear) [Refer to
AT-117, “DTC P0720 Vehicle
Speed Sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor)”.]
LC
4WD solenoid valve
(DUTY SOLENOID)
2-4WD shift solenoid valve
(2-4WD SOLENOID)
I Proper voltage is not applied to solenoid valve due to
open or short circuit.
EC
4WD solenoid valve, TF-101.
2-4WD shift solenoid valve or
4WD shift switch circuit, TF-103.
FE
Transfer motor relay
(MOTOR RELAY)
I Motor does not operate properly due to open or short
circuit in transfer motor or motor relay.
Transfer motor relay circuit,
TF-107.
CL
Transfer fluid temperature sensor
(FLUID TEMP SENSOR)
I Signal voltage from fluid temperature sensor is abnormally high (T/F fluid temperature is abnormally low)
while driving.
Transfer fluid temperature sensor
circuit, TF-110.
MT
Neutral-4LO switch
(N POSI SW TF)
I Improper signal is input while driving.
Neutral-4LO switch, TF-113.
Clutch pressure
(CLUTCH PRESSURE)
I Improper signal is input due to open or short circuit.
I Malfunction occurs in clutch pressure hydraulic circuit.
Clutch pressure switch circuit
(*1), TF-117.
Line pressure
(LINE PRESSURE)
I Improper signal is input due to open or short circuit.
I Malfunction occurs in line pressure hydraulic circuit.
Line pressure switch circuit (*1),
TF-120.
PD
Engine speed signal (Note 1)
(ENGINE SPEED SIG)
I Engine speed is abnormally low while driving.
Engine speed signal (Refer to
AT-122, “DTC P0725 Engine
Speed Signal”.)
AX
Throttle position sensor
(THRTL POSI SEN)
I Signal voltage from throttle position sensor is abnormally high.
I Signal voltage from throttle position sensor is abnormally low when closed throttle position switch is OFF.
Throttle position sensor (Refer to
AT-182, “DTC P1705 Throttle
Position Sensor”.)
Transfer control unit (ADC)
C/U (ADC)/THRTL SEN
I Power supply voltage for throttle position sensor is
improper or A/D converter system of transfer control
unit is malfunctioning.
Throttle position sensor (Refer to
AT-182, “DTC P1705 Throttle
Position Sensor”.)
Battery voltage (Note 1)
(BATTERY VOLTAGE)
I Power supply voltage for transfer control unit is abnormally low while driving.
Power supply circuit (Refer to
AT-102, “Wiring Diagram — AT —
MAIN”.)
4WD shift switch
(4WD MODE SW)
I More than two switch inputs are simultaneously
detected due to short circuit of 4WD shift switch.
4WD shift switch circuit, TF-103.
ABS operation signal (Note 4)
(ABS OPER SIGNAL)
I When a malfunction signal due to disconnection or
shorting is detected.
I When a defect signal is entered from the ABS control
unit.
ABS operation signal circuit,
TF-123.
Wait detection switch (Note 2)
(WAIT DETECT SWITCH)
I Improper signal is input due to open or short circuit.
ATP switch, wait detection switch
and neutral-4LO switch circuits
(*2), TF-113.
Shift actuator abnormal
(SHIFT ACT)
Transfer control device actuator motor is malfunctioning.
(Malfunctions are detected when actuator motor fails to
operate while shifting from “4H” to “4LO” or vice versa.)
Actuator motor and motor circuit,
TF-152, 126.
AT
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-67
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ATX14A
Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
Detected items
(Screen terms for CONSULT-II,
“SELF-DIAG RESULT” mode)
Malfunction is detected when...
Check items
Shift actuator position switch
abnormal
(SHIFT ACT P/S)
Actuator motor arm position
Transfer control device actuator motor arm position senssensing switch and sensing
ing switch is malfunctioning.
switch circuit, TF-152, 129.
Shift actuator circuit abnormal
(SHIFT ACT CIR)
Actuator motor, actuator motor
Transfer control device actuator circuit is shorted or
arm position sensing switch and
open. (Malfunctions are detected when motor relay circuit
their associated circuits, TF-151,
is open/shorted or relay monitor circuit is open/shorted.)
152 and 131.
Memory power supply stop
I Due to removal of battery which cuts off power supply
to transfer control unit, self-diagnosis memory function
is suspended.
Transfer control unit (RAM)
[CONTROL UNIT (RAM)]
I Malfunction is detected in the memory (RAM) system
of transfer control unit.
Transfer control unit (ROM)
[CONTROL UNIT (ROM)]
I Malfunction is detected in the memory (ROM) system
of transfer control unit.
Transfer control unit (EEPROM)
[CONTROL UNIT (EEPROM)]
I Malfunction is detected in the memory (EEPROM) system of transfer control unit.
Longitudinal G-sensor
Displayed, but do not use.
ABS VHL SPD SEN
I ABS vehicle speed sensor signal is not input due to an
open circuit.
Refer to ABS vehicle speed senI An unexpected signal is input when vehicle is being
sor diagnosis.
driven.
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
Displayed, but do not use.
VDC OPER SIG
If VDC operation signal is being input because of VDC
Refer to VDC C/U diagnosis.
malfunction or communication error between the vehicles
TCS OPER SIG
If TCS operation signal is being input because of TCS
Refer to VDC C/U diagnosis.
malfunction or communication error between the vehicles
CAN COMM
Malfunction is detected in CAN communication.
CAN communication circuit
A/T POSITION SIGNAL
When AT PNP switch circuit is malfunction or communication error between the vehicles
Refer to AT PNP switch circuit
diagnosis.
Data erase/display circuit,
TF-125.
Note 1: When a malfunction occurs, it is only displayed and not stored in the memory.
Note 2: When the wait detection switch has been properly fixed, malfunction information is erased from the memory.
Note 3: If 4WD shift switch is left between 4H and 4LO for a while, this indication may be displayed.
(*1): If the malfunction is detected only while driving in reverse, check the continuity of “R” position on A/T PNP switch. When there is
nothing wrong with the electrical system, check the hydraulic system.
(*2): If a revolution sensor malfunction is detected at the same time, check the revolution sensor circuit first.
Note 4: When this malfunction is detected with the ABS warning lamp off, first check for disconnection or shorting in the harness between
the transfer control unit and the ABS control unit.
DATA MONITOR
CONSULT-II Setting Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
NATF0012S03
NATF0012S0301
Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector, which is located in instrument lower panel on
driver side.
Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
Touch “START”.
SMT962D
TF-68
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ATX14A
Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
5.
Touch “ALL MODE AWD/4WD”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SDIA2216E
6.
Touch “DATA MONITOR”.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SMT212E
7.
8.
9.
Touch “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS”.
Select “Numerical Display”, “Bar Chart Display” or “Line Graph
Display”.
Touch “SETTING” to set record conditions.
AT
PD
AX
SU
SAT972J
10. Touch “AUTO TRIG” or “MANU TRIG”.
11. Return to “SELECT MONITOR ITEM” on “DATA MONITOR”
screen and touch “START”.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT973J
12. Monitored data are displayed.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT963D
TF-69
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ATX14A
Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
DATA MONITOR ITEMS
NATF0012S04
q: Standard H: Option
Monitor item
Item [Unit]
ECU input
signals
Main signals
Item menu
selection
Remarks
Revolution sensor-front [km/h (MPH)]
q
H
Revolution sensor installed on T/F
Revolution sensor-rear [km/h (MPH)]
q
H
Vehicle speed sensor·A/T
Engine speed [rpm]
q
H
Throttle position sensor [V]
q
H
Transfer fluid temperature sensor [V]
q
H
Battery voltage [V]
q
H
2WD switch [ON-OFF]
q
H
2WD switch of 4WD shift switch
AUTO switch [ON-OFF]
q
H
AUTO switch of 4WD shift switch
Lock switch [ON-OFF]
q
H
4H switch of 4WD shift switch
4L switch [ON-OFF]
q
H
4LO switch of 4WD shift switch
N position switch TF [ON-OFF]
q
H
N position switch of transfer
Line pressure switch [ON-OFF]
q
H
Line pressure switch
Clutch pressure switch [ON-OFF]
q
H
Clutch pressure switch
ATP switch [ON-OFF]
q
H
N position switch [ON-OFF]
q
H
“N” position on A/T PNP switch
R position switch [ON-OFF]
q
H
“R” position on A/T PNP switch
P position switch [ON-OFF]
q
H
“P” position on A/T PNP switch
Closed throttle position switch
[ON/OFF]
q
H
Displayed, but do not use.
ABS operation switch [ON-OFF]
q
H
ABS operation switch
Wait detection switch [ON-OFF]
q
H
Throttle opening
q
H
Throttle opening recognized by transfer control
unit
4WD-mode
q
H
4WD-mode recognized by transfer control unit
(2WD, AUTO, 4H & 4LO)
Vehicle speed comp [km/h (MPH)]
q
H
Vehicle speed recognized by transfer control
unit
*Control torque [N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)]
q
H
Calculated torque recognized by transfer control
unit
Duty solenoid valve [%]
(Transfer 4WD solenoid valve)
q
H
2-4WD shift solenoid valve [ON-OFF]
q
H
Transfer motor relay [ON-OFF]
q
H
Shift activating 1 [ON-OFF]
q
H
Shift activating 2 [ON-OFF]
q
H
TF-70
Control signal outputs of transfer control unit
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ATX14A
Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
GI
Monitor item
Item [Unit]
ECU input
signals
Main signals
Item menu
selection
2-4WD shift solenoid valve monitor
[ON-OFF]
H
Transfer motor relay monitor [ON-OFF]
H
Shift activating monitor 1 [ON-OFF]
H
Shift activating monitor 2 [ON-OFF]
H
q
4WD fail lamp [ON-OFF]
H
Shift position switch 1 [ON-OFF]
q
H
Shift position switch 2 [ON-OFF]
q
H
Remarks
MA
Check signal (re-input signal) of transfer control
unit control signal output is displayed. If circuit
is shorted or open, ON/OFF state does not
change.
EM
Transfer control unit control signal output for
4WD warning lamp (left)
EC
LC
FE
2WD indicator lamp [ON-OFF]
H
Transfer control unit control signal output for
4WD shift indicator lamp (rear)
CL
AUTO indicator lamp [ON-OFF]
H
Transfer control unit control signal output for
4WD shift indicator lamp (front & rear)
MT
LOCK indicator lamp [ON-OFF]
H
Transfer control unit control signal output for
4WD shift indicator lamp (center)
4LO indicator lamp [ON-OFF]
H
Transfer control unit control signal output for
4WD shift indicator lamp (right)
Offset at starting
H
Appears on monitor but does not function.
Clutch limit [N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)]
H
Clutch force release limit value set in WORK
SUPPORT
Voltage [V]
H
Value measured by voltage probe is displayed.
AX
H
Value measured by pulse probe is displayed. If
measurement is impossible, “#” sign is displayed. “#” sign is also displayed at the final
data value until the measurement result is
obtained.
Duty cycle value for measurement probe is displayed.
BR
Measured pulse width of measurement probe is
displayed.
ST
Frequency [Hz]
DUTY-HI
H
DUTY-LOW
H
PLS WIDTH-HI
H
PLS WIDTH-LOW
H
AT
PD
SU
VHCL SPEED SEN-FR [km/h]
q
H
Indicates average vehicle speed of ABS front
left/right wheel.
RS
VHCL SPEED SEN-RR [km/h]
q
H
Indicates average vehicle speed of ABS rear
left/right wheel.
BT
LONGITUDINAL G-SENSOR [G]
q
H
Displayed, but do not use.
TF VHCL SPD-FR [km/h]
q
H
Displayed, but do not use.
AT VHCL SPD-RR
q
H
Indicates A/T rear vehicle speed.
A/T actual gear position
q
H
Indicates A/T actual gear position.
VDC OPER SIG [ON-OFF]
q
H
Indicates VDC operation switch.
TCS OPER SIG [ON-OFF]
q
H
Indicates TCS operation switch.
H
Indicates C/U control signal output of ATP lamp.
ATP LAMP [ON-OFF]
TF-71
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ATX14A
Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
Monitor item
Item [Unit]
ECU input
signals
Main signals
Remarks
Item menu
selection
CAN COMM
Condition of CAN communication (ON/OFF) is
displayed.
CAN CIRC 1
Condition of CAN communication (ON/UNKWN)
is displayed.
CAN CIRC 2
Condition of CAN communication (ON/UNKWN)
is displayed.
CAN CIRC 3
Condition of CAN communication (ON/UNKWN)
is displayed.
CAN CIRC 4
Condition of CAN communication (ON/UNKWN)
is displayed.
CAN CIRC 5
Condition of CAN communication (ON/UNKWN)
is displayed.
*: This item is indicated as “COMP CL TORQ”.
REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Indicated items
(Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “DATA
MONITOR” mode)
Display
NATF0012S09
Conditions
Throttle position sensor
(THRTL POS SEN)
Approx. 0.5 - 4.0V
Throttle valve fully closed to fully open
Transfer fluid temperature sensor
(FLUID TEMP SE)
Approx. 1.5 - 0.5V
Transfer fluid temperature approx. 20 - 80°C (68 176°F)
Closed throttle position switch
(CLOSED THL/SW) (Without VDC)
OFF
Displayed, but do not use.
ABS operation switch
(ABS OPER SW)
OFF
ABS is not operating.
ON
ABS is operating.
2WD position
(2WD SW)
ON
4WD shift switch is in “2WD”.
OFF
Except the above condition
ON
4WD shift switch is in “4H”.
OFF
Except the above condition
Lock position
(LOCK SWITCH)
4WD shift switch position
Neutral-4LO switch
(N POSI SW TF)
ATP switch
(ATP SWITCH)
Wait detection switch
(WAIT DETCT SW)
ATP switch
Neutral-4LO switch
2WD,
AUTO, 4H
(N)
4LO
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Wait detection switch
See Note.
Note: When shifting from “4LO” to “2WD”, “AUTO”, “4H”, it turns ON when “Wait” function
is operating (and it turns OFF when “Wait” function is canceled).
TF-72
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ATX14A
Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
Indicated items
(Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “DATA
MONITOR” mode)
GI
Display
Throttle valve
Transfer motor relay
(MOTOR RELAY)
Fully closed
Conditions
MA
4WD
shift
switch
A/T selector
lever
Motor relay
2WD
—
OFF
AUTO,
4LO
P, N
OFF
Others
ON
P
OFF
Others
ON
EM
4H
ON for approx. 2 sec. after
shifting to “P”
LC
EC
The vehicle has been left at room temperature for 5
minutes and more with ignition switch in “OFF” position.
FE
ON
Ignition switch in “ON”, and 4WD shift switch in “AUTO”
or “4H” and A/T selector lever in “D”.
CL
OFF
Ignition switch in “ON”, and 4WD shift switch in “2WD”.
(“Wait” function is not operating.)
MT
ON
Ignition switch in “ON”, and 4WD shift switch in “AUTO”
or “4H” and A/T selector lever in “D”. (“Wait” function is
not operating.)
Clutch pressure switch
(CL PRES SW)
0 kg-m
In “2WD” position
39 - 1,079 N·m
(4 - 110 kg-m, 29 - 796 ft-lb)
In “AUTO” position
1,079 N·m
(110 kg-m, 796 ft-lb)
4%
4WD solenoid
(DUTY SOLENOID)
ON for approx. 2 sec. after
shifting to “P” and “N”
OFF
Line pressure switch
(LINE PRES SW)
Control torque
(COMP CL TORQ)
Remarks
4WD shift switch
(“Wait” function is not oper- In “4H” or “4LO” position
ating.)
In “2WD” position
94 - 4%
AT
PD
AX
In “AUTO” position
4%
In “4H” or “4LO” position
OFF
In “2WD” position
SU
BR
ON (“Wait” function is not operating.)
In “AUTO” position
2-4WD shift solenoid valve
(2-4WD SOL)
OFF (“Wait” function is operating.)
ST
4WD shift switch
ON (“Wait” function is not operating.)
In “4H” position
OFF (“Wait” function is operating.)
ON
RS
BT
In “4LO” position
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-73
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ATX14A
Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
Indicated items
(Screen terms for CONSULT-II,
“DATA MONITOR” mode)
Battery voltage
Display
Conditions
Approx. 12V
Key switch “ON” and engine at rest
Approx. 13 - 14V
AUTO switch
4L switch
N position switch
R position swtich
P position switch
Throttle opening
During idling
OFF
4WD shift switch in other than “AUTO” position
ON
4WD shift switch in “AUTO” position
OFF
4WD shift switch in other than “4LO” position
ON
4WD shift switch in “4LO” position
OFF
A/T selector lever in other than “N” position
ON
A/T selector lever in “N” position
OFF
A/T selector lever in other than “R” position
ON
A/T selector lever in “R” position
OFF
A/T selector lever in other than “P” position
ON
A/T selector lever in “P” position
0.0/8 - 8.0/8
Throttle fully closed (0.0/8) or throttle fully open (8.0/8)
2WD
In “2WD” position
AUTO
In “AUTO” position
4WD-mode
4WD shift switch
LOCK
In “4H” position
4L
In “4LO” position
Front wheel speed
0 - 255 km/h (0 - 158 MPH)
0 km/h (vehicle at standstill)
Rear wheel speed
0 - 255 km/h (0 - 158 MPH)
0 km/h (vehicle at standstill)
Shift ACTR operating 1,
Shift activating monitor 1
OFF
During normal operation
ON
During shifts from “4H” to “4LO” position
Shift ACTR operating 2,
Shift activating monitor 2
OFF
During normal operation
ON
During shifts from “4LO” to “4H” position
4WD fail lamp
OFF
During normal operation
ON
During 2-second period (after key switch turned to “ON”) or
when system is out of order
Shift ACTR position sensing
switch 1
OFF
4WD shift switch is in a position other than “4LO”.
ON
4WD shift switch in “4LO” position
Shift ACTR position sensing
switch 2
OFF
4WD shift switch in “4LO” position
ON
4WD shift switch is in a position other than “4LO”.
2WD indicator lamp
OFF
Engine at rest or system out of order
ON
Except the above condition
OFF
Engine at rest during 2WD-mode operation or system out of
order
ON
4WD shift switch in “4LO” or “4H” or “AUTO” position
OFF
Engine at rest and 4WD shift switch in “AUTO” position during
2WD-mode operation or system out of order
ON
4WD shift switch in “4H” or “4LO” position
AUTO indicator lamp
LOCK indicator lamp
TF-74
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ATX14A
Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
Indicated items
(Screen terms for CONSULT-II,
“DATA MONITOR” mode)
4LO indicator lamp
GI
Display
Conditions
OFF
Engine at rest and 4WD shift switch in “AUTO” position during
2WD-mode operation or system out of order
ON
4WD shift switch in “4LO” position
VDC operation switch
(VDC OPER SW)
OFF
VDC is not operating.
ON
VDC is operating.
TCS operation switch
(TCS OPER SW)
OFF
TCS is not operating.
ON
TCS is operating.
WORK SUPPORT
Purpose
MA
EM
LC
EC
NATF0012S06
FE
NATF0012S0601
When there is no problem with transfer and 4WD system, following symptoms in “AUTO” mode may be claimed by a customer.
I Tight corner braking symptom after accelerator (throttle) opening (Note 1)
I Vibration when accelerating on a low µ road (snow-covered or
icy road) (Note 2)
It is possible to deal with these symptoms by changing
“CLUTCH FORCE RELEASE LIMIT VALUE”. However, be
careful when changing the values because it may adversely
affect driving performance.
NOTE:
1) When the accelerator is slightly open (approx. 1/8) or fully
closed after being opened. The tight corner braking symptom
during idle creep driving with accelerator fully closed cannot be
solved by this method. Refer to SYMPTOM 8, TF-145.
2) A slight shock is felt at a few hertz as if it were being pushed
lightly from behind.
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
CONSULT-II Setting Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NATF0012S0602
Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector, which is located in instrument lower panel on
driver side.
Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
Touch “START”.
Touch “ALL MODE 4WD”.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT962D
6.
Touch “WORK SUPPORT”.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT212E
TF-75
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ATX14A
Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
7. Select WORK ITEM by touching “CLUTCH/F RLS LIM ADJ”.
NOTE:
“START TORQ OFFSET ADJ” is displayed, but the transfer does
not have this function.
SMT967D
CLUTCH FORCE RELEASE LIMIT ADJUSTMENT
NATF0012S07
1.2 kg-m: Tight corner braking symptom is alleviated. However,
vibration may occur when accelerating on a low µ road (icy road,
etc.).
0.3 kg-m: Initial set value
0.2 kg-m: Do not set to this value because the tight corner braking
symptom will get worse.
1.
2.
Current CLUTCH FORCE RELEASE LIMIT value “0.3 kg-m”
appears under “CONDITION SETTING” on CONSULT-II display.
Touch “1.2” on the display.
3.
Display changes to “NOW ADJUSTING” in a short time.
4.
When clutch force release limit value is set to “1.2 kg-m”, current value “0.3 kg-m” shown on display will be replaced by “1.2
kg-m” and “ADJUSTING COMPLETE” will appear at the same
time. Clutch force release limit value setting is now complete.
SMT968D
SMT969D
SMT970D
TF-76
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
ATX14A
Introduction
Introduction
DESCRIPTION
NATF0013
GI
NATF0013S01
When a malfunction (indicated by the 4WD warning lamp illumination) occurs, collect information first from the
customer about how the malfunction occurs. Then, proceed with the diagnosis presuming it is the cause. Also
inspect the electrical system, paying close attention to other possibilities such as fluid level and leaks.
All-mode 4WD transfer is controlled by transfer control unit and sensors.
If a malfunction occurs in the all-mode 4WD system, the 4WD warning lamp lights up to inform of the system
malfunction. There are two ways to identify the cause of the malfunction.
1) Performing the self-diagnosis. (The 4WD warning lamp will indicate what kind of malfunction has occurred
by flickering.)
2) Performing diagnosis using CONSULT-II.
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Information from Customer
MA
EM
LC
EC
NATF0013S02
NATF0013S0201
KEY POINTS
WHAT ..... Vehicle model
WHEN..... Date, Frequencies
WHERE..... Road conditions
HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms
FE
CL
MT
Information sheet from customer
Customer name MR/MS
Model & Year
VIN
Transfer model
ATX14A
Engine
Mileage
Incident Date
Manuf. Date
In Service Date
Frequency
l Continuous l Intermittent (
Symptoms
l 4WD shift indicator lamp does not turn on.
times a day)
l 4WD warning lamp does not turn on.
l 4WD shift indicator lamp does not turn off.
l ATP warning lamp does not turn on.
AT
PD
AX
SU
l 4LO indicator lamp does not turn on.
l 4WD shift indicator lamp does not indicate “4H”.
BR
l 4WD shift indicator lamp repeats flicking.
l Tight corner braking symptom occurs.
ST
l 4WD system does not operate.
RS
l Others.
4WD warning lamp
l Continuously lit
l Not lit
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-77
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
ATX14A
Introduction (Cont’d)
Diagnostic Worksheet
NATF0013S0202
1.
l Listen to customer complaints.
TF-80
2.
l Check transfer fluid.
TF-80
l Leakage
l Fluid condition
l Fluid level
3.
l Road testing
TF-80
l 1. Check before engine is started.
l 2. Check at idle.
l 3. Cruise test
4.
l Perform self-diagnosis NG items (with CONSULT-II and without CONSULT-II).
TF-65, TF-62
5.
l Check component. Repair or replace the damaged parts.
TF-148
6.
l Perform final check. Perform road test (1 through 3).
TF-80
TF-78
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
ATX14A
Work Flow
Work Flow
=NATF0014
HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR
GI
NATF0014S01
A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is important to fully understand the symptoms
or conditions for a customer complaint.
Make good use of the two sheets provided, “Information from Customer” (Refer to TF-77.) and “Diagnostic
Worksheet” (Refer to TF-78.), to perform the best troubleshooting possible.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
MTF013A
SC
*1: TF-80
*2: TF-80
*3: TF-80
*4: TF-135 - TF-146
*5: TF-98 - TF-131
*6: TF-80
EL
IDX
TF-79
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
ATX14A
Listen to Customer Complaints
Listen to Customer Complaints
I
I
Transfer Fluid Check
I
PREPARATION FOR ROAD TEST
I
I
SMT089D
1.
2.
3.
I
NATF0016
Check fluid for leaks and fluid level. Refer to MA-24, “Checking All-mode 4WD Transfer Fluid”.
Road Test
I
NATF0015
Each customer feels differently about a problem. It is important
to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer
complaint.
Listen to the customer about how and when the malfunction
occurs, and make good use of it when performing the road test.
NATF0017
NATF0017S01
The purpose of the test is to determine overall performance of
transfer and analyze causes of problems.
The road test consists of the following three parts:
When a malfunction is found in any part of transfer, perform the
road test to locate the malfunction area and repair the malfunction parts.
Check before engine is started
Check at idle
Cruise test
Perform road test and place checks for NG items on the diagnostic worksheet. Refer to TF-78.
TF-80
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
ATX14A
Road Test (Cont’d)
1. CHECK BEFORE ENGINE IS STARTED
1
1.
2.
3.
4.
=NATF0017S02
GI
CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR LAMP
MA
Park vehicle on flat surface.
Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
Move A/T selector lever to “P” position.
Set 4WD shift switch to “4H” position.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SMT849D
5. Set 4WD shift switch to “2WD” position.
6. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.)
7. Does 4WD shift indicator lamp turn ON for approx. 1 second?
CL
MT
AT
PD
SMT994D
AX
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 2.
No
©
Go to Symptom 1. Refer to TF-135.
SU
BR
2
CHECK 4WD WARNING LAMP
Is 4WD warning lamp turned ON?
ST
RS
BT
HA
SMT994D
Yes or No
Yes
©
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Perform self-diagnosis.
Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II”, TF-62.
3. Go to “2. CHECK AT IDLE”. Refer to TF-82.
No
©
Go to Symptom 2. Refer to TF-137.
TF-81
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
ATX14A
Road Test (Cont’d)
2. CHECK AT IDLE
1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
=NATF0017S03
CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR LAMP
Park vehicle on flat surface.
Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
Move A/T selector lever to “P” or “N” position.
Set 4WD shift switch to “4H” position.
Set 4WD shift switch to “2WD” position.
Start engine.
Is 4WD shift indicator lamp turned OFF?
SMT994D
Yes or No
Yes
©
Go to “ATP SWITCH, WAIT DETECTION SWITCH AND NEUTRAL-4LO SWITCH”. Refer
to TF-113.
No
©
GO TO 2.
2
CHECK 4WD WARNING LAMP
Is 4WD warning lamp turned OFF?
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 3.
No
©
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II”, TF-62.
TF-82
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
ATX14A
Road Test (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR LAMP
1. Set 4WD shift switch to “2WD”, “AUTO”, “4H”, “4LO”, “4H” and “2WD” in order.
(Stay at each switch position for at least 1 second.)
2. Does 4WD shift indicator lamp change properly and does buzzer sound?
MA
EM
LC
EC
SMT851D
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
SMT971D
BR
Yes or No
ST
Yes
©
GO TO 4.
No
©
Go to “2-4WD SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE AND 4WD SHIFT SWITCH”. Refer to TF-103.
RS
4
CHECK 4WD WARNING LAMP
BT
Is 4WD warning lamp turned ON?
Yes or No
Yes
©
Perform self-diagnosis. (Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II”, TF-62.)
No
©
GO TO 5.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-83
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
ATX14A
Road Test (Cont’d)
5
CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR LAMP
1. Move A/T selector lever to “P” position.
2. Set 4WD shift switch from “4H” to “4LO”.
SMT849D
3. While shifting from “4H” to “4LO”, does 4WD shift indicator lamp turn OFF and ATP warning lamp turn ON?
SMT994D
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 6.
No
©
Go to Symptoms 3 and 4. Refer to TF-139.
TF-84
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
ATX14A
Road Test (Cont’d)
6
GI
CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR LAMP
Does 4WD shift indicator lamp indicate 4LO indicator lamp turn ON when 4WD shift switch is set in “4LO”?
MA
EM
LC
EC
SMT849D
FE
CL
MT
AT
SMT770D
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 7.
No
©
Go to Symptom 5. Refer to TF-141.
7
PD
AX
CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR LAMP (*1)
1. Set 4WD shift switch from “4LO” to “4H”.
2. Does 4LO indicator lamp flicker? (*1)
*1: While “Wait” function is operating, 4LO indicator lamp flashes.
Yes or No
Yes
©
Go to Symptoms 6 and 7. Refer to TF-143 and TF-144.
No
©
Go to “3. CRUISE TEST”. Refer to TF-86.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-85
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
ATX14A
Road Test (Cont’d)
3. CRUISE TEST
1
=NATF0017S04
INSPECTION START
SMT849D
SMT994D
WITH CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 2.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 3.
TF-86
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
ATX14A
Road Test (Cont’d)
2
GI
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Warm up engine to normal operating temperature.
Park vehicle on flat surface.
Move A/T selector lever to “P” position.
Set 4WD shift switch to “4H” position.
Set 4WD shift switch to “AUTO” position.
Start engine.
Drive for at least 30 seconds at a speed higher than 20 km/h (12 MPH).
(Drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” exceeds 0.9V.)
8. Park vehicle on flat surface.
9. Move A/T selector lever to “P” position.
10. Set 4WD shift switch to “2WD” position.
11. Leave vehicle for at least 80 seconds with “FLUID TEMP SE” at 0.9V or less.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
SMT972D
12. Is 4WD warning lamp turned ON?
Yes or No
Yes
©
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II”, TF-65.
No
©
GO TO 4.
3
AX
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Warm up engine to normal operating temperature.
2. Park vehicle on flat surface.
3. Move A/T selector lever to “P” position.
4. Set 4WD shift switch to “4H” position.
5. Set 4WD shift switch to “AUTO” position.
6. Start engine.
7. Drive vehicle for at least 30 seconds at a speed higher than 20 km/h (12 MPH).
8. Park vehicle on flat surface.
9. Move A/T selector lever to “P” position.
10. Set 4WD shift switch to “2WD” position.
11. Is 4WD warning lamp turned ON?
Yes or No
Yes
©
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II”, TF-62.
No
©
GO TO 4.
4
PD
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
(1) CHECK TIGHT CORNER BRAKING SYMPTOM
1. Set 4WD shift switch to “AUTO” position.
2. Drive vehicle at speed lower than 20 km/h (12 MPH) with steering wheel fully turned.
3. Does tight corner braking symptom occur?
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 5.
No
©
GO TO 6.
SC
EL
IDX
TF-87
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
5
CONFIRM SYMPTOM AGAIN
Confirm symptom and self-diagnosis again.
Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II”, TF-62 and “Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II”, TF-65.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Go to Symptoms 8 and 9. Refer to TF-145, 146.
6
(2) CHECK TIGHT CORNER BRAKING SYMPTOM
1. Set 4WD shift switch to “4H” position.
2. Drive vehicle at speed lower than 20 km/h (12 MPH) with steering wheel fully turned.
3. Does tight corner braking symptom occur?
Yes or No
Yes
©
INSPECTION END
No
©
GO TO 7.
7
CONFIRM SYMPTOM AGAIN
Confirm symptom and self-diagnosis again.
Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II”, TF-62 and “Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II”, TF-65.
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
Go to Symptoms 8 and 9. Refer to TF-145, 146.
TF-88
ATX14A
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ATX14A
Transfer Control Unit Terminals and Reference Value
Transfer Control Unit Terminals and Reference
Value
GI
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF TRANSFER
CONTROL UNIT
Removal
MA
NATF0018
1.
SMT862D
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
I
NATF0018S03
NATF0018S0301
Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative battery terminal.
Remove console box.
Remove cluster lid C.
Remove audio assembly and A/C control unit.
Remove instrument lower panel on driver side.
Remove glove box.
Remove instrument lower panel on passenger side.
Remove instrument lower center panel.
Remove transfer control unit.
For steps 2 through 8 above, refer to BT-22, “Instrument Panel
Assembly”.
Installation
NATF0018S0302
I Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
When installing transfer control unit, tighten transfer control unit
lock nut.
Tightening torque:
: 4.3 - 5.8 N·m (0.44 - 0.59 kg-m, 38 - 51 in-lb)
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
INSPECTION OF TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
I
NATF0018S01
Measure voltage between each terminal and terminal 6 or 45
by following “TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION
TABLE”, TF-90.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT771D
I
Pin connector terminal layout
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-89
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ATX14A
Transfer Control Unit Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
SMT772D
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE
NATF0018S02
(Data are reference values.)
Terminal
No.
1
2
Item
2-4WD shift solenoid
valve
Condition
Ground
4
Transfer shift relay
(High)
Less than 1V
4WD shift switch is set to any position other than “2WD”.
Battery voltage
Lamp lights while system is operating properly.
Less than 1V
2WD indicator lamp does not come
on.
Battery voltage
—
&
5
4WD shift switch is set to “2WD”
position.
&
4WD shift indicator lamp
(2WD)
3
Judgement standard
4WD warning lamp
While actuator is operating
(4H , 4LO)
Battery voltage
Actuator does not operate.
Less than 1V
Lamp comes ON. (when engine is
stopped.)
(Fail-safe condition appears on
display, engine is stopped, actuator
Less than 1V
position detection switch is
inoperative, oil temperature is too
high and/or tires of different size are
installed.)
Except above
6
—
Battery voltage
Ground
—
—
—
7
CAN H
(With VDC)
—
—
—
7
(Without
VDC)
PNP switch (R position)
8
CAN L
(With VDC)
8
(Without
VDC)
—
A/T selector lever is set to “reverse”
position.
Battery voltage
A/T selector lever is set to any position other than “reverse”.
Less than 1V
&
—
—
—
—
—
—
TF-90
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ATX14A
Transfer Control Unit Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
GI
Terminal
No.
9
Item
Condition
Judgement standard
4WD shift switch is set to “2WD”
position.
Battery voltage
MA
4WD shift switch is set to any position other than “2WD”.
Less than 1V
EM
4WD shift switch is set to “AUTO”
position.
Approx. 4 - 14V
4WD shift switch is set to any position other than “2WD”.
Less than 1V
“4H” indicator lamp comes ON.
Less than 1V
4WD shift switch is set to any position other than “4H”.
Battery voltage
“4LO” indicator lamp comes ON.
Approx. 0V
4WD shift switch is set to any position other than “4LO”.
Battery voltage
While actuator is operating
(4LO , 4H)
Battery voltage
Actuator does not operate.
Approx. 0V
Transfer motor relay is ON.
Battery voltage
Transfer motor relay is OFF.
Less than 1V
AT selector lever is set to “P” position.
Battery voltage
AT selector lever is set to any position other than “P”.
Approx. 0V
A/T selector lever is set to “N” position.
Battery voltage
A/T selector lever is set to any position other than “N” position.
Less than 1V
Ignition key is set to “ON” position.
Battery voltage
Ignition key is set to “OFF” position.
Approx. 0V
4WD shift switch (2WD)
&
10
11
12
13
14
Transfer dropping resistor
4WD shift indicator lamp
(4H)
4WD shift indicator lamp
(4LO)
Transfer shift relay (Low)
16
&
18
19
20
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
PNP switch (N position)
Power supply
—
17
(With VDC)
17
(Without
VDC)
EC
Transfer motor relay
15
ATP lamp
(With VDC)
15
(Without
VDC)
LC
BR
ST
Do not use.
A/T selector lever is set to “P” position.
Battery voltage
A/T selector lever is set to any position other than “P”.
Less than 1V
4WD shift switch is set to “4H” position.
Battery voltage
4WD shift switch is set to any position other than “4H”.
Less than 1V
4WD shift switch is set to “AUTO”
position.
Approx. 1.5 - 3V
SC
4WD shift switch is set to any position other than “2WD”.
Less than 1V
EL
PNP switch (P position)
4WD shift switch (4H)
SU
RS
BT
&
HA
4WD solenoid valve
—
—
—
—
IDX
TF-91
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ATX14A
Transfer Control Unit Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
Terminal
No.
Item
21
4WD shift indicator lamp
(AUTO)
22
23
24
Power supply
Condition
27
28
4WD shift switch is set to any position other than “AUTO”.
Battery voltage
Ignition key is set to “ON” position.
Battery voltage
Ignition key is set to “OFF” position.
Approx. 0V
4WD shift switch is set to “4LO”
position.
Battery voltage
4WD shift switch is set to any position other than “4LO”.
Less than 1V
4WD shift switch is set to “AUTO”
position.
Battery voltage
4WD shift switch is set to any position other than “AUTO”.
Less than 1V
Transfer is set to “4LO” position.
Approx. 0V
Transfer is set to any position other
than “4LO”.
Power supply
4WD shift switch is set to “4H” position.
Less than 1V
4WD shift switch is set to any position other than “4H”.
Battery voltage
4WD shift switch (AUTO)
Neutral-4LO switch
Transfer 4H actuator
switch
Throttle valve is closed.
Throttle position sensor
(Ground)
TCM signal (Vehicle
speed signal)
30
Throttle position sensor
(Power supply for
throttle position sensor)
32
(With VDC)
Approx. 0V
4WD shift switch (4LO)
29
31
“AUTO” indicator lamp comes ON.
—
&
25
Judgement standard
Transfer fluid temperature sensor
Less than 1V
Throttle valve is fully open.
&
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH),
use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function.*1
CAUTION:
Connect the diagnosis data link
Approximately 225 Hz
cable to the vehicle diagnosis
connector.
*1: A circuit tester cannot be used to
test this item.
Ignition key is set to “ON” position.
Approx. 4.5 - 5.5V
Ignition key is set to “OFF” position.
Approx. 0V
At 20°C (68°F)
Approx. 1.5V
At 80°C (176°F)
Approx. 0.5V
&
&
Do not use.
TF-92
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ATX14A
Transfer Control Unit Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
Terminal
No.
32
(Without
VDC)
33
GI
Item
ABS signal
Condition
&
Transfer shift relay
(High)
Judgement standard
When moving, use the CONSULT-II
pulse frequency measuirng function.*2
CAUTION:
Refer to the illustration
Connect the diagnosis data link
(SMT973D) at the end of
cable to the vehicle diagnosis
this section.
connector.
*2: A circuit tester cannot be used to
test this item.
MA
While actuator is operating from
“4H” to “4LO”
Battery voltage
EC
Actuator does not operate.
Approx. 0V
35
Clutch pressure switch
&
Line pressure switch
4WD shift switch is set to “2WD”,
“AUTO” or “4H”, then A/T selector
lever is set to “D” position. (wait
detection system: ON)
Approx. 0V
4WD shift switch is set to “2WD”,
“AUTO” or “4H”, then A/T selector
lever is set to “D” position.
Battery voltage
—
36
CONSULT-II (RX)
37
(With VDC)
37
(Without
VDC)
39
(With VDC)
—
CL
MT
AT
Approx. 0V
—
PD
Do not use.
AX
Tachometer
38
Front revolution sensor
(With VDC)
38
(Without
VDC)
—
LC
FE
4WD shift switch is set to “AUTO” or
“4H”, then A/T selector lever is set to
Battery voltage
“D” position. (wait detection system:
OFF)
34
EM
Front revolution sensor
—
Refer to EC-149, “ECM
Inspection Table”.
Sensor is installed, but do not use. (Wheel speed is sent from VDC C/U via CAN communication.)
4WD shift switch is set to “4H” position. A/T selector lever is set to “D”
position.
Do not use.
Approx. 1V [30 km/h (19
MPH)]
Voltage rises in
response to vehicle
speed.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-93
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ATX14A
Transfer Control Unit Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
Terminal
No.
39
(Without
VDC)
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Item
Condition
ECM (Throttle position
sensor)
Judgement standard
Throttle valve is fully open.
Approx. 0.5V
Throttle valve is closed.
Approx. 4.2V
A/T selector lever is set to “P” position.
Battery voltage
A/T selector lever is set to any position other than “P”.
Less than 1V
Transfer motor relay is ON.
Battery voltage
Transfer motor relay is OFF.
Less than 1V
While actuator is operating from
“4LO” to “4H” position
Battery voltage
Actuator does not operate.
Approx. 0V
4WD shift switch is set to any position other than “4LO”.
Battery voltage
4WD shift switch is set to “4LO”
position.*3
Less than 1V
4WD shift switch is set to any position other than “4LO”. (Actuator:
High position)
Battery voltage
4WD shift switch is set to “4LO”
position. (Actuator: Low position)
Less than 1V
ATP switch
Transfer motor relay
monitor
Transfer shift relay
(LOW)
&
Wait detection switch
Transfer 4LO actuator
switch
Ground
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
47
Power supply (memory
back up)
&
—
48
CONSULT-II (TX)
—
—
*3: While wait detection system is operating, terminal 43 exists battery voltage.
TF-94
Battery voltage
—
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ATX14A
Transfer Control Unit Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SMT172E
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-95
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE (WITH VDC)
ATX14A
Description
Description
NATF0135
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many
electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with
2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
I
I
NATF0136
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” with CONSULT-II or U1000 without CONSULT-II is
detected when TCM cannot communicate to other control unit.
Possible Cause
NATF0137
Harness or connectors
(CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NATF0138
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
NATF0138S01
Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ALL MODE AWD/4WD”
with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait for at least 6 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to TF-97, “Diagnostic Procedure”.
SDIA2216E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.
TF-96
NATF0138S02
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE (WITH VDC)
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NATF0139
GI
CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
MA
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ALL MODE 4WD” with CONSULT-II.
3. The “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” is detected.
EM
LC
EC
FE
PCIA0061E
CL
Yes or No
Yes
©
Go to EL-447, “CAN Communication Unit”.
No
©
INSPECTION END
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-97
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (FRONT REVOLUTION SENSOR)
(WITHOUT VDC)
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
FRONT REVOLUTION SENSOR
Refer to “Front Revolution Sensor”, “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, TF-149.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
2
CHECK CONTINUITY
Check the following.
I Continuity of transfer sub-harness
Refer to “Transfer Sub-harness”, “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, TF-150.
OK or NG
OK
©
Repair or replace front revolution sensor.
NG
©
Repair or replace front revolution sensor and transfer sub-harness.
3
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
WITH CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 4.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 5.
TF-98
NATF0019
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (FRONT REVOLUTION SENSOR)
(WITHOUT VDC)
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor.
3. Read out the value of “VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (FRONT)” while driving.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SMT773D
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
SMT974D
4. Check if the value changes according to accelerating and decelerating the vehicle.
ST
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-99
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (FRONT REVOLUTION SENSOR)
(WITHOUT VDC)
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminals 38 and 28.
(Measure it in AC range.)
Voltage:
0 km/h (0 MPH): 0V
30 km/h (19 MPH): More than 1V
(Voltage rises gradually in response to vehicle speed.)
SMT774D
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
6
PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS AGAIN
After driving for a while, perform self-diagnosis again.
Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II”, TF-62.
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
1. Perform transfer control unit input/output signal inspection. Refer to “TRANSFER
CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE”, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL
DESCRIPTION”, TF-90.
2. If NG, recheck transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with
harness connector.
7
CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT AND FRONT REVOLUTION
SENSOR SUB-HARNESS CONNECTOR
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Repair or replace sub-harness connector between transfer control unit and front revolution sensor.
TF-100
4WD SOLENOID VALVE
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NATF0020
GI
CHECK 4WD SOLENOID VALVE
MA
EM
LC
EC
SMT775D
Refer to “4WD Solenoid Valve, Clutch Pressure Switch and Line Pressure Switch”, “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, TF-148.
FE
OK or NG
CL
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Check the following. If OK, repair or replace 4WD solenoid valve.
I Continuity of transfer sub-harness
Refer to “TRANSFER TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY SUB-HARNESS CONNECTOR”,
“COMPONENT INSPECTION”, TF-151.
MT
AT
2
CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector.
3. Check resistance between transfer terminal cord assembly sub-harness connector terminal 6 and transfer control unit
harness connector terminal 10.
Resistance: 11.2 - 12.8Ω
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
SMT150E
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Check the following.
I Transfer dropping resistor
Refer to “Transfer Dropping Resistor”, “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, TF-149.
I Continuity between transfer terminal cord assembly sub-harness connector terminal 6
and transfer control unit harness connector terminal 10.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-101
4WD SOLENOID VALVE
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Check continuity between transfer terminal cord assembly sub-harness connector terminal 6 and transfer control unit
harness connector terminal 19.
Continuity should exist.
SMT777D
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Repair or replace harness between transfer terminal cord assembly sub-harness connector terminal 6 and transfer control unit harness connector terminal 19.
4
PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
After driving for a while, perform self-diagnosis.
Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II”, TF-62 and “Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II”, TF-65.
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
1. Perform transfer control unit input/output signal inspection. Refer to “TRANSFER
CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE”, TF-90.
2. If NG, recheck transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with
harness connector.
TF-102
2-4WD SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE AND 4WD SHIFT SWITCH
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NATF0021
GI
CHECK 2-4WD SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE AND 4WD SHIFT SWITCH
Refer to “2-4WD Shift Solenoid Valve and Transfer Fluid Temperature Sensor”, “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, TF-148.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SMT778D
FE
OK or NG
CL
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Check the following. If OK, repair or replace 2-4WD shift solenoid valve and 4WD
shift switch.
I Continuity of transfer sub-harness
Refer to “TRANSFER TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY SUB-HARNESS CONNECTOR”,
“COMPONENT INSPECTION”, TF-151.
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-103
2-4WD SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE AND 4WD SHIFT SWITCH
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor.
2. Read out ON/OFF status of “2WD SW” and “LOCK SWITCH”.
SMT974D
OK or NG
OK
©
1. Perform transfer control unit input/output signal inspection. Refer to “TRANSFER
CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE”, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL
DESCRIPTION”, TF-90.
2. If NG, recheck transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with
harness connector.
NG
©
GO TO 3.
TF-104
2-4WD SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE AND 4WD SHIFT SWITCH
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK 4WD SHIFT SWITCH POWER SOURCE
1. Disconnect 4WD shift switch harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
3. Check voltage between 4WD shift switch harness connector terminal 1 and body ground.
Voltage: Battery voltage
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SMT852D
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Check the following.
I No. 18 fuse (10A)
I Continuity between ignition switch and 4WD shift switch
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-105
2-4WD SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE AND 4WD SHIFT SWITCH
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Check continuity between the following terminals:
I Transfer control unit 9 and 4WD shift switch 2 (2WD)
I Transfer control unit 18 and 4WD shift switch 5 (4H)
I Transfer control unit 24 and 4WD shift switch 3 (AUTO)
I Transfer control unit 23 and 4WD shift switch 6 (4LO)
I Transfer control unit 1 and Transfer terminal cord assembly sub-harness connector 4
I 4WD shift switch 4 and Transfer terminal cord assembly sub-harness connector 5
Continuity should exist.
SMT853D
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
Repair harness or connector.
5
PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS AGAIN
After driving for a while, perform self-diagnosis again.
Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II”, TF-62.
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
1. Perform transfer control unit input/output signal inspection. Refer to “TRANSFER
CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE”, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL
DESCRIPTION”, TF-90.
2. If NG, recheck transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with
harness connector.
TF-106
TRANSFER MOTOR AND TRANSFER MOTOR RELAY
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NATF0022
GI
CHECK TRANSFER MOTOR AND TRANSFER MOTOR RELAY
MA
EM
LC
EC
SMT151E
Refer to “Transfer Motor” and “Transfer Motor Relay”, “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, TF-150.
FE
OK or NG
CL
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Repair or replace transfer motor and transfer motor relay.
MT
2
CHECK CONTINUITY
Check the following.
I Continuity of transfer sub-harness
Refer to “TRANSFER SWITCH ASSEMBLY SUB-HARNESS CONNECTOR”, “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, TF-151.
AT
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Repair or replace transfer sub-harness.
3
PD
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
AX
With CONSULT-II
1. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in Data Monitor.
2. Read out ON/OFF status of “MOTOR RELAY”.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SMT975D
3. When the value is different from standard value although ON/OFF switching occurs, check the following items.
I PNP switch, throttle position sensor and closed throttle position switch circuits
Refer to AT-105, “DTC P0705 Park/Neutral Position Switch”, AT-182, “DTC P1705 Throttle Position Sensor”.
BT
HA
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
SC
NG
©
1. Perform transfer control unit input/output signal inspection. Refer to “TRANSFER
CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE”, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL
DESCRIPTION”, TF-90.
2. If NG, recheck transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with
harness connector.
EL
TF-107
IDX
TRANSFER MOTOR AND TRANSFER MOTOR RELAY
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK TRANSFER MOTOR RELAY POWER SOURCE
1. Disconnect transfer motor relay harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
3. Check voltage between transfer motor relay harness connector terminals 1, 3 and body ground.
Voltage: Battery voltage
SMT854DA
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
Check the following.
I No. 55 fuse (20A)
I No. 8 fuse (10A)
I Harness continuity between fuse and transfer motor relay
TF-108
TRANSFER MOTOR AND TRANSFER MOTOR RELAY
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
GI
CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Check continuity between the following terminals.
I Transfer control unit 41 and Transfer motor 14
I Transfer control unit 41 and Transfer motor relay 2
I Transfer control unit 14 and Transfer motor relay 4
I Transfer motor 15 and body ground
Continuity should exist.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
SMT855DA
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Repair or replace harness or connector.
6
PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS AGAIN
AX
SU
BR
After driving for a while, perform self-diagnosis again.
Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II”, TF-62 and “Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II”, TF-65.
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
1. Perform transfer control unit input/output signal inspection. Refer to “TRANSFER
CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE”, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL
DESCRIPTION”, TF-90.
2. If NG, recheck transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with
harness connector.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-109
TRANSFER FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NATF0023
CHECK TRANSFER FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to “2-4WD Shift Solenoid Valve and Transfer Fluid Temperature Sensor”, “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, TF-148.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Repair or replace fluid temperature sensor.
2
CHECK CONTINUITY
Check the following.
I Continuity of transfer sub-harness
Refer to “TRANSFER TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY SUB-HARNESS CONNECTOR”, “COMPONENT INSPECTION”,
TF-151.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Repair or replace transfer sub-harness.
3
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
WITH CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 4.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 5.
TF-110
TRANSFER FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
MA
EM
LC
EC
SMT784D
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor.
3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”.
Voltage:
20°C (68°F): Approx. 1.5V
80°C (176°F): Approx. 0.5V
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
SMT974D
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Check the following.
I Continuity between transfer control unit and transfer terminal cord assembly sub-harness connector
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-111
TRANSFER FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
2. Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminals 28 and 31.
Voltage:
20°C (68°F): Approx. 1.5V
80°C (176°F): Approx. 0.5V
SMT785D
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Check the following.
I Continuity between transfer control unit and transfer terminal cord assembly sub-harness connector
6
PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS AGAIN
After driving for a while, perform self-diagnosis again.
Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II”, TF-62.
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
1. Perform transfer control unit input/output signal inspection. Refer to “TRANSFER
CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE”, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL
DESCRIPTION”, TF-90.
2. If NG, recheck transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with
harness connector.
TF-112
ATP SWITCH, WAIT DETECTION SWITCH AND
NEUTRAL-4LO SWITCH
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NATF0024
GI
CHECK ATP SWITCH, WAIT DETECTION SWITCH AND NEUTRAL-4LO SWITCH
MA
EM
LC
EC
SMT786D
Refer to “ATP Switch, Neutral-4LO Switch and Wait Detection Switch”, “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, TF-149.
FE
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
CL
MT
2
CHECK CONTINUITY OF TRANSFER SUB-HARNESS
Check the following.
I Continuity of transfer sub-harness
Refer to “TRANSFER SWITCH ASSEMBLY SUB-HARNESS CONNECTOR”, “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, TF-151.
AT
OK or NG
OK
©
Repair or replace ATP switch, wait detection switch or neutral-4LO switch.
NG
©
Repair or replace transfer sub-harness.
3
PD
AX
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
WITH CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 4.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 5.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-113
ATP SWITCH, WAIT DETECTION SWITCH AND
NEUTRAL-4LO SWITCH
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor.
2. Read out the ON/OFF status of “ATP SW”, “NEUTRAL SW” and “WAIT DETCT SW”.
SMT976D
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Check the following.
I Harness continuity between transfer switch assembly sub-harness connector and
transfer control unit
I Continuity between transfer switch assembly sub-harness connector and body ground
TF-114
ATP SWITCH, WAIT DETECTION SWITCH AND
NEUTRAL-4LO SWITCH
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
GI
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Operate 4WD shift switch and check continuity between the following terminals.
Continuity:
Terminal 40 (ATP switch) and body ground
“4H” position: No continuity should exist.
Between “4H” and “4LO”: Continuity should exist.
“4LO” position: No continuity should exist.
Terminal 25 (Neutral-4LO switch) and body ground
“4H” position: No continuity should exist.
“4LO” position: Continuity should exist.
Terminal 43 (Wait detection switch) and body ground
“4H” position: No continuity should exist. (*1)
“4LO” position: Continuity should exist.
*1: After setting from “4LO” to “4H”, continuity exists while “Wait” function is operating in “4H” position.
(No continuity exists when “Wait” function is canceled.)
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
SMT787D
PD
AX
SU
BR
SMT849D
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Check the following.
I Harness continuity between transfer switch assembly sub-harness connector and
transfer control unit
I Continuity between transfer switch assembly sub-harness connector and body ground
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-115
ATP SWITCH, WAIT DETECTION SWITCH AND
NEUTRAL-4LO SWITCH
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS AGAIN
After driving for a while, perform self-diagnosis again.
Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II”, TF-62.
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
1. Perform transfer control unit input/output signal inspection. Refer to “TRANSFER
CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE”, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL
DESCRIPTION”, TF-90.
2. If NG, recheck transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with
harness connector.
TF-116
CLUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NATF0025
GI
CHECK MALFUNCTION
Is this malfunction detected only while driving in reverse?
MA
Yes or No
Yes
©
CHECK A/T PNP SWITCH “R” POSITION.
Refer to AT-105, “DTC P0705 Park/Neutral Position Switch”.
EM
No
©
GO TO 2.
LC
2
CHECK OTHER MALFUNCTION
Are other malfunctions also detected by self-diagnosis and CONSULT-II?
Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II”, TF-62 and “Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II”, TF-65.
Yes or No
©
Yes
©
No
CHECK FOR OTHER MALFUNCTIONS.
(When other malfunctions are eliminated, clutch pressure switch malfunction display may
disappear.)
EC
FE
CL
GO TO 3.
MT
3
CHECK 2-4WD SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE AND 4WD SHIFT SWITCH CIRCUITS
Check 2-4WD shift solenoid valve and 4WD shift switch circuits.
AT
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Check, repair or replace faulty parts.
PD
4
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
AX
WITH CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 5.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 6.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-117
CLUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor.
3. Read out ON/OFF status of “CL PRES SW”.
SMT788D
SMT977D
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
Check the following.
I Continuity between transfer control unit and transfer terminal cord assembly sub-harness connector
I Transfer sub-harness
I Clutch pressure switch
Refer to “4WD Solenoid Valve, Clutch Pressure Switch and Line Pressure Switch”,
“COMPONENT INSPECTION”, TF-148.
TF-118
CLUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
GI
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position and set 4WD shift switch to “4H” position.
2. Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminal 34 and body ground.
When 4WD shift switch is in “2WD”:
Battery voltage should exist.
When 4WD shift switch is in “AUTO” or “4H” and A/T selector lever is in “D”:
“Wait” operating: Battery voltage should exist.
“Wait” not operating: Approx. 0 volts should exist.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SMT789D
MT
AT
PD
SMT849D
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
Check the following.
I Continuity between transfer control unit and transfer terminal cord assembly sub-harness connector
I Transfer sub-harness
I Clutch pressure switch
Refer to “4WD Solenoid Valve, Clutch Pressure Switch and Line Pressure Switch”,
“COMPONENT INSPECTION”, TF-148.
7
PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS AGAIN
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
1. Check hydraulic parts.
2. After driving for a while, perform self-diagnosis again. Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II”, TF-62.
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
1. Perform transfer control unit input/output signal inspection. Refer to “TRANSFER
CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE”, TF-90.
2. If NG, recheck transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with
harness connector.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-119
LINE PRESSURE SWITCH
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NATF0026
CHECK MALFUNCTION
Is this malfunction detected only while driving in reverse?
Yes or No
Yes
©
CHECK A/T PNP SWITCH “R” POSITION.
Refer to AT-105, “DTC P0705 Park/Neutral Position Switch”.
No
©
GO TO 2.
2
CHECK OTHER MALFUNCTIONS
Are other malfunctions also detected by self-diagnosis and CONSULT-II?
Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II”, TF-62 and “Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II”, TF-65.
Yes or No
Yes
©
CHECK FOR OTHER MALFUNCTIONS.
(When other malfunctions are eliminated, line pressure switch malfunction display may
disappear.)
No
©
GO TO 3.
3
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
WITH CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 4.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 5.
TF-120
LINE PRESSURE SWITCH
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
MA
EM
LC
EC
SMT790D
With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor.
2. Read out the ON/OFF status of “LINE PRES SW”.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SMT977D
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Check the following.
I Continuity between transfer control unit and transfer terminal cord assembly sub-harness connector
I Transfer sub-harness
I Line pressure switch
Refer to “4WD Solenoid Valve, Clutch Pressure Switch and Line Pressure Switch”,
“COMPONENT INSPECTION”, TF-148.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-121
LINE PRESSURE SWITCH
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector.
3. Check continuity between transfer control unit harness connector terminal 35 and body ground.
After the vehicle has been left for at least 5 minutes in a room temperature with ignition switch “OFF”:
No continuity should exist.
With ignition switch in “ON”, 4WD shift switch in “AUTO” or “4H” and A/T selector lever in “D”:
Continuity should exist.
SMT152E
SMT849D
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 6.
NG
©
Check the following.
I Continuity between transfer control unit and transfer terminal cord assembly sub-harness connector
I Transfer sub-harness
I Line pressure switch
Refer to “4WD Solenoid Valve, Clutch Pressure Switch and Line Pressure Switch”,
“COMPONENT INSPECTION”, TF-148.
6
PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS AGAIN
1. Check hydraulic parts.
2. After driving for a while, perform self-diagnosis again. Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II”, TF-62.
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
1. Perform transfer control unit input/output signal inspection. Refer to TF-90.
2. If NG, recheck transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with
harness connector.
TF-122
ABS OPERATION SIGNAL (WITHOUT VDC)
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NATF0027
GI
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
MA
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 2.
EM
2
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
Disconnect ABS control unit harness connector.
Disconnect ABS control unit and transfer control unit harness connectors.
Check continuity between transfer control unit harness connector terminal 32 and ABS control unit harness connector
terminal 9.
Continuity should exist.
5. Check continuity between transfer control unit harness connector terminal 32, ABS control unit harness connector terminal 9 and body ground.
No continuity should exist.
1.
2.
3.
4.
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
SMT793DB
ST
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Repair or replace harness or connector between ABS control unit and transfer control
unit.
RS
BT
3
CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE
Check communication line between ABS control unit and transfer control unit.
(Refer to BR-147, “8. Vehicle vibrates excessively when ABS is operating”.)
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Check, repair or replace faulty parts.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-123
ABS OPERATION SIGNAL (WITHOUT VDC)
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS AGAIN
After driving for a while, perform self-diagnosis again.
Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II”, TF-62.
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
1. Perform transfer control unit input/output signal inspection. Refer to “TRANSFER
CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE”, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL
DESCRIPTION”, TF-90.
2. If NG, recheck transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with
harness connector.
TF-124
DATA ERASE/DISPLAY
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NATF0028
GI
CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT POWER SOURCE
MA
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position and perform self-diagnosis again.
Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II”, TF-62 and “Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II”, TF-65.
2. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
3. Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector.
4. Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminal 47 and body ground.
Voltage: Battery voltage
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SMT794D
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Check the following.
I No. 24 fuse (7.5A)
I Harness continuity between fuse and transfer control unit
2
MT
AT
PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS AGAIN
After driving for a while, perform self-diagnosis again.
Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II”, TF-62 and “Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II”, TF-65.
PD
OK or NG
AX
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
1. Perform transfer control unit input/output signal inspection. Refer to “TRANSFER
CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE”, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL
DESCRIPTION”, TF-90.
2. If NG, recheck transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with
harness connector.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-125
SHIFT ACTUATOR
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NATF0064
SHIFT ACTUATOR
Refer to “Actuator & Actuator Position Switch”, “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, TF-152.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
2
CHECK POWER SOURCE
SMT825DA
1. Disconnect transfer control device terminal.
2. Turn ignition switch to “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
3. Check voltage between transfer control device harness connector 3 (or 4) and body ground while 4WD shift switch is
set from 4H to 4LO (or from 4LO to 4H).
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
©
Repair or replace actuator.
NG
©
1. Recheck the following.
I Continuity between ignition switch and transfer HI & LOW relays
I Ignition switch and No. 3 fuse (20A)
I Continuity between transfer shift HI & LOW relays and transfer control device
2. If NG, repair or replace damaged part.
3
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
WITH CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 4.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 5.
TF-126
SHIFT ACTUATOR
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine (idling).
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in Select Diag Mode.
3. Read out self-diagnostic result.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SMT826D
CL
MT
AT
SMT978D
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
GO TO 6.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-127
SHIFT ACTUATOR
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine (idling).
2. Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminal 33 (or 42) and body ground while 4WD shift
switch is set from 4H to 4LO (or from 4LO to 4H).
SMT828D
3. Result
MTBL0202
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
GO TO 6.
6
CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT AND TRANSFER CONTROL
DEVICE
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
Repair and replace harness connector between transfer control unit and transfer control
device.
7
PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS AGAIN
After driving for a while, perform self-diagnosis again.
Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II”, TF-62.
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
1. Perform transfer control unit/output signal inspection. Refer to “TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE”, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL
DESCRIPTION”, TF-90.
2. If NG, recheck transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with
harness connector.
TF-128
SHIFT ACTUATOR POSITION SWITCH
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NATF0065
GI
SHIFT ACTUATOR POSITION SWITCH
MA
Refer to “Actuator & Actuator Position Switch”, “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, TF-152.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
EM
LC
2
CHECK POSITION SWITCH
1. Recheck continuity of shift actuator position switch.
Refer to “Actuator & Actuator Position Switch”, “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, TF-152.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
FE
CL
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Repair or replace position switch.
3
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
MT
WITH CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 4.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 5.
4
EC
AT
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine (idling).
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in Select Diag Mode.
3. Read out self-diagnostic result.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
SMT829DA
RS
BT
HA
SC
SMT978D
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
GO TO 6.
EL
IDX
TF-129
SHIFT ACTUATOR POSITION SWITCH
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine (idling).
2. Check voltage transfer control unit harness connector terminal 27 (or 44) and body ground while 4WD shift switch is
set from 4H to 4LO (or from 4LO to 4H).
SMT830D
3. Result
MTBL0203
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
GO TO 6.
6
CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT AND TRANSFER CONTROL
DEVICE
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 7.
NG
©
Repair and replace harness connector between transfer control unit and transfer control
device.
7
PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS AGAIN
After driving for a while, perform self-diagnosis again.
Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II”, TF-62.
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
1. Perform transfer control unit/output signal inspection. Refer to “TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE”, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL
DESCRIPTION”, TF-90.
2. If NG, recheck transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with
harness connector.
TF-130
SHIFT ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NATF0066
SHIFT ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
Refer to “Transfer Shift Relay (High & Low)”, “COMPONENT INSPECTION” and “Actuator & Actuator Position Switch”,
“COMPONENT INSPECTION”, TF-151, 152.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Repair or replace transfer shift relay and actuator and actuator position switch.
2
GI
MA
EM
LC
CHECK POWER SOURCE OF TRANSFER SHIFT (HI & LOW) RELAY
EC
FE
CL
MT
SMT825DA
1. Disconnect transfer control device terminal.
2. Turn ignition switch to “ON” (Do not start engine).
3. Check voltage between transfer shift HI and LOW relay terminal 5 and body ground.
Voltage: Battery voltage
AT
PD
AX
SU
SMT153E
BR
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
ST
NG
©
Check the following.
I Continuity between ignition switch and transfer shift HI & LOW relays
I Check ground circuit between transfer shift HI & LOW relays and body ground.
I Ignition switch and No. 3 fuse (20A)
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-131
SHIFT ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
CHECK POWER SOURCE OF TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE
Disconnect transfer control device terminal.
Turn ignition switch to “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Turn 4WD shift switch from “4H” to “4LO” (or from “4LO” to “4H”).
Check voltage between transfer control device terminal 3 (or 4) and body ground.
Voltage: Battery voltage
SMT832D
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Check the following.
I Harness and connector from transfer shift HI and LOW relays to transfer control
device harness terminal
I Ground circuit between transfer control device and body ground.
4
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
WITH CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 5.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
©
GO TO 6.
TF-132
SHIFT ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
GI
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine (idling).
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in Select Diag Mode.
3. Read out self-diagnostic result.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SMT835D
CL
MT
AT
SMT978D
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-133
SHIFT ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
ATX14A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine (idling).
2. Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminal 4 (or 13) and body ground while 4WD shift
switch is set from 4H to 4LO (or from 4LO to 4H).
SMT154E
3. Result
MTBL0516
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
GO TO 7.
7
CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT AND TRANSFER CONTROL
DEVICE
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 8.
NG
©
Repair and replace harness connector between transfer control unit and transfer control
device.
8
PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS AGAIN
After driving for a while, perform self-diagnosis again.
Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II”, TF-62.
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
1. Perform transfer control unit/output signal inspection. Refer to “TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE”, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL
DESCRIPTION”, TF-90.
2. If NG, recheck transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with
harness connector.
TF-134
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ATX14A
Symptom 1. 4WD Shift Indicator Lamp Does Not Turn ON
Symptom 1. 4WD Shift Indicator Lamp Does
Not Turn ON
GI
SYMPTOM: Although ignition switch is turned “ON”, all the
4WD shift indicator lamps do not turn ON for 1 second.
MA
NATF0029
1
CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT POWER SOURCE
EM
LC
EC
FE
SMT994D
CL
MT
AT
SMT860D
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position and disconnect transfer control unit harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.)
3. Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminals 16, 22 and body ground.
Voltage: Battery voltage
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
SMT796D
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Check the following.
I Continuity between ignition switch and transfer control unit
I Ignition switch and No. 18 fuse (10A)
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-135
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ATX14A
Symptom 1. 4WD Shift Indicator Lamp Does Not Turn ON (Cont’d)
2
CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector.
3. Measure resistance between transfer control unit harness connector terminals 6, 45 and body ground.
Resistance: 0Ω
SMT797D
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Check continuity between transfer control unit and body ground.
3
CHECK PROCEDURES FROM THE BEGINNING AGAIN
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
1. Perform transfer control unit input/output signal inspection. Refer to “TRANSFER
CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE”, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL
DESCRIPTION”, TF-90.
2. If NG, recheck transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with
harness connector.
TF-136
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ATX14A
Symptom 2. 4WD Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON
Symptom 2. 4WD Warning Lamp Does Not Turn GI
ON
SYMPTOM: Although ignition switch is turned “ON”, 4WD
MA
warning lamp does not turn ON.
=NATF0030
1
CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT POWER SOURCE
EM
LC
EC
FE
SMT799D
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position and disconnect transfer control unit harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
3. Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminals 16, 22 and body ground.
Voltage: Battery voltage
CL
MT
AT
PD
SMT800D
AX
OK or NG
SU
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Check the following.
I Continuity between ignition switch and transfer control unit
I Ignition switch and No. 18 fuse (10A)
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-137
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ATX14A
Symptom 2. 4WD Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON (Cont’d)
2
CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector.
3. Measure resistance between transfer control unit harness connector terminals 6, 45 and body ground.
Resistance: 0Ω
SMT803D
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Check continuity between transfer control unit and body ground.
3
CHECK 4WD WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT
Check the following.
I 4WD warning lamp
I Continuity between ignition switch and 4WD warning lamp
I Continuity between 4WD warning lamp and transfer control unit
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
I Repair or replace harness or connector.
I Replace 4WD warning lamp.
4
CHECK PROCEDURES FROM THE BEGINNING AGAIN
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
1. Perform transfer control unit input/output signal inspection. Refer to “TRANSFER
CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE”, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL
DESCRIPTION”, TF-90.
2. If NG, recheck transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with
harness connector.
TF-138
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ATX14A
Symptom 3. 4WD Shift Indicator Lamp Does Not Turn OFF
Symptom 3. 4WD Shift Indicator Lamp Does
Not Turn OFF
GI
SYMPTOM: When 4WD shift switch is set from “4H” to
“4LO”, all the 4WD shift indicator lamps do not turn OFF.
MA
NATF0031
1
CHECK ATP SWITCH CIRCUIT
EM
LC
EC
FE
SMT994D
Check ATP switch circuit.
Refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, “ATP SWITCH, WAIT DETECTION SWITCH AND NEUTRAL-4LO SWITCH”, TF-149.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Check, repair or replace faulty parts.
2
CL
MT
AT
CHECK PROCEDURE FROM THE BEGINNING AGAIN
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
Recheck each connector’s pin terminals for damage or loose connection.
PD
AX
SU
Symptom 4. ATP Warning Lamp Does Not Turn
ON
BR
SYMPTOM: When 4WD shift switch is set from “4H” to
“4LO” with A/T selector lever in “P” position, ATP warning
lamp does not turn ON.
ST
NATF0032
RS
BT
SMT173E
1
CHECK ATP SWITCH CIRCUIT
Check ATP switch circuit.
Refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, “ATP SWITCH, WAIT DETECTION SWITCH AND NEUTRAL-4LO SWITCH”, TF-149.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Check, repair or replace faulty parts.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-139
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Symptom 4. ATP Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON (Cont’d)
2
CHECK FOLLOWING ITEMS
Check the following.
I ATP warning lamp
I Continuity between “TFCU” terminal 15 and ATP warning lamp (With VDC)
I Continuity between PNP (“P” position) switch terminal 7 and ATP warning lamp (Without VDC)
I Continuity between ATP warning lamp and ATP switch
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4. (With VDC)/GO TO 3. (Without VDC)
NG
©
Repair or replace ATP warning lamp, harness or connector.
3
CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (Without VDC)
Check PNP switch circuit.
Refer to AT-105, “DTC P0705 Park/Neutral Position Switch”.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Check, repair or replace faulty parts.
4
CHECK PROCEDURES FROM THE BEGINNING AGAIN
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
Recheck each connector’s pin terminals for damage or loose connection.
TF-140
ATX14A
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ATX14A
Symptom 5. 4LO Indicator Lamp Does Not Turn ON
Symptom 5. 4LO Indicator Lamp Does Not Turn GI
ON
SYMPTOM: When 4WD shift switch is set from “4H” to
MA
“4LO” position, 4LO indicator lamp does not turn ON.
=NATF0033
1
CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
EM
LC
EC
FE
SMT994D
CL
MT
AT
SMT851D
PD
AX
SU
BR
SMT979D
1. Disconnect battery negative terminal (−), then transfer control unit connector.
2. Connect battery negative terminal (−) and turn ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped).
3. Check voltage across transfer control unit body-side connector terminals 47, 16 and body ground.
Voltage: Battery voltage
ST
RS
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 2.
BT
NG
©
Check the following.
I Continuity between battery and transfer control unit
I Ignition switch (Refer to EL-11, “Power Supply Routing”.)
I No. 24 fuse (7.5A), No. 8 fuse (10A) and No. 18 fuse (10A)
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-141
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ATX14A
Symptom 5. 4LO Indicator Lamp Does Not Turn ON (Cont’d)
2
CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, and disconnect transfer control unit connector.
2. Check for continuity between transfer control unit body-side connector terminals 6, 45 and body ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Check the following.
I Continuity between transfer control unit and body ground
3
CHECK 4LO INDICATOR LAMP CIRCUIT
Disconnect battery negative terminal (−) and check the following items:
1. Check condition of 4LO indicator lamp.
2. Check continuity between battery and 4LO indicator lamp.
3. Check continuity between 4LO indicator lamp and transfer control unit connector terminal 12.
4. Check condition of ATP switch.
5. Check condition of neutral-4LO switch.
6. Check continuity between neutral-4LO switch ground terminal 6 and body ground.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Check the following.
I 4LO indicator lamp
I Neutral-4LO switch
Refer to “ATP Switch, Neutral-4LO Switch and Wait Detection Switch”, “COMPONENT
INSPECTION”, TF-149.
4
CHECK PROCEDURES FROM THE BEGINNING
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
1. Perform transfer control unit input/output signal inspection. Refer to “TRANSFER
CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE”, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL
DESCRIPTION”, TF-90.
2. If NG, recheck transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with
harness connector.
TF-142
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ATX14A
Symptom 6. 4WD Shift Indicator Lamp Does Not Indicate “4H”
Symptom 6. 4WD Shift Indicator Lamp Does
Not Indicate “4H”
GI
SYMPTOM: When 4WD shift switch is set to “4H”, 4WD shift
indicator lamp does not indicate “4H”.
MA
NATF0034
1
CHECk 4WD WARNING LAMP
EM
LC
EC
FE
SMT994D
Is 4WD warning lamp turned ON?
CL
Yes or No
Yes
©
Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II”, TF-62.
No
©
GO TO 2.
MT
AT
2
CHECK FOLLOWING ITEMS
Check the following.
I Neutral-4LO switch circuit. Refer to TF-113.
I Wait detection switch circuit. Refer to TF-113.
I ATP switch circuit. Refer to TF-113.
PD
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Check, repair or replace faulty parts.
3
AX
CHECK PROCEDURES FROM THE BEGINNING AGAIN
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
Recheck each connector’s pin terminals for damage or loose connection.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-143
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ATX14A
Symptom 7. 4WD Shift Indicator Lamp Repeats Flickering
Symptom 7. 4WD Shift Indicator Lamp Repeats
Flickering
=NATF0035
SYMPTOM: 4WD shift indicator lamp keeps flickering.
1
CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR LAMP
SMT994D
1. Set 4WD shift switch to “2WD” position.
2. Move vehicle forward and backward. Or drive straight increasing or decreasing speed under 20 km/h (12 MPH).
3. Does 4WD shift indicator lamp keep flickering?
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 2.
No
©
INSPECTION END
2
CHECK TIGHT CORNER BRAKING SYMPTOM
Drive vehicle at speed under 20 km/h (12 MPH), turning steering wheel to the limit. Does tight corner braking symptom
occur?
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 3.
No
©
GO TO 4.
3
CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR LAMP
Does the 4WD shift indicator lamp keep flickering when the front wheels are jacked up?
Yes or No
Yes
©
Check transfer unit operating system.
No
©
Check tires.
4
CHECK 4WD WARNING LAMP
Does 4WD warning lamp flicker? (4WD shift indicator lamp is turned OFF.)
Yes or No
Yes
©
Perform self-diagnoses. Refer to “Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II”, TF-62.
No
©
GO TO 5.
5
CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR LAMP
Does 4WD shift indicator lamp keep flickering?
Yes or No
Yes
©
Check again.
No
©
INSPECTION END
TF-144
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ATX14A
Symptom 8. Tight Corner Braking Symptom
Symptom 8. Tight Corner Braking Symptom
NATF0036
SYMPTOM: Tight corner braking symptom occurs. (Hydraulic
system failure)
1
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor.
2. Read out the ON/OFF status of “CLUTCH PRES SW”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SMT977D
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminal 34 and body ground.
Refer to “TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE”, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION”,
TF-90.
MT
AT
OK or NG
©
OK
©
NG
2
Disassemble transfer unit and check the following.
I Control valve assembly
I 4WD solenoid valve
I 2-4WD shift solenoid valve
I Clutch piston
I Clutch assembly
GO TO 2.
CHECK CLUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT
Check clutch pressure switch circuit.
Refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, “CLUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH”, TF-117.
PD
AX
SU
BR
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Check, repair or replace faulty parts.
ST
RS
3
CHECK PROCEDURES FROM THE BEGINNING AGAIN
Check again.
BT
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
Recheck each connector’s pin terminals for damage or loose connection.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-145
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ATX14A
Symptom 9. 4WD System Does Not Operate
Symptom 9. 4WD System Does Not Operate
=NATF0037
SYMPTOM: The vehicle cannot be put into 4WD mode.
(Hydraulic system failure)
1
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor.
2. Read out the ON/OFF status of “CLUTCH PRES SW”.
SMT977D
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminal 34 and body ground.
Refer to “TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE”, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION”,
TF-90.
OK or NG
OK
©
1. Check transfer fluid level.
2. Disassemble transfer unit and check the following.
I Transfer motor
I Main oil pump assembly
I Sub-oil pump assembly
I Oil strainer
I Control valve assembly
I 2-4WD shift solenoid valve
I Oil filter element
I Lip seal
I Strainer O-ring
I Main oil pump drive gear
I Seal ring
I D-ring
I Clutch piston
I Clutch assembly
NG
©
GO TO 2.
2
CHECK CLUTCH PRESSURE CIRCUIT
Check clutch pressure switch circuit.
Refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, “CLUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH”, TF-117.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Check, repair or replace faulty parts.
TF-146
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
ATX14A
Symptom 9. 4WD System Does Not Operate (Cont’d)
3
CHECK PROCEDURES FROM THE BEGINNING
GI
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
©
INSPECTION END
NG
©
Recheck each connector’s pin terminals for damage or loose connection.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-147
NATF0038
COMPONENT INSPECTION
ATX14A
4WD Shift Switch
4WD Shift Switch
NATF0038S01
Check continuity between each terminal.
Terminals
Switch position
Continuity
2WD
Yes
Except 2WD
No
AUTO
Yes
Except AUTO
No
4H
Yes
Except 4H
No
4LO
Yes
Except 4LO
No
1-2
1 - 3, 1 - 4
SMT858D
1 - 4, 1 - 5
1 - 4, 1 - 6
2-4WD Shift Solenoid Valve and Transfer Fluid
Temperature Sensor
NATF0038S02
Measure resistance between terminals of transfer terminal cord
assembly sub-harness connector located on rear-right of transfer
unit.
SMT079D
Component parts
Terminals
Resistance
2-4WD shift solenoid valve
4-5
Approx. 20°C (68°F):
Approx. 22.8 - 25.2Ω
Transfer fluid temperature
sensor
2-3
Approx. 20°C (68°F): Approx. 2.5 kΩ
Approx. 80°C (176°F): Approx. 0.3
kΩ
4WD Solenoid Valve, Clutch Pressure Switch
and Line Pressure Switch
NATF0038S03
Measure resistance between terminals of transfer terminal cord
assembly sub-harness connector located on rear-right of transfer
unit.
SMT080D
TF-148
COMPONENT INSPECTION
ATX14A
4WD Solenoid Valve, Clutch Pressure Switch and Line Pressure Switch (Cont’d)
GI
Component
parts
Terminals
4WD solenoid
valve
6
Clutch pressure switch
7
Line pressure
switch
1
Remarks
Approx. 20°C (68°F): Approx. 3.0 - 3.4Ω
In room temperature
I 2-4WD shift solenoid valve “OFF”: No
continuity
Ground I 2-4WD shift solenoid valve and transfer
motor “ON”: Continuity exists
terminal
In room temperature
I Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position
and leave vehicle for more than 5 minutes. (OFF): No continuity
I Transfer motor “ON”: Continuity exists
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
Front Revolution Sensor
NATF0038S04
Measure resistance between terminals of front revolution sensor
sub-harness connector located on rear-right of transfer unit.
Terminals
Resistance
16 - 17
500 - 650Ω
18 - 17
No continuity
18 - 16
No continuity
PD
AX
SU
SMT081D
Transfer Dropping Resistor
NATF0038S07
Check resistance between terminals.
Resistance: 11.2 - 12.8 Ω
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT806D
ATP Switch, Neutral-4LO Switch and Wait
Detection Switch
HA
NATF0038S06
Measure resistance between terminals of transfer switch assembly
sub-harness connector located on rear-right of transfer unit.
SC
EL
IDX
SMT083D
TF-149
COMPONENT INSPECTION
ATX14A
ATP Switch, Neutral-4LO Switch and Wait Detection Switch (Cont’d)
4WD shift switch position
Switch
Terminals
ATP switch
8-9
Neutral-4LO
switch
12 - 13
4H
(N)
4LO
No continuity
Continuity
No continuity
No continuity
Continuity
No continuity
Wait detection
switch
10 - 11
Continuity
(Note)
+---------------------------
NOTE:
When shifting from “4LO” to “4H”, continuity exists while “Wait” function is operating. (No continuity exists when “Wait” function is canceled.)
Transfer Motor
NATF0038S05
Apply battery voltage directly to transfer motor assembly sub-harness connector located on rear-right of transfer unit. (Positive: Terminal 14, Negative: Terminal 15)
Transfer motor should operate.
SMT082D
Transfer Motor Relay
1.
2.
NATF0038S08
Apply battery voltage directly to terminals 3 and 4.
Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2.
Condition
Continuity (1 - 2)
Battery voltage is applied
Yes
No voltage is applied
No
SMT085D
Transfer Sub-harness
FRONT REVOLUTION SENSOR SUB-HARNESS
CONNECTOR
Check continuity between terminals shown in the figure.
SMT086DB
TF-150
NATF0038S09
NATF0038S0901
COMPONENT INSPECTION
ATX14A
Transfer Sub-harness (Cont’d)
TRANSFER SWITCH ASSEMBLY SUB-HARNESS
CONNECTOR
GI
NATF0038S0902
Check continuity between terminals shown in the figure.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SMT087D
TRANSFER TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
SUB-HARNESS CONNECTOR
AT
NATF0038S0903
Check continuity between terminals shown in the figure.
Terminals on solenoid valve
Terminals
6
SMT088D
PD
Components
4WD solenoid valve
4, 5
2-4WD shift solenoid valve
2, 3
Transfer fluid temperature sensor
7
Clutch pressure switch
1
Line pressure switch
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
Transfer Shift Relay (High & low)
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 4.
Condition
Continuity
12V direct current supply
between terminals 1 and 2
No
No current supply
Yes
NATF0038S10
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT197E
TF-151
COMPONENT INSPECTION
ATX14A
Actuator & Actuator Position Switch
Actuator & Actuator Position Switch
NATF0038S11
ACTUATOR
NATF0038S1101
Operation & resistance check
I Apply battery voltage directly to actuator assembly.
Operating check
Battery positive terminal
Battery negative terminal
1
4
3
2
3
4
Check
Approx. 0.2Ω (When the motor is not operated.)
SMT812D
ACTUATOR POSITION SWITCH
NATF0038S1102
Continuity check
Continuity check
Battery positive
terminal
Battery negative
terminal
Continuity
1
4
3
1-5
2
3
4
2-5
SMT838D
TF-152
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
ATX14A
Replacing Oil Seal
Replacing Oil Seal
FRONT CASE OIL SEAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
I
NATF0068
GI
NATF0068S01
Drain transfer fluid.
Remove exhaust front tube and heat insulator. Refer to
“Removal”, TF-156.
Remove front propeller shaft. Refer to PD-8, “Removal and
Installation”.
Remove companion flange lock nut.
Do not reuse lock nut.
MA
Put a matchmark on top of drive pinion thread. The mark
should be in line with the mark on the companion flange.
Always mark top of drive pinion screw using paint.
EC
EM
LC
SMT844DB
5.
I
FE
CL
MT
SMT112D
6.
Remove companion flange.
AT
PD
AX
SU
SMT802C
7.
Remove front case oil seal.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT803C
8.
I
9.
Install front case oil seal.
Before installing, apply multi-purpose grease to seal lip.
Install companion flange.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT183E
TF-153
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
ATX14A
Replacing Oil Seal (Cont’d)
10. Tighten nut to the specified torque.
Refer to TF-158.
11. Install front propeller shaft.
12. Install exhaust front tube and heat insulator.
SMT845DB
SHIFT SHAFT OIL SEAL
1.
2.
3.
NATF0068S02
Remove front propeller shaft. Refer to PD-8, “Removal and
Installation”.
Remove companion flange. Refer to “FRONT CASE OIL
SEAL”, TF-153.
Remove actuator lever from transfer outer shift lever. Then
remove outer shift lever.
SMT808D
4.
I
Remove shift shaft oil seal.
Be careful not to damage cross shaft.
5.
I
6.
7.
Install shift shaft oil seal.
Before installing, apply multi-purpose grease to seal lip.
Install transfer control linkage.
Install companion flange. Refer to “FRONT CASE OIL SEAL”,
TF-153.
Install front propeller shaft.
SMT491A
8.
SMT805C
REAR OIL SEAL
1.
2.
3.
I
4.
NATF0068S03
Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to PD-8, “Removal and
Installation”.
Remove rear oil seal.
Install rear oil seal.
Before installing, apply multi-purpose grease to seal lip.
Install rear propeller shaft.
SMT892C
TF-154
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
ATX14A
Transfer Motor
Transfer Motor
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
I
SMT874C
3.
4.
5.
NATF0069
Disconnect transfer motor harness connector.
Remove breather pipe from transfer motor.
Remove bolts to detach transfer motor.
After removing transfer motor, be sure to replace O-ring
with new one.
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
GI
NATF0070
Apply petroleum jelly or ATF to O-ring.
Align width across flat-notch with oil pump groove, and install
transfer motor.
Tighten bolts.
: 41 - 48 N·m (4.2 - 4.9 kg-m, 30 - 35 ft-lb)
Install breather pipe to transfer motor.
Connect transfer motor harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
Transfer Oil Filter
REMOVAL
I
I
I
INSTALLATION
SMT875C
1.
2.
I
NATF0071
Remove bolts to detach oil filter.
When removing oil filter from transfer, avoid damaging it.
Be sure to loosen bolts evenly.
When removing oil filter, be sure to replace O-ring with
new one.
Apply petroleum jelly or ATF to O-ring.
Tighten bolts evenly to install oil filter.
: 7 - 9 N·m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 in-lb)
Be sure not to damage oil filter.
PD
AX
NATF0072
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-155
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
ATX14A
Removal
Removal
1.
2.
3.
I
4.
SMT897C
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
NATF0073
Remove exhaust front and rear tubes. Refer to FE-9,
“EXHAUST SYSTEM”.
Remove front and rear propeller shaft. Refer to PD-8,
“Removal and Installation”.
Insert plug into rear oil seal after removing propeller shaft.
Be careful not to damage spline, sleeve yoke and rear oil
seal, when removing propeller shaft.
Disconnect neutral-4LO switch, front revolution sensor, ATP
switch, transfer motor and 4WD shift switch harness connectors.
Remove center console and A/T control device.
Remove floor panel for transfer.
Remove upper side fixing bolt for A/T and TF.
Remove actuator lever from transfer outer shift lever and
remove sub-oil pump from transfer.
Remove remaining fixing bolt for AT and TF.
SMT808D
10. Remove transfer from transmission.
WARNING:
Support transfer while removing it.
SMT899C
SMT871C
Installation
I
Tighten bolts securing transfer.
Bolt length:
45 mm (1.77 in)
Tightening torque:
: 31 - 42 N·m (3.2 - 4.3 kg-m, 23 - 31 ft-lb)
SMT872C
TF-156
NATF0074
OVERHAUL
ATX14A
Transfer Gear Control
Transfer Gear Control
NATF0075
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SMT809D
1.
Actuator
2.
Actuator lever
3.
Outer shift lever
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-157
OVERHAUL
ATX14A
Transfer Components
Transfer Components
NATF0076
SMT194E
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Oil seal
Transfer cover
Snap ring
Washer
Snap ring
Main gear bearing
Front case
Check plug
Check spring
Check ball
Internal gear
Snap ring
Bearing race
Thrust needle bearing
Planetary carrier
Thrust needle bearing
Sun gear
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
L-H sleeve
2-4 sleeve
Radial needle bearing
Front revolution sensor
Retaining pin
L-H fork
2-4 fork
Shift fork spring
Fork guide
Retaining pin
Shift rod
Self-lock nut
Companion flange
Oil seal
Drain plug
Wait detection switch
Needle bearing
TF-158
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
Mainshaft
Drive chain
Clutch drum
Clutch hub
Snap ring
Driven plate
Drive plate
Retaining plate
Return spring assembly
Press flange
Washer
Thrust needle bearing
Snap ring
Seal ring
Front bearing
Front drive shaft
Rear bearing
OVERHAUL
ATX14A
Transfer Components (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
SMT207E
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
Thrust needle bearing race
Clutch piston
D-ring
Lip seal
Oil gutter
Center case
Stem bleeder
Mainshaft rear bearing
Thrust washer
Speedometer drive gear
Snap ring
Rear case
ATP switch
Neutral-4LO switch
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
Oil seal
Magnet
Baffle plate
Oil strainer
O-ring
Control valve assembly
Lip seal (7 pieces)
Filler plug
Inner gear
Outer gear
Oil pump housing
Bushing
Oil pump shaft
Oil pressure check plug
83.
84.
85.
86.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
Oil pump gasket
Sub-oil pump housing
Outer gear
Inner gear
O-ring
Sub-oil pump cover
O-ring
Transfer motor
O-ring
Oil filter stud
O-ring
O-ring
Oil filter
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-159
DISASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Rear Case
Rear Case
DISASSEMBLY
NATF0077
1.
2.
Remove neutral-4LO switch and ATP switch.
Remove bolts.
3.
Remove rear case from center case by tapping it lightly with a
plastic hammer.
SMT877C
SMT878C
Center Case
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Remove oil pump shaft from main oil pump.
2.
Remove stem bleeder from bleeder hole.
3.
I
Remove lock nut from companion flange.
Do not reuse lock nut.
SMT883C
SMT884C
SMT844DB
TF-160
NATF0078
DISASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Center Case (Cont’d)
4.
Remove companion flange.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT886CA
5.
Remove bolts.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SMT887C
6.
I
Insert screwdrivers as shown in the figure, and separate center case from front case. Then, remove center case by levering it up with a tire lever or the like.
Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
AT
PD
AX
SU
SMT888C
7.
I
Remove snap ring from mainshaft.
Do not reuse snap ring.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT889C
8.
Remove C-rings from mainshaft bearing.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT890C
TF-161
DISASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Center Case (Cont’d)
Front Drive Shaft and Drive Chain
1.
2.
I
NATF0078S01
Remove oil gutter from center case.
With front drive shaft held by one hand as shown in the figure,
tap center case with a plastic hammer to remove it with drive
chain.
Do not tap drive chain with a plastic hammer.
SMT900C
3.
Set a puller (ST30031000) and an adapter (ST33052000).
Remove front drive shaft front bearing.
4.
Set the puller (ST30031000) and the adapter (ST33052000).
Remove front drive shaft rear bearing.
SMT175E
SMT176E
Mainshaft and Clutch Drum
NATF0078S02
1.
Remove mounting bolts to detach baffle plate.
2.
Set center case to press stand. Remove mainshaft from center case.
SMT903CA
SMT904C
TF-162
DISASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Center Case (Cont’d)
3.
Remove thrust needle bearing from press flange.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT905C
4.
I
Remove seal ring from mainshaft.
Do not reuse seal ring.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SMT906C
5.
Set a drift (KV31103300), a support ring (KV40104710), a support ring (ST27863000) and a drift (ST35271000) to press
flange as shown in the figure. Press drift until snap ring is out
of place.
AT
PD
AX
SU
SMT907C
6.
I
Remove snap ring from mainshaft.
Do not reuse snap ring.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT908C
7.
Remove washer.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT909C
TF-163
DISASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Center Case (Cont’d)
8.
Remove press flange from mainshaft.
9.
Remove return spring assembly from clutch hub.
SMT910C
SMT911C
10. Remove each plate from clutch drum.
SMT912C
11. Remove snap ring from mainshaft.
I Do not reuse snap ring.
SMT913C
12. Tap mainshaft with a plastic hammer to remove it from clutch
drum and clutch hub.
13. Remove needle bearing from mainshaft.
SMT914C
TF-164
DISASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Center Case (Cont’d)
Clutch Piston
1.
NATF0078S03
GI
Remove oil pressure check plug from oil pressure check port.
MA
EM
LC
SMT915C
2.
Apply air gradually from oil pressure check port, and remove
clutch piston from center case.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SMT916C
3.
I
4.
Remove lip seal and D-ring from clutch piston.
Do not reuse lip seal and D-ring.
Remove thrust needle bearing race from clutch piston by hooking a screwdriver edge into 4 notches of thrust needle bearing
race.
AT
PD
AX
SU
SMT917C
Control Valve
NATF0078S04
CAUTION:
I Do not reuse any part that has been dropped or damaged.
I Make sure valve is assembled in the proper direction.
I Do not use a magnet because residual magnetism stays
during disassembly.
BR
ST
RS
BT
1.
Remove bolts, and detach oil strainer.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT918C
TF-165
DISASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Center Case (Cont’d)
2.
I
Remove O-rings from oil strainer.
Do not reuse O-rings.
3.
Remove bolts for control valve.
4.
Remove snap ring. Then push terminal assembly into center
case to remove control valve assembly.
5.
I
I
Remove lip seals from center case.
Do not reuse lip seals.
There are two kinds of lip seals (lip seal of large inner
diameter: 5 pieces, lip seal of small inner diameter: 2
pieces). Confirm the position before disassembly.
6.
Remove all bolts except for two.
SMT919C
SMT920C
SMT921C
SMT922CA
SMT923C
TF-166
DISASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Center Case (Cont’d)
7.
8.
I
Remove 4WD solenoid valve, clutch pressure switch, 2-4WD
shift solenoid valve, line pressure switch, and transfer fluid
temperature sensor from control valve assembly.
Remove O-rings from each solenoid valve, switch and terminal body.
Do not reuse O-rings.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT924C
9.
Place control valve with lower body facing up, remove two
mounting bolts, and then remove lower body and separator
plate from upper body.
CAUTION:
I Be careful not to drop relief balls. Detach lower body carefully.
I Do not reuse separator plate.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SMT925C
10. Make sure reverse balls, relief balls and relief springs, accumulator pistons and valve springs are securely installed as
shown in the figure, and remove them.
AT
PD
AX
SU
SMT177E
11. Remove retainer plates.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT927C
12. Remove each control valve, spring and plug.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT928CA
TF-167
DISASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Center Case (Cont’d)
Mainshaft Rear Bearing
1.
NATF0078S05
Remove mainshaft rear bearing from center case using a
remover (ST35291000) and a remover (ST30090010).
SMT929C
Main Oil Pump
NATF0078S06
1.
Remove bolts as shown in figure to detach main oil pump.
2.
Remove outer gear and inner gear.
SMT930C
SMT931C
Sub-oil Pump
1.
NATF0078S07
I
Remove bolts to detach transfer motor from center case. Then
remove O-ring from the transfer motor.
Do not reuse O-ring.
2.
Remove sub-oil pump mounting bolts.
SMT932C
SMT933C
TF-168
DISASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Center Case (Cont’d)
3.
Thread two bolts (M4 x 0.8) into the holes of sub-oil pump as
shown in the figure, and pull out to remove sub-oil pump.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT934C
4.
I
EC
Remove oil pump gasket.
Do not reuse gasket.
FE
CL
MT
SMT935C
5.
I
Remove sub-oil pump cover, outer gear, inner gear and O-ring
from sub-oil pump housing.
Do not reuse O-ring.
AT
PD
AX
SU
SMT936C
Oil Filter
1.
NATF0078S08
Remove bolts for oil filter.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT937C
2.
Insert a screwdriver as shown in the figure to remove oil filter.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT938C
TF-169
DISASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Center Case (Cont’d)
3.
I
Remove O-rings from oil filter.
Do not reuse O-rings.
4.
Remove oil filter stud.
5.
I
Remove O-ring from oil filter stud.
Do not reuse O-ring.
SMT939C
SMT940C
SMT941C
Front Case
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
NATF0079
Remove rear case from center case. Refer to TF-160.
Remove front case from center case.
SMT895C
Shift Rod Components
1.
2.
NATF0079S01
Remove check plug, then check spring and check ball.
Remove wait detection switch.
SMT990C
TF-170
DISASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Front Case (Cont’d)
3.
Remove shift rod components together with 2-4 sleeve and
L-H sleeve.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT991C
4.
Remove 2-4 sleeve and L-H sleeve from 2-4 fork and L-H fork
respectively.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SMT992C
5.
I
AT
Drive out retaining pin from shift rod.
Do not reuse retaining pin.
PD
AX
SU
SMT993C
6.
Remove L-H fork, 2-4 fork, shift fork spring and fork guide from
shift rod.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT195E
Planetary Carrier, Sun Gear and Internal Gear
1.
Remove radial needle bearing from sun gear.
NATF0079S02
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT995C
TF-171
DISASSEMBLY
Front Case (Cont’d)
2.
I
Remove bolts to detach transfer cover.
Do not reuse bolts.
3.
I
Remove oil seal from transfer cover.
Do not reuse oil seal.
4.
I
Remove snap ring from main gear bearing.
Do not reuse snap ring.
5.
Remove sun gear by tapping it lightly.
6.
I
7.
Remove snap ring from sun gear.
Do not reuse snap ring as it is a selective part.
Remove washer from sun gear.
SMT996C
SMT997C
SMT998C
SMT999C
SMT001D
TF-172
ATX14A
DISASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Front Case (Cont’d)
8.
Set an adapter to sun gear as shown in the figure. Remove sun
gear from planetary carrier. Remove main gear bearing, bearing race and thrust needle bearing (front and rear of planetary
carrier) from sun gear.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SMT002DA
9.
I
Remove snap ring, and remove internal gear.
Do not reuse snap ring.
AT
PD
AX
SU
SMT004D
10. Remove front oil seal.
I Do not reuse oil seal.
11. Loosen nut of outer lever assembly to pull out cotter pin, and
remove outer lever.
12. Remove inner lever assembly.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT198E
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-173
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
ATX14A
Front Case
Front Case
INSPECTION
Planetary Carrier
I
I
SMT006D
I
NATF0080S01
Measure end play of each pinion gear, and make sure the
measurement is within specification shown below. If out of
specification, replace planetary carrier with new one.
Pinion gear end play:
0.1 - 0.7 mm (0.004 - 0.028 in)
Check working face of each gear, bearing and others for
damage, burrs, partial wear, dents and other abnormality. If
any is found, replace planetary carrier with new one.
Sun Gear
I
NATF0080
NATF0080S02
Check if oil passage of sun gear is clogged. For this, try to pass
a 3.6 mm (0.142 in) dia. wire through oil passage as shown in
the figure.
Check sliding/contact surface of each gear, bearing and others
for damage, burrs, partial wear, dents, and other abnormality.
If any is found, replace sun gear with new one.
SMT007D
Internal Gear
I
NATF0080S03
Check internal gear teeth for damage, partial wear, dents and
other abnormality. If any is found, replace internal gear with
new one.
SMT008D
Shift Rod Components
I
NATF0080S04
Check working face of shift rod and fork for wear, partial wear,
bending and other abnormality. If any is found, replace with
new one.
SMT009D
TF-174
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
ATX14A
Front Case (Cont’d)
I
Measure clearance between shift fork and sleeve. If it is out of
specification, replace it with new one.
Standard value:
Less than 0.36 mm (0.0142 in)
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT010D
EC
Center Case
INSPECTION
Sub-oil Pump
1.
2.
3.
SMT942C
NATF0081
NATF0081S01
Check inner and outer circumference, tooth face, and sideface of inner and outer gears for damage or abnormal wear.
Measure side clearance between oil pump housing edge and
inner gear/outer gear.
Make sure side clearance is within specification. If the measurement is out of specification, replace inner and outer gears
together with new ones as a set.
Specification:
0.015 - 0.035 mm (0.0006 - 0.0014 in)
For inner gear and outer gear, refer to SDS, TF-193.
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
Main Oil Pump
1.
2.
3.
SMT943C
Mainshaft
I
NATF0081S02
Check inner and outer circumference, tooth face, and sideface of inner and outer gears for damage or abnormal wear.
Measure side clearance between oil pump housing edge and
inner gear/outer gear.
Make sure side clearance is within specification. If the measurement is out of specification, replace inner and outer gears
with new ones as a set.
Specification:
0.015 - 0.035 mm (0.0006 - 0.0014 in)
For inner gear and outer gear, refer to SDS, TF-193.
NATF0081S03
Check surfaces which contact sun gear, clutch drum, clutch
hub, press flange, clutch piston, each bearing, etc. for damage,
peel, partial wear, dents, bending, or other abnormal damage.
If any is found, replace with new one.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT944C
TF-175
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
ATX14A
Center Case (Cont’d)
Control Valve
NATF0081S04
I
Check oil filter screen for damage. If any is found, replace with
new one.
I
Check resistance between terminals of 4WD solenoid valve,
2-4WD shift solenoid valve and transfer fluid temperature sensor.
Resistance:
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, TF-148.
SMT945C
SMT946CA
I
Check sliding faces of control valves and plugs for abnormality. If any is found, replace the control valve assembly with new
one.
CAUTION:
Replace control valve body together with clutch return spring
as a set.
Control valve:
Refer to SDS, TF-193.
SMT947C
I
I
Check each control valve spring for damage or distortion, and
also check its free length, outer diameter and wire diameter. If
any damage or fatigue is found, replace control valve body with
new one.
Replace control valve body together with clutch return
spring as a set.
Inspection standard:
Refer to SDS, TF-193.
SMT948C
Clutch
I
SMT949C
NATF0081S05
Check drive plate facings and driven plate for damage, cracks
or other abnormality. If any, replace with new one.
I Check the thickness of drive plate facings and driven plate.
Inspection standard:
Refer to SDS, TF-194.
CAUTION:
I Measure facing thickness at 3 points to take an average.
I Check all the drive and driven plates.
I Check return spring for damage or deformation.
TF-176
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
ATX14A
Center Case (Cont’d)
I
Check stamped mark shown in the figure. Then, check that
free length, outer diameter and wire diameter are within specifications. If any abnormality is found, replace with new return
spring assembly of the same stamped number.
Inspection standard:
Refer to SDS, TF-194.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT178E
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-177
ASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Front Case
Front Case
ASSEMBLY
Planetary Carrier, Sun Gear and Internal Gear
1.
I
NATF0082
NATF0082S01
Apply ATF to oil seal periphery, and install oil seal so that it is
flush with the end face of front case.
Do not reuse oil seal.
SMT011D
2.
I
Install internal gear with its groove facing snap ring into front
case. Then secure it with snap ring.
Do not reuse snap ring.
3.
I
Install snap ring to main gear bearing.
Do not reuse snap ring.
4.
Set main gear bearing to front case, then press it.
5.
6.
Install thrust needle bearing to sun gear.
Install sun gear to planetary carrier.
SMT012D
SMT014D
SMT015D
SMT016D
TF-178
ASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Front Case (Cont’d)
7.
8.
9.
Set a support (KV40105500) to bushing replacer puller
(ST30911000) as shown in the figure, and place planetary
carrier on it.
Install thrust needle bearing to planetary carrier with its roller
facing front case.
Measure “C” from the end of sun gear to the roller surface of
thrust needle bearing.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT017D
SMT018D
10. Measure “D” from the end of sun gear to the main gear bearing contact surface.
11. Calculate end play “E” using “C” and “D” obtained in steps 10
and 11. Select bearing race so that the end play becomes the
standard value.
Calculation formula:
End play “E” = “C” − “D”
Standard end play:
0.1 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)
Bearing race:
Refer to SDS, TF-195.
12. Set planetary carrier to press in the status described in step 8.
Then install the selected bearing race to planetary carrier.
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
PD
AX
SU
SMT019D
13. Install front case to planetary carrier. Set a support ring
(KV40105310) and an adapter B (KV40105230) to main gear
bearing inner race, then press it.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT020D
14. Install washer to sun gear assembly, and select proper snap
ring so that end play “F” of sun gear is within specifications.
Standard end play “F”:
0 - 0.15 mm (0 - 0.0059 in)
Snap ring: Refer to SDS, TF-195.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT021D
TF-179
ASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Front Case (Cont’d)
15. Install the selected snap ring.
I Do not reuse snap rings.
16. Apply ATF to the periphery of new transfer cover oil seal, and
attach it at 1.5 mm (0.059 in) from the transfer cover and face.
I Do not reuse oil seal.
SMT022D
17. Apply Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent to transfer cover mounting surface of front case as shown in the figure.
Refer to TF-158.
CAUTION:
I Remove all foreign materials such as water, oil, and
grease from mating surfaces of front case and transfer
cover.
I Prevent Liquid Gasket from entering into oil holes of front
case.
SMT179E
18. Align oil hole of front case with notch of transfer cover, and
tighten bolts.
: 49 - 58 N·m (5.0 - 5.9 kg-m, 36 - 43 ft-lb)
I Do not reuse bolts.
SMT024D
19. Apply petroleum jelly to radial needle bearing, and install it
inside sun gear.
20. Install shift rod assembly to front case assembly. Refer to “Shift
Rod Assembly”, TF-181.
SMT995C
TF-180
ASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Front Case (Cont’d)
Shift Rod Assembly
1.
I
NATF0082S02
Install fork guide, shift fork spring, 2-4 fork, and L-H fork to shift
rod, and secure them with retaining pins.
Do not reuse retaining pins.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT195E
2.
Install 2-4 sleeve and L-H sleeve to each fork.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SMT992C
3.
While aligning L-H sleeve with planetary carrier, install shift rod
assembly to front case.
AT
PD
AX
SU
SMT991C
4.
5.
SMT990C
I
6.
7.
Remove all the liquid gasket on check plug and front case, and
install check ball and check spring to front case. Apply Genuine Thread Sealant or equivalent* to check plug, install it to
front case, and tighten it to specified torque.
*: Refer to TF-158.
: 19 - 25 N·m (1.9 - 2.5 kg-m, 14 - 18 ft-lb)
Remove all the liquid gasket on the switch fitting and inner side
of front case, and with wait detection switch threaded one pitch
into the hole, apply Genuine Thread Sealant or equivalent* to
the thread, install it, and tighten it to specified torque.
: 15 - 20 N·m (1.5 - 2.0 kg-m, 11 - 14 ft-lb)
Wait detection switch harness connector is black.
Install center case assembly to front case assembly. Refer to
“Final Assembly”, TF-190.
Install rear case assembly to center case. Refer to “Final
Assembly”, TF-190.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-181
ASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Center Case
Center Case
ASSEMBLY
Oil Filter
1.
I
2.
NATF0083
NATF0083S01
Apply ATF or petroleum jelly to new O-ring, and install it to oil
filter stud.
Do not reuse O-rings.
Install oil filter stud to center case, and tighten it.
: 26 - 35 N·m (2.6 - 3.6 kg-m, 20 - 26 ft-lb)
SMT951C
3.
I
4.
I
Apply ATF or petroleum jelly to two new O-rings, and install
them to oil filter.
Do not reuse O-rings.
Install oil filter to center case and tighten bolts.
: 7 - 9 N·m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 in-lb)
Do not knock oil filter with a tool such as a hammer.
SMT939C
Sub-oil Pump
1.
I
NATF0083S02
Install new oil pump gasket to center case by aligning it with
dowel pin inside the center case.
Do not reuse gaskets.
SMT935C
2.
Install outer gear* and inner gear to sub-oil pump housing, and
measure side clearance. Refer to “Sub-oil Pump”,
“INSPECTION”, TF-175.
3. Set new O-ring to sub-oil pump housing, and install sub-oil
pump cover.
I Do not reuse O-rings.
* Identification mark “H” is placed on the side of sub-oil pump
cover.
SMT936C
4.
Align dowel pin hole and mounting bolt hole of sub-oil pump
assembly with center case. Then tighten bolts.
: 7 - 9 N·m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 in-lb)
SMT955C
TF-182
ASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Center Case (Cont’d)
5.
6.
Apply ATF or petroleum jelly to new O-ring and install it to
transfer motor.
Fit double-flat end of transfer motor shaft into slot of sub-oil
pump assembly. Then tighten bolts.
: 42 - 48 N·m (4.2 - 4.9 kg-m, 31 - 35 ft-lb)
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT956C
Main Oil Pump
1.
EC
NATF0083S03
Install inner gear and outer gear in the main oil pump housing
with their identification marks facing toward center case
mounting surface side. Then, measure the side clearance.
Refer to “Main Oil Pump”, “Center Case”, TF-175.
FE
CL
MT
SMT957C
2.
3.
Install main oil pump assembly to center case assembly, and
tighten bolts.
: 7 - 9 N·m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 in-lb)
Install oil pump shaft to main oil pump, then install rear case
assembly to center case.
Refer to “Final Assembly”, TF-190.
AT
PD
AX
SU
SMT930C
Control Valve
1.
SMT928C
NATF0083S04
Clean upper body, control valves and springs with cleaning
agent, and apply air blow.
2. Dip control valves in ATF, and apply ATF to the valve-mounting area of upper body.
3. Install each control valve, spring, and plug to upper body, and
fix it with retainer plates.
CAUTION:
I To insert control valves into upper body, place upper body
on a level surface in order to prevent flaw or damage.
I Make sure each control valve is smoothly inserted.
4. Install reverse balls, relief balls and relief springs, accumulator pistons and valve springs to upper body.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT177E
TF-183
ASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Center Case (Cont’d)
5.
I
Install lower body and separator plate to upper body.
Do not reuse separator plates.
6.
With lower body down, tighten two bolts in the position shown
in the figure.
Apply ATF or petroleum jelly to new O-ring, and install it to
2-4WD shift solenoid valve, terminal body, line pressure switch
and 4WD solenoid valve. Install them to control valve assembly.
Do not reuse O-rings.
SMT925C
7.
I
SMT962CA
8.
I
I
Apply ATF or petroleum jelly to lip seals, and install them to
center case.
Do not reuse lip seals.
There are 2 kinds of lip seals (lip seal of large inner diameter: 5 pieces, lip seal of small inner diameter: 2 pieces).
Confirm the position before installation.
SMT922CA
9.
Install bolts as shown in the figure, and tighten them to specified torque.
Bolt symbol
Length under
head
mm (in)
Q’ty
a
b
*c
d
e
f
g
38
(1.50)
43.5
(1.713)
62
(2.44)
19
(0.75)
47
(1.85)
40
(1.57)
52
(2.05)
16
3
2
1
2
1
1
Tightening torque
N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
SMT180E
*: Tighten with oil strainer.
TF-184
6.9 - 8.8 (0.70 - 0.90, 61.1 - 77.9)
ASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Center Case (Cont’d)
10. Install control valve assembly to center case, and tighten bolts.
: 6.9 - 8.8 N·m (0.70 - 0.90 kg-m, 61.1 - 77.9 in-lb)
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT920C
11. Remove terminal from center case installation hole, and
secure terminal body with snap ring.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SMT921C
12. Apply ATF or petroleum jelly to O-rings, and install them to oil
strainer.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-rings.
13. Install oil strainer to control valve assembly.
14. Install mainshaft and clutch drum to center case. Refer to
“Mainshaft and Clutch Drum”, TF-186.
15. Install front case assembly and rear case assembly. Refer to
“Final Assembly”, TF-190.
AT
PD
AX
SU
SMT919C
Clutch Piston
1.
I
NATF0083S05
Apply ATF to D-ring and lip seal, and install them to clutch piston.
Do not reuse lip seal and D-ring.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT917C
2.
Set clutch piston to a clutch piston attachment (KV31103400).
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT969C
TF-185
ASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Center Case (Cont’d)
3.
4.
Set the clutch piston attachment to center case, and install
clutch piston, tap it lightly.
Install slide needle bearing race to clutch piston.
SMT970C
5.
6.
Remove all the liquid gasket from oil pressure check port and
inside center case. With oil pressure check plug threaded in 1
or 2 pitches, apply Genuine Thread Sealant or equivalent to
the thread of plug, and tighten.
Refer to TF-158.
: 10 - 17 N·m (1.0 - 1.7 kg-m, 87 - 148 in-lb)
Install mainshaft and clutch drum. Refer to “Mainshaft and
Clutch Drum”, TF-186.
SMT915C
Mainshaft and Clutch Drum
NATF0083S06
1.
Install drive plates, driven plates and press flange to clutch
hub.
2. Place clutch hub on a surface plate and measure dimension
“A” between snap ring mounting surface of press flange and
clutch drum sliding face of clutch hub.
CAUTION:
Measure at least 2 points, and take an average.
SMT972C
3.
4.
SMT973C
5.
I
Measure dimension “B” between the gear end of mainshaft
and the snap ring mounting portion.
Calculate end play using dimension “A” and dimension “B”
(obtained in steps 2 and 3), and select proper retaining plate
so that the end play is within specifications.
Calculation formula:
End play = B − A − Retaining plate thickness
Standard end play:
0.2 - 0.5 mm (0.008 - 0.020 in)
Retaining plate:
Refer to SDS, TF-194.
Install clutch drum, needle bearing and clutch hub to
mainshaft, and secure them with snap ring.
Do not reuse snap ring.
SMT974C
TF-186
ASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Center Case (Cont’d)
6.
Install each clutch to clutch drum.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT975C
7.
Align the notch of return spring assembly with the pin of clutch
hub, and install it.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SMT911C
8.
Install press flange (with the holes indicated by arrows aligned
with pins of clutch hub).
AT
PD
AX
SU
SMT977C
9.
Install washer.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT909C
10. Pass mainshaft through snap ring. Set a drift (KV31103300),
a support ring (KV40104710), a support ring (ST27863000)
and a drift (ST35271000) to press flange at the position shown
in the figure, and press snap ring until it fits into snap ring
groove on mainshaft.
I Do not reuse snap ring.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT907C
TF-187
ASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Center Case (Cont’d)
11. Fix snap ring to mainshaft.
SMT908C
12. Install thrust needle bearing to press flange.
SMT905C
13. Apply petroleum jelly to new seal rings, and install them to
mainshaft. Measure clearance between seal ring and groove
using feeler gauge.
Standard clearance:
0.05 - 0.30 mm (0.0020 - 0.0118 in)
Limit clearance:
0.30 mm (0.0118 in)
I Pass seal ring from mainshaft rear end to install it.
Seal ring dimension:
Refer to SDS, TF-195.
SMT982C
14. Install mainshaft rear bearing to center case.
SMT983C
15. Place puller (ST30911000) to mainshaft rear bearing inner
race, and set it to press stand.
16. Place adapter (ST33061000) to the tip of mainshaft, and press
mainshaft into center case.
SMT984C
TF-188
ASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Center Case (Cont’d)
17. Install baffle plate to center case, and tighten bolts.
: 3.7 - 5.0 N·m (0.38 - 0.51 kg-m, 33.0 - 44.3 in-lb)
18. Install front drive shaft and drive chain. Refer to “Front Drive
Shaft and Drive Chain” below.
19. Install front case assembly and rear case assembly.
Refer to “Final Assembly”, TF-190.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT903CA
Front Drive Shaft and Drive Chain
1.
EC
NATF0083S07
Place a base (ST30032000) to front drive shaft rear bearing
inner race, and press it using a drift (KV40100621).
FE
CL
MT
SMT986C
2.
Place base (ST30032000) to front drive shaft front bearing
inner race, and press it using the drift (KV40100621).
AT
PD
AX
SU
SMT987C
3.
4.
I
Install drive chain temporarily to front drive shaft and drive gear
of clutch drum.
Tap front drive shaft with a plastic hammer while keeping it
upright and press-fit front drive shaft rear bearing.
Be careful not to tap drive chain with a hammer.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT988C
5.
6.
Align claw of oil gutter with center case, and install it.
Install front case assembly and rear case assembly.
Refer to “Final Assembly”, TF-190.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT989C
TF-189
ASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Final Assembly
Final Assembly
NATF0084
1.
Install C-rings to mainshaft rear bearing.
2.
Check speedometer drive gear teeth for abnormal wear. Set
speedometer drive gear properly on mainshaft, and secure it
with snap ring.
Do not reuse snap ring.
SMT891C
I
SMT889C
3.
Apply Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent to the
entire center case mounting surface of front case as shown in
the figure.
Refer to TF-158.
CAUTION:
Remove all foreign materials such as water, oil and grease
from center case and front case mating surfaces.
SMT181E
4.
Make sure the two claws of oil gutter are securely attached to
slots in center case.
SMT894C
TF-190
ASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Final Assembly (Cont’d)
5.
With the claws of oil gutter held by a finger, install center case
assembly to front case assembly.
CAUTION:
Pay careful attention so that mainshaft end does not damage
radial needle bearing in sun gear assembly.
6. Tap center case lightly with a rubber hammer or the like and
press-fit front drive shaft bearing into front case.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT895C
7.
8.
I
Make sure oil gutter rear end protrudes from point “A” in the
figure.
Tighten bolts to specified torque.
: 42 - 48 N·m (4.2 - 4.9 kg-m, 31 - 35 ft-lb)
Be sure to install air breather hose clamp, connector
bracket and harness clip.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SMT896C
9.
Fit double-flat end of oil pump shaft into slot of main oil pump
and install it.
NOTE:
When oil pump shaft is rotated slightly, it drops into position where
both parts fit.
AT
PD
AX
SU
SMT883C
10. Install stem bleeder to center case.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT884C
11. Remove rear oil seal.
I Do not reuse oil seal.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT881C
TF-191
ASSEMBLY
ATX14A
Final Assembly (Cont’d)
12. Apply ATF to the circumference of new rear oil seal, and tap it
using a drift as shown in the figure so that it is aligned with
case tip face.
I Apply multi-purpose grease to oil seal lip.
SMT882C
13. Apply Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent to entire
rear case mounting surface of center case as shown in the
figure.
Refer to TF-158.
CAUTION:
I Remove all foreign materials such as water, oil, and
grease from center case and rear case mating surfaces.
I Be careful not to allow Liquid Gasket to clog bleeder hole.
14. Install rear case to center case, and tighten bolts to specified
torque.
: 42 - 48 N·m (4.2 - 4.9 kg-m, 31 - 35 ft-lb)
I Be sure to attach harness clips.
SMT182E
15. Remove all the gasket fluid from switch mounting area and
inside rear case, with ATP switch and neutral-4LO switch
threaded in 1 to 2 pitches, apply Genuine Thread Sealant or
equivalent to the thread of the switches and tighten it to specified torque.
: 15 - 20 N·m (1.5 - 2.0 kg-m, 11 - 14 ft-lb)
16. Install rear case assembly to center case assembly.
SMT880C
17. Install companion flange to front drive shaft, and tighten lock
nut.
: 226 - 324 N·m (23.0 - 33.0 kg-m, 166 - 239 ft-lb)
I Do not reuse lock nut.
SMT845DB
TF-192
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
ATX14A
General Specifications
General Specifications
NATF0085
Transfer model
GI
ATX14A
High
1.000
Low
2.596
MA
Gear ratio
Sun gear
57
Internal gear
91
EM
Planetary gear
Number of teeth
Front drive sprocket
35
Front drive shaft
35
Fluid capacity (US qt, Imp qt)*
LC
EC
3.0 (3-1/8, 2-5/8)
*: Refer to MA-12, “Fluids and Lubricants”.
FE
Inner Gear and Outer Gear
NATF0086
SUB-OIL PUMP
NATF0086S01
Allowable clearance
Part No.*
Gear thickness
CL
0.015 - 0.035 mm (0.0006 - 0.0014 in)
MT
mm (in)
Inner gear
Outer gear
9.27 - 9.28 (0.3650 - 0.3654)
31346 0W462
31347 0W462
9.28 - 9.29 (0.3654 - 0.3657)
31346 0W461
31347 0W461
9.29 - 9.30 (0.3657 - 0.3661)
31346 0W460
31347 0W460
AT
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
MAIN OIL PUMP
NATF0086S02
Allowable clearance
AX
Part No.*
Gear thickness
PD
0.015 - 0.035 mm (0.0006 - 0.0014 in)
mm (in)
Inner gear
Outer gear
14.67 - 14.68 (0.5776 - 0.5780)
31346 0W412
31347 0W412
14.68 - 14.69 (0.5780 - 0.5783)
31346 0W411
31347 0W411
14.69 - 14.70 (0.5783 - 0.5787)
31346 0W410
31347 0W410
SU
BR
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
ST
Control Valve
NATF0087
VALVE
NATF0087S01
Mounting position
Part name
Part No.*
Outer dia.
mm (in)
Overall length
mm (in)
L1
2-4 shift valve
31772 21X00
8.0 (0.315)
38.5 (1.516)
L2
Clutch valve
31772 80X11
10.0 (0.394)
40.0 (1.575)
L4
Pilot valve
31772 80X11
10.0 (0.394)
40.0 (1.575)
L5
Regulator valve
31741 0W410
12.0 (0.472)
68.0 (2.677)
RS
BT
HA
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
SC
SPRING
NATF0087S02
Mounting position
Part name
Part No.*
Free length
mm (in)
Outer dia.
mm (in)
L1
2-4 shift valve
spring
31742 0W400
31.85 (1.2539)
7.0 (0.276)
Wire dia.
mm (in)
0.6 (0.024)
Winding direction
EL
Clockwise
IDX
TF-193
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
ATX14A
Control Valve (Cont’d)
Mounting position
Part name
Part No.*
Free length
mm (in)
Outer dia.
mm (in)
L2
Clutch valve spring
31742 0W405
40.6 (1.598)
9.0 (0.354)
0.8 (0.031)
Clockwise
L4
Pilot valve spring
31742 0W410
28.1 (1.106)
9.0 (0.354)
1.2 (0.047)
Clockwise
L5
Regulator valve
spring
31742 0W415
39.7 (1.563)
11.0 (0.433)
1.3 (0.051)
Clockwise
Wire dia.
mm (in)
Winding direction
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Clutch
NATF0088
DRIVE PLATE
NATF0088S01
Part No.*
Quantity
31532 0W410
8
Initial thickness
mm (in)
Limit value
2.0 (0.079)
mm (in)
1.8 (0.071)
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
DRIVEN PLATE
NATF0088S04
Part No.*
Quantity
31536 0W410
14
Initial thickness
mm (in)
Limit value
2.0 (0.079)
mm (in)
0 (0) (steel plate)
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
RETURN SPRING
NATF0088S02
Stamped mark
Part No.*
Free length
mm (in)
1
31521 0W401
37.3 (1.496)
2
31521 0W402
37.8 (1.488)
3
31521 0W403
38.4 (1.512)
4
31521 0W404
38.9 (1.531)
5
31521 0W405
39.4 (1.551)
6
31521 0W406
40.0 (1.575)
7
31521 0W407
36.8 (1.449)
8
31521 0W408
40.5 (1.594)
Outer dia.
mm (in)
12.0 (0.472)
Wire dia.
mm (in)
Winding direction
1.8 (0.071)
Clockwise
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
RETAINING PLATE
NATF0088S03
Standard end play
Measured value
mm (in)
0.2 - 0.5 mm (0.008 - 0.020 in)
Part No.*
Thickness
mm (in)
2.30 - 2.50 (0.0906 - 0.0984)
31537 0W410
2.1 (0.083)
2.50 - 2.70 (0.0984 - 0.1063)
31537 0W411
2.3 (0.091)
2.70 - 2.90 (0.1063 - 0.1142)
31537 0W412
2.5 (0.098)
2.90 - 3.10 (0.1142 - 0.1220)
31537 0W413
2.7 (0.106)
3.10 - 3.30 (0.1220 - 0.1299)
31537 0W414
2.9 (0.114)
3.30 - 3.50 (0.1299 - 0.1378)
31537 0W415
3.1 (0.122)
3.50 - 3.70 (0.1378 - 0.1457)
31537 0W416
3.3 (0.130)
3.70 - 3.90 (0.1457 - 0.1535)
31537 0W417
3.5 (0.138)
3.90 - 4.10 (0.1535 - 0.1614)
31537 0W418
3.7 (0.146)
4.10 - 4.30 (0.1614 - 0.1693)
31537 0W419
3.9 (0.154)
TF-194
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
ATX14A
Clutch (Cont’d)
Standard end play
Measured value
GI
0.2 - 0.5 mm (0.008 - 0.020 in)
mm (in)
Part No.*
Thickness
mm (in)
4.30 - 4.50 (0.1693 - 0.1772)
31537 0W420
4.1 (0.161)
4.50 - 4.70 (0.1772 - 0.1850)
31537 0W421
4.3 (0.169)
4.70 - 4.90 (0.1850 - 0.1929)
31537 0W422
4.5 (0.177)
4.90 - 5.10 (0.1929 - 0.2008)
31537 0W423
4.7 (0.185)
MA
EM
LC
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Seal Ring (Mainshaft side)
Standard clearance
Limit clearance
NATF0089
Part No.*
Outer dia.
31525 0W410
mm (in)
Inner dia.
40.8 (1.606)
mm (in)
Thickness
36.9 (1.453)
FE
mm (in)
1.97 (0.0776)
CL
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Bearing Race (Thrust needle bearing side)
Standard end play
End play (Dimension “E”)
EC
0.05 - 0.30 mm (0.0020 - 0.0118 in)
0.30 mm (0.0118 in)
NATF0090
MT
0.1 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)
mm (in)
Part No.*
Thickness
mm (in)
1.785 - 1.800 (0.0703 - 0.0709)
31439 0W410
1.6 (0.063)
1.800 - 1.900 (0.0709 - 0.0748)
31439 0W411
1.7 (0.067)
1.900 - 2.000 (0.0748 - 0.0787)
31439 0W412
1.8 (0.071)
2.000 - 2.100 (0.0787 - 0.0827)
31439 0W413
1.9 (0.075)
2.100 - 2.200 (0.0827 - 0.0866)
31439 0W414
2.0 (0.079)
2.200 - 2.270 (0.0866 - 0.0894)
31439 0W415
2.1 (0.083)
AT
PD
AX
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Snap Ring (Sun gear side)
Standard end play
End play (Dimension “F”)
NATF0091
SU
0 - 0.15 mm (0 - 0.0059 in)
mm (in)
Part No.*
Thickness
mm (in)
2.40 - 2.50 (0.0945 - 0.0984)
33112 0W411
2.4 (0.094)
2.50 - 2.60 (0.0984 - 0.1024)
33112 0W412
2.5 (0.098)
2.60 - 2.70 (0.1024 - 0.1063)
33112 0W413
2.6 (0.102)
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TF-195
NOTES
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
SECTION
IDX
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
A
ABS - Wiring diagram ....................................BR-37
ABS sensor rotor ........................................AX-6, 20
ABS/TCS C/U signal ............................EC-583, 585
A/C air flow.............................................HA-29, 207
A/C component layout............................HA-21, 205
A/C compressor clutch removal and
installation.........................................HA-175, 258
A/C compressor description .........................HA-200
A/C compressor precaution .....................HA-7, 191
A/C compressor special service tool......HA-11, 195
A/C control linkage adjustment (manual
A/C) ..........................................HA-225, 242, 244
A/C control operation (auto A/C) ....................HA-26
A/C control operation (manual A/C) .............HA-206
A/C diagnostic work flow (auto A/C) ..............HA-79
A/C diagnostic work flow (manual A/C)........HA-216
A/C HFC134a (R134a) system
precaution .............................................HA-3, 187
A/C HFC134a (R134a) system service
procedure..........................................HA-170, 253
A/C HFC134a (R134a) system service
tools ....................................................HA-12, 196
A/C HFC134a system service equipment precaution....................................HA-8, 192
A/C lubricant (R134a) ..........................HA-172, 255
A/C operational check ............................HA-80, 217
A/C performance chart .........................HA-138, 236
A/C performance test diagnoses .........HA-136, 234
A/C relay ..............................................HA-132, 251
A/C self-diagnoses (auto A/C)........................HA-48
A/C service data specification..............HA-186, 269
A/C switch ....................................................HA-251
A/C system description (auto A/C) .................HA-25
A/C trouble diagnoses (auto A/C) ..................HA-31
A/C trouble diagnoses (manual A/C) ...........HA-209
A/C, A - Wiring diagram ...........................HA-35, 40
A/C, M - Wiring diagram ..............................HA-213
Accelerator control system ...............................FE-3
Accelerator pedal position (APP)
sensor.......................................EC-708, 715, 731
Accelerator pedal released position
learning .......................................................EC-81
Actuator lever (Transfer) ...............................TF-157
Air bag ............................................................RS-11
Air bag disposal..............................................RS-25
Air bag precautions ...........................................GI-3
Air bleeding for brake system ..........................BR-9
Air cleaner filter replacement .........................MA-18
Air conditioner cut control ..............................EC-40
Air flow meter - See Mass air flow
sensor.......................EC-194, 203, 211, 219, 478
Air mix door control linkage adjustment.......HA-104
Air mix. door motor ..............................HA-100, 167
Air spoiler, rear................................................BT-36
All-mode 4WD system ....................................TF-43
Alternator ........................................................SC-30
Ambient sensor ............................................HA-155
Angular tightening application..........................EM-3
Antenna - See Power antenna .....................EL-203
Anti-lock brake system - Wiring
diagram .......................................................BR-37
APPS1 - Wiring diagram ..............................EC-711
APPS2 - Wiring diagram ..............................EC-718
APPS3 - Wiring diagram ..............................EC-734
ASC/BS - Wiring diagram ............................EC-688
ASC/SW - Wiring diagram ...........................EC-681
ASCBOF - Wiring diagram ...........................EC-776
ASCD..............................................................EC-62
ASCD (automatic speed control device) ......EL-256
ASCD brake switch ..............................EC-685, 775
ASCD clutch switch..............................EC-685, 775
ASCD steering switch ..................................EC-679
ASCIND - Wiring diagram ............................EC-784
A/T - Wiring diagram - AT - FTS ...................AT-113
A/T - Wiring diagram - AT - MAIN.................AT-102
A/T - Wiring diagram - AT - PNP/SW............AT-107
A/T - Wiring diagram - AT - VSS A/T ............AT-119
A/T fluid temperature sensor .........................AT-116
A/T self-diagnoses...........................................AT-48
A/T shift lock system .....................................AT-265
A/T shift lock system - Wiring diagram .........AT-266
A/T trouble diagnoses .....................................AT-55
A/T Wiring diagram - AT - ENG SS ..............AT-123
A/T Wiring diagram AT - 1ST ........................AT-129
A/T Wiring diagram AT - 2ND .......................AT-135
A/T Wiring diagram AT - 3RD .......................AT-141
A/T Wiring diagram AT - 4TH........................AT-148
A/T Wiring diagram AT - BA/FTS ..................AT-195
A/T Wiring diagram AT - CAN .......................AT-207
A/T Wiring diagram AT - LPSV .....................AT-170
A/T Wiring diagram AT - NONDTC ...............AT-218
A/T Wiring diagram AT - OVRCSV ...............AT-190
A/T Wiring diagram AT - SSV/A ....................AT-175
A/T Wiring diagram AT - SSV/B ....................AT-179
A/T Wiring diagram AT - TCCSIG .................AT-162
A/T Wiring diagram AT - TCV .......................AT-156
A/T Wiring diagram AT - TPS........................AT-185
A/T Wiring diagram AT - VSSMTR................AT-202
ATP switch ....................................................TF-149
ATP warning lamp.........................................TF-139
Audio .............................................................EL-191
AUDIO - Wiring diagram ...............................EL-192
Audio and A/C control removal and
installation - See Instrument panel .............BT-22
AUT/DP - Wiring diagram .............................EL-226
Auto air conditioner - Wiring diagram ......HA-35, 40
Automatic amplifier...................................HA-44, 89
Automatic drive positioner ............................EL-221
Automatic speed control system - See
ASCD ........................................................EL-256
Automatic transmission fluid
replacement................................................MA-23
Automatic transmission number ......................GI-45
Axle ................................................................MA-29
Axle housing (rear) .........................................AX-20
IDX-2
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
B
Back door ........................................................BT-16
Back door opener - See Back door ................BT-16
Back door trim.................................................BT-35
Back-up lamp ..................................................EL-78
Back-up lamp switch (M/T) ..............................MT-5
BACK/L - Wiring diagram................................EL-78
Ball joint (front) ...............................................SU-15
Basic inspection ...........................................EC-131
Battery ..............................................................SC-4
Battery/Starting/Charging System
Tester................................................SC-7, 13, 23
Baulk ring (M/T) ..............................................MT-11
Blower motor ........................................HA-114, 227
Blower resistor..............................................HA-227
Body alignment ...............................................BT-62
Brake booster .................................................BR-19
Brake control valve (Proportioning
valve) ..........................................................BR-12
Brake fluid change ...........................................BR-8
Brake fluid level .............................................MA-27
Brake fluid level and line check .......................BR-8
Brake hydraulic line ........................................BR-10
Brake inspection ............................................MA-27
Brake lines and cables inspection .................MA-27
Brake lining wear temporary checking ..........MA-28
Brake master cylinder ....................................BR-15
Brake pedal ....................................................BR-13
Brake switch .................................................EC-702
BRK/SW - Wiring diagram ...........................EC-704
Bulb specifications ........................................EL-536
Bumper, front ..................................................BT-13
Bumper, rear ...................................................BT-16
BYPS/V - Wiring diagram ....................EC-663, 670
C
Camshaft inspection ......................................EM-45
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) .............EC-357
CAN (Controller Area Network) ...EL-447, 452, 476,
498, 511
CAN - Wiring diagram ...EC-173, EL-453, 477, 499,
512
CAN communication ...EC-57, 172, BR-91, EL-447,
452, 476, 498, 511
Canister - See EVAP canister ........................EC-41
Center bearing assembly (propeller
shaft) ...........................................................PD-11
Center bearing disassembly (propeller
shaft) .............................................................PD-9
Center case (Transfer)............................TF-17, 160
CHARGE - Wiring diagram ............................SC-22
Charging system ............................................SC-21
Chassis and body maintenance ....................MA-22
CHIME - Wiring diagram...............................EL-151
CIGAR - Wiring diagram ...............................EL-175
Cigarette lighter.............................................EL-175
Circuit breaker.................................................EL-18
Clock .............................................................EL-176
CLOCK - Wiring diagram ..............................EL-176
Closed loop control (Bank 1) .......................EC-575
Closed loop control (Bank 2) .......................EC-575
Clutch cover ....................................................CL-12
Clutch disc ......................................................CL-12
Clutch drum (Transfer)..................................TF-162
Clutch fluid level.............................................MA-22
Clutch force release limit adjustment .............TF-76
Clutch master cylinder ......................................CL-8
Clutch operating cylinder ..................................CL-9
Clutch pedal ......................................................CL-5
Clutch pressure switch (Transfer).................TF-148
Clutch release bearing....................................CL-10
Clutch withdrawal lever...................................CL-10
Coil spring (front)............................................SU-10
Coil spring (rear) ............................................SU-40
Collision diagnosis..........................................RS-63
Combination lamp, front, removal and
installation ...................................................BT-13
Combination lamp, rear, removal and
installation ...................................................BT-36
Combination meter........................................EL-123
Combination meter removal and installation - See Instrument panel......................BT-22
Combination switch .........................................EL-32
COMPAS - Wiring diagram ...........................EL-136
Compass .......................................................EL-135
Component Location (auto A/C).....................HA-31
Component Location (manual A/C) ..............HA-209
Compression pressure ...................................EM-14
Compressor clutch removal and
installation.........................................HA-175, 258
Compressor description ...............................HA-200
Compressor precaution ............................HA-7, 191
Compressor special service tool ............HA-11, 195
Connecting rod...............................................EM-67
Connecting rod bearing clearance.................EM-71
Connecting rod bushing clearance ................EM-72
Connector inspection .......................................GI-21
Console box - See Instrument panel ..............BT-22
CONSULT for ABS .........................................BR-43
CONSULT for all-mode 4WD..........................TF-65
CONSULT for engine ....................................EC-111
CONSULT for VDC.......................................BR-106
CONSULT-II general information.....................GI-39
Control valve (A/T) ........................................AT-301
Control valve (Transfer) ................................TF-165
Controller Area Network (CAN) ...EL-447, 452, 476,
498, 511
Converter housing installation.......................AT-277
Coolant mixture ratio......................................MA-13
Coolant replacement ......................................MA-15
Cooling circuit (engine) ...................................LC-11
Counter gear (M/T) .........................................MT-11
Counter gear (Transfer) ..................................TF-18
Coupling sleeve (M/T) ....................................MT-11
Crankcase emission control system See positive crankcase ventilation .............EC-56
Crankshaft ......................................................EM-69
IDX-3
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ...............EC-350
Cruise control - See ASCD ...........................EL-256
Cylinder block ................................................EM-63
Cylinder head .................................................EM-41
Cylinder head bolt tightening .........................EM-52
D
Data link connector for Consult ....................EC-111
Daytime light system.......................................EL-50
Daytime running light - See Daytime
light system .................................................EL-50
DEF - Wiring diagram ...................................EL-179
Detonation sensor - See Knock sensor .......EC-345
Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for OBD
system ..................................................EC-10, 86
Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) inspection priority chart .......................................EC-137
Differential carrier assembly.....................PD-31, 58
Differential carrier disassembly ......................PD-45
Differential gear oil replacement ....................MA-26
Dimensions ......................................................GI-46
D/LOCK - Wiring diagram .............................EL-278
Dome light - See Interior lamp .......................EL-97
Door glass .......................................................BT-19
Door lock .........................................................BT-19
Door mirror ......................................................BT-61
Door trim .........................................................BT-31
Door, front .......................................................BT-19
Door, rear ........................................................BT-21
Drive belt inspection ......................................MA-14
Drive chain (Transfer) .............................TF-18, 162
Drive pinion diff. inspection ......................PD-24, 48
Drive pinion height ...................................PD-26, 54
Drive plate runout ..........................................EM-73
Drive shaft ......................................................MA-30
Drive shaft (front)............................................AX-12
Dropping resistor (A/T)..................................AT-173
DTC work support ........................................EC-123
DTRL - Wiring diagram ...................................EL-55
E
ECM input/output signal ...............................EC-149
ECM power supply ...............................EC-164, 473
ECM/PW - Wiring diagram ...........................EC-475
ECTS - Wiring diagram ................................EC-238
Electric sun roof ............................................EL-207
Electric throttle control actuator ...........EC-494, 496
Electrical diagnoses.........................................GI-24
Electrical ignition system ................................EC-39
Electrical unit ................................................Foldout
Electrical units location .................................EL-517
Engine compartment.......................................BT-63
Engine control circuit diagram........................EC-31
Engine control component parts
location .......................................................EC-26
Engine control module (ECM) ......................EC-471
Engine control system diagram and
chart ............................................................EC-34
Engine coolant temperature sensor
(ECTS)..............................................EC-236, 249
Engine fail-safe system ................................EC-138
Engine oil filter replacement ..........................MA-19
Engine oil precautions .......................................GI-7
Engine oil replacement ..................................MA-18
Engine outer component parts ......................EM-10
Engine removal ..............................................EM-59
Engine room - See Engine
compartment................................................BT-63
Engine serial number ......................................GI-45
ETC1 - Wiring diagram ................................EC-498
ETC2 - Wiring diagram ................................EC-506
ETC3 - Wiring diagram.................................EC-511
EVAP canister.................................................EC-42
EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve.............................EC-41, 396, 616
EVAP canister vent control
valve .........................................EC-403, 628, 636
EVAP control system (small leak)
diagnosis ..................EC-381, 425, 438, 601, 645
EVAP control system pressure
sensor ...............................................EC-410, 416
EVAP control system purge flow monitoring diagnosis.........................................EC-371
EVAP vapor lines inspection..........................MA-21
Evaporative emission (EVAP) system............EC-41
Exhaust system ................................................FE-9
Exhaust system inspection ............................MA-22
Exterior ............................................................BT-36
F
4LO indicator lamp........................................TF-141
4WD shift indicator lamp...............................TF-135
4WD shift switch ...........................................TF-148
4WD solenoid valve ......................................TF-148
4WD warning lamp .........................................TF-46
Fan control amp............................................HA-118
Fan switch ....................................................HA-227
F/FOG - Wiring diagram .................................EL-80
Final drive disassembly ..................................PD-44
Final drive pre-inspection ...............................PD-44
Final drive removal and installation ...............PD-44
Finisher, interior - See Trim ............................BT-29
Fluid temperature sensor (A/T) .....................AT-116
Fluids..............................................................MA-12
Flywheel (clutch) .............................................CL-13
Flywheel runout..............................................EM-73
Fog lamp, front................................................EL-79
Fog lamp, front, removal and
installation ...................................................BT-13
Fork rod (M/T) ................................................MT-13
Forward clutch...............................................AT-320
F/PUMP - Wiring diagram ............................EC-765
Freeze frame data ..........................................EC-87
Front axle..........................................................AX-2
Front bumper ..................................................BT-13
IDX-4
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Front case (Transfer) ..............................TF-17, 170
Front combination lamp removal and
installation ...................................................BT-13
Front disc brake .............................................BR-22
Front door .......................................................BT-19
Front drive shaft (Transfer).....................TF-18, 162
Front final drive disassembly (4WD) ..............PD-19
Front final drive pre-inspection (4WD) ...........PD-19
Front final drive removal and installation (4WD)...................................................PD-19
Front fog lamp.................................................EL-79
Front fog lamp removal and installation .........BT-13
Front revolution sensor (Transfer) ................TF-149
Front seat ........................................................BT-43
Front seat belt ..................................................RS-5
Front suspension ..............................................SU-3
Front washer .................................................EL-163
Front wiper ....................................................EL-163
Fuel cut control (at no load & high
engine speed) .............................................EC-41
Fuel filler lid.....................................................BT-16
Fuel filter replacement ...................................MA-17
Fuel gauge ....................................................EL-123
Fuel injection system ...........................EC-304, 312
Fuel injection system (Bank 1) ............EC-304, 312
Fuel injection system (Bank 2) ............EC-304, 312
Fuel level sensor..........................EC-454, 456, 458
Fuel line inspection ........................................MA-17
Fuel precautions ................................................GI-8
Fuel pressure check .......................................EC-64
Fuel pressure regulator ..................................EC-65
Fuel pressure release ....................................EC-64
Fuel pump ....................................................EC-763
Fuel system ......................................................FE-4
Fuel tank temperature sensor ..............EC-319, 322
Fuel tank vacuum relief valve ........................EC-42
FUELB1 - Wiring diagram ....................EC-306, 314
FUELB2 - Wiring diagram ....................EC-307, 315
Fuse ................................................................EL-18
Fuse and fusible link box .............................Foldout
Fuse block ....................................................Foldout
Fusible link ......................................................EL-18
G
Garage jack and safety stand .........................GI-48
Gauges..........................................................EL-123
Gear components (M/T) .................................MT-11
Generator - See Alternator .............................SC-30
Generic scan tool (GST) ..............................EC-125
Glass ...............................................................BT-19
Glass hatch opener, electric .........................EL-214
Grease ...........................................................MA-12
Ground distribution..........................................EL-19
H
Harness connector ............................................EL-7
Harness connector inspection .........................GI-21
Harness layout ..............................................EL-520
Hazard warning lamp ......................................EL-83
Headlamp ........................................................EL-35
Headlining - See Roof trim .............................BT-34
Heated oxygen sensor 1
(bank 1)....................EC-256, 264, 278, 541, 549
Heated oxygen sensor 1
(bank 2)....................EC-256, 264, 278, 541, 549
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 1) ............................EC-287, 295, 557, 566
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 2) ............................EC-287, 295, 557, 566
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
(bank 1) ............................................EC-179, 187
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
(bank 2) ............................................EC-179, 187
Heated oxygen sensor heater..............EC-179, 187
Heated seat .......................................BT-46, EL-217
Height (Dimensions) ........................................GI-46
HFC134a (R134a) system precaution .....HA-3, 187
HFC134a (R134a) system service
procedure..........................................HA-170, 253
HFC134a (R134a) system service
tools ....................................................HA-12, 196
HFC134a system service equipment
precaution .............................................HA-8, 192
High clutch.....................................................AT-317
H/LAMP - Wiring diagram ...............................EL-39
Homelink universal transceiver .....................EL-371
Hood................................................................BT-13
Horn ..............................................................EL-174
HORN - Wiring diagram................................EL-174
How to erase DTC for OBD system.............EC-100
HSEAT - Wiring diagram...............................EL-217
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
I
BR
IATS - Wiring diagram..........................EC-228, 233
Identification plate............................................GI-45
Idle air volume learning ..................................EC-81
Idle mixture ratio.............................................EC-69
Idle speed...............................................EC-69, 131
IGN/SG - Wiring diagram .............................EC-749
Ignition control system .................................EC-748
Ignition timing .........................................EC-69, 131
ILL - Wiring diagram .......................................EL-91
Illumination ......................................................EL-88
In vehicle sensor ..........................................HA-158
In-cabin Microfilter ................................HA-184, 267
INJECT - Wiring diagram .............................EC-759
Injector ..........................................................EC-758
Injector removal and installation ....................EC-66
Instrument panel .............................................BT-22
INT/L - Wiring diagram..................................EL-100
Intake air temparature sensor......EC-226, 231, 252
Intake door control linkage
adjustment ........................................HA-113, 225
Intake door motor .................................HA-105, 220
Intake manifold...............................................EM-12
IDX-5
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Intake sensor ................................................HA-165
Intake valve timing control ...................EC-175, 485
Intake valve timing control (Bank 1) ....EC-175, 485
Intake valve timing control (Bank 2) ....EC-175, 485
Intake valve timing control solenoid
valve .........................................................EC-178
Intake valve timing control solenoid
valve (Bank 1)...........................................EC-488
Intake valve timing control solenoid
valve (Bank 2)...........................................EC-488
Integrated homelink transmitter ....................EL-371
Interior .............................................................BT-29
Interior lamp ....................................................EL-97
Interior lamp on-off control..............................EL-98
Internal gear (Transfer) .................................TF-171
IVCB1 - Wiring diagram ...............................EC-490
IVCB2 - Wiring diagram ...............................EC-491
J
Jacking points ..................................................GI-47
Journal bearing assembly (propeller
shaft) ...........................................................PD-11
Journal bearing disassembly (propeller
shaft) ...........................................................PD-10
Junction box (J/B).........................................Foldout
K
KEYLES - Wiring diagram ............................EL-304
Keyless entry system - See Multi-remote control system ..................................EL-299
Knock sensor (KS) .......................................EC-345
Knuckle spindle ..............................................AX-10
KS - Wiring diagram .....................................EC-346
L
Length (Dimensions) .......................................GI-46
License lamp ...................................................EL-66
Lifting points ....................................................GI-49
Limited slip diff. adjustment............................PD-51
Limited slip diff. assembly ..............................PD-52
Limited slip diff. disassembly..........................PD-49
Limited slip diff. inspection .............................PD-50
Line pressure solenoid valve ........AT-153, 167, 173
Line pressure switch (Transfer) ....................TF-148
Line pressure test (A/T) ..................................AT-64
Liquid gasket application .................................EM-3
LOAD - Wiring diagram ................................EC-787
Location of electrical units ............................EL-517
Lock, door .......................................................BT-19
Low and reverse brake .................................AT-324
Low tire pressure warning system .................SU-16
Low tire pressure warning system trouble diagnoses .......................................SU-25
Low tire pressure warning system Wiring diagram............................................SU-18
Lubricant (R134a) A/C .........................HA-172, 255
Lubricants.......................................................MA-12
Lubrication circuit (engine) ...............................LC-3
Lubrication-locks, hinges and hood
latches ........................................................MA-30
Luggage room lamp ........................................EL-97
M
MAFS - Wiring diagram ......................EC-198, 207,
214, 222, 480
Magnet clutch...............................HA-125, 175, 258
MAIN - Wiring diagram.................................EC-165
Main drive gear (M/T) .....................................MT-11
Main gear (Transfer) .......................................TF-18
Main oil pump (Transfer)...............................TF-168
Mainshaft (M/T)...............................................MT-11
Mainshaft (Transfer)................................TF-18, 162
Maintenance (engine) ....................................MA-14
MAJOR OVERHALL......................................AT-281
Major overhaul (Transfer) .......................TF-16, 157
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) ..................EC-102
Manual air conditioner - Wiring diagram ......HA-213
Manual transmission number ..........................GI-45
Manual transmission oil replacement ............MA-22
Mass air flow sensor
(MAFS) .....................EC-194, 203, 211, 219, 478
Master cylinder (brake) ..................................BR-15
Master cylinder (clutch) ....................................CL-8
Meter .............................................................EL-123
METER - Wiring diagram..............................EL-128
MIL & Data link connectors circuit ...............EC-791
MIL/DL - Wiring diagram ..............................EC-791
MIRROR - Wiring diagram............................EL-213
Mirror defogger .............................................EL-177
Mirror, door......................................................BT-61
Mirror, out side ................................................BT-61
Misfire ...........................................................EC-335
Mode door control linkage adjustment...HA-99, 244
Mode door motor ............................................HA-92
Model variation ................................................GI-43
Molding - See Exterior ....................................BT-36
M/T major overhaul ........................................MT-10
M/T removal and installation ............................MT-7
Multi-remote control system..........................EL-299
Multiplex communication ..............................HA-168
Multiport fuel injection (MFI) system ..............EC-37
Multiport fuel injection precautions ....................GI-6
N
NATS (Nissan anti-theft system)...................EL-375
NATS - Wiring diagram .................................EL-377
NAVI - wiring diagram ...................................EL-404
Navigation System ........................................EL-395
Neutral-4LO switch .......................................TF-149
IDX-6
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
NVH troubleshooting (AX) ..........................AX-3, 19
NVH troubleshooting (BR)................................BR-7
NVH troubleshooting (CL) ................................CL-4
NVH troubleshooting (M/T) ..............................MT-4
NVH troubleshooting (PD)................................PD-4
NVH troubleshooting (ST).................................ST-6
NVH troubleshooting (SU) .........................SU-4, 37
NVH troubleshooting (Transfer) ......................TF-10
NVIS (Nissan vehicle immobilizer
system) ......................................................EL-375
O
O2H1B1 - Wiring diagram ............................EC-182
O2H1B2 - Wiring diagram ............................EC-183
O2H2B1 - Wiring diagram ............................EC-190
O2H2B2 - Wiring diagram ............................EC-191
O2S1B1 - Wiring diagram............EC-258, 267, 281
O2S1B2 - Wiring diagram............EC-259, 268, 282
O2S2B1 - Wiring diagram ...EC-289, 298, 560, 569
O2S2B2 - Wiring diagram ...EC-290, 299, 561, 570
Oil change (capacity) .....................................MA-12
Oil filter (Transfer) .........................................TF-155
Oil pan (engine) .............................................EM-16
Oil pressure (engine) ........................................LC-5
Oil pump (A/T)...............................................AT-297
Oil pump (engine) .............................................LC-6
Oil pump regulator valve (engine) ....................LC-7
Oil seal replacement (engine)........................EM-39
Oil seal replacement (front final drive
4WD)...........................................................PD-16
Oil seal replacement (front of final
drive) ...........................................................PD-41
On board diagnostic system ..........................EC-85
Operating cylinder (clutch)................................CL-9
ORVR (On-board Refueling Vapor
Recovery)....................................................EC-47
Out side mirror ................................................BT-61
Overdrive control switch................................AT-263
Overheat .......................................................EC-587
Overrun clutch ...............................................AT-320
Overrun clutch solenoid valve.......................AT-192
P
P/ANT - Wiring diagram................................EL-204
Park/Neutral position switch .........................EC-696
Park/neutral position switch (A/T) .........AT-109, 263
Park/neutral position switch (M/T)....................MT-5
Parking brake control .....................................BR-30
Parking lamp ...................................................EL-66
PCV (positive crankcase ventilation) .............EC-56
Periodic maintenance ......................................MA-7
PGC/V - Wiring diagram ......................EC-399, 619
PHASE - Wiring diagram .............................EC-359
Pinion bearing preload diff. ............................PD-26
Pinion gear height diff. .............................PD-26, 54
Piston assembly .............................................EM-73
Piston pin inspection ......................................EM-65
Piston ring inspection.....................................EM-66
Piston to bore clearance ................................EM-68
Planetary carrier (Transfer)...........................TF-171
PNP/SW - Wiring diagram ...........................EC-698
POS - Wiring diagram ..................................EC-352
POWER - Wiring diagram...............................EL-12
Power antenna ..............................................EL-203
Power door lock ............................................EL-276
Power door mirror .........................................EL-213
Power seat ....................................................EL-215
Power steering fluid level .....................MA-29, ST-8
Power steering gear........................................ST-17
Power steering hydraulic pressure .................ST-10
Power steering oil pump .................................ST-27
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor .......EC-466
Power steering system bleeding.......................ST-9
Power supply routing.......................................EL-11
Power transistor & ignition coil.....................EC-748
Power window ...............................................EL-257
PRE/SE - Wiring diagram ....................EC-412, 418
Precautions (General) .......................................GI-4
Pressure plate - See Clutch cover .................CL-12
Pressure test (A/T) ..........................................AT-64
Propeller shaft ..................................................PD-3
Propeller shaft greasing .................................MA-25
Propeller shaft inspection ..............................MA-25
Propeller shaft on vehicle service ....................PD-8
Propeller shaft vibration ...................................PD-8
PS/SEN - Wiring diagram ............................EC-467
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
R
AX
Rack retainer adjustment ..................................ST-8
Radiator ....................................................LC-21, 23
Radio - See Audio.........................................EL-191
Rear air spoiler ...............................................BT-36
Rear axle ........................................................AX-18
Rear bumper ...................................................BT-16
Rear case (Transfer)...............................TF-17, 160
Rear combination lamp removal and
installation ...................................................BT-36
Rear cover packing replacement diff. ............PD-17
Rear door ........................................................BT-21
Rear drum brake ............................................BR-26
Rear heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) ...........EC-557
Rear seat ........................................................BT-47
Rear seat belt ...................................................RS-6
Rear side window ...........................................BT-60
Rear suspension ............................................SU-37
Rear washer..................................................EL-168
Rear window defogger ..................................EL-177
Rear wiper.....................................................EL-168
Refregerant pressure sensor ...............HA-132, 251
Refrigerant connection precaution ...........HA-5, 189
Refrigerant discharging evacuating
charging ....................................................HA-170
Refrigerant general precaution ................HA-4, 188
Refrigerant lines ...................................HA-179, 262
Refrigerant pressure sensor.........................EC-770
IDX-7
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Refrigeration cycle .................................HA-16, 200
Release bearing (clutch).................................CL-10
REMOTE - Wiring diagram ...........................EL-202
Removal and installation (A/T)......................AT-276
Removal and installation (Transfer)........TF-15, 156
Reverse clutch...............................................AT-314
Reverse idler shaft (M/T)................................MT-11
Reverse lamp switch (M/T) - See
Back-up lamp switch (M/T)...........................MT-5
Reverse main gear (M/T) ...............................MT-11
Revolution sensor (A/T) ................................AT-121
Ring gear diff. inspection .........................PD-24, 48
Road wheel size ..............................................GI-46
Roof trim .........................................................BT-34
Room lamp - See Interior lamp ......................EL-97
RP/SEN - Wiring diagram ............................EC-771
S
SAE J1930 terminology list .............................GI-54
Screw jack .......................................................GI-47
Seal - See Exterior .........................................BT-36
SEAT - Wiring diagram .................................EL-215
Seat belt inspection .............................MA-31, RS-8
Seat belt pre-tensioner .....................................RS-3
Seat belt pre-tensioner disposal ....................RS-25
Seat belt, front ..................................................RS-5
Seat belt, rear...................................................RS-6
Seat, front .......................................................BT-43
Seat, rear ........................................................BT-47
Self-diagnosis (Transfer).................................TF-62
SEN/PW - Wiring diagram ...........................EC-598
SHIFT - Wiring diagram ................................AT-266
Shift control (Transfer) ..............................TF-19, 31
Shift control components (M/T) ......................MT-13
Shift fork (M/T) ...............................................MT-13
Shift lever .......................................................MT-13
Shift lock system ...........................................AT-265
Shift schedule................................................AT-356
Shift solenoid valve A (A/T) ..AT-131, 143, 153, 177
Shift solenoid valve B (A/T)..AT-131, 137, 153, 181
Shock absorber (rear) ....................................SU-40
Side air bag ....................................................RS-22
Side bearing preload (front final drive
4WD)...........................................................PD-25
Side trim ..........................................................BT-29
Side window - See Rear side window ............BT-60
Smart entrance control unit ..........................EL-362
SMJ (super multiple junction) .......................Foldout
Spare tire size .................................................GI-46
Spark plug replacement .................................MA-20
Speedometer.................................................EL-123
Spiral cable.....................................................RS-18
Splice location.......................EL-452, 476, 498, 511
Spot lamp ........................................................EL-97
Spring (Wheelarch) height ...............................SU-7
SROOF - Wiring diagram .............................EL-208
SRS - See Supplemental Restraint
System ........................................................RS-11
SRS - Wiring diagram ....................................RS-38
Stabilizer bar (front)........................................SU-13
Stabilizer bar (rear) ........................................SU-42
Stall test (A/T) .................................................AT-61
Standardized relay ............................................EL-9
START - Wiring diagram.................................SC-11
Starter .............................................................SC-19
Starting system...............................................SC-10
Steering gear, linkage and transfer
gear inspection ...........................................MA-28
Steering linkage ..............................................ST-17
Steering switch................................................EL-34
Steering transfer gear .....................................ST-15
Steering wheel and column.............................ST-11
Steering wheel play ..........................................ST-7
Steering wheel turning force .............................ST-9
Stop lamp ........................................................EL-76
Stop lamp switch..........................EC-685, 702, 775
STOP/L - Wiring diagram................................EL-76
Striking rod (M/T) ...........................................MT-13
Strut (front) .....................................................SU-10
Sub-gear (M/T) ...............................................MT-11
Sub-oil pump (Transfer) ................................TF-168
Sun gear (Transfer).......................................TF-171
Sunload sensor ............................................HA-162
Sunroof............................................................BT-48
Sunroof, electric ............................................EL-207
Supplemental Restraint System .....................RS-11
Supplemental restraint system - Wiring
diagram .......................................................RS-38
Suspension ....................................................MA-29
S/VCSW - Wiring diagram ...........................EC-579
Swirl control valve control solenoid
valve .................................................EC-514, 535
Swirl control valve control vacuum
check switch .............................................EC-577
SWL/V - Wiring diagram ......................EC-518, 537
Symbols and abbreviations .............................GI-10
Symptom matrix chart ..................................EC-139
Synchronizer (M/T) .........................................MT-11
System readiness test (SRT) code ................EC-87
T
2-4WD shift solenoid valve ...........................TF-148
T&FLID - Wiring diagram ..............................EL-214
Tachometer ...................................................EL-123
Tail lamp ..........................................................EL-66
TAIL/L - Wiring diagram ..................................EL-69
TCM circuit diagram ........................................AT-13
TCM inspection table ......................................AT-95
Temperature control cable and linkage
adjustment ................................................HA-242
TFTS - Wiring diagram.................................EC-324
Theft warning system....................................EL-328
Thermometer.................................................EL-135
Thermostat ......................................................LC-18
Three way catalyst function (Bank 1) ..........EC-366
Three way catalyst function (Bank 2) ..........EC-366
Three way catalyst precautions.........................GI-6
Throttle body ..................................................EM-12
IDX-8
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Throttle control motor ...................................EC-509
Throttle control motor relay ..........................EC-504
Throttle position sensor
(TPS)................EC-241, 327, 592, 594, 596, 723
Throttle valve closed position learning...........EC-81
Throwout bearing - See Clutch release
bearing ........................................................CL-10
Tie-rod .............................................................ST-21
Tie-rod ball joints.............................................ST-21
Tightening torque of standard bolts.................GI-52
Timing chain...................................................EM-21
Tire rotation ....................................................MA-26
Tire size ...........................................................GI-46
Tooth contact (front final drive 4WD) .............PD-30
Tooth contact diff. ...........................................PD-57
Torque converter clutch solenoid
valve ..................................................AT-158, 167
Torque converter installation .........................AT-277
Tow truck towing ..............................................GI-49
Towing point.....................................................GI-51
TPS1 - Wiring diagram.................................EC-330
TPS2 - Wiring diagram.................................EC-244
TPS3 - Wiring diagram.................................EC-726
Transfer case ..................................................TF-17
Transfer control unit inspection table..............TF-90
Transfer dropping resistor.............................TF-149
Transfer fluid replacement (All-mode
4WD model) ...............................................MA-24
Transfer fluid replacement (Part time
4WD model) ...............................................MA-24
Transfer fluid temperature sensor.................TF-148
Transfer motor...............................................TF-155
Transfer motor relay......................................TF-150
Transfer serial number ....................................GI-46
Transmission case (M/T)................................MT-10
TRANSMT - Wiring diagram .........................EL-371
Tread-FR&RR (Dimensions)............................GI-46
Trim .................................................................BT-29
TRNSCV - Wiring diagram ...........................EL-371
Trouble diagnoses ...........................................GI-34
Turbine revolution sensor..............................AT-209
TURN - Wiring diagram ..................................EL-85
Turn signal lamp .............................................EL-83
Two trip detection logic ..................................EC-85
Two-pole lift .....................................................GI-49
U
Under body .....................................................BT-65
V
Vacuum cut valve ...........................................EC-41
Vacuum cut valve bypass valve.....EC-41, 661, 667
Vacuum hose (brake system).........................BR-21
Vacuum hose drawing (Engine control) .........EC-35
Valve clearance..............................................EM-54
Valve guide.....................................................EM-46
Valve seat.......................................................EM-47
Valve spring....................................................EM-49
Vanity mirror lamp ...........................................EL-97
VDC (vehicle dynamics control) .....................BR-89
Vehicle identification number...........................GI-44
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck
vehicle).........................................................GI-51
Vehicle security (theft warning) system ........EL-328
Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) ........................EC-460
VEHSEC - Wiring Diagram ...........................EL-336
VENT/V - Wiring diagram ............EC-405, 630, 639
VIAS .............................................................EC-739
VIAS/V - Wiring diagram ..............................EC-741
Viscosity number (SAE) .................................MA-13
W
Wait detection switch ....................................TF-149
WARN - Wiring diagram ...............................EL-140
Warning chime ..............................................EL-149
Warning lamps ..............................................EL-139
Washer, front.................................................EL-163
Washer, rear..................................................EL-168
Water pump ....................................................LC-13
Water temperature gauge .............................EL-123
Weatherstrip - See Exterior ............................BT-36
Wheel balance ...............................................MA-26
Wheel bearing (front)........................................AX-4
Wheel bearing (rear) ......................................AX-19
Wheel hub (front)..............................................AX-6
Wheel sensor (VDC) ....................................BR-142
Wheel sensors (ABS)...............................BR-56, 80
Wheel size .......................................................GI-46
Wheelarch height .............................................SU-7
Wheelbase (Dimensions) ................................GI-46
Width (Dimensions) .........................................GI-46
WINDOW - Wiring diagram ..........................EL-261
Window, door ..................................................BT-19
Window, rear side ...........................................BT-60
Window, side - See Rear side window ...........BT-60
Windshield.......................................................BT-58
WIP/R - Wiring diagram ................................EL-170
WIPER - Wiring diagram ..............................EL-165
Wiper, front....................................................EL-163
Wiper, rear ....................................................EL-168
Wiring Diagram (Cell code) list .....................EL-537
Wiring diagram (Transfer) ...............................TF-53
Wiring diagrams ...............................................GI-11
Withdrawal lever (clutch) ................................CL-10
Wrist pin - See Piston pin inspection.............EM-65
IDX-9
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
NOTES
HEATER &
AIR CONDITIONER
SECTION
HA
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CONTENTS
AUTO
PRECAUTIONS ...............................................................3
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR
BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″...............3
Precautions for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a) .....3
General Refrigerant Precautions .................................4
Precautions for Leak Detection Dye............................4
Precaution for Identification Label on Vehicle .............5
Precautions for Refrigerant Connection ......................5
Precautions for Servicing Compressor........................7
Precautions for Service Equipment .............................8
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnoses..................10
PREPARATION .............................................................11
Special Service Tools ................................................11
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and
Equipment..................................................................12
DESCRIPTION ...............................................................16
Refrigeration System .................................................16
V-6 Variable Displacement Compressor....................17
Component Layout ....................................................21
Introduction ................................................................22
Features.....................................................................22
Overview of Control System......................................25
Control Operation ......................................................26
Discharge Air Flow.....................................................29
System Description....................................................30
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES................................................31
Component Location..................................................31
Circuit Diagram (Without Navigation System)...........34
Wiring Diagram - A/C, A - (Without Navigation
System)......................................................................35
Circuit Diagram (With Navigation System)................39
Wiring Diagram - A/C, A - (With Navigation
System)......................................................................40
Auto Amp. Terminals and Reference Value...............44
Self-diagnosis ............................................................48
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick
and Accurate Repair ..................................................79
CL
Operational Check .....................................................80
A/C System................................................................88
Mode Door Motor.......................................................92
Air Mix Door Motor ..................................................100
Intake Door Motor....................................................105
Blower Motor............................................................114
Magnet Clutch..........................................................125
Insufficient Cooling ..................................................133
Insufficient Heating ..................................................143
Noise........................................................................146
Self-diagnosis ..........................................................147
Memory Function .....................................................150
ECON (ECONOMY) Mode ......................................153
Ambient Sensor Circuit............................................155
In-vehicle Sensor Circuit..........................................158
Sunload Sensor Circuit............................................162
Intake Sensor Circuit ...............................................165
Air Mix Door Motor PBR Circuit ..............................167
Multiplex Communication Circuit .............................168
SERVICE PROCEDURE..............................................170
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure ..................170
Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in
Compressor .............................................................172
Compressor .............................................................175
Compressor Clutch ..................................................175
Refrigerant Lines .....................................................179
Checking for Refrigerant Leaks...............................180
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector ......................180
Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector...............................183
Belt...........................................................................184
In-cabin Microfilter ...................................................184
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .......186
Auto..........................................................................186
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
MANUAL
PRECAUTIONS ...........................................................187
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR
BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″...........187
IDX
CONTENTS
Precautions for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a) .187
General Refrigerant Precautions .............................188
Precautions for Leak Detection Dye........................188
Precaution for Identification Label on Vehicle .........189
Precautions for Refrigerant Connection ..................189
Precautions for Servicing Compressor....................191
Precautions for Service Equipment .........................192
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnoses................194
PREPARATION ...........................................................195
Special Service Tools ..............................................195
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and
Equipment................................................................196
DESCRIPTION .............................................................200
Refrigeration System ...............................................200
V-6 Variable Displacement Compressor..................201
Component Layout ..................................................205
Control Operation ....................................................206
Discharge Air Flow...................................................207
System Description..................................................208
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..............................................209
Component Location................................................209
Wiring Diagram - HEATER -....................................211
Circuit Diagram - Air Conditioner.............................212
Wiring Diagram - A/C, M - .......................................213
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick
and Accurate Repair ................................................216
(Cont’d)
Operational Check ...................................................217
Intake Door ..............................................................219
Blower Motor............................................................226
Insufficient Cooling ..................................................233
Insufficient Heating ..................................................241
Air Outlet..................................................................243
Magnet Clutch..........................................................245
Noise........................................................................252
SERVICE PROCEDURE..............................................253
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure ..................253
Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in
Compressor .............................................................255
Compressor .............................................................258
Compressor Clutch ..................................................258
Refrigerant Lines .....................................................262
Checking for Refrigerant Leaks...............................263
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector ......................263
Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector...............................266
Belt...........................................................................267
In-cabin Microfilter ...................................................267
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .......269
Manual .....................................................................269
HA-2
PRECAUTIONS
AUTO
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR
BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
GI
NAHA0153
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL R50 is as follows:
쐌 For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
쐌 For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of side air bag module (located in the outer side of front seat),
side curtain air bag module (locating in the headlining side of front and rear seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring harness, warning lamp (one
of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
WARNING:
쐌 To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
쐌 Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.
쐌 Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connector (and by yellow harness protector or yellow insulation tape before the harness connectors).
Precautions for Working with HFC-134a
(R-134a)
NAHA0154
WARNING:
쐌 CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant are not compatible. If the refrigerants
are mixed and compressor failure is likely to occur, refer to “CONTAMINATED REFRIGERANT”
below. To determine the purity of HFC-134a (R-134a) in the vehicle and recovery tank, use Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling Recharging equipment (ACR4) (J-39500-NI) and Refrigerant Identifier.
쐌 Use only specified lubricant for the HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system and HFC-134a (R-134a) components. If lubricant other than that specified is used, compressor malfunction is likely to occur.
쐌 The specified HFC-134a (R-134a) lubricant rapidly absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. The following handling precautions must be observed:
a) When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to
minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere.
b) When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just
before connecting the components. Connect all refrigerant loop components as quickly as possible to minimize the entry of moisture into system.
c) Only use the specified lubricant from a sealed container. Immediately reseal containers of lubricant. Without proper sealing, lubricant will become moisture saturated and should not be used.
d) Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and
throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the A/C system, using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment, or J2209 HFC-134a
(R-134a) recovery equipment. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before
resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and
lubricant manufacturers.
e) Do not allow lubricant (Nissan A/C System Oil Type S) to come in contact with styrofoam parts.
Damage may result.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
CONTAMINATED REFRIGERANT
NAHA0154S01
If a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in a vehicle, your options are:
쐌 Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated refrigerant into
the atmosphere.
쐌 Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage your service equipment and refrigerant supply.
HA-3
EL
IDX
PRECAUTIONS
AUTO
Precautions for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a) (Cont’d)
쐌
쐌
쐌
Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the contamination may
have occurred.
If you choose to perform the repair, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and containers. Do not recover contaminated refrigerant into your existing service equipment. If your facility does not have dedicated recovery equipment, you may contact a local refrigerant product retailer for
available service. This refrigerant must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and local regulations.
In addition, replacement of all refrigerant system components on the vehicle is recommended.
If the vehicle is within the warranty period, the air conditioner warranty is void. Please contact Nissan
Customer Affairs for further assistance.
General Refrigerant Precautions
NAHA0155
WARNING:
쐌 Do not release refrigerant into the air. Use approved recovery/recycling equipment to capture the
refrigerant every time an air conditioning system is discharged.
쐌 Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or
air conditioning system.
쐌 Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 52°C (125°F).
쐌 Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the
bottom of the container in a warm pail of water.
쐌 Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers.
쐌 Keep refrigerant away from open flames: poisonous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns.
쐌 Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent
suffocation.
쐌 Do not pressure test or leak test HFC-134a (R-134a) service equipment and/or vehicle air conditioning systems with compressed air during repair. Some mixtures of air and HFC-134a (R-134a)
have been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures, if ignited, may cause
injury or property damage. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant manufacturers.
Precautions for Leak Detection Dye
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
NAHA0247
The A/C system contains a fluorescent leak detection dye used for locating refrigerant leaks. An ultraviolet (UV) lamp is required to illuminate the dye when inspecting for leaks.
Always wear fluorescence enhancing UV safety glasses to protect your eyes and enhance the visibility of
the fluorescent dye.
A compressor shaft seal should not be repaired because of dye seepage. The compressor shaft seal
should only be repaired after confirming the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995).
Always remove any dye from the leak area after repairs are complete to avoid a misdiagnosis during a
future service.
Do not allow dye to come into contact with painted body panels or interior components. If dye is spilled,
clean immediately with the approved dye cleaner. Fluorescent dye left on a surface for an extended period
of time cannot be removed.
Do not spray the fluorescent dye cleaning agent on hot surfaces (engine exhaust manifold, etc.).
Do not use more than one refrigerant dye bottle (1/4 ounce /7.4 cc) per A/C system.
Leak detection dyes for HFC-134a (R-134a) and CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems are different. Do not use
HFC-134a (R-134a) leak detection dye in CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system or CFC-12 (R-12) leak detection dye
in HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems or A/C system damage may result.
The fluorescent properties of the dye will remain for over three (3) years unless a compressor failure
occurs.
HA-4
PRECAUTIONS
AUTO
Precaution for Identification Label on Vehicle
Precaution for Identification Label on Vehicle
쐌
쐌
쐌
NAHA0248
Vehicles with factory installed fluorescent dye have this identification label on the under side of hood.
Vehicles with factory installed fluorescent dye have a green
label.
Vehicles without factory installed fluorescent dye have a blue
label.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SHA436FA
Precautions for Refrigerant Connection
EC
NAHA0156
A new type refrigerant connection has been introduced to all refrigerant lines except the following location.
쐌 Expansion valve to evaporator
FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT CONNECTION
쐌
쐌
FE
NAHA0156S01
The O-ring has been relocated. It has also been provided with a groove for proper installation. This eliminates the chance of the O-ring being caught in, or damaged by, the mating part. The sealing direction of
the O-ring is now set vertically in relation to the contacting surface of the mating part to improve sealing
characteristics.
The reaction force of the O-ring will not occur in the direction that causes the joint to pull out, thereby
facilitating piping connections.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
SHA815E
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-5
PRECAUTIONS
AUTO
Precautions for Refrigerant Connection (Cont’d)
O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION
NAHA0156S02
RHA068I
CAUTION:
The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not confuse
O-rings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will leak at, or
around, the connection.
O-Ring Part Numbers and Specifications
Connection type
NAHA0156S0201
O-ring
size
New
Part number
D
mm (in)
W
mm (in)
92471 N8210
6.8 (0.268)
1.85 (0.0728)
92470 N8200
6.07 (0.2390)
1.78 (0.0701)
92472 N8210
10.9 (0.429)
2.43 (0.0957)
92475 71L00
11.0 (0.433)
2.4 (0.094)
92473 N8210
13.6 (0.535)
2.43 (0.0957)
92475 72L00
14.3 (0.563)
2.3 (0.0906)
92474 N8210
16.5 (0.650)
2.43 (0.0957)
92477 N8200
17.12 (0.6740)
1.78 (0.0701)
8
Former
New
12
Former
New
16
Former
SHA814E
New
19
Former
WARNING:
Make sure all refrigerant is discharged into the recycling equipment and the pressure in the system
is less than atmospheric pressure. Then gradually loosen the discharge side hose fitting and remove
it.
HA-6
PRECAUTIONS
AUTO
Precautions for Refrigerant Connection (Cont’d)
CAUTION:
When replacing or cleaning refrigerant cycle components, observe the following.
쐌 When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car.
Malfunction to do so will cause lubricant to enter the low pressure chamber.
쐌 When connecting tubes, always use a torque wrench and a back-up wrench.
쐌 After disconnecting tubes, immediately plug all openings to prevent entry of dirt and moisture.
쐌 When installing an air conditioner in the vehicle, connect the pipes as the final stage of the operation. Do not remove the seal caps of pipes and other components until just before required for
connection.
쐌 Allow components stored in cool areas to warm to working area temperature before removing seal
caps. This prevents condensation from forming inside A/C components.
쐌 Thoroughly remove moisture from the refrigeration system before charging the refrigerant.
쐌 Always replace used O-rings.
쐌 When connecting tube, apply lubricant to circle of the O-rings shown in illustration. Be careful not
to apply lubricant to threaded portion.
Lubricant name: Nissan A/C System Oil Type S
Part number: KLH00-PAGS0
쐌 O-ring must be closely attached to dented portion of tube.
쐌 When replacing the O-ring, be careful not to damage O-ring and tube.
쐌 Connect tube until you hear it click, then tighten the nut or bolt by hand until snug. Make sure that
the O-ring is installed to tube correctly.
쐌 After connecting line, conduct leak test and make sure that there is no leakage from connections.
When the gas leaking point is found, disconnect that line and replace the O-ring. Then tighten
connections of seal seat to the specified torque.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
RHA861F
Precautions for Servicing Compressor
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
BT
NAHA0157
Plug all openings to prevent moisture and foreign matter from entering.
When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car.
When replacing or repairing compressor, follow “Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor” exactly. Refer to HA-172.
Keep friction surfaces between clutch and pulley clean. If the surface is contaminated, with
lubricant, wipe it off by using a clean waste cloth moistened with thinner.
After compressor service operation, turn the compressor shaft by hand more than five turns in
both directions. This will equally distribute lubricant inside the compressor. After the compressor
is installed, let the engine idle and operate the compressor for one hour.
After replacing the compressor magnet clutch, apply voltage to the new one and check for usual
operation.
HA-7
SC
EL
IDX
PRECAUTIONS
AUTO
Precautions for Service Equipment
Precautions for Service Equipment
RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT
NAHA0158
NAHA0158S01
Be certain to follow the manufacturers instructions for machine
operation and machine maintenance. Never introduce any refrigerant other than that specified into the machine.
ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR
NAHA0158S02
Be certain to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for tester operation and tester maintenance.
VACUUM PUMP
NAHA0158S03
The lubricant contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible
with the specified lubricant for HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems.
The vent side of the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric
pressure. So the vacuum pump lubricant may migrate out of the
pump into the service hose. This is possible when the pump is
switched off after evacuation (vacuuming) and hose is connected
to it.
To prevent this migration, use a manual valve placed near the
hose-to-pump connection, as follows.
쐌 Usually vacuum pumps have a manual isolator valve as part
of the pump. Close this valve to isolate the service hose from
the pump.
쐌 For pumps without an isolator, use a hose equipped with a
manual shut-off valve near the pump end. Close the valve to
isolate the hose from the pump.
쐌 If the hose has an automatic shut off valve, disconnect the
hose from the pump. As long as the hose is connected, the
valve is open and lubricating oil may migrate.
Some one-way valves open when vacuum is applied and close
under a no vacuum condition. Such valves may restrict the pump’s
ability to pull a deep vacuum and are not recommended.
RHA270DA
MANIFOLD GAUGE SET
NAHA0158S04
Be certain that the gauge face indicates R-134a or 134a. Be sure
the gauge set has 1/2″-16 ACME threaded connections for service
hoses. Confirm the set has been used only with refrigerant HFC134a (R-134a) and specified lubricants.
SHA533D
SERVICE HOSES
NAHA0158S05
Be certain that the service hoses display the markings described
(colored hose with black stripe). All hoses must include positive
shut off devices (either manual or automatic) near the end of the
hoses opposite the manifold gauge.
RHA272D
HA-8
PRECAUTIONS
AUTO
Precautions for Service Equipment (Cont’d)
SERVICE COUPLERS
NAHA0158S06
Never attempt to connect HFC-134a (R-134a) service couplers to
an CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system. The HFC-134a (R-134a) couplers
will not properly connect to the CFC-12 (R-12) system. However, if
an improper connection is attempted, discharging and contamination may occur.
Shut-off valve rotation
A/C service valve
Clockwise
Open
Counterclockwise
Close
GI
MA
EM
LC
RHA273D
REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE
EC
NAHA0158S07
Verify that no refrigerant other than HFC-134a (R-134a) and specified lubricants have been used with the scale. If the scale controls
refrigerant flow electronically, the hose fitting must be 1/2″-16
ACME.
FE
CL
MT
RHA274D
CALIBRATING ACR4 WEIGHT SCALE
AT
NAHA0158S08
Calibrate the scale every three months.
To calibrate the weight scale on the ACR4 (J-39500-NI):
1. Press Shift/Reset and Enter at the same time.
2. Press 8787. “A1” will be displayed.
3. Remove all weight from the scale.
4. Press 0, then press Enter. “0.00” will be displayed and change
to “A2”.
5. Place a known weight (dumbbell or similar weight), between
4.5 and 8.6 kg (10 and 19 lb) on the center of the weight scale.
6. Enter the known weight using four digits. (Example 10 lb =
10.00, 10.5 lb = 10.50)
7. Press Enter — the display returns to the vacuum mode.
8. Press Shift/Reset and Enter at the same time.
9. Press 6 — the known weight on the scale is displayed.
10. Remove the known weight from the scale. “0.00” will be displayed.
11. Press Shift/Reset to return the ACR4 to the program mode.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
CHARGING CYLINDER
NAHA0158S09
Using a charging cylinder is not recommended. Refrigerant may be
vented into air from cylinder’s top valve when filling the cylinder
with refrigerant. Also, the accuracy of the cylinder is generally less
than that of an electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge
equipment.
SC
EL
IDX
HA-9
PRECAUTIONS
AUTO
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnoses
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnoses
NAHA0159
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
쐌 GI-11, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”
쐌 EL-12, “Wiring Diagram — POWER —”.
When you perform trouble diagnoses, refer to the following:
쐌 GI-34, “HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”
쐌 GI-24, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR
AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”
HA-10
PREPARATION
AUTO
Special Service Tools
Special Service Tools
NAHA0160
GI
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
MA
Description
KV99106100
(J-41260)
Clutch disc wrench
Removing center bolt
EM
LC
EC
NT232
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
NT378
KV99232340
(J-38874)
or
KV992T0001
(
—
)
Clutch disc puller
Removing clutch disc
AX
SU
BR
NT376
KV99106200
(J-41261)
Pulley installer
Installing pulley
ST
RS
NT235
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-11
PREPARATION
AUTO
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and
Equipment
=NAHA0161
Never mix HFC-134a refrigerant and/or its specified lubricant with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and/or its lubricant.
Separate and non-interchangeable service equipment must be used for handling each type of refrigerant/
lubricant.
Refrigerant container fittings, service hose fittings and service equipment fittings (equipment which handles
refrigerant and/or lubricant) are different between CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). This is to avoid
mixed use of the refrigerants/lubricant.
Adapters that convert one size fitting to another must never be used: refrigerant/lubricant contamination will
occur and compressor malfunction will result.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
HFC-134a (R-134a)
refrigerant
Container color: Light blue
Container marking: HFC-134a (R-134a)
Fitting size: Thread size
쐌 Large container 1/2″-16 ACME
NT196
KLH00-PAGS0
(
—
)
Nissan A/C System Oil
Type S
Type: Poly alkylene glycol oil (PAG), type S
Application: HFC-134a (R-134a) swash plate (piston) compressors (Nissan only)
Lubricity: 40 m (1.4 US fl oz, 1.4 Imp fl oz)
NT197
(J-39500-NI)
Recovery/Recycling
Recharging equipment
(ACR4)
Function: Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling and
Recharging
NT195
(J-41995)
Electrical leak detector
Power supply:
쐌 DC 12V (Cigarette lighter)
AHA281A
HA-12
PREPARATION
AUTO
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment (Cont’d)
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
GI
Description
(J-43926)
Refrigerant dye leak
detection kit
Kit includes:
(J-42220) UV lamp and
UV safety glasses
(J-41459) Refrigerant
dye injector
(J-41447) qty. 24
R-134a refrigerant dye
(J-43872) Refrigerant
dye cleaner
Power supply:
DC 12V (Battery terminal)
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
ZHA200H
(J-42220)
Fluorescent dye leak
detector
UV lamp
UV safety glasses
Power supply: DC12V (Battery terminal)
For checking refrigerant leak when fluorescent dye
is installed in A/C system.
Includes: UV lamp and UV safety glasses
CL
MT
SHA438F
(J-41447)
R-134a Fluorescent Leak
Detection Dye (Box of
24, 1/4 ounce bottles)
AT
Dye
Application: For R-134a PAG oil
Container: 1/4 ounce (7.4 cc) bottle
(Includes self-adhesive dye identification labels for
affixing to vehicle after charging system with dye.)
TF
PD
SHA439F
(J-41459)
R-134a Dye Injector
Use with J-41447, 1/4
ounce bottle
AX
Dye injector
For injecting 1/4 ounce of Fluorescent Leak Detection Dye into A/C system.
SU
BR
SHA440F
(J-43872)
Dye cleaner
For cleaning dye spills.
ST
RS
BT
SHA441F
(J-39183)
Manifold gauge set (with
hoses and couplers)
Identification:
쐌 The gauge face indicates R-134a.
Fitting size: Thread size
쐌 1/2″-16 ACME
SC
EL
NT199
IDX
HA-13
PREPARATION
AUTO
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment (Cont’d)
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
Service hoses
쐌 High side hose
(J-39501-72)
쐌 Low side hose
(J-39502-72)
쐌 Utility hose
(J-39476-72)
Hose color:
쐌 Low hose: Blue with black stripe
쐌 High hose: Red with black stripe
쐌 Utility hose: Yellow with black stripe or green
with black stripe
Hose fitting to gauge:
쐌 1/2″-16 ACME
NT201
Service couplers
쐌 High side coupler
(J-39500-20)
쐌 Low side coupler
(J-39500-24)
Hose fitting to service hose:
쐌 M14 x 1.5 fitting is optional or permanently
attached.
NT202
(J-39650)
Refrigerant weight scale
For measuring of refrigerant
Fitting size: Thread size
쐌 1/2″-16 ACME
NT200
(J-39649)
Vacuum pump
(Including the isolator
valve)
Capacity:
쐌 Air displacement: 4 CFM
쐌 Micron rating: 20 microns
쐌 Oil capacity: 482 g (17 oz)
Fitting size: Thread size
쐌 1/2″-16 ACME
NT203
COMMERCIAL SERVICE TOOL
Tool name
NAHA0161S01
Description
Refrigerant identifier
equipment
For checking refrigerant purity and for system contamination
NT765
HA-14
PREPARATION
AUTO
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment (Cont’d)
Tool name
GI
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
MA
EM
LC
PBIC0190E
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-15
DESCRIPTION
AUTO
Refrigeration System
Refrigeration System
REFRIGERATION CYCLE
Refrigerant Flow
NAHA0162
NAHA0162S01
The refrigerant flows in the standard pattern, that is, through the compressor, the condenser, the liquid tank,
through the evaporator, and back to the compressor. The refrigerant evaporation through the evaporator coil
is controlled by an externally equalized expansion valve, located inside the evaporator case.
Freeze Protection
NAHA0162S02
Under usual operating conditions, when the a/c is switched on, the compressor runs continuously, and the
evaporator pressure, and therefore temperature, is controlled by the V-6 variable displacement compressor to
prevent freeze up.
Refrigerant System Protection
NAHA0162S03
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
NAHA0162S0301
The refrigerant system is protected against excessively high or low pressures by the refrigerant pressure
sensor, located on the condenser. If the system pressure rises above, or falls below the specifications, the
refrigerant pressure sensor detects the pressure inside the refrigerant line and sends the voltage signal to the
ECM. ECM makes the A/C relay go OFF and stops the compressor when pressure on the high pressure side
detected by refrigerant pressure sensor is over about 2,746 kPa (28 kg/cm2, 398 psi) or below about 177 kPa
(1.8 kg/cm2, 26 psi).
Pressure Relief Valve
NAHA0162S0302
The refrigerant system is also protected by a pressure relief valve, located in the rear head of the compressor. When the pressure of refrigerant in the system increases to an unusual level [more than 3,727 kPa (38
kg/cm2, 540 psi)], the release port on the pressure relief valve automatically opens and releases refrigerant
into the atmosphere.
RHA031I
HA-16
DESCRIPTION
AUTO
V-6 Variable Displacement Compressor
V-6 Variable Displacement Compressor
GENERAL INFORMATION
GI
=NAHA0163
1. The V-6 variable compressor differs from previous units. The vent temperatures of the V-6 variable compress do not drop too far below 5°C (41°F) when:
쐌 evaporator intake air temperature is less than 20°C (68°F)
쐌 engine is running at speeds less than 1,500 rpm.
This is because the V-6 compressor provides a means of “capacity” control.
2. The V-6 variable compressor provides refrigerant control under varying conditions. During cold winters, it
may not produce high refrigerant pressure discharge (compared to previous units) when used with air
conditioning systems.
3. A “clanking” sound may occasionally be heard during refrigerant charge. The sound indicates that the tilt
angle of the swash plate has changed and is not a problem.
4. For air conditioning systems with the V-6 compressor, the clutch remains engaged unless: the system main
switch, fan switch or ignition switch is turned OFF. When ambient (outside) temperatures are low or when
the amount of refrigerant is insufficient, the clutch is disengaged to protect the compressor.
5. A constant range of suction pressure is maintained when engine speed is greater than a certain value. It
normally ranges from 147 to 177 kPa (1.5 to 1.8 kg/cm2, 21 to 26 psi) under varying conditions.
In previous compressors, however, suction pressure was reduced with increases in engine speed.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-17
DESCRIPTION
AUTO
V-6 Variable Displacement Compressor (Cont’d)
DESCRIPTION
General
=NAHA0164
NAHA0164S01
The variable compressor is basically a swash plate type that changes piston stroke in response to the required
cooling capacity.
The tilt of the swash plate allows the piston’s stroke to change so that refrigerant discharge can be continuously changed from 14.5 to 184 cm3 (0.885 to 11.228 cu in).
RHA037DD
HA-18
DESCRIPTION
AUTO
V-6 Variable Displacement Compressor (Cont’d)
Operation
=NAHA0164S02
1. Operation Control Valve
NAHA0164S0201
Operation control valve is located in the suction port (low-pressure) side, and opens or closes in response to
changes in refrigerant suction pressure.
Operation of the valve controls the internal pressure of the crankcase.
The angle of the swash plate is controlled between the crankcase’s internal pressure and the piston cylinder
pressure.
2. Maximum Cooling
NAHA0164S0202
Refrigerant pressure on the low-pressure side increases with an increase in heat loads.
When this occurs, the control valve’s bellows compress to open the low-pressure side valve and close the
high-pressure side valve.
This causes the following pressure changes:
쐌 the crankcase’s internal pressure to equal the pressure on the low-pressure side;
쐌 the cylinder’s internal pressure to be greater than the crankcase’s internal pressure.
Under this condition, the swash plate is set to the maximum stroke position.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
RHA473C
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-19
DESCRIPTION
AUTO
V-6 Variable Displacement Compressor (Cont’d)
3. Capacity Control
=NAHA0164S0203
쐌 Refrigerant pressure on suction side is low during high speed driving or when ambient or interior temperature is low.
쐌 The bellows expands when refrigerant pressure on the suction pressure side drops below approximately
177 kPa (1.8 kg/cm2, 26 psi).
Since suction pressure is low, it makes the suction port close and the discharge port open. Thus, crankcase pressure becomes high as high pressure enters the crankcase.
쐌 The force acts around the journal pin near the swash plate, and is generated by the pressure difference
before and behind the piston.
The drive lug and journal pin are located where the piston generates the highest pressure. Piston pressure is between suction pressure Ps and discharge pressure Pd, which is near suction pressure Ps. If
crankcase pressure Pc rises due to capacity control, the force around the journal pin makes the swash
plate angle decrease and also the piston stroke decrease. In other words, crankcase pressure increase
triggers pressure difference between the piston and the crankcase. The pressure difference changes the
angle of the swash plate.
RHA474C
HA-20
DESCRIPTION
AUTO
Component Layout
Component Layout
NAHA0166
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
RHA451G
HA-21
IDX
DESCRIPTION
AUTO
Introduction
Introduction
AIR CONDITIONER LAN SYSTEM OVERVIEW CONTROL SYSTEM
NAHA0167
NAHA0167S01
The LAN system consists of auto amp., mode door motor and air mix door motor.
A configuration of these components is shown in the diagram below.
RHA439G
Features
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NAHA0168
NAHA0168S10
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many
electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with
2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION (LAN)
NAHA0168S01
A small network is constructed between the auto amplifier, mode door motor and air mix door motor. The auto
amplifier and motors are connected by data transmission lines and motor power supply lines. The LAN network is built through the ground circuits of the two motors.
Addresses, motor opening angle signals, motor stop signals and error checking messages are all transmitted
through the data transmission lines connecting the auto amplifier and two motors.
The following functions are contained in LCUs built into the mode door motor and the air mix door motor.
쐌 Address
쐌 Motor opening angle signals
쐌 Data transmission
쐌 Motor stop and drive decision
쐌 Opening angle sensor (PBR function)
쐌 Comparison
쐌 Decision (Auto amplifier indicated value and motor opening angle comparison)
RHA440GA
Operation
NAHA0168S0101
The auto amplifier receives data from each of the sensors. The amplifier sends mode door and air mix door
opening angle data to the mode door motor LCU and air mix door motor LCU.
The mode door motor and air mix door motor read their respective signals according to the address signal.
HA-22
DESCRIPTION
AUTO
Features (Cont’d)
Opening angle indication signals received from the auto amplifier and each of the motor position sensors are
compared by the LCUs in each motor with the existing decision and opening angles. Subsequently, HOT/
COLD or DEFROST/VENT operation is selected. The new selection data is returned to the auto amplifier.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
RHA441GA
Transmission Data and Transmission Order
FE
NAHA0168S0102
Amplifier data is transmitted consecutively to each of the door motors following the form shown in figure below.
Start: Initial compulsory signal sent to each of the door motors.
Address: Data sent from the auto amplifier is selected according to data-based decisions made by the mode
door motor and air mix door motor.
If the addresses are identical, the opening angle data and error check signals are received by the door motor
LCUs. The LCUs then make the appropriate error decision. If the opening angle data is usual, door control
begins.
If an error exists, the received data is rejected and corrected data received. Finally, door control is based upon
the corrected opening angle data.
Opening angle: Data that shows the indicated door opening angle of each door motor.
Error check: Procedure by which sent and received data is checked for errors. Error data is then compiled.
The error check prevents corrupted data from being used by the mode door motor and air mix door motor.
Error data can be related to the following problems.
쐌 Unusual electrical frequency
쐌 Poor electrical connections
쐌 Signal leakage from transmission lines
쐌 Signal level fluctuation
Stop signal: At the end of each transmission, a stop operation, in-operation, or internal problem message is
delivered to the auto amplifier. This completes one data transmission and control cycle.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
RHA442G
EL
IDX
HA-23
DESCRIPTION
AUTO
Features (Cont’d)
Air Mix Door Control (Automatic Temperature Control)
NAHA0168S0103
The air mix door is automatically controlled so that in-vehicle temperature is maintained at a predetermined
value by: The temperature setting, ambient temperature, in-vehicle temperature and amount of sunload.
Fan Speed Control
NAHA0168S0104
Blower speed is automatically controlled based on temperature setting, ambient temperature, in-vehicle
temperature, intake temperature, amount of sunload and air mix door position.
With FAN switch set to “AUTO”, the blower motor starts to gradually increase air flow volume.
When engine coolant temperature is low, the blower motor operation is delayed to prevent cool air from flowing.
Intake Door Control
NAHA0168S0105
The intake doors are automatically controlled by: The temperature setting, ambient temperature, in-vehicle
temperature, intake temperature, amount of sunload and ON-OFF operation of the compressor.
Outlet Door Control
NAHA0168S0106
The outlet door is automatically controlled by: The temperature setting, ambient temperature, in-vehicle
temperature, intake temperature and amount of sunload.
Magnet Clutch Control
NAHA0168S0107
RHA197I
The ECM controls compressor operation using input signals from the throttle position sensor, refrigerant pressure sensor and auto amplifier.
Self-diagnostic System
NAHA0168S0108
The self-diagnostic system is built into the auto amplifier (LCU) to quickly locate the cause of problems.
HA-24
DESCRIPTION
AUTO
Overview of Control System
Overview of Control System
=NAHA0169
The control system consists of input sensors, switches, the automatic amplifier (microcomputer) and outputs.
The relationship of these components is shown in the diagram below:
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
RHA198I
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-25
DESCRIPTION
AUTO
Control Operation
Control Operation
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Except LE Grade
NAHA0170
NAHA0170S10
NAHA0170S1010
RHA452G
Display Screen
Displays the operational status of the system.
AUTO Switch
The compressor, intake doors, air mix door, outlet doors, and blower speed are automatically controlled so
that the in-vehicle temperature will reach, and be maintained at the set temperature selected by the operator.
ECON Switch
By pressing the ECON switch, the display should indicate ECON and the compressor always turns OFF. With
the compressor OFF, the system will not remove heat (cool) or de-humidify. The system will maintain the invehicle temperature at the set temperature when the set temperature is above the ambient (outside) temperature. The system will set the intake doors to the outside air position.
Temperature Switch (Potentio Temperature Control)
Increases or decreases the set temperature.
OFF Switch
The compressor and blower are OFF, the intake doors are set to the outside air position, and the air outlet
doors are set to the foot (80% foot and 20% defrost) position.
FAN Switch
Manual control of the blower speed. Four speeds are available for manual control (as shown on the display
screen):
low
, medium low
, medium high
, high
Recirculation (REC) Switch
OFF position: Set the inlet to automatic control.
ON position: Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. Compressor turns ON automatically.
Defroster (DEF) Switch
Positions the air outlet doors to the defrost position. Also positions the intake doors to the outside air position.
MODE Switch
Controls the air discharge outlets.
When switched to D/F, compressor turns ON and the intake doors are set to the FRE (Fresh) position automatically.
HA-26
DESCRIPTION
AUTO
Control Operation (Cont’d)
LE Grade
NAHA0170S1011
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
RHA140IA
Display Screen
Displays the operational status of the system.
AUTO Switch
The compressor, intake doors, air mix door, outlet doors, and blower speed are automatically controlled so
that the in-vehicle temperature will reach, and be maintained at the set temperature selected by the operator.
ECON Switch
By pressing the ECON switch, the display should indicate ECON and the compressor always turns OFF. With
the compressor OFF, the system will not remove heat (cool) or de-humidify. The system will maintain the invehicle temperature at the set temperature when the set temperature is above the ambient (outside) temperature. The system will set the intake doors to the outside air position.
OFF Switch
The compressor and blower are OFF, the intake doors are set to the outside air position, and the air outlet
doors are set to the foot (80% foot and 20% defrost) position.
FAN Switch
Manually controls the blower speed. Four speeds are available for manual control (as shown on the display
screen):
low
, medium low
, medium high
, high
RECIRCULATION (REC) Switch
OFF position: Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment.
ON position: Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. Compressor turns ON automatically.
DEFROSTER (DEF) Switch
Positions the air outlet doors to the defrost position. Also positions the intake doors to the outside air position.
MODE Switch
Controls the air discharge outlets. When switched to D/F, compressor turns ON and the intake doors are set
to the FRE (Fresh) position automatically.
Temperature Dial (Potentio Temperature Control)
Increases or decreases the set temperature.
Rear Window Defogger Switch
When illumination is ON, rear window is defogged.
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-27
DESCRIPTION
AUTO
Control Operation (Cont’d)
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
NAHA0170S11
RHA085I
Display Screen
NAHA0170S1101
Displays the operational status of the system.
AUTO Switch
NAHA0170S1102
The compressor, intake doors, air mix door, outlet doors, and blower speed are automatically controlled so
that the in-vehicle temperature will reach, and be maintained at the set temperature selected by the operator.
ECON Switch
NAHA0170S1103
By pressing the ECON switch, the display should indicate ECON and the compressor always turns OFF. With
the compressor OFF, the system will not remove heat (cool) or de-humidify. The system will maintain the invehicle temperature at the set temperature when the set temperature is above the ambient (outside) temperature. The system will set the intake doors to the outside air position.
OFF Switch
NAHA0170S1104
The compressor and blower are OFF, the intake doors are set to the outside air position, and the air outlet
doors are set to the foot (80% foot and 20% defrost) position.
FAN Switch
NAHA0170S1105
Manually controls the blower speed. Four speeds are available for manual control (as shown on the display
screen):
low
, medium low
, medium high
, high
Recirculation (REC) Switch
NAHA0170S1106
OFF position: Set the inlet to automatic control.
ON position: Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. Compressor turns ON automatically.
Defroster (DEF) Switch
NAHA0170S1107
Positions the air outlet doors to the defrost position. Also positions the intake doors to the outside air position.
MODE Switch
NAHA0170S1108
Controls the air discharge outlets.
When switched to D/F, compressor turns ON and the intake doors are set to the FRE (Fresh) position automatically.
Temperature Dial (Potentio Temperature Control)
Increases or decreases the set temperature.
HA-28
NAHA0170S1109
DESCRIPTION
AUTO
Discharge Air Flow
Discharge Air Flow
NAHA0171
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
RHA043G
HA-29
IDX
DESCRIPTION
AUTO
System Description
System Description
NAHA0246
SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTIONS
NAHA0246S01
RHA044GA
MODE SW
VENT
B/L
FOOT
DEF SW
D/F
ON
OFF
AUTO
SW
ECON
SW
REC SW
ON
Temperature SW or dial
OFF
Position or
switch
Door
18.0°C
(60°F)
—
Ventilator
door
A
B
C
C
C
—
—
Foot door
A
B
C
C
A
—
—
Defroster
door
A
A
B
C
C
—
—
Air mix
door
Intake
door
—
—
—
AUTO
AUTO
—
C
—
C
A
*1: Automatically controlled when REC switch is OFF.
HA-30
AUTO*1
A
AUTO
—
32.0°C
(90°F)
B
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Component Location
Component Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
NAHA0172
GI
NAHA0172S01
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
RHA069I
HA-31
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Component Location (Cont’d)
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Without Navigation System
NAHA0172S02
NAHA0172S0201
RHA498GC
HA-32
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Component Location (Cont’d)
With Navigation System
NAHA0172S0202
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
RHA857HA
HA-33
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Circuit Diagram (Without Navigation System)
Circuit Diagram (Without Navigation System)
NAHA0173
MHA187B
HA-34
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Wiring Diagram — A/C, A — (Without Navigation System)
Wiring Diagram — A/C, A — (Without
Navigation System)
GI
NAHA0174
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
MHA188B
HA-35
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Wiring Diagram — A/C, A — (Without Navigation System) (Cont’d)
MHA189B
HA-36
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Wiring Diagram — A/C, A — (Without Navigation System) (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
MHA190B
IDX
HA-37
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Wiring Diagram — A/C, A — (Without Navigation System) (Cont’d)
MHA191B
HA-38
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Circuit Diagram (With Navigation System)
Circuit Diagram (With Navigation System)
NAHA0257
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
MHA192B
HA-39
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Wiring Diagram — A/C, A — (With Navigation System)
Wiring Diagram — A/C, A — (With Navigation
System)
NAHA0258
MHA193B
HA-40
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Wiring Diagram — A/C, A — (With Navigation System) (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
MHA194B
IDX
HA-41
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Wiring Diagram — A/C, A — (With Navigation System) (Cont’d)
MHA195B
HA-42
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Wiring Diagram — A/C, A — (With Navigation System) (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
MHA196B
IDX
HA-43
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Auto Amp. Terminals and Reference Value
Auto Amp. Terminals and Reference Value
INSPECTION OF AUTO AMP.
NAHA0175
NAHA0175S01
쐌
Measure voltage between each terminal and body ground by
following “AUTO AMP. INSPECTION TABLE”.
쐌
Pin connector terminal layout
RHA464GA
RHA141I
RHA858H
RHA839H
AUTO AMP. INSPECTION TABLE
Without Navigation System
NAHA0175S02
NAHA0175S0201
TERMINAL
NO.
ITEM
CONDITION
Voltage
V
1
Intake sensor
—
—
2
Ambient sensor
—
—
3
In-vehicle sensor
—
—
HA-44
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Auto Amp. Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
ITEM
Voltage
V
CONDITION
AUTO SW: ON
6
Compressor feedback signal
AUTO SW: ON
8
Intake door position switch
Approximately 0
Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor connector
Approximately 5
FRESH or 20% FRESH
Approximately 0
RECIRCULATION
Approximately 5
Intake door position
Sensor ground
12
Sunload sensor
13
Water temperature signal
—
—
14
Ground (for Canada)
—
Approximately 0
16
A/C LAN signal
—
Approximately 5.5
18
Intake door position switch
Intake door position switch
21
Power supply for mode door
motor and air mix door motor
22
Compressor ON signal
24
Power supply for illumination
MA
EM
11
19
GI
—
—
Intake door position
Intake door position
LC
Approximately 0
—
20% FRE or RECIRCULATION
Approximately 0
FRESH
Approximately 5
RECIRCULATION or
FRESH
Approximately 0
20% FRE
Approximately 5
—
Approximately 12
ON
Approximately 0
OFF
Approximately 5
OFF
Approximately 0
1st
Approximately 12
Compressor
Lighting switch
25
Illumination ground
—
Approximately 0
26
Power supply for BAT
—
BATTERY VOLTAGE
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-45
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Auto Amp. Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
ITEM
27
Power supply for IGN
28
Power supply for intake door
motor
30
31
Voltage
V
CONDITION
—
Approximately 12
FRE , REC
Approximately 12
REC , FRE
Approximately 0
Rear window defogger switch: ON
Approximately 12
Rear window defogger switch: OFF
Approximately 0
Rear window defogger switch: ON
Approximately 0
Rear window defogger switch: OFF
Approximately 12
Intake door position
Rear defogger feedback signal
Rear defogger ON signal
32
Ground
—
Approximately 0
33
Power source for A/C
Ignition voltage feedback
Approximately 12
34
Blower motor feedback
Fan speed: Low
Approximately 7 - 10
35
Fan control AMP. control signal
36
Power supply for intake door
motor
Fan speed
Low, Middle low or Middle
high
Approximately 2.5 3.0
High
Approximately 9 - 10
FRE , REC
Approximately 0
REC , FRE
Approximately 12
Intake door position
With Navigation System
NAHA0175S0202
TERMINAL
NO.
ITEM
CONDITION
Voltage
V
1
Intake sensor
—
—
2
Ambient sensor
—
—
3
In-vehicle sensor
—
—
6
Intake door position switch
RECIRCULATION
Approximately 5
FRESH or 20% FRESH
Approximately 0
Intake door position
7
Multiplex communication signal
(AMP , NAVI)
—
—
8
Multiplex communication signal
(NAVI , AMP)
—
—
9
Sensor ground
10
Sunload sensor
—
—
HA-46
Approximately 0
—
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Auto Amp. Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
ITEM
11
Engine coolant temperature
signal
—
—
14
A/C LAN signal
—
Approximately 5.5
AUTO SW: ON
Approximately 0
17
Compressor feedback signal
AUTO SW: ON
18
19
Intake door position switch
Intake door position switch
20
Multiplex communication signal
(CLK)
21
Power supply for door motor
22
Compressor ON signal
24
Power supply for BAT
25
Power supply for IGN
26
Power supply for intake door
motor
Voltage
V
CONDITION
Intake door position
Intake door position
Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor connector
Approximately 5
FRESH
Approximately 5
RECIRCULATION or 20%
FRESH
Approximately 0
20% FRESH
Approximately 5
RECIRCULATION or
FRESH
Approximately 0
—
—
Approximately 12
Compressor: ON
Approximately 0
Compressor: OFF
Approximately 5
—
BATTERY VOLTAGE
—
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
Approximately 12
FRE , REC
Approximately 12
REC , FRE
Approximately 0
Intake door position
—
Approximately 0
33
Power source for A/C
—
Approximately 12
34
Blower motor feedback
Fan speed: Low
Approximately 7 - 10
Fan speed: Low, Middle low or Middle high
Approximately 2.5 3.0
Fan speed: High
Approximately 9 - 10
Fan control amp. control signal
Power supply for intake door
motor
EM
—
Ground
36
MA
EC
32
35
GI
REC , FRE
Approximately 12
FRE , REC
Approximately 0
Intake door position
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-47
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis
Self-diagnosis
INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION
=NAHA0176
NAHA0176S01
The self-diagnostic system diagnoses sensors, door motors, blower motor, etc. by system line. Refer to applicable sections (items) for details. Shifting from normal control to the self-diagnostic system is accomplished
by starting the engine (turning the ignition switch from “OFF” to “ON”) and pressing “
” switch for at least
” switch must be pressed within 10 seconds after starting the engine (ignition switch is
5 seconds. The “
turned “ON”). This system will be canceled by either pressing
(AUTO) switch or turning the ignition switch
“OFF”. Shifting from one step to another is accomplished by means of pushing
(HOT) or
(COLD) switch,
as required.
Additionally shifting from STEP 5 to AUXILIARY MECHANISM is accomplished by means of pushing (fan)
UP switch.
Without Navigation System (Except LE Grade)
NAHA0176S0101
RHA453GA
HA-48
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
Without Navigation System (Except LE Grade)
1
=NAHA0176S02
NAHA0176S0201
MA
SET IN SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Set in self-diagnostic mode as follows. Within 10 seconds after starting engine (ignition switch is turned “ON”.), press
switch for at least 5 seconds.
䊳
GI
EM
GO TO 2.
LC
2
STEP 1 - ALL LEDs AND SEGMENT ARE CHECKED
EC
Do all LEDs and segments illuminate?
FE
CL
MT
AT
RHA454G
TF
Yes or No
PD
Yes
䊳
GO TO 3.
No
䊳
switch, LED or fluorescent display tube.
Malfunctioning
Replace A/C auto amp.
3
CHECK TO ADVANCE SELF-DIAGNOSIS STEP 2
1. Press
(HOT) switch.
2. Advance to self-diagnosis STEP 2?
SU
Yes or No
BR
ST
Yes
䊳
GO TO 4.
No
䊳
Malfunctioning
(HOT) switch.
Replace A/C auto amp.
4
AX
CHECK TO RETURN SELF-DIAGNOSIS STEP 1
1. Press
(COLD) switch.
2. Return to self-diagnosis STEP 1?
RS
BT
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 5.
No
䊳
Malfunctioning
(COLD) switch.
Replace A/C auto amp.
SC
EL
IDX
HA-49
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
5
STEP 2 - SENSOR CIRCUITS ARE CHECKED FOR OPEN OR SHORT CIRCUIT
Press
(HOT) switch.
appear on the display?
Does code No.
RHA970DB
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 6.
No
䊳
GO TO 13.
6
STEP 3 - MODE DOOR AND INTAKE DOOR POSITIONS ARE CHECKED
Press
(HOT) switch.
Does code No.
appear on the display?
RHA869DD
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 7.
No
䊳
GO TO 14.
HA-50
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
7
GI
STEP 4 - OPERATION OF EACH ACTUATOR IS CHECKED
Press
(HOT) switch.
Engine running.
Press DEF switch, code No. of each actuator test is indicated on the display.
MA
EM
LC
EC
RHA495A
䊳
FE
GO TO 8.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-51
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
8
CHECK ACTUATORS
Refer to the following chart and confirm discharge air flow, air temperature, blower motor voltage and compressor operation.
Checks must be made visually, by listening to any noise, or by touching air outlets with your hand, etc. for
improper operation.
MTBL0200
MTBL0044
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
쐌 Air outlet does not change.
Go to “Mode Door Motor” (HA-92).
쐌 Intake door does not change.
Go to “Intake Door Motor” (HA-105).
쐌 Discharge air temperature does not change.
Go to “Air Mix Door Motor” (HA-100).
쐌 Blower motor operation is malfunctioning.
Go to “Blower Motor” (HA-114).
쐌 Magnet clutch does not engage.
Go to “Magnet Clutch” (HA-125).
HA-52
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
9
GI
STEP 5 - TEMPERATURE OF EACH SENSOR IS CHECKED
Press
(HOT) switch.
Code No. appears on the display.
MA
EM
LC
EC
RHA492A
䊳
FE
GO TO 10.
CL
10
CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR
Press
(DEF) switch one time, temperature detected by ambient sensor is indicated on the display.
ECON shown in display indicates negative temperature reading.
NOTE:
If temperature shown on display greatly differs from actual temperature, check sensor circuit first, then inspect sensor.
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
RHA499G
SU
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
Go to Ambient Sensor Circuit (HA-155).
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-53
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
11
CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
Press
(DEF) switch the second time, temperature detected by in-vehicle sensor is indicated on the display screen.
ECON shown in display indicates negative temperature reading.
NOTE:
If temperature shown on display greatly differs from actual temperature, check sensor circuit first, then inspect sensor.
RHA500G
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 12.
NG
䊳
Go to In-vehicle Sensor Circuit (HA-158).
12
CHECK INTAKE SENSOR
Press
(DEF) switch the third time, temperature detected by intake sensor is indicated on the display.
NOTE:
If temperature shown on display greatly differs from actual temperature, check sensor circuit first, then inspect sensor.
RHA500GB
OK or NG
OK
䊳
(DEF) switch the fourth time. Display returns to original presentation 5.
1. Press
2. Turn ignition switch OFF or
(AUTO) switch ON.
3. END
NG
䊳
Go to Intake Sensor Circuit (HA-165).
HA-54
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
13
GI
CHECK MALFUNCTIONING SENSOR
Refer to the following chart for malfunctioning code No.
(If two or more sensors malfunction, corresponding code Nos. blink respectively two times.)
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MTBL0083
*1: Conduct self-diagnosis STEP 2 under sunshine.
When conducting indoors, aim a light (more than 60W) at sunload sensor, otherwise Code No.
sunload sensor is functioning properly.
*2: HA-155
*3: HA-158
*4: HA-165
*5: HA-162
*6: HA-167
will indicate despite that
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
RHA455G
BR
ST
RS
BT
RHA501A
䊳
INSPECTION END
SC
EL
IDX
HA-55
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
14
CHECK MALFUNCTIONING DOOR MOTOR POSITION SWITCH
Mode or (and) intake door motor position switch(es) is (are) malfunctioning.
(If two or more mode or intake doors are out of order, corresponding code numbers blink respectively two times.)
MTBL0514
*1: If mode door motor harness connector is disconnected, the following display pattern will appear.
,
,
,
,
, Return to
*2: If intake door motor harness connector is disconnected, the following display pattern will appear.
,
,
, Return to
*3: HA-92
*4: HA-105
RHA168DA
RHA498A
䊳
INSPECTION END
HA-56
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
AUXILIARY MECHANISM: TEMPERATURE SETTING TRIMMER
=NAHA0176S03
The trimmer compensates for differences in range of ±3°C (±6°F) between temperature setting (displayed
digitally) and temperature felt by driver.
Operating procedures for this trimmer are as follows:
쐌 Begin Self-diagnosis STEP 5 mode.
쐌 Press (fan) UP switch to set system in auxiliary mode.
쐌 Display shows “ ” in auxiliary mechanism.
It takes approximately 3 seconds.
쐌 Press either
(HOT) or
(COLD) switch as desired. Temperature will change at a rate of 0.5°C (1°F)
each time a switch is pressed.
Without Navigation System (Except LE Grade)
NAHA0176S0301
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
SHA197E
When battery cable is disconnected, trimmer operation is canceled. Temperature set becomes that of
initial condition, i.e. 0°C (0°F).
HA-57
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION
NAHA0176S07
The self-diagnostic system diagnoses sensors, door motors, blower motor, etc. by system line. Refer to applicable sections (items) for details. Shifting from usual control to the self-diagnostic system is accomplished by
starting the engine (turning the ignition switch from “OFF” to “ON”) and pressing “
” switch for at least 5
seconds. The “
” switch must be pressed within 10 seconds after starting the engine (ignition switch is turned
(AUTO) switch or turning the ignition switch “OFF”.
“ON”). This system will be canceled by either pressing
Shifting from one step to another is accomplished by means of turning temperature dial, as required.
Additionally shifting from STEP 5 to AUXILIARY MECHANISM is accomplished by means of pushing (fan)
UP switch.
Without Navigation System (LE Grade)
NAHA0176S0702
RHA142I
HA-58
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
Without Navigation System (LE Grade)
1
=NAHA0176S08
NAHA0176S0802
MA
SET IN SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Set in self-diagnostic mode as follows. Within 10 seconds after starting engine (ignition switch is turned “ON”.), press
switch for at least 5 seconds.
䊳
GI
EM
GO TO 2.
LC
2
STEP 1 - ALL LEDs AND SEGMENT ARE CHECKED
EC
Do all LEDs and segments illuminate?
FE
CL
MT
RHA143I
AT
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 3.
No
䊳
Malfunctioning
switch, LED or fluorescent display tube.
Replace A/C auto amp.
3
TF
VERIFY ADVANCE TO SELF-DIAGNOSIS STEP 2
AX
1. Turn the temperature dial clockwise.
2. Does advance to self-diagnosis STEP 2?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 4.
No
䊳
Malfunctioning temperature dial.
Replace A/C auto amp.
4
PD
VERIFY RETURN TO SELF-DIAGNOSIS STEP 1
1. Turn the temperature dial counterclockwise.
2. Does return to self-diagnosis STEP 1?
SU
BR
ST
RS
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 5.
No
䊳
Malfunctioning temeprature dial.
Replace A/C auto amp.
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-59
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
5
STEP 2 - SENSOR CIRCUITS ARE CHECKED FOR OPEN OR SHORT CIRCUIT
Turn the temperature dial clockwise, go to STEP 2.
appear on the display?
Does code No.
RHA970DB
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 6.
No
䊳
GO TO 13.
6
STEP 3 - MODE DOOR AND INTAKE DOOR POSITIONS ARE CHECKED
Turn the temperature dial clockwise, go to STEP 3.
Does code No.
appear on the display?
RHA869DD
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 7.
No
䊳
GO TO 14.
HA-60
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
7
GI
STEP 4 - OPERATION OF EACH ACTUATOR IS CHECKED
Turn the temperature dial clockwise, go to STEP 4.
Engine running.
Press DEF switch, code No. of each actuator test is indicated on the display.
MA
EM
LC
EC
RHA495A
䊳
FE
GO TO 8.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-61
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
8
CHECK ACTUATORS
Refer to the following chart and confirm discharge air flow, air temperature, blower motor voltage and compressor operation.
Checks must be made visually, by listening to any noise, or by touching air outlets with your hand, etc. for
improper operation.
MTBL0200
MTBL0044
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
쐌 Air outlet does not change.
Go to “Mode Door Motor” (HA-92).
쐌 Intake door does not change.
Go to “Intake Door Motor” (HA-105).
쐌 Discharge air temperature does not change.
Go to “Air Mix Door Motor” (HA-100).
쐌 Blower motor operation is malfunctioning.
Go to “Blower Motor” (HA-114).
쐌 Magnet clutch does not engage.
Go to “Magnet Clutch” (HA-126).
HA-62
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
9
GI
STEP 5 - TEMPERATURE OF EACH SENSOR IS CHECKED
Turn the temperature dial clockwise, go to STEP 5.
Code No. appears on the display.
MA
EM
LC
EC
RHA492A
䊳
FE
GO TO 10.
CL
10
CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR
Press
(DEF) switch one time, temperature detected by ambient sensor is indicated on the display.
ECON shown in display indicates negative temperature reading.
NOTE:
If temperature shown on display greatly differs from actual temperature, check sensor circuit first, then inspect sensor.
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
RHA499G
SU
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
Go to Ambient Sensor Circuit (HA-155).
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-63
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
11
CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
Press
(DEF) switch the second time, temperature detected by in-vehicle sensor is indicated on the display screen.
ECON shown in display indicates negative temperature reading.
NOTE:
If temperature shown on display greatly differs from actual temperature, check sensor circuit first, then inspect sensor.
RHA500G
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 12.
NG
䊳
Go to In-vehicle Sensor Circuit (HA-158).
12
CHECK INTAKE SENSOR
Press
(DEF) switch the third time, temperature detected by intake sensor is indicated on the display.
NOTE:
If temperature shown on display greatly differs from actual temperature, check sensor circuit first, then inspect sensor.
RHA500GB
OK or NG
OK
䊳
(DEF) switch the fourth time. Display returns to original presentation 5.
1. Press
2. Turn ignition switch OFF or
(AUTO) switch ON.
3. END
NG
䊳
Go to Intake Sensor Circuit (HA-165).
HA-64
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
13
GI
CHECK MALFUNCTIONING SENSOR
Refer to the following chart for malfunctioning code No.
(If two or more sensors malfunction, corresponding code Nos. blink respectively two times.)
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MTBL0083
*1: Conduct self-diagnosis STEP 2 under sunshine.
When conducting indoors, aim a light (more than 60W) at sunload sensor, otherwise Code No.
sunload sensor is functioning properly.
*2: HA-156
*3: HA-159
*4: HA-166
*5: HA-162
*6: HA-167
will indicate despite that
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
RHA455G
BR
ST
RS
BT
RHA501A
䊳
INSPECTION END
SC
EL
IDX
HA-65
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
14
CHECK MALFUNCTIONING DOOR MOTOR POSITION SWITCH
Mode or (and) intake door motor position switch(es) is (are) malfunctioning.
(If two or more mode or intake doors are out of order, corresponding code numbers blink respectively two times.)
MTBL0508
*1: If mode door motor harness connector is disconnected, the following display pattern will appear.
,
,
,
,
, Return to
*2: If intake door motor harness connector is disconnected, the following display pattern will appear.
,
,
, Return to
*3: HA-93
*4: HA-106
RHA168DA
RHA498A
䊳
INSPECTION END
HA-66
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
AUXILIARY MECHANISM: TEMPERATURE SETTING TRIMMER
=NAHA0176S09
The trimmer compensates for differences in range of ±3°C (±6°F) between temperature setting (displayed
digitally) and temperature felt by driver.
Operating procedures for this trimmer are as follows:
쐌 Begin Self-diagnosis STEP 5 mode.
쐌 Press (fan) UP switch to set system in auxiliary mode.
쐌 Display shows “ ” in auxiliary mechanism.
It takes approximately 3 seconds.
쐌 Turn temperature dial clockwise or counter clockwide. Temperature will change at a rate of 0.5°C (1°F)
each time a switch is pressed.
Without Navigation System (LE Grade)
NAHA0176S0902
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
SHA330F
When battery cable is disconnected, trimmer operation is canceled. Temperature set becomes that of
initial condition, i.e. 0°C (0°F).
HA-67
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION
NAHA0176S04
The self-diagnostic system diagnoses sensors, door motors, blower motor, etc. by system line. Refer to applicable sections (items) for details. Shifting from usual control to the self-diagnostic system is accomplished by
starting the engine (turning the ignition switch from “OFF” to “ON”) and pressing “
” switch for at least 5
seconds. The “
” switch must be pressed within 10 seconds after starting the engine (ignition switch is turned
(AUTO) switch or turning the ignition switch “OFF”.
“ON”). This system will be canceled by either pressing
Shifting from one step to another is accomplished by means of turning temperature dial, as required.
Additionally shifting from STEP 5 to AUXILIARY MECHANISM is accomplished by means of pushing (fan)
UP switch.
With Navigation System
NAHA0176S0401
RHA094I
HA-68
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
With Navigation System
1
NAHA0176S05
NAHA0176S0501
MA
SET IN SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Set in self-diagnostic mode as follows. Within 10 seconds after starting engine (ignition switch is turned “ON”.), press
switch for at least 5 seconds.
䊳
GI
EM
GO TO 2.
LC
2
STEP 1 - ALL LEDs AND DISPLAY SCREEN ARE CHECKED
EC
When switch’s LED and display are functioning properly in STEP-1, LED and display will come on.
FE
CL
MT
RHA095I
AT
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
switch, LED or fluorescent display tube.
Malfunctioning
Go to “Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check”, HA-89.
TF
PD
3
VERIFY ADVANCE TO SELF-DIAGNOSIS STEP 2
AX
1. Turn temperature dial clockwise.
2. Does advance to self-diagnosis STEP 2?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 4.
No
䊳
Malfunctioning temperature dial.
Check Display & NAVI control unit.
4
VERIFY RETURN TO SELF-DIAGNOSIS STEP 1
1. Turn temperature dial counterclockwise.
2. Does return to self-diagnosis STEP 1?
SU
BR
ST
RS
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 5.
No
䊳
Malfunctioning temperature dial.
Check Display & NAVI control unit.
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-69
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
5
STEP 2 - SENSOR CIRCUITS ARE CHECKED FOR OPEN OR SHORT CIRCUIT
Turn temperature dial clockwise.
appear on the display?
Does code No.
RHA970DB
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 6.
No
䊳
GO TO 14.
6
STEP 3 - MODE DOOR AND INTAKE DOOR POSITIONS ARE CHECKED
Turn temperature dial clockwise.
Does code No.
appear on the display?
RHA869DD
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 7.
No
䊳
GO TO 15.
HA-70
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
7
GI
STEP 4 - OPERATION OF EACH ACTUATOR IS CHECKED
Turn temperature dial clockwise.
Engine running.
Press DEF switch, code No. of each actuator test is indicated on the display.
MA
EM
LC
EC
RHA495A
䊳
FE
GO TO 8.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-71
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
8
CHECK ACTUATORS
Refer to the following chart and confirm discharge air flow, air temperature, blower motor voltage and compressor operation.
Checks must be made visually, by listening to any noise, or by touching air outlets with your hand, etc. for
improper operation.
MTBL0200
MTBL0044
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
쐌 Air outlet does not change.
Go to “Mode Door Motor” (HA-94).
쐌 Intake door does not change.
Go to “Intake Door Motor” (HA-107).
쐌 Blower motor operation is malfunctioning.
Go to “Blower Motor” (HA-116).
쐌 Magnet clutch does not engage.
Go to “Magnet Clutch” (HA-127).
쐌 Discharge air temperature does not change.
Go to “Air Mix Door Motor” (HA-102).
HA-72
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
9
GI
STEP 5 - TEMPERATURE OF EACH SENSOR IS CHECKED
Turn temperature dial clcokwise.
Code No. appears on the display.
MA
EM
LC
EC
RHA492A
䊳
FE
GO TO 10.
CL
10
CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR
Press
(DEF) switch one time, temperature detected by ambient sensor is indicated on the display.
ECON shown in display indicates negative temperature reading.
NOTE:
If temperature shown on display greatly differs from actual temperature, check sensor circuit first, then inspect sensor.
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
RHA861H
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
Go to Ambient Sensor Circuit (HA-155).
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-73
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
11
CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
Press
(DEF) switch the second time, temperature detected by in-vehicle sensor is indicated on the display screen.
ECON shown in display indicates negative temperature reading.
NOTE:
If temperature shown on display greatly differs from actual temperature, check sensor circuit first, then inspect sensor.
RHA862H
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 12.
NG
䊳
Go to In-vehicle Sensor Circuit (HA-158).
12
CHECK INTAKE SENSOR
Press
(DEF) switch the third time, temperature detected by intake sensor is indicated on the display.
NOTE:
If temperature shown on display greatly differs from actual temperature, check sensor circuit first, then inspect sensor.
RHA862HA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 13.
NG
䊳
Go to Intake Sensor Circuit (HA-165).
HA-74
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
13
GI
DETECTS MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION ERROR
Press REC switch.
appears on the display
Does code No.
MA
EM
LC
MTBL0509
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
INSPECTION END
No
䊳
1. Go to “Multiplex Communication Circuit”, HA-168.
2. Go to “OPERATIONAL CHECK”, HA-85.
Confirm that A/C system is in good order.
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-75
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
14
CHECK MALFUNCTIONING SENSOR
Refer to the following chart for malfunctioning code No.
(If two or more sensors malfunction, corresponding code Nos. blink respectively two times.)
MTBL0083
*1: Conduct self-diagnosis STEP 2 under sunshine.
When conducting indoors, aim a light (more than 60W) at sunload sensor, otherwise Code No.
sunload sensor is functioning properly.
*2: HA-155
*3: HA-158
*4: HA-165
*5: HA-162
*6: HA-167
will indicate despite that
RHA455G
RHA501A
䊳
INSPECTION END
HA-76
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
15
GI
CHECK MALFUNCTIONING DOOR MOTOR POSITION SWITCH
Mode or (and) intake door motor position switch(es) is (are) malfunctioning.
(If two or more mode or intake doors are out of order, corresponding code numbers blink respectively two times.)
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MTBL0508
*1: If mode door motor harness connector is disconnected, the following display pattern will appear.
,
,
,
,
, Return to
*2: If intake door motor harness connector is disconnected, the following display pattern will appear.
,
,
, Return to
*3: HA-94
*4: HA-107
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
RHA168DA
BR
ST
RS
BT
RHA498A
䊳
INSPECTION END
SC
EL
IDX
HA-77
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
AUXILIARY MECHANISM: TEMPERATURE SETTING TRIMMER
With Navigation System
=NAHA0176S06
NAHA0176S0601
The trimmer compensates for differences in range of ±3°C (±6°F) between temperature setting (displayed
digitally) and temperature felt by driver.
Operating procedures for this trimmer are as follows:
쐌 Begin Self-diagnosis STEP 5 mode.
쐌 Press (fan) UP switch to set system in auxiliary mode.
쐌 Display shows “ ” in auxiliary mechanism.
It takes approximately 3 seconds.
쐌 Turn the temperature dial clockwise or counterclockwise: Temperature will change at a rate of 0.5°C (1°F).
RHA863H
When battery cable is disconnected, trimmer operation is canceled. Temperature set becomes that of
initial condition, i.e. 0°C (0°F).
HA-78
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick
and Accurate Repair
GI
=NAHA0177
WORK FLOW
NAHA0177S01
MA
EM
LC
EC
SHA900E
FE
*1: Operational Check (HA-80)
CL
SYMPTOM TABLE
NAHA0177S02
Symptom
Reference Page
쐌 A/C system does not come on.
쐌 Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for A/C system.
HA-88
쐌 Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Mode Door Motor. (LAN)
HA-92
쐌 Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Air Mix Door Motor. (LAN)
HA-100
쐌 Air outlet does not change.
쐌 Mode door motor does not operate normally.
쐌 Discharge air temperature does not
change.
쐌 Air mix door motor does not operate normally.
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
쐌 Intake door does not change.
쐌 Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Intake Door Motor.
HA-105
쐌 Blower motor operation is malfunctioning
under out of starting fan speed control.
쐌 Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Blower Motor.
HA-114
BR
쐌 Magnet clutch does not engage.
쐌 Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Magnet Clutch.
HA-125
ST
쐌 Insufficient cooling.
쐌 Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Cooling.
HA-133
쐌 Insufficient heating.
쐌 Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Heating.
HA-143
쐌 Noise.
쐌 Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Noise.
HA-146
쐌 Self-diagnosis can not be performed.
쐌 Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Self-diagnosis.
HA-147
쐌 Memory function does not operate.
쐌 Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Memory Function.
HA-150
쐌 ECON mode does not operate.
쐌 Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for ECON (ECONOMY) —
mode.
HA-153
쐌 A/C system cannot be controlled.
쐌 Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Multiplex Communication
Circuit.
HA-168
쐌 Intake door motor does not operate normally.
쐌 Blower motor operation is malfunctioning.
SU
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-79
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Operational Check
Operational Check
NAHA0178
The purpose of the operational check is to confirm that the system
operates properly.
CONDITIONS:
쐌
NAHA0178S01
Engine running and at normal operating temperature.
PROCEDURE: (WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM,
EXCEPT LE GRADE)
NAHA0178S02
1. Check Memory Function
NAHA0178S0201
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
RHA232I
Set the temperature 90°F or 32°C.
Press OFF switch.
Turn the ignition off.
Turn the ignition on.
Press the AUTO switch.
Confirm that the set temperature remains at previous temperature.
7. Press OFF switch.
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for memory function (HA150).
If OK, continue with next check.
2. Check Blower
NAHA0178S0202
1.
Press fan switch (up side) one time.
Blower should operate on low speed.
The fan symbol should have one blade lit .
2. Press fan switch (up side) one more time, and continue checking blower speed and fan symbol until all speeds are checked.
3. Leave blower on MAX speed .
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for blower motor (HA-114).
If OK, continue with next check.
RHA457G
3. Check Discharge Air
1.
2.
Press mode switch four times and DEF button.
Each position indicator should change shape.
RHA458G
HA-80
NAHA0178S0203
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Operational Check (Cont’d)
3.
Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table at left.
Refer to “Discharge Air Flow” (HA-29).
NOTE:
Confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged (visual inspection)
and intake door position is at FRESH when the DEF
is
selected.
Intake door position is checked in the next step.
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for mode door motor
(HA-92).
If OK, continue with next check.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
RHA654F
4. Check Recirculation
AT
NAHA0178S0204
1.
Press REC
switch.
Recirculation indicator should illuminate.
2. Listen for intake door position change (you should hear blower
sound change slightly).
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for intake door (HA-105).
If OK, continue with next check.
TF
PD
AX
SU
RHA459G
5. Check Temperature Decrease
NAHA0178S0205
1.
Press the temperature decrease button until 18°C (60°F) is
displayed.
2. Check for cold air at discharge air outlets.
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for insufficient cooling
(HA-133).
If OK, continue with next check.
BR
ST
RS
BT
RHA233I
6. Check Temperature Increase
NAHA0178S0206
1.
Press the temperature increase button until 32°C (90°F) is
displayed.
2. Check for hot air at discharge air outlets.
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for insufficient heating
(HA-143).
If OK, continue with next check.
SC
EL
IDX
RHA234I
HA-81
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Operational Check (Cont’d)
7. Check ECON (Economy) Mode
NAHA0178S0207
1.
2.
3.
RHA462G
Set the temperature 75°F or 25°C.
Press ECON switch.
Display should indicate ECON (no AUTO).
Confirm that the compressor clutch is not engaged (visual
inspection).
(Discharge air and blower speed will depend on ambient, invehicle and set temperatures.)
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ECON (Economy)
mode (HA-153).
If OK, continue with next check.
8. Check AUTO Mode
NAHA0178S0208
1.
2.
Press AUTO switch.
Display should indicate AUTO (no ECON).
Confirm that the compressor clutch engages (audio or visual
inspection).
(Discharge air and blower speed will depend on ambient, invehicle and set temperatures.)
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for A/C system (HA-88),
then if necessary, trouble diagnosis procedure for magnet clutch
(HA-125).
RHA463G
If all operational check are OK (symptom can not be duplicated),
go to “Incident Simulation Tests” (GI-25) and perform tests as outlined to simulate driving conditions environment. If symptom
appears, refer to “Symptom Table” (HA-79) and perform applicable
trouble diagnosis procedures.
PROCEDURE: (WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM, LE
GRADE)
NAHA0178S04
1. Check Memory Function
NAHA0178S0401
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
RHA144I
Set the temperature 90°F or 32°C.
Press OFF switch.
Turn the ignition off.
Turn the ignition on.
Press the AUTO switch.
Confirm that the set temperature remains at previous temperature.
7. Press OFF switch.
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for memory function (HA151).
If OK, continue with next check.
HA-82
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Operational Check (Cont’d)
2. Check Blower
NAHA0178S0402
Press fan switch (up side) one time.
Blower should operate on low speed.
The fan symbol should have one blade lit .
2. Press fan switch (up side) one more time, and continue checking blower speed and fan symbol until all speeds are checked.
3. Leave blower on MAX speed .
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for blower motor (HA-115).
If OK, continue with next check.
GI
1.
MA
EM
LC
RHA145I
3. Check Discharge Air
1.
2.
EC
NAHA0178S0403
Press MODE switch four times and DEF button.
Each position indicator should change shape.
FE
CL
MT
RHA146I
3.
Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table at left.
Refer to “Discharge Air Flow” (HA-93).
NOTE:
Confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged (visual inspection)
and intake door position is at FRESH when the DEF
is
selected.
Intake door position is checked in the next step.
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for mode door motor
(HA-93).
If OK, continue with next check.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
RHA654F
4. Check Recirculation
NAHA0178S0404
1.
Press REC
switch.
Recirculation indicator should illuminate.
2. Listen for intake door position change (you should hear blower
sound change slightly).
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for intake door (HA-106).
If OK, continue with next check.
SC
EL
IDX
RHA147I
HA-83
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Operational Check (Cont’d)
5. Check Temperature Decrease
NAHA0178S0405
1.
Turn temperature dial counterclockwise until 18°C (60°F) is
displayed.
2. Check for cold air at discharge air outlets.
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for insufficient cooling
(HA-134).
If OK, continue with next check.
RHA148I
6. Check Temperature Increase
NAHA0178S0406
1.
Turn the temperature dial clockwise until 32°C (90°F) is displayed.
2. Check for hot air at discharge air outlets.
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for insufficient heating
(HA-144).
If OK, continue with next check.
RHA149I
7. Check ECON (Economy) Mode
NAHA0178S0407
1.
2.
3.
RHA150I
Set the temperature 75°F or 25°C.
Press ECON switch.
Display should indicate ECON (no AUTO).
Confirm that the compressor clutch is not engaged (visual
inspection).
(Discharge air and blower speed will depend on ambient, invehicle and set temperatures.)
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ECON (Economy)
mode (HA-154).
If OK, continue with next check.
8. Check AUTO Mode
NAHA0178S0408
1.
2.
Press AUTO switch.
Display should indicate AUTO (no ECON).
Confirm that the compressor clutch engages (audio or visual
inspection).
(Discharge air and blower speed will depend on ambient, invehicle and set temperatures.)
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for A/C system (HA-88),
then if necessary, trouble diagnosis procedure for magnet clutch
(HA-126).
RHA144I
If all operational check are OK (symptom can not be duplicated),
go to “Incident Simulation Tests” (GI section) and perform tests as
outlined to simulate driving conditions environment. If symptom
appears, refer to “Symptom Table” (HA-79) and perform applicable
trouble diagnosis procedures.
HA-84
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Operational Check (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE: (WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM)
1. Check Memory Function
NAHA0178S03
NAHA0178S0301
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
RHA235I
GI
Set the temperature 90°F or 32°C.
Press OFF switch.
Turn the ignition off.
Turn the ignition on.
Press the AUTO switch.
Confirm that the set temperature remains at previous temperature.
7. Press OFF switch.
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for memory function (HA152).
If OK, continue with next check.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
2. Check Blower
AT
NAHA0178S0302
1.
Press fan switch (up side) one time.
Blower should operate on low speed.
The fan symbol should have one blade lit .
2. Press fan switch (up side) one more time, and continue checking blower speed and fan symbol until all speeds are checked.
3. Leave blower on MAX speed .
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for blower motor (HA-116).
If OK, continue with next check.
TF
PD
AX
SU
RHA086I
3. Check Discharge Air
1.
2.
Press MODE switch four times and D/F button.
Each position indicator should change shape.
NAHA0178S0303
BR
ST
RS
BT
RHA087I
SC
EL
IDX
HA-85
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Operational Check (Cont’d)
3.
Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table at left.
Refer to “Discharge Air Flow” (HA-29).
NOTE:
Confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged (visual inspection)
and intake door position is at FRESH when the DEF
is
selected.
Intake door position is checked in the next step.
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for mode door motor
(HA-94).
If OK, continue with next check.
RHA654F
4. Check Recirculation
NAHA0178S0304
1.
Press REC
switch.
Recirculation indicator should illuminate.
2. Listen for intake door position change (you should hear blower
sound change slightly).
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for intake door (HA-107).
If OK, continue with next check.
RHA088I
5. Check Temperature Decrease
NAHA0178S0305
1)
Turn the temperature dial counterclockwise until 18°C (60°F)
is displayed.
2) Check for cold air at discharge air outlets.
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for insufficient cooling
(HA-135).
If OK, continue with next check.
RHA236I
6. Check Temperature Increase
1)
NAHA0178S0306
Turn the temperature dial clockwise until 32°C (90°F) is displayed.
2) Check for hot air at discharge air outlets.
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for insufficient heating
(HA-145).
If OK, continue with next check.
RHA237I
HA-86
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Operational Check (Cont’d)
7. Check ECON (Economy) Mode
NAHA0178S0307
1.
2.
Press ECON switch.
Display should indicate ECON (no AUTO).
Confirm that the compressor clutch is not engaged (visual
inspection).
(Discharge air and blower speed will depend on ambient, invehicle and set temperatures.)
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ECON (Economy)
mode (HA-155).
If OK, continue with next check.
GI
MA
EM
LC
RHA090I
8. Check AUTO Mode
1.
2.
RHA091I
EC
NAHA0178S0308
Press AUTO switch.
Display should indicate AUTO (no ECON).
Confirm that the compressor clutch engages (audio or visual
inspection).
(Discharge air and blower speed will depend on ambient, invehicle and set temperatures.)
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for A/C system (HA-88),
then if necessary, trouble diagnosis procedure for magnet clutch
(HA-127).
If all operational check are OK (symptom can not be duplicated),
go to GI-25 “Incident Simulation Tests” (GI section) and perform
tests as outlined to simulate driving conditions environment. If
symptom appears, refer to “Symptom Table” (HA-79) and perform
applicable trouble diagnosis procedures.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-87
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
A/C System
A/C System
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR A/C SYSTEM
=NAHA0179
SYMPTOM:
쐌 A/C system does not come on.
INSPECTION FLOW
RHA238I
*1: HA-89
*2: HA-80
*3: HA-168
HA-88
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
A/C System (Cont’d)
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
GI
NAHA0180
Component Description
NAHA0180S01
RHA464GA
Automatic Amplifier (Auto Amp.)
NAHA0180S0101
The auto amplifier has a built-in microcomputer which processes
information sent from various sensors needed for air conditioner
operation. The air mix door motor, mode door motor, intake door
motor, blower motor and compressor are then controlled.
The auto amplifier is unitized with control mechanisms. Signals
from various switches and Potentio Temperature Control (PTC) are
directly entered into auto amplifier.
Self-diagnostic functions are also built into auto amplifier to provide
quick check of malfunctions in the auto air conditioner system.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
RHA141I
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
RHA858H
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-89
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
A/C System (Cont’d)
Potentio Temperature Control (PTC)
NAHA0180S0102
The PTC is built into the A/C auto amp. It can be set at an interval
of 0.5°C (1.0°F) in the 18°C (60°F) to 32°C (90°F) temperature
range by pushing the temperature button. The set temperature is
digitally displayed.
RHA464GA
RHA141I
RHA098I
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
SYMPTOM:
쐌 A/C system does not come on.
RHA817H
HA-90
NAHA0181
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
A/C System (Cont’d)
Auto Amp. Check
NAHA0181S01
Check power supply circuit for auto amp. with ignition switch ON.
Measure voltage across terminal Nos. 26, 27, 33 (24, 25, 33) and
body ground.
GI
MA
Voltmeter terminal
Voltage
(+)
(−)
EM
26 (24)
27 (25)
Body ground
Approx. 12V
LC
33 (33)
EC
If OK, check auto amp.
쐌 If NG, check 7.5A fuses [Nos. 11 and 24, located in the fuse
block — junction box (J/B)] and 15A fuses [Nos. 1 and 2,
located in the fuse block — junction box (J/B)].
쐌 If fuses are OK, check for open circuit in wiring harness.
Repair or replace as necessary.
쐌 If fuses are NG, replace fuse and check wiring harness for
short circuit. Repair or replace as necessary.
RHA818HA
Check body ground circuit for auto amp. with ignition switch OFF.
Check for continuity between terminal Nos. 32, 14 and body
ground.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
Ohmmeter terminal
Continuity
(+)
(−)
PD
32
Body ground
14 (Canada only)
NOTE:
If OK, replace auto amp.
If NG, repair or replace harness.
Yes
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SHA967EE
SC
EL
IDX
RHA868H
HA-91
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Mode Door Motor
Mode Door Motor
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR MOTOR (LAN)
=NAHA0182
SYMPTOM:
쐌 Air outlet does not change.
쐌 Mode door motor does not operate normally.
Inspection Flow
NAHA0182S01
Without Navigation System (Except LE Grade)
NAHA0182S0101
SHA245F
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
HA-29
HA-80
HA-48
HA-49
HA-155
*6:
*7:
*8:
*9:
HA-158
HA-162
HA-167
STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
(HA-49), see No. 13.
HA-92
*10:
*11:
*12:
*13:
*14:
HA-96
HA-99
HA-80
HA-79
HA-165
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Mode Door Motor (Cont’d)
Without Navigation System (LE Grade)
NAHA0182S0103
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
RHA152I
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
HA-29
HA-82
HA-59
HA-59
HA-155
*6:
*7:
*8:
*9:
HA-158
HA-162
HA-167
STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
(HA-59), see No. 13.
*10:
*11:
*12:
*13:
*14:
HA-96
HA-99
HA-82
HA-79
HA-165
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-93
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Mode Door Motor (Cont’d)
With Navigation System
NAHA0182S0102
RHA109I
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
HA-29
HA-85
HA-69
HA-69
HA-155
*6:
*7:
*8:
*9:
HA-158
HA-162
HA-167
STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
(HA-69), see No. 13.
HA-94
*10:
*11:
*12:
*13:
*14:
HA-96
HA-99
HA-85
HA-79
HA-165
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Mode Door Motor (Cont’d)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
=NAHA0183
GI
NAHA0183S01
Mode door control system components are:
1) Auto amp.
2) Mode door motor (LCU)
3) In-vehicle sensor
4) Ambient sensor
5) Sunload sensor
6) Intake sensor
MA
EM
LC
System Operation
NAHA0183S02
The auto amplifier receives data from each of the sensors. The amplifier sends mode door and air mix door
opening angle data to the mode door motor LCU and air mix door motor LCU.
The mode door motor and air mix door motor read their respective signals according to the address signal.
Opening angle indication signals received from the auto amplifier and each of the motor position sensors are
compared by the LCUs in each motor with the existing decision and opening angles. Subsequently, HOT/
COLD or DEFROST/VENT operation is selected. The new selection data is returned to the auto amplifier.
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
RHA870H
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-95
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Mode Door Motor (Cont’d)
Mode Door Control Specification
NAHA0183S03
RHA135G
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NAHA0184
The mode door motor is attached to the heater unit. It rotates so
that air is discharged from the outlet set by the auto amplifier. Motor
rotation is conveyed to a link which activates the mode door.
RHA505G
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR MOTOR
AND AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR CIRCUIT
NAHA0185
SYMPTOM: Mode door motor and/or air mix door motor does
not operate normally.
RHA488GA
HA-96
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Mode Door Motor (Cont’d)
1
GI
CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR AUTO AMP. (LCU) SIDE
Do approx. 12 volts exist between auto amp. (LCU) harness terminal No. 21 and body ground?
MA
EM
LC
EC
RHA819HB
NOTE:
If the result is NG or No after checking circuit continuity, repair harness or connector.
FE
Yes or No
CL
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
Replace auto amp. (LCU).
MT
2
CHECK SIGNAL FOR AUTO AMP. (LCU) SIDE
AT
Do approx. 5.5 volts exist between auto amp. (LCU) terminal No. 16 or 14 and body ground?
TF
PD
AX
RHA820H
NOTE:
If the result is NG or No after checking circuit continuity, repair harness or connector.
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 3.
No
䊳
Replace auto amp. (LCU).
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-97
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Mode Door Motor (Cont’d)
3
CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR MOTOR SIDE
Do approx. 12 volts exist between door motor (LCU) harness terminal No. 21 and body ground?
RHA489GC
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 4.
No
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
4
CHECK SIGNAL FOR MOTOR SIDE
Do approx. 5.5 volts exist between door motor (LCU) terminal No. 16 and body ground?
RHA490G
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 5.
No
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
5
CHECK MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Does continuity exist between door motor (LCU) harness terminal No. 32 and body ground?
RHA491G
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 6.
No
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
HA-98
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Mode Door Motor (Cont’d)
6
GI
CHECK MOTOR OPERATION
Disconnect and reconnect the motor connector and confirm the motor operation.
MA
OK or NG
OK (Return to operate
normally)
䊳
Poor contacting the motor connector
NG (Does not operate
normally)
䊳
GO TO 7.
EM
LC
7
CHECK MODE DOOR MOTOR OPERATION
EC
1. Disconnect the mode door motor and air mix door motor connector.
2. Reconnect the mode door motor and confirm the motor operation.
OK or NG
OK (Mode door motor
operates normally)
䊳
Replace the air mix door motor.
NG (Mode door motor
does not operate normally)
䊳
GO TO 8.
8
FE
CL
MT
CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR OPERATION
AT
1. Disconnect the mode door motor connector.
2. Reconnect the air mix door motor and confirm the air mix door motor operation.
TF
OK or NG
OK (Air mix door motor
operates normally)
䊳
Replace mode door motor.
NG (Air mix door motor
does not operate normally)
䊳
Replace auto amp.
PD
AX
SU
CONTROL LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT
Mode Door
1.
2.
RHA505G
3.
4.
5.
NAHA0186
NAHA0186S01
Install mode door motor on heater unit and connect it to main
harness.
Set up code No. in Self-diagnosis STEP 4. Refer to HA-49
(Without navigation system, except LE grade), HA-59 (Without
navigation system, LE grade) or HA-69 (With navigation system).
Move side link by hand and hold mode door in DEF mode.
Attach mode door motor rod to side link rod holder.
Make sure mode door operates properly when changing from
code No.
to
by pushing DEF switch.
VENT
B/L
B/L
FOOT
D/F
DEF
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-99
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Air Mix Door Motor
Air Mix Door Motor
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR (LAN)
=NAHA0187
SYMPTOM:
쐌 Discharge air temperature does not change.
쐌 Air mix door motor does not operate.
Inspection Flow
NAHA0187S01
Without Navigation System (Except LE Grade)
NAHA0187S0101
RHA239I
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
HA-48
HA-155
HA-158
HA-162
HA-167
*6: STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
(HA-49), see No. 13.
*7: HA-96
*8: HA-104
*9: HA-104
HA-100
*10:
*12:
*13:
*14:
*15:
HA-80
HA-80
HA-79
HA-165
HA-49
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Air Mix Door Motor (Cont’d)
Without Navigation System (LE Grade)
NAHA0187S0103
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
RHA153IA
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
HA-59
HA-155
HA-158
HA-162
HA-167
*6: STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
(HA-59), see No. 13.
*7: HA-96
*8: HA-104
*9: HA-104
*10:
*12:
*13:
*14:
*15:
HA-82
HA-82
HA-79
HA-165
HA-59
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-101
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Air Mix Door Motor (Cont’d)
With Navigation System
NAHA0187S0102
RHA240I
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
HA-69
HA-155
HA-158
HA-162
HA-167
*6: STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
(HA-69), see No. 13.
*7: HA-96
*8: HA-104
*9: HA-104
HA-102
*10:
*12:
*13:
*14:
*15:
HA-85
HA-85
HA-79
HA-165
HA-69
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Air Mix Door Motor (Cont’d)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Air
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
=NAHA0188
GI
NAHA0188S01
mix door control system components are:
Auto amp.
Air mix door motor (LCU)
In-vehicle sensor
Ambient sensor
Sunload sensor
Intake sensor
MA
EM
LC
System Operation
NAHA0188S02
The auto amplifier receives data from each of the sensors. The amplifier sends air mix door and mode door
opening angle data to the air mix door motor LCU and mode door motor LCU.
The air mix door motor and mode door motor read their respective signals according to the address signal.
Opening angle indication signals received from the auto amplifier and each of the motor position sensors are
compared by the LCUs in each motor with the existing decision and opening angles. Subsequently, HOT/
COLD or DEFROST/VENT operation is selected. The new selection data is returned to the auto amplifier.
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
RHA872H
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-103
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Air Mix Door Motor (Cont’d)
Air Mix Door Control Specification
NAHA0188S03
RHA137G
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NAHA0189
The air mix door motor is attached to the heater unit. It rotates so
that the air mix door is opened or closed to a position set by the
auto amplifier. Motor rotation is then conveyed through a shaft and
the air mix door position is then fed back to the auto amplifier by
PBR built-in air mix door motor.
RHA849E
CONTROL LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT
Air Mix Door
1.
2.
3.
RHA504G
4.
5.
NAHA0190
NAHA0190S01
Install air mix door motor on heater unit and connect it to main
harness.
Set up code No. 41 in Self-diagnosis STEP 4. Refer to HA-48
(Without navigation system, except LE grade), HA-59 (Without
navigation system, LE grade) or HA-69 (With navigation system).
Move air mix door lever by hand and hold it in full cold position.
Attach air mix door lever to rod holder.
Make sure air mix door operates properly when changing from
code No.
to
by pushing DEF switch.
Full cold
HA-104
Full hot
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Intake Door Motor
Intake Door Motor
GI
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR
=NAHA0191
SYMPTOM:
쐌 Intake door does not change.
쐌 Intake door motor does not operate normally.
MA
EM
Inspection Flow
NAHA0191S01
Without Navigation System (Except LE Grade)
NAHA0191S0101
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SHA247F
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
HA-48
HA-155
HA-158
HA-162
HA-167
*6: STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
(HA-49), see No. 13.
*7: HA-109
*8: HA-113
*9: HA-80
HA-105
*10:
*11:
*12:
*13:
HA-49
HA-80
HA-79
HA-165
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Intake Door Motor (Cont’d)
Without Navigation System (LE Grade)
NAHA0191S0103
RHA154I
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
HA-59
HA-155
HA-158
HA-162
HA-167
*6: STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
(HA-59), see No. 13.
*7: HA-109
*8: HA-113
*9: HA-82
HA-106
*10:
*11:
*12:
*13:
HA-59
HA-82
HA-79
HA-165
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Intake Door Motor (Cont’d)
With Navigation System
NAHA0191S0102
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
RHA111I
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
HA-69
HA-155
HA-158
HA-162
HA-167
*6: STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
(HA-69), see No. 13.
*7: HA-109
*8: HA-113
*9: HA-85
*10:
*11:
*12:
*13:
HA-69
HA-85
HA-79
HA-165
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-107
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Intake Door Motor (Cont’d)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
=NAHA0192
NAHA0192S01
Intake door control system components are:
1) Auto amp.
2) Intake door motor
3) A/C LAN system (PBR built-in mode motor and air mix door motor)
4) In-vehicle sensor
5) Ambient sensor
6) Sunload sensor
7) Intake sensor
System Operation
NAHA0192S02
The intake door control determines intake door position based on the ambient temperature, the intake air
temperature and the in-vehicle temperature. When the ECON, DEFROST, or OFF switches are pushed, the
auto amplifier sets the intake door at the “Fresh” position.
RHA874H
Intake Door Control Specification
NAHA0192S03
RHA136G
HA-108
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Intake Door Motor (Cont’d)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NAHA0193
The intake door motor is attached to the intake unit. It rotates so
that air is drawn from inlets set by the auto amplifier. Motor rotation is conveyed to a lever which activates the intake door.
GI
MA
EM
LC
RHA593F
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
EC
NAHA0194
SYMPTOM: Intake door motor does not operate normally.
FE
CL
MT
RHA502GA
1
AT
CHECK BODY GROUND CIRCUIT FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
Does continuity exist between intake door harness connector terminal No. 1 and body ground?
TF
PD
AX
SU
RHA492G
BR
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-109
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Intake Door Motor (Cont’d)
2
CHECK FOR AUTO AMP. OUTPUT
Set up Self-diagnosis STEP 4.
Measure voltage across auto amp. harness connector terminals and body ground.
RHA821H
MTBL0466
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
HA-110
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Intake Door Motor (Cont’d)
3
CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL ON AUTO AMP. AND ON INTAKE DOOR
MOTOR
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SHA605F
AX
SU
BR
MTBL0510
ST
If OK, check harness for short.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-111
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Intake Door Motor (Cont’d)
4
CHECK FOR AUTO AMP. OUTPUT
Set up Self-diagnosis STEP 4.
Measure voltage across auto amp. harness connector terminals and body ground.
RHA823HA
MTBL0468
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace intake door motor.
NG
䊳
Replace auto amp.
HA-112
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Intake Door Motor (Cont’d)
CONTROL LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT
Intake Door
1.
2.
RHA593F
3.
4.
5.
=NAHA0195
GI
NAHA0195S01
Install intake door motor on intake unit and connect it to main
harness.
Set up code No.
in Self-diagnosis STEP 4. Refer to HA-49
(Without navigation system, except LE grade), HA-59 (Without
navigation system, LE grade) or HA-69 (With navigation system).
Move intake door link by hand and hold it in REC position.
Attach intake door lever to rod holder.
Make sure intake door operates properly when changing from
code No.
to
by pushing DEF switch.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
REC
20% FRE
FRE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-113
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Blower Motor
Blower Motor
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR
=NAHA0196
SYMPTOM:
쐌 Blower motor operation is malfunctioning.
쐌 Blower motor operation is malfunctioning under out of starting fan speed control.
Inspection Flow
NAHA0196S01
Without Navigation System (Except LE Grade)
NAHA0196S0101
SHA691F
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
HA-48
HA-155
HA-158
HA-162
HA-167
*6: STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
(HA-49), see No. 13.
*7: HA-118
*8: HA-118
*9: HA-49
HA-114
*10:
*11:
*12:
*13:
*14:
HA-80
HA-79
HA-80
HA-165
EL-134
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Blower Motor (Cont’d)
Without Navigation System (LE Grade)
NAHA0196S0103
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
RHA138I
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
HA-59
HA-155
HA-158
HA-162
HA-167
*6: STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
(HA-59), see No. 13.
*7: HA-118
*8: HA-118
*9: HA-59
*10:
*11:
*12:
*13:
*14:
HA-82
HA-79
HA-82
HA-165
EL-87
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-115
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Blower Motor (Cont’d)
With Navigation System
NAHA0196S0102
SHA692F
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
HA-69
HA-155
HA-158
HA-162
HA-167
*6: STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
(HA-69), see No. 13.
*7: HA-118
*8: HA-118
*9: HA-69
HA-116
*10:
*11:
*12:
*13:
*14:
HA-85
HA-79
HA-85
HA-165
EL-134
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Blower Motor (Cont’d)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component parts
=NAHA0197
GI
NAHA0197S01
Fan speed control system components are:
1) Auto amp.
2) Fan control amp.
3) A/C LAN system (PBR built-in mode door motor and air mix door motor)
4) In-vehicle sensor
5) Ambient sensor
6) Sunload sensor
7) Intake sensor
MA
EM
LC
EC
System Operation
NAHA0197S02
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SHA006FF
Automatic Mode
NAHA0197S03
In the automatic mode, the blower motor speed is calculated by the automatic amplifier based on inputs from
the PBR, in-vehicle sensor, sunload sensor, intake sensor and ambient sensor. The blower motor applied
voltage ranges from approximately 5 volts (lowest speed) to 12 volts (highest speed).
The control blower speed (in the range of 5 to 12V), the automatic amplifier supplies a gate voltage to the fan
control amplifier. Based on this voltage, the fan control amplifier controls the voltage supplied to the blower
motor.
Starting Fan Speed Control
NAHA0197S04
Start Up From “COLD SOAK” Condition (Automatic mode)
NAHA0197S0401
In a cold start up condition where the engine coolant temperature is below 55°C (131°F), the blower will not
operate for a short period of time (up to 150 seconds). The exact start delay time varies depending on the
ambient and engine coolant temperature.
In the most extreme case (very low ambient) the blower starting delay will be 150 seconds as described above.
After this delay, the blower will operate at low speed until the engine coolant temperature rises above 55°C
(131°F), at which time the blower speed will increase to the objective speed.
Start Up From Normal or “HOT SOAK” Condition (Automatic mode)
NAHA0197S0402
The blower will begin operation momentarily after the AUTO button is pushed. The blower speed will gradually rise to the objective speed over a time period of 3 seconds or less (actual time depends on the objective
blower speed).
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-117
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Blower Motor (Cont’d)
Blower Speed Compensation
NAHA0197S05
Sunload
NAHA0197S0501
When the in-vehicle temperature and the set temperature are very close, the blower will be operating at low
speed. The low speed will vary depending on the sunload. During conditions of high sunload, the blower low
speed is “usual” low speed (approx. 6V). During low or no sunload conditions, the low speed will drop to “low”
low speed (approx. 5V).
Fan Speed Control Specification
NAHA0197S06
RHA138G
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Fan Control Amplifier
NAHA0198
NAHA0198S01
The fan control amplifier is located on the cooling unit. The fan
control amp. receives a gate voltage from the auto amp. to steplessly maintain the blower fan motor voltage in the 5 to 12 volt
range (approx.).
RHA648F
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
NAHA0199
SYMPTOM: Blower motor operation is malfunctioning under
Starting Fan Speed Control.
RHA467G
HA-118
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Blower Motor (Cont’d)
1
GI
CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR FAN CONTROL AMP.
Disconnect fan control amp. harness connector.
Do approx. 12 volts exist between fan control amp. harness connector terminal No. 3 and body ground?
MA
EM
LC
EC
RHA480G
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
GO TO 8.
2
FE
CL
CHECK BODY GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FAN CONTROL AMP.
MT
Does continuity exist between fan control amp. harness connector terminal No. 1 and body ground?
AT
TF
PD
AX
RHA089G
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Reconnect fan control amp. harness connector. And GO TO 3.
No
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-119
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Blower Motor (Cont’d)
3
CHECK VOLTAGE FOR FAN CONTROL AMP.
Set up Self-diagnosis STEP 4.
Measure voltage across fan control amp. harness connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
RHA481GC
MTBL0465
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
쐌 The voltage is less than 2.5V. Replace fan control amp.
쐌 The voltage is more than 3.0V. GO TO 4.
4
CHECK FAN CONTROL AMP.
Refer to HA-124
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
1. Replace fan control amp.
2. Go to “STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE”, HA-49 (Without navigation system, except LE
grade), HA-59 (Without navigation system, LE grade) or HA-69 (With navigation system) and perform self-diagnosis STEP 4.
Confirm that blower motor operation is usual.
HA-120
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Blower Motor (Cont’d)
5
GI
CHECK FAN CONTROL AMP. CIRCUIT BETWEEN FAN CONTROL AMP. AND AUTO AMP. (LCU)
1. Disconnect auto amp. (LCU) and fan control amp. harness connector.
2. Check circuit continuity between auto amp. (LCU) harness connector terminal No. 35 and fan control amp. harness
connector terminal No. 2.
MA
EM
LC
EC
RHA824H
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short.
FE
CL
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
6
MT
AT
CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR AUTO AMP.
Reconnect auto amp. (LCU) harness connector.
Do approx. 12 volts exist between auto amp. (LCU) harness connector terminal No. 33 and body ground?
TF
PD
AX
SU
RHA825H
BR
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 7.
No
䊳
Check power supply circuit and 15A fuses [Nos. 1 and 2, located in the fuse block —
junction box (J/B)].
Refer to EL-12, “Wiring Diagram — POWER —”.
쐌 If OK, check for open circuit in wiring harness.
Repair or replace as necessary.
쐌 If NG, replace fuse and check wiring harness for short circuit.
Repair or replace as necessary.
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-121
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Blower Motor (Cont’d)
7
CHECK FAN FEED BACK CIRCUIT
Do approx. 12 volts exist between auto amp. harness connector terminal No. 34 and body ground?
RHA826H
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
1. Replace auto amp.
2. Go to self-diagnosis step-by-step procedure HA-49 (Without navigation system,
except LE grade), HA-59 (Without navigation system, LE grade) or HA-69 (With navigation system) and perform self-diagnosis STEP-4.
Confirm that blower motor operation is usual.
No
䊳
GO TO 10.
8
CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR BLOWER MOTOR
Disconnect blower motor harness connector.
Do approx. 12 volts exist between blower motor harness connector terminal No. 1 and body ground?
RHA091G
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 9.
No
䊳
Check power supply circuit and 15A fuses [Nos. 1 and 2, located in the fuse block
— junction box (J/B)].
쐌 If OK, check for open circuit in wiring harness.
Repair or replace as necessary.
쐌 If NG, replace fuse and check wiring harness for short circuit.
Repair or replace as necessary.
HA-122
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Blower Motor (Cont’d)
9
GI
CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN BLOWER MOTOR AND FAN CONTROL AMP.
Disconnect blower motor connector and auto amp. (LCU) connector.
Check circuit continuity between blower motor harness connector terminal No. 2 and fan control amp. harness connector
terminal No. 3.
MA
EM
LC
EC
RHA472G
FE
OK or NG
OK
NG
10
䊳
䊳
Check blower motor. (Refer to HA-123.)
1. If NG, replace blower motor.
2. Go to self-diagnosis step-by-step procedure HA-49 (Without navigation system,
except LE grade), HA-59 (Without navigation system, LE grade) or HA-69 (With navigation system) and perform self-diagnosis STEP-4.
Confirm that blower motor operation is usual.
Repair harness or connector.
CL
MT
AT
CHECK BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN BLOWER MOTOR AND AUTO AMP. (LCU)
Check circuit continuity between blower motor harness connector terminal No. 2 and auto amp. (LCU) harness connector
terminal No. 34.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
RHA827H
Continuity should exist.
ST
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check harness for short.
NG
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
RS
BT
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Blower Motor
NAHA0200
NAHA0200S01
Confirm smooth rotation of the blower motor.
쐌 Ensure that there are no foreign particles inside the intake unit.
SC
EL
IDX
RHA941F
HA-123
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Blower Motor (Cont’d)
Fan Control Amp.
NAHA0200S02
Check continuity between terminals.
Ohmmeter terminal
Continuity
(+)
(–)
Terminal Nos.
Yes
2
RHA828H
HA-124
1
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Magnet Clutch
Magnet Clutch
GI
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET CLUTCH
=NAHA0201
SYMPTOM:
쐌 Magnet clutch does not engage.
MA
Inspection Flow
NAHA0201S01
Without Navigation System (Except LE Grade)
EM
NAHA0201S0101
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SHA249FA
SC
*1: STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
(HA-48)
*2: HA-155
*3: HA-158
*4: HA-162
*5: HA-167
*6: STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
(HA-49), see No. 13.
*7: HA-128
*8: HA-175
*9: HA-138
*10: HA-80
HA-125
*11:
*12:
*13:
*14:
HA-49
HA-80
HA-79
HA-165
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Magnet Clutch (Cont’d)
Without Navigation System (LE Grade)
NAHA0201S0103
RHA155I
*1: STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
(HA-59)
*2: HA-155
*3: HA-158
*4: HA-162
*5: HA-167
*6: STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
(HA-59), see No. 13.
*7: HA-128
*9: HA-138
HA-126
*10:
*11:
*12:
*13:
*14:
HA-82
HA-59
HA-82
HA-79
HA-165
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Magnet Clutch (Cont’d)
With Navigation System
NAHA0201S0102
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
RHA113I
*1: STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
(HA-69)
*2: HA-155
*3: HA-158
*4: HA-162
*5: HA-167
*6: STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
(HA-69), see No. 13.
*7: HA-128
*8: HA-175
*9: HA-138
*10: HA-85
*11:
*12:
*13:
*14:
HA-69
HA-85
HA-79
HA-165
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-127
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Magnet Clutch (Cont’d)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
=NAHA0202
Auto amplifier controls compressor operation by ambient temperature and signal from ECM.
Low Temperature Protection Control
NAHA0202S01
Auto amplifier will turn the compressor “ON” or “OFF” as determined by a signal detected by ambient sensor.
When ambient temperatures are greater than −2°C (28°F), the
compressor turns “ON”. The compressor turns “OFF” when ambient temperatures are less than −5°C (23°F).
RHA094GB
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
NAHA0203
SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage when AUTO
switch is ON.
RHA199I
1
CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR COMPRESSOR
Disconnect compressor harness connector. Do approx. 12 volts exist between compressor harness connector terminal No.
1 and body ground?
RHA096G
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Check magnet clutch coil.
1. If NG, replace magnet clutch. Refer to HA-175.
2. Go to self-diagnosis step-by-step procedure HA-49 (Without navigation system,
except LE grade), HA-59 (Without navigation system, LE grade) or HA-69 (With navigation system) and perform self-diagnosis STEP-4.
Confirm that magnet clutch operation is usual.
No
䊳
Disconnect A/C relay. And GO TO 2.
HA-128
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Magnet Clutch (Cont’d)
2
GI
CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN A/C RELAY AND COMPRESSOR
Check circuit continuity between A/C relay harness connector E26 terminal No. 5 (B/W) and compressor harness connector F202 terminal No. 1 (B/W).
MA
EM
LC
EC
SHA476F
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short.
CL
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
3
FE
MT
CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR A/C RELAY
AT
Disconnect A/C relay.
Do approx. 12 volts exist between A/C relay harness connector E26 terminal Nos. 1 (G/W), 3 (G/W) and body ground?
TF
PD
AX
SU
SHA477F
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 4.
No
䊳
Check power supply circuit and 7.5A (No. 6) fuse at fuse block — junction box (J/B).
Refer to EL-12, “Wiring Diagram — POWER —”.
쐌 If OK, check for open circuit in wiring harness.
Repair or replace as necessary.
쐌 If NG, replace fuse and check wiring harness for short circuit.
Repair or replace as necessary.
BR
ST
RS
BT
4
CHECK A/C RELAY AFTER DISCONNECTING IT
Refer to HA-132.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Reconnect A/C relay. And GO TO 5.
SC
NG
䊳
1. Replace A/C relay.
2. Go to self-diagnosis step-by-step procedure HA-49 (Without navigation system,
except LE grade), HA-59 (Without navigation system, LE grade) or HA-69 (With navigation system) and perform self-diagnosis STEP-4.
Confirm that magnet clutch operation is usual.
EL
HA-129
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Magnet Clutch (Cont’d)
5
CHECK COIL SIDE CIRCUIT OF A/C RELAY
Do approx. 12 volts exist between ECM harness connector terminal No. 105 and body ground?
RHA200I
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 6.
No
䊳
Disconnect A/C relay.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
GO TO 9.
6
CHECK VOLTAGE FOR ECM
Do approx. 5 volts exist between ECM harness connector terminal No. 110 and body ground?
RHA201I
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect auto amp. harness connector.
GO TO 7.
No
䊳
Check ECM. Refer to EC-149, “ECM Terminals and Reference Value”.
HA-130
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Magnet Clutch (Cont’d)
7
GI
CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN ECM AND AUTO AMP.
Check circuit continuity between ECM harness connector terminal No. 110 and auto amp. harness connector terminal No.
22.
MA
EM
LC
EC
RHA202I
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short.
CL
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
1. Repair harness or connector.
2. Go to “SETP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE”, “Self-diagnosis”, HA-49 (Without navigation
system, except LE grade), HA-59 (Without navigation system, LE grade) or HA-69
(With navigation system) and perform self-diagnosis STEP-4.
Confirm that magnet clutch operation is usual.
8
FE
MT
AT
TF
CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to HA-132.
PD
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.
9
AX
SU
CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN A/C RELAY AND ECM
Check circuit continuity between A/C relay harness connector E26 terminal No. 2 (G/R) and ECM harness connector F203
terminal No. 105 (LG).
BR
ST
RS
BT
RHA203I
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check harness for short.
NG
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
SC
EL
IDX
HA-131
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Magnet Clutch (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION
A/C Relay
NAHA0204
NAHA0204S01
Check continuity between terminal Nos. 3 and 5.
Conditions
Continuity
12V direct current supply between terminal Nos. 1 and 2
Yes
No current supply
No
If NG, replace relay.
SHA479F
Refrigeralt Pressure Sensor
NAHA0204S02
Make sure that higher A/C refrigerant-pressure results in higher
refrigerant-pressure sensor output voltage.
Check voltage between ECM harness terminal No. 70 and body
ground.
Refer to EC-772, “Diagnostic Procedure”.
RHA070I
SHA315F
HA-132
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Insufficient Cooling
Insufficient Cooling
GI
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR INSUFFICIENT COOLING
=NAHA0205
SYMPTOM:
쐌 Insufficient cooling
MA
Inspection Flow
NAHA0205S01
Without Navigation System (Except LE Grade)
EM
NAHA0205S0101
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SHA648F
SC
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
HA-48
HA-104
HA-138
HA-57
STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
(HA-49), see No. 13.
*6:
*7:
*8:
*9:
*10:
*11:
*12:
*13:
*14:
*15:
HA-95
HA-108
HA-117
HA-128
HA-136
HA-133
HA-80
HA-49
HA-3
MA-14
LC-22
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Insufficient Cooling (Cont’d)
Without Navigation System (LE Grade)
NAHA0205S0103
RHA241I
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
HA-59
HA-103
HA-138
HA-67
STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
(HA-59), see No. 13.
*6:
*7:
*8:
*9:
*10:
*11:
*12:
*13:
*14:
*15:
HA-96
HA-109
HA-118
HA-128
HA-136
HA-134
HA-82
HA-59
HA-3
MA-14
LC-22
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Insufficient Cooling (Cont’d)
With Navigation System
NAHA0205S0102
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SHA649F
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
HA-69
HA-100
HA-138
HA-78
STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
(HA-69), see No. 13.
*6:
*7:
*8:
*9:
*10:
*11:
*12:
*13:
*14:
*15:
HA-96
HA-107
HA-116
HA-127
HA-136
HA-85
HA-69
HA-3
MA-14
LC-22
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-135
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Insufficient Cooling (Cont’d)
PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSES
NAHA0206
SHA333F
*1: HA-138
*2: HA-138
*3: HA-138
*4: HA-104
*5: HA-3
HA-136
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Insufficient Cooling (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SHA329F
*1: HA-175
*2: HA-114
*3: MA-14
SC
EL
IDX
HA-137
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Insufficient Cooling (Cont’d)
PERFORMANCE CHART
Test Condition
NAHA0207
NAHA0207S01
Testing must be performed as follows:
Vehicle location
Indoors or in the shade (in a well-ventilated place)
Doors
Closed
Door windows
Open
Hood
Open
TEMP.
Max. COLD
Mode switch
(Ventilation) set
(Recirculation) set
REC switch
(blower) speed
Max. speed set
Engine speed
Idle speed
Operate the air conditioning system for 10 minutes before taking measurements.
Test Reading
NAHA0207S02
Recirculating-to-discharge Air Temperature Table
NAHA0207S0201
Inside air (Recirculating air) at blower assembly inlet
Relative humidity
%
Discharge air temperature at center ventilator
°C (°F)
Air temperature
°C (°F)
25 (77)
6.0 - 9.0 (43 - 48)
30 (86)
10.0 - 13.6 (50 - 56)
35 (95)
15.2 - 19.5 (59 - 67)
40 (104)
22.5 - 27.1 (73 - 81)
25 (77)
9.0 - 12.2 (48 - 54)
30 (86)
13.6 - 17.2 (56 - 63)
35 (95)
19.5 - 23.7 (67 - 75)
40 (104)
27.1 - 32.3 (81 - 90)
50 - 60
60 - 70
Ambient Air Temperature-to-operating Pressure Table
NAHA0207S0202
Ambient air
Relative humidity
%
High-pressure (Discharge side)
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Low-pressure (Suction side)
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
25 (77)
1,226 - 1,638
(12.5 - 16.7, 178 - 237)
172 - 250 (1.75 - 2.55, 25 - 36)
30 (86)
1,422 - 1,883
(14.5 - 19.2, 206 - 273)
196 - 275 (2.0 - 2.8, 28 - 40)
35 (95)
1,657 - 2,187
(16.9 - 22.3, 240 - 317)
231 - 309 (2.35 - 3.15, 33 - 45)
40 (104)
1,922 - 2,501
(19.6 - 25.5, 279 - 363)
280 - 373 (2.85 - 3.8, 41 - 54)
Air temperature
°C (°F)
50 - 70
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR UNUSUAL PRESSURE
NAHA0208
Whenever system’s high and/or low side pressure is unusual, diagnose using a manifold gauge. The marker
above the gauge scale in the following tables indicates the standard (usual) pressure range. Since the standard (usual) pressure, however, differs from vehicle to vehicle, refer to HA-138 (“Ambient air temperature-tooperating pressure table”).
HA-138
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Insufficient Cooling (Cont’d)
Both High and Low-pressure Sides are Too High.
Gauge indication
NAHA0208S01
Refrigerant cycle
Both high and low-pressure sides
are too high.
Probable cause
Corrective action
쐌 Pressure is reduced soon
after water is splashed on
condenser.
Excessive refrigerant charge
in refrigeration cycle
Air suction by cooling fan is
insufficient.
Insufficient condenser cooling 쐌 Clean condenser.
performance
쐌 Check and repair cooling
"
fan as necessary.
1. Condenser fins are
clogged.
2. Improper fan rotation of
cooling fan
쐌 Low-pressure pipe is not
cold.
쐌 When compressor is
stopped high-pressure
AC359A
value quickly drops by
approximately 196 kPa (2
kg/cm2, 28 psi). It then
decreases gradually thereafter.
Engine tends to overheat.
쐌 An area of the low-pressure pipe is colder than
areas near the evaporator
outlet.
쐌 Plates are sometimes covered with frost.
Poor heat exchange in condenser
(After compressor operation
stops, high pressure
decreases too slowly.)
"
Air in refrigeration cycle
High-pressure side is too high and
low-pressure side is too low.
Reduce refrigerant until specified pressure is obtained.
Evacuate repeatedly and
recharge system.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
Engine cooling systems malfunction.
Check and repair each
engine cooling system.
쐌 Excessive liquid refrigerant
on low-pressure side
쐌 Excessive refrigerant discharge flow
쐌 Expansion valve is open a
little compared with the
specification.
"
1. Improper expansion valve
installation
2. Improper expansion valve
adjustment
Replace expansion valve.
High-pressure Side is Too High and Low-pressure Side is Too Low.
Gauge indication
GI
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
Upper side of condenser and
high-pressure side are hot,
however, liquid tank is not so
hot.
High-pressure tube or parts
located between compressor
and condenser are clogged
or crushed.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
NAHA0208S02
Corrective action
쐌 Check and repair or
replace malfunctioning
parts.
쐌 Check lubricant for contamination.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
AC360A
EL
IDX
HA-139
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Insufficient Cooling (Cont’d)
High-pressure Side is Too Low and Low-pressure Side is Too High.
Gauge indication
High-pressure side is too low and
low-pressure side is too high.
NAHA0208S03
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
High and low-pressure sides
become equal soon after
compressor operation stops.
Compressor pressure operation is improper.
"
Damaged inside compressor
packings
Replace compressor.
No temperature difference
between high and low-pressure sides
Compressor pressure operation is improper.
"
Damaged inside compressor
packings.
Replace compressor.
AC356A
HA-140
Corrective action
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Insufficient Cooling (Cont’d)
Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too Low.
Gauge indication
Refrigerant cycle
Both high- and low-pressure sides
are too low.
쐌 There is a big temperature
difference between receiver
drier outlet and inlet. Outlet
temperature is extremely
low.
쐌 Liquid tank inlet and
expansion valve are
frosted.
쐌 Temperature of expansion
valve inlet is extremely low
as compared with areas
near liquid tank.
쐌 Expansion valve inlet may
be frosted.
쐌
Temperature difference
AC353A
occurs somewhere in highpressure side
쐌 Expansion valve and liquid
tank are warm or only cool
when touched.
NAHA0208S04
Probable cause
GI
Corrective action
Compressor discharge capac- 쐌 Replace liquid tank.
ity does not change. (Com쐌 Check lubricant for conpressor stroke is set at maxitamination.
mum.)
MA
EM
LC
High-pressure pipe located
between receiver drier and
expansion valve is clogged.
쐌 Check and repair malfunctioning parts.
쐌 Check lubricant for contamination.
EC
FE
CL
Low refrigerant charge
"
Leaking fittings or components
Check refrigerant for leaks.
Refer to “Checking Refrigerant Leaks”, HA-180.
There is a big temperature
Expansion valve closes a little 쐌 Remove foreign particles
difference between expansion compared with the specificaby using compressed air.
valve inlet and outlet while
tion.
쐌 Check lubricant for conthe valve itself is frosted.
"
tamination.
1. Improper expansion valve
adjustment
2. Malfunctioning expansion
valve
3. Outlet and inlet may be
clogged.
An area of the low-pressure
Low-pressure pipe is clogged
pipe is colder than areas near or crushed.
the evaporator outlet.
쐌 Check and repair malfunctioning parts.
쐌 Check lubricant for contamination.
Air flow volume is not enough Evaporator is frozen.
쐌 Check intake sensor circuit.
or is too low.
"
쐌 Replace compressor.
Compressor discharge capacity does not change. (Compressor stroke is set at maximum length.)
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-141
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Insufficient Cooling (Cont’d)
Low-pressure Side Sometimes Becomes Negative.
Gauge indication
Refrigerant cycle
쐌 Air conditioning system
does not function and
does not cyclically cool the
compartment air.
쐌 The system constantly
functions for a certain
period of time after compressor is stopped and
restarted.
Low-pressure side sometimes
becomes negative.
NAHA0208S05
Probable cause
Refrigerant does not discharge cyclically.
"
Moisture is frozen at expansion valve outlet and inlet.
"
Water is mixed with refrigerant.
Corrective action
쐌 Drain water from refrigerant or replace refrigerant.
쐌 Replace liquid tank.
AC354A
Low-pressure Side Becomes Negative.
Gauge indication
Low-pressure side becomes negative.
NAHA0208S06
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
Corrective action
Liquid tank or front/rear side
of expansion valve’s pipe is
frosted or dewed.
High-pressure side is closed
and refrigerant does not flow.
"
Expansion valve or liquid
tank is frosted.
Leave the system at rest
until no frost is present. Start
it again to check whether or
not the problem is caused by
water or foreign particles.
쐌 If water is the cause, initially cooling is okay. Then
the water freezes causing
a blockage. Drain water
from refrigerant or replace
refrigerant.
쐌 If due to foreign particles,
remove expansion valve
and remove the particles
with dry and compressed
air (not shop air).
쐌 If either of the above
methods cannot correct
the problem, replace
expansion valve.
쐌 Replace liquid tank.
쐌 Check lubricant for contamination.
AC362A
HA-142
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Insufficient Heating
Insufficient Heating
GI
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR INSUFFICIENT HEATING
=NAHA0209
SYMPTOM:
쐌 Insufficient heating
MA
Inspection Flow
NAHA0209S01
Without Navigation System (Except LE Grade)
EM
NAHA0209S0101
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
RHA242I
SC
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
HA-80
HA-48
HA-49
HA-49
HA-104
*6: STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
(HA-49), see No. 13.
*7: HA-96
*8: HA-109
*9: HA-118
HA-143
*10:
*11:
*12:
*13:
HA-100
MA-15
LC-12
LC-18
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Insufficient Heating (Cont’d)
Without Navigation System (LE Grade)
NAHA0209S0103
RHA157IB
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
HA-82
HA-59
HA-59
HA-59
HA-103
*6: STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
(HA-59), see No. 13.
*7: HA-96
*8: HA-109
*9: HA-118
HA-144
*10:
*11:
*12:
*13:
HA-96
MA-15
LC-12
LC-18
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Insufficient Heating (Cont’d)
With Navigation System
NAHA0209S0102
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
RHA243I
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
HA-85
HA-69
HA-69
HA-69
HA-104
*6: STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE
(HA-69), see No. 13.
*7: HA-96
*8: HA-107
*9: HA-116
*10:
*11:
*12:
*13:
HA-100
MA-15
LC-12
LC-18
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-145
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Noise
Noise
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR NOISE
=NAHA0210
SYMPTOM:
쐌 Noise
RHA883H
*1: HA-175
*2: HA-177
*3: HA-172
*4: HA-80
*5: MA-14
*6: MA-15
HA-146
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis
Self-diagnosis
GI
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR SELF-DIAGNOSIS
=NAHA0211
SYMPTOM:
쐌 Self-diagnosis cannot be performed.
MA
Inspection Flow
NAHA0211S01
Without Navigation System (Except LE Grade)
EM
NAHA0211S0101
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
SHA250F
*1: HA-89
*2: HA-155
*3: HA-158
*7: HA-80
*8: HA-79
*9: HA-80
*4: HA-162
*5: HA-165
*6: HA-167
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-147
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
Without Navigation System (LE Grade)
NAHA0211S0103
RHA158I
*1: HA-90
*2: HA-155
*3: HA-158
*7: HA-82
*8: HA-79
*9: HA-82
*4: HA-162
*5: HA-165
*6: HA-167
HA-148
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
With Navigation System
NAHA0211S0102
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
RHA116I
ST
*1: HA-89
*2: HA-155
*3: HA-158
*7: HA-85
*8: HA-79
*10: HA-168
*4: HA-162
*5: HA-165
*6: HA-167
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-149
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Memory Function
Memory Function
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR MEMORY FUNCTION
=NAHA0212
SYMPTOM:
쐌 Memory function does not operate.
Inspection Flow
NAHA0212S01
Without Navigation System (Except LE Grade)
NAHA0212S0101
RHA244I
*1: HA-89
*2: HA-80
*3: HA-49
HA-150
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Memory Function (Cont’d)
Without Navigation System (LE Grade)
NAHA0212S0103
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
RHA159IA
*1: HA-90
*2: HA-82
PD
*3: HA-59
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-151
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Memory Function (Cont’d)
With Navigation System
NAHA0212S0102
RHA245I
*1: HA-89
*2: HA-85
*3: HA-69
HA-152
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
ECON (ECONOMY) Mode
ECON (ECONOMY) Mode
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR ECON (ECONOMY) MODE
GI
=NAHA0213
SYMPTOM:
쐌 ECON mode does not operate.
MA
Inspection Flow
NAHA0213S01
Without Navigation System (Except LE Grade)
EM
NAHA0213S0101
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SHA920EA
*1: HA-89
*2: HA-80
*3: HA-49
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-153
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
ECON (ECONOMY) Mode (Cont’d)
Without Navigation System (LE Grade)
NAHA0213S0103
RHA160I
*1: HA-90
*2: HA-82
*3: HA-59
HA-154
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
ECON (ECONOMY) Mode (Cont’d)
With Navigation System
NAHA0213S0102
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
RHA118I
*1: HA-89
*2: HA-85
PD
*3: HA-69
AX
SU
Ambient Sensor Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NAHA0214
The ambient sensor is located on the hood lock stay. It detects
ambient temperature and converts it into a resistance value which
is then input into the auto amplifier.
BR
ST
RS
BT
RHA050G
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INPUT PROCESS
NAHA0215
The automatic amplifier includes a “processing circuit” for the ambient sensor input. However, when the temperature detected by the
ambient sensor increases quickly, the processing circuit retards the
auto amp. function. It only allows the auto amp. to recognize an
ambient temperature increase of 0.33°C (0.6°F) per 100 seconds.
As an example, consider stopping for a cup of coffee after high
speed driving. Although the actual ambient temperature has not
changed, the temperature detected by the ambient sensor will
increase. This is because the heat from the engine compartment
can radiate to the front grille area, location of the ambient sensor.
HA-155
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Ambient Sensor Circuit (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
NAHA0216
SYMPTOM: Ambient sensor circuit is open or shorted. (
or
is indicated on the display as a result of conducting Self−
diagnosis STEP 2.)
RHA051GE
1
CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR AND BODY GROUND
Disconnect ambient sensor harness connector.
Do approx. 5 volts exist between ambient sensor harness connector terminal No. 1 and body ground?
RHA052G
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
GO TO 4.
2
CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR AND AUTO AMP. (LCU)
1. Disconnect auto amp. (LCU) harness connector.
2. Check circuit continuity between ambient sensor harness connector terminal No. 2 and auto amp. (LCU) harness connector terminal No. 9 or 11.
RHA829H
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
HA-156
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Ambient Sensor Circuit (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR
Refer to HA-158.
MA
OK or NG
OK
NG
4
䊳
䊳
1. Replace auto amp. (LCU).
2. Go to self-diagnosis step-by-step procedure HA-49 (Without navigation system,
except LE grade), HA-59 (Without navigation system, LE grade) or HA-69 (With navigation system) and perform self-diagnosis STEP-2.
Confirm that code No. 20 is displayed.
EM
LC
Replace ambient sensor.
EC
CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR AND AUTO AMP. (LCU)
1. Disconnect auto amp. (LCU) harness connector.
2. Check circuit continuity between ambient sensor harness connector terminal No. 1 and auto amp. (LCU) harness connector terminal No. 2.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
RHA830H
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short.
PD
OK or NG
OK
NG
䊳
䊳
1. Replace auto amp. (LCU).
2. Go to self-diagnosis step-by-step procedure HA-49 (Without navigation system,
except LE grade), HA-59 (Without navigation system, LE grade) or HA-69 (With navigation system) and perform self-diagnosis STEP-2.
Confirm that code No. 20 is displayed.
AX
SU
Repair harness or connector.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-157
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Ambient Sensor Circuit (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Ambient Sensor
NAHA0217
NAHA0217S01
After disconnecting ambient sensor harness connector, measure
resistance between terminals 2 and 1 at sensor harness side, using
the table below.
SHA304F
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
−15 (5)
12.73
−10 (14)
9.92
−5 (23)
7.80
0 (32)
6.19
5 (41)
4.95
10 (50)
3.99
15 (59)
3.24
20 (68)
2.65
25 (77)
2.19
30 (86)
1.81
35 (95)
1.51
40 (104)
1.27
45 (113)
1.07
If NG, replace ambient sensor.
In-vehicle Sensor Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
In-vehicle sensor
NAHA0218
NAHA0218S01
The in-vehicle sensor is located on instrument lower panel. It converts variations in temperature of compartment air drawn from the
aspirator into a resistance value. It is then input into the auto
amplifier.
RHA103G
HA-158
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
In-vehicle Sensor Circuit (Cont’d)
Aspirator
NAHA0218S02
The aspirator is located in front of heater unit. It produces vacuum
pressure due to air discharged from the heater unit, continuously
taking compartment air in the aspirator.
GI
MA
EM
LC
RHA636F
EC
FE
CL
MT
RHA482A
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
AT
NAHA0219
SYMPTOM: In-vehicle sensor circuit is open or shorted. (
or
−
is indicated on the display as a result of conducting Selfdiagnosis STEP 2.)
TF
PD
AX
SU
RHA056GH
1
CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN IN-VEHICLE SENSOR AND BODY GROUND
BR
Disconnect in-vehicle sensor harness connector.
Do approx. 5 volts exist between in-vehicle sensor harness connector terminal No. 1 and body ground?
ST
RS
BT
RHA579H
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
GO TO 4.
SC
EL
IDX
HA-159
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
In-vehicle Sensor Circuit (Cont’d)
2
CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN IN-VEHICLE SENSOR AND AUTO AMP. (LCU)
1. Disconnect auto amp. (LCU) harness connector.
2. Check circuit continuity between in-vehicle sensor harness connector terminal No. 2 and auto amp. (LCU) harness connector terminal No. 11 or 9.
RHA831H
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
3
CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
Refer to HA-161.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
1. Replace auto amp.
2. Go to self-diagnosis step-by-step procedure HA-49 (Without navigation system,
except LE grade), HA-59 (Without navigation system, LE grade) or HA-69 (With navigation system) and perform self-diagnosis STEP-2.
Confirm that code No. 20 is displayed.
NG
䊳
1. Replace in-vehicle sensor.
2. Go to self-diagnosis step-by-step procedure HA-49 (Without navigation system,
except LE grade), HA-59 (Without navigation system, LE grade) or HA-69 (With navigation system) and perform self-diagnosis STEP-2.
Confirm that code No. 20 is displayed.
HA-160
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
In-vehicle Sensor Circuit (Cont’d)
CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN IN-VEHICLE SENSOR AND AUTO AMP. (LCU)
GI
1. Disconnect auto amp. (LCU) harness connector.
2. Check circuit continuity between in-vehicle sensor harness connector terminal No. 1 and auto amp. (LCU) harness connector terminal No. 3.
MA
4
EM
LC
EC
RHA832H
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short.
FE
CL
OK or NG
OK
NG
䊳
䊳
1. Replace auto amp. (LCU).
2. Go to self-diagnosis step-by-step procedure HA-49 (Without navigation system,
except LE grade), HA-67 (Without navigation system, LE grade) or HA-69 (With navigation system) and perform self-diagnosis STEP-2.
Confirm that code No. 20 is displayed.
MT
AT
Repair harness or connector.
TF
PD
AX
SU
COMPONENT INSPECTION
In-vehicle Sensor
NAHA0220
NAHA0220S01
After disconnecting in-vehicle sensor harness connector, measure
resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor harness side, using
the table below.
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
−15 (5)
12.73
−10 (14)
9.92
−5 (23)
7.80
0 (32)
6.19
5 (41)
4.95
10 (50)
3.99
15 (59)
3.24
20 (68)
2.65
25 (77)
2.19
30 (86)
1.81
RHA905H
HA-161
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
In-vehicle Sensor Circuit (Cont’d)
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
35 (95)
1.51
40 (104)
1.27
45 (113)
1.07
If NG, replace in-vehicle sensor.
Sunload Sensor Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NAHA0221
The sunload sensor is located on the right defroster grille. It detects
sunload entering through windshield by means of a photo diode.
The sensor converts the sunload into a current value which is then
input into the auto amplifier.
RHA639F
SUNLOAD INPUT PROCESS
NAHA0222
The auto amp. also includes a processing circuit which “average”
the variations in detected sunload over a period of time. This prevents drastic swings in the A/C system operation due to small or
quick variations in detected sunload.
For example, consider driving along a road bordered by an occasional group of large trees. The sunload detected by the sunload
sensor will vary whenever the trees obstruct the sunlight. The processing circuit averages the detected sunload over a period of
time, so that the (insignificant) effect of the trees momentarily
obstructing the sunlight does not cause any change in the A/C
system operation. On the other hand, shortly after entering a long
tunnel, the system will recognize the change in sunload, and the
system will react accordingly.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
NAHA0223
SYMPTOM: Sunload sensor circuit is open or shorted. (
or
−
is indicated on the display as a result of conducting Selfdiagnosis STEP 2.)
RHA084I
HA-162
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Sunload Sensor Circuit (Cont’d)
1
GI
CHECK SUNLOAD SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN SUNLOAD SENSOR AND BODY GROUND
Disconnect sunload sensor harness connector.
Do approx. 5 volts exist between sunload sensor harness connector terminal No. 1 and body ground?
MA
EM
LC
EC
RHA062G
FE
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
GO TO 4.
CL
MT
2
CHECK SUNLOAD SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN SUNLOAD SENSOR AND AUTO AMP. (LCU)
1. Disconnect auto amp. (LCU) harness connector.
2. Check circuit continuity between sunload sensor harness connector terminal No. 2 and auto amp. (LCU) harness connector terminal No. 11 or 9.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
RHA833H
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short.
BR
OK or NG
ST
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
RS
3
CHECK SUNLOAD SENSOR
Refer to HA-164.
BT
OK or NG
OK
NG
䊳
䊳
1. Replace auto amp. (LCU).
2. Go to self-diagnosis step-by-step procedure HA-49 (Without navigation system,
except LE grade), HA-59 (Without navigation system, LE grade) or HA-69 (With navigation system) and perform self-diagnosis STEP-2.
Confirm that code No. 20 is displayed.
1. Replace sunload sensor.
2. Go to self-diagnosis step-by-step procedure HA-49 (Without navigation system,
except LE grade), HA-59 (Without navigation system, LE grade) or HA-69 (With navigation system) and perform self-diagnosis STEP-2.
Confirm that code No. 20 is displayed.
HA-163
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Sunload Sensor Circuit (Cont’d)
4
CHECK SUNLOAD SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN SUNLOAD SENSOR AND AUTO AMP. (LCU)
1. Disconnect auto amp. (LCU) harness connector.
2. Check circuit continuity between sunload sensor harness connector terminal No. 1 and auto amp. (LCU) harness connector terminal No. 12 or 10.
RHA834H
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
1. Replace auto amp.
2. Go to self-diagnosis step-by-step procedure HA-49 (Without navigation system,
except LE grade), HA-59 (Without navigation system, LE grade) or HA-69 (With navigation system) and perform self-diagnosis STEP-2.
Confirm that code No. 20 is displayed.
NG
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Sunload Sensor
NAHA0224
NAHA0224S01
Measure voltage between auto amp. terminal No. 12 (10) and body
ground.
If NG, replace sunload sensor.
쐌 When checking sunload sensor, select a place where sun
shines directly on it.
RHA835H
HA-164
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Sunload Sensor Circuit (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SHA930E
MT
AT
Intake Sensor Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
NAHA0225
The intake sensor is located on the cooling unit. It converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the auto amp.
After disconnecting intake sensor harness connector, measure
resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor harness side, using
the table below.
RHA584E
TF
NAHA0225S01
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
−15 (5)
12.34
−10 (14)
9.62
−5 (23)
7.56
0 (32)
6.00
5 (41)
4.80
10 (50)
3.87
15 (59)
3.15
20 (68)
2.57
25 (77)
2.12
30 (86)
1.76
35 (95)
1.47
40 (104)
1.23
45 (113)
1.04
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
If NG, replace intake sensor.
IDX
HA-165
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Intake Sensor Circuit (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
NAHA0226
SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or shorted. (
or
is indicated on the display as a result of conducting
−
Self-diagnosis STEP 2.)
RHA056GI
1
CHECK INTAKE SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND BODY GROUND
Disconnect intake sensor harness connector.
Do approx. 5 volts exist between intake sensor harness connector terminal No. 1 and body ground?
RHA071I
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
GO TO 4.
2
CHECK INTAKE SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND AUTO AMP. (LCU)
1. Disconnect auto amp. (LCU) harness connector.
2. Check circuit continuity between intake sensor harness connector terminal No. 2 and auto amp. (LCU) harness connector terminal No. 11 or 9.
RHA836H
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
HA-166
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Intake Sensor Circuit (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK INTAKE SENSOR
Refer to HA-165.
MA
OK or NG
OK
NG
䊳
䊳
1. Replace auto amp.
2. Go to self-diagnosis step-by-step procedure HA-49 (Without navigation system,
except LE grade), HA-59 (Without navigation system, LE grade) or HA-69 (With navigation system) and perform self-diagnosis STEP-2.
Confirm that code No. 20 is displayed.
1. Replace intake sensor.
2. Go to self-diagnosis step-by-step procedure HA-49 (Without navigation system,
except LE grade), HA-59 (Without navigation system, LE grade) or HA-69 (With navigation system) and perform self-diagnosis STEP-2.
Confirm that code No. 20 is displayed.
EM
LC
EC
FE
4
CHECK INTAKE SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND AUTO AMP. (LCU)
1. Disconnect auto amp. (LCU) harness connector.
2. Check circuit continuity between intake sensor harness connector terminal No. 1 and auto amp. (LCU) harness connector terminal No. 1.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
RHA837H
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short.
AX
OK or NG
OK
NG
䊳
䊳
1. Replace auto amp.
2. Go to self-diagnosis step-by-step procedure HA-49 (Without navigation system,
except LE grade), HA-59 (Without navigation system, LE grade) or HA-69 (With navigation system) and perform self-diagnosis STEP-2.
Confirm that code No. 20 is displayed.
SU
BR
ST
Repair harness or connector.
RS
BT
Air Mix Door Motor PBR Circuit
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
NAHA0227
For description of mode door motor and air mix door motor circuit,
refer to HA-103.
SYMPTOM: If PBR circuit is open or shorted. (−
or
is
indicated on the display as a result of conducting Self-diagnosis STEP 2.)
Perform diagnostic procedure for mode door motor and air
mix door motor. Refer to HA-96.
SC
EL
IDX
HA-167
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Multiplex Communication Circuit
Multiplex Communication Circuit
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
NAHA0259
SYMPTOM:
쐌 A/C system does not come on.
쐌 A/C system cannot controlled.
RHA888H
1
CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN DISPLAY & NAVI CONTROL UNIT AND AUTO AMP.
Check circuit continuity between each terminal on Display & Navigation control unit and on auto amp.
RHA889H
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
1. Repair harness or connector.
2. Go to “OPERATIONAL CHECK”, HA-85.
Confirm that A/C system is in good order.
2
CHECK MULTI-PLEX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
Do approx. 3.5 volts exist between Display & NAVI control unit harness connector terminal Nos. 37, 38 and body ground?
RHA890H
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 3.
No
䊳
1. Replace auto amp.
2. Go to “OPERATIONAL CHECK”, HA-85.
Confirm that A/C system is in good order.
HA-168
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
AUTO
Multiplex Communication Circuit (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
Do approx. 3.5 volts exist between auto amp. harness connector terminal No. 40 and body ground?
MA
EM
LC
EC
RHA891H
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
INSPECTION END.
No
䊳
1. Replace Display & NAVI control unit.
2. Go to “OPERATIONAL CHECK”, HA-85.
Confirm that A/C system is in good order.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-169
SERVICE PROCEDURE
AUTO
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure
SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Discharging Refrigerant
NAHA0228
NAHA0228S01
NAHA0228S0101
WARNING:
Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and
throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from A/C system using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 (R-134a recycling equipment) or J2209 (R-134a recovery equipment). If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety
information may be obtained from refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers.
SHA179FC
Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant
NAHA0228S0102
SHA180FC
HA-170
SERVICE PROCEDURE
AUTO
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SHA251FA
*1: HA-172
*2: HA-180
*3: HA-181
*4: HA-136
*5: HA-3
SC
EL
IDX
HA-171
SERVICE PROCEDURE
AUTO
Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor
Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in
Compressor
NAHA0229
The lubricant in the compressor circulates through the system with
the refrigerant. Add lubricant to compressor when replacing any
component or after a large gas leakage occurred. It is important to
maintain the specified amount.
If lubricant quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result:
쐌 Lack of lubricant: May lead to a seized compressor
쐌 Excessive lubricant: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange
interference)
LUBRICANT
NAHA0229S01
Name: Nissan A/C System Oil Type S
Part number: KLH00-PAGS0
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING
NAHA0229S02
Adjust the lubricant quantity according to the test group shown
below.
1
CHECK LUBRICANT RETURN OPERATION
Can lubricant return operation be performed?
쐌 A/C system works properly.
쐌 There is no evidence of a large amount of lubricant leakage.
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
GO TO 3.
2
PERFORM LUBRICANT RETURN OPERATION, PROCEEDING AS FOLLOWS:
1. Start engine, and set the following conditions:
쐌 Test condition
Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm
AUTO switch: ON
Blower speed: Max. position
Temp. control: Optional [Set so that intake air temperature is 25 to 30°C (77 to 86°F).]
2. Next item is for V-6 compressor. Connect the manifold gauge, and check that the high pressure side pressure
is 588 kPa (6 kg/cm2, 85 psi) or higher.
If less than the reference level, attach a cover to the front face of the condenser to raise the pressure.
3. Perform lubricant return operation for about 10 minutes.
4. Stop engine.
CAUTION:
If excessive lubricant leakage is noted, do not perform the lubricant return operation.
OK
3
䊳
GO TO 3.
CHECK COMPRESSOR
Should the compressor be replaced?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Go to “Lubricant Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement”, (HA-173).
No
䊳
GO TO 4.
HA-172
SERVICE PROCEDURE
AUTO
Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK ANY PART
Is there any part to be replaced? (Evaporator, condenser, liquid tank or in case there is evidence of a large amount of
lubricant leakage.)
MA
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Go to “Lubricant Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except
Compressor”, (HA-173).
No
䊳
Carry out the A/C performance test.
EM
Lubricant Adjusting Procedure for Components
Replacement Except Compressor
LC
NAHA0229S0201
After replacing any of the following major components, add the
correct amount of lubricant to the system.
Amount of lubricant to be added
EC
FE
Lubricant to be added to
system
Part replaced
Remarks
CL
MT
Amount of lubricant
m (US fl oz, Imp fl oz)
Evaporator
75 (2.5, 2.6)
—
Condenser
75 (2.5, 2.6)
—
Liquid tank
5 (0.2, 0.2)
Add if compressor is not
replaced. *1
In case of refrigerant
leak
30 (1.0, 1.1)
Large leak
—
Small leak *2
*1:
*2:
If compressor is replaced, addition of lubricant is included in the table.
If refrigerant leak is small, no addition of lubricant is needed.
Lubricant Adjusting Procedure for Compressor
Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
TF
PD
AX
NAHA0229S0202
Before connecting ACR4 to vehicle, check ACR4 gauges. No
refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines.
Connect ACR4 to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply
tank using ACR4 and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to
“CONTAMINATED REFRIGERANT”, HA-3.
Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using ACR4
and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to “CONTAMINATED
REFRIGERANT”, HA-3.
Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling
equipment. Measure lubricant discharged into the recovery/
recycling equipment.
Remove the drain plug of the “old” (removed) compressor.
Drain the lubricant into a graduated container and record the
amount of drained lubricant.
Remove the drain plug and drain the lubricant from the “new”
compressor into a separate, clean container.
Measure an amount of new lubricant installed equal to amount
drained from “old” compressor. Add this lubricant to “new” compressor through the suction port opening.
Measure an amount of new lubricant equal to the amount
recovered during discharging. Add this lubricant to “new” compressor through the suction port opening.
Torque the drain plug.
18 - 19 N·m (1.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 13 - 14 ft-lb)
HA-173
AT
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
SERVICE PROCEDURE
AUTO
Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor (Cont’d)
10. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional
5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant at this time.
Do not add this 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant if only replacing the compressor.
RHA065DD
HA-174
SERVICE PROCEDURE
AUTO
Compressor
Compressor
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
GI
NAHA0230
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
RHA650F
AT
Compressor Clutch
OVERHAUL
NAHA0231
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
RHA122F
REMOVAL
쐌
BT
NAHA0232
When removing center bolt, hold clutch disc with clutch disc
wrench.
SC
EL
IDX
RHA136EB
HA-175
SERVICE PROCEDURE
AUTO
Compressor Clutch (Cont’d)
RHA399F
쐌
Remove the clutch disc using the clutch disc puller.
Insert the holder’s three pins into the holes in the clutch disc.
Rotate the holder clockwise to hook it onto the plate. Then,
tighten the center bolt to remove the clutch disc.
After removing the clutch disc, remove the shims from either
the drive shaft or the clutch disc.
쐌
Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers.
쐌
Pulley removal
Position the center pulley puller on the end of the drive shaft,
and remove the pulley assembly using any commercially available pulley puller.
To prevent the pulley groove from being deformed, the
puller claws should be positioned onto the edge of the
pulley assembly.
쐌
Remove the field coil harness clip using a pair of pliers.
RHA124F
RHA138E
RHA139E
RHA125F
HA-176
SERVICE PROCEDURE
AUTO
Compressor Clutch (Cont’d)
쐌
Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers.
GI
MA
EM
LC
RHA145E
INSPECTION
Clutch Disc
EC
NAHA0233
NAHA0233S01
If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive
heat, replace clutch disc and pulley.
Pulley
NAHA0233S02
Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If the contact surface of pulley shows signs of excessive grooving, replace clutch
disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley assembly should
be cleaned with a suitable solvent before reinstallation.
RHA126F
Coil
NAHA0233S03
Check coil for loose connection or cracked insulation.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
INSTALLATION
쐌
쐌
NAHA0234
Install the field coil.
Be sure to align the coil’s pin with the hole in the compressor’s front head.
Install the field coil harness clip using a screwdriver.
BR
ST
RS
BT
RHA142E
쐌
Install the pulley assembly using the installer and a hand
press, and then install the snap ring using snap ring pliers.
SC
EL
IDX
RHA143EA
HA-177
SERVICE PROCEDURE
AUTO
Compressor Clutch (Cont’d)
쐌
Install the clutch disc on the drive shaft, together with the
original shim(s). Press the clutch disc down by hand.
쐌
Using the holder to prevent clutch disc rotation, tighten the bolt
to 14 N·m (1.4 kg-m, 10 ft-lb) torque.
After tightening the bolt, check that the pulley rotates
smoothly.
쐌
Check clearance around the entire periphery of clutch disc.
Disc-to-pulley clearance:
0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in)
If the specified clearance is not obtained, replace adjusting
spacer and readjust.
RHA127F
RHA086E
RHA087E
Break-in Operation
NAHA0234S01
When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always carry out the
break-in operation. This is done by engaging and disengaging the
clutch about thirty times. Break-in operation raises the level of
transmitted torque.
HA-178
SERVICE PROCEDURE
AUTO
Refrigerant Lines
Refrigerant Lines
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
쐌
GI
=NAHA0235
Refer to page HA-5 regarding “Precautions for Refrigerant Connection”.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
RHA072I
EL
IDX
HA-179
SERVICE PROCEDURE
AUTO
Checking for Refrigerant Leaks
Checking for Refrigerant Leaks
PRELIMINARY CHECK
쐌
=NAHA0236
NAHA0236S04
Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings,
hoses and components for signs of A/C lubricant leakage,
damage and corrosion. A/C lubricant leakage may indicate an
area of refrigerant leakage. Allow extra inspection time in these
areas when using either an electronic refrigerant leak detector
or fluorescent dye leak detector.
쐌 If dye is observed, confirm the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector. It is possible a prior leak was repaired and
not properly cleaned.
쐌 When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found
but continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and connections.
쐌 When searching for refrigerant leaks using an electronic leak
detector, move the probe along the suspected leak area at 25
to 50 mm (1 to 2 in) per second and no further than 1/4 inch
from the component.
NOTE:
Moving the electronic leak detector probe slower and closer to
the suspected leak area will improve the chances of finding a
leak.
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector
NAHA0250
PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTORNAHA0250S01
SHA196FA
When performing a refrigerant leak check, use a J-41995 A/C leak
detector or equivalent. Ensure that the instrument is calibrated and
set properly per the operating instructions.
The leak detector is a delicate device. In order to use the leak
detector properly, read the operating instructions and perform any
specified maintenance.
쐌 Other gases in the work area or substances on the A/C
components, for example, anti-freeze, windshield washer
fluid, solvents and lubricants, may falsely trigger the leak
detector. Make sure the surfaces to be checked are clean.
Clean with a dry cloth or blow off with shop air.
쐌 Do not allow the sensor tip of the detector to contact with
any substance. This can also cause false readings and
may damage the detector.
1.
Position probe approximately 5 mm (3/16 in) away from point
to be checked.
SHA707EA
HA-180
SERVICE PROCEDURE
AUTO
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector (Cont’d)
2.
When testing, circle each fitting completely with probe.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SHA706E
3.
Move probe along component approximately 25 to 50 mm (1
to 2 in)/sec.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SHA708EA
CHECKING PROCEDURE
AT
NAHA0250S02
To prevent inaccurate or false readings, make sure there is no
refrigerant vapor, shop chemicals, or cigarette smoke in the
vicinity of the vehicle. Perform the leak test in calm area (low
air/wind movement) so that the leaking refrigerant is not dispersed.
1. Turn engine off.
2. Connect a suitable A/C manifold gauge set to the A/C service
ports.
3. Check if the A/C refrigerant pressure is at least 345 kPa (3.52
kg/cm2, 50 psi) above 16°C (61°F). If less than specification,
recover/evacuate and recharge the system with the specified
amount of refrigerant.
NOTE:
At temperatures below 16°C (61°F), leaks may not be detected
since the system may not reach 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2, 50 psi).
4. Conduct the leak test from the high side (compressor discharge a to evaporator inlet f) to the low side (evaporator drain
hose g to shaft seal k). Refer to HA-179. Perform a leak check
for the following areas carefully. Clean the component to be
checked and move the leak detector probe completely around
the connection/component.
쐌 Compressor
Check the fitting of high and low pressure hoses, relief valve
and shaft seal.
쐌 Liquid tank
Check the tube fitting.
쐌 Service valves
Check all around the service valves. Ensure service valve caps
are secured on the service valves (to prevent leaks).
NOTE:
After removing A/C manifold gauge set from service valves, wipe
any residue from valves to prevent any false readings by leak
detector.
HA-181
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
SERVICE PROCEDURE
AUTO
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector (Cont’d)
쐌
Cooling unit (Evaporator)
With engine OFF, turn blower fan on “High” for at least 15
seconds to dissipate any refrigerant trace in the cooling unit.
Wait a minimum of 10 minutes accumulation time (refer to the
manufacturer’s recommended procedure for actual wait time)
before inserting the leak detector probe into the drain hose.
Keep the probe inserted for at least ten seconds. Use caution
not to contaminate the probe tip with water or dirt that may be
in the drain hose.
5. If a leak detector detects a leak, verify at least once by blowing compressed air into area of suspected leak, then repeat
check as outlined above.
6. Do not stop when one leak is found. Continue to check for
additional leaks at all system components.
If no leaks are found, perform steps 7 - 10.
7. Start engine.
8. Set the heater A/C control as follows:
1) A/C switch ON.
2) Face mode
3) Recirculation switch ON
4) Max cold temperature
5) Fan speed high
9. Run engine at 1,500 rpm for at least 2 minutes.
10. Turn engine off and perform leak check again following steps
4 through 6 above.
Refrigerant leaks should be checked immediately after
stopping the engine. Begin with the leak detector at the
compressor. The pressure on the high pressure side will
gradually drop after refrigerant circulation stops and pressure on the low pressure side will gradually rise, as shown
in the graph. Some leaks are more easily detected when
pressure is high.
SHA839E
11. Before connecting ACR4 to vehicle, check ACR4 gauges. No
refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If pressure is
displayed, recover refrigerant from equipment lines and then
check refrigerant purity.
12. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using ACR4 and refrigerant identifier.
13. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using ACR4
and refrigerant identifier.
14. Discharge A/C system using approved refrigerant recovery
equipment. Repair the leaking fitting or component as necessary.
HA-182
SERVICE PROCEDURE
AUTO
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector (Cont’d)
15. Evacuate and recharge A/C system and perform the leak test
to confirm no refrigerant leaks.
16. Conduct A/C performance test to ensure system works
properly.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector
PRECAUTIONS FOR FLUORESCENT DYE LEAK
DETECTION
쐌
쐌
쐌
CHECKING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS USING THE
FLUORESCENT LEAK DETECTOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NAHA0263
The fluorescent dye leak detector is not a replacement for an
electronic refrigerant leak detector. The fluorescent dye leak
detector should be used in conjunction with an electronic
refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) to pinpoint refrigerant leaks.
For your safety and your customer’s satisfaction, read and follow all manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions
prior to performing the work.
Refer to “Precautions for Leak Detection Dye”, HA-4.
NAHA0264
Check A/C system for leaks using the UV lamp and safety
glasses (J-42220) in a low sunlight area (area without windows
preferable). Illuminate all components, fittings and lines. The
dye will appear as a bright green/yellow area at the point of
leakage. Fluorescent dye observed at the evaporator drain
opening indicates an evaporator core assembly (tubes, core or
expansion valve) leak.
If the suspected area is difficult to see, use an adjustable mirror or wipe the area with a clean shop rag or cloth, then check
the cloth with the UV lamp for dye residue.
Confirm any suspected leaks with an approved electronic
refrigerant leak detector.
After the leak is repaired, remove any residual dye using dye
cleaner (J-43872) to prevent future misdiagnosis.
Perform a system performance check and verify the leak repair
with an approved electronic refrigerant leak detector.
DYE INJECTION
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
NAHA0265
(This procedure is only necessary when re-charging the system or
when the compressor has seized and was replaced.)
Refer to “Precautions for Leak Detection Dye”, HA-4.
1. Check A/C system static (at rest) pressure. Pressure must be
at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2, 50 psi).
2. Pour one bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) of the A/C refrigerant dye
into the injector tool (J-41459).
3. Connect the injector tool to the A/C LOW PRESSURE side
service fitting.
4. Start engine and switch A/C ON.
5. With the A/C operating (compressor running), inject one bottle
(1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) of fluorescent dye through the low-pressure service valve using dye injector tool J-41459 (refer to the
manufacturer’s operating instructions).
HA-183
FE
BT
SC
EL
IDX
SERVICE PROCEDURE
AUTO
Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector (Cont’d)
6.
With the engine still running, disconnect the injector tool from
the service fitting.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to allow dye to spray or drip when disconnecting the injector from the system.
NOTE:
If repairing the A/C system or replacing a component, pour the
dye directly into the open system connection and proceed
with the service procedures.
7. Operate the A/C system for a minimum of 20 minutes to mix
the dye with the system oil. Depending on the leak size, operating conditions and location of the leak, it may take from minutes to days for the dye to penetrate a leak and become visible.
Belt
TENSION ADJUSTMENT
쐌
NAHA0237
Refer to MA-14, “Checking Drive Belts”.
In-cabin Microfilter
FUNCTION
NAHA0271
Air inside passenger compartment is kept clean at either recirculation or fresh mode by installing In-cabin microfilter into cooling unit.
NOTE:
To replace In-cabin microfilter, refer to MA-9, MA-11, “Periodic
Maintenance”.
Caution label is fixed inside the glove box.
RHA042GB
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
Remove glove box.
Remove instrument lower panel from instrument panel.
Remove In-cabin microfilter fixed clip.
SHA252F
HA-184
NAHA0272
SERVICE PROCEDURE
AUTO
In-cabin Microfilter (Cont’d)
4.
5.
6.
7.
Take out the lower side In-cabin microfilter from cooling unit.
Then slide upper side filter to the bottom position and take off
the In-cabin microfilter from the cooling unit.
Replace with new one and reinstall on cooling unit.
Reinstall clip, instrument lower panel and glove box.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SHA253F
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-185
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
AUTO
Auto
Auto
COMPRESSOR
NAHA0241
Model
Calsonic Kansei make V-6
Type
V-6 variable displacement
Displacement
cm3 (cu in)/rev.
Max.
184 (11.228)
Min.
14.5 (0.885)
Cylinder bore x stroke
mm (in)
37 (1.46) x [2.3 - 28.6 (0.091 - 1.126)]
Direction of rotation
Clockwise (viewed from drive end)
Drive belt
Poly V
LUBRICANT
NAHA0242
Model
Calsonic Kansei make V-6
Name
Nissan A/C System Oil Type S
Part number*
Capacity
m (US fl oz, Imp fl oz)
KLH00-PAGS0
Total in system
180 (6.1, 6.3)
Compressor (Service part) charging amount
180 (6.1, 6.3)
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
REFRIGERANT
NAHA0243
Type
HFC-134a (R-134a)
Capacity
kg (lb)
0.45 (0.99)
ENGINE IDLING SPEED (WHEN A/C IS ON)
쐌
BELT TENSION
쐌
NAHA0244
Refer to EC-792, “Idle Speed and Ignition Timing”.
NAHA0245
Refer to MA-14, “Checking Drive Belts”.
HA-186
PRECAUTIONS
MANUAL
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR
BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
GI
NAHA0060
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL R50 is as follows:
쐌 For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
쐌 For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of side air bag module (located in the outer side of front seat),
side curtain air bag module (locating in the headlining side of front and rear seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring harness, warning lamp (one
of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
WARNING:
쐌 To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
쐌 Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.
쐌 Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connector (and by yellow harness protector or yellow insulation tape before the harness connectors).
Precautions for Working with HFC-134a
(R-134a)
NAHA0061
WARNING:
쐌 CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant are not compatible. If the refrigerants
are mixed and compressor malfunction is likely to occur, refer to “CONTAMINATED REFRIGERANT” below. To determine the purity of HFC-134a (R-134a) in the vehicle and recovery tank, use
Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling Recharging equipment (ACR4) (J-39500-NI) and Refrigerant Identifier.
쐌 Use only specified lubricant for the HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system and HFC-134a (R-134a) components. If lubricant other than that specified is used, compressor malfunction is likely to occur.
쐌 The specified HFC-134a (R-134a) lubricant rapidly absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. The following handling precautions must be observed:
a) When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to
minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere.
b) When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just
before connecting the components. Connect all refrigerant loop components as quickly as possible to minimize the entry of moisture into system.
c) Only use the specified lubricant from a sealed container. Immediately reseal containers of lubricant. Without proper sealing, lubricant will become moisture saturated and should not be used.
d) Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and
throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the A/C system, using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment, or J2209 HFC-134a
(R-134a) recovery equipment. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before
resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and
lubricant manufacturers.
e) Do not allow lubricant (Nissan A/C System Oil Type S) to come in contact with styrofoam parts.
Damage may result.
CONTAMINATED REFRIGERANT
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
NAHA0061S01
If a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in a vehicle, your options are:
쐌 Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated refrigerant into
the atmosphere.
쐌 Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage your service equipment and refrigerant supply.
HA-187
EL
IDX
PRECAUTIONS
MANUAL
Precautions for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a) (Cont’d)
쐌
쐌
쐌
Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the contamination may
have occurred.
If you choose to perform the repair, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and containers. Do not recover contaminated refrigerant into your existing service equipment. If your facility does not have dedicated recovery equipment, you may contact a local refrigerant product retailer for
available service. This refrigerant must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and local regulations.
In addition, replacement of all refrigerant system components on the vehicle is recommended.
If the vehicle is within the warranty period, the air conditioner warranty is void. Please contact Nissan
Customer Affairs for further assistance.
General Refrigerant Precautions
NAHA0062
WARNING:
쐌 Do not release refrigerant into the air. Use approved recovery/recycling equipment to capture the
refrigerant every time an air conditioning system is discharged.
쐌 Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or
air conditioning system.
쐌 Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 52°C (125°F).
쐌 Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the
bottom of the container in a warm pail of water.
쐌 Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers.
쐌 Keep refrigerant away from open flames: poisonous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns.
쐌 Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent
suffocation.
쐌 Do not pressure test or leak test HFC-134a (R-134a) service equipment and/or vehicle air conditioning systems with compressed air during repair. Some mixtures of air and HFC-134a (R-134a)
have been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures, if ignited, may cause
injury or property damage. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant manufacturers.
Precautions for Leak Detection Dye
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
NAHA0251
The A/C system contains a fluorescent leak detection dye used for locating refrigerant leaks. An ultraviolet (UV) lamp is required to illuminate the dye when inspecting for leaks.
Always wear fluorescence enhancing UV safety glasses to protect your eyes and enhance the visibility of
the fluorescent dye.
A compressor shaft seal should not be repaired because of dye seepage. The compressor shaft seal
should only be repaired after confirming the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995).
Always remove any dye from the leak area after repairs are complete to avoid a misdiagnosis during a
future service.
Do not allow dye to come into contact with painted body panels or interior components. If dye is spilled,
clean immediately with the approved dye cleaner. Fluorescent dye left on a surface for an extended period
of time cannot be removed.
Do not spray the fluorescent dye cleaning agent on hot surfaces (engine exhaust manifold, etc.).
Do not use more than one refrigerant dye bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) per A/C system.
Leak detection dyes for HFC-134a (R-134a) and CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems are different. Do not use
HFC-134a (R-134a) leak detection dye in CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system or CFC-12 (R-12) leak detection dye
in HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems or A/C system damage may result.
The fluorescent properties of the dye will remain for over three (3) years unless a compressor malfunction
occurs.
HA-188
PRECAUTIONS
MANUAL
Precaution for Identification Label on Vehicle
Precaution for Identification Label on Vehicle
쐌
쐌
쐌
NAHA0252
Vehicles with factory installed fluorescent dye have this identification label on the under side of hood.
Vehicles with factory installed fluorescent dye have a green
label.
Vehicles without factory installed fluorescent dye have a blue
label.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SHA436FA
Precautions for Refrigerant Connection
EC
NAHA0063
A new type refrigerant connection has been introduced to all refrigerant lines except the following portion.
쐌 Expansion valve to evaporator
FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT CONNECTION
쐌
쐌
FE
NAHA0063S01
The O-ring has been relocated. It has also been provided with a groove for proper installation. This eliminates the chance of the O-ring being caught in, or damaged by, the mating part. The sealing direction of
the O-ring is now set vertically in relation to the contacting surface of the mating part to improve sealing
characteristics.
The reaction force of the O-ring will not occur in the direction that causes the joint to pull out, thereby
facilitating piping connections.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
SHA815E
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-189
PRECAUTIONS
MANUAL
Precautions for Refrigerant Connection (Cont’d)
O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION
NAHA0063S02
RHA068I
CAUTION:
The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not confuse
O-rings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will leak at, or
around, the connection.
O-Ring Part Numbers and Specifications
NAHA0063S0201
Connection type
O-ring
size
New
Part number
D
mm (in)
W
mm (in)
92471 N8210
6.8 (0.268)
1.85 (0.0728)
92470 N8200
6.07 (0.2390)
1.78 (0.0701)
92472 N8210
10.9 (0.429)
2.43 (0.0957)
92475 71L00
11.0 (0.433)
2.4 (0.094)
92473 N8210
13.6 (0.535)
2.43 (0.0957)
92475 72L00
14.3 (0.563)
2.3 (0.0906)
92474 N8210
16.5 (0.650)
2.43 (0.0957)
92477 N8200
17.12 (0.6740)
1.78 (0.0701)
8
Former
New
12
Former
New
16
Former
SHA814E
New
19
Former
WARNING:
Make sure all refrigerant is discharged into the recycling equipment and the pressure in the system
is less than atmospheric pressure. Then gradually loosen the discharge side hose fitting and remove
it.
HA-190
PRECAUTIONS
MANUAL
Precautions for Refrigerant Connection (Cont’d)
CAUTION:
When replacing or cleaning refrigerant cycle components, observe the following.
쐌 When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car.
Failure to do so will cause lubricant to enter the low pressure chamber.
쐌 When connecting tubes, always use a torque wrench and a back-up wrench.
쐌 After disconnecting tubes, immediately plug all openings to prevent entry of dirt and moisture.
쐌 When installing an air conditioner in the vehicle, connect the pipes as the final stage of the operation. Do not remove the seal caps of pipes and other components until just before required for
connection.
쐌 Allow components stored in cool areas to warm to working area temperature before removing seal
caps. This prevents condensation from forming inside A/C components.
쐌 Thoroughly remove moisture from the refrigeration system before charging the refrigerant.
쐌 Always replace used O-rings.
쐌 When connecting tube, apply lubricant to circle of the O-rings shown in illustration. Be careful not
to apply lubricant to threaded portion.
Lubricant name: Nissan A/C System Oil Type S
Part number: KLH00-PAGS0
쐌 O-ring must be closely attached to dented portion of tube.
쐌 When replacing the O-ring, be careful not to damage O-ring and tube.
쐌 Connect tube until you hear it click, then tighten the nut or bolt by hand until snug. Make sure that
the O-ring is installed to tube correctly.
쐌 After connecting line, conduct leak test and make sure that there is no leakage from connections.
When the gas leaking point is found, disconnect that line and replace the O-ring. Then tighten
connections of seal seat to the specified torque.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
RHA861F
Precautions for Servicing Compressor
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
BT
NAHA0064
Plug all openings to prevent moisture and foreign matter from entering.
When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car.
When replacing or repairing compressor, follow “Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor” exactly. Refer to HA-255.
Keep friction surfaces between clutch and pulley clean. If the surface is contaminated, with
lubricant, wipe it off by using a clean waste cloth moistened with thinner.
After compressor service operation, turn the compressor shaft by hand more than five turns in
both directions. This will equally distribute lubricant inside the compressor. After the compressor
is installed, let the engine idle and operate the compressor for one hour.
After replacing the compressor magnet clutch, apply voltage to the new one and check for normal
operation.
HA-191
SC
EL
IDX
PRECAUTIONS
MANUAL
Precautions for Service Equipment
Precautions for Service Equipment
RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT
NAHA0065
NAHA0065S01
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for machine operation and
machine maintenance. Never introduce any refrigerant other than
that specified into the machine.
ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR
NAHA0065S02
Follow the manufacture’s instructions for tester operation and
tester maintenance.
VACUUM PUMP
NAHA0065S03
The lubricant contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible
with the specified lubricant for HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems.
The vent side of the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric
pressure. So the vacuum pump lubricant may migrate out of the
pump into the service hose. This is possible when the pump is
switched off after evacuation (vacuuming) and hose is connected
to it.
To prevent this migration, use a manual valve situated near the
hose-to-pump connection, as follows.
쐌 Usually vacuum pumps have a manual isolator valve as part
of the pump. Close this valve to isolate the service hose from
the pump.
쐌 For pumps without an isolator, use a hose equipped with a
manual shut-off valve near the pump end. Close the valve to
isolate the hose from the pump.
쐌 If the hose has an automatic shut off valve, disconnect the
hose from the pump: as long as the hose is connected, the
valve is open and lubricating oil may migrate.
Some one-way valves open when vacuum is applied and close
under a no vacuum condition. Such valves may restrict the pump’s
ability to pull a deep vacuum and are not recommended.
RHA270D
MANIFOLD GAUGE SET
NAHA0065S04
Be certain that the gauge face indicates R-134a or 134a. Make
sure the gauge set has 1/2″-16 ACME threaded connections for
service hoses. Confirm the set has been used only with refrigerant
HFC-134a (R-134a) along with specified lubricant.
SHA533D
SERVICE HOSES
NAHA0065S05
Be certain that the service hoses display the markings described
(colored hose with black stripe). All hoses must include positive
shut off devices (either manual or automatic) near the end of the
hoses opposite the manifold gauge.
RHA272D
HA-192
PRECAUTIONS
MANUAL
Precautions for Service Equipment (Cont’d)
SERVICE COUPLERS
NAHA0065S06
Never attempt to connect HFC-134a (R-134a) service couplers to
an CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system. The HFC-134a (R-134a) couplers
will not properly connect to the CFC-12 (R-12) system. However, if
an improper connection is attempted, discharging and contamination may occur.
Shut-off valve rotation
A/C service valve
Clockwise
Open
Counterclockwise
Close
GI
MA
EM
LC
RHA273D
REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE
EC
NAHA0065S07
Verify that no refrigerant other than HFC-134a (R-134a) and specified lubricants have been used with the scale. If the scale controls
refrigerant flow electronically, the hose fitting must be 1/2″-16
ACME.
FE
CL
MT
RHA274D
CALIBRATING ACR4 WEIGHT SCALE
AT
NAHA0065S09
Calibrate the scale every three months.
To calibrate the weight scale on the ACR4 (J-39500-NI):
1. Press Shift/Reset and Enter at the same time.
2. Press 8787. “A1” will be displayed.
3. Remove all weight from the scale.
4. Press 0, then press Enter. “0.00” will be displayed and change
to “A2”.
5. Place a known weight (dumbbell or similar weight), between
4.5 and 8.6 kg (10 and 19 lb) on the center of the weight scale.
6. Enter the known weight using four digits. (Example 10 lb =
10.00, 10.5 lb = 10.50)
7. Press Enter — the display returns to the vacuum mode.
8. Press Shift/Reset and Enter at the same time.
9. Press 6 — the known weight on the scale is displayed.
10. Remove the known weight from the scale. “0.00” will be displayed.
11. Press Shift/Reset to return the ACR4 to the program mode.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
CHARGING CYLINDER
NAHA0065S08
Using a charging cylinder is not recommended. Refrigerant may be
vented into air from cylinder’s top valve when filling the cylinder
with refrigerant. Also, the accuracy of the cylinder is generally less
than that of an electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge
equipment.
SC
EL
IDX
HA-193
PRECAUTIONS
MANUAL
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnoses
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnoses
NAHA0066
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
쐌 GI-11, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”
쐌 EL-12, “Wiring Diagram — POWER —”
When you perform trouble diagnoses, refer to the following:
쐌 GI-34, “HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”
쐌 GI-24, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR
AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”
HA-194
PREPARATION
MANUAL
Special Service Tools
Special Service Tools
NAHA0067
GI
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
MA
Description
KV99106100
(J-41260)
Clutch disc wrench
Removing center bolt
EM
LC
EC
NT232
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
NT378
KV99232340
(J-38874)
or
KV992T0001
(
—
)
Clutch disc puller
Removing clutch disc
AX
SU
BR
NT376
KV99106200
(J-41261)
Pulley installer
Installing pulley
ST
RS
NT235
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-195
PREPARATION
MANUAL
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and
Equipment
=NAHA0068
Never mix HFC-134a refrigerant and/or its specified lubricant with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and/or its lubricant.
Separate and non-interchangeable service equipment must be used for handling each type of refrigerant/
lubricant.
Refrigerant container fittings, service hose fittings and service equipment fittings (equipment which handles
refrigerant and/or lubricant) are different between CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). This is to avoid
mixed use of the refrigerants/lubricant.
Adapters that convert one size fitting to another must never be used: refrigerant/lubricant contamination will
occur and compressor malfunction will result.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
HFC-134a (R-134a)
refrigerant
Container color: Light blue
Container marking: HFC-134a (R-134a)
Fitting size: Thread size
쐌 Large container 1/2″-16 ACME
NT196
KLH00-PAGS0
(
—
)
Nissan A/C System Oil
Type S
Type: Poly alkylene glycol oil (PAG), type S
Application: HFC-134a (R-134a) swash plate (piston) compressors (Nissan only)
Lubricity: 40 m (1.4 US fl oz, 1.4 Imp fl oz)
NT197
(J-39500-NI)
Recovery/Recycling
Recharging equipment
(ACR4)
Function: Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling and
Recharging
NT195
(J-41995)
Electrical leak detector
Power supply:
쐌 DC 12V (Cigarette lighter)
AHA281A
HA-196
PREPARATION
MANUAL
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment (Cont’d)
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
GI
Description
(J-43926)
Refrigerant dye leak
detection kit
Kit includes:
(J-42220) UV lamp and
UV safety glasses
(J-41459) Refrigerant
dye injector
(J-41447) qty. 24
R-134a refrigerant dye
(J-43872) Refrigerant
dye cleaner
Power supply:
DC 12V (Battery terminal)
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
ZHA200H
(J-42220)
Fluorescent dye leak
detector
UV lamp
UV safety glasses
Power supply: DC12V (Battery terminal)
For checking refrigerant leak when fluorescent dye
is installed in A/C system.
Includes: UV lamp and UV safety glasses
CL
MT
SHA438F
(J-41447)
R134a Fluorescent Leak
Detection Dye (Box of
24, 1/4 ounce bottles)
AT
Dye
Application: For R-134a PAG oil
Container: 1/4 ounce (7.4 cc) bottle
(Includes self-adhesive dye identification labels for
affixing to vehicle after charging system with dye.)
TF
PD
SHA439F
(J-41459)
R134a Dye Injector
Use with J-41447, 1/4
ounce bottle
AX
Dye injector
For injecting 1/4 ounce of Fluorescent Leak Detection Dye into A/C system.
SU
BR
SHA440F
(J-43872)
Dye cleaner
For cleaning dye spills.
ST
RS
BT
SHA441F
(J-39183)
Manifold gauge set (with
hoses and couplers)
Identification:
쐌 The gauge face indicates R-134a.
Fitting size: Thread size
쐌 1/2″-16 ACME
SC
EL
NT199
IDX
HA-197
PREPARATION
MANUAL
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment (Cont’d)
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
Service hoses
쐌 High side hose
(J-39501-72)
쐌 Low side hose
(J-39502-72)
쐌 Utility hose
(J-39476-72)
Hose color:
쐌 Low hose: Blue with black stripe
쐌 High hose: Red with black stripe
쐌 Utility hose: Yellow with black stripe or green
with black stripe
Hose fitting to gauge:
쐌 1/2″-16 ACME
NT201
Service couplers
쐌 High side coupler
(J-39500-20)
쐌 Low side coupler
(J-39500-24)
Hose fitting to service hose:
쐌 M14 x 1.5 fitting is optional or permanently
attached.
NT202
(J-39650)
Refrigerant weight scale
For measuring of refrigerant
Fitting size: Thread size
쐌 1/2″-16 ACME
NT200
(J-39649)
Vacuum pump
(Including the isolator
valve)
Capacity:
쐌 Air displacement: 4 CFM
쐌 Micron rating: 20 microns
쐌 Oil capacity: 482 g (17 oz)
Fitting size: Thread size
쐌 1/2″-16 ACME
NT203
COMMERCIAL SERVICE TOOL
Tool name
NAHA0068S01
Description
Refrigerant identifier
equipment
For checking refrigerant purity and for system contamination
NT765
HA-198
PREPARATION
MANUAL
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment (Cont’d)
Tool name
GI
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
MA
EM
LC
PBIC0190E
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-199
DESCRIPTION
MANUAL
Refrigeration System
Refrigeration System
REFRIGERATION CYCLE
Refrigerant Flow
NAHA0069
NAHA0069S01
The refrigerant flows in the standard pattern, that is, through the compressor, the condenser, the liquid tank,
through the evaporator, and back to the compressor. The refrigerant evaporation through the evaporator coil
is controlled by an externally equalized expansion valve, located inside the evaporator case.
Freeze Protection
NAHA0069S02
Under usual operating conditions, when the A/C is switched on, the compressor runs continuously, and the
evaporator pressure, and therefore temperature, is controlled by the V-6 variable displacement compressor to
prevent freeze up.
Refrigerant System Protection
NAHA0069S03
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
NAHA0069S0301
The refrigerant system is protected against excessively high or low pressures by the refrigerant pressure
sensor, located on the condenser. If the system pressure rises above, or falls below the specifications, the
refrigerant pressure sensor detects the pressure inside the refrigerant line and sends the voltage signal to the
ECM. ECM makes the A/C relay go OFF and stops the compressor when pressure on the high pressure side
detected by refrigerant pressure sensor is over about 2,746 kPa (28 kg/cm2, 398 psi) or below about 177 kPa
(1.8 kg/cm2, 26 psi).
Pressure Relief Valve
NAHA0069S0302
The refrigerant system is also protected by a pressure relief valve, located in the rear head of the compressor. When the pressure of refrigerant in the system increases to an unusual level [more than 3,727 kPa (38
kg/cm2, 540 psi)], the release port on the pressure relief valve automatically opens and releases refrigerant
into the atmosphere.
RHA031I
HA-200
DESCRIPTION
MANUAL
V-6 Variable Displacement Compressor
V-6 Variable Displacement Compressor
GENERAL INFORMATION
GI
=NAHA0070
1. The V-6 variable compressor differs from previous units. The vent temperatures of the V-6 variable compress do not drop too far below 5°C (41°F) when:
쐌 evaporator intake air temperature is less than 20°C (68°F)
쐌 engine is running at speeds less than 1,500 rpm.
This is because the V-6 compressor provides a means of “capacity” control.
2. The V-6 variable compressor provides refrigerant control under varying conditions. During cold winters, it
may not produce high refrigerant pressure discharge (compared to previous units) when used with air
conditioning systems.
3. A “clanking” sound may occasionally be heard during refrigerant charge. The sound indicates that the tilt
angle of the swash plate has changed and is not a problem.
4. For air conditioning systems with the V-6 compressor, the clutch remains engaged unless: the system main
switch, fan switch or ignition switch is turned OFF. When ambient (outside) temperatures are low or when
the amount of refrigerant is insufficient, the clutch is disengaged to protect the compressor.
5. A constant range of suction pressure is maintained when engine speed is greater than a certain value. It
normally ranges from 147 to 177 kPa (1.5 to 1.8 kg/cm2, 21 to 26 psi) under varying conditions.
In previous compressors, however, suction pressure was reduced with increases in engine speed.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-201
DESCRIPTION
MANUAL
V-6 Variable Displacement Compressor (Cont’d)
DESCRIPTION
General
=NAHA0132
NAHA0132S01
The variable compressor is basically a swash plate type that changes piston stroke in response to the required
cooling capacity.
The tilt of the swash plate allows the piston’s stroke to change so that refrigerant discharge can be continuously changed from 14.5 to 184 cm3 (0.885 to 11.228 cu in).
RHA037DB
HA-202
DESCRIPTION
MANUAL
V-6 Variable Displacement Compressor (Cont’d)
Operation
=NAHA0132S02
1. Operation Control Valve
NAHA0132S0201
Operation control valve is located in the suction port (low-pressure) side, and opens or closes in response to
changes in refrigerant suction pressure.
Operation of the valve controls the internal pressure of the crankcase.
The angle of the swash plate is controlled between the crankcase’s internal pressure and the piston cylinder
pressure.
2. Maximum Cooling
NAHA0132S0202
Refrigerant pressure on the low-pressure side increases with an increase in heat loads.
When this occurs, the control valve’s bellows compress to open the low-pressure side valve and close the
high-pressure side valve.
This causes the following pressure changes:
쐌 the crankcase’s internal pressure to equal the pressure on the low-pressure side;
쐌 the cylinder’s internal pressure to be greater than the crankcase’s internal pressure.
Under this condition, the swash plate is set to the maximum stroke position.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
RHA473C
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-203
DESCRIPTION
MANUAL
V-6 Variable Displacement Compressor (Cont’d)
3. Capacity Control
=NAHA0132S0203
쐌 Refrigerant pressure on suction side is low during high speed driving or when ambient or interior temperature is low.
쐌 The bellows expands when refrigerant pressure on the suction pressure side drops below approximately
177 kPa (1.8 kg/cm2, 26 psi).
Since suction pressure is low, it makes the suction port close and the discharge port open. Thus, crankcase pressure becomes high as high pressure enters the crankcase.
쐌 The force acts around the journal pin near the swash plate, and is generated by the pressure difference
before and behind the piston.
The drive lug and journal pin are located where the piston generates the highest pressure. Piston pressure is between suction pressure Ps and discharge pressure Pd, which is near suction pressure Ps. If
crankcase pressure Pc rises due to capacity control, the force around the journal pin makes the swash
plate angle decrease and also the piston stroke decrease. In other words, crankcase pressure increase
triggers pressure difference between the piston and the crankcase. The pressure difference changes the
angle of the swash plate.
RHA474C
HA-204
DESCRIPTION
MANUAL
Component Layout
Component Layout
NAHA0071
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
RHA573F
HA-205
IDX
DESCRIPTION
MANUAL
Control Operation
Control Operation
NAHA0072
RHA073I
FAN CONTROL KNOB
NAHA0072S01
This knob turns the fan ON and OFF, and controls fan speed.
MODE CONTROL KNOB
NAHA0072S02
This knob controls the outlet air flow.
In “DEF” or “D/F” mode, the intake door is set to “FRESH”.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL KNOB
NAHA0072S03
This knob allows adjustment of the temperature of the outlet air.
RECIRCULATION (REC) SWITCH
NAHA0072S04
OFF position: Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment.
ON position: Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. The indicator lamp will also light.
AIR CONDITIONER SWITCH
NAHA0072S05
The air conditioner switch controls the A/C system. When the switch is depressed with the fan ON, the compressor will turn ON. The indicator lamp will also light.
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
MAX A/C POSITION
NAHA0072S06
The A/C system operates at maximum performance when the REC switch and A/C switch are both ON.
HA-206
DESCRIPTION
MANUAL
Discharge Air Flow
Discharge Air Flow
NAHA0073
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
SHA963E
HA-207
IDX
DESCRIPTION
MANUAL
System Description
System Description
NAHA0074
SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTIONS
NAHA0074S01
Knob/Switch position
Knob/Switch
Air outlet
Intake air
Compressor
—
—
ON*1
VENT
—
—
B/L
—
—
FOOT
—
—
D/F
FRE
—
DEF
FRE
—
—
REC*2
—
A/C
A/C
쎻
쎻
Mode
쎻
쎻
쎻
쎻
쎻
*1: Compressor is operated by ECM.
*2: In DEF and D/F modes, REC switch is canceled.
HA-208
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Component Location
Component Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
NAHA0085
GI
NAHA0085S01
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
RHA074I
HA-209
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Component Location (Cont’d)
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
NAHA0085S02
RHA204I
HA-210
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Wiring Diagram — HEATER —
Wiring Diagram — HEATER —
NAHA0086
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
MHA197B
HA-211
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Circuit Diagram — Air Conditioner
Circuit Diagram — Air Conditioner
NAHA0087
MHA198B
HA-212
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Wiring Diagram — A/C, M —
Wiring Diagram — A/C, M —
NAHA0088
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
MHA199B
HA-213
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Wiring Diagram — A/C, M — (Cont’d)
MHA200B
HA-214
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Wiring Diagram — A/C, M — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
MHA201B
IDX
HA-215
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick
and Accurate Repair
NAHA0075
WORK FLOW
NAHA0075S01
SHA900E
*1: HA-217
SYMPTOM TABLE
NAHA0075S02
Symptom
Reference page
쐌 Intake door does not change in VENT, B/L or FOOT
mode.
쐌 Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Intake Door.
HA-219
쐌 Blower motor does not rotate at all.
쐌 Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Blower Motor.
HA-226
쐌 Insufficient cooling.
쐌 Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient cool- HA-233
ing.
쐌 Insufficient heating.
쐌 Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient heat- HA-241
ing.
쐌 Air outlet does not change.
쐌 Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Air Outlet.
HA-243
쐌 Magnet clutch does not engage when A/C switch and 쐌 Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Magnet Clutch.
fan switch are ON.
HA-245
쐌 Noise
HA-252
쐌 Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Noise.
HA-216
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Operational Check
Operational Check
=NAHA0076
GI
The purpose of the operational check is to confirm that the system
operates as it should. The systems which are checked are the
blower, mode (discharge air), intake air, temperature decrease,
temperature increase.
MA
CONDITIONS:
EM
NAHA0076S01
Engine running at normal operating temperature.
LC
PROCEDURE:
1. Check Blower
1.
2.
3.
4.
EC
NAHA0076S02
NAHA0076S0201
Turn fan control knob to 1-speed.
Blower should operate on 1-speed.
Then turn fan control knob to 2-speed.
Continue checking blower speed until all four speeds are
checked.
Leave blower on 4-speed.
RHA652F
2. Check Discharge Air
1.
FE
CL
MT
AT
NAHA0076S0202
Turn mode control knob.
TF
PD
AX
SU
RHA653F
2.
Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table at left.
Refer to “Discharge Air Flow” in “DESCRIPTION” (HA-207).
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
RHA654F
HA-217
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Operational Check (Cont’d)
3. Check Recirculation
NAHA0076S0203
1.
Press recirculation switch.
Recirculation indicator should light.
2. Listen for intake door position change (you should hear blower
sound change slightly).
NOTE:
Confirm that the RECIRCULATION (REC) switch is canceled in the
) and D/F (
) mode.
DEF (
RHA655F
4. Check Temperature Decrease
1.
2.
NAHA0076S0204
Turn temperature control knob to full cold.
Check for cold air at discharge air outlets.
RHA656F
5. Check Temperature Increase
1.
2.
NAHA0076S0205
Turn temperature control knob to full hot.
Check for hot air at discharge air outlets.
RHA657F
6. Check Air Conditioner Switch
NAHA0076S0206
Turn fan control knob to the desired (1 to 4-speed) position and
push the air conditioner switch to turn ON the air conditioner.
The indicator light should come on when air conditioner is ON.
RHA658F
HA-218
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Intake Door
Intake Door
GI
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR
=NAHA0135
Symptom:
쐌 Intake door does not change in VENT, B/L or FOOT mode.
Inspection Flow
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SHA260F
*1: HA-221
*2: HA-217
BR
*3: HA-216
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-219
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Intake Door (Cont’d)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Intake Door Motor
NAHA0136
NAHA0136S01
The intake door motor is installed on the intake unit. Using a link it
opens and closes the intake door.
When RECIRCULATION switch is at REC (except DEF and D/F
modes), the ground line of the motor is switched from intake door
motor terminal 3 to 2. This starts the motor because the position
switch contacts built into it make current flow. When RECIRCULATION switch is at FRE (except DEF and D/F modes), the ground
line is switched from intake door motor terminal 2 to 3. The contacts turn along with the motor. When they reach the non-current
flow position, the motor will stop. The motor always turns in the
same direction.
RECIRCULATION switch is canceled by MODE switch in DEF and
D/F modes.
RHA771F
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS INSPECTION
Mode Switch
NAHA0137
NAHA0137S01
Check continuity between terminals at each switch position.
Terminal No.
Mode switch (+)
Recirculation
switch connector
(−)
1
1
2
Mode control knob
condition
Continuity
VENT, B/L, FOOT
Yes
D/F, DEF
No
VENT, B/L, FOOT
No
D/F, DEF
Yes
1
2
2
All
Yes
3
3
All
Yes
4
4
All
Yes
RHA770F
Recirculation Switch
NAHA0137S02
Check continuity between terminals at each switch position.
Terminal No.
(+)
(−)
1
4
2
RHA768F
HA-220
Recirculation
switch condition
Continuity
REC
Yes
FRE
No
REC
No
FRE
Yes
4
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Intake Door (Cont’d)
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR CIRCUIT
=NAHA0090
SYMPTOM:
쐌 Intake door does not change in VENT, B/L or FOOT mode.
1
CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
Disconnect intake door motor harness connector.
Do approx. 12 volts exist between intake door motor harness connector terminal No. 1 and body ground?
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
RHA350FC
CL
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
Check 7.5A (No. 11) fuse at fuse block. (Refer to EL-12, “Wiring Diagram — POWER
—”.)
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-221
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Intake Door (Cont’d)
2
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
Check continuity between intake door motor harness connector terminals and body ground.
RHA580FA
MTBL0033
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Disconnect mode switch harness connector. GO TO 4.
3
CHECK INTAKE DOOR LINKAGE
Refer to Control Linkage Adjustment.
(HA-225)
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Replace intake door motor.
NG
䊳
Repair or adjust.
HA-222
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Intake Door (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN MODE SWITCH AND INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
Check circuit continuity between mode switch harness connector terminal No. 1 (2) and intake door motor harness connector terminal No. 2 (3).
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
RHA581FB
TF
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
5
PD
AX
SU
CHECK MODE SWITCH
(Refer to Electrical Components Inspection.)
(HA-220)
BR
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Replace mode switch.
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-223
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Intake Door (Cont’d)
6
CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN MODE SWITCH AND RECIRCULATION SWITCH
Check circuit continuity between mode switch harness connector terminal No. 4 and recirculation switch harness connector
terminal No. 4.
RHA769FB
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Replace mode switch.
7
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR MODE SWITCH
Check circuit continuity between mode switch harness connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
RHA582F
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
8
CHECK RECIRCULATION SWITCH
(Refer to Electrical Components Inspection.)
(HA-220)
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Replace recirculation switch.
HA-224
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Intake Door (Cont’d)
CONTROL LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT
Intake Door Motor
1.
2.
3.
4.
NAHA0093
GI
NAHA0093S04
Install intake door motor on intake unit.
Ensure that the intake door motor lever is fitted into the slit
portion of intake door link.
Connect the intake door motor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch to ON.
Check that intake door operates properly when RECIRCULATION switch is turned ON and OFF.
MA
EM
LC
RHA593F
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-225
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Blower Motor
Blower Motor
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR
=NAHA0138
Symptom:
쐌 Blower motor does not rotate at all.
Inspection Flow
SHA261F
*1: HA-228
*2: HA-217
*3: HA-216
HA-226
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Blower Motor (Cont’d)
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS INSPECTION
Fan Switch
=NAHA0139
NAHA0139S01
Check continuity between terminals at each switch position.
KNOB POSITION
Continuity between terminals
OFF
No continuity
1
5—1—6
2
4—1—6
3
3—1—6
4
2—1—6
RHA589F
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
Blower Motor
NAHA0139S02
Confirm smooth rotation of the blower motor.
쐌 Ensure that there are no foreign particles inside the intake unit.
TF
PD
AX
SU
Blower Resistor
NAHA0139S03
Check resistance between terminals.
BR
Terminal No.
Resistance
(+)
3
4
2
ST
(−)
Approx. 1.4 - 1.6Ω
1
Approx. 2.5 - 2.8Ω
RS
Approx. 0.5 - 0.6Ω
BT
RHA651F
SC
EL
IDX
HA-227
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Blower Motor (Cont’d)
BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUIT
=NAHA0089
SYMPTOM:
쐌 Blower motor does not rotate.
Test group No.
1
INCIDENT
1
Fan fails to rotate.
2
Fan does not rotate at 1-speed.
3
Fan does not rotate at 2-speed.
4
Fan does not rotate at 3-speed.
5
Fan does not rotate at 4-speed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Check if blower motor rotates properly at each fan speed.
Conduct checks as per table at above.
1
䊳
GO TO 2.
2, 3, 4
䊳
GO TO 8.
5
䊳
GO TO 10.
2
CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR BLOWER MOTOR
1. Disconnect blower motor harness connector.
2. Do approx. 12 volts exist between blower motor harness connector terminal No. 1 and body ground?
RHA343FA
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 3.
No
䊳
Check 15A (Nos. 1 and No. 2) fuses at fuse block. (Refer to EL-12, “Wiring Diagram —
POWER”.)
HA-228
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Blower Motor (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY FOR BLOWER MOTOR
1. Turn fan control knob to any position except OFF.
2. Check circuit continuity between blower motor harness connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
MA
EM
LC
EC
RHA344FA
FE
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Reconnect blower motor harness connector. GO TO 5.
4
CL
MT
CHECK BLOWER MOTOR
AT
(Refer to Electrical Components Inspection.)
(HA-227)
TF
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Replace blower motor.
5
PD
CHECK BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN BLOWER MOTOR AND RESISTOR
AX
Do approx. 12 volts exist between resistor harness connector terminal No. 1 and body ground?
SU
BR
ST
RS
RHA575F
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Disconnect fan switch harness connector. GO TO 7.
No
䊳
Disconnect blower motor and resistor harness connectors. GO TO 6.
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-229
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Blower Motor (Cont’d)
6
CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN BLOWER MOTOR AND RESISTOR
Check circuit continuity between blower motor harness terminal No. 2 and resistor harness connector terminal No. 1.
RHA576F
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check harness for short.
NG
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
7
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FAN SWITCH
Check circuit continuity between fan switch harness connector terminal No. 6 and body ground.
RHA577F
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
8
CHECK RESISTOR AFTER DISCONNECTING IT
(Refer to Electrical Components Inspection.)
(HA-227)
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Replace resistor.
9
CHECK RESISTOR HARNESS CONNECTOR
Reconnect resistor harness connector.
OK or NG
1
䊳
GO TO 12.
2, 3, 4
䊳
GO TO 10.
HA-230
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Blower Motor (Cont’d)
10
GI
CHECK FAN SWITCH CIRCUIT
Do approx. 12 volts exist between each fan switch harness connector terminal and body ground?
MA
EM
LC
EC
RHA578F
FE
CL
MT
MTBL0310
AT
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 12.
No
䊳
GO TO 11.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-231
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Blower Motor (Cont’d)
11
CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN FAN SWITCH AND RESISTOR
Check circuit continuity between fan switch harness terminal and resistor harness connector terminal.
RHA579F
MTBL0032
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check harness for short.
NG
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
12
CHECK FAN SWITCH AFTER DISCONNECTING IT
(Refer to Electrical Components Inspection.)
(HA-227)
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Replace fan switch.
HA-232
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Insufficient Cooling
Insufficient Cooling
GI
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR INSUFFICIENT COOLING
=NAHA0150
Symptom:
쐌 Insufficient Cooling.
Inspection Flow
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SHA650F
*1: HA-242
*2: HA-236
*3: HA-234
*7: HA-187
*8: MA-14
*9: LC-22
*4: HA-217
*5: HA-216
*6: HA-258
SC
EL
IDX
HA-233
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Insufficient Cooling (Cont’d)
PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSES
NAHA0082
SHA333F
*1: HA-236
*2: HA-236
*3: HA-236
*4: HA-242
*5: HA-187
HA-234
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Insufficient Cooling (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SHA329F
*1: HA-260
*2: HA-226
*3: MA-14
SC
EL
IDX
HA-235
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Insufficient Cooling (Cont’d)
PERFORMANCE CHART
Test Condition
=NAHA0083
NAHA0083S01
Testing must be performed as follows:
Vehicle location
Indoors or in the shade (in a well-ventilated place)
Doors
Closed
Door windows
Open
Hood
Open
TEMP.
Max. COLD
Discharge Air
Face (Ventilation) set
REC switch
(Recirculation) set
FAN speed
High speed
Engine speed
Idle speed
Operate the air conditioning system for 10 minutes before taking measurements.
Test Reading
NAHA0083S02
Recirculating-to-discharge Air Temperature Table
NAHA0083S0201
Inside air (Recirculating air) at blower assembly inlet
Discharge air temperature at center ventilator °C (°F)
Relative humidity %
Air temperature °C (°F)
25 (77)
6.0 - 9.0 (43 - 48)
30 (86)
10.0 - 13.6 (50 - 56)
35 (95)
15.2 - 19.5 (59 - 67)
40 (104)
22.5 - 27.1 (73 - 81)
25 (77)
9.0 - 12.2 (48 - 54)
30 (86)
13.6 - 17.2 (56 - 63)
35 (95)
19.5 - 23.7 (67 - 75)
40 (104)
27.1 - 32.3 (81 - 90)
50 - 60
60 - 70
Ambient Air Temperature-to-operating Pressure Table
NAHA0083S0202
Ambient air
Relative humidity %
High-pressure (Discharge side)
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Low-pressure (Suction side)
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
25 (77)
1,226 - 1,638 (12.5 - 16.7, 178 - 237)
172 - 250 (1.75 - 2.55, 25 - 36)
30 (86)
1,422 - 1,883 (14.5 - 19.2, 206 - 273)
196 - 275 (2.0 - 2.8, 28 - 40)
35 (95)
1,657 - 2,187 (16.9 - 22.3, 240 - 317)
231 - 309 (2.35 - 3.15, 33 - 45)
40 (104)
1,922 - 2,501 (19.6 - 25.5, 279 - 363)
280 - 373 (2.85 - 3.8, 41 - 54)
Air temperature
°C (°F)
50 - 70
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR UNUSUAL PRESSURE
NAHA0084
Whenever system’s high and/or low side pressure is unusual, diagnose using a manifold gauge. The marker
above the gauge scale in the following tables indicates the standard (usual) pressure range. Since the standard (usual) pressure, however, differs from vehicle to vehicle, refer to HA-236 (“Ambient air temperature-tooperating pressure table”).
HA-236
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Insufficient Cooling (Cont’d)
Both High and Low-pressure Sides are Too High.
Gauge indication
NAHA0084S01
Refrigerant cycle
Both high and low-pressure sides
are too high.
Probable cause
Excessive refrigerant charge
in refrigeration cycle
Air suction by cooling fan is
insufficient.
Insufficient condenser cooling 쐌 Clean condenser.
performance
쐌 Check and repair cooling
"
fan as necessary.
1. Condenser fins are
clogged.
2. Improper fan rotation of
cooling fan
Engine tends to overheat.
쐌 An area of the low-pressure pipe is colder than
areas near the evaporator
outlet.
쐌 Plates are sometimes covered with frost.
Poor heat exchange in condenser
(After compressor operation
stops, high pressure
decreases too slowly.)
"
Air in refrigeration cycle
High-pressure side is too high and
low-pressure side is too low.
Reduce refrigerant until
specified pressure is
obtained.
Evacuate repeatedly and
recharge system.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
Engine cooling systems malfunction.
Check and repair each
engine cooling system.
쐌 Excessive liquid refrigerant
on low-pressure side
쐌 Excessive refrigerant discharge flow
쐌 Expansion valve is open a
little compared with the
specification.
"
1. Improper expansion valve
installation
2. Improper expansion valve
adjustment
Replace expansion valve.
High-pressure Side is Too High and Low-pressure Side is Too Low.
Gauge indication
Corrective action
쐌 Pressure is reduced soon
after water is splashed on
condenser.
쐌 Low-pressure pipe is not
cold.
쐌 When compressor is
stopped high-pressure
AC359A
value quickly drops by
approximately 196 kPa (2
kg/cm2, 28 psi). It then
decreases gradually thereafter.
GI
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
Upper side of condenser and
high-pressure side are hot,
however, liquid tank is not so
hot.
High-pressure tube or parts
located between compressor
and condenser are clogged
or crushed.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
NAHA0084S02
Corrective action
쐌 Check and repair or
replace malfunctioning
parts.
쐌 Check lubricant for contamination.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
AC360A
EL
IDX
HA-237
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Insufficient Cooling (Cont’d)
High-pressure Side is Too Low and Low-pressure Side is Too High.
Gauge indication
High-pressure side is too low and
low-pressure side is too high.
NAHA0084S03
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
High and low-pressure sides
become equal soon after
compressor operation stops.
Compressor pressure operation is improper.
"
Damaged inside compressor
packings
Replace compressor.
No temperature difference
between high and low-pressure sides
Compressor pressure operation is improper.
"
Damaged inside compressor
packings.
Replace compressor.
AC356A
HA-238
Corrective action
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Insufficient Cooling (Cont’d)
Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too Low.
Gauge indication
Refrigerant cycle
Both high- and low-pressure sides
are too low.
쐌 There is a big temperature
difference between receiver
drier outlet and inlet. Outlet
temperature is extremely
low.
쐌 Liquid tank inlet and
expansion valve are
frosted.
NAHA0084S04
Probable cause
Corrective action
Compressor discharge capac- 쐌 Replace liquid tank.
ity does not change. (Com쐌 Check lubricant for conpressor stroke is set at maxitamination.
mum.)
MA
EM
LC
쐌 Temperature of expansion High-pressure pipe located
valve inlet is extremely low between receiver drier and
expansion valve is clogged.
as compared with areas
near liquid tank.
쐌 Expansion valve inlet may
be frosted.
쐌
Temperature difference
AC353A
occurs somewhere in highpressure side
쐌 Expansion valve and liquid
tank are warm or only cool
when touched.
GI
Low refrigerant charge
"
Leaking fittings or components
쐌 Check and repair malfunctioning parts.
쐌 Check lubricant for contamination.
FE
CL
Check refrigerant for leaks.
Refer to “Checking Refrigerant Leaks”, HA-263.
There is a big temperature
Expansion valve closes a
쐌 Remove foreign particles
difference between expansion little compared with the speciby using compressed air.
valve inlet and outlet while
fication.
쐌 Check lubricant for conthe valve itself is frosted.
"
tamination.
1. Improper expansion valve
adjustment
2. Malfunctioning expansion
valve
3. Outlet and inlet may be
clogged.
An area of the low-pressure
Low-pressure pipe is clogged
pipe is colder than areas near or crushed.
the evaporator outlet.
EC
쐌 Check and repair malfunctioning parts.
쐌 Check lubricant for contamination.
Air flow volume is not enough Evaporator is frozen.
쐌 Check intake sensor ciror is too low.
"
cuit.
Compressor discharge capac- 쐌 Replace compressor.
ity does not change. (Compressor stroke is set at maximum length.)
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-239
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Insufficient Cooling (Cont’d)
Low-pressure Side Sometimes Becomes Negative.
Gauge indication
Refrigerant cycle
쐌 Air conditioning system
does not function and
does not cyclically cool the
compartment air.
쐌 The system constantly
functions for a certain
period of time after compressor is stopped and
restarted.
Low-pressure side sometimes
becomes negative.
NAHA0084S05
Probable cause
Refrigerant does not discharge cyclically.
"
Moisture is frozen at expansion valve outlet and inlet.
"
Water is mixed with refrigerant.
Corrective action
쐌 Drain water from refrigerant or replace refrigerant.
쐌 Replace liquid tank.
AC354A
Low-pressure Side Becomes Negative.
Gauge indication
Low-pressure side becomes negative.
NAHA0084S06
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
Corrective action
Liquid tank or front/rear side
of expansion valve’s pipe is
frosted or dewed.
High-pressure side is closed
and refrigerant does not flow.
"
Expansion valve or liquid
tank is frosted.
Leave the system at rest
until no frost is present. Start
it again to check whether or
not the problem is caused by
water or foreign particles.
쐌 If water is the cause, initially cooling is okay. Then
the water freezes causing
a blockage. Drain water
from refrigerant or replace
refrigerant.
쐌 If due to foreign particles,
remove expansion valve
and remove particles with
dry and compressed air
(not shop air).
쐌 If either of the above
methods cannot correct
the problem, replace
expansion valve.
쐌 Replace liquid tank.
쐌 Check lubricant for contamination.
AC362A
HA-240
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Insufficient Heating
Insufficient Heating
GI
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR INSUFFICIENT HEATING
=NAHA0140
Symptom:
쐌 Insufficient Heating.
Inspection Flow
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
RHA075I
*1: HA-242
*2: HA-217
*3: HA-216
*4: MA-15
*5: LC-12
*6: LC-18
*7: MA-15
SC
EL
IDX
HA-241
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Insufficient Heating (Cont’d)
CONTROL LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT
Temperature Control Cable
1.
2.
3.
NAHA0141
NAHA0141S02
Move the temperature control knob to the full hot position.
Set the air mix door lever in the full hot position.
Pull on the cable cover in the direction of the arrow, then clamp
it.
After positioning control cable, check that it operates
properly.
RHA632EA
HA-242
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Air Outlet
Air Outlet
GI
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR AIR OUTLET
=NAHA0142
Symptom:
쐌 Air outlet does not change.
Inspection Flow
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SHA263F
*1: HA-244
*2: HA-217
*3: HA-216
*4: HA-207
SC
EL
IDX
HA-243
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Air Outlet (Cont’d)
CONTROL LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT
Mode Control Cable
1.
2.
3.
NAHA0151
NAHA0151S01
Turn the mode control knob to the DEF position.
Set the side link in the DEF position by hand.
Pull on the cable cover in the direction of the arrow, then clamp
it.
After positioning control cable, check that it operates
properly.
RHA630EA
HA-244
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Magnet Clutch
Magnet Clutch
GI
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET CLUTCH
=NAHA0119
Symptom:
쐌 Magnet clutch does not operate when A/C switch and fan switch are ON.
Inspection Flow
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SHA264FA
*1: HA-263
*2: HA-246
*3: HA-217
*4: HA-216
*5: MA-14
SC
EL
IDX
HA-245
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Magnet Clutch (Cont’d)
MAGNET CLUTCH CIRCUIT
=NAHA0091
SYMPTOM:
쐌 Magnet clutch does not engage when A/C switch and fan
switch are ON.
1
CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR COMPRESSOR
Disconnect compressor harness connector.
Do approx. 12 volts exist between compressor harness connector terminal No. 1 and body ground?
RHA747FA
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
Disconnect A/C relay. GO TO 3.
2
CHECK MAGNET CLUTCH COIL
OK or NG
NG
3
䊳
Replace magnet clutch. Refer to HA-258.
CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN A/C RELAY AND COMPRESSOR
Check circuit continuity between A/C relay harness connector E26 terminal No. 5 (B/W) and compressor harness connector F202 terminal No. 1 (B/W).
SHA480F
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
HA-246
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Magnet Clutch (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR A/C RELAY
Disconnect A/C relay.
Do approx. 12 volts exist between A/C relay harness connector E26 terminal Nos. 1 (G/W), 3 (G/W) and body ground?
MA
EM
LC
EC
SHA481F
FE
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 5.
No
䊳
Check power supply circuit and 7.5A (No. 6) fuse at fuse block. Refer to EL-12, “Wiring
Diagram — POWER —”.
CL
MT
5
CHECK A/C RELAY AFTER DISCONNECTING IT
AT
Refer to HA-251.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Reconnect A/C relay. GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Replace A/C relay.
TF
PD
6
CHECK COIL SIDE CIRCUIT OF A/C RELAY
Do approx. 12 volts exist between ECM harness connector terminal No. 105 and body ground?
AX
SU
BR
ST
RHA200I
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 8.
No
䊳
Disconnect A/C relay. Disconnect ECM harness connector. GO TO 7.
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-247
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Magnet Clutch (Cont’d)
7
CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN A/C RELAY AND ECM
Check circuit continuity between A/C relay harness connector F203 terminal No. 2 (GR) and ECM harness connector F203
terminal No. 105 (LG).
RHA203I
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Check harness for short.
NG
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
8
CHECK VOLTAGE FOR ECM
Do approx. 5 volts exist between ECM harness connector terminal No. 110 and body ground?
RHA201I
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 9.
No
䊳
Check ECM. Refer to EC-149, “ECM Terminals and Reference Value”.
9
CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to HA-251.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Disconnect A/C switch harness connector. GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.
HA-248
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Magnet Clutch (Cont’d)
10
GI
CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN ECM AND A/C SWITCH
Check circuit continuity between ECM harness connector terminal No. 110 and A/C switch harness connector terminal No.
2.
MA
EM
LC
EC
RHA205I
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short.
CL
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
11
FE
MT
CHECK A/C SWITCH
AT
Refer to HA-251.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Disconnect fan switch harness connector. GO TO 12.
NG
䊳
Replace A/C switch.
12
TF
PD
CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN A/C SWITCH AND FAN SWITCH
Check circuit continuity between A/C switch harness connector terminal No. 1 and fan switch harness connector terminal
No. 1.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
RHA617F
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short.
BT
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 13.
NG
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
SC
EL
IDX
HA-249
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Magnet Clutch (Cont’d)
13
CHECK BODY GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FAN SWITCH
Does continuity exist between fan switch harness connector terminal No. 6 and body ground?
RHA588F
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 14.
No
䊳
Repair harness or connector.
14
CHECK FAN SWITCH
Refer to HA-227.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Replace fan switch.
HA-250
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Magnet Clutch (Cont’d)
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS INSPECTION
A/C Switch
=NAHA0092
NAHA0092S04
Check continuity between terminals at each switch position.
Switch condition
GI
MA
Terminal No.
Continuity
A/C
(+)
(−)
EM
ON
Yes
2
1
OFF
No
LC
RHA590F
EC
A/C Relay
NAHA0092S07
Check continuity between terminal Nos. 3 and 5.
Conditions
Continuity
12V direct current supply between terminal Nos. 1
and 2
Yes
No current supply
No
FE
CL
MT
If NG, replace relay.
SHA479F
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
AT
NAHA0092S08
Make sure that higher A/C refrigerant pressure results in higher
refrigerant-pressure sensor output voltage.
Check voltage between ECM harness terminal No. 70 and body
ground.
Refer to EC-772, “Diagnostic Procedure”.
TF
PD
AX
SU
RHA070I
BR
ST
RS
BT
SHA315F
SC
EL
IDX
HA-251
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
MANUAL
Noise
Noise
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR NOISE
=NAHA0080
Symptom:
쐌 Noise
Inspection Flow
RHA586H
*1: HA-260
*2: HA-260
*3: HA-255
*4: MA-14
HA-252
SERVICE PROCEDURE
MANUAL
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure
SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Discharging Refrigerant
NAHA0094
GI
NAHA0094S01
NAHA0094S0101
WARNING:
Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and
throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from A/C system using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 (R-134a recycling equipment) or J2209 (R-134a recovery equipment). If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety
information may be obtained from refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant
SHA179FB
PD
NAHA0094S0102
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SHA180FB
SC
EL
IDX
HA-253
SERVICE PROCEDURE
MANUAL
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure (Cont’d)
SHA193FA
*1: HA-255
*2: HA-263
*3: HA-264
*4: HA-234
*5: HA-187
HA-254
SERVICE PROCEDURE
MANUAL
Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor
Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in
Compressor
GI
NAHA0095
The lubricant in the compressor circulates through the system with
the refrigerant. Add lubricant to compressor when replacing any
component or after a large gas leakage occurred. It is important to
maintain the specified amount.
If lubricant quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result:
쐌 Lack of lubricant: May lead to a seized compressor
쐌 Excessive lubricant: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange
interference)
LUBRICANT
LC
EC
FE
NAHA0095S02
Adjust the lubricant quantity according to the test group shown
below.
1
EM
NAHA0095S01
Name: Nissan A/C System Oil Type S
Part number: KLH00-PAGS0
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING
MA
LUBRICANT RETURN OPERATION
Can lubricant return operation be performed?
쐌 A/C system works properly.
쐌 There is no evidence of a large amount of lubricant leakage.
CL
MT
AT
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
GO TO 3.
2
TF
PERFORM LUBRICANT RETURN OPERATION, PROCEEDING AS FOLLOWS
1. Start engine, and set the following conditions:
쐌 Test condition
Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm
A/C switch: ON
Blower speed: Max. position
Temp. control: Optional [Set so that intake air temperature is 25 to 30°C (77 to 86°F).]
2. Next item is for V-6 compressor. Connect the manifold gauge, and check that the high pressure side pressure
is 588 kPa (6 kg/cm2, 85 psi) or higher.
If less than the reference level, attach a cover to the front face of the condenser to raise the pressure.
3. Perform lubricant return operation for about 10 minutes.
4. Stop engine.
CAUTION:
If excessive lubricant leakage is noted, do not perform the lubricant return operation.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
䊳
GO TO 3.
BT
3
CHECK COMPRESSOR
Should the compressor be replaced?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO HA-256.
No
䊳
GO TO 4.
SC
EL
IDX
HA-255
SERVICE PROCEDURE
MANUAL
Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor (Cont’d)
4
CHECK ANY PART
Is there any part to be replaced? (Evaporator, condenser, liquid tank or in case there is evidence of a large amount of
lubricant leakage.)
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO HA-256.
No
䊳
Carry out the A/C performance test.
Lubricant Adjusting Procedure for Components
Replacement Except Compressor
NAHA0095S0201
After replacing any of the following major components, add the
correct amount of lubricant to the system.
Amount of lubricant to be added
Lubricant to be added to
system
Part replaced
Remarks
Amount of lubricant
m (US fl oz, Imp fl oz)
Evaporator
75 (2.5, 2.6)
—
Condenser
75 (2.5, 2.6)
—
Liquid tank
5 (0.2, 0.2)
Add if compressor is not
replaced. *1
In case of refrigerant
leak
30 (1.0, 1.1)
Large leak
—
Small leak *2
*1:
*2:
If compressor is replaced, addition of lubricant is included in the table.
If refrigerant leak is small, no addition of lubricant is needed.
Lubricant Adjustment Procedure for Compressor
Replacement
NAHA0095S0202
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Before connecting ACR4 to vehicle, check ACR4 gauges. No
refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If OK, recover refrigerant from equipment lines.
Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using ACR4 and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to “CONTAMINATED
REFRIGERANT”, HA-187.
Connect ACR4 to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle
A/C system using ACR4 and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer
to “CONTAMINATED REFRIGERANT”, HA-187.
Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling
equipment. Measure lubricant discharged into the recovery/
recycling equipment.
Remove the drain plug of the “old” (removed) compressor.
Drain the lubricant into a graduated container and record the
amount of drained lubricant.
Remove the drain plug and drain the lubricant from the “new”
compressor into a separate, clean container.
Measure an amount of new lubricant installed equal to amount
drained from “old” compressor. Add this lubricant to “new” compressor through the suction port opening.
Measure an amount of new lubricant equal to the amount
recovered during discharging. Add this lubricant to “new” compressor through the suction port opening.
Torque the drain plug.
V-6 compressor:
18 - 19 N·m (1.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 13 - 14 ft-lb)
HA-256
SERVICE PROCEDURE
MANUAL
Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor (Cont’d)
10. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional
5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant at this time.
Do not add this 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant if only replacing the compressor.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
RHA065DD
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-257
SERVICE PROCEDURE
MANUAL
Compressor
Compressor
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NAHA0096
RHA650F
Compressor Clutch
OVERHAUL
NAHA0097
RHA122F
REMOVAL
쐌
NAHA0098
When removing center bolt, hold clutch disc with clutch disc
wrench.
RHA136EB
HA-258
SERVICE PROCEDURE
MANUAL
Compressor Clutch (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
RHA399F
쐌
Remove the clutch disc using the clutch disc puller.
Insert the holder’s three pins into the holes in the clutch disc.
Rotate the holder clockwise to hook it onto the plate. Then,
tighten the center bolt to remove the clutch disc.
After removing the clutch disc, remove the shims from either
the drive shaft or the clutch disc.
EC
FE
CL
MT
RHA124F
쐌
Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
RHA138E
쐌
Pulley removal
Position the center pulley puller on the end of the drive shaft,
and remove the pulley assembly using any commercially available pulley puller.
To prevent the pulley groove from being deformed, the
puller claws should be positioned onto the edge of the
pulley assembly.
BR
ST
RS
BT
RHA139E
쐌
Remove the field coil harness clip using a pair of pliers.
SC
EL
IDX
RHA125F
HA-259
SERVICE PROCEDURE
MANUAL
Compressor Clutch (Cont’d)
쐌
Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers.
RHA145E
INSPECTION
Clutch Disc
NAHA0099
NAHA0099S01
If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive
heat, replace clutch disc and pulley.
Pulley
NAHA0099S02
Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If the contact surface of pulley shows signs of excessive grooving, replace clutch
disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley assembly should
be cleaned with a suitable solvent before reinstallation.
RHA126F
Coil
NAHA0099S03
Check coil for loose connection or cracked insulation.
INSTALLATION
쐌
쐌
NAHA0100
Install the field coil.
Be sure to align the coil’s pin with the hole in the compressor’s front head.
Install the field coil harness clip using a screwdriver.
RHA142E
쐌
Install the pulley assembly using the installer and a hand
press, and then install the snap ring using snap ring pliers.
RHA143EA
HA-260
SERVICE PROCEDURE
MANUAL
Compressor Clutch (Cont’d)
쐌
Install the clutch disc on the drive shaft, together with the
original shim(s). Press the clutch disc down by hand.
GI
MA
EM
LC
RHA127F
쐌
Using the holder to prevent clutch disc rotation, tighten the bolt
to 14 N·m (1.4 kg-m, 10 ft-lb) torque.
After tightening the bolt, check that the pulley rotates
smoothly.
EC
FE
CL
MT
RHA086E
쐌
Check clearance around the entire periphery of clutch disc.
Disc-to-pulley clearance:
0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in)
If the specified clearance is not obtained, replace adjusting
spacer and readjust.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
RHA087E
Break-in Operation
NAHA0100S01
When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always carry out the
break-in operation. This is done by engaging and disengaging the
clutch about thirty times. Break-in operation raises the level of
transmitted torque.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-261
SERVICE PROCEDURE
MANUAL
Refrigerant Lines
Refrigerant Lines
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
쐌
=NAHA0101
Refer to page HA-189 regarding “Precautions for Refrigerant Connection”.
RHA072I
HA-262
SERVICE PROCEDURE
MANUAL
Checking for Refrigerant Leaks
Checking for Refrigerant Leaks
PRELIMINARY CHECK
쐌
=NAHA0102
NAHA0102S04
Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings,
hoses and components for signs of A/C lubricant leakage,
damage and corrosion. A/C lubricant leakage may indicate an
area of refrigerant leakage. Allow extra inspection time in these
areas when using either an electronic refrigerant leak detector
or fluorescent dye leak detector.
쐌 If dye is observed, confirm the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector. It is possible a prior leak was repaired and
not properly cleaned.
쐌 When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found
but continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and connections.
쐌 When searching for refrigerant leaks using an electronic leak
detector, move the probe along the suspected leak area at 25
to 50 mm (1 to 2 in) per second and no further than 1/4 inch
from the component.
NOTE:
Moving the electronic leak detector probe slower and closer to
the suspected leak area will improve the chances of finding a
leak.
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
NAHA0254
PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTORNAHA0254S01
SHA196FA
GI
When performing a refrigerant leak check, use a J-41995 A/C leak
detector or equivalent. Ensure that the instrument is calibrated and
set properly per the operating instructions.
The leak detector is a delicate device. In order to use the leak
detector properly, read the operating instructions and perform any
specified maintenance.
쐌 Other gases in the work area or substances on the A/C
components, for example, anti-freeze, windshield washer
fluid, solvents and lubricants, may falsely trigger the leak
detector. Make sure the surfaces to be checked are clean.
Clean with a dry cloth or blow off with shop air.
쐌 Do not allow the sensor tip of the detector to contact with
any substance. This can also cause false readings and
may damage the detector.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
1.
Position probe approximately 5 mm (3/16 in) away from point
to be checked.
SC
EL
IDX
SHA707EA
HA-263
SERVICE PROCEDURE
MANUAL
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector (Cont’d)
2.
When testing, circle each fitting completely with probe.
3.
Move probe along component approximately 25 to 50 mm (1
to 2 in)/sec.
SHA706E
SHA708EA
CHECKING PROCEDURE
NAHA0254S02
To prevent inaccurate or false readings, make sure there is no
refrigerant vapor, shop chemicals, or cigarette smoke in the
vicinity of the vehicle. Perform the leak test in calm area (low
air/wind movement) so that the leaking refrigerant is not dispersed.
1. Turn engine off.
2. Connect a suitable A/C manifold gauge set to the A/C service
ports.
3. Check if the A/C refrigerant pressure is at least 345 kPa (3.52
kg/cm2, 50 psi) above 16°C (61°F). If less than specification,
recover/evacuate and recharge the system with the specified
amount of refrigerant.
NOTE:
At temperatures below 16°C (61°F), leaks may not be detected
since the system may not reach 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2, 50 psi).
4. Conduct the leak test from the high side (compressor discharge a to evaporator inlet f) to the low side (evaporator drain
hose g to shaft seal k). Refer to HA-262. Perform a leak check
for the following areas carefully. Clean the component to be
checked and move the leak detector probe completely around
the connection/component.
쐌 Compressor
Check the fitting of high and low pressure hoses, relief valve
and shaft seal.
쐌 Liquid tank
Check the tube fitting.
쐌 Service valves
Check all around the service valves. Ensure service valve caps
are secured on the service valves (to prevent leaks).
NOTE:
After removing A/C manifold gauge set from service valves, wipe
any residue from valves to prevent any false readings by leak
detector.
HA-264
SERVICE PROCEDURE
MANUAL
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector (Cont’d)
쐌
Cooling unit (Evaporator)
With engine OFF, turn blower fan on “High” for at least 15
seconds to dissipate any refrigerant trace in the cooling unit.
Wait a minimum of 10 minutes accumulation time (refer to the
manufacturer’s recommended procedure for actual wait time)
before inserting the leak detector probe into the drain hose.
Keep the probe inserted for at least ten seconds. Use caution
not to contaminate the ptobe tip with water or dirt that may be
in the drain hose.
5. If a leak detector detects a leak, verify at least once by blowing compressed air into area of suspected leak, then repeat
check as outlined above.
6. Do not stop when one leak is found. Continue to check for
additional leaks at all system components.
If no leaks are found, perform steps 7 - 10.
7. Start engine.
8. Set the heater A/C control as follows:
1) A/C switch ON.
2) Face mode
3) Recirculation switch ON
4) Max cold temperature
5) Fan speed high
9. Run engine at 1,500 rpm for at least 2 minutes.
10. Turn engine off and perform leak check again following steps
4 through 6 above.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
Refrigerant leaks should be checked immediately after
stopping the engine. Begin with the leak detector at the
compressor. The pressure on the high pressure side will
gradually drop after refrigerant circulation stops and pressure on the low pressure side will gradually rise, as shown
in the graph. Some leaks are more easily detected when
pressure is high.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SHA839E
11. Before connecting ACR4 to vehicle, check ACR4 gauges. No
refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If pressure is
displayed, recover refrigerant from equipment lines and then
check refrigerant purity.
12. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using ACR4 and refrigerant identifier.
13. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using ACR4
and refrigerant identifier.
14. Discharge A/C system using approved refrigerant recovery
equipment. Repair the leaking fitting or component as necessary.
HA-265
SC
EL
IDX
SERVICE PROCEDURE
MANUAL
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector (Cont’d)
15. Evacuate and recharge A/C system and perform the leak test
to confirm no refrigerant leaks.
16. Conduct A/C performance test to ensure system works
properly.
Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector
PRECAUTIONS FOR FLUORESCENT DYE LEAK
DETECTION
쐌
쐌
쐌
CHECKING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS USING THE
FLUORESCENT LEAK DETECTOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NAHA0266
The fluorescent dye leak detector is not a replacement for an
electronic refrigerant leak detector. The fluorescent dye leak
detector should be used in conjunction with an electronic
refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) to pinpoint refrigerant leaks.
For your safety and your customer’s satisfaction, read and follow all manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions
prior to performing the work.
Refer to “Precautions for Leak Detection Dye”, HA-188.
NAHA0267
Check A/C system for leaks using the UV lamp and safety
glasses (J-42220) in a low sunlight area (area without windows
preferable). Illuminate all components, fittings and lines. The
dye will appear as a bright green/yellow area at the point of
leakage. Fluorescent dye observed at the evaporator drain
opening indicates an evaporator core assembly (tubes, core or
TXV) leak.
If the suspected area is difficult to see, use an adjustable mirror or wipe the area with a clean shop rag or cloth, then check
the cloth with the UV lamp for dye residue.
Confirm any suspected leaks with an approved electronic
refrigerant leak detector.
After the leak is repaired, remove any residual dye using dye
cleaner (J-43872) to prevent future misdiagnosis.
Perform a system performance check and verify the leak repair
with an approved electronic refrigerant leak detector.
DYE INJECTION
NAHA0268
(This procedure is only necessary when re-charging the system or
when the compressor has seized and was replaced.)
Refer to “Precautions for Leak Detection Dye”, HA-188.
1. Check A/C system static (at rest) pressure. Pressure must be
at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2, 50 psi).
2. Pour one bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) of the A/C refrigerant dye
into the injector tool (J-41459).
3. Connect the injector tool to the A/C LOW PRESSURE side
service fitting.
4. Start engine and switch A/C ON.
5. With the A/C operating (compressor running), inject one bottle
(1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) of fluorescent dye through the low-pressure service valve using dye injector tool J-41459 (refer to the
manufacturer’s operating instructions).
HA-266
SERVICE PROCEDURE
MANUAL
Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector (Cont’d)
6.
With the engine still running, disconnect the injector tool from
the service fitting.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to allow dye to spray or drip when disconnecting the injector from the system.
NOTE:
If repairing the A/C system or replacing a component, pour the
dye directly into the open system connection and proceed
with the service procedures.
7. Operate the A/C system for a minimum of 20 minutes to mix
the dye with the system oil. Depending on the leak size, operating conditions and location of the leak, it may take from minutes to days for the dye to penetrate a leak and become visible.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
Belt
TENSION ADJUSTMENT
쐌
NAHA0103
Refer to MA-14, “Checking Drive Belts”.
TF
PD
AX
SU
In-cabin Microfilter
FUNCTION
NAHA0273
Air inside passenger compartment is kept clean at either recirculation or fresh mode by installing In-cabin microfilter into cooling unit.
NOTE:
To replace In-cabin microfilter, refer to MA-9, MA-11, “Periodic
Maintenance”.
Caution label is fixed inside the glove box.
BR
ST
RS
BT
RHA042GB
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
Remove glove box.
Remove instrument lower panel from instrument panel.
Remove In-cabin microfilter fixed clip.
NAHA0274
SC
EL
IDX
SHA252F
HA-267
SERVICE PROCEDURE
MANUAL
In-cabin Microfilter (Cont’d)
4.
5.
6.
7.
Take out the lower side In-cabin microfilter from cooling unit.
Then slide upper side filter to the bottom position and take off
the In-cabin microfilter from the cooling unit.
Replace with new one and reinstall on cooling unit.
Reinstall clip, instrument lower panel and glove box.
SHA253F
HA-268
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
MANUAL
Manual
Manual
GI
COMPRESSOR
NAHA0105
Model
Calsonic Kansei make V-6
Type
V-6 variable displacement
Displacement
cm3 (cu in)/rev.
Max.
184 (11.228)
Min.
14.5 (0.885)
Cylinder bore x stroke
mm (in)
EM
LC
37 (1.46) x [2.3 - 28.6 (0.091 - 1.126)]
Direction of rotation
Clockwise (viewed from drive end)
Drive belt
EC
Poly V
LUBRICANT
NAHA0106
Model
Calsonic Kansei make V-6
Name
Nissan A/C System Oil Type S
Part number*
Capacity
m (US fl oz, Imp fl oz)
MA
CL
KLH00-PAGS0
Total in system
180 (6.1, 6.3)
Compressor (Service part) charging amount
180 (6.1, 6.3)
MT
AT
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
REFRIGERANT
NAHA0107
Type
PD
0.45 (0.99)
ENGINE IDLING SPEED (WHEN A/C IS ON)
NAHA0108
AX
NAHA0109
SU
Refer to EC-792, “Idle Speed and Ignition Timing”.
BELT TENSION
쐌
TF
HFC-134a (R-134a)
Capacity
kg (lb)
쐌
FE
Refer to MA-14, “Checking Drive Belts”.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SC
EL
IDX
HA-269
NOTES
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
SECTION
MT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CONTENTS
PREPARATION ...............................................................2
Special Service Tools ..................................................2
Commercial Service Tool.............................................3
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................................4
NVH Troubleshooting Chart.........................................4
MANUAL TRANSMISSION..........................................4
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ..................................................5
Position Switch Check .................................................5
DESCRIPTION .................................................................6
Cross-sectional View ...................................................6
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...................................7
Removal.......................................................................7
Installation....................................................................8
OVERHAUL ...................................................................10
Case Components .....................................................10
Gear Components .....................................................11
Shift Control Components .........................................13
DISASSEMBLY..............................................................14
Case Components .....................................................14
DISASSEMBLY ........................................................14
Shift Control Components .........................................15
DISASSEMBLY ........................................................15
Gear Components .....................................................16
DISASSEMBLY ........................................................16
INSPECTION..................................................................20
Shift Control Components .........................................20
INSPECTION ...........................................................20
Gear Components .....................................................20
INSPECTION ...........................................................20
ASSEMBLY....................................................................22
Gear Components .....................................................22
ASSEMBLY .............................................................22
Shift Control Components .........................................30
ASSEMBLY .............................................................30
Case Components .....................................................30
ASSEMBLY .............................................................30
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .........33
General Specifications...............................................33
Gear End Play ...........................................................33
Clearance Between Baulk Ring and Gear ................33
2ND AND 3RD BAULK RING ....................................34
Distance Between Rear Surface of Reverse
Cone and Reverse Baulk Ring..................................34
Available Snap Ring ..................................................34
MAIN DRIVE GEAR SNAP RING ..............................34
MAINSHAFT FRONT SNAP RING .............................34
COUNTER GEAR REAR SNAP RING .......................35
Available C-ring .........................................................35
MAINSHAFT C-RING ...............................................35
Available Shim and Washer ......................................36
TABLE FOR SELECTING PROPER COUNTER
GEAR FRONT BEARING THRUST WASHER ............36
REVERSE IDLER REAR THRUST WASHER .............36
CL
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
Special Service Tools
NAMT0001
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
ST23540000
(J25689-A)
Pin punch
Removing and installing retaining pin
a: 2.3 mm (0.091 in) dia.
b: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia.
NT442
ST30031000
(J22912-01)
Puller
Removing 1st & 2nd synchronizer assembly
Removing counter gear rear thrust bearing
Removing main drive bearing
a: 90 mm (3.54 in) dia.
b: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia.
NT411
ST33230000
(
—
Drift
Removing mainshaft and counter gear
a: 51 mm (2.01 in) dia.
b: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia.
)
NT084
ST22350000
(J25678-01)
Drift
Removing counter gear front bearing (Use with
KV38100300)
a: 34 mm (1.34 in) dia.
b: 28 mm (1.10 in) dia.
NT065
KV38100300
(J25523)
Drift
Removing counter gear front bearing (Use with
ST22350000)
Installing counter gear rear bearing
a: 54 mm (2.13 in) dia.
b: 32 mm (1.26 in) dia.
NT065
ST30720000
1 (J34286)
2 (J34331)
Drift
1 Removing mainshaft front bearing
2 Installing mainshaft front bearing
a: 77 mm (3.03 in) dia.
b: 55.5 mm (2.185 in) dia.
NT115
ST33210000
1 (J25523)
2 (J25803-01)
Drift
1 Installing counter gear front bearing
2 Installing front cover oil seal
a: 44 mm (1.73 in) dia.
b: 24.5 mm (0.965 in) dia.
NT084
ST30613000
(J25742-3)
Drift
Installing main drive gear bearing
a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia.
b: 48 mm (1.89 in) dia.
NT073
MT-2
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools (Cont’d)
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
GI
Description
ST37750000
1 (J34286)
2 (J34332)
3 (J34334)
4 (J25679-01)
Drift
1 Removing counter gear rear bearing
2 Installing OD gear bushing
2 Removing and installing mainshaft rear bearing
2 Installing reverse cone
3 Installing reverse counter gear
4 Installing counter gear rear end bearing
a: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia.
b: 31 mm (1.22 in) dia.
NT065
ST22452000
(J34337)
Drift
MA
EM
LC
EC
Installing reverse hub
a: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia.
b: 36 mm (1.42 in) dia.
FE
NT065
(J26349-3)
Puller leg
Installing mainshaft and counter gear
(Use with J34328)
CL
Installing mainshaft and counter gear
(Use with J26349-3)
AT
NT078
(J34328)
Puller
TF
NT079
(J26092)
Drift
PD
Installing sub-gear snap ring
a: 44.5 mm (1.752 in) dia.
b: 38.5 mm (1.516 in) dia.
AX
NT065
(J34342)
Drift
SU
Installing OD main gear
Installing reverse gear bushing
a: 44.5 mm (1.752 in) dia.
b: 40.5 mm (1.594 in) dia.
BR
NT065
ST33220000
(J25804-01)
Drift
ST
Installing mainshaft rear bearing
a: 37 mm (1.46 in) dia.
b: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia.
RS
BT
NT084
Commercial Service Tool
Tool name
NAMT0002
HA
Description
Puller
Removing counter gear rear end bearing
Removing reverse synchronizer hub
Removing reverse counter gear
SC
EL
NT077
IDX
MT-3
NAMT0023
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
NAMT0023S01
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the problem. The numbers indicate the order of the inspection. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
MT-13
MT-11
MT-11
MT-11
MT-11
GEAR (Worn or damaged)
BEARING (Worn or damaged)
BAULK RING (Worn or damaged)
INSERT SPRING (Damaged)
1
SHIFT FORK (Worn)
1
MT-13
Hard to shift or will not shift
CHECK PLUG RETURN SPRING AND
CHECK BALL (Worn or damaged)
1
MT-13
3
O-RING (Worn or damaged)
Oil leakage
MT-10
2
OIL SEAL (Worn or damaged)
1
MT-10
OIL (Wrong)
Noise
OIL (Level low)
SUSPECTED PARTS
(Possible cause)
GASKET (Damaged)
Reference page
OIL (Level too high)
Refer to MA-22, “Checking M/T Oil”.
NAMT0023S0101
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
Symptom
Jumps out of gear
1
MT-4
2
2
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Position Switch Check
Position Switch Check
Switch
NAMT0024
Gear position
Continuity
Reverse
Yes
Except reverse
No
Neutral
Yes
Except neutral
No
GI
MA
Back-up lamp switch
EM
PNP switch
LC
EC
FE
CL
SMT820CA
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
MT-5
NAMT0005
DESCRIPTION
Cross-sectional View
Cross-sectional View
NAMT0005S02
SMT990D
MT-6
NAMT0006
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
Removal
NAMT0006S01
CAUTION:
When removing the M/T assembly from engine, first remove
the crankshaft position sensor (OBD) from the M/T assembly.
Be careful not to damage sensor edge.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
AT
SMT815CB
TF
PD
AX
SU
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
I
I
8.
a.
SMT006E
Remove battery negative terminal.
Remove shift lever from transmission and control lever from
transfer.
Remove crankshaft position sensor (OBD) from lower side of
transmission case.
Remove clutch operating cylinder from transmission. Tighten
clutch operating cylinder to the specified torque. Refer to CL-5,
“CLUTCH SYSTEM”.
Lower the transmission out of the body with the speed sensor
and other harnesses still connected. The harnesses are
attached to the body in four places.
Remove starter motor from transmission.
: 41 - 52 N·m (4.2 - 5.3 kg-m, 30 - 38 ft-lb)
Remove front and rear propeller shafts. Refer to PD-8,
“Removal and Installation”.
Insert plug into rear oil seal after removing propeller shaft.
Be careful not to damage spline, sleeve yoke and rear oil
seal when removing propeller shaft.
Remove clutch withdrawal lever and release bearing following
the procedures below.
Remove the dust cover on the withdrawal lever hole from the
transmission case.
MT-7
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal (Cont’d)
b.
Pull out snap pin on the withdrawal shaft, and then pull out
withdrawal shaft to remove withdrawal lever and release bearing.
9. Remove exhaust tube mounting bracket from transmission.
Refer to FE-9, “EXHAUST SYSTEM”.
10. Support manual transmission with a jack.
11. Remove rear mounting member. Tighten rear mounting member to the specified torque. Refer to EM-61, “Removal and
Installation”.
12. Remove bolt securing engine to manual transmission to separate engine from the transmission.
13. Lower manual transmission as much as possible.
WARNING:
Support Manual Transmission together with transfer, while
removing it.
Installation
1.
2.
I
NAMT0006S02
Set withdrawal shaft, washer and snap pin to withdrawal lever
and release bearing.
Install the manual transmission in reverse order of removal.
Apply sealant as below
SMT007E
MT-8
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Installation (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
AT
TF
PD
SMT156EA
AX
SU
I
Tighten bolt securing transmission.
Bolt No.
Tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
mm (in)
1
70 - 79 (7.1 - 8.1, 52 - 58)
65 (2.56)
2
70 - 79 (7.1 - 8.1, 52 - 58)
55 (2.17)
3
29 - 39 (3.0 - 4.0, 22 - 28)
40 (1.57)
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT984D
HA
SC
EL
IDX
MT-9
NAMT0007
OVERHAUL
Case Components
Case Components
NAMT0007S01
SMT159EA
MT-10
OVERHAUL
Gear Components
Gear Components
NAMT0007S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SMT049E
MT-11
IDX
OVERHAUL
Gear Components (Cont’d)
SMT111EA
MT-12
OVERHAUL
Shift Control Components
Shift Control Components
NAMT0007S03
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SMT160EA
MT-13
IDX
DISASSEMBLY
Case Components
Case Components
DISASSEMBLY
1.
NAMT0008
I
Remove check ball plug, check spring and check ball. Then
remove interlock stopper.
If interlock assembly is removed as a unit, the check ball
can fall into transmission case.
Be careful not to lose check ball.
2.
I
Remove control housing, return spring and check ball.
Be careful not to lose check ball.
3.
Drive out retaining pin from striking arm.
4.
Remove OD gear case together with striking arm by tapping
lightly.
5.
Remove front cover and gasket.
I
SMT988D
SMT438B
SMT158E
SMT440B
SMT370A
MT-14
DISASSEMBLY
Case Components (Cont’d)
6.
Remove stopper ring and main drive bearing snap ring.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT371A
7.
EC
Remove transmission case by tapping lightly.
FE
CL
SMT372A
8.
AT
Remove front cover oil seal.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SMT392A
Shift Control Components
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
NAMT0009
Mount adapter plate on vise.
Remove OD & reverse fork rod.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT373A
3.
4.
Drive out retaining pin from striking lever.
While pulling out striking rod, remove striking lever and striking interlock. Then remove 1st & 2nd, 3rd & 4th and reverse
shift fork.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT374A
MT-15
DISASSEMBLY
Shift Control Components (Cont’d)
5.
6.
Drive out retaining pin from OD shift fork.
Pull out OD fork rod and then remove OD shift fork.
SMT375A
Gear Components
DISASSEMBLY
1.
I
NAMT0010
Before removing gears and shafts, measure each gear end
play.
Gear end play:
Refer to SDS, MT-33.
If not within specification, disassemble and check contact surface of gear to hub, washer, bushing, needle bearing and shaft.
SMT376A
2.
a.
Remove rear side components on mainshaft and counter gear.
Remove reverse coupling sleeve.
b.
Remove mainshaft rear snap ring and counter gear rear snap
ring.
Remove C-ring holder and mainshaft C-rings from mainshaft.
Use punch and hammer to remove C-rings.
SMT463A
c.
SMT377A
d.
e.
Pull out counter gear rear end bearing.
Remove reverse idler gear and reverse idler thrust washers.
SMT378A
MT-16
DISASSEMBLY
Gear Components (Cont’d)
f.
Pull out reverse main gear together with mainshaft spacer and
reverse synchronizer hub. Then remove reverse gear needle
bearings.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT380A
g.
h.
Pull out reverse counter gear.
Remove OD coupling sleeve together with OD baulk ring,
reverse baulk ring and spring inserts.
EC
FE
CL
SMT773A
i.
Pull out reverse gear bushing.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SMT770A
j.
Pull out OD counter gear together with reverse cone.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT771A
3.
Press out mainshaft and counter gear alternately.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
MT-17
DISASSEMBLY
Gear Components (Cont’d)
SMT772A
4.
a.
b.
I
Remove front side components on mainshaft.
Remove 1st gear washer and steel ball.
Remove 1st main gear and 1st gear needle bearing.
Be careful not to lose steel ball.
c.
Press out 2nd main gear together with 1st gear bushing and
1st & 2nd synchronizer assembly.
Remove mainshaft front snap ring.
SMT383A
d.
SMT482C
e.
Press out 3rd main gear together with 3rd & 4th synchronizer
assembly and 3rd gear needle bearing.
SMT385A
MT-18
DISASSEMBLY
Gear Components (Cont’d)
5.
a.
Remove front side components on counter gear.
Remove counter gear rear thrust bearing.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT404A
b.
EC
Remove sub-gear components.
FE
CL
SMT470A
6.
a.
b.
AT
Remove main drive gear bearing.
Remove main drive gear snap ring.
Press out main drive gear bearing.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SMT420A
7.
Remove bearings from case components.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SMT206DA
IDX
MT-19
INSPECTION
Shift Control Components
Shift Control Components
INSPECTION
I
NAMT0011
Check contact surface and sliding surface for wear, scratches,
projections or other damage.
SMT398A
Gear Components
INSPECTION
Gears and Shafts
I
I
NAMT0012
NAMT0012S01
Check shafts for cracks, wear or bending.
Check gears for excessive wear, chips or cracks.
SMT386A
SMT423A
Synchronizers
I
I
I
I
NAMT0012S02
Check spline portion of coupling sleeves, hubs, and gears for
wear or cracks.
Check baulk rings for cracks or deformation.
Check shifting inserts for wear or deformation.
Check insert springs for deformation.
SMT427C
I
I
Measure wear of main drive, 1st and OD baulk rings.
Clearance between baulk ring and gear:
Refer to SDS, MT-33.
If the clearance is smaller than the wear limit, replace baulk
ring.
SMT140
MT-20
INSPECTION
Gear Components (Cont’d)
I
a)
b)
SMT041BF
I
Measure wear of 2nd and 3rd baulk rings.
Place baulk rings in position on synchronizer cone.
While holding baulk rings against synchronizer cone as far as
it will go, measure dimensions “A” and “B”.
Standard:
A 0.7 - 0.9 mm (0.028 - 0.035 in)
B 0.6 - 1.1 mm (0.024 - 0.043 in)
Wear limit:
0.2 mm (0.008 in)
If dimension “A” or “B” is smaller than the wear limit, replace
outer baulk ring, inner baulk ring and synchronizer cone as a
set.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SMT042BC
I
a)
b)
c)
Measure wear of reverse baulk ring.
Place baulk ring in position on reverse cone.
While holding baulk ring against reverse cone as far as it will
go, measure dimension “A” with dial indicator.
Dimension “A”:
Standard −0.45 to 1.05 mm (−0.0177 to 0.0413 in)
Wear limit 0.7 mm (0.028 in)
If dimension “A” is larger than the wear limit, replace baulk ring.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SMT424A
Bearings
I
NAMT0012S03
Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, crack,
pitting or wear.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT418A
HA
SC
EL
IDX
MT-21
ASSEMBLY
Gear Components
Gear Components
ASSEMBLY
NAMT0013
SMT207DA
1.
2.
a.
Install bearings into case components.
Install main drive gear bearing.
Press main drive gear bearing.
b.
Select proper main drive gear snap ring to minimize clearance
of groove.
Allowable clearance of groove:
0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in)
Main drive gear snap ring:
Refer to SDS, MT-34.
Install selected snap ring on main drive gear.
SMT425A
c.
SMT426A
3.
a.
I
Install components on counter gear.
Install sub-gear components.
When installing sub-gear snap ring, tap sub-gear snap
ring into position on counter gear.
SMT577A
MT-22
ASSEMBLY
Gear Components (Cont’d)
b.
Install counter gear rear thrust bearing.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT405A
4.
a.
Install front side components on mainshaft.
Assemble 1st & 2nd synchronizer.
EC
FE
CL
SMT614B
b.
Assemble 3rd & 4th synchronizer.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SMT615B
c.
I
Press on 3rd & 4th synchronizer assembly together with 3rd
main gear and 3rd gear needle bearing.
Pay attention to direction of synchronizer assembly.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT399A
d.
e.
Select proper snap ring to minimize clearance of groove.
Allowable clearance of groove:
0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in)
Mainshaft front snap ring:
Refer to SDS, MT-34.
Install selected snap ring on mainshaft.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT400A
MT-23
ASSEMBLY
Gear Components (Cont’d)
f.
Press on 1st & 2nd synchronizer assembly together with 2nd
main gear and 2nd gear needle bearing.
g.
h.
Press on 1st gear bushing using 1st gear washer.
Install 1st main gear and needle bearing.
i.
I
Install steel ball and 1st gear washer.
Apply multi-purpose grease to steel ball and 1st gear
washer before installing.
5.
Select proper counter gear front bearing thrust washer when
replacing transmission case, counter gear, counter gear rear
thrust bearing or sub-gear components.
Install counter gear with sub-gear components, counter gear
front and rear bearing thrust washer on adapter plate.
Remove counter gear front bearing thrust washer from transmission case.
Place adapter plate and counter gear assembly in transmission case (case inverted).
SMT401A
SMT402A
SMT403A
a.
b.
c.
SMT427AA
MT-24
ASSEMBLY
Gear Components (Cont’d)
d.
e.
f.
g.
Tighten adapter plate to transmission case using 2 bolts.
Place dial indicator on rear end of counter gear.
Move counter gear up and down and measure dial indicator
deflection.
Select proper thrust washer using table below as a guide.
Counter gear end play:
0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)
Table for selecting proper counter gear front bearing
thrust washer:
Refer to SDS, MT-36.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SMT578A
6.
a.
I
Select proper reverse idler rear thrust washer when replacing
OD gear case, reverse idler gear (with sub-gear components),
reverse idler shaft.
Install reverse idler gear (with sub-gear components), reverse
idler needle bearings and reverse idler shaft into OD gear
case.
When replacing reverse idler rear thrust washer, install
either A or B.
Reverse idler rear thrust washer:
Refer to SDS, MT-36.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT112E
HA
SC
EL
IDX
MT-25
ASSEMBLY
Gear Components (Cont’d)
b.
c.
d.
e.
Place dial indicator on front end of reverse idler shaft.
Put straightedge on front surface of rear extension (or OD gear
case) as a stopper of reverse idler shaft.
Move reverse idler shaft up and down and measure reverse
idler gear end play.
Reverse idler gear end play:
0.30 - 0.53 mm (0.0118 - 0.0209 in)
If not within specification, replace reverse idler rear thrust
washer with the other (A or B) and check again.
SMT433A
7.
a.
Install mainshaft and counter gear on adapter plate and main
drive gear on mainshaft.
Mount adapter plate on vise and apply multi-purpose grease to
counter gear rear bearing.
SMT438A
b.
I
Install mainshaft a little on mainshaft front bearing.
To allow for installation of counter gear, do not install
mainshaft completely.
c.
Install counter gear on counter gear rear bearing and install
main drive gear, pilot bearing and spacer on mainshaft.
SMT440A
SMT441A
MT-26
ASSEMBLY
Gear Components (Cont’d)
I
When installing counter gear into counter gear rear
bearing, push up on upper roller of counter gear rear bearing with screwdriver.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT442A
d.
e.
Install Tools (J26349-3) onto adapter plate and C-ring and
C-ring holder on mainshaft.
Install Tool (J34328) on mainshaft.
EC
FE
CL
SMT064C
f.
Install mainshaft and counter gear completely by extending
length of (J26349-3).
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SMT579A
8.
a.
Install rear side components on mainshaft and counter gear.
Install OD gear bushing while pushing on the front of counter
gear.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT444A
b.
I
c.
d.
Install OD main gear.
Pay attention to direction of OD main gear. (B is wider than
A as shown at left.)
Install adapter plate with gear assembly onto transmission
case.
Install OD gear needle bearing and then install OD counter
gear and reverse idler shaft.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT580AA
MT-27
ASSEMBLY
Gear Components (Cont’d)
e.
Install reverse cone.
f.
Install insert springs and reverse baulk ring on OD coupling
sleeve. Then install them and OD baulk ring on OD counter
gear.
Pay attention to direction of OD coupling sleeve.
SMT582A
I
SMT571AA
SMT583A
g.
h.
Install reverse counter gear.
Install reverse gear needle bearing and then install reverse
main gear, reverse idler gear and reverse idler thrust washers.
i.
I
Install reverse hub.
Pay attention to its direction.
SMT584A
SMT585A
MT-28
ASSEMBLY
Gear Components (Cont’d)
j.
k.
Install counter gear rear end bearing.
Separate adapter plate from transmission case and mount
adapter plate on vice again.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT485C
l.
Select proper mainshaft C-ring to minimize clearance of
groove.
Allowable clearance of groove:
0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in)
Mainshaft C-ring:
Refer to SDS, MT-35.
SMT452A
m. Install selected C-ring, C-ring holder and mainshaft rear snap
ring.
EC
FE
CL
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SMT454A
n.
o.
Select proper counter gear rear snap ring to minimize clearance of groove.
Allowable clearance of groove:
0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in)
Counter gear rear snap ring:
Refer to SDS, MT-35.
Install selected counter gear rear snap ring.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT453A
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT455A
MT-29
ASSEMBLY
Gear Components (Cont’d)
p.
I
q.
Install reverse coupling sleeve.
Pay attention to its direction.
Measure each gear end play as a final check. Refer to
“DISASSEMBLY”, MT-16.
SMT456A
Shift Control Components
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
NAMT0014
Install OD fork rod and OD shift fork. Then install retaining pin
into OD shift fork.
Install 1st & 2nd, 3rd & 4th and reverse shift fork onto coupling
sleeve.
SMT457A
3.
I
Install striking rod into hole of shift forks, striking lever and
interlock and then install retaining pin into striking lever.
Make sure that striking rod moves smoothly.
SMT374A
Case Components
ASSEMBLY
1.
I
2.
NAMT0015
I
3.
Install front cover oil seal.
Apply multi-purpose grease to seal lip.
Install selected counter gear front bearing shim onto transmission case.
Apply multi-purpose grease.
Apply sealant to mating surface of transmission case.
4.
5.
I
Install gear assembly onto transmission case.
Install check spring and check ball into interlock stopper.
Apply multi-purpose grease to check ball.
SMT393A
SMT588A
MT-30
ASSEMBLY
Case Components (Cont’d)
6.
I
Install interlock stopper assembly and then tighten check ball
plug.
Apply genuine thread sealant to thread of check ball plug.
Refer to Shift Control Components, MT-13.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SMT109E
7.
Install stopper ring and main drive bearing snap ring.
EC
FE
CL
SMT371A
8.
I
9.
Install front cover and gasket.
Apply genuine thread sealant to thread of 3 bolts shown
left.
Refer to Case Components, MT-10.
Apply sealant to mating surface of adapter plate.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SMT110E
10. Install OD gear case together with striking arm.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMT444B
11. Install retaining pin into striking arm.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMT439B
MT-31
ASSEMBLY
Case Components (Cont’d)
12. Install return spring and check ball and then install control
housing.
I Apply sealant to mating surface of OD gear case.
Refer to Case Components, MT-10.
SMT445B
13. Tighten control housing bolts.
Bolt head size:
A bolts 12 mm (0.47 in)
B bolts 13 mm (0.51 in)
SMT446BA
MT-32
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications
General Specifications
Applied model
NAMT0016
GI
VQ35DE
MA
4WD
Transmission
FS5R30A
Model code number
EM
4W120
Number of speed
5
LC
EC
Shift pattern
MT-SDS-2
Synchromesh type
FE
Warner
Number of teeth
CL
Gear ratio
Mainshaft
Countershaft
—
22
32
1st
3.580
32
13
2nd
2.077
30
21
3rd
1.360
29
31
4th
1.000
—
—
OD
0.811
24
43
Reverse
3.636
30
12
Drive
Reverse idler gear
TF
PD
22
Oil capacity (US pt, Imp pt)*
Remarks
AT
5.1 (10-3/4, 9)
AX
2nd & 3rd double baulk ring type synchronizer
*: Refer to MA-12, “Fluids and Lubricants”.
SU
Gear End Play
NAMT0017
Unit: mm (in)
Gear
End play
1st main gear
0.23 - 0.33 (0.0091 - 0.0130)
2nd main gear
0.23 - 0.33 (0.0091 - 0.0130)
3rd main gear
0.06 - 0.16 (0.0024 - 0.0063)
OD counter gear
0.23 - 0.33 (0.0091 - 0.0130)
Reverse main gear
0.33 - 0.43 (0.0130 - 0.0169)
Counter gear
0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098)
Reverse idler gear
0.30 - 0.53 (0.0118 - 0.0209)
ST
RS
BT
HA
Clearance Between Baulk Ring and Gear
NAMT0018
Unit: mm (in)
Standard
1st
1.05 - 1.3 (0.0413 - 0.0512)
Main drive
1.05 - 1.3 (0.0413 - 0.0512)
OD
1.05 - 1.3 (0.0413 - 0.0512)
MT-33
BR
SC
Wear limit
EL
0.7 (0.028)
IDX
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Clearance Between Baulk Ring and Gear (Cont’d)
2ND AND 3RD BAULK RING
NAMT0018S01
Unit: mm (in)
SMT742C
Dimension
Standard
Wear limit
A
0.7 - 0.9 (0.028 - 0.035)
B
0.6 - 1.1 (0.024 - 0.043)
0.2 (0.008)
Distance Between Rear Surface of Reverse
Cone and Reverse Baulk Ring
NAMT0019
Unit: mm (in)
SMT428C
Dimension “A”
Standard
Wear limit
0.3 to 0.75 (0.012 to 0.0295)
1.1 (0.043)
Available Snap Ring
NAMT0020
MAIN DRIVE GEAR SNAP RING
NAMT0020S01
Unit: mm (in)
Allowable clearance
0 - 0.1 (0 - 0.004)
Thickness
Part number*
Thickness
Part number*
1.89 (0.0744)
32204-01G60
2.03 (0.0799)
32204-01G63
1.95 (0.0768)
32204-01G61
2.07 (0.0815)
32204-01G64
1.99 (0.0783)
32204-01G62
2.11 (0.0831)
32204-01G65
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
MAINSHAFT FRONT SNAP RING
NAMT0020S02
Unit: mm (in)
Allowable clearance
0 - 0.1 (0 - 0.004)
Thickness
Part number*
Thickness
Part number*
1.99 (0.0783)
32204-01G62
2.11 (0.0831)
32204-01G65
2.03 (0.0799)
32204-01G63
2.15 (0.0846)
32204-01G66
2.07 (0.0815)
32204-01G64
2.19 (0.0862)
32204-01G67
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
MT-34
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Available Snap Ring (Cont’d)
COUNTER GEAR REAR SNAP RING
NAMT0020S03
GI
Unit: mm (in)
Allowable clearance
0 - 0.11 (0 - 0.0043)
MA
Thickness
Part number*
Thickness
Part number*
1.32 (0.0520)
32236-01G00
1.56 (0.0614)
32236-01G04
1.38 (0.0543)
32236-01G01
1.62 (0.0638)
32236-01G05
1.44 (0.0567)
32236-01G02
1.68 (0.0661)
32236-01G06
1.50 (0.0591)
32236-01G03
1.74 (0.0685)
32236-01G07
EM
LC
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
EC
Available C-ring
NAMT0021
MAINSHAFT C-RING
NAMT0021S01
Unit: mm (in)
Allowable clearance
0 - 0.1 (0 - 0.004)
CL
Thickness
Part number*
Thickness
Part number*
2.63 (0.1035)
32348-01G15
3.19 (0.1256)
32348-01G07
2.70 (0.1063)
32348-01G00
3.26 (0.1283)
32348-01G08
2.77 (0.1091)
32348-01G01
3.33 (0.1311)
32348-01G09
2.84 (0.1118)
32348-01G02
3.40 (0.1339)
32348-01G10
2.91 (0.1146)
32348-01G03
3.47 (0.1366)
32348-01G11
2.98 (0.1173)
32348-01G04
3.54 (0.1394)
32348-01G12
3.05 (0.1201)
32348-01G05
3.61 (0.1421)
32348-01G13
3.12 (0.1228)
32348-01G06
3.68 (0.1449)
32348-01G14
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
FE
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
MT-35
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Available Shim and Washer
Available Shim and Washer
=NAMT0022
TABLE FOR SELECTING PROPER COUNTER GEAR FRONT BEARING THRUST WASHER
NAMT0022S01
Unit: mm (in)
Dial indicator deflection
Thickness of proper washer
Part number*
0.93 - 1.02 (0.0366 - 0.0402)
0.80 (0.0315)
32218-01G00
1.01 - 1.10 (0.0398 - 0.0433)
0.88 (0.0346)
32218-01G11
1.09 - 1.18 (0.0429 - 0.0465)
0.96 (0.0378)
32218-01G12
1.17 - 1.26 (0.0461 - 0.0496)
1.04 (0.0409)
32218-01G13
1.25 - 1.34 (0.0492 - 0.0528)
1.12 (0.0441)
32218-01G14
1.33 - 1.42 (0.0524 - 0.0559)
1.20 (0.0472)
32218-01G04
1.41 - 1.50 (0.0555 - 0.0591)
1.28 (0.0504)
32218-01G15
1.49 - 1.58 (0.0587 - 0.0622)
1.36 (0.0535)
32218-01G16
1.57 - 1.66 (0.0618 - 0.0654)
1.44 (0.0567)
32218-01G17
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
REVERSE IDLER REAR THRUST WASHER
NAMT0022S02
Unit: mm (in)
Thickness
Part number*
A
1.97 (0.0776)
32284-01G10
B
2.07 (0.0815)
32284-01G11
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
MT-36
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SECTION
RS
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CONTENTS
SEAT BELTS ...................................................................3
Precautions ..................................................................3
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
″AIR BAG″ AND ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″ ........3
PRECAUTION FOR SEAT BELT SERVICE ..................3
Front Seat Belt.............................................................5
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .................................5
Rear Seat Belt .............................................................6
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .................................6
Seat Belt Inspection.....................................................8
AFTER A COLLISION .................................................8
PRELIMINARY CHECKS ............................................8
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK .........9
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK .......9
Tether Anchor Plate ...................................................10
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...............................10
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) .........11
Precautions ................................................................11
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
″AIR BAG″ AND ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″ ......11
PRECAUTIONS FOR SRS ″AIR BAG″ AND ″SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER″ SERVICE...........................11
WIRING DIAGRAMS AND TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .....11
Preparation ................................................................12
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS ......................................12
COMMERCIAL SERVICE TOOL ................................13
Description .................................................................14
Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter.................15
Side Air Bag...............................................................15
Side Curtain Air Bag ..................................................15
SRS Component Parts Location ...............................16
Diagnosis Sensor Unit ...............................................16
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...............................16
Seat Belt Pre-tensioner .............................................17
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...............................17
Satellite Sensor..........................................................17
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...............................17
Driver Air Bag Module and Spiral Cable ...................18
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...............................18
REMOVAL ...............................................................18
INSTALLATION........................................................20
Front Passenger Air Bag Module ..............................20
REMOVAL ...............................................................20
INSTALLATION........................................................22
Side Air Bag Module..................................................22
REMOVAL ...............................................................22
INSTALLATION........................................................23
Side Curtain Air Bag Module .....................................24
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...............................24
Disposal of Air Bag Module and Seat Belt Pretensioner ....................................................................25
CHECKING DEPLOYMENT TOOL .............................26
DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR AIR BAG
MODULE (OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE) ...........................26
DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR SIDE
CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE (OUTSIDE OF
VEHICLE)................................................................29
DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER (OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE) ..............30
DEPLOYMENT OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER WHILE MOUNTED IN
VEHICLE .................................................................31
DISPOSING OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER ...........................................31
Trouble Diagnoses Introduction.................................32
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ...........................................32
DIAGNOSIS MODE FOR CONSULT-II .......................32
HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
WITH CONSULT-II ...................................................33
HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
WITHOUT CONSULT-II ............................................33
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS .........33
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick
and Accurate Repair ..................................................35
INFORMATION FROM CUSTOMER ..........................35
PRELIMINARY CHECK ............................................35
WORK FLOW ..........................................................36
Schematic ..................................................................37
Wiring Diagram - SRS -.............................................38
SRS Operation Check ...............................................41
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 ..................................41
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
CONTENTS
Trouble Diagnoses with CONSULT-II...................42
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 ..................................42
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 ..................................46
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED
FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2) ......................47
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5 ..................................48
Trouble Diagnoses without CONSULT-II..............52
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 ..................................52
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7 ..................................58
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 8 (CONTINUED
FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6) ......................59
RS-2
(Cont’d)
Trouble Diagnoses: ″AIR BAG″ Warning Lamp
Does Not Turn Off .....................................................60
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 9 ..................................60
Trouble Diagnoses: ″AIR BAG″ Warning Lamp
Does Not Turn On .....................................................62
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 10 ................................62
Collision Diagnosis ....................................................63
FOR FRONTAL COLLISION .....................................63
FOR SIDE COLLISION .............................................65
SEAT BELTS
Precautions
Precautions
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) “AIR BAG” AND “SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER”
GI
NARS0001
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL R50 is as follows:
I For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
I For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of side air bag module (located in the outer side of front seat),
side curtain air bag module (locating in the headlining side of front and rear seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring harness, warning lamp (one
of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
WARNING:
I To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
I Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.
I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connector (and by yellow harness protector or yellow insulation tape before the harness connectors).
PRECAUTION FOR SEAT BELT SERVICE
NARS0002
CAUTION:
I Before removing the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both
battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes.
I Do not use electrical test equipment for seat belt pre-tensioner connector.
I After replacing or reinstalling seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, or reconnecting seat belt pre-tensioner connector, check the system function. Refer to “SRS Operation Check” (RS-41) for details.
I Do not use disassemble buckle or seat belt assembly.
I Replace anchor bolts if they are deformed or worn out.
I Never oil tongue and buckle.
I If any component of seat belt assembly is questionable, do not repair. Replace the whole seat belt
assembly.
I If webbing is cut, frayed, or damaged, replace seat belt assembly.
I When replacing seat belt assembly, use a genuine seat belt assembly.
After A Collision
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
NARS0002S01
WARNING:
Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any collision.
NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the
collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so
could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-tensioner
should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags
are deployed.
Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if:
I The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and
buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly).
I The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.)
I The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
I Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.
I The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in
RS-3
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEAT BELTS
Precautions (Cont’d)
which the air bags are deployed.
RS-4
SEAT BELTS
Front Seat Belt
Front Seat Belt
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
GI
=NARS0003
Slide the seat all the way forward and tilt the seatback toward the front.
Remove adjuster cover.
Remove floor anchor bolt.
Remove shoulder anchor bolt.
Remove center pillar upper and lower garnish. Refer to BT-29, “SIDE AND FLOOR TRIM” for details.
Disconnect seat belt pre-tensioner connector.
Remove the bolt securing seat belt retractor, then remove seat belt and seat belt retractor.
Remove bolts securing seat belt adjuster, then remove seat belt adjuster.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
BT
HA
SC
SRS873-A
EL
IDX
RS-5
SEAT BELTS
Rear Seat Belt
Rear Seat Belt
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
=NARS0004
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Raise up rear seat cushion.
Remove outer anchor bolt.
Remove rear side upper and lower garnish. Refer to BT-29, “SIDE AND FLOOR TRIM” for details.
Remove anchor through-bolt.
Remove anchor bolt and bolt securing rear seat belt retractor, then remove seat belt and seat belt
retractor.
6. Remove each anchor bolt.
SRS654-A
RS-6
SEAT BELTS
Rear Seat Belt (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
BT
HA
SRS781-C
SC
EL
IDX
RS-7
SEAT BELTS
Seat Belt Inspection
Seat Belt Inspection
AFTER A COLLISION
=NARS0029
NARS0029S01
WARNING:
Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any collision.
NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the
collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so
could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-tensioner
should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags
are deployed.
Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if:
I The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and
buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly).
I The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.)
I The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
I Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.
I The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in
which the air bags are deployed.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
NARS0029S02
1. Check the seat belt warning lamp/chime for proper operation as follows:
a. Switch ignition ON. The seat belt warning lamp should illuminate. Also, the seat belt warning chime should
sound for about seven seconds.
b. Fasten driver’s seat belt. The seat belt warning lamp should go out and the chime (if sounding) should
stop.
2. If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II, and air bag warning lamp.
Refer to “SRS Operation Check”, RS-41.
3. Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are securely attached.
4. Check the shoulder seat belt guide and shoulder belt height adjuster for front seats. Ensure guide swivels freely and that belt lays flat and does not bind in guide. Ensure height adjuster operates properly and
holds securely.
5. Check retractor operation:
a. Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage.
b. Allow the seat belt to retract. Ensure that belt returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the seat
belt does not returns smoothly, the cause may be an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the “SEAT BELT
TAPE SET” and perform the following steps.
Inspect the front seat belt through-anchor.
i. Pull the seat belt out to a length of 500 mm (19.69 in) or more.
ii. Use a clip or other device to fix the seat belt at the center pillar belt opening.
iii. Pass a thin wire through the through-anchor belt opening. Hold both ends of the wire and pull taut while
moving it up and down several times along the belt opening surface to move matter stuck there.
iv. Any dirt that cannot be removed with the wire can be removed by cleaning the opening with a clean cloth.
v. Apply tape at the point where the belt contacts the through-anchor belt opening.
NOTE:
Apply the tape so that there is no looseness or wrinkling.
vi. Remove the clip fixing the seat belt and check that the belt returns smoothly.
c. Fasten the seat belt. Pull firmly on belt and buckle to ensure belt remains latched. Unfasten seat belt.
Ensure belt releases freely and buckle button returns to original position.
6. For center (non-retractable) seat belts, check that the seat belt are accessible. Check seat belt webbing
for twists, tears or other damage. Fasten the seat belt. Pull firmly on belt and buckle to ensure belt remains
latched. Unfasten seat belts. Ensure belt releases freely and buckle button returns to original position.
7. Repeat steps above as necessary to check the other seat belts.
RS-8
SEAT BELTS
Seat Belt Inspection (Cont’d)
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK
Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
NARS0029S03
NARS0029S0301
NOTE:
All seat belt retractors are of the Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an emergency (sudden stop)
the retractor will lock and prevent the belt from extending any further. All 3-point type seat belt retractors except
the driver’s seat belt also have an Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also called child
restraint mode) is used when installing child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt is fully
extended. When the belt is then retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt in a specific position so the belt cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat belt to fully
wind back into the retractor.
Check the seat belt retractors using the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is operating
properly.
ELR Function Stationary Check
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
NARS0029S0302
Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt from extending further.
ALR Function Stationary Check
NARS0029S0304
1. Pull out entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard.
2. Retract the belt partially. A clicking noise should be heard as the belt retracts indicating that the retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode.
3. Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The belt must lock and not extend any further. If NG,
replace the retractor assembly.
4. Allow the entire length of the belt to retract to cancel the automatic locking mode.
ELR Function Moving Check
NARS0029S0303
FE
CL
MT
AT
WARNING:
Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions (for example,
a large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. DO NOT perform the following test
on wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an accident and serious personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the
retractor does not lock.
1. Fasten driver’s seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested.
2. Proceed to the designated safe area.
3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop
and the driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does not
lock, apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop.
During stop, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does not lock,
perform the retractor off-vehicle check.
TF
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK
ST
NARS0029S04
1. Remove the seat belt retractor assembly.
2. Slowly pull out belt while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position without twisting
the retractor assembly as shown in the illustration.
15 degrees or less tilt: Belt can be pulled out.
35 degrees or more tilt: Belt locks and cannot be pulled out.
PD
AX
SU
BR
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
RS-9
SEAT BELTS
Seat Belt Inspection (Cont’d)
SRS361
If NG, replace the retractor assembly.
Tether Anchor Plate
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Replace anchor bolt if they are deformed or worn out.
SRS916
RS-10
NARS0050
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Precautions
Precautions
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) “AIR BAG” AND “SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER”
GI
NARS0005
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL R50 is as follows:
I For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
I For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of side air bag module (located in the outer side of front seat),
side curtain air bag module (locating in the headlining side of front and rear seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring harness, warning lamp (one
of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
WARNING:
I To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
I Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.
I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connector (and by yellow harness protector or yellow insulation tape before the harness connectors).
PRECAUTIONS FOR SRS “AIR BAG” AND “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” SERVICE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NARS0006
Do not use electrical test equipment to check SRS circuits unless instructed to in this Service Manual.
Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch “OFF”, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3
minutes.
For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag and seat belt
pre-tensioner to deploy. Therefore, do not work on any SRS connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes
have passed.
Diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with their arrow marks “g” pointing towards the front of
the vehicle for proper operation. Also check diagnosis sensor unit for cracks, deformities or rust before
installation and replace as required.
The spiral cable must be aligned with the neutral position since its rotations are limited. Do not attempt to
turn steering wheel or column after removal of steering gear.
Handle air bag module carefully. Always place driver and passenger air bag modules with the pad side
facing upward and side air bag module standing with the stud bolt side setting bottom.
Conduct self-diagnosis to check entire SRS for proper function after replacing any components.
After air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly should be replaced if damaged.
WIRING DIAGRAMS AND TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
I GI-11, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”
I EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” for power distribution circuit
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
I GI-35, “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”
I GI-24, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
NARS0007
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
RS-11
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Preparation
Preparation
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
=NARS0008
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV99106400
(J38381)
Deployment tool
Disposing of air bag module
NT357
KV99105300
(J41246)
Air bag module bracket
Anchoring air bag module
NT354
HT61961000 and
HT62152000 combined
(J38219)
*Special torx bit
Use for special bolts [TAMPER RESISTANT TORX (Size T50)]
a: 3.5 (0.138) dia.
b: 8.5 - 8.6 (0.335 - 0.339) dia.
c: approx. 10 (0.39) sq.
Unit: mm (in)
NT361
KV99109000
(J44230)
Deployment tool adapter for side
air bags
NT837
(J38381-80)
Deployment tool adapter for seat
belt pre-tensioner (Yellow connector) and side curtain air bag
(Yellow and orange connectors)
PHIA0184E
RS-12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Preparation (Cont’d)
GI
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(J-44615)
Air bag master key set
Removing and installing accessory air bag
locking bolts
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
LRS194
CL
*: Special tool or commercial equivalent
COMMERCIAL SERVICE TOOL
Tool name
NARS0051
MT
Description
Tamper resistant torx
socket
Size: T30
AT
TF
PD
NT757
AX
SU
BR
ST
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
RS-13
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Description
Description
=NARS0009
SRS018A
The air bag deploys if the diagnosis sensor unit activates while the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “START”
position.
The collision modes for which supplemental restraint systems are activated are different among the SRS systems. For example, the driver air bag module and passenger air bag module are activated in a frontal collision but not in a side collision.
SRS configurations which are activated for some collision modes are as follows;
SRS configuration
Frontal collision
Left side collision
Right side collision
Driver air bag module
X
—
—
Passenger air bag module
X
—
—
Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner
X
—
—
Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner
X
—
—
Front LH side air bag module (LH)
—
X
—
Front RH side air bag module (RH)
—
—
X
LH side curtain air bag module
—
X
—
RH side curtain air bag module
—
—
X
RS-14
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter
Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter
SRS444
NARS0032
The seat belt pre-tensioner system with load limiter is installed to
both the driver’s seat and the front passenger’s seat. It operates
simultaneously with the SRS air bag system in the event of a frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified level.
When the frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified
level occurs, seat belt slack resulting from clothing or other factors
is immediately taken up by the pre-tensioner. Vehicle passengers
are securely restrained.
When passengers in a vehicle are thrown forward in a collision and
the restraining force of the seat belt exceeds a specified level, the
load limiter permits the specified extension of the seat belt by the
twisting of the ELR shaft, and a relaxation of the chest-area seat
belt web tension while maintaining force.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
Side Air Bag
AT
NARS0033
Front side air bag is built-in type.
The front seatbacks with built-in type side air bag have the labels
shown in figures at left.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SRS560-B
Side Curtain Air Bag
NARS0053
The side curtain air bag have the labels shown in figure at left.
BR
ST
BT
BF-2006D
HA
SC
EL
IDX
RS-15
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
SRS Component Parts Location
SRS Component Parts Location
NARS0010
SRS019A
Diagnosis Sensor Unit
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NARS0012
CAUTION:
I Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait for at least 3 minutes.
I Do not use old bolts after removal; replace with new ones.
I Check diagnosis sensor unit for proper installation.
I Check diagnosis sensor unit to ensure it is free of
deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If they show any visible
signs of damage, replace them with new ones.
I Check diagnosis sensor unit brackets to ensure they are
free of deformities or rust.
I Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or
sustained an impact.
I After replacement of diagnosis sensor unit, perform selfdiagnosis for SRS. Refer to “SRS Operation Check” for
details (RS-41).
RS-16
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Diagnosis Sensor Unit (Cont’d)
1.
SRS636-A
Disconnect connectors for driver and passenger air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioner.
2. Remove console box. Refer to BT-22, “INSTRUMENT PANEL
ASSEMBLY”.
3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit connector.
4. Remove ground bolt and diagnostic sensor unit fixing bolts.
Use TAMPER RESISTANT TORX (Size T50) to remove special bolts.
Then remove the diagnosis sensor unit.
NOTE:
I To install, reverse the removal procedure sequence.
GI
Seat Belt Pre-tensioner
EC
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NARS0034
CAUTION:
I Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes.
I Check seat belt pre-tensioner with load limiter for proper
installation.
I After replacement of seat belt pre-tensioner, check SRS
function and perform self-diagnosis for SRS. Refer to
“SRS Operation Check” for details. (RS-41)
I Do not attempt to disassemble seat belt pre-tensioner with
load limiter.
I Replace seat belt pre-tensioner if it has been dropped or
sustained an impact.
I Do not expose seat belt pre-tensioner to temperatures
exceeding 80°C (176°F).
For removal of seat belt pre-tensioner, refer to “Front Seat Belt” for
details. (RS-5)
NOTE:
I To install, reverse the removal procedure sequence.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
Satellite Sensor
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NARS0035
CAUTION:
I Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes.
I Do not use old bolts coated with bonding agent after
removal; replace with new ones.
I Check satellite sensor for proper installation.
I Check satellite sensor to ensure they are free of
deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible
signs of damage, replace it with new one.
I After replacement of satellite sensor, check SRS function
and perform self-diagnosis for SRS. Refer to “SRS Operation Check” for details. (RS-41)
I Do not attempt to disassemble satellite sensor.
I Replace satellite sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
BR
ST
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
RS-17
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Satellite Sensor (Cont’d)
1.
Remove seat belt pre-tensioner. Refer to “Front Seat Belt” for
details. (RS-5)
2. Disconnect satellite sensor connector.
3. Remove satellite sensor fixing nuts.
Then remove the satellite sensor.
NOTE:
I To install, reverse the removal procedure sequence.
SRS979
Driver Air Bag Module and Spiral Cable
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NARS0013
SRS020A
REMOVAL
NARS0014
CAUTION:
I Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes.
I Always work from the side of air bag module.
1. Remove lower lid from steering wheel, and disconnect air bag
module connector.
SRS566
2.
3.
Remove audio and ASCD steering switches. Using the
TAMPER RESISTANT TORX (Size T30), remove left and right
special bolts.
Remove air bag module, and then disconnect horn connector.
SRS021A
RS-18
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Driver Air Bag Module and Spiral Cable (Cont’d)
CAUTION:
I Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward.
I Do not attempt to disassemble air bag module.
I The special bolts are coated with bonding agent. Do not
use old bolts after removal; replace with new ones.
I Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into
air bag module connector.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SRS443
I
I
I
Replace air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F).
Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with
the air bag module.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SBF814E
4.
5.
6.
Set steering wheel in the neutral position.
Remove nuts.
Using steering wheel puller, remove steering wheel. Be careful not to over-tighten puller bolt on steering wheel.
CAUTION:
I Do not tap or bump the steering wheel.
7. Remove steering column cover.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SRS676
8.
Unlock the spiral cable connector. Then disconnect connectors
and remove the four screws. The spiral cable can then be
removed.
CAUTION:
I Do not attempt to disassemble spiral cable.
I Do not apply lubricant to the spiral cable.
BR
ST
BT
SRS384
HA
SC
EL
IDX
RS-19
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Driver Air Bag Module and Spiral Cable (Cont’d)
INSTALLATION
NARS0015
1.
2.
Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position.
Make sure that the spiral cable is in the neutral position.
The neutral position is detected by turning left about 2.5 revolutions from the right end position. Align the two marks ( ).
CAUTION:
I The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the
cable is installed in an improper position.
I Also, with the steering linkage disconnected, the cable
may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited
number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned to the left
about 2.5 turns from the right end position.
3. Connect spiral cable connector and tighten with screws. Install
steering column cover.
4. Install steering wheel, aligning with spiral cable pin guides, and
pull spiral cable through.
5. Connect horn connector and steering switch connector engage
spiral cable with pawls in steering wheel. Move air bag module connector away from steering wheel lower lid opening.
6. Tighten nut.
: 30 - 39 N·m (3.0 - 4.0 kg-m, 22 - 28 ft-lb)
SRS276
7.
8.
9.
SRS021A
Position air bag module and tighten with new special bolts.
Connect air bag module connector.
Conduct self-diagnosis to ensure entire SRS operates properly. (Use CONSULT-II or warning lamp check.)
Before performing self-diagnosis, connect both battery cables.
10. Turn steering wheel to the left end and then to the right end
fully to make sure that spiral cable is set in the neutral position.
If air bag warning lamp blinks or stays ON (at the user mode),
it shows the spiral cable may be snapped due to its improper
position. Perform self-diagnosis again (use CONSULT-II or
warning lamp). If a malfunction is detected, replace the spiral
cable with a new one.
11. Perform self-diagnosis again to check that no malfunction is
detected.
Front Passenger Air Bag Module
REMOVAL
NARS0016
CAUTION:
I Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait for at least 3 minutes.
I Always work from the side of or under air bag module.
1. Remove glove box assembly. Refer to BT-22, “INSTRUMENT
PANEL ASSEMBLY” for details.
2. Disconnect front passenger air bag module connector from air
bag harness connector.
SRS162
RS-20
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Front Passenger Air Bag Module (Cont’d)
3.
Remove instrument lower panel on passenger side. Refer to
BT-22, “INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY” for details.
GI
MA
EM
LC
4.
5.
I
Remove front passenger fixing bolts. Use the TAMPER
RESISTANT TORX (SIZE T50) to remove special bolts from
front passenger air bag module.
Take out the air bag module from the instrument panel.
The air bag module is heavy and should be supported using
both hands during removal.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SRS948
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SRS949
CAUTION:
I Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward.
I Do not attempt to disassemble air bag module.
I Do not use old bolts after removal; replace with new bolts.
I Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into
air bag module connector.
BR
ST
BT
SRS164
I
I
I
I
Replace air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F).
Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with
the air bag module.
After air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly
should be replaced if damaged.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SBF814E
RS-21
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Front Passenger Air Bag Module (Cont’d)
INSTALLATION
NARS0017
CAUTION:
I Always work from the side of or under air bag module.
1. Install front passenger air bag module to instrument panel.
I Ensure harness is not caught between rear of air bag module
and steering member.
2. Install front passenger air bag module to steering member.
SRS948
SRS949
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Install instrument lower panel on passenger side.
Connect air bag module connector to air bag harness connector.
Install glove box assembly.
Connect both battery cables.
Conduct self-diagnosis to ensure entire SRS operates properly. (Use CONSULT-II or warning lamp check.)
SRS162
Side Air Bag Module
REMOVAL
SRS682
NARS0036
CAUTION:
I Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes.
I Always work from the rear of the air bag module.
1. Remove seatback board.
I When using a clip removal tool to remove the seatback
board, take care not to damage the air bag harness.
2. Disconnect side air bag module connector by sliding tab.
3.
4.
5.
Pull up the seatback trim.
Remove the nuts securing the inner cloth with seatback frame.
Then pull up the inner cloth.
Remove seatback trim. Refer to BT-43, “FRONT SEAT” for
details.
SRS683-A
RS-22
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Side Air Bag Module (Cont’d)
6.
7.
Remove the torx nuts coated with bonding agent from the side
air bag module.
Remove side air bag connector. Side air bag module can then
be removed.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SRS684-A
CAUTION:
I Always place the air bag module stading with the stud bolt
side setting bottom.
I Do not attempt to disassemble air bag module.
I The torx nuts are coated with bonding agent. Do not use
old nuts after removal; replace with new coated nuts.
I Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into
air bag module connector.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SRS623
I
I
I
I
Replace air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F).
Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with
the air bag module.
After air bag inflates, all parts of front seatback (including
front seatback frame) should be replaced.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SBF814E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
NARS0037
Install side air bag module on seatback frame with new torx
nuts coated with bonding agent.
Install side air bag connector.
Install seatback trim. Refer to BT-43, “FRONT SEAT” for details.
BR
ST
BT
SRS684-A
4.
Secure the inner cloth which covers the side air bag module
with nuts.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SRS683-A
RS-23
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Side Air Bag Module (Cont’d)
5.
6.
7.
8.
Connect side air bag module connector.
Install seatback board with new clips.
Connect both battery cables.
Go to “SRS Operation Check”, RS-41 and perform self-diagnosis to ensure entire SRS operates properly. (Use CONSULT-II or air bag warning lamp.)
SRS725
Side Curtain Air Bag Module
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NARS0052
SRS022A
Removal
NARS0052S01
CAUTION:
I Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes.
I Always work from the side of the side curtain air bag
module.
1. Remove headliner. Refer to BT-34, “ROOF TRIM” for details.
2. Disconnect side curtain air bag connector.
3. Remove side curtain air bag module fixing bolts, and remove
the side curtain air bag module.
RS-24
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Side Curtain Air Bag Module (Cont’d)
CAUTION:
I Always place the side curtain air bag module with the
warning label facing upward.
I Do not attempt to disassemble side curtain air bag module.
I Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into
air bag module connector.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SRS023A
I
I
I
Replace side curtain air bag module if it has been dropped
or sustained an impact.
Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F).
Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with
the side curtain air bag module.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SBF814E
Disposal of Air Bag Module and Seat Belt Pretensioner
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NARS0018
Before disposing of air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner,
or vehicles equipped with such systems, deploy the systems.
If such systems have already been deployed due to an
accident, dispose of them as indicated in “DISPOSING OF AIR
BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” (RS-31).
When deploying the air bag module and seat belt pretensioner, always use the Special Service Tool; Deployment
tool KV99106400 (Kent-Moore No. J38381).
When deploying the air bag module and seat belt pretensioner, stand at least 5 m (16 ft) away from the deployment
component.
When deploying air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner, a
fairly loud noise is made, followed by smoke being released.
The smoke is not poisonous, however, be careful not to inhale
smoke since it irritates the throat and can cause choking.
Always activate one air bag module at a time.
Due to heat, leave air bag module unattended for more than
30 minutes after deployment. Also leave seat belt pre-tensioner unattended for move than 10 minutes after deployment.
Be sure to wear gloves when handling a deployed air bag
module and seat belt pre-tensioner.
Never apply water to the deployed air bag module and seat
belt pre-tensioner.
Wash your hands clean after finishing work.
Place the vehicle outdoors with an open space of at least 6 m
(20 ft) on all sides when deploying air bag module and seat belt
pre-tensioner while mounted in vehicle.
Use a voltmeter to make sure the vehicle battery is fully
charged.
Do not dispose of the air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner un-deployed.
RS-25
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Disposal of Air Bag Module and Seat Belt Pre-tensioner (Cont’d)
CHECKING DEPLOYMENT TOOL
Connecting to Battery
SRS019
NARS0018S01
NARS0018S0101
CAUTION:
The battery must show voltage of 9.6V or more.
Remove the battery from the vehicle and place it on dry wood
blocks approximately 5 m (16 ft) away from the vehicle.
I Wait 3 minutes after the vehicle battery is disconnected before
proceeding.
I Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal and black clip to negative terminal.
Make sure the polarity is correct. The right side lamp in the
tool, marked “deployment tool power”, should glow with a
green light. If the right side lamp glows red, reverse the connections to the battery.
Deployment Tool Check
NARS0018S0102
Press the deployment tool switch to the “ON” position. The left side
lamp in the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage” should illuminate. If it does not illuminate, replace the tool.
Air Bag Deployment Tool Lamp Illumination Chart
(Battery connected)
NARS0018S0103
SBF266H
Switch operation
Left side lamp, green*
“AIR BAG CONNECTOR
VOLTAGE”
Right side lamp, green*
“DEPLOYMENT TOOL
POWER”
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
*: If this lamp glows red, the tool is connected to the battery incorrectly. Reverse
the connections and make sure the lamp glows green.
DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR AIR BAG MODULE
(OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE)
NARS0018S02
Unless the vehicle is being scrapped, deploying the air bag in the
vehicle is not recommended. This may cause damage to the
vehicle interior.
Anchor air bag module bracket [KV99105300 (J41246)] in a vise
secured to a firm foundation during deployment.
RS-26
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Disposal of Air Bag Module and Seat Belt Pre-tensioner (Cont’d)
Deployment of Driver Air Bag Module (Outside of
GI
vehicle)
NARS0018S0201
1.
Using wire, secure air bag module to air bag module bracket
[SST: KV99105300 (J41246)] at two places.
CAUTION:
Use wire of at least 1 mm (0.04 in) diameter.
2. Firmly secure air bag module bracket [SST: KV99105300
(J41246)] with air bag module attached, in a vise.
MA
EM
LC
SRS233
3.
Connect deployment tool [SST: KV99106400 (J38381)] to air
bag module connector.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SRS234-F
4.
Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal and black clip to negative terminal.
5. The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked “deployment tool
power”, should glow green, not red.
6. Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on
the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage”, will illuminate and
the air bag module will deploy.
CAUTION:
When deploying the air bag module, stand at least 5 m (16 ft)
away from the air bag module.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SRS020-B
Deployment of Passenger Air Bag Module (Outside of
vehicle)
NARS0018S0202
1.
Make an 8.5 mm (0.335 in) diameter hole in air bag module
bracket [SST: KV99105300 (J41246)] at the position shown in
figure at left.
BR
ST
BT
SRS141-G
2.
Firmly secure air bag module bracket [SST: KV99105300
(J41246)] in a vise.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SRS145-C
RS-27
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Disposal of Air Bag Module and Seat Belt Pre-tensioner (Cont’d)
3.
Match the two holes in air bag module bracket (held in vise)
and passenger air bag module and fix them with two bolts [M8
× 25 - 30 mm (0.98 - 1.18 in)].
CAUTION:
If a gap exists between passenger air bag module and air bag
module bracket, use a piece of wood inserted in the gap to
stabilize the air bag module.
SRS146-C
4.
5.
6.
7.
Connect deployment tool adapter [SST: KV991065S0 (J3838130)] to deployment tool [SST: KV99106400 (J38381)] connector and air bag module connector.
Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal and black clip to negative terminal.
The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked “deployment tool
power”, should glow green, not red.
Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on
the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage”, will illuminate and
the air bag module will deploy.
SRS147-A
CAUTION:
I When deploying the air bag module, do not stand on the
deploying side.
I Stand at least 5 m (16 ft) away from the air bag module.
SRS020-B
Deployment of Side Air Bag Module (Outside of
vehicle)
1.
NARS0018S0203
Make 6.5 mm (0.256 in) diameter holes in air bag module
bracket [SST: KV99105300 (J41246)] at the position shown in
figure at left.
SRS490-A
2.
Firmly secure air bag module bracket [SST: KV99105300
(J41246)] in a vise.
3. Insert the stud bolts of side air bag module (built-in type) into
the two holes in air bag module bracket (held in vise) and fix
them with two M6 nuts.
CAUTION:
Side air bag module should be secured to air bag module
bracket [SST: KV99105300 (J41246)] in a vise with metal portion facing down.
SRS628
RS-28
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Disposal of Air Bag Module and Seat Belt Pre-tensioner (Cont’d)
4.
Connect deployment tool adapter [SST: KV99109000
(J44230)] to deployment tool [SST: KV99106400 (J38381)]
connector and connector on air bag module.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SRS688
5.
Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal and black clip to negative terminal.
6. The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked “deployment tool
power”, should glow green, not red.
7. Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on
the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage”, will illuminate and
the air bag module will deploy.
CAUTION:
When deploying the air bag module, stand at least 5 m (16 ft)
away from the air bag module.
SRS020-B
DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR SIDE CURTAIN AIR
BAG MODULE (OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE)
NARS0018S06
1.
Cut the inflator from side curtain air bag module.
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
PHIA0196E
2.
Connect deployment tool [SST: J38381-80] and deployment
tool adapter (J38381-80) to the inflator.
LH side curtain air bag module: Yellow connector
RH side curtain air bag module: Orange connector
BR
ST
BT
PHIA0197E
3.
Put the inflator connected with the deployment tool [SST:
KV99106400 (J38381)] into a tire without a wheel.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SHIA0201E
RS-29
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Disposal of Air Bag Module and Seat Belt Pre-tensioner (Cont’d)
4.
WHIA0048E
Put the tire with the inflator onto another tire without wheel.
Add an additional tire without a wheel and then a tire mounted
on a wheel on top.
CAUTION:
Tie all tires together with a strap in order keep them standing.
5. Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal and black clip to negative terminal.
6. The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked “deployment tool
power”, should glow green, not red.
7. Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on
the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage”, will illuminate and
the air bag module will deploy.
CAUTION:
When deploying the side curtain air bag module, stand at least
5 m (16 ft) away from the side curtain air bag module.
DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER (OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE)
NARS0018S05
1.
Firmly grip pre-tensioner in a vise and cut the webbing off.
2.
Connect deployment tool adapter (J38381-80) to deployment
tool [SST: KV99106400 (J38381)] connector and seat belt pretensioner.
SRS984
PHIA0221E
3.
Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal and black clip to negative terminal.
4. The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked “deployment tool
power”, should glow green, not red.
5. Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on
the tool, marked “seat belt pre-tensioner connector voltage”,
will illuminate and the seat belt pre-tensioner will deploy.
CAUTION:
When deploying the seat belt pre-tensioner, stand at least 5 m
(16 ft) away from the seat belt pre-tensioner.
SRS242
RS-30
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Disposal of Air Bag Module and Seat Belt Pre-tensioner (Cont’d)
DEPLOYMENT OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT GI
PRE-TENSIONER WHILE MOUNTED IN VEHICLE NARS0018S03
When disposing of a vehicle, deploy air bag module and seat belt
pre-tensioners while they are mounted in vehicle.
CAUTION:
When deploying air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner,
ensure vehicle is empty.
1. Disconnect both the vehicle battery cables and wait 3 minutes.
2. Disconnect air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner connector.
3. Connect deployment tool [SST: KV99106400 (J38381)] to air
bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner.
For front passenger air bag module, attach deployment tool
adapter [SST: KV991065S0 (J38381-30)] to the tool connector.
For side air bag module, attach deployment tool adapter [SST:
KV99109000 (J44230)] to the tool connector. For seat belt
pre-tensioner, attach deployment tool adapter (SST: J3838180) to the tool connector. For side curtain air bag module,
attach deployment tool adapter (SST: J38381-80) to the tool
connector.
4.
5.
6.
Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal and black clip to negative terminal.
The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked “deployment tool
power”, should glow green, not red.
Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on
the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage”, will illuminate and
the air bag module will deploy.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SRS006-C
DISPOSING OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER
NARS0018S04
SBF276H
Deployed air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner are very hot.
Before disposing of air bag module, and seat belt pre-tensioner
wait at least 30 minutes, and 10 minutes, respectively. Seal them
in a plastic bag before disposal.
CAUTION:
I Never apply water to a deployed air bag module and seat
belt pre-tensioner.
I Be sure to wear gloves when handling a deployed air bag
module and seat belt pre-tensioner.
I No poisonous gas is produced upon air bag module
deployment. However, be careful not to inhale gas since it
irritates throat and can cause choking.
I Do not attempt to disassemble air bag module and seat
belt pre-tensioner.
I Air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner cannot be
reused.
I Wash your hands clean after finishing work.
BR
ST
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
RS-31
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Trouble Diagnoses Introduction
Trouble Diagnoses Introduction
=NARS0040
CAUTION:
I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow harness connector (and with
yellow harness protector or yellow insulation tape before the harness connectors).
I Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify the SRS wiring harness. If the harness is damaged,
replace it with a new one.
I Keep ground portion clean.
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
NARS0040S01
The SRS self-diagnosis results can be read by using “AIR BAG” warning lamp and/or CONSULT-II. The reading of these results is accomplished using one of two modes — “User mode” and “Diagnosis mode”.
The User mode is exclusively prepared for the customer (driver). This mode warns the driver of a system
malfunction through the operation of the “AIR BAG” warning lamp.
The Diagnosis mode allows the technician to locate and inspect the malfunctioning part.
The mode applications for the “AIR BAG” warning lamp and CONSULT-II are as follows:
User mode
Diagnosis mode
Display type
“AIR BAG” warning lamp
X
X
ON-OFF operation
CONSULT-II
—
X
Monitoring
NOTE:
Seat belt pre-tensioner malfunction is indicated by “AIR BAG” warning lamp.
DIAGNOSIS MODE FOR CONSULT-II
NARS0040S02
I
“SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”
A current Self-diagnosis result (also indicated by the number of warning lamp flashes in the Diagnosis
mode) is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen in real time. This refers to a malfunctioning part requiring
repairs.
I “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”
Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory are displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. The stored
results are not erased until memory erasing is executed.
I “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”
With TROUBLE DIAG RECORD, diagnosis results previously erased by a reset operation can be displayed
on the CONSULT-II screen.
I “ECU DISCRIMINATED NO.”
The diagnosis sensor unit for each vehicle model is assigned with its own, individual classification number. This number will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, as shown below. When replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, refer to the part number for the compatibility. After installation, replacement with a correct unit can be checked by confirming this classification number on the CONSULT-II screen.
For NISSAN MODEL R50, the diagnosis sensor unit classification numbers assigned is AA2F (Models
with side air bag) and AA2E (Models without side air bag).
RS-32
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Trouble Diagnoses Introduction (Cont’d)
HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITH CONSULT-II
From User Mode to Diagnosis Mode
=NARS0040S03
GI
NARS0040S0301
After selecting “AIR BAG” on the “SELECT SYSTEM” screen, User mode automatically changes to Diagnosis mode.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SRS803
From Diagnosis Mode to User Mode
NARS0040S0302
To return to User mode from Diagnosis mode, touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II until “SELECT SYSTEM”
appears, Diagnosis mode automatically changes to User mode.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SRS804
HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITHOUT CONSULT-II
From User Mode to Diagnosis Mode
AX
NARS0040S04
NARS0040S0401
Diagnosis mode activates only when a malfunction is detected, by turning ignition switch as follows:
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) After “AIR BAG” warning lamp lights for 7 seconds, turn ignition switch “OFF” within 1 second.
3) Wait more than 3 seconds.
4) Repeat steps 1 to 3 twice (Perform 3 times in total).
5) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
SRS will not enter Diagnosis mode, if no malfunction is detected.
From Diagnosis Mode to User Mode
BR
ST
NARS0040S0402
After a malfunction is repaired, switch the ignition “OFF” for at least one second, then back “ON”. Diagnosis
mode is returned to User mode.
If switching Diagnosis mode to User mode is required while malfunction is being detected, by turning ignition
switch as follows:
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) After “AIR BAG” warning lamp lights for 7 seconds, turn ignition switch “OFF” within 1 second.
3) Wait more than 3 seconds.
4) Repeat steps 1 to 3 twice (Perform 3 times in total).
5) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
With CONSULT-II
I
SU
“SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”
A current Self-diagnosis result is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen in real time.
RS-33
NARS0040S05
BT
HA
SC
EL
NARS0040S0501
IDX
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Trouble Diagnoses Introduction (Cont’d)
After the malfunction is repaired completely, no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”.
“SELF-DIAG [PAST]”
Return to the “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” CONSULT-II screen by pushing “BACK” key of CONSULT-II and
select “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” in SELECT DIAG MODE. Touch “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”
mode.
NOTE:
If the memory of the malfunction in “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” is not erased, the User mode shows the system malfunction by the operation of the warning lamp even if the malfunction is repaired completely.
I
SRS701
I
“TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”
The memory of “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD” cannot be erased.
Without CONSULT-II
NARS0040S0502
After a malfunction is repaired, switch the ignition “OFF” for at least one second, then back “ON”. Diagnosis
mode returns to the User mode. At that time, the self-diagnostic result is cleared.
RS-34
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick
and Accurate Repair
GI
=NARS0041
A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a malfunction. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint.
MA
INFORMATION FROM CUSTOMER
EM
NARS0041S01
WHAT ..... Vehicle model
WHEN ..... Date, Frequencies
WHERE ..... Road conditions
HOW ..... Operating conditions, Symptoms
LC
PRELIMINARY CHECK
NARS0041S02
Check that the following parts are in good order.
I Battery [Refer to SC-4, “BATTERY”.]
I Fuse [Refer to EL-11, “Fuse”, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”.]
I System component-to-harness connections
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
RS-35
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair (Cont’d)
WORK FLOW
=NARS0041S03
NOTE:
Seat belt pre-tensioner malfunction is indicated by “AIR BAG” warning lamp.
SRS799
*1: RS-35
*2: RS-41
*3: RS-42
*4: RS-52
*5: RS-46
*6: RS-58
RS-36
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Schematic
Schematic
NARS0042
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
BT
HA
SC
EL
MRS451A
RS-37
IDX
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Wiring Diagram — SRS —
Wiring Diagram — SRS —
NARS0043
MRS452A
RS-38
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Wiring Diagram — SRS — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
BT
HA
SC
EL
MRS453A
IDX
RS-39
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Wiring Diagram — SRS — (Cont’d)
MRS454A
RS-40
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
SRS Operation Check
SRS Operation Check
NARS0044
GI
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
NARS0044S01
Checking Air Bag Operation by Using “AIR BAG”
MA
Warning Lamp — User Mode
NARS0044S0101
1.
2.
After turning ignition switch from “OFF” to “ON”, “AIR BAG”
warning lamp operates.
Compare “AIR BAG” warning lamp operation to the chart
below.
EM
LC
SRS800
EC
“AIR BAG” warning lamp operation — User mode —
SRS condition
No malfunction is
detected. No further action
is necessary.
Reference item
FE
—
CL
MRS095A
The system is malfunction- Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROing and needs to be
CEDURE 2 or 6 (RS-42 or
repaired as indicated.
RS-52).
MT
AT
TF
MRS096A
Air bag is deployed.
Seat belt pre-tensioner is
deployed.
Air bag fuse, diagnosis
sensor unit or harness is
malfunctioning and needs
MRS097A to be repaired.
Go to COLLISION DIAGNOSIS (RS-63).
Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 9 (RS-60).
One of the following has
Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROoccurred and needs to be CEDURE 10 (RS-62).
repaired.
I Meter fuse is blown.
I “AIR BAG” warning
lamp circuit has open or
short.
MRS098A I Diagnosis sensor unit is
malfunctioning.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
RS-41
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Trouble Diagnoses with CONSULT-II
Trouble Diagnoses with CONSULT-II
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2
=NARS0045
NARS0045S01
Inspecting SRS malfunctioning parts by using CONSULT-II —
Diagnosis mode
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector.
SRS844
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Touch “START”.
5.
Touch “AIR BAG”.
6.
Touch “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”.
7.
Diagnostic codes are displayed on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”.
SRS695
SRS771
SRS697
SHIA0203E
RS-42
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Trouble Diagnoses with CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
If no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” even
though malfunction is detected in “SRS Operation Check”, check
the battery voltage.
If the battery voltage is less than 9V, charge the battery. Then go
to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3, page RS-46.
If the battery voltage is OK, go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4,
page RS-47, to diagnose the following cases:
I Self-diagnostic result “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” (previously stored
in the memory) might not be erased after repair.
I The SRS system malfunctions intermittently.
GI
8.
9.
EC
MA
EM
LC
SRS701
10.
11.
12.
13.
Touch “PRINT”.
Compare diagnostic codes to “CONSULT-II Diagnostic Code
Chart”, page RS-43.
Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II until “SELECT SYSTEM”
appears in order to return to User mode from Diagnosis mode.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then turn off and disconnect
CONSULT-II, and disconnect both battery cables.
Repair the system as outlined by the “Repair order” in “CONSULT-II Diagnostic Code Chart”, that corresponds to the selfdiagnostic result. For replacement procedure of component
parts, refer to RS-16.
After repairing the system, go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
3, page RS-46 for final checking.
FE
CL
MT
AT
CONSULT-II Diagnostic Code Chart (“SELF-DIAG
TF
[CURRENT]”)
NARS0045S0101
Diagnostic item
NO DTC IS
DETECTED.
DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE
[OPEN]
Explanation
When malfunction is
indicated by the “AIR
BAG” warning lamp in
User mode
Repair order
“Recheck SRS at each replacement.”
I Low battery voltage (Less than 9V)
I Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
3 (RS-46) after charging battery.
I Self-diagnostic result “SELF-DIAG
[PAST]” (previously stored in the
memory) might not be erased after
repair.
I Intermittent malfunction has been
detected in the past.
I Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
4 (RS-47).
PD
AX
SU
BR
I No malfunction is detected.
I Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
3 (RS-46).
I Driver air bag module circuit is open. (including the spiral
cable)
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace driver air bag module.
(Before disposal, it must be
deployed.)
4. Replace the spiral cable.
5. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
6. Replace the related harness.
ST
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
RS-43
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Trouble Diagnoses with CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
Diagnostic item
Explanation
Repair order
“Recheck SRS at each replacement.”
DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE
[VB-SHORT]
I Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to a power supply circuit. (including the spiral cable)
DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE
[GND-SHORT]
I Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. (including
the spiral cable)
DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE
[SHORT]
I Driver air bag module circuit is shorted between lines.
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[VB-SHORT]
I Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to some
power supply circuit.
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[OPEN]
I Front passenger air bag module circuit is open.
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[GND-SHORT]
I Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[SHORT]
I Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted between
lines.
SIDE MODULE LH
[OPEN]
I Front LH side air bag module circuit is open.
SIDE MODULE LH
[VB-SHORT]
I Front LH side
supply circuit.
SIDE MODULE LH
[GND-SHORT]
I Front LH side
SIDE MODULE LH
[SHORT]
I Front LH side
SIDE MODULE RH
[OPEN]
I Front RH side air bag module circuit is open.
SIDE MODULE RH
[VB-SHORT]
I Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to a power
supply circuit.
SIDE MODULE RH
[GND-SHORT]
I Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
SIDE MODULE RH
[SHORT]
I Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted between
lines.
SATELLITE SENS LH
[UNIT FAIL]
SATELLITE SENS LH
[COMM FAIL]
I LH side air bag (Satellite) sensor
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace the LH side air bag (satellite) sensor.
4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
SATELLITE SENS RH
[UNIT FAIL]
SATELLITE SENS RH
[COMM FAIL]
I RH side air bag (Satellite) sensor
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace the RH side air bag (satellite) sensor.
4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace the spiral cable.
4. Replace driver air bag module.
(Before disposal, it must be
deployed.)
5. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
6. Replace the related harness.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace front passenger air bag
module. (Before disposal, it must
be deployed.)
4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
air bag module circuit is shorted to a power
damage.
3. Replace the front LH side air bag
module.
air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
(Before disposal, it must be
deployed.)
air bag module circuit is shorted between lines. 4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
RS-44
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace the front RH side air bag
module.
(Before disposal, it must be
deployed.)
4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Trouble Diagnoses with CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
Diagnostic item
Explanation
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[OPEN]
I Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner circuit is open.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[VB-SHORT]
I Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner circuit is shorted to a power
supply circuit.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[GND-SHORT]
I Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner circuit is shorted to ground.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[SHORT]
I Front LH pre-tensioner circuit is shorted between lines.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[OPEN]
I Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner circuit is open.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[VB-SHORT]
I Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner circuit is shorted to a power
supply circuit.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[GND-SHORT]
I Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner circuit is shorted to ground.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[SHORT]
I Front RH pre-tensioner circuit is shorted between lines.
CURTAIN MODULE LH I LH side curtain air bag module circuit is open.
[OPEN]
CURTAIN MODULE LH I LH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to a power
[VB-SHORT]
supply circuit.
CURTAIN MODULE LH I LH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
[GND-SHORT]
CURTAIN MODULE LH I LH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted between
[SHORT]
lines.
CURTAIN MODULE
RH
[OPEN]
I RH side curtain air bag module circuit is open.
CURTAIN MODULE
RH
[VB-SHORT]
I RH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to a power
supply circuit.
CURTAIN MODULE
RH
[SHORT]
I RH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted between
lines.
CURTAIN MODULE
RH
[GND-SHORT]
I RH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
CONTROL UNIT
I Diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning.
Repair order
“Recheck SRS at each replacement.”
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connections.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace front LH seat belt.
(Before disposal, it must be deactivated.)
4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connections.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace front RH seat belt.
(Before disposal, it must be deactivated.)
4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace LH side curtain air bag
module.
(Before disposal, it must be
deployed.)
4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace RH side curtain air bag
module.
(Before disposal, it must be
deployed.)
4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
* Follow the procedures in numerical order when repairing malfunctioning parts. Confirm whether malfunction is eliminated
using the air bag warning lamp or CONSULT-II each time repair is finished. If malfunction is still observed, proceed to the next
step. When malfunction is eliminated, further repair work is not required.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
RS-45
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Trouble Diagnoses with CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3
NARS0045S02
Final checking after repairing SRS by using CONSULT-II —
Diagnosis mode
1. After repairing SRS, connect both battery cables.
2. Connect CONSULT-II to Data link connector.
3. Turn ignition switch from “OFF” to “ON”.
SRS844
4.
Touch “START”.
5.
Touch “AIR BAG”.
6.
Touch “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”.
7.
If no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”,
repair of SRS is completed. Go to step 8.
If any malfunction is displayed on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”,
the malfunctioning part is not repaired completely or another
malfunctioning part is detected. Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2, page RS-42, and repair malfunctioning part completely.
SRS695
SRS771
SRS697
SRS701
RS-46
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Trouble Diagnoses with CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
8. Touch “ERASE”.
NOTE:
Touch “ERASE” to clear the memory of the malfunction
(“SELF-DIAG [PAST]”).
If the memory of the malfunction in “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” is not
erased, the User mode shows the system malfunction by the
operation of the warning lamp even if the malfunction is repaired
completely.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SHIA0180E
9.
Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II to “SELECT SYSTEM”
screen. Touch “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SRS697
10. Check that no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG
[PAST]”.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SRS702
11. Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II until “SELECT SYSTEM”
appears in order to return to User mode from Diagnosis mode.
12. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then turn off and disconnect CONSULT-II.
13. Go to “SRS Operation Check”, page RS-41 to check SRS
operation by using “AIR BAG” warning lamp with User mode.
BR
ST
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)
NARS0045S03
Inspecting SRS malfunctioning record
1
CONSIDER POSSIBILITY OF NOT ERASING SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT AFTER REPAIRING
BT
Is it the first time for maintenance of SRS?
Yes or No
Yes
©
Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5 (RS-48).
No
©
Self-diagnostic result “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” (previously stored in the memory) might not
be erased after repair. Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3, step 8 (RS-46).
HA
SC
EL
IDX
RS-47
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Trouble Diagnoses with CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5
NARS0045S04
Inspecting SRS intermittent malfunction by using CONSULT-II
— Diagnosis mode
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector.
SRS844
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Touch “START”.
5.
Touch “AIR BAG”.
6.
Touch “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”.
7.
If diagnostic codes are displayed on “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”, go
to step 10.
SRS695
SRS771
SRS697
SHIA0181E
RS-48
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Trouble Diagnoses with CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
If no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”, touch
“BACK” and go back to “SELECT DIAG MODE”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SRS702
8. Touch “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”.
NOTE:
With “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”, diagnosis results previously erased by a reset operation can be displayed.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SRS697
9.
Diagnostic code is displayed on “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SHIA0182E
10. Touch “PRINT”.
11. Compare diagnostic codes to “Intermittent Malfunction Diagnostic Code Chart”, page RS-50.
12. Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II until “SELECT SYSTEM”
appears.
13. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then turn off and disconnect
CONSULT-II, and disconnect both battery cables.
14. Repair the system as outlined by the “Repair order” in “Intermittent Malfunction Diagnostic Code Chart”, that corresponds
to the self-diagnostic result. For replacement procedure of
component parts, refer to RS-16.
15. Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3, page RS-46, for final
checking.
BR
ST
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
RS-49
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Trouble Diagnoses with CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
Intermittent Malfunction Diagnostic Code Chart (“SELFDIAG [PAST]” or “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”)
NARS0045S0401
Diagnostic item
NO DTC IS
DETECTED.
Explanation
When malfunction is
indicated by the “AIR
BAG” warning lamp in
User mode
I Low battery voltage (Less than 9V)
Repair order
I Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
3 (RS-46) after charging battery.
I No malfunction is detected.
I Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
3 (RS-46).
DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE
[OPEN]
I Driver air bag module circuit is open. (including the spiral
cable)
DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE
[VB-SHORT]
I Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to a power supply circuit. (including the spiral cable)
DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE
[GND-SHORT]
I Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. (including
the spiral cable)
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. If the harness check result is OK,
replace driver air bag module
(Before disposal, it must be
deployed.), diagnosis sensor unit
and spiral cable.
DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE
[SHORT]
I Driver air bag module circuit is shorted between lines.
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[VB-SHORT]
I Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to a power
supply circuit.
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[OPEN]
I Front passenger air bag module circuit is open.
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[GND-SHORT]
I Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[SHORT]
I Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted between
lines.
SIDE MODULE LH
[OPEN]
I Front LH side air bag module circuit is open.
SIDE MODULE LH
[VB-SHORT]
I Front LH side
supply circuit.
SIDE MODULE LH
[GND-SHORT]
I Front LH side
SIDE MODULE LH
[SHORT]
I Front LH side
SIDE MODULE RH
[OPEN]
I Front RH side air bag module circuit is open.
SIDE MODULE RH
[VB-SHORT]
I Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to a power
supply circuit.
SIDE MODULE RH
[GND-SHORT]
I Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
SIDE MODULE RH
[SHORT]
I Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted between
lines.
SATELLITE SENS LH
[UNIT FAIL]
SATELLITE SENS LH
[COMM FAIL]
I LH side air bag (Satellite) sensor
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. If the harness check result is OK,
replace front passenger air bag
module (Before disposal, it must be
deployed.), and diagnosis sensor
unit.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
air bag module circuit is shorted to a power
damage.
3. If the harness check is OK, replace
the diagnosis sensor unit and front
air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
LH side air bag module. (Before
disposing of the front LH side air
bag module, it must be deployed.)
air bag module circuit is shorted between lines.
RS-50
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. If the harness check is OK, replace
the diagnosis sensor unit and front
RH side air bag module. (Before
disposing of the front RH side air
bag module, it must be deployed.)
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. If the harness check is OK, replace
the diagnosis sensor unit and LH
side air bag (Satellite) sensor.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Trouble Diagnoses with CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
Diagnostic item
SATELLITE SENS RH
[UNIT FAIL]
SATELLITE SENS RH
[COMM FAIL]
Explanation
I RH side air bag (Satellite) sensor
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[OPEN]
I Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner circuit is open.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[VB-SHORT]
I Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner circuit is shorted to a power
supply circuit.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[GND-SHORT]
I Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner circuit is shorted to ground.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[SHORT]
I Front LH pre-tensioner circuit is shorted to between lines.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[OPEN/VB-SHORT]
I Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner circuit is open.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[VB-SHORT]
I Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner circuit is shorted to a power
supply circuit.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[SHORT]
I Front RH pre-tensioner circuit is shorted between lines.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[GND-SHORT]
I Front RH pre-tensioner circuit is shorted to ground.
CURTAIN MODULE LH I LH side curtain air bag module circuit is open.
[OPEN]
CURTAIN MODULE LH I LH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to a power
[VB-SHORT]
supply circuit.
CURTAIN MODULE LH I LH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
[GND-SHORT]
CURTAIN MODULE LH I LH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted between
[SHORT]
lines.
CURTAIN MODULE
RH
[OPEN]
I RH side curtain air bag module circuit is open.
CURTAIN MODULE
RH
[VB-SHORT]
I RH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to a power
supply circuit.
CURTAIN MODULE
RH
[SHORT]
I RH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted between
lines.
CURTAIN MODULE
RH
[GND-SHORT]
I RH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
CONTROL UNIT
I Diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning.
Repair order
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. If the harness check is OK, replace
the diagnosis sensor unit and RH
side air bag (Satellite) sensor.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connections.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. If the harness check is OK, replace
the diagnosis sensor unit and front
LH seat belt.
(Before disposing of the front LH
seat belt pre-tensioner, it must be
deployed.)
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connections.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. If the harness check is OK, replace
the diagnosis sensor unit and front
RH seat belt.
(Before disposing of the front RH
seat belt pre-tensioner, it must be
deployed.)
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. If the harness check is OK, replace
the diagnosis sensor unit and LH
side curtain air bag module.
(Before disposing of the LH side
curtain air bag module, it must be
deployed.)
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. If the harness check is OK, replace
the diagnosis sensor unit and RH
side curtain air bag module.
(Before disposing of the RH side
curtain air bag module, it must be
deployed.)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
BT
HA
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. If the harness check is OK, replace
the diagnosis sensor unit.
* Follow the procedures in numerical order when repairing malfunctioning parts, then make the final system check.
RS-51
SC
EL
IDX
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Trouble Diagnoses without CONSULT-II
Trouble Diagnoses without CONSULT-II
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6
SRS800
NARS0046
NARS0046S01
Inspecting SRS malfunctioning parts by using “AIR BAG”
warning lamp — Diagnosis mode
NOTE:
SRS will not enter Diagnosis mode if no malfunction is
detected in User mode.
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. After “AIR BAG” warning lamp lights for 7 seconds, turn ignition switch “OFF” within 1 second.
3. Wait more than 3 seconds.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 twice (Perform 3 times in total).
5. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
SRS is now in Diagnosis mode.
6. “AIR BAG” warning lamp operates in Diagnosis mode as follows:
NOTE:
If SRS does not enter Diagnosis mode even though malfunction is
detected in User mode, check the battery voltage.
If the battery voltage is less than 9V, charge the battery. Then go
to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7, page RS-58.
If the battery voltage is OK, replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
RS-52
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Trouble Diagnoses without CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
No.
“AIR BAG” warning lamp flash pattern — Diagnosis mode —
a through b are repeated.
1
SRS333
a through d are repeated.
b — Driver and passenger air
bag and seat belt pre-tensioner marker (For identifying
driver air bag, passenger air
bag and/or seat belt pre-tensioners malfunctioning)
d — Indicates malfunctioning
part. The number of flash varSRS341 ies with malfunctioning part
(0.5 sec. ON and 0.5 sec.
OFF is counted as one flash.)
2
SRS condition
I Diagnosis
results (previously
stored in the
memory)
might not be
erased after
repair.
I Intermittent
malfunction
has been
detected in
the past.
Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 8
(RS-59).
The system is
malfunctioning
and needs to
be repaired.
a through f are repeated.
b, c, d — Side air bag
marker (For identifying side
air bag malfunctioning)
f — Indicates malfunctioning
part. The number of flash varies with malfunctioning part
(0.5 sec. ON and 0.5 sec.
SRS342-A OFF is counted as one flash.)
3
7.
Malfunctioning part is indicated by the number of flashes (part
d or f). Compare the number of flashes to “Air Bag Warning
Lamp Flash Code Chart”, page RS-54, and locate malfunctioning part.
8. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, and disconnect both battery cables.
9. Repair the system as outlined by the “Repair order” in “Warning Lamp Flash Code Chart” that corresponds to the flash
code. For replacement procedure of component parts, refer to
RS-16.
10. After repairing the system, go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
7, page RS-58.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
RS-53
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Trouble Diagnoses without CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
Air Bag Warning Lamp Flash Code Chart (Diagnosis
mode)
NARS0046S0101
Flash pattern
a through b are
repeated.
I Diagnosis results (previously stored in the
memory) might not be
erased after repair.
I Intermittent malfunction has been detected
in the past.
SRS333
Repair order
I Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 8 (RS-59).
Flash pattern
a through d are
repeated.
d — One flash indicates
malfunctioning front RH
seat belt pre-tensioner
circuit.
Front RH seat belt pretensioner circuit is malfunctioning.
(d: 1 flash)
SRS801
Repair order (“Recheck SRS at each replacement”).
1. Visually check the wiring harness connections.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
3. Replace front RH seat belt pre-tensioner.
(Before disposal, it must be deactivated.)
4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
Flash pattern
a through d are
repeated.
d — Two flashes indicate malfunctioning driver’s air bag module circuit.
Driver air bag module
circuit is malfunctioning.
(d: 2 flashes)
SRS334
Repair order (“Recheck SRS at each replacement.”)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Visually check the wiring harness connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace the spiral cable.
Replace driver air bag module.
(Before disposal, it must be deployed.)
5. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
6. Replace the related harness.
RS-54
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Trouble Diagnoses without CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
GI
Flash pattern
a through d are
repeated.
d — Three flashes indicate malfunctioning front
LH seat belt pre-tensioner circuit.
Front LH seat belt pretensioner circuit is malfunctioning.
(d: 3 flashes)
MA
EM
LC
SRS802
EC
Repair order (“Recheck SRS at each replacement”).
1. Visually check the wiring harness connections.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
3. Replace front LH seat belt pre-tensioner.
(Before disposal, it must be deactivated.)
4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
FE
CL
MT
Flash pattern
a through d are
repeated.
d — Seven flashes indicate malfunctioning diagnosis sensor unit.
Diagnosis sensor unit is
malfunctioning.
(d: 7 flashes)
SRS335
AT
TF
PD
Repair order (“Recheck SRS at each replacement.”)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Visually check the wiring harness connections.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
AX
SU
Flash pattern
Front passenger air bag
module circuit is malfunctioning.
(d: 8 flashes)
a through d are
repeated.
d — Eight flashes indicate malfunctioning front
passenger air bag module circuit.
BR
ST
SRS336
Repair order (“Recheck SRS at each replacement.”)
1. Visually check the wiring harness connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
3. Replace front passenger air bag module.
(Before disposal, it must be deployed.)
4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
RS-55
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Trouble Diagnoses without CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
Flash pattern
a through f are repeated.
f — One flash indicates
malfunctioning front RH
side air bag module circuit.
Front RH side air bag
module circuit is malfunctioning.
(f: 1 flash)
SRS338
Repair order (“Recheck SRS at each replacement.”)
1. Visually check the wiring harness connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
3. Replace front RH side air bag module.
(Before disposal, it must be deployed.)
4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
Flash pattern
a through f are repeated.
f — Two flashes indicate
malfunctioning front LH
side air bag module circuit.
Front LH side air bag
module circuit is malfunctioning.
(f: 2 flashes)
SRS337
Repair order (“Recheck SRS at each replacement.”)
1. Visually check the wiring harness connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
3. Replace front LH side air bag module.
(Before disposal, it must be deployed.)
4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
Flash pattern
a through f are repeated.
f — Three flashes indicate malfunctioning RH
side air bag (Satellite)
sensor circuit.
RH side air bag (Satellite) sensor is malfunctioning.
(f: 3 flashes)
SRS340
Repair order (“Recheck SRS at each replacement.”)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Visually check the wiring harness connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace the RH side air bag (Satellite) sensor.
Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
RS-56
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Trouble Diagnoses without CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
GI
Flash pattern
a through f are repeated.
f — Four flashes indicate malfunctioning LH
side air bag (Satellite)
sensor circuit.
LH side air bag (Satellite) sensor is malfunctioning.
(f: 4 flashes)
MA
EM
LC
SRS339-A
Repair order (“Recheck SRS at each replacement.”)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
EC
Visually check the wiring harness connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace the LH side air bag (Satellite) sensor.
Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
FE
Flash pattern
CL
a through f are repeated.
f — Five flashes indicate
malfunctioning RH side
curtain air bag module
circuit.
MT
AT
Side curtain air bag module (RH) circuit is malfunctioning.
(f: 5 flashes)
TF
SRS024A
Repair order (“Recheck SRS at each replacement.”)
PD
1. Visually check the wiring harness connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
3. Replace RH side curtain air bag module.
(Before disposal, it must be deployed.)
4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
AX
SU
Flash pattern
a through f are repeated.
f — Six flashes indicate
malfunctioning LH side
curtain air bag module
circuit.
LH side curtain air bag
module circuit is malfunctioning.
(f: 6 flashes)
BR
ST
SRS025A
Repair order (“Recheck SRS at each replacement.”)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Visually check the wiring harness connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace LH side curtain air bag module.
Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.
* Follow the procedures in numerical order when repairing malfunctioning parts. Confirm whether malfunction is eliminated
using the air bag warning lamp or CONSULT-II each time repair is finished. If malfunction is still observed, proceed to the next
step. When malfunction is eliminated, further repair work is not required.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
RS-57
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Trouble Diagnoses without CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7
NARS0046S02
Final checking after repairing SRS by using “AIR BAG” warning lamp — Diagnosis mode and User mode
1. After repairing SRS connect both battery cables.
2. Turn ignition switch from “OFF” to “ON”.
3. “AIR BAG” warning lamp operates in Diagnosis mode as follows:
SRS800
No.
“AIR BAG” warning lamp flash pattern — Diagnosis mode —
a through b are repeated.
1
SRS condition
No malfunction
is detected or
repair is completed.
No further
action is necessary.
SRS333
2
a through d are repeated.
b — Driver and passenger air
bag and seat belt pre-tensioner
marker (For identifying driver
air bag, passenger air bag
and/or seat belt pre-tensioners
malfunctioning)
d — Indicates malfunctioning
part. The number of flashes
SRS341 varies with malfunctioning part
(0.5 sec. ON and 0.5 sec. OFF
is counted as one flash.)
3
a through f are repeated.
b, c, d — Side air bag marker
(For identifying side air bag
malfunctioning)
f — Indicates malfunctioning
part. The number of flashes
varies with malfunctioning part
(0.5 sec. ON and 0.5 sec. OFF
SRS342-A is counted as one flash.)
The system is
malfunctioning
and needs to
be repaired.
NOTE:
When diagnosis sensor unit is replaced with new one, “AIR BAG”
warning lamp will operate in User mode. Checking “AIR BAG”
warning lamp operation in Diagnosis mode is not required. Go to
step 6.
4. If “AIR BAG” warning lamp operates as shown in No. 1 in chart
above, turn ignition switch “OFF” to reset from Diagnosis mode
to User mode and to erase the memory of the malfunction.
Then go to step 6.
If “AIR BAG” warning lamp operates as shown in No. 2 or No.
3 in chart above, the malfunctioning part is not repaired
completely, or another malfunctioning part is detected. Go to
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6, page RS-52, and repair malfunctioning part completely.
5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. “AIR BAG” warning lamp operates in
User mode. Compare “AIR BAG” warning lamp operation to
the chart below.
RS-58
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Trouble Diagnoses without CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
NOTE:
If switching Diagnosis mode to User mode is required while malfunction is being detected, by turning ignition switch as follows:
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) After “AIR BAG” warning lamp lights for 7 seconds, turn ignition switch “OFF” within 1 second.
3) Wait more than 3 seconds.
4) Repeat steps 1 to 3 twice (Perform 3 times in total).
5) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
SRS is now in User mode.
“AIR BAG” warning lamp operation — User mode —
SRS condition
Reference item
No malfunction is
detected.
No further action is necessary.
—
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MRS095A
The system is malfunction- Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROing and needs to be
CEDURE 6 (RS-52).
repaired as indicated.
MT
AT
MRS096A
Air bag is deployed.
Seat belt pre-tensioner is
deployed.
Air bag fuse, diagnosis
sensor unit or harness is
malfunctioning and needs
MRS097A to be repaired.
Go to COLLISION DIAGNOSIS (RS-63).
Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 9 (RS-60).
One of the following has
Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROoccurred and needs to be CEDURE 10 (RS-62).
repaired.
I Meter fuse is blown.
I “AIR BAG” warning
lamp circuit has open or
short.
MRS098A I Diagnosis sensor unit is
malfunctioning.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 8 (CONTINUED FROM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6)
NARS0046S03
Inspecting SRS malfunctioning record
1
CONSIDER POSSIBILITY OF NOT ERASING SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT AFTER REPAIRING
BT
Is it the first time for maintenance of SRS?
Yes or No
Yes
No
©
©
Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5 (RS-48). (Further inspection cannot be performed
without CONSULT-II.)
Diagnosis results (previously stored in the memory) might not be erased after repair. Go
to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7, step 5 (RS-58).
HA
SC
EL
IDX
RS-59
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Trouble Diagnoses: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off
Trouble Diagnoses: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp
Does Not Turn Off
=NARS0047
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 9
1
NARS0047S01
SEE THE DEPLOYMENT OF AIR BAG MODULE
Is air bag module deployed?
Yes or No
Yes
©
Refer to COLLISION DIAGNOSIS (RS-63).
No
©
GO TO 2.
2
CHECK AIR BAG FUSE
Is SRS “Air Bag” fuse OK?
SRS577
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
GO TO 3.
3
CHECK AIR BAG FUSE AGAIN
Replace “AIR BAG” fuse and turn ignition switch ON.
Is “AIR BAG” fuse blown again?
Yes
©
Repair main harness and/or replace air bag harness.
No
©
INSPECTION END
RS-60
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Trouble Diagnoses: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Connect CONSULT-II and touch “START”.
I Is “AIR BAG” displayed on CONSULT-II?
MA
EM
LC
EC
SRS771
Yes or No
Yes
©
GO TO 5.
No
©
Visually check the wiring harness connection of diagnosis sensor unit. If the harness
connection check result is OK, replace diagnosis sensor unit.
5
CHECK HARNESS CONNECTION
FE
CL
MT
AT
Is harness connection between warning lamp and diagnosis sensor unit OK?
OK or NG
OK
©
Replace diagnosis sensor unit.
NG
©
Connect “AIR BAG” warning lamp and diagnosis sensor unit connector properly. If “AIR
BAG” warning lamp still does not go off, replace harness.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
RS-61
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Trouble Diagnoses: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn On
Trouble Diagnoses: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp
Does Not Turn On
=NARS0048
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 10
1
NARS0048S01
CHECK “METER” FUSE
Is meter fuse OK?
SRS852
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
2
CHECK “METER” FUSE AGAIN
Replace meter fuse and turn ignition switch ON.
Is meter fuse blown again?
Yes
©
Repair main harness.
No
©
INSPECTION END
3
CHECK HARNESS CONNECTION BETWEEN DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT AND “AIR BAG” WARNING
LAMP
Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit connector and turn ignition switch “ON”.
I Does “AIR BAG” warning lamp turn on?
Yes or No
Yes
©
Replace diagnosis sensor unit.
No
©
Check the ground circuit of “AIR BAG” warning lamp.
RS-62
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Collision Diagnosis
Collision Diagnosis
FOR FRONTAL COLLISION
=NARS0049
NARS0049S01
To repair the SRS, perform the following steps.
When SRS (except the side air bag) is activated in a collision:
1) Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
2) Remove the air bag modules (except the side air bag module) and seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies.
3) Check the SRS components using the table shown below:
I Replace any SRS components showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks and deformation).
4) Install new air bag modules (except the side air bag module) and seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies.
5) Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II or “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to “SRS Operation Check”
for details (RS-41). Ensure entire SRS operation properly.
When SRS is not activated in a collision:
1) Check the SRS components using the table shown below:
I Replace any SRS components showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks and deformation).
2) Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II or “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to “SRS Operation Check”
for details (RS-41). Ensure entire SRS operation properly.
SRS Inspection (For frontal collision)
Part
Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly
REPLACE
Install seat belt pretensioner with new
bolts.
SRS is NOT activated
1. Remove air bag module. Check harness cover and connectors for damage,
terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
2.
a. Install driver air bag module into the steering wheel to check fit and alignment
with the wheel.
b. Install front passenger air bag module into the instrument panel to check fit
with the instrument panel.
3. No damage found, reinstall with new bolts.
4. If damaged—REPLACE. Install air bag modules with new bolts. Air bag must
be deployed before disposal.
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
1. Remove seat belt pre-tensioners.
Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities,
and harness for binding.
2. Check belts for damage and anchors for loose mounting.
3. Check retractor for smooth operation.
4. If no damage is found, reinstall seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
5. If damaged—REPLACE. Install the seat belt pre-tensioners with new bolts
coated with bonding agent. Seat belt pre-tensioners must be deployed before
disposal.
AX
1.
2.
3.
4.
ST
Diagnosis sensor unit
REPLACE
Install with new bolts.
Steering wheel
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Visually check steering wheel for deformities.
Check harness (built into steering wheel) and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
Install air bag module to check fit or alignment with steering wheel.
Check steering wheel for excessive free play.
If no damage is found, reinstall with bolts.
If damaged—REPLACE.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Visually check spiral cable and combination switch for damage.
Check connectors and protective tape for damage.
Check steering wheel for noise, binding or heavy operation.
If no damage is found, reinstall with bolts.
If damaged—REPLACE.
Spiral cable
MA
NARS0049S0101
SRS is activated
Air bag module (driver REPLACE
and front passenger
Install with new bolts.
side)
GI
Check case for dents, cracks or deformities.
Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
If no damage is found, reinstall with new bolts and ground bolt.
If damaged—REPLACE. Install diagnosis sensor unit with new bolts and
ground bolt coated with bonding agent.
SU
BR
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
RS-63
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Collision Diagnosis (Cont’d)
Part
SRS is activated
Harness and Connec- 1.
tors
2.
3.
4.
Instrument panel
SRS is NOT activated
Check connectors for poor connection, damage, and terminals for deformities.
Check harness for binding, chafing, cuts, or deformities.
If no damage is found, reinstall the harness and connectors.
Damaged—REPLACE damaged section of harness. Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify any SRS
harness.
1. When passenger air bag inflates, check the following points for bending, deformities or cracks.
I Opening portion for passenger air bag
SRS366
I Passenger air bag module brackets
SRS367
I The portions securing the instrument panel
SRS876
2. If no damage is found, reinstall the instrument panel.
3. If damaged—REPLACE the instrument panel with bolts.
RS-64
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Collision Diagnosis (Cont’d)
FOR SIDE COLLISION
=NARS0049S02
To repair the SRS for a side collision, perform the following steps.
When the side air bag is activated in the side collision:
1) Replace the following component:
− All parts of front seatback (including front seatback frame) with side air bag module (on the side on which
side air bag is activated)
− Side curtain air bag module (on the side on which side curtain air bag is activated)
− Diagnosis sensor unit
− Side air bag (Satellite) sensor (on the side on which side air bag is activated)
2) Check the SRS components and the related parts using the table shown below.
I Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks,
deformation).
3) Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II or “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to “SRS Operation Check”
for details (RS-41). Ensure entire SRS operation properly.
When SRS is not activated in the side collision:
1) Check the SRS components and the related parts using the table shown below.
I Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks,
deformation).
2) Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II or “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to “SRS Operation Check”
for details (RS-41). Ensure entire SRS operation properly.
SRS Inspection (For side collision)
Part
(LH or RH) side curtain air bag module
Side air bag is activated
Replace the side curtain air bag module.
(Repair the center
pillar inner, etc. before
installing new one if
damaged.)
Front (LH or RH) side REPLACE all parts of
air bags module
front seatback with
deployed side air bag
module.
(LH or RH) side air
bag (Satellite) sensor
NARS0049S0201
REPLACE the satellite sensor on the collision side with new
nuts coated with
bonding agent.
(Repair the center
pillar inner, etc. before
installing new one if
damaged.)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
SRS is NOT activated
1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the center pillar on the collision side.
2. If damaged—Remove the side curtain air bag module.
3. Check for visible signs of damaged (tears etc.) of the side curtain air bag module.
4. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
5. If no damaged is found, reinstall the side curtain air bag module with new
bolts.
6. If damaged—REPLACE the side curtain air bag module with new bolts. Air bag
must be deployed before disposal.
1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the seatback
on the collision side.
2. If damaged—REPLACE the damaged seat parts with new bolts and remove
the front (LH or RH) side air bag module.
3. Check for visible signs of damaged (tears etc.) of the front (LH or RH) side air
bag module.
4. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
5. If no damaged is found, reinstall the front (LH or RH) side air bag module with
new torx nuts coated with bonding agent.
6. If damaged—REPLACE the front (LH or RH) side air bag module with new torx
nuts coated with bonding agent. Air bag must be deployed before disposal.
1. Remove the (LH or RH) side air bag (Satellite) sensor on the collision side.
Check harness connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness
for binding.
2. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the LH or RH
side air bag (Satellite) sensor.
3. Install the satellite sensor to check fit.
4. If no damage is found, reinstall the (LH or RH) side air bag (Satellite) sensor
with new nuts coated with bonding agent.
5. If damaged—REPLACE the (LH or RH) side air bag (Satellite) sensor with new
nuts coated with bonding agent.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
RS-65
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Collision Diagnosis (Cont’d)
Part
Side air bag is activated
SRS is NOT activated
Diagnosis sensor unit
REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit with
the new bolts.
1. Check case and bracket for dents, cracks or deformities.
2. Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
3. If no damage is found, reinstall the diagnosis sensor unit with new special bolts
and ground bolt.
4. If damaged—REPLACE. Install the diagnosis sensor unit with new special
bolts and ground bolt.
Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly
1. Check if the seat belt can be extended smoothly.
If the seat belt cannot be extended smoothly.
– Check for deformities of the center pillar inner.
– If the center pillar inner has no damage, REPLACE the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
2. Remove the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly on the collision side. Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
3. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
4. If no damage is found, reinstall the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
5. If damaged—REPLACE the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly with new bolts coated with bonding
agent. The seat belt pre-tensioner assembly must be deployed before disposal.
Seat with side air bag REPLACE all parts of 1. Visually check the seat on the collision side.
front seatback (includ- 2. Remove the seat on the collision side and check the following for damage and
deformities.
ing front seatback
I Harness, connectors and terminals
frame)
I Frame and recliner (for front and rear seat), and also adjuster and slides (for
front seat)
3. If no damage is found, reinstall the seat.
4. If damaged—REPLACE the damaged seat parts with new bolts.
Center pillar inner
1. Check the center pillar inner on the collision side for damage (dents, cracks, deformation).
2. If damaged—REPAIR the center pillar inner.
Trim
1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the interior trim on the collision side.
2. If damaged—REPLACE the damaged trim parts.
RS-66
STARTING & CHARGING SYSTEM
SECTION
SC
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS ...............................................................2
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR
BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″...............2
Precautions for SRS ″AIR BAG″ and ″SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER″ Service...............................2
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis.....................2
PREPARATION ...............................................................3
Special Service Tool ....................................................3
BATTERY.........................................................................4
How to Handle Battery ................................................4
METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE ......4
CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL ............................4
SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK ......................................5
CHARGING THE BATTERY ........................................6
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging
System Tester ..............................................................7
DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART ..........................9
STARTING SYSTEM .....................................................10
System Description....................................................10
WITH M/T................................................................10
WITH A/T ................................................................10
Wiring Diagram - START -/With M/T .........................11
Wiring Diagram - START -/With A/T..........................12
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging
System Tester ............................................................13
DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART ........................14
WORK FLOW ..........................................................15
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 ..................................16
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 ..................................18
MINIMUM SPECIFICATION OF CRANKING
VOLTAGE REFERENCING COOLANT
TEMPERATURE ......................................................19
Construction...............................................................19
Removal and Installation ...........................................19
Pinion/Clutch Check ..................................................20
CHARGING SYSTEM ....................................................21
System Description....................................................21
Wiring Diagram - CHARGE -.....................................22
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging
System Tester ............................................................23
DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART ........................25
WORK FLOW ..........................................................26
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 ..................................27
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 ..................................28
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 ..................................29
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR ....................................30
Construction...............................................................30
Removal and Installation ...........................................30
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .........31
Battery........................................................................31
Starter ........................................................................31
Alternator ...................................................................31
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
PRECAUTIONS
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR
BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
NASC0001
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL R50 is as follows:
I For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
I For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of side air bag module (located in the outer side of front seat),
side curtain air bag module (locating in the headliner side of front and rear seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring harness, warning lamp (one
of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
WARNING:
I To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
I Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.
I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connector (and by yellow harness protector or yellow insulation tape before the harness connectors).
Precautions for SRS “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” Service
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NASC0025
Do not use electrical test equipment to check SRS circuits unless instructed to in this Service Manual.
Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch “OFF”, disconnect battery ground cable and wait at least 3
minutes.
For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag and seat belt
pre-tensioner to deploy. Therefore, do not work on any SRS connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes
have passed.
Diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with their arrow marks “g” pointing towards the front of
the vehicle for proper operation. Also check diagnosis sensor unit for cracks, deformities or rust before
installation and replace as required.
The spiral cable must be aligned with the neutral position since its rotations are limited. Do not attempt to
turn steering wheel or column after removal of steering gear.
Handle air bag module carefully. Always place driver and passenger air bag modules with the pad side
facing upward and side air bag module standing with the stud bolt side setting bottom.
Conduct self-diagnosis to check entire SRS for proper function after replacing any components.
After air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly should be replaced if damaged.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
I GI-11, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”
I EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” for power distribution circuit
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
I GI-35, “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”
I GI-24, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”
SC-2
NASC0002
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
Special Service Tool
Tool number
Tool name
Description
NASC0017
GI
MA
J-44373 Model 620
Battery/Starting/Charging
system tester
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEL403X
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
SC-3
BATTERY
How to Handle Battery
How to Handle Battery
NASC0003
CAUTION:
I If it becomes necessary to start the engine with a booster
battery and jumper cables, use a 12-volt booster battery.
I After connecting battery cables, ensure that they are
tightly clamped to battery terminals for good contact.
I Never add distilled water through the hole used to check
specific gravity.
METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE
NASC0003S01
The following precautions must be taken to prevent over-discharging a battery.
I The battery surface (particularly its top) should always be kept
clean and dry.
I The terminal connections should be clean and tight.
I At every routine maintenance, check the electrolyte level.
This also applies to batteries designated as “low maintenance”
and “maintenance-free”.
MEL040F
I
When the vehicle is not going to be used over a long period of
time, disconnect the negative battery terminal. (If the vehicle
has an extended storage switch, turn it off.)
I
Check the charge condition of the battery.
Periodically check the specific gravity of the electrolyte. Keep
a close check on charge condition to prevent over-discharge.
MEL041F
MEL042F
CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL
NASC0003S02
WARNING:
Do not allow battery fluid to come in contact with skin, eyes,
fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery, do not
touch or rub your eyes until you have thoroughly washed your
hands. If acid contacts eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
SC-4
BATTERY
How to Handle Battery (Cont’d)
I
I
Remove the cell plug using a suitable tool.
Add distilled water up to the MAX level.
GI
MA
EM
LC
MEL043F
EC
Sulphation
SEL709EA
NASC0003S0201
A battery will be completely discharged if it is left unattended
for a long time and the specific gravity will become less than
1.100. This may result in sulphation on the cell plates.
To determine if a battery has been “sulphated”, note its voltage and current when charging it. As shown in the figure, less
current and higher voltage are observed in the initial stage of
charging sulphated batteries.
A sulphated battery may sometimes be brought back into service by means of a long, slow charge, 12 hours or more, followed by a battery capacity test.
CL
MT
AT
SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK
1.
FE
NASC0003S03
Read hydrometer and thermometer indications at eye level.
TF
PD
AX
SU
MEL042FA
2.
Use the chart below to correct your hydrometer reading
according to electrolyte temperature.
Hydrometer Temperature Correction
NASC0003S0301
Battery electrolyte temperature °C (°F)
Add to specific gravity reading
71 (160)
0.032
66 (150)
0.028
60 (140)
0.024
54 (130)
0.020
49 (120)
0.016
43 (110)
0.012
38 (100)
0.008
32 (90)
0.004
27 (80)
0
21 (70)
−0.004
16 (60)
−0.008
10 (50)
−0.012
SC-5
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
BATTERY
How to Handle Battery (Cont’d)
Battery electrolyte temperature °C (°F)
Add to specific gravity reading
4 (40)
−0.016
−1 (30)
−0.020
−7 (20)
−0.024
−12 (10)
−0.028
−18 (0)
−0.032
Corrected specific gravity
Approximate charge condition
1.260 - 1.280
Fully charged
1.230 - 1.250
3/4 charged
1.200 - 1.220
1/2 charged
1.170 - 1.190
1/4 charged
1.140 - 1.160
Almost discharged
1.110 - 1.130
Completely discharged
CHARGING THE BATTERY
NASC0003S04
CAUTION:
I Do not “quick charge” a fully discharged battery.
I Keep the battery away from open flame while it is being
charged.
I When connecting the charger, connect the leads first, then
turn on the charger. Do not turn on the charger first, as
this may cause a spark.
I If battery electrolyte temperature rises above 60°C (140°F),
stop charging. Always charge battery at a temperature
below 60°C (140°F).
Charging Rates
NASC0003S0401
Amps
Time
50
1 hour
25
2 hours
10
5 hours
5
10 hours
Do not charge at more than 50 ampere rate.
NOTE:
The ammeter reading on your battery charger will automatically
decrease as the battery charges. This indicates that the voltage of
the battery is increasing normally as the state of charge improves.
The charging amps indicated above refer to initial charge rate.
I If, after charging, the specific gravity of any two cells varies
more than .050, the battery should be replaced.
SC-6
BATTERY
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester
Trouble Diagnoses with
Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester
GI
NASC0018
CAUTION:
When working with batteries, always wear appropriate eye
protection.
NOTE:
I To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery,
starter and alternator test segments must be done as a set
from start to finish.
I If battery surface charge is detected while testing, the tester
will prompt you to turn on the headlamps to remove the surface charge.
I If necessary, the tester will prompt you to determine if the battery temperature is above or below 0°C (32°F). Choose the
appropriate selection by pressing the up or down arrow button,
then press “ENTER” to make the selection.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
1.
SEL404X
Turn off all loads on the vehicle electrical system. Clean or
repair as necessary.
2. Visually inspect the battery, battery terminals and cable ends
with ignition switch in “OFF” position.
NOTE:
The contact surface between the battery terminals, cable ends and
tester leads must be clean for a valid test. A poor connection will
prevent testing and a “CHECK CONNECTION” message will
appear during the test procedures. If this occurs, clean the battery
post and terminals, reconnect them and restart the test.
3. Connect the red tester lead clamp to the positive battery
terminal, and the black to the negative terminal.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
4.
The tester will turn on automatically. Using the arrow keys,
select “IN VEHICLE” on the tester and then press the “ENTER”
key.
HA
EL
IDX
SEL405X
SC-7
BATTERY
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester (Cont’d)
5.
SEL406X
Locate the battery type and rating stamped or written on the
top case of the battery to be tested.
NOTE:
The battery type and rating will have either of the following.
CCA: Cold Cranking Amps (490 CCA, 550 CCA, etc.)
JIS: Japanese Industrial Standard.
Battery is stamped with a number such as:
80D26L: 80 (rank of output), D (physical size-depth), 26 (width
in cm). The last character L (post configuration) is not input into
the tester.
The tester requires the rating for the battery be entered exactly
as it is written or stamped on the battery. Do not attempt a CCA
conversion for JIS stamped batteries. JIS must be input
directly.
6. Using the arrow and “ENTER” keys alternately, select the battery type and rating.
NOTE:
The tester lists five choices; CCA, JIS, IEC, DIN, and EN. Only use
CCA or JIS.
7.
Press “ENTER” to begin the test. Diagnosis results are displayed on the tester. Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM
CHART” on the next page.
SEL407X
8.
SEL576X
Press “ENTER”, then test output code is displayed. Record the
test output code on the repair order.
9. Toggle back to the “DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN” for test results.
NOTE:
I If necessary, the tester will ask the user to determine if the
battery has just been charged. Choose the appropriate selection by pressing the up or down arrow button and then press
the “ENTER” button to make the selection.
I When testing a battery installed in a vehicle that has recently
been driven, select “BEFORE CHANGE”.
I If the battery has just been slow charged due to a “CHARGE
& RETEST” decision by the tester, and the tester asks the user
“BEFORE CHARGE/AFTER CHARGE”, select “AFTER
CHARGE”.
SC-8
BATTERY
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART
Diagnostic item
NASC0018S01
GI
Service procedure
GOOD BATTERY
Battery is OK, go to “Trouble Diagnoses”, “STARTING SYSTEM”. Refer to SC-13.
MA
REPLACE BATTERY
Replace battery.
Before replacing battery, clean the battery cable clamps and battery posts. Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. If second test result is
“Replace Battery”, then do so. Perform battery test again to confirm repair.
EM
BAD CELL-REPLACE
Replace the battery. Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system
tester to confirm repair.
GOOD-RECHARGE
Perform the slow battery charging procedure. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12 hours.)
Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester.
CHARGE & RETEST
Perform the slow battery charging. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12 hours.)
Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester to confirm repair.
NOTE:
If the tester asks the user “BEFORE CHARGE/AFTER CHARGE”, select “AFTER
CHARGE”.
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
SC-9
STARTING SYSTEM
System Description
System Description
WITH M/T
NASC0004
NASC0004S02
Power is supplied at all times
I to ignition switch terminal 1
I through 40A fusible link (letter e, located in the fuse and fusible link box).
With the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied
I through terminal 5 of the ignition switch
I to clutch interlock relay terminal 3.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)] or 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block
(J/B)]
I to clutch interlock relay terminal 1.
If clutch pedal is depressed, ground is supplied
I to clutch interlock relay terminal 2
I through clutch interlock switch
I from body grounds M111, M147, M66, M4 and M157.
The clutch interlock relay is energized and power is supplied
I from terminal 5 of the clutch interlock relay
I to terminal 2 of the starter motor windings.
The starter motor plunger closes and provides a closed circuit between the battery and the starter motor. The
starter motor is grounded to the cylinder block. With power and ground supplied, cranking occurs and the
engine starts.
WITH A/T
NASC0004S01
Power is supplied at all times
I to ignition switch terminal 1
I through 40A fusible link (letter e, located in the fuse and fusible link box).
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
I through 10A fuse [No. 18, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to park/neutral position relay terminal 1.
Also, with the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied
I from ignition switch terminal 5
I to park/neutral position relay terminal 3.
With the selector lever in the P or N position, ground is supplied
I to park/neutral position relay terminal 2 through the park/neutral position switch
I from body grounds B55 and B75.
Then park/neutral position relay is energized and power is supplied
I from park/neutral position relay terminal 5
I to terminal 2 of the starter motor windings.
The starter motor plunger closes and provides a closed circuit between the battery and starter motor. The
starter motor is grounded to the engine block. With power and ground supplied, cranking occurs and the engine
starts.
SC-10
STARTING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — START —/With M/T
Wiring Diagram — START —/With M/T
NASC0005
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
MEL409R
SC-11
IDX
STARTING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — START —/With A/T
Wiring Diagram — START —/With A/T
NASC0021
MEL124Q
SC-12
STARTING SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester
Trouble Diagnoses with
Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester
GI
NASC0019
NOTE:
To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter
and alternator test segments must be done as a set from start to
finish.
MA
EM
LC
1.
2.
3.
Turn off all loads on the vehicle electrical system.
Perform battery test with Battery/Starting/Charging system
tester. Refer to SC-7.
Press “ENTER” to begin the starting system test.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEL408X
4.
Start the engine.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEL409X
5.
Diagnosis result is displayed on the tester. Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART” on the next page.
NOTE:
I If the starter performs normally but the engine does not start,
perform engine diagnosis.
I For intermittent “NO CRANK” or “NO STARTER OPERATION”
incidents, go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL410X
HA
EL
IDX
SC-13
STARTING SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART
Diagnostic item
NASC0019S01
Service procedure
CRANKING VOLTAGE NORMAL
Go to “WORK FLOW”, SC-15.
CRANKING VOLTAGE LOW
Go to “WORK FLOW”, SC-15.
CHARGE BATTERY
Perform the slow battery charging procedure. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12 hours.)
Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. Refer to SC-7.
REPLACE BATTERY
Before replacing battery, clean the battery cable clamps and battery posts. Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. Refer to SC-7. If second test
result is “REPLACE BATTERY”, then do so. Perform battery test again to confirm repair.
SC-14
STARTING SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester (Cont’d)
WORK FLOW
NASC0019S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL411XA
*1
*2
SC-7
SC-19
*3
SC-16
*4
SC-18
EL
IDX
SC-15
STARTING SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
Check “B” Terminal Circuit
1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NASC0019S03
NASC0019S0301
CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR STARTER MOTOR “B” TERMINAL
Remove the fuel pump fuse.
Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel pressure is released.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Check that the starter motor B terminal E108 terminal 1 (B/R) connection is clean and tight.
Check voltage between starter motor B terminal E108 terminal 1 (B/R) and ground using a digital circuit tester.
SEL961XA
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Check harness between the battery and the starter motor for open circuit.
2
CHECK BATTERY CABLE CONNECTION QUALITY (VOLTAGE DROP TEST)
1. Check voltage between starter motor B terminal E108 terminal 1 (B/R) and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit tester.
SEL962XA
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Check harness between the battery and the starter motor for poor continuity.
SC-16
STARTING SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK STARTER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT (VOLTAGE DROP TEST)
1. Check voltage between starter motor case and battery negative terminal using a digital circuit tester.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL666YB
OK or NG
OK
©
Starter motor “B” terminal circuit is OK. Further inspection necessary. Refer to “WORK
FLOW”, SC-15.
NG
©
Check the starter motor case and ground for poor continuity.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
SC-17
STARTING SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2
Check “S” Terminal Circuit
1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
=NASC0019S04
NASC0019S0401
CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR STARTER MOTOR “S” TERMINAL
Remove the fuel pump fuse.
Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel pressure is released.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect starter motor terminal 2 connector.
Check voltage between starter motor connector E147 terminal 2 (B/P) and ground using a digital circuit tester.
SEL948X
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Check the following.
I 40A fusible link (letter e, located in fuse and fusible link box)
I Clutch interlock relay or park/neutral position relay
I Harness for open or short
2
CHECK “S” TERMINAL CONNECTION QUALITY (VOLTAGE DROP TEST)
1. Connect starter motor terminal 2 connector.
2. Check voltage between starter motor connector E147 terminal 2 (B/P) and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit tester.
SEL949X
OK or NG
OK
©
Starter motor “S” terminal circuit is OK. Further inspection necessary. Refer to “WORK
FLOW”, SC-15.
NG
©
Check harness between the battery and the starter motor “S” terminal for poor continuity.
SC-18
STARTING SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester (Cont’d)
MINIMUM SPECIFICATION OF CRANKING VOLTAGE
GI
REFERENCING COOLANT TEMPERATURE
=NASC0019S05
Engine coolant temperature
Voltage V
−30°C to −20°C (−22°F to −4°F)
8.6
−19°C to −10°C (−2°F to 14°F)
9.1
−9°C to 0°C (16°F to 32°F)
9.5
More than 1°C (More than 34°F)
9.9
Construction
MA
EM
LC
EC
NASC0006
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
MEL943OA
ST
RS
BT
Removal and Installation
NASC0007
HA
EL
IDX
SEL936Y
SC-19
STARTING SYSTEM
Pinion/Clutch Check
Pinion/Clutch Check
1.
I
2.
I
3.
I
NASC0008
Inspect pinion teeth.
Replace pinion if teeth are worn or damaged. (Also check
condition of ring gear teeth.)
Inspect reduction gear teeth.
Replace reduction gear if teeth are worn or damaged. (Also
check condition of armature shaft gear teeth.)
Check to see if pinion locks in one direction and rotates
smoothly in the opposite direction.
If it locks or rotates in both directions, or unusual resistance is
evident, replace.
SC-20
CHARGING SYSTEM
System Description
System Description
NASC0009
The alternator provides DC voltage to operate the vehicle’s electrical system and to keep the battery charged.
The voltage output is controlled by the IC regulator.
Power is supplied at all times to alternator terminal S through:
I 120A fusible link (letter a, located in the fuse and fusible link box), and
I 7.5A fuse (No. 65, located in the fuse and fusible link box).
Terminal B supplies power to charge the battery and operate the vehicle’s electrical system. Output voltage
is controlled by the IC regulator at terminal S detecting the input voltage. The charging circuit is protected by
the 120A fusible link.
Terminal E of the alternator supplies ground through body ground E101.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
I through 10A fuse [No. 8, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to combination meter terminal 66 for the charge warning lamp.
Ground is supplied to combination meter terminal 68 through alternator terminal 1 (L). With power and ground
supplied, the charge warning lamp will illuminate. When the alternator is providing sufficient voltage with the
engine running, the ground is opened and the charge warning lamp will go off.
If the charge warning lamp illuminates with the engine running, a malfunction is indicated.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
SC-21
CHARGING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — CHARGE —
Wiring Diagram — CHARGE —
NASC0010
MEL125Q
SC-22
CHARGING SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester
Trouble Diagnoses with
Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester
GI
NASC0020
NOTE:
To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter
and alternator test segments must be done as a set from start to
finish.
MA
EM
LC
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn off all loads on the vehicle electrical system.
Perform battery and starting system test with Battery/Starting/
Charging system tester.
Press “ENTER” to begin the charging system test.
Start engine.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEL417X
5.
SEL418X
Press “ENTER” until “LOADS OFF REV ENGINE 5 SEC” is
displayed.
6. Raise and hold the engine speed at 1,500 to 2,000 rpm for
about 5 seconds, then return to the engine to idle.
Once the increase in engine rpm is detected, press “ENTER”
to continue.
NOTE:
I If after 30 seconds an increase in engine idle speed is not
detected, “RPM NOT DETECTED” will display.
I Some engines may have a higher idle initially after starting,
particularly when the engine is cold. The tester may detect this
without any other action being taken. If this occurs, continue on
with the testing process. The final results will not be affected.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
7.
The tester now checks the engine at idle and performs the
DIODE/RIPPLE check.
8. When complete, the tester will prompt you to turn on the following electrical loads.
I Heater fun set to highest. Do not run the A/C or windshield
defroster.
I Headlamp high beam
I Rear window defogger
NOTE:
Do not run the windshield wipers or any other cyclical loads.
SEL419X
SC-23
HA
EL
IDX
CHARGING SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester (Cont’d)
9.
Press “ENTER” to continue.
SEL420X
10. Raise and hold the engine speed at 1,500 to 2,000 rpm for
about 5 seconds, then return the engine to idle. Once the
increase in engine rpm is detected, press “ENTER” to continue.
NOTE:
If after 30 seconds an increase in engine idle speed is not detected,
“RPM NOT DETECTED” will be displayed. Press “ENTER” to
restart the test.
SEL421X
11. Diagnostic result is displayed on the tester. Refer to the following “DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART” on the next page.
SEL422X
12. Press “ENTER” then test output code is displayed. Record the
test output code on the repair order.
13. Toggle back to the “DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN” for test results.
SEL577X
SC-24
CHARGING SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART
Diagnostic item
NASC0020S01
GI
Service procedure
CHARGING SYSTEM NORMAL
Charging system is normal and will also show DIODE RIPPLE test result.
NO CHARGING VOLTAGE
Go to “WORK FLOW”, SC-26.
LOW CHARGING VOLTAGE
Go to “WORK FLOW”, SC-26.
HIGH CHARGING VOLTAGE
Go to “WORK FLOW”, SC-26.
DIODE RIPPLE NORMAL
Diode ripple is OK and will also show CHARGING VOLTAGE test result.
EXCESS RIPPLE DETECTED
Replace the alternator. Perform “DIODE RIPPLE” test again using Battery/Starting/
Charging system tester to confirm repair.
DIODE RIPPLE NOT DETECTED
Go to “WORK FLOW”, SC-26.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
SC-25
CHARGING SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester (Cont’d)
WORK FLOW
NASC0020S02
SEL423X
SC-26
CHARGING SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
Check “L” Terminal Circuit
1
NASC0020S03
GI
NASC0020S0301
MA
CHECK “L” TERMINAL CONNECTION
Check to see if “L” terminal is clean and tight.
OK or NG
EM
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Repair “L” terminal connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/
Charging system test.
2
LC
EC
CHECK “L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect E106 connector from alternator.
2. Apply ground to alternator connector E106 terminal 1 (Y/B) with the ignition switch in the ON position.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEL424XA
TF
OK or NG
OK
©
Replace the alternator. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging
system test.
NG
©
Check the following.
I 10A fuse [No. 8, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I CHARGE lamp
I Harness for open or short between combination meter and fuse
I Harness for open or short between combination meter and alternator
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
SC-27
CHARGING SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2
Check “B” Terminal Circuit
1
=NASC0020S04
NASC0020S0401
CHECK “B” TERMINAL CONNECTION
Check to see if “B” terminal is clean and tight.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 2. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test.
NG
©
Repair “B” terminal connection.
2
CHECK ALTERNATOR “B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT
Check voltage between alternator B terminal E107 (B/R) and ground using a digital circuit tester.
SEL967XA
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Check the following.
I 120A fusible link (letter a, located in fuse and fusible link box)
I Harness for open or short between alternator and fusible link
3
CHECK “B” TERMINAL CONNECTION QUALITY (VOLTAGE DROP TEST)
Check voltage between alternator B terminal E107 (B/R) and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit tester.
SEL968XA
OK or NG
OK
©
Replace the alternator. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging
system test.
NG
©
Check harness between the battery and the alternator for poor continuity.
SC-28
CHARGING SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3
Check “S” Terminal Circuit
1
=NASC0020S05
GI
NASC0020S0501
MA
CHECK “S” TERMINAL CONNECTION
Check to see if “S” terminal is clean and tight.
OK or NG
EM
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Repair “S” terminal connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/
Charging system test.
2
LC
EC
CHECK ALTERNATOR “S” TERMINAL CIRCUIT
Check voltage between alternator connector E106 terminal 2 (L/Y) and ground using a digital circuit tester.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEL427XA
OK or NG
TF
PD
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Check the following.
I 7.5A fuse (No. 65, located in fuse and fusible link box)
I Harness for open or short between alternator and fuse
AX
3
CHECK “S” TERMINAL CONNECTION QUALITY (VOLTAGE DROP TEST)
Check voltage between alternator connector E106 terminal 2 (L/Y) and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit
tester.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL428XA
OK or NG
OK
©
Replace the alternator. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging
system test.
NG
©
Check harness between the battery and the alternator for poor continuity.
HA
EL
IDX
SC-29
CHARGING SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester (Cont’d)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
=NASC0020S06
The IC regulator warning function activates to illuminate
“CHARGE” warning lamp, if any of the following symptoms occur
while alternator is operating:
I Excessive voltage is produced.
I No voltage is produced.
Construction
NASC0012
SEL667Y
Removal and Installation
MEL952LB
SC-30
NASC0013
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Battery
Battery
Type
NASC0022
80D23R
Capacity
MA
12V-52AH
Cold cranking current
(For reference value)
582A
Starter
EM
NASC0023
M0T50571
Type
MITSUBISHI make
System voltage
12V
Terminal voltage
LC
EC
Reduction gear type
No-load
GI
FE
11.0V
Current
Less than 90A
Revolution
CL
More than 2,700 rpm
Minimum diameter of commutator
28.8 mm (1.134 in)
Minimum length of brush
7.0 mm (0.276 in)
Brush spring tension
MT
15.0 - 20.4 N (1.53 - 2.08 kg, 3.37 - 4.59 lb)
Clearance between bearing metal and armature shaft
AT
Less than 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
Movement “” in height of pinion assembly
0.5 - 2.0 mm (0.020 - 0.079 in)
Alternator
TF
NASC0024
A3TB4291
PD
Type
MITSUBISHI make
Nominal rating
12V-110A
Ground polarity
Negative
Minimum revolution under no-load (When 13.5V is applied)
Less than 1,300 rpm
More than 35A/1,300 rpm
More than 91A/2,500 rpm
More than 110A/5,000 rpm
Hot output current (When 13.5V is applied)
Regulated output voltage
14.1 - 14.7V
Minimum length of brush
More than 5.00 mm (0.197 in)
Brush spring pressure
AX
SU
BR
ST
4.8 - 6.0 N (490 - 610 g, 17.28 - 21.51 oz)
Slip ring minimum outer diameter
More than 22.1 mm (0.870 in)
Rotor (Field coil) resistance
1.7 - 2.1Ω
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
SC-31
NOTES
PROPELLER SHAFT &
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
SECTION
PD
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CONTENTS
PROPELLER SHAFT ......................................................3
Preparation ..................................................................3
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS ........................................3
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Troubleshooting ...........................................................4
NVH TROUBLESHOOTING CHART ............................4
Components.................................................................5
FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT .....................................5
REAR PROPELLER SHAFT .......................................6
On-vehicle Service.......................................................8
PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION ...............................8
APPEARANCE CHECKING ........................................8
Removal and Installation .............................................8
Inspection.....................................................................9
Disassembly.................................................................9
CENTER BEARING - 2WD - .......................................9
JOURNAL (71H AND 80B)........................................10
Assembly ...................................................................11
CENTER BEARING - 2WD - .....................................11
JOURNAL (71H AND 80B)........................................11
Service Data and Specifications (SDS).....................12
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................12
SERVICE DATA .......................................................13
SNAP RING (80B)....................................................13
SNAP RING (71H) ...................................................13
SNAP RING (1310) ..................................................13
R200A
FRONT FINAL DRIVE ...................................................14
Preparation ................................................................14
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS ......................................14
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Troubleshooting .........................................................16
On-vehicle Service.....................................................16
FRONT OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT...........................16
REAR COVER GASKET REPLACEMENT..................17
Components...............................................................18
Removal and Installation ...........................................19
REMOVAL ...............................................................19
INSTALLATION........................................................19
CL
Disassembly...............................................................19
PRE-INSPECTION ...................................................19
FINAL DRIVE HOUSING ..........................................20
DIFFERENTIAL CASE ..............................................22
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE SHAFT ...................................23
Inspection...................................................................24
RING GEAR AND DRIVE PINION .............................24
DIFFERENTIAL CASE ASSEMBLY ...........................24
BEARING ................................................................24
Adjustment .................................................................25
SIDE BEARING PRELOAD .......................................25
PINION GEAR HEIGHT AND PINION BEARING
PRELOAD ...............................................................26
TOOTH CONTACT ...................................................30
Assembly ...................................................................31
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE SHAFT ...................................31
DIFFERENTIAL CASE ..............................................32
FINAL DRIVE HOUSING ..........................................33
Service Data and Specifications (SDS).....................37
R200A.....................................................................37
H233B
REAR FINAL DRIVE .....................................................39
Preparation ................................................................39
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS ......................................39
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Troubleshooting .........................................................41
On-vehicle Service.....................................................41
FRONT OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT...........................41
Components...............................................................43
Removal and Installation ...........................................44
REMOVAL ...............................................................44
INSTALLATION........................................................44
Disassembly...............................................................44
PRE-INSPECTION ...................................................44
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER ........................................45
DIFFERENTIAL CASE ..............................................47
Inspection...................................................................48
RING GEAR AND DRIVE PINION .............................48
DIFFERENTIAL CASE ASSEMBLY ...........................48
MT
AT
TF
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
CONTENTS
BEARING ................................................................48
Limited Slip Differential..............................................48
PREPARATION FOR DISASSEMBLY ........................48
DISASSEMBLY ........................................................49
INSPECTION ...........................................................50
ADJUSTMENT .........................................................51
ASSEMBLY .............................................................52
Adjustment .................................................................54
PINION GEAR HEIGHT ............................................54
PD-2
(Cont’d)
TOOTH CONTACT ...................................................57
Assembly ...................................................................58
DIFFERENTIAL CASE ..............................................58
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER ........................................59
Service Data and Specifications (SDS).....................62
H233B.....................................................................62
PROPELLER SHAFT
Preparation
Preparation
GI
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
NAPD0001
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
MA
Description
EM
KV38108300
(J44195)
Companion flange
wrench
Removing and installing propeller shaft lock nut,
and drive pinion lock nut
LC
EC
NT771
ST3090S000
(
—
)
Drive pinion rear inner
race puller set
1 ST30031000
(J22912-01)
Puller
2 ST30901000
(J26010-01)
Base
Removing and installing drive pinion rear inner
cone
a: 79 mm (3.11 in) dia.
b: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia.
c: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia.
FE
CL
MT
AT
NT527
TF
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
PD-3
PD-24, 48
Improper gear contact
PD-30, 57
Tooth surfaces worn
PD-24, 48
PD-19, 44
×
×
PROPELLER SHAFT
—
×
DIFFERENTIAL
—
×
DRIVE SHAFT
AX-3
×
AXLE
AX-3
×
SUSPENSION
SU-4
×
TIRES
SU-4
×
ROAD WHEEL
SU-4
×
BRAKES
BR-7
×
STEERING
ST-6
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
=NAPD0049
—
NAPD0049S01
×
Improper gear oil
×
—
×
×
Companion flange excessive runout
×
×
Incorrect backlash
PROPELLER SHAFT
×
Rough gear tooth
×
PD-8
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) Troubleshooting
×
Excessive runout
PD-8
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Troubleshooting
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Rotation imbalance
—
×
Excessive joint angle
—
×
Center bearing mounting (insulator) cracks, damage or deterioration
—
×
Excessive center bearing axial end play
PD-6
NVH TROUBLESHOOTING CHART
Noise
Shake
Vibration
Noise
Center bearing improper installation
—
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
Reference page
PROPELLER
SHAFT
DIFFERENTIAL
Possible cause and
SUSPECTED PARTS
Symptom
×: Applicable
PD-4
Uneven rotation torque
PROPELLER SHAFT
Components
Components
FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT
NAPD0002
GI
NAPD0002S01
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SPD517A
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
PD-5
PROPELLER SHAFT
Components (Cont’d)
REAR PROPELLER SHAFT
NAPD0002S02
SPD524A
SPD522A
PD-6
PROPELLER SHAFT
Components (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SPD469AA
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SPD468AA
IDX
PD-7
PROPELLER SHAFT
On-vehicle Service
On-vehicle Service
PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION
NAPD0003
If vibration is present at high speed, inspect propeller shaft runout
first.
1. Raise rear wheels.
2. Measure propeller shaft runout at several points by rotating
final drive companion flange with hands.
Runout limit: 0.6 mm (0.024 in)
Propeller shaft runout measuring points:
Unit: mm (in)
SPD356A
Distance
A
B
C
3S80B-2BJ
2WD M/T
162 (6.38)
240 (9.45)
240 (9.45)
3F80B-2BJ
2WD A/T
372.5
(14.67)
240 (9.45)
240 (9.45)
280 (11.02)
480.8
(18.93)
266.5
(10.49)
2S1310
Part-time 4WD 280 (11.02) 480 (18.90)
266.5
(10.49)
2S80B-T
Full-time 4WD
280 (11.02)
463.5
(18.25)
266.5
(10.49)
Part-time 4WD
179.5
(7.07)
—
—
Full-time 4WD
173.5
(6.83)
—
—
2F71H
SPD525A
3.
4.
5.
If runout exceeds specifications, disconnect propeller shaft at
final drive companion flange; then rotate companion flange
180 degrees and reconnect propeller shaft.
Check runout again. If runout still exceeds specifications,
replace propeller shaft assembly.
Perform road test.
APPEARANCE CHECKING
I
SPD102
I
Removal and Installation
I
NAPD0004
Inspect propeller shaft tube surface for dents or cracks.
If damaged, replace propeller shaft assembly.
If center bearing is noisy or damaged, replace center bearing.
NAPD0005
Put match marks on flanges and separate propeller shaft from
final drive.
SPD103
PD-8
PROPELLER SHAFT
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
I
Draw out propeller shaft from transmission and plug up rear
end of transmission rear extension housing.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SPD359
Inspection
I
EC
NAPD0006
Inspect propeller shaft runout. If runout exceeds specifications,
replace propeller shaft assembly.
Runout limit: 0.6 mm (0.024 in)
FE
CL
MT
SPD106
I
If the play exceeds specifications, replace propeller shaft
assembly.
Journal axial play:
0.02 mm (0.0008 in) or less
AT
TF
AX
SU
SPD874
Disassembly
CENTER BEARING — 2WD —
1.
NAPD0007
NAPD0007S01
Put match marks on flanges, and separate 2nd tube from 1st
tube.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SPD109
2.
Put match marks on the flange and shaft.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SPD110
PD-9
PROPELLER SHAFT
Disassembly (Cont’d)
3.
4.
Remove locking nut with Tool.
Tool number:
KV38108300 (J44195)
Remove companion flange with puller.
SPD475A
5.
Remove center bearing with Tool and press.
Tool number: ST30031000 (J22912-01)
SPD113
JOURNAL (71H AND 80B)
NAPD0007S02
1.
Put match marks on shaft and flange or yoke.
2.
Remove snap ring.
3.
Remove pushed out journal bearing by lightly tapping yoke
with a hammer, taking care not to damage journal and yoke
hole.
SPD128
SPD731
SPD732
PD-10
PROPELLER SHAFT
Disassembly (Cont’d)
4. Remove bearing at opposite side in above operation.
Put marks on disassembled parts so that they can be reinstalled in their original positions from which they were
removed.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SPD131
Assembly
CENTER BEARING — 2WD —
I
I
EC
NAPD0008
NAPD0008S01
When installing center bearing, position the “F” mark on center bearing toward front of vehicle.
Apply a coat of multi-purpose lithium grease containing
molybdenum disulfide to the end face of the center bearing and both sides of the washer.
FE
CL
MT
SPD114
I
I
AT
Stake the nut. Always use new one.
Align match marks when assembling tubes.
TF
AX
SU
SPD117
JOURNAL (71H AND 80B)
NAPD0008S02
1.
Assemble journal bearing. Apply recommended multi-purpose
grease on bearing inner surface.
When assembling, be careful that needle bearing does not fall
down.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SPD133
2.
Select snap ring that will provide specified play in axial direction of journal, and install them.
Refer to SDS, PD-13.
Select snap rings with a difference in thickness at both sides
within 0.06 mm (0.0024 in).
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SPD134
PD-11
PROPELLER SHAFT
Assembly (Cont’d)
3.
Adjust thrust clearance between bearing and snap ring to zero
by tapping yoke.
4.
Check to see that journal moves smoothly and check for axial
play.
Axial play: 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) or less
SPD732
SPD874
Service Data and Specifications (SDS)
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
2WD Model
NAPD0009
NAPD0009S01
Transmission
Propeller shaft model
M/T
A/T
3S80B-2BJ
3F80B-2BJ
Number of joints
3
Coupling method with transmission
Sleeve type
Type of journal bearings
Distance between yokes
Solid type (disassembly type — without Birfield joint —)
mm (in)
80 (3.15)
1st
Shaft length (Spider to spider) mm (in)
Shaft outer diameter
Flange type
612 (24.19)
650 (25.59)
2nd
749 (29.49)
1st
75 (2.95)
2nd
65 (2.56)
mm (in)
4WD Model
NAPD0009S02
Rear
Front
Location
A/T
M/T
Full-time
Part-time
Propeller shaft model
2F71H
2S1310
Number of joints
Part time
2S80B-T
2
Coupling method with transmission
Flange type
Type of journal bearings
Distance between yokes
Sleeve type
Solid type (disassembly type)
mm (in)
Shaft length (Spider to spider)
Shaft outer diameter
Full time
mm (in)
mm (in)
71 (2.80)
553 (21.77)
80 (3.15)
565 (22.24)
50.8 (2.000)
PD-12
965.1 (38.00)
76.2 (3.000)
927 (36.50)
960 (37.80)
75 and 63.5 (2.95 and 2.500)
PROPELLER SHAFT
Service Data and Specifications (SDS) (Cont’d)
SERVICE DATA
NAPD0010
GI
Unit: mm (in)
Propeller shaft runout limit
0.6 (0.024)
Journal axial play
MA
0.02 (0.0008) or less
SNAP RING (80B)
NAPD0011
EM
Unit: mm (in)
Thickness
Color
Part number*
1.99 (0.0783)
White
37146-C9400
2.02 (0.0795)
Yellow
37147-C9400
2.05 (0.0807)
Red
37148-C9400
2.08 (0.0819)
Green
37149-C9400
2.11 (0.0831)
Blue
37150-C9400
2.14 (0.0843)
Light brown
37151-C9400
2.17 (0.0854)
Black
37152-C9400
2.20 (0.0866)
No paint
37153-C9400
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
SNAP RING (71H)
NAPD0012
AT
Unit: mm (in)
Thickness
Color
Part number*
1.99 (0.0783)
White
37146-01G00
2.02 (0.0795)
Yellow
37147-01G00
2.05 (0.0807)
Red
37148-01G00
2.08 (0.0819)
Green
37149-01G00
2.11 (0.0831)
Blue
37150-01G00
2.14 (0.0843)
Light brown
37151-01G00
2.17 (0.0854)
Pink
37152-01G00
2.20 (0.0866)
No paint
37153-01G00
TF
AX
SU
BR
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
SNAP RING (1310)
NAPD0052
ST
Unit: mm (in)
Thickness
Color
Part number*
1.99 (0.0783)
White
37146-C9400
2.02 (0.0795)
Yellow
37147-C9400
2.05 (0.0807)
Red
37148-C9400
2.08 (0.0819)
Green
37149-C9400
2.11 (0.0831)
Blue
37150-C9400
2.14 (0.0843)
Light brown
37151-C9400
2.17 (0.0854)
Black
37152-C9400
2.20 (0.0866)
No paint
37153-C9400
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
IDX
PD-13
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
R200A
Preparation
Preparation
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
NAPD0013
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
ST3127S000
(See J25765-A)
Preload gauge
1 GG91030000
(J25765)
Torque wrench
2 HT62940000
(
—
)
Socket adapter
3 HT62900000
(
—
)
Socket adapter
Description
Measuring pinion bearing preload and total preload
NT124
KV38100800
(J34310, J25604-01)
Differential attachment
Mounting final drive
(To use, make a new hole.)
a: 152 mm (5.98 in)
NT119
KV38108300
(J44195)
Companion flange
wrench
Removing and installing propeller shaft lock nut,
and drive pinion lock nut
NT771
ST3090S000
(
—
)
Drive pinion rear inner
race puller set
1 ST30031000
(J22912-01)
Puller
2 ST30901000
(J26010-01)
Base
ST3306S001
Differential side bearing
puller set
1 ST33051001
(J22888-20)
Body
2 ST33061000
(J8107-2)
Adapter
Removing and installing drive pinion rear inner
cone
a: 79 mm (3.11 in) dia.
b: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia.
c: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia.
NT527
Removing and installing differential side bearing
inner cone
a: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia.
b: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia.
NT072
KV38100300
(J25523)
Differential side bearing
drift
Installing side bearing inner cone
a: 54 mm (2.13 in) dia.
b: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia.
c: 32 mm (1.26 in) dia.
NT085
PD-14
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
R200A
Preparation (Cont’d)
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
GI
Description
KV38100600
(J25267)
Side bearing spacer drift
Installing side bearing spacer
a: 8 mm (0.31 in)
b: R42.5 mm (1.673 in)
NT528
ST30611000
(J25742-1)
Drift
Installing pinion rear bearing outer race
(Use with ST30621000 or ST30613000)
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
NT090
ST30621000
(J25742-5)
Drift
Installing pinion rear bearing outer race
(Use with ST30611000)
a: 79 mm (3.11 in) dia.
b: 59 mm (2.32 in) dia.
CL
MT
NT073
ST30613000
(J25742-3)
Drift
Installing pinion front bearing outer race
(Use with ST30611000)
a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia.
b: 48 mm (1.89 in) dia.
AT
TF
NT073
KV38100500
(J25273)
Gear carrier front oil
seal drift
Installing front oil seal
a: 85 mm (3.35 in) dia.
b: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
AX
NT115
KV38100200
(J26233)
Gear carrier side oil
seal drift
Installing side oil seal
SU
BR
ST
NT120
(J34309)
Differential shim selector
Adjusting bearing pre-load and gear height
RS
BT
HA
NT134
(J25269-4)
Side bearing discs
(2 Req’d)
Selecting pinion height adjusting washer
SC
EL
NT136
IDX
PD-15
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
R200A
Preparation (Cont’d)
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(J8129)
Spring gauge
Measuring carrier turning torque
NT127
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Troubleshooting
NAPD0050
Refer to “NVH TROUBLESHOOTING CHART”, PD-4.
On-vehicle Service
FRONT OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT
1.
2.
Remove front propeller shaft.
Loosen drive pinion nut.
Tool number: KV38108300 (J44195)
3.
Remove companion flange.
4.
Remove front oil seal.
SPD476A
SPD734
SPD735
PD-16
NAPD0014
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
R200A
On-vehicle Service (Cont’d)
5.
6.
7.
Apply multi-purpose grease to cavity at sealing lips of oil seal.
Press front oil seal into carrier.
Install companion flange and drive pinion nut.
Install propeller shaft.
Tool number:
KV38100500 (J25273)
GI
MA
EM
LC
SPD736
REAR COVER GASKET REPLACEMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Drain gear oil.
Remove rear cover and rear cover gasket.
Install new rear cover gasket and rear cover.
Fill final drive with recommended gear oil.
EC
NAPD0015
FE
CL
MT
SPD740-A
AT
TF
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
PD-17
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
R200A
Components
Components
NAPD0016
SPD557A
PD-18
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
R200A
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
I
NAPD0017
GI
NAPD0017S01
Remove front of propeller shaft.
Plug front end of transfer.
I Remove drive shaft. Refer to AX-12, “Removal”.
I Remove front final drive mounting bolts.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage spline, sleeve yoke and front oil seal
when removing propeller shaft.
MA
INSTALLATION
EC
I
EM
LC
NAPD0017S02
Fill final drive with recommended gear oil.
FE
CL
MT
SPD123
Disassembly
PRE-INSPECTION
SPD664
AT
NAPD0018
NAPD0018S01
Before disassembling final drive, perform the following inspection.
I Total preload
a) Turn drive pinion in both directions several times to set bearing rollers.
b) Check total preload with Tool.
Tool number: ST3127S000 (J25765-A)
Total preload:
P1 + [0.3 - 1.5 N·m (3 - 15 kg-cm, 2.6 - 13.0 in-lb)]
P1 = Drive pinion preload
TF
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
I
Ring gear to drive pinion backlash
Check backlash of ring gear with a dial indicator at several
points.
Ring gear-to-drive pinion backlash:
0.10 - 0.15 mm (0.0039 - 0.0059 in)
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SPD513
PD-19
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
R200A
Disassembly (Cont’d)
I
I
Ring gear runout
Check runout of ring gear with a dial indicator.
Runout limit:
0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
Tooth contact
Check tooth contact. Refer to “TOOTH CONTACT”, PD-30.
SPD524
I
Side gear to pinion mate gear backlash
Using a feeler gauge, measure clearance between side gear
thrust washer and differential case.
Clearance between side gear thrust washer and differential case:
Less than 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
SPD665
FINAL DRIVE HOUSING
NAPD0018S02
1.
Using three spacers [20 mm (0.79 in)], mount final drive
assembly on Tool.
Tool number:
KV38100800 (J34310, J25604-01)
2.
Remove differential side shaft assembly.
3.
Remove differential side flange.
SPD666
SPD644
SPD667
PD-20
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
R200A
Disassembly (Cont’d)
4.
Put match marks on one side of side bearing cap with paint or
punch to ensure that it is replaced in proper position during
reassembly.
Bearing caps are line-bored during manufacture and should
be put back in their original places.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SPD526
5.
Remove side bearing caps.
EC
FE
CL
MT
PD343
6.
Remove differential case assembly with a pry bar.
AT
TF
AX
SU
SPD668
Be careful to keep the side bearing outer races together with
their respective inner cones — do not mix them up.
CAUTION:
Side bearing spacer is placed on either the left or right
depending upon final drive gear ratio. It should be labeled so
that it may be replaced correctly.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SPD527
7.
8.
Loosen drive pinion nut.
Tool number: KV38108300 (J44195)
Remove companion flange with puller.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SPD477A
PD-21
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
R200A
Disassembly (Cont’d)
9.
Take out drive pinion together with rear bearing inner cone,
drive pinion bearing spacer and pinion bearing adjusting
washer.
10. Remove front oil seal and pinion front bearing inner cone.
SPD670
11. Remove pinion bearing outer races with a brass drift.
PD349
12. Remove pinion rear bearing inner cone and drive pinion height
adjusting washer.
Tool number: ST30031000 (J22912-01)
SPD209
DIFFERENTIAL CASE
NAPD0018S03
1. Remove side bearing inner cones.
To prevent damage to bearing, engage puller jaws in grooves.
Tool number:
A ST33051001 (J22888-20)
B ST33061000 (J8107-2)
SPD207A
Be careful not to confuse the right and left hand parts.
Keep bearing and bearing race for each side together.
SPD022
PD-22
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
R200A
Disassembly (Cont’d)
2. Loosen ring gear bolts in a criss-cross pattern.
3. Tap ring gear off the differential case with a soft hammer.
Tap evenly all around to keep ring gear from binding.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SPD024
4.
Punch off pinion mate shaft lock pin from ring gear side.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SPD025
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE SHAFT
1.
AT
NAPD0018S04
Cut collar with cold chisel. Be careful not to damage differential side shaft.
TF
AX
SU
SPD236A
2.
Reinstall differential side shaft into extension tube and secure
with bolts. Remove rear axle bearing by drawing out differential side shaft from rear axle bearing with puller.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SPD672
PD-23
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
R200A
Disassembly (Cont’d)
3.
Remove grease seal and oil seal.
SPD647
SPD781
Inspection
RING GEAR AND DRIVE PINION
NAPD0019
NAPD0019S01
Check gear teeth for scoring, cracking or chipping.
If any damaged part is evident, replace ring gear and drive pinion
as a set (hypoid gear set).
DIFFERENTIAL CASE ASSEMBLY
NAPD0019S02
Check mating surfaces of differential case, side gears, pinion mate
gears, pinion mate shaft and thrust washers.
SPD097AA
BEARING
1.
2.
NAPD0019S03
Thoroughly clean bearing.
Check bearing for wear, scratches, pitting or flaking.
Check tapered roller bearing for smooth rotation. If damaged,
replace outer race and inner cone as a set.
SPD715
PD-24
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
R200A
Adjustment
Adjustment
NAPD0020
For quiet and reliable final drive operation, the following five adjustments must be made correctly:
1. Side bearing preload
2. Pinion gear height
3. Pinion bearing preload
4. Ring gear-to-pinion backlash. Refer to SDS, PD-38.
5. Ring and pinion gear tooth contact pattern
SIDE BEARING PRELOAD
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
NAPD0020S01
A selection of carrier side bearing adjusting washer is
required for successful completion of this procedure.
1. Make sure all parts are clean and that the bearings are well
lubricated with light oil or “DEXRONTM” type automatic transmission fluid.
2. Place the differential carrier, with side bearings and bearing
races installed, into the final drive housing.
FE
CL
MT
SPD527
3. Put the side bearing spacer in place.
CAUTION:
Side bearing spacer is placed on either the right or left
depending upon final drive gear ratio. Be sure to replace it on
the correct side.
AT
TF
AX
SU
SPD894
4.
Using Tool, install original carrier side bearing preload shims
on the carrier end, opposite the ring gear.
Tool number: KV38100600 (J25267)
BR
ST
RS
BT
SPD986
5.
6.
Install the side bearing caps in their correct locations and
torque the bearing cap retaining bolts.
Specification:
88 - 98 N·m (9 - 10 kg-m, 65 - 72 ft-lb)
Turn the carrier several times to seat the bearings.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SPD526
PD-25
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
R200A
Adjustment (Cont’d)
7.
Measure the turning torque of the carrier at the ring gear retaining bolts with a spring gauge, J8129.
Specification:
34.3 - 39.2 N (3.5 - 4.0 kg, 7.7 - 8.8 lb) of pulling force
at the ring gear bolt
8.
If the carrier turning torque is not within the specification range,
increase or decrease the total thickness of the side bearing
adjusting washers until the turning torque is correct. If the
turning torque is less than the specified range, install washers
of greater thickness; if the turning torque is greater than the
specification, install thinner washers. See the SDS section for
washer dimensions and part numbers.
Record the total amount of washer thickness required for the
correct carrier side bearing preload.
SPD194A
9.
SPD772
10. Remove the carrier from the final drive housing, saving the
selected preload washers for later use during the assembly of
the final drive unit.
SPD668
PINION GEAR HEIGHT AND PINION BEARING
PRELOAD
1.
2.
NAPD0020S02
Make sure all parts are clean and that the bearings are well
lubricated.
Assemble the pinion gear bearings into the pinion pre-load
shim selector Tool, J34309.
SPD769
I
I
Front Pinion Bearing — make sure the J34309-3 front pinion
bearing seat is secured tightly against the J34309-2 gauge
anvil. Then turn the front pinion bearing pilot, J34309-5, to
secure the bearing in its proper position.
Rear Pinion Bearing — the rear pinion bearing pilot, J3430915, is used to center the rear pinion bearing only. The rear
pinion bearing locking seat, J34309-4, is used to lock the bearing to the assembly.
SPD197A
PD-26
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
R200A
Adjustment (Cont’d)
3.
Place the pinion preload shim selector Tool, J34309-1, gauge
screw assembly with the pinion rear bearing inner cone
installed into the final drive housing.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SPD893
4.
Assemble the front pinion bearing inner cone and the J34309-2
gauge anvil together with the J34309-1 gauge screw in the
final drive housing. Make sure that the pinion height gauge
plate, J34309-16, will turn a full 360 degrees, and tighten the
two sections together by hand.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SPD199A
5.
Turn the assembly several times to seat the bearings.
AT
TF
AX
SU
SPD770
6.
Measure the turning torque at the end of the J34309-2 gauge
anvil using torque wrench J25765A.
Turning torque specification:
1.0 - 1.3 N·m (10 - 13 kg-cm, 8.7 - 11.3 in-lb)
BR
ST
RS
BT
SPD234A
7.
Place the J34309-1 “R200A” pinion height adapter onto the
gauge plate and tighten it by hand.
CAUTION:
Make sure all machined surfaces are clean.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SPD208A
PD-27
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
R200A
Adjustment (Cont’d)
PINION BEARING PRELOAD WASHER SELECTION
8. Place the solid pinion bearing spacer, small end first, over the
J34309-2 gauge anvil and seat the small end squarely against
the tip of the J34309-1 gauge screw in the tool recessed portion.
SPD209A
SPD773
9.
Select the correct thickness of pinion bearing preload adjusting washer using a standard gauge of 3.5 mm (0.138 in) and
your J34309-101 feeler gauge. The exact measure you get
with your gauges is the thickness of the adjusting washer
required. Select the correct washer.
Drive pinion bearing preload adjusting washer:
Refer to SDS, PD-38.
10. Set your selected, correct pinion bearing preload adjusting
washer aside for use when assembling the pinion gear and
bearings into the final drive.
SPD210A
SPD774
PINION HEIGHT ADJUSTING WASHER SELECTION
11. Now, position the side bearing discs, J25269-4, and arbor
firmly into the side bearing bores.
SPD211A
PD-28
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
R200A
Adjustment (Cont’d)
12. Install the side bearing caps and tighten the cap bolts.
Specification:
88 - 98 N·m (9 - 10 kg-m, 65 - 72 ft-lb)
GI
MA
EM
LC
SPD212A
13. Select the correct standard pinion height adjusting washer
thickness by using a standard gauge of 3.0 mm (0.118 in) and
your J34309-101 feeler gauge. Measure the gap between the
J34309-11 “R200A” pinion height adapter and the arbor.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SPD204A
14. Write down your exact total measurement.
AT
TF
AX
SU
SPD775
15. Correct the pinion height washer size by referring to the “pinion head number”.
There are two numbers painted on the pinion gear. The first
one refers to the pinion and ring gear as a matched set and
should be the same as the number on the ring gear. The second number is the “pinion head height number”, and it refers
to the ideal pinion height from standard for quietest operation.
Use the following chart to determine the correct pinion height
washer. Refer to SDS, PD-38.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SPD542
HA
SC
EL
IDX
PD-29
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
R200A
Adjustment (Cont’d)
Pinion Head Height Number
Add or Remove from the Standard
Pinion Height Washer Thickness
Measurement
−6
Add 0.06 mm (0.0024 in)
−5
Add 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
−4
Add 0.04 mm (0.0016 in)
−3
Add 0.03 mm (0.0012 in)
−2
Add 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
−1
Add 0.01 mm (0.0004 in)
0
Use the selected washer thickness
+1
Subtract 0.01 mm (0.0004 in)
+2
Subtract 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
+3
Subtract 0.03 mm (0.0012 in)
+4
Subtract 0.04 mm (0.0016 in)
+5
Subtract 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
+6
Subtract 0.06 mm (0.0024 in)
16. Remove the J34309 pinion preload shim selector tool from the
final drive housing and disassemble to retrieve the pinion bearings.
SPD205A
TOOTH CONTACT
NAPD0020S03
Gear tooth contact pattern check is necessary to verify correct
relationship between ring gear and drive pinion.
Hypoid gear sets which are not positioned properly in relation to
one another may be noisy, or have short life, or both. With a pattern check, the most desirable contact for low noise level and long
life can be assured.
1.
2.
Thoroughly clean ring gear and drive pinion teeth.
Sparingly apply a mixture of powdered ferric oxide and oil or
equivalent to 3 or 4 teeth of ring gear drive side.
SPD357
PD-30
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
R200A
Adjustment (Cont’d)
3.
Hold companion flange steady by hand and rotate the ring gear
in both directions.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SPD677
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SPD007-B
AX
SU
Assembly
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE SHAFT
1.
NAPD0021
NAPD0021S01
BR
Install oil seal and grease seal.
ST
RS
BT
SPD782-A
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SPD654-A
PD-31
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
R200A
Assembly (Cont’d)
2.
Install extension tube retainer, rear axle bearing and rear axle
shaft bearing collar on differential side shaft.
SPD655
DIFFERENTIAL CASE
NAPD0021S02
1.
Install side gears, pinion mate gears and thrust washers into
differential case.
2.
Fit pinion mate shaft to differential case so that it meets lock
pin holes.
Adjust backlash between side gear and pinion mate gear by
selecting side gear thrust washer.
Refer to SDS, PD-37.
Backlash between side gear and pinion mate gear
(Clearance between side gear thrust washer and differential case):
Less than 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
SPD552
3.
SPD258
4. Install pinion mate shaft lock pin with a punch.
Make sure lock pin is flush with case.
SPD030
5.
Apply gear oil to gear tooth surfaces and thrust surfaces and
check to see they turn properly.
SPD322
PD-32
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
R200A
Assembly (Cont’d)
6.
7.
Install differential case assembly on ring gear.
Apply genuine medium strength thread locking sealant or
equivalent. Refer to GI section, “Recommended chemical
products and sealants” to ring gear bolts, and install them.
After tightening, tighten by rotating 34 to 39 degress.
Tighten bolts in a criss-cross pattern, lightly tapping bolt head
with a hammer.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SPD554
8.
Press-fit side bearing inner cones on differential case with Tool.
Tool number:
A KV38100300 (J25523)
B ST33061000 (J8107-2)
EC
FE
CL
MT
PD353
FINAL DRIVE HOUSING
1.
AT
NAPD0021S03
Press-fit front and rear bearing outer races with Tools.
Tool number:
A ST30611000 (J25742-1)
B ST30621000 (J25742-5)
C ST30613000 (J25742-3)
TF
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SPD679
2.
3.
Select drive pinion height adjusting washer and pinion bearing
adjusting washer. Refer to “PINION GEAR HEIGHT AND PINION BEARING PRELOAD”, PD-26.
Install drive pinion height adjusting washer in drive pinion, and
press-fit pinion rear bearing inner cone in it, using press and
Tool.
Tool number:
ST30901000 (J26010-01)
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SPD377
PD-33
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
R200A
Assembly (Cont’d)
4.
Place pinion front bearing inner cone in final drive housing.
5.
Apply multi-purpose grease to cavity at sealing lips of oil seal.
Install front oil seal.
Tool number:
KV38100500 (J25273)
6.
Place drive pinion bearing spacer, drive pinion bearing adjusting washer and drive pinion in final drive housing.
7.
Insert companion flange into drive pinion by tapping the companion flange with a soft hammer.
SPD581
SPD680
SPD658
SPD681
8. Tighten pinion nut to the specified torque.
The threaded portion of drive pinion and pinion nut should be
free from oil or grease.
Tool number: KV38108300 (J44195)
SPD478A
PD-34
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
R200A
Assembly (Cont’d)
9.
Turn drive pinion in both directions several revolutions, and
measure pinion bearing preload.
Tool number: ST3127S000 (J25765-A)
Pinion bearing preload:
1.1 - 1.4 N·m (11 - 14 kg-cm, 9.5 - 12.2 in-lb)
When pinion bearing preload is outside the specifications,
replace pinion bearing adjusting washer and spacer with a
different thickness.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SPD664
10. Select side bearing adjusting washer.
Refer to “SIDE BEARING PRELOAD”, PD-25.
11. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races
into final drive housing.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SPD527
12. Insert left and right side bearing adjusting washers in place
between side bearings and final drive housing.
AT
TF
AX
SU
SPD558
13. Drive in side bearing spacer with Tool.
Tool number: KV38100600 (J25267)
BR
ST
RS
BT
SPD559
14. Align mark on bearing cap with that on final drive housing and
install bearing cap on final drive housing.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SPD526
PD-35
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
R200A
Assembly (Cont’d)
15. Apply multi-purpose grease to cavity at sealing lips of oil seal.
Install side oil seal.
Tool number: KV38100200 (J26233)
SPD560
16. Measure ring gear to drive pinion backlash with a dial indicator.
Ring gear-to-drive pinion backlash:
0.10 - 0.15 mm (0.0039 - 0.0059 in)
I If backlash is too small, decrease thickness of right shim and
increase thickness of left shim by the same amount.
If backlash is too great, reverse the above procedure.
Never change the total amount of shims as it will change the
bearing preload.
SPD513
17. Check total preload with Tool.
When checking preload, turn drive pinion in both directions several times to set bearing rollers.
Tool number: ST3127S000 (J25765-A)
Total preload:
P1 + [0.3 - 1.5 N·m (3 - 15 kg-cm, 2.6 - 13.0 in-lb)]
P1 = Drive pinion preload
SPD664
I
If preload is too great, remove the same amount of shim from
each side.
I If preload is too small, add the same amount of shim to each
side.
Never add or remove a different number of shims for each side
as it will change ring gear to drive pinion backlash.
18. Recheck ring gear to drive pinion backlash because increase
or decrease in thickness of shims will cause change of ring
gear-to-pinion backlash.
SPD561
SPD524
19. Check runout of ring gear with a dial indicator.
Runout limit:
0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
I If backlash varies excessively in different places, the variance
may have resulted from foreign matter caught between the ring
gear and the differential case.
I If the backlash varies greatly when the runout of the ring gear
is within a specified range, the hypoid gear set or differential
case should be replaced.
20. Check tooth contact. Refer to “TOOTH CONTACT”, PD-30.
21. Install rear cover and gasket.
PD-36
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
R200A
Assembly (Cont’d)
22. Install differential side shaft assembly.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SPD682
EC
Service Data and Specifications (SDS)
R200A
General Specifications
NAPD0022
NAPD0022S01
FE
Standard
Front final drive
CL
R200A
2-pinion
Gear ratio
4.363
Number of teeth (Ring gear/drive pinion)
48/11
Oil capacity (Approx.) (US pt, lmp pt)
1.85 (3-7/8, 3-1/4)
Ring Gear Runout
Ring gear runout limit
AT
NAPD0022S02
mm (in)
NAPD0022S03
Side gear backlash (Clearance between side gear and differential case)
mm (in)
Thickness mm (in)
0.75
0.78
0.81
0.84
0.87
0.90
0.93
Less than 0.15 (0.0059)
AX
Part number*
(0.0295)
(0.0307)
(0.0319)
(0.0331)
(0.0343)
(0.0354)
(0.0366)
38424-N3110
38424-N3111
38424-N3112
38424-N3113
38424-N3114
38424-N3115
38424-N3116
SU
BR
ST
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Side Bearing Adjustment
NAPD0022S04
Differential carrier assembly turning resistance
N (kg, lb)
34.3 - 39.2 (3.5 - 4.0, 7.7 - 8.8)
Thickness mm (in)
Available side
bearing adjusting washers
TF
0.05 (0.0020)
Side Gear Adjustment
Available side
gear thrust
washers
MT
2.00
2.05
2.10
2.15
2.20
2.25
2.30
2.35
2.40
2.45
2.50
2.55
2.60
RS
Part number*
(0.0787)
(0.0807)
(0.0827)
(0.0846)
(0.0866)
(0.0886)
(0.0906)
(0.0925)
(0.0945)
(0.0965)
(0.0984)
(0.1004)
(0.1024)
38453-N3100
38453-N3101
38453-N3102
38453-N3103
38453-N3104
38453-N3105
38453-N3106
38453-N3107
38453-N3108
38453-N3109
38453-N3110
38453-N3111
38453-N3112
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
PD-37
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
FRONT FINAL DRIVE
R200A
Service Data and Specifications (SDS) (Cont’d)
Total Preload Adjustment
Total preload
NAPD0022S05
N·m (kg-cm, in-lb)
Ring gear backlash
P1 + [0.3 - 1.5 (3 - 15, 2.6 - 13.0)]
mm (in)
0.10 - 0.15 (0.0039 - 0.0059)
P1 = Drive pinion preload
Drive Pinion Height Adjustment
Available pinion height
adjusting
washers
NAPD0022S06
Thickness mm (in)
Part number*
3.09 (0.1217)
3.12 (0.1228)
3.15 (0.1240)
3.18 (0.1252)
3.21 (0.1264)
3.24 (0.1276)
3.27 (0.1287)
3.30 (0.1299)
3.33 (0.1311)
3.36 (0.1323)
3.39 (0.1335)
3.42 (0.1346)
3.45 (0.1358)
3.48 (0.1370)
3.51 (0.1382)
3.54 (0.1394)
3.57 (0.1406)
3.60 (0.1417)
3.63 (0.1429)
3.66 (0.1441)
38154-P6017
38154-P6018
38154-P6019
38154-P6020
38154-P6021
38154-P6022
38154-P6023
38154-P6024
38154-P6025
38154-P6026
38154-P6027
38154-P6028
38154-P6029
38154-P6030
38154-P6031
38154-P6032
38154-P6033
38154-P6034
38154-P6035
38154-P6036
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Drive Pinion Preload Adjustment
NAPD0022S07
Drive pinion bearing preload adjusting method
Drive pinion preload with front oil seal
Adjusting washer and spacer
N·m (kg-cm, in-lb)
[P1]
1.1 - 1.4 (11 - 14, 9.5 - 12.2)
Thickness mm (in)
Available drive
pinion bearing
preload adjusting washers
Available drive
pinion bearing
preload adjusting spacers
3.81
3.83
3.85
3.87
3.89
3.91
3.93
3.95
3.97
3.99
4.01
4.03
4.05
4.07
4.09
Part number*
(0.1500)
(0.1508)
(0.1516)
(0.1524)
(0.1531)
(0.1539)
(0.1547)
(0.1555)
(0.1563)
(0.1571)
(0.1579)
(0.1587)
(0.1594)
(0.1602)
(0.1610)
38125-61001
38126-61001
38127-61001
38128-61001
38129-61001
38130-61001
38131-61001
38132-61001
38133-61001
38134-61001
38135-61001
38136-61001
38137-61001
38138-61001
38139-61001
Length mm (in)
Part number*
54.50 (2.1457)
54.80 (2.1575)
55.10 (2.1693)
55.40 (2.1811)
55.70 (2.1929)
56.00 (2.2047)
38165-B4000
38165-B4001
38165-B4002
38165-B4003
38165-B4004
38165-61001
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
PD-38
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Preparation
Preparation
GI
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
NAPD0029
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
ST3127S000
(See J25765-A)
Preload gauge
1 GG91030000
(J25765)
Torque wrench
2 HT62940000
(
—
)
Socket adapter
3 HT62900000
(
—
)
Socket adapter
MA
Description
EM
Measuring pinion bearing preload and total preload
LC
EC
FE
NT124
CL
ST06340000
(J24310, J34310)
Differential attachment
Mounting final drive
MT
AT
NT140
ST32580000
(J34312)
Differential side bearing
adjusting nut wrench
Adjusting side bearing preload and backlash (ring
gear-drive pinion)
TF
NT141
KV38108300
(J44195)
Companion flange
wrench
Removing and installing propeller shaft lock nut,
and drive pinion lock nut
AX
SU
BR
NT771
ST3090S000
(
—
)
Drive pinion rear inner
race puller set
1 ST30031000
(J22912-01)
Puller
2 ST30901000
(J26010-01)
Base
ST3306S001
Differential side bearing
puller set
1 ST33051001
(J22888-20)
Body
2 ST33061000
(J8107-2)
Adapter
Removing and installing drive pinion rear inner
cone
a: 79 mm (3.11 in) dia.
b: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia.
c: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia.
ST
RS
BT
NT527
Removing and installing differential side bearing
inner cone
a: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia.
b: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia.
HA
SC
EL
NT072
IDX
PD-39
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Preparation (Cont’d)
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
ST33190000
(J25523)
Differential side bearing
drift
Installing side bearing inner cone
a: 52 mm (2.05 in) dia.
b: 45.5 mm (1.791 in) dia.
c: 34 mm (1.34 in) dia.
NT085
ST33081000
(
—
)
Side bearing puller
adapter
Installing side bearing inner cone
a: 43 mm (1.69 in) dia.
b: 33.5 mm (1.319 in) dia.
NT431
ST30611000
(J25742-1)
Drift
Installing pinion rear bearing outer race
(Use with ST30621000 or ST30613000)
NT090
ST30621000
(J25742-5)
Drift
Installing pinion rear bearing outer race
a: 79 mm (3.11 in) dia.
b: 59 mm (2.32 in) dia.
NT073
ST30613000
(J25742-3)
Drift
Installing pinion front bearing outer race
(Use with ST30611000)
a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia.
b: 48 mm (1.89 in) dia.
NT073
KV381025S0
(
—
)
Oil seal fitting tool
1 ST30720000
(J25405)
Drift bar
2 KV38102510
(
—
)
Drift
Installing front oil seal
a: 77 mm (3.03 in) dia.
b: 55 mm (2.17 in) dia.
c: 71 mm (2.80 in) dia.
d: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia.
NT525
(J34309)
Differential shim selector
Adjusting bearing pre-load and gear height
NT134
PD-40
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Preparation (Cont’d)
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
GI
Description
(J25269-18)
Side bearing discs
(2 Req’d)
MA
Selecting pinion height adjusting washer
EM
NT135
KV381052S0
(
—
)
Rear axle shaft dummy
1 KV38105210
(
—
)
Torque wrench side
2 KV38105220
(
—
)
Vice side
Checking differential torque on limited slip differential
LC
EC
NT142
FE
KV38100500
(J25273)
Gear carrier front oil
seal drift
Installing front oil seal
a: 85 mm (3.35 in) dia.
b: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
CL
MT
NT115
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Troubleshooting
AT
NAPD0051
Refer to “NVH TROUBLESHOOTING CHART”, PD-4.
TF
AX
SU
On-vehicle Service
FRONT OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT
1.
2.
Remove propeller shaft.
Loosen drive pinion nut.
Tool number: KV38108300 (J44195)
NAPD0030
BR
ST
RS
BT
SPD479A
3.
Remove companion flange.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SPD737
PD-41
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
On-vehicle Service (Cont’d)
4.
Remove front oil seal.
5.
Apply multi-purpose grease to cavity at sealing lips of oil seal.
Press front oil seal into carrier.
Tool number:
KV38100500 (J25273)
Install companion flange and drive pinion nut.
Install rear propeller shaft.
SPD738
6.
7.
SPD739
PD-42
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Components
Components
NAPD0031
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SPD362AB
PD-43
IDX
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
I
NAPD0032
NAPD0032S01
Remove rear of propeller shaft.
Plug front end of transfer.
I Remove axle shaft.
Refer to AX-20, “Removal”.
I Remove rear final drive mounting bolts.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage spline, sleeve yoke and front oil seal
when removing propeller shaft.
INSTALLATION
I
Fill final drive with recommended gear oil.
I
Pay attention to the direction of gasket.
NAPD0032S02
SPD123
SPD767
Disassembly
PRE-INSPECTION
SPD149
NAPD0033
NAPD0033S01
Before disassembling final drive, perform the following inspection.
I Total preload
a) Turn drive pinion in both directions several times to seat bearing rollers correctly.
b) Check total preload with Tool.
Tool number: ST3127S000 (J25765-A)
Total preload:
1.2 - 2.0 N·m (12 - 20 kg-cm, 10 - 17 in-lb)
I
Ring gear to drive pinion backlash
Check backlash of ring gear with a dial indicator at several
points.
Ring gear-to-drive pinion backlash:
0.13 - 0.18 mm (0.0051 - 0.0071 in)
SPD246
PD-44
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Disassembly (Cont’d)
I
Ring gear runout
Check runout of ring gear with a dial indicator.
Runout limit:
0.08 mm (0.0031 in)
GI
MA
EM
LC
SPD247
I
I
Tooth contact
Check tooth contact. Refer to “TOOTH CONTACT”, PD-57.
Side gear to pinion mate gear backlash
Measure clearance between side gear thrust washer and differential case with a feeler gauge.
Clearance between side gear thrust washer and differential case:
0.10 - 0.20 mm (0.0039 - 0.0079 in)
EC
FE
CL
MT
SPD004
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
1.
AT
NAPD0033S02
Mount final drive assembly on Tool.
Tool number:
ST06340000 (J24310, J34310)
TF
AX
SU
SPD683
2.
Put match marks on one side of side bearing cap with paint or
punch to ensure that it is replaced in proper position during
reassembly.
Bearing caps are line-bored during manufacture and should
be put back in their original places.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SPD249
3.
Remove side lock fingers and side bearing caps.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SPD250
PD-45
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Disassembly (Cont’d)
4.
Remove side bearing adjuster with Tool.
Tool number: ST32580000 (J34312)
5.
Remove differential case assembly with a pry bar.
SPD684
SPD685
Be careful to keep the side bearing outer races together with
their respective inner cones — do not mix them up.
SPD011
6.
7.
Remove drive pinion nut with Tool.
Tool number: KV38108300 (J44195)
Remove companion flange with puller.
SPD480A
8.
Take out drive pinion together with pinion rear bearing inner
cone, drive pinion bearing spacer and pinion bearing adjusting
shim.
SPD687
PD-46
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Disassembly (Cont’d)
9. Remove front oil seal and pinion front bearing inner cone.
10. Remove pinion bearing outer races with a brass drift.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SPD563
11. Remove pinion rear bearing inner cone and drive pinion adjusting washer.
Tool number: ST30031000 (J22912-01)
EC
FE
CL
MT
SPD542A
DIFFERENTIAL CASE
1.
AT
NAPD0033S03
Remove side bearing inner cones.
To prevent damage to bearing, engage puller jaws in
groove.
Tool number:
A ST33051001 (J22888-20)
B ST33061000 (J8107-2)
TF
AX
SU
SPD207A
Be careful not to confuse the left and right hand parts.
Keep bearing and bearing race for each side together.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SPD022
2. Loosen ring gear bolts in a criss-cross pattern.
3. Tap ring gear off differential case with a soft hammer.
Tap evenly all around to keep ring gear from binding.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SPD024
PD-47
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Disassembly (Cont’d)
4.
Drive out pinion mate shaft lock pin, with punch from ring gear
side.
Lock pin is calked at pin hole mouth on differential case.
SPD025
Inspection
RING GEAR AND DRIVE PINION
NAPD0034
NAPD0034S01
Check gear teeth for scoring, cracking or chipping.
If any damaged part is evident, replace ring gear and drive pinion
as a set (hypoid gear set).
DIFFERENTIAL CASE ASSEMBLY
NAPD0034S02
Check mating surfaces of differential case, side gears, pinion mate
gears, pinion mate shaft, and thrust washers.
SPD530-A
BEARING
1.
2.
NAPD0034S03
Thoroughly clean bearing.
Check bearings for wear, scratches, pitting or flaking.
Check tapered roller bearing for smooth rotation. If damaged,
replace outer race and inner cone as a set.
SPD715
Limited Slip Differential
PREPARATION FOR DISASSEMBLY
Checking Differential Torque
SPD415
NAPD0035
NAPD0035S01
Measure differential torque with Tool.
If it is not within the specifications, inspect components of limited
slip differential.
Differential torque:
40 - 58 N·m 4 - 6 kg-m, 29 - 43 ft-lb)
Tool number: A KV38105210 (
—
)
Tool number: B KV38105220 (
—
)
PD-48
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Limited Slip Differential (Cont’d)
DISASSEMBLY
NAPD0036
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SPD544A
CAUTION:
Do not run engine when one wheel (rear) is off the ground.
AX
SU
1. Remove side bearing inner cone with Tool.
2. Loosen ring gear bolts in a criss-cross pattern.
3. Tap ring gear off gear case with a soft hammer.
Tap evenly all around to keep ring gear from binding.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SPD552A
4.
Remove couple bolts on differential cases A and B with a
press.
Tool number: ST33081000 (
—
)
5. Separate differential case A and B.
Draw out component parts (discs and plates, etc.).
Put marks on component parts so that they can be reinstalled
in their original positions from which they were removed.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SPD363A
PD-49
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Limited Slip Differential (Cont’d)
INSPECTION
Contact Surfaces
1.
2.
NAPD0037
NAPD0037S01
Clean the disassembled parts in suitable solvent and blow dry
with compressed air.
If following surfaces are found with burrs or scratches, smooth
with oil stone.
1 Differential case B
2 Differential case A
3 Side gear
4 Pinion mate gear
5 Pinion mate shaft
6 Friction plate guide
SPD359A
Disc and Plate
1.
2.
3.
NAPD0037S02
Clean the discs, plates and spacer in suitable solvent and blow
dry with compressed air.
Inspect discs and plates for wear, nicks and burrs.
To test if friction disc or plate is not distorted, place it on a surface plate and rotate it by hand with indicating finger of dial
gauge resting against disc or plate surface.
Maximum allowable warpage:
0.08 mm (0.0031 in)
If it exceeds limits, replace with a new plate or disc to eliminate
possibility of clutch slippage or sticking.
SPD279
PD-50
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Limited Slip Differential (Cont’d)
4.
Measure thickness of spring plate.
Thickness of spring plate
Standard:
1.5 mm (0.059 in)
Wear limit:
1.4 mm (0.055 in)
5. Measure frictional surfaces and projected portions of friction
disc, friction plate, and determine each part’s differences to
see if the specified wear limit has been exceeded.
If any part has worn beyond the wear limit, and deformed or
fatigued, replace it with a new one that is the same thickness as
the projected portion.
Wear limit:
0.1 mm (0.004 in) or less
A − B = Wear limit mm (in)
I: Measuring points
A: Projected portion
B: Frictional surface
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SPD551A
ADJUSTMENT
Friction Disc and Friction Plate End Play
SPD545A
AT
NAPD0038
NAPD0038S01
End play of friction disc and friction plate can be calculated by using
following equation and should be adjusted within following range.
Adjustment can be made by selecting friction disc or friction plate
having three different thicknesses.
End play E: (One side)
0.05 - 0.15 mm (0.0020 - 0.0059 in)
E = A − (B + C)
A: Length of differential case contact surface to differential case
inner bottom.
B: Total thickness of friction discs, friction plates, spring plate and
spacer in differential case on one side.
C: Length of differential case contact surface to back side of side
gear.
1. Measure values of “A”.
Standard length A:
49.50 - 49.55 mm (1.9488 - 1.9508 in)
TF
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SPD417
2.
Measure thickness of each disc and plate.
Total thickness “B”:
18.57 - 20.43 mm (0.7311 - 0.8043 in)
No. of discs and plates (One side)
Friction disc: 2
Friction plate: 5
Spring plate: 2
Spacer: 1
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SPD420
PD-51
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Limited Slip Differential (Cont’d)
3.
a.
b.
Measure values of “C”.
Attach a dial indicator to the base plate.
Place differential case B on the base plate, and install a master gauge on case B.
Then adjust the dial indicator scale to zero with its tip on
the master gauge.
SPD418
c.
SPD419
Install pinion mate gears, side gears and pinion mate shaft in
differential case B.
d. Set dial indicator’s tip on the rear of side gear, and read the
indication.
Example:
E = A − D = A − (B + C) = 0.05 to 0.15 mm
A = 49.52 mm
B = 19.45 mm
C = 29.7 mm
D=B+C
49.15 (D) = 19.45 (B) + 29.7 (C)
E=A−D
0.37 (E) = 49.52 (A) − 49.15 (D)
From the above equation, end play of 0.37 mm exceeds the specified range of 0.05 to 0.15 mm.
Select suitable discs and plates to adjust correctly.
4. Calculate end play of differential case A with the same procedure of differential case B.
ASSEMBLY
NAPD0039
Prior to assembling discs and plates, properly lubricate them by
dipping them in limited slip differential oil.
1. Position specified number of friction plates, friction discs and
spacer on rear of side gear.
Always position a friction plate first on rear of side gear.
No. of discs and plates (One side)
Friction disc: 2
Friction plate: 5
Spacer: 1
SPD546A
PD-52
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Limited Slip Differential (Cont’d)
2.
Install two spring plates.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SPD547A
3. Install friction plate guides.
Correctly align the raised portions of friction plates, and apply
LSD gear oil to inner surfaces of friction plate guides to prevent them from falling.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SPD385A
4.
I
I
Install differential case B over side gear, discs, plates, spacer
and friction plate guide assembly.
Install differential case B while supporting friction plate
guides with your middle finger inserted through oil hole in
differential case.
Be careful not to detach spring plate from the hexagonal
part of the side gear.
AT
TF
AX
SU
SPD386A
5.
Install pinion mate gears and pinion mate thrust washers on
pinion mate shaft, then install pinion mate shaft in differential
case B.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SPD426
6. Install side gear to pinion mate gears.
7. Install each disc and plate.
Use same procedures as outlined in steps 1. through 4. above.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SPD387A
PD-53
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Limited Slip Differential (Cont’d)
8. Install differential case A.
Position differential cases A and B by correctly aligning marks
stamped on cases.
SPD388A
9. Tighten differential case couple bolts.
10. Place ring gear on differential case and tighten ring gear bolts.
Tighten bolts in a criss-cross pattern.
11. Install side bearing inner cone.
12. Check differential torque.
SPD364A
Adjustment
NAPD0040
For quiet and reliable final drive operation, the following five adjustments must be made correctly:
1. Side bearing preload
2. Pinion gear height
3. Side bearing preload
4. Ring gear-to-pinion backlash. Refer to SDS, PD-63.
5. Ring and pinion gear tooth contact pattern
PINION GEAR HEIGHT
1.
2.
NAPD0040S01
Make sure all parts are clean and that the bearings are well
lubricated.
Assemble the pinion gear bearings into the pinion pre-load
shim selector tool, J34309.
SPD196A
I
I
Rear Pinion Bearing — the rear pinion bearing pilot,
J34309-8, is used to center the rear pinion bearing only. The
rear pinion bearing locking seat, J34309-4, is used to lock the
bearing to the assembly.
Front Pinion Bearing — make sure the J34309-3, front pinion bearing seat is secured tightly against the J34309-2 gauge
anvil. Then turn the front pinion bearing pilot, J34309-5, to
secure the bearing in its proper position.
SPD197A
PD-54
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Adjustment (Cont’d)
3.
Place the pinion preload shim selector tool gauge screw
assembly, J34309-1, with the pinion rear bearing inner cone
installed, into the final drive housing.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SPD216A
4.
5.
Install the J34309-2 gauge anvil with the front pinion bearing
into the final drive housing and assemble it to the J34309-1
gauge screw. Make sure that the J34309-16 gauge plate will
turn a full 360 degrees, and tighten the two sections by hand
to set bearing pre-load.
Turn the assembly several times to seat the bearings.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SPD217A
6.
Measure the turning torque at the end of the J34309-2 gauge
anvil using torque wrench J25765A.
Turning torque specification:
0.4 - 0.9 N·m (4 - 9 kg-cm, 3.5 - 7.8 in-lb)
AT
TF
AX
SU
SPD234A
7.
Place the J34309-12 “H233B” pinion height adapter onto the
gauge plate and tighten it by hand.
CAUTION:
Make sure all machined surfaces are clean.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SPD208A
PINION HEIGHT ADJUSTING WASHER SELECTION
8. Position the J25269-18 side bearing discs and the arbor into
the side bearing bores.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SPD286A
PD-55
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Adjustment (Cont’d)
9.
Install the bearing caps and torque the bolts.
Specification:
93 - 103 N·m (9.5 - 10.5 kg-m, 69 - 76 ft-lb)
SPD237A
10. Select the correct standard pinion height adjusting washer
thickness using a standard gauge of 2.5, 3.0, or 3.5 mm
(0.098, 0.118, or 0.138 in) and your J34309-101 feeler gauge.
Measure the distance between the J34309-12 “H233B” pinion
height adapter and the arbor.
SPD204A
11. Write down your exact total measurement.
SPD779
12. Correct the pinion height washer size by referring to the “pinion head height number”.
There are two numbers painted on the pinion gear. The first
one refers to the pinion and ring gear as a matched set and
should be the same as the number on the ring gear. The second number is the “pinion head height number”, and it refers
to the ideal pinion height from standard for the quietest operation. Use the following chart to determine the correct pinion
height washer. Refer to SDS, PD-64.
SPD542
PD-56
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Adjustment (Cont’d)
Pinion Head Height Number
Add or Remove from the Selected
Standard Pinion Height Washer
Thickness Measurement
−6
Add 0.06 mm (0.0024 in)
−5
Add 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
−4
Add 0.04 mm (0.0016 in)
−3
Add 0.03 mm (0.0012 in)
−2
Add 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
−1
Add 0.01 mm (0.0004 in)
0
Use the selected washer thickness
+1
Subtract 0.01 mm (0.0004 in)
+2
Subtract 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
+3
Subtract 0.03 mm (0.0012 in)
+4
Subtract 0.04 mm (0.0016 in)
+5
Subtract 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
+6
Subtract 0.06 mm (0.0024 in)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
13. Remove the J34309 pinion preload shim selector tool from the
final drive housing and disassemble to retrieve the pinion bearings.
AT
TF
AX
SU
SPD220A
TOOTH CONTACT
NAPD0040S02
Gear tooth contact pattern check is necessary to verify correct
relationship between ring gear and drive pinion.
Hypoid gear sets which are not positioned properly in relation to
one another may be noisy, or have short life or both. With a pattern check, the most desirable contact for low noise level and long
life can be assured.
BR
ST
RS
BT
1.
2.
Thoroughly clean ring gear and drive pinion teeth.
Sparingly apply a mixture of powdered ferric oxide and oil or
equivalent to 3 or 4 teeth of ring gear drive side.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SPD005
PD-57
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Adjustment (Cont’d)
3.
Hold companion flange steady by hand and rotate the ring gear
in both directions.
SPD695
SPD007-B
Assembly
DIFFERENTIAL CASE
NAPD0041
NAPD0041S01
1.
Install side gears, pinion mate gears and thrust washers into
differential case.
2.
Fit pinion mate shaft to differential case so that it meets lock
pin holes.
Adjust backlash between side gear and pinion mate gear by
selecting side gear thrust washer.
Refer to SDS, PD-63.
Backlash between side gear and pinion mate gear
(Clearance between side gear thrust washer and differential case):
0.10 - 0.20 mm (0.0039 - 0.0079 in)
SPD552
3.
SPD258
PD-58
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Assembly (Cont’d)
4. Install pinion mate shaft lock pin with a punch.
Make sure lock pin is flush with case.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SPD030
5.
Apply gear oil to gear tooth surfaces and thrust surfaces and
check to see they turn properly.
6. Install differential case assembly on ring gear.
Tighten bolts in a criss-cross pattern, lightly tapping bolt head
with a hammer.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SPD322
7.
Press-fit side bearing inner cones on differential case with Tool.
Tool number:
A ST33190000 (J25523)
B ST33081000 (
—
)
AT
TF
AX
SU
PD244
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
1.
Press-fit front and rear bearing outer races with Tools.
Tool number:
A ST30611000 (J25742-1)
B ST30621000 (J25742-5)
C ST30613000 (J25742-3)
NAPD0041S02
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SPD580
PD-59
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Assembly (Cont’d)
2.
3.
Select drive pinion height adjusting washer. Refer to
“Adjustment”, PD-54.
Install drive pinion adjusting washer in drive pinion, and pressfit pinion rear bearing inner cone in it, with press and Tool.
Tool number:
ST30901000 (J26010-01)
SPD377
4.
Place pinion front bearing inner cone in gear carrier.
5.
Apply multi-purpose grease to cavity at sealing lips of oil seal.
Install front oil seal.
Tool number:
A ST30720000 (J25405)
B KV38102510 (
—
)
6.
Install drive pinion bearing spacer, pinion bearing adjusting
shim and drive pinion in gear carrier.
7.
Insert companion flange into drive pinion by tapping the companion flange with a soft hammer.
SPD581
SPD291A
SPD935-A
SPD697
PD-60
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Assembly (Cont’d)
8. Tighten pinion nut to the specified torque.
The threaded portion of drive pinion and pinion nut should be
free from oil or grease.
Tool number: KV38108300 (J44195)
GI
MA
EM
LC
SPD481A
9.
SPD149
Turn drive pinion in both directions several times, and measure
pinion bearing preload.
Tool number: ST3127S000 (J25765-A)
Pinion bearing preload (Without front oil seal):
0.12 - 0.20 N·m (1.2 - 2.0 kg-cm, 1.0 - 1.7 in-lb)
If preload is out of specification, adjust the thickness of spacer and
shim combination by replacing shim and spacer with thinner one.
I Start from the combination of thickest spacer and shim.
I Combine each spacer and shim thickness one by one until the
correct specification are achieved.
Drive pinion bearing preload adjusting spacer and
shim:
Refer to SDS, PD-65.
10. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races
into gear carrier.
11. Position side bearing adjusters on gear carrier with threads
properly engaged; screw in adjusters lightly at this stage of
assembly.
Tool number: ST32580000 (J34312)
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
AX
SU
SPD684
12. Align mark on bearing cap with that on gear carrier and install
bearing cap on gear carrier.
I Do not tighten at this point to allow further tightening of side
bearing adjusters.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SPD265
13. Tighten both right and left side bearing adjusters alternately
and measure ring gear backlash and total preload at the same
time. Adjust right and left side bearing adjusters by tightening
them alternately so that proper ring gear backlash and total
preload can be obtained.
Ring gear-to-drive pinion backlash:
0.13 - 0.18 mm (0.0051 - 0.0071 in)
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SPD246
PD-61
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Assembly (Cont’d)
I
When checking preload, turn drive pinion in both directions several times to set bearing rollers.
Tool number: ST3127S000 (J25765-A)
Total preload:
P1 + [0.3 - 0.4 N·m (3 - 4 kg-cm, 2.6 - 3.5 in-lb)]
P1 = Drive pinion preload
SPD149
14. Tighten side bearing cap bolts.
15. Install side lock finger in place to prevent rotation during operation.
SPD698
16. Check runout of ring gear with a dial indicator.
Runout limit: 0.08 mm (0.0031 in)
I If backlash varies excessively in different places, the variance
may have resulted from foreign matter caught between the ring
gear and the differential case.
I If the backlash varies greatly when the runout of the ring gear
is within a specified range, the hypoid gear set or differential
case should be replaced.
17. Check tooth contact. Refer to “TOOTH CONTACT”, PD-57.
SPD247
Service Data and Specifications (SDS)
H233B
General Specifications
NAPD0042
NAPD0042S01
2WD Model
NAPD0042S0101
Applied model
Standard
Optional (SE grade)
H233B
Rear final drive
2-pinion
LSD
Gear ratio
4.363
Number of teeth (Ring gear/drive pinion)
48/11
Oil capacity (Approx.) (US pt, lmp pt)
2.8 (5-7/8, 4-7/8)
4WD Model
NAPD0042S0102
Applied model
All
Standard
Rear final drive
Optional
H233B
2-pinion
Gear ratio
LSD
4.363
PD-62
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Service Data and Specifications (SDS) (Cont’d)
Applied model
GI
All
Number of teeth (Ring gear/drive pinion)
48/11
Oil capacity (Approx.)
(US pt, lmp pt)
EM
Ring Gear Runout
Ring gear runout limit
MA
2.8 (5-7/8, 4-7/8)
NAPD0042S02
mm (in)
0.08 (0.0031)
LC
Side Gear Adjustment
NAPD0042S03
Side gear backlash (Clearance between side gear and differential case)
Available side
gear thrust
washers
mm (in)
EC
0.10 - 0.20 (0.0039 - 0.0079)
Thickness mm (in)
Part number*
1.75 (0.0689)
1.80 (0.0709)
1.85 (0.0728)
38424-T5000
38424-T5001
38424-T5002
FE
CL
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Differential Torque Adjustment (LSD models)
Differential torque
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
40 - 58 (4 - 6, 29 - 43)
Friction disc
Total thickness
2
0.1 (0.004)
mm (in)
0.08 (0.0031)
mm (in)
Available discs
and plates
TF
1
mm (in)
Plate name
AT
5
Spacer
Allowable warpage of friction disc and plate
18.57 - 20.43 (0.7311 - 0.8043)
Thickness
mm (in)
AX
Part number*
Friction disc
1.4 (0.055)
1.5 (0.059)
1.6 (0.063)
38433-C6004 (Adjusting type)
38433-C6002 (Standard type)
38433-C6003 (Adjusting type)
SU
Friction plate
1.4 (0.055)
1.5 (0.059)
1.6 (0.063)
38432-C6002 (Adjusting type)
38432-C6001 (Standard type)
38432-C6003 (Adjusting type)
BR
Spring plate
1.5 (0.059)
38435-S9200
Spacer
6.0 (0.236)
38454-S9200
ST
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
RS
Total Preload Adjustment
Total preload
NAPD0042S05
N·m (kg-cm, in-lb)
Ring gear backlash
MT
2
Number of discs, plates and spacer Friction plate
(One side)
Spring plate
Wear limit of plate and disc
NAPD0042S04
P1 + [0.3 - 0.4 (3 - 4, 2.6 - 3.5)]
mm (in)
BT
0.13 - 0.18 (0.0051 - 0.0071)
Side bearing adjusting method
Side adjuster
HA
P1 = Drive pinion preload
SC
EL
IDX
PD-63
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Service Data and Specifications (SDS) (Cont’d)
Drive Pinion Height Adjustment
Available pinion height
adjust washers
NAPD0042S06
Thickness mm (in)
Part number*
2.58 (0.1016)
2.61 (0.1028)
2.64 (0.1039)
2.67 (0.1051)
2.70 (0.1063)
2.73 (0.1075)
2.76 (0.1087)
2.79 (0.1098)
2.82 (0.1110)
2.85 (0.1122)
2.88 (0.1134)
2.91 (0.1146)
2.94 (0.1157)
2.97 (0.1169)
3.00 (0.1181)
3.03 (0.1193)
3.06 (0.1205)
3.09 (0.1217)
3.12 (0.1228)
3.15 (0.1240)
3.18 (0.1252)
3.21 (0.1264)
3.24 (0.1276)
3.27 (0.1287)
3.30 (0.1299)
3.33 (0.1311)
3.36 (0.1323)
3.39 (0.1335)
3.42 (0.1346)
3.45 (0.1358)
3.48 (0.1370)
3.51 (0.1382)
3.54 (0.1394)
3.57 (0.1406)
3.60 (0.1417)
3.63 (0.1429)
3.66 (0.1441)
38151-01J00
38151-01J01
38151-01J02
38151-01J03
38151-01J04
38151-01J05
38151-01J06
38151-01J07
38151-01J08
38151-01J09
38151-01J10
38151-01J11
38151-01J12
38151-01J13
38151-01J14
38151-01J15
38151-01J16
38151-01J17
38151-01J18
38151-01J19
38151-01J60
38151-01J61
38151-01J62
38151-01J63
38151-01J64
38151-01J65
38151-01J66
38151-01J67
38151-01J68
38151-01J69
38151-01J70
38151-01J71
38151-01J72
38151-01J73
38151-01J74
38151-01J75
38151-01J76
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
PD-64
REAR FINAL DRIVE
H233B
Service Data and Specifications (SDS) (Cont’d)
Drive Pinion Preload Adjustment
NAPD0042S07
Drive pinion bearing preload adjusting method
Drive pinion preload without front oil seal
Adjusting shim and spacer
N·m (kg-cm, in-lb)
[P1]
Thickness mm (in)
Available front
drive pinion
bearing adjusting shims
2.31
2.33
2.35
2.37
2.39
2.41
2.43
2.45
2.47
2.49
2.51
2.53
2.55
2.57
2.59
4.50
4.75
5.00
5.25
5.50
1.2 - 2.0 (12 - 20, 10 - 17)
MA
Part number*
(0.0909)
(0.0917)
(0.0925)
(0.0933)
(0.0941)
(0.0949)
(0.0957)
(0.0965)
(0.0972)
(0.0980)
(0.0988)
(0.0996)
(0.1004)
(0.1012)
(0.1020)
38125-82100
38126-82100
38127-82100
38128-82100
38129-82100
38130-82100
38131-82100
38132-82100
38133-82100
38134-82100
38135-82100
38136-82100
38137-82100
38138-82100
38139-82100
Thickness mm (in)
Available drive
pinion bearing
adjusting spacers
GI
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
Part number*
(0.1772)
(0.1870)
(0.1969)
(0.2067)
(0.2165)
38165-76000
38166-76000
38167-76000
38166-01J00
38166-01J10
MT
AT
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
TF
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
PD-65
NOTES
STEERING SYSTEM
SECTION
ST
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS ...............................................................2
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR
BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″...............2
Precautions for SRS ″AIR BAG″ and ″SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER″ Service...............................2
Precautions for Steering System.................................2
PREPARATION ...............................................................3
Special Service Tools ..................................................3
Commercial Service Tools ...........................................4
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................................6
NVH Troubleshooting Chart.........................................6
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ..................................................7
Checking Steering Wheel Play....................................7
Checking Neutral Position on Steering Wheel ............7
PRE-CHECKING ........................................................7
CHECKING ...............................................................7
Front Wheel Turning Angle..........................................7
Checking Gear Housing Movement ............................8
Adjusting Rack Retainer ..............................................8
Checking and Adjusting Drive Belts ............................8
Checking Fluid Level ...................................................8
Checking Fluid Leakage ..............................................8
Bleeding Hydraulic System..........................................9
Checking Steering Wheel Turning Force ....................9
Checking Hydraulic System.......................................10
STEERING WHEEL AND STEERING COLUMN .........11
Components...............................................................11
Removal and Installation ...........................................11
STEERING WHEEL .................................................11
STEERING COLUMN ...............................................12
Disassembly and Assembly.......................................13
Inspection...................................................................14
TILT MECHANISM ...................................................14
STEERING TRANSFER GEAR .....................................15
Removal.....................................................................15
Installation..................................................................16
Inspection...................................................................16
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE ................17
Components...............................................................17
Removal and Installation ...........................................18
Disassembly...............................................................19
Inspection...................................................................20
BOOT .....................................................................20
RACK .....................................................................20
PINION ASSEMBLY .................................................20
GEAR HOUSING CYLINDER ....................................20
TIE-ROD OUTER AND INNER SOCKETS..................21
Assembly ...................................................................21
Adjustment .................................................................24
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP....................................27
Components...............................................................27
Pre-disassembly Inspection.......................................27
Disassembly...............................................................28
Inspection...................................................................29
Assembly ...................................................................29
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .........32
General Specifications...............................................32
Steering Wheel ..........................................................32
Steering Column ........................................................32
Steering Transfer Gear ..............................................32
Steering Gear and Linkage .......................................33
Power Steering ..........................................................33
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
PRECAUTIONS
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR
BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
NAST0047
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL R50 is as follows:
I For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
I For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of side air bag module (located in the outer side of front seat),
side curtain air bag module (locating in the headliner side of front and rear seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring harness, warning lamp (one
of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
WARNING:
I To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
I Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.
I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connector (and by yellow harness protector or yellow insulation tape before the harness connectors).
Precautions for SRS “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” Service
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Precautions for Steering System
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NAST0048
Do not use electrical test equipment to check SRS circuits unless instructed to in this Service Manual.
Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch “OFF”, disconnect battery ground cable and wait at least 3
minutes.
For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag and seat belt
pre-tensioner to deploy. Therefore, do not work on any SRS connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes
have passed.
Diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with their arrow marks “g” pointing towards the front of
the vehicle for proper operation. Also check diagnosis sensor unit for cracks, deformities or rust before
installation and replace as required.
The spiral cable must be aligned with the neutral position since its rotations are limited. Do not attempt to
turn steering wheel or column after removal of steering gear.
Handle air bag module carefully. Always place driver and passenger air bag modules with the pad side
facing upward and side air bag module standing with the stud bolt side setting bottom.
Conduct self-diagnosis to check entire SRS for proper function after replacing any components.
After air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly should be replaced if damaged.
NAST0046
Before disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the unit.
Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. It is important to prevent the internal parts from
becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
Place disassembled parts in order, on a parts rack, for easier and proper assembly.
Use nylon cloths or paper towels to clean the parts; common shop rags can leave lint that might
interfere with their operation.
Before inspection or reassembly, carefully clean all parts with a general purpose, non-flammable
solvent.
Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended power steering fluid* to hydraulic parts. Vaseline
may be applied to O-rings and seals. Do not use any grease.
Replace all gaskets, seals and O-rings. Avoid damaging O-rings, seals and gaskets during installation. Perform functional tests whenever designated.
*: Genuine Nissan PSF II or equivalent. Refer to MA-12, “Fluids and Lubricants”.
ST-2
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
Special Service Tools
NAST0003
GI
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
MA
Description
KV48100700
(J26364)
Torque adapter
Measuring pinion rotating torque
EM
LC
NT169
ST35300000
(
—
Drift
Installing power steering oil pump oil seal
a: 59 mm (2.32 in) dia.
b: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia.
)
EC
FE
CL
NT073
ST27180001
(J25726-A)
Steering wheel puller
Removing steering wheel
MT
AT
TF
NT544
ST29020001
(J24319-01)
Ball joint remover
Removing ball joint
a: 34 mm (1.34 in)
b: 6.5 mm (0.256 in)
c: 61.5 mm (2.421 in)
PD
AX
SU
NT694
KV48103500
(J26357 and J26357-10)
Pressure gauge
Measuring oil pressure
BR
RS
NT547
KV48102500
(
—
)
Pressure gauge adapter
Measuring oil pressure
BT
HA
SC
NT542
EL
IDX
ST-3
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools (Cont’d)
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
ST3127S000
(See J25765-A)
1 GG91030000
(J25765-A)
Torque wrench
2 HT62940000
(
—
)
Socket adapter
3 HT62900000
(
—
)
Socket adapter
Description
Measuring turning torque
NT541
KV48104400
(
—
)
Rack seal ring reformer
Reforming teflon ring
a: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia.
b: 36 mm (1.42 in) dia.
c: 100 mm (3.94 in)
NT550
KV48103400
(
—
)
Torque adapter
Measuring steering transfer gear rotating
torque
NT236
KV48104200
(
—
)
Rear cover wrench
Removing and installing gear housing end
cover
a: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia.
b: 5 mm (0.20 in)
c: 3 mm (0.12 in) dia.
d: 5 mm (0.20 in)
NT540
Commercial Service Tools
Tool name
Description
Rear oil seal drift
Installing rear oil seal
a: 28 mm (1.10 in) dia.
NT063
ST-4
NAST0004
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools (Cont’d)
Tool name
GI
Description
Pinion oil seal drift
Installing pinion oil seal
a: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia.
MA
EM
NT063
Oil pump attachment
Disassembling and assembling oil pump
Unit: mm (in)
LC
EC
FE
NT179
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ST-5
×
Tie-rod ball joint swinging force
ST-21
×
Tie-rod ball joint rotating torque
ST-21
×
Tie-rod ball joint end play
ST-21
×
Steering gear fluid leakage
ST-8
×
Steering wheel play
ST-7
×
Steering gear rack sliding force
ST-9
×
Drive belt looseness
MA-14
×
Steering column deformation or damage
ST-13
×
Improper installation or looseness of steering column
ST-13
Steering linkage looseness
ST-17
×
PROPELLER SHAFT
PD-4
×
DIFFERENTIAL
PD-4
×
DRIVE SHAFT
AX-3
×
AXLE
AX-3
×
SUSPENSION
SU-4
×
TIRES
SU-4
×
ROAD WHEEL
SU-4
×
BRAKES
BR-7
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
NAST0043
×
ST-8
×
—
NAST0043S01
×
Mounting rubber deterioration
×
×
ST-13
×
×
×
Improper installation or looseness or tilt lock lever
×
×
×
Improper steering wheel
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
ST-9
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
×
Air in hydraulic system
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
×
ST-8
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
Reference page
Noise
Shake
Shimmy
Judder
STEERING Vibration
Possible cause and
SUSPECTED PARTS
Symptom
×: Applicable
ST-6
Fluid level
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Checking Steering Wheel Play
Checking Steering Wheel Play
1.
2.
SST489B
NAST0005
With wheels in a straight-ahead position, check steering wheel
play.
Steering wheel play:
35 mm (1.38 in) or less
If it is not within specification, check the following for loose or
worn components.
Steering gear assembly
Steering column
Front suspension and axle
Checking Neutral Position on Steering Wheel
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
NAST0006
PRE-CHECKING
I
I
CHECKING
1.
SST490BA
2.
3.
NAST0006S01
Make sure that wheel alignment is correct.
Wheel alignment:
Refer to SU-34, “Wheel Alignment”.
Verify that the steering gear is centered before removing the
steering wheel.
FE
CL
MT
NAST0006S02
Check that the steering wheel is in the neutral position when
driving straight ahead.
If it is not in the neutral position, remove the steering wheel and
reinstall it correctly.
If the neutral position is between two teeth, loosen tie-rod lock
nuts. Turn the tie-rods by the same amount in opposite directions on both left and right sides.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
Front Wheel Turning Angle
1.
NAST0007
Rotate steering wheel all the way right and left; measure turning angle.
Turning angle of full turns:
Refer to SU-34, “Wheel Alignment”.
BR
RS
BT
SMA127
2.
If it is not within specification, check rack stroke.
Rack stroke “S”:
Refer to SDS (ST-33).
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SST651C
ST-7
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Checking Gear Housing Movement
Checking Gear Housing Movement
1.
I
2.
NAST0008
Check the movement of steering gear housing during stationary steering on a dry paved surface.
Apply a force of 49 N (5 kg, 11 lb) to steering wheel to check
the gear housing movement.
Turn off ignition key while checking.
Movement of gear housing:
±2 mm (±0.08 in) or less
If movement exceeds the limit, replace mount insulator after
confirming proper installation of gear housing clamps.
SST601C
Adjusting Rack Retainer
I
a)
b)
I
NAST0009
Perform this driving test on a flat road.
Check whether vehicle moves in a straight line when steering
wheel is released.
Check whether steering wheel returns to neutral position when
steering wheel is released from a slightly turned (approx. 20°)
position.
If any abnormality is found, correct it by resetting adjusting
screw.
SST602C
Checking and Adjusting Drive Belts
NAST0010
Refer to MA-14, “Checking Drive Belts”.
Checking Fluid Level
NAST0011
Check fluid level.
Use the correct range of the dipstick depending on the fluid temperature. Use the “HOT” range at 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F), or the
“COLD” range at 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
CAUTION:
I Do not overfill.
I Recommended fluid is Genuine Nissan PSF II or equivalent. Refer to MA-12, “Fluids and Lubricants”.
SST280BA
Checking Fluid Leakage
NAST0012
Check the lines for improper attachment and for leaks, cracks,
damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration.
1. Run engine between idle speed and 1,000 rpm.
Make sure temperature of fluid in reservoir tank rises to 50 to
80°C (122 to 176°F).
2. Turn steering wheel right-to-left several times.
3. Hold steering wheel at each “lock” position for five seconds
and carefully check for fluid leakage.
SST458C
ST-8
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Checking Fluid Leakage (Cont’d)
CAUTION:
Do not hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more
than 15 seconds.
4. If fluid leakage at connectors is noticed, loosen flare nut and
then retighten.
Do not overtighten connector as this can damage O-ring,
washer and connector.
5. Check rack boots for accumulation of power steering fluid.
GI
MA
EM
LC
Bleeding Hydraulic System
EC
NAST0013
1.
2.
Raise front end of vehicle until wheels are clear of the ground.
Add fluid into reservoir tank to specified level. Then, quickly
turn steering wheel fully to right and left and lightly touch steering stoppers.
Repeat steering wheel operation until fluid level no longer
decreases.
3. Start engine.
Repeat step 2 above.
I Incomplete air bleeding will cause the following to occur. When
this happens, bleed air again.
a) Air bubbles in reservoir tank
b) Clicking noise in oil pump
c) Excessive buzzing in oil pump
Fluid noise may occur in the valve or oil pump. This is common
when the vehicle is stationary or while turning steering wheel
slowly. This does not affect performance or durability of the system.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
Checking Steering Wheel Turning Force
1.
2.
3.
SST491B
SST090B
NAST0014
Park vehicle on a level, dry surface and set parking brake.
Start engine.
Bring power steering fluid up to adequate operating temperature. [Make sure temperature of fluid is approximately 50 to
80°C (122 to 176°F).]
Tires need to be inflated to normal pressure.
4. Check steering wheel turning force when steering wheel has
been turned 360° from the neutral position.
Steering wheel turning force:
39 N (4 kg, 9 lb) or less
5. If steering wheel turning force is out of specification, check
rack sliding force.
a. Disconnect steering column lower joint and knuckle arms from
the gear.
b. Start and run engine at idle to make sure steering fluid has
reached normal operating temperature.
c. Pull tie-rod slowly to move it from neutral position to ±11.5 mm
(±0.453 in) at speed of 3.5 mm (0.138 in)/s. Check that rack
sliding force is within specification.
Rack sliding force:
167 - 254 N (17.0 - 25.9 kg, 37 - 57 lb)
ST-9
BR
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Checking Steering Wheel Turning Force (Cont’d)
6.
7.
If rack sliding force is not within specification, overhaul steering gear assembly.
If rack sliding force is OK, inspect steering column. Refer to
“Inspection”, “STEERING WHEEL AND STEERING
COLUMN”, ST-14.
Checking Hydraulic System
SST834-F
NAST0015
Before starting, check belt tension, driving pulley and tire pressure.
1. Set Tool. Open shut-off valve. Then bleed air.
Refer to “Bleeding Hydraulic System”, ST-9.
2. Run engine, at idle speed or 1,000 rpm.
Make sure fluid temperature in reservoir tank rises to 50 to
80°C (122 to 176°F).
WARNING:
Warm up engine with shut-off valve fully opened. If engine is
started with shut-off valve closed, fluid pressure in the power
steering pump increase to maximum. This will raise fluid temperature abnormally.
3. Check pressure with steering wheel fully turned to left and right
positions with engine idling at 1,000 rpm.
CAUTION:
Do not hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more
than 15 seconds.
Power steering pump maximum operating pressure:
8,630 - 9,219 kPa
(88 - 94 kg/cm2, 1,251 - 1,337 psi)
I If pressure reaches maximum operating pressure, system is
OK.
I If pressure increases above maximum operating pressure,
check power steering pump flow control valve. Refer to ST-28.
4. If power steering pressure is below the maximum operating
pressure, slowly close shut-off valve and check pressure
again.
CAUTION:
Do not close shut-off valve for more than 15 seconds.
I If pressure increases to maximum operating pressure, gear
should be damaged. Refer to “Removal and Installation”,
ST-18.
I If pressure remains below maximum operating pressure, pump
should be damaged. Refer to “Disassembly”, ST-28.
5. After checking hydraulic system, remove Tool and add fluid as
necessary. Then completely bleed air out of system. Refer to
ST-9.
ST-10
STEERING WHEEL AND STEERING COLUMN
Components
Components
NAST0016
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SST010D
1.
2.
Air bag module
Steering wheel
3.
4.
Spiral cable
Combination switch
5.
6.
Steering column assembly
Column cover
MT
AT
CAUTION:
I The rotation of the spiral cable (SRS “AIR BAG” component part) is limited. If the steering gear must be removed,
set the front wheels in the straight-ahead direction. Do not
rotate the steering column while the steering gear is
removed.
I Remove the steering wheel before removing the steering
lower joint to avoid damaging the SRS spiral cable.
TF
PD
AX
SU
Removal and Installation
STEERING WHEEL
1.
NAST0017
NAST0017S01
BR
Remove air bag module and spiral cable. Refer to RS-18,
“Removal — Air Bag Module and Spiral Cable”.
RS
BT
SBF812E
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ST-11
STEERING WHEEL AND STEERING COLUMN
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
2.
a.
b.
Align spiral cable correctly when installing steering wheel.
Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position.
Make sure that the spiral cable is in the neutral position.
The neutral position is detected by turning left about 2.5 revolutions from the right end position. Align the two marks ( ).
CAUTION:
I The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the
cable is installed in an improper position.
I Also, with the steering linkage disconnected, the cable
may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited
number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned to the left
about 2.5 turns from the right end position.
SRS266
3.
Remove steering wheel with Tool.
4.
Remove key interlock cable.
SST818C
SST329C
STEERING COLUMN
I
I
NAST0017S02
When installing steering column, fingertighten all lower bracket
and clamp retaining bolts; then tighten them securely. Do not
apply undue stress to steering column.
When attaching coupling joint, be sure tightening bolt faces
cutout portion.
SST844C
ST-12
STEERING WHEEL AND STEERING COLUMN
Disassembly and Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly
NAST0018
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SST845C
1.
2.
3.
Combination switch
Lock nut
Jacket tube assembly
4.
5.
6.
Tilt lever
Tilt spring
Steering column shaft assembly
7.
8.
9.
Band
Jacket tube bracket insulator
assembly
Hole cover
PD
AX
SU
I
I
When disassembling and assembling, unlock steering lock
with key.
Install lock nut on steering column shaft and tighten the nut to
specification.
: 25 - 34 N·m (2.5 - 3.5 kg-m, 18 - 25 ft-lb)
BR
RS
BT
SST490C
I
a)
b)
Steering lock
Break self-shear type screws with a drill or other appropriate
tool.
Install new self-shear type screws and then cut off self-shear
type screw heads.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SST742A
ST-13
STEERING WHEEL AND STEERING COLUMN
Inspection
Inspection
I
a)
b)
I
SST606C
NAST0019
When steering wheel does not turn smoothly, check the steering column as follows and replace damaged parts.
Check column bearings for damage and unevenness. Lubricate with recommended multi-purpose grease or replace steering column as an assembly, if necessary.
Check steering column lower shaft for deformation and breakage. Replace if necessary.
When the vehicle comes into a light collision, check length “L1”,
“L2” and “L3”.
Steering column length “L1”:
716.7 - 718.7 mm (28.22 - 28.30 in)
Steering column lower shaft length “L2”:
178 - 180 mm (7.01 - 7.09 in)
Steering column upper joint length “L3”:
430.7 - 432.7 mm (16.96 - 17.04 in)
If out of the specifications, replace steering column upper joint
or steering column as an assembly.
SST607C
TILT MECHANISM
NAST0019S01
After installing steering column, check tilt mechanism operation.
SST582BE
ST-14
STEERING TRANSFER GEAR
Removal
Removal
NAST0021
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SST846C
1.
2.
Power steering gear assembly
Steering column lower joint
3.
Transfer gear assembly
4.
Steering column upper joint
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
1.
2.
Set wheels in the straight-ahead position.
Straight-forward position is indicated by a protrusion on the
power steering gear rear cover cap and matching mark on the
rear housing.
BR
RS
BT
SST609C
3.
4.
Remove steering column upper and lower joint from transfer
gear.
Remove transfer gear assembly.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SST610C
ST-15
STEERING TRANSFER GEAR
Installation
Installation
1.
2.
3.
4.
NAST0022
Set wheels in the straight-ahead position.
Install transfer gear assembly.
Install column lower joint while aligning groove with protrusions
on the steering gear rear cover cap.
Tighten bolt while aligning groove on steering gear. Before
tightening bolt, ensure it is inserted correctly.
SST847C
5.
When attaching steering column upper and lower joint to transfer gear, it must be positioned as shown in figure at left.
SST848C
Inspection
SST707CA
NAST0024
Do not disassemble steering transfer gear assembly.
I Check that steering transfer gear assembly operates smoothly.
Also check for grease leakage, deformation and damage.
Replace steering transfer gear assembly if necessary.
I Check rotating torque at input shaft in 360° and in both directions.
Rotating torque:
0.25 - 0.69 N·m (2.5 - 7.0 kg-cm, 2.2 - 6.1 in-lb)
If rotating torque is out of specification, replace steering transfer gear assembly.
ST-16
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
Components
Components
NAST0026
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
RS
SST618CB
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Rear cover cap
Rear housing assembly
Pinion seal ring
Pinion assembly
O-ring
Shim
Pinion oil seal
Lock nut
Adjusting screw
Spring
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Retainer
Gear housing assembly
Rack oil seal
Rack assembly
Rack seal ring
O-ring
O-ring
Rack bushing
Rack oil seal
Snap ring
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
End cover assembly
Boot clamp
Dust boot
Boot clamp
Lock plate
Tie-rod inner socket
Tie-rod
Tie-rod outer socket
Cotter pin
Cylinder tube
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ST-17
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
NAST0027
SST011D
1.
2.
Gear and linkage assembly
Rack mounting insulator
3.
Gear housing mounting bracket
4.
Cotter pin
CAUTION:
I The rotation of the spiral cable (SRS “AIR BAG” component part) is limited. If the steering gear must be removed,
set the front wheels in the straight-ahead direction. Do not
rotate the steering column while the steering gear is
removed.
I Remove the steering wheel before removing the steering
lower joint to avoid damaging the SRS spiral cable.
I Detach tie-rod outer sockets from knuckle arms with Tool.
SFA756B
I
I
SST615C
I
Install pipe connector.
Observe specified tightening torque when tightening high-pressure and low-pressure pipe connectors. Excessive tightening
will damage threads of connector or O-ring.
Connector tightening torque:
Low-pressure side “1”
30 - 35 N·m (3.1 - 3.6 kg-m, 22 - 26 ft-lb)
High-pressure side “2”
30 - 35 N·m (3.1 - 3.6 kg-m, 22 - 26 ft-lb)
The O-ring in low-pressure pipe connector is larger than that
ST-18
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
in high-pressure connector. Take care to install the proper
O-ring.
GI
MA
EM
LC
I
Initially, tighten nut on tie-rod outer socket and knuckle arm to
64 to 69 N·m (6.5 to 7.0 kg-m, 47 to 51 ft-lb). Then tighten further to align nut groove with first pin hole so that cotter pin can
be installed.
CAUTION:
Tightening torque must not exceed 108 N·m (11.0 kg-m, 80 ftlb).
EC
FE
CL
MT
SST616C
I
I
Before removing steering column lower joint from gear, set
gear in neutral (wheels in straight-ahead position). After
removing steering column lower joint, put matching mark on
pinion shaft and pinion housing to record neutral position.
To install, set left and right dust boots to equal deflection.
Attach steering column lower joint by aligning matching marks
of pinion shaft and pinion housing.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SST819A
I
Tighten gear housing mounting bracket bolts in the order
shown.
Secure tightening torque:
157 - 186 N·m (16 - 18 kg-m, 116 - 137 ft-lb)
BR
RS
BT
SST617C
Disassembly
1.
SST718CA
NAST0028
Prior to disassembling, measure pinion rotating torque. Record
the pinion rotating torque as a reference.
I Before measuring, disconnect cylinder tube and drain
fluid.
I Use soft jaws when holding steering gear housing. Handle
gear housing carefully, as it is made of aluminum. Do not
grip cylinder in a vise.
2. Remove pinion gear.
Be careful not to damage pinion gear when removing pinion
seal ring.
ST-19
HA
SC
EL
IDX
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
Disassembly (Cont’d)
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove tie-rod outer sockets and boots.
Loosen tie-rod inner socket by prying up staked portion, and
remove socket.
Remove retainer.
Remove pinion assembly.
Use a 2 to 2.5 mm (0.079 to 0.098 in) diameter drill to completely remove staked portion of gear housing end.
SST051C
8.
9.
10.
I
Remove gear housing end cover assembly with a suitable tool.
Draw out rack assembly.
Remove rack seal ring.
Using a heat gun, heat rack seal to approximately 40°C
(104°F).
I Remove rack seal ring.
Be careful not to damage rack.
SST652C
11. Remove rack bushing and rack oil seal using tape wrapped
socket and extension bar.
Do not scratch inner surfaces of pinion housing.
SST644C
Inspection
NAST0029
Thoroughly clean all parts in cleaning solvent or Genuine Nissan
PSF II or equivalent. Blow dry with compressed air, if available.
BOOT
I
I
NAST0029S01
Check condition of boot. If cracked excessively, replace it.
Check boots for accumulation of power steering fluid.
RACK
NAST0029S02
Thoroughly examine rack gear. If damaged, cracked and worn,
replace it.
PINION ASSEMBLY
I
I
NAST0029S03
Thoroughly examine pinion gear. If pinion gear is damaged,
cracked and worn, replace it.
Check that all bearings roll freely. Ensure that balls, rollers and
races are not cracked, pitted and worn.
GEAR HOUSING CYLINDER
NAST0029S04
Check gear housing cylinder bore for scratches and other damage.
Replace if necessary.
ST-20
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
Inspection (Cont’d)
TIE-ROD OUTER AND INNER SOCKETS
I
I
I
SST468C
I
NAST0029S05
Check ball joints for swinging force.
Tie-rod outer and inner ball joints swinging force “A”:
Refer to SDS, ST-33.
Check ball joint for rotating torque.
Tie-rod outer ball joint rotating torque “B”:
Refer to SDS, ST-33.
Check ball joints for axial end play.
Tie-rod outer and inner ball joints axial end play “C”:
Refer to SDS, ST-33.
Check condition of dust cover. If cracked excessively, replace
outer tie-rod.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
Assembly
1.
AT
NAST0030
Using a heat gun, heat new teflon rack seal ring to approximately 40°C (104°F). Then place it onto rack.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SST083B
2. Using Tool, compress rack seal ring securely on rack.
Always insert Tool from the rack gear side.
BR
RS
BT
SBR132C
3.
I
I
I
Insert new rack oil seal.
Place plastic film into rack oil seal to prevent damage by
rack teeth.
Do not forget to remove plastic film after rack oil seal is
positioned properly.
Make sure lips of rack oil seal face each other.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SST201A
ST-21
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
Assembly (Cont’d)
4.
Install rack oil seal and rack bushing with rack assembly.
5.
Insert rack oil seal and end cover assembly to rack. Then
tighten end cover assembly.
6.
Fasten cylinder end cover assembly to gear housing by staking.
7.
Set rack gear in the neutral position.
Rack stroke “S”:
Refer to SDS, ST-33.
SST645C
SST653C
SST654C
SST651C
8.
Coat seal lip of new pinion oil seal with multi-purpose grease.
Install it into pinion housing of gear with a suitable tool.
Make sure lip of oil seal faces up when installed.
SST381A
ST-22
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
Assembly (Cont’d)
9.
I
Install pinion bearing adjusting shim(s).
Whenever pinion assembly, gear housing and rear housing are
disassembled, replace shim(s) with new ones. Always use the
same number of shim(s) when replacing.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SST074B
10. Install new pinion seal ring (made of Teflon) on pinion gear
assembly.
I Using a heat gun, heat pinion seal ring to approximately 40°C
(104°F) before installing it onto pinion gear assembly.
I Make sure pinion seal ring is properly settled in valve groove.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SST085B
11. Apply a coat of multi-purpose grease to needle bearing roller
and oil seal lip.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SST075B
12. Install pinion assembly to rear housing.
Be careful not to damage pinion oil seal.
BR
RS
BT
SST552
13. Apply a coat of multi-purpose grease to new rear oil seal lip
before installing rear housing.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SST133C
ST-23
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
Assembly (Cont’d)
14. Ensure that the rack is centered. Install rear cover cap so that
its protrusion is positioned as shown in figure.
Be careful not to damage worm ring and oil seal.
15. Install retainer, spring and adjusting screw temporarily.
SST609C
16. Install new lock plate.
I Attach lock plate 2 to side rod inner socket 1.
I Apply locking sealant to inner socket threads 3.
Screw inner socket into rack 4 and tighten to specified torque.
I Clinch two places of lock plate at rack’s groove.
CAUTION:
To prevent scratching the boot, remove burrs from lock plate.
SST135C
17. Tighten outer socket lock nut.
Tie-rod length “L”:
Refer to SDS, ST-33.
18. Measure rack stroke.
Rack stroke “S”:
Refer to SDS, ST-33.
SST655C
19. Before installing boot, coat the contact surfaces between boot
and tie-rod with grease.
SST967A
Adjustment
NAST0031
Adjust pinion rotating torque as follows:
1. Set rack to the neutral position without fluid in the gear.
2. Coat the adjusting screw with locking sealant and screw it in.
3. Lightly tighten lock nut.
4. Tighten adjusting screw to a torque of 4.9 to 5.9 N·m (50 to 60
kg-cm, 43 to 52 in-lb).
5. Loosen adjusting screw, then retighten it to 0.2 N·m (2 kg-cm,
1.7 in-lb).
SST619C
ST-24
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
Adjustment (Cont’d)
6.
7.
8.
9.
Move rack over its entire stroke several times.
Measure pinion rotating torque within the range of 180° from
neutral position.
Stop the gear at the point of maximum torque.
Loosen adjusting screw, then retighten it to 4.9 to 5.9 N·m (50
to 60 kg-cm, 43 to 52 in-lb).
Loosen adjusting screw by 10° to 20°.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SST718CA
10. Prevent adjusting screw from turning, and tighten lock nut to
specified torque.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SST713C
SST718CA
11. Measure pinion rotating torque.
Lock to lock:
Average rotating torque
0.78 - 1.47 N·m (8.0 - 15.0 kg-cm, 6.9 - 13.0 in-lb)
Within ±100° from the neutral position:
Maximum torque variation
0.4 N·m (4 kg-cm, 3.5 in-lb)
Outside the above range:
Maximum force variation
0.6 N·m (6 kg-cm, 5.2 in-lb)
I
If pinion rotating torque is not within specifications, readjust it
starting from step 4. If pinion rotating torque is still out of
specifications after readjustment, replace steering gear
assembly.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
RS
BT
SST090B
12. Check rack sliding force on vehicle as follows:
a. Install steering gear onto vehicle, but do not connect tie-rod to
knuckle arm.
b. Connect all piping and fill with steering fluid.
c. Start engine and bleed air completely.
d. Disconnect steering column lower joint from the gear.
e. Keep engine at idle and make sure steering fluid has reached
normal operating temperature.
f. Pull tie-rod slowly to move it from neutral position to ±11.5 mm
(±0.453 in) at speed of 3.5 mm (0.138 in)/s. Check that rack
sliding force is within specification.
ST-25
HA
SC
EL
IDX
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
Adjustment (Cont’d)
I
I
Rack sliding force:
167 - 254 N (17.0 - 25.9 kg, 37 - 57 lb)
If rack sliding force is not within specification, readjust by
repeating adjustment procedure from the beginning.
If rack sliding force is still out of specification after
readjustment, gear assembly needs to be replaced.
ST-26
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
Components
Components
NAST0032
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SST924C
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Pulley and drive shaft
Front bracket
Oil seal
Suction pipe
O-ring
Casing
Flow control valve spring
Flow control A valve
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Dowel pin
Flow control B valve assembly
Side plate (Front)
Cam ring
Rotor
Vane
Snap ring
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Side plate (Rear)
Side plate inner seal
Side plate outer seal
O-ring
Rear cover
Power steering pump bracket
Copper washer
SU
BR
RS
BT
Pre-disassembly Inspection
NAST0033
Disassemble the power steering oil pump only if the following items
are found.
I Oil leak from any point shown in the figure.
I Deformed or damaged pulley.
I Poor performance.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SST925C
ST-27
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
Disassembly
Disassembly
NAST0034
CAUTION:
I Parts which can be disassembled are strictly limited.
Never disassemble parts other than those specified.
I Disassemble in as clean a place as possible.
I Clean your hands before disassembly.
I Do not use rags; use nylon cloths or paper towels.
I Follow the procedures and cautions in the Service
Manual.
I When disassembling and reassembling, do not let foreign
matter enter or contact the parts.
1. Fix power steering pump to vise.
CAUTION:
When fixing the pump to vise, use an aluminum plate or such
to avoid damaging the fitting plane of the steering pump.
2. Remove the front bracket mounting bolt, and remove the front
bracket from the casing.
3. Remove the cover body mounting bolt, and remove the rear
cover from the casing.
4. Remove the O-ring from the casing.
5.
Remove side plate (rear side) from cam ring, then remove side
plate inner/outer seals from side plate (rear side).
6. Remove rotor snap ring using snap ring pliers, and remove
pulley from casing.
CAUTION:
Do not damage pulley shaft when removing rotor snap ring.
SST926C
SST928C
7. Remove the followings from casing.
I Cam ring
I Rotor
I Vane
I Side plate (front side)
I Flow control A valve
I Flow control valve spring
I Flow control B valve assembly
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop flow control valve.
8. Remove suction pipe mounting bolt, and remove suction pipe
from casing.
9. Remove suction pipe O-ring from suction pipe.
10. Remove drive shaft oil seal from casing with a screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Do not damage casing surface with the screwdriver.
ST-28
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
Inspection
Inspection
I
I
I
I
I
NAST0035
If pulley is cracked or deformed, replace it.
If an oil leak is found around drive shaft oil seal, replace the
seal.
Check the casing and the inside of the rear cover for damage.
If damages are found in the rear cover, replace the rear cover.
If the casing is damaged, replace the power steering pump as
an assembly.
Check the cam ring for damage. If damage is found, replace
the cam ring, rotor and vane as a set.
Check the side plates (front and rear) for damage. If damage
is found, replace the side plates as a set (front and rear).
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
Assembly
AT
NAST0036
1.
Apply grease to the lip of the drive shaft oil seal, and attach the
casing.
CAUTION:
The drive shaft oil seal cannot be reused. Always replace after
every disassembly.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SST934C
2.
3.
When removing the dowel pin, if it is difficult to insert with your
hands, insert into the casing by tapping lightly with a hammer
or similar tool.
Attach the flow control A valve, flow control valve spring, and
the flow control B valve assembly to the locations indicated in
the drawing left.
BR
RS
BT
SST928C
4.
Match the dowel pin A on the flow control A valve side with the
notch B of the side plate (front), and attach the side plate (front)
to the casing.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SST929C
ST-29
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
Assembly (Cont’d)
5.
Face the cam ring side with fewer pores towards the casing,
and attach the cam ring on top of the side plate (front).
6. Attach the pulley to the casing.
CAUTION:
Attach with care so as not to damage the drive shaft oil seal.
SST930C
7.
Face the side of the rotor with the punch mark towards the
casing, and attach the rotor to the drive shaft.
8.
Attach the vane to the rotor so that the vane’s arc touches the
cam ring.
SST289A
SST843A
9.
Use a hammer or suitable tool to insert the rotor snap ring into
the drive shaft channel.
CAUTION:
I The rotor snap ring cannot be reused. Always replace after
every disassembly.
I Insert with care so as not to damage the rotor or the drive
shaft.
I If the rotor is damaged, replace the power steering as an
assembly.
SST931C
10. Match the dowel pin A on the flow control A valve side with the
notch B of the side plate (rear), and attach the side plate (rear)
to the cam ring.
11. Apply Genuine Nissan PSF II or equivalent to O-ring and
attach to the casing.
CAUTION:
The O-ring cannot be reused. Always replace after every disassembly.
SST932C
ST-30
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
Assembly (Cont’d)
SST933C
12. Attach a side plate inner seal and side plate outer seal with
Genuine Nissan PSF II or equivalent applied, to the side plate
(rear).
CAUTION:
The side plate inner seal and outer seal cannot be reused.
Always replace after every disassembly.
13. Set the power steering pump on the vice.
CAUTION:
When securing to the vise, use an aluminum plate or other
material to protect the installation surface of the power steering pump from damage.
14. Attach the rear cover to the casing, and secure the bolts (4
bolts) in a diagonal order to the specified torque.
15. Attach the front bracket to the casing, and secure the bolts (2
bolts) to the specified torque.
16. Attach the suction pipe O-ring to the grooves of the suction
pipe, and attach the suction pipe to the casing with attachment
bolts.
CAUTION:
The suction pipe O-ring cannot be reused. Always replace
after every disassembly.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ST-31
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications
General Specifications
NAST0037
Applied model
All
Steering model
Power steering
Steering gear type
PR32K
Steering overall gear ratio
17.2
Turns of steering wheel
(Lock to lock)
3.09
Steering column type
Collapsible, tilt
Steering Wheel
NAST0038
Unit: mm (in)
Steering wheel axial play
0 (0)
Steering wheel play
35 (1.38) or less
Movement of gear housing
±2 (±0.08) or less
Steering Column
NAST0039
Unit: mm (in)
Steering column length “L1”
716.7 - 718.7 (28.22 - 28.30)
Steering column lower shaft length “L2”
178 - 180 (7.01 - 7.09)
Steering column upper joint length “L3”
430.7 - 432.7 (16.96 - 17.04)
SST739C
Steering Transfer Gear
Rotating torque
NAST0041
0.25 - 0.69 N·m (2.5 - 7.0 kg-cm, 2.2 - 6.1 in-lb)
ST-32
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Steering Gear and Linkage
Steering Gear and Linkage
Applied model
GI
All
Steering gear type
MA
PR32K
Swinging force at cotter pin hole: “A”
Tie-rod outer ball joint
NAST0040
4.9 - 47.1 N (0.5 - 4.8 kg, 1.1 - 10.6 lb)
Rotating torque: “B”
0.3 - 2.9 N·m (3 - 30 kg-cm, 2.6 - 26.0 in-lb)
Axial end play: “C”
0.1 mm (0.004 in) or less
Swinging force*: “A”
EM
LC
3.9 - 32.4 N (0.4 - 3.3 kg, 0.9 - 7.3 lb)
Tie-rod inner ball joint
Axial end play: “C”
0.3 mm (0.012 in) or less
Tie-rod standard length “L”
Rack stroke “S”
72.0 mm (2.835 in)
FE
Lock to lock
Average rotating torque
Pinion gear preload without
gear fluid
EC
200 mm (7.87 in)
0.78 - 1.47 N·m (8.0 - 15.0 kg-cm, 6.9 - 13.0 in-lb)
Within ±100° from the neutral position
Maximum torque variation
0.4 N·m (4 kg-cm, 3.5 in-lb)
Outside the above range
Maximum torque variation
0.6 N·m (6 kg-cm, 5.2 in-lb)
CL
MT
*: Measuring point [: 240 mm (9.45 in)]
AT
TF
PD
AX
SST740C
SU
Power Steering
Steering gear type
PR32K
Rack sliding force
Under normal operating oil pressure
BR
167 - 254 N (17.0 - 25.9 kg, 37 - 57 lb)
Initial tightening torque
Retainer adjustment
(Adjustment screw)
NAST0042
4.9 - 5.9 N·m (50 - 60 kg-cm, 43 - 52 in-lb)
Retightening torque after loosening
Tightening torque after gear has settled
Returning angle
0.2 N·m (2 kg-cm, 1.7 in-lb)
10° - 20°
Steering wheel turning force
(Measured at one full turn from the neutral position)
RS
4.9 - 5.9 N·m (50 - 60 kg-cm, 43 - 52 in-lb)
BT
39 N (4 kg, 9 lb) or less
Fluid capacity (Approximate)
0.9 (1 US qt, 3/4 Imp qt)
Oil pump maximum pressure
8,630 - 9,219 kPa (88 - 94 kg/cm2, 1,251 - 1,337 psi)
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ST-33
NOTES
MAINTENANCE
SECTION
MA
GI
EM
LC
EC
FE
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS ...............................................................3
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) ″AIR BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER″ ......................................................3
PREPARATION ...............................................................4
Special Service Tool ....................................................4
Commercial Service Tool.............................................4
GENERAL MAINTENANCE ............................................5
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ............................................7
Schedule 1...................................................................8
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE .........8
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE ........................9
Schedule 2.................................................................10
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE .......10
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE ......................11
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS...........12
Fluids and Lubricants ................................................12
SAE Viscosity Number ..............................................13
GASOLINE ENGINE OIL ..........................................13
Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio .............................13
ENGINE MAINTENANCE ..............................................14
Checking Drive Belts .................................................14
Changing Engine Coolant..........................................15
-DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT- ..............................15
-REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT-..............................16
-FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM- ..............................16
Checking Fuel Lines ..................................................17
Changing Fuel Filter ..................................................17
WITH CONSULT-II ..............................................17
WITHOUT CONSULT-II .......................................18
Changing Air Cleaner Filter .......................................18
VISCOUS PAPER TYPE ...........................................18
Changing Engine Oil..................................................18
Changing Oil Filter.....................................................19
Changing Spark Plugs...............................................20
Checking EVAP Vapor Lines .....................................21
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE .......................22
Checking Exhaust System.........................................22
Checking Clutch Fluid Level and Leaks....................22
Checking M/T Oil .......................................................22
Changing M/T Oil.......................................................22
Checking A/T Fluid ....................................................23
Changing A/T Fluid ....................................................23
Checking Part Time 4WD Transfer Fluid...................24
Changing Part Time 4WD Transfer Fluid ..................24
Checking All-mode 4WD Transfer Fluid ....................24
Changing All-mode 4WD Transfer Fluid....................24
Checking Propeller Shaft...........................................25
Greasing Propeller Shaft ...........................................25
Checking Differential Gear Oil...................................25
Changing Differential Gear Oil ..................................26
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL GEAR........................26
Balancing Wheels ......................................................26
Tire Rotation ..............................................................26
Checking Brake Fluid Level and Leaks.....................27
Checking Brake Lines and Cables ............................27
Checking Disc Brake .................................................27
ROTOR ...................................................................27
CALIPER .................................................................27
PAD ........................................................................27
Checking Drum Brake ...............................................28
WHEEL CYLINDER ..................................................28
DRUM .....................................................................28
LINING ....................................................................28
TEMPORARY METHOD FOR CHECKING LINING
WEAR .....................................................................28
Checking Steering Gear, Linkage and Transfer
Gear ...........................................................................28
STEERING GEAR ....................................................28
STEERING LINKAGE ...............................................28
STEERING TRANSFER GEAR..................................28
Checking Power Steering Fluid and Lines ................29
CHECKING FLUID LEVEL ........................................29
CHECKING LINES ...................................................29
Axle and Suspension Parts .......................................29
FRONT WHEEL BEARING .......................................30
Drive Shaft .................................................................30
Lubricating Locks, Hinges and Hood Latches...........30
Checking Seat Belts, Buckles, Retractors,
Anchors and Adjusters...............................................31
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
CONTENTS
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .........32
Engine Maintenance ..................................................32
DRIVE BELT DEFLECTION ......................................32
DRIVE BELT TENSION ............................................32
MA-2
(Cont’d)
SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) ................32
Chassis and Body Maintenance................................32
WHEEL BALANCE ...................................................32
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System GI
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER”
NAMA0001
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL R50 is as follows:
I For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
I For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of side air bag module (located in the outer side of front seat),
side curtain air bag module (locating in the headlining side of front and rear seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring harness, warning lamp (one
of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
WARNING:
I To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
I Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.
I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connector (and by yellow harness protector or yellow insulation tape before the harness connectors).
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
MA-3
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
Special Service Tool
NAMA0002
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV10115801
(J38956)
Oil filter cap wrench
Removing oil filter
a: 64.3 mm (2.531 in)
NT375
Commercial Service Tool
Tool name
(Kent-Moore No.)
Description
Belt tension gauge
(BT3373-F)
Checking drive belt tension
AMA126
MA-4
NAMA0045
NAMA0003
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during the normal day-to-day operation
of the vehicle. They are essential if the vehicle is to continue operating properly. The owners can perform
checks and inspections themselves or they can have their NISSAN dealers do them.
OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
GI
The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.
Item
Tires
Wheel nuts
Reference page
Check the pressure with a gauge, including the spare, at least once a month
and always prior to a long distance trips. Adjust to the specified pressure if
necessary. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
—
When checking the tires, make sure no nuts are missing, and check for any
loose nuts. Tighten if necessary.
—
Tire rotation
Tires should be rotated every 12,000 km (7,500 miles).
Wheel alignment and
balance
If the vehicle pulls to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or
if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel
alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds,
wheel balancing may be needed.
Windshield wiper
blades
Doors and engine
hood
Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.
Check that all doors and the engine hood operate smoothly as well as the
trunk lid and back hatch. Also make sure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from
opening when the primary latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check
lubrication frequently.
MA-26, SU-8, “Front
Wheel Alignment”
EC
FE
CL
—
MT
MA-30
AT
TF
The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the
vehicle, etc.
Lamps
LC
MA-26
INSIDE THE VEHICLE
Item
EM
Reference page
PD
AX
Make sure that the headlamps, stop lamps, tail lamps, turn signal lamps, and
other lamps are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check
headlamp aim.
—
Warning lamps and
buzzers/chimes
Make sure that all warning lamps and buzzers/chimes are operating properly.
—
Windshield wiper and
washer
Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do
not streak.
—
Windshield defroster
Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioning.
—
Steering wheel
Check that it has the specified play. Be sure to check for changes in the
steering condition, such as excessive play, hard steering or strange noises.
Free play: Less than 35 mm (1.38 in)
—
Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to
make sure they operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in every
position. Check that the head restrains move up and down smoothly and that
the locks (if equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Check that the
latches lock securely for folding-down rear seatbacks.
—
HA
Seat belts
Check that all parts of the seat belt system (e.g. buckles, anchors, adjusters
and retractors) operate properly and smoothly and are installed securely.
Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
MA-31
RS-8, “Seat Belt Inspection”
SC
Clutch pedal
Make sure the pedal operates smoothly and check that it has the proper free
play.
CL-6, “Adjusting Clutch
Pedal”
Brakes
Check that the brake does not pull the vehicle to one side when applied.
Seats
MA-5
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
—
EL
IDX
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Item
Reference page
Brake pedal and
booster
Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure it has the proper distance under it when depressed fully. Check the brake booster function. Be
sure to keep floor mats away from the pedal.
Refer to BR-13, “Brake
Pedal and Bracket” and
“Brake Booster”
Parking brake
Check that the lever has the proper travel and make sure that the vehicle is
held securely on a fairly steep hill when only the parking brake is applied.
Refer to BR-31, “Parking
Brake Control”
Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism
Check that the lock release button on the selector lever operates properly
and smoothly. On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely
with the selector lever in the “P” position without applying any brakes.
—
UNDER THE HOOD AND VEHICLE
The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (e.g. each time you check the engine oil or refuel).
Item
Reference page
Windshield washer
fluid
Check that there is adequate fluid in the tank.
Engine coolant level
Check the coolant level when the engine is cold.
Radiator and hoses
Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc.,
that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks,
deformation, deterioration or loose connections.
Brake and clutch fluid Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid levels are between the “MAX” and
levels
“MIN” lines on the reservoir.
Battery
Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions
require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.
—
MA-16
—
MA-22, 27
—
Engine drive belts
Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
MA-14
Engine oil level
Check the level on the dipstick after parking the vehicle on a level spot and
turning off the engine.
MA-18
Power steering fluid
level and lines
Check the level on the dipstick with the engine off. Check the lines for
improper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.
MA-29
Automatic transmission fluid level
Check the level on the dipstick after putting the selector lever in “P” with the
engine idling.
MA-23
Exhaust system
Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately
locate the trouble and correct it.
MA-22
Underbody
Fluid leaks
The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these
substances, otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and
around the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be
thoroughly flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where
mud and dirt can easily accumulate.
—
Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the
vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner
after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or gasoline fumes are
evident, check for the cause and correct it immediately.
—
MA-6
NAMA0004
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Two different maintenance schedules are provided, and should be used, depending upon the conditions in
which the vehicle is mainly operated. After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, continue the periodic
maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals.
Schedule 1
Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 1 if your driving habits frequently
includes one or more of the following driving conditions:
I Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km).
I Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.
I Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic.
I Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police,
taxi or door-to-door delivery use.
I Driving in dusty conditions.
I Driving on rough, muddy, or salt spread roads.
I Towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier.
Emission Control
System Maintenance
Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 2 if none of the driving conditions
shown in Schedule 1 apply to your driving habits.
Emission Control
System Maintenance
MA-10
Chassis and Body
Maintenance
MA-11
MA-8
GI
EM
LC
Chassis and Body
Maintenance
MA-9
EC
FE
Schedule 2
Maintenance for off-road driving (
only)
Whenever you drive off-road through sand, mud or water, more frequent maintenance may be required of the
following items:
G Brake pads and discs
G Brake lining and drums
G Brake lines and hoses
G Wheel bearing grease
G Differential, transmission and transfer oil
G Steering linkage
G Propeller shaft and drive shafts
G Air cleaner filter
G Clutch housing
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
MA-7
Perform at number of miles,
kilometers or months, whichever
comes first.
[ ]: At the mileage intervals only
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
Reference Section
- Page
3.75 7.5 11.25 15 18.75 22.5 26.25 30 33.75 37.5 41.25 45 48.75 52.5 56.25 60
or
(6) (12) (18) (24) (30) (36) (42) (48) (54) (60) (66) (72) (78) (84) (90) (96)
- Content Title
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
36
39
42
45
48
Drive belts
I*
I*
MA-14
[R]
[R]
MA-18
EVAP vapor lines
I*
I*
MA-21
Fuel lines
I*
I*
MA-17
Air cleaner filter
NOTE (1)
NOTE (2)
Engine coolant
NOTE (3)
MA-17
R*
MA-15
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
MA-18
Engine oil filter (Use part No.
15208-31U00 or equivalent.)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
MA-19
MA-8
Spark plugs (PLATINUMTIPPED type)
Intake & exhaust valve clearance*
Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km)
NOTE (4)
MA-20
EM-54
Schedule 1
Engine oil
NOTE:
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(2) When the filter becomes clogged, the vehicle speed cannot be increased as the driver wishes. In such an event, replace the filter.
(3) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months.
(4) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance.
★ Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the
emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Fuel filter*
Schedule 1
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: R = Replace.
NAMA0004S01
NAMA0004S0101
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles,
kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Reference
Section
- Page
or
- Content Title
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000 3.75 7.5 11.25 15 18.75 22.5 26.25 30 33.75 37.5 41.25 45 48.75 52.5 56.25 60
(km x 1,000) (6) (12) (18) (24) (30) (36) (42) (48) (54) (60) (66) (72) (78) (84) (90) (96)
Months
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
36
39
42
45
48
Brake lines & cables
I
Brake pads, rotors, drums &
linings
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
MA-27
I
MA-27, 28
NOTE (1)
I
I
I
I
MA-22, 23, 24, 25
LSD gear oil
NOTE (1)
I
R
I
R
MA-26
I
MA-28
MA-29
Steering gear, linkage & transfer gear, axle & suspension
parts
Tire rotation
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NOTE (2)
MA-5
MA-9
Drive shaft boots & propeller
shaft (
)
Propeller shaft
NOTE (3)
“Front wheel bearing
grease”
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Automatic transmission, (allmode 4WD) transfer fluid,
manual transmission & differential gear oil (exc. LSD)
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: R = Replace. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. L = Lubricate.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
MA-30
MA-25
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
MA-25
I
MA-30
R
MA-30
I
MA-22
4x2
I
Front wheel bearing
grease
I
Exhaust system
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NOTE:
(1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil (exc. LSD) at every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24
months, and change LSD gear oil every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months.
(2) Refer to “Tire rotation” under the “GENERAL MAINTENANCE” heading earlier in this section.
(3) The propeller shaft should be re-greased after being immersed in water.
Schedule 1 (Cont’d)
NAMA0004S0102
GI
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
[ ]: At the mileage intervals only
60
(96)
48
Reference Section
- Page
or
- Content Title
I*
I*
MA-14
[R]
[R]
MA-18
EVAP vapor lines
I*
I*
MA-21
Fuel lines
I*
I*
MA-17
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
7.5
(12)
6
15
(24)
12
22.5
(36)
18
Drive belts
Air cleaner filter
NOTE (1)
Engine coolant
NOTE (2)
37.5
(60)
30
45
(72)
36
52.5
(84)
42
MA-17
R*
MA-15
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
MA-18
Engine oil filter (Use part No. 15208-31U00
or equivalent.)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
MA-19
MA-10
Spark plugs (PLATINUM-TIPPED type)
Intake & exhaust valve clearance*
Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km)
NOTE (3)
MA-20
EM-54
NOTE:
(1) When the filter becomes clogged, the vehicle speed cannot be increased as the driver wishes. In such an event, replace the filter.
(2) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months.
(3) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance.
★ Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the
emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
Schedule 2
Engine oil
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Fuel filter*
30
(48)
24
Schedule 2
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: R = Replace.
NAMA0004S02
NAMA0004S0201
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Perform at number of miles, kilometers
or months, whichever comes first.
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
7.5
(12)
6
15
(24)
12
22.5
(36)
18
30
(48)
24
37.5
(60)
30
45
(72)
36
52.5
(84)
42
L = Lubricate.
60
(96)
48
Reference Section
- Page
or
- Content Title
I
I
I
I
MA-27
Brake pads, rotors, drums & linings
I
I
I
I
MA-27, 28
Automatic transmission, (all-mode 4WD)
transfer fluid, manual transmission &
differential gear oil (exc. LSD)
I
I
I
I
MA-22, 23, 24, 25
LSD gear oil
I
R
I
R
MA-26
I
MA-28
MA-29
Steering gear, linkage & transfer gear,
axle & suspension parts
Tire rotation
I
NOTE (1)
MA-5
Drive shaft boots & propeller shaft
(
)
MA-11
Propeller shaft
NOTE (2)
I
I
I
I
MA-30
MA-25
L
L
L
L
MA-25
I
MA-30
R
MA-30
I
MA-22
Front wheel bearing grease (4x2)
Front wheel bearing grease (
I
)
I
R
Exhaust system
I
I
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Brake lines & cables
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: R = Replace.
NOTE:
(1) Refer to “Tire rotation” under the “GENERAL MAINTENANCE” heading earlier in this section.
(2) The propeller shaft should be re-greased after being immersed in water.
Schedule 2 (Cont’d)
NAMA0004S0202
GI
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
NAMA0005
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Fluids and Lubricants
Fluids and Lubricants
NAMA0005S01
Capacity (Approximate)
Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
US measure Imp measure
Liter
With oil filter
5-1/4 qt
4-3/8 qt
5.0
Without oil
filter
5-1/8 qt
4-1/4 qt
4.8
7-1/4 qt
6 qt
6.8
Cooling system (With reservoir)
9-3/4 qt
8-1/8 qt
9.2
Genuine NISSAN anti-freeze coolant or
equivalent
Manual transmission gear oil
10-3/4 pt
9 pt
5.1
API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85
Drain and
refill
Engine oil
Dry engine
(Engine overhaul)
I API Certification Mark*1
I API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ or SL,
Energy Conserving*1
I ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II & GF-III*1
Part time 4WD model
2-3/8 qt
2 qt
2.2
NISSAN Matic “D” (Continental U.S.
and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid*2 or API GL-4,
viscosity SAE 75W-90
All-mode 4WD model
3-1/8 qt
2-5/8 qt
3.0
NISSAN Matic “D” (Continental U.S.
and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid*2
Front (4WD)
3-7/8 pt
3-1/4 pt
1.85
Rear
5-7/8 pt
4-7/8 pt
2.8
9 qt
7-1/2 qt
8.5
NISSAN Matic “D” (Continental U.S.
and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid*2
Power steering fluid (PSF)
—
—
—
Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent*6
Brake and clutch fluid
—
—
—
Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid*3 or
equivalent DOT 3 (U.S. FMVSS No.
116)
Propeller shaft grease
—
—
—
NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
Multi-purpose grease
—
—
—
NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
Transfer fluid
Differential
carrier gear
oil
Automatic
transmission
fluid
2WD
4WD
Standard differential gear: API GL-5,
viscosity SAE 80W-90*4
Limited-slip differential (LSD) gear:
Use only LSD gear oil API GL-5 and
SAE 80W-90*4 approved for NISSAN
LSD*5.
*1: For further details, see “SAE Viscosity Number”.
*2: DEXRONTM III/MERCONTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact a NISSAN
dealership for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of DEXRONTM III/MERCONTM Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
*3: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.
*4: For hot areas, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0°C (32°F).
*5: Contact a NISSAN dealer for a list of approved oils.
*6: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRONTM III/MERCONTM or equivalent ATF may also be used.
MA-12
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
SAE Viscosity Number
SAE Viscosity Number
GASOLINE ENGINE OIL
NAMA0005S02
GI
NAMA0005S0201
SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all ambient temperatures.
SAE 10W-30, 10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the ambient
temperature is above −18°C (0°F).
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
MMA117AA
Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio
SMA947CA
AT
NAMA0005S03
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality,
year-round, anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution
contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Therefore, additional cooling
system additives are not necessary.
CAUTION:
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only a Genuine NISSAN anti-freeze coolant or equivalent with the proper
mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized water/
distilled water. Other types of coolant solutions may damage
your engine cooling system.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
MA-13
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
Checking Drive Belts
Checking Drive Belts
NAMA0049
SMA091D
1.
Inspect belt for cracks, fraying, wear and oil. If necessary,
replace.
2. Inspect drive belt deflection or tension at a point on the belt
midway between pulleys.
3. Check belt tension using belt tension gauge (BT3373-F or
equivalent).
Inspect drive belt deflection or tension when engine is cold.
Adjust if belt deflections exceed the limit or if belt tension is
not within specifications.
Belt deflection and tension
Deflection adjustment
Unit: mm (in) Tension adjustment *1
Used belt
Unit: N (kg, lb)
Used belt
New belt
New belt
Limit
After adjustment
Alternator
Power steering
oil pump
Fan
7 (0.28)
4-5
(0.16 - 0.20)
3.5 - 4.5
(0.138 - 0.177)
294 (30, 66)
730 - 818 (74.4 - 838 - 926 (85.4 83.5, 164 - 184) 94.5, 188 - 208)
Air conditioner
compressor
12 (0.47)
9 - 10
(0.35 - 0.39)
8-9
(0.31 - 0.35)
196 (20, 44)
348 - 436 (35.5 - 470 - 559 (47.9 44.5, 78 - 98)
57.0, 106 - 126)
Applied pushing
force
Limit
98 N (10 kg, 22 lb)
After adjustment
—
*1 If belt tension gauge cannot be installed at check points shown, check drive belt tension at a different location on the belt.
MA-14
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
Changing Engine Coolant
Changing Engine Coolant
NAMA0050
GI
WARNING:
To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
—DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT—
1.
a.
SMA857C
b.
2.
3.
I
NAMA0050S01
Set air conditioning system as follows to prevent coolant from
remaining in the system.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and set temperature controller to
maximum hot position.
Wait 10 seconds before turning ignition switch “OFF”.
Open radiator drain plug at the bottom of radiator.
Remove radiator cap.
Be careful not to allow coolant to contact drive belts.
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SMA858C
When draining all the coolant in the system, also perform the following two steps.
1) Open drain plugs on right side of cylinder block and water
pump side, then open air relief plugs to drain coolant.
2) Check drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. If contaminated flush engine cooling
system, “Refer to FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM”, MA-16.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SMA092D
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMA093D
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMA131D
MA-15
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
Changing Engine Coolant (Cont’d)
—REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT—
NAMA0050S02
1.
2.
SMA182B
SMA412B
Install reservoir tank if removed, and radiator drain plug.
Close and tighten cylinder block drain plugs securely if
removed.
I Apply sealant to the thread of cylinder block drain plugs.
: 7.8 - 11.8 N·m (0.8 - 1.2 kg-m, 69 - 104 in-lb) Front
side
: 17.6 - 21.6 N·m (1.8 - 2.2 kg-m, 13 - 15 ft-lb) Right
side
Use Genuine Thread Sealant or equyivalent. Refer to GI-53.
3. Fill radiator slowly with coolant.
If air relief plug was removed, fill until coolant spills from the
air relief plug, then install air relief plug.
4. Fill reservoir tank if removed with coolant up to the MAX level
and install radiator cap.
Use Genuine NISSAN antifreeze coolant or equivalent mixed
with demineralized water/distilled water.
For coolant mixture ratio, refer to “RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS”, MA-13.
Coolant capacity (Without reservoir tank):
8.6 (9-1/8 US qt, 7-5/8 Imp qt)
Reservoir tank capacity (for MAX level):
0.6 (5/8 US qt, 1/2 Imp qt)
Pour coolant through coolant filler neck slowly to allow air in
system to escape.
5. Warm up engine to normal operating temperature with radiator cap installed.
6. Run engine at 2,500 rpm for 10 seconds and return to idle
speed.
I Repeat 2 or 3 times.
Watch coolant temperature gauge so as not to overheat the
engine.
7. Stop engine and cool it down.
I Cool down using a fan to reduce the time.
8. Refill reservoir tank to Max line with coolant.
9. Repeat steps 5 through step 8 two or more times until coolant
level no longer drops.
10. Check cooling system for leaks with engine running.
11. Warm up engine, and check for sound of coolant flow while
running engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm with heater temperature control set at several positions between COOL and HOT.
I Sound may be noticeable at heater water cock.
12. If sound is heard, bleed air from cooling system by repeating
steps 5 through 8 until coolant level no longer drops.
I Clean excess coolant from engine.
—FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM—
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
NAMA0050S03
Open air relief plug.
Fill radiator with water until water spills from the air relief holes,
then close air relief plugs. Fill radiator and reservoir tank with
water and reinstall radiator cap.
Run engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Rev engine two or three times under no-load.
Stop engine and wait until it cools down.
Drain water.
MA-16
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
Changing Engine Coolant (Cont’d)
7.
Repeat steps 1 through 6 until clear water begins to drain from
radiator.
GI
EM
LC
Checking Fuel Lines
EC
NAMA0051
Inspect fuel lines and tank for improper attachment, leaks, cracks,
damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration.
If necessary, repair or replace faulty parts.
FE
CL
MT
SMA803A
CAUTION:
Tighten high-pressure rubber hose clamp so that clamp end is
3 mm (0.12 in) from hose end.
Tightening torque specifications are the same for all rubber
hose clamps.
Ensure that screw does not contact adjacent parts.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
MMA104A
Changing Fuel Filter
NAMA0052
WARNING:
Before removing fuel filter, release fuel pressure from fuel line.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
SEF214Y
5.
NAMA0052S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
After engine stalls, crank engine two or three times to release
all fuel pressure.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
MA-17
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
Changing Fuel Filter (Cont’d)
6.
7.
I
I
I
Loosen fuel hose clamps.
Replace fuel filter.
Be careful not to spill fuel over engine compartment. Place
a shop towel to absorb fuel.
Use a high-pressure type fuel filter. Do not use a synthetic
resinous fuel filter.
When tightening fuel hose clamps, refer to “Checking Fuel
Lines”.
SMA861C
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
NAMA0052S02
Remove fuel pump fuse located in fuse box.
Start engine.
After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and install fuel pump fuse.
SMA869C
5.
6.
I
I
I
Loosen fuel hose clamps.
Replace fuel filter.
Be careful not to spill fuel over engine compartment. Place
a shop towel to absorb fuel.
Use a high-pressure type fuel filter. Do not use a synthetic
resinous fuel filter.
When tightening fuel hose clamps, refer to “Checking Fuel
Lines”.
SMA861C
Changing Air Cleaner Filter
VISCOUS PAPER TYPE
NAMA0053
NAMA0053S01
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between
replacement intervals.
SMA095D
Changing Engine Oil
SMA096D
NAMA0054
WARNING:
I Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot.
I Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may
cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with
soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
1. Warm up engine, and check for oil leakage from engine components.
2. Stop engine and wait for more than 10 minutes.
3. Remove drain plug and oil filler cap.
MA-18
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
Changing Engine Oil (Cont’d)
4. Drain oil and refill with new engine oil.
Oil specification and viscosity
I API grade SG or SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade
SJ or SL, Energy Conserving
I API Certification Mark
I ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II & GF-III
I See “RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS”, MA-12.
Oil capacity (Approximately):
Unit: (US qt, Imp qt)
With oil filter change
5.0 (5-1/4, 4-3/8)
Without oil filter change
4.8 (5-1/8, 4-1/4)
Drain and refill
Dry engine (engine overhaul)
GI
EM
LC
EC
6.8 (7-1/4, 6)
CAUTION:
I Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer.
Oil pan drain plug:
: 29.4 - 39.2 N·m (3.0 - 4.0 kg-m, 22 - 29 ft-lb)
I The refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and
drain time. Use these specifications for reference only.
Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper
amount of oil is in the engine.
5. Warm up engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage.
6. Stop engine and wait for more than 10 minutes.
7. Check oil level.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
JMA122D
Changing Oil Filter
NAMA0055
1. Remove oil filter with Tool.
WARNING:
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine and engine oil
are hot.
The filter is a full-flow cartridge type and is provided with a relief
valve.
Refer to LC-8, “Oil Filter”.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMA097D
2.
Clean oil filter mounting surface on cylinder block. Coat rubber
seal of new oil filter with engine oil.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMA010
MA-19
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
Changing Oil Filter (Cont’d)
3.
Screw in the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten
an additional 2/3 turn.
4. Add engine oil.
Refer to MA-18, “Changing Engine Oil”.
I Clean excess oil from engine.
SMA702C
Changing Spark Plugs
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
NAMA0056
Remove engine cover.
Remove air duct with air cleaner assembly.
Disconnect harness connectors and harness brackets around
ignition coil sides.
Remove electric throttle control actuator. (Only when removing
the No. 4 cylinder spark plug)
Disconnect ignition coil harness connectors.
Loosen ignition coil fixing bolts and pull out coil from rocker
cover.
Ignition coil:
: 8.5 - 10.8 N·m (0.87 - 1.1 kg-m, 76 - 95 in-lb)
SMA176D
7. Check type and gap of new spark plug.
Spark plug type (Platinum-tipped type):
SEM294A
Symbol
Make
Standard type
PLFR5A-11
NGK
Cold type
PLFR6A-11
NGK
Hot type
PLFR4A-11
NGK
Gap (Nominal): 1.1 mm (0.043 in)
Spark plug:
: 19.6 - 29.4 N·m (2.0 - 2.9 kg-m, 15 - 22 ft-lb)
Use standard type spark plug for normal condition.
The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling may occur with the
standard type spark plug such as:
I frequent engine starts
I low ambient temperatures
The cold type spark plug is suitable when spark knock may occur
with the standard type spark plug such as:
I extended highway driving
I frequent high engine revolution
MA-20
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
Changing Spark Plugs (Cont’d)
I
I
Do not use a wire brush for cleaning.
If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may
be used.
Cleaner air pressure:
Less than 588 kPa (6 kg/cm2, 85 psi)
Cleaning time:
Less than 20 seconds
GI
EM
LC
SMA773C
I
Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between
change intervals.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SMA806CA
Checking EVAP Vapor Lines
1.
AT
NAMA0057
Visually inspect EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment,
cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration.
2. Inspect vacuum relief valve of fuel tank filler cap for clogging,
sticking, etc.
Refer to EC-41, “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM”.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEC151D
HA
SC
EL
IDX
MA-21
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Checking Exhaust System
Checking Exhaust System
NAMA0019
Check exhaust pipes, muffler and mounting for improper
attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or
deterioration.
SMA211A
Checking Clutch Fluid Level and Leaks
NAMA0020
If fluid level is extremely low, check clutch system for leaks.
SMA956C
Checking M/T Oil
NAMA0021
Check for oil leakage and oil level.
Never start engine while checking oil level.
Filler plug:
: 25 - 34 N·m (2.5 - 3.5 kg-m, 18 - 25 ft-lb)
SMA103
Changing M/T Oil
1.
2.
NAMA0022
Drain oil from drain plug and refill with new gear oil.
Check oil level.
Oil grade and viscosity:
API GL-4. Refer to “Fluids and Lubricants”, “RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS”, MA-12.
Oil capacity:
5.1 (10-3/4 US pt, 9 Imp pt)
Drain plug:
: 25 - 34 N·m (2.5 - 3.5 kg-m, 18 - 25 ft-lb)
MA-22
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Checking A/T Fluid
Checking A/T Fluid
NAMA0024
1.
2.
3.
SMA121D
Warm up engine.
Check for fluid leakage.
Before driving, fluid level can be checked at fluid temperatures
of 30 to 50°C (86 to 122°F) using “COLD” range on dipstick.
a. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.
b. Start engine and move selector lever through each gear position. Leave selector lever in “P” position.
c. Check fluid level with engine idling.
d. Remove dipstick and note reading. If level is at low side of
either range, and fluid to the charging pipe.
e. Re-insert dipstick into charging pipe as far as it will go.
f. Remove dipstick and note reading. If reading is at low side of
range, add fluid to the charging pipe.
Do not overfill.
4. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
5. Re-check fluid level at fluid temperatures of 50 to 80°C (122
to 176°F) using “HOT” range on dipstick.
CAUTION:
Securely install A/T fluid level gauge.
GI
SMA070D
6.
I
I
Check fluid condition.
If fluid is very dark or smells burned, refer to AT section for
checking operation of A/T. Flush cooling system after repair of
A/T.
If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.),
replace radiator and flush cooler line using cleaning solvent
and compressed air after repair of A/T. Refer to LC-21, “Radiator”.
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SMA853B
Changing A/T Fluid
1.
2.
3.
SMA515C
4.
5.
NAMA0025
Warm up A/T fluid.
Stop engine.
Drain A/T fluid from drain plug and refill with new A/T fluid.
Always refill same volume with drained fluid.
Fluid grade:
Nissan Matic “D” (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or
Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Refer
to
“RECOMMENDED
FLUIDS
AND
LUBRICANTS”, MA-12.
Fluid capacity (With torque converter):
2WD, 4WD 8.5 (9 US qt, 7-1/2 Imp qt)
Drain plug:
: 29 - 39 N·m (3.0 - 4.0 kg-m, 22 - 29 ft-lb)
Run engine at idle speed for five minutes.
Check fluid level and condition. Refer to MA-23, “Checking A/T
Fluid”. If fluid is still dirty, repeat steps 2 through 5.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
MA-23
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Checking Part Time 4WD Transfer Fluid
Checking Part Time 4WD Transfer Fluid
NAMA0026
Check for fluid leakage and fluid level.
A/T fluid is used for the transfer in the factory.
Never start engine while checking fluid level.
Filler plug:
: 25 - 34 N·m (2.5 - 3.5 kg-m, 18 - 25 ft-lb)
SMA439B
Changing Part Time 4WD Transfer Fluid
SMA444B
NAMA0027
When changing transfer fluid completely, A/T fluid may be used.
Fluid grade:
NISSAN Matic “D” (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or
Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid or
API GL-4.
Refer to “Fluids and Lubricants”, “RECOMMENDED
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS”, MA-12.
Fluid capacity:
2.2 (2-3/8 US qt, 2 Imp qt)
Drain plug:
: 25 - 34 N·m (2.5 - 3.5 kg-m, 18 - 25 ft-lb)
Checking All-mode 4WD Transfer Fluid
NAMA0047
Check for oil leakage and fluid level.
A/T fluid is used for the all-mode 4WD transfer in the factory.
Never start engine while checking fluid level.
Filler plug:
: 10 - 20 N·m (1.0 - 2.0 kg-m, 87 - 174 in-lb)
SMA439B
Changing All-mode 4WD Transfer Fluid
SMA444B
NAMA0048
When changing all-mode 4WD transfer fluid completely, A/T fluid
may be used.
Fluid grade:
NISSAN Matic “D” (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or
Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid
Refer to “Fluids and Lubricants”, “RECOMMENDED
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS”, MA-12.
Fluid capacity:
3.0 (3-1/8 US qt, 2-5/8 Imp qt)
MA-24
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Changing All-mode 4WD Transfer Fluid (Cont’d)
Drain plug:
: 10 - 20 N·m (1.0 - 2.0 kg-m, 87 - 174 in-lb)
GI
EM
LC
Checking Propeller Shaft
EC
NAMA0028
Check propeller shaft for damage, looseness or grease leakage.
FE
CL
MT
SMA231-A
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SMA872CA
Greasing Propeller Shaft
NAMA0029
Apply specified grease to nipples provided on propeller shaft.
Grease grade:
Refer
to
“RECOMMENDED
FLUIDS
AND
LUBRICANTS”, MA-12.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMA123D
Checking Differential Gear Oil
Check for oil leakage and oil level.
Filler plug:
Front
: 39 - 59 N·m (4 - 6 kg-m, 29 - 43 ft-lb)
Rear
: 59 - 118 N·m (6 - 12 kg-m, 43 - 87 ft-lb)
NAMA0030
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SMA440B
MA-25
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Changing Differential Gear Oil
Changing Differential Gear Oil
1.
2.
SMA632C
SMA631C
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL GEAR
I
I
1.
2.
3.
NAMA0031
Drain oil from drain plug and refill with new gear oil.
Check oil level.
Oil grade and viscosity:
See “RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICATNS”,
MA-12.
Oil capacity:
Front
1.85 (3-7/8 US pt, 3-1/4 Imp pt)
Rear
2.8 (5-7/8 US pt, 4-7/8 Imp pt)
Filler plug:
Front
: 39 - 59 N·m (4 - 6 kg-m, 29 - 43 ft-lb)
Rear
: 59 - 118 N·m (6 - 12 kg-m, 43 - 87 ft-lb)
Drain plug:
Front
: 59 - 98 N·m (6 - 10 kg-m, 43 - 72 ft-lb)
Rear
: 59 - 118 N·m (6 - 12 kg-m, 43 - 87 ft-lb)
NAMA0031S01
Use only approved limited-slip differential gear oil.
Limited-slip differential identification.
Lift both rear wheels off the ground.
Turn one rear wheel by hand.
If both rear wheels turn in the same direction simultaneously,
vehicle is equipped with limited-slip differential.
Balancing Wheels
NAMA0032
Adjust wheel balance using the road wheel center.
Wheel balance (Maximum allowable unbalance):
Refer to SDS, MA-32.
Tire Rotation
I
I
NAMA0033
After rotating the tires, adjust the tire pressure.
Retighten the wheel nuts after the vehicle has been driven
for the 1,000 km (600 miles). (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.)
Wheel nuts:
: 118 - 147 N·m (12 - 15 kg-m, 87 - 108 ft-lb)
SGI991
MA-26
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Checking Brake Fluid Level and Leaks
Checking Brake Fluid Level and Leaks
NAMA0034
GI
If fluid level is extremely low, check brake system for leaks.
EM
LC
SBR451D
Checking Brake Lines and Cables
EC
NAMA0035
Check brake fluid lines and parking brake cables for improper
attachment, leaks, chafing, abrasions and deterioration.
FE
CL
MT
SBR389C
Checking Disc Brake
ROTOR
AT
NAMA0036
NAMA0036S01
Check condition, wear and damage.
Standard thickness:
28 mm (1.10 in)
Minimum thickness:
26 mm (1.02 in)
TF
PD
AX
SU
CALIPER
NAMA0036S02
Check for leakage.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SMA922A
PAD
NAMA0036S03
Check wear or damage.
Standard thickness:
11 mm (0.43 in)
Minimum thickness: 2 mm (0.08 in)
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BRA0010D
MA-27
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Checking Drum Brake
Checking Drum Brake
WHEEL CYLINDER
NAMA0037
NAMA0037S01
Check for leakage.
DRUM
NAMA0037S02
Check condition and inner surface.
Standard inner diameter:
295 mm (11.61 in)
Drum repair limit (Inner diameter):
296.5 mm (11.67 in)
SMA848B
LINING
NAMA0037S03
Check wear or damage.
Standard thickness:
6.1 mm (0.240 in)
Lining wear limit (Minimum thickness):
1.5 mm (0.059 in)
SMA849B
TEMPORARY METHOD FOR CHECKING LINING WEAR
NAMA0037S04
Remove inspection hole plug and check for lining wear.
SMA870C
Checking Steering Gear, Linkage and Transfer
Gear
NAMA0038
STEERING GEAR
I
I
Check gear housing and boots for looseness, damage and
grease leakage.
Check connection with steering column for looseness.
STEERING LINKAGE
I
SMA874CA
NAMA0038S02
Check ball joint, dust cover and other component parts for
looseness, wear, damage and grease leakage.
STEERING TRANSFER GEAR
I
NAMA0038S01
NAMA0038S03
Check gear box for looseness, damage and grease leakage.
MA-28
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Checking Power Steering Fluid and Lines
Checking Power Steering Fluid and Lines
CHECKING FLUID LEVEL
I
I
SST280B
NAMA0039
NAMA0039S01
Check fluid level with engine off.
Check fluid level with dipstick on reservoir cap. Use “HOT”
range at fluid temperatures of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Use
“COLD” range at fluid temperatures of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
CAUTION:
I Do not overfill.
I Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.
Refer
to
“RECOMMENDED
FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS”, MA-12.
CHECKING LINES
I
I
GI
EM
LC
EC
NAMA0039S02
Check lines for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage,
loose connections, chafing and deterioration.
Check rack boots for accumulation of power steering fluid.
FE
CL
MT
SST118B
Axle and Suspension Parts
AT
NAMA0061
Check front and rear axle and suspension parts for excessive play,
cracks, wear, or other damage.
I Shake each wheel to check for excessive play.
I Rotate each wheel to check for abnormal noise.
I Check axle and suspension nuts and bolts for looseness.
I Check strut (shock absorber) for oil leakage or other damage.
I Check suspension ball joint for grease leakage and ball joint
dust cover for cracks or other damage.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SMA525A
BR
ST
RS
BT
SFA757B
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SFA392B
MA-29
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Axle and Suspension Parts (Cont’d)
FRONT WHEEL BEARING
NAMA0061S01
Apply multi-purpose grease sparingly to the following parts:
I Threaded portion of spindle
I Contact surface between wheel bearing lock washer (chamfered side) and outer wheel bearing
I Grease seal lip
I Wheel hub (as shown at left) — 4WD —
SFA891
Drive Shaft
NAMA0062
Check boot and drive shaft for cracks, wear, damage and grease
leakage.
SFA901
Lubricating Locks, Hinges and Hood Latches
NAMA0040
SMA031D
MA-30
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Checking Seat Belts, Buckles, Retractors, Anchors and Adjusters
Checking Seat Belts, Buckles, Retractors,
Anchors and Adjusters
GI
NAMA0041
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SMA854CD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
MA-31
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Engine Maintenance
Engine Maintenance
DRIVE BELT DEFLECTION
NAMA0058
Unit: mm (in)
Used belt deflection
Deflection of new belt
Limit
Deflection after adjustment
Alternator
Power steering oil pump
Fan
7 (0.28)
4 - 5 (0.16 - 0.20)
3.5 - 4.5 (0.138 - 0.177)
Air conditioner compressor
12 (0.47)
9 - 10 (0.35 - 0.39)
8 - 9 (0.31 - 0.35)
Applied pushing force
98 N (10 kg, 22 lb)
DRIVE BELT TENSION
NAMA0059
Unit: N (kg, lb)
Used belt
New belt
Limit
After adjustment
Generator
Power steering oil pump
Fan
294 (30, 66)
730 - 818 (74.4 - 83.5, 164 - 184)
838 - 926 (85.4 - 94.5, 188 - 208)
Air conditioner compressor
196 (20, 44)
348 - 436 (35.5 - 44.5, 78 - 98)
470 - 559 (47.9 - 57.0, 106 - 126)
SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)
NAMA0060
Symbol
Make
Standard type
PLFR5A-11
NGK
Cold type
PLFR6A-11
NGK
Hot type
PLFR4A-11
NGK
Plug gap (Nominal)
1.1 mm (0.043 in)
Chassis and Body Maintenance
WHEEL BALANCE
NAMA0044
Dynamic (At rim flange)
g (oz)
10 (0.35) (one side)
Maximum allowable unbalance
Static
g (oz)
20 (0.71)
MA-32
GENERAL INFORMATION
SECTION
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS ...............................................................3
Precautions ..................................................................3
PRECAUTIONS FOR SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) ″AIR BAG″ AND
″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″ .................................3
PRECAUTIONS FOR NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM - NATS).................................3
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS .........................................4
PRECAUTIONS FOR MULTIPORT FUEL
INJECTION SYSTEM OR ENGINE CONTROL
SYSTEM ...................................................................6
PRECAUTIONS FOR THREE WAY CATALYST ...........6
PRECAUTIONS FOR HOSES .....................................6
PRECAUTIONS FOR ENGINE OILS ...........................7
PRECAUTIONS FOR FUEL ........................................8
PRECAUTIONS FOR AIR CONDITIONING ..................8
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL........................................9
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS..........................11
Sample/Wiring Diagram - EXAMPL - ........................11
OPTIONAL SPLICE..................................................12
Description .................................................................13
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS .........................................15
HARNESS INDICATION ...........................................16
COMPONENT INDICATION ......................................16
SWITCH POSITIONS ...............................................16
DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE
LINES .....................................................................17
MULTIPLE SWITCH .................................................18
REFERENCE AREA .................................................19
HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL .......................................21
Connector and Terminal Pin Kit.................................21
How to Probe Connectors .........................................21
PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE ............................21
PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE ...........................21
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of
Terminal .....................................................................22
Waterproof Connector Inspection ..............................23
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION ...................................23
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION ........................................23
Terminal Lock Inspection ...........................................23
HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS
FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT ...............................24
Work Flow..................................................................24
Incident Simulation Tests...........................................25
INTRODUCTION ......................................................25
VEHICLE VIBRATION ..............................................25
HEAT SENSITIVE ....................................................26
FREEZING ..............................................................26
WATER INTRUSION ................................................27
ELECTRICAL LOAD .................................................27
COLD OR HOT START UP.......................................27
Circuit Inspection .......................................................27
INTRODUCTION ......................................................27
TESTING FOR ″OPENS″ IN THE CIRCUIT ................28
TESTING FOR ″SHORTS″ IN THE CIRCUIT ..............29
GROUND INSPECTION ...........................................30
VOLTAGE DROP TESTS ..........................................30
CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST ...............................32
HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES...............34
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnoses....35
Harness Wire Color and Connector Number
Indication....................................................................36
TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND
CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN
ILLUSTRATION .......................................................36
TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND
CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT ........36
Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or
Procedures.................................................................37
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM ...............................39
Function and System Application ..............................39
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement...............40
Checking Equipment..................................................40
CONSULT-II Start Procedure ....................................41
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit ......41
INSPECTION PROCEDURE .....................................41
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION ................................43
Model Variation ..........................................................43
2WD .......................................................................43
4WD .......................................................................43
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
CONTENTS
PREFIX AND SUFFIX DESIGNATIONS .....................43
Identification Number.................................................44
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
ARRANGEMENT .....................................................44
IDENTIFICATION PLATE..........................................45
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER.......................................45
MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER.........................45
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER ...................45
TRANSFER SERIAL NUMBER ..................................46
Dimensions ................................................................46
Wheels & Tires ..........................................................46
LIFTING POINTS AND TOW TRUCK TOWING ...........47
Screw Jack ................................................................47
(Cont’d)
Garage Jack and Safety Stand .................................48
2-pole Lift ...................................................................49
Tow Truck Towing ......................................................49
2WD MODELS.........................................................50
PART TIME 4WD MODELS ......................................50
ALL-MODE 4WD MODELS .......................................51
VEHICLE RECOVERY ..............................................51
TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS ........52
RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND
SEALANTS ....................................................................53
SAE J1930 TERMINOLOGY LIST ................................54
SAE J1930 Terminology List .....................................54
GI-2
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions
Precautions
NAGI0001
Observe the following precautions to ensure safe and proper
servicing. These precautions are not described in each individual section.
MA
EM
LC
EC
PRECAUTIONS FOR SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS) “AIR BAG” AND “SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER”
NAGI0001S01
FE
SGI646
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with a seat belt, helps to
reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. The SRS composition which is
available to NISSAN MODEL R50 is as follows:
I For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag
module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on
passenger side), seat belt pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor
unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
I For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of side air bag
module (located in the outer side of front seat), side curtain air
bag module (locating in the headlining side of front and rear
seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring harness, warning lamp (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
WARNING:
I To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could
increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event
of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all
maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN
dealer.
I Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and
installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused
by unintentional activation of the system.
I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related
to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual.
SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or
orange harness connector (and by yellow harness protector or yellow insulation tape before the harness connectors).
PRECAUTIONS FOR NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
NAGI0001S08
NVIS (NATS) will immobilize the engine if someone tries to start it
without the registered key of NVIS (NATS).
Both of the originally supplied ignition key IDs have been NVIS
(NATS) registered.
The security indicator is located on the instrument panel. The indicator blinks when the ignition switch is in “OFF” or “ACC” position.
Therefore, NVIS (NATS) warns outsiders that the vehicle is
equipped with the anti-theft system.
GI-3
CL
SC
EL
IDX
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions (Cont’d)
I
When NVIS (NATS) detects trouble, the security indicator lamp
lights up while ignition switch is in “ON” position.
This lighting up indicates that the anti-theft is not functioning,
so prompt service is required.
I When servicing NVIS (NATS) (trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration of other NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs), CONSULT-II hardware and CONSULT-II NVIS
(NATS) software is necessary.
Regarding the procedures of NVIS (NATS) initialization and
NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II
operation manual, IVIS/NVIS.
Therefore, CONSULT-II NVIS (NATS) software (program card
and operation manual) must be kept strictly confidential to
maintain the integrity of the anti-theft function.
I When servicing NVIS (NATS) (trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration of other NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs), it may be necessary to re-register original key
identification. Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from
vehicle owner.
A maximum of five key IDs can be registered into NVIS
(NATS).
I When failing to start the engine first time using the key of NVIS
(NATS) (for example, when interference is caused by another
NVIS (NATS) key, an automated full road device or automated
payment device on the key ring), restart as follows.
a) Leave the ignition switch in “ON” position for approximately 5
seconds.
b) Turn ignition switch to “OFF” or “LOCK” position and wait
approximately 5 seconds.
c) Repeat step 1 and 2.
d) Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have
caused the interference) separate from the registered NVIS
(NATS) key. If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered nats key on a separate key
ring to avoid interference from other devices.
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
NAGI0001S02
I
Do not operate the engine for an extended period of time
without proper exhaust ventilation.
Keep the work area well ventilated and free of any inflammable
materials. Special care should be taken when handling any
inflammable or poisonous materials, such as gasoline, refrigerant gas, etc. When working in a pit or other enclosed area,
be sure to properly ventilate the area before working with hazardous materials.
Do not smoke while working on the vehicle.
I
Before jacking up the vehicle, apply wheel chocks or other tire
blocks to the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. After
jacking up the vehicle, support the vehicle weight with safety
stands at the points designated for proper lifting before working on the vehicle.
These operations should be done on a level surface.
When removing a heavy component such as the engine or
transaxle/transmission, be careful not to lose your balance and
drop it. Also, do not allow it to strike adjacent parts, especially
the brake tubes and master cylinder.
SGI285
I
SGI231
GI-4
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions (Cont’d)
I
Before starting repairs which do not require battery power:
Turn off ignition switch.
Disconnect the negative battery cable.
MA
EM
LC
SEF289H
I
To prevent serious burns:
Avoid contact with hot metal parts.
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SGI233
I
Before servicing the vehicle:
Protect fenders, upholstery and carpeting with appropriate covers.
Take caution that keys, buckles or buttons do not scratch paint.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SGI234
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Clean all disassembled parts in the designated liquid or solvent
prior to inspection or assembly.
Replace oil seals, gaskets, packings, O-rings, locking washers,
cotter pins, self-locking nuts, etc. with new ones.
Replace inner and outer races of tapered roller bearings and
needle bearings as a set.
Arrange the disassembled parts in accordance with their
assembled locations and sequence.
Do not touch the terminals of electrical components which use
microcomputers (such as ECMs).
Static electricity may damage internal electronic components.
After disconnecting vacuum or air hoses, attach a tag to indicate the proper connection.
Use only the fluids and lubricants specified in this manual.
Use approved bonding agent, sealants or their equivalents
when required.
Use tools and recommended special tools where specified for
safe and efficient service repairs.
When repairing the fuel, oil, water, vacuum or exhaust
systems, check all affected lines for leaks.
Dispose of drained oil or the solvent used for cleaning parts in
an appropriate manner.
GI-5
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions (Cont’d)
WARNING:
To prevenvt ECM from storing the diagnostic trouble codes,
do not carelessly disconnect the harness connectors which
are related to the engine control system and TCM (Transmission Control Module) system. The connectors should be disconnected only when working according to the WORK FLOW
of TROUBLE DIAGNOSES in EC and AT sections.
PRECAUTIONS FOR MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION
SYSTEM OR ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
NAGI0001S03
I
I
SGI787
I
Before connecting or disconnecting any harness connector for
the multiport fuel injection system or ECM (Engine Control
Module):
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect negative battery terminal.
Otherwise, there may be damage to ECM.
Before disconnecting pressurized fuel line from fuel pump to
injectors, be sure to release fuel pressure.
Be careful not to jar components such as ECM and mass air
flow sensor.
PRECAUTIONS FOR THREE WAY CATALYST
NAGI0001S04
If a large amount of unburned fuel flows into the catalyst, the catalyst temperature will be excessively high. To prevent this, follow the
instructions below:
I Use unleaded gasoline only. Leaded gasoline will seriously
damage the three way catalyst.
I When checking for ignition spark or measuring engine
compression, make tests quickly and only when necessary.
I Do not run engine when the fuel tank level is low, otherwise the
engine may misfire causing damage to the catalyst.
Do not place the vehicle on flammable material. Keep flammable
material off the exhaust pipe and the three way catalyst.
PRECAUTIONS FOR HOSES
Hose Removal and Installation
I
NAGI0001S10
NAGI0001S1001
To prevent damage to rubber hose, do not pry off rubber hose
with tapered tool or screwdriver.
SMA019D
GI-6
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions (Cont’d)
I
To reinstall the rubber hose securely, make sure of hose insertion length and clamp orientation. (If tube is equipped with
hose stopper, insert rubber hose into tube until it butts up
against hose stopper.)
MA
EM
LC
SMA020D
Hose Clamping
I
I
EC
NAGI0001S1002
If old rubber hose is re-used, install hose clamp in its original
position (at the indentation where the old clamp was). If there
is a trace of tube bulging left on the old rubber hose, align
rubber hose at that position.
Discard old clamps; replace with new ones.
FE
CL
MT
SMA021D
I
After installing leaf spring clamps, apply force to them in the
direction of the arrow, tightening rubber hose equally all
around.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SMA022D
PRECAUTIONS FOR ENGINE OILS
NAGI0001S05
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause
skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil.
If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
Health Protection Precautions
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ST
NAGI0001S0501
Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly
used engine oils.
Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where
practicable.
Do not put oily rags in pockets.
Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil.
Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should
not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regularly.
First Aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open
cuts and wounds.
Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to
help the removal of oil from the skin.
Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin
cleansers and nail brushes will help). Preparations containing
lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed.
GI-7
BR
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions (Cont’d)
I
I
I
I
Do not use gasoline, kerosine, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinners or
solvents for cleaning skin.
If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay.
Where practicable, degrease components prior to handling.
Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be
worn, for example, chemical goggles or face shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided.
Environmental Protection Precautions
NAGI0001S0502
Burning used engine oil in small space heaters or boilers can be
recommended only for units of approved design. The heating system must meet the requirements of HM Inspectorate of Pollution for
small burners of less than 0.4 MW. If in doubt check with the
appropriate local authority and/or manufacturer of the approved
appliance.
Dispose of used oil and used oil filters through authorized waste
disposal contractors to licensed waste disposal sites, or to the
waste oil reclamation trade. If in doubt, contact the local authority
for advice on disposal facilities.
It is illegal to pour used oil on to the ground, down sewers or drains,
or into water courses.
The regulations concerning pollution vary between regions.
PRECAUTIONS FOR FUEL
NAGI0001S06
Use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI
(Anti-Knock Index) number (research octane number 91).
CAUTION:
Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded gasoline will damage the three way catalyst.
Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect
the emission control devices and systems, and could also
affect the warranty coverage validity.
PRECAUTIONS FOR AIR CONDITIONING
NAGI0001S07
Use an approved refrigerant recovery unit any time the air conditioning system must be discharged. Refer to HA-170, “HFC-134a
(R-134a) Service Procedure” for specific instructions.
GI-8
NAGI0002
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
The captions WARNING and CAUTION warn you of steps that must be followed to prevent personal injury
and/or damage to some part of the vehicle.
WARNING indicates the possibility of personal injury if instructions are not followed.
CAUTION indicates the possibility of component damage if instructions are not followed.
BOLD TYPED STATEMENTS except WARNING and CAUTION give you helpful information.
ALPHABETICAL INDEX is provided at the end of this manual so that you can rapidly find the item and
page you are searching for.
A QUICK REFERENCE INDEX, a black tab (e.g.
) is provided on the first page. You can quickly find
the first page of each section by mating it to the section’s black tab.
THE CONTENTS are listed on the first page of each section.
THE TITLE is indicated on the upper portion of each page and shows the part or system.
THE PAGE NUMBER of each section consists of two letters which designate the particular section and a
number (e.g. “BR-5”).
THE LARGE ILLUSTRATIONS are exploded views (See below.) and contain tightening torques, lubrication points, section number of the PARTS CATALOG (e.g. SEC. 440) and other information necessary to
perform repairs.
The illustrations should be used in reference to service matters only. When ordering parts, refer to the
appropriate PARTS CATALOG.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SBR364AC
I
I
I
THE SMALL ILLUSTRATIONS show the important steps such as inspection, use of special tools, knacks
of work and hidden or tricky steps which are not shown in the previous large illustrations.
Assembly, inspection and adjustment procedures for the complicated units such as the automatic transaxle
or transmission, etc. are presented in a step-by-step format where necessary.
The UNITS given in this manual are primarily expressed as the SI UNIT (International System of Unit),
and alternatively expressed in the metric system and in the yard/pound system.
“Example”
Tightening torque:
59 - 78 N·m (6.0 - 8.0 kg-m, 43 - 58 ft-lb)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES are included in sections dealing with complicated components.
GI-9
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
I
I
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS are contained at the end of each section for quick reference of
data.
The following SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS are used:
SYMBOL
ABBREVIATION
SYMBOL
Tightening torque
ABBREVIATION
2-Wheel Drive
2WD
Should be lubricated with grease. Unless otherwise indicated, use recommended multi-purpose grease.
A/C
Should be lubricated with oil.
P/S
Power Steering
Sealing point
SST
Special Service Tools
Checking point
SAE
Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc.
Always replace after every disassembly.
ATF
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Apply petroleum jelly.
Air Conditioner
D1
q
P
Drive range 1st gear
Apply ATF.
D2
Drive range 2nd gear
★
Select with proper thickness.
D3
Drive range 3rd gear
✩
Adjustment is required.
D4
Drive range 4th gear
Service Data and Specifications
OD
Overdrive
LH, RH
Left-Hand, Right-Hand
22
2nd range 2nd gear
FR, RR
Front, Rear
21
2nd range 1st gear
M/T
Manual Transaxle/Transmission
12
1st range 2nd gear
A/T
Automatic Transaxle/Transmission
11
1st range 1st gear
SDS
,
4-Wheel Drive
4WD
GI-10
NAGI0003
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Sample/Wiring Diagram — EXAMPL —
Sample/Wiring Diagram — EXAMPL —
I
NAGI0003S01
For Description, refer to GI-13.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SGI134A
GI-11
IDX
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Sample/Wiring Diagram — EXAMPL — (Cont’d)
OPTIONAL SPLICE
NAGI0003S0101
SGI942
GI-12
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Description
Description
Number
Item
=NAGI0003S02
Description
1
Power condition
I This shows the condition when the system receives battery positive voltage (can be operated).
2
Fusible link
I The double line shows that this is a fusible link.
I The open circle shows current flow in, and the shaded circle shows current flow out.
3
Fusible link/fuse loca- I This shows the location of the fusible link or fuse in the fusible link or fuse box. For
tion
arrangement, refer to EL-12, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”.
4
Fuse
I The single line shows that this is a fuse.
I The open circle shows current flow in, and the shaded circle shows current flow out.
5
Current rating
I This shows the current rating of the fusible link or fuse.
Connectors
I This shows that connector E3 is female and connector M1 is male.
I The G/R wire is located in the 1A terminal of both connectors.
I Terminal number with an alphabet (1A, 5B, etc.) indicates that the connector is SMJ connector. Refer to GI-19.
6
7
Optional splice
I The open circle shows that the splice is optional depending on vehicle application.
8
Splice
I The shaded circle shows that the splice is always on the vehicle.
9
Page crossing
I This arrow shows that the circuit continues to an adjacent page.
I The A will match with the A on the preceding or next page.
10
Common connector
I The dotted lines between terminals show that these terminals are part of the same connector.
11
Option abbreviation
I This shows that the circuit is optional depending on vehicle application.
12
Relay
I This shows an internal representation of the relay. For details, refer to EL-9, “STANDARDIZED RELAY”.
13
Connectors
I This shows that the connector is connected to the body or a terminal with bolt or nut.
I This shows a code for the color of the wire.
14
Wire color
B = Black
W = White
R = Red
G = Green
L = Blue
Y = Yellow
LG = Light Green
BR = Brown
OR = Orange
P = Pink
PU = Purple
GY = Gray
SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown
DG = Dark Green
When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as
shown below:
Example: L/W = Blue with White Stripe
15
Option description
I This shows a description of the option abbreviation used on the page.
16
Switch
I This shows that continuity exists between terminals 1 and 2 when the switch is in the A
position. Continuity exists between terminals 1 and 3 when the switch is in the B position.
17
Assembly parts
I Connector terminal in component shows that it is a harness incorporated assembly.
Cell code
I This identifies each page of the wiring diagram by section, system and wiring diagram
page number.
Current flow arrow
I Arrow indicates electric current flow, especially where the direction of standard flow (vertically downward or horizontally from left to right) is difficult to follow.
I A double arrow “
” shows that current can flow in either direction depending on circuit operation.
18
19
20
System branch
I This shows that the system branches to another system identified by cell code (section
and system).
GI-13
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Description (Cont’d)
Number
Item
Description
21
Page crossing
I This arrow shows that the circuit continues to another page identified by cell code.
I The C will match with the C on another page within the system other than the next or preceding pages.
22
Shielded line
I The line enclosed by broken line circle shows shield wire.
23
Component box in
wave line
I This shows that another part of the component is also shown on another page (indicated
by wave line) within the system.
24
Component name
I This shows the name of a component.
25
Connector number
I This shows the connector number.
I The letter shows which harness the connector is located in.
I Example: M: main harness. For detail and to locate the connector, refer to EL-522, “Main
Harness”. A coordinate grid is included for complex harnesses to aid in locating connectors.
26
Ground (GND)
I The line spliced and grounded under wire color shows that ground line is spliced at the
grounded connector.
27
Ground (GND)
I This shows the ground connection.
28
Connector views
I This area shows the connector faces of the components in the wiring diagram on the
page.
29
Common component
I Connectors enclosed in broken line show that these connectors belong to the same component.
30
Connector color
I This shows a code for the color of the connector. For code meaning, refer to wire color
codes, Number 14 of this chart.
31
Fusible link and fuse
box
I This shows the arrangement of fusible link(s) and fuse(s), used for connector views of
“POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” in EL section.
The open square shows current flow in, and the shaded square shows current flow out.
32
Reference area
I This shows that more information on the Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) and Joint Connectors (J/C) exists on the foldout page. Refer to GI-19 for details.
GI-14
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Description (Cont’d)
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
=NAGI0003S0201
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side.
I Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed
by a single line and followed by the direction mark.
I Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed
by a double line and followed by the direction mark.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SGI364
I
Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and
female terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SGI363
HA
SC
EL
IDX
GI-15
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Description (Cont’d)
HARNESS INDICATION
I
I
COMPONENT INDICATION
I
NAGI0003S0206
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness
(connector) wire color.
Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness
connectors.
NAGI0003S0207
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
AGI070
SWITCH POSITIONS
NAGI0003S0202
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the
normal condition.
A vehicle is in the normal condition when:
I ignition switch is OFF,
I doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
I pedals are not depressed, and
I parking brake is released.
SGI860
GI-16
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Description (Cont’d)
DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES
NAGI0003S0203
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires,
with different weight are used.
I A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a “detectable
line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)”. A “detectable line for
DTC” is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can
detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system.
I A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a “non-detectable line for DTC”. A “non-detectable line for DTC” is a circuit
in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board
diagnostic system.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SGI862-A
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
GI-17
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Description (Cont’d)
MULTIPLE SWITCH
=NAGI0003S0204
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown
below.
I The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
I The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
SGI875
GI-18
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Description (Cont’d)
REFERENCE AREA
=NAGI0003S0208
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to
additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If
connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of
the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the
Connector Area.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SGI092A
Super multiple junction (SMJ)
In a wiring diagram, the SMJ connectors include a letter of the
alphabet in the terminal number.
SMJ connector numbers are shown in the Reference Area of the
wiring diagram. SMJ terminal arrangement can be found on the
electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. For terminal
arrangement of these connectors, refer to the “SUPER MULTIPLE
JUNCTION (SMJ)” electrical reference page at the end of the
GI-19
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Description (Cont’d)
manual.
Fuse block — Junction box (J/B)
Fuse block — Junction box (J/B) connector number is shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram. For connector terminal and
fuse arrangement, refer to the “FUSE BLOCK — Junction Box
(J/B)” electrical reference page at the end of the manual.
Fuse and fusible link box
For fuse arrangement in the fuse and fusible link box, refer to the
“FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX” electrical reference page at the
end of the manual.
Electrical units
Electrical unit connector symbols are shown in the Connector Area
of the wiring diagram.
However, when there is not enough space to show the connector
terminal arrangement in the Connector Area of the wiring diagram,
the electrical unit connector number is shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram. For electrical unit connector terminal
arrangement, refer to the “ELECTRICAL UNITS” electrical reference page at the end of the manual. Most of the electrical unit
connectors on this page are shown from the harness side of the
connector.
Joint connector
Joint connector symbols are shown in the connector area of the
wiring diagram. For connector internal wiring layout and joint connector terminal arrangement, refer to the “JOINT CONNECTOR
(J/C)” electrical reference page at the end of the manual.
GI-20
NAGI0011
HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL
Connector and Terminal Pin Kit
Connector and Terminal Pin Kit
NAGI0011S01
Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed below when replacing
connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most
commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
MA
EM
Description
LC
—
(J38751-95NI)
Connector and terminal
pin kit
—
(J42992-98KIT)
OBD Terminal Repair Kit
EC
FE
CL
MT
AGI121
How to Probe Connectors
AT
NAGI0011S02
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from
improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the
connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a “T” pin. For the best contact grasp the “T”
pin using an alligator clip.
TF
PD
AX
SU
PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE
NAGI0011S0201
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed
from harness side with “T” pin.
I If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM
connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal.
I Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side.
Damage to the seal between wire and connector may
result.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SGI841
PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE
NAGI0011S0202
Female Terminal
I There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe
each terminal with the “T” pin through the notch.
Do not insert any object other than the same type male
terminal into female terminal.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEL265V
GI-21
HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL
How to Probe Connectors (Cont’d)
I
Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To
probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make
contact space for probing.
SEL266V
Male Terminal
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a “T” pin.
Do not bend terminal.
SEL267V
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of
Terminal
NAGI0011S03
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent
signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below
to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female
terminal.
1.
2.
Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal
side up.
SEL270V
3.
While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the
male terminal into the female terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal
with your hands.
SEL271V
GI-22
HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal (Cont’d)
4.
While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal
can be easily inserted or not.
MA
EM
LC
SEL272V
I
If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female
terminal, replace the female terminal.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEL273V
Waterproof Connector Inspection
AT
NAGI0011S04
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may
lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
I
SEL275V
I
PD
NAGI0011S0401
Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal
between the male and female connectors. If the seal is
missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the
rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or
female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
TF
NAGI0011S0402
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a
waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
Terminal Lock Inspection
NAGI0011S05
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the
circuit.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEL330V
GI-23
NAGI0004
HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Work Flow
Work Flow
NAGI0004S01
SGI838
STEP
STEP 1
DESCRIPTION
Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident occurred.
The following are key pieces of information required to make a good analysis:
WHAT
Vehicle Model, Engine, Transmission and the System (i.e. Radio).
WHEN
Date, Time of Day, Weather Conditions, Frequency.
WHERE
Road Conditions, Altitude and Traffic Situation.
HOW
System Symptoms, Operating Conditions (Other Components Interaction).
Service History and if any After Market Accessories have been installed.
STEP 2
Operate the system, road test if necessary.
Verify the parameter of the incident.
If the incident cannot be duplicated, refer to “Incident Simulation Tests” next page.
STEP 3
Get the proper diagnosis materials together including:
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
System Operation Descriptions
Applicable Service Manual Sections
Check for any Service Bulletin.
Identify where to begin diagnosis based upon your knowledge of the system operation and the customer comments.
STEP 4
Inspect the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage.
Determine which circuits and components are involved and diagnose using the Power Supply Routing
and Harness Layouts.
STEP 5
Repair or replace the incident circuit or component.
STEP 6
Operate the system in all modes. Verify the system works properly under all conditions. Make sure you
have not inadvertently created a new incident during your diagnosis or repair steps.
GI-24
HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Incident Simulation Tests
Incident Simulation Tests
INTRODUCTION
NAGI0004S02
NAGI0004S0201
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought
in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the
time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found
Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the
conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an
electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
I Vehicle vibration
I Heat sensitive
I Freezing
I Water intrusion
I Electrical load
I Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is
important for simulating the conditions of the incident.
VEHICLE VIBRATION
NAGI0004S0202
The incident may occur or become worse while driving on a rough
road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case,
you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the
illustration below.
Connectors & Harness
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the
electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you
are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
Hint
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin
film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection
may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the
problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the incident is caused by
corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the
terminals on related connectors in the system.
Sensors & Relays
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system
you are inspecting.
This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SGI839
SC
EL
IDX
GI-25
HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Incident Simulation Tests (Cont’d)
Engine Compartment
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could
cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are:
I Connectors not fully seated.
I Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to
engine vibrations or rocking.
I Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
I Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
I Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION
described later.) First make sure that the system is properly
grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the
wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring
diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
Behind The Instrument Panel
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become
pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw.
Under Seating Areas
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by
seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If
the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching.
HEAT SENSITIVE
NAGI0004S0203
The owner’s incident may occur during hot weather or after car has
sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat
sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the
component with a heat gun or equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60°C (140°F). If incident occurs
while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
SGI842
FREEZING
NAGI0004S0204
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car
warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for
the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold
enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis
of those electrical components which could be affected.
SGI843
GI-26
HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Incident Simulation Tests (Cont’d)
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer
long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car
and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair
or replace the component.
MA
EM
LC
WATER INTRUSION
EC
NAGI0004S0205
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy
weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water
intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the
car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
FE
CL
MT
SGI844
ELECTRICAL LOAD
AT
NAGI0004S0206
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis
with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio,
fog lamps) turned on.
TF
COLD OR HOT START UP
PD
NAGI0004S0207
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the
car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot
shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep
the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
AX
SU
SGI845
Circuit Inspection
INTRODUCTION
NAGI0004S03
NAGI0004S0302
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is
approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning
it is important to have all available information on the system to be
tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation.
Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow
the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical
components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
OPEN
A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the
circuit.
SHORT
There are two types of shorts.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
I SHORT
CIRCUIT
When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes
the normal resistance to change.
SC
I SHORT TO
GROUND
When a circuit contacts a ground source and
grounds the circuit.
EL
NOTE:
Refer to “HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL” in GI-21 to probe or
check terminal.
GI-27
IDX
HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Circuit Inspection (Cont’d)
TESTING FOR “OPENS” IN THE CIRCUIT
NAGI0004S0303
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should
rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
SGI846
Continuity Check Method
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The
Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate
an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer
to the schematic above.
1) Disconnect the battery negative cable.
2) Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other
end. (At the fuse block in this example)
3) Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on
the load side.
4) Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1.
Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has
good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM
would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition.
(point A)
5) Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no
resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
6) Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little
or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good
continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above
example.
Voltage Check Method
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer
to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically
checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by
switching the DMM to the voltage function.
1) Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
2) Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to
the other end.
3) With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage.
voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1.
no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
4) Close SW1 and probe at relay.
GI-28
HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Circuit Inspection (Cont’d)
voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay.
no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
5) Close the relay and probe at the solenoid.
voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid.
no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the
above example.
TESTING FOR “SHORTS” IN THE CIRCUIT
NAGI0004S0304
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to
the schematic below.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SGI847
Resistance Check Method
1) Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown
fuse.
2) Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse.
3) Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse
terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground.
4) With SW1 open, check for continuity.
continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
5) Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load
side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check
for continuity.
continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
6) Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put
probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good
ground. Then, check for continuity.
continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C).
no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Voltage Check Method
1) Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1
open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered
through the fuse.
2) Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on
the B + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known
good ground).
3) With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage.
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
4) With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the
DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
GI-29
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Circuit Inspection (Cont’d)
5)
no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper
wire check for voltage.
voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the
relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C).
no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
GROUND INSPECTION
NAGI0004S0305
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of
electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often
exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted
resistance can change the way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper
grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an
electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean,
there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
1) Remove the ground bolt or screw.
2) Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
3) Clean as required to assure good contact.
4) Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
5) Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with
the ground circuit.
6) If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal,
check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean,
securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple
wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have
excess wire insulation.
SGI853
VOLTAGE DROP TESTS
NAGI0004S0306
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits
which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is
caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with
ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0
ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single
GI-30
HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Circuit Inspection (Cont’d)
strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked
up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
I Undersized wiring (single strand example)
I Corrosion on switch contacts
I Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger
gauge.
Measuring Voltage Drop — Accumulated Method
1) Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter
should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to
ground.
2) Operate the circuit.
3) The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to
“push” current through that part of the circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop
between the battery and the bulb.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
SGI974
Measuring Voltage Drop — Step by Step
The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive
drops in low voltage systems (such as those in “Computer Controlled Systems”).
Circuits in the “Computer Controlled System” operate on very low
amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely
affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire
with too much resistance.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
GI-31
HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Circuit Inspection (Cont’d)
SGI854
CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST
NAGI0004S0307
System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit lights
up the lamp.
MGI034A
Input-output voltage chart
Pin No.
Item
Condition
Voltage
value V
In case of high resistance such as single strand
V*
1
Switch
Switch ON
Battery voltage
Lower than battery voltage Approx. 8 (Example)
Switch OFF
Approx. 0
Approx. 0
Switch ON
Battery voltage
Approx. 0 (Inoperative lamp)
Switch OFF
Approx. 0
Approx. 0
2
Lamp
The voltage value is based on the body ground.
* : If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control unit
does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not supply power to light up the
lamp.
GI-32
HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Circuit Inspection (Cont’d)
MA
EM
LC
MGI035A
EC
Input-output voltage chart
Pin No.
Item
Condition
Voltage
value V
In case of high resistance such as single strand
V*
1
Lamp
Switch ON
Approx. 0
Battery voltage (Inoperative lamp)
Switch OFF
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
Switch ON
Approx. 0
Higher than 0 Approx. 4 (Example)
Switch OFF
Approx. 5
Approx. 5
2
Switch
The voltage value is based on the body ground.
* : If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0V. Control unit
does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not control ground to light up the
lamp.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
GI-33
NAGI0005
HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
NOTICE:
Trouble diagnoses indicate work procedures required to diagnose
problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before
diagnosing.
1) Before performing trouble diagnoses, read the “Preliminary Check”, the “Symptom Chart” or the “Work Flow”.
2) After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated.
3) Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for
identification/location of components and harness connectors.
4) Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness
connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is
used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section
and Harness Layout in EL section for identification of harness connectors.
5) When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should
be OFF.
6) Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage.
7) After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness
connectors are reconnected as they were.
GI-34
HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnoses
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble
Diagnoses
NAGI0005S01
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SGI138A
1)
2)
3)
4)
Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose an incident using procedures indicated in
enclosed test groups.
Questions and required results.
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test
group.
The meaning of are as follows:
a. Battery voltage → 11 - 14V or approximately 12V
b. Voltage: Approximately 0V → Less than 1V
Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with
each symbol. Refer to “CONNECTOR SYMBOLS” (GI-15) and
“Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures” (GI37).
Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of
each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper
portion of each test group.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
GI-35
HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication
Harness Wire Color and Connector Number
Indication
NAGI0005S03
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number
indication.
TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR
NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION
NAGI0005S0301
I
I
I
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness
wire color.
Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors.
AGI070
TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR
NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT
NAGI0005S0302
SGI144A
GI-36
HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures
Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or
Procedures
NAGI0005S02
Symbol
Symbol explanation
Symbol
Symbol explanation
Check after disconnecting the connector to be measured.
Procedure with Generic Scan Tool
(GST, OBD-II scan tool)
Check after connecting the connector to be measured.
Procedure without CONSULT-II or
GST
Insert key into ignition switch.
A/C switch is “OFF”.
MA
EM
LC
EC
Remove key from ignition switch.
A/C switch is “ON”.
Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
REC switch is “ON”.
Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
REC switch is “OFF”.
FE
CL
MT
Turn ignition switch to “START” position.
Fan switch is “ON”. (At any position
except for “OFF” position)
Turn ignition switch from “OFF” to
“ACC” position.
Fan switch is “OFF”.
Turn ignition switch from “ACC” to
“OFF” position.
Apply positive voltage from battery
with fuse directly to components.
Turn ignition switch from “OFF” to
“ON” position.
Drive vehicle.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
Turn ignition switch from “ON” to
“OFF” position.
Disconnect battery negative cable.
Do not start engine, or check with
engine stopped.
Depress brake pedal.
Start engine, or check with engine
running.
Release brake pedal.
Apply parking brake.
Depress accelerator pedal.
Release parking brake.
Release accelerator pedal.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
GI-37
HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures (Cont’d)
Symbol
Symbol explanation
Symbol
Check after engine is warmed up
sufficiently.
Voltage should be measured with a
voltmeter.
Circuit resistance should be measured with an ohmmeter.
Current should be measured with an
ammeter.
Procedure with CONSULT-II
Procedure without CONSULT-II
GI-38
Symbol explanation
Pin terminal check for SMJ type
ECM and TCM connectors.
For details regarding the terminal
arrangement, refer to the “ELECTRICAL UNITS” electrical reference page at the end of the
manual.
NAGI0006
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Function and System Application
Function and System Application
Diagnostic
test mode
Function
ALLENGINE MODE
4WD
A/T
ABS
ABS
(Including
VDC)
AIR
BAG
NVIS
(NATS)*1
NAGI0006S01
SMART
ENTRANCE
AIR
PRESSURE
MONITOR
MA
EM
This mode enables a technician to adjust some
devices faster and more
accurate by following the
indications on CONSULT-II.
x
x
x
—
x
—
—
x
x
Self-diagnos- Self-diagnostic results can
tic results
be read and erased quickly.
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
—
x
Current self-diagnostic
Trouble diag- results and all trouble diagnostic record nostic records previously
stored can be read.
—
—
—
—
—
x
—
—
—
ECU discriminated
No.
Classification number of a
replacement ECU can be
read to prevent an incorrect
ECU from being installed.
—
—
—
—
—
x
—
—
—
MT
Data monitor
Input/Output data in the
ECU (ECM) can be read.
x
x
x
x
x
—
—
x
x
AT
CAN diagno- Indicates the communicasis support
tion condition of CAN commonitor
munication line.
x
x
x
—
x
—
—
—
—
TF
This mode enables a technician to set operating conditions to confirm self-diagnosis status/results.
—
—
x
—
—
—
—
—
—
The specified values will be
displayed when OK/NG
Data monitor
judgement is difficult for the
(Spec.)
DATA MONITOR items by
Barchart and LIne Graph.
x
Work support
DTC work
support
EC
FE
CL
PD
AX
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
SU
BR
Active test
Diagnostic Test Mode in
which CONSULT-II drives
some actuators apart from
the ECMs and also shifts
some parameters in a
specified range.
x
—
—
x
x
—
—
x
—
ECU (ECM)
part number
ECU (ECM) part number
can be read.
x
x
x
x
x
—
—
—
x
Control unit
initialization
All registered ignition key
IDs in NATS components
can be initialized and new
IDs can be registered.
—
The results of SRT (System
Readiness Test) and the
self-diagnosis status/results
can be confirmed.
x
SRT & DTC
confirmation
LC
ST
RS
BT
—
—
—
—
—
x
—
—
HA
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
SC
EL
IDX
GI-39
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Function and System Application (Cont’d)
Diagnostic
test mode
Function
ALLENGINE MODE
4WD
A/T
ABS
ABS
(Including
VDC)
AIR
BAG
NVIS
(NATS)*1
SMART
ENTRANCE
AIR
PRESSURE
MONITOR
A maximum of four IDs
(identifications) can be registered in the memory using
the remote controller. These
IDs can be also be confirmed and erased as
required.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
x
—
Conducted by CONSULT-II
instead of a technician to
Function test determine whether each
system is “OK” or “NG” (No
Good).
x
—
x
x
x
x
—
—
—
REMO
CONT ID
SET UP
x: Applicable
*1: NVIS (NATS) [NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (Nissan Anti-Theft System)]
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
NAGI0006S06
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following:
WARNING:
Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if
mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire.
Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Checking Equipment
NAGI0006S07
When ordering the below equipment, contact your NISSAN/INFINITI distributor.
Tool name
Description
NISSAN CONSULT-II
q
1 CONSULT-II unit (Tester internal soft:
Resident version 3.3.0) and accessories
q
2 Program card AED03E and AEN02C
q
3 CONSULT-II CONVERTER
q
4 “CONSULT-II Pigtail” Cable
SAIA0363E
NOTE:
I The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card.
CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure.
I Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned off before installing or removing a program card.
CAUTION:
Previous CONSULT-II “I” and “Y” DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their
DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
GI-40
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NAGI0006S09
MA
EM
LC
EC
PAIA0070E
1. Turn off the ignition switch.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SAIA0450E
PD
3. Turn on the ignition switch.
4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” or “System shortcut” (eg: Engine) on the screen.
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
AX
NAGI0006S08
SU
BR
ST
SOM801
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
NAGI0006S0801
If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the following items.
Symptom
Check item
CONSULT-II cannot access any
system.
I CONSULT-II DLC power supply circuit (Terminal 8) and ground circuit (Terminal 4)
(For detailed circuit, refer to EC-791, “MIL & DATA LINK CONNECTORS”.)
I CONSULT-II (DDL) cable and CONSULT-II CONVERTER
CONSULT-II cannot access indi- I CONSULT-II program card (Check the approprite CONSULT-II program card for the system.
vidual system. (Other systems
Refer to “Checking Equipment” above.)
can be accessed.)
I Power supply and ground circuit for the control unite of the system
(For detailed circuit, refer to wiring diagram for each system.)
I Open or short circuit between the system and CONSULT-II DLC
(For detailed circuit, refer to wiring diagram for each system.)
GI-41
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit (Cont’d)
NOTE:
The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one
system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II
access to other systems.
GI-42
NAGI0007
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
Model Variation
Model Variation
NAGI0007S01
2WD
Destination
Body
NAGI0007S0101
Grade
Engine
VQ35DE
Transmission
RE4R01A
(Automatic)
Differential carrier
H233B
SE
U.S.A.
VLJULTAR50EUA
Wide
4-door
LE
Grade
EC
VQ35DE
Transmission
FS5R30A (Manual)
Differential carrier
U.S.A.
Rear
H233B
Front R200A
FE
RE4R01A (Automatic)
Front R200A
Rear
H233B
SE
VLJZLTFR50EUA
*1
VLJZLTAR50EUA
LE
—
*2
VLJWLVAR50EUA
TLJZLRFR50ENA
*1
TLJZLRAR50ENA
Wide
Wagon
Canada
XE
4-door
Transfer
LC
NAGI0007S0102
Engine
Body
EM
VLJULVAR50EUA
4WD
Destination
MA
*1
SE
VLJZLTFR50ENA
LE
—
Wide
VLJWLTAR50ENA
CL
MT
AT
*2
VLJWLVAR50ENA
TF
*1 TX10A (Part time 4WD models)
*2 ATX14A (All-mode 4WD models)
PREFIX AND SUFFIX DESIGNATIONS
PD
NAGI0007S0103
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
MGI037AB
HA
SC
EL
IDX
GI-43
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
Identification Number
Identification Number
NAGI0007S02
SGI935-A
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ARRANGEMENT
NAGI0007S0201
SGI067AJ
GI-44
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
Identification Number (Cont’d)
IDENTIFICATION PLATE
NAGI0007S0202
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MGI039A
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
MT
AT
NAGI0007S0203
TF
PD
AX
SU
SGI136A
MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER
NAGI0007S0204
BR
ST
RS
BT
SGI185A
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
NAGI0007S0205
HA
SC
EL
IDX
MGI042A
GI-45
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
Identification Number (Cont’d)
TRANSFER SERIAL NUMBER
NAGI0007S0206
MGI043A
Dimensions
NAGI0007S03
Unit: mm (in)
Wagon*2
Wide*3
VQ35DE
Overall length*1
4,640 (182.7)
Overall width
1,770 (69.7)
1,820 (71.7)
Overall height
1,730 (68.1)
1,725 (67.9)
Front tread
1,480 (58.3)
1,540 (60.6)
Rear tread
1,485 (58.5)
1,545 (60.8)
Wheelbase
2,700 (106.3)
*1: On spare tire carrier equipped models, the spare tire carrier adds 240 mm (9.45
in) to the overall length.
*2: XE models
*3: SE models and LE wide models
Wheels & Tires
Road wheel/offset mm (in)
NAGI0007S04
Tire
Spare tire size
SE
16 x 7JJ Aluminum/20 (0.79)
P255/65R16 106S
P255/65R16 106S
215/80R16 103S*
LE
17 x 8JJ Aluminum/20 (0.79)
P245/65R17 105S
P245/65R17 105S
215/80R16 103S*
XE
16 x 7JJ Aluminum/50 (1.97)
P245/70R16 106S
P245/70R16 106S
SE
16 x 7JJ Aluminum/20 (0.79)
P255/65R16 106S
P255/65R16 106S
LE
17 x 8JJ Aluminum/20 (0.79)
P245/65R17 105S
P245/65R17 105S
4x2 PATHFINDER
4x4 PATHFINDER
*: If so equipped (US only)
GI-46
NAGI0008
LIFTING POINTS AND TOW TRUCK TOWING
WARNING:
I Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by
the jack. Always use safety stands to support the frame
when you have to get under the vehicle.
I Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels
on the ground.
Screw Jack
MA
EM
NAGI0008S01
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SGI152A
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
GI-47
LIFTING POINTS AND TOW TRUCK TOWING
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
=NAGI0008S02
CAUTION:
Place a wooden or rubber block between safety stand and
vehicle body when the supporting body is flat.
SGI130A
GI-48
LIFTING POINTS AND TOW TRUCK TOWING
2-pole Lift
2-pole Lift
=NAGI0008S03
WARNING:
When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible
and ensure that the front and rear of the vehicle are well balanced.
When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the
brake tubes, brake cable and fuel lines.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
SGI131A
TF
PD
AX
SU
Tow Truck Towing
SGI988
NAGI0008S04
CAUTION:
I All applicable state or Provincial (in Canada) laws and
local laws regarding the towing operation must be
obeyed.
I It is necessary to use proper towing equipment to avoid
possible damage to the vehicle during towing operation.
Towing is in accordance with Towing Procedure Manual at
dealer.
I Always attach safety chains before towing.
I When towing, make sure that the transmission, steering
system and power train are in good order. If any unit is
damaged, dollies must be used.
I Never tow an automatic transmission model from the rear
(that is backward) with four wheels on the ground as this
may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
GI-49
LIFTING POINTS AND TOW TRUCK TOWING
Tow Truck Towing (Cont’d)
2WD MODELS
NAGI0008S0401
NISSAN recommends that vehicle be towed with the driving (rear)
wheels off the ground as illustrated.
CAUTION:
I When towing manual or automatic transmission models
with the front wheels on the ground: Turn the ignition key
to the OFF position and secure the steering wheel in a
straightahead position with a rope or similar device. Never
place the ignition key in the LOCK position. This will result
in damage to the steering lock mechanism.
I When towing manual transmission models with the rear
wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (if you
do not use towing dollies): Always release the parking
brake and move the transmission shift lever to the N (neutral) position.
Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances.
Manual transmission models:
I Speed: Below 95 km/h (59 MPH)
I Distance: Less than 800 km (500 miles)
If the speed or distance must necessarily be greater, remove the
propeller shaft beforehand to prevent damage to the transmission.
SGI989
PART TIME 4WD MODELS
SGI990
NAGI0008S0402
NISSAN recommends that a dolly be used as illustrated when
towing 4WD models.
CAUTION:
If towing with the front wheels on the ground or with the rear
wheels on the ground (if you do not use towing dollies) is
necessary: Move the transfer case shift lever into the 2H position.
I When towing with the front wheels on the ground: On
manual transmission models to move the shift lever to the
N (neutral) position, turn the ignition key to the OFF position and secure the steering wheel in a straightahead position with a rope or similar device.
On automatic transmission models to move the selector
lever to N (neutral) position, turn the ignition key to the
ACC position. After moving the selector lever to the N
(neutral) position, turn the ignition key to the OFF position
and secure the steering wheel in a straightahead position
with a rope or similar device.
Never place the ignition key in the LOCK position. This will
result in damage to the steering lock mechanism.
I When towing manual transmission models with the rear
wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground:
Always release the parking brake and move the transmission shift lever to the N (neutral) position.
Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances.
Manual transmission models:
I Speed: Below 95 km/h (59 MPH)
I Distance: Less than 800 km (500 miles)
If the speed or distance must necessarily be greater, remove the
front and rear propeller shafts beforehand to prevent damage to the
transmission.
GI-50
LIFTING POINTS AND TOW TRUCK TOWING
Tow Truck Towing (Cont’d)
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SGI950
MT
ALL-MODE 4WD MODELS
NAGI0008S0404
NISSAN recommends that a dolly or a flat bed truck be used as
illustrated when towing all-mode 4WD models.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
VEHICLE RECOVERY
I
I
I
SGI977
I
NAGI0008S0403
Use the towing hook only, not other parts of the vehicle.
Otherwise, the vehicle body will be damaged.
Use the towing hook only to free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow,
mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle for a long distance using only
the towing hook.
The towing hook is under tremendous force when used to free
a stuck vehicle. Always pull the cable straight out from the front
or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the hook at a sideways
angle.
Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
GI-51
NAGI0009
TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS
Grade
4T
Pitch
mm
M6
6.0
M8
8.0
Bolt size
M10
M12
7T
Hexagon head bolt
Hexagon flange bolt
N·m
kg-m
ft-lb
in-lb
N·m
kg-m
ft-lb
in-lb
1.0
5.1
0.52
3.8
45.1
6.1
0.62
4.5
53.8
1.25
13
1.3
9
—
15
1.5
11
—
1.0
13
1.3
9
—
16
1.6
12
—
1.5
25
2.5
18
—
29
3.0
22
—
1.25
25
2.6
19
—
30
3.1
22
—
1.75
42
4.3
31
—
51
5.2
38
—
1.25
46
4.7
34
—
56
5.7
41
—
10.0
12.0
M14
14.0
1.5
74
7.5
54
—
88
9.0
65
—
M6
6.0
1.0
8.4
0.86
6.2
74.6
10
1.0
7
87
1.25
21
2.1
15
—
25
2.5
18
—
M8
8.0
1.0
22
2.2
16
—
26
2.7
20
—
1.5
41
4.2
30
—
48
4.9
35
—
1.25
43
4.4
32
—
51
5.2
38
—
1.75
71
7.2
52
—
84
8.6
62
—
1.25
77
7.9
57
—
92
9.4
68
—
M10
M12
9T
Tightening torque (Without lubricant)
Bolt diameter *
mm
10.0
12.0
M14
14.0
1.5
127
13.0
94
—
147
15.0
108
—
M6
6.0
1.0
12
1.2
9
—
15
1.5
11
—
1.25
29
3.0
22
—
35
3.6
26
—
M8
8.0
1.0
31
3.2
23
—
37
3.8
27
—
1.5
59
6.0
43
—
70
7.1
51
—
1.25
62
6.3
46
—
74
7.5
54
—
1.75
98
10.0
72
—
118
12.0
87
—
1.25
108
11.0
80
—
137
14.0
101
—
1.5
177
18.0
130
—
206
21.0
152
—
M10
M12
M14
10.0
12.0
14.0
*: Nominal diameter
1) Special parts are excluded.
2) This standard is applicable to bolts having the following marks embossed on the bolt head.
MGI044A
GI-52
NAGI0012
RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS
Refer to the following chart for help in selecting the appropriate chemical product or sealant.
Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants
Product Description
1
2
3
Purpose
Rear View Mirror
Adhesive
Used to permanently
remount rear view mirrors to windows.
Anaerobic Liquid Gasket
For metal-to-metal
flange sealing.
Can fill a 0.38 mm
(0.015 inch) gap and
provide instant sealing
for most powertrain
applications.
999MP-AM001P
High Performance
Thread Sealant
Provides instant sealing on any threaded
straight or parallel
threaded fitting.
(Thread sealant only,
no locking ability.)
I Do not use on plastic.
999MP-AM002P
Gasket Maker
4
6
999MP-AM000P
Nissan Canada Part
No. (Canada)
99998-50505
High Temperature,
High Strength Thread
Locking Sealant (Red)
Medium Strength
Thread Locking Sealant (Blue)
Threadlocker
Threadlocker (service
tool removable)
Aftermarket Cross Reference Part Nos.
MA
Permatex 81844
EM
LC
99998-50503
Permatex 51813 and
51817
EC
FE
CL
999MP-AM002P
Permatex 56521
MT
999MP-AM003P
(Ultra Grey)
99998-50506
(Ultra Grey)
Silicone RTV
Gasket Maker for
Maxima/Quest 5-speed
automatic transmission
(RE5F22A)
5
Nissan North America
Part No. (USA)
—
999MP-AM004P
999MP-AM005P
—
999MP-AM004P
999MP-AM005P
Permatex Ultra Grey
82194;
Three Bond 1207,
1215, 1216, 1217F and
1217G;
Nissan RTV Part No.
999MP-A7007
Three Bond 1281B or
exact equivalent in its
quality
AT
TF
PD
AX
Permatex 27200;
Three Bond 1360,
1360N, 1305 N&P,
1307N, 1335, 1335B,
1363B, 1377C, 1386B,
D&E and 1388
SU
Permatex 24200,
24206, 24240, 24283
and 09178;
Three Bond 1322,
1322N, 1324 D&N,
1333D, 1361C, 1364D,
1370C and 1374
ST
BR
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
GI-53
NAGI0010
SAE J1930 TERMINOLOGY LIST
SAE J1930 Terminology List
SAE J1930 Terminology List
NAGI0010S01
All emission related terms used in this publication in accordance with SAE J1930 are listed. Accordingly, new
terms, new acronyms/abbreviations and old terms are listed in the following chart.
NEW ACRONYM /
ABBREVIATION
NEW TERM
OLD TERM
Air cleaner
ACL
Air cleaner
Barometric pressure
BARO
***
Barometric pressure sensor-BCDD
BAROS-BCDD
BCDD
Camshaft position
CMP
***
Camshaft position sensor
CMPS
Crank angle sensor
Canister
***
Canister
Carburetor
CARB
Carburetor
Charge air cooler
CAC
Intercooler
Closed loop
CL
Closed loop
Closed throttle position switch
CTP switch
Idle switch
Clutch pedal position switch
CPP switch
Clutch switch
Continuous fuel injection system
CFI system
***
Continuous trap oxidizer system
CTOX system
***
Crankshaft position
CKP
***
Crankshaft position sensor
CKPS
***
Data link connector
DLC
***
Diagnostic test mode
DTM
Diagnostic mode
Diagnostic test mode selector
DTM selector
Diagnostic mode selector
Diagnostic test mode I
DTM I
Mode I
Diagnostic test mode II
DTM II
Mode II
Diagnostic trouble code
DTC
Malfunction code
Direct fuel injection system
DFI system
***
Distributor ignition system
DI system
Ignition timing control
Early fuel evaporation-mixture heater
EFE-mixture heater
Mixture heater
Early fuel evaporation system
EFE system
Mixture heater control
Electrically erasable programmable read
only memory
EEPROM
***
Electronic ignition system
EI system
Ignition timing control
Engine control
EC
***
Engine control module
ECM
ECCS control unit
Engine coolant temperature
ECT
Engine temperature
Engine coolant temperature sensor
ECTS
Engine temperature sensor
Engine modification
EM
***
Engine speed
RPM
Engine speed
Erasable programmable read only
memory
EPROM
***
GI-54
SAE J1930 TERMINOLOGY LIST
SAE J1930 Terminology List (Cont’d)
NEW ACRONYM /
ABBREVIATION
NEW TERM
OLD TERM
Evaporative emission canister
EVAP canister
Canister
Evaporative emission system
EVAP system
Canister control solenoid valve
Exhaust gas recirculation valve
EGR valve
EGR valve
Exhaust gas recirculation control-BPT
valve
EGRC-BPT valve
BPT valve
Exhaust gas recirculation control-solenoid
valve
EGRC-solenoid valve
EGR control solenoid valve
Exhaust gas recirculation temperature
sensor
EGRT sensor
Exhaust gas temperature sensor
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
EGR temperature sensor
Flash electrically erasable programmable
read only memory
FEEPROM
***
Flash erasable programmable read only
memory
FEPROM
***
Flexible fuel sensor
FFS
***
Flexible fuel system
FF system
***
Fuel pressure regulator
***
Pressure regulator
Fuel pressure regulator control solenoid
valve
***
PRVR control solenoid valve
Fuel tank temperature sensor
FTT
Tank fuel temperature sensor
Fuel trim
FT
***
Heated Oxygen sensor
HO2S
Exhaust gas sensor
Idle air control system
IAC system
Idle speed control
Idle air control valve-air regulator
IACV-air regulator
Air regulator
Idle air control valve-auxiliary air control
valve
IACV-AAC valve
Auxiliary air control (AAC) valve
Idle air control valve-FICD solenoid valve
IACV-FICD solenoid valve
FICD solenoid valve
Idle air control valve-idle up control solenoid valve
IACV-idle up control solenoid valve
Idle up control solenoid valve
Idle speed control-FI pot
ISC-FI pot
FI pot
Idle speed control system
ISC system
***
Ignition control
IC
***
Ignition control module
ICM
***
Indirect fuel injection system
IFI system
***
Intake air
IA
Air
Intake air temperature sensor
IAT sensor
Air temperature sensor
Knock
***
Detonation
Knock sensor
KS
Detonation sensor
Malfunction indicator lamp
MIL
Check engine light
Manifold absolute pressure
MAP
***
Manifold absolute pressure sensor
MAPS
***
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
GI-55
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAE J1930 TERMINOLOGY LIST
SAE J1930 Terminology List (Cont’d)
NEW ACRONYM /
ABBREVIATION
NEW TERM
OLD TERM
Manifold differential pressure
MDP
***
Manifold differential pressure sensor
MDPS
***
Manifold surface temperature
MST
***
Manifold surface temperature sensor
MSTS
***
Manifold vacuum zone
MVZ
***
Manifold vacuum zone sensor
MVZS
***
Mass air flow sensor
MAFS
Air flow meter
Mixture control solenoid valve
MC solenoid valve
Air-fuel ratio control solenoid valve
Multiport fuel injection System
MFI system
Fuel injection control
Neutral position switch
***
Neutral switch
Nonvolatile random access memory
NVRAM
***
On board diagnostic system
OBD system
Self-diagnosis
Open loop
OL
Open loop
Oxidation catalyst
OC
Catalyst
Oxidation catalytic converter system
OC system
***
Oxygen sensor
O2S
Exhaust gas sensor
Park position switch
***
Park switch
Park/neutral position switch
PNP switch
Park/neutral switch
Periodic trap oxidizer system
PTOX system
***
Positive crankcase ventilation
PCV
Positive crankcase ventilation
Positive crankcase ventilation valve
PCV valve
PCV valve
Powertrain control module
PCM
***
Programmable read only memory
PROM
***
Pulsed secondary air injection control
solenoid valve
PAIRC solenoid valve
AIV control solenoid valve
Pulsed secondary air injection system
PAIR system
Air induction valve (AIV) control
Pulsed secondary air injection valve
PAIR valve
Air induction valve
Random access memory
RAM
***
Read only memory
ROM
***
Scan tool
ST
***
Secondary air injection pump
AIR pump
***
Secondary air injection system
AIR system
***
Sequential multiport fuel injection system
SFI system
Sequential fuel injection
Service reminder indicator
SRI
***
Simultaneous multiport fuel injection system
***
Simultaneous fuel injection
Smoke puff limiter system
SPL system
***
Supercharger
SC
***
GI-56
SAE J1930 TERMINOLOGY LIST
SAE J1930 Terminology List (Cont’d)
NEW ACRONYM /
ABBREVIATION
NEW TERM
OLD TERM
MA
Supercharger bypass
SCB
***
System readiness test
SRT
***
Thermal vacuum valve
TVV
Thermal vacuum valve
Three way catalyst
TWC
Catalyst
Three way catalytic converter system
TWC system
***
Three way + oxidation catalyst
TWC + OC
Catalyst
Three way + oxidation catalytic converter
system
TWC + OC system
***
EC
Throttle body
TB
Throttle chamber
SPI body
FE
Throttle body fuel injection system
TBI system
Fuel injection control
Throttle position
TP
Throttle position
Throttle position sensor
TPS
Throttle sensor
Throttle position switch
TP switch
Throttle switch
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
TCC solenoid valve
Lock-up cancel solenoid
Lock-up solenoid
Transmission control module
TCM
A/T control unit
Turbocharger
TC
Turbocharger
Vehicle speed sensor
VSS
Vehicle speed sensor
Volume air flow sensor
VAFS
Air flow meter
Warm up oxidation catalyst
WU-OC
Catalyst
Warm up oxidation catalytic converter sys- WU-OC system
tem
***
Warm up three way catalyst
WU-TWC
Catalyst
Warm up three way catalytic converter
system
WU-TWC system
***
Wide open throttle position switch
WOTP switch
Full switch
EM
LC
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
GI-57
NOTES
ACCELERATOR CONTROL, FUEL &
EXHAUST SYSTEMS
SECTION
FE
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
CONTENTS
PREPARATION ...............................................................2
Special Service Tool ....................................................2
Commercial Service Tools ...........................................2
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM ...........................3
Removal and Installation .............................................3
REMOVAL .................................................................3
INSTALLATION..........................................................3
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION .........................3
FUEL SYSTEM ................................................................4
Removal and Installation .............................................4
FUEL TANK ...............................................................5
FUEL PUMP AND FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT ..........6
EXHAUST SYSTEM ........................................................9
Removal and Installation .............................................9
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
Special Service Tool
NAFE0001
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV10114400 (J38365)
Heated oxygen sensor
wrench
Loosening or tightening rear heated oxygen sensor (For right bank)
a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
NT636
Commercial Service Tools
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
NAFE0007
Description
Oxygen sensor thread
cleaner
(J-43897-18)
(J-43897-12)
Reconditioning the exhaust system
threads before installing a new heated
oxygen sensor. Use with anti-seize lubricant shown below.
a: J-43897-18 (18 mm dia.) for Zirconia
Heated Oxygen Sensor
b: J-43897-12 (12 mm dia.) for Titania
Heated Oxygen Sensor
NT778
Anti-seize lubricant (PermatexTM 133AR or
equivalent meeting MIL
specification MIL-A-907)
Lubricating heated oxygen sensor thread
cleaning tool when reconditioning exhaust
system threads.
NT779
FE-2
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
NAFE0008
CAUTION:
I Check that throttle valve opens when accelerator pedal is fully depressed. Also check that it returns
to idle position when pedal is released when ignition switch is in “ON” position.
I Check accelerator control parts for improper contact with any adjacent parts.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
CL
MT
AT
SFE787A
TF
1.
Accelerator pedal assembly
PD
REMOVAL
NAFE0008S01
1. Remove harness connector.
2. Remove mounting nut then remove accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION:
I Do not disassemble accelerator pedal or remove/install accelerator pedal position sensor.
I Do not drop or shock accelerator pedal assembly.
I Keep accelerator pedal assembly from getting wet.
INSTALLATION
AX
SU
BR
NAFE0008S02
Install in reverse order of removal.
ST
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
I
I
I
I
NAFE0008S03
Check if accelerator pedal moves smoothly within its range.
Check if accelerator pedal returns securely to its original position.
Perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning” when removing the accelerator pedal position
sensor harness connector. Refer to EC-81, “BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE”.
For electrical inspection of accelerator pedal assembly, refer to EC-731, “DTC P2138 APP SENSOR”.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
FE-3
FUEL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
NAFE0004
WARNING:
When replacing fuel line parts, be sure to observe the following:
I Put a “CAUTION: INFLAMMABLE” sign in workshop.
I Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open
flames and sparks away from work area.
I Be sure to work in a well ventilated area and furnish the
workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher.
CAUTION:
I Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following
procedures:
a) Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put
lid on securely. Keep the container in safe area.
b) Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to MA-17,
“Changing Fuel Filter”.
c) Disconnect battery ground cable.
I Always replace O-ring with new ones.
I Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed.
I Do not tighten hose clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
I When installing fuel check valve, be careful of its designated direction. Refer to EC-41, “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM”.
I For inspection of ORVR system parts, refer to EC-47, “ON
Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR)”.
I After installation, make sure there is no fuel leaks at connections in the following steps.
a) Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines with turning ignition
switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel
leaks at connections.
b) Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at
connections.
FE-4
FUEL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
CL
MT
AT
TF
SFE766A
PD
AX
SU
FUEL TANK
1.
2.
3.
4.
I
NAFE0004S01
Release fuel pressure from fuel line.
Refer to MA-17, “Changing Fuel Filter”.
Remove inspection hole cover located behind the rear seat.
Disconnect harness connectors under inspection hole cover.
Disconnect fuel hoses.
Put mating marks on hoses for correct installation.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SFE420A
5.
Disconnect filler hose, vent hose and evaporation hose at fuel
tank side.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SFE468A
FE-5
FUEL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
6.
7.
Remove parking brake wire from fuel tank protector.
Remove fuel tank protector.
SFE422A
8.
Remove fuel tank band mounting bolts while supporting fuel
tank.
9. Remove fuel tank.
Installation procedure is the reverse order of removal.
SFE469A
FUEL PUMP AND FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT
NAFE0004S02
SFE810A
1.
2.
3.
I
4.
Release fuel pressure from fuel line.
Refer to MA-17, “Changing Fuel Filter”.
Remove inspection hole cover located behind the rear seat.
Disconnect harness connectors and fuel tubes from upper
plate of fuel level sensor unit.
Put mating marks on tubes for correct installation.
Remove fuel level sensor unit retainer and fuel level sensor
unit.
FE-6
FUEL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
5.
I
I
Disconnect the quick connectors as follows.
Hold the sides of the connector, push in tubs and pull out the
tube.
If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull
several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them
by pulling.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SFE544A
CAUTION:
I The quick connector can be removed when the tabs are
completely depressed. Do not twist it more than necessary.
I Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector.
I Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful
when welding near the tube.
I Prevent acid liquid such as battery electrolyte, etc. from
getting on the resin tube.
I Do not bend or twist the tube during installation and
removal.
I Only when the quick connector is replaced, remove the
remaining retainer on the fuel level sensor unit. (Feed
tube)
I When the fuel level sensor unit is replaced, also replace
the retainer with a new one [Yellow colored retainer].
(Feed tube)
EC
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
KBIA1295E
I
Press fuel tube and fuel level sensor unit as shown in the
figure. Disconnect the joint by pushing tab and pull out
fuel tube. (Return tube)
BR
ST
RS
BT
JFE791A
I
To keep the connecting portion clean and to avoid damage
and foreign materials, cover them completely with plastic
bags or something similar.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
JFE792A
FE-7
FUEL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
6.
Remove fuel pump with bracket while lifting the pawl of the fuel
pump bracket upward.
7.
I
1)
2)
3)
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Connect the quick connectors as follows.
Be sure that the connecting portion is clean and smooth.
Align mating marks.
Insert tube straight into the connector aligning each center until
you hear a click.
After connecting, make sure that the connection is secure by
following method.
Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely
connected.
Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the
connector.
SFE425A
4)
a.
JFE793A
b.
I
Face fuel level sensor unit as shown in the figure, and install
it with knock pin on back aligned with knock pin hole on fuel
tank.
SFE428A
FE-8
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
NAFE0005
CAUTION:
I Always replace exhaust gaskets with new ones when reassembling.
I With engine running, check all tube connections for exhaust gas leaks, and entire system for
unusual noises.
I Check to ensure that mounting brackets and mounting insulators are installed properly and free
from undue stress. Improper installation could result in excessive noise or vibration.
I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
I Before installing new heated oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 of J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
I Do not overtorque the heated oxygen sensor. Doing so may cause damage to the heated oxygen
sensor, resulting in the MIL coming on.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
FE-9
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
SFE788A
1.
2.
3.
4.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1)
Front tube
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2)
Dynamic damper
5.
6.
7.
Mounting rubber
Clamp
Mounting bracket
FE-10
8. Mounting rubber
9. Main muffler
10. Post muffler
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SFE789A
1.
2.
3.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1)
Front tube
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2)
4.
5.
6.
Mounting bracket
Mounting rubber
Main muffler
7.
8.
Post muffler
Dynamic damper
SC
EL
IDX
FE-11
NOTES
ENGINE LUBRICATION &
COOLING SYSTEMS
SECTION
LC
GI
MA
EM
EC
FE
CONTENTS
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM..................................2
Precautions ..................................................................2
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE ............2
Preparation ..................................................................2
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS ........................................2
COMMERCIAL SERVICE TOOL ..................................3
Lubrication Circuit ........................................................3
Oil Pressure Check......................................................5
Oil Pump ......................................................................6
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .................................6
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY................................6
OIL PUMP INSPECTION ............................................7
REGULATOR VALVE INSPECTION ............................7
OIL FILTER ...............................................................8
Oil Cooler.....................................................................8
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .................................8
INSPECTION .............................................................9
Service Data and Specifications (SDS).......................9
OIL PRESSURE ........................................................9
REGULATOR VALVE .................................................9
OIL PUMP .................................................................9
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM........................................10
Precautions ................................................................10
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE ..........10
Preparation ................................................................10
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS ......................................10
Cooling Circuit ...........................................................11
System Check............................................................12
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES ...................12
CHECKING RADIATOR ............................................12
CHECKING RADIATOR CAP ....................................12
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS ............13
Water Pump ...............................................................13
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...............................13
REMOVAL ...............................................................14
INSPECTION ...........................................................15
INSTALLATION........................................................16
Thermostat.................................................................18
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...............................18
INSPECTION ...........................................................18
Water Control Valve...................................................19
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...............................19
INSPECTION ...........................................................20
Radiator .....................................................................21
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...............................21
Cooling Fan (Crankshaft driven) ...............................22
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...............................22
INSPECTION ...........................................................22
Refilling Engine Coolant ............................................22
Radiator (Aluminum type)..........................................23
PREPARATION .......................................................23
DISASSEMBLY ........................................................23
ASSEMBLY .............................................................24
INSPECTION ...........................................................25
Overheating Cause Analysis .....................................26
Service Data and Specifications (SDS).....................27
THERMOSTAT ........................................................27
WATER CONTROL VALVE .......................................27
RADIATOR ..............................................................27
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Precautions
Precautions
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
I
SEM164F
I
3.
4.
5.
NALC0001
Use a scraper to remove all traces of old liquid gasket from
mating surfaces and grooves. Also, completely clean any oil
from these areas.
Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to mating surfaces.
(Use Genuine RTV silicone sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-53.)
For oil pan, be sure liquid gasket diameter is 4.0 to 5.0 mm
(0.157 to 0.197 in).
For areas except oil pan, be sure liquid gasket diameter is 2.0
to 3.0 mm (0.079 to 0.118 in).
Apply liquid gasket around the inner side of bolt holes (unless
otherwise specified).
Assembly should be done within 5 minutes after coating.
Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling engine oil and engine
coolant.
AEM080
Preparation
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
ST25051001
(J25695-1)
Oil pressure gauge
NT050
ST25052000
(J25695-2)
Hose
Adapting oil pressure gauge to upper oil pan
NT559
WS39930000
(
—
)
Tube pressure
Pressing the tube of liquid gasket
NT052
LC-2
NALC0002
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Preparation (Cont’d)
COMMERCIAL SERVICE TOOL
Tool name
NALC0040
GI
Description
MA
Removing and installing oil pressure switch
Deep socket 26 mm, 3/8 drive
Deep socket
EM
NT818
EC
FE
CL
MT
Lubrication Circuit
AT
NALC0003
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SLC350BD
SC
EL
IDX
LC-3
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Lubrication Circuit (Cont’d)
SLC493BA
LC-4
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Oil Pressure Check
Oil Pressure Check
NALC0004
WARNING:
I Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine and oil may
be hot.
I Oil pressure check should be done in “Neutral position”
(M/T) or “Parking position” (A/T).
1. Check oil level.
2. Disconnect oil pressure switch harness connector.
3. Remove oil pressure switch using a deep socket. (Commercial
service tool)
4. Install pressure gauge.
5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
6. Check oil pressure with engine running under no-load.
SLC497B
7.
a.
b.
Engine speed
rpm
Approximate discharge pressure
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Idle speed
2,000
More than 98 (1.0, 14)
294 (3.0, 43)
If difference is extreme, check oil passage and oil pump
for oil leaks.
After the inspections, install the oil pressure switch as follows.
Remove the old sealant adhering to switch and engine.
Apply Genuine RTV silicone sealant or equivalent to the thread
and tighten. Refer to GI-53.
13 - 17 N·m (1.25 - 1.75 kg-m, 9 - 12 ft-lb)
GI
MA
EM
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SLC498B
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SLC926
LC-5
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Oil Pump
Oil Pump
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1.
2.
I
3.
=NALC0005
Remove timing chain. Refer to EM-24, “Removal”.
Remove oil pump assembly.
Inspect the oil pump after removing it.
Reinstall any parts removed in reverse order of removal.
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
NALC0006
SLC494B
I
When installing oil pump, apply engine oil to rotors.
LC-6
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Oil Pump (Cont’d)
OIL PUMP INSPECTION
NALC0007
I
Install oil pump with the groove of the inner rotor facing
the oil pump cover.
Using a feeler gauge, straightedge and micrometers, check the
following clearances:
Unit: mm (in)
SLC324B
Body to outer rotor radial clearance 1
0.114 - 0.200 (0.0045 - 0.0079)
Inner rotor to outer gear tip clearance
2
Below 0.18 (0.0071)
Body to inner rotor axial clearance 3
0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028)
Body to outer rotor axial clearance 4
0.050 - 0.110 (0.0020 - 0.0043)
Inner rotor to brazed portion of housing clearance 5
0.045 - 0.091 (0.0018 - 0.0036)
I
I
If the tip clearance (2) exceeds the limit, replace rotor set.
If body to rotor clearances (1, 3, 4, 5) exceed the limit,
replace oil pump body assembly.
GI
MA
EM
EC
FE
CL
MT
SLC932A
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SLC933A
BR
ST
RS
BT
SLC934AB
REGULATOR VALVE INSPECTION
1.
2.
NALC0008
Visually inspect components for wear and damage.
Check oil pressure regulator valve sliding surface and valve
spring.
3. Coat regulator valve with engine oil. Check that it falls
smoothly into the valve hole by its own weight.
If damaged, replace regulator valve set or oil pump body.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SLC251B
LC-7
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Oil Pump (Cont’d)
4.
Check regulator valve to oil pump body clearance.
Clearance:
6 : 0.040 - 0.097 mm (0.0016 - 0.0038 in)
If it exceeds the limit, replace oil pump body.
SLC935AA
OIL FILTER
NALC0009
The oil filter is a small, full-flow cartridge type and is provided with
a relief valve.
I Use Tool specified in MA-19 for changing oil filter.
ALC094
Oil Cooler
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NALC0036
SLC353BC
1.
I
2.
Disconnect water hoses from oil cooler, pinching water hose to
prevent coolant spill.
Do not spill coolant on the drive belt.
Remove oil cooler.
LC-8
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Oil Cooler (Cont’d)
I
Inspect the oil cooler after removing it.
GI
MA
EM
3.
I
Installation is in reverse order of removal.
When installing the oil cooler, align the oil cooler stopper
with the stopper of the oil cooler bracket.
INSPECTION
Oil Cooler
1.
2.
FE
NALC0037
NALC0037S01
Check oil cooler for cracks.
Check oil cooler for clogging by blowing through coolant inlet.
If necessary, replace oil cooler assembly.
Oil Pressure Relief Valve
SLC333B
EC
CL
MT
NALC0037S02
Inspect oil pressure relief valve for movement, cracks and breaks
by pushing the ball. If replacement is necessary, remove valve by
prying it out with a suitable tool. Install a new valve in place by
tapping it.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
Service Data and Specifications (SDS)
OIL PRESSURE
NALC0010
Engine speed
rpm
Approximate discharge pressure
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Idle speed
2,000
More than 98 (1.0, 14)
294 (3.0, 43)
BR
ST
RS
REGULATOR VALVE
NALC0011
Unit: mm (in)
Regulator valve to oil pump cover clearance
BT
0.040 - 0.097 (0.0016 - 0.0038)
OIL PUMP
NALC0012
Unit: mm (in)
Body to outer rotor radial clearance
0.114 - 0.200 (0.0045 - 0.0079)
Inner rotor to outer rotor tip clearance
Below 0.18 (0.0071)
Body to inner rotor axial clearance
0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028)
Body to outer rotor axial clearance
0.050 - 0.110 (0.0020 - 0.0043)
Inner rotor to brazed portion of housing clearance
0.045 - 0.091 (0.0018 - 0.0036)
LC-9
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Precautions
Precautions
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
I
SEM164F
I
3.
4.
5.
NALC0013
Use a scraper to remove all traces of old liquid gasket from
mating surfaces and grooves. Also, completely clean any oil
from these areas.
Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to mating surfaces.
(Use Genuine RTV silicone sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-53.)
For oil pan, be sure liquid gasket diameter is 4.0 to 5.0 mm
(0.157 to 0.197 in).
For areas except oil pan, be sure liquid gasket diameter is 2.0
to 3.0 mm (0.079 to 0.118 in).
Apply liquid gasket around the inner side of bolt holes (unless
otherwise specified).
Assembly should be done within 5 minutes after coating.
Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling engine oil and engine
coolant.
AEM080
Preparation
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
NALC0014
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
WS39930000
(
—
)
Tube pressure
Pressing the tube of liquid gasket
NT052
EG17650301
(J33984-A)
Radiator cap tester
adapter
Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator filler neck
a: 28 (1.10) dia.
b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in)
NT564
KV99103510
(
—
)
Radiator plate pliers A
Installing radiator upper and lower tanks
NT224
KV99103520
(
—
)
Radiator plate pliers B
Removing radiator upper and lower tanks
NT225
LC-10
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling Circuit
Cooling Circuit
NALC0015
GI
MA
EM
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SLC321BC
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SLC513B
LC-11
IDX
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
System Check
System Check
NALC0016
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot; serious
burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around the cap and carefully remove it by
turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape
and then turn the cap all the way off.
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES
NALC0016S01
Check hoses for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage,
loose connections, chafing and deterioration.
CHECKING RADIATOR
NALC0016S02
Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as
follows.
I Be careful not to bend or damage the radiator fins.
I When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as cooling fan, radiator shroud and horns.
Then tape the harness and connectors to prevent water from
entering.
1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core vertically downward.
2. Apply water again to all radiator core surfaces once per
minute.
3. Stop washing if any stains no longer flow out from the radiator.
4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core vertically downward.
I Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2, 71 psi) and
keep distance more than 30 cm (11.8 in).
5. Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces once per
minute until no water sprays out.
CHECKING RADIATOR CAP
To check radiator cap, apply pressure to cap with a tester.
Radiator cap relief pressure:
Standard
78 - 98 kPa
(0.8 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 11 - 14 psi)
Limit
59 kPa (0.6 kg/cm2, 9 psi)
SLC755A
Pull the negative pressure valve to open it.
Check that it closes completely when released.
SMA967B
LC-12
NALC0016S03
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
System Check (Cont’d)
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS
NALC0016S04
To check for leakage, apply pressure to the cooling system with a
tester.
Testing pressure:
157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi)
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator
damage.
GI
MA
EM
SLC756A
EC
Water Pump
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NALC0017
CAUTION:
I When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to
get coolant on drive belt.
I Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be
replaced as a unit.
I After installing water pump, connect hose and clamp
securely, then check for leaks using radiator cap tester.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SLC509B
HA
SC
EL
IDX
LC-13
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Water Pump (Cont’d)
REMOVAL
=NALC0018
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove undercover.
Remove suspension member stay.
Drain coolant from radiator.
Remove radiator shrouds.
Remove drive belts.
Remove cooling fan.
Remove water drain plug on water pump side of cylinder block.
Remove chain tensioner cover and water pump cover.
9.
Pushing timing chain tensioner sleeve, apply a stopper pin so
it does not return. Then remove the chain tensioner assembly.
SLC499B
SLC328B
10. Remove the 3 water pump fixing bolts. Secure a gap between
water pump gear and timing chain, by turning crankshaft pulley 20° backwards.
SLC941A
11. Put M8 bolts [pitch: 1.25 mm (0.0492 in), length: approx. 50
mm (1.97 in)] to two water pump fixing bolt holes.
JLC357B
LC-14
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Water Pump (Cont’d)
12. Tighten M8 bolts by turning half turn alternately until they reach
timing chain rear case.
I In order to prevent damages to water pump or timing chain rear
case, do not tighten one bolt continuously. Always turn each
bolt half turn each time.
13. Lift up water pump and remove it.
I When lifting up water pump, do not allow water pump gear to
hit timing chain.
GI
MA
EM
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SLC116B
INSPECTION
1.
2.
Check for badly rusted or corroded body assembly.
Check for rough operation due to excessive end play.
NALC0019
BR
ST
RS
BT
SLC943A
HA
SC
EL
IDX
LC-15
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Water Pump (Cont’d)
INSTALLATION
=NALC0020
1.
I
Apply engine oil and coolant to O-rings as shown in the figure.
Install O-ring with a white paint mark to the front side.
2.
I
Install water pump.
Do not allow cylinder block to nip O-rings when installing
water pump.
3.
Return the crankshaft pulley to its original position by turning
it 20° forward.
4.
I
Install timing chain tensioner, then remove the stopper pin.
When installing the timing chain tensioner, engine oil
should be applied to the oil hole and tensioner.
5.
a.
Install chain tensioner cover and water pump cover.
Before installing, remove all traces of liquid gasket from mating surface of water pump cover and chain tensioner cover
using a scraper.
Also remove traces of liquid gasket from mating surface of
front cover.
PBIC0855E
SLC031B
SLC156B
SLC961A
SLC944A
LC-16
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Water Pump (Cont’d)
b.
Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to mating surface of
chain tensioner cover and water pump cover.
Use Genuine RTV silicone sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-53.
GI
MA
EM
EC
FE
CL
MT
SLC500B
6.
I
Reinstall any parts removed in reverse order of removal.
After starting engine, let idle for three minutes, then rev
engine up to 3,000 rpm under no load to purge air from the
high-pressure chamber of the chain tensioners. The
engine may produce a rattling noise. This indicates that
air still remains in the chamber and is not a matter of
concern.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
LC-17
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Thermostat
Thermostat
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
=NALC0021
SLC354BA
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
I
Remove undercover.
Remove suspension member stay.
Drain coolant from radiator.
Remove drive belts.
Remove water drain plug on water pump side of cylinder block.
Disconnect lower radiator hose.
Remove water inlet and thermostat assembly.
Do not disassemble water inlet and thermostat assembly.
Replace them as a unit, if necessary.
8.
I
Install thermostat with jiggle valve facing upward.
After installation, run engine for a few minutes, and check
for leaks.
Be careful not to spill coolant over engine compartment.
Use a rag to absorb coolant.
Reinstall any removed parts in reverse order of removal.
SLC962AB
I
9.
SLC948A
INSPECTION
1.
2.
NALC0022
Check valve seating condition at ordinary room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
Check valve opening temperature and maximum valve lift.
Standard
Valve opening temperature
Valve lift
SLC949A
LC-18
76.5°C (170°F)
More than 8.6 mm/90°C
(0.339 in/194°F)
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Thermostat (Cont’d)
3.
Then check if valve closes at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening
temperature.
GI
MA
EM
EC
Water Control Valve
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NALC0032
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SLC490BA
SU
1.
2.
Water outlet housing
Water control valve
3.
4.
Water outlet
Water hose
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
5.
6.
Cylinder block water outlet
Engine coolant temperature
sensor
Release fuel pressure.
Refer to EC-64, “Fuel Pressure Release”.
Remove undercover.
Remove suspension member stay.
Drain coolant from radiator.
Remove engine cover.
Remove air duct with air cleaner assembly.
Disconnect hoses, harness and so on.
Remove upper intake manifold corrector.
Remove intake manifold corrector support bolts.
Remove lower intake manifold corrector.
Disconnect injector harness connectors.
Remove injector tube.
Remove intake manifold.
Remove water outlet housing and water control valve.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
LC-19
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Water Control Valve (Cont’d)
SLC334B
15. Install water control valve and water outlet housing.
a. Install gum ring to thermostat.
b. Point the arrow on the upper surface of the valve to the front
of the engine, and also be sure to install the protrusions and
the valve stopper so that they are aligned in a straight line.
16. Reinstall any removed parts in reverse order of removal.
I When installing intake manifold, injector tube and intake
manifold collectors, refer to EM-12, “TIGHTENING PROCEDURES”.
I After installation, run engine for a few minutes, and check
for leaks.
I Be careful not to spill coolant over engine compartment.
Use a rag to absorb coolant.
INSPECTION
1.
2.
NALC0033
Check valve seating condition at ordinary room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
Check valve opening temperature and maximum valve lift.
Standard
Valve opening temperature
Valve lift
SLC252B
3.
95°C (203°F)
More than 8.0 mm/108°C
(0.315 in/226°F)
Then check if valve closes at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening
temperature.
LC-20
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Radiator
Radiator
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
GI
=NALC0023
1. Remove undercover.
2. Remove suspension member stay.
3. Drain coolant from radiator.
4. Disconnect radiator upper and lower hoses.
5. Remove upper and lower radiator shroud.
6. Remove A/T oil cooler hoses. (A/T)
7. Disconnect reservoir tank hose.
8. Remove radiator mounting bracket.
9. Remove radiator.
10. After repairing or replacing radiator, install any part removed in reverse order of removal.
When filling radiator with coolant, refer to MA-15, “Changing Engine Coolant”.
MA
EM
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
SLC501B
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
LC-21
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling Fan (Crankshaft driven)
Cooling Fan (Crankshaft driven)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
I
I
I
=NALC0038
Do not release the drive belt tension by removing the fan pulley.
Fan coupling cannot be disassembled and should be replaced
as a unit. If front mark F is present, install fan so that side
marked F faces the front.
Install the drive belt only after the fan and fan coupling to fan
pulley bracket flange bolts/nuts have been properly torqued.
SLC502B
INSPECTION
NALC0039
Check fan coupling for rough operation, wobbling, oil leakage or
bent bimetal.
After assembly, verify the fan does not wobble or flap while the
engine is running.
WARNING:
I When the engine is running, keep hands and clothing
away from moving parts such as drive belts and fan.
SLC067B
Refilling Engine Coolant
NALC0034
For details on refilling engine coolant, refer to MA-16, “REFILLING
ENGINE COOLANT”.
LC-22
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Radiator (Aluminum type)
Radiator (Aluminum type)
PREPARATION
GI
=NALC0025
MA
EM
EC
FE
CL
MT
SLC882AB
1.
2.
3.
Attach the spacer to the tip of the radiator plate pliers A. Spacer
specification: 1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick x 18 mm (0.71 in) wide
x 8.5 mm (0.335 in) long.
Make sure that when radiator plate pliers A are closed dimension H′′ is approx. 7.6 mm (0.299 in).
Adjust dimension H′′ with the spacer, if necessary.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SLC655CB
DISASSEMBLY
1.
NALC0026
Remove upper and lower tanks with Tool.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SLC903-A
I
Grip the crimped edge and bend it upwards so that Tool slips
off.
Do not bend excessively.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SLC893
LC-23
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Radiator (Aluminum type) (Cont’d)
I
In areas where Tool cannot be used, use a screwdriver to bend
the edge up.
Be careful not to damage tank.
2. Remove sealing rubbers.
SLC930
3.
4.
Make sure the edge stands straight up.
Remove oil cooler from tank. (A/T models only)
SLC931
ASSEMBLY
1. Install oil cooler. (A/T models only)
Pay attention to direction of conical washer.
SLC894
2.
Clean contact portion of tank.
SLC932
3. Install sealing rubber.
Push it in with fingers.
Be careful not to twist sealing rubber.
SLC917A
LC-24
NALC0027
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Radiator (Aluminum type) (Cont’d)
4.
Caulk tank in specified sequence with Tool.
GI
MA
EM
SLC904-A
EC
FE
CL
MT
SLC896
I
AT
Use pliers in the locations where Tool cannot be used.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SLC897
5.
Make sure that the rim is completely crimped down.
Standard height “H”:
8.0 - 8.4 mm (0.315 - 0.331 in)
6. Confirm that there is no leakage.
Refer to Inspection.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SLC554A
INSPECTION
1.
NALC0028
Apply pressure with Tool.
Specified pressure value:
157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi)
WARNING:
To prevent the risk of the hose coming undone while under
pressure, securely fasten it down with a hose clamp.
Attach a hose to the oil cooler to seal its inlet and outlet. (A/T
models only)
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SLC933-A
LC-25
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Radiator (Aluminum type) (Cont’d)
2.
Check for leakage by soaking radiator in water container.
SLC934
Overheating Cause Analysis
Symptom
Check items
Water pump malfunction
Worn or loose drive belt
Thermostat stuck closed
Poor heat transfer
NALC0029
—
Dust contamination or
paper clogging
Damaged fins
—
Physical damage
Clogged radiator cooling
tube
Excess foreign material
(rust, dirt, sand, etc.)
Cooling fan does not operate
Reduced air flow
High resistance to fan rotation
Fan assembly
—
Damaged fan blades
Cooling system parts
malfunction
Damaged radiator shroud
—
—
—
Improper coolant mixture
ratio
—
—
—
Poor coolant quality
—
Coolant density
—
Loose clamp
Cooling hose
Cracked hose
Water pump
Poor sealing
Loose
Radiator cap
Poor sealing
Coolant leaks
Insufficient coolant
Radiator
O-ring for damage, deterioration or improper fitting
Cracked radiator tank
Cracked radiator core
Reservoir tank
Overflowing reservoir tank
LC-26
Exhaust gas leaks into
cooling system
Cracked reservoir tank
Cylinder head deterioration
Cylinder head gasket
deterioration
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Overheating Cause Analysis (Cont’d)
Symptom
GI
Check items
High engine rpm under
no load
Driving in low gear for
extended time
Abusive driving
MA
EM
Driving at extremely high
speed
—
Overload on engine
Powertrain system malfunction
Installed improper size
wheels and tires
Except cooling system
parts malfunction
EC
—
Dragging brakes
FE
Improper ignition timing
Blocked bumper
—
CL
Installed car brassiere
Blocked radiator grille
Blocked or restricted air
flow
Blocked radiator
Mud contamination or
paper clogging
MT
—
—
AT
Blocked condenser
Blocked airflow
Installed large fog lamp
TF
PD
AX
SU
Service Data and Specifications (SDS)
THERMOSTAT
NALC0030
Valve opening temperature
BR
76.5°C (170°F)
Valve lift
ST
More than 8.6 mm/90°C (0.339 in/194°F)
WATER CONTROL VALVE
NALC0035
Valve opening temperature
RS
95°C (203°F)
Valve lift
More than 8.0 mm/108°C (0.315 in/226°F)
RADIATOR
BT
NALC0031
Unit: kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Standard
78 - 98 (0.8 - 1.0, 11 - 14)
Limit
59 (0.6, 9)
HA
Cap relief pressure
Leakage test pressure
SC
157 (1.6, 23)
EL
IDX
LC-27
NOTES
ENGINE MECHANICAL
SECTION
EM
GI
MA
LC
EC
FE
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS ...............................................................3
Parts Requiring Angular Tightening.............................3
Liquid Gasket Application Procedure ..........................3
PREPARATION ...............................................................4
Special Service Tools ..................................................4
Commercial Service Tools ...........................................6
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................................8
NVH Troubleshooting - Engine Noise .........................9
OUTER COMPONENT PARTS .....................................10
Removal and Installation ...........................................10
TIGHTENING PROCEDURES ...................................12
MEASUREMENT OF COMPRESSION PRESSURE ....14
OIL PAN.........................................................................16
Components...............................................................16
Removal.....................................................................16
Installation..................................................................19
TIMING CHAIN ..............................................................21
Components...............................................................21
POSITION FOR APPLYING LIQUID GASKET ............22
Removal.....................................................................24
Inspection...................................................................31
Installation..................................................................31
OIL SEAL.......................................................................39
Replacement..............................................................39
VALVE OIL SEAL .....................................................39
OIL SEAL INSTALLATION DIRECTION .....................40
FRONT OIL SEAL ....................................................40
REAR OIL SEAL ......................................................40
CYLINDER HEAD..........................................................41
Components...............................................................41
Removal.....................................................................42
Disassembly...............................................................44
Inspection...................................................................44
CYLINDER HEAD DISTORTION ...............................44
CAMSHAFT VISUAL CHECK ....................................45
CAMSHAFT RUNOUT ..............................................45
CAMSHAFT CAM HEIGHT .......................................45
CAMSHAFT JOURNAL CLEARANCE ........................45
CAMSHAFT END PLAY............................................46
CAMSHAFT SPROCKET RUNOUT ...........................46
VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE ....................................46
VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT ................................47
VALVE SEATS .........................................................47
REPLACING VALVE SEAT FOR SERVICE PARTS ....48
VALVE DIMENSIONS ...............................................48
VALVE SPRING .......................................................49
VALVE LIFTER ........................................................49
Assembly ...................................................................50
Installation..................................................................50
Valve Clearance.........................................................54
CHECKING .............................................................54
ADJUSTING ............................................................57
ENGINE ASSEMBLY.....................................................59
Removal and Installation ...........................................59
REMOVAL ...............................................................60
INSTALLATION........................................................62
CYLINDER BLOCK .......................................................63
Components...............................................................63
CYLINDER BLOCK HEATER ....................................64
Removal and Installation ...........................................64
Disassembly...............................................................64
PISTON, CRANKSHAFT AND OIL JET ......................64
Inspection...................................................................65
PISTON AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE ..................65
PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE ............................66
PISTON RING END GAP..........................................66
CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION ...............67
CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION AND WEAR ...........67
PISTON-TO-BORE CLEARANCE ..............................68
CRANKSHAFT.........................................................69
BEARING CLEARANCE ...........................................69
CONNECTING ROD BUSHING CLEARANCE
(SMALL END) ..........................................................72
FLYWHEEL/DRIVE PLATE RUNOUT ........................73
Assembly ...................................................................73
PISTON ..................................................................73
OIL JET ..................................................................74
CRANKSHAFT.........................................................74
KNOCK SENSOR ....................................................76
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT OF PILOT BUSHING (M/T) OR
PILOT CONVERTER (A/T)........................................77
FLYWHEEL/DRIVE PLATE .......................................77
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .........78
General Specifications...............................................78
Compression Pressure ..............................................78
Cylinder Head ............................................................78
Valve ..........................................................................79
VALVE ....................................................................79
VALVE CLEARANCE................................................79
VALVE SPRING .......................................................79
VALVE LIFTER ........................................................79
AVAILABLE LIFTERS (SHIMLESS TYPE) ..................80
VALVE GUIDE .........................................................81
Valve Seat..................................................................81
Camshaft and Camshaft Bearing ..............................82
EM-2
(Cont’d)
Cylinder Block............................................................83
Piston, Piston Ring and Piston Pin ...........................84
AVAILABLE PISTON ................................................84
PISTON RING .........................................................85
PISTON PIN ............................................................85
Connecting Rod .........................................................85
Crankshaft..................................................................86
Available Main Bearing..............................................87
UNDERSIZE ............................................................87
Available Connecting Rod Bearing............................88
CONNECTING ROD BEARING .................................88
UNDERSIZE ............................................................88
Miscellaneous Components.......................................88
BEARING CLEARANCE ...........................................88
PRECAUTIONS
Parts Requiring Angular Tightening
Parts Requiring Angular Tightening
I
a)
b)
c)
d)
I
I
I
NAEM0001
Use an angle wrench for the final tightening of the following
engine parts:
Cylinder head bolts
Main bearing cap bolts
Connecting rod cap bolts
Crankshaft pulley bolt
Do not use a torque value for final tightening.
The torque value for these parts are for a preliminary step.
Ensure thread and seat surfaces are clean and coated with
engine oil.
GI
MA
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
Liquid Gasket Application Procedure
1.
2.
I
AT
NAEM0002
Use a scraper to remove all traces of old liquid gasket
from mating surfaces and grooves. Also, completely clean
any oil from these areas.
Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to mating surfaces. (Use Genuine RTV silicone sealant or equivalent.
Refer to GI-53.)
Be sure liquid gasket diameter is as specified.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEM164F
3.
4.
5.
Apply liquid gasket around the inner side of bolt holes
(unless otherwise specified).
Assembly should be done within 5 minutes after coating.
Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling engine oil and
engine coolant.
BR
ST
RS
BT
AEM080
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EM-3
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
Special Service Tools
NAEM0003
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
ST0501S000
(
—
)
Engine stand assembly
1 ST05011000
(
—
)
Engine stand
2 ST05012000
(
—
)
Base
Disassembling and assembling
NT042
KV10106500
(
—
)
Engine stand shaft
NT028
KV10117000
(J41262)
Engine sub-attachment
KV10117000 has been replaced with KV10117001
(KV10117000 is no longer in production, but it is
usable).
NT373
KV10117001
(
—
)
Engine sub-attachment
Installing on the cylinder block
NT372
ST10120000
(J24239-01)
Cylinder head bolt
wrench
Loosening and tightening cylinder head bolt
a: 13 (0.51) dia.
b: 12 (0.47)
c: 10 (0.39)
Unit: mm (in)
NT583
KV10116200
(J26336-A)
Valve spring compressor
1 KV10115900
(J26336-20)
Attachment
Disassembling valve mechanism
NT022
EM-4
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools (Cont’d)
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
GI
Description
(J39386)
Valve oil seal drift
Installing valve oil seal
NT024
KV101151S0
(J38972)
Lifter stopper set
1 KV10115110
(J38972-1)
Camshaft pliers
2 KV10115120
(J38972-2)
Lifter stopper
MA
LC
Changing shims
EC
FE
NT041
CL
EM03470000
(J8037)
Piston ring compressor
Installing piston assembly into cylinder bore
MT
AT
NT044
ST16610001
(J23907)
Pilot bushing puller
Removing crankshaft pilot bushing
TF
PD
NT045
KV10111100
(J37228)
Seal cutter
Removing steel oil pan and rear timing chain case
AX
SU
NT046
WS39930000
(
—
Tube presser
Pressing the tube of liquid gasket
BR
)
ST
NT052
RS
KV10112100
(BT8653-A)
Angle wrench
Tightening bolts for bearing cap, cylinder head, etc.
BT
HA
NT014
SC
EL
IDX
EM-5
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools (Cont’d)
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV10117100
(J3647-A)
Heated oxygen sensor
wrench
Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensor
For 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut
NT379
KV10114400
(J38365)
Heated oxygen sensor
wrench
Loosening or tightening rear heated oxygen sensor
a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
NT636
KV10117700
(J44716)
Ring gear stopper
Removing and installing crankshaft pulley
NT822
Commercial Service Tools
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
Spark plug wrench
Removing and installing spark plug
NT047
Valve seat cutter set
Finishing valve seat dimensions
NT048
Piston ring expander
Removing and installing piston ring
NT030
Valve guide drift
Removing and installing valve guide
Intake & Exhaust:
a = 9.5 mm (0.374 in) dia.
b = 5.5 mm (0.217 in) dia.
NT015
EM-6
NAEM0004
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools (Cont’d)
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
GI
Description
Valve guide reamer
Reaming valve guide 1 or hole for oversize valve
guide 2
Intake & Exhaust:
d1 = 6.0 mm (0.236 in) dia.
d2 = 10.2 mm (0.402 in) dia.
MA
LC
NT016
(J-43897-18)
(J-43897-12)
Oxygen sensor thread
cleaner
Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before
installing a new heated oxygen sensor (Use with
anti-seize lubricant shown below.)
a = J-43897-18 (18 mm dia.) for zirconia heated
oxygen sensor
b = J-43897-12 (12 mm dia.) for titania heated
oxygen sensor
EC
FE
CL
AEM488
Anti-seize lubricant (Permatex 133AR or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907)
Lubricating oxygen heated sensor thread cleaning
tool when reconditioning exhaust system threads
MT
AT
TF
PD
AEM489
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EM-7
NAEM0005
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
SEM472G
EM-8
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting — Engine Noise
NVH Troubleshooting — Engine Noise
NAEM0005S01
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom.
1. Locate the area where noise occurs.
2. Confirm the type of noise.
3. Specify the operating condition of engine.
4. Check specified noise source.
If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
Operating condition of engine
Location of
noise
Top of
engine
Rocker
cover
Cylinder
head
Type of
noise
Ticking or
clicking
Rattle
Slap or
knock
Before
After
When
warm-up warm-up starting
C
C
—
Crankshaft Slap or
pulley
rap
Cylinder
block
(Side of
engine)
Oil pan
Front of
engine
Timing
chain
cover
A
A
A
A
—
—
—
—
—
When
idling
A
A
B
B
When
racing
B
B
B
B
While
driving
Source of
noise
Check item
—
Valve clearance
C
Camshaft
bearing
noise
Camshaft journal clearance
EM-45, 45
Camshaft runout
—
Piston pin
noise
Piston and piston pin
clearance
Connecting rod bushing clearance
A
Piston-to-bore clearance
Piston ring side clearPiston slap
ance
noise
Piston ring end gap
Connecting rod bend
and torsion
B
C
B
B
B
Knock
A
B
—
A
B
C
Main bearing oil clearMain bearance
ing noise
Crankshaft runout
B
Timing
chain and
chain tensioner
noise
C
Drive belts
(Sticking
Drive belts deflection
or slipping)
Squeaking
or fizzing
Creaking
A
A
B
B
—
—
A
B
B
B
B
—
A
B
Front of
engine
Squall
Creak
A: Closely related
A
B: Related
B
—
C: Sometimes related
B
A
—: Not related
EM-9
B
EM-65, 72
CL
MT
AT
EM-66, 66,
67, 68
TF
PD
AX
SU
EM-69, 69
BR
Timing chain cracks
and wear
Timing chain tensioner
operation
Drive belts Idler pulley bearing
(Slipping) operation
Water
pump
noise
EM-57
Connecting rod bushing clearance (Small
end)
EM-72, 71
Connecting rod bearing
clearance (Big end)
A
A
LC
FE
Knock
A
MA
EC
Tappet
noise
Connecting rod
bearing
noise
Tapping or
ticking
Reference
page
GI
Water pump operation
EM-31, 21
ST
MA section
(“Checking
Drive
Belts”,
“ENGINE
MAINTENANCE”)
RS
LC section
(“Water
Pump
Inspection”,
“ENGINE
COOLING
SYSTEM”)
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
OUTER COMPONENT PARTS
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
NAEM0006
SEM924G
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Intake manifold collector support
Lower intake manifold collector
Fuel damper and fuel feed hose
assembly
Fuel injector
Fuel tube assembly
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Fuel pressure regulator
Ignition coil with power transistor
Upper intake manifold collector
Intake manifold
Electric throttle control actuator
EM-10
11. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
12. Swirl control valve actuator
13. Power valve actuator (A/T)
14. Oil level gauge
OUTER COMPONENT PARTS
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
GI
MA
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEM925G
1.
2.
3.
4.
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 1)
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 2)
TWC (manifold)
Thermostat with water inlet
5.
6.
7.
Exhaust manifold
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Water control valve
8.
9.
Water outlet housing
Cylinder block water outlet
SC
EL
IDX
EM-11
OUTER COMPONENT PARTS
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
TIGHTENING PROCEDURES
Intake Manifold
I
1.
2.
I
NAEM0006S01
NAEM0006S0101
Loosen in reverse order and tighten in numerical order
shown in the figure.
Tighten all bolts and nuts to 4.9 to 9.8 N·m (0.5 to 1.0 kg-m,
44 to 86 in-lb).
Finally tighten all bolts and nuts to 26.5 to 31.4 N·m (2.7 to 3.2
kg-m, 20 to 23 ft-lb).
Tighten all bolts and nuts to the final torque, evenly dividing the
tightening into at least three steps.
SEM926G
Fuel Tube
I
1.
2.
NAEM0006S0102
Tighten in numerical order shown in the figure.
Tighten all bolts to 9.3 to 10.8 N·m (0.95 to 1.1 kg-m, 83 to 95
in-lb).
Then tighten all bolts to 20.6 to 26.5 N·m (2.1 to 2.7 kg-m, 16
to 19 ft-lb).
SEM473G
Fuel Pressure Regulator
NAEM0006S0103
Tighten fuel pressure regulator to 2.9 to 3.8 N·m (0.3 to 0.39 kg-m,
26.0 to 33.9 in-lb).
I Tighten screws evenly several times to have the fuel pressure regulator tightened at the specified torque.
I Always replace O-ring with new ones.
I Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil.
SEM474G
Electric Throttle Control Actuator
I
NAEM0006S0105
Tighten all bolts to 7.2 to 9.7 (0.74 to 0.98 kg-m, 64 to 85
in-lb) in numerical order shown in the figure.
KBIA0957E
Upper Intake Manifold Collector
NAEM0006S0107
Loosen bolts and nuts in reverse order and tighten to 17.6 to 21.6
N·m (1.8 to 2.2 kg-m, 13 to 15 ft-lb) in numerical order shown in
the figure.
SEM927G
EM-12
OUTER COMPONENT PARTS
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
Lower Intake Manifold Collector
NAEM0006S0108
Tighten bolts and nuts to 17.6 to 21.6 N·m (1.8 to 2.2 kg-m, 13 to
15 ft-lb) in numerical order shown in the figure.
GI
MA
LC
SEM477G
Exhaust Manifold
EC
NAEM0006S0109
Tighten nuts to 28.5 to 32.4 N·m (2.9 to 3.3 kg-m, 21 to 23 ft-lb) in
numerical order shown in the figure.
FE
CL
MT
SEM478G
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEM479G
TWC (Manifold)
I
NAEM0006S0110
Align the mating mark as shown for locating exhaust flange.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEM607G
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EM-13
NAEM0007
MEASUREMENT OF COMPRESSION PRESSURE
1.
2.
3.
Warm up engine.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Release fuel pressure.
Refer to EC-64, “Fuel Pressure Release”.
4.
SEF933Y
Disconnect fuel pump fuse to avoid injection during measurement.
5. Remove engine cover.
6. Remove air duct with air cleaner case.
7. Remove harness connectors and harness brackets around
ignition coils.
8. Remove Electric throttle control actuator.
9. Disconnect ignition coil with power transistor harness
connectors, then remove ignition coils.
10. Remove all spark plugs.
I Clean area around plug with compressed air before removing
the spark plug.
11.
12.
13.
I
Attach a compression tester to No. 1 cylinder.
Crank engine and record highest gauge indication.
Repeat the measurement on each cylinder as shown above.
Always use a fully-charged battery to obtain specified
engine speed.
Unit: kPa (kg/cm2, psi)/rpm
JEM482G
Standard
Minimum
Difference limit between
cylinders
1,275 (13.0, 185)/300
981 (10.0, 142)/300
98 (1.0, 14)/300
14. If compression in one or more cylinders is low:
a. Pour a small amount of engine oil into cylinders through spark
plug holes.
b. Retest compression.
I If adding oil helps compression, piston rings may be worn
or damaged. If so, replace piston rings after checking piston.
I If pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or seating
improperly. Inspect and repair valve and valve seat. (Refer
to SDS, EM-79 and EM-81.) If valve or valve seat is damaged excessively, replace them.
SEM387C
EM-14
MEASUREMENT OF COMPRESSION PRESSURE
I
If compression stays low in two cylinders that are next to
each other:
a) The cylinder head gasket may be leaking, or
b) Both cylinders may have valve component damage. Inspect
and repair as necessary.
15. Install removed parts in reverse order of removal.
16. Perform “Self-diagnosis Procedure” referring to EC-100, “How
to Erase DTC” if any DTC appears.
GI
MA
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EM-15
OIL PAN
Components
Components
NAEM0008
SEM928G
Removal
NAEM0009
WARNING:
I Place vehicle on a flat and solid surface.
I You should not remove oil pan until exhaust system and
cooling system have completely cooled off.
Otherwise, you may burn yourself and/or fire may break
out in the fuel line.
I When removing front engine mounting nuts, lift up slightly
engine for safety work.
CAUTION:
When removing the aluminum oil pan from engine, first
remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from the assembly.
Be careful not to damage sensor edges and signal plate teeth.
1. Remove front RH and LH wheels.
2. Remove battery.
3. Remove oil level gauge.
4. Remove engine undercover.
5. Remove suspension member stay.
6. Drain engine coolant from radiator drain plug.
7. Disconnect A/T oil cooler hoses. (A/T)
8. Drain engine oil.
EM-16
OIL PAN
Removal (Cont’d)
9. Remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS).
10. Remove drive belts and idler pulley with bracket.
11. Remove power steering oil pump, then put it aside holding with
a suitable wire.
12. Remove alternator.
GI
MA
LC
SEM605G
13. Install engine slingers.
14. Remove front propeller shaft. (4WD)
Refer to PD-8, “Removal and Installation”.
15. Remove exhaust front tube heat insulators, then remove rear
heated oxygen sensors.
16. Remove exhaust front tube from both sides.
Refer to FE-9, “Removal and Installation”.
17. Remove front final drive. (4WD)
Refer to PD-19, “Removal and Installation”.
18. Remove starter motor.
19. Disconnect oil pressure switch harness connector.
20. Loosen and disconnect the bolts fixing the steering column
assembly lower joint and the power steering gear.
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEM528G
21. Set a suitable transmission jack under the front suspension
member and hoist engine with engine slingers.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEM471G
22. Remove front engine mounting nuts from both sides.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EMQ0357D
EM-17
OIL PAN
Removal (Cont’d)
23. Remove front suspension member bolts and nuts.
24. Lower the transmission jack carefully to secure clearance
between the oil pan and suspension member.
25. Remove A/T oil cooler tube. (A/T)
26. Remove water hose and tube. (A/T)
SEM529G
SEM530G
27. Remove the four engine-to-transmission bolts.
28. Loosen steel oil pan bolts in reverse order of tightening. Refer
to “Components”, EM-16.
SEM469G
29. Remove steel oil pan.
a. Insert seal cutter (special service tool) between aluminum oil
pan and steel oil pan.
I Be careful not to damage aluminum mating surface.
I Do not insert screwdriver, or oil pan flange will be
deformed.
b. Slide seal cutter by tapping on the side of the tool with a hammer.
SEM365E
30.
I
31.
32.
a.
I
I
b.
Remove pulg from rear right of aluminum oil pan.
Plug position is under No. 4 bolt in the figure.
Remove aluminum oil pan bolts in numerical order.
Remove aluminum oil pan.
Insert seal cutter between aluminum oil pan and cylinder block.
Be careful not to damage aluminum mating surface.
Do not insert screwdriver, or oil pan flange will be
deformed.
Slide seal cutter by tapping its side with a hammer.
SEM463G
EM-18
OIL PAN
Removal (Cont’d)
33. Remove O-rings from cylinder block and oil pump body.
GI
MA
LC
SEM464G
34. Remove front cover gasket and rear oil seal retainer gasket.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEM465G
Installation
1.
I
I
AT
NAEM0010
Before installing oil pan, remove old liquid gasket from mating
surface using a scraper.
Also remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of cylinder block.
Remove old liquid gasket from the bolt hole and thread.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEM466G
2.
Apply sealant to front cover gasket and rear oil seal retainer
gasket.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEM964E
3.
Install front cover gasket and rear oil seal retainer gasket.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEM465G
EM-19
OIL PAN
Installation (Cont’d)
4.
I
Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to mating surface of
aluminum oil pan.
Use Genuine RTV silicone sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-53.
SEM159F
5.
I
I
I
Apply liquid gasket to inner sealing surface as shown in figure.
Be sure to apply it inside to all bolt holes.
Be sure to apply it to part A at [4.5 to 5.5 mm (0.177 to
0.217 in)].
Attaching should be done within 5 minutes after coating.
6.
Install O-rings, cylinder block and oil pump body.
7.
I
I
8.
I
Install aluminum oil pan.
Tighten bolts in numerical order.
Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling engine oil.
Install plug to rear right of aluminum oil pan.
Plug position is under No. 10 bolt in the figure.
SEM929G
SEM464G
SEM468G
9.
Install the four engine-to-transmission bolts. For tightening
torque, refer to AT-277 or MT-8, “Installation”.
10. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
SEM469G
EM-20
TIMING CHAIN
Components
Components
NAEM0011
GI
MA
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEM930G
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Rear timing chain case
Left camshaft chain tensioner
Internal guide
Timing chain (Secondary)
Right camshaft chain tensioner
Timing chain tensioner
Slack guide
Timing chain (Primary)
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Crankshaft sprocket
Lower chain guide
Upper tension guide
Front timing chain case
Crankshaft pulley
Water pump cover
Chain tensioner cover
Exhaust camshaft sprocket
17.
18.
19.
20.
Intake valve timing control cover
Intake camshaft sprocket
Cover
Camshaft position sensor
(PHASE)
21. VIAS control solenoid valve (A/T)
22. Swirl control valve control solenoid
valve
23. Vacuum tank
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EM-21
TIMING CHAIN
Components (Cont’d)
POSITION FOR APPLYING LIQUID GASKET
=NAEM0011S01
Refer to “Liquid Gasket Application Procedure” in “PRECAUTION”,
EM-3.
I Before installation, wipe off the protruding sealant.
EM-22
TIMING CHAIN
Components (Cont’d)
GI
MA
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEM411G
IDX
EM-23
TIMING CHAIN
Components (Cont’d)
CAUTION:
I After removing timing chain, do not turn crankshaft and
camshaft separately, or valves will strike piston heads.
I When installing camshafts, chain tensioners, oil seals, or
other sliding parts, lubricate contacting surfaces with new
engine oil.
I Apply new engine oil to bolt threads and seat surfaces
when installing camshaft sprockets and crankshaft pulley.
I Before disconnecting fuel hose, release fuel pressure.
Refer to EC-64, “Fuel Pressure Release”.
I Be careful not to damage sensor edges.
I Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts.
Removal
1.
NAEM0012
Release fuel pressure.
Refer to EC-64, “Fuel Pressure Release”.
2. Remove battery.
3. Remove radiator.
Refer to LC-21, “REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION”.
4. Drain engine oil.
5. Remove drive belts and idler pulley with brackets.
6. Remove cooling fan with bracket.
7. Remove engine cover.
8. Remove air duct with air cleaner case, collector, PCV hose,
vacuum hoses, fuel hoses, water hoses, harnesses, connectors and so on.
9. Remove the air conditioner compressor, and tie it down using
rope or the like to keep it from interfering.
10. Remove the power steering oil pump and reservoir tank. Tie
them down using rope or the like to keep them from interfering.
11. Remove alternator.
12. Remove the following.
I Vacuum tank
I Water bypass pipe
I Brackets
EM-24
TIMING CHAIN
Removal (Cont’d)
13.
I
I
I
I
Remove camshaft position sensors (PHASE).
Avoid impact such as dropping.
Do not disassemble the components.
Do not place them on areas where iron powder may adhere.
Keep away from the objects susceptible to magnetism.
GI
MA
LC
SEM931G
14. Remove upper intake manifold collector in reverse order of
illustration.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEM927G
15. Remove intake manifold collector support bolts.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEM413G
16. Remove lower intake manifold collector in reverse order of
illustration.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEM477G
17. Disconnect injector harness connectors.
18. Remove fuel tube assembly in reverse order of illustration.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEM473G
EM-25
TIMING CHAIN
Removal (Cont’d)
19. Remove ignition coils.
20. Remove RH and LH rocker covers from cylinder head.
I Loosen bolts in numerical order shown in the figure.
SEM932G
21. Set No. 1 piston at TDC on the compression stroke by rotating crankshaft.
I Align pointer with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley.
KBIA1717J
I
Check that intake and exhaust cam nose on No. 1 cylinder are
located as shown left.
If not, turn the crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as
above.
SEM418G
22. Remove starter motor, and set ring gear stopper using the
mounting bolt hole.
I Be careful not to damage the signal plate teeth.
SEM485GA
SEM541G
EM-26
TIMING CHAIN
Removal (Cont’d)
23. Loosen the crankshaft pulley bolt.
GI
MA
LC
SEM933G
24. Remove crankshaft pulley with a suitable puller.
25. Remove aluminum oil pan.
Refer to EM-16, “Removal”.
26. Temporarily install the suspension member bolts and engine
mounting nuts.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEM420G
27. Remove intake valve timing control covers.
I Loosen bolts in numerical order as shown in the figure.
I In the cover, the shaft is engaged with the center hole of the
intake camshaft sprocket. Remove it straight out until the
engagement comes off.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEM423G
28. Remove front timing chain case bolts.
I Loosen bolts in numerical order as shown in the figure.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEM424G
29. Remove front timing chain case.
a. Insert the appropriate size tool into the notch at the top of the
front timing chain case as shown (1).
b. Pry off the case by moving the tool as shown (2).
I Use seal cutter (special service tool) or an equivalent tool to
cut liquid gasket for removal.
CAUTION:
I Do not use screwdrivers or something similar.
I After removal, handle it carefully so it does not tilt, cant,
or warp under a load.
SEM156F
EM-27
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TIMING CHAIN
Removal (Cont’d)
30. Remove internal guide.
31. Remove upper tension guide.
32. Remove timing chain tensioner and slack guide.
SEM934G
I
Remove timing chain tensioner. (Push piston and insert a suitable pin into pinhole.)
33. Remove primary timing chain and crankshaft sprocket.
SEM966F
34. Remove lower chain guide.
SEM924E
35. Attach a suitable stopper pin to RH and LH camshaft chain
tensioners.
SEM923G
EM-28
TIMING CHAIN
Removal (Cont’d)
36. Remove intake and exhaust camshaft sprocket bolts.
I Secure the hexagonal head of the camshaft using a spanner to loosen mounting bolts.
GI
MA
LC
KBIA1698J
SEM922G
37. Remove secondary timing chains with camshaft sprockets.
a. Rotate camshaft lightly, and slacken timing chain of timing
chain tensioner-side.
b. Insert metal or resin plate [thickness: 0.5 mm (0.020 in)] into
guide between timing chain and chain tensioner plunger.
Remove cam sprocket and secondary timing chain with timing
chain floated from guide groove.
CAUTION:
Chain tensioner plunger may move, while fixed stopper pin
and plunger both come off when timing chain is removed. Use
caution during removal.
I
Intake camshaft sprocket is two-for-one structure of primary
and secondary sprockets.
I Handle intake camshaft sprocket, taking care of the following.
CAUTION:
I Avoid impact.
I Do not disassemble (Never loosen inner hexagonal bolts).
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEM935G
38. Remove rear timing chain case as follows if necessary.
a. Loosen mounting bolts in numerical order shown in figure, and
remove them.
b. Disconnect liquid gasket applied portion using seal cutter (special service tool: KV10111100) or an equivalent tool. Then
remove rear timing chain case.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEM442G
CAUTION:
I Do not remove plate metal cover of oil passage.
I After removing chain case, do not apply any load which
affects flatness.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
KBIA1307E
EM-29
TIMING CHAIN
Removal (Cont’d)
39. Remove O-rings from cylinder head.
SEM945G
40. Remove O-rings from cylinder block.
PBIC0788E
41. Remove RH and LH camshaft chain tensioners from cylinder
head as follows if necessary.
a. Remove No. 1 camshaft brackets.
Refer to EM-42, “Removal”.
b. Remove chain tensioners with stopper pin attached.
42. Use a scraper to remove all traces of liquid gasket from front
and rear timing chain case, and opposite mating surfaces.
SEM428G
I Remove old liquid gasket from the bolt hole and thread.
43. Remove front oil seal from front timing chain case. Refer to
EM-40, “FRONT OIL SEAL”.
44. Remove water pump cover and chain tensioner cover from
front timing chain case if necessary.
SEM161F
EM-30
TIMING CHAIN
Removal (Cont’d)
45. Use a scraper to remove all traces of liquid gasket from intake
valve timing control cover, water pump cover and chain tensioner cover.
GI
MA
LC
SEM429GA
Inspection
EC
NAEM0013
Check for cracks and excessive wear at roller links. Replace
chain if necessary.
FE
CL
MT
SEM936G
Installation
1.
a.
b.
AT
NAEM0014
Install RH and LH camshaft chain tensioners to cylinder head
as follows if removed.
Install chain tensioners with stopper pin attached and new
O-ring.
Install No. 1 camshaft brackets.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEM947G
2.
Install new O-rings to cylinder block if rear timing chain case
is removed.
BR
ST
RS
BT
PBIC0788E
3.
4.
Install new O-rings to cylinder head if rear timing chain case is
removed.
Apply liquid gasket to rear timing chain case. Refer to EM-22,
“POSITION FOR APPLYING LIQUID GASKET”.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEM945G
EM-31
TIMING CHAIN
Installation (Cont’d)
5.
I
a.
I
b.
6.
I
Align rear timing chain case, if removed, with dowel pins (RH
and LH) on cylinder block. Then install it.
Do not allow O-ring to drop.
Tighten mounting bolts in order as shown in the figure.
Install two types of mounting bolts, referring to the following
instructions and figure.
Bolt length:
20 mm (0.79 in) (1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 in the figure)
16 mm (0.63 in) (other than the above)
After all bolts are temporarily tightened, retighten them to
specified torque in order shown in the figure.
After installing rear timing chain case, check surface height
difference between following parts on oil pan mounting surface.
Standard
Rear timing chain case to cylinder block:
−0.24 to 0.14 mm (−0.0094 to 0.0055 in)
If not within standard, repeat above installation procedure.
SEM448G
7.
I
Make sure that camshaft and crankshaft are at TDC position
of No. 1 cylinder.
Make sure that dowel pin and crankshaft key are located as
shown in the figure.
Camshaft dowel pin: At cylinder head upper face side in each
bank
Crankshaft key: At cylinder head side of RH bank
SEM930E
8.
Install lower chain guide on dowel pin, with front mark on the
guide facing upside.
9.
a.
Install secondary timing chain and camshaft sprockets.
Press and shrink the secondary chain tensioner sleeve, and fix
it using stopper pins.
Lubricate threads and seat surfaces of camshaft sprocket bolts
with new engine oil.
SEM931E
I
SEM430G
EM-32
TIMING CHAIN
Installation (Cont’d)
b.
I
I
Identify intake camshaft sprocket of the right and left bank.
Identify by front identification mark [10 mm (0.39 in) dia.
recess] number and cutout position difference for signal detection of front end circumference.
Exhaust camshaft sprocket is a common part for both banks.
GI
MA
LC
SEM937G
c.
I
I
I
Install secondary timing chain and sprocket.
Align mating marks (golden links) on secondary timing chain
with those (punched marks) on the intake and exhaust sprockets.
Align camshaft dowel pins with the sprocket groove and hole.
Because camshaft sprocket mounting bolts are tightened in
step 10, perform manual tightening to the extent necessary to
keep camshaft dowel pin from dislocating.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEM431G
I
Mating marks of the intake sprocket are on the back side of the
secondary sprockets. There are two types of the marks; circle
and oval types, which should be used for right and left banks
respectively.
Right bank: Circle
Left bank: Oval
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEM938G
I
It may be difficult to visually check the dislocation of mating
marks during and after installation. To make the matching
easier, make a mating mark on top of the sprocket teeth and
its extended line in advance with paint.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEM433G
10. After confirming the mating marks are aligned, tighten the camshaft sprocket mounting bolts.
I Secure the camshaft hexagonal head using a spanner to
tighten mounting bolts.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
KBIA1698J
EM-33
TIMING CHAIN
Installation (Cont’d)
11. Pull out the stopper pin from the secondary timing chain tensioner.
12. Install primary timing chain.
SEM923G
I
Install crankshaft sprocket, with mating mark to timing chain
facing front of engine.
I
Install primary timing chain so that mating mark (punched) on
camshaft sprocket is aligned with that (dark blue link) on the
timing chain, and mating mark (notched) on crankshaft
sprocket is aligned with that (orange link) on the timing chain,
respectively.
When it is difficult to align mating marks of the primary timing
chain with each sprocket, gradually turn the camshaft hexagonal head using a spanner so it is aligned with the mating mark.
During alignment, be careful to prevent dislocation of mating
marks on the secondary timing chain.
SEM929E
I
I
SEM739GA
EM-34
TIMING CHAIN
Installation (Cont’d)
13. Install internal guide.
14. Install upper tension guide and slack guide.
GI
MA
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEM934G
I
Do not overtighten the slack guide mounting bolts. It is normal
for a gap to exist under the bolt seats when the mounting bolts
are tightened to specification.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEM741G
15. Install timing chain tensioner, then remove the stopper pin.
I When installing the timing chain tensioner, engine oil
should be applied to the oil hole and tensioner.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEM967F
16. Install O-rings on rear timing chain case.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEM939G
EM-35
TIMING CHAIN
Installation (Cont’d)
17. Install the water pump cover and the chain tensioner cover to
front timing chain case if removed.
I Apply RTV silicone sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-53, “RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS”.
18. Install new front oil seal, then apply liquid gasket to front timing chain case.
I Refer to “OIL SEAL INSTALLATION DIRECTION”, EM-40.
I Refer to “POSITION FOR APPLYING LIQUID GASKET”,
EM-22.
I Before installation, wipe off the protruding sealant.
SEM744GA
19. Install rear timing chain case pin into dowel pin hole on front
timing chain case.
20. Tighten bolts to the specified torque in order shown in the figure.
I Leave the bolts unattended for 30 minutes or more after
tightening.
SEM436G
21. After installing front timing chain case, check surface height
difference between following parts on oil pan mounting surface.
Standard
Front timing chain case to rear timing chain case:
−0.14 to 0.14 mm (−0.0055 to 0.0055 in)
I If not within standard, repeat above installation procedure.
SEM943G
22. Install LH and RH intake valve timing control covers.
a. Install collared O-rings in front timing chain case oil hole (RH
and LH sides).
SEM940G
EM-36
TIMING CHAIN
Installation (Cont’d)
b.
c.
d.
Install seal ring at intake valve timing control covers.
Apply liquid gasket to intake valve timing control covers.
Use genuine RTV silicone sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-53.
Being careful not to move the seal ring from the installation
groove, align the dowel pins on the chain case with the holes
to install the intake valve timing control cover.
GI
MA
LC
PBIC1123E
e.
Tighten in numerical order as shown in the figure.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEM438G
SEM813G
23. Install RH and LH rocker covers.
Rocker cover tightening procedure:
I Tighten in numerical order as shown in the figure.
a. Tighten bolts 1 to 10 in that order to 6.9 to 8.8 N·m (0.7 to 0.9
kg-m, 61 to 78 in-lb).
b. Then tighten bolts 1 to 10 as indicated in figure to 6.9 to 8.8
N·m (0.7 to 0.9 kg-m, 61 to 78 in-lb).
24. Hang engine using the right and left side engine slingers with
a suitable hoist.
25. Set a suitable transmission jack under the suspension member.
26. Remove right and left side engine mounting nuts.
27. Remove right and left side suspension member bolts.
28. Install oil pan. Refer to EM-19, “Installation”.
29. Set ring gear stopper using the mounting bolt hole.
I Be careful not to damage the signal plate teeth.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEM440G
30. Install crankshaft pulley to crankshaft.
I Align pointer with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
KBIA1717J
EM-37
TIMING CHAIN
Installation (Cont’d)
31. Install crankshaft pulley bolt.
I Lubricate thread and seat surface of the bolt with new
engine oil.
a. Tighten to 39 to 49 N·m (4.0 to 5.0 kg-m, 29 to 36 ft-lb).
b. Put a paint mark on the crankshaft pulley.
SEM933G
c.
SEM751G
Again tighten by turning 60° to 66°, about the angle from one
hexagon bolt head corner to another.
32. Install camshaft position sensors (PHASE), crankshaft position
sensor (POS).
33. Reinstall removed parts in the reverse order of removal.
I When installing fuel tube and intake manifold collectors, refer
to EM-12, “TIGHTENING PROCEDURES”.
I Check oil level. Refer to MA-18, “Changing Engine Oil”.
I After starting engine, keep idling for three minutes. Then
rev engine up to 3,000 rpm under no load to purge air from
the high-pressure chamber of the chain tensioners. The
engine may produce a rattling noise. This indicates that
air still remains in the chamber and is not a matter of
concern.
EM-38
OIL SEAL
Replacement
Replacement
NAEM0015
CAUTION:
When removing the oil pans, oil pump assembly and timing
chain from engine, first remove the camshaft position sensors
(PHASE), intake valve timing control position sensor and the
crankshaft position sensor (POS) from the assembly.
Be careful not to damage sensor edges.
VALVE OIL SEAL
PBIC1147E
1.
2.
3.
4.
NAEM0015S01
Remove timing chain. Refer to “Removal”, EM-24.
Remove camshaft brackets and camshaft. Refer to “Removal”,
EM-42.
Remove valve lifters.
Remove valve spring with Tool.
Before removing valve spring, fix valve as follows.
Piston concerned should be set at TDC to prevent valve
from falling.
GI
MA
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
Remove spark plug, then install air hose adapter into
spark plug hole and apply air pressure to hold valves in
place. Apply a pressure of 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2, 71 psi).
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEM826E
5.
Remove valve oil seal.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEM827E
6.
7.
Apply engine oil to new valve oil seal and install it with Tool.
Reinstall any parts removed in reverse order of removal.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEM828E
EM-39
OIL SEAL
Replacement (Cont’d)
OIL SEAL INSTALLATION DIRECTION
I
NAEM0015S02
Install new oil seal in the direction shown in the figure.
SEM715A
FRONT OIL SEAL
NAEM0015S03
1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
Remove the following parts:
Engine undercover
Suspension member stay
Drive belts
Crankshaft pulley: Refer to EM-24, “Removal”.
Radiator: Refer to LC-21, “REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION”.
Cooling fan
2.
Remove front oil seal using a suitable tool.
Be careful not to scratch front cover.
Apply engine oil to new oil seal and install it using a suitable
tool until its front end is level with front end of front cover.
3.
SEM829E
REAR OIL SEAL
NAEM0015S04
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
transmission. Refer to MT-7 or AT-276, “Removal”.
flywheel or drive plate.
oil pan. Refer to EM-16.
rear oil seal retainer.
5.
I
Apply liquid gasket to rear oil seal retainer.
Assembly should be done within 5 minutes after coating.
SEM830E
PBIC0922E
EM-40
CYLINDER HEAD
Components
Components
NAEM0016
GI
MA
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEM941G
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Oil filler cap
Rocker cover
Camshaft bracket
Camshaft
PCV valve
Cylinder head
Spark plug tube
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Spark plug
Valve
Valve spring seat
Valve spring
Valve spring retainer
Valve collet
Valve lifter
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
PCV hose
Tensioner sleeve
Spring
Chain tensioner
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EM-41
CYLINDER HEAD
Components (Cont’d)
CAUTION:
I When installing camshafts, chain tensioners, oil seals, or
other sliding parts, lubricate contacting surfaces with new
engine oil.
I Apply new engine oil to threads and seat surfaces when
installing cylinder head, camshaft sprocket, crankshaft
pulley, and camshaft bracket.
I Attach tags to valve lifters so as not to mix them up.
Removal
1.
2.
3.
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
NAEM0017
Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-64, “Fuel pressure
release”.
Drain engine coolant and engine oil.
Remove the following parts.
Battery
Engine undercover
Radiator shroud
Radiator: Refer to LC-21, “REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION”.
Cooling fan
Drive belts
Remove exhaust front tubes. Refer to FE-9, “EXHAUST SYSTEM”.
Remove exhaust manifolds in reverse order of installation.
Refer to EM-13, “Exhaust Manifold”.
Remove aluminum oil pan. Refer to EM-16, “Removal”.
Remove front timing chain case, timing chain and rear timing
chain case. Refer to EM-24, “Removal”.
Remove intake manifold in reverse order of illustration.
Remove water outlet.
SEM926G
10. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valves.
SEM443GA
EM-42
CYLINDER HEAD
Removal (Cont’d)
11. Remove intake and exhaust camshafts and camshaft brackets.
I Equally loosen camshaft bracket bolts in several steps in the
numerical order shown in the figure.
For reinstallation, be sure to put marks on camshaft
bracket before removal.
12. Remove valve lifters.
I Identify installation positions, and store them without mixing
them up.
GI
MA
LC
SEM856E
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEM857E
13. Remove RH and LH camshaft chain tensioners from cylinder
head.
I Remove chain tensioner with its stopper pin attached.
I Stopper pin was attached when secondary timing chain was
removed.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEM947G
14. Remove cylinder head bolts.
I Cylinder head bolts should be loosened in two or three
steps.
I A warped or cracked cylinder head could result from
removing in incorrect order.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEM859E
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEM860E
EM-43
CYLINDER HEAD
Removal (Cont’d)
15. Remove cylinder head.
SEM863E
Disassembly
NAEM0043
1.
Remove spark plug with spark plug wrench (commercial service tool).
2. Remove valve component parts.
Refer to EM-39, “VALVE OIL SEAL”.
I Check the clearance before removing the valve guide. Refer to
EM-46, “VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE”.
3. Remove spark plug tube, as necessary.
I Using a pair of pilers, pull spark plug tube out of cylinder head.
CAUTION:
I Take care not to damage cylinder head.
I Once removed, a spark plug tube will be deformed and
cannot be reused. Do not remove it unless absolutely necessary.
Inspection
CYLINDER HEAD DISTORTION
SEM861E
NAEM0019
NAEM0019S01
Clean surface of cylinder head.
Use a reliable straightedge and feeler gauge to check the flatness
of cylinder head surface.
Check along six positions shown in the figure.
Head surface flatness: Limit 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
If beyond the specified limit, resurface or replace it.
The limit for cylinder head resurfacing is determined by the
cylinder block resurfacing.
Resurfacing limit:
Amount of cylinder head resurfacing is “A”.
Amount of cylinder block resurfacing is “B”.
The maximum limit : A + B = 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
After resurfacing cylinder head, check that camshaft rotates freely
by hand. If resistance is felt, cylinder head must be replaced.
Nominal cylinder head height:
126.3 - 126.5 mm (4.972 - 4.980 in)
EM-44
CYLINDER HEAD
Inspection (Cont’d)
CAMSHAFT VISUAL CHECK
NAEM0019S02
GI
NAEM0019S03
MA
Check camshaft for scratches, seizure and wear.
CAMSHAFT RUNOUT
1.
2.
3.
PBIC0929E
4.
Put V block on precise flat bed, and support No. 2 and No. 4
journal of camshaft.
Set dial gauge vertically to No. 3 journal.
Turn camshaft to one direction with hands, and measure camshaft runout on dial gauge.
Runout (Total indicator reading):
Limit 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
If it exceeds the limit, replace camshaft.
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
CAMSHAFT CAM HEIGHT
1.
2.
AT
NAEM0019S04
Measure camshaft cam height.
Standard cam height:
Intake and exhaust
44.465 - 44.655 mm (1.7506 - 1.7581 in)
Cam wear limit:
0.2 mm (0.008 in)
If wear is beyond the limit, replace camshaft.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEM549A
CAMSHAFT JOURNAL CLEARANCE
1.
2.
NAEM0019S05
Install camshaft bracket and tighten bolts to the specified
torque.
Measure inner diameter “A” of camshaft bearing.
Standard inner diameter:
No. 1: 26.000 - 26.021 mm (1.0236 - 1.0244 in)
No. 2, 3, 4: 23.500 - 23.521 mm (0.9252 - 0.9260 in)
ST
RS
BT
SEM862E
3.
4.
SEM012A
BR
Measure outer diameter of camshaft journal.
Standard outer diameter:
No. 1: 25.935 - 25.955 mm (1.0211 - 1.0218 in)
No. 2, 3, 4: 23.445 - 23.465 mm (0.9230 - 0.9238 in)
If clearance exceeds the limit, replace camshaft and/or cylinder head.
Camshaft journal clearance:
Standard
No. 1: 0.045 - 0.086 mm (0.0018 - 0.0034 in)
No. 2, 3, 4: 0.035 - 0.076 mm (0.0014 - 0.0030 in)
EM-45
HA
SC
EL
IDX
CYLINDER HEAD
Inspection (Cont’d)
Limit
0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
CAMSHAFT END PLAY
1.
2.
NAEM0019S06
Install camshaft in cylinder head.
Measure camshaft end play.
Camshaft end play:
Standard
0.115 - 0.188 mm (0.0045 - 0.0074 in)
Limit
0.24 mm (0.0094 in)
SEM864E
CAMSHAFT SPROCKET RUNOUT
1.
2.
3.
4.
NAEM0019S07
Put V block on precise flat bed, and support No. 2 and No. 4
journal of camshaft.
Install sprocket on camshaft.
Turn camshaft to one direction with hands, and measure camshaft sprocket runout on dial gauge.
Runout (Total indicator reading):
Less than 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
If it exceeds the limit, replace camshaft sprocket.
PBIC0930E
VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE
NAEM0019S08
1.
Measure valve deflection as shown in the figure. (Valve and
valve guide mostly wear in this direction.)
Valve deflection limit (Dial gauge reading):
Intake 0.24 mm (0.0094 in)
Exhaust 0.28 mm (0.0110 in)
2.
a.
b.
If it exceeds the limit, check valve to valve guide clearance.
Measure valve stem diameter and valve guide inner diameter.
Check that clearance is within specification.
Valve to valve guide clearance limit:
Intake 0.08 mm (0.0031 in)
Exhaust 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
If it exceeds the limit, replace valve or valve guide.
SEM178F
c.
SEM938C
EM-46
CYLINDER HEAD
Inspection (Cont’d)
VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT
1.
NAEM0019S09
To remove valve guide, heat cylinder head to 110 to 130°C
(230 to 266°F) by soaking in heated oil.
GI
MA
LC
SEM008A
2.
Drive out valve guide with a press [under a 20 kN (2 ton, 2.2
US ton, 2.0 Imp ton) pressure] or hammer and suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Cylinder head contains heat. When working, wear protective
equipment to avoid getting burned.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEM931C
3.
AT
Ream cylinder head valve guide hole.
Valve guide hole diameter (for service parts):
10.175 - 10.196 mm (0.4006 - 0.4014 in)
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEM932C
4.
Heat cylinder head to 110 to 130°C (230 to 266°F) and press
service valve guide onto cylinder head.
Projection “L”:
12.6 - 12.8 mm (0.496 - 0.504 in)
CAUTION:
Cylinder head contains heat. When working, wear protective
equipment to avoid getting burned.
5. Ream valve guide.
Finished size:
6.000 - 6.018 mm (0.2362 - 0.2369 in)
SEM950E
VALVE SEATS
NAEM0019S10
Check valve seats for any evidence of pitting at valve contact
surface, and reseat or replace if it has worn out excessively.
I Before repairing valve seats, check valve and valve guide
for wear. If they have worn, replace them. Then correct
valve seat.
I Use both hands to cut uniformly.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEM934C
EM-47
CYLINDER HEAD
Inspection (Cont’d)
REPLACING VALVE SEAT FOR SERVICE PARTS
NAEM0019S11
1.
SEM795A
SEM892B
Bore out old seat until it collapses. Boring should not continue
beyond the bottom face of the seat recess in cylinder head. Set
the machine depth stop to ensure this.
2. Ream cylinder head recess for service valve seat.
Oversize [0.5 mm (0.020 in)]:
Intake 38.500 - 38.516 mm (1.5157 - 1.5164 in)
Exhaust 32.700 - 32.716 mm (1.2874 - 1.2880 in)
Be sure to ream in circles concentric to the valve guide
center.
This will enable valve seat to fit correctly.
3. Heat cylinder head to 110 to 130°C (230 to 266°F) by soaking
in heated oil.
4. Press fit valve seat until it seats on the bottom.
CAUTION:
Cylinder head contains heat. When working, wear protective
equipment to avoid getting burned.
5. Cut or grind valve seat using suitable tool to the specified
dimensions as shown in SDS (EM-81).
6. After cutting, lap valve seat with abrasive compound.
7. Check valve seating condition.
Seat face angle “α”: 45°
Contacting width “W”:
Intake 1.09 - 1.31 mm (0.0429 - 0.0516 in)
Exhaust 1.29 - 1.51 mm (0.0508 - 0.0594 in)
8.
Use a depth gauge to measure the distance between the
mounting surface of the cylinder head spring seat and the
valve stem end. If the distance is shorter than specified, repeat
step 5 above to adjust it. If it is longer, replace the valve seat
with a new one.
Valve seat resurface limit “L”:
Intake 41.07 - 41.67 mm (1.6169 - 1.6405 in)
Exhaust 41.00 - 41.60 mm (1.6142 - 1.6378 in)
SEM621F
VALVE DIMENSIONS
NAEM0019S12
Check dimensions of each valve. For dimensions, refer to SDS
(EM-79).
When valve head has been worn down to 0.5 mm (0.020 in) in
margin thickness, replace valve.
Grinding allowance for valve stem tip is 0.2 mm (0.008 in) or
less.
SEM188A
EM-48
CYLINDER HEAD
Inspection (Cont’d)
VALVE SPRING
Squareness
1.
2.
NAEM0019S13
GI
NAEM0019S1301
Measure dimension “S”.
Out-of-square “S”:
Less than 2.0 mm (0.079 in)
If it exceeds the limit, replace spring.
MA
LC
SEM288A
Pressure
EC
NAEM0019S1302
Check valve spring pressure at specified spring height.
Pressure:
Installation
196 N (20.0 kg, 44.1 lb) at height 37.0 mm (1.457 in)
Valve open
More than 433 N (44.2 kg, 97.3 lb) at height 27.8
mm (1.094 in)
If it exceeds the limit, replace spring.
EM113
VALVE LIFTER
1.
FE
CL
MT
AT
NAEM0019S14
Check contact and sliding surfaces for wear or scratches.
TF
PD
AX
SU
KBIA0182J
2.
Check diameter of valve lifter and valve lifter guide bore.
Valve lifter outer diameter:
33.977 - 33.987 mm (1.3377 - 1.3381 in)
BR
ST
RS
BT
JEM798G
Lifter guide bore diameter:
34.000 - 34.016 mm (1.3386 - 1.3392 in)
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEM867E
EM-49
CYLINDER HEAD
Assembly
Assembly
NAEM0020
1.
I
a.
KBIA1248E
Install spark plug tube.
Press-fit spark plug tube following procedure below.
Remove old liquid gasket adhering to cylinder-head mounting
hole.
b. Apply liquid gasket to area within approximately 12 mm (0.47
in) from edge of spark plug tube press-fit side.
I Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-53, “RECOMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS”.
c. Using a drift, press-fit spark plug tube so that its height “H” is
as specified in the figure.
Standard press-fit height “H”:
38.55 - 38.65 mm (1.5177 - 1.5217 in)
CAUTION:
I When press-fitting, take care not to deform spark plug
tube.
I After press-fitting, wipe off liquid gasket protruding onto
cylinder-head upper face.
2.
I
I
I
I
3.
Install valve component parts.
Always use new valve oil seal. Refer to “VALVE OIL
SEAL”, EM-39.
Before installing valve oil seal, install valve spring seat.
Install valve spring (uneven pitch type) with its narrow
pitch side toward cylinder head side (paint mark).
After installing valve component parts, tap valve stem tip with
plastic hammer to assure a proper fit.
Install spark plug.
SEM085D
Installation
1.
I
NAEM0021
Before installing rear timing chain case, remove old liquid gasket from mating surface using a scraper.
Also remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of cylinder
block.
SEM891E
I
Remove old liquid gasket from the bolt hole and thread.
SEM161F
EM-50
CYLINDER HEAD
Installation (Cont’d)
2.
Before installing camshaft bracket, remove old liquid gasket
from mating surface using a scraper.
GI
MA
LC
SEM892E
3.
I
Before installing the cylinder head gasket, be sure that No. 1
cylinder is at TDC.
At this time, the crankshaft key should face toward the right
bank.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEM532G
4.
I
Install cylinder heads with new gaskets.
Do not rotate crankshaft and camshaft separately, or
valves will strike piston heads.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEM445G
CAUTION:
Cylinder head bolts are tightened by plastic zone tightening
method. Whenever the size difference between d1 and d2
exceeds the limit, replace them with new ones.
Limit (d1 - d2):
0.11 mm (0.0043 in)
I Lubricate threads and seat surfaces of the bolts with new
engine oil.
I If reduction of outer diameter appears in a position other
than d2, use it as d2 point.
SEM957E
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EM-51
CYLINDER HEAD
Installation (Cont’d)
5.
I
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
SEM877EA
I
Install cylinder head outside bolts.
Tightening procedure:
Tighten all bolts to 98.1 N·m (10 kg-m, 72 ft-lb).
Completely loosen all bolts in reverse order shown.
Tighten all bolts to 34.3 to 44.1 N·m (3.5 to 4.4 kg-m, 25 to
33 ft-lb).
Turn all bolts 90 to 95 degrees clockwise [target: 90
degrees (angle tightening)].
Turn all bolts 90 to 95 degrees clockwise again [target: 90
degrees (angle tightening)].
Tighten in numerical order shown in the figure.
SEM878EA
SEM879EA
6.
Install camshaft chain tensioners on both sides of cylinder
head.
7.
I
Install exhaust and intake camshafts and camshaft brackets.
Intake camshaft has a drill mark on camshaft sprocket
mounting flange. Install it on the intake side.
SEM947G
SEM652F
EM-52
CYLINDER HEAD
Installation (Cont’d)
I
Identification marks are present on camshafts.
GI
Paint mark
Bank
INT/EXH
ID mark
Drill mark
M1
M2
INT
R3
Yes
Yes
No
EXH
R3
No
No
Yes
INT
L3
Yes
Yes
No
EXH
L3
No
No
Yes
MA
RH
LH
LC
SEM653F
I
Position camshaft
RH exhaust camshaft dowel pin at about 10 o’clock
LH exhaust camshaft dowel pin at about 2 o’clock
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEM533G
8.
I
I
I
I
SEM564G
I
Before installing camshaft brackets, apply sealant to mating
surface of No. 1 journal head.
Use Genuine RTV silicone sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-53.
Refer to “POSITION FOR APPLYING LIQUID GASKET”,
EM-22.
Install camshaft brackets in their original positions.
Align stamp mark as shown in the figure.
If any part of valve assembly or camshaft is replaced,
check valve clearance according to reference data.
After completing assembly check valve clearance. Refer
to “Checking” and “Adjusting” in “VALVE CLEARANCE”,
EM-54 and 57.
Reference data valve clearance (Cold):
Intake
0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 in)
Exhaust
0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 in)
Lubricate threads and seat surfaces of camshaft bracket
bolts with new engine oil before installing them.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEM446G
EM-53
CYLINDER HEAD
Installation (Cont’d)
I
Tighten the camshaft brackets in the following steps.
Step
Tightening torque
Tightening order
1
1.96 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb)
Tighten in the order of 7 to 10,
then tighten 1 to 6.
2
5.88 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 52 in-lb)
Tighten in the numerical order.
9.02 - 11.8 N·m (0.92 - 1.20 kg-m,
79.9 - 104.2 in-lb)
Tighten in the order of 1 to 6.
8.3 - 10.3 N·m (0.9 - 1.0 kg-m,
74 - 91 in-lb)
Tighten in the order of 7 to 10.
3
SEM885EA
SEM886EA
9.
Install intake valve timing control solenoid valves.
SEM443GB
10. Reinstall all removed parts in reverse order of removal.
Valve Clearance
CHECKING
KBIA1717J
NAEM0022
NAEM0022S01
Check valve clearance while engine is cold and not running.
1. Remove engine cover.
2. Remove air duct with air cleaner case, collectors, hoses,
harnesses, connectors and so on.
3. Remove upper intake manifold collector. Refer to EM-12,
“Upper Intake Manifold Collector”.
4. Remove lower intake manifold collector.
Refer to EM-13, “Lower Intake Manifold Collector”.
EM-54
CYLINDER HEAD
Valve Clearance (Cont’d)
5.
6.
7.
I
Remove ignition coils and spark plugs.
Remove RH and LH rocker covers.
Set No. 1 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke.
Align pointer with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley.
GI
MA
LC
I
Check that valve lifters on No. 1 cylinder are loose and valve
lifters on No. 4 are tight.
If not, turn crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as above.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEM418G
8.
AT
Check only those valves shown in the figure.
Measuring position (RH bank)
No. 1 CYL.
EXH
No. 3 CYL.
No. 5 CYL.
TF
X
No. 1 CYL. at TDC
INT
Measuring position (LH bank)
X
No. 2 CYL.
INT
No. 6 CYL.
X
No. 1 CYL. at TDC
EXH
PD
No. 4 CYL.
AX
X
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEM893E
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EM-55
CYLINDER HEAD
Valve Clearance (Cont’d)
I
I
SEM139D
Using a feeler gauge, measure clearance between valve lifter
and camshaft.
Record any valve clearance measurements which are out of
specification. They will be used later to determine the required
replacement valve lifter.
Valve clearance for checking:
Cold
Intake
0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 in)
Exhaust
0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 in)
Hot*
Intake
0.304 - 0.416 mm (0.012 - 0.016 in)
Exhaust
0.308 - 0.432 mm (0.012 - 0.017 in)
*: Approximately 80°C (176°F) (Reference data)
KBIA0185E
9. Turn crankshaft 240° and align as above.
10. Set No. 3 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke.
11. Check only those valves shown in the figure.
Measuring position (RH bank)
No. 1 CYL.
No. 3 CYL.
EXH
No. 5 CYL.
X
No. 3 CYL. at TDC
INT
Measuring position (LH bank)
INT
X
No. 2 CYL.
No. 4 CYL.
X
No. 3 CYL. at TDC
EXH
SEM894E
EM-56
X
No. 6 CYL.
CYLINDER HEAD
Valve Clearance (Cont’d)
12. Turn crankshaft 240° and align as above.
13. Set No. 5 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke.
14. Check only those valves shown in the figure.
Measuring position (RH bank)
EXH
No. 1 CYL.
No. 3 CYL.
GI
MA
No. 5 CYL.
X
No. 5 CYL. at TDC
INT
Measuring position (LH bank)
INT
X
No. 2 CYL.
No. 4 CYL.
No. 6 CYL.
LC
X
EC
X
No. 5 CYL. at TDC
EXH
15. If all valve clearances are within specification, install the following parts. If they are out of specification, adjust the valve
clearances.
I Intake manifold collectors
I RH and LH rocker covers
I All spark plugs
I All ignition coils
SEM958E
FE
CL
MT
AT
ADJUSTING
NAEM0022S02
Adjust valve clearance while engine is cold.
Perform adjustment by selecting head thickness of valve lifter
(Adjusting shims are not used).
1. Remove camshaft.
2. Remove valve lifter at location where measured value is outside standard.
TF
PD
AX
SU
3.
4.
SEM754G
I
Measure center thickness of removed valve lifter with
micrometer.
Use equation below to calculate valve lifter thickness for
replacement.
Valve lifter thickness calculation:
Thickness of replacement valve lifter = t1 + (C1 − C2)
t1 = Thickness of removed valve lifter
C1 = Measured valve clearance
C2 = Standard valve clearance:
Intake: 0.30 mm (0.012 in)
Exhaust: 0.33 mm (0.013 in)
Thickness of new valve lifter can be identified by stamp mark
on reverse side (inside cylinder).
Unit: mm (in)
I
SEM755G
Stamp mark
Thickness of valve lifter
Starting: 788U or 788R
7.88 (0.3102)
Ending: 840U or 840R
8.40 (0.3307)
Available thickness of valve lifter (Factory setting):
7.88 - 8.40 mm (0.3102 - 0.3307 in) [in 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
step] in 27 sizes (Intake/Exhaust)
Refer to EM-80.
EM-57
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
CYLINDER HEAD
Valve Clearance (Cont’d)
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Install selected valve lifter.
Install camshaft.
Rotate crankshaft a few turns by hand.
Confirm that valve clearance is within standard.
After repair, confirm that valve clearance is within standard
with engine warmed-up.
Valve clearance:
Unit: mm (in)
Cold
Hot* (reference data)
Intake
0.26 - 0.34 (0.010 - 0.013)
0.304 - 0.416 (0.012 - 0.016)
Exhaust
0.29 - 0.37 (0.011 - 0.015)
0.308 - 0.432 (0.012 - 0.017)
*: Approximately 80°C (176°F)
EM-58
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
NAEM0042
WARNING:
I Situate vehicle on a flat and solid surface.
I Place chocks at front and back of rear wheels.
I Do not remove engine until exhaust system has completely cooled off. Otherwise, you may burn yourself
and/or fire may break out in fuel line.
I For safety during subsequent steps, the tension of wires
should be slackened against the engine.
I Before disconnecting fuel hose, release fuel pressure
from fuel line.
Refer to EC-64, “Fuel Pressure Release”.
I Before removing front axle from transmission, place
safety stands under designated front supporting points.
Refer to GI section for lifting points and towing.
I Be sure to hoist engine and transmission in a safe manner.
I For engines not equipped with engine slingers, attach
proper slingers and bolts described in PARTS CATALOG.
CAUTION:
I When lifting engine, be careful not to strike adjacent parts,
especially brake lines, and brake master cylinder.
I In hoisting the engine, always use engine slingers in a
safe manner.
I Before separating engine and transmission, remove
crankshaft position sensor (POS) from the assembly.
I Always take extra care not to damage edge of crankshaft
position sensor (POS), or ring gear teeth.
GI
MA
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EM-59
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
REMOVAL
Front Engine Mounting
NAEM0042S01
NAEM0042S0101
SEM458G
EM-60
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
Rear Engine Mounting
NAEM0042S0102
GI
MA
LC
EC
FE
CL
SEM542G
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEM543G
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EM-61
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
1.
SEM605G
2.
3.
4.
5.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6.
7.
8.
SEM461G
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
SEM324F
16.
Release fuel pressure.
Refer to EC-64, “Fuel pressure release”.
Remove engine hood and front RH and LH wheels.
Remove engine undercover and suspension member stay.
Drain coolant from radiator.
Remove the following parts.
Radiator shroud
Radiator: Refer to LC-21, “REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION”.
Cooling fan
Drive belts
Battery
Engine cover
Air duct with air cleaner case
Disconnect vacuum hoses, fuel hoses, heater hoses, EVAP
canister hoses, harnesses, connectors and so on.
Remove air conditioner compressor from bracket, then put it
aside holding with a suitable wire.
Remove power steering oil pump and reservoir tank with
bracket, then put it aside holding with a suitable wire.
Remove alternator.
Remove exhaust front tube heat insulators, then remove rear
heated oxygen sensors.
Remove exhaust front and rear tubes.
Refer to FE-9, “Removal and Installation”.
Remove transmission.
Refer to AT-276, MT-7, “Removal”.
Remove TWC (manifold) heat insulators, then remove TWC
(manifold).
Install engine slingers.
Hoist engine with engine slingers and remove front engine
mounting nuts.
Remove engine from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
EM-62
NAEM0042S02
CYLINDER BLOCK
Components
Components
NAEM0024
GI
MA
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEM942G
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Rear oil seal retainer
Cylinder block
Knock sensor
Upper main bearing
Lower main bearing
Oil jet
Water drain plug (RH side)
Water drain plug (Water pump
side)
Main bearing cap
10. Main bearing beam
11. Crankshaft
12. Pilot bushing (M/T) or pilot converter (A/T)
13. Flywheel with signal plate (M/T)
14. Drive plate with signal plate (A/T)
15. Flywheel reinforcement plate (M/T)
16. Drive plate reinforcement plate
(A/T)
17. Oil ring
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
Piston pin
Connecting rod bearing
Connecting rod
Piston
Top ring
2nd ring
Baffle plate
Water drain plug (LH side)
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EM-63
CYLINDER BLOCK
Components (Cont’d)
CYLINDER BLOCK HEATER
NAEM0024S02
SEM537GC
Removal and Installation
SEM180FA
NAEM0025
CAUTION:
I When installing bearings, pistons, or other sliding parts,
lubricate contacting surfaces with new engine oil.
I Place removed parts such as bearings and bearing caps
in their proper order and direction.
I When installing connecting rod nuts, and main bearing
cap bolts, apply new engine oil to threads and seating
surfaces.
I Do not allow any magnetic materials to contact the signal
plate teeth of flywheel or drive plate.
Disassembly
PISTON, CRANKSHAFT AND OIL JET
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
NAEM0026
NAEM0026S01
Remove engine. Refer to “Removal and Installation”, EM-59.
Place engine on a work stand.
Drain coolant and oil.
Remove oil pan. Refer to “Removal”, EM-16.
Remove timing chain. Refer to “Removal”, EM-24.
Remove cylinder head. Refer to “Removal”, EM-24.
SEM190FA
EM-64
CYLINDER BLOCK
Disassembly (Cont’d)
7.
8.
I
Remove baffle plate from main bearing beam.
Remove pistons with connecting rods.
When disassembling piston and connecting rod, remove snap
ring first, then heat piston to 60 to 70°C (140 to 158°F).
9. Remove rear oil seal retainer.
CAUTION:
I When piston rings are not replaced, make sure that piston
rings are mounted in their original positions.
I When replacing piston rings, if there is no punchmark,
install with either side up.
GI
10. Loosen bolts in numerical order as shown and remove main
bearing beam, bearing cap and crankshaft.
I Before removing bearing beam and bearing cap, measure
crankshaft end play. Refer to EM-74.
I Bolts should be loosened in two or three steps.
EC
MA
LC
SEM965A
FE
CL
MT
SEM842E
AT
11. Remove oil jets.
12. Remove knock sensor.
CAUTION:
Carefully handle the sensor and avoid impacts.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEM454G
Inspection
PISTON AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE
1.
NAEM0027
NAEM0027S01
Measure inner diameter of piston pin hole “dp”.
Standard diameter “dp”:
Grade No. 0
21.993 - 21.999 mm (0.8659 - 0.8661 in)
Grade No. 1
21.999 - 22.005 mm (0.8661 - 0.8663 in)
BR
ST
RS
BT
AEM023
2.
Measure outer diameter of piston pin “Dp”.
Standard diameter “Dp”:
Grade No. 0
21.989 - 21.995 mm (0.8657 - 0.8659 in)
Grade No. 1
21.995 - 22.001 mm (0.8659 - 0.8662 in)
3. Calculate interference fit of piston pin to piston.
Dp − dp = 0.002 - 0.006 mm (0.0001 - 0.0002 in)
If it exceeds the above value, replace piston assembly with pin.
AEM024
EM-65
HA
SC
EL
IDX
CYLINDER BLOCK
Inspection (Cont’d)
PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE
SEM024AA
PISTON RING END GAP
SEM599A
NAEM0027S02
Side clearance:
Top ring
0.040 - 0.080 mm (0.0016 - 0.0031 in)
2nd ring
0.030 - 0.070 mm (0.0012 - 0.0028 in)
Oil ring
0.015 - 0.050 mm (0.0006 - 0.0020 in)
Max. limit of side clearance:
Top ring 0.11 mm (0.0043 in)
2nd ring 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
If out of specification, replace piston ring. If clearance exceeds
maximum limit with new ring, replace piston.
NAEM0027S03
End gap:
Top ring 0.23 - 0.33 mm (0.0091 - 0.0130 in)
2nd ring 0.33 - 0.48 mm (0.0130- 0.0189 in)
Oil ring 0.20 - 0.60 mm (0.0079 - 0.0236 in)
Max. limit of ring gap:
Top ring 0.54 mm (0.0213 in)
2nd ring 0.80 mm (0.0315 in)
Oil ring 0.95 mm (0.0374 in)
If out of specification, replace piston ring. If gap still exceeds the
limit even with a new ring, do the following. Rebore cylinder and
use oversized piston and piston rings.
Refer to SDS (EM-84).
I When replacing the piston, check the cylinder block surface for
scratches or seizure. If scratches or seizure is found, hone or
replace the cylinder block.
EM-66
CYLINDER BLOCK
Inspection (Cont’d)
CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION
NAEM0027S04
Bend:
Limit 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
per 100 mm (3.94 in) length
Torsion:
Limit 0.30 mm (0.0118 in)
per 100 mm (3.94 in) length
If it exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod assembly.
GI
MA
LC
SEM038F
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEM003F
CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION AND WEAR
I
I
SEM123C
I
AT
NAEM0027S05
Clean upper surface of cylinder block.
Use a reliable straightedge and feeler gauge to check the flatness of cylinder block surface.
Check along six positions shown in the figure.
Distortion limit: 0.10 mm (0.0039 in)
If out of specification, resurface it. The limit for cylinder block
resurfacing is determined by cylinder head resurfacing in
engine.
Resurfacing limit:
Amount of cylinder head resurfacing is “A”.
Amount of cylinder block resurfacing is “B”.
The maximum limit is as follows:
A + B = 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
Nominal cylinder block height from crankshaft center:
214.95 - 215.05 mm (8.4626 - 8.4665 in)
Refer to SDS (EM-83).
If necessary, replace cylinder block.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EM-67
CYLINDER BLOCK
Inspection (Cont’d)
PISTON-TO-BORE CLEARANCE
NAEM0027S06
1.
Using a bore gauge, measure cylinder bore for wear, out-ofround and taper.
Cylinder bore inner diameter
Grade No.
Standard inner diameter
No. 1
95.500 - 95.510 mm (3.7598 - 3.7602 in)
No. 2
95.510 - 95.520 mm (3.7602 - 3.7606 in)
No. 3
95.520 - 95.530 mm (3.7606 - 3.7610 in)
Wear limit
0.20 mm (0.0079 in)
SEM843E
2.
If it exceeds the limit, rebore all cylinders. Replace cylinder
block if necessary.
Out-of-round (Difference between X and Y):
Limit 0.015 mm (0.0006 in)
Taper (Difference between A and C):
Limit 0.015 mm (0.0006 in)
Check for scratches and seizure. If seizure is found, hone it.
SEM321AA
I
If both cylinder block and piston are replaced with new
ones, select piston of the same grade number punched on
cylinder block rear position. These numbers are punched
in either Arabic or Roman numerals.
3.
Measure piston skirt diameter.
Piston diameter “A”: Refer to SDS (EM-84).
Measuring point “a” (Distance from the top):
41.0 mm (1.61 in)
Check that piston-to-bore clearance is within specification.
Piston-to-bore clearance “B”:
0.010 - 0.030 mm (0.0004 - 0.0012 in)
Determine piston oversize according to amount of cylinder
wear.
Oversize pistons are available for service.
Refer to SDS (EM-84).
If oversize piston is used, use it for all cylinders with oversize piston rings.
Cylinder bore size is determined by adding piston-to-bore
clearance to piston diameter “A”.
Rebored size calculation: D = A + B − C
where,
D: Bored diameter
A: Piston diameter as measured
B: Piston-to-bore clearance
C: Honing allowance 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
SEM451G
4.
5.
SEM258C
I
6.
EM-68
CYLINDER BLOCK
Inspection (Cont’d)
7.
Install main bearing caps, and tighten to the specified torque.
Otherwise, cylinder bores may be distorted in final assembly.
8. Cut cylinder bores.
I When any cylinder needs boring, all other cylinders must
also be bored.
I Do not cut too much out of cylinder bore at a time. Cut
only 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) or so in diameter at a time.
9. Hone cylinders to obtain specified piston-to-bore clearance.
10. Measure finished cylinder bore for out-of-round and taper.
I Measurement should be done after cylinder bore cools
down.
CRANKSHAFT
1.
2.
SEM316A
GI
MA
LC
EC
NAEM0027S07
Check crankshaft main and pin journals for score, wear or
cracks.
With a micrometer, measure journals for taper and out-ofround.
Out-of-round (X − Y):
Standard
0.002 mm (0.0001 in)
Taper (A − B):
Standard
0.002 mm (0.0001 in)
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
3.
Measure crankshaft runout.
Runout (Total indicator reading):
Limit 0.10 mm (0.0039 in)
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEM346D
BEARING CLEARANCE
I
NAEM0027S08
Use either of the following two methods, however, method “A”
gives more reliable results and is preferable.
Method A (Using bore gauge & micrometer)
Main bearing
1.
HA
SC
NAEM0027S0801
Set main bearings in their proper positions on cylinder block
and main bearing cap.
EL
IDX
SEM175F
EM-69
CYLINDER BLOCK
Inspection (Cont’d)
2.
3.
Install main bearing cap and bearing beam to cylinder block.
Tighten all bolts in correct order.
Measure inner diameters “A” of each main bearing.
SEM845E
4.
5.
I
I
Measure outer diameters “Dm” of each crankshaft main journal.
Calculate main bearing clearance.
Main bearing clearance = A − Dm
Standard: 0.035 - 0.045 mm (0.0014 - 0.0018 in)
Limit: 0.065 mm (0.0026 in)
If it exceeds the limit, replace bearing.
If clearance cannot be adjusted using any standard bearing
grade, grind crankshaft journal and use undersized bearing.
AEM033
a.
b.
When grinding crankshaft journal, confirm that “L” dimension in
fillet roll is more than the specified limit.
“L”: 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
Refer to SDS for grinding crankshaft and available service
parts.
SEM964
6.
a.
If crankshaft or cylinder block is replaced with a new one,
select thickness of main bearings as follows:
Grade number of each cylinder block main journal is punched
on the respective cylinder block. These numbers are punched
in either Arabic or Alphabet. Refer to SDS, EM-83.
If measured diameter is out of grade punched, decide suitable
grade using table in SDS.
SEM451G
b.
c.
Grade number of each crankshaft main journal is punched on
the respective crankshaft. These numbers are punched in
either Arabic or Alphabet. Refer to SDS, EM-86.
If measured diameter is out of grade punched, decide suitable
grade using table in SDS.
Select main bearing with suitable thickness according to the
following table.
Refer to “SDS”, EM-87, for available main bearings.
SEM452G
EM-70
CYLINDER BLOCK
Inspection (Cont’d)
GI
MA
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
PBIC0814E
BR
ST
RS
BT
Connecting Rod Bearing (Big end)
1.
2.
3.
NAEM0027S0802
Install connecting rod bearing to connecting rod and cap.
Install connecting rod cap to connecting rod.
Tighten bolts to the specified torque.
Measure inner diameter “C” of connecting rod.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AEM027
EM-71
CYLINDER BLOCK
Inspection (Cont’d)
4.
5.
6.
7.
Measure outer diameter “Dp” of each crankshaft pin journal.
Calculate connecting rod bearing clearance.
Connecting rod bearing clearance = C − Dp
Standard: 0.034 - 0.059 mm (0.0013 - 0.0023 in)
Limit: 0.070 mm (0.0028 in)
If it exceeds the limit, replace bearing.
If clearance cannot be adjusted within the standard of any
bearing, grind crankshaft journal and use undersized bearing.
Refer to “BEARING CLEARANCE — Main bearing”, EM-69.
AEM034
8.
SEM452G
If crankshaft is replaced with a new one, select connecting rod
bearing according to the following table.
Connecting rod bearing grade number (Identification
color):
These numbers are punched in either Arabic or Roman numerals.
Crankshaft pin journal grade
number
Connecting rod bearing grade number
0
0 (Black)
1
1 (Brown)
2
2 (Green)
Method B (Using plastigage)
CAUTION:
I Do not turn crankshaft or connecting rod while plastigage
is being inserted.
I When bearing clearance exceeds the specified limit,
ensure that the proper bearing has been installed. If incorrect bearing clearance exists, use a thicker or undersized
main bearing to ensure specified clearance.
EM142
CONNECTING ROD BUSHING CLEARANCE (SMALL
END)
NAEM0027S09
1.
2.
3.
SEM673E
Measure inner diameter “C” of bushing.
Measure outer diameter “Dp” of piston pin.
Calculate connecting rod bushing clearance.
Connecting rod bushing clearance = C − Dp
Standard: 0.005 - 0.017 mm (0.0002 - 0.0007 in)
Limit: 0.030 mm (0.0012 in)
If it exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod assembly or
connecting rod bushing and/or piston set with pin.
EM-72
CYLINDER BLOCK
Inspection (Cont’d)
FLYWHEEL/DRIVE PLATE RUNOUT
SEM849EB
NAEM0027S11
Runout (Total indicator reading):
Flywheel (M/T model)
Less than 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
Drive plate (A/T model)
Less than 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
CAUTION:
I The signal plate is built into the flywheel/drive plate
assembly. Be careful not to damage the signal plate, especially the teeth.
I Check the drive plate and signal plate for deformation or
cracks.
I Never place the flywheel assembly with the signal plate
facing down.
I Keep any magnetized objects away from the signal plate.
I Do not allow any magnetic materials to contact the signal
plate teeth.
I Do not surface flywheel. Replace as necessary.
GI
MA
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEM536G
Assembly
PISTON
1.
2.
I
I
I
SEM838F
AT
NAEM0028
NAEM0028S01
Install new snap ring on one side of piston pin hole.
Heat piston to 60 to 70°C (140 to 158°F) and assemble piston,
piston pin, connecting rod and new snap ring.
Align the direction of piston and connecting rod.
Numbers stamped on connecting rod and cap correspond
to each cylinder.
After assembly, make sure connecting rod swings
smoothly.
3. Set piston rings as shown.
CAUTION:
I When piston rings are not replaced, make sure that piston
rings are mounted in their original positions.
I When replacing piston rings, these without punchmarks
present, piston rings can be mounted with either side up.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEM814G
I
Align piston rings so that end gaps are positioned as
shown in the figure.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEM160B
EM-73
CYLINDER BLOCK
Assembly (Cont’d)
OIL JET
1.
I
NAEM0028S05
Install oil jets.
Insert oil jet knock pin into the cylinder block knock pin hole,
and tighten the mounting bolts.
SEM454G
CRANKSHAFT
1.
I
NAEM0028S02
Set main bearings in their proper positions on cylinder block
and main bearing beam.
Confirm that correct main bearings are used. Refer to
“Inspection” of this section.
SEM175F
2.
I
Instructions for re-use of main bearing cap bolts.
A plastic zone tightening method is used for tightening
main bearing cap bolts. Measure d1 and d2 as shown in
the figure.
d2: Select minimum diameter in the measuring area.
If the difference between d1 and d2 exceeds the limit,
replace the bolts with new ones.
Limit (d1 - d2): 0.11 mm (0.0043 in)
3.
After installing crankshaft, main bearing cap, main bearing
beam and bearing cap bolts, tighten bearing cap bolts in
numerical order as shown.
Make sure that the front mark on the main bearing beam
faces the front of the engine.
Tightening procedure
Tighten all bolts to 32 to 38 N·m (3.3 to 3.9 kg-m, 24 to 28
ft-lb) in several different steps.
Turn all bolts 90 to 95 degrees clockwise with angle
wrench.
Prior to tightening bearing cap bolts, place bearing beam
SEM177F
SEM456G
I
I
a)
b)
SEM851E
I
EM-74
CYLINDER BLOCK
Assembly (Cont’d)
I
I
in its proper position by shifting crankshaft in the axial
direction.
After securing bearing cap bolts, make sure crankshaft
turns smoothly by hand.
Lubricate threads and seat surfaces of the bolts with new
engine oil.
GI
MA
LC
4.
Measure crankshaft end play.
Crankshaft end play:
Standard
0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)
Limit
0.30 mm (0.0118 in)
If beyond the limit, replace bearing with a new one.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SEM852E
5.
I
Install connecting rod bearings in connecting rods and connecting rod caps.
Confirm that correct bearings are used.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEM455G
6.
a.
I
I
Install pistons with connecting rods.
Install them into corresponding cylinders with Tool.
Be careful not to scratch cylinder wall with the connecting
rod.
Arrange so that front mark on piston head faces toward
engine front.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEM620
b.
I
I
I
Install connecting rod caps.
Lubricate threads and seat surfaces with new engine oil.
Install so that the cylinder number stamped on the connecting
rod agrees with that stamped on cap side.
Make sure that front mark on the connecting rod cap faces the
front of the engine.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEM457G
EM-75
CYLINDER BLOCK
Assembly (Cont’d)
c.
I
I
Re-use connecting rod cap bolts as follows.
Make sure that the bolts can be smoothly screwed-in to the
end manually.
If not, measure the outer diameter “d” shown in the figure.
Outer diameter “d” of connecting rod cap bolt:
Standard
7.90 - 8.00 mm (0.3110 - 0.3150 in)
Limit
7.75 mm (0.3051 in)
SEM538G
d.
Tighten connecting rod cap bolts to the specified torque.
Connecting rod cap bolt:
(1) Tighten nuts to 19 to 21 N·m (1.9 to 2.1 kg-m, 14
to 15 ft-lb).
(2) Turn nuts 90 to 95 degrees clockwise with angle
wrench.
7.
Measure connecting rod side clearance.
Connecting rod side clearance:
Standard
0.20 - 0.35 mm (0.0079 - 0.0138 in)
Limit
0.40 mm (0.0157 in)
If beyond the limit, replace connecting rod and/or crankshaft.
Install baffle plate to main bearing beam.
Install rear oil seal retainer.
SEM953E
8.
9.
SEM954E
KNOCK SENSOR
1.
I
PBIC0810E
NAEM0028S07
Install knock sensor.
Make sure that there is no foreign material on the cylinder
block mating surface and the back surface of the knock sensor.
I Install knock sensor so that connector faces front of engine.
I Do not tighten the mounting bolts while holding the connector.
I Make sure that the knock sensor does not interfere with other
parts.
CAUTION:
If any impact by dropping is applied to the knock sensor,
replace it with new one.
I After installing knock sensor, connect sub-harness, and lay it
out to rear of engine.
EM-76
CYLINDER BLOCK
Assembly (Cont’d)
REPLACEMENT OF PILOT BUSHING (M/T) OR PILOT
GI
CONVERTER (A/T)
NAEM0028S04
1.
Remove pilot bushing or pilot converter using tool or suitable
tool.
MA
LC
SEM005G
2.
EC
Install pilot bushing or pilot converter as shown.
FE
CL
MT
SEM163B
FLYWHEEL/DRIVE PLATE
AT
NAEM0028S06
Install drive plate.
I Install the drive plate and reinforce plate in the direction shown
in the figure.
I Align dowel pin of crankshaft rear end with pin holes of each
part.
I Secure the crankshaft using a ring gear stopper.
I Tighten the installation bolts crosswise over several times.
TF
PD
AX
SU
PBIC0910E
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EM-77
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications
General Specifications
Cylinder arrangement
Displacement
cm3 (cu in)
Bore and stroke
NAEM0029
V-6
3,498 (213.45)
mm (in)
95.5 x 81.4 (3.760 x 3.205)
Valve arrangement
DOHC
Firing order
1-2-3-4-5-6
Compression
2
Oil
1
Number of piston rings
Number of main bearings
4
Compression ratio
10.0
Compression Pressure
NAEM0030
Unit: kPa (kg/cm2, psi)/300 rpm
Compression pressure
Standard
1,275 (13.0, 185)
Minimum
981 (10.0, 142)
Differential limit between cylinders
98 (1.0, 14)
Cylinder number
SEM713A
Cylinder Head
NAEM0031
Unit: mm (in)
Head surface distortion
Standard
Limit
Less than 0.03 (0.0012)
0.1 (0.004)
SEM949E
EM-78
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Valve
Valve
NAEM0032
VALVE
GI
NAEM0032S01
Unit: mm (in)
MA
LC
EC
SEM188
Intake
FE
37.0 - 37.3 (1.4567 - 1.4685)
Valve head diameter “D”
Exhaust
31.2 - 31.5 (1.228 - 1.240)
Intake
96.12 - 96.62 (3.7842 - 3.8039)
Exhaust
93.65 - 94.15 (3.6870 - 3.7067)
Intake
5.965 - 5.980 (0.2348 - 0.2354)
Exhaust
5.945 - 5.960 (0.2341 - 0.2346)
CL
Valve length “L”
MT
Valve stem diameter “d”
AT
Intake
Valve seat angle “α”
45°15′ - 45°45′
TF
Exhaust
Intake
1.1 (0.044)
Exhaust
1.3 (0.051)
Valve margin “T”
Valve margin “T” limit
More than 0.5 (0.020)
Valve stem end surface grinding limit
Less than 0.2 (0.008)
PD
AX
VALVE CLEARANCE
NAEM0032S02
Unit: mm (in)
Cold
Hot* (reference data)
Intake
0.26 - 0.34 (0.010 - 0.013)
0.304 - 0.416 (0.012 - 0.016)
Exhaust
0.29 - 0.37 (0.011 - 0.015)
0.308 - 0.432 (0.012 - 0.017)
BR
ST
*: Approximately 80°C (176°F)
VALVE SPRING
Free height
Pressure
NAEM0032S04
mm (in)
RS
46.52 (1.8315)
Installation
196 (20.0, 44.1) at 37.0 (1.457)
Valve open
433 (44.2, 97.3) at 27.8 (1.094)
N (kg, lb) at height mm (in)
Out-of-square
SU
mm (in)
BT
Less than 2.0 (0.079)
HA
VALVE LIFTER
NAEM0032S05
Unit: mm (in)
Valve lifter outer diameter
33.977 - 33.987 (1.3377 - 1.3381)
Lifter guide inner diameter
34.000 - 34.016 (1.3386 - 1.3392)
Clearance between lifter and lifter guide
0.013 - 0.039 (0.0005 - 0.0015)
SC
EL
IDX
EM-79
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Valve (Cont’d)
AVAILABLE LIFTERS (SHIMLESS TYPE)
=NAEM0032S08
Identification mark
Thickness mm (in)
788U or 788R
7.88 (0.3102)
790U or 790R
7.90 (0.3110)
792U or 792R
7.92 (0.3118)
794U or 794R
7.94 (0.3126)
796U or 796R
7.96 (0.3134)
798U or 798R
7.98 (0.3142)
800U or 800R
8.00 (0.3150)
802U or 802R
8.02 (0.3157)
804U or 804R
8.04 (0.3165)
806U or 806R
8.06 (0.3173)
808U or 808R
8.08 (0.3181)
810U or 810R
8.10 (0.3189)
812U or 812R
8.12 (0.3197)
814U or 814R
8.14 (0.3205)
816U or 816R
8.16 (0.3213)
818U or 818R
8.18 (0.3220)
820U or 820R
8.20 (0.3228)
822U or 822R
8.22 (0.3236)
824U or 824R
8.24 (0.3244)
826U or 826R
8.26 (0.3252)
828U or 828R
8.28 (0.3260)
830U or 830R
8.30 (0.3268)
832U or 832R
8.32 (0.3276)
834U or 834R
8.34 (0.3283)
836U or 836R
8.36 (0.3291)
838U or 838R
8.38 (0.3299)
840U or 840R
8.40 (0.3307)
SEM758G
EM-80
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Valve (Cont’d)
VALVE GUIDE
NAEM0032S06
GI
Unit: mm (in)
MA
LC
EC
SEM950E
Valve guide
Outer diameter
Valve guide
Inner diameter (Finished size)
Cylinder head valve guide hole diameter
FE
Standard
Service
10.023 - 10.034 (0.3946 - 0.3950)
10.223 - 10.234 (0.4025 - 0.4029)
CL
6.000 - 6.018 (0.2362 - 0.2369)
9.975 - 9.996 (0.3927 - 0.3935)
Interference fit of valve guide
10.175 - 10.196 (0.4006 - 0.4014)
MT
0.027 - 0.059 (0.0011 - 0.0023)
Standard
Max. tolerance
Intake
0.020 - 0.053 (0.0008 - 0.0021)
0.08 (0.0031)
Exhaust
0.040 - 0.073 (0.0016 - 0.0029)
0.1 (0.004)
Intake
—
0.24 (0.0094)
Exhaust
—
0.28 (0.0110)
AT
Stem to guide clearance
TF
Valve deflection limit
Projection length “L”
PD
12.6 - 12.8 (0.496 - 0.504)
Valve Seat
NAEM0033
AX
Unit: mm (in)
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEM021EB
EL
IDX
EM-81
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Valve Seat (Cont’d)
SEM621F
Standard
Service
Intake
38.000 - 38.016 (1.4961 - 1.4967)
38.500 - 38.516 (1.5157 - 1.5164)
Exhaust
32.200 - 32.216 (1.2677 - 1.2683)
32.700 - 32.716 (1.2874 - 1.2880)
Cylinder head seat recess diameter (D)
Intake
0.081 - 0.113 (0.0032 - 0.0044)
Exhaust
0.064 - 0.096 (0.0025 - 0.0038)
Valve seat interference fit
Intake
38.097 - 38.113 (1.4999 - 1.5005)
38.597 - 38.613 (1.5196 - 1.5202)
Exhaust
32.280 - 32.296 (1.2709 - 1.2715)
32.780 - 32.796 (1.2905 - 1.2912)
Intake
5.9 - 6.0 (0.232 - 0.236)
5.05 - 5.15 (0.1988 - 0.2028)
Exhaust
5.9 - 6.0 (0.232 - 0.236)
4.95 - 5.05 (0.1949 - 0.1988)
Valve seat outer diameter (d)
Height (h)
Depth (H)
5.9 - 6.1 (0.232 - 0.240)
Intake
41.07 - 41.67 (1.6169 - 1.6405)
Exhaust
41.00 - 41.60 (1.6142 - 1.6378)
Depth (L)
Camshaft and Camshaft Bearing
NAEM0034
Unit: mm (in)
Standard
Limit
No. 1
0.045 - 0.086 (0.0018 - 0.0034)
No. 2, 3, 4
0.035 - 0.076 (0.0014 - 0.0030)
0.15 (0.0059)
Inner diameter of camshaft bearing
No. 1
26.000 - 26.021 (1.0236 - 1.0244)
No. 2, 3, 4
23.500 - 23.521 (0.9252 - 0.9260)
—
Outer diameter of camshaft journal
No. 1
25.935 - 25.955 (1.0211 - 1.0218)
No. 2, 3, 4
23.445 - 23.465 (0.9230 - 0.9238)
—
Camshaft runout [TIR*]
Less than 0.02 (0.0008)
0.05 (0.0020)
Camshaft sprocket runout [TIR*]
Less than 0.15 (0.0059)
—
0.115 - 0.188 (0.0045 - 0.0074)
0.24 (0.0094)
Camshaft journal to bearing clearance
Camshaft end play
*: Total indicator reading
EM-82
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Camshaft and Camshaft Bearing (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM671
Cam height “A”
Intake and exhaust
LC
44.465 - 44.655 (1.7506 - 1.7581)
Wear limit of cam height
EC
0.2 (0.008)
FE
CL
Valve timing
MT
AT
Unit: degree
a
b
c
d
e
f
232
230
–3
53
6
46
Cylinder Block
TF
PD
NAEM0035
Unit: mm (in)
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEM022EA
Standard
Less than 0.03 (0.0012)
Surface flatness
Limit
0.10 (0.0039)
Standard
Cylinder bore
RS
Grade No. 1
95.500 - 95.510 (3.7598 - 3.7602)
Grade No. 2
95.510 - 95.520 (3.7602 - 3.7606)
Grade No. 3
95.520 - 95.530 (3.7606 - 3.7610)
BT
HA
Inner diameter
Wear limit
0.20 (0.0079)
Out-of-round (Difference between X and Y)
Less than 0.015 (0.0006)
Taper (Difference between A and C)
Less than 0.015 (0.0006)
SC
EL
IDX
EM-83
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Cylinder Block (Cont’d)
Main journal inner
diameter grade
(Without bearing)
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
No. A
No. B
No. C
No. D
No. E
No. F
No. G
No. H
No. J
No. K
No. L
No. M
No. N
No. P
No. R
No. S
No. T
No. U
No. V
No. W
No. X
No. Y
No. 4
No. 7
Difference in inner
diameter between
cylinders
Standard
63.993 - 63.994 (2.5194 - 2.5194)
63.994 - 63.995 (2.5194 - 2.5195)
63.995 - 63.996 (2.5195 - 2.5195)
63.996 - 63.997 (2.5195 - 2.5196)
63.997 - 63.998 (2.5196 - 2.5196)
63.998 - 63.999 (2.5196 - 2.5196)
63.999 - 64.000 (2.5196 - 2.5197)
64.000 - 64.001 (2.5197 - 2.5197)
64.001 - 64.002 (2.5197 - 2.5198)
64.002 - 64.003 (2.5198 - 2.5198)
64.003 - 64.004 (2.5198 - 2.5198)
64.004 - 64.005 (2.5198 - 2.5199)
64.005 - 64.006 (2.5199 - 2.5199)
64.006 - 64.007 (2.5199 - 2.5200)
64.007 - 64.008 (2.5200 - 2.5200)
64.008 - 64.009 (2.5200 - 2.5200)
64.009 - 64.010 (2.5200 - 2.5201)
64.010 - 64.011 (2.5201 - 2.5201)
64.011 - 64.012 (2.5201 - 2.5202)
64.012 - 64.013 (2.5202 - 2.5202)
64.013 - 64.014 (2.5202 - 2.5202)
64.014 - 64.015 (2.5202 - 2.5203)
64.015 - 64.016 (2.5203 - 2.5203)
64.016 - 64.017 (2.5203 - 2.5203)
Less than 0.03 (0.0012)
Piston, Piston Ring and Piston Pin
NAEM0036
AVAILABLE PISTON
NAEM0036S01
Unit: mm (in)
SEM882E
Piston skirt diameter “A”
Grade No. 1
95.480 - 95.490 (3.7590 - 3.7594)
Grade No. 2*
95.490 - 95.500 (3.7594 - 3.7598)
Grade No. 3
95.500 - 95.510 (3.7598 - 3.7602)
0.20 (0.0079) oversize (Service)
95.680 - 95.710 (3.7669 - 3.7681)
Standard
“a” dimension
41.0 (1.614)
Grade No. 0
21.993 - 21.999 (0.8659 - 0.8661)
Grade No. 1
21.999 - 22.005 (0.8661 - 0.8663)
Piston pin hole diameter
Piston clearance to cylinder block
0.010 - 0.030 (0.0004 - 0.0012)
*: No grade No. is punched on piston.
EM-84
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Piston, Piston Ring and Piston Pin (Cont’d)
PISTON RING
=NAEM0036S02
GI
Unit: mm (in)
Side clearance
End gap
Standard
Limit
Top
0.040 - 0.080 (0.0016 - 0.0031)
0.11 (0.0043)
2nd
0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028)
0.1 (0.004)
Oil ring
0.015 - 0.050 (0.0006 - 0.0020)
—
Top
0.23 - 0.33 (0.0091 - 0.0130)
0.54 (0.0213)
2nd
0.33 - 0.48 (0.0130 - 0.0189)
0.80 (0.0315)
Oil (rail ring)
0.20 - 0.60 (0.0079 - 0.0236)
0.95 (0.0374)
PISTON PIN
MA
LC
EC
NAEM0036S03
Unit: mm (in)
Grade No. 0
21.989 - 21.995 (0.8657 - 0.8659)
Grade No. 1
21.995 - 22.001 (0.8659 - 0.8662)
FE
Piston pin outer diameter
Interference fit of piston pin to piston
CL
0.002 - 0.006 (0.0001 - 0.0002)
Standard
MT
0.005 - 0.017 (0.0002 - 0.0007)
Piston pin to connecting rod bushing clearance
Limit
0.030 (0.0012)
AT
*: Values measured at ambient temperature of 20°C (68°F)
Connecting Rod
NAEM0037
Unit: mm (in)
Center distance
TF
144.15 - 144.25 (5.6752 - 5.6791)
Bend [per 100 (3.94)]
Limit
0.15 (0.0059)
Torsion [per 100 (3.94)]
Limit
0.30 (0.0118)
Connecting rod small end inner diameter
23.980 - 24.000 (0.9441 - 0.9449)
Grade No. 0
22.000 - 22.006 (0.8661 - 0.8664)
Grade No. 1
22.006 - 22.012 (0.8664 - 0.8666)
PD
AX
Piston pin bushing inner diameter*
Connecting rod big end inner diameter
SU
55.000 - 55.013 (2.1654 - 2.1659)
Standard
0.20 - 0.35 (0.0079 - 0.0138)
Side clearance
Limit
BR
0.40 (0.0157)
ST
*: After installing in connecting rod
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EM-85
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Crankshaft
Crankshaft
NAEM0038
Unit: mm (in)
Main journal dia. “Dm” grade
Pin journal dia. “Dp”
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
No. A
No. B
No. C
No. D
No. E
No. F
No. G
No. H
No. J
No. K
No. L
No. M
No. N
No. P
No. R
No. S
No. T
No. U
No. V
No. W
No. X
No. Y
No. 4
No. 7
59.975 - 59.974 (2.3612 - 2.3612)
59.974 - 59.973 (2.3612 - 2.3611)
59.973 - 59.972 (2.3611 - 2.3611)
59.972 - 59.971 (2.3611 - 2.3611)
59.971 - 59.970 (2.3611 - 2.3610)
59.970 - 59.969 (2.3610 - 2.3610)
59.969 - 59.968 (2.3610 - 2.3609)
59.968 - 59.967 (2.3609 - 2.3609)
59.967 - 59.966 (2.3609 - 2.3609)
59.966 - 59.965 (2.3609 - 2.3608)
59.965 - 59.964 (2.3608 - 2.3608)
59.964 - 59.963 (2.3608 - 2.3607)
59.963 - 59.962 (2.3607 - 2.3607)
59.962 - 59.961 (2.3607 - 2.3607)
59.961 - 59.960 (2.3607 - 2.3606)
59.960 - 59.959 (2.3606 - 2.3606)
59.959 - 59.958 (2.3606 - 2.3605)
59.958 - 59.957 (2.3605 - 2.3605)
59.957 - 59.956 (2.3605 - 2.3605)
59.956 - 59.955 (2.3605 - 2.3604)
59.955 - 59.954 (2.3604 - 2.3604)
59.954 - 59.953 (2.3604 - 2.3603)
59.953 - 59.952 (2.3603 - 2.3603)
59.952 - 59.951 (2.3603 - 2.3603)
Grade No. 0
51.968 - 51.974 (2.0460 - 2.0462)
Grade No. 1
51.962 - 51.968 (2.0457 - 2.0460)
Grade No. 2
51.956 - 51.962 (2.0445 - 2.0457)
Center distance “r”
40.36 - 40.44 (1.5890 - 1.5921)
Out-of-round (X − Y)
Standard
Less than 0.002 (0.0001)
Taper (A − B)
Standard
Less than 0.002 (0.0001)
Runout [TIR*]
Limit
Less than 0.10 (0.0039)
Standard
0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098)
Free end play
Limit
0.30 (0.0118)
SEM645
*: Total indicator reading
EM-86
EM715
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Available Main Bearing
Available Main Bearing
NAEM0039
GI
MA
LC
EC
SEM175F
Grade number
Thickness “T”
Width “W”
mm (in)
mm (in)
Identification color
(UPR/LWR)
0
2.000 - 2.003 (0.0787 - 0.0789)
Black
1
2.003 - 2.006 (0.0789 - 0.0790)
Brown
2
2.006 - 2.009 (0.0790 - 0.0791)
Green
3
2.009 - 2.012 (0.0791 - 0.0792)
Yellow
4
2.012 - 2.015 (0.0792 - 0.0793)
Blue
5
2.015 - 2.018 (0.0793 - 0.0794)
Pink
6
2.018 - 2.021 (0.0794 - 0.0796)
Purple
7
2.021 - 2.024 (0.0796 - 0.0797)
White
UPP
2.003 - 2.006 (0.0789 - 0.0790)
LWR
2.000 - 2.003 (0.0787 - 0.0789)
UPR
2.006 - 2.009 (0.0790 - 0.0791)
LWR
2.003 - 2.006 (0.0789 - 0.0790)
UPR
2.009 - 2.012 (0.0791 - 0.0792)
LWR
2.006 - 2.009 (0.0790 - 0.0791)
UPR
2.012 - 2.015 (0.0792 - 0.0793)
LWR
2.009 - 2.012 (0.0791 - 0.0792)
UPR
2.015 - 2.018 (0.0793 - 0.0794)
LWR
2.012 - 2.015 (0.0792 - 0.0793)
UPR
2.018 - 2.021 (0.0794 - 0.0796)
LWR
2.015 - 2.018 (0.0793 - 0.0794)
UPR
2.021 - 2.024 (0.0796 - 0.0797)
LWR
2.018 - 2.021 (0.0794 - 0.0796)
01
12
19.9 - 20.1
(0.783 - 0.791)
23
34
CL
MT
Grade is the same for
upper and lower bearings.
AT
TF
Brown/Black
PD
Green/Brown
AX
Yellow/Green
SU
Blue/Yellow
45
56
67
FE
Remarks
Grade is different for upper
and lower bearings.
BR
Pink/Blue
ST
Purple/Pink
RS
White/Purple
BT
UNDERSIZE
NAEM0039S01
HA
Unit: mm (in)
0.25 (0.0098)
Thickness
Main journal diameter “Dm”
2.132 - 2.140 (0.0839 - 0.0843)
Grind so that bearing clearance is the specified
value.
SC
EL
IDX
EM-87
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Available Connecting Rod Bearing
Available Connecting Rod Bearing
NAEM0040
CONNECTING ROD BEARING
Grade number
NAEM0040S01
Thickness “T”
mm (in)
Identification color (mark)
0
1.500 - 1.503 (0.0591 - 0.0592)
Black
1
1.503 - 1.506 (0.0592 - 0.0593)
Brown
2
1.506 - 1.509 (0.0593 - 0.0594)
Green
UNDERSIZE
NAEM0040S02
Unit: mm (in)
0.25 (0.0098)
Thickness
Crank pin journal diameter “Dp”
1.626 - 1.634 (0.0640 - 0.0643)
Grind so that bearing clearance is the specified
value.
Miscellaneous Components
NAEM0041
Unit: mm (in)
Flywheel runout [TIR]*
Less than 0.15 (0.0059)
Drive plate runout [TIR]*
Less than 0.15 (0.0059)
*: Total indicator reading
BEARING CLEARANCE
NAEM0041S01
Unit: mm (in)
Standard
0.035 - 0.045 (0.0014 - 0.0018)
Main bearing clearance
Limit
0.065 (0.0026)
Standard
0.034 - 0.059 (0.0013 - 0.0023)
Connecting rod bearing clearance
Limit
0.070 (0.0028)
EM-88
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
SECTION
EC
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CONTENTS
MODIFICATION NOTICE ................................................9
Modification Notice ......................................................9
How to Check Vehicle Type ........................................9
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX ..................................10
Alphabetical Index .....................................................10
DTC No. Index...........................................................14
PRECAUTIONS .............................................................19
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR
BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″.............19
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD)
System of Engine and A/T.........................................19
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System ..................20
Precautions ................................................................21
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...................22
PREPARATION .............................................................23
Special Service Tools ................................................23
Commercial Service Tools .........................................24
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL
SYSTEM.........................................................................26
Engine Control Component Parts Location...............26
Circuit Diagram ..........................................................31
System Diagram ........................................................34
Vacuum Hose Drawing ..............................................35
System Chart .............................................................36
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ...............................................37
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .......................37
Electronic Ignition (EI) System ..................................39
Air Conditioning Cut Control......................................40
Fuel Cut Control (at no load & high engine
speed) ........................................................................41
Evaporative Emission System ...................................41
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) ..........47
Positive Crankcase Ventilation ..................................56
CAN Communication .................................................57
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) System....62
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ...................................64
Fuel Pressure Release ..............................................64
Fuel Pressure Check .................................................64
Fuel Pressure Regulator Check ................................65
Injector .......................................................................66
How to Check Idle Speed and Ignition Timing..........67
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio
Adjustment .................................................................69
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning.........81
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ...................81
Idle Air Volume Learning ...........................................81
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION ...............................................................85
Introduction ................................................................85
Two Trip Detection Logic ...........................................85
Emission-related Diagnostic Information ...................86
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)............................102
OBD System Operation Chart .................................105
CONSULT-II ............................................................. 111
Generic Scan Tool (GST) ........................................125
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION................127
Introduction ..............................................................127
Work Flow................................................................129
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION .........131
Basic Inspection.......................................................131
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL
DESCRIPTION .............................................................137
DTC Inspection Priority Chart..................................137
Fail-safe Chart .........................................................138
Symptom Matrix Chart.............................................139
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................143
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................147
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................149
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE ..159
Description ...............................................................159
Testing Condition .....................................................159
Inspection Procedure...............................................159
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................160
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT
INCIDENT.....................................................................163
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
CONTENTS
Description ...............................................................163
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................163
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY........164
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................164
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit..................165
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE...172
Description ...............................................................172
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................172
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................172
Wiring Diagram ........................................................173
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................174
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL ............................175
Description ...............................................................175
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................176
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................176
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................176
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................177
Component Inspection.............................................178
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1
HEATER.......................................................................179
Description ...............................................................179
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................179
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................179
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................180
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................180
Wiring Diagram ........................................................182
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................184
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2
HEATER.......................................................................187
Description ...............................................................187
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................187
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................187
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................188
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................188
Wiring Diagram ........................................................190
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................192
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I) ..........................194
Application Notice ....................................................194
Component Description ...........................................194
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................194
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................194
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................195
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................195
Overall Function Check ...........................................196
Wiring Diagram ........................................................198
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................199
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR (TYPE II) .........................203
Application Notice ....................................................203
(Cont’d)
Component Description ...........................................203
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................203
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................203
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................204
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................204
Overall Function Check ...........................................206
Wiring Diagram ........................................................207
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................208
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I)..............211
Application Notice ....................................................211
Component Description ...........................................211
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................211
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................211
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................212
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................212
Wiring Diagram ........................................................214
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................215
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR (TYPE II).............219
Application Notice ....................................................219
Component Description ...........................................219
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................219
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................219
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................220
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................220
Wiring Diagram ........................................................222
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................223
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR (TYPE I) ................226
Application Notice ....................................................226
Component Description ...........................................226
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................226
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................226
Wiring Diagram ........................................................228
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................229
Component Inspection.............................................230
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR (TYPE II) ...............231
Application Notice ....................................................231
Component Description ...........................................231
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................231
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................231
Wiring Diagram ........................................................233
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................234
Component Inspection.............................................235
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR..............................236
Component Description ...........................................236
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................236
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................237
Wiring Diagram ........................................................238
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................239
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR................................241
EC-2
CONTENTS
Component Description ...........................................241
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................241
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................241
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................242
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................242
Wiring Diagram ........................................................244
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................245
Component Inspection.............................................247
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR..........................................249
Description ...............................................................249
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................249
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................250
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................250
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR ...........................................252
Component Description ...........................................252
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................252
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................252
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................253
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION.....................254
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................254
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................254
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................255
DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1 .........................................256
Component Description ...........................................256
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................256
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................256
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................257
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................257
Wiring Diagram ........................................................258
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................260
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1 .........................................264
Component Description ...........................................264
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................264
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................264
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................265
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................265
Overall Function Check ...........................................266
Wiring Diagram ........................................................267
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................269
DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1 .........................................278
Component Description ...........................................278
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................278
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................278
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................279
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................279
Overall Function Check ...........................................280
Wiring Diagram ........................................................281
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................283
(Cont’d)
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 .........................................287
Component Description ...........................................287
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................287
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................287
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................287
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................288
Wiring Diagram ........................................................289
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................291
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 .........................................295
Component Description ...........................................295
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................295
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................295
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................295
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................296
Overall Function Check ...........................................296
Wiring Diagram ........................................................298
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................300
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION ...................................................................304
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................304
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................304
Wiring Diagram ........................................................306
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................308
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION ...................................................................312
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................312
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................312
Wiring Diagram ........................................................314
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................316
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR ..........................................319
Component Description ...........................................319
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................319
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................319
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................320
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR..............................322
Component Description ...........................................322
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................322
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................322
Wiring Diagram ........................................................324
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................325
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR................................327
Component Description ...........................................327
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................327
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................327
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................328
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................328
Wiring Diagram ........................................................330
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................331
Component Inspection.............................................333
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-3
CONTENTS
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE ..................335
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................335
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................336
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................337
DTC P0327, P0328 KS................................................345
Component Description ...........................................345
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................345
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................345
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................345
Wiring Diagram ........................................................346
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................347
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) ..............................350
Component Description ...........................................350
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................350
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................350
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................351
Wiring Diagram ........................................................352
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................353
Component Inspection.............................................356
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ............357
Component Description ...........................................357
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................357
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................357
Wiring Diagram ........................................................359
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................361
Component Inspection.............................................365
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST
FUNCTION ...................................................................366
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................366
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................366
Overall Function Check ...........................................367
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................367
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.....................371
System Description..................................................371
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................371
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................372
Overall Function Check ...........................................372
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................374
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.....................381
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................381
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................382
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................383
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE
VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ..................396
Description ...............................................................396
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................396
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................397
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................397
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................398
(Cont’d)
Wiring Diagram ........................................................399
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................400
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE..........................................................................403
Component Description ...........................................403
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................403
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................403
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................403
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................404
Wiring Diagram ........................................................405
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................406
DTC P0452 EVAP SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR ..410
Component Description ...........................................410
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................410
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................410
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................411
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................411
Wiring Diagram ........................................................412
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................413
DTC P0453 EVAP SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR ..416
Component Description ...........................................416
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................416
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................416
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................417
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................417
Wiring Diagram ........................................................418
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................419
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.....................425
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................425
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................426
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................427
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.....................438
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................438
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................439
Overall Function Check ...........................................440
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................441
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................454
Component Description ...........................................454
On Board Diagnostic Logic......................................454
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................454
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................455
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................456
Component Description ...........................................456
On Board Diagnostic Logic......................................456
Overall Function Check ...........................................456
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................457
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ..............458
Component Description ...........................................458
On Board Diagnostic Logic......................................458
EC-4
CONTENTS
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................458
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................459
DTC P0500 VSS ..........................................................460
Description ...............................................................460
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................460
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................460
Overall Function Check ...........................................461
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................461
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM ...........................................462
Description ...............................................................462
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................462
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................462
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................463
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM ...........................................464
Description ...............................................................464
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................464
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................464
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................465
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR..........................................466
Component Description ...........................................466
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................466
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................466
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................466
Wiring Diagram ........................................................467
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................468
Component Inspection.............................................470
DTC P0605 ECM .........................................................471
Component Description ...........................................471
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................471
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................471
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................472
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY (BACK UP).......473
Component Description ...........................................473
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................473
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................473
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................473
Wiring Diagram ........................................................475
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................476
DTC P1102 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I) ..........................478
Application Notice ....................................................478
Component Description ...........................................478
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................478
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................478
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................479
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................479
Wiring Diagram ........................................................480
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................481
DTC P1110, P1135 IVT CONTROL.............................485
Description ...............................................................485
(Cont’d)
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................485
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................486
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................486
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................487
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE..........................................................................488
Component Description ...........................................488
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................488
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................488
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................489
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................489
Wiring Diagram ........................................................490
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................492
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
ACTUATOR .................................................................494
Component Description ...........................................494
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................494
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................494
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................495
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
FUNCTION ...................................................................496
Description ...............................................................496
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................496
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................497
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................497
Wiring Diagram ........................................................498
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................499
Component Inspection.............................................503
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL
MOTOR RELAY...........................................................504
Component Description ...........................................504
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................504
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................504
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................504
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................505
Wiring Diagram ........................................................506
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................507
Component Inspection.............................................508
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR.............509
Component Description ...........................................509
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................509
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................509
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................509
Wiring Diagram ........................................................511
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................512
Component Inspection.............................................513
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE......................................................514
Description ...............................................................514
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-5
CONTENTS
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................515
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................515
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................516
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................516
Wiring Diagram ........................................................518
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................519
DTC P1131 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE......................................................535
Component Description ...........................................535
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................535
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................535
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................535
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................536
Wiring Diagram ........................................................537
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................538
DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1 .........................................541
Component Description ...........................................541
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................541
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................541
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................542
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................542
Overall Function Check ...........................................543
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................544
DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1 .........................................549
Component Description ...........................................549
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................549
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................549
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................550
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................550
Overall Function Check ...........................................551
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................552
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 .........................................557
Component Description ...........................................557
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................557
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................557
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................557
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................558
Overall Function Check ...........................................558
Wiring Diagram ........................................................560
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................562
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 .........................................566
Component Description ...........................................566
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................566
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................566
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................566
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................567
(Cont’d)
Overall Function Check ...........................................567
Wiring Diagram ........................................................569
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................571
DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL........575
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................575
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................575
Overall Function Check ...........................................576
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................576
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL
VACUUM CHECK SWITCH.........................................577
Component Description ...........................................577
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................577
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................577
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................578
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................578
Wiring Diagram ........................................................579
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................580
DTC P1211 ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT .....................583
Description ...............................................................583
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................583
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................583
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................584
DTC P1212 ABS/TCS COMMUNICATION LINE........585
Description ...............................................................585
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................585
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................585
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................586
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE............587
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................587
Overall Function Check ...........................................587
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................588
Main 12 Causes of Overheating..............................591
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR ............................................592
Component Description ...........................................592
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................592
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................592
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................593
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR ............................................594
Component Description ...........................................594
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................594
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................594
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................595
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY....................596
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................596
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................596
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................596
Wiring Diagram ........................................................598
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................599
DTC P1442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.....................601
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................601
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................602
EC-6
CONTENTS
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................603
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...................................616
Description ...............................................................616
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................616
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................617
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................617
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................617
Wiring Diagram ........................................................619
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................620
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE..........................................................................628
Component Description ...........................................628
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................628
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................628
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................628
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................629
Wiring Diagram ........................................................630
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................631
DTC P1448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE..........................................................................636
Component Description ...........................................636
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................636
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................636
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................636
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................637
Overall Function Check ...........................................638
Wiring Diagram ........................................................639
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................640
DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.....................645
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................645
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................646
Overall Function Check ...........................................647
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................648
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS
VALVE..........................................................................661
Description ...............................................................661
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................661
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................661
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................662
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................662
Wiring Diagram ........................................................663
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................664
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS
VALVE..........................................................................667
Description ...............................................................667
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................667
(Cont’d)
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................667
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................668
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................668
Overall Function Check ...........................................669
Wiring Diagram ........................................................670
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................671
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH ....................679
Component Description ...........................................679
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................679
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................679
On Board Diagnosis Procedure...............................680
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................680
Wiring Diagram ........................................................681
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................682
Component Inspection.............................................684
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH..........................685
Component Description ...........................................685
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................685
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................685
On Board Diagnosis Procedure...............................686
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................686
Wiring Diagram ........................................................688
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................689
Component Inspection.............................................694
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH...........................................696
Component Description ...........................................696
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................696
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................696
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................696
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................696
Overall Function Check ...........................................697
Wiring Diagram ........................................................698
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................699
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH .....................................702
Description ...............................................................702
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................702
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................702
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................702
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................703
Wiring Diagram ........................................................704
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................705
Component Inspection.............................................707
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR .............................708
Component Description ...........................................708
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................708
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................708
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................709
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-7
CONTENTS
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................710
Wiring Diagram ........................................................711
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................712
Component Inspection.............................................714
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR .............................715
Component Description ...........................................715
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................715
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................715
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................716
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................717
Wiring Diagram ........................................................718
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................719
Component Inspection.............................................722
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR ............................................723
Component Description ...........................................723
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................723
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................723
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................724
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................724
Wiring Diagram ........................................................726
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................727
Component Inspection.............................................729
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR..........................................731
Component Description ...........................................731
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................731
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................731
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................732
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................733
Wiring Diagram ........................................................734
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................735
Component Inspection.............................................737
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM
(VIAS)...........................................................................739
Description ...............................................................739
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................740
Wiring Diagram ........................................................741
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................742
IGNITION SIGNAL.......................................................748
Component Description ...........................................748
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................748
Wiring Diagram ........................................................749
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................752
INJECTOR ...................................................................758
Component Description ...........................................758
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................758
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................758
(Cont’d)
Wiring Diagram ........................................................759
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................760
FUEL PUMP.................................................................763
System Description..................................................763
Component Description ...........................................763
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................763
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................764
Wiring Diagram ........................................................765
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................766
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ......................770
Description ...............................................................770
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................770
Wiring Diagram ........................................................771
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................772
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ..............................................775
Component Description ...........................................775
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................775
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................775
Wiring Diagram ........................................................776
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................777
ASCD INDICATOR LAMP...........................................783
Component Description ...........................................783
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................783
Wiring Diagram ........................................................784
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................785
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL.....................................786
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................786
Wiring Diagram ........................................................787
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................788
MIL & DATA LINK CONNECTORS ............................791
Wiring Diagram ........................................................791
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .......792
Fuel Pressure Regulator..........................................792
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing................................792
Mass Air Flow Sensor (Type I) ................................792
Mass Air Flow Sensor (Type II) ...............................792
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ......................792
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater ............................792
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater ............................792
Fuel Pump ...............................................................792
Injector .....................................................................792
Calculated Load Value.............................................793
Intake Air Temperature Sensor................................793
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor ...............................793
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)..........................793
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) .......................793
EC-8
MODIFICATION NOTICE
Modification Notice
Modification Notice
NAEC1413
GI
Mass air flow (MAF) sensor has been changed.
How to Check Vehicle Type
NAEC1414
MA
Confirm the type of the vehicle.
Vehicle Type
Vehicle Serial Number
Type I
700001 - 712114 (2WD)
800001 - 826013, 826016 - 834317 (4WD)
Type II
712115 - (2WD)
826014, 826015, 834318 - (4WD)
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-9
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical Index
Alphabetical Index
NAEC0001
APPLICATION NOTICE
NAEC0001S03
Confirm the type of the vehicle. Refer to “How to Check Vehicle Type”, EC-9.
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
NAEC0001S04
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001.
Refer to EC-172, “DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE”.
X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
Trip
MIL lighting
up
Reference page
0731
2
X
AT-126
P0732
0732
2
X
AT-132
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
P0733
0733
2
X
AT-138
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
P0734
0734
2
X
AT-144
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
P0744
0744
2
X
AT-157
APP SEN 1/CIRC
P2122
2122
1
X
EC-708
APP SEN 1/CIRC
P2123
2123
1
X
EC-708
APP SEN 2/CIRC
P2127
2127
1
X
EC-715
APP SEN 2/CIRC
P2128
2128
1
X
EC-715
APP SENSOR
P2138
2138
1
X
EC-731
ASCD BRAKE SW
P1572
1572
1
—
EC-685
ASCD SW
P1564
1564
1
—
EC-679
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
P0710
0710
2
X
AT-111
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT
P1805
1805
2
—
EC-702
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1000
1000*5
1
X
EC-172
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1001
1001*5
2
—
EC-172
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT
P0335
0335
2
X
EC-350
CLOSED LOOP-B1
P1148
1148
1
X
EC-575
CLOSED LOOP-B2
P1168
1168
1
X
EC-575
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1
P0340
0340
2
X
EC-357
CMP SEN/CIRC-B2
P0345
0345
2
X
EC-357
CTP LEARNING
P1225
1225
2
—
EC-592
CTP LEARNING
P1226
1226
2
—
EC-594
CYL 1 MISFIRE
P0301
0301
2
X
EC-335
CYL 2 MISFIRE
P0302
0302
2
X
EC-335
CYL 3 MISFIRE
P0303
0303
2
X
EC-335
CYL 4 MISFIRE
P0304
0304
2
X
EC-335
CYL 5 MISFIRE
P0305
0305
2
X
EC-335
CYL 6 MISFIRE
P0306
0306
2
X
EC-335
ECM
P0605
0605
1 or 2
X or —
EC-471
CONSULT-II
GST*2
ECM*3
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
P0731
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
EC-10
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical Index (Cont’d)
GI
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
Trip
MIL lighting
up
Reference page
CONSULT-II
GST*2
ECM*3
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT
P1065
1065
2
X
EC-473
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0117
0117
1
X
EC-236
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0118
0118
1
X
EC-236
ECT SENSOR
P0125
0125
1
X
EC-249
ENG OVER TEMP
P1217
1217
1
X
EC-587
ENGINE SPEED SIG
P0725
0725
2
X
AT-122
ETC ACTR
P1121
1121
1
X
EC-494
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC
P1122
1122
1
X
EC-496
ETC MOT
P1128
1128
1
X
EC-509
ETC MOT PWR
P1124
1124
1
X
EC-504
ETC MOT PWR
P1126
1126
1
X
EC-504
EVAP GROSS LEAK
P0455
0455
2
X
EC-425
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON
P0441
0441
2
X
EC-371
EVAP SMALL LEAK
P0442
0442
2
X
EC-381
EVAP SMALL LEAK
P1442
1442
2
X
EC-601
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0452
0452
2
X
EC-410
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0453
0453
2
X
EC-416
EVAP VERY SML LEAK
P0456
0456
2
X
EC-438
EVAP VERY SML LEAK
P1456
1456
2
X
EC-645
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0182
0182
2
X
EC-322
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0183
0183
2
X
EC-322
FTT SENSOR
P0181
0181
2
X
EC-319
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH
P0460
0460
2
X
EC-454
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
P0461
0461
2
X
EC-456
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
P0462
0462
2
X
EC-458
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
P0463
0463
2
X
EC-458
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1
P0171
0171
2
X
EC-304
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2
P0174
0174
2
X
EC-304
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1
P0172
0172
2
X
EC-312
FUEL SYS-RICH-B2
P0175
0175
2
X
EC-312
HO2S1 (B1)
P0132
0132
2
X
EC-256
HO2S1 (B1)
P0133
0133
2
X
EC-264
HO2S1 (B1)
P0134
0134
2
X
EC-278
HO2S1 (B1)
P1143
1143
2
X
EC-541
HO2S1 (B1)
P1144
1144
2
X
EC-549
HO2S1 (B2)
P0152
0152
2
X
EC-256
EC-11
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical Index (Cont’d)
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
Trip
MIL lighting
up
Reference page
0153
2
X
EC-264
P0154
0154
2
X
EC-278
HO2S1 (B2)
P1163
1163
2
X
EC-541
HO2S1 (B2)
P1164
1164
2
X
EC-549
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
P0031
0031
2
X
EC-179
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
P0032
0032
2
X
EC-179
HO2S1 HTR (B2)
P0051
0051
2
X
EC-179
HO2S1 HTR (B2)
P0052
0052
2
X
EC-179
HO2S2 (B1)
P0138
0138
2
X
EC-287
HO2S2 (B1)
P0139
0139
2
X
EC-295
HO2S2 (B1)
P1146
1146
2
X
EC-557
HO2S2 (B1)
P1147
1147
2
X
EC-566
HO2S2 (B2)
P0158
0158
2
X
EC-287
HO2S2 (B2)
P0159
0159
2
X
EC-295
HO2S2 (B2)
P1166
1166
2
X
EC-557
HO2S2 (B2)
P1167
1167
2
X
EC-566
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
P0037
0037
2
X
EC-187
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
P0038
0038
2
X
EC-187
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
P0057
0057
2
X
EC-187
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
P0058
0058
2
X
EC-187
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0112
0112
2
X
EC-226, 231
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0113
0113
2
X
EC-226, 231
IAT SENSOR
P0127
0127
2
X
EC-252
INT/V TIM CONT-B1
P0011
0011
2
X
EC-175
INT/V TIM CONT-B1
P1110
1110
2
X
EC-485
INT/V TIM CONT-B2
P0021
0021
2
X
EC-175
INT/V TIM CONT-B2
P1135
1135
2
X
EC-485
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1
P1111
1111
2
X
EC-488
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2
P1136
1136
2
X
EC-488
ISC SYSTEM
P0506
0506
2
X
EC-462
ISC SYSTEM
P0507
0507
2
X
EC-464
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
P0327
0327
2
—
EC-345
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
P0328
0328
2
—
EC-345
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
P0745
0745
2
X
AT-168
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
P0101
0101
1
X
EC-194, 203
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
P0102
0102
1
X
EC-211, 219
CONSULT-II
GST*2
ECM*3
HO2S1 (B2)
P0153
HO2S1 (B2)
EC-12
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical Index (Cont’d)
GI
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
Trip
MIL lighting
up
Reference page
CONSULT-II
GST*2
ECM*3
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
P0103
0103
1
X
EC-211, 219
MAF SENSOR*7
P1102
1102
1
X
EC-478
MULTI CYL MISFIRE
P0300
0300
2
X
EC-335
NATS MALFUNCTION
P1610 P1615
1610 - 1615
2
—
EL-375
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
No DTC
Flashing*4
—
Flashing*4
EC-103
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0000
0000
—
—
—
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC
P1760
1760
2
X
AT-188
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT
P1706
1706
2
X
EC-696
PNP SW/CIRC
P0705
0705
2
X
AT-105
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P0444
0444
2
X
EC-396
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P0445
0445
2
X
EC-396
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P1444
1444
2
X
EC-616
PW ST P SEN/CIRC
P0550
0550
2
—
EC-466
SENSOR POWER/CIRC
P1229
1229
1
X
EC-596
SFT SOL A/CIRC
P0750
0750
1
X
AT-174
SFT SOL B/CIRC
P0755
0755
1
X
AT-178
SWIRL CONT SOL/V
P1130
1130
2
X
EC-514
SWIRL CONT SOL/V
P1131
1131
2
X
EC-535
SWL CON VC SW/CIRC
P1165
1165
2
X
EC-577
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC
P0740
0740
2
X
AT-154
TCS C/U FUNCTN
P1211
1211
2
—
EC-583
TCS/CIRC
P1212
1212
2
—
EC-585
THERMSTAT FNCTN
P0128
0128
2
X
EC-254
TP SEN 1/CIRC
P0222
0222
1
X
EC-327
TP SEN 1/CIRC
P0223
0223
1
X
EC-327
TP SEN 2/CIRC
P0122
0122
1
X
EC-241
TP SEN 2/CIRC
P0123
0123
1
X
EC-241
TP SEN/CIRC A/T
P1705
1705
1
X
AT-182
TP SENSOR
P2135
2135
1
X
EC-723
TW CATALYST SYS-B1
P0420
0420
2
X
EC-366
TW CATALYST SYS-B2
P0430
0430
2
X
EC-366
VC CUT/V BYPASS/V
P1491
1491
2
X
EC-667
VC/V BYPASS/V
P1490
1490
2
X
EC-661
MA
EM
LC
FE
EC-13
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical Index (Cont’d)
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
Trip
MIL lighting
up
Reference page
0720
2
X
AT-117
P0500
0500
2
X
EC-460
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P0447
0447
2
X
EC-403
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P1446
1446
2
X
EC-628
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P1448
1448
2
X
EC-636
CONSULT-II
GST*2
ECM*3
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*6
P0720
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
*7:
1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), these numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
When engine is running.
The troubleshooting for these DTCs need CONSULT-II.
When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.
For the type I vehicle (Refer to “How to Check Vehicle Type”, EC-9.).
DTC No. Index
NAEC1181
APPLICATION NOTICE
NAEC1181S01
Confirm the type of the vehicle. Refer to “How to Check Vehicle Type”, EC-9.
DTC NO. INDEX
NAEC1181S02
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001.
Refer to EC-172, “DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE”.
X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
Trip
MIL lighting up
Reference page
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
—
Flashing*4
EC-103
1000*5
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
1
X
EC-172
U1001
1001*5
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
2
—
EC-172
P0000
0000
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
—
—
—
P0011
0011
INT/V TIM CONT-B1
2
X
EC-175
P0021
0021
INT/V TIM CONT-B2
2
X
EC-175
P0031
0031
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
2
X
EC-179
P0032
0032
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
2
X
EC-179
P0037
0037
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
2
X
EC-187
P0038
0038
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
2
X
EC-187
P0051
0051
HO2S1 HTR (B2)
2
X
EC-179
P0052
0052
HO2S1 HTR (B2)
2
X
EC-179
P0057
0057
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
2
X
EC-187
P0058
0058
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
2
X
EC-187
P0101
0101
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
1
X
EC-194, 203
CONSULT-II
GST*2
ECM*3
No DTC
Flashing*4
U1000
EC-14
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
DTC No. Index (Cont’d)
GI
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
Trip
MIL lighting up
Reference page
CONSULT-II
GST*2
ECM*3
P0102
0102
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
1
X
EC-211, 219
P0103
0103
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
1
X
EC-211, 219
P0112
0112
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT
2
X
EC-226, 231
P0113
0113
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT
2
X
EC-226, 231
P0117
0117
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT
1
X
EC-236
P0118
0118
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT
1
X
EC-236
P0122
0122
TP SEN 2/CIRC
1
X
EC-241
P0123
0123
TP SEN 2/CIRC
1
X
EC-241
P0125
0125
ECT SENSOR
1
X
EC-249
P0127
0127
IAT SENSOR
2
X
EC-252
P0128
0128
THERMSTAT FNCTN
2
X
EC-254
P0132
0132
HO2S1 (B1)
2
X
EC-256
P0133
0133
HO2S1 (B1)
2
X
EC-264
P0134
0134
HO2S1 (B1)
2
X
EC-278
P0138
0138
HO2S2 (B1)
2
X
EC-287
P0139
0139
HO2S2 (B1)
2
X
EC-295
P0152
0152
HO2S1 (B2)
2
X
EC-256
P0153
0153
HO2S1 (B2)
2
X
EC-264
P0154
0154
HO2S1 (B2)
2
X
EC-278
P0158
0158
HO2S2 (B2)
2
X
EC-287
P0159
0159
HO2S2 (B2)
2
X
EC-295
P0171
0171
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1
2
X
EC-304
P0172
0172
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1
2
X
EC-312
P0174
0174
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2
2
X
EC-304
P0175
0175
FUEL SYS-RICH-B2
2
X
EC-312
P0181
0181
FTT SENSOR
2
X
EC-319
P0182
0182
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
2
X
EC-322
P0183
0183
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
2
X
EC-322
P0222
0222
TP SEN 1/CIRC
1
X
EC-327
P0223
0223
TP SEN 1/CIRC
1
X
EC-327
P0300
0300
MULTI CYL MISFIRE
2
X
EC-335
P0301
0301
CYL 1 MISFIRE
2
X
EC-335
P0302
0302
CYL 2 MISFIRE
2
X
EC-335
P0303
0303
CYL 3 MISFIRE
2
X
EC-335
P0304
0304
CYL 4 MISFIRE
2
X
EC-335
P0305
0305
CYL 5 MISFIRE
2
X
EC-335
MA
EC-15
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
DTC No. Index (Cont’d)
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
Trip
MIL lighting up
Reference page
CYL 6 MISFIRE
2
X
EC-335
0327
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
2
—
EC-345
P0328
0328
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
2
—
EC-345
P0335
0335
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT
2
X
EC-350
P0340
0340
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1
2
X
EC-357
P0345
0345
CMP SEN/CIRC-B2
2
X
EC-357
P0420
0420
TW CATALYST SYS-B1
2
X
EC-366
P0430
0430
TW CATALYST SYS-B2
2
X
EC-366
P0441
0441
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON
2
X
EC-371
P0442
0442
EVAP SMALL LEAK
2
X
EC-381
P0444
0444
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
2
X
EC-396
P0445
0445
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
2
X
EC-396
P0447
0447
VENT CONTROL VALVE
2
X
EC-403
P0452
0452
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
2
X
EC-410
P0453
0453
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
2
X
EC-416
P0455
0455
EVAP GROSS LEAK
2
X
EC-425
P0456
0456
EVAP VERY SML LEAK
2
X
EC-438
P0460
0460
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH
2
X
EC-454
P0461
0461
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
2
X
EC-456
P0462
0462
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
2
X
EC-458
P0463
0463
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
2
X
EC-458
P0500
0500
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6
2
X
EC-460
P0506
0506
ISC SYSTEM
2
X
EC-462
P0507
0507
ISC SYSTEM
2
X
EC-464
P0550
0550
PW ST P SEN/CIRC
2
—
EC-466
P0605
0605
ECM
1 or 2
X or —
EC-471
P0705
0705
PNP SW/CIRC
2
X
AT-105
P0710
0710
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
2
X
AT-111
P0720
0720
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*6
2
X
AT-117
P0725
0725
ENGINE SPEED SIG
2
X
AT-122
P0731
0731
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
2
X
AT-126
P0732
0732
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
2
X
AT-132
P0733
0733
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
2
X
AT-138
P0734
0734
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
2
X
AT-144
P0740
0740
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC
2
X
AT-154
P0744
0744
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
2
X
AT-159
CONSULT-II
GST*2
ECM*3
P0306
0306
P0327
EC-16
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
DTC No. Index (Cont’d)
GI
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
Trip
MIL lighting up
Reference page
CONSULT-II
GST*2
ECM*3
P0745
0745
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
2
X
AT-168
P0750
0750
SFT SOL A/CIRC
1
X
AT-174
P0755
0755
SFT SOL B/CIRC
1
X
AT-178
P1065
1065
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT
2
X
EC-473
P1102
1102
MAF SENSOR*7
1
X
EC-478
P1110
1110
INT/V TIM CONT-B1
2
X
EC-485
P1111
1111
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1
2
X
EC-488
P1121
1121
ETC ACTR
1
X
EC-494
P1122
1122
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC
1
X
EC-496
P1124
1124
ETC MOT PWR
1
X
EC-504
P1126
1126
ETC MOT PWR
1
X
EC-504
P1128
1128
ETC MOT
1
X
EC-509
P1130
1130
SWIRL CONT SOL/V
2
X
EC-514
P1131
1131
SWIRL CONT SOL/V
2
X
EC-535
P1135
1135
INT/V TIM CONT-B2
2
X
EC-485
P1136
1136
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2
2
X
EC-488
P1143
1143
HO2S1 (B1)
2
X
EC-541
P1144
1144
HO2S1 (B1)
2
X
EC-549
P1146
1146
HO2S2 (B1)
2
X
EC-557
P1147
1147
HO2S2 (B1)
2
X
EC-566
P1148
1148
CLOSED LOOP-B1
1
X
EC-575
P1163
1163
HO2S1 (B2)
2
X
EC-541
P1164
1164
HO2S1 (B2)
2
X
EC-549
P1165
1165
SWL CON VC SW/CIRC
2
X
EC-577
P1166
1166
HO2S2 (B2)
2
X
EC-557
P1167
1167
HO2S2 (B2)
2
X
EC-566
P1168
1168
CLOSED LOOP-B2
1
X
EC-575
P1211
1211
TCS C/U FUNCTN
2
—
EC-583
P1212
1212
TCS/CIRC
2
—
EC-585
P1217
1217
ENG OVER TEMP
1
X
EC-587
P1225
1225
CTP LEARNING
2
—
EC-592
P1226
1226
CTP LEARNING
2
—
EC-594
P1229
1229
SENSOR POWER/CIRC
1
X
EC-596
P1442
1442
EVAP SMALL LEAK
2
X
EC-601
P1444
1444
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
2
X
EC-616
P1446
1446
VENT CONTROL VALVE
2
X
EC-628
MA
EC-17
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
DTC No. Index (Cont’d)
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
Trip
MIL lighting up
Reference page
VENT CONTROL VALVE
2
X
EC-636
1456
EVAP VERY SML LEAK
2
X
EC-645
P1490
1490
VC/V BYPASS/V
2
X
EC-661
P1491
1491
VC CUT/V BYPASS/V
2
X
EC-667
P1564
1564
ASCD SW
1
—
EC-679
P1572
1572
ASCD BRAKE SW
1
—
EC-685
P1610 - P1615
1610 - 1615
NATS MALFUNCTION
2
—
EL-375
P1705
1705
TP SEN/CIRC A/T
1
X
AT-182
P1706
1706
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT
2
X
EC-696
P1760
1760
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC
2
X
AT-188
P1805
1805
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT
2
—
EC-702
P2122
2122
APP SEN 1/CIRC
1
X
EC-708
P2123
2123
APP SEN 1/CIRC
1
X
EC-708
P2127
2127
APP SEN 2/CIRC
1
X
EC-715
P2128
2128
APP SEN 2/CIRC
1
X
EC-715
P2135
2135
TP SENSOR
1
X
EC-723
P2138
2138
APP SENSOR
1
X
EC-731
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
*7:
CONSULT-II
GST*2
ECM*3
P1448
1448
P1456
1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), these numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
When engine is running.
The troubleshooting for these DTCs need CONSULT-II.
When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.
For the type I vehicle (Refer to “How to Check Vehicle Type”, EC-9.).
EC-18
PRECAUTIONS
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR
BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
GI
NAEC0002
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL R50 is as follows:
쐌 For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
쐌 For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of side air bag module (located in the outer side of front seat),
side curtain air bag module (located in the headliner side of front and rear seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring harness, warning lamp (one
of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
쐌 To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
쐌 Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, refer to RS section.
쐌 Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connector (and by yellow harness protector or yellow insulation tape before the harness connectors).
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD)
System of Engine and A/T
NAEC0003
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
쐌 Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc.
will cause the MIL to light up.
쐌 Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
쐌 Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to EL-8, “HARNESS
CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)”.
쐌 Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with
a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
쐌 Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the fuel injection system, etc.
쐌 Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-19
PRECAUTIONS
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System
NAEC0004
SEF952RG
EC-20
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions
Precautions
쐌
NAEC0005
Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness
connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the
ECM because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if
ignition switch is turned off.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF289H
쐌
When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it
securely with a lever as far as it will go as shown at left.
FE
CL
MT
SEC406D
쐌
When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF291H
쐌
Before replacing ECM, perform “ECM Terminals and Reference Value” inspection and make sure ECM functions
properly. Refer to EC-149.
BR
ST
RS
BT
MEF040D
쐌
After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform
“DTC Confirmation Procedure” or “Overall Function
Check”.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” if the repair is completed. The “Overall
Function Check” should be a good result if the repair is
completed.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEF217U
EC-21
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions (Cont’d)
쐌
쐌
When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never
allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the
ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than the ECM
terminals, such as the ground.
SEF348N
쐌
쐌
“B1” indicates the bank 1 and “B2” indicates the bank 2
as shown in the figure.
Bank 1 includes No. 1 cylinder.
SEF099WB
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
When you read Wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
쐌 GI-11, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”
쐌 EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” for power distribution circuit
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
쐌 GI-35, “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”
쐌 GI-24, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”
EC-22
NAEC0006
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
Special Service Tools
NAEC0007
GI
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
MA
Description
EG17650301
(J33984-A)
Radiator cap tester
adapter
Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and
radiator filler neck
a: 28 (1.10) dia.
b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
a: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in)
EM
LC
NT564
KV10117100
(J36471-A)
Heated oxygen sensor
wrench
Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors
with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut
FE
CL
MT
NT379
(J44321)
Fuel pressure gauge kit
Checking fuel pressure with pressure gauge
AT
TF
PD
LEC642
KV109E0010
(J-46209)
Break-out box
Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester
AX
SU
BR
NT825
KV109E0080
(J-45819)
Y-cable adapter
Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester
ST
RS
BT
NT826
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-23
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools
Commercial Service Tools
Tool name
(Kent-Moore No.)
NAEC0008
Description
Fuel filler cap adapter
(i.e.: MLR-8382)
Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
pressure
NT815
Leak detector
(i.e., J41416)
Locating the EVAP leak
NT703
EVAP service port
adapter
(i.e., J41413-OBD)
Applying positive pressure through EVAP service
port
NT704
Socket wrench
Removing and installing engine coolant temperature sensor
NT705
Oxygen sensor thread
cleaner
i.e.: (J-43897-18)
(J-43897-12)
Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before
installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with antiseize lubricant shown below.
a: J-43897-18 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5
mm, for Zirconia Oxygen Sensor
b: J-43897-12 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25
mm, for Titania Oxygen Sensor
AEM488
EC-24
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools (Cont’d)
Tool name
(Kent-Moore No.)
GI
Description
Anti-seize lubricant
i.e.: (PermatexTM 133AR
or equivalent meeting
MIL specification MIL-A907)
Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool
when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
MA
EM
LC
NT779
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-25
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Engine Control Component Parts Location
NAEC0009
SEC407D
EC-26
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Engine Control Component Parts Location (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEC408D
IDX
EC-27
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Engine Control Component Parts Location (Cont’d)
SEC409D
EC-28
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Engine Control Component Parts Location (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEC410D
SC
EL
IDX
EC-29
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Engine Control Component Parts Location (Cont’d)
SEC576D
SEC577D
EC-30
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
APPLICATION NOTICE
NAEC0010
GI
NAEC0010S03
Confirm the type of the vehicle. Refer to “How to Check Vehicle Type”, EC-9.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-31
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Circuit Diagram (Cont’d)
TYPE I
NAEC0010S04
MEC075E
EC-32
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Circuit Diagram (Cont’d)
TYPE II
NAEC0010S05
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC514E
EC-33
IDX
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
System Diagram
System Diagram
NAEC0011
SEC423D
EC-34
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Vacuum Hose Drawing
Vacuum Hose Drawing
NAEC0012
GI
Refer to “System Diagram”, EC-34 for Vacuum Control System.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEC413D
EC-35
IDX
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
System Chart
System Chart
Input (Sensor)
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Mass air flow sensor
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Heated oxygen sensor 1
Ignition switch
Throttle position sensor
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Air conditioner switch
Knock sensor
Intake air temperature sensor
EVAP control system pressure sensor
Battery voltage
Power steering pressure sensor
Vehicle speed signal*3
Fuel tank temperature sensor *1
Heated oxygen sensor 2*2
TCM (Transmission control module)*3
ABS actuator and electric unit (Control
unit)*3
Refrigerant pressure sensor
Electrical load
Fuel level sensor*1
ASCD steering switch
ASCD brake switch
ASCD clutch switch (MT models)
Stop lamp switch
This
This
This
This
NAEC0013
ECM Function
Output (Actuator)
Fuel injection & mixture ratio control
Injectors
Electronic ignition system
Power transistor
Idle air control system
ASCD vehicle speed control
Electric throttle control actuator
Fuel pump control
Fuel pump relay
On board diagnostic system
MIL (On the instrument panel)*4
Swirl control valve control
Swirl control valve control solenoid
valve
Power valve control
VIAS control solenoid valve
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
EVAP canister purge flow control
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
Air conditioning cut control
Air conditioner relay*4
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS for EVAP system
쐌 EVAP canister vent control valve
쐌 Vacuum cut valve bypass valve
sensor is not used to control the engine system. This is used only for the on board diagnosis.
sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
input signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
output signal is sent from the ECM through CAN communication line.
EC-36
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System
DESCRIPTION
Input/Output Signal Chart
NAEC0014
NAEC0014S01
Sensor
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
GI
Input Signal to ECM
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*3
Piston position
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Heated oxygen sensor 1
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Gear position
Vehicle speed signal*2
Vehicle speed
Air conditioner switch
Air conditioner operation
Knock sensor
Engine knocking condition
Battery
Battery voltage*3
EVAP control system pressure sensor
Ambient air barometric pressure
Power steering pressure sensor
Power steering operation
Heated oxygen sensor 2*1
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
ECM function
Actuator
EM
LC
FE
Fuel injection & mixture ratio
control
CL
Injectors
MT
AT
TF
PD
*1: Under normal conditions, this sensor is not for engine control operation.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
Basic Multiport Fuel Injection System
MA
AX
NAEC0014S02
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air
flow sensor.
Various Fuel Injection Increase/Decrease Compensation
NAEC0014S03
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operating conditions as listed below.
쐌 During warm-up
쐌 When starting the engine
쐌 During acceleration
쐌 Hot-engine operation
쐌 When selector lever is changed from “N” to “D”
쐌 High-load, high-speed operation
쐌 During deceleration
쐌 During high engine speed operation
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-37
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System (Cont’d)
Mixture Ratio Feedback Control (Closed loop control)
NAEC0014S04
SEF336WC
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control. The three way catalyst (manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses
a heated oxygen sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor if the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM
adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about the heated
oxygen sensor 1, refer to EC-278. This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal
air-fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching
characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
Open Loop Control
NAEC0014S05
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
쐌 Deceleration and acceleration
쐌 High-load, high-speed operation
쐌 Malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1 or its circuit
쐌 Insufficient activation of heated oxygen sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
쐌 High engine coolant temperature
쐌 During warm-up
쐌 After shifting from “N” to “D”
쐌 When starting the engine
Mixture Ratio Self-learning Control
NAEC0014S06
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from the heated oxygen sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close
to the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as
originally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic
changes during operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This
is then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from the heated oxygen sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich,
and an increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences,
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.
EC-38
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System (Cont’d)
Fuel Injection Timing
NAEC0014S07
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF179U
Two types of systems are used.
Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
NAEC0014S0701
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
NAEC0014S0702
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all six cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The six injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
FE
CL
MT
AT
Fuel Shut-off
NAEC0014S08
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of the engine at excessively high speeds.
TF
Electronic Ignition (EI) System
DESCRIPTION
Input/Output Signal Chart
Sensor
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
NAEC0015
PD
NAEC0015S01
Input Signal to ECM
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*2
Piston position
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Vehicle speed signal*1
Vehicle speed
Knock sensor
Engine knocking
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Gear position
Battery
Battery voltage*2
ECM function
Actuator
AX
SU
BR
Ignition timPower transistor
ing control
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-39
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Electronic Ignition (EI) System (Cont’d)
System Description
NAEC0015S02
SEF742M
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of
the engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms the map shown.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
e.g.,
N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec
A °BTDC
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored
in the ECM.
쐌 At starting
쐌 During warm-up
쐌 At idle
쐌 At low battery voltage
쐌 During acceleration
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
Air Conditioning Cut Control
DESCRIPTION
Input/Output Signal Chart
Sensor
NAEC0016
NAEC0016S01
Input Signal to ECM
Air conditioner switch*1
Air conditioner “ON” signal
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*2
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Vehicle speed signal*1
Vehicle speed
Refrigerant pressure sensor
Refrigerant pressure
Power steering pressure sensor
Power steering operation
Battery
Battery voltage*2
ECM function
Actuator
Air conditioner cut
Air conditioner relay
control
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
System Description
NAEC0016S02
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
쐌 When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
EC-40
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Air Conditioning Cut Control (Cont’d)
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
When cranking the engine.
At high engine speeds.
When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
When engine speed is excessively low.
When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.
GI
MA
EM
Fuel Cut Control (at no load & high engine
speed)
DESCRIPTION
Input/Output Signal Chart
Sensor
LC
NAEC0017
NAEC0017S01
Input Signal to ECM
Vehicle speed signal*1
Vehicle speed
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Neutral position
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed
ECM function
Actuator
FE
CL
Fuel cut
control
Injectors
MT
AT
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm with no load (for example, in neutral and engine speed over 1,800
rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will operate until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut is cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under “Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System”, EC-37.
PD
AX
Evaporative Emission System
DESCRIPTION
TF
NAEC0018
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEF569XB
EL
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
EC-41
IDX
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the engine
operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is proportionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and
idling.
INSPECTION
EVAP Canister
NAEC0019
NAEC0019S01
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Pinch the fresh air hose.
2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port B.
SEF428T
Tightening Torque
NAEC0019S02
Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly between EVAP canister and EVAP canister vent control valve.
SEF231SB
Fuel Tank Vacuum Relief Valve (Built into fuel fillerNAEC0019S03
cap)
1.
2.
SEF445Y
Wipe clean valve housing.
Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
Pressure:
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum:
−6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2, −0.87 to
−0.48 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
SEF943S
EC-42
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)
Vacuum Cut Valve and Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass NAEC0019S04
Valve GI
Refer to EC-667.
EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve
MA
NAEC0019S05
Refer to EC-396.
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor
NAEC0019S06
Refer to EC-319.
EM
LC
Evap Service Port
NAEC0019S07
Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the
EVAP service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system
occurs, use a leak detector to locate the leak.
FE
CL
MT
SEF462UA
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage
SEF200U
PEF838U
AT
NAEC0019S08
CAUTION:
쐌 Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
쐌 Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure
in EVAP system.
NOTE:
쐌 Do not start engine.
쐌 Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP
service port may cause a leak.
With CONSULT-II
NAEC0019S0801
1) Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP
service port.
2) Also attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service
port adapter.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4) Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT
MODE” with CONSULT-II.
5) Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will
appear on the screen.
6) Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure
indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
7) Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure
pump.
8) Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to “EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-45.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
PEF917U
EC-43
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)
1)
2)
3)
4)
SEF462UA
5)
6)
Without CONSULT-II
NAEC0019S0802
Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP
service port.
Also attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the
EVAP service port adapter.
Apply battery voltage to between the terminals of both EVAP
canister vent control valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve
to make a closed EVAP system.
To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to 2.76 kPa (0.014
to 0.028 kg/cm2, 0.2 to 0.4 psi).
Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure
pump.
Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to “EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-45.
SEC930C
EC-44
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
NAEC0020
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEC414D
EC-45
IDX
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)
SEC927C
EC-46
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR)
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR)
NAEC0744
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
GI
NAEC0744S01
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
SEF206VA
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEC883C
From the beginning of refueling, the fuel tank pressure goes up. When the pressure reaches the setting value
of the refueling control valve (RCV) opening pressure, the RCV is opened. After RCV opens, the air and vapor
inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut valve, RCV and refueling vapor line to the EVAP
canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is released to the atmosphere.
When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed
and refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is
purged during driving.
The RCV is always closed during driving and the evaporative emission control system is operated the same
as conventional system.
WARNING:
When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following:
쐌 Put a “CAUTION: INFLAMMABLE” sign in workshop.
쐌 Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area.
쐌 Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher.
EC-47
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d)
CAUTION:
쐌 Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
a) Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely.
b) Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to “Fuel Pressure Release”, EC-64.
c) Disconnect battery ground cable.
쐌 Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed.
쐌 Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed.
쐌 Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
쐌 After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection.
쐌 Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Symptom: Fuel Odor from EVAP Canister Is Strong.
1
NAEC0744S02
NAEC0744S0201
CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
2
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
SEF596U
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 3.
No (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 6.
No (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 7.
3
REPLACE EVAP CANISTER
Replace EVAP canister with a new one.
䊳
GO TO 4.
EC-48
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d)
4
1.
2.
3.
4.
GI
CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Check
Check
Check
Check
visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.
MA
EM
LC
FE
PBIB1032E
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE:
쐌 Do not disassemble water separator.
CL
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Replace water separator.
5
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
MT
AT
TF
Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection.
䊳
Repair or replace EVAP hose.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-49
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d)
6
1.
2.
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
a.
b.
c.
d.
CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Remove fuel tank. Refer to FE-4, “FUEL SYSTEM.
Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer.
Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other side to a fuel
container.
Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from hose end B), and check that the air flows freely into the tank.
Check EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
Connect vacuum pump to hose ends A and B using a suitable 3-way connector.
Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
Put fuel tank upside down.
Apply vacuum pressure to both hose ends A and B [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
SEF968X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
EC-50
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d)
7
1.
2.
a.
b.
3.
4.
a.
b.
c.
d.
GI
CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Without CONSULT-II
Remove fuel tank. Refer to FE-4, “FUEL SYSTEM”.
Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
Remove fuel gauge retainer.
Drain fuel from the tank using a hand pump into a fuel container.
Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from hose end B), and check that the air flows freely into the tank.
Check EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
Connect vacuum pump to hose ends A and B using a suitable 3-way connector.
Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
Put fuel tank upside down.
Apply vacuum pressure to both hose ends A and B [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF968X
TF
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
8
PD
AX
CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE
1. Remove fuel filler cap.
2. Check air continuity between hose ends A and B.
Blow air into the hose end B. Air should flow freely into the fuel tank.
3. Blow air into hose end A and check there is no leakage.
4. Apply pressure to both hose ends A and B [20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg)] using a pressure pump and a suitable
3-way connector. Check that there is no leakage.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF968X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Replace refueling control valve with fuel tank.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-51
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d)
Symptom: Cannot Refuel/Fuel Odor From The Fuel Filler Opening Is Strong While
Refueling.
1
NAEC0744S0202
CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
2
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
SEF596U
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 3.
No
䊳
GO TO 6.
3
REPLACE EVAP CANISTER
Replace EVAP canister with a new one.
䊳
GO TO 4.
EC-52
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d)
4
1.
2.
3.
4.
GI
CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Check
Check
Check
Check
visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.
MA
EM
LC
FE
PBIB1032E
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE:
쐌 Do not disassemble water separator.
CL
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Replace water separator.
5
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
MT
AT
TF
Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection.
䊳
6
Repair or replace EVAP hose.
CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES
Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling control valve for clogging, kink, looseness and improper
connection.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
7
CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
Check signal line and recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Replace filler neck tube.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-53
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d)
8
CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE
1. Remove fuel filler cap.
2. Check air continuity between hose ends A and B.
Blow air into the hose end B. Air should flow freely into the fuel tank.
3. Blow air into hose end A and check there is no leakage.
4. Apply pressure to both hose ends A and B [20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg)] using a pressure pump and a suitable
3-way connector. Check that there is no leakage.
SEF968X
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 9.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Replace refueling control valve with fuel tank.
9
1.
2.
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
a.
b.
c.
d.
CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Remove fuel tank. Refer to FE-4, “FUEL SYSTEM”.
Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer.
Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other side to a fuel
container.
Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from hose end B), and check that the air flows freely into the tank.
Check EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
Connect vacuum pump to hose ends A and B using a suitable 3-way connector.
Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
Put fuel tank upside down.
Apply vacuum pressure to both hose ends A and B [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
SEF968X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
EC-54
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d)
10
1.
2.
a.
b.
3.
4.
a.
b.
c.
d.
GI
CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Without CONSULT-II
Remove fuel tank. Refer to FE-4, “FUEL SYSTEM”.
Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
Remove fuel gauge retainer.
Drain fuel from the tank using a hand pump into a fuel container.
Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from hose end B), and check that the air flows freely into the tank.
Check EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
Connect vacuum pump to hose ends A and B using a suitable 3-way connector.
Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
Put fuel tank upside down.
Apply vacuum pressure to both hose ends A and B [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF968X
TF
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
11
PD
AX
CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE
Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 12.
NG
䊳
Replace fuel filler tube.
12
SU
BR
ST
CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I
Check one-way valve for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 13.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-55
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) (Cont’d)
13
CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II
1. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank.
2. Remove fuel filler tube and hose.
3. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows.
When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing stick it should close.
SEF665U
Do not drop any material into the tank.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank.
Positive Crankcase Ventilation
DESCRIPTION
SEF372Q
NAEC0021
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.
The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake manifold.
During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold
sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV valve.
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any
blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air.
The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the
crankcase. In this process the air passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover.
Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to
draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the
hose connection in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all
conditions.
PBIB1588E
INSPECTION
PCV (Positive Crankcase Ventilation) Valve
NAEC0022
NAEC0022S01
With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve ventilation hose
from PCV valve; if the valve is working properly, a hissing noise will
be heard as air passes through it and a strong vacuum should be
felt immediately when a finger is placed over valve inlet.
PBIB1589E
EC-56
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (Cont’d)
PCV Valve Ventilation Hose
1.
2.
NAEC0022S02
Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any
hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
GI
MA
EM
LC
ET277
CAN Communication
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NAEC1368
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many
electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with
2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN COMMUNICATION UNIT
CL
MT
NAEC1369
Body type
Axle
FE
Wide/Wagon
4WD (All-mode)
4WD (Part time)
Engine
AT
2WD
4WD (Part time)
VQ35DE
Transmission
TF
A/T
Brake control
M/T
VDC
PD
ABS
CAN communication unit
ECM
X
X
X
X
TCM
X
X
X
X
Transfer control unit
X
Steering angle sensor
X
X
X
ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)
X
X
X
Combination meter
X
X
X
CAN communication type (Reference
page)
X
AX
SU
BR
Type 1 (EC-58)
Type 2 (EC-60)
X
X
Type 3 (EC-61)
Type 4 (EC-62)
ST
RS
X: Applicable
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-57
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CAN Communication (Cont’d)
Type 1
=NAEC1369S01
System Diagram
NAEC1369S0101
SEL683Y
Input/Output Signal Chart
NAEC1369S0102
T: Transmit R: Receive
Signals
ECM
TCM
Transfer
control unit
ABS actuaSteering
tor and elec- Combination
angle sensor tric unit (conmeter
trol unit)
Engine speed signal
T
R
R
Accelerator pedal position signal
T
R
R
Closed throttle position signal
T
R
Wide open throttle position signal
T
R
VDC operation signal
R
R
T
TCS operation signal
R
R
T
ABS operation signal
R
R
T
Output shaft revolution signal
R
ETC fail signal
T
During shifting signal
R
T
R
R
T
R
Steering wheel angle sensor signal
R
T
Wheel speed sensor signal
R
Stop lamp switch signal
R
R
T
R
T
MIL signal
T
R
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
R
Fuel consumption signal
T
R
T
R
Vehicle speed signal
R
T
Lock-up prohibition signal
T
R
Lock-up signal
R
T
Neutral range switch signal
R
T
Parking range switch signal
R
T
Overdrive control switch signal
R
T
A/C compressor feedback signal
T
R
Fuel level sensor signal
R
T
EC-58
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CAN Communication (Cont’d)
Signals
ECM
TCM
Transfer
control unit
ABS actuaSteering
tor and elec- Combination
angle sensor tric unit (conmeter
trol unit)
A/T position indicator signal
T
R
O/D OFF indicatorsignal
T
R
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-59
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CAN Communication (Cont’d)
Type 2
=NAEC1369S02
System Diagram
NAEC1369S0201
SEL682Y
Input/Output Signal Chart
NAEC1369S0202
T: Transmit R: Receive
Signals
ECM
TCM
Steering angle
sensor
ABS actuator
and electric
unit (control
unit)
Combination
meter
R
Engine speed signal
T
R
Accelerator pedal position signal
T
R
Closed throttle position signal
T
R
Wide open throttle position signal
T
R
VDC operation signal
R
T
TCS operation signal
R
T
ABS operation signal
R
T
Steering wheel angle sensor signal
T
R
MIL signal
T
R
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
R
Fuel consumption signal
T
R
T
R
Vehicle speed signal
R
T
Stop lamp switch signal
R
Lock-up prohibition signal
T
R
Lock-up signal
R
T
T
Neutral range switch signal
R
T
Parking range switch signal
R
T
Overdrive control switch signal
R
T
A/C compressor feedback signal
T
R
Fuel level sensor signal
R
T
A/T position indicator signal
T
R
O/D OFF indicator signal
T
R
EC-60
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CAN Communication (Cont’d)
Type 3
=NAEC1369S03
System Diagram
GI
NAEC1369S0301
MA
EM
LC
SEL684Y
Input/Output Signal Chart
NAEC1369S0302
FE
T: Transmit R: Receive
Signals
ECM
TCM
Engine speed signal
T
Closed throttle position signal
T
R
Wide open throttle position signal
T
R
Stop lamp switch signal
Combination meter
CL
R
R
Lock-up prohibition signal
T
R
Lock-up signal
R
T
MT
T
AT
TF
Neutral range switch signal
R
T
Parking range switch signal
R
T
Overdrive control switch signal
R
T
MIL signal
T
R
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
R
Fuel consumption signal
T
R
Vehicle speed signal
R
T
A/C compressor feedback signal
T
R
Fuel level sensor signal
R
T
A/T position indicator signal
T
R
O/D OFF indicator signal
T
R
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-61
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CAN Communication (Cont’d)
Type 4
=NAEC1369S04
System Diagram
NAEC1369S0401
SEL681Y
Input/Output Signal Chart
NAEC1369S0402
T: Transmit R: Receive
Signals
ECM
Combination meter
Engine speed signal
T
R
MIL signal
T
R
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
R
Fuel consumption signal
T
R
Vehicle speed signal
R
T
A/C compressor feedback signal
T
R
Fuel level sensor signal
R
T
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD)
System
DESCRIPTION
Input/Output Signal Chart
Sensor
NAEC1370
NAEC1370S01
Input signal to ECM
ASCD brake switch
Brake pedal operation
Stop lamp switch
Brake pedal operation
ASCD clutch switch (MT models)
Clutch pedal operation
ASCD steering switch
ASCD steering switch operation
Combination meter
Vehicle speed
TCM
Power train revolution
Basic ASCD System
ECM function
ASCD vehicle speed
control
Actuator
Electric throttle control
actuator
NAEC1370S02
Refer to Owner’s Manual for ASCD operating instructions.
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed
without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/h
(25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH).
ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed.
Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter.
If any malfunction occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control.
Set Operation
NAEC1370S03
Press ASCD CRUISE switch (Main switch). (Then CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89
MPH), press SET switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
EC-62
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) System (Cont’d)
Accel Operation
NAEC1370S04
If the RESUME/ACCEL switch is depressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until the
switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system.
And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
Cancel Operation
NAEC1370S05
When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
쐌 CANCEL switch is depressed.
쐌 More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are depressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared.).
쐌 Brake pedal is depressed.
쐌 Clutch pedal is depressed (M/T models).
쐌 A/T selector lever is shifted to P, N or R position (A/T models).
쐌 Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed
쐌 TCS system is operated
When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform
the driver by blinking indicator lamp.
쐌 Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature: CRUISE lamp may
blink slowly.
When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will
stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by depressing SET switch or RESUME switch.
쐌 Malfunction for self-diagnosis regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly.
If MAIN switch is turned to OFF while ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle
speed memory will be erased.
Coast Operation
NAEC1370S06
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
When the SET/COAST switch is depressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the
switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
TF
Resume Operation
PD
NAEC1370S07
When the RESUME/ACCEL switch is depressed after cancel operation other than depressing MAIN switch is
performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must
meet following conditions.
쐌 Brake pedal is released.
쐌 Clutch pedal is released (M/T models).
쐌 A/T selector lever is in other than P, N and R positions (A/T models).
쐌 Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH).
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-63
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Fuel Pressure Release
Fuel Pressure Release
NAEC0023
Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel
line to eliminate danger.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
SEF941Y
5.
NAEC0023S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
SEF214Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NAEC0023S02
Remove fuel pump fuse located in fuse box.
Start engine.
After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
SEF933Y
Fuel Pressure Check
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
SEF327Z
1.
2.
NAEC0024
When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent
parts.
Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system
operating (i.e. lights, rear window defogger, A/C etc.). Fuel
pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in manifold vacuum.
Release fuel pressure to zero.
Disconnect fuel tube joint between fuel damper and injector
tube and set fuel pressure check adapter (J44321).
EC-64
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Fuel Pressure Check (Cont’d)
3.
SEF328Z
Install pressure gauge to the fuel pressure check adapter as
shown in the figure.
4. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
5. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
At idling:
With vacuum hose connected
Approximately 235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi)
With vacuum hose disconnected
Approximately 294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi)
If results are unsatisfactory, perform Fuel Pressure Regulator
Check.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
Fuel Pressure Regulator Check
1.
2.
3.
AT
NAEC0025
Stop engine and disconnect fuel pressure regulator vacuum
hose from vacuum gallery.
Plug vacuum gallery with a blind cap.
Connect variable vacuum source to fuel pressure regulator.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF329ZA
4.
Start engine and read indication of fuel pressure gauge as
vacuum is changed.
Fuel pressure should decrease as vacuum increases. If results
are unsatisfactory, replace fuel pressure regulator.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF718BA
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-65
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Injector
Injector
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
SEF937Y
4.
5.
쐌
쐌
6.
쐌
쐌
쐌
7.
쐌
NAEC0026
Release fuel pressure to zero.
Remove intake manifold collector. Refer to EM-21, “TIMING
CHAIN”.
Remove fuel tube assemblies in numerical sequence as
shown in the figure at left.
Expand and remove clips securing fuel injectors.
Extract fuel injectors straight from fuel tubes.
Be careful not to damage injector nozzles during removal.
Do not bump or drop fuel injectors.
Carefully install O-rings, including the one used with the pressure regulator.
Lubricate O-rings with a smear of engine oil.
Be careful not to damage O-rings with service tools, finger nails or clips. Do not expand or twist O-rings.
Discard old clips; replace with new ones.
Position clips in grooves on fuel injectors.
Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned
with cutouts of clips after installation.
SEF703X
SEF938Y
8.
9.
Align protrusions of fuel tubes with those of fuel injectors.
Insert fuel injectors straight into fuel tubes.
After properly inserting fuel injectors, check to make sure that
fuel tube protrusions are engaged with those of fuel injectors,
and that flanges of fuel tubes are engaged with clips.
EC-66
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Injector (Cont’d)
SEF939Y
10. Tighten fuel tube assembly mounting nuts in numerical
sequence (indicated in the figure at left) and in two stages.
: Tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
1st stage:
9.3 - 10.8 (1.0 - 1.1, 6.9 - 7.9)
2nd stage:
20.6 - 26.5 (2.1 - 2.7, 16 - 19)
11. Install all parts removed in reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After properly connecting fuel tube assembly to injector and
fuel hose, check connection for fuel leakage.
GI
MA
EM
LC
How to Check Idle Speed and Ignition Timing
NAEC0607
IDLE SPEED
NAEC0607S01
WITH CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
WITH GST
Check idle speed with GST.
FE
CL
MT
SEF058Y
IGNITION TIMING
Any of following two methods may be used.
쐌 Method A
a) Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
b) Check ignition timing.
AT
NAEC0607S02
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF940Y
쐌
a)
Method B
Remove No. 1 ignition coil.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEC411D
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-67
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
How to Check Idle Speed and Ignition Timing (Cont’d)
b)
c)
Connect No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug with suitable
high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to
this wire.
Check ignition timing.
SEC412D
SEC580D
SEF311Q
EC-68
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio
Adjustment
GI
=NAEC0028
PREPARATION
1)
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
NAEC0028S01
Make sure that the following parts are in good order.
Battery
Ignition system
Engine oil and coolant levels
Fuses
ECM harness connector
Vacuum hoses
Air intake system
(Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.)
Fuel pressure
Engine compression
Throttle valve
Evaporative emission system
On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is “OFF”.
On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio,
checks should be carried out while shift lever is in “N” position.
When measuring “CO” percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe.
Turn off headlamps, heater blower, rear defogger.
Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-69
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
Overall Inspection Sequence
NAEC0028S0101
PBIB1054E
EC-70
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1
=NAEC0028S02
GI
INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for scheduled
maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
– Harness connectors for improper connections
– Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
– Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
– Hoses and ducts for leaks
– Air cleaner clogging
– Gasket
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
SEF983U
3.
–
–
–
–
4.
Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
Headlamp switch is OFF.
Air conditioner switch is OFF.
Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF976U
5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF977U
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
HA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
SC
EL
REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding “Diagnostic Procedure”.
䊳
IDX
GO TO 3.
EC-71
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
3
CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
SEF978U
3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF058Y
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
3. Check idle speed.
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
4
PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1. Stop engine.
2. Perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
5
GO TO 5.
PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
GO TO 6.
EC-72
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
6
GI
PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
MA
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 7.
No
䊳
1. Follow the instruction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
2. GO TO 4.
EM
LC
7
CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
GO TO 8.
8
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
PD
Check the following.
쐌 Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to ”DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)”, EC-357.
쐌 Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to “DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)”, EC-350.
AX
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
9
SU
BR
CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is the
rarely the case.)
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to NVIS (NISSAN
VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)”, EC-101.
䊳
ST
RS
GO TO 4.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-73
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
10
CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
SEC580D
M/T: 15°±5° BTDC
A/T: 15°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 19.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 20.
NG
䊳
GO TO 11.
11
PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1. Stop engine.
2. Perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
12
GO TO 12.
PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
13
GO TO 13.
PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 14.
No
䊳
1. Follow the instruction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
2. GO TO 4.
EC-74
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
14
GI
CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
MA
EM
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
LC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 15.
NG
䊳
GO TO 17.
FE
CL
15
CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEC580D
M/T: 15°±5° BTDC
A/T: 15°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
AX
SU
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 19.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 20.
NG
䊳
GO TO 16.
16
CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
BR
ST
RS
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-21, “TIMING CHAIN”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 17.
NG
䊳
1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-75
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
17
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to “DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)”, EC-357.
쐌 Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to “DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)”, EC-350.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 18.
NG
䊳
1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
18
CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is the
rarely the case.)
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “NVIS (NISSAN
VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)”, EC-101.
䊳
19
GO TO 4.
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 1) SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. See “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that
the monitor fluctuates between LEAN and RICH more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
PBIB0120E
1 time: RICH → LEAN → RICH
2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 21.
NG (Monitor does not
fluctuate.)
䊳
GO TO 23.
NG (Monitor fluctuates
less than 5 times.)
䊳
GO TO 31.
EC-76
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
20
GI
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 1) SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine and set ECM to Self-diagnostic mode II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor). Refer to “HOW TO SWITCH
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE”, EC-103.
2. Start engine and run it at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
3. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that
the MIL comes on more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 22.
NG (MIL does not come
on)
䊳
GO TO 23.
NG (MIL comes on less
than 5 times)
䊳
GO TO 31.
21
MA
EM
LC
FE
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 2) SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. See “HO2S1 MNTR (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
2. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that
the monitor fluctuates between LEAN and RICH more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
PBIB0120E
1 time: RICH → LEAN → RICH
2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH
AX
SU
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG (Monitor does not
fluctuate.)
䊳
GO TO 24.
NG (Monitor fluctuates
less than 5 times.)
䊳
GO TO 31.
22
BR
ST
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 2) SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Switch the monitored sensor from bank 1 to bank 2. Refer to “How to Switch Monitored Sensor from Bank 1 to Bank 2
or Vice Versa”, EC-103.
2. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that
the MIL comes on more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
RS
BT
HA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG (MIL does not come
on)
䊳
GO TO 24.
NG (MIL comes on less
than 5 times)
䊳
GO TO 31.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-77
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
23
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 1) HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect battery ground cable.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 1) harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 1) terminal 1. Refer to “Wiring
Diagram”, EC-258.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 25.
NG
䊳
1. Repair or replace harness between ECM and heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 1).
2. GO TO 4.
24
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 2) HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect battery ground cable.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 2) harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 16 and heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 2) terminal 1. Refer to “Wiring
Diagram”, EC-259.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 25.
NG
䊳
1. Repair or replace harness between ECM and heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 2).
2. GO TO 4.
25
PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Perform “Accelerator pedal released position learning”, EC-81.
䊳
26
GO TO 26.
PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
27
GO TO 27.
PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 28.
Yes (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 29.
No
䊳
1. Follow the instruction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
2. GO TO 4.
EC-78
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
28
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
GI
CHECK “CO” %
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
Select “ENG COOLANT TEMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Set “ENG COOLANT TEMP” to 5°C (41°F) by touching “DWN” and “Qd”.
Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed.
Check “CO” %.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
SEF172Y
Idle CO: 0.7 - 9.9 % and engine runs smoothly.
MT
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 31.
NG
䊳
GO TO 30.
29
AT
TF
CHECK “CO” %
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
Connect a resistor (4.4 kΩ) between terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed.
Check “CO” %.
Idle CO: 0.7 - 9.9 % and engine runs smoothly.
7. After checking “CO” %, turn ignition switch “OFF”, disconnect the resistor from the terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector, and then connect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector to engine coolant temperature sensor.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF982UA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 31.
NG
䊳
GO TO 30.
30
SC
RECONNECT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Reconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
䊳
HA
EL
IDX
GO TO 34.
EC-79
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
31
REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 on the malfunctioning bank.
With CONSULT-II
䊳
GO TO 32.
Without CONSULT-II
䊳
GO TO 33.
32
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 1)/(BANK 2) SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge.
2. See “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that
the monitor fluctuates between LEAN and RICH more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
1 time: RICH → LEAN → RICH
2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 34.
33
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 1)/(BANK 2) SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Set ECM to Self-diagnostic mode II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor). Refer to “How to Switch Diagnostic Test Mode”,
EC-103.
2. Switch the monitored sensor to the malfunctioning bank. Refer to “How to Switch Monitored Sensor from Bank 1 to
Bank 2 or Vice Versa”, EC-103.
3. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that
the MIL comes on more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 34.
34
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-211, EC-219.
쐌 Check injector and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-758.
쐌 Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-236.
쐌 Check fuel pressure and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-64.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 36.
NG
䊳
1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 35.
35
ERASE UNNECESSARY DTC
After this inspection, unnecessary DTC might be displayed.
Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM. Refer to “How to Erase Emission-related Diagnostic Information”, EC-100 and
AT-60.
䊳
GO TO 4.
EC-80
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
36
GI
CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is the
rarely the case.)
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “NVIS (NISSAN
VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS”, EC-101.
䊳
MA
EM
GO TO 4.
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
NAEC1183
DESCRIPTION
LC
NAEC1183S01
“Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning” is an operation to learn the fully released position of the
accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each
time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NAEC1183S02
Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” wait at least 10 seconds.
CL
MT
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
NAEC1184
NAEC1184S01
“Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning” is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve
by monitorizing the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector
of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
FE
AT
TF
NAEC1184S02
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF” wait at least 10 seconds.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
PD
AX
SU
Idle Air Volume Learning
DESCRIPTION
NAEC1182
NAEC1182S01
“Idle Air Volume Learning” is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be
performed under any of the following conditions:
쐌 Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
쐌 Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
ST
RS
NAEC1182S02
Before performing “Idle Air Volume Learning”, make sure that all of
the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are
missed for even a moment.
쐌 Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
쐌 Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
쐌 PNP switch: ON
쐌 Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)
On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, set
lighting switch to the 1st position to light only small
lamps.
쐌 Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
EC-81
BR
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Air Volume Learning (Cont’d)
쐌
쐌
Vehicle speed: Stopped
Transmission: Warmed-up
For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID
TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indicates less than 0.9V.
For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive
vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
NAEC1182S03
NAEC1182S0301
NOTE:
Before perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, make sure that “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning” and “Throttle Valve
Closed Position Learning” are completed.
If not, perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”,
EC-81 and “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check that all items listed under the topic “PREPARATION”
(previously mentioned) are in good order.
3.
Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
4.
Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
5.
Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
If “CMPLT” is not displayed, “Idle Air Volume Learning” will not
be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the
incident by referring to the “Diagnostic Procedure” below.
Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle
speed and ignition timing are within the specifications.
SEF452Y
SEF454Y
6.
ITEM
Idle speed
MBIB0238E
EC-82
SPECIFICATION
MT: 750±50 rpm
AT: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Air Volume Learning (Cont’d)
Ignition timing
MT: 15±5° BTDC
AT: 15±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
GI
MA
Without CONSULT-II
NAEC1182S0302
NOTE:
쐌 It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
쐌 It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an
accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction.
NOTE:
Before perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, make sure that “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning” and “Throttle Valve
Closed Position Learning” are completed.
If not, perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”,
EC-81 and “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check that all items listed under the topic “PREPARATION”
(previously mentioned) are in good order.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition
switch “ON” and wait 3 seconds.
5. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
1) Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
2) Fully release the accelerator pedal.
6. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep
it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turns
ON.
7. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the
MIL turned ON.
8. Start engine and let it idle.
9. Wait 20 seconds.
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEC897C
10. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle
speed and ignition timing are within the specifications.
ITEM
SPECIFICATION
Idle speed
MT: 750±50 rpm
AT: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Ignition timing
MT: 15±5° BTDC
AT: 15±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
11. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification,
“Idle Air Volume Learning” will not be carried out successfully.
In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the
“Diagnostic Procedure” below.
EC-83
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Air Volume Learning (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
NAEC1182S04
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully,
proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2. Check PCV valve operation.
3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air
leakage.
4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident.
It is useful to perform EC-159, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SPECIFICATION VALUE”.
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine
has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform “Idle air volume learning” all over again:
− Engine stalls.
− Erroneous idle.
EC-84
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Introduction
Introduction
NAEC0029
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actuators. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
Emission-related diagnostic information
GI
MA
SAE Mode
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Mode 3 of SAE J1979
Freeze Frame data
Mode 2 of SAE J1979
System Readiness Test (SRT) code
Mode 1 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC)
Mode 7 of SAE J1979
EM
LC
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
Test values and Test limits
Mode 6 of SAE J1979
Calibration ID
Mode 9 of SAE 1979
FE
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
DTC
1st trip DTC
Freeze Frame
data
1st trip Freeze
Frame data
SRT code
Test value
CONSULT-II
X
X
X
X
X
—
GST
X
X*1
X
—
X
X
ECM
X
X*2
—
—
—
—
MT
AT
*1: 1st trip DTCs for self-diagnoses concerning SRT items cannot be shown on the GST display.
*2: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
TF
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected
in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-138.)
쐌 When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting MIL up when there
is a malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrically controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnosis is continuously detected
as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system has a malfunction and MIL circuit is
open by means of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when a DTC is detected during the above diagnosis except MIL circuit,
and demands the driver to repair the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel
cut
Two Trip Detection Logic
CL
NAEC0030
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored
in the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd
trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL,
and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-85
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Two Trip Detection Logic (Cont’d)
X: Applicable
MIL
DTC
1st trip
Items
—: Not Exit
1st trip DTC
2nd trip
1st trip
2nd trip
1st trip
2nd trip
displaying displaying displaying displaying
Blinking
Lighting up
Blinking
Lighting
up
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst
damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0306
is being detected
X
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst
damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0306
is being detected
—
—
X
—
—
X
—
—
One trip detection diagnoses
(Refer to EC-10.)
—
X
—
—
X
—
—
—
Except above
—
—
—
X
—
X
X
—
*1: Except “ECM”
Emission-related Diagnostic Information
DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC
NAEC0031
NAEC0031S01
The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words,
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consecutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and
2nd trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the 1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in “HOW TO
ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-100.
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-95. These items are required by legal
regulations to continuously monitor the system/component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously
are also displayed on CONSULT-II.
1st trip DTC is specified in Mode 7 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL
and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the
vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in “Work Flow” procedure Step II, refer to EC-129. Then perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure” or “Overall Function Check” to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is duplicated, the item
requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
NAEC0031S0101
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
With CONSULT-II
With GST
CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0117, P0340, P1065, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
No TOOLS
The number of times the MIL blinks in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC.
(Example: 0117, 0340, 1065, etc.)
쐌 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
쐌 Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST does not indicate whether the malfunction
is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal. CONSULT-II can identify
malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended.
EC-86
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times
the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “[1t]”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
PBIB0911E
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA
NAEC0031S02
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant
temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed and absolute pressure at
the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
details, see EC-115.
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data.
Priority
1
2
3
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
Items
Freeze frame data
CL
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
SU
Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
1st trip freeze frame data
BR
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different malfunction is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or
1st trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and
freeze frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged
in the ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM
memory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in “HOW TO ERASE EMISSIONRELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-100.
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE
ST
RS
BT
HA
NAEC0031S03
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Mode 1 of SAE J1979.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and components. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”,
use the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
EC-87
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer’s
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM
memory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will continue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE:
If MIL is “ON” during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.
SRT Item
NAEC0031S0310
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
SRT item
(CONSULT-II indication)
Performance Priority*
Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”
Corresponding
DTC No.
CATALYST
2
Three way catalyst function
P0420, P0430
EVAP SYSTEM
1
EVAP control system (small leak) (negative pressure)
P0442, P1442
2
EVAP control system (very small leak) (negative pressure)/
(positive pressure)
P0456, P1456
2
EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
P0441
2
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (circuit)
P0134, P0154
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (lean shift monitoring)
P1143, P1163
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (rich shift monitoring)
P1144, P1164
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (response monitoring)
P0133, P0153
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (high voltage)
P0132, P0152
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (min. voltage monitoring)
P1146, P1166
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (max. voltage monitoring)
P1147, P1167
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (response monitoring)
P0139, P0159
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (high voltage)
P0138, P0158
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
P0031, P0032, P0051,
P0052
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
P0037, P0038, P0057,
P0058
HO2S
HO2S HTR
2
*: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority
for models with CONSULT-II.
EC-88
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
SRT Set Timing
=NAEC0031S0311
SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is done
regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and is
shown in the table below.
GI
MA
Example
Self-diagnosis result
Diagnosis
All OK
Case 1
Case 2
NG exists
Case 3
+ ON ,
OFF
Ignition cycle
+ ON , OFF + ON ,
EM
OFF
+ ON ,
LC
P0400
OK (1)
— (1)
OK (2)
— (2)
P0402
OK (1)
— (1)
— (1)
OK (2)
P1402
OK (1)
OK (2)
— (2)
— (2)
SRT of EGR
“CMPLT”
“CMPLT”
“CMPLT”
“CMPLT”
P0400
OK (1)
— (1)
— (1)
— (1)
P0402
— (0)
— (0)
OK (1)
— (1)
P1402
OK (1)
OK (2)
— (2)
— (2)
SRT of EGR
“INCMP”
“INCMP”
“CMPLT”
“CMPLT”
P0400
OK
OK
—
—
P0402
—
—
—
—
P1402
NG
—
NG
NG
(Consecutive NG)
(1st trip)
DTC
1st trip DTC
—
1st trip DTC
DTC
(= MIL “ON”)
TF
SRT of EGR
“INCMP”
“INCMP”
“INCMP”
“CMPLT”
PD
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
FE
CL
MT
AT
AX
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT
will indicate “CMPLT”. , Case 1 above
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. , Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indicate “CMPLT”. , Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary of each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following
reasons:
쐌 The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
쐌 The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
쐌 When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagnosis memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
쐌 If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out prior
to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
SRT Service Procedure
NAEC0031S0312
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.
EL
IDX
EC-89
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
SEF170Z
*1
EC-86
*2
EC-90
*3
How to Display SRT Code
EC-91
NAEC0031S0301
With CONSULT-II
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT
codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed.
With GST
Selecting Mode 1 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)
A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown below.
“INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set. “CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is
complete and SRT is set.
EC-90
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF935Z
How to Set SRT Code
NAEC0031S0302
To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
With CONSULT-II
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on “Performance Priority” in the table
on EC-88.
Without CONSULT-II
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-91
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
Driving Pattern
NAEC0031S0303
PBIB1053E
EC-92
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
쐌
The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving habits, etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time required, for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the
shortest.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed
within zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
− Sea level
− Flat road
− Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
− Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagnosis may also be performed.
Pattern 1:
쐌 The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V).
쐌 The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C
(158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is lower than 1.4V).
쐌 The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage
between the ECM terminal 107 and ground is less than 4.1V).
Pattern 2:
쐌 When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted.
In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended.
Pattern 3:
쐌 The driving pattern outlined in *2 must be repeated at least 3 times.
Pattern 4:
쐌 Tests are performed after the engine has been operated for at least 17 minutes.
쐌 The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-state driving.
쐌 If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all over again.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal
and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h
(56 MPH) again.
*2: Operate the vehicle in the following driving pattern.
1) Decelerate vehicle to 0 km/h (0 MPH) and let engine idle.
2) Repeat driving pattern shown below at least 10 times.
쐌 During acceleration, hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF414S
*3: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
Suggested Transmission Gear Position for A/T Models
Set the selector lever in the “D” position with the overdrive switch turned ON.
Suggested upshift speeds for M/T models
Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel
economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather
and individual driving habits.
EC-93
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
For normal acceleration in low altitude areas
[less than 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
For quick acceleration in low altitude
areas and high altitude areas
[over 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
ACCEL shift point
km/h (MPH)
CRUISE shift point
km/h (MPH)
km/h (MPH)
1st to 2nd
21 (13)
21 (13)
24 (15)
2nd to 3rd
37 (23)
26 (16)
40 (25)
3rd to 4th
53 (33)
44 (27)
64 (40)
4th to 5th
63 (39)
58 (36)
72 (45)
Gear change
Suggested Maximum Speed in Each Gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the
highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits and drive according to the road
conditions to ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause
engine damage or loss of vehicle control.
Gear
km/h (MPH)
1st
50 (30)
2nd
89 (55)
3rd
128 (80)
4th
—
5th
—
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II)
NAEC0031S04
The following is the information specified in Mode 6 of SAE J1979.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is “OK” or “NG” while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
Items for which these data (test value and test limit) are displayed are the same as SRT code items (30 test
items).
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be displayed on the GST screen.
X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
Test value (GST display)
SRT item
Self-diagnostic test item
Test limit
Application
01H
Max.
X
03H
02H
Max.
X
EVAP control system
(Small leak)
05H
03H
Max.
X
EVAP control system purge flow
monitoring
06H
83H
Min.
X
TID
CID
Three way catalyst function
(bank 1)
01H
Three way catalyst function
(bank 2)
CATALYST
EVAP SYSTEM
EC-94
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
GI
Test value (GST display)
SRT item
Self-diagnostic test item
Test limit
Application
TID
CID
09H
04H
Max.
X
0AH
84H
Min.
X
0BH
04H
Max.
X
0CH
04H
Max.
X
0DH
04H
Max.
X
11H
05H
Max.
X
12H
85H
Min.
X
13H
05H
Max.
X
14H
05H
Max.
X
15H
05H
Max.
X
19H
86H
Min.
X
1AH
86H
Min.
X
1BH
06H
Max.
X
1CH
06H
Max.
X
21H
87H
Min.
X
22H
87H
Min.
X
23H
07H
Max.
X
24H
07H
Max.
X
29H
08H
Max.
X
2AH
88H
Min.
X
2BH
09H
Max.
X
2CH
89H
Min.
X
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
(bank 1)
2DH
0AH
Max.
X
2EH
8AH
Min.
X
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
(bank 2)
2FH
0BH
Max.
X
30H
8BH
Min.
X
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 1)
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 2)
MA
EM
LC
FE
HO2S
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1)
CL
MT
AT
TF
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2)
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
PD
AX
SU
HO2S HTR
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS
Application Notice
NAEC0031S05
ST
RS
NAEC0031S0501
Confirm the type of the vehicle. Refer to “How to Check Vehicle Type”, EC-9.
BT
Emission-related Diagnostic Information Items
NAEC0031S0502
X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
BR
SRT code
Test value/Test
1st trip DTC*1
limit
Reference
page
CONSULT-II
GST*2
ECM*3
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1000
1000*6
—
—
—
EC-172
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1001
1001*6
—
—
X
EC-172
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-95
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
SRT code
Test value/Test
1st trip DTC*1
limit
Reference
page
CONSULT-II
GST*2
ECM*3
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0000
0000
—
—
—
—
INT/V TIM CONT-B1
P0011
0011
—
—
X
EC-175
INT/V TIM CONT-B2
P0021
0021
—
—
X
EC-175
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
P0031
0031
X
X
X*5
EC-179
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
P0032
0032
X
X
X*5
EC-179
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
P0037
0037
X
X
X*5
EC-187
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
P0038
0038
X
X
X*5
EC-187
HO2S1 HTR (B2)
P0051
0051
X
X
X*5
EC-179
HO2S1 HTR (B2)
P0052
0052
X
X
X*5
EC-179
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
P0057
0057
X
X
X*5
EC-187
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
P0058
0058
X
X
X*5
EC-187
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
P0101
0101
—
—
—
EC-194, 203
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
P0102
0102
—
—
—
EC-211, 219
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
P0103
0103
—
—
—
EC-211, 219
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0112
0112
—
—
X
EC-226, 231
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0113
0113
—
—
X
EC-226, 231
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0117
0117
—
—
—
EC-236
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0118
0118
—
—
—
EC-236
TP SEN 2/CIRC
P0122
0122
—
—
—
EC-241
TP SEN 2/CIRC
P0123
0123
—
—
—
EC-241
ECT SENSOR
P0125
0125
—
—
—
EC-249
IAT SENSOR
P0127
0127
—
—
X
EC-252
THERMSTAT FNCTN
P0128
0128
—
—
X
EC-254
HO2S1 (B1)
P0132
0132
X
X
X*5
EC-256
HO2S1 (B1)
P0133
0133
X
X
X*5
EC-264
HO2S1 (B1)
P0134
0134
X
X
X*5
EC-278
HO2S2 (B1)
P0138
0138
X
X
X*5
EC-287
HO2S2 (B1)
P0139
0139
X
X
X*5
EC-295
HO2S1 (B2)
P0152
0152
X
X
X*5
EC-256
HO2S1 (B2)
P0153
0153
X
X
X*5
EC-264
HO2S1 (B2)
P0154
0154
X
X
X*5
EC-278
HO2S2 (B2)
P0158
0158
X
X
X*5
EC-287
HO2S2 (B2)
P0159
0159
X
X
X*5
EC-295
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1
P0171
0171
—
—
X
EC-304
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1
P0172
0172
—
—
X
EC-312
EC-96
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
GI
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
SRT code
Test value/Test
1st trip DTC*1
limit
Reference
page
CONSULT-II
GST*2
ECM*3
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2
P0174
0174
—
—
X
EC-304
FUEL SYS-RICH-B2
P0175
0175
—
—
X
EC-312
FTT SENSOR
P0181
0181
—
—
X
EC-319
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0182
0182
—
—
X
EC-322
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0183
0183
—
—
X
EC-322
TP SEN 1/CIRC
P0222
0222
—
—
—
EC-327
TP SEN 1/CIRC
P0223
0223
—
—
—
EC-327
MULTI CYL MISFIRE
P0300
0300
—
—
X
EC-335
CYL 1 MISFIRE
P0301
0301
—
—
X
EC-335
CYL 2 MISFIRE
P0302
0302
—
—
X
EC-335
CYL 3 MISFIRE
P0303
0303
—
—
X
EC-335
CYL 4 MISFIRE
P0304
0304
—
—
X
EC-335
CYL 5 MISFIRE
P0305
0305
—
—
X
EC-335
CYL 6 MISFIRE
P0306
0306
—
—
X
EC-335
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
P0327
0327
—
—
X
EC-345
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
P0328
0328
—
—
X
EC-345
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT
P0335
0335
—
—
X
EC-350
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1
P0340
0340
—
—
X
EC-357
CMP SEN/CIRC-B2
P0345
0345
—
—
X
EC-357
TW CATALYST SYS-B1
P0420
0420
X
X
X*5
EC-366
TW CATALYST SYS-B2
P0430
0430
X
X
X*5
EC-366
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON
P0441
0441
X
X
X*5
EC-371
EVAP SMALL LEAK
P0442
0442
X
X
X*5
EC-381
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P0444
0444
—
—
X
EC-396
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P0445
0445
—
—
X
EC-396
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P0447
0447
—
—
X
EC-403
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0452
0452
—
—
X
EC-410
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0453
0453
—
—
X
EC-416
EVAP GROSS LEAK
P0455
0455
X
X
X*5
EC-425
EVAP VERY SML LEAK
P0456
0456
X*4
X
X*5
EC-438
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH
P0460
0460
—
—
X
EC-454
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
P0461
0461
—
—
X
EC-456
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
P0462
0462
—
—
X
EC-458
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
P0463
0463
—
—
X
EC-458
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*7
P0500
0500
—
—
X
EC-460
ISC SYSTEM
P0506
0506
—
—
X
EC-462
EC-97
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
SRT code
Test value/Test
1st trip DTC*1
limit
Reference
page
CONSULT-II
GST*2
ECM*3
ISC SYSTEM
P0507
0507
—
—
X
EC-464
PW ST P SEN/CIRC
P0550
0550
—
—
X
EC-466
ECM
P0605
0605
—
—
X
EC-471
PNP SW/CIRC
P0705
0705
—
—
X
AT-105
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
P0710
0710
—
—
X
AT-111
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*7
P0720
0720
—
—
X
AT-117
ENGINE SPEED SIG
P0725
0725
—
—
X
AT-122
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
P0731
0731
—
—
X
AT-126
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
P0732
0732
—
—
X
AT-132
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
P0733
0733
—
—
X
AT-138
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
P0734
0734
—
—
X
AT-144
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC
P0740
0740
—
—
X
AT-154
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
P0744
0744
—
—
X
AT-159
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
P0745
0745
—
—
X
AT-168
SFT SOL A/CIRC
P0750
0750
—
—
—
AT-174
SFT SOL B/CIRC
P0755
0755
—
—
—
AT-178
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT
P1065
1065
—
—
X
EC-473
MAF SENSOR*8
P1102
1102
—
—
—
EC-478
INT/V TIM CONT-B1
P1110
1110
—
—
X
EC-485
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1
P1111
1111
—
—
X
EC-488
ETC ACTR
P1121
1121
—
—
—
EC-494
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC
P1122
1122
—
—
—
EC-496
ETC MOT PWR
P1124
1124
—
—
—
EC-504
ETC MOT PWR
P1126
1126
—
—
—
EC-504
ETC MOT
P1128
1128
—
—
—
EC-509
SWIRL CONT SOL/V
P1130
1130
—
—
X
EC-514
SWIRL CONT SOL/V
P1131
1131
—
—
X
EC-535
INT/V TIM CONT-B2
P1135
1135
—
—
X
EC-485
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2
P1136
1136
—
—
X
EC-488
HO2S1 (B1)
P1143
1143
X
X
X*5
EC-541
HO2S1 (B1)
P1144
1144
X
X
X*5
EC-549
HO2S2 (B1)
P1146
1146
X
X
X*5
EC-557
HO2S2 (B1)
P1147
1147
X
X
X*5
EC-566
CLOSED LOOP-B1
P1148
1148
—
—
—
EC-575
HO2S1 (B2)
P1163
1163
X
X
X*5
EC-541
HO2S1 (B2)
P1164
1164
X
X
X*5
EC-549
EC-98
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
GI
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
SRT code
Test value/Test
1st trip DTC*1
limit
Reference
page
CONSULT-II
GST*2
ECM*3
SWL CON VC SW/CIRC
P1165
1165
—
—
X
EC-577
HO2S2 (B2)
P1166
1166
X
X
X*5
EC-557
HO2S2 (B2)
P1167
1167
X
X
X*5
EC-566
CLOSED LOOP-B2
P1168
1168
—
—
—
EC-575
TCS C/U FUNCTN
P1211
1211
—
—
X
EC-583
TCS/CIRC
P1212
1212
—
—
X
EC-585
ENG OVER TEMP
P1217
1217
—
—
—
EC-587
CTP LEARNING
P1225
1225
—
—
X
EC-592
CTP LEARNING
P1226
1226
—
—
X
EC-594
SENSOR POWER/CIRC
P1229
1229
—
—
—
EC-596
EVAP SMALL LEAK
P1442
1442
X
X
X*5
EC-601
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P1444
1444
—
—
X
EC-616
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P1446
1446
—
—
X
EC-628
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P1448
1448
—
—
X
EC-636
EVAP VERY SML LEAK
P1456
1456
X*4
X
X*5
EC-645
VC/V BYPASS/V
P1490
1490
—
—
X
EC-661
VC CUT/V BYPASS/V
P1491
1491
—
—
X
EC-667
ASCD SW
P1564
1564
—
—
—
EC-679
ASCD BRAKE SW
P1572
1572
—
—
—
EC-685
P1610 P1615
1610 - 1615
—
—
X
EL-375
TP SEN/CIRC A/T
P1705
1705
—
—
—
AT-182
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT
P1706
1706
—
—
X
EC-696
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC
P1760
1760
—
—
X
AT-188
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT
P1805
1805
—
—
X
EC-702
APP SEN 1/CIRC
P2122
2122
—
—
—
EC-708
APP SEN 1/CIRC
P2123
2123
—
—
—
EC-708
APP SEN 2/CIRC
P2127
2127
—
—
—
EC-715
APP SEN 2/CIRC
P2128
2128
—
—
—
EC-715
TP SENSOR
P2135
2135
—
—
—
EC-723
APP SENSOR
P2138
2138
—
—
—
EC-731
NATS MALFUNCTION
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
*7:
*8:
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), these numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
SRT code will not be set if the self-diagnostic result is NG.
These are not displayed with GST.
The troubleshooting for these DTCs need CONSULT-II.
When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.
For the type I vehicle (Refer to “How to Check Vehicle Type”, EC-9.).
EC-99
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
How to Erase DTC
NAEC0031S06
NAEC0031S0601
With CONSULT-II
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-10), skip steps 2 through 4.
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “A/T”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK”
twice.
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
쐌 If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased
individually from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
SAT857K
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELFDIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased individually from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
With GST
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-10), skip step 2.
8. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
EC-100
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
9. Perform “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT-II)” in AT section titled “TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS”, “Self-diagnosis”. (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis
only to erase the DTC.)
10. Select Mode 4 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Mode 4 with GST.
쐌 If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24
hours.
쐌 The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
1) Diagnostic trouble codes
2) 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
3) Freeze frame data
4) 1st trip freeze frame data
5) System readiness test (SRT) codes
6) Test values
7) Others
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but
all of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
GI
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
MT
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
NAEC0031S08
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEF515Y
쐌
쐌
쐌
If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in the “ON” position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic results mode with
CONSULT-II using NATS program card. Refer to EL-375, “NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System
— NATS)”.
Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NVIS (NATS) is displayed before touching “ERASE” in “SELFDIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
When replacing ECM, initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be carried out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of NVIS (NATS)
initialization and NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation manual,
IVIS/NVIS.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-101
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
DESCRIPTION
NAEC0032
SEF217U
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check.
쐌 If the MIL does not light up, refer to EL-139, “WARNING LAMPS” or see EC-791.
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction.
On Board Diagnostic System Function
NAEC0032S01
The on board diagnostic system has the following four functions.
Diagnostic Test
Mode
KEY and ENG.
Status
Function
Explanation of Function
Mode I
Ignition switch in
“ON” position
BULB CHECK
This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown,
open circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit.
Engine running
MALFUNCTION
WARNING
This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is
detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip
detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver
that a malfunction has been detected.
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL
in the 1st trip.
쐌 One trip detection diagnoses
쐌 “Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)”
Ignition switch in
“ON” position
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
Engine stopped
Mode II
Engine stopped
Engine running
쐌
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 This function allows the fuel mixture condition (lean or
MONITOR
rich), monitored by heated oxygen sensor 1, to be read.
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting MIL up when there
is a malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrically controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnosis is continuously detected
as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system has a malfunction and MIL circuit is
open by means of operating fail-safe function.
EC-102
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Cont’d)
The fail-safe function also operates when a DTC is detected during the above diagnosis except MIL circuit,
and demands the driver to repair the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel
cut
MIL Flashing without DTC
NAEC0032S0102
If the ECM is in Diagnostic Test Mode II, MIL may flash when engine is running. In this case, check ECM
diagnostic test mode. How to Switch Diagnostic Test Mode.
How to switch the diagnostic test (function) modes, and details of the above functions are described later.How
to Switch Diagnostic Test Mode.
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
1. Diagnostic trouble codes
2. 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
3. Freeze frame data
4. 1st trip freeze frame data
5. System readiness test (SRT) codes
6. Test values
7. Others
How to Switch Diagnostic Test Mode
NAEC0032S07
NOTE:
쐌 It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
쐌 It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
쐌 Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned “OFF”.
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
NAEC0032S0701
1. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch “ON” and wait 3 seconds.
2. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
1) Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
2) Fully release the accelerator pedal.
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts
blinking.
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
PBIB0092E
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Monitor)
NAEC0032S0702
1. Set the ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode
II (Self-diagnostic Results).
2. Start Engine.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor).
ECM will start heated oxygen sensor 1 monitoring from the bank 1 sensor.
How to Set Diagnostic Switch Monitored Sensor from Bank 1 to Bank 2 or Vice versa
NAEC0032S0703
1. Fully depress the accelerator pedal quickly and then release it immediately.
2. Make sure that monitoring sensor has changed by MIL blinking as follows.
EC-103
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Cont’d)
PBIB0093E
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
NAEC0032S0704
1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode
II (Self-diagnostic Results).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds. The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
Diagnostic Test Mode I — Bulb Check
NAEC0032S03
In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to EL-139,
“WARNING LAMPS” or see EC-791.
Diagnostic Test Mode I — Malfunction Warning
MIL
쐌
NAEC0032S04
Condition
ON
When the malfunction is detected or the ECM’s CPU is malfunctioning.
OFF
No malfunction.
These DTC numbers are clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS).
Diagnostic Test Mode II — Self-Diagnostic Results
NAEC0032S08
In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test
mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the
MIL illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes
are displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These
unidentified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for
how to read a code.
SEF952W
EC-104
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Cont’d)
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated
by the number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds
consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second) cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC “0000” refers to no
malfunction. (See “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX”, EC-10.)
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
NAEC0032S0801
The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to How
to Switch Diagnostic Test Mode.
쐌 If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours.
쐌 Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
ON
Lean
Rich
*Remains ON or OFF
Any condition
LC
CL
Air fuel ratio feedback control condition
MT
Closed loop system
OFF
EM
NAEC0032S09
In this mode, the MIL displays the condition of the fuel mixture (lean or rich) which is monitored by the heated
oxygen sensor 1.
Fuel mixture condition in the exhaust gas
MA
FE
Diagnostic Test Mode II — Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Monitor
MIL
GI
AT
Open loop system
*: Maintains conditions just before switching to open loop.
To check the heated oxygen sensor 1 function, start engine in the Diagnostic Test Mode II and warm it up until
engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of the gauge.
Next run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load conditions. Then make sure that the
MIL comes ON more than 5 times within 10 seconds with engine running at 2,000 rpm under no-load.
OBD System Operation Chart
NAEC0033
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
NAEC0033S01
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to “Two Trip Detection Logic” on
EC-85.
The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when
the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting,
the counter will reset.
The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A)
without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel
Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driving pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS”
mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in “OK” for the 2nd trip.
SUMMARY CHART
Items
MIL (goes off)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
display)
1st Trip DTC (clear)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
(clear)
NAEC0033S02
Fuel Injection System
Misfire
Other
3 (pattern B)
3 (pattern B)
3 (pattern B)
80 (pattern C)
80 (pattern C)
40 (pattern A)
1 (pattern C), *1
1 (pattern C), *1
1 (pattern B)
*1, *2
*1, *2
1 (pattern B)
EC-105
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)
For details about patterns “B” and “C” under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-108.
For details about patterns “A” and “B” under “Other”, see EC-110.
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.
EC-106
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR
“MISFIRE” , “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
GI
=NAEC0033S03
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEF392S
*1: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips,
MIL will light up.
*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is
driven 3 times (pattern B) without
any malfunctions.
*3: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips,
the DTC and the freeze frame
data will be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame
data will not be displayed any
longer after vehicle is driven 80
times (pattern C) without the same
malfunction. (The DTC and the
freeze frame data still remain in
ECM.)
*5: When a malfunction is detected
for the first time, the 1st trip DTC
and the 1st trip freeze frame data
will be stored in ECM.
*6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared
at the moment OK is detected.
*7: When the same malfunction is
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st
trip freeze frame data will be
cleared.
*8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when
vehicle is driven once (pattern C)
without the same malfunction after
DTC is stored in ECM.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-107
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
NAEC0033S04
NAEC0033S0401
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
쐌 The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
쐌 The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
쐌 The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”)
NAEC0033S0402
Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows:
1) The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
쐌 When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), “T” should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
쐌 When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), “T” should be higher than or
equal to 70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F)
쐌 The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1).
쐌 The C counter will be counted up when (1) is satisfied without the same malfunction.
쐌 The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80.
쐌 The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
EC-108
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT
GI
FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”NAEC0033S05
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEF393S
*1: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips,
MIL will light up.
*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is
driven 3 times (pattern B) without
any malfunctions.
*3: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips,
the DTC and the freeze frame
data will be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame
data will not be displayed any
longer after vehicle is driven 40
times (pattern A) without the same
malfunction.
(The DTC and the freeze frame
data still remain in ECM.)
*5: When a malfunction is detected
for the first time, the 1st trip DTC
and the 1st trip freeze frame data
will be stored in ECM.
*6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after
vehicle is driven once (pattern B)
without the same malfunction.
*7: When the same malfunction is
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st
trip freeze frame data will be
cleared.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-109
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
NAEC0033S06
NAEC0033S0601
AEC574
쐌
쐌
쐌
The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
NAEC0033S0602
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
쐌 The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
쐌 The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
쐌 The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in “OBD System Operation Chart”, EC-105).
EC-110
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
=NAEC0034
GI
NAEC0034S01
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector, which is located under LH dash panel near the
fuse box cover.
MA
EM
LC
SEF941Y
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
FE
CL
MT
MBIB0233E
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
If “ENGINE” is not indicated, go to GI-41, “CONSULT-II Data
Link Connector (DLC) Circuit”.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF948Y
6.
Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service
procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation
Manual.
BR
ST
RS
BT
PBIB2308E
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-111
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL
SYSTEMS APPLICATION
NAEC0034S02
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS
INPUT
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
Item
WORK
SUPPORT
DATA
MONITOR
DATA
MONITOR
(SPEC)
X
X
X
X
X
X
DTC & SRT
CONFIRMATION
ACTIVE
TEST
SRT
STATUS
DTC
WORK
SUPPORT
DTC*1
FREEZE
FRAME
DATA*2
Crankshaft position sensor
(POS)
X
X
Crankshaft position sensor
(PHASE)
X
Mass air flow sensor
X
Engine coolant temperature sensor
X
Heated oxygen sensor 1
X
X
X
X
X
Heated oxygen sensor 2
X
X
X
X
X
Vehicle speed sensor
X
X
X
Accelerator pedal position sensor
X
X
X
Throttle position sensor
X
X
X
Fuel tank temperature sensor
X
X
X
EVAP control system pressure
sensor
X
X
X
Intake air temperature sensor
X
X
X
Knock sensor
X
Refrigerant pressure sensor
X
X
Ignition switch (start signal)
X
X
Closed throttle position switch
(Accelerator pedal position sensor signal)
X
X
Air conditioner switch
X
X
X
X
Park/neutral position (PNP)
switch
X
X
X
Power steering pressure sensor
X
X
X
Battery voltage
X
X
Load signal
X
X
Swirl control valve control
vacuum check switch
X
X
X
Fuel level sensor
X
X
X
Intake valve timing control position sensor
X
X
X
ASCD steering switch
X
X
X
ASCD brake switch
X
X
X
EC-112
X
X
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
GI
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS
DATA
MONITOR
ACTIVE
TEST
Injectors
X
X
X
Power transistor (Ignition timing)
X
X
X
Item
WORK
SUPPORT
DTC*1
FREEZE
FRAME
DATA*2
Throttle control motor
X
Throttle control motor relay
X
X
X
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Air conditioner relay
Fuel pump relay
OUTPUT
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
DTC & SRT
CONFIRMATION
DATA
MONITOR
(SPEC)
X
SRT
STATUS
X
X
CL
X
X
X
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
X
X
X
X
EVAP canister vent control valve
X
X
X
X
X
Vacuum cut valve bypass valve
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
Calculated load value
X
X
FE
X
X
VIAS control solenoid valve
EM
LC
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
Swirl control valve control solenoid valve
DTC
WORK
SUPPORT
MA
MT
AT
X
X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-87.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-113
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode
=NAEC0034S03
Function
WORK SUPPORT
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the
indications on the CONSULT-II unit.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame
data can be read and erased quickly.*1
DATA MONITOR
Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
DATA MONITOR (SPEC)
Input/Output specification of the basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the
other data monitor items can be read.
CAN diagnostic support
monitor
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also
shifts some parameters in a specified range.
FUNCTION TEST
Conducted by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system is “OK” or
“NG”.
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION
The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
ECM PART NUMBER
ECM part number can be read.
*1 The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
1) Diagnostic trouble codes
2) 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
3) Freeze frame data
4) 1st trip freeze frame data
5) System readiness test (SRT) codes
6) Test values
7) Others
WORK SUPPORT MODE
WORK ITEM
CONDITION
NAEC0034S04
USAGE
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
쐌 FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DURING
IDLING.
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
When releasing fuel pressure from fuel line
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN
쐌 THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE WITHIN
THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN ECM.
When learning the idle air
volume
SELF-LEARNING CONT
쐌 THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEFFICIENT.
When clearing the coefficient
of self-learning control value
EC-114
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
WORK ITEM
CONDITION
EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE
OPEN THE VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE AND CLOSE When detecting EVAP vapor
THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN ORDER TO
leak point of EVAP system
MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS.
쐌 IGN SW “ON”
쐌 ENGINE NOT RUNNING
쐌 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F).
쐌 NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYSTEM
쐌 TANK FUEL TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F).
쐌 WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYSTEM
CLOSE”
쐌 WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE”
UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULT-II WILL
DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRIATE INSTRUCTION.
NOTE:
WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-II MAY DISPLAY “BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BATTERY”, EVEN IN
USING CHARGED BATTERY.
쐌 IDLE CONDITION
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ*
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ*
GI
USAGE
쐌 When adjusting target
ignition timing
쐌 If once the “TARGET IDLE
RPM ADJ” has been
done, the Idle Air Volume
Learning procedure will
not be completed.
쐌 IDLE CONDITION
When setting target idle
speed
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
DTC and 1st Trip DTC
NAEC0034S0501
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
NAEC0034S0502
FUEL SYS-B1
FUEL SYS-B2
CAL/LD VALUE [%]
Description
쐌 The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as “PXXXX”.
(Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX”, EC-10.)
쐌 “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
쐌 One mode in the following is displayed.
“MODE 2”: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
“MODE 3”: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enrichment)
“MODE 4”: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
“MODE 5”: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
쐌 The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP [°C]
쐌 The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [°F]
S-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%]
S-FUEL TRIM-B2 [%]
L-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%]
L-FUEL TRIM-B2 [%]
쐌 “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
쐌 The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel
schedule.
쐌 “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
쐌 The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule
than short-term fuel trim.
EC-115
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
NAEC0034S05
Regarding items of “DTC and 1st trip DTC”, refer to “TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS — INDEX” (See EC-10.)
DIAG TROUBLE
CODE
[PXXXX]
EM
PD
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
Freeze frame data
item*1
MA
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
Freeze frame data
item*1
Description
ENGINE SPEED
[rpm]
쐌 The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
VEHICL SPEED
[km/h] or [mph]
쐌 The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec]
쐌 The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
INT/A TEMP SE [°C]
or [°F]
쐌 The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
*1: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
EC-116
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
DATA MONITOR MODE
=NAEC0034S06
GI
ECM
input
signals
Main
signals
ENG SPEED [rpm]
쎻
쎻
쐌 Indicates the engine speed computed from
the REF signal (120° signal) of the crankshaft position sensor (REF).
EM
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V]
쎻
쎻
쐌 The signal voltage of the mass air flow sen- 쐌 When the engine is stopped, a cersor is displayed.
tain value is indicated.
LC
쎻
쐌 When the engine coolant temperature sensor is open or shortcircuited, ECM enters fail-safe
mode. The engine coolant temperature determined by the ECM is displayed.
Monitored item [Unit]
COOLAN TEMP/S
[°C] or [°F]
쎻
HO2S1 (B1) [V]
쎻
HO2S1 (B2) [V]
쎻
HO2S2 (B1) [V]
쎻
HO2S2 (B2) [V]
쎻
HO2S1 MNTR (B1)
[RICH/LEAN]
쎻
HO2S1 MNTR (B2)
[RICH/LEAN]
쎻
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
[RICH/LEAN]
쎻
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
[RICH/LEAN]
쎻
쎻
쎻
Description
쐌 The engine coolant temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the engine
coolant temperature sensor) is displayed.
FE
CL
쐌 The signal voltage of the rear heated oxygen sensor is displayed.
MT
쐌 Display of heated oxygen sensor 1 signal
during air-fuel ratio feedback control:
RICH ... means the mixture became “rich”,
and control is being affected toward a
leaner mixture.
LEAN ... means the mixture became “lean”,
and control is being affected toward a rich
mixture.
쐌 After turning ON the ignition switch,
“RICH” is displayed until air-fuel
mixture ratio feedback control
begins.
쐌 When the air-fuel ratio feedback is
clamped, the value just before the
clamping is displayed continuously.
AT
쐌 Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal:
RICH ... means the amount of oxygen after
three way catalyst is relatively small.
LEAN ... means the amount of oxygen after
three way catalyst is relatively large.
쐌 When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated.
AX
쎻
쎻
쐌 The vehicle speed computed from the
vehicle speed sensor signal is displayed.
BATTERY VOLT [V]
쎻
쎻
쐌 The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed.
ACCEL SEN 1 [V]
쎻
쎻
ACCEL SEN 2 [V]
쎻
쐌 The accelerator pedal position sensor signal
voltage is displayed.
THRTL SEN 1 [V]
쎻
쎻
THRTL SEN 2 [V]
쎻
쐌 The throttle position sensor signal voltage is
displayed.
쎻
쐌 The fuel temperature judged from the tank
fuel temperature sensor signal voltage is
displayed.
INT/A TEMP SE
[°C] or [°F]
쎻
쐌 The intake air temperature determined by
the signal voltage of the intake air temperature sensor is indicated.
EVAP SYS PRES [V]
쎻
쐌 The signal voltage of EVAP control system
pressure sensor is displayed.
FUEL LEVEL SE [V]
쎻
쐌 The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor is
displayed.
쎻
MA
쐌 The signal voltage of the front heated oxygen sensor is displayed.
VHCL SPEED SE
[km/h] or [mph]
FUEL T/TMP SE
[°C] or [°F]
Remarks
TF
PD
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-117
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
ECM
input
signals
Main
signals
Description
START SIGNAL
[ON/OFF]
쎻
쎻
쐌 Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] computed by the ECM according to the signals
of engine speed and battery voltage.
CLSD THL POS
[ON/OFF]
쎻
쎻
쐌 Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed
by ECM according to the accelerator pedal
position sensor signal.
AIR COND SIG
[ON/OFF]
쎻
쎻
쐌 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air conditioner switch as determined by the air
conditioner signal.
P/N POSI SW
[ON/OFF]
쎻
쎻
쐌 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the park/
neutral position (PNP) switch signal.
PW/ST SIGNAL
[ON/OFF]
쎻
쎻
쐌 [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering oil
pressure switch determined by the power
steering oil pressure signal is indicated.
쎻
쐌 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electrical load signal and/or lighting switch.
ON ... rear defogger is operating and/or
lighting switch is on.
OFF ... rear defogger is not operating and
lighting switch is not on.
Monitored item [Unit]
LOAD SIGNAL
[ON/OFF]
쎻
IGNITION SW
[ON/OFF]
쎻
쐌 After starting the engine, [OFF] is
displayed regardless of the starter
signal.
쐌 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition
switch.
BRAKE SW
[ON/OFF]
쐌 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the stop
lamp switch signal.
SWRL CONT S/V
[ON/OFF]
쐌 The control condition of the swirl control
valve control solenoid valve (determined by
ECM according to the input signals) is indicated.
쐌 ON ... Swirl control valve is closed.
OFF ... Swirl control valve is opened.
INJ PULSE-B1
[msec]
Remarks
쎻
INJ PULSE-B2
[msec]
쐌 Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse
width compensated by ECM according to
the input signals.
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec]
쎻
쐌 “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM,
prior to any learned on board correction.
IGN TIMING [BTDC]
쎻
쐌 Indicates the ignition timing computed by
ECM according to the input signals.
쐌 When the engine is stopped, a certain computed value is indicated.
쐌 When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated.
쐌 Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve control value computed by the ECM according to the input
signals.
쐌 The opening becomes larger as the value
increases.
PURG VOL C/V [%]
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%]
쎻
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%]
쎻
쐌 When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated.
쐌 The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle is indicated. 쐌 This data also includes the data for
the air-fuel ratio learning control.
EC-118
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
ECM
input
signals
GI
Main
signals
Description
AIR COND RLY
[ON/OFF]
쎻
쐌 The air conditioner relay control condition
(determined by ECM according to the input
signal) is indicated.
FUEL PUMP RLY
[ON/OFF]
쎻
Monitored item [Unit]
쐌 Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition determined by ECM according to the
input signals.
VENT CONT/V
[ON/OFF]
쐌 The control condition of the EVAP canister
vent control valve (determined by ECM
according to the input signal) is indicated.
쐌 ON ... Closed
OFF ... Open
THRTL RELAY
[ON/OFF]
쐌 Indicates the throttle control motor relay
control condition determined by the ECM
according to the input signals.
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
[ON/OFF]
쐌 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front heated
oxygen sensor heater determined by ECM
according to the input signals.
HO2S1 HTR (B2)
[ON/OFF]
Remarks
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
[ON/OFF]
쐌 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear heated
oxygen sensor heater determined by ECM
according to the input signals.
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
[ON/OFF]
쐌 The control condition of the vacuum cut
valve bypass valve (determined by ECM
according to the input signal) is indicated.
쐌 ON ... Open
OFF ... Closed
VC/V BYPASS/V
[ON/OFF]
TF
PD
AX
CAL/LD VALUE [%]
쐌 “Calculated load value” indicates the value
of the current airflow divided by peak airflow.
SU
MASS AIRFLOW
[g·m/s]
쐌 Indicates the mass airflow computed by
ECM according to the signal voltage of the
mass airflow sensor.
BR
쐌 Indicate [°CA] of intake camshaft advanced
angle.
ST
쐌 The control condition of the intake valve
timing control solenoid valve is indicated.
RS
INT/V SOL (B2) [%]
TRVL AFTER MIL
[km] or [Mile]
쐌 Distance traveled while MIL is activated
VIAS S/V
[ON/OFF]
쐌 The control condition of the VIAS control
solenoid valve (determined by ECM according to the input signal) is indicated.
쐌 OFF ... VIAS control solenoid valve is not
operating.
ON ... VIAS control solenoid valve is operating.
SWL CON VC SW
쐌 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the swirl
control valve control vacuum check switch.
ON ... Swirl control valve is not operational.
OFF ... Swirl control valve is operational.
INT/V TIM (B1) [°CA]
INT/V TIM (B2) [°CA]
INT/V SOL (B1) [%]
쎻
EC-119
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
Monitored item [Unit]
ECM
input
signals
Main
signals
Description
IDL A/V LEARN
쐌 Display the condition of idle air volume
learning
YET ... Idle air volume learning has not
been performed yet.
CMPLT ... Idle air volume learning has
already been performed successfully.
AC PRESS SEN [V]
쐌 The signal voltage from the refrigerant pressure sensor is displayed.
SET VHCL SPD
[km/h] or [mph]
쐌 The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
MAIN SW [ON/OFF]
쐌 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CRUISE
switch signal.
CANCEL SW
[ON/OFF]
쐌 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CANCEL
switch signal.
RESUME/ACC SW
[ON/OFF]
쐌 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ACCEL/
RES switch signal.
SET SW [ON/OFF]
쐌 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from COAST/
SET switch signal.
BRAKE SW1
[ON/OFF]
쐌 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD
brake switch signal, and ASCD clutch
switch signal (M/T models).
BRAKE SW2
[ON/OFF]
쐌 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop lamp
switch signal.
VHCL SPD CUT
[NON/CUT]
쐌 Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON ... Vehicle speed is maintained at the
ASCD set speed.
CUT ...Vehicle speed increased to excessively high compared with the ASCD set
speed, and ASCD operation is cut off.
LO SPEED CUT
[NON/CUT]
쐌 Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON ... Vehicle speed is maintained at the
ASCD set speed.
CUT ...Vehicle speed decreased to excessively low compared with the ASCD set
speed, and ASCD operation is cut off.
AT OD MONITOR
[ON/OFF]
쐌 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D
according to the input signal from the TCM.
AT OD CANCEL
[ON/OFF]
쐌 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D
cancel signal sent from the TCM.
CRUISE LAMP
[ON/OFF]
쐌 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE
lamp determined by the ECM according to
the input signals.
SET LAMP [ON/OFF]
쐌 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET lamp
determined by the ECM according to the
input signals.
EC-120
Remarks
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
Monitored item [Unit]
ECM
input
signals
GI
Main
signals
Description
Remarks
MA
Voltage [V]
Frequenty [msec],
[Hz] or [%]
쐌 Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse
width measured by the probe.
DUTY-HI
DUTY-LOW
PLS WIDTH-HI
쐌 Only “#” is displayed if item is
unable to be measured.
쐌 Figures with “#”s are temporary
ones. They are the same figures as
an actual piece of data which was
just previously measured.
EM
LC
PLS WIDTH-LOW
NOTE:
쐌
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE
Monitored item [Unit]
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V]
ECM
input
signals
쎻
FE
NAEC0034S11
CL
Main
signals
쎻
Description
Remarks
쐌 The signal voltage of the mass air flow sen- 쐌 When the engine is running, specifisor specification is displayed.
cation range is indicated.
쐌 “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injec쐌 When the engine is running, specifition pulse width programmed into ECM,
cation range is indicated.
prior to any learned on board correction.
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec]
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%]
쎻
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%]
쎻
쐌 When the engine is running, specifi쐌 Indicates the mean value of the air-fuel ratio
cation range is indicated.
feedback correction factor per cycle.
쐌 This data also includes the data for
the air-fuel ratio learning control.
NOTE:
쐌
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
ACTIVE TEST MODE
TEST ITEM
CONDITION
AT
TF
PD
AX
NAEC0034S07
JUDGEMENT
CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
쐌 Engine: Return to the original
쐌 Harness and connector
trouble condition
If trouble symptom disappears, see
FUEL INJECTION
쐌 Fuel injectors
쐌 Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM.
쐌 Heated oxygen sensor
tion using CONSULT-II.
쐌 Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
IGNITION TIMING 쐌 Timing light: Set
쐌 Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-II.
MT
SU
BR
ST
If trouble symptom disappears, see
쐌 Adjust initial ignition timing
CHECK ITEM.
POWER BALANCE
쐌 Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine.
쐌 A/C switch “OFF”
쐌 Shift lever “N”
쐌 Cut off each injector signal one
at a time using CONSULT-II.
Engine runs rough or dies.
ENG COOLANT
TEMP
쐌 Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
쐌 Change the engine coolant temperature using CONSULT-II.
쐌 Harness and connector
If trouble symptom disappears, see 쐌 Engine coolant temperature senCHECK ITEM.
sor
쐌 Fuel injectors
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Harness and connector
Compression
Injectors
Power transistor
Spark plugs
Ignition coils
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-121
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
TEST ITEM
CONDITION
JUDGEMENT
CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
FUEL PUMP
RELAY
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
쐌 Turn the fuel pump relay “ON”
and “OFF” using CONSULT-II
and listen to operating sound.
Fuel pump relay makes the operat- 쐌 Harness and connector
ing sound.
쐌 Fuel pump relay
VIAS SOL VALVE
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
쐌 Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
“OFF” with CONSULT-II and listen for operating sound.
Solenoid valve makes an operating 쐌 Harness and connector
sound.
쐌 Solenoid valve
SWIRL CONT
SOL VALVE
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
쐌 Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
“OFF” with CONSULT-II and listen for operating sound.
Solenoid valve makes an operating 쐌 Harness and connector
sound.
쐌 Solenoid valve
PURG VOL
CONT/V
쐌 Engine: After warming up, run
engine at 1,500 rpm.
쐌 Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according
volume control solenoid valve
to the opening percent.
opening percent using CONSULT-II.
FUEL/T TEMP
SEN
쐌 Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-II.
VENT
CONTROL/V
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
쐌 Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
“OFF” with the CONSULT-II and
listen to operating sound.
Solenoid valve makes an operating 쐌 Harness and connector
sound.
쐌 Solenoid valve
VC/V BYPASS/V
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
쐌 Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
“OFF” with the CONSULT-II and
listen to operating sound.
Solenoid valve makes an operating 쐌 Harness and connector
sound.
쐌 Solenoid valve
V/T ASSIGN
ANGLE
쐌 Engine: After warming up, hold
engine speed at 2,500 rpm.
쐌 Change the intake valve timing
using CONSULT-II.
쐌 Harness and connector
If trouble symptom disappears, see
쐌 Intake valve timing control soleCHECK ITEM.
noid valve
쐌 Harness and connector
쐌 Solenoid valve
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE
SRT STATUS Mode
NAEC0034S08
NAEC0034S0801
For details, refer to “SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE”,
EC-87.
SRT Work Support Mode
NAEC0034S0803
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT
while monitoring the SRT status.
EC-122
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
DTC Work Support Mode
Test mode
Test item
Condition
NAEC0034S0802
Reference page
EVP SML LEAK P0442/P1442
EC-381, 601
EVP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456
EC-438, 645
EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM PURG VOL CN/V P1444
EC-616
PURGE FLOW P0441
EC-371
VC CUT/V BP/V P1491
EC-667
HO2S1 (B1) P0134
EC-278
HO2S1 (B1) P1143
EC-541
HO2S1 (B1) P1144
EC-549
HO2S1 (B1) P0133
EC-264
Refer to corresponding
trouble diagnosis for
DTC.
HO2S1
HO2S1 (B2) P0154
HO2S1 (B2) P1163
GI
EC-278
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
EC-541
HO2S1 (B2) P1164
EC-549
HO2S1 (B2) P0153
EC-264
HO2S2 (B1) P1146
EC-557
HO2S2 (B1) P1147
EC-566
HO2S2 (B1) P0139
EC-295
HO2S2 (B2) P1166
EC-557
HO2S2 (B2) P1167
EC-566
HO2S2 (B2) P0159
EC-295
HO2S2
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE
(RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)
NAEC0034S10
SEF705Y
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by
touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
1) “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger):
쐌 The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen in
real time.
In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be
displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM.
At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONITOR”
in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording Data ...
xx%” as shown at left, and the data after the malfunction detection is recorded. Then when the percentage reached 100%,
“REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If “STOP” is touched
on the screen during “ Recording Data ... xx%”, “REAL-TIME
DIAG” screen is also displayed.
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and
“Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION
MANUAL.
2) “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger):
쐌 DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed
SEF707X
EC-123
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunction is detected by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though
a malfunction is detected.
Use these triggers as follows:
1) “AUTO TRIG”
쐌 While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the
“DTC Confirmation Procedure”, be sure to select to “DATA
MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is detected.
쐌 While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II
should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent.
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, components and harness in
the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, the moment a malfunction
is found the DTC/1st trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to
GI-25, “Incident Simulation Tests”.)
2) “MANU TRIG”
쐌 If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR”
is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU TRIG”. By selecting
“MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data
can be utilized for further diagnosis, such as a comparison with
the value for the normal operating condition.
SEF714Y
EC-124
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (GST)
Generic Scan Tool (GST)
DESCRIPTION
=NAEC0035
GI
NAEC0035S01
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978
has 8 different functions explained on the next page.
ISO9141 is used as the protocol.
The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service
manual.
MA
EM
LC
SEF139P
GST INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
NAEC0035S02
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect GST to data link connector, which is located under LH
dash panel near the fuse box cover.
FE
CL
MT
SEF941Y
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in
the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.)
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF398S
5.
Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service procedure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of the
tool maker.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF416S
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-125
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (GST) (Cont’d)
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode
NAEC0035S03
Function
MODE 1
READINESS TESTS
This mode gains access to current emission-related data values, including analog
inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
MODE 2
(FREEZE DATA)
This mode gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by ECM
during the freeze frame. [For details, refer to “Freeze Frame Data” (EC-115).]
MODE 3
DTCs
This mode gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which were
stored by ECM.
MODE 4
CLEAR DIAG INFO
This mode can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This includes:
쐌 Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 1)
쐌 Clear diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 3)
쐌 Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (MODE 1)
쐌 Clear freeze frame data (MODE 2)
쐌 Reset status of system monitoring test (MODE 1)
쐌 Clear on board monitoring test results (MODE 6 and 7)
MODE 6
(ON BOARD TESTS)
This mode accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of specific
components/systems that are not continuously monitored.
MODE 7
(ON BOARD TESTS)
This mode enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-related
powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal driving
conditions.
MODE 8
MODE 9
—
(CALIBRATION ID)
This mode can close EVAP system in ignition switch “ON” position (Engine stopped).
When this mode is performed, the following parts can be opened or closed.
쐌 EVAP canister vent control valve open
쐌 Vacuum cut valve bypass valve closed
In the following conditions, this mode cannot function.
쐌 Low ambient temperature
쐌 Low battery voltage
쐌 Engine running
쐌 Ignition switch “OFF”
쐌 Low fuel temperature
쐌 Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system
This mode enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle information
such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.
EC-126
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Introduction
Introduction
MEF036D
SEF233G
NAEC0036
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel
control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM
accepts input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators.
It is essential that both input and output signals are proper and
stable. At the same time, it is important that there are no incidents
such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other incidents with
the engine.
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this
case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the
replacement of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the “Work Flow” on EC-129.
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with
a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the
example on next page should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electronically controlled engine vehicle.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF234G
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
SEF907L
NAEC0036S01
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction
of engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make
trouble-shooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about an incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a
customer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
쐌 Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
쐌 Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-127
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Introduction (Cont’d)
Worksheet Sample
NAEC0036S0101
MTBL0017
EC-128
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Work Flow
Work Flow
NAEC0037
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
PBIB1043E
*1
*2
If time data of “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS” is other than “0” or
“[1t]”, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT
INCIDENT”, EC-163.
If the incident cannot be verified,
perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”,
EC-163.
*3
*4
If the on board diagnostic system
cannot be performed, check main
power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
FOR POWER SUPPLY”, EC-165.
If malfunctioning part cannot be
*5
*6
detected, perform “TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
EC-92
EC-159
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-129
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Work Flow (Cont’d)
DESCRIPTION FOR WORK FLOW
STEP
NAEC0037S01
DESCRIPTION
STEP I
Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using
the “DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET”, EC-128.
STEP II
Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II or GST) the (1st trip) DTC
and the (1st trip) freeze frame data, then erase the DTC and the data. (Refer to EC-100.) The (1st trip) DTC and
the (1st trip) freeze frame data can be used when duplicating the incident at STEP III & IV.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
Study the relationship between the cause, specified by (1st trip) DTC, and the symptom described by the customer. (The “Symptom Matrix Chart” will be useful. See EC-139.)
Also check related service bulletins for information.
STEP III
Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs.
The “DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET” and the freeze frame data are useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V.
STEP IV
Try to detect the (1st trip) DTC by driving in (or performing) the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Check and read
the (1st trip) DTC and (1st trip) freeze frame data by using CONSULT-II or GST.
During the (1st trip) DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
In case the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” is not available, perform the “Overall Function Check” instead. The
(1st trip) DTC cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified “check” is an effective alternative.
The “NG” result of the “Overall Function Check” is the same as the (1st trip) DTC detection.
STEP V
Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV.
If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PXXXX.
If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the BASIC INSPECTION. (Refer to EC-131.) If CONSULT-II is
available, perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II and proceed to the “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE”, EC-159. (If malfunction is detected, proceed to “REPAIR REPLACE”.) Then
perform inspections according to the Symptom Matrix Chart. (Refer to EC-139.)
STEP VI
Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes.
Inspect the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) “Harness Layouts”.
Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT-II set in “DATA MONITOR
(AUTO TRIG)” mode.
Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-143, 149.
The “Diagnostic Procedure” in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit
inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to GI-27, “Circuit
Inspection”.
Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
If malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”,
EC-163.
STEP VII
Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions
and circumstances which resulted in the customer’s initial complaint.
Perform the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” and confirm the normal code [DTC No. P0000] is detected. If the
incident is still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a different method from the previous one.
Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) (1st trip) DTC in
ECM and TCM (Transmission control module). (Refer to EC-100.)
EC-130
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection
Basic Inspection
NAEC0038
Precaution:
Perform Basic Inspection without electrical or mechanical
loads applied;
쐌 Headlamp switch is OFF,
쐌 Air conditioner switch is OFF,
쐌 Rear window defogger switch is OFF,
쐌 Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
1
INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for scheduled
maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
쐌 Harness connectors for improper connections
쐌 Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
쐌 Wiring for improper connections, pinches and cuts
쐌 Air cleaner clogging
쐌 Hoses and ducts for leaks
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF983U
䊳
2
PD
GO TO 2.
AX
REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding “Diagnostic Procedure”.
䊳
SU
GO TO 3.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-131
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
3
CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
SEF978U
3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
MT: 750±50 rpm
AT: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
3. Check idle speed.
MT: 750±50 rpm
AT: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
4
PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1. Stop engine.
2. Perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
5
GO TO 5.
PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
GO TO 6.
EC-132
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
6
GI
PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
MA
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 7.
No
䊳
1. Follow the instruction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
2. GO TO 4.
EM
LC
7
CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
MT: 750±50 rpm
AT: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
MT: 750±50 rpm
AT: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
GO TO 8.
8
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
PD
Check the following.
쐌 Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-357.
쐌 Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-350.
AX
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
9
SU
BR
CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is the
rarely the case.)
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “NVIS (NISSAN
VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)”, EC-101.
䊳
ST
RS
GO TO 4.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-133
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
10
CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
SEC580D
MT: 15°±5° BTDC
AT: 15°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 11.
11
PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1. Stop engine.
2. Perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
12
GO TO 12.
PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
13
GO TO 13.
PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 14.
No
䊳
1. Follow the instruction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
2. GO TO 4.
EC-134
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
14
GI
CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
MT: 750±50 rpm
AT: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
MA
EM
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
MT: 750±50 rpm
AT: 750±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
LC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 15.
NG
䊳
GO TO 17.
FE
CL
15
CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEC580D
MT: 15°±5° BTDC
AT: 15°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
AX
SU
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 16.
16
CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
BR
ST
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-21, “TIMING CHAIN”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 17.
NG
䊳
1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4.
RS
BT
HA
17
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-357.
쐌 Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-350.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 18.
NG
䊳
1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-135
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
18
CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is the
rarely the case.)
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “NVIS (NISSAN
VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)”, EC-101.
䊳
GO TO 4.
EC-136
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DTC Inspection Priority Chart
DTC Inspection Priority Chart
NAEC0039
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority chart.
Priority
1
2
3
GI
MA
Detected items (DTC)
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
U1000, U1001 CAN communication line
P0101, P0102, P0103, P1102* MAF sensor
P0112, P0113, P0127 IAT sensor
P0117, P0118, P0125 ECT sensor
P0122, P0123, P0222, P0223, P1225, P1226, P2135 Throttle position sensor
P0128 Thermostat function
P0181, P0182, P0183 FTT sensor
P0327, P0328 KS
P0335 CKP sensor (POS)
P0340, P0345 CMP sensor (PHASE)
P0460, P0461, P0462, P0463 Fuel level sensor
P0500 VSS
P0605 ECM
P1229 Sensor power supply
P1706 PNP switch
P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128, P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor
EM
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 heater
P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 heater
P0132-P0134, P1143, P1144 and P0152-P0154, P1163, P1164 HO2S1
P0138, P0139, P1146, P1147 and P0158, P0159, P1166, P1167 HO2S2
P0441 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
P0444, P0445, P1444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
P0447, P1446, P1448 EVAP canister vent control valve
P0452, P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor
P0550 Power steering pressure sensor
P0705-P0755, P1705, P1760 A/T related sensors, solenoid valves and switches
P1065 ECM power supply
P1111 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
P1122 Electric throttle control function
P1165 Swirl control valve control vacuum check switch
P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)
P1490, P1491 Vacuum cut valve bypass valve
P1805 Brake switch
MT
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
P0011, P0021, P1110, P1135 Intake valve timing control
P0171, P0172 and P0174, P0175 Fuel injection system function
P0300-P0306 Misfire
P0420, P0430 Three way catalyst function
P0442, P0455, P0456, P1442, P1456 EVAP control system
P0506, P0507 ISC system
P0731-P0734, P0744 A/T function
P1121 Electric throttle control actuator
P1124, P1126, P1128 Electric throttle control actuator
P1130, P1131 Swirl control valve control solenoid valve
P1148, P1168 Closed loop control
P1211 ABS/TCS control unit
P1212 ABS/TCS communication line
P1564 ASCD steering switch
P1572 ASCD brake switch
LC
FE
CL
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
*: For the type I vehicle (Refer to “How to Check Vehicle Type”, EC-9.).
SC
EL
IDX
EC-137
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Fail-safe Chart
Fail-safe Chart
=NAEC0040
When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
DTC No.
Detected items
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
P0102
P0103
P1102*
Mass air flow sensor circuit
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0117
P0118
Engine coolant temperature
sensor circuit
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after
turning ignition switch “ON” or “START”.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Condition
Engine coolant temperature decided
(CONSULT-II display)
Just as ignition switch is turned
ON or Start
40°C (104°F)
More than approx. 4 minutes
after ignition ON or Start
80°C (176°F)
Except as shown above
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the
cooling fan operates while engine is running.
P0122
P0123
P0222
P0223
P2135
Throttle position sensor
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle
opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the
normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
P1121
Electric throttle control
actuator
(When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return
spring malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around
the idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
(When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening
to 20 degrees or less.
(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:)
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle
stops, the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000
rpm or more.
P1122
Electric throttle control func- ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained
tion
at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1124
P1126
Throttle control relay
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained
at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1128
Throttle control motor
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained
at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1229
Sensor power supply
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained
at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2122
P2123
P2127
P2128
P2138
Accelerator pedal position
sensor
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle
opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the
normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
*: For the type I vehicle (Refer to “How to Check Vehicle Type”, EC-9.).
쐌
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting MIL up when there
is a malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrically controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnosis is continuously detected
EC-138
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Fail-safe Chart (Cont’d)
as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system has a malfunction and MIL circuit is
open by means of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when a DTC is detected during the above diagnosis except MIL circuit,
and demands the driver to repair the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel
cut
GI
MA
EM
LC
Symptom Matrix Chart
NAEC0041
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
NAEC0041S01
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
AH
AJ AK AL AM HA
2
2
3
4
4
2
2
Fuel pump circuit
1
1
2
3
2
Fuel pressure regulator system
3
3
4
4
4
Injector circuit
1
1
2
3
2
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
AA AB AC AD AE AF AG
ENGINE STALL
IDLING VIBRATION
Fuel
4
4
2
Positive crankcase ventilation system
Ignition
Reference
page
AT
TF
PD
AX
EC-763
EC-65
2
EC-758
SU
BR
EC-41
4
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
3
Incorrect idle speed adjustment
Electric throttle control actuator
MT
4
Evaporative emission system
Air
FE
CL
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
Warranty symptom code
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
SYMPTOM
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
EC-56
EC-131
1
2
3
3
Incorrect ignition timing adjustment
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
EC-131
Ignition circuit
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
EC-748
2
2
3
3
3
3
2
Main power supply and ground circuit
2
EC-494, 496,
504, 509
1
2
3
Air conditioner circuit
3
EC-165
ST
RS
BT
HA
3
3
2
HA section
SC
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next page)
EL
IDX
EC-139
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
Engine
control
2
2
Camshaft position sensor
(PHASE) circuit
3
2
EC-357
1
EC-194, 203,
211, 219, 478
2
EC-278
1
2
3
2
1
Accelerator pedal position sensor
circuit
3
Vehicle speed sensor circuit
2
Knock sensor circuit
2
3
1
2
2
2
3
3
EC-236, 249
2
2
EC-241, 327,
592, 594, 723
2
2
EC-596, 708,
715, 731
3
EC-460
2
2
2
Park/Neutral position switch circuit
Power steering pressure sensor
circuit
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
EC-345
EC-471
3
EC-696
EC-466
Electrical load signal circuit
EC-787
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit
3
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit
2
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
EC-350
Throttle position sensor circuit
ECM
Reference
page
AJ AK AL AM HA
Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
AH
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
circuit
Mass air flow sensor circuit
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
AA AB AC AD AE AF AG
ENGINE STALL
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
Warranty symptom code
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
SYMPTOM
2
1
3
3
4
2
2
3
3
EC-488
3
4
EC-770
EC-583, 585
Swirl control valve control solenoid
valve circuit
1
EC-514
VIAS control solenoid valve circuit
1
EC-739
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next page)
EC-140
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER
NAEC0041S02
GI
Fuel
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
MA
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
AH
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
AA AB AC AD AE AF AG
ENGINE STALL
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
Warranty symptom code
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
SYMPTOM
EM
LC
Reference
section
FE
CL
AJ AK AL AM HA
Fuel tank
FE section
MT
5
Fuel piping
5
5
5
5
5
5
AT
Vapor lock
5
Valve deposit
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline,
Low octane)
Air
5
5
5
5
5
5
TF
5
Air duct
—
PD
Air cleaner
AX
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — electric
throttle control actuator
Air leakage from intake manifold/
Collector/Gasket
Cranking
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
SU
5
BR
Battery
1
1
1
1
Alternator circuit
1
1
1
1
EL section
ST
Starter circuit
3
Flywheel/Drive plate
6
EM section
PNP switch
4
AT section
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next page)
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-141
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
Engine
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
AH
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
AA AB AC AD AE AF AG
ENGINE STALL
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
Warranty symptom code
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
SYMPTOM
Reference
section
AJ AK AL AM HA
Cylinder head
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Cylinder head gasket
4
3
Cylinder block
Piston
4
Piston ring
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Connecting rod
Bearing
EM section
Crankshaft
Valve
Timing chain
mechanism
Camshaft
Intake valve timing control
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Intake valve
3
Exhaust valve
Exhaust
Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/
Gasket
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
FE section
Three way catalyst
Lubrication
Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil
filter/Oil gallery
5
5
5
MA, EM, LC
section
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil
Cooling
Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap
Thermostat
Water pump
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
LC section
4
5
Water gallery
Coolant level (low)/Contaminated
coolant
MA section
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
EC-142
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
GI
NVIS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System —
NATS)
1
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
MA
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
AH
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
AA AB AC AD AE AF AG
ENGINE STALL
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
Warranty symptom code
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
SYMPTOM
EM
Reference
section
FE
CL
AJ AK AL AM HA
EC-101 or EL
section
1
LC
MT
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0042
APPLICATION NOTICE
AT
TF
NAEC0042S01
Confirm the type of the vehicle. Refer to “How to Check Vehicle Type”, EC-9.
PD
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
NAEC0042S02
Remarks:
쐌 Specification data are reference values.
쐌 Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in
spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM
according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
MONITOR ITEM
ENG SPEED
CONDITION
쐌 Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indication.
SPECIFICATION
Almost the same speed as
the tachometer indication.
AX
SU
BR
ST
1.2 - 1.8V (Type I)
MAS A/F SE-B1
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
Idle
1.0 - 1.3V (Type II)
2,500 rpm
1.7 - 2.1V (Type II)
COOLAN TEMP/S
쐌 Engine: After warming up
HO2S1 MNTR (B1)
HO2S1 MNTR (B2)
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 1.0V
쐌 Engine: After warming up
쐌 After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm
for one minute and at idle for
one minute under no load
BT
More than 70°C (158°F)
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2)
쐌 Engine: After warming up
RS
1.6 - 2.2V (Type I)
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
Revving engine from idle up to 3,000
rpm quickly
EC-143
LEAN +, RICH
Changes more than 5 times
during 10 seconds.
HA
SC
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 1.0V
EL
LEAN +, RICH
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d)
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
BATTERY VOLT
쐌 Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
ACCEL SEN 1
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
쐌 Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
“1st” (M/T models)
ACCEL SEN 2*
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
쐌 Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
“1st” (M/T models)
0.5 - 1.0V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
4.0 - 4.7V
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.3 - 1.2V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
3.9 - 4.8V
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
쐌 Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
“1st” (M/T models)
START SIGNAL
쐌 Ignition switch: ON , START , ON
CLSD THL POS
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
쐌 Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
“1st” (M/T models)
P/N POSI SW
PW/ST SIGNAL
11 - 14V
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
THRTL SEN 1
THRTL SEN 2*
AIR COND SIG
SPECIFICATION
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
OFF , ON , OFF
ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
쐌 Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
쐌 Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
OFF
Air conditioner switch: “ON”
(Compressor operates.)
ON
Shift lever: “P” or “N”
ON
Except above
OFF
Steering wheel in neutral position
(forward direction)
OFF
The steering wheel is turned
ON
IGNITION SW
쐌 Ignition switch: ON , OFF , ON
INJ PULSE-B1
INJ PULSE-B2
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
Idle
2.4 - 3.2 msec
2,000 rpm
1.9 - 2.8 msec
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
Idle
2.0 - 3.2 msec
B/FUEL SCHDL
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
2,000 rpm
1.4 - 2.6 msec
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
Idle
15°±5° BTDC
2,000 rpm
More than 25° BTDC
Rear window defogger switch is ON
and/or lighting switch is in 2nd.
ON
IGN TIMING
LOAD SIGNAL
PURG VOL C/V
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
A/F ALPHA-B1
A/F ALPHA-B2
쐌 Engine: After warming up
EVAP SYS PRES
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
ON , OFF , ON
Rear window defogger switch is OFF
OFF
and lighting switch is OFF.
Idle
0%
2,000 rpm
—
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
54 - 155%
1.8 - 4.8V
EC-144
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d)
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
AIR COND RLY
쐌 Air conditioner switch: OFF , ON
OFF , ON
ON
FUEL PUMP RLY
쐌 Ignition switch is turned to ON (Operates for 1 second)
쐌 Engine running and cranking
Except as shown above
OFF
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
OFF
쐌 Engine: After warming up
쐌 Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm
ON
쐌 Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
OFF
쐌 Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
쐌 Engine speed: Above 3,200 rpm
OFF
쐌 Engine speed: Below 3,200 rpm after the following conditions are met.
쐌 After warming up
쐌 After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for one
minute and at idle for one minute under no load
ON
VC/V BYPASS/V
Ignition switch: ON
OFF
CAL/LD VALUE
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
VENT CONT/V
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
HO2S1 HTR (B2)
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
BRAKE SW
MASS AIRFLOW
SWRL CONT S/V
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
쐌 Engine speed: Idle
MA
EM
LC
FE
Idle
14.0 - 33.0%
2,500 rpm
12.0 - 25.0%
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
Idle
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
2,500 rpm
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
Engine coolant temperature is
between 15°C (59°F) to 50°C
(122°F).
GI
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
ON
SU
Engine coolant temperature is above
OFF
55°C (131°F).
SWL CON VC SW
VIAS S/V
AC PRESS SEN
INT/V TIM (B1)
INT/V TIM (B2)
BR
쐌 Engine speed: Idle
쐌 Engine coolant temperature is between 15°C (59°F) to 50°C (122°F).
OFF
쐌 Engine speed: Idle
쐌 Engine coolant temperature is above 55°C (131°F).
ON
쐌 Engine: After warming up
1,800 - 3,600 rpm
ON
Except above conditions
OFF
쐌 Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
Approx. 0V
쐌 Engine: Idle
쐌 Air conditioner switch: OFF
1.0 - 4.0V
쐌 Engine: After warming up
쐌 Shift lever “N”
쐌 Quickly depressed accelerator
pedal
쐌 No-load
ST
RS
BT
HA
Idle
0° CA
2,000 rpm
Approximately 12 - 18° CA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-145
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d)
MONITOR ITEM
INT/V SOL (B1)
INT/V SOL (B2)
CONDITION
쐌 Engine: After warming up
쐌 Shift lever “N”
쐌 Quickly depressed accelerator
pedal
쐌 No-load
SPECIFICATION
Idle
0%
2,000 rpm
Approximately 40%
Vehicle has traveled after MIL has
turned ON.
0 - 65,535 km
(0 - 40,723 mile)
TRVL AFTER MIL
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
VEH SPEED SE
쐌 Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer indication.
Almost the same speed as
the speedometer indication
SET VHCL SPD
쐌 Engine: Running
ASCD: Operating
The preset vehicle speed is
displayed.
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
CRUISE switch: Pressed
ON
MAIN SW
CRUISE switch: Released
OFF
CANCEL switch: Pressed
ON
CANCEL switch: Released
OFF
ACCEL/RES switch: Pressed
ON
ACCEL/RES switch: Released
OFF
COAST/SET switch: Pressed
ON
COAST/SET switch: Released
OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released
Clutch pedal: Fully released (M/T)
ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
Clutch pedal: Slightly depressed
(M/T)
OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
CRUISE lamp: Illuminated
ON
CRUISE lamp: Not illuminated
OFF
SET lamp: Illuminated
ON
SET lamp: Not illuminated
OFF
CANCEL SW
RESUME/ACC SW
SET SW
BRAKE SW1
BRAKE SW2
CRUISE LAMP
SET LAMP
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ from
ECM terminals voltage signal.
EC-146
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Mode
GI
=NAEC0043
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
MA
CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1
NAEC0043S01
Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelerator pedal with the ignition switch “ON” and with selector lever in ″D″ position (A/T models) or with shift lever
in ″1st″ position (M/T models).
The signal of “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise
after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from “ON” to “OFF”.
EM
LC
FE
CL
PBIB0198E
ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), HO2S1 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1
NAEC0043S02
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S2 (B1)”, “HO2S1 (B1)” and
“INJ PULSE-B1” when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently.
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF241Y
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-147
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d)
PBIB0668E
EC-148
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
PREPARATION
1.
2.
NAEC0044
GI
NAEC0044S01
ECM is located behind the driver side instrument lower panel.
For this inspection, remove driver side instrument lower panel.
Remove ECM harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEC405D
3.
4.
쐌
쐌
When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with
levers as far as they will go as shown in the figure.
Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST)
between the ECM and ECM harness connector.
Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
FE
CL
MT
SEC406D
ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUTNAEC0044S02
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
PBIB1192E
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Application Notice
NAEC0044S03
NAEC0044S0301
Confirm the type of the vehicle. Refer to “How to Check Vehicle
Type”, EC-9.
ECM Inspection Table
NAEC0044S0302
Specification data are reference values and are measured between
each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULTII.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring the input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use ground other than the ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
TERMIWIRE
NAL NO. COLOR
1
B
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
ITEM
ECM ground
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
쐌 Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
Engine ground
EL
IDX
EC-149
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMIWIRE
NAL NO. COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 7V★
2
R/G
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
Heated oxygen sensor 쐌 Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
1 heater (bank 2)
PBIB0519E
3
OR
Throttle control motor
relay power supply
[Engine is running]
쐌 Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
0 - 14V★
4
L/W
Throttle control motor
(Close)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
쐌 Accelerator pedal is releasing
PBIB1104E
0 - 14V★
5
L/B
Throttle control motor
(Open)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
쐌 Accelerator pedal is depressing
PBIB1105E
6
R/W
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is below 3,200 rpm.
쐌 After keeping engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle
Heated oxygen sensor
for one minute
2 heater (bank 2)
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
쐌 Engine speed is above 3,200 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
7 - 8V★
10
P/L
Intake valve timing
control solenoid valve
(bank 2)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
quickly.
PBIB1790E
EC-150
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMIWIRE
NAL NO. COLOR
GI
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
MA
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
EM
7 - 8V★
11
OR/B
Intake valve timing
control solenoid valve
(bank 1)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
quickly.
LC
PBIB1790E
12
R/B
Power steering pressure sensor
FE
[Engine is running]
쐌 Steering wheel is being turned.
0.5 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
쐌 Steering wheel is not being turned.
0.4 - 0.8V
CL
Approximately 1.6V★
MT
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
AT
TF
13
Y
PBIB1041E
Crankshaft position
sensor (POS)
Approximately 1.5V★
PD
[Engine is running]
쐌 Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
AX
SU
PBIB1042E
1.0 - 4.0V★
BR
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
14
OR
ST
RS
Camshaft position
sensor (PHASE)
(bank 2)
PBIB1039E
1.0 - 4.0V★
BT
HA
[Engine is running]
쐌 Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
SC
PBIB1040E
15
W
Knock sensor
[Engine is running]
쐌 Idle speed
Approximately 2.5V
EL
IDX
EC-151
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMIWIRE
NAL NO. COLOR
16
G/B
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
Heated oxygen sensor
쐌 Warm-up condition
1 (bank 2)
쐌 Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Periodically change)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)★
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
21
22
23
L/W
R/Y
R/B
Injector No. 5
Injector No. 3
Injector No. 1
SEC984C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)★
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
SEC985C
Approximately 7V★
24
L/OR
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
Heated oxygen sensor 쐌 Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
1 heater (bank 1)
PBIB0519E
[Engine is running]
쐌 Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
25
P/B
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is below 3,200 rpm.
쐌 After keeping engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle
Heated oxygen sensor
for one minute
2 heater (bank 1)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
쐌 Engine speed is above 3,200 rpm.
27
29
G
Y/G
Swirl control valve
control solenoid valve
VIAS control solenoid
valve
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
0 - 1.0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Idle speed
0 - 1.0V
쐌 Engine coolant temperature is between 15 50°C (59 - 122°F).
[Engine is running]
쐌 Idle speed
쐌 Engine coolant temperature is above 55°C
(131°F).
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Engine speed is above 5,000 rpm.
0 - 1.0V
EC-152
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMIWIRE
NAL NO. COLOR
32
L/G
GI
ITEM
EVAP control system
pressure sensor
CONDITION
[Ignition switch “ON”]
DATA (DC Voltage)
MA
1.8 - 4.8V
1.0 - 4.0V★
EM
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
33
Y/G
Camshaft position
sensor (PHASE)
(bank 1)
LC
PBIB1039E
1.0 - 4.0V★
FE
[Engine is running]
쐌 Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
CL
MT
PBIB1040E
34
B/P
Intake air temperature
[Engine is running]
sensor
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with intake air
temperature.
35
G
[Engine is running]
Heated oxygen sensor
쐌 Warm-up condition
1 (bank 1)
쐌 Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Periodically change)
TF
PD
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)★
AX
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
40
41
42
PU/R
R/L
R/W
Injector No. 6
Injector No. 4
Injector No. 2
AT
SU
SEC984C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)★
BR
ST
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
RS
BT
SEC985C
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-153
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMIWIRE
NAL NO. COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)★
[Engine is running]
쐌 Idle speed
45
L/Y
EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve
SEC990C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)★
[Engine is running]
쐌 Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More
than 100 seconds after starting engine).
SEC991C
47
L
Sensors’ power supply (Throttle position
sensor)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
48
P/B
Sensors’ power supply
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
P/B
Sensor’s power supply
(Refrigerant pressure
sensor)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Gear position: “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
쐌 Accelerator pedal fully released
More than 0.36V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Gear position: “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
쐌 Accelerator pedal fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
49
50
51
55
BR
OR
OR/L
Throttle position sensor 1
Mass air flow sensor
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
1.2 - 1.8V (Type I)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
1.6 - 2.2V (Type I)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm
Heated oxygen sensor
after the following conditions are met.
2 (bank 2)
쐌 After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for one minute and at
idle for one minute under no load
EC-154
1.0 - 1.3V (Type II)
1.7 - 2.1V (Type II)
0 - Approximately 1.0V
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMIWIRE
NAL NO. COLOR
59
W/B
GI
ITEM
Swirl control valve
control vacuum check
switch
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
MA
[Engine is running]
쐌 Idle speed
Approximately 5V
쐌 Engine coolant temperature is between 15 50°C (59 - 122°F).
[Engine is running]
쐌 Idle speed
쐌 Engine coolant temperature is above 55°C
(131°F).
EM
0 - 1.0V
LC
0 - 0.2V★
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
FE
CL
60
61
62
PU/W
L/R
Y/R
Ignition signal No. 5
Ignition signal No. 3
Ignition signal No. 1
SEC986C
0.1 - 0.3V★
MT
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
AT
TF
SEC987C
66
BR/Y
Sensors’ ground
(Throttle position sensor)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
Approximately 0V
67
B/P
Sensors’ ground
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
Approximately 0V
L
Sensor’s power supply
(Power steering pressure sensor)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
68
69
70
73
BR/W
W/PU
LG/R
AX
SU
BR
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Gear position: “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st”. (M/T models)
쐌 Accelerator pedal fully released
Less than 4.75V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Gear position: “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st”. (M/T models)
쐌 Accelerator pedal fully depressed
More than 0.36V
Refrigerant pressure
sensor
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Both A/C switch and blower switch are
“ON”. (Compressor operates.)
1.0 - 4.0V
Engine coolant temperature sensor
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with engine
coolant temperature.
Throttle position sensor 2
PD
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-155
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMIWIRE
NAL NO. COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
74
OR
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm
Heated oxygen sensor
after the following conditions are met.
2 (bank 1)
쐌 After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for one minute and at
idle for one minute under no load
78
B
Sensors’ ground
(Heated oxygen sensor)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - Approximately 1.0V
Approximately 0V
0 - 0.2V★
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
79
80
81
GY/R
GY
G/R
Ignition signal No. 6
Ignition signal No. 4
Ignition signal No. 2
SEC986C
0.1 - 0.3V★
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
SEC987C
82
B/R
Sensor’s ground
(APP sensor 1)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
Approximately 0V
83
L
Sensor’s ground
(APP sensor 2)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Lighting switch is in 2nd.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Lighting switch is “OFF”.
0V
84
OR
Lighting switch
85
LG/R
Data link connector
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 CONSULT-II or GST is disconnected.
Approximately 5V
86
R
CAN communication
line
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 1.7 - 2.3V
Output voltage varies with the communication status.
90
L
Sensor’s power supply
(APP sensor 1)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
91
W/R
Sensor’s power supply
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
B/L
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Rear window defogger 쐌 Rear window defogger switch is ON.
switch
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
93
EC-156
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
0V
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMIWIRE
NAL NO. COLOR
94
98
99
101
102
104
106
107
L
R
L/Y
G/Y
L
L
L
G/B
GI
ITEM
CAN communication
line
Accelerator pedal
position sensor 2
ASCD steering switch
Stop lamp switch
PNP switch
Throttle control motor
relay
Accelerator pedal
position sensor 1
CONDITION
[Ignition switch “ON”]
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 2.6 - 3.2V
Output voltage varies with the communication status.
MA
EM
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
쐌 Accelerator pedal fully released
0.15 - 0.6V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
쐌 Accelerator pedal fully depressed
1.95 - 2.4V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 ASCD steering switch is “OFF”.
Approximately 4V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 CRUISE switch is “ON”.
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 CANCEL switch is “ON”.
Approximately 1V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 COAST/SET switch is “ON”.
Approximately 2V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 ACCEL/RESUME switch is “ON”.
Approximately 3V
TF
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Brake pedal is fully released
Approximately 0V
PD
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Brake pedal is depressed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
AX
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Gear position is “P” or “N”.
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Except the above gear position
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
0 - 1.0V
ST
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
쐌 Accelerator pedal fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
RS
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
쐌 Accelerator pedal fully depressed
3.9 - 4.7V
HA
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with fuel tank
temperature.
SC
Fuel tank temperature
[Engine is running]
sensor
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
SU
BR
BT
EL
IDX
EC-157
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMIWIRE
NAL NO. COLOR
108
109
111
112
113
L/Y
R
L/B
G/W
R/L
ITEM
ASCD brake switch
CONDITION
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Brake pedal is depressed
쐌 Clutch pedal is depressed (M/T models)
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Brake pedal is fully released
쐌 Clutch pedal is fully released (M/T models)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
쐌 For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch “OFF”
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
쐌 A few seconds passed after turning ignition
switch “OFF”
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 For 1 second after turning ignition switch
“ON”
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 More than 1 second after turning ignition
switch “ON”.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Ignition switch
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
Vacuum cut valve
bypass valve
Fuel pump relay
DATA (DC Voltage)
115
116
B
B
ECM ground
[Engine is running]
쐌 Idle speed
Engine ground
117
G/R
EVAP canister vent
control valve
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
119
120
B/W
B/W
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
121
W/R
Power supply for ECM
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
(Back-up)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
★: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
EC-158
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
Description
Description
NAEC0717
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)”
mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in
“DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or
more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
쐌 B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board correction)
쐌 A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
쐌 MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
Testing Condition
NAEC0718
쐌 Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,107 miles)
쐌 Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2, 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
쐌 Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
쐌 Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F)
쐌 Transmission: Warmed-up*1
쐌 Electrical load: Not applied*2
쐌 Engine speed: Idle
*1: For A/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID
TEMP SE” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates less than 0.9V. For M/T models, drive vehicle for 10
minutes after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.
*2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are “OFF”. Steering wheel is straight
ahead.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
Inspection Procedure
SEF601Z
NAEC0719
NOTE:
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform “Basic Inspection”, EC-131.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with
CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
5. If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-160.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-159
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
NAEC0720
SEF613ZD
EC-160
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SEF768Z
IDX
EC-161
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
SEF615ZA
EC-162
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Description
Description
NAEC0045
Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer’s complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I
occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred
may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indicate the specific malfunctioning area.
COMMON I/I REPORT SITUATIONS
NAEC0045S01
STEP in Work Flow
GI
MA
EM
LC
Situation
II
The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than “0” or “[1t]”.
III
The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
IV
(1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
VI
The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area.
FE
CL
MT
Diagnostic Procedure
1
INSPECTION START
AT
NAEC0046
TF
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION — RELATED INFORMATION”, EC-100.
䊳
2
GO TO 2.
PD
CHECK GROUND TERMINALS
Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
Refer to GI-30, “GROUND INSPECTION”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace.
3
AX
SU
BR
SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
ST
Perform GI-25, “Incident Simulation Tests”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace.
4
RS
BT
CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS
Refer to GI-22, “How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Repair or replace connector.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-163
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0648
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
1
B
ECM ground
109
R
Ignition switch
111
L/B
ECM relay
(Self shutt-off)
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Idle speed
Engine ground
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
쐌 For a few seconds after turning ignition switch
“OFF”
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
쐌 A few seconds passed after turning ignition
switch “OFF”
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
115
B
ECM ground
[Engine is running]
쐌 Idle speed
Engine ground
116
B
ECM ground
[Engine is running]
쐌 Idle speed
Engine ground
119
120
B/W
B/W
Power supply for ECM
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
EC-164
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit
WIRING DIAGRAM
GI
NAEC0047
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC076E
EC-165
IDX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
MEC077E
EC-166
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1
NAEC0049
INSPECTION START
MA
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 10.
No
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
GI
EM
LC
CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE
CL
MT
AT
MBIB0015E
Voltage: Battery voltage
TF
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
3
PD
AX
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 10A fuse
쐌 Harness connectors M32, F23
쐌 Fuse block (J/B) connectors E4, M10
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM and ignition switch
䊳
SU
BR
Repair harness or connectors.
ST
4
CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and engine ground.
Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-167
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
5
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Joint connector
쐌 Harness connectors F27, M94
쐌 Harness connectors F22, M33
쐌 Harness for open between ECM relay and ground
䊳
6
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Disconnect ECM relay.
SEC425D
2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminals 1, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF956Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
7
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 10A fuse
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM relay and battery
䊳
8
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and ECM relay terminal 2. Refer to wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Go to “IGNITION SIGNAL”, EC-748.
NG
䊳
GO TO 9.
EC-168
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
9
GI
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M32, F23
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM relay and ECM
䊳
10
MA
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
EM
LC
1. Stop engine.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON” and then “OFF”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE
CL
MT
PBIB1630E
Voltage:
After turning ignition switch “OFF”, battery voltage will exist for a few seconds, then drop approximately
0V.
AT
TF
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 16.
NG (Battery voltage
does not exist.)
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG (Battery voltage
exists for more than a
few seconds.)
䊳
GO TO 13.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-169
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
11
CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
1. Disconnect ECM relay.
SEC425D
2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 7 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF957Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 13.
NG
䊳
GO TO 12.
12
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 7.5A fuse
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM relay and fuse
䊳
13
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ECM relay terminal 6.
Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 15.
NG
䊳
GO TO 14.
14
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M32, F23
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM and ECM relay
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-170
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
15
GI
CHECK ECM RELAY
1. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.
MA
EM
LC
SEF296X
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 16.
NG
䊳
Replace ECM relay.
16
CL
CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and engine ground.
Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 18.
NG
䊳
GO TO 17.
17
AT
TF
PD
AX
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
SU
Check the following.
쐌 Joint connector
쐌 Harness connectors F27, M94
쐌 Harness connectors F22, M33
쐌 Harness for open between ECM relay and ground
䊳
18
MT
BR
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
ST
RS
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-171
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Description
Description
NAEC1185
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for
real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication
line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electonic control units are equipped onto a
vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN
communication, control units are connected with 2 communication
lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information
transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives
data but selectively reads required data only.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
U1000*1
1000*1
U1001*2
1001*2
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
NAEC1186
Possible cause
쐌 ECM cannot communicate to other control
쐌 Harness or connectors
units.
CAN communication line
(CAN communication line is open or
쐌 ECM cannot communicate for more than
shorted.)
the specified time.
*1: This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
*2: The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
NAEC1187
Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 3 seconds.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”
EC-174.
EC-172
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1188
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC124E
EC-173
IDX
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
Go to EL-447, “CAN Communication Unit”.
EC-174
NAEC1189
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
Description
Description
NAEC0821
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
GI
NAEC0821S01
Input signal to ECM function
ECM
MA
Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed and piston position
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Vehicle speed signal*1
Vehicle speed
Intake
valve timing control
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
EM
LC
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEC419D
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the camshaft timing control valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to increase
engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-175
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
=NAEC0822
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
INT/V TIM (B1)
INT/V TIM (B2)
INT/V SOL (B1)
INT/V SOL (B2)
CONDITION
쐌 Engine: After warming up
쐌 Shift lever “N”
쐌 Quickly depressed accelerator
pedal
쐌 No-load
쐌 Engine: After warming up
쐌 Shift lever “N”
쐌 Quickly depressed accelerator
pedal
쐌 No-load
SPECIFICATION
Idle
0° CA
2,000 rpm
Approximately 12 - 18° CA
Idle
0%
2,000 rpm
Approximately 40%
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0011
0011
(Bank 1)
P0021
0021
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis
name
Intake valve timing
control performance
DTC Detecting Condition
There is a gap between angle of target and
phase-control angle degree.
NAEC0824
Possible Cause
쐌 Intake valve timing control solenoid
valve
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NAEC0824S01
When malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.
Detected items
Intake valve timing control
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0825
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
NOTE:
쐌 If DTC P0011 or P0021 is displayed with DTC P1111 or
P1136, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1111 or
P1136, EC-488.
쐌 If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
NAEC0825S03
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 conecutive
seconds.
ENG SPEED
1,200 - 2,000 rpm (A constant rotation
is maintained.)
COOLANT TEMPS
More than 60°C (140°F)
Selector lever
1st position
SEF353Z
EC-176
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
Driving location
4)
Driving vehicle uphill
(Increased engine load will help maintain the driving conditions required for
this test.)
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-177.
WITH GST
NAEC0825S04
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
1
CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-178.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
2
GI
MA
EM
LC
NAEC1191
FE
CL
MT
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-352 for CKP sensor (POS) and EC-359 for CMP sensor (PHASE).
OK or NG
䊳
AT
TF
INSPECTION END
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-177
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
Component Inspection
Component Inspection
=NAEC1192
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
NAEC1192S01
1.
2.
SEC557D
Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness
connector.
Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminals as follows.
Terminals
Resistance
1 and 2
7.0 - 7.5Ω at 20°C (68°F)
1 or 2 and ground
∞Ω
(Continuity should not exist)
EC-178
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER
Description
Description
NAEC0826
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
GI
NAEC0826S01
Sensor
ECM function
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
MA
Actuator
Heated
oxygen
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heatsensor 1
ers
heater control
EM
LC
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 1 heaters corresponding to the engine speed
and engine coolant temperature. The duty percent varies with engine coolant temperature when engine is
started.
OPERATION
NAEC0826S02
Engine speed
rpm
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heaters
Above 3,600
OFF
Below 3,600 after warming up
ON
CL
MT
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0827
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
HO2S1 HTR (B2)
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
쐌 Engine: After warming up
쐌 Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm
ON
쐌 Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
OFF
PD
NAEC0828
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
AT
TF
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
TERMINAL
NO.
FE
AX
SU
BR
DATA (DC Voltage)
ST
Approximately 7V★
RS
2
R/G
Heated oxygen sensor
1 heater (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
BT
PBIB0519E
[Engine is running]
쐌 Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-179
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 7V★
24
L/OR
Heated oxygen sensor
1 heater (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
PBIB0519E
[Engine is running]
쐌 Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
★: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC Detecting Condition
NAEC0829
Possible Cause
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
circuit is open or shorted.)
쐌 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
P0031
0031
(Bank 1)
P0051
0051
(Bank 2)
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control
circuit low
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM
through the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater.)
P0032
0032
(Bank 1)
P0052
0052
(Bank 2)
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control
circuit high
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sen- 쐌 Harness or connectors
sor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
(The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM
circuit is shorted.)
through the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater.)
쐌 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0830
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 11V and 16V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
1)
NAEC0830S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
EC-180
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-184.
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
쐌
GI
MA
EM
NAEC0830S02
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed.
Select “MODE 3” with GST.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-184.
When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should
be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II
because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is
recommended.
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-181
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1
NAEC0831
NAEC0831S01
MEC078E
EC-182
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
BANK 2
NAEC0831S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC079E
EC-183
IDX
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0832
CHECK HO2S1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
SEC426D
SEC427D
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between HO2S1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB0112E
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors M32, F23
쐌 Fuse block (J/B) connector M10
쐌 15A fuse
쐌 Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 1 and fuse
䊳
Repair harness or connectors.
EC-184
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK HO2S1 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MA
EM
LC
MTBL1349
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-185
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER
Check resistance between HO2S1 terminals as follows.
SEF249Y
MTBL1782
CAUTION:
쐌 Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
쐌 Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
5
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-186
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
Description
Description
NAEC0833
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
GI
NAEC0833S01
Sensor
ECM function
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
MA
Actuator
EM
Heated
oxygen
sensor
heater 2
control
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heaters
LC
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heaters corresponding to the engine speed,
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
NAEC0833S02
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heaters
Above 3,200
OFF
CL
ON
MT
Below 3,200 (After the following conditions are met.)
쐌 After warming up
쐌 After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000
rpm for one minute and at idle for one minute under no load
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0834
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
쐌 Engine speed: Below 3,200 rpm after the following conditions are met.
쐌 After warming up
ON
쐌 After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for one
minute and at idle for one minute under no load
AX
SU
NAEC0835
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
6
WIRE
COLOR
R/W
ITEM
Heated oxygen sensor
2 heater (bank 2)
TF
PD
OFF
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
TERMINAL
NO.
AT
SPECIFICATION
쐌 Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
쐌 Engine is running above 3,200 rpm.
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
FE
Engine speed rpm
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is below 3,200 rpm.
쐌 After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle for one
minute
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
쐌 Engine speed is above 3,200 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-187
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
25
WIRE
COLOR
P/B
ITEM
CONDITION
Heated oxygen sensor
2 heater (bank 1)
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is below 3,200 rpm.
쐌 After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle for one
minute
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
쐌 Engine speed is above 3,200 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC Detecting Condition
NAEC0836
Possible Cause
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
circuit is open or shorted.)
쐌 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
P0037
0037
(Bank 1)
P0057
0057
(Bank 2)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control
circuit low
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM
through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.)
P0038
0038
(Bank 1)
P0058
0058
(Bank 2)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control
circuit high
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sen- 쐌 Harness or connectors
sor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
(The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM
circuit is shorted.)
through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.)
쐌 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0837
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 11V and 16V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
NAEC0837S01
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
Let engine idle for one minute.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-192.
EC-188
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
쐌
NAEC0837S02
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
Let engine idle for one minute.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed at between 3,500 to
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
Let engine idle for one minute.
Select “MODE 3” with GST.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-192.
When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should
be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II
because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is
recommended.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-189
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1
NAEC0838
NAEC0838S01
MEC080E
EC-190
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
BANK 2
NAEC0838S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC081E
EC-191
IDX
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0839
CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
SEC426D
SEC427D
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ground.
SEF314X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors M32, F23
쐌 Fuse block (J/B) connector M10
쐌 15A fuse
쐌 Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse
䊳
Repair harness or connectors.
EC-192
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MA
EM
LC
MTBL1351
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
FE
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
CL
MT
Check the resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows.
AT
TF
PD
SEF315XB
CAUTION:
쐌 Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
쐌 Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
AX
SU
BR
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
5
ST
RS
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
BT
INSPECTION END
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-193
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I)
Application Notice
Application Notice
NAEC1384
Confirm the type of the vehicle. Refer to “How to Check Vehicle
Type”, EC-9.
Component Description
SEC266C
NAEC0840
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric
current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is controlled
by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film
is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the
greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain
the temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM
detects the air flow by means of this current change.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0841
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
MAS A/F SE-B1
CAL/LD VALUE
MASS AIRFLOW
CONDITION
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
SPECIFICATION
Idle
1.2 - 1.8V
2,500 rpm
1.6 - 2.2V
Idle
14.0 - 33.0%
2,500 rpm
12.0 - 25.0%
Idle
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
2,500 rpm
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
ditto
ditto
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0842
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
48
51
WIRE
COLOR
P/B
OR
ITEM
Sensors’ power supply
Mass air flow sensor
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
1.2 - 1.8V
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
1.6 - 2.2V
EC-194
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I)
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
GI
TERMINAL
NO.
67
WIRE
COLOR
B/P
ITEM
CONDITION
Mass air flow sensor
ground
DATA (DC Voltage)
MA
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
Approximately 0V
EM
LC
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0843
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
NOTE:
If DTC P0101 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the
trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-596.
DTC No.
P0101
0101
Trouble diagnosis
name
Mass air flow sensor
circuit range/
performance problem
DTC Detecting Condition
A)
B)
A high voltage from the sensor is sent to
ECM under light load driving condition.
A low voltage from the sensor is sent to
ECM under heavy load driving condition.
FE
CL
Possible Cause
MT
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 Mass air flow sensor
AT
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 Intake air leaks
쐌 Mass air flow sensor
TF
PD
AX
SU
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0844
Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If the
DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B”.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
BR
ST
RS
BT
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NAEC0844S01
NOTE:
If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with
engine stopped (Ignition switch “ON”) instead of running engine at
idle speed.
With CONSULT-II
SEF174Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC0844S0101
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
EC-195
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
5)
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-199.
With GST
NAEC0844S0102
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
NAEC0844S02
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
With CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
SEF243Y
NAEC0844S0201
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
If engine cannot be started, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-199.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check the voltage of MAS AIR/FL SE with “DATA MONITOR”.
Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm.
Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed
increases.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-199.
If OK, go to following step.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive
seconds.
ENG SPEED
More than 2,000 rpm
THRTL SEN 1
THRTL SEN 2
More than 3V
Selector lever
Suitable position
Driving location
Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load)
will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
8)
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-199.
PBIB0199E
Overall Function Check
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
NAEC0845
NAEC0845S01
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow
sensor circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
With GST
1)
2)
3)
4)
SEF534P
NAEC0845S0101
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “MODE 1” with GST.
Check the mass air flow sensor signal with “MODE 1”.
Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in
response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.
EC-196
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I)
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
5)
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-199.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-197
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0846
MEC082E
EC-198
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0847
GI
INSPECTION START
MA
Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated?
A or B
A
䊳
GO TO 3.
B
䊳
GO TO 2.
EM
LC
2
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check the following for connection.
쐌 Air duct
쐌 Vacuum hoses
쐌 Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold collector
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Reconnect the parts.
3
CL
MT
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEF959Y
䊳
GO TO 4.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-199
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
SEF960YA
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminals 2, 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEC428D
MTBL1352
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
5
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connector E1, M1
쐌 Harness connector M32, F23
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM relay and mass air flow sensor
쐌 Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
䊳
Repair harness or connectors.
EC-200
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect TCM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67, MAF sensor terminal 3 and TCM terminal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
GI
MA
EM
LC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
7
FE
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors F22, M33
쐌 Joint connector
쐌 Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
쐌 Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and TCM
䊳
CL
MT
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
AT
8
CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 5 and ECM terminal 51.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
TF
PD
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-201
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
9
CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.
SEF100V
MTBL1353
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect MAF sensor harness connector and connect it again.
Then repeat above check.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Replace mass air flow sensor.
10
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-202
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR (TYPE II)
Application Notice
Application Notice
NAEC1393
Confirm the type of the vehicle. Refer to “How to Check Vehicle
Type”, EC-9.
GI
MA
EM
LC
Component Description
PBIB1604E
NAEC1385
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric
current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is controlled
by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film
is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the
greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain
the temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM
detects the air flow by means of this current change.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1386
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
MAS A/F SE-B1
CAL/LD VALUE
MASS AIRFLOW
CONDITION
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
SPECIFICATION
Idle
1.0 - 1.3V
2,500 rpm
1.7 - 2.1V
Idle
14.0 - 33.0%
2,500 rpm
12.0 - 25.0%
Idle
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
2,500 rpm
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
51
67
OR
B/P
MT
AT
TF
PD
SU
ditto
BR
ditto
NAEC1387
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
WIRE
COLOR
CL
AX
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
TERMINAL
NO.
FE
ST
RS
BT
ITEM
Mass air flow sensor
Mass air flow sensor
ground
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
HA
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
1.0 - 1.3V
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
1.7 - 2.1V
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
Approximately 0V
EC-203
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR (TYPE II)
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
111
119
120
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
ECM relay
(Self shutt-off)
L/B
B/W
B/W
Power supply for ECM
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
쐌 For a few seconds after turning ignition switch
“OFF”
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
쐌 A few seconds passed after turning ignition
switch “OFF”
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1388
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P0101
0101
Trouble diagnosis
name
Mass air flow sensor
circuit range/
performance problem
DTC Detecting Condition
Possible Cause
A)
A high voltage from the sensor is sent to
ECM under light load driving condition.
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 Mass air flow sensor
B)
A low voltage from the sensor is sent to
ECM under heavy load driving condition.
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 Intake air leaks
쐌 Mass air flow sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1389
Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If the
DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B”.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
EC-204
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR (TYPE II)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NAEC1389S01
NOTE:
If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with
engine stopped (Ignition switch “ON”) instead of running engine at
idle speed.
With CONSULT-II
SEF174Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
NAEC1389S0101
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-208.
With GST
GI
MA
EM
LC
NAEC1389S0102
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
FE
CL
MT
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
AT
NAEC1389S02
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
With CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
SEF243Y
TF
NAEC1389S0201
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
If engine cannot be started, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-208.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check the voltage of MAS AIR/FL SE with “DATA MONITOR”.
Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm.
Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed
increases.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-208.
If OK, go to following step.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive
seconds.
ENG SPEED
More than 2,000 rpm
THRTL SEN 1
THRTL SEN 2
More than 3V
Selector lever
Suitable position
Driving location
Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load)
will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
8)
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-208.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
PBIB0199E
EC-205
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR (TYPE II)
Overall Function Check
Overall Function Check
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
NAEC1390
NAEC1390S01
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow
sensor circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
With GST
1)
2)
3)
4)
SEF534P
5)
NAEC1390S0101
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “MODE 1” with GST.
Check the mass air flow sensor signal with “MODE 1”.
Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in
response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-208.
EC-206
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR (TYPE II)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1391
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC515E
EC-207
IDX
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR (TYPE II)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1392
INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated?
A or B
A
䊳
GO TO 3.
B
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check the following for connection.
쐌 Air duct
쐌 Vacuum hoses
쐌 Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold collector
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Reconnect the parts.
3
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF959Y
䊳
GO TO 4.
EC-208
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR (TYPE II)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEF960YA
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PBIB1168E
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
5
AX
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
SU
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connector E1, M1
쐌 Harness connector M32, F23
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM relay and mass air flow sensor
쐌 Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
䊳
6
Repair harness or connectors.
CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect TCM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
PD
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-209
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR (TYPE II)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors F22, M33
쐌 Joint connector
쐌 Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
쐌 Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and TCM
䊳
8
Repair open circuit or short to gorund or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 51.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9
CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.
SEF100V
MTBL1806
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect MAF sensor harness connector and connect it again.
Then repeat above check.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Replace mass air flow sensor.
10
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-210
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I)
Application Notice
Application Notice
NAEC1394
Confirm the type of the vehicle. Refer to “How to Check Vehicle
Type”, EC-9.
GI
MA
EM
LC
Component Description
SEC266C
NAEC0746
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric
current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is controlled
by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film
is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the
greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain
the temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM
detects the air flow by means of this current change.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0747
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
MAS A/F SE-B1
CAL/LD VALUE
MASS AIRFLOW
CONDITION
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
SPECIFICATION
Idle
1.2 - 1.8V
2,500 rpm
1.6 - 2.2V
Idle
14.0 - 33.0%
2,500 rpm
12.0 - 25.0%
Idle
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
2,500 rpm
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
48
51
P/B
OR
MT
AT
TF
PD
SU
ditto
BR
ditto
NAEC0748
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
WIRE
COLOR
CL
AX
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
TERMINAL
NO.
FE
ST
RS
BT
ITEM
Sensors’ power supply
Mass air flow sensor
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
1.2 - 1.8V
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
1.6 - 2.2V
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-211
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I)
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
67
WIRE
COLOR
B/P
ITEM
CONDITION
Mass air flow sensor
ground
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
Approximately 0V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0749
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
NOTE:
If DTC P0102 or P0103 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229.
Refer to EC-596.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC Detecting Condition
Possible Cause
P0102
0102
Mass air flow sensor
circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent 쐌 Harness or connectors
to ECM when engine is running.
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 Intake air leaks
쐌 Mass air flow sensor
P0103
0103
Mass air flow sensor
circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 Mass air flow sensor
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NAEC0749S01
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Detected items
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Mass air flow sensor circuit
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0751
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103
With CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC0751S01
NAEC0751S0101
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 6 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-215.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
EC-212
NAEC0751S0102
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102
With CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC0751S02
NAEC0751S0201
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-215.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
GI
MA
EM
NAEC0751S0202
LC
SEF058Y
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-213
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0753
MEC082E
EC-214
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0754
GI
INSPECTION START
MA
Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated?
P0102 or P0103
P0103
䊳
GO TO 3.
P0102
䊳
GO TO 2.
EM
LC
2
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check the following for connection.
쐌 Air duct
쐌 Vacuum hoses
쐌 Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold collector
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Reconnect the parts.
3
CL
MT
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEF959Y
䊳
GO TO 4.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-215
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
SEF960YA
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminals 2, 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEC428D
MTBL1352
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
5
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connector E1, M1
쐌 Harness connector M32, F23
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM relay and mass air flow sensor
쐌 Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
䊳
Repair harness or connectors.
EC-216
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect TCM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67, MAF sensor terminal 3 and TCM terminal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
GI
MA
EM
LC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
7
FE
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connector F22, M33
쐌 Joint connector
쐌 Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
쐌 Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and TCM
䊳
CL
MT
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
AT
8
CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 5 and ECM terminal 51.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
TF
PD
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-217
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
9
CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.
SEF100V
MTBL1353
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect MAF sensor harness connector and connect it again.
Then repeat above check.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Replace mass air flow sensor.
10
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-218
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR (TYPE II)
Application Notice
Application Notice
NAEC1402
Confirm the type of the vehicle. Refer to “How to Check Vehicle
Type”, EC-9.
GI
MA
EM
LC
Component Description
PBIB1604E
NAEC1395
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric
current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is controlled
by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film
is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the
greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain
the temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM
detects the air flow by means of this current change.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1396
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
MAS A/F SE-B1
CAL/LD VALUE
MASS AIRFLOW
CONDITION
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
SPECIFICATION
Idle
1.0 - 1.3V
2,500 rpm
1.7 - 2.1V
Idle
14.0 - 33.0%
2,500 rpm
12.0 - 25.0%
Idle
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
2,500 rpm
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
51
67
OR
B/P
MT
AT
TF
PD
SU
ditto
BR
ditto
NAEC1397
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
WIRE
COLOR
CL
AX
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
TERMINAL
NO.
FE
ST
RS
BT
ITEM
Mass air flow sensor
Mass air flow sensor
ground
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
HA
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
1.0 - 1.3V
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
1.7 - 2.1V
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
Approximately 0V
EC-219
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR (TYPE II)
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
111
119
120
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
ECM relay
(Self shutt-off)
L/B
B/W
B/W
Power supply for ECM
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
쐌 For a few seconds after turning ignition switch
“OFF”
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
쐌 A few seconds passed after turning ignition
switch “OFF”
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1398
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC Detecting Condition
Possible Cause
P0102
0102
Mass air flow sensor
circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent 쐌 Harness or connectors
to ECM when engine is running.
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 Intake air leaks
쐌 Mass air flow sensor
P0103
0103
Mass air flow sensor
circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 Mass air flow sensor
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NAEC1398S01
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Detected items
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Mass air flow sensor circuit
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1399
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103
With CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC1399S01
NAEC1399S0101
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 6 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-223.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
EC-220
NAEC1399S0102
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR (TYPE II)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102
With CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC1399S02
NAEC1399S0201
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-223.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
GI
MA
EM
NAEC1399S0202
LC
SEF058Y
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-221
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR (TYPE II)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1400
MEC515E
EC-222
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR (TYPE II)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1401
GI
INSPECTION START
MA
Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated?
P0102 or P0103
P0103
䊳
GO TO 3.
P0102
䊳
GO TO 2.
EM
LC
2
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check the following for connection.
쐌 Air duct
쐌 Vacuum hoses
쐌 Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold collector
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Reconnect the parts.
3
CL
MT
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEF959Y
䊳
GO TO 4.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-223
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR (TYPE II)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
SEF960YA
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB1168E
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
5
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connector E1, M1
쐌 Harness connector M32, F23
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM relay and mass air flow sensor
쐌 Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
䊳
6
Repair harness or connectors.
CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect TCM harness connector
Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
EC-224
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR (TYPE II)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
GI
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connector F22, M33
쐌 Joint connector
쐌 Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
쐌 Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and TCM
䊳
8
MA
EM
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
LC
CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 51.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9
CL
MT
CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF100V
BR
ST
RS
BT
MTBL1806
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect MAF sensor harness connector and connect it again.
Then repeat above check.
HA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Replace mass air flow sensor.
10
SC
EL
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-225
IDX
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR (TYPE I)
Application Notice
Application Notice
NAEC1403
Confirm the type of the vehicle. Refer to “How to Check Vehicle
Type”, EC-9.
Component Description
NAEC0852
The intake air temperature sensor is mounted to the air duct housing. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive
to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
Intake air
temperature °C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
SEF960YA
25 (77)
3.32
1.9 - 2.1
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 34
(Intake air temperature sensor) and body ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
SEF012P
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0112
0112
P0113
0113
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC Detecting Condition
NAEC0853
Possible Cause
Intake air temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent 쐌 Harness or connectors
sensor circuit low
to ECM.
(The sensor circuit is open or
input
shorted.)
쐌 Intake air temperature sensor
Intake air temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sensor circuit high
sent to ECM.
input
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0854
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
EC-226
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR (TYPE I)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC0854S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-229.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
GI
MA
EM
NAEC0854S02
LC
SEF058Y
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-227
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR (TYPE I)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0855
MEC083E
EC-228
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR (TYPE I)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0856
GI
CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (built-in intake air temperature sensor) harness connector.
EM
LC
FE
SEF960YA
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground.
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEC429D
PD
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair harness or connectors.
2
CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect TCM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67, MAF sensor terminal 3 and TCM terminal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
3
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
SC
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors F22, M33
쐌 Joint connector
쐌 Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
쐌 Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and TCM
䊳
AX
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-229
EL
IDX
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR (TYPE I)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-230, “Component Inspection”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
5
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
NAEC1193
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
NAEC1193S01
Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor terminals 1 and 3 under the following conditions.
Intake air temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
25 (77)
1.9 - 2.1
If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
SEC266C
SEF012P
EC-230
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR (TYPE II)
Application Notice
Application Notice
NAEC1410
Confirm the type of the vehicle. Refer to “How to Check Vehicle
Type”, EC-9.
GI
MA
EM
LC
Component Description
NAEC1404
The intake air temperature sensor is mounted to the air duct housing. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive
to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
Intake air
temperature °C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
3.32
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
P0112
0112
P0113
0113
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF012P
Trouble diagnosis
name
MT
AT
1.9 - 2.1
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 34
(Intake air temperature sensor) and body ground.
DTC No.
CL
kΩ
SEF960YA
25 (77)
FE
NAEC1405
BR
DTC Detecting Condition
Possible Cause
Intake air temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent 쐌 Harness or connectors
sensor circuit low
to ECM.
(The sensor circuit is open or
input
shorted.)
쐌 Intake air temperature sensor
Intake air temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sensor circuit high
sent to ECM.
input
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ST
RS
BT
NAEC1406
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-231
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR (TYPE II)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC1406S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-234.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
EC-232
NAEC1406S02
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR (TYPE II)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1407
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC516E
EC-233
IDX
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR (TYPE II)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1408
CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (built-in intake air temperature sensor) harness connector.
SEF960YA
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between terminal 5 and ground.
PBIB1169E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair harness or connectors.
2
CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect TCM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
3
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors F22, M33
쐌 Joint connector
쐌 Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
쐌 Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and TCM
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-234
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR (TYPE II)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-235, “Component Inspection”.
MA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
5
EM
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
LC
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
FE
CL
MT
AT
Component Inspection
NAEC1409
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
NAEC1409S01
Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor terminals 1 and 3 under the following conditions.
Intake air temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
25 (77)
1.9 - 2.1
If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
TF
PD
AX
SU
PBIB1604E
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF012P
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-235
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0857
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the
engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor
which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical
resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K
Engine coolant
temperature °C (°F)
SEF012P
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
−10 (14)
4.4
7.0 - 11.4
20 (68)
3.5
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
2.2
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.9
0.236 - 0.260
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 73
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0858
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis
name
P0117
0117
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit low input
P0118
0118
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit high input
DTC Detecting Condition
Possible Cause
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent 쐌 Harness or connectors
to ECM.
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 Engine coolant temperature sensor
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NAEC0858S01
When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
EC-236
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
On Board Diagnosis Logic (Cont’d)
Detected items
GI
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch
“ON” or “START”.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-II
display)
Condition
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit
Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start
40°C (104°F)
More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or
Start
80°C (176°F)
MA
EM
LC
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
(Depends on the time)
Except as shown above
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature is activated, the cooling fan operates while
engine is running.
FE
CL
MT
DTC Confirmation Procedure
AT
NAEC0859
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
PD
NAEC0859S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-239.
WITH GST
TF
AX
SU
NAEC0859S02
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-237
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0860
MEC084E
EC-238
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0861
GI
CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor connector.
EM
LC
FE
SEC426D
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between ECT sensor connector terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEC106D
PD
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
AX
SU
2
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors F112, F28
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor
䊳
3
Repair harness or connectors.
CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-239
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors F112, F28
쐌 Joint connector F204
쐌 Harness for open between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor
쐌 Harness for open between TCM and engine coolant temperature sensor
䊳
5
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
SEF304X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
6
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-240
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
Component Description
Component Description
PBIB0145E
=NAEC1194
Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds
to the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from
these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to
make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1195
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
THRTL SEN2*
CONDITION
쐌 Ignition switch:
ON (Engine stopped)
쐌 Shift lever:
D (A/T model)
1st (M/T model)
SPECIFICATION
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
AX
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
SU
NAEC1201
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
47
50
WIRE
COLOR
L
BR
ITEM
Sensor’s power supply
(Throttle position sensor)
TF
PD
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
TERMINAL
NO.
AT
CONDITION
[Ignition switch “ON”]
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Shift lever position is “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
Throttle position sensor 쐌 Accelerator pedal fully released
1
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Engine stopped
Shift lever position is “D” (A/T models)
Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
Accelerator pedal fully depressed
EC-241
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
More than 0.36V
SC
EL
Less than 4.75V
IDX
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
66
69
WIRE
COLOR
BR/Y
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
Sensor’s ground
BR/W
W/R
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Shift lever position is “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
Throttle position sensor 쐌 Accelerator pedal fully released
2
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
91
DATA (DC Voltage)
Sensor’s power supply
(APP sensor 2)
Less than 4.75V
Engine stopped
Shift lever position is “D” (A/T models)
Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
Accelerator pedal fully depressed
More than 0.36V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1196
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC Detecting Condition
P0122
0122
Throttle position sensor 2 circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 2
is sent to ECM.
P0123
0123
Throttle position sensor 2 circuit high
input
An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 2
is sent to ECM.
Possible Cause
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The TP sensor 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
쐌 Electric throttle control actuator (TP
sensor 2)
쐌 Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NAEC1196S01
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within
+10 degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1197
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
EC-242
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
1)
2)
3)
4)
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-245.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-243
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1198
TEC846
EC-244
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1199
GI
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
EM
LC
FE
SEF959Y
䊳
2
CL
GO TO 2.
MT
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEC433D
SU
3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
BR
ST
RS
BT
PBIB0082E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-245
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace open circuit.
4
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
쐌 ECM terminal 47 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 1. Refer to “Wiring Diagram”, EC-244.
쐌 ECM terminal 91 and APP sensor terminal 10. Refer to “Wiring Diagram”, EC-718.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5
CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-722.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
6
1.
2.
3.
4.
REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”, EC-81.
Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
7
INSPECTION END
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and ECM terminal 66.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-246
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
GI
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
MA
EM
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9
LC
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-247.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
GO TO 10.
10
FE
CL
REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
MT
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
3. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
11
AT
INSPECTION END
TF
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
PD
INSPECTION END
AX
SU
Component Inspection
SEC434D
NAEC1200
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Set selector lever to “D” position (A/T models) or “1st” position
(M/T models).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1), 69
(TP sensor 2) and engine ground under the following conditions.
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
50
(Throttle position sensor
1)
Fully released
More than 0.36V
Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
Fully released
Less than 4.75V
Fully depressed
More than 0.36V
69
(Throttle position sensor
2)
6.
7.
If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the
next step.
Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
EC-247
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
Component Inspection (Cont’d)
8.
Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
EC-248
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR
Description
Description
NAEC0869
NOTE:
If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117, P0118, first perform the
trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117, P0118. Refer to EC-236.
GI
MA
EM
LC
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NAEC0869S01
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the
engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor
which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical
resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
FE
CL
MT
SEF594K
AT
Engine coolant
temperature °C (°F)
SEF012P
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
−10 (14)
4.4
9.2
20 (68)
3.5
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
2.2
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.9
0.236 - 0.260
TF
PD
AX
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 73
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0125
0125
Trouble diagnosis
name
Insufficient engine
coolant temperature
for closed loop fuel
control
DTC Detecting Condition
쐌 Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not
practical, even when some time has passed
after starting the engine.
쐌 Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for
closed loop fuel control.
NAEC0870
HA
Possible Cause
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 Engine coolant temperature sensor
쐌 Thermostat
SC
EL
IDX
EC-249
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0871
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF174Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
NAEC0871S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 10°C (50°F).
If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK.
If it is below 10°C (50°F), go to following step.
Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 10°C (50°F)
within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test result will
be OK.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-250.
WITH GST
NAEC0871S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0872
CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor connector terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
SEF304X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
EC-250
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2
GI
CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION
When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine coolant
does not flow.
MA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to LC-18, “Thermostat”.
3
EM
LC
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
쐌 Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
쐌 Refer to wiring diagram, EC-238.
䊳
INSPECTION END
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-251
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0767
The intake air temperature sensor is mounted to the air duct housing. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive
to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
Intake air
temperature °C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
SEF960YA
25 (77)
3.32
1.9 - 2.1
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 34
(Intake air temperature sensor) and body ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
SEF012P
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0127
0127
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC Detecting Condition
NAEC0768
Possible Cause
Intake air temperature Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent 쐌 Harness or connectors
too high
to ECM, compared with the voltage signal from
(The sensor circuit is open or
engine coolant temperature sensor.
shorted.)
쐌 Intake air temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0770
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
TESTING CONDITION:
This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the
shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be
easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
a)
b)
c)
d)
쐌
SEF176Y
2)
NAEC0770S03
Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C
(194°F).
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check the engine coolant temperature.
If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C
(194°F), turn ignition switch “OFF” and cool down engine.
Perform the following steps before engine coolant temperature
is above 90°C (194°F).
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
EC-252
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
3)
4)
5)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100
consecutive seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-253.
6)
WITH GST
1
CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-230 (Type I), 235 (Type II).
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
2
MA
EM
NAEC0770S04
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
GI
LC
NAEC0772
FE
CL
MT
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
쐌 Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
쐌 Refer to wiring diagram, EC-228 (Type I), 233 (Type II).
䊳
INSPECTION END
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-253
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1202
Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long enough.
This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat open stuck.
DTC No.
P0128
0128
Trouble diagnosis
name
Thermostat function
DTC Detecting Condition
Possible Cause
The engine coolant temperature does not reach to 쐌 Thermostat
specified temperature even though the engine has 쐌 Leakage from sealing portion of therrun long enough.
mostat
쐌 Engine coolant temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1203
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
쐌 For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C
(14°F) or higher.
쐌 For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of
–10°C (14°F) to 65°C (149°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
NAEC1203S01
Replace thermostat with new one. Refer to LC-18, “Thermostat”. Use only a genuine NISSAN thermostat as a replacement. If an incorrect thermostat is used, the MIL may come on.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F).
If it is below 65°C (149°F), go to following step.
If it is above 65°C (149°F), cool down the engine to less than
65°C (149°F), then retry from step 1.
Drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following
conditions.
VHCL SPEED SE
80 - 120 km/h (50 - 75 MPH)
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-255.
WITH GST
1)
Follow the prodedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
EC-254
NAEC1203S02
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1204
GI
CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
MA
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor.
3. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals under the following conditions.
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF304X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-255
DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0873
The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold.
It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM
adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel
ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from
1V to 0V.
SEF463R
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0874
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B2)
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
쐌 Engine: After warming up
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
LEAN +, RICH
Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0875
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
16
G/B
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Periodically change)
35
G
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Periodically change)
EC-256
DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0876
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the heated
oxygen sensor 1 output is not inordinately high.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF301UA
DTC No.
P0132
0132
(Bank 1)
P0152
0152
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC Detecting Condition
Heated oxygen senAn excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sor 1 circuit high volt- sent to ECM.
age
Possible Cause
FE
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 Heated oxygen sensor 1
CL
MT
DTC Confirmation Procedure
AT
NAEC0877
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF174Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
PD
NAEC0877S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-260.
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
쐌
TF
NAEC0877S02
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes.
Select “MODE 3” with GST.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-260.
When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should
be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II
because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is
recommended.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-257
DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1
NAEC0878
NAEC0878S01
MEC087E
EC-258
DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
BANK 2
NAEC0878S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC088E
EC-259
IDX
DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0879
INSPECTION START
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
SEC426D
SEC427D
䊳
2
GO TO 2.
RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1.
Tightening torque:
40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
䊳
3
GO TO 3.
CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 4 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-260
DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MA
EM
LC
MTBL1354
Continuity should exist.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S1 terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
FE
CL
MTBL1355
Continuity should not exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
MT
OK or NG
AT
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
TF
5
CHECK HO2S1 CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
PD
AX
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 6.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 7.
SU
NG
䊳
Repair or replace harness or connectors.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-261
DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF967Y
6. Check the following.
쐌 “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” more than 5 times in
10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown left:
SEF647Y
쐌 “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
쐌 “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
쐌 “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
쐌 Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
쐌 Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
EC-262
DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
GI
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 bank 1 signal) or 16 (HO2S1 bank 2 signal) and engine
ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEC430D
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than 5 times within 10 seconds.
The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.
The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V
CAUTION:
쐌 Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
쐌 Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
8
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-263
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0880
The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold.
It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM
adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel
ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from
1V to 0V.
SEF463R
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0881
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B2)
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
쐌 Engine: After warming up
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
LEAN +, RICH
Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0882
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
16
G/B
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Periodically change)
35
G
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Periodically change)
EC-264
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0883
To judge the malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of heated oxygen sensor 1 signal. The
time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel
feedback control constant, and heated oxygen sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time
[heated oxygen sensor 1 cycling time index] is inordinately long or
not.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF010V
DTC No.
P0133
0133
(Bank 1)
P0153
0153
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis
name
Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit slow
response
DTC Detecting Condition
The response of the voltage signal from the sensor takes more than the specified time.
Possible Cause
FE
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 Heated oxygen sensor 1
쐌 Fuel pressure
쐌 Injectors
쐌 Intake air leaks
쐌 Exhaust gas leaks
쐌 PCV valve
쐌 Mass air flow sensor
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0884
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
쐌 Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
쐌 Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-265
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH CONSULT-II
NAEC0884S01
1)
2)
3)
SEF338Z
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2) P0133/
P0153” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
4) Touch “START”.
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.
6) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It
will take approximately 40 to 50 seconds.)
ENG SPEED
1,600 - 3,100 rpm
Vehicle speed
More than 80 km/h (50 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL
5 - 12 msec
Selector lever
Suitable position
SEF339Z
7)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-269.
SEF658Y
Overall Function Check
NAEC0885
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
SEC430D
쐌
4)
NAEC0885S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 bank
1 signal) or 16 (HO2S1 bank 2 signal) and engine ground.
Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more
than 5 times within 10 seconds.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0
- 0.3V
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-269.
EC-266
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1
NAEC0886
GI
NAEC0886S01
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC087E
EC-267
IDX
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
BANK 2
NAEC0886S02
MEC088E
EC-268
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0887
GI
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
EM
LC
FE
SEF959Y
䊳
CL
GO TO 2.
RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
MT
Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1.
Tightening torque:
40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
AT
2
䊳
3
TF
GO TO 3.
PD
CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEC635D
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace.
4
RS
BT
HA
CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-269
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
SEF968Y
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
Erase the DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-100.
Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-304,
312.
No
䊳
GO TO 6.
EC-270
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
GI
CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEC426D
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEC427D
3. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 4 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-271
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL1356
Continuity should exist.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S1 terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL1357
Continuity should not exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-272
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
GI
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER
Check resistance between HO2S1 terminals as follows.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF249Y
TF
PD
MTBL1782
CAUTION:
쐌 Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
쐌 Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
GO TO 13.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-273
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
9
CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.
SEF100V
MTBL1807
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and connect it again.
Then repeat above check.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Replace mass air flow sensor.
EC-274
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
10
1.
2.
3.
4.
GI
CHECK PCV VALVE
Install all removed parts.
Start engine and let it idle.
Remove PCV valve ventilation hose from PCV valve.
Make sure that a hissing noise will be heard as air passes through it and a strong vacuum should be felt immediately
when a finger is placed over valve inlet.
MA
EM
LC
FE
PBIB1589E
CL
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 11.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 12.
NG
䊳
Replace PCV valve.
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-275
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
11
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF967Y
6. Check the following.
쐌 “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below.
SEF647Y
쐌 “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
쐌 “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
쐌 “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
쐌 Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
쐌 Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 13.
NG
䊳
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
EC-276
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
12
GI
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 bank 1 signal) or 16 (HO2S1 bank 2 signal) and engine
ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEC430D
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than 5 times within 10 seconds.
The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.
The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V
CAUTION:
쐌 Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
쐌 Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 13.
NG
䊳
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
13
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-277
DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0888
The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold.
It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM
adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel
ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from
1V to 0V.
SEF463R
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0889
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B2)
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
쐌 Engine: After warming up
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
LEAN +, RICH
Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0890
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
16
G/B
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Periodically change)
35
G
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Periodically change)
EC-278
DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0891
Under the condition in which the heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is
not input, the ECM circuits will read a continuous approximately
0.3V. Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output voltage is
within 200 to 400 mV range is monitored, and the diagnosis checks
that this time is not inordinately long.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF237U
DTC No.
P0134
0134
(Bank 1)
P0154
0154
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis
name
Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit no activity detected
DTC Detecting Condition
Possible Cause
The voltage from the sensor is constantly approx.
0.3V.
FE
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 Heated oxygen sensor 1
CL
MT
DTC Confirmation Procedure
AT
NAEC0892
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
SEC748C
WITH CONSULT-II
SEC750C
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2) P0134/P0154” of “HO2S1” in “DTC
WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Touch “START”.
4) Let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 4.
5) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It
will take approximately 10 to 60 seconds.)
ENG SPEED
1,500 - 2,800 rpm
Vehicle speed
More than 64 km/h (40 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL
3.0 - 14 msec
Selector lever
Suitable position
6)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
EC-279
PD
AX
SU
NAEC0892S01
1)
2)
SEC749C
TF
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-283.
During this test, P1148 and P1168 may be stored in ECM.
Overall Function Check
NAEC0893
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
SEC430D
쐌
4)
NAEC0893S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 bank
1 signal) or 16 (HO2S1 bank 2 signal) and engine ground.
Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 to 0.4V.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-283.
EC-280
DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1
=NAEC0894
GI
NAEC0894S01
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC087E
EC-281
IDX
DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
BANK 2
NAEC0894S02
MEC088E
EC-282
DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0895
GI
CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
EM
LC
FE
SEF959Y
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEC426D
PD
AX
SU
BR
SEC427D
4. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 4 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
ST
RS
OK or NG
BT
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-283
DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2
CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL1358
Continuity should exist.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S1 terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL1359
Continuity should not exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 3.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-284
DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
GI
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF967Y
6. Check the following.
쐌 “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEF647Y
쐌 “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
쐌 “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
쐌 “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
쐌 Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
쐌 Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-285
DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 bank 1 signal) or 16 (HO2S1 bank 2 signal) and engine
ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
SEC430D
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than 5 times within 10 seconds.
The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.
The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V
CAUTION:
쐌 Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
쐌 Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
5
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-286
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
Component Description
Component Description
SEF327R
NAEC0896
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are
shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used
for engine control operation.
GI
MA
EM
LC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0897
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
HO2S2 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S2 MNTR
(B2)
CONDITION
쐌 Engine: After warming up
쐌 After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm
for one minute and at idle for
one minute under no load
SPECIFICATION
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
Revving engine from idle up to
3,000 rpm
LEAN +, RICH
AT
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
55
74
WIRE
COLOR
OR/L
OR
CL
MT
NAEC0898
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
FE
ITEM
CONDITION
Heated oxygen sensor
2 (bank 2)
Heated oxygen sensor
2 (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm after
0 - Approximately 1.0V
the following conditions are met.
쐌 After keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle for one
minute under no load
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PD
AX
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm after
the following conditions are met.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
쐌 After keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle for one
minute under no load
TF
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
NAEC0899
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold)
causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of
heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the voltage is
unusually high during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEF305UA
EC-287
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
On Board Diagnosis Logic (Cont’d)
DTC No.
P0138
0138
(Bank 1)
P0158
0158
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC Detecting Condition
Heated oxygen senAn excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sor 2 circuit high volt- sent to ECM.
age
Possible Cause
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 Heated oxygen sensor 2
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0900
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
SEF189Y
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
쐌
NAEC0900S01
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
Let engine idle for two minutes.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-291.
NAEC0900S02
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
Let engine idle for two minutes.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
Let engine idle for two minutes.
Select “Mode 3” with GST.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-291, “Diagnostic Procedure”.
When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should
be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II
because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is
recommended.
EC-288
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1
NAEC0902
GI
NAEC0902S01
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC089E
EC-289
IDX
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
BANK 2
NAEC0902S02
MEC090E
EC-290
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0903
GI
INSPECTION START
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
EM
LC
FE
SEF959Y
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEC426D
PD
AX
SU
BR
SEC427D
4. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
䊳
ST
GO TO 2.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-291
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2
CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL1360
Continuity should exist.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S2 terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL1361
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3
CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
4
CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTORS FOR WATER
Check heated oxygen sensor 2 connector and harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace harness or connectors.
EC-292
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
GI
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
Let engine idle for one minute.
Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULTII.
6. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
SEF972YA
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.68V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.48V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
쐌 Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto
a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
쐌 Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner
tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
MT
AT
TF
OK or NG
PD
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-293
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-I
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
Let engine idle for one minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 bank 1 signal) or 55 (HO2S2 bank 2 signal) and engine
ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SEC432D
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during this procedure.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
7
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-II
Idle vehicle for 10 minutes, then check voltage between the same terminals as in Test No. 6; or check voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), “D” position with “OD” OFF (A/T).
The voltage should go below 0.48V at least once during this procedure.
CAUTION:
쐌 Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
쐌 Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
8
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-294
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
Component Description
Component Description
SEF327R
NAEC0904
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are
shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used
for engine control operation.
GI
MA
EM
LC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0905
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
HO2S2 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S2 MNTR
(B2)
CONDITION
쐌 Engine: After warming up
쐌 After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm
for one minute and at idle for
one minute under no load
SPECIFICATION
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
Revving engine from idle up to
3,000 rpm
LEAN +, RICH
AT
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
55
74
WIRE
COLOR
OR/L
OR
CL
MT
NAEC0906
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
FE
ITEM
CONDITION
Heated oxygen sensor
2 (bank 2)
Heated oxygen sensor
2 (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm after
0 - Approximately 1.0V
the following conditions are met.
쐌 After keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle for one
minute under no load
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PD
AX
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm after
the following conditions are met.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
쐌 After keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle for one
minute under no load
TF
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
NAEC0907
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold)
causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of
heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the switching
response of the sensor’s voltage is faster than specified during the
various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEF302U
EC-295
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
On Board Diagnosis Logic (Cont’d)
DTC No.
P0139
0139
(Bank 1)
P0159
0159
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis
name
Heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit slow
response
DTC Detecting Condition
It takes more time for the sensor to respond
between rich and lean than the specified time.
Possible Cause
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 Heated oxygen sensor 2
쐌 Fuel pressure
쐌 Injectors
쐌 Intake air leaks
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0908
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
쐌 Open engine hood before conducting following procedure.
쐌 For the best results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at
a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
SEF666Y
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
SEF667Y
6)
7)
a)
b)
c)
d)
SEF668Y
NAEC0908S01
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
Let engine idle for one minute.
Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” or “HO2S2 (B2) P0159” of
“HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Follow the instruction of CONSULT-II.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”.
If NG is displayed, refer to EC-300, “Diagnostic Procedure”.
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and leave the vehicle in a cool place
(soak the vehicle).
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in
“DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up while monitoring “COOLAN
TEMP/S” indication on CONSULT-II.
When “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F),
go to step 3.
Overall Function Check
NAEC0909
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the rear heated
oxygen sensor circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
SEC432D
NAEC0909S01
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
EC-296
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
Let engine idle for one minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 bank
1 signal) or 55 (HO2S2 bank 2 signal) and engine ground.
Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not
necessary.
Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH)
in 3rd gear position (M/T), “D” position with “OD” OFF (A/T).
A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-300.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-297
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1
=NAEC0910
NAEC0910S01
MEC089E
EC-298
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
BANK 2
NAEC0910S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC090E
EC-299
IDX
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0911
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF959Y
䊳
2
GO TO 2.
CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
SEF968Y
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Make sure DTC No. P0102 is displayed.
Erase the DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-100.
Make sure DTC No. P0000 is displayed.
Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-304,
312.
No
䊳
GO TO 3.
EC-300
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEC426D
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEC427D
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
TF
PD
AX
MTBL1362
Continuity should exist.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S2 terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
SU
BR
ST
MTBL1363
Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-301
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors
5
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
Let engine idle for one minute.
Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULTII.
6. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SEF972YA
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.68V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.48V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
쐌 Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto
a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
쐌 Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner
tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
EC-302
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
GI
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-I
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
Let engine idle for one minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 bank 1 signal) or 55 (HO2S2 bank 2 signal) and engine
ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
SEC432D
MT
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during this procedure.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
7
TF
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-II
PD
Idle vehicle for 10 minutes, then check voltage between the same terminals as in Test No. 6; or check voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), “D” position with “OD” OFF (A/T).
The voltage should go below 0.48V at least once during this procedure.
CAUTION:
쐌 Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
쐌 Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
8
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-303
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0912
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual
mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio
based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen
sensors 1. The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to
correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large
(The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL
(2 trip detection logic).
Sensor
Heated oxygen sensors 1
DTC No.
P0171
0171
(Bank 1)
P0174
0174
(Bank 2)
Input Signal to ECM
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Trouble diagnosis
name
Fuel injection system
too lean
ECM function
Fuel injection control
Actuator
Injectors
DTC Detecting Condition
Fuel injection system does not operate Properly,
the amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.)
Possible Cause
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Intake air leaks
Heated oxygen sensor 1
Injectors
Exhaust gas leaks
Incorrect fuel pressure
Lack of fuel
Mass air flow sensor
Incorrect PCV hose connection
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0913
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
SEF968Y
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
NAEC0913S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF-LEARN CONTROL” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this
stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-308.
If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine
starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-308. If engine does
not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
EC-304
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
SEF960Y
NAEC0913S02
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4) Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5) Select “MODE 7” with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected.
6) Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
7) Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
8) Select “MODE 7” with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so,
go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-308.
9) If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
10) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine
starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-308. If engine does
not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-305
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1
NAEC0914
NAEC0914S01
MEC091E
EC-306
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
BANK 2
NAEC0914S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC092E
EC-307
IDX
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0915
CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
SEC635D
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace.
2
CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
2. Check PCV hose connection.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace.
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL1364
Continuity should exist.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S1 terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL1365
Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-308
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-64.
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-64.
At idling:
When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is connected.
235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi)
When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is disconnected.
294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi)
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
5
MA
EM
LC
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
FE
Check the following.
쐌 Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-763.)
쐌 Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-65.)
쐌 Fuel lines (Refer to MA-17, “Checking Fuel Lines”.)
쐌 Fuel filter for clogging
CL
䊳
6
MT
Repair or replace.
AT
CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
TF
PD
AX
SU
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor
circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-211 (Type I), 219 (Type II).
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-309
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF070Y
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
PBIB1725E
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Perform trouble diagnosis for “INJECTORS”, EC-758.
EC-310
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
GI
CHECK INJECTOR
Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect injector harness connectors.
Remove injector gallery assembly. Refer to EC-66.
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
For DTC P0171, reconnect injector harness connectors on bank 1.
For DTC P0174, reconnect injector harness connectors on bank 2.
Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
Prepare pans or saucers under each injector.
Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
For DTC P0171, make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors on bank 1.
For DTC P0174, make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors on bank 2.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
PBIB1726E
AT
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each injector.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Replace injectors from which fuel does not spray out. Always replace O-ring with new
ones.
9
TF
PD
AX
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
SU
INSPECTION END
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-311
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0916
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual
mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio
based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen
sensors 1. The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to
correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large
(The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL
(2 trip detection logic).
Sensor
Heated oxygen sensors 1
DTC No.
P0172
0172
(Bank 1)
P0175
0175
(Bank 2)
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Trouble diagnosis
name
Fuel injection system
too rich
ECM function
Input Signal to ECM
Fuel injection control
Actuator
Injectors
DTC Detecting Condition
Fuel injection system does not operate properly,
the amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.)
Possible Cause
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Heated oxygen sensor 1
Injectors
Exhaust gas leaks
Incorrect fuel pressure
Mass air flow sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0917
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
SEF968Y
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
NAEC0917S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF-LEARN CONTROL” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0172, P0175 should be detected at this
stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-316.
If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-316. If
engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and check for
fouling, etc.
EC-312
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
SEF960Y
NAEC0917S02
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4) Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5) Select “MODE 7” with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected.
6) Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
7) Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
8) Select “MODE 7” with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so,
go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-316.
9) If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
10) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-316. If
engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and check for
fouling, etc.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-313
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1
NAEC0918
NAEC0918S01
MEC091E
EC-314
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
BANK 2
NAEC0918S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC092E
EC-315
IDX
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0919
CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
SEC635D
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace.
2
CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace.
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL1366
Continuity should exist.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S1 terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL1367
Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-316
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-64.
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-64.
At idling:
When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is connected.
235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi)
When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is disconnected.
294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi)
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
5
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
EM
LC
FE
Check the following.
쐌 Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-763.)
쐌 Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-65.)
䊳
MA
CL
Repair or replace.
MT
6
CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
AT
With GST
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
PD
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor
circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-211 (Type I), 219 (Type II).
TF
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-317
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF070Y
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
PBIB1725E
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Perform trouble diagnosis for “INJECTORS”, EC-758.
8
CHECK INJECTOR
1. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EC-66.
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Disconnect all injector harness connectors.
4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each injectors.
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG (Drips.)
䊳
Replace the injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.
9
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-318
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0773
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive
to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF751UA
Fuel temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
20 (68)
3.5
2.3 - 2.7
50 (122)
2.2
0.79 - 0.90
CL
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 107
(Fuel tank temperature sensor) and body ground.
SEF012P
FE
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0181
0181
Trouble diagnosis
name
NAEC0774
BR
DTC Detecting Condition
Possible Cause
Fuel tank temperature Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent 쐌 Harness or connectors
sensor circuit range/ to ECM, compared with the voltage signals from
(The sensor circuit is open or
performance
engine coolant temperature sensor and intake air
shorted.)
temperature sensor.
쐌 Fuel tank temperature sensor
ST
RS
BT
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0776
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-319
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
SEF174Y
5)
6)
7)
NAEC0776S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 10 seconds.
If the result is NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-320.
If the result is OK, go to following step.
Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will
be OK.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following step.
Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C
(140°F).
Wait at least 10 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-320.
WITH GST
NAEC0776S02
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0778
CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit terminals 1 and 2 by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in
the figure.
SEF974Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Replace fuel level sensor unit.
EC-320
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2
GI
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
쐌 Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
쐌 Refer to wiring diagram, EC-324.
䊳
MA
INSPECTION END
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-321
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0920
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive
to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF751UA
Fuel temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
20 (68)
3.5
2.3 - 2.7
50 (122)
2.2
0.79 - 0.90
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 107
(Fuel tank temperature sensor) and body ground.
SEF012P
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0182
0182
P0183
0183
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC Detecting Condition
NAEC0921
Possible Cause
Fuel tank temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent 쐌 Harness or connectors
sensor circuit low
to ECM.
(The sensor circuit is open or
input
shorted.)
쐌 Fuel tank temperature sensor
Fuel tank temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sensor circuit high
sent to ECM.
input
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0922
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
EC-322
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
SEF174Y
5)
6)
7)
NAEC0922S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 10 seconds.
If the result is NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-325.
If the result is OK, go to following step.
Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will
be OK.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following step.
Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C
(140°F).
Wait at least 10 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-325.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
AT
NAEC0922S02
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-323
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0923
MEC093E
EC-324
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0924
GI
CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit harness connector.
EM
LC
FE
SEF751UA
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between fuel level sensor unit terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF973Y
PD
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
AX
SU
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors B1, M2
쐌 Harness connectors M94, F27
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel level sensor unit
䊳
3
Repair harness or connector.
CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit terminal 2 and combination meter terminal 23. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-325
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors B1, M2
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel level sensor unit
䊳
5
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit terminals 1 and 2 by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in
the figure.
SEF974Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Replace fuel level sensor unit.
6
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-326
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
Component Description
Component Description
PBIB0145E
NAEC1205
Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds
to the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from
these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to
make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1206
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
THRTL SEN1
CONDITION
쐌 Ignition switch:
ON (Engine stopped)
쐌 Shift lever:
D (A/T model)
1st (M/T model)
SPECIFICATION
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
PD
SU
NAEC1212
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
47
50
WIRE
COLOR
L
BR
TF
AX
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
TERMINAL
NO.
AT
ITEM
CONDITION
BR
ST
DATA (DC Voltage)
RS
Sensor’s power supply
(Throttle position sensor)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Shift lever position is “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
Throttle position sensor 쐌 Accelerator pedal fully released
1
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Engine stopped
Shift lever position is “D” (A/T models)
Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
Accelerator pedal fully depressed
Approximately 5V
More than 0.36V
BT
HA
SC
Less than 4.75V
EL
IDX
EC-327
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
66
69
WIRE
COLOR
BR/Y
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
Sensor’s ground
BR/W
W/R
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Shift lever position is “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
Throttle position sensor 쐌 Accelerator pedal fully released
2
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
91
DATA (DC Voltage)
Sensor’s power supply
(APP sensor 2)
Less than 4.75V
Engine stopped
Shift lever position is “D” (A/T models)
Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
Accelerator pedal fully depressed
More than 0.36V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1207
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC Detecting Condition
P0222
0222
Throttle position sensor 1 circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 1
is sent to ECM.
P0223
0223
Throttle position sensor 1 circuit high
input
An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 1
is sent to ECM.
Possible Cause
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The TP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
쐌 Electric throttle control actuator (TP
sensor 1)
쐌 Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NAEC1207S01
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within
+10 degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1208
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
EC-328
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
1.
2.
3.
4.
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-331.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-329
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1209
TEC845
EC-330
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1210
GI
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
EM
LC
FE
SEF959Y
䊳
2
CL
GO TO 2.
MT
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEC433D
SU
3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
BR
ST
RS
BT
PBIB0082E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-331
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace open circuit.
4
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
쐌 ECM terminal 47 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 1. Refer to “Wiring Diagram”, EC-330.
쐌 ECM terminal 91 and APP sensor terminal 10. Refer to “Wiring Diagram”, EC-718.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5
CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-722.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
6
1.
2.
3.
4.
REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”, EC-81.
Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
7
INSPECTION END
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and ECM terminal 66.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-332
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
GI
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
MA
EM
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9
LC
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-333.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
GO TO 10.
10
FE
CL
REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
MT
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
3. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
11
AT
INSPECTION END
TF
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
PD
INSPECTION END
AX
SU
Component Inspection
SEC434D
NAEC1211
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Set selector lever to “D” position (A/T models) or “1st” position
(M/T models).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1), 69
(TP sensor 2) and engine ground under the following conditions.
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
50
(Throttle position sensor
1)
Fully released
More than 0.36V
Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
Fully released
Less than 4.75V
Fully depressed
More than 0.36V
69
(Throttle position sensor
2)
6.
7.
If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the
next step.
Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
EC-333
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
Component Inspection (Cont’d)
8.
Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
EC-334
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER
MISFIRE
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0929
When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine
speed fluctuates enough to cause the CKP sensor signal to vary,
ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
Sensor
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Input Signal to ECM
DTC No.
P0300
0300
MA
ECM function
EM
Engine speed
On board diagnosis of misfire
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.
1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)
On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to overheating, the MIL
will blink.
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP
sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not
damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC
on a second trip, the MIL will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not
damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC,
the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will
affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM
monitors the CKP sensor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or
on multiple cylinders.
Trouble diagnosis
name
GI
DTC Detecting Condition
P0301
0301
Multiple cylinder mis- Multiple cylinders misfire, No. 1 cylinder misfires,
fire detected
No. 2 cylinder misfires, No. 3 cylinder misfires, No.
4 cylinder misfires, No. 5 cylinder misfires and No.
No. 1 cylinder misfire 6 cylinder misfires.
detected
P0302
0302
No. 2 cylinder misfire
detected
P0303
0303
No. 3 cylinder misfire
detected
P0304
0304
No. 4 cylinder misfire
detected
P0305
0305
No. 5 cylinder misfire
detected
P0306
0306
No. 6 cylinder misfire
detected
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
Possible Cause
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Improper spark plug
Insufficient compression
Incorrect fuel pressure
The injector circuit is open or shorted
Injectors
Intake air leak
The ignition secondary circuit is open
or shorted
Lack of fuel
Drive plate or flywheel
Heated oxygen sensor 1
Incorrect PCV hose connection
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-335
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER
MISFIRE
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0930
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when driving.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before
conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF213Y
NAEC0930S01
1)
Turn ignition switch ON, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3) Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4) Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-337.
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing
the following procedure is advised.
1) Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2) Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions
to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain time. Refer to the
table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the
vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied
at the same time.
Engine speed
Engine speed in the freeze frame data ±400 rpm
Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ±10 km/h (5 MPH)
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F),
T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F),
T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the
freeze frame data.
Engine speed
Time
Around 1,000 rpm
Approximately 10 minutes
Around 2,000 rpm
Approximately 5 minutes
More than 3,000 rpm
Approximately 3.5 minutes
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
EC-336
NAEC0930S02
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
GI
CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
MA
1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
3. Check PCV hose connection.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Discover air leak location and repair.
2
NAEC0931
EM
LC
CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING
1. Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace it.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-337
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
SEF190Y
2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop?
Without CONSULT-II
When disconnecting each ignition coil harness connector one at a time, is there any cylinder which does not produce a
momentary engine speed drop?
SEC435D
SEC436D
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 5.
No
䊳
GO TO 4.
EC-338
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK INJECTOR
Does each injector make an operating sound at idle?
MA
EM
LC
PBIB1725E
FE
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 5.
No
䊳
Check injector(s) and circuit(s). Refer to EC-758.
5
1.
2.
3.
4.
CL
CHECK IGNITION SPARK
MT
Disconnect ignition wire from spark plug.
Connect a known good spark plug to the ignition wire.
Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine.
Check for spark.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEC437D
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to “IGNITION SIGNAL”,
EC-748.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-339
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
CHECK SPARK PLUGS
Remove the spark plugs and check for fouling, etc.
SEF156I
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to
MA-32, “ENGINE MAINTENANCE”.
7
CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE
Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-14, “Measurement of Compression Pressure”.
Standard:
1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2, 185 psi)/300 rpm
Minimum:
981 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2, 142 psi)/300 rpm
Difference between each cylinder:
98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi)/300 rpm
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.
8
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-64.
3. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-64.
At idling:
With vacuum hose connected
Approximately 235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi)
With vacuum hose disconnected
Approximately 294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi)
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
GO TO 9.
9
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-763.)
쐌 Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-65.)
쐌 Fuel lines (Refer to MA-17, “Checking Fuel Lines”.)
쐌 Fuel filter for clogging
䊳
Repair or replace.
EC-340
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
10
GI
CHECK IGNITION TIMING
Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-131.
MA
EM
MTBL1368
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 11.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 12.
NG
䊳
Follow the “Basic Inspection”.
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-341
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
11
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and “HI SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II, and select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and
“HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
3. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
4. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF967Y
5. Check the following.
쐌 “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown left:
SEF647Y
쐌 “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
쐌 “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
쐌 “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
쐌 Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
쐌 Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 13.
NG
䊳
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
EC-342
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
12
GI
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 bank 1 signal) or 16 (HO2S1 bank 2 signal) and engine
ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEC430D
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than 5 times within 10 seconds.
The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.
The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V
CAUTION:
쐌 Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
쐌 Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 13.
NG
䊳
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
13
CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
With CONSULT-II
Check mass air flow sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST
Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
BR
ST
RS
OK or NG
BT
OK
䊳
GO TO 14.
NG
䊳
Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor
circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-211 (Type I), 219 (Type II).
14
CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART
Check items on the rough idle symptom in “Symptom Matrix Chart”, EC-139.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 15.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-343
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
15
ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-100.
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
䊳
16
GO TO 16.
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-344
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0932
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses
engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration
from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This
pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF332I
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0933
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
15
WIRE
COLOR
W
ITEM
CONDITION
CL
DATA (DC Voltage)
MT
Knock sensor
[Engine is running]
쐌 Idle speed
Approximately 2.5V
AT
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0934
The MIL will not light up for these self-diagnoses.
DTC No.
FE
Trouble diagnosis
name
P0327
0327
Knock sensor circuit
low input
P0328
0328
Knock sensor circuit
high input
DTC Detecting Condition
TF
Possible Cause
PD
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent 쐌 Harness or connectors
to ECM.
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
쐌 Knock sensor
sent to ECM.
AX
SU
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0935
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
1)
2)
3)
NAEC0935S01
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II
Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-347.
WITH GST
NAEC0935S03
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
EL
IDX
EC-345
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0936
MEC094E
EC-346
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0937
GI
CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ECM terminal 15 and engine ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
EM
LC
FE
CL
SEC438D
Resistance:
Approximately 500 - 620 kΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
MT
AT
TF
CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 15 and knock sensor terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
PD
AX
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
SU
BR
3
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors F19, F116
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM and knock sensor
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-347
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
SEC439D
Resistance: 500 - 620 kΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]
CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Replace knock sensor.
5
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
Loose and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF959Y
䊳
6
GO TO 6.
CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
7
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors F19, F116
쐌 Harness connectors F22, M33
쐌 Harness for open between harness connector knock sensor and engine ground
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-348
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
GI
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
MA
INSPECTION END
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-349
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Description
Component Description
PBIB0562E
NAEC1213
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan
facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1214
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
ENG SPEED
CONDITION
쐌 Tachometer: Connect
쐌 Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II
value.
SPECIFICATION
Almost the same speed as the
CONSULT-II value.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0335
0335
Trouble diagnosis
name
Crankshaft position
sensor (POS) circuit
DTC Detecting Condition
NAEC1215
Possible Cause
쐌 Harness or connectors
쐌 The crankshaft position sensor signal is
not detected by the ECM during the first
[The crankshaft position sensor (POS)
circuit is open or shorted.]
few seconds of engine cranking.
쐌 The proper pulse signal from the crank쐌 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
shaft position sensor (POS) is not sent to 쐌 Signal plate
ECM while the engine is running.
쐌 The crankshaft position sensor signal is
not in the normal pattern during engine
running.
EC-350
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
SEF058Y
=NAEC1216
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch “ON”.
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5
seconds at idle speed.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-353.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
4) Maintaining engine speed at more than 1,000 rpm for at least
5 seconds.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-353
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-351
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1217
MEC095E
EC-352
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
GI
MA
EM
DATA (DC Voltage)
LC
Approximately 1.6V★
[Engine is running]
쐌 Idle speed
FE
PBIB1041E
13
Y
Crankshaft position
sensor (POS)
CL
Approximately 1.5V★
MT
[Engine is running]
쐌 Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
AT
PBIB1042E
TF
★: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
PD
AX
SU
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1218
BR
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF959Y
䊳
GO TO 2.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-353
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2
CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
SEC440D
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between crankshaft position sensor (POS) terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB0664E
Voltage: Battery voltage
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
3
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E132, E135
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM relay and crankshaft position sensor (POS)
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM and crankshaft position sensor (POS)
䊳
4
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between crankshaft position sensor (POS) terminal 3 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
EC-354
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
GI
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E132, E135
쐌 Harness connectors E116, M114
쐌 Harness connectors M32, F23
쐌 Joint connector F204
쐌 Harness connectors F22, M33
쐌 Harness for open between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ground
䊳
6
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
FE
CL
AT
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
䊳
TF
PD
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-356.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
9
LC
MT
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E132, E135
쐌 Harness connectors E116, M114
쐌 Harness connectors M32, F23
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM and crankshaft position sensor (POS)
8
EM
CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and crankshaft position sensor (POS) terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
7
MA
AX
SU
BR
ST
CHECK GEAR TOOTH
Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Replace the signal plate.
10
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
RS
BT
HA
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
SC
EL
IDX
EC-355
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Inspection
Component Inspection
NAEC1219
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
1.
2.
NAEC1219S01
3.
4.
Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
Remove the sensor.
Visually check the sensor for chipping.
5.
Check resistance as shown in the figure.
SEC420D
Terminal No. (Polarity)
Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 (+) - 2 (−)
1 (+) - 3 (−)
2 (+) - 3 (−)
SEC421D
EC-356
Except 0 or ∞
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Description
Component Description
PBIB0562E
NAEC1220
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of
intake valve camshaft to identify a particular cylinder. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) senses the piston position. When the
crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the
camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of
engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause
the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the
magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0340
0340
(Bank 1)
P0345
0345
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC Detecting Condition
Camshaft position sen- 쐌 The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
sor (PHASE) circuit
for the first few seconds during engine
cranking.
쐌 The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
during engine running.
쐌 The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal
pattern during engine running.
NAEC1221
TF
Possible Cause
쐌 Harness or connectors
[The camshaft position sensor
(PHASE) circuit is open or shorted.]
쐌 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
쐌 Camshaft (Intake)
쐌 Starter motor (Refer to SC section.)
쐌 Starting system circuit (Refer to SC
section.)
쐌 Dead (Weak) battery
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1222
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch “ON”.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-357
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
SEF058Y
NAEC1222S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5
seconds at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-361. If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
Maintaining engine speed at more than 1,000 rpm for at least
5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-361.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
EC-358
NAEC1222S02
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1
NAEC1223
GI
NAEC1223S01
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC102E
EC-359
IDX
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
BANK 2
NAEC1223S02
MEC103E
EC-360
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
GI
MA
EM
DATA (DC Voltage)
LC
1.0 - 4.0V★
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
FE
33
Y/G
Camshaft position
sensor (PHASE)
(Bank 1)
PBIB1039E
CL
1.0 - 4.0V★
MT
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
AT
PBIB1040E
TF
1.0 - 4.0V★
PD
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
14
OR
AX
PBIB1039E
Camshaft position
sensor (PHASE)
(Bank 2)
SU
1.0 - 4.0V★
BR
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
ST
PBIB1040E
RS
★: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
BT
Diagnostic Procedure
1
CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
Turn ignition switch to “START” position.
Does the engine turn over?
Does the starter motor operate?
NAEC1224
HA
SC
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
Check starting system. (Refer to SC-10, “STARTING SYSTEM”.)
EC-361
EL
IDX
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF959Y
䊳
GO TO 3.
EC-362
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect CMP sensor (PHASE) harness connector (bank 1) or (bank 2).
MA
EM
LC
SEC452D
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEC477D
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF479Y
Voltage: Battery voltage
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
BR
ST
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
4
RS
BT
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M32, F23
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM and camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM relay and camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
䊳
HA
SC
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EL
IDX
EC-363
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
6
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Joint connector F204
쐌 Harness connectors F22, M33
쐌 Harness for open between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ground
䊳
7
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 33 and CMP sensor (PHASE) (Bank 1) terminal 2.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 14 and CMP sensor (PHASE) (Bank 2) terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Repair harness or connectors.
8
CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-365.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
9
CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)
Visually check for chipped signal plate at camshaft.
SEC578D
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Replace camshaft.
EC-364
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
10
GI
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
MA
INSPECTION END
EM
LC
Component Inspection
NAEC1225
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
1.
2.
3.
4.
NAEC1225S01
Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
Remove the sensor.
Visually check the sensor for chipping.
FE
CL
MT
PBIB0563E
5.
Check resistance as shown inthe figure.
Terminal No. (Polarity)
Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
AT
TF
1 (+) - 2 (−)
1 (+) - 3 (−)
Except 0 or ∞
PD
2 (+) - 3 (−)
AX
SU
PBIB0564E
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-365
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0951
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of heated oxygen
sensors 1 and 2.
A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.
As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor
2 switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of heated oxygen sensors 1 and 2
approaches a specified limit value, the three way catalyst (manifold) malfunction is diagnosed.
SEF484YF
DTC No.
P0420
0420
(Bank 1)
P0430
0430
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis
name
Catalyst system efficiency below threshold
DTC Detecting Condition
Three way catalyst (manifold) does not operate
properly, three way catalyst (manifold) does not
have enough oxygen storage capacity.
Possible Cause
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Three way catalyst (manifold)
Exhaust tube
Intake air leaks
Injectors
Injector leaks
Spark plug
Improper ignition timing
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0952
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEC138D
SEC139D
SEF560X
NAEC0952S01
TESTING CONDITION:
쐌 Open engine hood before conducting the following procedure.
쐌 Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified
minutes below.
1) Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
4) Let engine idle for one minute.
5) Open engine hood.
6) Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
7) Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely. If
“INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “COMPLT”, go to step 10.
8) Wait 5 seconds at idle.
9) Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until
“INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It will take
approximately 5 minutes). If not “CMPLT”, perform the following.
a) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and leave the vehicle in a cool place
(soak the vehicle).
b) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in
“DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
c) Start engine and warm it up while monitoring “COOLAN
EC-366
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
TEMP/S” indication on CONSULT-II.
When “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F),
go to step 3.
10) Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
11) Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected.
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-367.
GI
d)
MA
EM
LC
Overall Function Check
NAEC0953
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the warm-up
three way catalyst. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
WITH GST
NAEC0953S01
1)
SEC430D
SEC431D
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
4) Let engine idle for one minute.
5) Set voltmeters probes between ECM terminals 35 [heated oxygen sensor 1 bank 1 signal], 16 [heated oxygen sensor 1 bank
2 signal] and engine ground, and ECM terminals 74 [heated
oxygen sensor 2 bank 1 signal], 55 [heated oxygen sensor 2
bank 2 signal] and engine ground.
6) Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
7) Make sure that the voltage switching frequency (high & low)
between ECM terminals 74 and engine ground, or 55 and
engine ground is very less than that of ECM terminals 35 and
engine ground, or 16 and engine ground.
Switching frequency ratio = A/B
A: Heated oxygen sensor 2 voltage switching frequency
B: Heated oxygen sensor 1 voltage switching frequency
This ratio should be less than 0.75.
If the ratio is greater than above, it means warm-up three way
catalyst does not operate properly. Go to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-367.
NOTE:
If the voltage at terminal 16 or 35 does not switch periodically more
than 5 times within 10 seconds at step 5, perform trouble diagnosis for “DTC P0133, P0153” first. (See EC-264.)
Diagnostic Procedure
1
CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM
Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace.
NAEC0954
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-367
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2
CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold).
SEC635D
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace.
3
CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace.
4
CHECK IGNITION TIMING
Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-131.
MTBL1368
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Follow the “Basic Inspection”.
EC-368
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
GI
CHECK INJECTORS
1. Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM for Injectors, EC-759.
2. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
MA
EM
LC
SEC516D
FE
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
CL
MT
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure”, “INJECTOR”, EC-760.
6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CHECK IGNITION SPARK
AT
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect ignition coil assembly from rocker cover.
Connect a known-good spark plug to the ignition coil assembly.
Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine.
Check for spark.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
SEC437D
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Check ignition coil with power transistor and their circuit. Refer to EC-748.
7
ST
RS
BT
CHECK INJECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Remove injector assembly.
Refer to EC-66.
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
3. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG (Drips.)
䊳
Replace the injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.
EC-369
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
Trouble is fixed.
䊳
INSPECTION END
Trouble is not fixed.
䊳
Replace three way catalyst (manifold).
EC-370
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
System Description
System Description
NAEC0955
NOTE:
If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 or P2138, first perform
trouble diagnosis for other DTC.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF323U
In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions.
Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP control system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum.
P0441
0441
EVAP control system
incorrect purge flow
DTC Detecting Condition
EVAP control system does not operate properly,
EVAP control system has a leak between intake
manifold and EVAP control system pressure sensor.
MT
NAEC0956
Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow are adequate. If not,
a fault is determined.
Trouble diagnosis
name
CL
AT
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
FE
Possible Cause
쐌 EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve stuck closed
쐌 EVAP control system pressure sensor
and the circuit
쐌 Loose, disconnected or improper connection of rubber tube
쐌 Blocked rubber tube
쐌 Cracked EVAP canister
쐌 EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve circuit
쐌 Accelerator pedal position sensor
쐌 Blocked purge port
쐌 EVAP canister vent control valve
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-371
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0957
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEC757C
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
SEC758C
NAEC0957S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds.
Select “PURG FLOW P0441” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in
“DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “START”.
If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7.
When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It
will take at least 35 seconds.)
Selector lever
Suitable position
Vehicle speed
32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 MPH)
ENG SPEED
500 - 3,000 rpm
B/FUEL SCHDL
1.0 - 10 msec
Engine coolant temperature
More than 20°C (68°F)
7)
SEC759C
If “TESTING” is not changed for a long time, retry from
step 2.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-374.
Overall Function Check
NAEC0958
Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the
EVAP control system purge flow monitoring. During this check, a
DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
SEC523D
3)
4)
NAEC0958S01
Lift up drive wheels.
Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”) and warm it up to normal
operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and wait at least 70 seconds.
EC-372
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
5)
6)
7)
Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 32 (EVAP control system pressure sensor signal) and ground.
Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle
speed and note it.
Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1
minute.
Air conditioner switch
ON
Headlamp switch
ON
Rear window defogger switch
ON
Engine speed
Approx. 3,000 rpm
Gear position
Any position other than “P”, “N” or “R”
8)
9)
Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays
0.1V less than the value at idle speed (measured at step 6) for
at least 1 second.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-374.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-373
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
=NAEC0959
CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check EVAP canister for cracks.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 2.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP canister.
2
CHECK PURGE FLOW
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and
install vacuum gauge.
SEF983Y
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and let it idle.
Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to adjust “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum existence.
PBIB1678E
MTBL1805
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
EC-374
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK PURGE FLOW
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and
install vacuum gauge.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF983Y
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
5. Check vacuum gauge indication when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
6. Release the accelerator pedal fully and let idle.
Vacuum should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
4
CL
MT
AT
TF
CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
PD
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-45.
AX
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair it.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-375
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT
1. Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B.
SEF367U
2. Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C.
3. Check that air flows freely.
SEF368U
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 6.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port.
6
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.
PBIB1678E
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
EC-376
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
MA
EM
LC
SEF334XA
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF335X
PD
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
8
AX
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
SU
BR
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Repair it.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-377
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
9
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
SEC931C
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
10
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION
Refer to “DTC Confirmation Procedure” for DTC P0452, EC-410 and P0453, EC-416.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
11
CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 12.
NG
䊳
Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
12
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.
SEF376Z
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 13.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
EC-378
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
13
1.
2.
3.
4.
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II
With CONSULT-II
Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEC158D
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEF378Z
AX
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 15.
NG
䊳
GO TO 14.
14
BR
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III
1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform Test No. 13 again.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 15.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
15
SU
CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
ST
RS
BT
HA
Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-45.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 16.
NG
䊳
Replace it.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-379
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
16
CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
䊳
17
GO TO 17.
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-380
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0960
NOTE:
If DTC P0442 is displayed with P1448, first perform trouble
diagnosis for DTC P1448. (See EC-636.)
This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine
intake manifold vacuum.
If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the
line between the fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following “Vacuum test” conditions.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is opened to clear the line
between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve. The EVAP canister vent control valve will then be
closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve is opened to depressurize the EVAP
purge line using intake manifold vacuum. After this occurs, the
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF323U
DTC No.
P0442
0442
Trouble diagnosis
name
EVAP control system
small leak detected
(negative pressure)
DTC Detecting Condition
EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP control
system does not operate properly.
EC-381
Possible Cause
쐌 Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
쐌 Incorrect fuel filler cap used
쐌 Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to
close.
쐌 Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap
쐌 Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve.
쐌 Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve
쐌 EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
쐌 EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber
tube) leaks
쐌 EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
쐌 Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP
control system pressure sensor
쐌 Loose or disconnected rubber tube
쐌 EVAP canister vent control valve and
the circuit
쐌 EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve and the circuit
쐌 Fuel tank temperature sensor
쐌 O-ring of EVAP canister vent control
valve is missing or damaged.
쐌 Water separator
쐌 EVAP canister is saturated with water.
쐌 EVAP control system pressure sensor
쐌 Fuel level sensor and the circuit
쐌 Refueling control valve
쐌 ORVR system leaks
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
On Board Diagnosis Logic (Cont’d)
CAUTION:
쐌 Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may
come on.
쐌 If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may
come on.
쐌 Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
SEC760C
NAEC0961
NOTE:
쐌 If DTC P0442 is displayed with P1448, first perform trouble
diagnosis for DTC P1448 (See EC-636).
쐌 If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
쐌 Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is
between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is placed on flat level
surface.
쐌 Open engine hood before conducting the following procedure.
WITH CONSULT-II
NAEC0961S01
1)
2)
3)
SEC761C
SEC762C
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
4) Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)
5) Select “EVP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE
SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULTII.
Follow the instruction displayed.
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to “Basic Inspection”,
EC-131.
6) Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-383.
NOTE:
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
WITH GST
SEC763C
NAEC0961S02
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of “Driving Pattern” on EC-92
before driving vehicle.
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle according to “Driving Pattern”, EC-92.
3) Stop vehicle.
4) Select “MODE 1” with GST.
쐌 If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the following step.
EC-382
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
쐌
5)
6)
If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine.
It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving.
7) Drive vehicle again according to the “Driving Pattern”, EC-92.
8) Stop vehicle.
9) Select “MODE 3” with GST.
쐌 If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-383.
쐌 If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0441, EC-374.
쐌 If P0441 and P0442 are not displayed on the screen, go to the
following step.
10) Select “MODE 1” with GST.
쐌 If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
쐌 If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 6.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0962
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
TF
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
PD
AX
SU
SEF915U
BR
OK or NG
ST
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
RS
2
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
BT
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
쐌 Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
쐌 Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-383
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
4
CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
SEF445Y
SEF943S
Pressure:
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum:
−6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2, −0.87 to −0.48 psi)
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
EC-384
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
GI
INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
MA
EM
LC
SEF983Y
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF916U
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.
With CONSULT-II
䊳
GO TO 6.
Without CONSULT-II
䊳
GO TO 7.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-385
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
NOTE:
쐌 Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
쐌 Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
PEF917U
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-45.
SEF200U
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace.
EC-386
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
GI
CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of
test.)
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEC930C
3. Apply 12 volts DC to vacuum cut valve bypass valve. The valve will open. (Continue to apply 12V until the end of test.)
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEC932C
4. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove
pump and EVAP service port adapter.
NOTE:
쐌 Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
쐌 Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
5. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-45.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF200U
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-387
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
1.
2.
3.
4.
CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Check
Check
Check
Check
visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.
PBIB1032E
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE:
쐌 Do not disassemble water separator.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Replace water separator.
9
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE, O-RING AND CIRCUIT
Refer to “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, EC-404.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring or harness/connector.
10
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
SEF596U
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 11.
No (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 13.
No (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 14.
EC-388
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
11
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
MA
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 13.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 14.
NG
䊳
GO TO 12.
12
EM
LC
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 EVAP canister for damage
쐌 EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
䊳
13
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
FE
Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
CL
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
MT
With CONSULT-II
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine.
Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
PBIB1678E
BR
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 16.
NG
䊳
GO TO 15.
ST
RS
14
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine.
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
BT
HA
SC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 17.
NG
䊳
GO TO 15.
EL
IDX
EC-389
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
15
CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to “Vacuum Hose Drawing”, EC-35.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 16.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 17.
NG
䊳
Repair or reconnect the hose.
16
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.
PBIB1678E
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 18.
NG
䊳
GO TO 17.
EC-390
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
17
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
MA
EM
LC
SEC524D
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF334XA
TF
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
PD
AX
SU
BR
SEC524D
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF335X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 18.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-391
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
18
CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit terminals 1 and 2 by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in
the figure.
SEF974Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 19.
NG
䊳
Replace fuel level sensor unit.
EC-392
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
19
GI
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
쐌 Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
MA
EM
LC
SEF799W
2. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor from EVAP canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
3. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEC422D
CAUTION:
쐌 Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
쐌 Do not apply below −93.3 kPa (−700 mmHg, −27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
쐌 Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5
m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
AX
SU
OK or NG
BR
OK
䊳
GO TO 20.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
ST
20
CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
Refer to “Evaporative Emission System”, EC-41.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 21.
NG
䊳
Repair or reconnect the hose.
21
CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
䊳
RS
BT
HA
SC
GO TO 22.
EL
IDX
EC-393
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
22
CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR LINE
쐌 Check refueling EVAP vapor line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-45.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 23.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
23
CHECK SIGNAL LINE AND RECIRCULATION LINE
쐌 Check signal line and recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 24.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace hoses, tubes or filler neck tube.
24
CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE
1. Remove fuel filler cap.
2. Check air continuity between hose ends A and B.
Blow air into hose end B. Air should flow freely into the fuel tank.
3. Blow air into hose end A and check that there is no leakage.
4. Apply pressure to both hose ends A and B [20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg)] using a pressure pump and a suitable
3-way connector. Check that there is no leakage.
SEC883C
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 25.
NG
䊳
Replace or refueling control valve with fuel tank.
25
CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to EL-124, “Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 26.
NG
䊳
Replace fuel level sensor unit.
EC-394
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
26
GI
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
MA
INSPECTION END
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-395
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
Description
Description
NAEC0963
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*2 and piston position
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Battery
Battery voltage*2
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Heated oxygen sensor 1
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel tank temperature sensor
Fuel temperature in fuel tank
Vehicle speed signal*1
Vehicle speed
NAEC0963S01
ECM
function
Actuator
EVAP canEVAP canister purge volume
ister purge
control solenoid valve
flow control
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow
rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the
flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the
air flow changes.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NAEC0963S02
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a
ON/OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP
canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON
pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the
valve.
SEF337U
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0964
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
PURG VOL C/V
CONDITION
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
SPECIFICATION
Idle (Vehicle stopped)
0%
2,000 rpm
—
EC-396
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0965
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
GI
MA
EM
LC
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)★
[Engine is running]
쐌 Idle speed
FE
CL
45
L/Y
SEC990C
EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)★
MT
AT
[Engine is running]
쐌 Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100
seconds after starting engine).
TF
SEC991C
PD
★: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
AX
SU
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0444
0444
P0445
0445
Trouble diagnosis
name
NAEC0966
BR
DTC Detecting Condition
EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve circuit
open
An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM
through the valve.
EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve circuit
shorted
An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM
through the valve.
Possible Cause
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is shorted.)
쐌 EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-397
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0967
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery
voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC0967S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-400.
WITH GST
Follow the proocedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
EC-398
NAEC0967S02
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0968
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC096E
EC-399
IDX
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0969
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.
SEC524D
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or
tester.
SEF988Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M32, F23
쐌 Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
쐌 Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM relay
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-400
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN AND SHORT
GI
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
MA
OK or NG
LC
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 4.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connetors.
4
EM
FE
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
PBIB1678E
AX
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-401
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEF334XA
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEF335X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
6
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-402
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Component Description
Component Description
SEF381Z
NAEC0970
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other
evaporative emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the
evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows
“EVAP Control System (Small Leak)” diagnosis.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
SEC928C
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0971
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
VENT CONT/V
NAEC0972
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
117
WIRE
COLOR
G/R
P0447
0447
AX
SU
BR
ITEM
CONDITION
EVAP canister vent
control valve
[Ignition switch “ON”]
DATA (DC Voltage)
Trouble diagnosis
name
EVAP canister vent
control valve circuit
open
DTC Detecting Condition
ST
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
RS
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
TF
PD
OFF
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
AT
NAEC0973
Possible Cause
An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through Harness or connectors
EVAP canister vent control valve.
(The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
쐌 EVAP canister vent control valve
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-403
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0974
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery
voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC0974S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait at least 8 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-406.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
EC-404
NAEC0974S02
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0975
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC097E
EC-405
IDX
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0976
INSPECTION START
1. Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
GO TO 3.
2
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then turn “ON”.
2. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
PBIB0151E
4. Check for operating sound of the valve.
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
EC-406
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEC928C
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF990Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
4
AX
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
SU
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M33, F22
쐌 Harness connectors F27, M94
쐌 Harness connectors M2, B1
쐌 Harness connectors B43, M101
쐌 Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM relay
䊳
5
PD
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
BR
ST
RS
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 117 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-407
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors B101, B43
쐌 Harness connectors B1, M2
쐌 Harness connectors M94, F27
쐌 Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM
䊳
7
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
8
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.
SEF376Z
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
EC-408
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
9
1.
2.
3.
4.
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II
With CONSULT-II
Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEC158D
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEF378Z
AX
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
GO TO 10.
10
BR
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III
1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform Test No. 9 again.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
11
SU
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
ST
RS
BT
HA
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
SC
EL
IDX
EC-409
DTC P0452 EVAP SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0779
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the
purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as
pressure increases.
SEF053V
PBIB1207E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0780
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
EVAP SYS PRES 쐌 Ignition switch: ON
1.8 - 4.8V
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0781
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
32
L/G
EVAP control system
pressure sensor
[Ignition switch “ON”]
1.8 - 4.8V
48
P/B
Sensor’s power supply
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
67
B/P
Sensor’s ground
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
Approximately 0V
EC-410
DTC P0452 EVAP SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
=NAEC0782
NOTE:
If DTC P0452 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-596.
DTC No.
P0452
0452
Trouble diagnosis
name
EVAP control system
pressure sensor low
input
DTC Detecting Condition
Possible Cause
MA
EM
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent 쐌 Harness or connectors
to ECM.
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 EVAP control system pressure sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
GI
LC
NAEC0784
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
FE
CL
MT
WITH CONSULT-II
AT
NAEC0784S01
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
SEF194Y
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Make sure that “FUEL T/TEMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-413.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
8) Stop engine and install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
9) Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump.
10) Confirm the pressure does not go up.
11) If pressure go up, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-413.
WITH GST
1)
2)
SEC525D
3)
4)
5)
6)
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
NAEC0784S02
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
Select “MODE 7” with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-413.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-411
DTC P0452 EVAP SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0785
MEC098E
EC-412
DTC P0452 EVAP SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0786
GI
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
MA
Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
EM
LC
SEF959Y
䊳
2
GO TO 2.
FE
CL
CHECK CONNECTOR
MT
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
2. Check sensor harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
AT
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace harness connector.
3
TF
PD
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEF992Y
RS
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
BT
HA
4
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors B101, B43
쐌 Harness connectors B1, M2
쐌 Harness connectors M94, F27
쐌 Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
䊳
SC
EL
Repair harness or connectors.
IDX
EC-413
DTC P0452 EVAP SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
6
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors B101, B43
쐌 Harness connectors B1, M2
쐌 Harness connectors M94, F27
쐌 Harness connectors F22, M23
쐌 Joint connector F204
쐌 Harness for open between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
쐌 Harness for open between EVAP control system pressure sensor and TCM
䊳
7
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
GO TO 8.
8
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors B101, B43
쐌 Harness connectors B1, M2
쐌 Harness connectors M94, F27
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM and EVAP control system pressure sensor
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-414
DTC P0452 EVAP SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
9
GI
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
쐌 Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
MA
EM
LC
SEF799W
2. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor from EVAP canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
3. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEC422D
CAUTION:
쐌 Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
쐌 Do not apply below −93.3 kPa (−700 mmHg, −27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
쐌 Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5
m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
AX
SU
OK or NG
BR
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
ST
10
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
RS
INSPECTION END
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-415
DTC P0453 EVAP SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0977
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the
purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as
pressure increases.
SEF053V
PBIB1207E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0978
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
EVAP SYS PRES
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
1.8 - 4.8V
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0979
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
32
L/G
EVAP control system
pressure sensor
[Ignition switch “ON”]
1.8 - 4.8V
48
P/B
Sensors’ power supply
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
67
B/P
Sensors’ ground
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
Approximately 0V
EC-416
DTC P0453 EVAP SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0980
NOTE:
If DTC P0453 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the
trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-596.
DTC No.
P0453
0453
Trouble diagnosis
name
EVAP control system
pressure sensor high
input
DTC Detecting Condition
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
Possible Cause
GI
MA
EM
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 EVAP control system pressure sensor
쐌 EVAP canister vent control valve
쐌 EVAP canister
쐌 Water separator
쐌 Rubber hose from EVAP canister vent
control valve to water separator
LC
FE
CL
MT
DTC Confirmation Procedure
AT
NAEC0981
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
TF
PD
AX
SU
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
NAEC0981S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Make sure that “FUEL T/TEMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-419.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF194Y
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
NAEC0981S02
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
Select “MODE 7” with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-419.
SEC525D
EC-417
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0453 EVAP SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0982
MEC098E
EC-418
DTC P0453 EVAP SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0983
GI
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
MA
Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
EM
LC
SEF959Y
䊳
2
GO TO 2.
FE
CL
CHECK CONNECTOR
MT
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
2. Check sensor harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
AT
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace harness connector.
3
TF
PD
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEF992Y
RS
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
BT
HA
4
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors B101, B43
쐌 Harness connectors B1, M2
쐌 Harness connectors M94, F27
쐌 Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
䊳
SC
EL
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
IDX
EC-419
DTC P0453 EVAP SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
6
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors B101, B43
쐌 Harness connectors B1, M2
쐌 Harness connectors M94, F27
쐌 Harness connectors F22, M33
쐌 Joint connector F204
쐌 Harness for open between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
쐌 Harness for open between EVAP control system pressure sensor and TCM
䊳
7
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
GO TO 8.
8
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors B101, B43
쐌 Harness connectors B1, M2
쐌 Harness connectors M94, F27
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM and EVAP control system pressure sensor
䊳
9
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
EC-420
DTC P0453 EVAP SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I
GI
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.
MA
10
EM
LC
SEF376Z
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
11
CL
MT
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEC158D
BR
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF378Z
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
SC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 13.
NG
䊳
GO TO 12.
EL
IDX
EC-421
DTC P0453 EVAP SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
12
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III
1. Clean the air passage (portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform Test No. 14 again.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 13.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
13
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
쐌 Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
SEF799W
2. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor from EVAP canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
3. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
SEC422D
CAUTION:
쐌 Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
쐌 Do not apply below −93.3 kPa (−700 mmHg, −27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
쐌 Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5m
(19.7in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 14.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
14
CHECK RUBBER TUBE
Check obstructed rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 15.
NG
䊳
Clean rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube.
EC-422
DTC P0453 EVAP SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
15
1.
2.
3.
4.
GI
CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Check
Check
Check
Check
visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.
MA
EM
LC
FE
PBIB1032E
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE:
쐌 Do not disassemble water separator.
CL
MT
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 16.
NG
䊳
Replace water separator.
16
AT
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
TF
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
PD
AX
SU
BR
SEF596U
ST
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 17.
No
䊳
GO TO 19.
17
RS
BT
CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
HA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 19.
NG
䊳
GO TO 18.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-423
DTC P0453 EVAP SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
18
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 EVAP canister for damage
쐌 EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
䊳
19
Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-424
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0984
NOTE:
If DTC P0455 is displayed with P1448, first perform trouble
diagnosis for DTC P1448. (See EC-636.)
This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.)
in EVAP system between the fuel tank and EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF323U
DTC No.
P0455
0455
Trouble diagnosis
name
EVAP control system
gross leak detected
DTC Detecting Condition
Possible Cause
EVAP control system has a very large leak such
쐌 Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to
as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control system does
close.
not operate properly.
쐌 Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
쐌 Incorrect fuel filler cap used
쐌 Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap
쐌 Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve.
쐌 Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve
쐌 EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
쐌 EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber
tube) leaks
쐌 EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
쐌 Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP
control system pressure sensor
쐌 Loose or disconnected rubber tube
쐌 EVAP canister vent control valve and
the circuit
쐌 EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve and the circuit
쐌 Fuel tank temperature sensor
쐌 O-ring of EVAP canister vent control
valve is missing or damaged.
쐌 EVAP control system pressure sensor
쐌 Refueling control valve
쐌 ORVR system leaks
CAUTION:
쐌 Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may
come on.
쐌 If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may
come on.
쐌 Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-425
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
SEC760C
WITH CONSULT-II
SEC761C
SEC762C
NAEC0985S01
1)
2)
3)
4)
Tighten fuel filler cap securely until ratcheting sound is heard.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
5) Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F)
6) Select “EVP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE
SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULTII.
Follow the instruction displayed.
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to “Basic Inspection”,
EC-131.
7) Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode and
make sure that “EVAP GROSS LEAK [P0455]” is displayed. If
it is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-427.
If P0442 is displayed, perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC
P0442.
WITH GST
SEC763C
NAEC0985
CAUTION:
Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
NOTE:
쐌 If DTC P0455 is displayed with P1448, first perform trouble
diagnosis for DTC P1448. (See EC-636.)
쐌 Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
쐌 If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
쐌 Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is
between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is placed on flat level
surface.
쐌 Open engine hood before conducting the following procedures.
NAEC0985S02
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of “Driving Pattern” on EC-92
before driving vehicle.
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle according to “Driving Pattern”, EC-92.
3) Stop vehicle.
4) Select “MODE 1” with GST.
쐌 If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the following step.
쐌 If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
5) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
6) Start engine.
It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving.
7) Drive vehicle again according to the “Driving Pattern”, EC-92.
EC-426
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
8)
9)
쐌
Stop vehicle.
Select “MODE 3” with GST.
If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-427.
쐌 If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, for DTC P0442, EC-381.
쐌 If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0441, EC-371.
쐌 If P0441, P0442 and P0455 are not displayed on the screen,
go to the following step.
10) Select “MODE 1” with GST.
쐌 If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
쐌 If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 6.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0986
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
TF
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
PD
AX
SU
SEF915U
BR
OK or NG
ST
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
RS
2
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
BT
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
쐌 Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
쐌 Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-427
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
4
CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
SEF445Y
SEF943S
Pressure:
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum:
−6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2, −0.87 to −0.48 psi)
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
5
CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or disconnection.
Refer to “Evaporative Emission System”, EC-41.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Repair or reconnect the hose.
6
CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
䊳
GO TO 7.
EC-428
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE, O-RING AND CIRCUIT
Refer to “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, EC-404.
MA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring or harness/connector.
8
INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
EM
LC
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
FE
CL
MT
SEF983Y
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEF916U
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.
With CONSULT-II
䊳
GO TO 9.
Without CONSULT-II
䊳
GO TO 10.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-429
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
9
CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
NOTE:
쐌 Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
쐌 Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
PEF917U
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-45.
SEF200U
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace.
EC-430
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
10
GI
CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of
test.)
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEC930C
3. Apply 12 volts DC to vacuum cut valve bypass valve. The valve will open. (Continue to apply 12V until the end of test.)
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEC932C
4. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove
pump and EVAP service port adapter.
NOTE:
쐌 Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
쐌 Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
5. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-45.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF200U
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 12.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-431
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
11
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine.
Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
PBIB1678E
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 14.
NG
䊳
GO TO 13.
12
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine.
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 15.
NG
䊳
GO TO 13.
13
CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to “Vacuum Hose Drawing”, EC-35.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 14.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 15.
NG
䊳
Repair or reconnect the hose.
EC-432
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
14
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.
MA
EM
LC
FE
PBIB1678E
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 16.
NG
䊳
GO TO 15.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-433
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
15
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEC524D
SEF334XA
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEC524D
SEF335X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 16.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
EC-434
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
16
GI
CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit terminals 1 and 2 by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in
the figure.
MA
EM
LC
SEF974Y
FE
OK or NG
CL
OK
䊳
GO TO 17.
NG
䊳
Replace fuel level sensor unit.
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-435
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
17
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
쐌 Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
SEF799W
2. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor from EVAP canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
3. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
SEC422D
CAUTION:
쐌 Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
쐌 Do not apply below −93.3 kPa (−700 mmHg, −27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
쐌 Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5
m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 18.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
18
CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR LINE
쐌 Check refueling EVAP vapor line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-45.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 19.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
19
CHECK SIGNAL LINE AND RECIRCULATION LINE
쐌 Check signal line and recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 20.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace hoses, tubes or filler neck tube.
EC-436
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
20
GI
CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE
1. Remove fuel filler cap.
2. Check air continuity between hose ends A and B.
Blow air into hose end B. Air should flow freely into the fuel tank.
3. Blow air into hose end A and check that there is no leakage.
4. Apply pressure to both hose ends A and B [20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg)] using a pressure pump and a suitable
3-way connector. Check that there is no leakage.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEC883C
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 21.
NG
䊳
Replace or refueling control valve with fuel tank.
21
PD
AX
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
SU
INSPECTION END
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-437
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0987
SEF323U
This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold same as a conventional EVAP small leak diagnosis.
If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected.
If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected.
If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK.
DTC No.
P0456
0456
Trouble diagnosis
name
Evaporative emission
control system very
small leak (negative
pressure check)
DTC Detecting Condition
쐌 EVAP system has a very small leak.
쐌 EVAP system does not operate properly.
Possible Cause
쐌 Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
쐌 Incorrect fuel filler cap used
쐌 Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to
close.
쐌 Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap
쐌 Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve.
쐌 Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve
쐌 EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
쐌 EVAP purge line (Pipe and rubber
tube) leaks
쐌 EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
쐌 Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP
control system pressure sensor
쐌 Loose or disconnected rubber tube
쐌 EVAP canister vent control valve and
the circuit
쐌 EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve and the circuit
쐌 Fuel tank temperature sensor
쐌 O-ring of EVAP canister vent control
valve is missing or damaged.
쐌 Water separator
쐌 EVAP canister saturated with water
쐌 EVAP control system pressure sensor
쐌 Refueling control valve
쐌 ORVR system leaks
쐌 Fuel level sensor and the circuit
쐌 Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve
CAUTION:
쐌 Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
the MIL may come on.
쐌 If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
쐌 Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
EC-438
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
SEC764C
SEC765C
SEC766C
NAEC0988
CAUTION:
Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC confirmation procedure.
NOTE:
쐌 If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, first perform trouble
diagnosis for DTC P0456.
쐌 If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting
the next test.
쐌 After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are
installed properly.
TESTING CONDITION:
쐌 Open engine hood before conducting following procedure.
쐌 If any of following condition is met just before the DTC
confirmation procedure, leave the vehicle for more than 1
hour.
a) Fuel filler cap is removed.
b) Refilled or drained the fuel.
c) EVAP component parts is/are removed.
쐌 Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Make sure the following conditions are met.
FUEL LEVEL SE: 1.08 - 0.2V
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F)
FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F)
INT A/TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F)
If NG, turn ignition switch “OFF” and leave the vehicle in a cool
place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining fuel until the output voltage condition of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the
range above and leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then
start from step 1).
3) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds.
4) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5) Select “EVP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456” of “EVAPORATIVE
SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULTII.
Follow the instruction displayed.
6) Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-441.
NOTE:
쐌 If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range
displayed on CONSULT-II screen, go to “Basic
inspection”, EC-131.
쐌 Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-439
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Overall Function Check
Overall Function Check
WITH GST
SEF983Y
SEF462UA
NAEC0989
NAEC0989S01
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very
small leak function. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
CAUTION:
쐌 Never use compressed air, doing so may damage the
EVAP system.
쐌 Do not start engine.
쐌 Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi).
1) Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP
service port.
2) Set the pressure pump and a hose.
3) Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose.
4) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5) Connect GST and select mode 8.
6) Using mode 8 control the EVAP canister vent control valve
(close) and vacuum cut valve bypass valve (open).
7) Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are
satisfied.
Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg)
Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP
system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and
the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa (3
mmHg, 0.12 inHg)
If NG, go to diagnostic procedure, EC-441.
If OK, go to next step.
8) Disconnect GST.
9) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
10) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
11) Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds.
12) Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds.
13) Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
NOTE:
For more information, refer to GST instruction manual.
EC-440
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0990
GI
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
EM
LC
SEF915U
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
2
CL
MT
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
쐌 Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
쐌 Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
AT
TF
PD
3
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
AX
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-441
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
SEF445Y
SEF943S
Pressure:
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum:
−6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2, −0.87 to −0.48 psi)
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
EC-442
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
GI
INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
MA
EM
LC
SEF983Y
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF916U
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.
With CONSULT-II
䊳
GO TO 6.
Without CONSULT-II
䊳
GO TO 7.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-443
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
NOTE:
쐌 Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
쐌 Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
PEF917U
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-45.
SEF200U
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace.
EC-444
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
GI
CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of
test.)
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEC930C
3. Apply 12 volts DC to vacuum cut valve bypass valve. The valve will open. (Continue to apply 12V until the end of test.)
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEC932C
4. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove
pump and EVAP service port adapter.
NOTE:
쐌 Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
쐌 Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
5. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-45.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF200U
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-445
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
1.
2.
3.
4.
CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Check
Check
Check
Check
visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.
PBIB1032E
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE:
쐌 Do not disassemble water separator.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Replace water separator.
9
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE, O-RING AND CIRCUIT
Refer to “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, EC-404.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring or harness/connector.
10
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
SEF596U
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 11.
No (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 13.
No (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 14.
EC-446
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
11
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
MA
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 13.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 14.
NG
䊳
GO TO 12.
12
EM
LC
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 EVAP canister for damage
쐌 EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
䊳
13
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
FE
Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
CL
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
MT
With CONSULT-II
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine.
Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
PBIB1678E
BR
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 16.
NG
䊳
GO TO 15.
ST
RS
14
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine.
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
BT
HA
SC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 17.
NG
䊳
GO TO 15.
EL
IDX
EC-447
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
15
CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to “Vacuum Hose Drawing”, EC-35.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 16.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 17.
NG
䊳
Repair or reconnect the hose.
16
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.
PBIB1678E
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 18.
NG
䊳
GO TO 17.
EC-448
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
17
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
MA
EM
LC
SEC524D
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF334XA
TF
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
PD
AX
SU
BR
SEC524D
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF335X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 18.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-449
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
18
CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit terminals 1 and 2 by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in
the figure.
SEF974Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 19.
NG
䊳
Replace fuel level sensor unit.
EC-450
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
19
GI
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
쐌 Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
MA
EM
LC
SEF799W
2. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor from EVAP canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
3. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEC422D
CAUTION:
쐌 Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
쐌 Do not apply below −93.3 kPa (−700 mmHg, −27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
쐌 Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5
m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
AX
SU
OK or NG
BR
OK
䊳
GO TO 20.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
ST
20
CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
Refer to “Evaporative Emission System”, EC-41.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 21.
NG
䊳
Repair or reconnect the hose.
21
CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
䊳
RS
BT
HA
SC
GO TO 22.
EL
IDX
EC-451
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
22
CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR LINE
쐌 Check refueling EVAP vapor line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-45.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 23.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
23
CHECK SIGNAL LINE AND RECIRCULATION LINE
쐌 Check signal line and recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 24.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace hoses, tubes or filler neck tube.
24
CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE
1. Remove fuel filler cap.
2. Check air continuity between hose ends A and B.
Blow air into hose end B. Air should flow freely into the fuel tank.
3. Blow air into hose end A and check that there is no leakage.
4. Apply pressure to both hose ends A and B [20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg)] using a pressure pump and a suitable
3-way connector. Check that there is no leakage.
SEC883C
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 25.
NG
䊳
Replace or refueling control valve with fuel tank.
25
CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to EL-134, “Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 26.
NG
䊳
Replace fuel level sensor unit.
EC-452
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
26
GI
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
MA
INSPECTION END
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-453
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0991
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal
to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel
level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is
variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
SEF018S
On Board Diagnostic Logic
NAEC0992
NOTE:
If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to
“DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE”, EC-172.
When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank
is stable. It means that output signal of the fuel level sensor does
not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel
level sensor malfunction is detected.
DTC No.
P0460
0460
Trouble diagnosis
name
Fuel level sensor circuit noise
DTC Detecting Condition
Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal being
varied is sent from the fuel level sensor to ECM.
Possible Cause
쐌 Fuel level sensor circuit
(The fuel level sensor circuit is open
or shorted.)
쐌 Fuel level sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0993
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF195Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC0993S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-455.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
EC-454
NAEC0993S02
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
=NAEC0995
GI
CHECK FUEL GAUGE OPERATION
Refer to EL-129, “Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode”.
MA
OK or NG
EM
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Follow the instruction of “Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter Segment Check in
Diagnosis Mode”, Refer to EL-129.
2
LC
CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR AND CIRCUIT
Refer to EL-133, “INSPECTION/FUEL LEVEL SENSOR”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3
FE
CL
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
MT
INSPECTION END
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-455
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
Component Description
=NAEC0996
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal
to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel
level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is
variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
SEF018S
On Board Diagnostic Logic
NAEC0997
NOTE:
If DTC P0461 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to
“DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE”, EC-172.
Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level.
This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not
moving even after a long distance has been driven.
DTC No.
P0461
0461
Trouble diagnosis
name
Fuel level sensor circuit range/
performance
DTC Detecting Condition
Possible Cause
The output signal of the fuel level sensor does not 쐌 Harness or connectors
change within the specified range even though the
(The level sensor circuit is open or
vehicle has been driven a long distance.
shorted.)
쐌 Fuel level sensor
Overall Function Check
NAEC0998
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level
sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be
confirmed.
WARNING:
When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the
handling of the fuel. Refer to FE-5, “Fuel Tank”.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining
fuel and refilling fuel is required.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF195Y
NAEC0998S01
NOTE:
Start from step 11, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel
cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) in
advance.
1) Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2) Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to “Fuel Pressure
Release”, EC-64.
3) Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
4) Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was
removed.
EC-456
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
5)
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds then
turn “ON”.
6) Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
7) Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
8) Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
9) Touch “ON” and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal,
6-5/8 Imp gal) and stop it.
10) Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
11) Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
12) Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and confirm whether
the voltage changes more than 0.03V during step 7 to 11.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-457.
WITH GST
1
MA
EM
LC
FE
NAEC0998S02
NOTE:
Start from step 11, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel
cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) in
advance.
1) Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2) Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to “Fuel Pressure
Release”, EC-64.
3) Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
4) Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was
removed.
5) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
6) Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel
tank using proper equipment.
7) Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies.
8) Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
9) Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies.
10) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-457.
Diagnostic Procedure
GI
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
NAEC1226
BR
CHECK FUEL GAUGE OPERATION
Refer to EL-129, “Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Follow the instruction of “Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter Segment Check in
Diagnosis Mode”. Refer to EL-129.
2
CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR AND CIRCUIT
Refer to EL-133, “INSPECTION/FUEL LEVEL SENSOR”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
IDX
INSPECTION END
EC-457
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0999
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal
to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel
level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is
variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
SEF018S
On Board Diagnostic Logic
NAEC1000
NOTE:
If DTC P0462, P0463 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first
perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to
“DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE”, EC-172.
ECM receives two signals from the fuel level sensor circuit.
One is fuel level sensor power supply circuit, and the other is fuel
level sensor ground circuit.
This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit
malfunction.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis
name
P0462
0462
Fuel level sensor circuit low input
P0463
0463
Fuel level sensor circuit high input
DTC Detecting Condition
Possible Cause
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent 쐌 Harness or connectors
to ECM.
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
쐌 Fuel level sensor
sent to ECM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1001
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at ignition switch “ON”.
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC1001S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-459.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
SEF195Y
EC-458
NAEC1001S02
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
=NAEC1003
GI
CHECK FUEL GAUGE OPERATION
Refer to EL-129, “Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode”.
MA
OK or NG
EM
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Follow the instruction of “Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter Segment Check in
Diagnosis Mode”. Refer to EL-129.
2
LC
CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR AND CIRCUIT
Refer to EL-133, “INSPECTION/FUEL LEVEL SENSOR”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3
FE
CL
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
MT
INSPECTION END
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-459
DTC P0500 VSS
Description
Description
=NAEC1004
NOTE:
If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-172.
The vehicle speed sensor is installed in the transmission. It contains a pulse generator which provides a vehicle
speed signal to the combination meter. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM through CAN
communication line.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0500
0500
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC Detecting Condition
NAEC1006
Possible Cause
Vehicle speed sensor The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from vehicle
쐌 Harness or connectors
speed sensor is sent to ECM even when vehicle is
(The CAN communication line is open
being driven.
or shorted)
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The vehicle speed sensor circuit is
open or shorted)
쐌 Vehicle speed sensor
쐌 Combination meter
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1007
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted
in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected
to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
NAEC1007S01
Start engine.
Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULT-II should
exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable
gear position.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-461.
If OK, go to following step.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive
seconds.
ENG SPEED
More than 1,800 rpm (A/T models)
More than 2,000 rpm (M/T models)
COOLAN TEMP/S
More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL
More than 5.5 msec
Selector lever
Except “P” or “N” position
PW/ST SIGNAL
OFF
SEF196Y
EC-460
DTC P0500 VSS
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
6)
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-461.
GI
MA
EM
LC
Overall Function Check
NAEC1008
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle
speed sensor signal circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC1008S01
Lift up drive wheels.
Start engine.
Read vehicle speed sensor signal in “MODE 1” with GST.
The vehicle speed sensor signal on GST should be able to
exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable
gear position.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-461.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
Diagnostic Procedure
1
CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
NAEC1010
BR
Refer to EL-130, “Trouble Diagnosis”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace.
2
RS
CHECK COMBINATION METER
BT
Check combination meter function.
Refer to EL-125, “COMBINATION METERS”.
䊳
ST
HA
INSPECTION END
SC
EL
IDX
EC-461
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM
Description
Description
NAEC1227
NOTE:
If DTC P0506 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is
let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve
is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects
the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadly.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions,
such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner and power steering operation, etc.).
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0506
0506
Trouble diagnosis
name
Idle speed control
system RPM lower
than expected
DTC Detecting Condition
The idle speed is not in the specified range.
NAEC1228
Possible Cause
쐌 Electric throttle control actuator
쐌 Intake air leak
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1229
NOTE:
쐌 If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
쐌 If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform “Idle Air Volume Learning” before conducting “DTC
Confirmation Procedure”. For the target idle speed, refer
to the “Service Data and Specifications (SDS)”, EC-792.
TESTING CONDITION:
쐌 Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
쐌 Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C
(14°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
NAEC1229S01
Open engine hood.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON” again and select “DATA MONITOR”
mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-463.
SEF174Y
EC-462
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH GST
NAEC1229S02
GI
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
MA
EM
LC
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1230
CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Discover air leak location and repair.
2
REPLACE ECM
FE
CL
MT
AT
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace ECM.
3. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)”, EC-101.
4. Perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”, EC-81.
5. Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
6. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
INSPECTION END
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-463
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM
Description
Description
NAEC1231
NOTE:
If DTC P0507 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is
let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve
is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects
the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadly.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions,
such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner and power steering operation, etc.).
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0507
0507
Trouble diagnosis
name
Idle speed control
system RPM higher
than expected
DTC Detecting Condition
The idle speed is not in the specified range.
NAEC1232
Possible Cause
쐌 Electric throttle control actuator
쐌 Intake air leak
쐌 PCV system
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1233
NOTE:
쐌 If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
쐌 If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform “Idle Air Volume Learning” before conducting “DTC
Confirmation Procedure”. For the target idle speed, refer
to the “Service Data and Specifications (SDS)”, EC-792.
TESTING CONDITION:
쐌 Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
쐌 Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C
(14°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
NAEC1233S01
Open engine hood.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON” again and select “DATA MONITOR”
mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-465.
SEF174Y
EC-464
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH GST
NAEC1233S02
GI
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
MA
EM
LC
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1234
CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Discover air leak location and repair.
2
REPLACE ECM
FE
CL
MT
AT
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace ECM.
3. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)”, EC-101.
4. Perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”, EC-81.
5. Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
6. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
INSPECTION END
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-465
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC1359
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power
steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load.
This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the
ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and
adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine
speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
SEC526D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1360
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
PW/ST SIGNAL
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
Steering wheel is in neutral position.
OFF
쐌 Engine: After warming up, idle the (Forward direction)
engine
Steering wheel is turned.
ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1361
The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
NOTE:
If DTC P0550 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-596.
DTC No.
P0550
0550
Trouble diagnosis name
Power steering pressure
sensor circuit
DTC detecting condition
An excessively low or high voltage from the
sensor is sent to ECM.
Possible cause
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 Power steering pressure sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1362
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-468, “Diagnostic Procedure”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
EC-466
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1363
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC113E
EC-467
IDX
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and body ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
12
WIRE
COLOR
R/B
67
B/P
68
L
ITEM
Power steering pressure sensor
Sensors’ ground
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
쐌 Steering wheel is being turned.
0.5 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
쐌 Steering wheel is not being turned.
0.4 - 0.8V
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
Approximately 0V
Sensors’ power supply [Ignition switch “ON”]
Diagnostic Procedure
1
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
NAEC1364
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF959Y
䊳
GO TO 2.
EC-468
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2
GI
CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect PSP sensor harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
MA
EM
LC
SEC526D
3. Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEC048D
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
3
AX
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
SU
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E132, E135
쐌 Harness connectors E116, M114
쐌 Harness connectors M32, F23
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM and power steering pressure sensor
䊳
4
PD
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 3 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-469
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E102, E48
쐌 Harness connectors E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M32, F23
쐌 Harness connectors F22, M33
쐌 Joint connector F204
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM and PSP sensor
쐌 Harness for open or short between TCM and PSP sensor.
䊳
6
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and PSP sensor terminal 2. Refer to wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
7
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E102, E48
쐌 Harness connectors E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M32, F23
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM and power steering pressure sensor
䊳
8
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK PSP SENSOR
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-470.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Replace PSP sensor.
9
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
NAEC1365
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under
the following conditions.
Condition
MBIB0025E
Voltage
Steering wheel is turned fully.
Approximately 0.5 - 4.0V
Steering wheel is not turned.
Approximately 0.4 - 0.8V
EC-470
DTC P0605 ECM
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC1235
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the engine.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEC405D
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1236
This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic.
P0605
0605
FE
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC No.
Engine control module
DTC Detecting Condition
A)
ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.
B)
ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning.
C)
ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.
Possible Cause
CL
쐌 ECM
MT
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction A is detected.
Detected items
Malfunction A
AT
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
쐌 ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening
(approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
쐌 ECM deactivates ASCD operation.
TF
PD
AX
SU
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1237
Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If the 1st
trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE FOR
MALFUNCTION B”. If there is no malfunction on “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B”, perform “PROCEDURE FOR
MALFUNCTION C”.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-472, “Diagnostic Procedure”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEF058Y
EC-471
DTC P0605 ECM
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds, and then
turn “ON”.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-472, “Diagnostic Procedure”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
SEF058Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds, and then
turn “ON”.
4) Repeat “step 3” 32 times.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-472, “Diagnostic Procedure”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1238
INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “ERASE”.
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-471.
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
1.
2.
3.
4.
With GST
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select MODE 4 with GST.
Touch “ERASE”.
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-471.
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
1.
2.
3.
4.
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
INSPECTION END
2
REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)”, EC-101.
3. Perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”, EC-81.
4. Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
5. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-472
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY (BACK UP)
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC1239
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition
switch is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC
memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory,
the idle air volume learning value memory, etc.
GI
MA
EM
LC
PBIB1164E
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC1244
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and body ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
121
WIRE
COLOR
W/R
ITEM
CONDITION
P1065
1065
CL
DATA (DC Voltage)
MT
Power supply for ECM
(Back-up)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
FE
Trouble diagnosis name
ECM power supply circuit
DTC detecting condition
ECM back-up RAM system does not function
properly.
AT
NAEC1240
TF
Possible cause
쐌 Harness or connectors
[ECM power supply (back-up) circuit
is open or shorted.]
쐌 ECM
PD
AX
SU
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1241
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
BR
ST
RS
BT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds, and then
turn “ON”.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 four times.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-476.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEF058Y
EC-473
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY (BACK UP)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
With GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
EC-474
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY (BACK UP)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1242
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC345E
EC-475
IDX
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY (BACK UP)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1243
CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 121 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
MBIB0026E
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M32, F23
쐌 7.5A fuse
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
䊳
3
Repair or replace harness or connectors.
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace harness or connectors.
EC-476
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY (BACK UP)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “ERASE”.
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-473.
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again?
GI
1.
2.
3.
4.
MA
With GST
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select MODE 4 with GST.
Touch “ERASE”.
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-473.
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again?
LC
EM
1.
2.
3.
4.
FE
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 5.
No
䊳
INSPECTION END
CL
MT
5
REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)”, EC-101.
3. Perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”, EC-81.
4. Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
5. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
INSPECTION END
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-477
DTC P1102 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I)
Application Notice
Application Notice
NAEC1411
Confirm the type of the vehicle. Refer to “How to Check Vehicle
Type”, EC-9.
Component Description
SEC266C
NAEC0803
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric
current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is controlled
by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film
is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the
greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain
the temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM
detects the air flow by means of this current change.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0804
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
MAS A/F SE-B1
CAL/LD VALUE
MASS AIRFLOW
CONDITION
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
SPECIFICATION
Idle
1.2 - 1.8V
2,500 rpm
1.6 - 2.2V
Idle
14.0 - 33.0%
2,500 rpm
12.0 - 25.0%
Idle
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
2,500 rpm
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
ditto
ditto
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0805
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
48
51
WIRE
COLOR
P/B
OR
ITEM
Sensors’ power supply
Mass air flow sensor
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
1.2 - 1.8V
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
1.6 - 2.2V
EC-478
DTC P1102 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I)
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
GI
TERMINAL
NO.
67
WIRE
COLOR
B/P
ITEM
CONDITION
Mass air flow sensor
ground
DATA (DC Voltage)
MA
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
Approximately 0V
EM
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC0806
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
NOTE:
If DTC P1102 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-596.
DTC No.
P1102
1102
Trouble diagnosis
name
Mass air flow sensor
circuit range/
performance problem
DTC Detecting Condition
A voltage from the sensor is constantly approx.
1.0V when engine is running.
Possible Cause
LC
FE
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 Mass air flow sensor
CL
MT
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NAEC0806S01
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Detected items
AT
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Mass air flow sensor circuit
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
TF
PD
AX
SU
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC0808
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
BR
ST
RS
BT
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC0808S06
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-481.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
NAEC0808S07
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEF058Y
EC-479
DTC P1102 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0810
MEC082E
EC-480
DTC P1102 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0811
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
MA
Check the following for connection.
쐌 Air duct
쐌 Vacuum hoses
EM
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Reconnect the parts.
2
GI
LC
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF959Y
䊳
TF
GO TO 3.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-481
DTC P1102 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
SEF960Y
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminals 2, 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEC428D
MTBL1352
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
4
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M32, F23
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM relay and mass air flow sensor
쐌 Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-482
DTC P1102 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect TCM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67, MAF sensor terminal 3 and TCM terminal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
GI
MA
EM
LC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
6
FE
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors F22, M33
쐌 Joint connector
쐌 Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
쐌 Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and TCM
䊳
CL
MT
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
AT
7
CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 5 and ECM terminal 51.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
TF
PD
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-483
DTC P1102 MAF SENSOR (TYPE I)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.
SEF100V
MTBL1353
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect MAF sensor harness connector and connect it again.
Then repeat above check.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Replace mass air flow sensor.
9
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-484
DTC P1110, P1135 IVT CONTROL
Description
Description
NAEC1371
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
GI
NAEC1371S01
Sensor
Input signal to ECM function
ECM
MA
Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed and piston position
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Vehicle speed signal*1
Vehicle speed
Intake
valve timing control
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
EM
LC
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEC419D
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the camshaft timing control valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to increase
engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
AX
SU
BR
ST
NAEC1372
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
INT/V TIM (B1)
INT/V TIM (B2)
INT/V SOL (B1)
INT/V SOL (B2)
CONDITION
쐌 Engine: After warming up
쐌 Shift lever “N”
쐌 Quickly depressed accelerator
pedal
쐌 No-load
쐌 Engine: After warming up
쐌 Shift lever “N”
쐌 Quickly depressed accelerator
pedal
쐌 No-load
SPECIFICATION
Idle
0° CA
2,000 rpm
Approximately 12 - 18° CA
Idle
0%
RS
BT
HA
SC
2,000 rpm
Approximately 40%
EL
IDX
EC-485
DTC P1110, P1135 IVT CONTROL
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1110
1110
(Bank 1)
P1135
1135
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis
name
Intake valve timing
control performance
DTC Detecting Condition
The alignment of the intake valve timing control has been misregistered.
=NAEC1373
Possible Cause
쐌 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
쐌 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
쐌 Accumulation of debris to the signal
pick-up portion of the camshaft
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NAEC1373S01
When malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.
Detected items
Intake valve timing control
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1374
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
NOTE:
쐌 If DTC P1110 or P1135 is displayed with DTC P1111 or
P1136, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1111 or
P1136, EC-488.
쐌 If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
NAEC1374S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 conecutive
seconds.
ENG SPEED
1,200 - 2,000 rpm (A constant rotation
is maintained.)
COOLANT TEMPS
More than 60°C (140°F)
Selector lever
1st position
Driving location
Driving vehicle uphill
(Increased engine load will help maintain the driving conditions required for
this test.)
SEF353Z
4)
Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 conecutive
seconds.
ENG SPEED
Idle
COOLANT TEMPS
More than 60°C (140°F)
Selector lever
“P” or “N” position
EC-486
DTC P1110, P1135 IVT CONTROL
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
5)
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-487.
WITH GST
NAEC1374S02
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
GI
MA
EM
LC
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1375
CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
FE
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-356.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
2
CL
MT
CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
AT
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-365.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Replace.
TF
PD
3
CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)
Visually check for chipped signal plate at camshaft.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEC578D
RS
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Replace camshaft.
4
BT
HA
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-352 CKP sensor (POS), and EC-359 for CMP sensor (PHASE).
SC
OK or NG
䊳
EL
INSPECTION END
IDX
EC-487
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Component Description
Component Description
PBIB1842E
NAEC1036
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF
pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1037
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
INT/V SOL (B1)
INT/V SOL (B2)
CONDITION
쐌 Engine: After warming up
쐌 Shift lever “N”
쐌 Quickly depressed accelerator
pedal
쐌 No-load
SPECIFICATION
Idle
0%
2,000 rpm
Approximately 40%
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC1038
Specification data are reference values, and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than the ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
7 - 8V★
10
P/L
Intake valve timing
control solenoid
valves (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
quickly.
PBIB1790E
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
7 - 8V★
11
OR/B
Intake valve timing
control solenoid
valves (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
quickly.
PBIB1790E
★: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
EC-488
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1111
1111
(Bank 1)
P1136
1136
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC Detecting Condition
Intake valve timing
An improper voltage is sent to the ECM through
control solenoid valve intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
circuit
NAEC1039
Possible Cause
MA
쐌 Harness or connectors
(Intake valve timing control solenoid
valve circuit is open or shorted.)
쐌 Intake valve timing control solenoid
valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure
SEF353Z
1)
2)
3)
4)
WITH GST
LC
FE
CL
NAEC1040S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-492.
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
EM
NAEC1040
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
GI
NAEC1040S02
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-489
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1
NAEC1041
NAEC1041S01
MEC099E
EC-490
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
BANK 2
NAEC1041S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC100E
EC-491
IDX
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1042
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
SEC572D
SEC573D
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEC556D
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
DETECT MALFUNCTION PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M33, F22
쐌 Harness continuity between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and ECM relay
䊳
Repair harness or connectors.
EC-492
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
GI
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness connectors continuity between ECM terminal 11 (bank 1) or 10 (bank 2) and intake valve timing control
solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
MA
OK or NG
LC
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4
CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
EM
FE
Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals as follows.
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEC555D
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
5
PD
AX
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
SU
INSPECTION END
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-493
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC1245
Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throttle
valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle
valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC No.
P1121
1121
Electric throttle control
actuator
DTC detecting condition
A)
Electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring malfunction.
B)
Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode
is not in specified range.
C)
ECM detects that the throttle valve is stuck
open.
NAEC1246
Possible cause
쐌 Electric throttle control actuator
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Detected items
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Malfunction A
The ECM controls the electric throttle throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle
position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
Malfunction B
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less.
Malfunction C
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in “N” or “P” position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1247
NOTE:
쐌 Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B”
first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
“PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C”.
If there is no malfunction on “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B”, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C”.
쐌 If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Shift selector lever to “D” position and wait at least 2 seconds.
4) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
5) Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
6) Shift selector lever to “D” position and wait at least 2 seconds.
7) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds, and then
turn “ON”.
SEF058Y
EC-494
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
8)
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-495.
With GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF058Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Shift selector lever to “D” position and wait at least 2 seconds.
4) Shift selector lever to “N” or “P” position.
5) Start engine and let it idle for 3 seconds.
6) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-495.
With GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
1
FE
CL
MT
AT
NAEC1248
CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
TF
1. Remove the intake air duct.
2. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing.
PD
AX
SU
BR
SEC513D
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside.
2
REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
3. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
ST
RS
BT
HA
INSPECTION END
SC
EL
IDX
EC-495
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
Description
Description
NAEC1249
NOTE:
If DTC P1122 is displayed with DTC P1121 or P1126, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1121
or P1126. Refer to EC-494, 504.
Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides the
feedback to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC1268
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
3
WIRE
COLOR
OR
ITEM
Throttle control motor
relay power supply
CONDITION
[Ignition switch “ON”]
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
0 - 14V★
4
L/W
Throttle control motor
(Close)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Shift lever position is “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
쐌 Accelerator pedal is releasing
PBIB1104E
0 - 14V★
5
L/B
Throttle control motor
(Open)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Shift lever position is “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
쐌 Accelerator pedal is depressing
PBIB1105E
104
L
Throttle control motor
relay
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
0 - 1.0V
★: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
EC-496
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
=NAEC1250
GI
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P1122
1122
Trouble diagnosis
name
Electric throttle control performance
problem
DTC Detecting Condition
Electric throttle control function does not operate
properly.
MA
Possible Cause
쐌 Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor circuit is open
or shorted.)
쐌 Electric throttle control actuator
EM
LC
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the
return spring.
FE
CL
MT
DTC Confirmation Procedure
AT
NAEC1251
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TF
PD
AX
SU
1)
2)
3)
4)
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-499.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-497
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1252
MEC121E
EC-498
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1253
GI
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
EM
LC
FE
SEF959Y
䊳
2
CL
GO TO 2.
CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
MT
Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.
AT
TF
PD
AX
MBIB0028E
SU
BR
MTBL1168
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-499
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect throttle control motor relay.
SEC425D
3. Check voltage between throttle control motor relay terminals 1, 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEC538D
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
4
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 15A fuse
쐌 Harness for open and short between throttle control motor relay and battery
䊳
5
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 3 and throttle control motor relay terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
EC-500
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
GI
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connector E1, M11
쐌 Harness connector M33, F22
쐌 Harness for open and short between throttle control motor relay and ECM
䊳
7
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
MA
EM
LC
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 104 and throttle control motor relay terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
GO TO 8.
8
CL
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connector E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M33, F22
쐌 Harness for open and short between throttle control motor relay and ECM
䊳
9
FE
MT
AT
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
TF
CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
PD
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-503.
OK or NG
AX
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Replace throttle control motor relay.
SU
10
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
BR
INSPECTION END
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-501
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
11
CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
SEC433D
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL1377
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 12.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
12
CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
1. Remove the intake air duct.
2. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing.
SEC513D
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 13.
NG
䊳
Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside.
EC-502
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
13
GI
CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-503.
MA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 14.
NG
䊳
GO TO 15.
14
EM
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
LC
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 15.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace harness or connectors.
15
FE
REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
CL
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
3. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
MT
INSPECTION END
AT
Component Inspection
NAEC1254
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NAEC1254S01
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
TF
PD
AX
SU
PBIB0095E
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
1.
2.
NAEC1254S02
Apply 12V direct current between relay terminals 1 and 2.
Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5.
Conditions
Continuity
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No current supply
No
3.
If NG, replace throttle control motor relay.
PBIB0098E
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-503
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC1255
Power supply for the Throttle Control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch
is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1256
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
THRTL RELAY
ON
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC1269
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
3
104
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
OR
Throttle control motor
relay power supply
L
Throttle control motor
relay
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
0 - 1.0V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1257
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC Detecting Condition
Possible Cause
P1124
1124
Throttle control motor ECM detects that the throttle control motor relay is 쐌 Harness or connectors
relay circuit short
stuck ON.
(Throttle control motor relay circuit is
shorted)
쐌 Throttle control motor relay
P1126
1126
Throttle control motor ECM detects that a voltage of power source for
relay circuit open
throttle control motor is excessively low.
쐌 Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor relay circuit is
open)
쐌 Throttle control motor relay
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NAEC1257S01
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the
return spring.
EC-504
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1258
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1124
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-507.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
1)
2)
3)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
SEF058Y
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1126
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
4) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-507.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF058Y
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-505
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1259
MEC122E
EC-506
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1260
GI
CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect throttle control motor relay.
EM
LC
FE
SEC425D
3. Check voltage between throttle control motor relay terminals 1, 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEC538D
Voltage: Battery voltage
PD
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
AX
SU
2
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 15A fuse
쐌 Harness for open and short between throttle control motor relay and battery
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
ST
CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
RS
䊳
3
BR
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 3 and throttle control motor relay terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-507
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connector E1, M1
쐌 Harness connector M33, F22
쐌 Harness for open and short between throttle control motor relay and ECM
䊳
5
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 104 and throttle control motor relay terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
6
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connector E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M33, F22
쐌 Harness for open and short between throttle control motor relay and ECM
䊳
7
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-508.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Replace throttle control motor relay.
8
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
NAEC1261
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
1. Apply 12V direct current between relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5.
PBIB0098E
Conditions
Continuity
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No current supply
No
3.
If NG, replace throttle control motor relay.
EC-508
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC1262
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC1270
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
0 - 14V★
4
L/W
Throttle control motor
(Close)
CL
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Shift lever position is “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
쐌 Accelerator pedal is releasing
MT
PBIB1104E
AT
0 - 14V★
TF
5
L/B
Throttle control motor
(Open)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Shift lever position is “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
쐌 Accelerator pedal is depressing
PD
PBIB1105E
★: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
SU
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1263
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P1128
1128
Trouble diagnosis
name
BR
DTC Detecting Condition
Throttle control motor ECM detects short in both circuits between ECM
circuit short
and throttle control motor.
AX
Possible Cause
ST
쐌 Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor circuit is
shorted.)
쐌 Electric throttle control actuator
(Throttle control motor)
RS
BT
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1264
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-509
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
1)
2)
3)
4)
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-512.
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
EC-510
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1265
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC123E
EC-511
IDX
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1266
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF959Y
䊳
2
1.
2.
3.
4.
GO TO 2.
CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
SEC433D
MTBL1377
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-512
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-513.
MA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
4
EM
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
LC
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5
FE
REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
CL
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
3. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
MT
INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
AT
NAEC1267
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
4. Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
5. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
TF
PD
AX
SU
PBIB0095E
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-513
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Description
Description
NAEC1043
If DTC P1130 is displayed with P1165, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1165, EC-577.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
NAEC1043S01
ECM function
Swirl control valve
control
Actuator
Swirl control valve control solenoid valve
" Vacuum signal
Swirl control valve actuator
"
Swirl control valve
This system has a swirl control valve in the intake passage of each
cylinder.
While idling and during low engine speed operation, the swirl control valve closes. Thus the velocity of the air in the intake passage
increases, promoting the vaporization of the fuel and producing a
swirl in the combustion chamber.
Because of this operation, this system tends to increase the burning speed of the gas mixture, improve fuel consumption, and
increase the stability in running conditions.
Also, except when idling and during low engine speed operation,
this system opens the swirl control valve. In this condition, this
system tends to increase power by improving intake efficiency via
reduction of intake flow resistance, intake flow.
The solenoid valve controls swirl control valve’s shut/open condition. This solenoid valve is operated by the ECM.
Accelerator
pedal position
sensor (Idle
position)
Engine speed
(A/T)
Engine speed
(M/T)
Swirl control
valve control
solenoid valve
Swirl control
valve
ON
Below 3,200
rpm
Below 2,400
rpm
ON
Closed
Less than
3,200 rpm
Less than
2,400 rpm
ON
Closed
More than
3,600 rpm
More than
2,800 rpm
OFF
Open
OFF
When engine coolant temperature is below 10°C (50°F) and above 55°C (131°F),
swirl control valve is kept open regardless of above condition.
SEF446Z
EC-514
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Description (Cont’d)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Swirl Control Valve Control Solenoid Valve
NAEC1043S02
GI
NAEC1043S0201
The swirl control valve control solenoid valve responds to signals
from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the
solenoid valve is bypassed to apply intake manifold vacuum to the
swirl control valve actuator. This operation closes the swirl control
valve. When the ECM sends an OFF signal, the vacuum signal is
cut and the swirl control valve opens.
MA
EM
LC
SEC539D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1044
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
SWRL CONT S/V
CONDITION
쐌 Engine speed: Idle
SPECIFICATION
CL
Engine coolant temperature is
between 15°C (59°F) to 50°C
(122°F).
ON
Engine coolant temperature is
above 55°C (131°F).
OFF
MT
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
AT
NAEC1045
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
27
WIRE
COLOR
G
ITEM
FE
CONDITION
TF
PD
DATA (DC Voltage)
AX
[Engine is running]
쐌 Idle speed
쐌 Engine coolant temperature is between 15 to
50°C (59 to 122°F).
Swirl control valve control solenoid valve
[Engine is running]
쐌 Idle speed
쐌 Engine coolant temperature is above 55°C
(131°F).
0 - 1.0V
SU
BR
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-515
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1130
1130
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC Detecting Condition
Swirl control valve
A)
control solenoid valve
An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM
through swirl control valve control solenoid
valve.
NAEC1046
Possible Cause
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The swirl control valve control solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.)
쐌 Swirl control valve control solenoid
valve
B)
The vacuum signal is not sent to swirl con- 쐌 Harness or connector
trol valve under specified driving conditions,
(The swirl control valve control soleeven though swirl control valve control solenoid valve circuit is open.)
noid valve is ON.
쐌 Swirl control valve control solenoid
valve
쐌 Intake system
(Intake air leaks)
쐌 Hoses and tubes between intake
manifold, vacuum tank and swirl control valve actuator
쐌 Swirl control valve actuator
쐌 Swirl control valve control vacuum
check switch
쐌 Mass air flow sensor
쐌 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
쐌 Throttle position sensor
쐌 Accelerator pedal position sensor
C)
The vacuum signal is sent to swirl control
valve even though swirl control valve control solenoid valve is OFF.
쐌 Harness or connector
(The swirl control valve control solenoid valve circuit is shorted.)
쐌 Swirl control valve control vacuum
check switch
쐌 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
쐌 Throttle position sensor
쐌 Accelerator pedal position sensor
쐌 Hoses and tubes between air cleaner
and swirl control valve vacuum check
switch
쐌 Swirl control valve control solenoid
valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1047
Perform “Procedure for malfunction A” first. If the 1st trip DTC
cannot be confirmed, perform “Procedure for malfunction B”.
If the 1st trip DTC is not confirmed on “Procedure for malfunction B”, perform “Procedure for malfunction C”.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
EC-516
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
NAEC1047S01
NAEC1047S0101
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-519.
With GST
GI
NAEC1047S0102
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
MA
EM
LC
SEF058Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
NAEC1047S02
TESTING CONDITION:
쐌 For best results, perform the test at a temperature above
5°C (41°F).
쐌 Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 10V at idle, then stop engine
immediately.
With CONSULT-II
SEF174Y
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
NAEC1047S0201
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Confirm COOLAN TEMP/S value is 40°C (104°F) or less.
If the value is more than 40°C (104°F), park the vehicle in a
cool place and retry from step 1.
Start engine and wait until COOLAN TEMP/S value increases
to more than 55°C (131°F).
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-519.
With GST
With CONSULT-II
SEF174Y
4)
With GST
AT
TF
PD
AX
NAEC1047S03
NAEC1047S0301
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON” again and select “DATA MONITOR”
mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds. If 1st trip
DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-519.
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
MT
SU
TESTING CONDITION:
쐌 For best results, perform the test at a temperature above
5°C (41°F).
쐌 Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
1)
2)
3)
CL
NAEC1047S0202
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
FE
NAEC1047S0302
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-517
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1048
MEC101E
EC-518
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
PROCEDURE A
1
NAEC1049
GI
NAEC1049S01
MA
INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
EM
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
GO TO 3.
2
LC
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF003Z
4. Make sure that clicking sound is heard from the swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-519
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect swirl control valve control solenoid valve harness connector.
SEC539D
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF619X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
4
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M33, F22
쐌 Harness for open or short between swirl control valve control solenoid valve and ECM relay
䊳
5
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 27 and swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
EC-520
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
GI
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Reconnect the disconnected harness connectors.
Start engine and let it idle.
Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
Select “SWIRL CONT SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
SEC540D
MT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Without CONSULT-II
Reconnect ECM harness connector.
Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
Start engine and let it idle.
Apply 12V of direct current between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2.
Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEC541D
BR
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Replace intake manifold collector assembly.
ST
RS
7
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-521
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE B
1
NAEC1049S02
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Check intake air system for air leaks.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 2.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair intake system.
2
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF003Z
3. Make sure that clicking sound is heard from the swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
EC-522
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect swirl control valve control solenoid valve harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEC539D
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF619X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
4
AX
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
SU
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M33, F22
쐌 Harness for open or short between swirl control valve control solenoid valve and ECM relay
䊳
5
PD
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 27 and swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
OK or NG
SC
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
EL
IDX
EC-523
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
CHECK HOSES
Check hoses and tubes between intake manifold, and swirl control valve actuator for crack, clogging, improper connection
or disconnection.
SEF109L
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Repair hoses or tubes.
EC-524
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
GI
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Reconnect the disconnected harness connectors.
Start engine and let it idle.
Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
SEC540D
MT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Without CONSULT-II
Reconnect ECM harness connector.
Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
Start engine and let it idle.
Apply 12V of direct current between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2.
Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEC541D
BR
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Replace intake manifold collector assembly.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-525
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE ACTUATOR
With CONSULT-II
Reconnect vacuum hose between swirl control valve actuator and swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
Start engine and let it idle.
Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
Make sure that swirl control valve actuator rod moves according to “SWIRL CONT SOL/V indication.
SEF006ZA
1.
2.
3.
4.
Without CONSULT-II
Reconnect vacuum hose between swirl control valve actuator and swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
Start engine and let it idle.
Apply 12V direct current between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2.
Make sure that swirl control valve actuator rod moves according to 12V direct current being applied.
SEF006ZA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Replace swirl control valve actuator.
EC-526
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
9
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
Attach vacuum pump to swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 59 and ground under the following conditions.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEC542D
CL
MT
AT
TF
MTBL1369
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Replace swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-527
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
10
CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.
SEC543D
MTBL1807
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect MAF sensor harness connector and connect it again.
Then repeat above check.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
Replace mass air flow sensor.
11
CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-737, “Component Inspection”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 12.
NG
䊳
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
12
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-729, “Component Inspection”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 13.
NG
䊳
Replace electric throttle control actuator.
13
CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
Refer to EC-365, “Component Inspection”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 14.
NG
䊳
Replace crankshaft position sensor (PHASE).
EC-528
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
14
GI
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
MA
INSPECTION END
PROCEDURE C
1
NAEC1049S03
INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
LC
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
GO TO 3.
2
EM
FE
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEF003Z
4. Make sure that clicking sound is heard from the swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
AX
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-529
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect swirl control valve control solenoid valve harness connector.
SEC539D
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF619X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
4
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M33, F22
쐌 Harness for open or short between swirl control valve control solenoid valve and ECM relay
䊳
5
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 27 and swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
EC-530
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
GI
CHECK HOSES
Check hoses and tubes between air cleaner and swirl control valve vacuum check switch for clogging or improper connection.
MA
EM
LC
SEF109L
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Repair hoses or tubes.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-531
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Reconnect the disconnected harness connectors.
Start engine and let it idle.
Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEC540D
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Without CONSULT-II
Reconnect ECM harness connector.
Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
Start engine and let it idle.
Apply 12V of direct current between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2.
Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEC541D
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Replace intake manifold collector assembly.
EC-532
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
Attach vacuum pump to swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 59 and ground under the following conditions.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEC542D
CL
MT
AT
TF
MTBL1369
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Replace swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
9
CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
PD
AX
SU
Refer to EC-365, “Component Inspection”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
10
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
BR
ST
RS
Refer to EC-729, “Component Inspection”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
Replace electric throttle control actuator.
11
CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-737, “Component Inspection”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 12.
NG
䊳
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-533
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
12
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-534
DTC P1131 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC1050
The swirl control valve control solenoid valve responds to signals
from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the
solenoid valve is bypassed to apply intake manifold vacuum to the
swirl control valve actuator. This operation closes the swirl control
valve. When the ECM sends an OFF signal, the vacuum signal is
cut and the swirl control valve opens.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEC539D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1051
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
SWRL CONT S/V
CONDITION
쐌 Engine speed: Idle
SPECIFICATION
CL
Engine coolant temperature is
between 15°C (59°F) to 50°C
(122°F).
ON
Engine coolant temperature is
above 55°C (131°F).
OFF
MT
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
AT
NAEC1052
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
27
WIRE
COLOR
G
ITEM
CONDITION
PD
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Idle speed
쐌 Engine coolant temperature is between 15 to
50°C (59 to 122°F).
Swirl control valve control solenoid valve
[Engine is running]
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC Detecting Condition
SU
0 - 1.0V
BR
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
ST
On Board Diagnosis Logic
P1131
1131
TF
AX
쐌 Idle speed
쐌 Engine coolant temperature is above 55°C
(131°F).
DTC No.
FE
NAEC1053
RS
Possible Cause
Swirl control valve
An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through 쐌 Harness or connectors (The swirl
control solenoid valve swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
control valve control solenoid valve
circuit
circuit is open or shorted.)
쐌 Swirl control valve control solenoid
valve
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-535
DTC P1131 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1054
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
SEF058Y
NAEC1054S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-538.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
EC-536
NAEC1054S02
DTC P1131 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
=NAEC1055
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC101E
EC-537
IDX
DTC P1131 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1056
INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
GO TO 3.
2
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF003Z
4. Make sure that clicking sound is heard from the swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
EC-538
DTC P1131 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect swirl control valve control solenoid valve harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEC539D
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF619X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
4
AX
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
SU
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M33, F22
쐌 Harness for open or short between swirl control valve control solenoid valve and ECM relay
䊳
5
PD
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 27 and swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
OK or NG
SC
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
EL
IDX
EC-539
DTC P1131 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Reconnect the disconnected harness connectors.
Start engine and let it idle.
Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
Select “SWIRL CONT SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEC540D
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Without CONSULT-II
Reconnect ECM harness connector.
Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
Start engine and let it idle.
Apply 12V of direct current between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2.
Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEC541D
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Replace intake manifold collector assembly.
7
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-540
DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC1147
The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold.
It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM
adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel
ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from
1V to 0V.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF463R
FE
CL
MT
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1148
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B2)
쐌 Engine: After warming up
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
PD
LEAN +, RICH
Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
WIRE
COLOR
TF
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
NAEC1149
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
AT
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
16
G/B
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Periodically change)
35
G
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Periodically change)
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-541
DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1150
To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sensor 1 is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is sufficiently high and whether the “lean” output is sufficiently low. When
both the outputs are shifting to the lean side, the malfunction will
be detected.
SEF300U
DTC No.
P1143
1143
(Bank 1)
P1163
1163
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis
name
Heated oxygen sensor 1 lean shift monitoring
DTC Detecting Condition
The maximum and minimum voltage from the sen- 쐌
sor are not reached to the specified voltages.
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Possible Cause
Heated oxygen sensor 1
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
Fuel pressure
Injectors
Intake air leaks
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1151
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
쐌 Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
쐌 Before performing following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
EC-542
DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH CONSULT-II
NAEC1151S01
1)
2)
3)
SEC767C
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2) P1143/
P0154” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
4) Touch “START”.
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.
6) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It
will take approximately 50 seconds or more.)
ENG SPEED
1,300 - 2,800 rpm
Vehicle speed
Less than 100 km/h (62 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL
3 - 14 msec
Selector lever
Suitable position
SEC768C
7)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-544.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEC769C
Overall Function Check
NAEC1152
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
SEC430D
쐌
쐌
4)
BR
ST
NAEC1152S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 bank
1 signal) or 16 (HO2S1 bank 2 signal) and engine ground.
Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000
rpm constant under no load.
The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
The minimum voltage is over 0.1V at least one time.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-544.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-543
DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1153
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF959Y
䊳
2
GO TO 2.
RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1.
Tightening torque:
40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
䊳
GO TO 3.
EC-544
DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF968Y
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
CL
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
Erase the DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-100.
Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174. Refer to EC-304.
No
䊳
GO TO 4.
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-545
DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER 1
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect HO2S1 harness connector.
3. Check resistance between HO2S1 terminals as follows.
SEF249Y
MTBL1782
CAUTION:
쐌 Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
쐌 Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
EC-546
DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
GI
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF967Y
6. Check the following.
쐌 “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEF647Y
쐌 “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
쐌 “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
쐌 “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
쐌 Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
쐌 Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-547
DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 bank 1 signal) or 16 (HO2S1 bank 2 signal) and engine
ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
SEC430D
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than 5 times within 10 seconds.
The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.
The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V
CAUTION:
쐌 Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
쐌 Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
7
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
For circuit, refer to “Wiring Diagram”, EC-278.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-548
DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC1154
The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold.
It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM
adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel
ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from
1V to 0V.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF463R
FE
CL
MT
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1155
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B2)
쐌 Engine: After warming up
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
PD
LEAN +, RICH
Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
WIRE
COLOR
TF
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
NAEC1156
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
AT
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
16
G/B
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Periodically change)
35
G
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Periodically change)
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-549
DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1157
To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sensor 1 is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is sufficiently high and “lean” output is sufficiently low. When both the
outputs are shifting to the rich side, the malfunction will be
detected.
SEF299U
DTC No.
P1144
1144
(Bank 1)
P1164
1164
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis
name
Heated oxygen sensor 1 rich shift monitoring
DTC Detecting Condition
The maximum and minimum voltages from the
sensor are outside the specified voltages.
Possible Cause
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Heated oxygen sensor 1
Fuel pressure
Injectors
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1158
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
쐌 Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
쐌 Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
EC-550
DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH CONSULT-II
NAEC1158S01
1)
2)
3)
SEC770C
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2) P1144/
P1164” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
4) Touch “START”.
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.
6) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It
will take approximately 50 seconds or more.)
ENG SPEED
1,300 - 2,800 rpm
Vehicle speed
Less than 100 km/h (62 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL
3 - 14 msec
Selector lever
Suitable position
SEC771C
7)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-552.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEC772C
Overall Function Check
NAEC1159
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
SEC430D
쐌
쐌
4)
BR
ST
NAEC1159S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 bank
1 signal) or 16 (HO2S1 bank 2 signal) and engine ground.
Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000
rpm constant under no load.
The maximum voltage is below 0.8V at least one time.
The minimum voltage is below 0.35V at least one time.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-552.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-551
DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1160
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF959Y
䊳
2
GO TO 2.
RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1.
Tightening torque:
40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
䊳
GO TO 3.
EC-552
DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF968Y
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
CL
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
Erase the DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-100.
Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-312.
No
䊳
GO TO 4.
4
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
CHECK HO2S 1 CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
3. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
BR
ST
OK or NG
RS
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace harness or connectors.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-553
DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER
Check resistance between HO2S1 terminals as follows.
SEF249Y
MTBL1782
CAUTION:
쐌 Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
쐌 Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 6.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
EC-554
DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
GI
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF967Y
6. Check the following.
쐌 “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEF647Y
쐌 “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
쐌 “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
쐌 “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
쐌 Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
쐌 Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-555
DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 bank 1 signal) or 16 (HO2S1 bank 2 signal) and engine
ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
SEC430D
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than 5 times within 10 seconds.
The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.
The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V
CAUTION:
쐌 Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
쐌 Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
8
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
For circuit, refer to “Wiring Diagram”, EC-278.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-556
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
Component Description
Component Description
SEF327R
NAEC1161
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are
shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used
for engine control operation.
GI
MA
EM
LC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1162
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
HO2S2 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S2 MNTR
(B2)
CONDITION
쐌 Engine: After warming up
쐌 After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm
for one minute and at idle for
one minute under no load
SPECIFICATION
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
Revving engine from idle up to
3,000 rpm
LEAN +, RICH
AT
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
55
74
WIRE
COLOR
OR/L
OR
CL
MT
NAEC1163
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
FE
ITEM
CONDITION
Heated oxygen sensor
2 (bank 2)
Heated oxygen sensor
2 (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm after
0 - Approximately 1.0V
the following conditions are met.
쐌 After keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle for one
minute under no load
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PD
AX
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm after
the following conditions are met.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
쐌 After keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle for one
minute under no load
TF
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
NAEC1164
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes
the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated
oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the minimum voltage of
sensor is sufficiently low during the various driving condition such
as fuel-cut.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEF972Z
EC-557
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
On Board Diagnosis Logic (Cont’d)
DTC No.
P1146
1146
(Bank 1)
P1166
1166
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis
name
Heated oxygen sensor 2 minimum voltage monitoring
DTC Detecting Condition
The minimum voltage from the sensor is not
reached to the specified voltage.
Possible Cause
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 Heated oxygen sensor 2
쐌 Fuel pressure
쐌 Injectors
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1165
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
쐌 Open engine hood before conducting following procedure.
쐌 For the best results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at
a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
SEC773C
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
SEC774C
6)
7)
a)
b)
c)
d)
SEC775C
NAEC1165S01
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
Let engine idle for one minute.
Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1146” or “HO2S2 (B2) P1166” of
“HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Follow the instruction of CONSULT-II.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”.
If NG is displayed, refer to EC-562, “Diagnostic Procedure”.
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and leave the vehicle in a cool place
(soak the vehicle).
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in
“DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up while monitoring “COOLAN
TEMP/S” indication on CONSULT-II.
When “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F),
go to step 3.
Overall Function Check
NAEC1166
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
SEC432D
NAEC1166S01
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
EC-558
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
Let engine idle for one minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 bank
1 signal) or 55 (HO2S2 bank 2 signal) and engine ground.
Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be below 0.48V at least once during
this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not
necessary.
Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH)
in 3rd gear position (M/T), “D” position with “OD” OFF (A/T).
The voltage should be below 0.48V at least once during
this procedure.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-562.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-559
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1
=NAEC1167
NAEC1167S01
MEC089E
EC-560
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
BANK 2
NAEC1167S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC090E
EC-561
IDX
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1168
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF959Y
䊳
2
GO TO 2.
CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
SEF968Y
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
Erase the DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-100.
Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-312.
No
䊳
GO TO 3.
EC-562
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEC426D
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEC427D
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and rear HO2S terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
TF
PD
AX
MTBL1371
Continuity should exist.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S2 terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
SU
BR
ST
MTBL1372
Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-563
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
5
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
Let engine idle for one minute.
Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULTII.
6. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SEF972YA
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.68V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.48V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
쐌 Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto
a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
쐌 Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner
tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
EC-564
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
GI
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-I
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
Let engine idle for one minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 bank 1 signal) or 55 (HO2S2 bank 2 signal) and engine
ground.
6. Check the voltage when rewing up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
SEC432D
MT
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during this procedure.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
7
TF
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-II
PD
Idle vehicle for 10 minutes, then check voltage between the same terminals as in Test No. 6; or check voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), “D” position with “OD” OFF (A/T).
The voltage should go below 0.48V at least once during this procedure.
CAUTION:
쐌 Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
쐌 Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
8
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-565
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
Component Description
Component Description
SEF327R
NAEC1169
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are
shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used
for engine control operation.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1170
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
HO2S2 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S2 MNTR
(B2)
CONDITION
쐌 Engine: After warming up
쐌 After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm
for one minute and at idle for
one minute under no load
SPECIFICATION
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
Revving engine from idle up to
3,000 rpm
LEAN +, RICH
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC1171
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
55
74
WIRE
COLOR
OR/L
OR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
Heated oxygen sensor
2 (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm after
the following conditions are met.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
쐌 After keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle for one
minute under no load
Heated oxygen sensor
2 (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm after
0 - Approximately 1.0V
the following conditions are met.
쐌 After keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle for one
minute under no load
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1172
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold)
causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of
heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the maximum
voltage of the sensor is sufficiently high during the various driving
condition such as fuel-cut.
SEF259VA
EC-566
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
On Board Diagnosis Logic (Cont’d)
DTC No.
P1147
1147
(Bank 1)
P1167
1167
(Bank 2)
GI
Trouble diagnosis
name
Heated oxygen sensor 2 maximum voltage monitoring
DTC Detecting Condition
The maximum voltage from the sensor is not
reached to the specified voltage.
Possible Cause
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 Heated oxygen sensor 2
쐌 Fuel pressure
쐌 Injectors
쐌 Intake air leaks
DTC Confirmation Procedure
MA
EM
LC
NAEC1173
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
쐌 Open engine hood before conducting following procedure.
쐌 For the best results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at
a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
SEC776C
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
SEC777C
6)
7)
a)
b)
c)
d)
SEC778C
NAEC1173S01
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
Let engine idle for one minute.
Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” or “HO2S2 (B2) P1167” of
“HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and follow the instruction of CONSULT-II.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-571, “Diagnostic Procedure”.
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and leave the vehicle in a cool place
(soak the vehicle).
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in
“DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up while monitoring “COOLAN
TEMP/S” indication on CONSULT-II.
When “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F),
go to step 3.
Overall Function Check
NAEC1174
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
SEC432D
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
NAEC1174S01
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
EC-567
FE
EL
IDX
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
Let engine idle for one minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 bank
1 signal) or 55 (HO2S2 bank 2 signal) and engine ground.
Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during
this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not
necessary.
Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH)
in 3rd gear position (M/T), “D” position with “OD” OFF (A/T).
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during
this procedure.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-571.
EC-568
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1
=NAEC1175
GI
NAEC1175S01
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC089E
EC-569
IDX
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
BANK 2
NAEC1175S02
MEC090E
EC-570
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1176
GI
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
EM
LC
FE
SEF959Y
䊳
2
CL
GO TO 2.
MT
CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF968Y
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
BR
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
Erase the DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-100.
Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174. Refer to EC-304.
No
䊳
GO TO 3.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-571
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
SEC426D
SEC427D
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL1379
Continuity should exist.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S2 terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL1380
Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-572
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
MA
EM
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
LC
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
Let engine idle for one minute.
Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULTII.
Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEF972YA
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.68V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.48V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
쐌 Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto
a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
쐌 Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner
tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-573
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-I
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
Let engine idle for one minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 bank 1 signal) or 55 (HO2S bank 2 signal) and engine ground.
Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
SEC432D
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during this procedure.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
7
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-II
Idle vehicle for 10 minutes, then check voltage between the same terminals as in Test No. 6; or check voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), “D” position with “OD” OFF (A/T).
The voltage should go below 0.48V at least once during this procedure.
CAUTION:
쐌 Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
쐌 Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
8
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-574
DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1064
GI
★ The closed loop control has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P1148
1148
(Bank 1)
P1168
1168
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis
name
Closed loop control
DTC Detecting Condition
The closed loop control function for right bank
does not operate even when vehicle is driving in
the specified condition, the closed loop control
function for left bank does not operate even when
vehicle is driving in the specified condition.
MA
Possible Cause
쐌 The front heated oxygen sensor circuit is open or shorted.
쐌 Heated oxygen sensor 1
쐌 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
DTC Confirmation Procedure
EM
LC
NAEC1065
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
쐌 Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm during the
“DTC Confirmation Procedure”. If the engine speed limit is
exceeded, retry the procedure from step 2.
쐌 Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
SEF063Y
쐌
쐌
7)
8)
NAEC1065S01
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
Let engine idle for one minute.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm and check one of the following.
“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage should go above 0.70V at least
once.
“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage should go below 0.21V at least
once.
If the check result is NG, perform “Diagnosis Procedure”,
EC-576.
If the check result is OK, perform the following step.
Let engine idle at least 5 minutes.
Maintain the following condition at least 50 consecutive seconds.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-575
DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
B/FUEL SCHDL
3.6 msec or more (A/T)
3.0 msec or more (M/T)
ENG SPEED
1,500 rpm or more
Selector lever
Suitable position
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 70 km/h (43 MPH)
9)
During this test, P0134 and/or P0154 may be displayed on
CONSULT-II screen.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-576.
Overall Function Check
NAEC1066
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the closed loop
control. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
SEC430D
4)
5)
6)
쐌
쐌
7)
NAEC1066S01
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
Let engine idle for one minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [Heated oxygen sensor 1 bank 1 signal] or 16 [Heated oxygen sensor 1
bank 2 signal] and engine ground.
Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no-load.
The voltage should go above 0.70V at least once.
The voltage should go below 0.21V at least once.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-576.
Diagnostic Procedure
NAEC1067
Perform trouble diagnosis for “DTC P0133, P0153”, EC-264.
EC-576
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC1068
The swirl control valve control vacuum check switch detects
vacuum signal to the swirl control valve, and sends “ON” or “OFF”
signal to the ECM.
When vacuum is supplied to the valve, the swirl control valve control vacuum check switch sends “OFF” signal to the ECM.
The swirl control valve control vacuum check switch is not used to
control the engine system, it is used for on board diagnosis.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF999Y
FE
CL
MT
SEF446Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1069
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
SWL CON VC SW
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
AX
ON
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
SU
NAEC1070
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
59
TF
PD
쐌 Engine speed: Idle
OFF
쐌 Engine coolant temperature is between 15°C (59°F) to 50°C (122°F).
쐌 Engine speed: Idle
쐌 Engine coolant temperature is above 55°C (131°F).
AT
BR
ST
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
RS
W/B
[Engine is running]
쐌 Idle speed
쐌 Engine coolant temperature is between 15 to
Swirl control valve con50°C (59 to 122°F).
trol vacuum check
[Engine is running]
switch
쐌 Idle speed
쐌 Engine coolant temperature is above 55°C
(131°F).
Approximately 5V
BT
HA
0 - 1.0V
SC
EL
IDX
EC-577
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1165
1165
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC Detecting Condition
Swirl control valve
The swirl control valve control vacuum check
control vacuum check switch remains “OFF” under specified engine conswitch
ditions.
NAEC1071
Possible Cause
쐌 Harness or connectors
(Swirl control valve control vacuum
check switch circuit is open.)
쐌 Hoses
(Hoses are clogged or connected
incorrectly.)
쐌 Swirl control valve control solenoid
valve
쐌 Swirl control valve control vacuum
check switch
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1072
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
For best results, perform the test at a temperature above 5°C
(41°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
1)
2)
3)
NAEC1072S01
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II and wait at
least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-580.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
EC-578
NAEC1072S02
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1073
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC104E
EC-579
IDX
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1074
CHECK HOSES
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check hose for clogging or improper connection.
SEF109L
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair or reconnect the hose.
2
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Disconnect swirl control valve control vacuum check switch harness connector.
SEF999Y
2. Check harness continuity between terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
3
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M32, F23
쐌 Harness connectors F22, M33 (A/T models)
쐌 Joint connector F204
쐌 Harness for open or short between swirl control valve control vacuum check switch and ECM
쐌 Harness for open or short between swirl control valve control vacuum check switch and TCM
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-580
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 59 and swirl control valve control vacuum check switch terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
GI
MA
EM
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
5
LC
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
FE
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M94, F27
쐌 Harness for open or short between swirl control valve control vacuum check switch and ECM
䊳
CL
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
MT
6
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
Attach vacuum pump to swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 59 and ground under the following conditions.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEC542D
BR
ST
RS
BT
MTBL1369
HA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Replace swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-581
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Reconnect the disconnected harness connectors.
Start engine and let it idle.
Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
Select “SWIRL CONT SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEC540D
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Without CONSULT-II
Reconnect ECM harness connector.
Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
Start engine and let it idle.
Apply 12V of direct current between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminals and 2.
Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEC541D
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Replace intake manifold collector assembly.
8
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-582
DTC P1211 ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT
Description
Description
NAEC1271
The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit) to ECM.
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) but also for ECM after TCS related repair.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1272
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MIL will not light up for this
self-diagnosis.
DTC No.
P1211
1211
Trouble diagnosis name
TCS control unit
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
ECM receives a malfunction information from
ABS actuator and electric unit (Control unit).
쐌 ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)
쐌 TCS related parts
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
DTC Confirmation Procedure
AT
NAEC1273
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
TF
PD
AX
SU
1.
2.
3.
4.
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 60 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-584.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-583
DTC P1211 ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
Go to BR-94, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS”.
EC-584
NAEC1274
DTC P1212 ABS/TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
Description
Description
NAEC1275
NOTE:
If DTC P1212 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to “DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE”, EC-172.
This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS operation. Pulse
signals are exchanged between ECM and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only in ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) but also ECM after the ABS related repair.
GI
MA
EM
LC
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1276
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MIL will not light up for this
self-diagnosis.
DTC No.
P1212
1212
Trouble diagnosis name
TCS communication line
DTC detecting condition
ECM cannot receive the information from
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
continuously.
Possible cause
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open
or shorted.)
쐌 ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)
쐌 Dead (Weak) battery
FE
CL
MT
DTC Confirmation Procedure
AT
NAEC1277
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
TF
PD
AX
SU
1.
2.
3.
4.
WITH CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-586.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-585
DTC P1212 ABS/TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
Go to BR-94, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS”.
EC-586
NAEC1278
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1177
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system
malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will rise. When the
engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is indicated.
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P1217
1217
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC Detecting Condition
Engine over tempera- 쐌 Cooling fan does not operate properly (Overture
heat).
쐌 Cooling fan system does not operate properly
(Overheat).
쐌 Engine coolant was not added to the system
using the proper filling method.
쐌 Engine coolant is not within the specified range.
GI
MA
EM
Possible Cause
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Cooling fan (Crankshaft driven)
Thermostat
Radiator hose
Radiator
Radiator cap
Water pump
For more information, refer to “MAIN
12 CAUSES OF OVERHEATING”,
EC-591.
LC
FE
CL
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated be sure to replace the
coolant, follow the procedure in “Changing Engine Coolant”,
“ENGINE MAINTENANCE”, MA-15. Also, replace the engine
oil.
1) Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute like pouring coolant by
kettle. Be sure to use coolant with the proper mixture
ratio. Refer to “Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio”, “RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS”, MA-13.
2) After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no
water-flow noise is emitted.
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
Overall Function Check
NAEC1178
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the coolant
overtemperature enrichment protection check, a DTC might not be
confirmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious
burns could be caused by high-pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Carefully remove the cap
by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to
escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
WITH GST
1)
SEF621W
NAEC1178S01
Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir and/or radiator is below the
proper range, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-588.
Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-588.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
NAEC1178S02
Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir and/or radiator is below the
EC-587
BR
IDX
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
2)
proper range, and go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-588.
Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-588.
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1179
CHECK COOLING FAN (CRANKSHAFT DRIVEN) OPERATION
Start engine and make sure that cooling fan (crankshaft driven) operates.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Check cooling fan (crankshaft driven). Refer to LC-22, “Cooling Fan (Crankshaft driven)”.
2
CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK
Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops.
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi)
SLC754A
Pressure should not drop.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Check the following for leak
쐌 Hose
쐌 Radiator
쐌 Water pump
Refer to “Water Pump”, LC-13.
EC-588
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK RADIATOR CAP
Apply pressure to cap with a tester and check radiator cap relief pressure.
MA
EM
LC
SLC755A
FE
Radiator cap relief pressure:
59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 14 psi)
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Replace radiator cap.
4
CL
MT
CHECK THERMOSTAT
AT
1. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
2. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SLC949A
Valve opening temperature:
76.5°C (170°F) [standard]
Valve lift:
More than 8 mm/108°C (0.315 in/226°F)
3. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature.
For details, refer to “Thermostat”, LC-18.
BR
ST
RS
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Replace thermostat
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-589
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Check resistance as shown in the figure.
SEF152P
MTBL0229
SEF012P
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
6
CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES
If the cause cannot be isolated, go to “MAIN 12 CAUSES OF OVERHEATING”, EC-591.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-590
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
Main 12 Causes of Overheating
Main 12 Causes of Overheating
Engine
Step
OFF
1
2
Inspection item
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Blocked
Blocked
Blocked
Blocked
radiator
condenser
radiator grille
bumper
쐌 Coolant mixture
Equipment
쐌 Visual
Standard
No blocking
NAEC1180
Reference page
—
쐌 Coolant tester
50 - 50% coolant mixture See “RECOMMENDED
FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS”, MA-12.
쐌 Coolant level
쐌 Visual
Coolant up to MAX level
in reservoir tank and
radiator filler neck
See “Changing Engine
Coolant”, “ENGINE
MAINTENANCE”, MA-15.
4
쐌 Radiator cap
쐌 Pressure tester
59 - 98 kPa
(0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 14
psi) (Limit)
See “System Check”,
“ENGINE COOLING
SYSTEM”, LC-12.
ON*1
5
쐌 Coolant leaks
쐌 Visual
No leaks
See “System Check”,
“ENGINE COOLING
SYSTEM”, LC-12.
ON*1
6
쐌 Thermostat
쐌 Touch the upper and
lower radiator hoses
Both hoses should be
hot
See “Thermostat” and
“Radiator”, “ENGINE
COOLING SYSTEM”,
LC-18, LC-21.
OFF
ON*2
OFF*3
OFF
7
8
9
MA
EM
3
ON*1
GI
쐌 Cooling fan
(Crankshaft driven)
쐌 Visual
Operating
쐌 Combustion gas leak
쐌 Color checker chemical tester 4 Gas analyzer
Negative
쐌 Coolant temperature
gauge
쐌 Visual
Gauge less than 3/4
when driving
쐌 Coolant overflow to
reservoir tank
쐌 Visual
See LC-22, “Cooling Fan
(Crankshaft driven)”.
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
—
PD
—
AX
No overflow during driving and idling
See “Changing Engine
Coolant”, “ENGINE
MAINTENANCE”, MA-15.
SU
쐌 Coolant return from
쐌 Visual
reservoir tank to radiator
Should be initial level in
reservoir tank
See “ENGINE
MAINTENANCE”, MA-14.
BR
11
쐌 Cylinder head
0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maximum distortion (warping)
See “Inspection”, “CYLINDER HEAD
DISTORTION”, EM-44.
12
쐌 Cylinder block and pis- 쐌 Visual
tons
No scuffing on cylinder
walls or piston
See “Inspection”, “CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION AND WEAR”,
EM-67.
10
쐌 Straight gauge feeler
gauge
*1: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*2: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*3: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to “Engine Cooling System”, “OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS”, LC-26.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-591
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
Component Description
Component Description
PBIB0145E
NAEC1279
Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds
to the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from
these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to
make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1280
The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
DTC No.
P1225
1225
Trouble diagnosis
name
Closed throttle position learning performance problem
DTC Detecting Condition
Closed throttle position learning value is excessively low.
Possible Cause
쐌 Electric throttle control actuator (TP
sensor 1 and 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1281
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-593.
SEF058Y
EC-592
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
GI
MA
EM
LC
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1282
CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
FE
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Remove the intake air duct.
3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing.
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEC513D
PD
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside.
2
AX
REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
3. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
INSPECTION END
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-593
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
Component Description
Component Description
PBIB0145E
NAEC1283
Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds
to the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from
these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to
make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1284
The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
DTC No.
P1226
1226
Trouble diagnosis
name
Closed throttle position learning performance problem
DTC Detecting Condition
Closed throttle position learning is not performed
successfully, repeatedly.
Possible Cause
쐌 Electric throttle control actuator (TP
sensor 1 and 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1285
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Repeat steps 3 and 4, 32 times.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-595.
SEF058Y
EC-594
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
GI
MA
EM
LC
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1286
CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
FE
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Remove the intake air duct.
3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing.
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEC513D
PD
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside.
2
AX
REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
3. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
INSPECTION END
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-595
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC1291
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
48
P/B
Sensor’s power supply
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
49
P/B
Sensor’s power supply
(Refrigerant pressure
sensor)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
68
L
Sensor’s power supply
(Power steering pressure sensor)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
90
L
Sensor’s power supply
(APP sensor 1)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1287
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P1229
1229
Trouble diagnosis
name
Sensor power supply
circuit short
DTC Detecting Condition
Possible Cause
ECM detects a voltage of power source for sensor 쐌 Harness or connectors
is excessively low or high.
(APP sensor 1 circuit is shorted.)
(PSP sensor circuit is shorted.)
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
shorted.)
[MAF sensor (TYPE I) circuit is
shorted.]
(EVAP control system pressure sensor circuit is shorted.)
쐌 Accelerator pedal position sensor
쐌 Power steering pressure sensor
쐌 EVAP control system pressure sensor
쐌 Refrigerant pressure sensor
쐌 MAF sensor (TYPE I)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NAEC1287S01
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the
return spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1288
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
EC-596
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
1)
2)
3)
4)
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-599.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-597
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1289
TEC847
EC-598
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1290
GI
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
EM
LC
FE
SEF959Y
䊳
2
CL
GO TO 2.
MT
CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEC550D
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 12 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEC551D
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-599
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
쐌 ECM terminal 48 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3. Refer to “Wiring Diagram”, EC-412.
쐌 ECM terminal 48 and mass air flow sensor (TYPE I) terminal 4. Refer to “Wiring Diagram”, EC-198.
쐌 ECM terminal 68 and power steering pressure sensor terminal 1. Refer to “Wiring Diagram”, EC-467.
쐌 ECM terminal 49 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3. Refer to “Wiring Diagram”, EC-771.
쐌 ECM terminal 90 and APP sensor terminal 12. Refer to “Wiring Diagram”, EC-598.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4
CHECK COMPONENTS
Check the following.
쐌 Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, HA-132.)
쐌 Power steering pressure sensor (Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-466.)
쐌 EVAP control system pressure sensor (Refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-410.)
쐌 Mass air flow sensor (TYPE I) (Refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-194.)
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Replace malfunctioning component.
5
CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-714.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
6
1.
2.
3.
4.
REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”, EC-81.
Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
7
INSPECTION END
REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-600
DTC P1442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1377
NOTE:
If DTC P0442 is displayed with P1448, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1448 first. (See EC-636.)
This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using the vapor
pressure in the fuel tank.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP
purge line. The vacuum cut valve bypass valve will then be opened
to clear the line between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve. The EVAP control system pressure
sensor can now monitor the pressure inside the fuel tank.
If pressure increases, the ECM will check for leaks in the line
between the vacuum cut valve and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF323U
DTC No.
P1442
1442
Trouble diagnosis
name
EVAP control system
small leak detected
(positive pressure)
TF
DTC Detecting Condition
EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP control
system does not operate properly.
Possible Cause
쐌 Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
쐌 Incorrect fuel filler cap used
쐌 Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to
close.
쐌 Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap
쐌 Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve.
쐌 Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve
쐌 EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
쐌 EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber
tube) leaks
쐌 EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
쐌 Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP
control system pressure sensor
쐌 Loose or disconnected rubber tube
쐌 EVAP canister vent control valve and
the circuit
쐌 EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve and the circuit
쐌 Fuel tank temperature sensor
쐌 O-ring of EVAP canister vent control
valve is missing or damaged.
쐌 Water separator
쐌 EVAP canister is saturated with water.
쐌 EVAP control system pressure sensor
쐌 Fuel level sensor and the circuit
쐌 Refueling control valve
쐌 ORVR system leaks
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-601
DTC P1442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
On Board Diagnosis Logic (Cont’d)
CAUTION:
쐌 Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may
come on.
쐌 If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may
come on.
쐌 Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
SEC760C
NAEC1378
NOTE:
쐌 If DTC P1442 is displayed with P1448, first perform trouble
diagnosis for DTC P1448 (See EC-636).
쐌 If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
쐌 Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is
between 1/4 to 3/4 full and vehicle is placed on flat level
surface.
쐌 Open engine hood before conducting the following procedure.
WITH CONSULT-II
NAEC1378S01
1)
2)
3)
SEC761C
SEC762C
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
4) Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)
5) Select “EVP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE
SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULTII.
Follow the instruction displayed.
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to “Basic Inspection”,
EC-131.
6) Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-603.
NOTE:
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
WITH GST
SEC763C
NAEC1378S02
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of “Driving Pattern” on EC-92
before driving vehicle.
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle according to “Driving Pattern”, EC-92.
3) Stop vehicle.
4) Select “MODE 1” with GST.
쐌 If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the following step.
EC-602
DTC P1442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
쐌
5)
6)
If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine.
It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving.
7) Drive vehicle again according to the “Driving Pattern”, EC-92.
8) Stop vehicle.
9) Select “MODE 3” with GST.
쐌 If P1442 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-603.
쐌 If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-383.
쐌 If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0441, EC-374.
쐌 If P0441, P0442 and P1442 are not displayed on the screen,
go to the following step.
10) Select “MODE 1” with GST.
쐌 If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
쐌 If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 6.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1379
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
TF
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
PD
AX
SU
SEF915U
BR
OK or NG
ST
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
RS
2
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
BT
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
쐌 Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
쐌 Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-603
DTC P1442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
4
CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
SEF445Y
SEF943S
Pressure:
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum:
−6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2, −0.87 to −0.48 psi)
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
EC-604
DTC P1442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
GI
INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
MA
EM
LC
SEF983Y
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF916U
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.
With CONSULT-II
䊳
GO TO 6.
Without CONSULT-II
䊳
GO TO 7.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-605
DTC P1442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
NOTE:
쐌 Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
쐌 Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
PEF917U
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-45.
SEF200U
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace.
EC-606
DTC P1442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
GI
CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of
test.)
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEC930C
3. Apply 12 volts DC to vacuum cut valve bypass valve. The valve will open. (Continue to apply 12V until the end of test.)
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEC932C
4. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove
pump and EVAP service port adapter.
NOTE:
쐌 Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
쐌 Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
5. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-45.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF200U
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-607
DTC P1442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
1.
2.
3.
4.
CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Check
Check
Check
Check
visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.
PBIB1032E
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE:
쐌 Do not disassemble water separator.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Replace water separator.
9
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE, O-RING AND CIRCUIT
Refer to “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, EC-404.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring or harness/connector.
10
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
SEF596U
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 11.
No (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 13.
No (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 14.
EC-608
DTC P1442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
11
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
MA
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 13.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 14.
NG
䊳
GO TO 12.
12
EM
LC
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 EVAP canister for damage
쐌 EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
䊳
13
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
FE
Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
CL
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
MT
With CONSULT-II
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine.
Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
PBIB1678E
BR
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 16.
NG
䊳
GO TO 15.
ST
RS
14
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine.
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
BT
HA
SC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 17.
NG
䊳
GO TO 15.
EL
IDX
EC-609
DTC P1442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
15
CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to “Vacuum Hose Drawing”, EC-35.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 16.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 17.
NG
䊳
Repair or reconnect the hose.
16
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.
PBIB1678E
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 18.
NG
䊳
GO TO 17.
EC-610
DTC P1442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
17
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
MA
EM
LC
SEC524D
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF334XA
TF
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
PD
AX
SU
BR
SEC524D
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF335X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 18.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-611
DTC P1442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
18
CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit terminals 1 and 2 by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in
the figure.
SEF974Y
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 19.
NG
䊳
Replace fuel level sensor unit.
EC-612
DTC P1442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
19
GI
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
쐌 Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
MA
EM
LC
SEF799W
2. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor from EVAP canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
3. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEC422D
CAUTION:
쐌 Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
쐌 Do not apply below −93.3 kPa (−700 mmHg, −27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
쐌 Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5
m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
AX
SU
OK or NG
BR
OK
䊳
GO TO 20.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
ST
20
CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
Refer to “Evaporative Emission System”, EC-41.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 21.
NG
䊳
Repair or reconnect the hose.
21
CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
䊳
RS
BT
HA
SC
GO TO 22.
EL
IDX
EC-613
DTC P1442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
22
CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR LINE
쐌 Check refueling EVAP vapor line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-45.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 23.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
23
CHECK SIGNAL LINE AND RECIRCULATION LINE
쐌 Check signal line and recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 24.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace hoses, tubes or filler neck tube.
24
CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE
1. Remove fuel filler cap.
2. Check air continuity between hose ends A and B.
Blow air into hose end B. Air should flow freely into the fuel tank.
3. Blow air into hose end A and check that there is no leakage.
4. Apply pressure to both hose ends A and B [20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg)] using a pressure pump and a suitable
3-way connector. Check that there is no leakage.
SEC883C
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 25.
NG
䊳
Replace or refueling control valve with fuel tank.
25
CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to EL-124, “Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 26.
NG
䊳
Replace fuel level sensor unit.
EC-614
DTC P1442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
26
GI
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
MA
INSPECTION END
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-615
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Description
Description
NAEC1089
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*2 and piston position
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Heated oxygen sensor 1
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel tank temperature sensor
Fuel temperature in fuel tank
Vehicle speed signal*1
Vehicle speed
Battery
Battery voltage*2
NAEC1089S01
ECM
function
Actuator
EVAP canEVAP canister purge volume
ister purge
control solenoid valve
flow control
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow
rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the
flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the
air flow changes.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NAEC1089S02
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a
ON/OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP
canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON
pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the
valve.
SEF337U
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1090
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
PURG VOL C/V
CONDITION
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
SPECIFICATION
Idle (Vehicle stopped)
0%
2,000 rpm
—
EC-616
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC1091
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
GI
MA
EM
LC
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)★
[Engine is running]
쐌 Idle speed
FE
CL
45
L/Y
SEC990C
EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)★
MT
AT
[Engine is running]
쐌 Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100
seconds after starting engine).
TF
SEC991C
PD
★: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
AX
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1444
1444
Trouble diagnosis
name
EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve
DTC Detecting Condition
NAEC1092
Possible Cause
SU
The canister purge flow is detected during the
쐌 EVAP control system pressure sensor
specified driving conditions, even when EVAP can- 쐌 EVAP canister purge volume control
ister purge volume control solenoid valve is comsolenoid valve (The valve is stuck
pletely closed.
open.)
쐌 EVAP canister vent control valve
쐌 EVAP canister
쐌 Hoses
(Hoses are connected incorrectly or
clogged.)
BR
ST
RS
BT
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1093
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 0°C (32°F) or more.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-617
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
SEC143D
7)
WITH GST
SEC144D
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
NAEC1093S01
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “START”.
Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II
changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take for approximately 10
seconds.)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-620.
NAEC1093S02
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds.
Select “MODE 7” with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-620.
SEF237Y
EC-618
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1094
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC096E
EC-619
IDX
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1095
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.
SEC524D
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and engine ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB0080E
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M32, F23
쐌 Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
쐌 Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM relay
䊳
3
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-620
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE
Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
MA
EM
LC
SEC931C
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair it.
5
FE
CL
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
MT
AT
OK or NG
TF
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-621
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
쐌 Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
SEF799W
2. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor from EVAP canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
3. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
SEC422D
CAUTION:
쐌 Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
쐌 Do not apply below −93.3 kPa (−700 mmHg, −27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
쐌 Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5
m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 7.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
EC-622
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
1.
2.
3.
4.
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine.
Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.
MA
EM
LC
FE
PBIB1678E
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
GO TO 8.
CL
MT
AT
8
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
TF
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
PD
AX
SU
BR
SEF334XA
ST
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEF335X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
EC-623
EL
IDX
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
9
CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
10
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.
SEF376Z
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
EC-624
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
11
1.
2.
3.
4.
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II
With CONSULT-II
Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEC158D
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEF378Z
AX
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 13.
NG
䊳
GO TO 12.
12
SU
BR
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III
1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform procedure 9 again.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 13.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-625
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
13
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
SEF596U
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 14.
No
䊳
GO TO 17.
14
CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 16.
NG
䊳
GO TO 15.
15
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 EVAP canister for damage
쐌 EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separater for clogging or poor connection
䊳
Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
EC-626
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
16
1.
2.
3.
4.
GI
CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Check
Check
Check
Check
visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.
MA
EM
LC
FE
PBIB1032E
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE:
쐌 Do not disassemble water separator.
CL
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 17.
NG
䊳
Clean or replace water separator.
17
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
MT
AT
TF
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-627
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Component Description
Component Description
SEF381Z
NAEC1096
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other
evaporative emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the
evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows
“EVAP Control System (Small Leak)” diagnosis.
SEC928C
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1097
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
VENT CONT/V
OFF
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC1098
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
117
WIRE
COLOR
G/R
ITEM
CONDITION
EVAP canister vent
control valve
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1446
1446
Trouble diagnosis
name
EVAP canister vent
control valve closed
DTC Detecting Condition
EVAP canister vent control valve remains closed
under specified driving conditions.
EC-628
NAEC1099
Possible Cause
쐌 EVAP canister vent control valve
쐌 EVAP control system pressure sensor
and the circuit
쐌 Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister
vent control valve
쐌 Water separator
쐌 EVAP canister is saturated with water.
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1100
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
PBIB0164E
NAEC1100S01
1)
2)
3)
4)
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle at a speed of approximately 80 km/h (50 MPH)
for a maximum of 15 minutes.
NOTE:
If a malfunction exists, NG result may be displayed quicker.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-631.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
NAEC1100S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-629
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1101
MEC097E
EC-630
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1102
GI
CHECK RUBBER TUBE
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
3. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
EM
LC
FE
SEC928C
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Clean rubber tube using an air blower.
2
1.
2.
3.
4.
MT
AT
CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Check
Check
Check
Check
CL
visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
PBIB1032E
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE:
쐌 Do not disassemble water separator.
ST
OK or NG
RS
BT
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Clean or replace water separator.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-631
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.
SEF376Z
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
4
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
SEC158D
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF378Z
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
EC-632
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III
1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform the procedure 4 again.
MA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
6
EM
LC
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
FE
CL
MT
SEF596U
AT
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 7.
No
䊳
GO TO 9.
TF
PD
7
CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
GO TO 8.
8
Check the following.
쐌 EVAP canister for damage
쐌 EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
9
SU
BR
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
䊳
AX
ST
RS
Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE
Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Repair it.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-633
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
10
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
SEC931C
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
EC-634
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
11
GI
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
쐌 Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
MA
EM
LC
SEF799W
2. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor from EVAP canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
3. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEC422D
CAUTION:
쐌 Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
쐌 Do not apply below −93.3 kPa (−700 mmHg, −27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
쐌 Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5
m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
AX
SU
OK or NG
BR
OK
䊳
GO TO 12.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
ST
12
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
RS
INSPECTION END
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-635
DTC P1448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Component Description
Component Description
SEF381Z
NAEC1103
NOTE:
If DTC P1448 is displayed with P0442, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1448 first.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other
evaporative emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the
evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows
“EVAP Control System (Small Leak)” diagnosis.
SEC928C
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1104
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
VENT CONT/V
OFF
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC1105
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
117
WIRE
COLOR
G/R
ITEM
CONDITION
EVAP canister vent
control valve
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1448
1448
Trouble diagnosis
name
EVAP canister vent
control valve open
DTC Detecting Condition
EVAP canister vent control valve remains opened
under specified driving conditions.
EC-636
NAEC1106
Possible Cause
쐌 EVAP canister vent control valve
쐌 EVAP control system pressure sensor
and circuit
쐌 Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister
vent control valve
쐌 Water separator
쐌 EVAP canister is saturated with water.
쐌 Vacuum cut valve
DTC P1448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1107
NOTE:
쐌 If DTC P1448 is displayed with P0442 or P1442, perform
trouble diagnosis for DTC P1448 first.
쐌 If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
GI
MA
EM
LC
WITH CONSULT-II
SEC760C
COOLAN TEMP/S
0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE
0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)
5)
SEC761C
SEC762C
NAEC1107S01
TESTING CONDITION:
쐌 Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is
between 1/4 to 3/4 full and vehicle is placed on flat level
surface.
쐌 Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to
86°F).
쐌 Open engine hood before conducting the following procedure.
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
4) Make sure that the following conditions are met.
Select “EVP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE
SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULTII.
Follow the instruction displayed.
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to “Basic Inspection”,
EC-131.
6) Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, go to the following step.
NOTE:
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
7) Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds, then turn “ON”.
8) Disconnect hose from water separator.
9) Select “VENT CONTROL/V” of “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
10) Touch “ON” and “OFF” alternately.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEC763C
EC-637
DTC P1448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
11) Make sure the following.
Condition
VENT CONTROL/V
Air passage continuity
between A and B
ON
No
OFF
Yes
If the result is NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-640.
If the result is OK, go to “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC
P0442, EC-383.
PBIB0153E
Overall Function Check
NAEC1108
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP canister vent control valve circuit. During this check, a DTC might not
be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
NAEC1108S01
Disconnect hose from water separator.
Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector.
Verify the following.
SEF380Z
Condition
Air passage continuity
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2
No
No supply
Yes
If the result is NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-640.
If the result is OK, go to “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC
P0442, EC-383.
EC-638
DTC P1448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1109
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC097E
EC-639
IDX
DTC P1448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1110
CHECK RUBBER TUBE
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
3. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
SEC928C
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Clean rubber tube using an air blower.
2
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.
SEF376Z
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
EC-640
DTC P1448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEC158D
CL
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEF378Z
AX
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
SU
BR
4
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III
1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform Test No. 3 again.
ST
OK or NG
RS
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-641
DTC P1448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove vacuum cut valve.
3. Check vacuum cut valve as follows:
SEF379Q
a. Plug port C and D with fingers.
b. Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from port B.
c. Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from port A.
d. Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow out of port A.
e. Open port C and D.
f. Blow air in port A check that air flows freely out of port C.
g. Blow air in port B check that air flows freely out of port D.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Replace vacuum cut valve.
6
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
SEF596U
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 7.
No
䊳
GO TO 9.
7
CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
GO TO 8.
EC-642
DTC P1448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
GI
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 EVAP canister for damage
쐌 EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
䊳
9
MA
Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
EM
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE
LC
Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Repair it.
FE
10
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEC931C
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-643
DTC P1448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
11
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
쐌 Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
SEF799W
2. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor from EVAP canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
3. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
SEC422D
CAUTION:
쐌 Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
쐌 Do not apply below −93.3 kPa (−700 mmHg, −27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
쐌 Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5
m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 12.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
12
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-644
DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1380
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF323U
This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve, using the vapor pressure in the fuel tank same as a conventional EVAP small leak
diagnosis.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line. The vacuum cut valve bypass
valve will then be opened to clear the line between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. The EVAP control system pressure sensor can now monitor the pressure inside the fuel
tank.
If pressure increases, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the vacuum cut valve and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P1456 will be detected.
If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P1442 will be detected.
If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK.
DTC No.
P1456
1456
Trouble diagnosis
name
Evaporative emission
control system very
small leak (positive
pressure check)
DTC Detecting Condition
쐌 EVAP system has a very small leak.
쐌 EVAP system does not operate properly.
EC-645
Possible Cause
쐌 Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
쐌 Incorrect fuel filler cap used
쐌 Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to
close.
쐌 Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap
쐌 Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve.
쐌 Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve
쐌 EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
쐌 EVAP purge line (Pipe and rubber
tube) leaks
쐌 EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
쐌 Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP
control system pressure sensor
쐌 Loose or disconnected rubber tube
쐌 EVAP canister vent control valve and
the circuit
쐌 EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve and the circuit
쐌 Fuel tank temperature sensor
쐌 O-ring of EVAP canister vent control
valve is missing or damaged.
쐌 Water separator
쐌 EVAP canister saturated with water
쐌 EVAP control system pressure sensor
쐌 Refueling control valve
쐌 ORVR system leaks
쐌 Fuel level sensor and the circuit
쐌 Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
On Board Diagnosis Logic (Cont’d)
CAUTION:
쐌 Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
the MIL may come on.
쐌 If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
쐌 Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
SEC764C
SEC765C
SEC766C
NAEC1381
CAUTION:
Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC confirmation procedure.
NOTE:
쐌 If DTC P1456 is displayed with P1442, perform TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1456 first.
쐌 If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting
the next test.
쐌 After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are
installed properly.
TESTING CONDITION:
쐌 Open engine hood before conducting following procedure.
쐌 If any of following condition is met just before the DTC
confirmation procedure, leave the vehicle for more than 1
hour.
a) Fuel filler cap is removed.
b) Refilled or drained the fuel.
c) EVAP component parts is/are removed.
쐌 Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Make sure the following conditions are met.
FUEL LEVEL SE: 1.08 - 0.2V
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F)
FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F)
INT A/TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F)
If NG, turn ignition switch “OFF” and leave the vehicle in a cool
place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining fuel until the output voltage condition of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the
range above and leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then
start from step 1).
3) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds.
4) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5) Select “EVP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456” of “EVAPORATIVE
SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULTII.
Follow the instruction displayed.
6) Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-648.
EC-646
DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
NOTE:
쐌 If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range
displayed on CONSULT-II screen, go to “Basic
inspection”, EC-131.
쐌 Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
GI
MA
EM
LC
Overall Function Check
WITH GST
SEF983Y
SEF462UA
NAEC1382
NAEC1382S01
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very
small leak function. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
CAUTION:
쐌 Never use compressed air, doing so may damage the
EVAP system.
쐌 Do not start engine.
쐌 Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi).
1) Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP
service port.
2) Set the pressure pump and a hose.
3) Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose.
4) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5) Connect GST and select mode 8.
6) Using mode 8 control the EVAP canister vent control valve
(close) and vacuum cut valve bypass valve (open).
7) Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are
satisfied.
Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg)
Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP
system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and
the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa (3
mmHg, 0.12 inHg)
If NG, go to diagnostic procedure, EC-648.
If OK, go to next step.
8) Disconnect GST.
9) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
10) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
11) Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds.
12) Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds.
13) Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
NOTE:
For more information, refer to GST instruction manual.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-647
DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1383
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
SEF915U
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
2
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
쐌 Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
쐌 Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
3
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
EC-648
DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
MA
EM
LC
SEF445Y
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF943S
Pressure:
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum:
−6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2, −0.87 to −0.48 psi)
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
TF
PD
AX
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-649
DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
SEF983Y
SEF916U
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.
With CONSULT-II
䊳
GO TO 6.
Without CONSULT-II
䊳
GO TO 7.
EC-650
DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
GI
CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
NOTE:
쐌 Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
쐌 Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
PEF917U
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-45.
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEF200U
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-651
DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of
test.)
SEC930C
3. Apply 12 volts DC to vacuum cut valve bypass valve. The valve will open. (Continue to apply 12V until the end of test.)
SEC932C
4. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove
pump and EVAP service port adapter.
NOTE:
쐌 Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
쐌 Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
5. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-45.
SEF200U
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace.
EC-652
DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
1.
2.
3.
4.
GI
CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Check
Check
Check
Check
visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.
MA
EM
LC
FE
PBIB1032E
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE:
쐌 Do not disassemble water separator.
CL
MT
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Replace water separator.
9
AT
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE, O-RING AND CIRCUIT
TF
Refer to “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, EC-404.
OK or NG
PD
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring or harness/connector.
10
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
AX
SU
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF596U
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 11.
No (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 13.
No (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 14.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-653
DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
11
CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 13.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 14.
NG
䊳
GO TO 12.
12
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 EVAP canister for damage
쐌 EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
䊳
13
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine.
Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
PBIB1678E
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 16.
NG
䊳
GO TO 15.
14
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine.
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 17.
NG
䊳
GO TO 15.
EC-654
DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
15
GI
CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to “Vacuum Hose Drawing”, EC-35.
MA
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 16.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 17.
EM
NG
䊳
Repair or reconnect the hose.
LC
16
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.
FE
CL
MT
AT
PBIB1678E
TF
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 18.
NG
䊳
GO TO 17.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-655
DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
17
CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEC524D
SEF334XA
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEC524D
SEF335X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 18.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
EC-656
DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
18
GI
CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit terminals 1 and 2 by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in
the figure.
MA
EM
LC
SEF974Y
FE
OK or NG
CL
OK
䊳
GO TO 19.
NG
䊳
Replace fuel level sensor unit.
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-657
DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
19
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
쐌 Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
SEF799W
2. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor from EVAP canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
3. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
SEC422D
CAUTION:
쐌 Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
쐌 Do not apply below −93.3 kPa (−700 mmHg, −27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
쐌 Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5
m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 20.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
20
CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
Refer to “Evaporative Emission System”, EC-41.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 21.
NG
䊳
Repair or reconnect the hose.
21
CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
䊳
GO TO 22.
EC-658
DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
22
GI
CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR LINE
쐌 Check refueling EVAP vapor line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-45.
MA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 23.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
23
EM
LC
CHECK SIGNAL LINE AND RECIRCULATION LINE
쐌 Check signal line and recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
FE
OK
䊳
GO TO 24.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace hoses, tubes or filler neck tube.
24
CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE
CL
1. Remove fuel filler cap.
2. Check air continuity between hose ends A and B.
Blow air into hose end B. Air should flow freely into the fuel tank.
3. Blow air into hose end A and check that there is no leakage.
4. Apply pressure to both hose ends A and B [20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg)] using a pressure pump and a suitable
3-way connector. Check that there is no leakage.
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEC883C
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 25.
NG
䊳
Replace or refueling control valve with fuel tank.
25
BT
HA
SC
CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to EL-134, “Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 26.
NG
䊳
Replace fuel level sensor unit.
EC-659
EL
IDX
DTC P1456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
26
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-660
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Description
Description
=NAEC1116
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
SEF485T
GI
NAEC1116S01
The vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve are
installed in parallel on the EVAP purge line between the fuel tank
and the EVAP canister.
The vacuum cut valve prevents the intake manifold vacuum from
being applied to the fuel tank.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is a solenoid type valve and
generally remains closed. It opens only for on board diagnosis.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve responds to signals from the
ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the valve is
opened. The vacuum cut valve is then bypassed to apply intake
manifold vacuum to the fuel tank.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM DIAGRAM
NAEC1116S02
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF323U
TF
PD
AX
SU
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1117
BR
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
VC/V BYPASS/V
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
ST
OFF
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
RS
NAEC1118
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
112
WIRE
COLOR
G/W
ITEM
CONDITION
BT
HA
DATA (DC Voltage)
SC
Vacuum cut valve
bypass valve
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
EL
IDX
EC-661
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1490
1490
Trouble diagnosis
name
Vacuum cut valve
bypass valve circuit
DTC Detecting Condition
NAEC1119
Possible Cause
An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through 쐌 Harness or connectors
vacuum cut valve bypass valve.
(The vacuum cut valve bypass valve
circuit is open or shorted.)
쐌 Vacuum cut valve bypass valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1120
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle speed.
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
NAEC1120S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-664.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
EC-662
NAEC1120S02
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1121
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC105E
EC-663
IDX
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1122
INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
GO TO 3.
2
CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then “ON”.
2. Select “VC/V BYPASS/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
PBIB0157E
4. Make sure that clicking sound is heard from the vacuum cut valve bypass valve.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
EC-664
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALUE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect vacuum cut valve bypass valve harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEF485T
FE
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between vacuum cut valve bypass valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF015Z
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
4
AX
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
SU
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M33, F22
쐌 Harness connectors M94, F27
쐌 Harness connectors B1, M2
쐌 Harness connectors B43, B101
쐌 Harness connectors B151, B152
쐌 Harness for open or short between vacuum cut valve bypass valve and ECM relay
䊳
5
PD
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 112 and vacuum cut valve bypass valve terminal 1. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
EL
IDX
EC-665
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors B152, B151
쐌 Harness connectors B101, B43
쐌 Harness connectors B1, M2
쐌 Harness connectors M94, F27
쐌 Harness for open or short between vacuum cut valve bypass valve and ECM
䊳
7
1.
2.
3.
4.
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Reconnect harness disconnected connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “VC/V BYPASS/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEC156D
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF358X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Replace vacuum cut valve bypass valve.
8
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-666
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Description
Description
NAEC1123
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
SEF485T
GI
NAEC1123S01
The vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve are
installed in parallel on the EVAP purge line between the fuel tank
and the EVAP canister.
The vacuum cut valve prevents the intake manifold vacuum from
being applied to the fuel tank.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is a solenoid type valve and
generally remains closed. It opens only for on board diagnosis.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve responds to signals from the
ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the valve is
opened. The vacuum cut valve is then bypassed to apply intake
manifold vacuum to the fuel tank.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM DIAGRAM
NAEC1123S02
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF323U
TF
PD
AX
SU
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1124
BR
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
VC/V BYPASS/V
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
ST
OFF
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
RS
NAEC1125
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
112
WIRE
COLOR
G/W
ITEM
CONDITION
BT
HA
DATA (DC Voltage)
SC
Vacuum cut valve
bypass valve
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
EL
IDX
EC-667
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1491
1491
Trouble diagnosis
name
Vacuum cut valve
bypass valve
DTC Detecting Condition
NAEC1126
Possible Cause
Vacuum cut valve bypass valve does not operate
properly.
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Vacuum cut valve bypass valve
Vacuum cut valve
Bypass hoses for clogging
EVAP control system pressure sensor
and circuit
EVAP canister vent control valve
Hose between fuel tank and vacuum
cut valve clogged
Hose between vacuum cut valve and
EVAP canister clogged
EVAP canister
EVAP purge port of fuel tank for clogging
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1127
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
For best results, perform test at a temperature of 5 to 30°C (41
to 86°F).
SEF210Y
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
SEF211Y
NAEC1127S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds.
Select “VC CUT/V BP/V P1491” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM”
in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “START”.
When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It
will take at least 30 seconds.)
ENG SPEED
Idle speed or more
Selector lever
Suitable position
Vehicle speed
37 km/h (23 MPH) or more
B/FUEL SCHDL
1.3 - 10 msec
8)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 3.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
SEF239Y
EC-668
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-671.
GI
MA
EM
LC
Overall Function Check
NAEC1128
Use this procedure to check the overall function of vacuum cut
valve bypass valve. During this check, the 1st trip DTC might not
be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
NAEC1128S01
Remove vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve
as an assembly.
Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from
port B.
Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from
port A.
Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow
out of port A.
Supply battery voltage to the terminal.
Blow air in port A and check that air flows freely out of port B.
Blow air in port B and check that air flows freely out of port A.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-671.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF530Q
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-669
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1129
MEC105E
EC-670
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1130
GI
INSPECTION START
MA
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
GO TO 3.
EM
LC
2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Remove vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve as an assembly.
Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from port B.
Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from port A.
Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow out of port A.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “VC/V BYPASS/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II and touch “ON”.
Blow air in port A and check that air flows freely out of port B.
Blow air in port B and check that air flows freely out of port A.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEC157D
AX
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-671
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Remove vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve as an assembly.
Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from port B.
Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from port A.
Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow out of port A.
Disconnect vacuum cut valve bypass valve harness connector.
Supply battery voltage to the terminal.
Blow air in port A and check that air flows freely out of port B.
Blow air in port B and check that air flows freely out of port A.
SEF914U
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
4
CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging or disconnection.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair it.
5
CHECK EVAP PURGE PORT
Check EVAP purge port of fuel tank for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Clean EVAP purge port.
EC-672
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
GI
CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1. Pinch the fresh air hose.
2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port B.
MA
EM
LC
AEC630A
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 12.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP canister.
7
CL
MT
CHECK BYPASS HOSE
Check bypass hoses for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace hoses.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-673
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “VC/V BYPASS/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEC156D
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF358X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Replace vacuum cut valve bypass valve.
EC-674
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
9
GI
CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE
Check vacuum cut valve as follows:
MA
EM
LC
SEF379Q
FE
a. Plug port C and D with fingers.
b. Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from port B.
c. Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from port A.
d. Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow out of port A.
e. Open port C and D.
f. Blow air in port A check that air flows freely out of port C.
g. Blow air in port B check that air flows freely out of port D.
CL
MT
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Replace vacuum cut valve.
AT
TF
10
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
PD
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace.
AX
SU
11
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEC931C
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 12.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-675
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
12
CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
쐌 Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.
SEF799W
2. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor from EVAP canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
3. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
SEC422D
CAUTION:
쐌 Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
쐌 Do not apply below −93.3 kPa (−700 mmHg, −27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
쐌 Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5
m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 13.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
13
CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 14.
NG
䊳
Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
EC-676
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I
GI
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.
MA
14
EM
LC
SEF376Z
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 15.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
15
1.
2.
3.
4.
CL
MT
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II
With CONSULT-II
Reconnect harness disconnected connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEC158D
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF378Z
SC
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 17.
NG
䊳
GO TO 16.
EL
IDX
EC-677
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
16
CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III
1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform the Test No. 15 again.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 17.
NG
䊳
Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
17
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-678
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC1292
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for
each button. ECM reads voltage variation of switch, and determines which button is operated.
Refer to EC-62 for the ASCD function.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEC544D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1293
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
MAIN SW
CANCEL SW
RESUME/ACC SW
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
SET SW
SPECIFICATION
쐌 CRUISE switch pressed
ON
쐌 CRUISE switch released
OFF
쐌 CANCEL switch pressed
ON
쐌 CANCEL switch released
OFF
CL
MT
AT
쐌 ACCEL RES switch pressed ON
쐌 ACCEL RES switch released OFF
쐌 COAST/SET switch pressed
TF
ON
쐌 COAST/SET switch released OFF
PD
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC1299
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
67
99
WIRE
COLOR
B/P
L/Y
ITEM
Sensors’ ground
ASCD steering switch
CONDITION
FE
DATA (DC Voltage)
AX
SU
BR
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
Approximately 0V
ST
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 ASCD steering switch is “OFF”.
Approximately 4V
RS
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 CRUISE switch is “ON”.
Approximately 0V
BT
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 CANCEL switch is “ON”.
Approximately 1V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 COAST/SET switch is “ON”.
Approximately 2V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 ACCEL/RES switch is “ON”.
Approximately 3V
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-679
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
On Board Diagnosis Procedure
On Board Diagnosis Procedure
=NAEC1294
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
NOTE:
If DTC P1564 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to
EC-471.
DTC No.
P1564
1564
Trouble diagnosis name
ASCD steering switch
DTC Detecting Condition
Possible cause
쐌 An excessively high voltage signal
from the ASCD steering switch is
쐌 Harness or connectors
sent to ECM.
(The ASCD steering switch circuit
쐌 ECM detects that input signal from
is open or shorted.)
the ASCD steering switch is out of
쐌 ASCD steering switch
the specified range.
쐌 ECM
쐌 ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is stuck ON.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1295
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Press “CRUISE” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release
it and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Press “ACCEL/RES” switch for at least 10 seconds, then
release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Press “COAST/SET” switch for at least 10 seconds, then
release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
7. Press “CANCEL” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release
it and wait at least 10 seconds.
8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-682.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
EC-680
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1296
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC117E
EC-681
IDX
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1297
CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “MAIN SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW”, “SET SW” and “CANCEL SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEC006D
3. Check each item indication under the following conditions.
MTBL1193
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 99 and ground with pressing each button.
PBIB0311E
MTBL1400
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
EC-682
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2
GI
CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ASCD steering switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD steering switch terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MA
EM
LC
SEC545D
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
FE
CL
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
3
MT
AT
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connector Z20
쐌 Spiral cable Z2
쐌 Harness connectors Z1, M47
쐌 Harness connectors M94, F27
쐌 Harness connectors F22, M33
쐌 Joint connector F204
쐌 Harness for open and short between ECM and ASCD steering switch
쐌 Harness for open and short between TCM and ASCD steering switch
䊳
4
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and ASCD steering switch terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
5
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
HA
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connector Z20
쐌 Spiral cable Z2
쐌 Harness connectors Z1, M47
쐌 Harness connectors M32, F23
쐌 Harness for open and short between ECM and ASCD steering switch
䊳
TF
SC
EL
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
IDX
EC-683
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-684.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Replace ASCD steering switch.
7
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
NAEC1298
ASCD STEERING SWITCH
1. Disconnect ASCD steering switch.
2. Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2 by pushing each
switch.
Switch
Condition
Resistance [kΩ]
Pressed
Approx. 0
Released
Approx. 4
Pressed
Approx. 0.66
Released
Approx. 4
Pressed
Approx. 1.48
Released
Approx. 4
Pressed
Approx. 0.25
Released
Approx. 4
CRUISE SW
SEC546D
COAST/SET SW
ACCEL/RES SW
CANCEL SW
EC-684
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC1300
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned
OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON.
ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds
(ON/OFF signal).
Refer to EC-62 for the ASCD function.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEC009D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1301
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
BRAKE SW 1
(ASCD brake switch)
BRAKE SW 2
(Stop lamp switch)
CONDITION
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
CL
쐌 Brake pedal fully released
쐌 Clutch pedal is fully released
(M/T models)
ON
쐌 Brake pedal depressed
쐌 Clutch pedal is depressed
(M/T models)
OFF
쐌 Brake pedal fully released
OFF
쐌 Brake pedal depressed
ON
MT
AT
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
TF
NAEC1307
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
101
108
WIRE
COLOR
G/Y
L/Y
ITEM
Stop lamp switch
ASCD brake switch
CONDITION
FE
DATA (DC Voltage)
PD
AX
SU
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Brake pedal is fully released
Approximately 0V
BR
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Brake pedal is depressed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
ST
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Brake pedal is fully released
쐌 Clutch pedal is fully released (M/T models)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
RS
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Brake pedal is depressed
쐌 Clutch pedal is depressed (M/T models)
Approximately 0V
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-685
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
On Board Diagnosis Procedure
On Board Diagnosis Procedure
=NAEC1302
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
NOTE:
쐌 If DTC P1572 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer
to EC-471.
쐌 If DTC P1572 is displayed with DTC P1805, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1805. Refer
to EC-702.
쐌 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. When malfunction A is detected, DTC is not
stored in ECM memory. And in that case, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip freeze frame data are displayed.
1st trip DTC is erased when ignition switch is OFF. And even when malfunction A is detected in
two consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory.
DTC
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC Detecting Condition
A)
P1572
1572
ASCD brake switch
B)
Possible cause
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The stop lamp switch circuit is
shorted.)
쐌 When the vehicle speed is above 쐌 Harness or connectors
30 km/h (19 MPH), ON signal
(The ASCD brake switch circuit is
from the stop lamp switch and
shorted.)
ASCD brake switch are sent to the 쐌 Harness or connectors
ECM at the same time.
(The ASCD clutch switch circuit is
shorted.)
– (M/T models)
쐌 ASCD brake switch
쐌 Stop lamp switch
쐌 ASCD clutch switch (M/T models)
쐌 Incorrect stop lamp switch installation
쐌 ASCD brake switch signal is not
쐌 Incorrect ASCD brake switch
sent to ECM for extremely long
installation
time while driving vehicle.
쐌 Incorrect ASCD clutch switch
installation (M/T models)
쐌 ECM
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1303
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
쐌 If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
쐌 Procedure for malfunction B is not described here. It takes
extremely long time to complete procedure for malfunction B.
By performing procedure for malfunction A, the incident that
caused malfunction B can be detected.
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 4 and 5 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted
in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected
to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
EC-686
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
With CONSULT-II
Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”).
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Press MAIN switch and make sure that CRUISE indicator
lights up.
4) Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the
following condition.
1)
2)
3)
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 30 km/h (19 MPH)
Selector lever
Suitable position
GI
MA
EM
LC
PBIB2386E
5)
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-689.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the following step.
Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the
following condition.
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 30 km/h (19 MPH)
Selector lever
Suitable position
Driving location
Depress the brake pedal for more
than five seconds so as not to come
off from the above-mentioned vehicle
speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-689.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
FE
CL
MT
AT
6)
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-687
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1304
MEC118E
EC-688
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1305
GI
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I
MA
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check the indication of “BRAKE SW1” under the following conditions.
EM
LC
FE
SEC011D
CL
MT
AT
MTBL1334
TF
PD
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions.
AX
SU
BR
ST
MBIB0061E
RS
BT
HA
MTBL1335
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-689
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
With CONSULT-II
See “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
SEC013D
MTBL1336
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.
MBIB0060E
MTBL1337
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 16.
NG
䊳
GO TO 11.
EC-690
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
GI
CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
MA
EM
LC
FE
PBIB0857E
Voltage: Battery voltage
CL
OK or NG
OK (A/T models)
䊳
GO TO 5.
OK (M/T models)
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
4
MT
AT
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Fuse block (J/B) connector M10
쐌 7.5A fuse
쐌 Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
䊳
TF
PD
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
AX
5
CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for open to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
6
BR
ST
RS
BT
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors M94, F27
쐌 Harness for open and short between ECM and ASCD brake switch
䊳
SU
HA
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-691
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminal 2 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 1, ASCD clutch
switch terminal 2 and ECM terminal 108.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for open to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
GO TO 8.
8
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors M94, F27
쐌 Harness for open and short between ASCD brake switch and ASCD clutch switch
쐌 Harness for open and short between ASCD clutch switch and ECM
䊳
9
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-694.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Replace ASCD clutch switch.
10
CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-694.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 16.
NG
䊳
Replace ASCD brake switch.
EC-692
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
11
GI
CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
A/T models
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEC547D
M/T models
CL
MT
AT
TF
PBIB0117E
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 13.
NG
䊳
GO TO 12.
12
PD
AX
SU
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Fuse block (J/B) connector M10
쐌 10A fuse
쐌 Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse
䊳
BR
ST
Repair open circuit or short to ground in harness or connectors.
RS
13
CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminal 2 and ECM terminal 101. Refer to wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
BT
HA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 15.
NG
䊳
GO TO 14.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-693
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
14
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors M94, F27
쐌 Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and ECM
䊳
15
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-694.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 16.
NG
䊳
Replace stop lamp switch.
16
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
NAEC1306
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH AND STOP LAMP SWITCH
Continuity
Condition
SEC023DA
ASCD brake
switch
Stop lamp switch
When brake pedal is depressed
No
Yes
When brake pedal is released
Yes
No
Check each switch after adjusting brake pedal — refer to BR
section.
SEC548D
SEC155DA
EC-694
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Inspection (Cont’d)
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH (FOR M/T MODELS)
Condition
GI
Continuity
When clutch pedal is depressed
No
When clutch pedal is released
Yes
MA
EM
LC
SEC024D
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-695
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC1134
When the gear position is “P” (A/T models only) or “N”, park/neutral
position (PNP) switch is “ON”.
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the
“ON” signal) exists.
For A/T models, the park/neutral position (PNP) switch assembly
also includes a transmission range switch to detect selector lever
position.
SEC968D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1135
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
P/N POSI SW
SPECIFICATION
Shift lever: “P” or “N”
ON
Except above
OFF
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC1136
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
102
WIRE
COLOR
L
ITEM
PNP switch
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Gear position is “P” (A/T models) or “N” (Neutral
position).
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Except the above gear position
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1706
1706
Trouble diagnosis
name
Park/Neutral position
switch
DTC Detecting Condition
The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP)
switch is not changed in the process of engine
starting and driving.
NAEC1137
Possible Cause
쐌 Harness or connectors
[The park/neutral position (PNP)
switch circuit is open or shorted.]
쐌 Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1138
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
EC-696
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
NAEC1138S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the following conditions.
Position (Selector lever)
ON
Except the above position
OFF
SEF212Y
3)
4)
5)
LC
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-699.
If OK, go to following step.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive
seconds.
ENG SPEED
More than 1,500 rpm (A/T)
More than 1,800 rpm (M/T)
COOLAN TEMP/S
More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL
More than 3.7 msec
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 64 km/h (40 MPH)
Selector lever
Suitable position (A/T)
5th position (M/T)
FE
CL
MT
SEF213Y
6)
MA
EM
Known-good signal
“N” and “P” position
GI
AT
TF
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-699.
PD
AX
SU
Overall Function Check
NAEC1139
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral
position (PNP) switch circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed.
ST
WITH GST
1)
2)
NAEC1139S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 and body ground
under the following conditions.
Condition (Gear position)
Voltage V (Known-good data)
MBIB0043E
“P” and “N” position
Except the above position
3)
BR
RS
BT
Approx. 0
Battery voltage
HA
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-699.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-697
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1140
MEC106E
EC-698
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
FOR M/T MODELS
1
NAEC1141
GI
NAEC1141S01
MA
CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness connector.
EM
LC
FE
SEC968D
3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
CL
MT
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
AT
TF
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors B200, B61
쐌 Harness for open or short between park/neutral position (PNP) switch and ground
䊳
3
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
PD
AX
CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and PNP switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
SU
BR
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
ST
RS
4
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors F22, M33
쐌 Harness connectors M72, B52
쐌 Harness connectors B61, B200
쐌 Harness for open or short between park/neutral position (PNP) switch and ECM
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-699
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Refer to MT-5 “Position Switch Check”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch.
6
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-700
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
FOR A/T MODELS
1
=NAEC1141S02
GI
CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness connector.
EM
LC
FE
SEF011SA
3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 1 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
2
CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and PNP switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
3
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors F22, M33
쐌 Harness connectors M70, B50
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM and park/neutral position (PNP) switch
䊳
BR
ST
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
RS
4
CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Refer to AT-108, “Diagnostic Procedure”.
BT
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch.
5
HA
SC
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EL
IDX
EC-701
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
Description
Description
NAEC1308
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed.
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1309
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
BRAKE SW
SPECIFICATION
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC1315
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and body ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
101
G/Y
ITEM
Stop lamp switch
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Brake pedal fully released
Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
쐌 Brake pedal fully depressed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1310
The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
DTC No.
P1805
1805
Trouble diagnosis name
Brake switch
DTC detecting condition
A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for
an extremely long time while the vehicle is
driving.
Possible cause
쐌 Harness or connectors
(Stop lamp switch circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 Stop lamp switch
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NAEC1310S01
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to small range.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Condition
Driving condition
When engine is idling
Normal
When accelerating
Poor acceleration
EC-702
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
=NAEC1311
WITH CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-705.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-703
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1312
MEC120E
EC-704
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1313
GI
CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.
EM
MTBL1138
LC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
FE
2
CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
CL
1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
MT
AT
TF
SEC549D
PD
2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEC547D
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEC051DA
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
EL
IDX
EC-705
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 10A fuse
쐌 Fuse block (J/B) connector M10
쐌 Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and battery
䊳
4
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
SEC549D
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
5
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connector M94, F27
쐌 Harness for open and short between ECM and stop lamp switch
䊳
6
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-707.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Replace stop lamp switch.
7
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-706
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
Component Inspection
Component Inspection
=NAEC1314
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEC549D
2.
3.
Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions.
Conditions
Continuity
Brake pedal fully released
Should not exist.
Brake pedal depressed
Should exist.
If NG, replace stop lamp switch.
SEC548D
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEC052DA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-707
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC1316
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal
from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on
these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The
ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut.
PBIB1741E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1317
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
ACCEL SEN1
ACCEL SEN2*
CLSD THL POS
CONDITION
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
(engine stopped)
쐌 Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
“1st” (M/T models)
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
(engine stopped)
쐌 Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
“1st” (M/T models)
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
(engine stopped)
쐌 Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
“1st” (M/T models)
SPECIFICATION
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
4.0 - 4.7V
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.3 - 1.2V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
3.9 - 4.8V
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly
depressed
OFF
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC1323
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
82
B/R
Sensor’s ground
(APP sensor 1)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
Approximately 0V
83
L
Sensor’s ground
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 0V
EC-708
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
GI
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
MA
90
L
Sensor’s power supply
(APP sensor 1)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
91
W/R
Sensor’s power supply
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
98
106
R
L
Accelerator pedal position sensor 2
Accelerator pedal position sensor 1
EM
LC
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
쐌 Accelerator pedal fully released
0.15 - 0.6V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
쐌 Accelerator pedal fully depressed
1.95 - 2.4V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
쐌 Accelerator pedal fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
쐌 Accelerator pedal fully depressed
3.9 - 4.7V
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1318
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
NOTE:
If DTC P2122 or P2123 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229.
Refer to EC-596.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis
name
P2122
2122
Accelerator pedal
position sensor 1 circuit low input
P2123
2123
Accelerator pedal
position sensor 1 circuit high input
DTC Detecting Condition
AX
SU
Possible Cause
An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 1 쐌 Harness or connectors
is sent to ECM.
(The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 Accelerator pedal position sensor
An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)
1 is sent to ECM.
BR
ST
RS
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NAEC1318S01
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters in fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
BT
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within
+10 degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-709
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1319
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V at idle.
1.
2.
3.
4.
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-712.
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
EC-710
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1320
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC184E
EC-711
IDX
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1321
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF959Y
䊳
2
GO TO 2.
CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
SEC550D
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 12 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEC551D
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-712
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 9 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
GI
MA
EM
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
4
LC
CHECK APP SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 11.
Refer to Wiring Diagram
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
FE
CL
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
MT
AT
5
CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-714.
TF
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
6
1.
2.
3.
4.
REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”, EC-81.
Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
7
PD
AX
SU
BR
INSPECTION END
ST
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
RS
INSPECTION END
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-713
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
Component Inspection
Component Inspection
=NAEC1322
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1
signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the
following conditions.
Terminal
MBIB0023E
106
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)
98
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)
4.
5.
6.
7.
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
Fully depressed
3.9 - 4.7V
Fully released
0.15 - 0.6V
Fully depressed
1.95 - 2.4V
If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”,
EC-81.
Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
EC-714
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC1324
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal
from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on
these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The
ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut.
PBIB1741E
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1325
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
ACCEL SEN1
ACCEL SEN2*
CLSD THL POS
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
(engine stopped)
쐌 Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
“1st” (M/T models)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
4.0 - 4.7V
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
(engine stopped)
쐌 Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
“1st” (M/T models)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.3 - 1.2V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
3.9 - 4.8V
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
(engine stopped)
쐌 Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
“1st” (M/T models)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly
depressed
OFF
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
RS
NAEC1331
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
BT
HA
DATA (DC Voltage)
SC
47
L
Sensor’s power supply
(Throttle position sensor)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
82
B/R
Sensor’s ground
(APP sensor 1)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
Approximately 0V
EC-715
EL
IDX
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
83
L
Sensor’s ground
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 0V
90
L
Sensor’s power supply
(APP sensor 1)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
91
W/R
Sensor’s power supply
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
98
R
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
Accelerator pedal posi- 쐌 Accelerator pedal fully released
tion sensor 2
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
106
L
Engine stopped
Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
Accelerator pedal posi- 쐌 Accelerator pedal fully released
tion sensor 1
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Engine stopped
Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
Accelerator pedal fully depressed
0.15 - 0.6V
1.95 - 2.4V
0.5 - 1.0V
3.9 - 4.7V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1326
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis
name
P2127
2127
Accelerator pedal
position sensor 2 circuit low input
P2128
2128
Accelerator pedal
position sensor 2 circuit high input
DTC Detecting Condition
Possible Cause
An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 2 쐌 Harness or connectors
is sent to ECM.
(The APP sensor 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 Accelerator pedal position sensor
An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)
2 is sent to ECM.
쐌 Electric throttle control actuator (TP
sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NAEC1326S01
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within
+10 degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
EC-716
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1327
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V at idle.
GI
MA
EM
LC
1)
2)
3)
4)
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-719.
FE
CL
MT
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-717
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1328
TEC844
EC-718
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1329
GI
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
EM
LC
FE
SEF959Y
䊳
2
CL
GO TO 2.
MT
CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEC550D
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 10 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEC552D
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-719
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 10 and ECM terminal 91.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace open circuit.
4
CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
쐌 ECM terminal 47 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 1. Refer to “Wiring Diagram”, EC-244.
쐌 ECM terminal 91 and APP sensor terminal 10. Refer to “Wiring Diagram”, EC-718.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-247.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
6
REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
3. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
7
INSPECTION END
CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 7 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-720
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 8.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
GI
MA
EM
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9
LC
CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-722.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
GO TO 10.
10
1.
2.
3.
4.
11
CL
REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”, EC-81.
Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
FE
MT
AT
TF
INSPECTION END
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
PD
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-721
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
Component Inspection
Component Inspection
=NAEC1330
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1
signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the
following conditions.
Terminal
MBIB0023E
106
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)
98
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)
4.
5.
6.
7.
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
Fully depressed
3.9 - 4.7V
Fully released
0.15 - 0.6V
Fully depressed
1.95 - 2.4V
If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”,
EC-81.
Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
EC-722
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Component Description
Component Description
PBIB0145E
NAEC1332
Electric Throttle Control Actuator Consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds
to the throttle vale movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve form
these signal and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to
make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1333
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
THRTL SEN1
THRTL SEN2*
CONDITION
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
쐌 Shift lever:
“D” (A/T model)
“1st” (M/T model)
SPECIFICATION
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
AX
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
SU
NAEC1339
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
47
50
WIRE
COLOR
L
BR
ITEM
Sensor’s power supply
(Throttle position sensor)
TF
PD
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
TERMINAL
NO.
AT
CONDITION
[Ignition switch “ON”]
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Shift lever position is “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
Throttle position sensor 쐌 Accelerator pedal fully released
1
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Engine stopped
Shift lever position is “D” (A/T models)
Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
Accelerator pedal fully depressed
EC-723
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
More than 0.36V
SC
EL
Less than 4.75V
IDX
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
66
69
WIRE
COLOR
BR/Y
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
Sensor’s ground
BR/W
W/R
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Shift lever position is “D” (A/T models)
쐌 Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
Throttle position sensor 쐌 Accelerator pedal fully released
2
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
91
DATA (DC Voltage)
Sensor’s power supply
(APP sensor 2)
Less than 4.75V
Engine stopped
Shift lever position is “D” (A/T models)
Shift lever position is “1st” (M/T models)
Accelerator pedal fully depressed
More than 0.36V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1334
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P2135
2135
Trouble diagnosis
name
Throttle position sensor circuit range/
performance problem
DTC Detecting Condition
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM compared with the signals from TP sensor 1 and TP
sensor 2.
Possible Cause
쐌 Harness or connector
(The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is
open or shorted.)
쐌 Electric throttle control actuator (TP
sensor 1 and 2)
쐌 Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NAEC1334S01
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within
+10 degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1335
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V at idle.
EC-724
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
1.
2.
3.
4.
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-727.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-725
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1336
TEC842
EC-726
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1337
GI
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
EM
LC
FE
SEF959Y
䊳
2
CL
GO TO 2.
MT
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEC433D
SU
3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
BR
ST
RS
BT
PBIB0082E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-727
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace open circuit.
4
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
쐌 ECM terminal 47 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 1. Refer to “Wiring Diagram”, EC-726.
쐌 ECM terminal 91 and APP sensor terminal 10. Refer to “Wiring Diagram”, EC-718.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5
CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-722.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
6
1.
2.
3.
4.
REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”, EC-81.
Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
7
INSPECTION END
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and ECM terminal 66.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-728
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
GI
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4, ECM terminal 69
and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
MA
EM
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9
LC
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-729.
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
GO TO 10.
CL
REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
MT
10
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
3. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
11
AT
INSPECTION END
TF
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
PD
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
AX
SU
Component Inspection
SEC434D
NAEC1338
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Set selector lever to “D” position (A/T models) or “1st” position
(M/T models).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1), 69
(TP sensor 2) and engine ground under the following conditions.
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
50
(Throttle position sensor
1)
Fully released
More than 0.36V
Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
Fully released
Less than 4.75V
Fully depressed
More than 0.36V
69
(Throttle position sensor
2)
6.
7.
If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the
next step.
Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
EC-729
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Component Inspection (Cont’d)
8.
Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
EC-730
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC1340
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal
from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on
these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The
ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut.
PBIB1741E
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1341
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
ACCEL SEN1
ACCEL SEN2*
CLSD THL POS
CONDITION
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
(engine stopped)
쐌 Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
“1st” (M/T models)
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
(engine stopped)
쐌 Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
“1st” (M/T models)
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
(engine stopped)
쐌 Shift lever: “D” (A/T models)
“1st” (M/T models)
SPECIFICATION
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
4.0 - 4.7V
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.3 - 1.2V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
3.9 - 4.8V
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly
depressed
OFF
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
RS
NAEC1347
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
BT
HA
DATA (DC Voltage)
SC
47
L
Sensor’s power supply
(Throttle position sensor)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
82
B/R
Sensor’s ground
(APP sensor 1)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
Approximately 0V
EC-731
EL
IDX
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
83
L
Sensor’s ground
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 0V
90
L
Sensor’s power supply
(APP sensor 1)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
91
W/R
Sensor’s power supply
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
98
R
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
Accelerator pedal posi- 쐌 Accelerator pedal fully released
tion sensor 2
[Ignition switch “ON”]
0.15 - 0.6V
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Accelerator pedal fully depressed
106
L
1.95 - 2.4V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Engine stopped
Accelerator pedal posi- 쐌 Accelerator pedal fully released
tion sensor 1
[Ignition switch “ON”]
0.5 - 1.0V
쐌 Engine stopped
쐌 Accelerator pedal fully depressed
3.9 - 4.7V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAEC1342
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
NOTE:
If DTC P2138 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-596.
DTC No.
P2138
2138
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC Detecting Condition
Accelerator pedal
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM composition sensor circuit pared with the signals from APP sensor 1 and
range/performance
APP sensor 2.
problem
Possible Cause
쐌 Harness or connector
(The APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is
open or shorted.)
(TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
쐌 Accelerator pedal position sensor 1
and 2
쐌 Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NAEC1342S01
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within
+10 degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
EC-732
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NAEC1343
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V at idle.
GI
MA
EM
LC
1.
2.
3.
4.
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-735.
FE
CL
MT
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-733
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1344
TEC843
EC-734
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1345
GI
RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
MA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
EM
LC
FE
SEF959Y
䊳
2
CL
GO TO 2.
MT
CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SEC550D
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 12 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEC551D
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-735
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 10 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEC552D
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
4
CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 10 and ECM terminal 91.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace open circuit.
5
CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
쐌 ECM terminal 47 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 1. Refer to “Wiring Diagram”, EC-244.
쐌 ECM terminal 91 and APP sensor terminal 10. Refer to “Wiring Diagram”, EC-734.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-247.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 12.
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
7
REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
3. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-736
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
8
GI
CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminals 7, 9 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
MA
EM
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9
LC
CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 11, ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor
terminal 8.
Refer to Wiring Diagram
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10
FE
CL
MT
AT
CHECK APP SENSOR
TF
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-737.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 12.
NG
䊳
GO TO 11.
PD
AX
11
1.
2.
3.
4.
REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
SU
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”, EC-81.
Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
䊳
BR
INSPECTION END
ST
12
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
RS
IINSPECTION END
BT
Component Inspection
NAEC1346
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1
signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the
following conditions.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
MBIB0023E
EC-737
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
Component Inspection (Cont’d)
Terminal
106
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)
98
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)
4.
5.
6.
7.
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
Fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
Fully depressed
3.9 - 4.7V
Fully released
0.15 - 0.6V
Fully depressed
1.95 - 2.4V
If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”,
EC-81.
Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”, EC-81.
Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-81.
EC-738
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Description
Description
NAEC0596
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed* and piston position
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Battery
Battery voltage*
GI
NAEC0596S01
ECM function
MA
Actuator
EM
VIAS control
LC
VIAS control solenoid valve
FE
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF447Z
When the engine is running at low or medium speed, the power
valve is fully closed. Under this condition, the effective suction port
length is equivalent to the total length of the intake manifold collector’s suction port including the intake valve. This long suction port
provides increased air intake which results in improved suction
efficiency and higher torque generation.
The surge tank and one-way valve are provided. When engine is
running at high speed, the ECM sends the signal to the VIAS control solenoid valve. This signal introduces the intake manifold
vacuum into the power valve actuator and therefore opens the
power valve to two suction passages together in the collector.
Under this condition, the effective port length is equivalent to the
length of the suction port provided independently for each cylinder.
This shortened port length results in enhanced engine output with
reduced suction resistance under high speeds.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-739
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Description (Cont’d)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Power Valve
NAEC0596S02
NAEC0596S0201
The power valve is installed in intake manifold collector and used
to control the suction passage of the variable induction air control
system. It is set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the
power valve actuator operated by the vacuum stored in the surge
tank. The vacuum in the surge tank is controlled by the VIAS control solenoid valve.
VIAS Control Solenoid Valve
SEC539D
NAEC0596S0202
The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum
signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from
the ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the
intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil
pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the
power valve actuator.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0684
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
29
WIRE
COLOR
Y/G
ITEM
VIAS control solenoid
valve
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Engine speed is above 5,000 rpm.
0 - 1.0V
EC-740
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0597
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC107E
EC-741
IDX
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0598
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF”, and make sure that power valve actuator rod moves.
PBIB0844E
SEC558D
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Rev engine quickly up to above 5,000 rpm and make sure that power valve actuator rod moves.
SEC558D
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 3.
EC-742
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2
1.
2.
3.
4.
GI
CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE
With CONSULT-II
Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator.
Start engine and let it idle.
Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
Turn VIAS control solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF”, and check for the existence of vacuum under the following conditions.
MA
EM
LC
FE
PBIB0844E
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEC559D
PD
AX
MTBL1174
SU
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Repair or replace power valve actuator.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-743
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE
Without CONSULT-II
Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator.
Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector.
Start engine and let it idle.
Apply 12V of direct current between VIAS control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2.
Check for the existence of vacuum under the following conditions.
PBIB0845E
SEC559D
MTBL1175
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Repair or replace power valve actuator.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
EC-744
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK VACUUM HOSE
1. Stop engine.
2. Check hoses and tubes between intake manifold and power valve actuator for crack, clogging, disconnection or
improper connection.
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF109L
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Replace vacuum hose.
5
CL
MT
CHECK VACUUM TANK
AT
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to vacuum tank.
2. Connect a vacuum pump to port A of vacuum tank.
3. Apply vacuum and make sure that vacuum exists at the port B.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEC560D
BR
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Replace vacuum tank.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-745
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector.
SEC539D
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF603X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
7
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M33, F22
쐌 Harness continuity between VIAS control solenoid valve and ECM relay
䊳
8
Repair harness or connectors.
CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-746
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
9
1.
2.
3.
4.
GI
CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Reconnect disconnected harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
MA
EM
LC
FE
PBIB0177E
CL
MT
MTBL1171
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
MEC488B
BR
ST
MTBL1172
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Replace VIAS control solenoid valve.
RS
BT
HA
10
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
SC
INSPECTION END
EL
IDX
EC-747
IGNITION SIGNAL
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0817
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR
NAEC0817S01
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns
on and off the ignition coil primary circuit. This on-off operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.
SEC561D
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0818
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - 0.2V★
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
60
61
62
79
80
81
PU/W
L/R
Y/R
GY/R
GY
G/R
Ignition
Ignition
Ignition
Ignition
Ignition
Ignition
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
5
3
1
6
4
2
SEC986C
0.1 - 0.3V★
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
SEC987C
★: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
EC-748
IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0819
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC108E
EC-749
IDX
IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
MEC109E
EC-750
IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC110E
IDX
EC-751
IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0820
CHECK ENGINE START
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, and restart engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 3.
No
䊳
GO TO 4.
2
SEARCH FOR MALFUNCTIONING CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Search for circuit which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop.
PBIB0133E
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 13.
3
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Let engine idle.
2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 60, 61, 62, 79, 80, 81 and ground with oscilloscope.
3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as shown below.
SEC579D
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 14.
EC-752
IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
MA
EM
LC
MBIB0034E
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Go to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY, EC-165.
5
FE
CL
MT
CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
AT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEC562D
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF367X
HA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-753
IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM relay.
SEC425D
3. Check harness continuity between ECM relay terminal 3 and condenser terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
7
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M33, F22
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM relay and condenser
䊳
8
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF010Z
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
GO TO 9.
9
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 10A fuse
쐌 Harness for open and short between ECM relay and fuse
䊳
Repair or replace harness or connectors.
EC-754
IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
10
GI
CHECK ECM RELAY
1. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between ECM relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.
MA
EM
LC
SEF296X
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 20.
NG
䊳
Replace ECM relay.
11
CL
MT
CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
AT
TF
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 12.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
12
PD
AX
CHECK CONDENSER
Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
SU
BR
ST
RS
MBIB0031E
Resistance: Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F)
BT
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 13.
NG
䊳
Replace condenser.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-755
IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
13
CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
3. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
SEC561D
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF370X
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 15.
NG
䊳
GO TO 14.
14
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connector F211, F221 (Ignition coil No. 2, No. 4, No. 6)
쐌 Harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F22
䊳
15
Repair or replace harness or connectors.
CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 17.
NG
䊳
GO TO 16.
16
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors F221, F211 (Ignition coil No. 2, No. 4, No. 6)
쐌 Check the harness for open between ignition coil and ground.
䊳
Repair or replace harness or connectors.
EC-756
IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
17
GI
CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 62, 81, 61, 80, 60, 79 and ignition coil terminal 1. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
MA
EM
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 19.
NG
䊳
GO TO 18.
18
LC
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors F211, F221 (Ignition coil No. 2, No. 4, No. 6)
쐌 Check the harness for open or short between ignition coil and ECM.
䊳
19
FE
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CL
CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
MT
Check resistance between ignition coil terminals 2 and 3.
AT
TF
PD
SEC563D
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 20.
NG
䊳
Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
20
AX
SU
BR
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
ST
INSPECTION END
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-757
INJECTOR
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC0383
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is
energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and allows
fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The
amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration.
Pulse duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The
ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel
needs.
SEF375Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0384
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
INJ PULSE-B2
INJ PULSE-B1
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
B/FUEL SCHDL
ditto
Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Shift lever: “N”
No-load
SPECIFICATION
Idle
2.4 - 3.2 msec
2,000 rpm
1.9 - 2.8 msec
Idle
2.0 - 3.2 msec
2,000 rpm
1.4 - 2.6 msec
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0685
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)★
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
21
22
23
40
41
42
L/W
R/Y
R/B
PU/R
R/L
R/W
Injector
Injector
Injector
Injector
Injector
Injector
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
5
3
1
6
4
2
SEC984C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)★
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
SEC985C
★: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
EC-758
INJECTOR
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0386
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC111E
EC-759
IDX
INJECTOR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0387
INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to “START”.
Is any cylinder ignited?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
GO TO 3.
2
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
PBIB0133E
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
MEC703B
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
EC-760
INJECTOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect injector harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEF023Z
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between injector terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF364Z
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
4
AX
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
SU
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors M33, F22
쐌 Harness connectors F5, F100
쐌 Fuse block (J/B) connector M10
쐌 10A fuse
쐌 Harness for open or short between injector and fuse
䊳
PD
BR
ST
Repair harness or connectors.
RS
5
CHECK INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 23, 22, 21, 42, 41, 40. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-761
INJECTOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors F100, F5
쐌 Harness for open or short between injector and ECM
䊳
7
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK INJECTOR
1. Disconnect injector harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
SEF964XB
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Replace injector.
8
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-762
FUEL PUMP
System Description
System Description
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed* and piston position
Battery
Battery voltage*
NAEC0392
ECM function
Fuel pump
control
Actuator
MA
Fuel pump relay
EM
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned on to improve engine
startability. If the ECM receives a 120° signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that the
engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the 120° signal is not received when the ignition switch
is on, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby improving
safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn
controls the fuel pump.
Condition
GI
LC
FE
Fuel pump operation
Ignition switch is turned to ON.
CL
Operates for 1 second.
Engine running and cranking
Operates.
When engine is stopped
Stops in 1.5 seconds.
Except as shown above
Stops.
MT
AT
Component Description
NAEC0393
The fuel pump with a fuel damper is an in-tank type (the pump and
damper are located in the fuel tank).
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF018S
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC0394
BR
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
FUEL PUMP RLY
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
쐌 Ignition switch is turned to ON. (Operates for 1 second.)
쐌 Engine running and cranking
ON
Except as shown above
OFF
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-763
FUEL PUMP
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
=NAEC0686
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
113
WIRE
COLOR
R/L
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 For 1 second after turning ignition switch “ON”
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 1 second passed after turning ignition switch
“ON”.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Fuel pump relay
EC-764
FUEL PUMP
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0396
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC112E
EC-765
IDX
FUEL PUMP
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0397
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
SEF025Z
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned “ON”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect fuel pump relay.
SEC564D
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between terminals 1, 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEC565D
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
EC-766
FUEL PUMP
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Fuse block (J/B) connector M10
쐌 15A fuse in fuse block (J/B)
쐌 Harness connectors M2, B1
쐌 Harness for open or short between fuse and fuel pump relay and fuse
䊳
4
MA
EM
Repair harness or connectors.
LC
CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect fuel pump harness connector.
FE
CL
MT
SEF021S
3. Check harness continuity between fuel pump terminal 2 and body ground, fuel pump terminal 1 and fuel pump relay
terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
5
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 113 and fuel pump relay terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
PD
SU
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors B24, D101
쐌 Harness connectors D106, D206
쐌 Harness for open or short between fuel pump relay and fuel pump
쐌 Harness for open between fuel pump and ground
6
TF
AX
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
䊳
AT
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-767
FUEL PUMP
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors B1, M2
쐌 Harness connectors M32, F23
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel pump relay
䊳
8
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect fuel pump relay, fuel pump harness connector and ECM harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Turn fuel pump relay “ON” and “OFF” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II and check operating sound.
SEF073Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5 under the following conditions.
SEC566D
MTBL1373
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Replace fuel pump relay.
EC-768
FUEL PUMP
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
9
GI
CHECK FUEL PUMP
1. Disconnect fuel pump harness connector.
2. Check resistance between fuel pump terminals 1 and 2.
MA
EM
LC
SEF027Z
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Replace fuel pump.
10
CL
MT
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
AT
INSPECTION END
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-769
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Description
Description
NAEC0636
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the
air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM.
SEC567D
SEF099XA
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0689
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
49
P/B
Sensors’ power supply
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 5V
67
B/P
Sensors’ ground
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Idle speed
Approximately 0V
W/PU
Refrigerant pressure
sensor
[Engine is running]
쐌 Warm-up condition
쐌 Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON”.
(Compressor operates.)
1.0 - 4.0V
70
EC-770
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0637
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC114E
EC-771
IDX
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0638
CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn A/C switch and blower switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 70 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB0832E
Voltage: 1 - 4V
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn A/C switch and blower switch “OFF”.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
SEC567D
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF030Z
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
EC-772
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M32, F23
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
䊳
4
Repair harness or connectors.
CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
MA
EM
LC
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
5
CL
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E116, M114
쐌 Harness connectors M94, F27
쐌 Joint connector F204
쐌 Harness for open between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
쐌 Harness connectors F22, M33 (A/T models)
쐌 Harness for open between TCM and refrigerant pressure sensor (A/T models)
䊳
6
MT
AT
TF
Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
PD
CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 70 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
7
FE
SU
BR
ST
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M94, F27
쐌 Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
䊳
AX
RS
BT
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
HA
8
CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
SC
Refer to HA-16, “Refrigerant pressure sensor”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.
EL
IDX
EC-773
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
9
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-774
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC1348
When depressing the brake pedal, ASCD brake switch is turned
OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON.
ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this two kinds of input
(ON/OFF signal).
Refer to EC-62 for the ASCD function.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEC549D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1349
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
BRAKE SW 1
(ASCD brake switch)
BRAKE SW 2
(Stop lamp switch)
CONDITION
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
CL
쐌 Brake pedal fully released
쐌 Clutch pedal is fully released
(M/T models)
ON
쐌 Brake pedal depressed
쐌 Clutch pedal is depressed (M/T
models)
OFF
쐌 Brake pedal fully released
OFF
쐌 Brake pedal depressed
ON
MT
AT
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
TF
NAEC1356
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
101
108
WIRE
COLOR
G/Y
L/Y
ITEM
Stop lamp switch
ASCD brake switch
CONDITION
FE
DATA (DC Voltage)
PD
AX
SU
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Brake pedal is fully released
Approximately 0V
BR
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Brake pedal is depressed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
ST
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Brake pedal is fully released
쐌 Clutch pedal is fully released (M/T models)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
RS
[Ignition switch “ON”]
쐌 Brake pedal is depressed
쐌 Clutch pedal is depressed (M/T models)
Approximately 0V
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-775
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1350
MEC119E
EC-776
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1351
GI
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I
MA
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check the indication of “BRAKE SW1” under the following conditions.
EM
LC
FE
SEC011D
CL
MT
AT
MTBL1334
TF
PD
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions.
AX
SU
BR
ST
MBIB0061E
RS
BT
HA
MTBL1335
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-777
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
With CONSULT-II
See “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
SEC013D
MTBL1336
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.
MBIB0060E
MTBL1337
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 11.
EC-778
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
GI
CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
MA
EM
LC
FE
PBIB0857E
Voltage: Battery voltage
CL
OK or NG
OK (A/T models)
䊳
GO TO 5.
OK (M/T models)
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
4
MT
AT
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Fuse block (J/B) connector M10
쐌 7.5A fuse
쐌 Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
䊳
TF
PD
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
AX
5
CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for open to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
6
BR
ST
RS
BT
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors M94, F27
쐌 Harness for open and short between ECM and ASCD brake switch
䊳
SU
HA
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-779
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminal 2 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 1, ASCD clutch
switch terminal 2 and ECM terminal 108.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for open to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
GO TO 8.
8
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors M94, F27
쐌 Harness for open and short between ASCD brake switch and ASCD clutch switch
쐌 Harness for open and short between ASCD clutch switch and ECM
䊳
9
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-694.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Replace ASCD clutch switch.
10
CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-694.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 16.
NG
䊳
Replace ASCD brake switch.
EC-780
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
11
GI
CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
A/T models
MA
EM
LC
FE
SEC547D
M/T models
CL
MT
AT
TF
PBIB0117E
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 13.
NG
䊳
GO TO 12.
12
PD
AX
SU
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Fuse block (J/B) connector M10
쐌 10A fuse
쐌 Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse
䊳
BR
ST
Repair open circuit or short to ground in harness or connectors.
RS
13
CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminal 2 and ECM terminal 101. Refer to wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
BT
HA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 15.
NG
䊳
GO TO 14.
SC
EL
IDX
EC-781
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
14
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors M94, F27
쐌 Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and ECM
䊳
15
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-694.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 16.
NG
䊳
Replace stop lamp switch.
16
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-782
ASCD INDICATOR LAMP
Component Description
Component Description
NAEC1352
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status.
Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and SET, and is integrated in
combination meter.
CRUISE indicator illuminates when CRUISE switch on steering
switch is turned ON to indicate that ASCD system is ready for
operation.
SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met.
CRUISE indicator illuminates, and SET switch on steering switch
is turned ON while vehicle speed is within range of ASCD setting.
SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control. Refer to EC-62 for
ASCD functions.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NAEC1353
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
쐌 CRUISE switch is depressed at
first time , second time.
CRUISE LAMP
쐌 Ignition switch: ON
SET LAMP
쐌 When vehicle speed is between 40 km/h 쐌 COAST/SET switch pressed
(25 MPH) to 144 km/h (89 MPH), and
쐌 ASCD control is canceled.
CRUISE switch is ON.
SPECIFICATION
AT
TF
PD
ON , OFF
ON
AX
OFF
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-783
ASCD INDICATOR LAMP
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC1354
MEC190E
EC-784
ASCD INDICATOR LAMP
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC1355
GI
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
MA
Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.
EM
LC
MTBL1260
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
FE
CHECK DTC
CL
Make sure that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC U1000 or U1001, EC-174.
3
CHECK COMBINATION METER OPERATION
Check that combination meter operates normally.
MT
AT
TF
OK or NG
PD
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to EL-123.
AX
4
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
SU
INSPECTION END
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-785
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NAEC0690
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
84
93
WIRE
COLOR
OR
B/L
ITEM
Headlamp signal
Rear window defogger
signal
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Headlamp: ON
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Headlamp: OFF
0V
[Engine is running]
쐌 Rear window defogger: ON
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
쐌 Rear window defogger: OFF
0V
EC-786
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0604
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC115E
EC-787
IDX
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAEC0605
CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 93 and ground under the following conditions.
SEC568D
MTBL1374
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
2
CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground under the following conditions.
MBIB0158E
MTBL1375
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
EC-788
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FUNCTION
1. Start engine.
2. Turn “ON” the rear window defogger switch.
3. Check the rear windshield. Is the rear windshield heated up?
MA
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 4.
No
䊳
Refer to EL-177, “Rear Window Defogger”.
4
1.
2.
3.
4.
EM
LC
CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
Stop engine.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect rear window defogger relay.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 93 and rear window defogger relay terminal 7.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEC569D
BR
ST
MTBL1376
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
5
RS
BT
HA
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M33, F22
쐌 Diode M37
쐌 Harness for open and short between ECM and rear window defigger relay
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-789
SC
EL
IDX
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
7
INSPECTION END
CHECK HEADLAMP FUNCTION
1. Start engine.
2. Turn the lighting switch “ON” at 1st position with high beam.
3. Check that headlamps are illuminated.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Refer to EL-35, “HEADLAMP (FOR USA)”.
8
1.
2.
3.
4.
CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
Stop engine.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect headlamp LH relay.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 84 and headlamp LH relay terminal 5 under the following conditions.
SEC570D
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
GO TO 9.
9
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
쐌 Harness connectors E1, M1
쐌 Harness connectors M33, F22
쐌 Diode E121
쐌 Harness for open and short between ECM and headlamp LH relay
䊳
10
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-163.
䊳
INSPECTION END
EC-790
MIL & DATA LINK CONNECTORS
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
NAEC0407
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MEC116E
EC-791
IDX
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure Regulator
Fuel Pressure Regulator
NAEC0408
Fuel pressure at idling kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Condition
Vacuum hose is connected.
Approximately 235 (2.4, 34)
Vacuum hose is disconnected.
Approximately 294 (3.0, 43)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing
Target idle speed*1
NAEC0409
No-load*2 (in “P” or N” position)
M/T: 750±50 rpm
A/T: 750±50 rpm
Air conditioner: ON
In “P” or N” position
825 rpm or more
Ignition timing*1
In “P” or N” position
15°±5° BTDC
*1:
*2:
쐌
쐌
쐌
Throttle position sensor harness connector connected
Under the following conditions:
Air conditioner switch: OFF
Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
Mass Air Flow Sensor (Type I)
Supply voltage
NAEC0411
Battery voltage (11 - 14V)
Output voltage at idle
1.2 - 1.8V*
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec at idle*
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST)
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load.
Mass Air Flow Sensor (Type II)
Supply voltage
NAEC1412
Battery voltage (11 - 14V)
Output voltage at idle
1.0 - 1.3V*
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec at idle*
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST)
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load.
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
Temperature °C (°F)
NAEC0412
Resistance kΩ
20 (68)
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.236 - 0.260
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
NAEC0414
3.3 - 4.0Ω
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
NAEC0422
5.0 - 7.0Ω
Fuel Pump
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
NAEC0415
0.2 - 5.0Ω
Injector
Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)]
NAEC0417
13.5 - 17.5Ω
EC-792
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Calculated Load Value
Calculated Load Value
NAEC0420
GI
Calculated load value % (Using CONSULT-II or GST)
At idle
14.0 - 33.0
At 2,500 rpm
12.0 - 25.0
Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Temperature °C (°F)
MA
EM
NAEC0421
LC
Resistance kΩ
25 (77)
1.9 - 2.1
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor
Temperature °C (°F)
NAEC0424
Resistance kΩ
20 (68)
2.3 - 2.7
50 (122)
0.79 - 0.90
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)
FE
CL
NAEC1357
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-350.
MT
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-357.
NAEC1358
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
EC-793
NOTES
BODY & TRIM
SECTION
BT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS ...............................................................3
Service Notice..............................................................3
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR
BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″...............3
PREPARATION ...............................................................4
Special Service Tools ..................................................4
Commercial Service Tool.............................................4
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.........5
Work Flow....................................................................5
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ...........................................5
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ................6
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ...................6
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT
CAUSE .....................................................................6
REPAIR THE CAUSE .................................................6
CONFIRM THE REPAIR .............................................7
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ..............7
INSTRUMENT PANEL ................................................7
CENTER CONSOLE ..................................................7
DOORS.....................................................................7
TRUNK .....................................................................8
SUNROOF/HEADLINER .............................................8
SEATS ......................................................................8
UNDERHOOD ...........................................................8
Diagnostic Worksheet..................................................9
CLIP AND FASTENER..................................................11
Description .................................................................11
BODY FRONT END.......................................................13
Removal and Installation ...........................................13
FRONT BUMPER ASSEMBLY ..................................13
BODY REAR END AND OPENER................................16
Removal and Installation ...........................................16
REAR BUMPER ASSEMBLY ....................................16
FRONT DOOR ...............................................................19
Overhaul ....................................................................19
Front Door Limit Switch Reset ..................................20
RESET CONDITIONS ..............................................20
RESET PROCEDURES ............................................20
REAR DOOR .................................................................21
Overhaul ....................................................................21
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY .............................22
Removal and Installation ...........................................22
SIDE AND FLOOR TRIM...............................................29
Removal and Installation ...........................................29
DOOR TRIM ...................................................................31
Removal and Installation ...........................................31
TYPE A ...................................................................31
TYPE B ...................................................................32
ROOF TRIM ...................................................................34
Removal and Installation ...........................................34
BACK DOOR TRIM .......................................................35
Removal and Installation ...........................................35
EXTERIOR .....................................................................36
Removal and Installation ...........................................36
FRONT SEAT ................................................................43
Removal and Installation ...........................................43
POWER SEAT .........................................................44
MANUAL SEAT........................................................45
HEATED SEAT ........................................................46
REAR SEAT...................................................................47
Removal and Installation ...........................................47
SUNROOF......................................................................48
Adjustment .................................................................48
Contents of Working ..................................................49
Contents of Switch Working ......................................50
JAM PROTECTION ..................................................50
Removal and Installation ...........................................50
Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................54
DIAGNOSTIC TABLE................................................54
WIND DEFLECTOR .................................................54
ADJUSTMENT .........................................................55
DRAIN HOSES ........................................................56
WEATHERSTRIP .....................................................57
LINK AND WIRE ASSEMBLY ....................................57
WINDSHIELD AND WINDOWS ....................................58
Removal and Installation ...........................................58
REMOVAL ...............................................................58
INSTALLATION........................................................58
WINDSHIELD ..........................................................59
REAR SIDE WINDOW ..............................................60
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
HA
SC
EL
IDX
CONTENTS
DOOR MIRROR .............................................................61
Removal and Installation ...........................................61
BODY (ALIGNMENT) ....................................................62
BT-2
(Cont’d)
Alignment ...................................................................62
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ........................................63
UNDERBODY ..........................................................65
PRECAUTIONS
Service Notice
Service Notice
I
I
I
I
I
NABT0030
When removing or installing various parts, place a cloth or padding onto the vehicle body to prevent
scratches.
Handle trim, molding, instruments, grille, etc. carefully during removing or installing. Be careful not to soil
or damage them.
Apply sealing compound where necessary when installing parts.
When applying sealing compound, be careful that the sealing compound does not protrude from parts.
When replacing any metal parts (for example body outer panel, members, etc.), be sure to take rust prevention measures.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR
BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
NABT0023
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS system composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL R50 is as follows:
I For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
I For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of side air bag module (located in the outer side of front seat),
satellite sensor, side curtain air bag module (located in the headlining side of front and rear seat), diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring harness, warning lamp (one
of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
I To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
I Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the RS section.
I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified with yellow and/or orange harness connector (and with yellow harness protector or yellow insulation tape before the harness connectors).
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BT-3
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
Special Service Tools
NABT0024
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-39570)
Chassis ear
Locating the noise
SBT839
—
(J-43980)
Nissan Squeak and Rattle
kit
Repairing the cause of noize
SBT840
Commercial Service Tool
Tool name
Description
Engine ear
Locating the noise
SBT841
BT-4
NABT0025
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow
Work Flow
NABT0026
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
NABT0026S01
Interview the customer, if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the
Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and
any customer’s comments; refer to BT-9. This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist
when the noise occurs.
I The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to
obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
I If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer
is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
I After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
I Squeak — (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping
I Creak — (Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity.
I Rattle — (Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
I Knock — (Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
I Tick — (Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
I Thump — (Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
I Buzz — (Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
I Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge
as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
I Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BT-5
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow (Cont’d)
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
NABT0026S02
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
I Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
I If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
NABT0026S03
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
NABT0026S04
1. Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanics stethoscope).
2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
I removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fastener can
be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
I tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated
only temporarily.
I feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the
noise.
I placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
I looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to “Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting”, BT-7.
REPAIR THE CAUSE
NABT0026S05
I
I
−
−
If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized Nissan Parts
Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
The following materials are contained in the Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be ordered
separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
76268-9E005: 100 x 135 mm (3.94 x 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60 x 85 mm (2.36 x 3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15 x
25 mm (0.59 x 0.98 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50 x 50 mm (1.97 x 1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50 x
50 mm (1.97 x 1.97 in)
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
BT-6
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow (Cont’d)
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 x 50 mm (1.18 x 1.97 in)
FELT CLOTH TAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
68370-4B000: 15 x 25 mm (0.59 x 0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll
The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
SILICONE GREASE
Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit.
Note: Will only last a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
DUCT TAPE
Use to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
NABT0026S06
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting
FE
CL
NABT0027
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
MT
INSTRUMENT PANEL
NABT0027S01
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicon spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.
CENTER CONSOLE
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
NABT0027S02
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
DOORS
ST
RS
NABT0027S03
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BT-7
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting (Cont’d)
TRUNK
=NABT0027S04
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINER
NABT0027S05
Noises in the sunroof/headliner area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
SEATS
NABT0027S06
When isolating seat noises it’s important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat
when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of
the noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holders
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seat back lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
UNDERHOOD
NABT0027S07
Some interior noises may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noises include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
BT-8
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Diagnostic Worksheet
Diagnostic Worksheet
NABT0028
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
HA
SC
EL
SBT843
BT-9
IDX
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Diagnostic Worksheet (Cont’d)
SBT844
BT-10
CLIP AND FASTENER
Description
Description
I
I
NABT0003
Clips and fasteners in BT section correspond to the following numbers and symbols.
Replace any clips and/or fasteners which are damaged during removal or installation.
Symbol No.
Shapes
GI
MA
Removal & Installation
EM
LC
C101
EC
SBF302H
SBF367BA
FE
CL
C103
MT
AT
SBT095
SBF423H
TF
PD
C203
AX
SU
SBF258G
SBF708E
BR
C205
ST
RS
MBT080A
SBF638CA
HA
CE103
SC
EL
SBF104B
SBF147B
BT-11
IDX
CLIP AND FASTENER
Description (Cont’d)
Symbol No.
Shapes
Removal & Installation
CE117
SBF174D
SBF175D
CF109
SBF651B
SBF652B
CG101
SBF145B
SBF085B
CR103
SBF768B
SBF770B
CS101
SBF078B
SBF992G
BT-12
BODY FRONT END
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
I
I
I
I
I
When removing or installing hood, place a cloth or other padding on front fender panel and cowl top. This
prevents vehicle body from being scratched.
Bumper fascia is made of plastic. Do not use excessive force and be sure to keep oil away from it.
Hood adjustment: Adjust at hinge portion.
Hood lock adjustment: After adjusting, check hood lock control operation. Apply a coat of grease to hood
locks engaging mechanism.
Hood opener: Do not attempt to bend cable forcibly. Doing so increases effort required to unlock hood.
FRONT BUMPER ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
NABT0004
GI
MA
EM
LC
NABT0004S01
Remove bolts securing left and right side combination lamps and remove the lamps.
Remove clips securing center radiator grille and remove the center radiator grille.
Remove bolts securing left and right radiator grille and remove the grilles.
Remove clips and screws securing left and right sides of fender protector.
Remove screws securing bumper fascia.
Remove clips securing radiator core support lower.
Remove clips securing bumper reinforcement.
Extract bumper fasica.
Remove bolts and nuts securing bumper reinforcement.
Extract bumper reinforcement. (When installing bumper reinforcement, remove washer tank.)
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BT-13
BODY FRONT END
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
SBT699
BT-14
BODY FRONT END
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
HA
SC
EL
SBT700
IDX
BT-15
BODY REAR END AND OPENER
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
I
I
NABT0005
Bumper fascia is made of plastic. Do not use excessive force and be sure to keep oil away from it.
Back door lock system adjustment: Adjust lock & striker so that they are in the center.
After adjustment, check back door lock operation.
I Back door hatch lock system adjustment: Adjust lock & striker so that they are in the center.
After adjustment, check back door hatch lock operation.
I Opener cable: Do not attempt to bend cable using excessive force.
I After installation, make sure that back door and fuel filler lid open smoothly.
WARNING:
I Be careful not to scratch back door stay and/or back door hatch stay when installing back door
and/or back door hatch. A scratched stay may cause gas leakage.
I The contents of the back door stay and back door hatch stay are under pressure. Do not take apart,
puncture, apply heat or allow fire near them.
REAR BUMPER ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
NABT0005S01
Remove screws securing left and right mudguards and remove the mudguards.
Remove clips and screws securing left and right sides of wheel protector.
Remove bolts and screws securing lower side and side of bumper assembly.
Remove bolts securing bumper rubber assembly.
Remove bolts securing spare tire hanger striker assembly.
Remove bolts securing spare tire hanger guide assembly.
Remove clips from upper side of bumper assembly.
Extract bumper assembly.
Remove nuts securing bumper reinforcement and remove the bumper reinforcement.
SBT297A
BT-16
BODY REAR END AND OPENER
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
HA
SC
EL
SBT298A
IDX
BT-17
BODY REAR END AND OPENER
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
SBT299A
BT-18
FRONT DOOR
Overhaul
Overhaul
I
I
NABT0006
For removal of door trim, refer to “DOOR TRIM” (BT-31).
After adjusting door or door lock, check door lock operation.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
HA
SC
SBT512-A
EL
IDX
BT-19
FRONT DOOR
Front Door Limit Switch Reset
Front Door Limit Switch Reset
RESET CONDITIONS
NABT0029
NABT0029S01
After each of the following operations are performed, reset the limit
switch (with built-in motor).
I Regulator removal and installation
I Removal of motor from regulator
I Operation of regulator as a single unit
I Door glass removal and installation
I Glass run removal and installation
RESET PROCEDURES
SBT041A
NABT0029S02
After installing parts, proceed as follows:
1. Close the door window completely.
2. Press the reset switch and open the door window completely.
3. Release the reset switch. After making sure the reset switch
has returned to the original position, close the door window
completely.
4. The limit switch is now reset.
CAUTION:
Be sure to manually open or close the door window. (Do not
use the automatic open-close procedures.)
BT-20
REAR DOOR
Overhaul
Overhaul
NABT0007
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
HA
SC
EL
SBT736
BT-21
IDX
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
NABT0008
CAUTION:
I Lock the CD changer unit mechanism (models with CD
changer).
Refer to EL-201, “LOCKING CD CHANGER UNIT MECHANISM”.
I Disconnect both battery cables in advance.
I Disconnect air bag system line in advance.
I Never tamper with or force air bag lid open, as this may
adversely affect air bag performance.
I Be careful not to scratch pad and other parts.
SBT302A
*1
RS-18
*2
BT-29
BT-22
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
SBT026A
*1
RS-20
*2
RS
BT-29
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BT-23
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
SBT300A
BT-24
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
HA
SC
EL
SBT301A
IDX
BT-25
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
Steering column cover
After removing the screws, release the pawls by pressing on the
upper cover where it meets (the bottom cover) from both sides.
SBT029A
Instrument lower panel on the driver side
Open the pocket after removing the screws. Hold the opening and
the bottom and pull out horizontally.
SBT030A
Cluster lid A
After removing the screws, hold the bottom and pull out.
CAUTION:
Cover the surroundings with a cloth to prevent damage.
SBT044A
Center ventilator
Hook a cloth-covered flat-bladed screwdriver into the right-side
groove section, and pull out.
CAUTION:
To prevent the screwdriver from slipping and causing damage
to the surface, pull out while applying pressure on the screwdriver towards the right.
SBT031A
Cluster lid C
After removing the screws, place hands on the metal clip section,
and pull forward to remove the metal clips.
SBT045A
BT-26
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
Console finisher
1) After removing the ashtray, place hands on the opening and
pull out in an upward direction to remove the clips at the back.
2) Hold the front of the finisher, pull out in an upward direction and
remove the clips at the front.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SBT032A
Console box
1) Pull up the parking brake lever.
2) Remove the screws, pull the console towards the back of the
car until it is free of the instrument panel, lift up the front and
remove.
I It will be easier to remove if the parking brake lever is pulled
up for more than 10 notches.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SBT033A
Instrument finisher
Remove the screws and pull up.
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SBT034A
Instrument lower panel on the passenger side
After removing the screws, hold both sides and pull out horizontally.
BR
ST
RS
SBT046A
Instrument mask
Insert a cloth-covered flat-bladed screwdriver, and remove by lifting up.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SBT047A
BT-27
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
Defroster grille
REMOVAL
Insert a cloth-covered flat-bladed screwdriver into the grilles of the
outside, center and central grilles, respectively, lift up the front of
the grilles and remove.
INSTALLATION
After inserting the front section, insert the rear section (pawls) to
attach.
CAUTION:
Confirm that the pawls at the rear are securely attached.
SBT035A
Side ventilator-left
Insert a cloth-covered flat-bladed screwdriver into the lower
section, and pull out forward.
SBT036A
Side ventilator-right
Insert a cloth-covered flat-bladed screwdriver into the corner of the
lower section, and pull out forward. (Securely press the screwdriver
against the ventilator.) Or, after removing the Instrument lower
panel, push the ventilator out from the back.
Side defroster grille
After removing the side ventilator, reach in with hands from the
opening, push on the pawls from behind the grille, and remove by
pushing out.
SBT037A
BT-28
SIDE AND FLOOR TRIM
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
NABT0009
CAUTION:
Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing metal clips from garnishes.
1. Remove front and rear seats. Refer to “FRONT SEAT” and “REAR SEAT” for details, BT-43, BT-47.
2. Remove front and rear seat belts. Refer to RS-3, “SEAT BELT” for details.
3. Remove front and rear kicking plates.
4. Remove dash side lower finishers.
5. Remove front and rear body side welts.
6. Remove front pillar garnishes.
7. Remove center assist grips.
8. Remove center pillar lower garnishes.
9. Remove center pillar upper garnishes.
10. Remove rear gate kicking plate.
11. Remove rear net hooks.
12. Remove tonneau cover assembly and rear parcel holder.
13. Remove rear side lower garnishes.
14. Remove rear side upper garnishes.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
HA
SBT694
SC
EL
IDX
BT-29
SIDE AND FLOOR TRIM
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
SBT728
BT-30
DOOR TRIM
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
TYPE A
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
NABT0010
GI
NABT0010S01
Remove inside handle escutcheon.
Remove door armrest. (Front door only)
Remove power window switches, then disconnect the connectors.
Remove door finisher cover. (Rear door only)
Remove bolts securing door finisher.
Remove clips securing door finisher.
Lift out door finisher.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
HA
SC
SBT207
EL
IDX
BT-31
DOOR TRIM
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
TYPE B
=NABT0010S02
Front Door Trim
1. Remove inside handle escutcheon.
2. Remove power window switch, then disconnect the connectors.
3. Remove door armrest.
4. Remove bolts securing door finisher.
5. Pull on door finisher to remove clips from door panel and remove door finisher, then disconnect glass hatch
and fuel lid opener switch connector.
Rear Door Trim
6. Remove inside handle escutcheon.
7. Remove power window switch, then disconnect the connector.
8. Remove door armrest cap.
9. Remove bolts securing door finisher.
10. Pull on door finisher to remove clips from door panel and remove door finisher.
SBT696
BT-32
DOOR TRIM
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
HA
SC
EL
SBT697
IDX
BT-33
ROOF TRIM
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
NABT0011
front and rear seats. Refer to “FRONT SEAT” and “REAR SEAT” for details, BT-43, BT-47.
front and rear seat belts. Refer to RS-3, “SEAT BELTS” for details.
body side trim. Refer to “SIDE AND FLOOR TRIM” for details, BT-29.
roof console assembly.
inside mirror assembly.
sun visors.
interior lamp assembly and luggage room lamp assembly.
assist grips.
clips securing headlining.
rear roof garnish.
headlining from vehicle through either back door.
SBT487
BT-34
BACK DOOR TRIM
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
NABT0012
back door grip.
back door finisher assembly.
high-mounted stop lamp.
back door upper finisher assembly.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SBT223
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BT-35
EXTERIOR
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
NABT0013
SBT729
BT-36
EXTERIOR
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
HA
SC
EL
SBT730
IDX
BT-37
EXTERIOR
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
SBT490-A
BT-38
EXTERIOR
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
HA
SC
EL
SBT491-A
IDX
BT-39
EXTERIOR
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
SBT492-B
BT-40
EXTERIOR
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
HA
SC
EL
SBT493-A
IDX
BT-41
EXTERIOR
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
SBT731
BT-42
FRONT SEAT
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
NABT0014
I When removing or installing the seat trim, handle carefully to keep dirt out and avoid damage.
★ For Wiring Diagram, refer to EL-215, “POWER SEAT”.
CAUTION:
I Before removing the front seat, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait
at least 3 minutes.
I When checking the power seat circuit for continuity using a circuit tester, do not confuse its connector with the side air bag module connector. Such an error may cause the air bag to deploy.
I Do not drop, tilt, or bump the side air bag module installed in the seat. Always handle it with care.
I Disconnect the side air bag, power seat switch, and heated seat harness connectors from under
the seat before removing the seat.
I Disconnect the side air bag harness connector before removing the seat back. (Refer to RS-22,
“Side Air Bag Module”.)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
SBT067A
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BT-43
FRONT SEAT
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
POWER SEAT
=NABT0014S01
SBT019A
BT-44
FRONT SEAT
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
MANUAL SEAT
NABT0014S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SBT020A
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BT-45
FRONT SEAT
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
HEATED SEAT
I
I
I
★
=NABT0014S03
When handling seat, be extremely careful not to scratch heating unit.
To replace heating unit, seat trim and pad should be separated.
Do not use any organic solvent, such as thinner, benzene, alcohol, gasoline, etc. to clean trims.
For Wiring Diagram, refer to EL-217, “HEATED SEAT”.
BT-46
REAR SEAT
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
NABT0015
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
HA
SC
EL
SBT190-B
BT-47
IDX
SUNROOF
Adjustment
Adjustment
NABT0016
Install motor & limit SW assembly and sunroof rail assembly in the following sequence:
1. Arrange equal lengths of link and wire assemblies on both sides of sunroof opening.
2. Connect sunroof connector to vehicles harness.
3. Set lid assembly to fully closed position
by operating OPEN switch and TILT switch. After the lid has
closed all the way, keep pushing the tiling switch toward tilt DOWN for more than 1 second.
4. Fit outer side of lid assembly to the surface of roof on body outer panel.
5. Press TILT-UP switch to check lid assembly for normal tilting.
6. Check sunroof lid assembly for normal operations (tilt-up, tilt-down, open, and close).
SBF920F
BT-48
SUNROOF
Contents of Working
Contents of Working
=NABT0034
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SBT254A
Tilt
Pre-select
Manual
Auto
Condition
AX
Ignition (timer)
Normal working
Reverse working
Normal working
Reverse working
ON
q
X
q*1
q
OFF
X
X
X
X*2
q: Working
X: Not working
*1: Auto doesn’t work if the position is not at the initial starting position.
*2: The motor keeps moving in reverse motion until finishing the reverse working.
PD
SU
BR
ST
RS
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BT-49
SUNROOF
Contents of Switch Working
Contents of Switch Working
=NABT0035
Priority of each switch is as folllows.
Tilt switch
Up
Down
Open
Close
Motor stop
+
Follow switch input
+
Reverse turn continued
+
Reverse turn continued
+
Operate to tilt full open and stop
+
Follow switch input
+
After continued operation, stop
at tilt full open position
+
Follow switch input
+
Reverse turn continued
+
Reverse turn continued
+
Sliding open
After continued operation, stop
at flap down position
+
Follow switch input
+
Sliding close
Operate to flap down position
and stop
+
Follow switch input
+
Reverse turn continued
+
Reverse turn continued
+
Sliding open
Motor stop
+
Follow switch input
+
Sliding close
Motor stop
+
Follow switch input
+
Reverse turn continued
+
After reverse turn, continued,
follow switch input
Reverse
turn continued
Tilting up/down &
Tilt A range sliding open/close
Reverse turning
Sliding open
Tilt B range Sliding close
Reverse turning
Flap range
Slide switch (Pre-select)
Reverse turning
Slide range
Reverse turning
JAM PROTECTION
NABT0035S01
Reverse working is as follows.
Operation direction
Reverse turn distance
Tilt A range
Open operation
Tilt full open position
Tilt B & flap range
Open operation
Tilt full open position
Flap range
Close operation
Flap down position
Slide A range
Close operation
125 mm (4.92 in) min.
Slide B range
Close operation
125 mm (4.92 in) min. (*1)
(*1): Full open position [In case of reverse start position, full open position is within 125 mm (4.92 in).]
CAUTION:
Don’t pinch a foreign object or your body on purpose.
Removal and Installation
I
NABT0017
After any adjustment, check sunroof operation and lid alignment.
I Handle finisher plate and glass lid with care so not to cause
damage.
I It is desirable for easy installation to mark each point before
removal.
CAUTION:
I Always work with a helper.
I Before removal, fully close the glass lid assembly, then
after removal, do not move motor assembly.
BT-50
SUNROOF
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
SBT515-D
*1
BT-34
*2
RS
EL-208
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BT-51
SUNROOF
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
SBT252A
BT-52
SUNROOF
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
Record the number of shims placed between glass lid assembly and link and wire assembly. Remove securing nuts and glass
lid assembly.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SBT249A
Remove screws from left and right sides of each wind deflector
holder. Extract pawls through rail holes, then remove left and right
sides of wind deflector holder. Remove screws from front end of
sunroof unit. Extract pawls through frame holes, then remove wind
deflector from frame assembly.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SBT827
AT
CAUTION:
I Before removing sunroof motor, make sure that sunroof is
fully closed.
I After removing sunroof motor, never attempt to rotate
sunroof motor as a single unit.
I Power supply to the motor is off when removing sunroof
motor and vehicle harness or battery. Initialize at starting
position.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SBT250A
Remove shade stoppers (2 points) from rear end of sunroof
frame assembly. Remove sun shade from rear end of sunroof
frame assembly.
BR
ST
RS
SBT251A
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BT-53
SUNROOF
Trouble Diagnoses
Trouble Diagnoses
=NABT0018
DIAGNOSTIC TABLE
NABT0018S01
Sunroof is malfunctioning
Procedure
Malfunctioning item
1. Check power supply. (*1)
NG
Replace battery.
No
Initialize the sunroof switch.
NG
Replace the sunroof switch.
OK
2. Is the position initialized at starting position?
Yes
3. Check sunroof switch.
I Is correct voltage value or resistance value at each
position?
I Does occur chattering?
OK
Replace sunroof motor.
*1: If voltage between terminal 1 (Input voltage) and terminal 8 (ground) of sunroof motor is less than approx. 8V, do not operate.
NOTE:
For diagnosing electric problem, refer to EL-211, “POWER SUNROOF”.
Check items (Components)
Wind deflector
Adjustment
Drain hoses
Weatherstrip
Link and wire
assembly
Reference page
BT-54
BT-55
BT-56
BT-57
BT-57
Excessive wind
noise
1
2
3
Water leaks
1
2
3
Sunroof rattles
1
4
2
3
Excessive operation noise
1
2
3
Symptom
The numbers in this table mean checking order.
WIND DEFLECTOR
1.
2.
3.
NABT0018S02
Open lid.
Check visually for proper installation.
Check to ensure a proper amount of petroleum jelly has been
applied to wind deflector connection points; apply if necessary.
SBT331
BT-54
SUNROOF
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
4.
Check that wind deflector is properly retracted by hand. If it is
not, remove and visually check condition. (Refer to removal
procedures, BT-50.) If wind deflector is damaged, replace with
new one. If wind deflector is not damaged, re-install properly.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SBT332
ADJUSTMENT
EC
NABT0018S03
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
SBT257A
If any gap or height difference between glass lid and roof is found,
check glass lid fit and adjust as follows:
Gap Adjustment
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
RS
NABT0018S0301
Open shade assembly.
Tilt glass lid up then remove side trim.
Loosen glass lid securing nuts (3 each on left and right sides),
then tilt glass lid down.
Adjust glass lid from outside of vehicle so it resembles “A-A”
as shown in the figure above.
Tilt glass lid up and down until it is adjusted to “B-B” (When
sunroof is closed) as shown in the figure above.
After adjusting glass lid, tilt glass lid up and tighten nuts.
Tilt glass lid up and down several times to check that it moves
smoothly.
BT-55
ST
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SUNROOF
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Height Difference Adjustment
1.
2.
3.
I
I
NABT0018S0302
Tilt glass lid up and down.
Check height difference between roof panel and glass lid to
see if it is as “A-A” as shown in the figure above.
If necessary, adjust it by using one of following procedures.
Adjust by adding or removing adjustment shim(s) between
glass lid and link assembly.
If glass lid protrudes above roof panel, add shim(s) or plain
washer(s) at sunroof mounting bracket or stud bolt locations to
adjust sunroof installation as required.
DRAIN HOSES
NABT0018S04
SBT376
1.
2.
Remove headlining to access drain hose connections. (Refer
to “Removal and Installation” in “ROOF TRIM”, BT-34, for
detail.)
Check visually for proper connections, damage or
deterioration. (The figure shows only the front side.)
SBT333
3.
4.
5.
I
If leakage occurs around luggage room, remove luggage room
side trim and check connecting area. Check for proper
connection, damage or tear.
Remove drain hoses and check visually for any damage,
cracks, or deterioration.
Pour water into drain hoses and find damaged portion.
If any damaged portion is found at each step, replace the
damaged part.
SBT377
BT-56
SUNROOF
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
WEATHERSTRIP
I
NABT0018S05
In the case of leakage around glass lid, close glass lid and pour
water over glass lid to find damaged or gap portion, remove
glass lid assembly. (Refer to removal procedures, BT-50, for
details.)
I Check weatherstrip visually for any damage, deterioration, or
flattening.
I If any damage is found, replace weatherstrip.
CAUTION:
Do not remove weatherstrip except when replacing, or filling
up butyl seal.
LINK AND WIRE ASSEMBLY
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
NABT0018S06
NOTE:
Before replacing a suspect part, carefully ensure it is the source of
noise being experienced.
1. Visually check to determine if a sufficient amount of petroleum
jelly has been applied to wire or rail groove. If not, add petroleum jelly as required.
2. Check wire for any damage or deterioration. If any damage is
found, remove rear guide (refer to removal procedures, BT-50
for details), then replace wire.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BT-57
WINDSHIELD AND WINDOWS
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
SBF034B
I
SBT473
NABT0019S01
After removing moldings, remove glass using piano wire or power
cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag.
WARNING:
When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety
glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from
entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION:
I Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
I Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may
develop into cracks.
INSTALLATION
SBT472
NABT0019
NABT0019S02
Use a genuine Nissan Urethane Adhesive Kit or equivalent
and follow the instructions furnished with it.
I While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by
passenger compartment air pressure when a door is
closed.
I The molding must be installed securely so that it is in
position and leaves no gap.
I Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured
(preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature
and humidity.
WARNING:
I Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive
are flammable.
I The materials contained in the kit are harmful if
swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid contact
with the skin and eyes.
I Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing
the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled. If affected by
vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh
air.
I Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the windshield in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
I Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term.
Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the
date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or
manufacture date printed on the box.
I Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally,
they should be stored in a refrigerator.
I Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended
with their caps open or off.
I The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or
until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing
time varies depending on temperature and humidities. The
curing time will increase under higher temperatures and
lower humidities.
BT-58
WINDSHIELD AND WINDOWS
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
WINDSHIELD
NABT0019S03
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SBT191-A
Repairing Water Leaks for Windshield
PD
NABT0019S0301
Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling glass.
If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and
body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be
done by applying water to the windshield area while pushing
glass outward.
To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane
adhesive to the leak point.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BT-59
WINDSHIELD AND WINDOWS
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
REAR SIDE WINDOW
NABT0019S04
SBT359-A
BT-60
DOOR MIRROR
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
NABT0020
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch door rearview mirror body.
★ For Wiring Diagram, refer to EL-213, “DOOR MIRROR”.
1. Remove door trim. Refer to “DOOR TRIM” for details, BT-31.
2. Remove clip securing inner cover from front corner of door.
3. Disconnect door mirror harness connector.
4. Remove bolts securing door mirror, then remove door mirror assembly.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
HA
SC
SBT891
EL
IDX
BT-61
BODY (ALIGNMENT)
Alignment
Alignment
I
I
I
I
I
I
NABT0021
All dimensions indicated in figures are actual ones.
When using a tracking gauge, adjust both pointers to equal length. Then check the pointers and gauge
itself to make sure there is no free play.
When a measuring tape is used, check to be sure there is no elongation, twisting or bending.
Measurements should be taken at the center of the mounting holes.
An asterisk (★) following the value at the measuring point indicates that the measuring point on the other
side is symmetrically the same value.
The coordinates of the measurement points are the distances measured from the standard line of “X”, “Y”
and “Z”.
SBF874GD
BT-62
BODY (ALIGNMENT)
Alignment (Cont’d)
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Measurement
NABT0021S01
GI
NABT0021S0101
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SBT194
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
HA
SC
EL
IDX
BT-63
BODY (ALIGNMENT)
Alignment (Cont’d)
Measurement Points
NABT0021S0102
SBT195
BT-64
BODY (ALIGNMENT)
Alignment (Cont’d)
UNDERBODY
Measurement
NABT0021S02
GI
NABT0021S0201
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
HA
SC
EL
SBT196
BT-65
IDX
BODY (ALIGNMENT)
Alignment (Cont’d)
Measurement Points
NABT0021S0202
SBT197
BT-66
FRONT & REAR SUSPENSION
SECTION
SU
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CONTENTS
FRONT SUSPENSION ....................................................3
Precautions ..................................................................3
PRECAUTIONS .........................................................3
Preparation ..................................................................3
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS ........................................3
COMMERCIAL SERVICE TOOLS ................................3
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Troubleshooting ...........................................................4
NVH TROUBLESHOOTING CHART ............................4
Components.................................................................5
2WD .........................................................................5
4WD .........................................................................6
On-vehicle Service.......................................................7
FRONT SUSPENSION PARTS ...................................7
FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT .....................................8
Coil Spring and Strut Assembly.................................10
COMPONENTS .......................................................10
REMOVAL ...............................................................12
DISASSEMBLY ........................................................12
INSPECTION ...........................................................12
ASSEMBLY .............................................................13
Stabilizer Bar .............................................................13
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...............................13
INSPECTION ...........................................................14
Transverse Link and Lower Ball Joint .......................14
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...............................14
INSPECTION ...........................................................15
Low Tire Pressure Warning System ..........................16
SYSTEM COMPONENTS .........................................16
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ..........................................16
Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................18
WIRING DIAGRAM ..................................................18
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING CONTROL
UNIT INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL STANDARD ..............20
ID REGISTRATION PROCEDURE ............................20
SELF-DIAGNOSIS ...................................................23
HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR .............................25
PRELIMINARY CHECK ............................................26
MALFUNCTION CODE/SYMPTOM CHART ...............27
Trouble Diagnoses for Self-diagnostic Items.............27
INSPECTION 1: TRANSMITTER OR TIRE
PRESSURE WARNING CONTROL UNIT ...................27
INSPECTION 2: TRANSMITTER-1 ............................28
INSPECTION 3: TRANSMITTER-2 ............................29
INSPECTION 4: LOW TIRE PRESSURE
WARNING CONTROL UNIT......................................29
Trouble Diagnoses for Symptoms .............................30
INSPECTION 1: WARNING LAMP DOES NOT
COME ON WHEN IGNITION SWITCH IS TURNED
ON. .........................................................................30
INSPECTION 2: WARNING LAMP STAYS ON
WHEN IGNITION SWITCH IS TURNED ON. ..............31
INSPECTION 3: WARNING LAMP BLINKS WHEN
IGNITION SWITCH IS TURNED ON. .........................33
INSPECTION 4: TAIL LAMP BLINKS WHEN
IGNITION SWITCH IS TURNED ON. .........................34
INSPECTION 5: ID REGISTRATION CANNOT BE
COMPLETED. .........................................................34
Service Data and Specifications (SDS).....................34
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (FRONT) .....................34
WHEEL ALIGNMENT (UNLADEN*1) ..........................34
LOWER BALL JOINT ...............................................35
WHEELARCH HEIGHT (UNLADEN*) .........................35
WHEEL RUNOUT AVERAGE* ..................................36
REAR SUSPENSION.....................................................37
Precautions ................................................................37
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................37
Preparation ................................................................37
COMMERCIAL SERVICE TOOLS ..............................37
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Troubleshooting .........................................................37
Components...............................................................38
On-vehicle Service.....................................................38
REAR SUSPENSION PARTS ...................................38
Removal and Installation ...........................................39
Coil Spring and Shock Absorber ...............................40
COMPONENTS .......................................................40
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...............................41
INSPECTION ...........................................................41
Upper Link, Lower Link and Panhard Rod................41
INSPECTION ...........................................................41
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
CONTENTS
BUSHING REPLACEMENT.......................................41
INSTALLATION........................................................42
Stabilizer Bar .............................................................42
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...............................42
SU-2
(Cont’d)
Low Tire Pressure Warning System ..........................42
Service Data and Specifications (SDS).....................43
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (REAR) .......................43
FRONT SUSPENSION
Precautions
Precautions
GI
PRECAUTIONS
I
I
I
SBR686C
I
NASU0001
When installing rubber parts, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition* with tires on ground.
*Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack,
hand tools and mats in designated positions.
Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake
tubes.
After installing removed suspension parts, check wheel
alignment and adjust if necessary.
Always torque brake lines when installing.
Preparation
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
NASU0002
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
ST29020001
(J24319-01)
Ball joint remover
Removing tie-rod outer end and lower ball joint
a: 34 mm (1.34 in)
b: 6.5 mm (0.256 in)
c: 61.5 mm (2.421 in)
MT
AT
TF
NT694
PD
COMMERCIAL SERVICE TOOLS
Tool name
NASU0003
Description
AX
1 Flare nut crowfoot
2 Torque wrench
Removing and installing each brake piping
a: 10 mm (0.39 in)
BR
NT360
Spring compressor
Removing and installing coil spring
ST
RS
NT717
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU-3
FRONT SUSPENSION
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) Troubleshooting
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Troubleshooting
=NASU0035
NVH TROUBLESHOOTING CHART
NASU0035S01
×
×
×
Shake
×
×
×
×
×
×
TIRES
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Out-of-round
Stabilizer bar fatigue
Incorrect wheel alignment
Suspension looseness
×
—
×
—
×
Spring fatigue
×
Parts interference
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Vibration
ROAD WHEEL
ST-6
×
STEERING
×
BR-7
×
BRAKES
Noise
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Shimmy
×
×
×
×
×
×
Judder
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Poor quality
ride or handling
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Noise
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Shake
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Shimmy, Judder
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Poor quality
ride or handling
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×: Applicable
SU-4
×
Refer to ROAD WHEEL
in this chart.
×
ROAD WHEEL
×
Refer to TIRES
in this chart.
×
TIRES
Poor quality
ride or handling
×
×
×
Refer to SUSPENSION
in this chart.
×
×
×
SUSPENSION
×
AX-3
×
AX-3
Judder
AXLE
×
DRIVE SHAFT
×
PD-4
×
PD-4
×
DIFFERENTIAL
Shimmy
PROPELLER SHAFT
×
—
×
—
×
Incorrect tire size
×
Non-uniformity
Vibration
—
×
Deformation or damage
×
—
×
—
×
Uneven tire wear
Shake
Incorrect air pressure
×
—
×
SU-8
×
Imbalance
×
SU-8
—
Bushing or mounting deterioration
SU-13, 42
SU-10, 40
Shock absorber deformation,
damage or deflection
Noise
Symptom
SU-10, 40
SU-5, 38
Possible Cause and
SUSPECTED PARTS
SUSPENSION
Reference page
Improper installation, looseness
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
×
FRONT SUSPENSION
Components
Components
NASU0004
2WD
GI
NASU0004S01
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
BR
ST
RS
SFA743B
1.
2.
3.
Strut mounting insulator
Spring upper seat
Bound bumper
4.
5.
6.
Coil spring
Strut assembly
Stabilizer connecting rod
7.
8.
9.
Bracket
Stabilizer bar
Transverse link
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU-5
FRONT SUSPENSION
Components (Cont’d)
4WD
NASU0004S02
SFA744B
1.
2.
3.
4.
Strut mounting insulator
Spring upper seat
Bound bumper
Coil spring
5.
6.
7.
Strut assembly
Stabilizer connecting rod
Bracket
SU-6
8. Stabilizer bar
9. Transverse link
10. Drive shaft
FRONT SUSPENSION
On-vehicle Service
On-vehicle Service
FRONT SUSPENSION PARTS
GI
NASU0005
Check front axle and front suspension parts for excessive play,
cracks, wear and other damage.
1. Shake each front wheel to check for excessive play.
2. Retighten all axle and suspensions nuts and bolts to the specified torque.
Tightening torque:
Refer to “Components”, SU-10.
MA
3.
EC
EM
LC
SMA525A
4.
5.
a.
b.
SFA392B
c.
Check strut (shock absorber) for oil leakage and other damage.
Check suspension ball joint for grease leakage and ball joint
dust cover for cracks and other damage.
If ball joint dust cover is cracked or damaged, replace ball joint
assembly.
Check suspension ball joint end play.
Jack up front of vehicle and set the stands.
Clamp dial indicator onto transverse link and place indicator tip
on lower edge of brake caliper.
Make sure front wheels are straight and brake pedal is
depressed.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
d.
e.
Place a pry bar between transverse link and knuckle.
While raising and releasing pry bar, observe maximum dial
indicator value.
Vertical end play:
0 mm (0 in)
If ball joint vertical end play exists, remove lower ball joint
assembly and recheck the ball joint. Refer to “Tranverse Link
and Lower Ball Joint”, SU-14.
ST
RS
BT
SFA745B
6.
a.
b.
c.
SFA746B
BR
Check spring height from top of wheelarch to ground using the
following procedure.
Park vehicle on a level surface with vehicle unladen*.
*: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack,
hand tools and mats in designated positions.
Check tires for proper inflation and wear (tread wear indicator
must not be showing).
Bounce vehicle up and down several times and measure
dimensions Hf and Hr. Refer to SDS, SU-35.
Spring height is not adjustable. If out of specification, check for
worn springs and suspension parts.
SU-7
HA
SC
EL
IDX
FRONT SUSPENSION
On-vehicle Service (Cont’d)
FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT
NASU0006
Before checking front wheel alignment, be sure to make a preliminary inspection (Unladen*).
*: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand
tools and mats in designated positions.
SFA975B
Preliminary Inspection
NASU0006S01
1.
2.
Check tires for wear and improper inflation.
Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage.
If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout.
NOTE:
Measure both the inner and outer sides for the radial runout and
lateral runout, and confirm the figures are within the standards.
Wheel runout (Dial indicator value):
Refer to SDS, SU-36.
3. Check front wheel bearings for looseness.
4. Check front suspension for looseness.
5. Check steering linkage for looseness.
6. Check that front shock absorbers work properly.
7. Check vehicle posture (Unladen).
Camber, Caster and Kingpin Inclination
NASU0006S02
Camber, caster and kingpin inclination are preset at factory
and cannot be adjusted.
1. Measure camber, caster and kingpin inclination of both right
and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge.
Camber, Caster and Kingpin inclination:
Refer to SDS, SU-34.
2. If camber, caster or kingpin inclination is not within
specification, inspect front suspension parts. Replace damaged or worn out parts.
SFA894
SU-8
FRONT SUSPENSION
On-vehicle Service (Cont’d)
Toe-in
SFA614B
NASU0006S03
Measure toe-in using the following procedure.
WARNING:
I Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface.
I Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before
pushing it.
1. Bounce front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the posture.
2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft).
3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both tires at
the same height of hub center. This mark is a measuring point.
4. Measure distance “A” (rear side).
5. Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180
degrees (1/2 turn).
If the wheels have rotated more than 180 degrees (1/2 turn), try
the above procedure again from the beginning. Never push
vehicle backward.
6. Measure distance “B” (front side).
Total toe-in:
Refer to SDS, SU-34.
SFA234AC
7.
a.
b.
Adjust toe-in by varying the length of steering tie-rods.
Loosen lock nuts.
Adjust toe-in by screwing tie-rods in and out.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SFA749B
c.
Make sure both tie-rods are the same length.
Standard length “L”:
Refer to ST-33, “Steering Gear and Linkage”.
Tighten lock nuts to specified torque.
Lock nut tightening torque:
Refer to ST-18, “POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE”.
ST
RS
BT
SFA486A
Front Wheel Turning Angle
SFA439BA
BR
NASU0006S04
Turning angle is set by stroke length of steering gear rack and
cannot be adjusted.
1. Set wheels in straight-ahead position. Then move vehicle forward until front wheels rest on turning radius gauge properly.
2. Rotate steering wheel all the way right and left; measure turning angle.
Do not hold the steering wheel on full lock for more than 15
seconds.
Wheel turning angle (Full turn):
Refer to SDS, SU-34.
SU-9
HA
SC
EL
IDX
FRONT SUSPENSION
Coil Spring and Strut Assembly
Coil Spring and Strut Assembly
COMPONENTS
2WD
NASU0007
NASU0007S01
SSU052
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Spacer
Strut mounting insulator
Bracket
Strut mounting bearing
Spring upper seat
Bound bumper
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Coil spring
(Polyurethane tube)
Strut assembly
Bracket
Lower ball joint assembly
Cotter pin
SU-10
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Transverse link
Stabilizer connecting rod
Stabilizer bar
Bushing
Bracket
Knuckle spindle
FRONT SUSPENSION
Coil Spring and Strut Assembly (Cont’d)
4WD
NASU0007S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
BR
ST
RS
SSU053
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Spacer
Strut mounting insulator
Bracket
Strut mounting bearing
Spring upper seat
Bound bumper
Coil spring
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
(Polyurethane tube)
Strut assembly
Bracket
Lower ball joint assembly
Cotter pin
Transverse link
Stabilizer connecting rod
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Stabilizer bar
Bushing
Bracket
Knuckle spindle
Snap ring
Hub cap
Drive shaft
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU-11
FRONT SUSPENSION
Coil Spring and Strut Assembly (Cont’d)
REMOVAL
NASU0008
1. Remove stabilizer connecting rod.
2. Remove strut assembly fixing bolts and nuts (to hood-ledge).
Do not remove piston rod lock nut on vehicle.
SFA956A
DISASSEMBLY
NASU0009
1. Set strut assembly on vise, then loosen piston rod lock nut.
WARNING:
Do not remove piston rod lock nut at this time.
2. Compress spring with tool so that the strut mounting insulator
can be turned by hand.
WARNING:
Make sure that the pawls of the two spring compressors are
firmly hooked on the spring. The spring compressors must be
tightened alternately so as not to tilt the spring.
SSU002
3.
Remove piston rod lock nut.
SSU003
INSPECTION
Strut Assembly
I
I
I
I
Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension.
Check for oil leakage on welded and gland packing portion.
Check piston rod for cracks, deformation and other damage.
Replace if necessary.
Strut Mounting Insulator and Rubber Parts
I
I
I
NASU0010S03
Check thrust bearing parts for abnormal noise and excessive
rattle in axial direction.
Replace if necessary.
Coil Spring
I
NASU0010S02
Check cemented rubber-to-metal portion for separation and
cracks. Check rubber parts for deterioration.
Replace if necessary.
Strut Mounting Bearing
I
NASU0010
NASU0010S01
NASU0010S04
Check for cracks, deformation and other damage. Replace if
necessary.
SU-12
FRONT SUSPENSION
Coil Spring and Strut Assembly (Cont’d)
ASSEMBLY
I
NASU0011
When installing coil spring on strut, it must be positioned as
shown in the figure at left.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SFA725B
I
Install upper spring seat with its cutout facing the inner side of
vehicle.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SFA664AA
AT
Stabilizer Bar
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
I
NASU0012
Remove stabilizer bar and connecting rod.
TF
PD
AX
SFA767B
I
When installing stabilizer, make sure that paint mark and
bracket face in their correct directions.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SFA768B
I
When removing and installing stabilizer bar fix portion A.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SFA769B
SU-13
FRONT SUSPENSION
Stabilizer Bar (Cont’d)
I
Install stabilizer bar with ball joint socket properly placed.
SFA449BA
INSPECTION
I
I
I
NASU0013
Check stabilizer for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary.
Check rubber bushings for deterioration and cracks. Replace
if necessary.
Check ball joint can rotate in all directions. If movement is not
smooth and free, replace stabilizer bar connecting rod.
ARA027
Transverse Link and Lower Ball Joint
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SFA757B
6.
NASU0014
Separate drive shaft from knuckle. — 4WD —
Refer to AX-12, “Drive Shaft”.
Separate lower ball joint stud from knuckle.
Remove lower ball joint assembly from transverse link.
Remove transverse link.
During installation, final tightening must be carried out at curb
weight with tires on ground.
After installation, check wheel alignment.
Refer to “FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT”, “On-vehicle Service”,
SU-8.
SU-14
FRONT SUSPENSION
Transverse Link and Lower Ball Joint (Cont’d)
INSPECTION
Transverse Link
I
I
=NASU0015
GI
NASU0015S01
Check transverse link for damage, cracks and deformation.
Replace it if necessary.
Check rubber bushing for damage, cracks and deformation.
Replace transverse link if necessary.
MA
EM
LC
Lower Ball Joint
I
SFA858AA
EC
NASU0015S02
Check ball joint for excessive play. Replace lower ball joint
assembly if any of the following exists:
− Ball stud is worn.
− Joint is hard to swing.
− Play in axial direction is excessive.
Before checking, turn ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that ball
joint is properly broken in.
Swinging force “A”:
(measuring point: cotter pin hole of ball stud)
Refer to SDS, SU-35.
Turning torque “B”:
Refer to SDS, SU-35.
Vertical end play “C”:
Refer to SDS, SU-35.
Check dust cover for damage. Replace it and cover clamp if necessary.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU-15
FRONT SUSPENSION
Low Tire Pressure Warning System
Low Tire Pressure Warning System
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
NASU0037
SEIA0222E
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Transmitter
NASU0038
NASU0038S01
A sensor-transmitter integrated with a valve is installed on a wheel,
and transmits a detected air pressure signal in the form of a radio
wave.
SEIA0203E
Antenna
NASU0038S02
Receives the radio wave signal transmitted by the transmitter.
SEIA0230E
SU-16
FRONT SUSPENSION
Low Tire Pressure Warning System (Cont’d)
Low Tire Pressure Warning Control Unit
NASU0038S03
Reads the radio wave signal received by the antenna, and controls
the warning lamp and the buzzer operations as shown below. It
also has a judgement function to detect a system malfunction.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEIA0231E
EC
Condition
Warning lamp
Buzzer
Less than 170 kPa (1.7 kg/cm2, 24 psi) [Flat tire]
ON
Sounds for 10 sec.
System malfunction
ON
OFF
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU-17
FRONT SUSPENSION
Trouble Diagnoses
Trouble Diagnoses
WIRING DIAGRAM
NASU0039
MSU001
SU-18
FRONT SUSPENSION
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MSU002
IDX
SU-19
FRONT SUSPENSION
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING CONTROL UNIT INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL STANDARD
NASU0040
Standards using a circuit tester and oscilloscope
Measurement terminal
+
Measuring point
Standard value
−
1
Battery power supply
Always
Battery voltage (Approx. 12V)
2
Ignition switch ON or START
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage (Approx. 12V)
Tire pressure warning lamp
turns ON
Approx. 0V
Tire pressure warning lamp
turns OFF
Battery voltage (Approx. 12V)
3
Tire pressure warning lamp
4
Ignition switch ON or ACC
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage (Approx. 12V)
8
Tire pressure warning check switch
Always
Approx. 5V
Lighting switch in 1st position
Approx. 0V
9
Tail lamp relay
Lighting switch OFF
Approx. 12V
Ground
10
Speed meter operated
[When vehicle speed is
approx. 40 km/h (25 MPH)]
Vehicle speed signal (8-pulse)
ELF1084D
11
GND
—
Approx. 0V
12
Data link connector (RX)
—
—
13
Data link connector (TX)
—
—
17
Antenna
—
—
ID REGISTRATION PROCEDURE
ID Registration with Transmitter Activation Tool
NASU0041
NASU0041S01
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector.
Start engine.
Touch “START”, “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR”, “WORK SUPPORT” and “ID REGIST”.
5.
With the transmitter activation tool (J-45295) pushed against
the front-left transmitter, press the button then keep 5 seconds.
SEIA0101E
SU-20
FRONT SUSPENSION
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
6.
Register the IDs in order from FR LH, FR RH, RR RH, to RR
LH. When ID registration of each wheel has been completed,
a buzzer sounds and tail lamps blinks.
Activation tire position
Buzzer
1
FR LH
Once
2
FR RH
2 times
3
RR RH
3 times
4
RR LH
4 times
Tail lamp
CONSULT-II
2 times flashing
“YET”
"
“DONE”
7.
After completing all ID registrations, press “END” to complete
the procedure.
NOTE:
Be sure to register the IDs in order from FR LH, FR RH, RR RH,
to RR LH, or the self-diagnostic results display will not function
properly.
ID Registration without Transmitter Activation ToolNASU0041S02
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector.
Start engine.
Touch “START”, “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR”, “WORK” SUPPORT” and “ID REGIST”.
Adjust the tire pressure to the values shown in the table below
for ID registration, and drive the vehicle at 32 km/h (20 MPH)
or more for a few minutes.
Tire position
Tire pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Front-Left
250 (2.5, 36)
Front-Right
230 (2.3, 33)
Rear-Right
210 (2.1, 30)
Rear-Left
190 (1.9, 27)
Rear LH
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
BR
CONSULT-II
ST
Front LH
Front RH
MA
AX
After completing all ID registrations, press “END” to complete
the procedure.
Activation tire position
GI
“YET”
"
“DONE”
RS
Rear RH
BT
Transmitter Wake Up Operation
NASU0041S03
With Transmitter Activation Tool
NASU0041S0301
1. With the transmitter activation tool (J-45295) pushed against
the front left transmitter, press the button for 5 seconds.
I When ignition switch is ON, then warning lamp blinks as in the
follow diagram and transmitter wakes up.
2. Register the IDs in order from FR LH, FR RH, RR RH or RR
LH. When wake up of each wheel has been completed, a tail
lamp blinks.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SEIA0101E
SU-21
FRONT SUSPENSION
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
3.
Need to activate tire
position
Warning lamp
Front LH
Once (0.3 sec.)
Front RH
2 times blinking
Rear LH
3 times blinking
Rear RH
4 times blinking
All tires
Once (2.0 sec.)
Tail lamp
2 times flashing
After completing wake up of all transmitters, make sure tire
pressure warning lamp goes out.
SU-22
FRONT SUSPENSION
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Description
=NASU0042
GI
NASU0042S01
During driving, the low tire pressure warning system receives the signal transmitted from the transmitter
installed in each wheel, and gives alarms when the tire pressure becomes low. The control unit of this system
has pressure judgement and trouble diagnosis functions.
MA
Function
EM
NASU0042S02
When the low tire pressure warning system detects low inflation pressure or another unusual symptom, the
warning lamps in the combination meter comes on. To start the self-diagnostic results mode, ground the selfdiagnostic (check) terminal. The malfunction location is indicated by the tail lamp flashing and the buzzer
sounds.
LC
CONSULT-II
EC
NASU0042S03
CONSULT-II Application to Low Tire Pressure Warning System
ITEM
NASU0042S0301
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
Front - Left transmitter
×
×
Front - Right transmitter
×
×
Rear - Left transmitter
×
×
Rear - Right transmitter
×
×
Warning lamp
—
×
Vehicle speed
—
×
Buzzer (in control unit)
—
×
×: Applicable
—: Not applicable
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU-23
FRONT SUSPENSION
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Self-Diagnostic Results Mode
=NASU0042S0302
Diagnostic item
FLAT
FLAT
FLAT
FLAT
-
TIRE
TIRE
TIRE
TIRE
[NO-DATA]
[NO-DATA]
[NO-DATA]
[NO-DATA]
-
-
Diagnostic item is detected when ···
Front-left tire pressure drops to 200 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2, 28 psi) or less
Front-right tire pressure drops to 200 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2, 28 psi) or less
Rear-right tire pressure drops to 200 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2, 28 psi) or less
Rear-left tire pressure drops to 200 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) or less
FL
FR
RR
RL
FL
FR
RR
RL
Data
Data
Data
Data
from
from
from
from
[CHECKSUM[CHECKSUM[CHECKSUM[CHECKSUM-
ERR]
ERR]
ERR]
ERR]
-
FL
FR
RR
RL
Checksum
Checksum
Checksum
Checksum
[PRESSDATA[PRESSDATA[PRESSDATA[PRESSDATA-
ERR]
ERR]
ERR]
ERR]
-
FL
FR
RR
RL
Air
Air
Air
Air
[CODE[CODE[CODE[CODE-
ERR]
ERR]
ERR]
ERR]
-
FL
FR
RR
RL
[BATT
[BATT
[BATT
[BATT
VOLT
VOLT
VOLT
VOLT
-
LOW]
LOW]
LOW]
LOW]
-
FL
FR
RR
RL
RECEIVER - ID - NO - REG
data
data
data
data
pressure
pressure
pressure
pressure
Function
Function
Function
Function
-
front-left transmitter cannot be received.
front-right transmitter cannot be received.
rear-right transmitter cannot be received.
rear-left transmitter cannot be received.
Battery
Battery
Battery
Battery
from
from
from
from
data
data
data
data
code
code
code
code
from
from
from
from
data
data
data
data
voltage
voltage
voltage
voltage
of
of
of
of
front-left transmitter is malfunctioning.
front-right transmitter is malfunctioning.
rear-right transmitter is malfunctioning.
rear-left transmitter is malfunctioning.
front-left transmitter is malfunctioning.
front-right transmitter is malfunctioning.
rear-right transmitter is malfunctioning.
rear-left transmitter is malfunctioning.
from
from
from
from
front-left transmitter is malfunctioning.
front-right transmitter is malfunctioning.
rear-right transmitter is malfunctioning.
rear-left transmitter is malfunctioning.
front-left transmitter drops.
front-right transmitter drops.
rear-right transmitter drops.
rear-left transmitter drops.
No ID registration has been made to the low tire pressure warning control unit.
NOTE:
Before performing the self-diagnosis, be sure to register the ID. Or, the actual malfunction location may be different from that displayed
on CONSULT-II.
Data Monitor Mode
MONITOR
NASU0042S0303
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
VHCL SPEED SE
Drive vehicle.
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
I Drive vehicle for a few minutes.
or
Tire pressure (kPa or Psi)
I Ignition switch ON and activation
tool is transmitting activate signals.
ID
ID
ID
ID
PRESS
PRESS
PRESS
PRESS
REGST
REGST
REGST
REGST
FL
FR
RR
RL
Vehicle speed (km/h or MPH)
FL
FR
RR
RL
Registration ID: DONE
No registration ID: YET
Ignition switch ON
WARNING LAMP
Warning lamp on: ON
Warning lamp off: OFF
BUZZER
Buzzer in low tire pressure warning control unit on: ON
Buzzer in low tire pressure warning control unit off: OFF
NOTE:
Before performing the self-diagnosis, be sure to register the ID. Or, the actual malfunction location may be different from that displayed
on CONSULT-II.
SU-24
FRONT SUSPENSION
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR
Introduction
I
I
I
=NASU0043
NASU0043S01
Before troubleshooting, verify customer complaints.
If a vehicle problem is hard to reproduce, harnesses, harness connectors or terminals may often be malfunctioning. Hold and shake these parts by hand to make sure they are securely connected.
When using a circuit tester to measure voltage or resistance of each circuit, be careful not to expand connector terminals.
Work Flow
GI
NASU0043S02
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEIA0100E
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU-25
FRONT SUSPENSION
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
PRELIMINARY CHECK
BASIC INSPECTION
1
CHECK ALL TIRES PRESSURES
I Check all tires pressures.
Tire pressure:
210 kPa (2.1 kg/cm2, 30 psi)
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Adjust tire pressure to specified value.
2
CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION
I Check warning lamp activation.
I Does warning lamp activate for 1 second when ignition switch is turned “ON”?
YES or NO
YES
©
Warning lamp turns off: GO TO 3.
NO
©
Check fuse and combination meter. Then repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3
CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect low tire pressure warning control unit connector M156.
2. Check terminals for damage or loose connection.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Repair or replace damaged parts.
4
CHECK TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL
I Check transmitter tool battery.
OK or NG
OK
©
Carry out self-diagnosis.
NG
©
Replace transmitter activation tool battery.
SU-26
=NASU0044
FRONT SUSPENSION
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
MALFUNCTION CODE/SYMPTOM CHART
=NASU0045
Code/Symptom
Malfunction part
Reference
page
GI
MA
15
16
17
18
Front-left tire pressure drops to 200 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2, 28 psi) or less
Front-right tire pressure drops to 200 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2, 28 psi) or less
Rear-right tire pressure drops to 200 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2, 28 psi) or less
Rear-left tire pressure drops to 200 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2, 28 psi) or less
21
22
23
24
Transmitter
Transmitter
Transmitter
Transmitter
no
no
no
no
31
32
33
34
Transmitter
Transmitter
Transmitter
Transmitter
checksum
checksum
checksum
checksum
35
36
37
38
Transmitter
Transmitter
Transmitter
Transmitter
pressure
pressure
pressure
pressure
41
42
43
44
Transmitter
Transmitter
Transmitter
Transmitter
function
function
function
function
45
46
47
48
Transmitter
Transmitter
Transmitter
Transmitter
battery
battery
battery
battery
51
Low tire pressure warning control unit
SU-29
PD
Warning lamp does not come on when
ignition switch is turned on.
Fuse or combination meter
Low tire pressure warning control unit connector or circuit
Low tire pressure warning control unit
SU-30
AX
Warning lamp stays on when ignition
switch is turned on.
Fuse or combination meter
Low tire pressure warning control unit connector or circuit
Low tire pressure warning control unit
SU-31
Warning lamp blinks when ignition
switch is turned on.
Low tire pressure warning control unit harness connector or circuit
Low tire pressure warning control unit
SU-33
BR
Tail lamp blinks when ignition switch is
turned on.
Low tire pressure warning control unit harness connector or circuit
Low tire pressure warning control unit
SU-34
ST
ID registration cannot be operated.
Transmitter
Antenna harness connector or circuit
Antenna
SU-34
RS
Trouble Diagnoses for Self-diagnostic Items
BT
data
data
data
data
(front - left)
(front - right)
(rear - right)
(rear - left)
error
error
error
error
(front - left)
(front - right)
(rear - right)
(rear - left)
EM
LC
SU-27
EC
SU-28
data
data
data
data
error
error
error
error
(front - left)
(front - right)
(rear - right)
(rear - left)
SU-29
code
code
code
code
error
error
error
error
(front - left)
(front - right)
(rear - right)
(rear - left)
SU-28
(front - left)
(front - right)
(rear - right)
(rear - left)
SU-28
voltage
voltage
voltage
voltage
low
low
low
low
INSPECTION 1: TRANSMITTER OR TIRE PRESSURE WARNING CONTROL UNIT
Malfunction Code No. 21, 22, 23 or 24
1
—
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
NASU0046
NASU0046S01
HA
CHECK CONTROL UNIT
I Drive for several minutes. Check all tires’ pressure with CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR ITEM”.
SC
Are all tires’ pressure displayed 0 kPa?
YES
©
GO TO 2.
NO
©
GO TO 3.
EL
IDX
SU-27
FRONT SUSPENSION
Trouble Diagnoses for Self-diagnostic Items (Cont’d)
2
CHECK ANTENNA CONNECTOR
I Check antenna and feeder connector M601 for damage or loose connections.
OK or NG
OK
©
Replace control unit, then GO TO 3.
NG
©
Repair or replace antenna or feeder connector.
3
ID REGISTRATION
I Carry out ID registration of all transmitters.
Is there a tire that cannot register ID?
YES
©
Replace transmitter of the tire, GO TO 5.
NO
©
GO TO 4.
4
VEHICLE DRIVING
I Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for several minutes without stopping. Check all tires’ pressure with CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR ITEM” within 15 minutes after vehicle speed becomes 17 km/h (11 MPH).
Does “DATA MONITOR ITEM” display tire pressure as normal without any warning lamp?
YES
©
INSPECTION END.
NO
©
GO TO 5.
5
ID REGISTRATION AND VEHICLE DRIVING
1. Carry out ID registration of all transmitters.
2. Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for 3 minutes, and then drive the vehicle at any speed for 10 minutes.
Then check all tires’ pressure with CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR ITEM” within 5 minutes.
Does “DATA MONITOR ITEM” display tire pressure as normal without any warning lamp?
YES
©
INSPECTION END.
NG
©
GO TO the inspection applicable to DTC.
INSPECTION 2: TRANSMITTER-1
Malfunction Code No. 31, 32, 33, 34, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47 or 48
1
NASU0056
NASU0056S01
ID REGISTRATION (CORRECTION OF TRANSMITTER LOCATION)
1. Carry out ID registration of all transmitters.
2. Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for 3 minutes, and then drive the vehicle at any speed for 10 minutes.
©
2
GO TO 2.
REPLACE TRANSMITTER
1. Check warning lamp for blink again, replace malfunctioning transmitter.
2. Carry out ID registration of all transmitters.
Can ID registration of all transmitters be completed?
YES
©
GO TO 3.
NO
©
GO TO Inspection 1.
SU-28
FRONT SUSPENSION
Trouble Diagnoses for Self-diagnostic Items (Cont’d)
3
GI
VEHICLE DRIVING
I Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for 3 minutes, and then drive the vehicle at any speed for 10 minutes.
Then check all tires’ pressure with CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR ITEM” within 5 minutes.
MA
Does “DATA MONITOR ITEM” display tire pressure as normal without any warning lamp?
YES
©
INSPECTION END.
NO
©
Replace malfunctioning transmitter, and perform “Step 3” again.
EM
INSPECTION 3: TRANSMITTER-2
Malfunction Code No. 35, 36, 37 or 38
1
NASU0057
LC
NASU0057S01
EC
CHECK ALL TIRES’ PRESSURE
I Check all tires’ pressure.
Tire pressure:
210 kPa (2.1 kg/m2, 30 psi)
FE
Are there any tires’ whose pressure is “64 psi” or more?
YES
©
Adjust tire pressure to specified value.
NO
©
GO TO 2.
CL
MT
2
VEHICLE DRIVING
AT
1. Carry out ID registration of all transmitters.
2. Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for several minutes without stopping. Check all tires’ pressure with
CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR ITEM” within 15 minutes after vehicle speed becomes 17 km/h (11 MPH).
TF
Replace transmitter with new one if “DATA MONITOR ITEM” displays 64 psi or more.
©
Then GO TO 3.
PD
3
ID REGISTRATION AND VEHICLE
1. Carry out ID registration of all transmitters.
2. Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for 3 minutes, and then drive the vehicle at any speed for 10 minutes.
Then check all tires’ pressure with CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR ITEM” within 5 minutes.
AX
Does “DATA MONITOR ITEM” display tire pressure as normal without any warning lamp?
YES
©
INSPECTION END.
NO
©
GO TO the inspection applicable to DTC.
INSPECTION 4: LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING CONTROL UNIT
Malfunction Code No. 51
1
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
BR
NASU0048
ST
NASU0048S01
RS
I Carry out self-diagnosis.
Does warning lamp still activate again?
YES
©
Replace low tire pressure warning control unit.
NO
©
INSPECTION END.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU-29
FRONT SUSPENSION
Trouble Diagnoses for Symptoms
Trouble Diagnoses for Symptoms
INSPECTION 1: WARNING LAMP DOES NOT COME ON WHEN IGNITION SWITCH IS
TURNED ON.
NASU0049
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1
CHECK COMBINATION METER OPERATION
I Check combination meter operation.
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Check combination meter.
2
CHECK WARNING LAMP
1. Disconnect low tire pressure warning control unit connector M156.
2. Apply ground to low tire pressure warning control unit connector M156 terminal 3 (L/Y).
SEIA0232E
Does the warning lamp activate?
OK
©
Replace low tire pressure warning control unit.
NG
©
GO TO 3.
3
CHECK COMBINATION METER CIRCUIT
I Check continuity between low tire pressure warning control unit connector M156 terminal 3 (LY) and combination meter
connector M24 terminal 8 (LY).
3 (LY) - 8 (LY):
Continuity should exist.
SEIA0233E
OK or NG
OK
©
Check combination meter.
NG
©
Check harness for open or short between low tire pressure warning control unit and
combination meter.
SU-30
FRONT SUSPENSION
Trouble Diagnoses for Symptoms (Cont’d)
INSPECTION 2: WARNING LAMP STAYS ON WHEN IGNITION SWITCH IS TURNED ON.
NASU0050
GI
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1
CHECK CONNECTOR
MA
1. Disconnect low tire pressure warning control unit connector M156.
2. Check terminal for damage or loose connections.
OK or NG
EM
LC
OK
©
GO TO 2.
NG
©
Repair or replace damaged parts.
2
EC
CHECK CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect combination meter connector M24 and low tire pressure warning control unit connector M156.
2. Check continuity between tire pressure warning control unit connector M156 terminal 3 (L/Y) and combination meter
connector M24 terminal 8 (L/Y).
3 (L/Y) - 8 (L/Y):
Continuity should exist.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEIA0233E
PD
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 3.
NG
©
Check harness for open or short between low tire pressure warning control unit and
combination meter.
3
AX
CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1
I Check voltage between low tire pressure warning control unit connector M156 terminal 1 (G/R) and ground.
1 (G/R) - Ground:
Battery voltage (Approx. 12V)
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEIA0234E
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 4.
NG
©
Check low tire pressure warning control unit power supply circuit for open or short.
SC
EL
IDX
SU-31
FRONT SUSPENSION
Trouble Diagnoses for Symptoms (Cont’d)
4
CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 2
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between low tire pressure warning control unit connector M156 terminal 2 (W/B) and ground.
2 (W/B) - Ground:
Battery voltage (Approx. 12V)
SEIA0235E
OK or NG
OK
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
Check low tire pressure warning control unit power supply circuit for open or short.
5
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Check continuity between low tire pressure warning control unit connector M156 terminal 11 (B) and ground.
11 (B) - Ground:
Continuity should exist.
SEIA0236E
OK or NG
OK
©
Replace low tire pressure warning control unit.
NG
©
Repair or replace low tire pressure warning control unit ground circuit.
SU-32
FRONT SUSPENSION
Trouble Diagnoses for Symptoms (Cont’d)
INSPECTION 3: WARNING LAMP BLINKS WHEN IGNITION SWITCH IS TURNED ON.
NASU0051
GI
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1
CHECK WARNING LAMP
MA
If warning lamp blinks as below, the system is normal.
I This mode shows transmitter status is in OFF-mode.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEIA0347E
CL
OK or NG
OK
©
Carry out transmitter wake up operation.
NG
©
GO TO 2.
2
MT
AT
CHECK CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect low tire pressure warning control unit connector M156.
2. Check continuity between low tire pressure warning control unit connector M156 terminal 8 (PU/W) and ground.
8 (PU/W) - Ground:
Continuity should not exist.
TF
PD
AX
BR
SEIA0237E
OK or NG
OK
©
Replace low tire pressure warning control unit.
NG
©
Repair or replace harness connector.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU-33
FRONT SUSPENSION
Trouble Diagnoses for Symptoms (Cont’d)
INSPECTION 4: TAIL LAMP BLINKS WHEN IGNITION SWITCH IS TURNED ON.
NASU0052
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect low tire pressure warning control unit connector M156.
2. Check continuity between low tire pressure warning control unit connector M156 terminal 11 (B) and ground.
11 (B) - Ground:
Continuity should exist.
SEIA0236E
OK or NG
OK
©
Replace low tire pressure warning control unit.
NG
©
Repair or replace low tire pressure warning control unit ground circuit.
INSPECTION 5: ID REGISTRATION CANNOT BE COMPLETED.
NASU0053
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1
ID REGISTRATION (ALL)
I Carry out ID registration of all transmitters.
Can ID registration of all transmitters be completed?
YES
©
INSPECTION END.
NO
©
Go To Inspection 1: Transmitter or Low Tire Pressure Warning Control Unit.
Service Data and Specifications (SDS)
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (FRONT)
NASU0016
Suspension type
Independent macpherson strut with coil spring
Strut type
Double-acting hydraulic
Stabilizer bar
Standard equipment
WHEEL ALIGNMENT (UNLADEN*1)
NASU0017
Unit: Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Applied model
All
Minimum
−0°35′ (−0.58°)
Nominal
0°10′ (0.17°)
Maximum
0°55′ (0.92°)
Camber
Left and right difference
45′ (0.75°) or less
Minimum
2°15′ (2.25°)
Nominal
3°00′ (3.00°)
Maximum
3°45′ (3.75°)
Caster
Left and right difference
SU-34
45′ (0.75°) or less
FRONT SUSPENSION
Service Data and Specifications (SDS) (Cont’d)
Applied model
GI
All
Kingpin inclination
Distance (A - B)
Minimum
13°35′ (13.58°)
Nominal
14°20′ (14.33°)
Maximum
15°05′ (15.08°)
Minimum
1 mm (0.04 in)
Nominal
2 mm (0.08 in)
Maximum
3 mm (0.12 in)
Minimum
5′ (0.08°)
Nominal
10′ (0.17°)
Maximum
15′ (0.25°)
Minimum
30°00′ (30.00°)
Nominal
33°00′ (33.00°)
Maximum
34°00′ (34.00°)
Minimum
28°00′ (28.00°)
Nominal
31°00′ (31.00°)
Maximum
32°00′ (32.00°)
MA
EM
LC
Total toe-in
Angle (left plus right)
Inside
Wheel turning angle
EC
FE
CL
Full turn*2
Outside
MT
*1: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
*2: On power steering models, wheel turning force (at circumference of steering wheel) of 98 to 147 N (10 to 15 kg, 22 to 33 lb) with
engine idle.
LOWER BALL JOINT
AT
TF
NASU0018
Swinging force “A”
(Measuring point: cotter pin hole of ball stud)
PD
7.8 - 76.5 N (0.8 - 7.8 kg, 1.8 - 17.2 lb)
Turning torque “B”
0.5 - 4.9 N·m (5 - 50 kg-cm, 4.3 - 43.4 in-lb)
Vertical end play “C”
AX
0 mm (0 in)
WHEELARCH HEIGHT (UNLADEN*)
NASU0019
Unit: mm (in)
BR
ST
RS
BT
SFA746B
2WD
Applied model
HA
4WD
P245/70 R16 tire
P245/65 R17 tire
P255/65 R16 tire
(With over fender)
P245/70 R16 tire
P245/65 R17 tire
P255/65 R16 tire
(With over fender)
Front (Hf)
840 (33.07)
840 (33.07)
837 (32.95)
824 (32.44)
Rear (Hr)
867 (34.13)
817 (32.17)
867 (34.13)
817 (32.17)
SC
EL
*: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
IDX
SU-35
FRONT SUSPENSION
Service Data and Specifications (SDS) (Cont’d)
WHEEL RUNOUT AVERAGE*
NASU0020
Unit: mm (in)
Wheel type
Aluminum
Steel
Radial runout limit
0.3 (0.012)
0.8 (0.031)
Lateral runout limit
0.3 (0.012)
0.8 (0.031)
*: Wheel runout average = (Outside runout value + Inside runout value) x 0.5
SU-36
REAR SUSPENSION
Precautions
Precautions
GI
PRECAUTIONS
I
I
I
SBR686C
I
NASU0021
When installing rubber parts, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition* with tires on ground.
*Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack,
hand tools and mats in designated positions.
Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake
tubes.
After installing removed suspension parts, check wheel
alignment and adjust if necessary.
Always torque brake lines when installing.
Preparation
COMMERCIAL SERVICE TOOLS
Tool name
NASU0023
Description
1 Flare nut crowfoot
2 Torque wrench
Removing and installing each brake piping
a: 10 mm (0.39 in)
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
NT360
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Troubleshooting
AT
NASU0036
Refer to “Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) Troubleshooting”,
“FRONT SUSPENSION”, SU-4.
TF
PD
AX
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU-37
REAR SUSPENSION
Components
Components
NASU0024
SRA880A
On-vehicle Service
REAR SUSPENSION PARTS
NASU0025
Check rear axle and rear suspension parts for excessive play, wear
and damage.
1. Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play.
2. Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque.
Tightening torque: Refer to “Coil Spring and Shock
Absorber”, SU-40.
SMA525A
3.
4.
5.
Check shock absorber for oil leakage and other damage.
Check shock absorber bushing for excessive wear and other
damage.
Check wheelarch height. Refer to “On-vehicle Service”,
“FRONT SUSPENSION”, SU-7.
SRA754A
SU-38
REAR SUSPENSION
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
NASU0026
1.
SBR686C
Support axle and suspension components with a suitable jack
and block.
2. Disconnect brake hydraulic line and parking brake cables at
back plates.
CAUTION:
I Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake
tubes.
I Before removing the rear suspension assembly, disconnect the ABS wheel sensor from the assembly. Then move
it away from the rear suspension assembly. Failure to do
so may result in damage to the sensor wires and the sensor becoming inoperative.
3. Remove stabilizer bar from body.
4. Remove upper links and lower links from body.
5. Remove panhard rod from body.
6. Disconnect rear end of propeller shaft. Refer to PD-8,
“Removal and Installation”.
7. Remove upper end nuts of shock absorber.
GI
Final tightening for rubber parts requires to be carried out
under unladen condition with tires on ground.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
SRA935
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU-39
REAR SUSPENSION
Coil Spring and Shock Absorber
Coil Spring and Shock Absorber
COMPONENTS
NASU0027
SSU054
SU-40
REAR SUSPENSION
Coil Spring and Shock Absorber (Cont’d)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NASU0028
Refer to “Removal and Installation”, “REAR SUSPENSION”,
SU-39.
When installing coil spring, pay attention to its direction.
Be sure spring rubber seat is not twisted and has not slipped
off when installing coil spring.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SSU051
INSPECTION
I
I
I
EC
NASU0029
Check coil spring for yield, deformation and cracks.
Check shock absorber for oil leakage, cracks and deformation.
Check all rubber parts for wear, cracks and deformation.
Replace if necessary.
FE
CL
MT
AT
Upper Link, Lower Link and Panhard Rod
INSPECTION
NASU0030
Check for cracks, distortion and other damage. Replace if
necessary.
TF
PD
AX
BUSHING REPLACEMENT
NASU0031
Check for cracks and other damage. Replace with suitable tool if
necessary.
I Remove bushing with suitable tool.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SRA898
When installing bushing, apply a coat of 1% soapy water to
outer wall of bushing.
Always install new bushing.
Do not tap end face of bushing directly with a hammer.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SRA900
SU-41
REAR SUSPENSION
Upper Link, Lower Link and Panhard Rod (Cont’d)
INSTALLATION
NASU0032
When installing each link, pay attention to direction of nuts
and bolts.
When installing each rubber part, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition with tires on ground.
Stabilizer Bar
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NASU0033
I
When removing and installing stabilizer bar, fix portion A.
I
Install stabilizer bar with ball joint socket properly placed.
SRA766A
SFA449BA
Low Tire Pressure Warning System
NASU0055
Refer to “Tire Pressure Warning System”, “FRONT SUSPENSION”
SU-42
REAR SUSPENSION
Service Data and Specifications (SDS)
Service Data and Specifications (SDS)
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (REAR)
GI
NASU0034
Suspension type
5-link type rigid with coil spring
Shock absorber type
MA
Double-acting hydraulic
Stabilizer
Standard equipment
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
AX
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU-43
NOTES
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SECTION
AT
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CONTENTS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX ....................................4
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC ...........................4
PRECAUTIONS ...............................................................6
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) ″AIR BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER″ ......................................................6
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD)
System of A/T and Engine...........................................6
Precautions ..................................................................6
Service Notice or Precautions .....................................8
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis.....................9
PREPARATION .............................................................10
Special Service Tools ................................................10
OVERALL SYSTEM ......................................................12
A/T Electrical Parts Location .....................................12
Circuit Diagram ..........................................................13
Cross-sectional View .................................................14
Hydraulic Control Circuit............................................15
Shift Mechanism ........................................................16
Control System ..........................................................25
Control Mechanism....................................................26
Control Valve .............................................................31
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION ...............................................................33
Introduction ................................................................33
OBD-II Function for A/T System................................33
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ..............33
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ....................33
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)..............................37
CONSULT-II ...............................................................37
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II..............48
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION..................55
Introduction ................................................................55
Work Flow..................................................................59
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION ...........61
A/T Fluid Check .........................................................61
Stall Test ....................................................................61
Line Pressure Test.....................................................64
Road Test...................................................................65
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL
DESCRIPTION ...............................................................83
Symptom Chart..........................................................83
TCM Terminals and Reference Value........................95
CAN COMMUNICATION ...............................................98
System Description....................................................98
CAN Communication Unit..........................................98
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY........102
Wiring Diagram - AT - MAIN....................................102
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................103
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ...105
Description ...............................................................105
Wiring Diagram - AT - PNP/SW...............................107
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................108
Component Inspection.............................................109
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CIRCUIT ....................................................................... 111
Description ............................................................... 111
Wiring Diagram - AT - FTS ......................................113
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................114
Component Inspection.............................................116
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR.A/T
(REVOLUTION SENSOR) ...........................................117
Description ...............................................................117
Wiring Diagram - AT - VSSA/T ................................119
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................120
Component Inspection.............................................121
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL .......................122
Description ...............................................................122
Wiring Diagram - AT - ENGSS ................................123
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................124
DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR
POSITION ....................................................................126
Description ...............................................................126
Wiring Diagram - AT - 1ST ......................................129
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................130
Component Inspection.............................................131
DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR
POSITION ....................................................................132
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
CONTENTS
Description ...............................................................132
Wiring Diagram - AT - 2ND......................................135
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................136
Component Inspection.............................................137
DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR
POSITION ....................................................................138
Description ...............................................................138
Wiring Diagram - AT - 3RD......................................141
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................142
Component Inspection.............................................143
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR
POSITION ....................................................................144
Description ...............................................................144
Wiring Diagram - AT - 4TH ......................................148
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................149
Component Inspection.............................................153
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH
SOLENOID VALVE......................................................154
Description ...............................................................154
Wiring Diagram - AT - TCV......................................156
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................157
Component Inspection.............................................158
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION ......159
Description ...............................................................159
Wiring Diagram - AT - TCCSIG ...............................162
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................163
Component Inspection.............................................167
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE ...168
Description ...............................................................168
Wiring Diagram - AT - LPSV....................................170
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................171
Component Inspection.............................................173
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A ..................174
Description ...............................................................174
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/A ..................................175
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................176
Component Inspection.............................................177
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B ..................178
Description ...............................................................178
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/B ..................................179
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................180
Component Inspection.............................................181
DTC P1705 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION
SENSOR (THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR).............182
Description ...............................................................182
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................183
Possible Cause........................................................183
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation
Procedure ................................................................184
Wiring Diagram - AT - TPS......................................185
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................186
(Cont’d)
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE..........................................................................188
Description ...............................................................188
Wiring Diagram - AT - OVRCSV..............................190
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................191
Component Inspection.............................................192
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP
SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) ....193
Description ...............................................................193
Wiring Diagram - AT - BA/FTS ................................195
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................196
Component Inspection.............................................199
DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR.MTR .......................200
Description ...............................................................200
Wiring Diagram - AT - VSSMTR..............................202
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................203
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE ...............205
Description ...............................................................205
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................205
Possible Cause........................................................205
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation
Procedure ................................................................206
Wiring Diagram - AT - CAN .....................................207
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................208
DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR ....................209
Description ...............................................................209
Wiring Diagram - AT - TRSA/T ................................211
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................212
Component Inspection.............................................213
DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT
(ROM)...........................................................................214
Description ...............................................................214
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................215
DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM) .............................216
Description ...............................................................216
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................217
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS ...............218
Wiring Diagram - AT - NONDTC .............................218
O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On........221
Engine Cannot Be Started In ″P″ and ″N″
Position ....................................................................223
In ″P″ Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or
Backward When Pushed .........................................224
In ″N″ Position, Vehicle Moves................................225
Large Shock. ″N″ -> ″R″ Position............................227
Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In ″R″
Position ....................................................................229
Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In ″D″, ″2″ Or
″1″ Position ..............................................................232
Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 .......................235
A/T Does Not Shift: D1 -> D2 Or Does Not
Kickdown: D4 -> D2..................................................238
AT-2
CONTENTS
A/T Does Not Shift: D2 -> D3...................................241
A/T Does Not Shift: D3 -> D4...................................244
A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up ...............................247
A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition ....................249
Lock-up Is Not Released .........................................251
Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light
Braking D4 -> D3).....................................................252
Vehicle Does Not Start From D1 .............................254
A/T Does Not Shift: D4 -> D3, When Overdrive
Control Switch ″ON″ -> ″OFF″ ................................255
A/T Does Not Shift: D3 -> 22, When Selector
Lever ″D″ -> ″2″ Position.........................................256
A/T Does Not Shift: 22 -> 11, When Selector
Lever ″2″ -> ″1″ Position .........................................257
Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake ......258
TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP,
Overdrive Control and Accelerator Pedal Position
Sensor Circuit Checks)............................................258
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM.........................................265
Description ...............................................................265
Wiring Diagram - SHIFT -........................................266
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................267
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE ..........................................270
Components.............................................................270
Removal...................................................................270
Installation................................................................271
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ..............................................272
Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators.............272
Revolution Sensor Replacement .............................273
Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement................273
Rear Oil Seal Replacement.....................................273
Rear Oil Seal and Companion Flange Oil Seal
Replacement............................................................274
Parking Components Inspection..............................274
Park/Neutral Position Switch Adjustment ................275
Manual Control Linkage Adjustment........................275
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...............................276
Removal...................................................................276
Installation................................................................277
OVERHAUL .................................................................281
(Cont’d)
Components.............................................................281
Oil Channel ..............................................................284
Locations of Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers
and Snap Rings .......................................................285
DISASSEMBLY............................................................286
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS .........................297
Oil Pump ..................................................................297
Control Valve Assembly...........................................301
Control Valve Upper Body .......................................307
Control Valve Lower Body .......................................312
Reverse Clutch ........................................................314
High Clutch ..............................................................317
Forward and Overrun Clutches ...............................320
Low & Reverse Brake..............................................324
Forward Clutch Drum Assembly..............................328
Rear Internal Gear and Forward Clutch Hub ..........330
Band Servo Piston Assembly ..................................333
Parking Pawl Components ......................................337
ASSEMBLY..................................................................339
Assembly (1)............................................................339
Adjustment ...............................................................347
Assembly (2)............................................................349
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .......356
General Specifications.............................................356
Shift Schedule..........................................................356
Stall Revolution........................................................356
Line Pressure...........................................................356
Return Springs.........................................................357
Accumulator O-ring..................................................358
Clutches and Brakes ...............................................358
Oil Pump and Low One-way Clutch ........................360
Total End Play..........................................................360
Reverse Clutch Drum End Play ..............................361
Removal and Installation .........................................361
Shift Solenoid Valves...............................................361
Solenoid Valves .......................................................361
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor.................................361
Turbine Revolution Sensor ......................................361
Revolution Sensor ...................................................362
Dropping Resistor ....................................................362
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-3
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC
NAAT0179
ALPHABETICAL INDEX FOR DTC
NAAT0179S01
DTC
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
CONSULT-II
GST*1
Reference page
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
P0731
AT-126
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
P0732
AT-132
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
P0733
AT-138
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
P0734
AT-144
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
P0744
AT-159
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
P0710
AT-111
ENGINE SPEED SIG
P0725
AT-122
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
P0745
AT-168
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC
P1760
AT-188
PNP SW/CIRC
P0705
AT-105
SFT SOL A/CIRC*2
P0750
AT-174
SFT SOL B/CIRC*2
P0755
AT-178
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC
P0740
AT-154
TP SEN/CIRC A/T*2
P1705
AT-182
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*3
P0720
AT-117
*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
*2: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*3: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at
the same time.
AT-4
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)
P NO. INDEX FOR DTC
=NAAT0179S02
GI
DTC
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
CONSULT-II
GST*1
Reference page
MA
EM
P0705
PNP SW/CIRC
AT-105
P0710
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
AT-111
P0720
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*3
AT-117
P0725
ENGINE SPEED SIG
AT-122
P0731
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
AT-126
P0732
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
AT-132
P0733
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
AT-138
P0734
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
AT-144
P0740
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC
AT-154
P0744
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
AT-159
P0745
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
AT-168
P0750
SFT SOL A/CIRC*2
AT-174
P0755
SFT SOL B/CIRC*2
AT-178
P1705
TP SEN/CIRC A/T*2
AT-182
P1760
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC
AT-188
*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
*2: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*3: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at
the same time.
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-5
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER”
NAAT0001
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL R50 is as follows:
쐌 For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
쐌 For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of side air bag module (located in the outer side of front seat),
side curtain air bag module (locating in the headliner side of front and rear seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring harness, warning lamp (one
of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
WARNING:
쐌 To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
쐌 Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.
쐌 Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connector (and by yellow harness protector or yellow insulation tape before the harness connectors).
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD)
System of A/T and Engine
NAAT0002
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
쐌 Be sure to turn the ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect the negative battery terminal before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc.
will cause the MIL to light up.
쐌 Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
쐌 Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit.
쐌 Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system,
etc.
쐌 Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and
ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precautions
쐌
NAAT0003
Before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness
connector, turn ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect
negative battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage
the TCM. Because battery voltage is applied to TCM even
if ignition switch is turned “OFF”.
SEF289H
AT-6
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions (Cont’d)
쐌
When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from TCM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF291H
쐌
Before replacing TCM, perform TCM input/output signal
inspection and make sure whether TCM functions properly or not. (Refer to AT-95.)
EC
FE
CL
MT
MEF040DA
쐌
After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform
“DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” if the repair is completed.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT964I
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transmission. It is important to prevent the internal
parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common
shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere with the operation of the transmission.
Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper
assembly.
All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose,
non-flammable solvent before inspection or reassembly.
Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the
transmission is disassembled.
It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they
are indicated.
The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme
care when parts are removed and serviced. Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper
assembly. Care will also prevent springs and small parts from
becoming scattered or lost.
Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along
bores in valve body under their own weight.
AT-7
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions (Cont’d)
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all
parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and seals, or
hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not
use grease.
Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings,
seals and gaskets when assembling.
Replace ATF cooler if excessive foreign material is found in oil
pan or clogging strainer. Refer to “ATF COOLER SERVICE”,
AT-9.
After overhaul, refill the transmission with new ATF.
When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is
drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque converter and ATF
cooling system.
Always follow the procedures when changing A/T fluid. Refer
to MA-22, “Changing A/T Fluid”.
Service Notice or Precautions
FAIL-SAFE
NAAT0004
NAAT0004S01
The TCM has an electronic Fail-Safe (limp home mode). This allows the vehicle to be driven even if a major
electrical input/output device circuit is damaged.
Under Fail-Safe, the vehicle always runs in third gear, even with a shift lever position of “1”, “2” or “D”. The
customer may complain of sluggish or poor acceleration.
When the ignition key is turned “ON” following Fail-Safe operation, O/D OFF indicator lamp blinks for about
8 seconds. (For “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, refer to AT-48.)
The blinking of the O/D OFF indicator lamp for about 8 seconds will appear only once and be cleared. The
customer may resume normal driving conditions.
Always follow the “WORK FLOW” (Refer to AT-59).
The SELF-DIAGNOSIS results will be as follows:
The first SELF-DIAGNOSIS will indicate damage to the vehicle speed sensor or the revolution sensor.
During the next SELF-DIAGNOSIS, performed after checking the sensor, no damages will be indicated.
TORQUE CONVERTER SERVICE
NAAT0004S04
The torque converter should be replaced under any of the following conditions:
쐌 External leaks in the hub weld area.
쐌 Converter hub is scored or damaged.
쐌 Converter pilot is broken, damaged or fits poorly into crankshaft.
쐌 Steel particles are found after flushing the cooler and cooler lines.
쐌 Pump is damaged or steel particles are found in the converter.
쐌 Vehicle has TCC shudder and/or no TCC apply. Replace only after all hydraulic and electrical diagnoses
have been made. (Converter clutch material may be glazed.)
쐌 Converter is contaminated with engine coolant containing antifreeze.
쐌 Internal failure of stator roller clutch.
쐌 Heavy clutch debris due to overheating (blue converter).
쐌 Steel particles or clutch lining material found in fluid filter or on magnet when no internal parts in unit are
worn or damaged — indicates that lining material came from converter.
The torque converter should not be replaced if:
쐌 The fluid has an odor, is discolored, and there is no evidence of metal or clutch facing particles.
쐌 The threads in one or more of the converter bolt holes are damaged.
AT-8
PRECAUTIONS
Service Notice or Precautions (Cont’d)
쐌
쐌
Transmission failure did not display evidence of damaged or worn internal parts, steel particles or clutch
plate lining material in unit and inside the fluid filter.
Vehicle has been exposed to high mileage (only). The exception may be where the torque converter clutch
dampener plate lining has seen excess wear by vehicles operated in heavy and/or constant traffic, such
as taxi, delivery or police use.
ATF COOLER SERVICE
NAAT0004S02
Replace ATF cooler if excessive foreign material is found in oil pan or clogging strainer.
Replace radiator lower tank (which includes ATF cooler) with a new one and flush cooler line using cleaning
solvent and compressed air. Refer to LC-21, “REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION”.
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS
쐌
쐌
쐌
−
−
−
*:
쐌
GI
MA
EM
LC
NAAT0004S03
A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through
the blinking pattern of the O/D OFF indicator or the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Refer to the table on
AT-38 for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result.
The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM
memories.
Always perform the procedure “HOW TO ERASE DTC” on AT-35 to complete the repair and avoid
unnecessary blinking of the MIL.
The following self-diagnostic items can be detected using ECM self-diagnostic results mode* only when
the O/D OFF indicator lamp does not indicate any malfunctions.
PNP switch
A/T 1st, 2nd, 3rd, or 4th gear function
A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up)
For details of OBD-II, refer to EC-85, “Introduction”.
Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use the new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to EL-7, “Description”.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
쐌 GI-11, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”.
쐌 EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” for power distribution circuit.
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
쐌 GI-35, “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”.
쐌 GI-24, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”.
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
NAAT0005
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-9
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
Special Service Tools
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
ST2505S001
(J34301-C)
Oil pressure gauge set
1 ST25051001
(
—
)
Oil pressure gauge
2 ST25052000
(
—
)
Hose
3 ST25053000
(
—
)
Joint pipe
4 ST25054000
(
—
)
Adapter
5 ST25055000
(
—
)
Adapter
Description
Measuring line pressure
NT097
ST07870000
(J37068)
Transmission case stand
Disassembling and assembling A/T
a: 182 mm (7.17 in)
b: 282 mm (11.10 in)
c: 230 mm (9.06 in)
d: 100 mm (3.94 in)
NT421
KV31102100
(J37065)
Torque converter oneway clutch check tool
Checking one-way clutch in torque converter
NT098
ST25850000
(J25721-A)
Sliding hammer
Removing oil pump assembly
a: 179 mm (7.05 in)
b: 70 mm (2.76 in)
c: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia.
d: M12 x 1.75P
NT422
KV31102400
(J34285 and J34285-87)
Clutch spring compressor
Removing and installing clutch return springs
a: 320 mm (12.60 in)
b: 174 mm (6.85 in)
NT423
AT-10
NAAT0006
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools (Cont’d)
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
GI
Description
ST33200000
(J26082)
Drift
Installing oil pump housing oil seal Installing rear
oil seal
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 44.5 mm (1.752 in) dia.
MA
EM
LC
NT091
(J34291)
Shim setting gauge set
Selecting oil pump cover bearing race and oil
pump thrust washer
EC
FE
NT101
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-11
OVERALL SYSTEM
A/T Electrical Parts Location
A/T Electrical Parts Location
NAAT0007
SAT681K
AT-12
OVERALL SYSTEM
Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
NAAT0008
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT310B
AT-13
IDX
OVERALL SYSTEM
Cross-sectional View
Cross-sectional View
NAAT0010
SAT150K
AT-14
OVERALL SYSTEM
Hydraulic Control Circuit
Hydraulic Control Circuit
NAAT0011
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SAT706K
AT-15
IDX
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism
Shift Mechanism
NAAT0012
The automatic transmission uses compact, dual planetary gear systems to improve power-transmission
efficiency, simplify construction and reduce weight.
It also employs an optimum shift control and superwide gear ratios. They improve starting performance and
acceleration during medium and high-speed operation.
Two one-way clutches are also employed: one is used for the forward clutch and the other for the low clutch.
These one-way clutches, combined with four accumulators, reduce shifting shock to a minimum.
CONSTRUCTION
NAAT0012S01
SAT509I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Torque converter clutch piston
Torque converter
Oil pump
Input shaft
Brake band
Reverse clutch
High clutch
Front pinion gear
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Front sun gear
Front internal gear
Front planetary carrier
Rear sun gear
Rear pinion gear
Rear internal gear
Rear planetary carrier
Forward clutch
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
Forward one-way clutch
Overrun clutch
Low one-way clutch
Low & reverse brake
Parking pawl
Parking gear
Output shaft
FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE
Clutch and brake components
NAAT0012S02
Abbr.
Function
Reverse clutch 6
R/C
To transmit input power to front sun gear 9.
High clutch 7
H/C
To transmit input power to front planetary carrier 11.
Forward clutch 16
F/C
To connect front planetary carrier 11 with forward one-way
clutch 17.
Overrun clutch 18
O/C
To connect front planetary carrier 11 with rear internal gear 14.
Brake band 5
B/B
To lock front sun gear 9.
Forward one-way clutch 17
F/O.C
When forward clutch 16 is engaged, to stop rear internal gear
14 from rotating in opposite direction against engine revolution.
Low one-way clutch 19
L/O.C
To stop front planetary carrier 11 from rotating in opposite direction against engine revolution.
Low & reverse brake 20
L & R/B
To lock front planetary carrier 11.
AT-16
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
CLUTCH AND BAND CHART
Reverse
Shift position
clutch
High
clutch
Forward
clutch
NAAT0012S03
Overrun
clutch
Band servo
2nd
apply
3rd
release
4th
apply
Forward
one
-way
clutch
Low
oneway
clutch
Low &
reverse Lock-up
brake
Remarks
GI
MA
EM
PARK
POSITION
P
쎻
R
REVERSE
POSITION
쎻
NEUTRAL
POSITION
N
1st
쎻
*1D
2nd
쎻
*1A
쎻
*1A
*2C
C
*3C
C
D*4
3rd
쎻
쎻
4th
쎻
C
1st
쎻
D
2nd
쎻
*1A
1st
쎻
쎻
2nd
쎻
쎻
2
B
B
B
B
쎻
Automatic
shift
1k2
B
B
B
1
쎻
EC
FE
CL
쎻
B
쎻
*1쎻
Automatic
shift
1k2k3
k4
LC
B
쎻
Locks (held
stationary) in
1st speed
1g2
*1: Operates when overdrive control switch is being set in “OFF” position.
*2: Oil pressure is applied to both 2nd “apply” side and 3rd “release” side of band servo piston. However, brake band does not contract
because oil pressure area on the “release” side is greater than that on the “apply” side.
*3: Oil pressure is applied to 4th “apply” side in condition *2 above, and brake band contracts.
*4: A/T will not shift to 4th when overdrive control switch is set in “OFF” position.
쎻 : Operates.
A: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, activating engine brake.
B: Operates during “progressive” acceleration.
C: Operates but does not affect power transmission.
D: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, but does not affect engine brake.
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-17
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
POWER TRANSMISSION
“N” and “P” Positions
쐌
쐌
=NAAT0012S04
NAAT0012S0401
“N” position
No control members operate. Power from the input shaft is not transmitted to the output shaft since the
clutch does not operate.
“P” position
Similar to the “N” position, no control members operate. The parking pawl interconnected with the select
lever engages with the parking gear to mechanically hold the output shaft so that the power train is locked.
SAT039J
AT-18
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
“11” Position
=NAAT0012S0406
Forward clutch
Forward one-way clutch
Overrun clutch
Low and reverse brake
As overrun clutch engages, rear internal gear is locked by the operation of low and
reverse brake.
This is different from that of D1 and 21.
Engine brake
Overrun clutch always engages, therefore engine brake can be obtained when decelerating.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT100JC
SC
EL
IDX
AT-19
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
“D1” and “21” Positions
=NAAT0012S0402
Forward one-way clutch
Forward clutch
Low one-way clutch
Rear internal gear is locked to rotate counterclockwise because of the functioning of
these three clutches. (Start-up at D1)
Overrun clutch
engagement conditions
(Engine brake)
D1: Overdrive control switch in “OFF”
Throttle opening less than 3/16
21: Throttle opening less than 3/16
At D1 and 21 positions, engine brake is not activated due to free turning of low one-way
clutch.
SAT096JC
AT-20
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
“D2”, “22” and “12” Positions
=NAAT0012S0403
Forward clutch
Forward one-way clutch
Brake band
Rear sun gear drives rear planetary carrier and combined front internal gear. Front internal gear now rotates around front sun gear accompanying front planetary carrier.
As front planetary carrier transfers the power to rear internal gear through forward clutch
and forward one-way clutch, this rotation of rear internal gear increases the speed of
rear planetary carrier compared with that of the 1st speed.
Overrun clutch
engagement conditions
D2: Overdrive control switch in “OFF”
Throttle opening less than 3/16
22: Throttle opening less than 3/16
12: Always engaged
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
SAT097JC
EL
IDX
AT-21
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
“D3” Position
=NAAT0012S0404
High clutch
Forward clutch
Forward one-way clutch
Input power is transmitted to front planetary carrier through high clutch. And front planetary carrier is connected to rear internal gear by operation of forward clutch and forward
one-way clutch.
This rear internal gear rotation and another input (the rear sun gear) accompany rear
planetary carrier to turn at the same speed.
Overrun clutch
engagement conditions
D3: Overdrive control switch in “OFF”
Throttle opening less than 3/16
SAT098JB
AT-22
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
“D4” (OD) Position
=NAAT0012S0405
High clutch
Brake band
Forward clutch
(Does not affect power transmission)
Input power is transmitted to front carrier through high clutch.
This front planetary carrier turns around the sun gear which is fixed by brake band and
makes front internal gear (output) turn faster.
Engine brake
At D4 position, there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line and engine
brake can be obtained when decelerating.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT099JB
SC
EL
IDX
AT-23
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
“R” Position
=NAAT0012S0407
Reverse clutch
Low and reverse brake
Front planetary carrier is stationary because of the operation of low and reverse brake.
Input power is transmitted to front sun gear through reverse clutch, which drives front
internal gear in the opposite direction.
Engine brake
As there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line, engine brake can be
obtained when decelerating.
SAT101JB
AT-24
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control System
Control System
=NAAT0013
OUTLINE
NAAT0013S01
The automatic transmission senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always
controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
SENSORS (or SIGNALS)
PNP switch
Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
Closed throttle position signal
Wide open throttle position signal
Engine speed signal
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Revolution sensor
Vehicle speed sensor
Overdrive control switch signal
Stop lamp switch signal
Turbine revolution sensor
GI
TCM
왘
Shift control
Line pressure control
Lock-up control
Overrun clutch control
Timing control
Fail-safe control
Self-diagnosis
CONSULT-II communication
line
Duet-EU control
ACTUATORS
왘
MA
EM
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
Overrun clutch solenoid valve
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Line pressure solenoid valve
O/D OFF indicator lamp
T/F control unit
LC
EC
FE
CL
CONTROL SYSTEM
NAAT0013S02
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT698K
SC
EL
IDX
AT-25
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control System (Cont’d)
TCM FUNCTION
=NAAT0013S03
The function of the TCM is to:
쐌 Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors.
쐌 Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation.
쐌 Send required output signals to the respective solenoids.
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL OF TCM
NAAT0013S04
Sensors and solenoid valves
Input
Output
Function
PNP switch
Detects select lever position and sends a signal to TCM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
Detects accelerator pedal position sensor as throttle position signal and
sends a signal from ECM to TCM.
Closed throttle position signal
Detects throttle valve’s fully-closed position and sends a signal from ECM to
TCM.
Wide open throttle position signal
Detects a throttle valve position of greater than 1/2 of full throttle and sends
a signal from ECM to TCM.
Engine speed signal
From ECM.
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Detects transmission fluid temperature and sends a signal to TCM.
Revolution sensor
Detects output shaft rpm and sends a signal to TCM.
Vehicle speed signal
Used as an auxiliary vehicle speed signal. Sends a signal when revolution
sensor (installed on transmission) malfunctions.
Overdrive control switch
Sends a signal, which prohibits a shift to “D4” (overdrive) position, from unified meter control unit to the TCM.
ASCD operation signal
Sends the cruise signal and “D4” (overdrive) cancellation signal from ECM
to TCM.
Turbine revolution sensor
Sends an input shaft revolution signal.
Stop lamp switch
Sends the lock-up release signal from unified meter control unit to the TCM
at time of D4 (lock-up).
Shift solenoid valve A/B
Selects shifting point suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent
from TCM.
Line pressure solenoid valve
Regulates (or decreases) line pressure suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM.
Torque converter clutch solenoid
valve
Regulates (or decreases) lock-up pressure suited to driving conditions in
relation to a signal sent from TCM.
Overrun clutch solenoid valve
Controls an “engine brake” effect suited to driving conditions in relation to a
signal sent from TCM.
O/D OFF indicator lamp
Shows TCM faults, when A/T control components malfunction.
Control Mechanism
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL
NAAT0180
NAAT0180S01
TCM has the various line pressure control characteristics to meet
the driving conditions.
An ON-OFF duty signal is sent to the line pressure solenoid valve
based on TCM characteristics.
Hydraulic pressure on the clutch and brake is electronically controlled through the line pressure solenoid valve to accommodate
engine torque. This results in smooth shift operation.
AT-26
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control Mechanism (Cont’d)
Normal Control
NAAT0180S0101
The line pressure to throttle opening characteristics is set for suitable clutch operation.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT003J
Back-up Control (Engine brake)
EC
NAAT0180S0102
If the selector lever is shifted to “2” position while driving in D4 (OD)
or D3, great driving force is applied to the clutch inside the transmission. Clutch operating pressure (line pressure) must be
increased to deal with this driving force.
FE
CL
MT
SAT004J
During Shift Change
NAAT0180S0103
The line pressure is temporarily reduced corresponding to a
change in engine torque when shifting gears (that is, when the shift
solenoid valve is switched for clutch operation) to reduce shifting
shock.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT005J
At Low Fluid Temperature
쐌
NAAT0180S0104
Fluid viscosity and frictional characteristics of the clutch facing
change with fluid temperature. Clutch engaging or band-contacting pressure is compensated for, according to fluid
temperature, to stabilize shifting quality.
BR
ST
RS
BT
쐌
The line pressure is reduced below 60°C (140°F) to prevent
shifting shock due to low viscosity of automatic transmission
fluid when temperature is low.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT006J
AT-27
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control Mechanism (Cont’d)
쐌
Line pressure is increased to a maximum irrespective of the
throttle opening when fluid temperature drops to −10°C (14°F).
This pressure rise is adopted to prevent a delay in clutch and
brake operation due to extreme drop of fluid viscosity at low
temperature.
SAT007J
SHIFT CONTROL
NAAT0180S02
The shift is regulated entirely by electronic control to accommodate
vehicle speed and varying engine operations. This is accomplished
by electrical signals transmitted by the revolution sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). This results
in improved acceleration performance and fuel economy.
Control of Shift Solenoid Valves A and B
NAAT0180S0201
The TCM activates shift solenoid valves A and B according to signals from the accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position
sensor) and revolution sensor to select the optimum gear position
on the basis of the shift schedule memorized in the TCM.
The shift solenoid valve performs simple ON-OFF operation. When
set to “ON”, the drain circuit closes and pilot pressure is applied to
the shift valve.
[Relation between shift solenoid valves A and B and gear positions]
SAT008J
Gear position
Shift solenoid valve
D1, 21, 11
D2, 22, 12
D3
D4 (OD)
N-P
A
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
B
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
Control of Shift Valves A and B
NAAT0180S0202
SAT047J
AT-28
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control Mechanism (Cont’d)
Pilot pressure generated by the operation of shift solenoid valves
A and B is applied to the end face of shift valves A and B.
The drawing above shows the operation of shift valve B. When the
shift solenoid valve is “ON”, pilot pressure applied to the end face
of the shift valve overcomes spring force, moving the valve upward.
GI
LOCK-UP CONTROL
EM
NAAT0180S03
The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is locked
to eliminate torque converter slip to increase power transmission
efficiency. The solenoid valve is controlled by an ON-OFF duty
signal sent from the TCM. The signal is converted to oil pressure
signal which controls the torque converter clutch piston.
NAAT0180S0301
When vehicle is driven in 4th gear position, vehicle speed and
throttle opening are detected. If the detected values fall within the
lock-up zone memorized in the TCM, lock-up is performed.
ON
Selector lever
Gear position
Vehicle speed sensor
Accelerator pedal position sensor
(Throttle position sensor)
Closed throttle position switch
A/T fluid temperature sensor
LC
EC
Conditions for Lock-up Operation
Overdrive control switch
MA
OFF
FE
CL
“D” position
D4
D3
MT
More than set value
Less than set opening
OFF
More than 40°C (104°F)
TF
PD
AX
SU
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Control
NAAT0180S0302
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the
TCM. The plunger closes the drain circuit during the “OFF” period,
and opens the circuit during the “ON” period. If the percentage of
OFF-time increases in one cycle, the pilot pressure drain time is
reduced and pilot pressure remains high.
The torque converter clutch piston is designed to slip to adjust the
ratio of ON-OFF, thereby reducing lock-up shock.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT010J
OFF-time INCREASING
"
Amount of drain DECREASING
"
Pilot pressure HIGH
"
Lock-up RELEASING
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT011J
AT-29
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control Mechanism (Cont’d)
Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve OperationNAAT0180S0303
SAT048J
Lock-up Released
The OFF-duration of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is
long, and pilot pressure is high. The pilot pressure pushes the end
face of the torque converter clutch control valve in combination with
spring force to move the valve to the left. As a result, converter
pressure is applied to chamber A (torque converter clutch piston
release side). Accordingly, the torque converter clutch piston
remains unlocked.
Lock-up Applied
When the OFF-duration of the torque converter clutch solenoid
valve is short, pilot pressure drains and becomes low. Accordingly,
the control valve moves to the right by the pilot pressure of the
other circuit and converter pressure. As a result, converter pressure is applied to chamber B, keeping the torque converter clutch
piston applied.
Also smooth lock-up is provided by transient application and
release of the lock-up.
OVERRUN CLUTCH CONTROL (ENGINE BRAKE
CONTROL)
NAAT0180S04
Forward one-way clutch is used to reduce shifting shocks in downshifting operations. This clutch transmits engine torque to the
wheels. However, drive force from the wheels is not transmitted to
the engine because the one-way clutch rotates idle. This means the
engine brake is not effective.
The overrun clutch operates when the engine brake is needed.
Overrun Clutch Operating Conditions
Gear position
Throttle opening
“D” position
D1, D2, D3 gear position
Less than 3/16
“2” position
21, 22 gear position
“1” position
11, 12 gear position
NAAT0180S0401
At any position
SAT715K
AT-30
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control Mechanism (Cont’d)
Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve Control
NAAT0180S0402
The overrun clutch solenoid valve is operated by an ON-OFF signal transmitted by the TCM to provide overrun clutch control
(engine brake control).
When this solenoid valve is “ON”, the pilot pressure drain port
closes. When it is “OFF”, the drain port opens.
During the solenoid valve “ON” pilot pressure is applied to the end
face of the overrun clutch control valve.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT015J
Overrun Clutch Control Valve Operation
EC
NAAT0180S0403
When the solenoid valve is “ON”, pilot pressure A is applied to the
overrun clutch control valve. This pushes up the overrun clutch
control valve. The line pressure is then shut off so that the clutch
does not engage.
When the solenoid valve is “OFF”, pilot pressure A is not generated. At this point, the overrun clutch control valve moves downward by spring force. As a result, overrun clutch operation pressure
is provided by the overrun clutch reducing valve. This causes the
overrun clutch to engage.
In the “1” position, the overrun clutch control valve remains pushed
down so that the overrun clutch is engaged at all times.
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT049J
Control Valve
NAAT0181
FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVE
NAAT0181S01
Valve name
BR
Function
ST
쐌 Pressure regulator valve
쐌 Pressure regulator plug
쐌 Pressure regulator sleeve plug
Regulate oil discharged from the oil pump to provide optimum line pressure for all
driving conditions.
Pressure modifier valve
Used as a signal supplementary valve to the pressure regulator valve. Regulates
pressure-modifier pressure (signal pressure) which controls optimum line pressure for
all driving conditions.
Modifier accumulator piston
Smooths hydraulic pressure regulated by the pressure modifier valve to prevent pulsations.
Pilot valve
Regulates line pressure to maintain a constant pilot pressure level which controls
lock-up mechanism, overrun clutch, 3-2 timing required for shifting.
Accumulator control valve
Accumulator control sleeve
Regulate accumulator back-pressure to pressure suited to driving conditions.
SC
Manual valve
Directs line pressure to oil circuits corresponding to select positions.
Hydraulic pressure drains when the shift lever is in Neutral.
EL
RS
BT
HA
IDX
AT-31
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control Valve (Cont’d)
Valve name
Function
Shift valve A
Simultaneously switches three oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve
A to meet driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.).
Provides automatic downshifting and up-shifting (1st , 2nd , 3rd , 4th gears/4th
, 3rd , 2nd , 1st gears) in combination with shift valve B.
Shift valve B
Simultaneously switches three oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve
B in relation to driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.).
Provides automatic downshifting and up-shifting (1st , 2nd , 3rd , 4th gears/4th
, 3rd , 2nd , 1st gears) in combination with shift valve A.
Shuttle shift valve S
Switches hydraulic circuits to provide 3-2 timing control and overrun clutch control in
relation to the throttle opening.
Inactivates the overrun clutch to prevent interlocking in 4th gear when the throttle is
wide open.
Overrun clutch control valve
Switches hydraulic circuits to prevent engagement of the overrun clutch simultaneously with application of the brake band in 4th gear. (Interlocking occurs if the
overrun clutch engages during D4 gear operation.)
4-2 relay valve
Memorizes that the transmission is in 4th gear. Prevents the transmission from downshifting from 4th gear to 3rd and then to 2nd in combination with 4-2 sequence valve
and shift valves A and B when downshifting from 4th to 2nd gear.
4-2 sequence valve
Prevents band servo pressure from draining before high clutch operating pressure
and band servo releasing pressure drain (from the same circuit) during downshifting
from 4th to 2nd gear.
Servo charger valve
An accumulator and a one-way orifice are used in the 2nd gear band servo oil circuit
to dampen shifting shock when shifting from 1st to 2nd gear.
To maintain adequate flow rate when downshifting from 4th or 3rd gear to 2nd gear,
the servo charger valve directs 2nd gear band servo hydraulic pressure to the circuit
without going through the one-way orifice when downshifting from 3rd or a higher
gear.
3-2 timing valve
Prevents a late operation of the brake band when shifting selector lever from “D” to
“1” or “2” position while driving in D3.
“1” reducing valve
Reduces low & reverse brake pressure to dampen engine-brake shock when downshifting from the “1” position 2nd gear to 1st gear.
Overrun clutch reducing valve
Reduces oil pressure directed to the overrun clutch and prevents engine-brake shock.
In “1” and “2” positions, line pressure acts on the overrun clutch reducing valve to
increase the pressure-regulating point, with resultant engine brake capability.
Torque converter relief valve
Prevents an excessive rise in torque converter pressure.
Torque converter clutch control valve,
torque converter clutch control plug and
torque converter clutch control sleeve
Activate or inactivate the lock-up function.
Also provide smooth lock-up through transient application and release of the lock-up
system.
Shuttle shift valve D
Switches hydraulic circuits so that output pressure of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve acts on the lock-up valve in the “D” position of 2nd, 3rd and 4th gears. (In
the “D” position 1st gear, lock-up is inhibited.)
쐌 Lock-up control is not affected in “D” position 2nd, 3rd or 4th gears, unless output
pressure of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is generated by a signal
from the control unit.
AT-32
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Introduction
Introduction
NAAT0014
The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems.
The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combination
with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in
the ECM memory but not the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the O/D OFF indicator lamp. The malfunction is
stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For detail,
refer to AT-38.
GI
MA
EM
LC
OBD-II Function for A/T System
NAAT0182
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system. One function
is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the
ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a
diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches
and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
The MIL automatically illuminates in One or Two Trip Detection Logic when a malfunction is sensed in relation to A/T system parts.
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II
ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC
EC
FE
CL
NAAT0015
NAAT0015S01
If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored
in the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function.
TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC
MT
NAAT0015S02
When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC
(diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — First Trip
If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive,
the MIL will illuminate. — Second Trip
A/T-related parts for which the MIL illuminates during the first or second test drive are listed below.
TF
PD
MIL
Items
One trip detection
Shift solenoid valve A — DTC: P0750
X
Shift solenoid valve B — DTC: P0755
X
Accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor) or
switch — DTC: P1705
X
Except above
Two trip detection
AX
SU
BR
X
The “trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation.
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC
NAAT0016
ST
RS
NAAT0016S01
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
(
with CONSULT-II or
GST) CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0710, P0720,
P0725, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
쐌 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
쐌 Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction.
However, in case of the Mode II and GST they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still
occurring or occurred in the past and returned to normal.
CONSULT-II can identify them as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown on the next page. DTC or 1st trip DTC
of a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Time
data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
AT-33
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) (Cont’d)
SAT014K
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.
SAT015K
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “1t”.
SAT016K
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
NAAT0016S0101
The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated
load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle
speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data,
and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II
or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
detail, refer to EC-111, “CONSULT-II”.
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data of freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data.
AT-34
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) (Cont’d)
Priority
1
Freeze frame data
2
3
GI
Items
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
MA
Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
EM
1st trip freeze frame data
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM
memory is erased.
HOW TO ERASE DTC
LC
NAAT0016S02
The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT-II, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as
described following.
쐌 If the battery terminal is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours.
쐌 When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT-II or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode
selector on the ECM.
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC
related to OBD-II. For details, refer to EC-86, “Emission-related Diagnostic Information”.
쐌 Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC)
쐌 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC)
쐌 Freeze frame data
쐌 1st trip freeze frame data
쐌 System readiness test (SRT) codes
쐌 Test values
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT-II)
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
NAAT0016S03
쐌 If a DTC is displayed for both ECM and TCM, it needs to be erased for both ECM and TCM.
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
5 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “A/T”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) Then touch “BACK” twice.
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-35
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) (Cont’d)
SCIA5586E
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)
NAAT0016S04
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
5 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT-48.
3. Select Mode 4 with Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details, refer to EC-125, “DESCRIPTION”.
HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)
NAAT0016S05
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
5 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”. Refer to AT-48. (The engine warm-up step
can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.)
AT-36
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
=NAAT0183
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON
without the engine running. This is a bulb check.
쐌 If the MIL does not light up, refer to EL-127, “Schematic”.
(Or refer to EC-791, “Wiring Diagram”.)
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction. For detail, refer to
EC-85, “Introduction”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT964I
EC
CONSULT-II
NAAT0184
After performing “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)” (AT-38), place check marks for results on the “DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET”, AT-57. Reference pages are provided following the items.
NOTICE:
1) The CONSULT-II electrically displays shift timing and lock-up
timing (that is, operation timing of each solenoid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the
CONSULT-II display. If the difference is noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical parts using applicable diagnostic procedures.
2) Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on
CONSULT-II and that indicated in Service Manual may differ
slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons:
쐌 Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance,
쐌 Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point
where shifts start, and
쐌 Gear position displayed on CONSULT-II indicates the point
where shifts are completed.
3) Shift solenoid valve “A” or “B” is displayed on CONSULT-II at
the start of shifting. Gear position is displayed upon completion
of shifting (which is computed by TCM).
4) Additional CONSULT-II information can be found in the Operation Manual supplied with the CONSULT-II unit.
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode
NAAT0184S07
Function
Reference
Work support
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and
more accurately by following the indications on CONSULT-II.
—
Self-diagnostic results
Self-diagnostic results can be read and erased quickly.
Refer to AT-38
Data monitor
Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Refer to AT-40
CAN diagnostic support
monitor
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication
can be read.
—
Function test
Performed by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine
whether each system is “OK” or “NG”.
—
DTC work support
Select the operating condition to confirm Diagnostic Trouble
Codes.
TCM part number
TCM part number can be read.
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
Refer to AT-44
—
EL
IDX
AT-37
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)
NAAT0184S01
1.
Turn on CONSULT-II and touch “ENGINE” for OBD-II detected
items or touch “A/T” for TCM self-diagnosis.
If A/T is not displayed, check TCM power supply and ground
circuit. Refer to AT-95. If result is NG, refer to EL-11, “Schematic”.
2.
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing
operation.
CONSULT-II performs REAL-TIME SELF-DIAGNOSIS.
Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be displayed at real time.
SAT014K
SAT987J
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT TEST MODE
NAAT0184S02
TCM self-diagnosis
OBD-II (DTC)
Available by
O/D OFF
indicator lamp
Available by
malfunction
indicator lamp*2,
“ENGINE” on CONSULT-II or GST
—
P0705
X
P0720
X
—
—
P0731*1
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
쐌 A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st
gear position even if electrical
circuit is good.
—
P0732*1
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
쐌 A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd
gear position even if electrical
circuit is good.
—
P0733*1
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
쐌 A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd
gear position even if electrical
circuit is good.
—
P0734*1
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
쐌 A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th
gear position even if electrical
circuit is good.
Detected items
(Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS” test mode)
Malfunction is detected when ...
“A/T”
“ENGINE”
PNP switch circuit
—
PNP SW/CIRC
Revolution sensor
VHCL SPEED
SEN·A/T
VEH SPD SEN/CIR
AT
Vehicle speed sensor (Meter)
VHCL SPEED
SEN·MTR
—
A/T 1st gear function
—
A/T 2nd gear function
—
A/T 3rd gear function
—
A/T 4th gear function
—
쐌 TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal (based on
the gear position) from the
switch.
쐌 TCM does not receive the
proper voltage signal from the
sensor.
쐌 TCM does not receive the
proper voltage signal from the
sensor.
AT-38
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
TCM self-diagnosis
OBD-II (DTC)
Available by
O/D OFF
indicator lamp
Available by
malfunction
indicator lamp*2,
“ENGINE” on CONSULT-II or GST
—
P0744*1
Detected items
(Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS” test mode)
MA
Malfunction is detected when ...
“A/T”
“ENGINE”
A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up)
—
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
SHIFT SOLENOID/V
A
SFT SOL A/CIRC
SFT SOL B/CIRC
쐌 TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate
the solenoid valve.
Shift solenoid valve B
SHIFT SOLENOID/V
B
Overrun clutch solenoid valve
OVERRUN CLUTCH
S/V
O/R CLUCH SOL/
CIRC
T/C clutch solenoid valve
T/C CLUTCH SOL/V
TCC SOLENOID/
CIRC
Line pressure solenoid valve
LINE PRESSURE
S/V
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
Accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle
position sensor)
THROTTLE POSI
SEN
TP SEN/CIRC A/T
ENGINE SPEED SIG
A/T fluid temperature sensor
ATF TEMP SEN/
CIRC
CAN communication
CAN COMM LINE
—
Turbine revolution sensor
TURBINE REV
—
TCM (RAM)
CONTROL UNIT
(RAM)
쐌 TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate
the solenoid valve.
쐌 TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate
the solenoid valve.
쐌 TCM receives an excessively
low or high voltage from the
sensor.
EM
LC
EC
X
P0750
FE
X
P0755
X
P1760
X
P0740
X
P0745
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
X
P1705
SU
쐌 TCM receives an excessively
low or high voltage from the
sensor.
쐌 The CAN communication line is
open or shorted.
쐌 TCM does not receive the
proper voltage signal from the
sensor.
X
P0725
X
P0710
BR
ST
RS
X
EC-57
BT
X
—
HA
쐌 TCM memory (RAM) is malfunctioning.
—
—
쐌 TCM memory (ROM) is malfunctioning.
—
—
—
TCM (ROM)
CONTROL UNIT
(ROM)
쐌 TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate
the solenoid valve.
쐌 TCM does not receive the
proper voltage signal from the
ECM.
Engine speed signal
BATT/FLUID TEMP
SEN
쐌 A/T cannot perform lock-up
even if electrical circuit is good.
쐌 TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate
the solenoid valve.
Shift solenoid valve A
GI
SC
EL
—
IDX
AT-39
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
TCM self-diagnosis
OBD-II (DTC)
Available by
O/D OFF
indicator lamp
Available by
malfunction
indicator lamp*2,
“ENGINE” on CONSULT-II or GST
—
—
X
—
X
X
Detected items
(Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS” test mode)
Malfunction is detected when ...
“A/T”
“ENGINE”
쐌 TCM memory (EEP ROM) is
malfunctioning.
TCM (EEP ROM)
CONTROL UNIT
(EEP ROM)
—
Initial start
INITIAL START
—
No failure
(NO DTC IS DETECTED FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED)
쐌 This is not a malfunction message (Whenever shutting off a
power supply to the TCM, this
message appears on the
screen.)
쐌 No failure has been detected.
X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
*1: These malfunctions cannot be displayed by MIL
*2: Refer to EC-102, “DESCRIPTION”.
if another malfunction is assigned to MIL.
DATA MONITOR MODE (A/T)
NAAT0184S03
Selection monitor item
Item
Display
Vehicle speed sensor 1
(A/T)
(Revolution sensor)
VHCL/S SE·A/T
[km/h] or [mph]
Vehicle speed sensor 2
(Meter)
VHCL/S
SE·MTR
[km/h] or [mph]
TCM
MAIN
INPUT
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
X
X
Accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle
position sensor)
THRTL POS
SEN
[V]
A/T fluid temperature
sensor
FLUID TEMP
SE
[V]
Battery voltage
BATTERY VOLT
[V]
X
SELECTION
FROM
MENU
—
—
—
왔
왔
Description
쐌 Vehicle speed computed from signal of
revolution sensor is
displayed.
When racing engine in
“N” or “P” position with
vehicle stationary, CONSULT-II data may not
indicate 0 km/h (0 mph).
쐌 Vehicle speed computed from signal of
vehicle speed sensor
is displayed.
Vehicle speed display
may not be accurate
under approx. 10 km/h
(6 mph). It may not indicate 0 km/h (0 mph)
when vehicle is stationary.
왔
쐌 Accelerator pedal
position sensor
(throttle position sensor) signal voltage is
displayed.
X
—
왔
쐌 A/T fluid temperature
sensor signal voltage
is displayed.
쐌 Signal voltage lowers
as fluid temperature
rises.
X
—
왔
쐌 Source voltage of
TCM is displayed.
AT-40
Remarks
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
GI
Selection monitor item
Item
Engine speed
Turbine revolution sensor
Overdrive control switch
PN position switch
R position switch
D position switch
2 position switch
1 position switch
ASCD cruise signal
Display
ENGINE
SPEED
[rpm]
TURBINE REV
[rpm]
OVERDRIVE
SW
[ON/OFF]
PN POSI SW
[ON/OFF]
R POSITION
SW
[ON/OFF]
D POSITION
SW
[ON/OFF]
2 POSITION
SW
[ON/OFF]
1 POSITION
SW
[ON/OFF]
TCM
MAIN
INPUT
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
왔
왔
—
KICKDOWN
SW
[ON/OFF]
X
—
—
Description
Engine speed display
may not be accurate
under approx. 800 rpm.
It may not indicate 0
rpm even when engine
is not running.
쐌 Turbine revolution
computed from signal
of turbine revolution
sensor is displayed.
Error may occur under
approx. 800 rpm and will
not indicate 0 rpm even
if engine is not running.
왔
왔
쐌 ON/OFF state computed from signal of
PN position SW is
displayed.
왔
쐌 ON/OFF state computed from signal of R
position SW is displayed.
왔
쐌 ON/OFF state computed from signal of D
position SW is displayed.
왔
쐌 ON/OFF status, computed from signal of 2
position SW, is displayed.
왔
쐌 ON/OFF status, computed from signal of 1
position SW, is displayed.
왔
쐌 Status of ASCD
cruise signal is displayed.
ON ... Cruising state
OFF ... Normal running state
왔
왔
Remarks
쐌 Engine speed, computed from engine
speed signal, is displayed.
쐌 ON/OFF state computed from signal of
overdrive control SW
is displayed.
ASCD-OD CUT
[ON/OFF]
X
Kickdown switch
X
ASCD-CRUISE
[ON/OFF]
X
ASCD OD cut signal
SELECTION
FROM
MENU
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
쐌 Status of ASCD OD
release signal is displayed.
ON ... OD released
OFF ... OD not
released
쐌 ON/OFF status, computed from signal of
kickdown SW, is displayed.
MA
HA
SC
쐌 This is displayed even
when no kickdown
switch is equipped.
EL
IDX
AT-41
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
Selection monitor item
Item
A/T mode switch
Display
POWER SHIFT
SW
[ON/OFF]
Closed throttle position
signal
CLOSED
THL/SW
[ON/OFF]
Wide open throttle position signal
W/O THRL/
P-SW
[ON/OFF]
TCM
MAIN
INPUT
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
X
X
SELECTION
FROM
MENU
—
—
왔
쐌 ON/OFF status, computed from signal of
closed throttle position SW, is displayed.
쐌 Signal input with CAN
communication
쐌 ON/OFF status, computed from signal of
wide open throttle
position SW, is displayed.
쐌 Signal input with CAN
communication
X
—
왔
*SHIFT S/V A
[ON/OFF]
—
—
왔
Shift solenoid valve B
*SHIFT S/V B
[ON/OFF]
—
—
왔
Overrun clutch solenoid
valve
*OVRRUN/C
S/V
[ON/OFF]
—
—
왔
A/T mode switch
HOLD SW
[ON/OFF]
X
—
왔
Stop lamp signal
BRAKE SW
[ON/OFF]
Selector lever position
Vehicle speed
Throttle position
Line pressure duty
VEHICLE
SPEED
[km/h] or [mph]
THROTTLE
POSI
[/8]
LINE PRES
DTY
[%]
Displays status of check
signal (re-input signal)
for TCM control signal
output. Remains
unchanged when solenoid valves are open or
shorted.
쐌 Not mounted but displayed.
X
—
왔
쐌 ON/OFF status is dis- 쐌 Signal input with CAN
played.
communication
ON ... Brake pedal is
depressed.
OFF ... Brake pedal is
released.
—
X
왔
쐌 Gear position data
used for computation
by TCM, is displayed.
GEAR
SLCT LVR
POSI
Remarks
쐌 Not mounted but displayed.
왔
Shift solenoid valve A
Gear position
Description
—
X
왔
쐌 Selector lever position 쐌 A specific value used
data, used for compufor control is distation by TCM, is displayed if fail-safe is
played.
activated due to error.
—
X
왔
쐌 Vehicle speed data,
used for computation
by TCM, is displayed.
—
—
X
X
AT-42
왔
왔
쐌 Throttle position data,
used for computation
by TCM, is displayed.
쐌 Control value of line
pressure solenoid
valve, computed by
TCM from each input
signal, is displayed.
쐌 A specific value used
for control is displayed if fail-safe is
activated due to error.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
GI
Selection monitor item
Item
Torque converter clutch
solenoid valve duty
Display
TCM
MAIN
INPUT
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
왔
쐌 Control value of shift
solenoid valve A,
computed by TCM
from each input
signal, is displayed.
X
왔
쐌 Control value of shift
solenoid valve B,
computed by TCM
from each input
signal, is displayed.
SHIFT S/V B
[ON/OFF]
—
Overrun clutch solenoid
valve
왔
SHIFT S/V A
[ON/OFF]
—
Shift solenoid valve B
X
OVERRUN/C
S/V
[ON/OFF]
Self-diagnosis display
lamp
(O/D OFF indicator
lamp)
SELF-D DP
LMP
[ON/OFF]
Torque converter slip
ratio
TC SLIP RATIO
[0.000]
Torque converter slip
speed
TC SLIP
SPEED
[rpm]
Voltage
Voltage [V]
Frequency
Frequency
[Hz]
—
—
—
X
X
X
—
Description
쐌 Control value of
torque converter
clutch solenoid valve,
computed by TCM
from each input
signal, is displayed.
TCC S/V DUTY
[%]
—
Shift solenoid valve A
SELECTION
FROM
MENU
왔
왔
Remarks
MA
EM
LC
Control value of solenoid is displayed even if
solenoid circuit is disconnected.
The “OFF” signal is displayed if solenoid circuit
is shorted.
EC
FE
CL
MT
쐌 Control value of overrun clutch solenoid
valve computed by
TCM from each input
signal is displayed.
TF
쐌 Control status of O/D
OFF indicator lamp is
displayed.
PD
왔
쐌 Ratio of engine revolution to input shaft
revolution of torque
converter
AX
SU
—
—
왔
Difference in revolution
between input shaft
revolution and input
shaft revolution of
torque converter
—
—
왔
Value measured by voltage probe is displayed.
RS
왔
Value measured by
pulse probe is displayed. If measurement
is impossible, “#” sign is
displayed. “#” sign is
also displayed at the
final data value until the
measurement result is
obtained.
Duty cycle value for
measurement probe is
displayed.
SC
—
—
Duty cycle (high)
DUTY-HI
[%]
—
—
왔
Duty cycle (low)
DUTY-LOW
[%]
—
—
왔
Display doesn’t indicate
0 rpm even if engine is
stopped.
But this isn’t malfunction.
BR
ST
BT
HA
EL
IDX
AT-43
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
Selection monitor item
Item
TCM
MAIN
INPUT
SIGNALS
SIGNALS
Display
SELECTION
FROM
MENU
Plus width (high)
PLS WIDTH-HI
—
—
왔
Plus width (low)
PLS WIDTHLOW
—
—
왔
Description
Remarks
Measured pulse width of
measurement probe is
displayed.
X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
왔: Option
DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II Setting Procedure
NAAT0184S04
NAAT0184S0401
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector, which is located in instrument lower panel on
driver side.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
5.
Touch “A/T”.
6.
Touch “DTC WORK SUPPORT”.
SAIA0450E
SAT014K
SCIA5358E
AT-44
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
7.
Touch select item menu (1ST, 2ND, etc.).
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT018K
8.
Touch “START”.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT589J
9.
Perform driving test according to “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” in “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT019K
쐌
When testing conditions are satisfied, CONSULT-II screen
changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT591J
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-45
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
10. Stop vehicle. If “NG” appears on the screen, malfunction may
exist. Go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.
SAT592J
SAT593J
11. Perform test drive to check gear shift feeling in accordance
with instructions displayed.
SAT594J
12. Touch “YES” or “NO”.
SAT595J
AT-46
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
13. CONSULT-II procedure ended.
If “NG” appears on the screen, a malfunction may exist. Go to
“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT596J
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT593J
DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE
DTC work support item
NAAT0184S05
Description
Check item
1ST GR FNCTN P0731
Following items for “A/T 1st gear function (P0731)” can be confirmed.
쐌 Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not)
쐌 Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
2ND GR FNCTN P0732
Following items for “A/T 2nd gear function (P0732)” can be confirmed.
쐌 Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not)
쐌 Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)
쐌 Shift solenoid valve B
쐌 Each clutch
쐌 Hydraulic control circuit
3RD GR FNCTN P0733
Following items for “A/T 3rd gear function (P0733)” can be confirmed.
쐌 Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not)
쐌 Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)
쐌 Shift solenoid valve A
쐌 Each clutch
쐌 Hydraulic control circuit
Following items for “A/T 4th gear function (P0734)” can be confirmed.
쐌 Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not)
쐌 Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
4TH GR FNCTN P0734
TCC S/V FNCTN P0744
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
Each clutch
Hydraulic control circuit
TF
PD
AX
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
Overrun clutch solenoid valve
Line pressure solenoid valve
Each clutch
Hydraulic control circuit
Following items for “A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up) (P0744)” can
쐌 Torque converter clutch solebe confirmed.
noid valve
쐌 Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being con쐌 Each clutch
ducted or not)
쐌 Hydraulic control circuit
쐌 Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-47
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II
NAAT0206
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH NAAT0206S01
GST)
Refer to EC-125, “DESCRIPTION”.
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO
TOOLS)
NAAT0206S02
Refer to EC-102, “DESCRIPTION”.
TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)
NAAT0206S03
Preparation
NAAT0206S0301
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SAT491J
6.
Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
Connect the handy type vacuum pump to the throttle opener
and apply vacuum −25.3 kPa (−190 mmHg, −7.48 inHg).
Disconnect the throttle position switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
Check continuity of the closed throttle position switch.
Continuity should exist.
(If continuity does not exist, check throttle opener and
closed throttle position switch. Then increase vacuum
until closed throttle position switch shows continuity.)
Go to “DIAGNOSIS START” on next page.
SAT132K
AT-48
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
1
GI
CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP
1. Start the engine with selector lever in “P” position. Warm engine to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
3. Wait 5 seconds.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT967I
4. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
5. Does O/D OFF indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds?
CL
MT
TF
PD
SAT204K
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
Stop procedure. Perform O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On”, AT-221 before
proceeding.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-49
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
2
JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
Push shift lock release button.
Move selector lever from “P” to “D” position.
Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.)
Wait 3 seconds.
Push the overdrive control switch in “O/D OFF” position (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “ON”) If O/D OFF indicator
lamp does not come on, go to step 5 on AT-258.
7. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
SAT968I
8. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position (Do not start engine.).
9. Push the overdrive control switch in “O/D ON” position (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “OFF”).
10. Wait 2 seconds.
11. Move selector lever to “2” position.
12. Push the overdrive control switch in “O/D OFF” position (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “ON”).
13. Push the overdrive control switch in “O/D OFF” position (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “OFF”).
SAT969I
䊳
GO TO 3.
AT-50
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
GI
JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 2
Move selector lever to “1” position.
Push the overdrive control switch in “O/D OFF” position (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “ON”).
Push the overdrive control switch in “O/D ON” position (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “OFF”).
Push the overdrive control switch in “O/D OFF” position (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “ON”).
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT970I
CL
5. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it.
6. Push the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will begin to flash “ON” and “OFF”).
MT
TF
PD
SAT981F
GO TO 4.
AX
CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE
SU
䊳
4
Check O/D OFF indicator lamp.
Refer to JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE, AT-52.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT204K
䊳
HA
DIAGNOSIS END
SC
EL
IDX
AT-51
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE
NAAT0206S04
O/D OFF indicator lamp:
All judgement flickers are same.
1st judgement flicker is longer than others.
SAT666I
SAT667I
All circuits that can be confirmed by self-diagnosis are OK.
Revolution sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒ Go to DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR), AT-117.
2nd judgement flicker is longer than others.
3rd judgement flicker is longer than others.
SAT668I
SAT669I
Vehicle speed signal circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒ Go to DTC VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL·MTR, AT-200.
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒ Go to DTC P1705 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION
SENSOR, AT-182.
4th judgement flicker is longer than others.
5th judgement flicker is longer than others.
SAT670I
Shift solenoid valve A circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒ Go to DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A, AT-174.
SAT671I
Shift solenoid valve B circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒ Go to DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B, AT-178.
AT-52
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
GI
O/D OFF indicator lamp:
6th judgement flicker is longer than others.
7th judgement flicker is longer than others.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT672I
SAT673I
Overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒ Go to DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE,
AT-188.
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited
or disconnected.
⇒ Go to DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE, AT-154.
CL
8th judgement flicker is longer than others.
9th judgement flicker is longer than others.
MT
TF
PD
AX
SAT674I
SAT675I
A/T fluid temperature sensor is disconnected or TCM power
source circuit is damaged.
⇒ Go to DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND TCM POWER SOURCE), AT-193.
Engine speed signal circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒ Go to DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL, AT-122.
10th judgement flicker is longer than others.
11th judgement flicker is longer than others.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT676I
Turbine revolution sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒ Go to DTC Turbine Revolution Sensor, AT-209.
SAT677I
Line pressure solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒ Go to DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE,
AT-168.
SC
EL
IDX
AT-53
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
O/D OFF indicator lamp:
12th judgement flicker is longer than others.
Flickers as shown below.
SAT678I
CAN communication line is open or shorted.
⇒ Go to DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE, AT-206.
SAT679I
Battery power is low.
Battery has been disconnected for a long time.
Battery is connected conversely.
(When reconnecting TCM connectors. — This is not a problem.)
SAT705K
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch, overdrive control switch,
closed throttle position signal or wide-open throttle position signal circuit is disconnected or TCM is damaged.
⇒ Go to 21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP,
Overdrive Control and Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
Circuit Checks), AT-258.
t1 = 2.5 seconds
t2 = 2.0 seconds
t3 = 1.0 second
t4 = 1.0 second
AT-54
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Introduction
Introduction
SAT631IB
SAT632I
NAAT0019
The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor, throttle
position sensor or PNP switch and provides shift control or lock-up
control via A/T solenoid valves.
The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal
sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the
A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is
capable of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can
store malfunctions in its memory.
Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the
operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good
operating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve
malfunction, etc.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this
case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the
replacement of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the problems. A road
test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the “Work Flow”. Refer to AT-59.
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with
a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such problems, especially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and
under what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the
example (AT-57) should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an electronically
controlled engine vehicle.
Also check related Service bulletins.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SEF234G
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-55
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Introduction (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Information From Customer
KEY POINTS
WHAT ..... Vehicle & A/T model
WHEN..... Date, Frequencies
WHERE..... Road conditions
HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms
Customer name
MR/MS
Model & Year
VIN
Trans. model
Engine
Mileage
Incident Date
Manuf. Date
In Service Date
Frequency
쏔 Continuous
Symptoms
쏔 Vehicle does not move.
쏔 No up-shift
쏔 Intermittent (
times a day)
(쏔 Any position 쏔 Particular position)
(쏔 1st , 2nd 쏔 2nd , 3rd
쏔 No down-shift
(쏔 O/D , 3rd
쏔 3rd , O/D)
쏔 3rd , 2nd 쏔 2nd , 1st)
쏔 Lockup malfunction
쏔 Shift point too high or too low.
쏔 Shift shock or slip
(쏔 N , D
쏔 Lockup
쏔 Any drive position)
쏔 Noise or vibration
쏔 No kickdown
쏔 No pattern select
쏔 Others
(
O/D OFF indicator lamp
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
)
Blinks for about 8 seconds.
쏔 Continuously lit
쏔 Not lit
쏔 Continuously lit
쏔 Not lit
AT-56
=NAAT0019S01
NAAT0019S0101
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Introduction (Cont’d)
Diagnostic Worksheet
=NAAT0019S0102
1.
쏔 Read the Fail-safe Remarks and listen to customer complaints.
AT-8
2.
쏔 CHECK A/T FLUID
AT-61
쏔 Leakage (Follow specified procedure)
쏔 Fluid condition
쏔 Fluid level
3.
쏔 Stall test — Mark possible damaged components/others.
AT-61,
AT-64
쏔 Low & reverse brake
쏔 Low one-way clutch
쏔 Engine
쏔 Line pressure is low
쏔 Clutches and brakes except high clutch and
brake band are OK
Torque converter one-way clutch
Reverse clutch
Forward clutch
Overrun clutch
Forward one-way clutch
LC
EC
FE
쏔 Pressure test — Suspected parts:
4.
MA
EM
Perform STALL TEST and LINE PRESSURE TEST.
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
GI
CL
쏔 Perform all ROAD TEST and mark required procedures.
AT-65
4-1.
AT-66
Check before engine is started.
MT
쏔 O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On, AT-221.
쏔 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE - Mark detected items.
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
4-2.
DTC P0705 PNP switch, AT-105.
DTC P0710 A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-111.
DTC P0720 Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor), AT-117.
DTC P0725 Engine speed signal, AT-122.
DTC P0740 Torque converter clutch solenoid valve, AT-154.
DTC P0745 Line pressure solenoid valve, AT-168.
DTC P0750 Shift solenoid valve A, AT-174.
DTC P0755 Shift solenoid valve B, AT-178.
DTC P1705 Accelerator pedal position sensor, AT-182.
DTC P1760 Overrun clutch solenoid valve, AT-188.
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T fluid temperature sensor and TCM power source), AT-193.
DTC Vehicle speed sensor·MTR, AT-200.
DTC Turbine revolution sensor, AT-209.
DTC U1000 CAN communication line, AT-206.
DTC Control unit (RAM), control unit (ROM), AT-214.
DTC Control unit (EEP ROM), AT-216.
PNP, overdrive control and accelerator pedal position sensor, AT-258.
Battery
Others
Check at idle
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
AT-68
Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” And “N” Position, AT-223.
In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed, AT-224.
In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves, AT-225.
Large Shock. “N” , “R” Position, AT-227.
Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position, AT-229.
Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position, AT-232.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-57
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Introduction (Cont’d)
4.
4-3.
Cruise test
AT-69
AT-73
Part-1
쏔 Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1, AT-235.
쏔 A/T Does Not Shift: D1 , D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 , D2, AT-238.
쏔 A/T Does Not Shift: D2 , D3, AT-241.
쏔 A/T Does Not Shift: D3 , D4, AT-244.
쏔 A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up, AT-247.
쏔 A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition, AT-249.
쏔 Lock-up Is Not Released, AT-251.
쏔 Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 , D3), AT-252.
Part-2
AT-77
쏔 Vehicle Does Not Start From D1, AT-254.
쏔 A/T Does Not Shift: D1 , D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 , D2, AT-238.
쏔 A/T Does Not Shift: D2 , D3, AT-241.
쏔 A/T Does Not Shift: D3 , D4, AT-244.
Part-3
AT-79
쏔 A/T Does Not Shift: D4 , D3 When Overdrive Control Switch “ON” , “OFF”, AT-255
쏔 Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Engine Brake In D3 ), AT-252.
쏔 A/T Does Not Shift: D3 , 22, When Selector Lever “D” , “2” Position, AT-256.
쏔 Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Engine Brake In 22 ), AT-252.
쏔 A/T Does Not Shift: 22 , 11, When Selector Lever “2” , “1” Position, AT-257.
쏔 Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake, AT-258.
쏔 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE — Mark detected items.
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
DTC P0705 PNP switch, AT-105.
DTC P0710 A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-111.
DTC P0720 Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor), AT-117.
DTC P0725 Engine speed signal, AT-122.
DTC P0740 Torque converter clutch solenoid valve, AT-154.
DTC P0745 Line pressure solenoid valve, AT-168.
DTC P0750 Shift solenoid valve A, AT-174.
DTC P0755 Shift solenoid valve B, AT-178.
DTC P1705 Accelerator pedal position sensor, AT-182.
DTC P1760 Overrun clutch solenoid valve, AT-188.
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T fluid temperature sensor and TCM power source), AT-193.
DTC Vehicle speed sensor·MTR, AT-200.
DTC Turbine revolution sensor, AT-209.
DTC U1000 CAN communication line, AT-206.
DTC Control unit (RAM), control unit (ROM), AT-214.
DTC Control unit (EEP ROM), AT-216.
PNP, overdrive control and accelerator pedal position sensor, AT-258.
Battery
Others
5.
쏔 For self-diagnosis NG items, inspect each component. Repair or replace the damaged parts.
AT-38
6.
쏔 Perform all ROAD TEST and re-mark required procedures.
AT-65
7.
쏔 Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for following MIL indicating items and check out NG items.
Refer to EC-86, “Emission-related Diagnostic Information”.
EC-86
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
쏔
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
DTC
(P0731,
(P0732,
(P0733,
(P0734,
(P0744,
1103) A/T 1st gear function, AT-126.
1104) A/T 2nd gear function, AT-132.
1105) A/T 3rd gear function, AT-138.
1106) A/T 4th gear function, AT-144.
1107) A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up), AT-159.
8.
쏔 Perform the Diagnostic Procedures for all remaining items marked NG. Repair or replace the damaged
parts.
Refer to the Symptom Chart when you perform the procedures. (The chart also shows some other possible
symptoms and the component inspection orders.)
AT-95
AT-103
9.
쏔 Erase DTC from TCM and ECM memories.
AT-35
AT-58
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Work Flow
Work Flow
HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR
NAAT0020
GI
NAAT0020S01
A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is important to fully understand the symptoms
or conditions for a customer complaint.
Make good use of the two sheets provided, “INFORMATION FROM CUSTOMER” (AT-56) and “DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET” (AT-57), to perform the best troubleshooting possible.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-59
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Work Flow (Cont’d)
WORK FLOW CHART
NAAT0020S02
SAT086JF
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
AT-56
AT-57
AT-8
AT-61
AT-61, 64
AT-65
*7:
*8:
*9:
*10:
*11:
*12:
*13:
*14:
*15:
*16:
*17:
*18:
AT-37
AT-33
AT-52
AT-105
AT-216
AT-218
AT-60
AT-258
AT-83
AT-35
AT-106
AT-216
EC-86
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
A/T Fluid Check
A/T Fluid Check
NAAT0021
FLUID LEAKAGE CHECK
1.
2.
3.
4.
NAAT0021S01
Clean area suspected of leaking. — for example, mating surface of converter housing and transmission case.
Start engine, apply foot brake, place selector lever in “D” position and wait a few minutes.
Stop engine.
Check for fresh leakage.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FLUID CONDITION CHECK
NAAT0021S02
Fluid color
SAT638A
GI
Suspected problem
FE
Dark or black with burned odor
Wear of frictional material
Milky pink
Water contamination — Road water
entering through filler tube or breather
CL
Varnished fluid, light to dark brown
and tacky
Oxidation — Over or under filling, —
Overheating
MT
FLUID LEVEL CHECK
NAAT0021S03
Refer to MA-22, “Checking A/T Fluid”.
TF
PD
AX
SU
Stall Test
STALL TEST PROCEDURE
1.
2.
NAAT0022
NAAT0022S01
Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add fluid
and oil.
Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until fluid and oil reach
operating temperature.
ATF operating temperature:
50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT647B
3.
4.
쐌
Set parking brake and block wheels.
Install a tachometer where it can be seen by driver during test.
It is good practice to put a mark on point of specified
engine rpm on indicator.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT513G
AT-61
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Stall Test (Cont’d)
5.
6.
7.
쐌
Start engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D”
position.
Accelerate to wide open throttle gradually while applying foot
brake.
Quickly note the engine stall revolution and immediately
release throttle.
During test, never hold throttle wide open for more than 5
seconds.
Stall revolution:
Refer to SDS, AT-356.
SAT514G
8.
9.
쐌
10.
Move selector lever to “N” position.
Cool off ATF.
Run engine at idle for at least one minute.
Repeat steps 5 through 9 with selector lever in “2”, “1” and “R”
positions.
SAT771B
JUDGEMENT OF STALL TEST
NAAT0022S02
The test result and possible damaged components relating to each
result are shown in the illustration. In order to pinpoint the possible
damaged components, refer to “Work Flow”, AT-59.
NOTE:
Stall revolution is too high in “D” or “2” position:
쐌 Slippage occurs in 1st gear but not in 2nd and 3rd gears. .....
Low one-way clutch slippage
쐌 Slippage occurs at the following gears:
1st through 3rd gears in “D” position and engine brake functions.
1st and 2nd gears in “2” position and engine brake functions
with accelerator pedal released (fully closed throttle). ..... Forward clutch or forward one-way clutch slippage
Stall revolution is too high in “R” position:
쐌 Engine brake does not function in “1” position. ..... Low &
reverse brake slippage
쐌 Engine brake functions in “1” position. ..... Reverse clutch slippage
Stall revolution within specifications:
쐌 Vehicle does not achieve speed of more than 80 km/h (50
MPH). ..... One-way clutch seizure in torque converter housing
CAUTION:
Be careful since automatic fluid temperature increases abnormally.
쐌 Slippage occurs in 3rd and 4th gears in “D” position. ..... High
clutch slippage
쐌 Slippage occurs in 2nd and 4th gear in “D” position. ..... Brake
band slippage
쐌 Engine brake does not function in 2nd and 3rd gears in “D”
position, 2nd gear in 2nd position, and 1st position. ..... Overrun clutch slippage
AT-62
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Stall Test (Cont’d)
Stall revolution less than specifications:
쐌 Poor acceleration during starts. ..... One-way clutch slippage in
torque converter
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT392H
AT-63
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Line Pressure Test
Line Pressure Test
쐌
쐌
NAAT0023
Location of line pressure test ports.
Always replace line pressure plugs as they are self-sealing bolts.
SAT209GA
LINE PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE
1.
2.
NAAT0023S01
Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add fluid
and oil.
Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until fluid and oil reach
operating temperature.
ATF operating temperature:
50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
SAT647B
3.
Install pressure gauge to corresponding line pressure port.
4.
쐌
Set parking brake and block wheels.
Continue to depress brake pedal fully while line pressure
test is being performed at stall speed.
SAT518GB
SAT519GB
SAT513G
AT-64
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Line Pressure Test (Cont’d)
5.
쐌
Start engine and measure line pressure at idle and stall speed.
When measuring line pressure at stall speed, follow the
stall test procedure.
Line pressure:
Refer to SDS, AT-356.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT493G
JUDGEMENT OF LINE PRESSURE TEST
Judgement
EC
NAAT0023S02
Suspected parts
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Line pressure is low in all positions.
Oil pump wear
Control piston damage
Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
Spring for pressure regulator valve damaged
Fluid pressure leakage between oil strainer and pressure regulator valve
Clogged strainer
쐌 Fluid pressure leakage between manual valve and particular clutch
쐌 For example, line pressure is:
— Low in “R” and “1” positions, but
— Normal in “D” and “2” positions.
Then, fluid leakage exists at or around low and reverse brake circuit.
Refer to “CLUTCH AND BAND CHART”, AT-17.
Line pressure is low in particular position.
At idle
Line pressure is high.
Line pressure is low.
At stall speed
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Mal-adjustment of throttle position sensor
Fluid temperature sensor damaged
Line pressure solenoid valve sticking
Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit
Pressure modifier valve sticking
Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
Open in dropping resistor circuit
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Mal-adjustment of throttle position sensor
Line pressure solenoid valve sticking
Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit
Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
Pressure modifier valve sticking
Pilot valve sticking
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
Road Test
DESCRIPTION
쐌
쐌
1.
2.
3.
NAAT0024
HA
NAAT0024S01
The purpose of the test is to determine overall performance of
A/T and analyze causes of problems.
The road test consists of the following three parts:
Check before engine is started
Check at idle
Cruise test
SC
EL
IDX
SAT786A
AT-65
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
쐌
쐌
Before road test, familiarize yourself with all test procedures
and items to check.
Conduct tests on all items until specified symptom is found.
Troubleshoot items which check out No Good after road test.
Refer to “ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION” and “TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS”,
AT-33 - AT-52 and AT-218 - AT-258.
SAT496G
1. CHECK BEFORE ENGINE IS STARTED
1
NAAT0024S02
CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP
1. Park vehicle on flat surface.
2. Move selector lever to “P” position.
3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
SAT967I
4. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.)
5. Does O/D OFF indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds?
SAT204K
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
Stop Road Test. Go to “O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On”, AT-221.
AT-66
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
2
GI
CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP
Does O/D OFF indicator lamp flicker for about 8 seconds?
MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT204K
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE (No Tools),
AT-48.
No
䊳
GO TO 3.
3
FE
CL
MT
CHECK NG ITEM
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Perform self-diagnosis and note NG items.
Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE (No Tools), AT-48.
䊳
Go to “2. CHECK AT IDLE”, AT-68.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-67
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
2. CHECK AT IDLE
1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
=NAAT0024S03
CHECK ENGINE START
Park vehicle on flat surface.
Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
Move selector lever to “P” or “N” position.
Turn ignition switch to start position.
Is engine started?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
Go to “Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N” Position”, AT-223.
2
1.
2.
3.
4.
CHECK ENGINE START
Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
Move selector lever to “D”, “1”, “2” or “R” position.
Turn ignition switch to start position.
Is engine started?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Go to “Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N” Position”, AT-223.
No
䊳
GO TO 3.
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CHECK VEHICLE MOVE
Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
Move selector lever to “P” position.
Release parking brake.
Push vehicle forward or backward.
Does vehicle move when it is pushed forward or backward?
SAT796A
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Go to “In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed”, AT-224.
No
䊳
GO TO 4.
4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CHECK VEHICLE MOVE
Apply parking brake.
Move selector lever to “N” position.
Turn ignition switch to “START” position and start engine.
Release parking brake.
Does vehicle move forward or backward?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Go to “In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves”, AT-225.
No
䊳
GO TO 5.
AT-68
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
5
GI
CHECK SHIFT SHOCK
1. Apply foot brake.
2. Move selector lever to “R” position.
3. Is there large shock when changing from “N” to “R” position?
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT082J
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Go to “Large Shock. “N” , “R” Position”, AT-227.
No
䊳
GO TO 6.
6
CL
MT
CHECK VEHICLE MOVE
1. Release foot brake for several seconds.
2. Does vehicle creep backward when foot brake is released?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 7.
No
䊳
Go to “Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position”, AT-229.
7
TF
PD
CHECK VEHICLE MOVE
AX
1. Move selector lever to “D”, “2” and “1” position and check if vehicle creeps forward.
2. Does vehicle creep forward in all three positions?
SU
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Go to “CRUISE TEST”, AT-69.
No
䊳
Go to “Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position”, AT-232.
BR
ST
RS
BT
3. CRUISE TEST
쐌
With CONSULT-II
쐌
쐌
NAAT0024S04
Check all items listed in Parts 1 through 3.
NAAT0024S0401
Using CONSULT-II, conduct a cruise test and record the result.
Print the result and ensure that shifts and lock-ups take place
as per “Shift Schedule”.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT601J
AT-69
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
CONSULT-II Setting Procedure
NAAT0024S0402
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector, which is located in instrument lower panel on
driver side.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
5.
Touch “A/T”.
6.
Touch “DATA MONITOR”.
7.
8.
Touch “MAIN SIGNALS” or “TCM INPUT SIGNALS”.
See “Numerical Display”, “Barchart Display” or “Line Graph
Display”.
SAIA0450E
SAT014K
SCIA5358E
SAT175K
AT-70
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
9.
Touch “SETTING” to set recording condition (“AUTO TRIG” or
“MANU TRIG”) and touch “BACK”.
10. Touch “Start”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT973J
11. When performing cruise test, touch “RECORD”.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT134K
12. After finishing cruise test part 1, touch “STOP”.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT135K
13. Touch “STORE” and touch “BACK”.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT987J
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT974J
AT-71
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
14.
15.
16.
17.
Touch “DISPLAY”.
Touch “PRINT”.
Check the monitor data printed out.
Continue cruise test part 2 and 3.
SAT975J
Without CONSULT-II
쐌
NAAT0024S0403
Accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor) can
be checked by voltage across terminals 41 and 42 of TCM.
SAT513J
AT-72
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
Cruise Test — Part 1
1
=NAAT0024S0404
GI
CHECK STARTING GEAR (D1) POSITION
MA
1. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes to warm engine oil and ATF up to operating temperature.
ATF operating temperature:
50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
2. Park vehicle on flat surface.
3. Set overdrive control switch to “ON” position.
4. Move selector lever to “P” position.
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT001J
5. Start engine.
6. Move selector lever to “D” position.
MT
TF
PD
SAT952I
7. Accelerate vehicle by constantly depressing accelerator pedal halfway.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SAT953I
8. Does vehicle start from D1?
Read gear position.
RS
Yes or No
BT
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
Go to “Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1”, AT-235.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-73
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
2
CHECK SHIFT UP (D1 TO D2)
Does A/T shift from D1 to D2 at the specified speed?
Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed.
Specified speed when shifting from D1 to D2:
Refer to Shift schedule, AT-356.
SAT954I
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 3.
No
䊳
Go to “A/T Does Not Shift: D1 , D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 , D2”, AT-238.
3
CHECK SHIFT UP (D2 TO D3)
Does A/T shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed?
Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed.
Specified speed when shifting from D2 to D3:
Refer to Shift schedule, AT-356.
SAT955I
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 4.
No
䊳
Go to “A/T Does Not Shift: D2 , D3”, AT-241.
AT-74
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4)
Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed?
Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed.
Specified speed when shifting from D3 to D4:
Refer to Shift schedule, AT-356.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT956I
FE
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 5.
No
䊳
Go to “A/T Does Not Shift: D3 , D4”, AT-244.
CL
MT
5
CHECK LOCK-UP (D4 TO D4 L/U)
Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed?
Read vehicle speed, throttle position when lock-up duty becomes 94%.
Specified speed when lock-up occurs:
Refer to Shift schedule, AT-356.
TF
PD
AX
SAT957I
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 6.
No
䊳
Go to “A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up”, AT-247.
SU
BR
ST
6
CHECK HOLD LOCK-UP
Does A/T hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds?
RS
Yes or No
BT
Yes
䊳
GO TO 7.
No
䊳
Go to “A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition”, AT-249.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-75
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
7
CHECK LOCK-UP OFF (D4 L/U TO D4)
1. Release accelerator pedal.
2. Is lock-up released when accelerator pedal is released?
SAT958I
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 8.
No
䊳
Go to “Lock-up Is Not Released”, AT-251.
8
CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D4 TO D3)
1. Decelerate vehicle by applying foot brake lightly.
2. Does engine speed return to idle smoothly when A/T is shifted from D4 to D3?
Read gear position and engine speed.
SAT959I
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Go to “Cruise Test — Part 2”, AT-77.
No
䊳
Go to “Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 , D3)”, AT-252.
AT-76
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
Cruise Test — Part 2
1
1.
2.
3.
4.
=NAAT0024S0405
GI
CHECK STARTING GEAR (D1) POSITION
MA
Confirm overdrive control switch is in “ON” position.
Confirm selector lever is in “D” position.
Accelerate vehicle by half throttle again.
Does vehicle start from D1?
Read gear position.
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT495G
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
Go to “Vehicle Does Not Start From D1”, AT-254.
2
MT
CHECK SHIFT UP AND SHIFT DOWN (D3 TO D4 TO D2)
TF
1. Accelerate vehicle to 80 km/h (50 MPH) as shown in illustration.
2. Release accelerator pedal and then quickly depress it fully.
3. Does A/T shift from D4 to D2 as soon as accelerator pedal is depressed fully?
Read gear position and throttle position.
PD
AX
SU
BR
SAT404H
ST
Yes or No
RS
Yes
䊳
GO TO 3.
No
䊳
Go to “A/T Does Not Shift: D3 , D4, AT-244 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 , D2”, AT-238.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-77
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
3
CHECK SHIFT UP (D2 TO D3)
Does A/T shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed?
Read gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed.
Specified speed when shifting from D2 to D3:
Refer to Shift schedule, AT-356.
SAT960I
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 4.
No
䊳
Go to “A/T Does Not Shift: D2 , D3”, AT-241.
4
CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4) AND ENGINE BRAKE
Release accelerator pedal after shifting from D2 to D3.
Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 and does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?
Read gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed.
SAT405H
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Go to “Cruise test — Part 3”, AT-79.
No
䊳
Go to “A/T Does Not Shift: D3 , D4”, AT-244.
AT-78
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
Cruise Test — Part 3
1
=NAAT0024S0406
GI
VEHICLE SPEED D4 POSITION
MA
1. Confirm overdrive control switch is in “ON” position.
2. Confirm selector lever is in “D” position.
3. Accelerate vehicle using half-throttle to D4.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT812A
䊳
CL
GO TO 2.
MT
2
CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D4 TO D3)
1. Release accelerator pedal.
2. Set overdrive control switch to “OFF” position while driving in D4.
3. Does A/T shift from D4 to D3 (O/D OFF)?
Read gear position and vehicle speed.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT999IA
BR
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 3.
No
䊳
Go to “A/T Does Not Shift: D4 , D3, When Overdrive Control Switch “ON” , “OFF”,
AT-255.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-79
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
3
CHECK ENGINE BRAKE
Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?
SAT999IA
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 4.
No
䊳
Go to “Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 , D3)”, AT-252.
4
CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D3 TO 22)
1. Move selector lever from “D” to “2” position while driving in D3 (O/D OFF).
2. Does A/T shift from D3 (O/D OFF) to 22?
Read gear position.
SAT791GB
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 5.
No
䊳
Go to “A/T Does Not Shift: D3 , 22, When Selector Lever “D” , “2” Position”, AT-256.
AT-80
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
5
GI
CHECK ENGINE BRAKE
Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?
MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT791GB
FE
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 6.
No
䊳
Go to “Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 , D3)”, AT-252.
6
CL
MT
CHECK SHIFT DOWN (22 TO 11)
1. Move selector lever from “2” to “1” position while driving in 22.
2. Does A/T shift from 22 to 11 position?
TF
PD
AX
SAT778B
SU
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 7.
No
䊳
Go to “A/T Does Not Shift: 22 , 11, When Selector lever “2” , “1” Position”, AT-257.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-81
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
7
CHECK ENGINE BRAKE
Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?
SAT778B
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools),
AT-48.
No
䊳
Go to “Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake”, AT-258.
AT-82
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
NAAT0233
Numbers are arranged in order of inspection.
Perform inspections starting with number one and work up.
Items
Symptom
Torque converter
is not locked up.
Condition
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
No Lock-up
Engagement/TCC
Inoperative
Torque converter
clutch piston slip.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Lock-up point is
extremely high or
low.
AT-247
Shift Shock
Sharp shock in
shifting from N to
D position.
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
Diagnostic Item
Reference Page
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, 200
3. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment
AT-275
4. Engine speed signal
AT-122
5. A/T fluid temperature sensor
AT-111
6. Line pressure test
AT-64
7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
AT-154
8. Control valve assembly
AT-272
9. Torque converter
AT-286
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
3. Line pressure test
AT-64
4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
AT-154
5. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-168
6. Control valve assembly
AT-272
7. Torque converter
AT-286
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, 200
3. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
AT-154
4. Control valve assembly
AT-272
1. Engine idling rpm
EC-792
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
3. Line pressure test
AT-64
4. A/T fluid temperature sensor
AT-111
5. Engine speed signal
AT-122
6. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-168
7. Control valve assembly
AT-272
8. Accumulator N-D
AT-272
9. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-209
10. Forward clutch
AT-320
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
OFF vehicle
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-83
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)
Items
Symptom
Too sharp a
shock in change
from D1 to D2.
Condition
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Too sharp a
shock in change
from D2 to D3.
ON vehicle
Diagnostic Item
Reference Page
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
2. Line pressure test
AT-64
3. Accumulator servo release
AT-272
4. Control valve assembly
AT-272
5. A/T fluid temperature sensor
AT-111
6. Brake band
AT-333
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
2. Line pressure test
AT-64
3. Control valve assembly
AT-272
4. High clutch
AT-317
5. Brake band
AT-333
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
2. Line pressure test
AT-64
3. Control valve assembly
AT-272
4. Brake band
AT-333
5. Overrun clutch
AT-320
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
2. Line pressure test
AT-64
3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve
AT-188
4. Control valve assembly
AT-272
1. Control valve assembly
AT-272
2. Low & reverse brake
AT-324
OFF vehicle
Shift Shock
Too sharp a
shock in change
from D3 to D4.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Gear change
shock felt during
deceleration by
releasing accelerator pedal.
ON vehicle
Large shock
ON vehicle
changing from 12
to 11 in 1 position. ON vehicle
AT-84
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)
Items
Symptom
Condition
Too high a gear
change point from
D1 to D2, from D2
ON vehicle
to D3, from D3 to
D4.
AT-238, 241, 244
Improper Shift
Timing
Gear change
ON vehicle
directly from D1 to
D3 occurs.
OFF vehicle
Too high a
change point from
D4 to D3, from D3 ON vehicle
to D2, from D2 to
D1.
Kickdown does
not operate when
depressing pedal
in D4 within kickdown vehicle
speed.
Improper Shift
Timing
ON vehicle
Kickdown operates or engine
overruns when
depressing pedal ON vehicle
in D4 beyond kickdown vehicle
speed limit.
Gear change from
22 to 23 in 2 posi- ON vehicle
tion.
Gear change from
11 to 12 in 1 posi- ON vehicle
tion.
Diagnostic Item
Reference Page
GI
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, 200
3. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-174
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-178
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Accumulator servo release
AT-272
3. Brake band
AT-333
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
FE
2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, 200
CL
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
MT
2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, 200
3. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-174
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-178
1. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, 200
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
3. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-174
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-178
1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment
AT-275
MA
EM
LC
EC
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment
AT-275
2. Manual control linkage adjustment
AT-275
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-85
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)
Items
Symptom
Failure to change
gear from D4 to
D3.
Condition
ON vehicle
Diagnostic Item
Reference Page
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve
AT-188
4. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-174
5. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-168
6. Control valve assembly
AT-272
7. Low & reverse brake
AT-324
8. Overrun clutch
AT-320
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
3. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-174
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-178
5. Control valve assembly
AT-272
6. High clutch
AT-317
7. Brake band
AT-333
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
3. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-182
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-178
5. Control valve assembly
AT-272
6. Low one-way clutch
AT-328
7. High clutch
AT-317
8. Brake band
AT-333
OFF vehicle
No Down Shift
Failure to change
gear from D3 to
D2 or from D4 to
D2.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
Failure to change
gear from D2 to
D1 or from D3 to
D1.
OFF vehicle
AT-86
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)
Items
Symptom
Failure to change
from D3 to 22
when changing
lever into 2 position.
AT-252
No Down Shift
Condition
ON vehicle
Diagnostic Item
Reference Page
1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment
AT-275
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve
AT-188
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-178
5. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-174
6. Control valve assembly
AT-272
7. Manual control linkage adjustment
AT-275
8. Brake band
AT-333
9. Overrun clutch
AT-320
1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment
AT-275
CL
2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, 200
MT
Does not change
from 12 to 11 in 1
position.
3. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-174
4. Control valve assembly
AT-272
5. Overrun clutch solenoid valve
AT-188
6. Overrun clutch
AT-320
7. Low & reverse brake
AT-324
1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment
AT-275
2. Manual control linkage adjustment
AT-275
3. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-174
4. Control valve assembly
AT-272
5. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, 200
6. Brake band
AT-333
1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment
AT-275
2. Manual control linkage adjustment
AT-275
3. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-178
4. Control valve assembly
AT-272
5. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, 200
6. High clutch
AT-317
7. Brake band
AT-333
MA
EM
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
GI
LC
EC
FE
TF
OFF vehicle
Failure to change
gear from D1 to
D2.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
No Up Shift
Failure to change
gear from D2 to
D3.
ON vehicle
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
OFF vehicle
SC
EL
IDX
AT-87
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)
Items
Symptom
Failure to change
gear from D3 to
D4.
Condition
Diagnostic Item
Reference Page
1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment
AT-275
2. Manual control linkage adjustment
AT-275
3. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-174
4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, 200
5. A/T fluid temperature sensor
AT-111
6. Brake band
AT-333
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
2. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment
AT-275
3. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, 200
4. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-174
5. Overrun clutch solenoid valve
AT-188
6. Control valve assembly
AT-272
7. A/T fluid temperature sensor
AT-111
8. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-168
9. Brake band
AT-333
10. Overrun clutch
AT-320
1. Manual control linkage adjustment
AT-275
2. Line pressure test
AT-64
3. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-168
4. Control valve assembly
AT-272
5. Reverse clutch
AT-314
6. High clutch
AT-317
7. Forward clutch
AT-320
8. Overrun clutch
AT-320
9. Low & reverse brake
AT-324
ON vehicle
1. Manual control linkage adjustment
AT-275
OFF vehicle
2. Low one-way clutch
AT-328
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
No Up Shift
A/T does not shift ON vehicle
to D4 when driving with overdrive
control switch ON.
OFF vehicle
Slips/Will Not
Engage
Vehicle will not
run in R position
(but runs in D, 2
and 1 positions).
Clutch slips.
Very poor acceleration.
AT-229
Vehicle will not
run in D and 2
positions (but
runs in 1 and R
positions).
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
AT-88
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)
Items
Symptom
Vehicle will not
run in D, 1, 2
positions (but
runs in R position). Clutch slips.
Very poor acceleration.
AT-232
Condition
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
Slips/Will Not
Engage
Clutches or
brakes slip somewhat in starting.
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
No creep at all.
AT-229, 232
OFF vehicle
Almost no shock
or clutches slipping in change
from D1 to D2.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Diagnostic Item
Reference Page
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Line pressure test
AT-64
3. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-168
4. Control valve assembly
AT-272
5. Accumulator N-D
AT-272
6. Reverse clutch
AT-314
7. High clutch
AT-317
8. Forward clutch
AT-320
9. Forward one-way clutch
AT-330
10. Low one-way clutch
AT-328
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Manual control linkage adjustment
AT-275
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
4. Line pressure test
AT-64
5. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-168
6. Control valve assembly
AT-272
7. Accumulator N-D
AT-272
8. Forward clutch
AT-320
9. Reverse clutch
AT-314
10. Low & reverse brake
AT-324
11. Oil pump
AT-297
12. Torque converter
AT-286
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Line pressure test
AT-64
3. Control valve assembly
AT-272
4. Forward clutch
AT-320
5. Oil pump
AT-297
6. Torque converter
AT-286
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
3. Line pressure test
AT-64
4. Accumulator servo release
AT-272
5. Control valve assembly
AT-272
6. Brake band
AT-333
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-89
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)
Items
Symptom
Condition
ON vehicle
Almost no shock
or slipping in
change from D2 to
D3 .
Diagnostic Item
Reference Page
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
3. Line pressure test
AT-64
4. Control valve assembly
AT-272
5. High clutch
AT-317
6. Forward clutch
AT-320
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
3. Line pressure test
AT-64
4. Control valve assembly
AT-272
5. High clutch
AT-317
6. Brake band
AT-333
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
3. Line pressure test
AT-64
4. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-168
5. Control valve assembly
AT-272
6. High clutch
AT-317
7. Forward clutch
AT-320
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
3. Line pressure test
AT-64
4. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-168
5. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-174
6. Control valve assembly
AT-272
7. Brake band
AT-333
8. Forward clutch
AT-320
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
3. Line pressure test
AT-64
4. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-168
5. Control valve assembly
AT-272
6. A/T fluid temperature sensor
AT-111
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
Almost no shock
or slipping in
change from D3 to
D4 .
OFF vehicle
Slips/Will Not
Engage
Races extremely
fast or slips in
changing from D4
to D3 when
depressing pedal.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Races extremely
fast or slips in
changing from D4
to D2 when
depressing pedal.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Races extremely
fast or slips in
changing from D3
to D2 when
depressing pedal.
ON vehicle
AT-90
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)
Items
Symptom
Races extremely
fast or slips in
changing from D3
to D2 when
depressing pedal.
Races extremely
fast or slips in
changing from D4
or D3 to D1 when
depressing pedal.
Condition
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Slips/Will Not
Engage
Diagnostic Item
Reference Page
7. Brake band
AT-333
8. Forward clutch
AT-320
9. High clutch
AT-317
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
3. Line pressure test
AT-64
4. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-168
5. Control valve assembly
AT-272
6. Forward clutch
AT-320
7. Forward one-way clutch
AT-330
8. Low one-way clutch
AT-328
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Manual control linkage adjustment
AT-275
3. Line pressure test
AT-64
4. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-168
5. Oil pump
AT-297
6. High clutch
AT-317
7. Brake band
AT-333
8. Low & reverse brake
AT-324
9. Torque converter
AT-286
10. Parking pawl components
AT-337
1. Ignition switch and starter
EL-16, and SC-10
2. Manual control linkage adjustment
AT-275
3. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment
AT-275
1. Manual control linkage adjustment
AT-275
2. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment
AT-275
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Line pressure test
AT-64
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, 200
5. Engine speed signal
AT-122
6. Oil pump
AT-297
7. Torque converter
AT-286
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
ON vehicle
Vehicle will not
run in any position.
TF
PD
OFF vehicle
Engine cannot be
started in P and N
ON vehicle
positions.
AT-223
Engine starts in
positions other
than P and N.
AT-223
ON vehicle
NOT USED
Transmission
noise in P and N
positions.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-91
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)
Items
Symptom
Condition
Vehicle moves
when changing
ON vehicle
into P position or
parking gear does
not disengage
when shifted out
OFF vehicle
of P position.
AT-224
Vehicle runs in N
position.
AT-225
Diagnostic Item
Reference Page
1. Manual control linkage adjustment
AT-275
2. Parking pawl components
AT-337
1. Manual control linkage adjustment
AT-275
2. Forward clutch
AT-320
3. Reverse clutch
AT-314
4. Overrun clutch
AT-320
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Manual control linkage adjustment
AT-275
3. Line pressure test
AT-64
4. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-168
5. Control valve assembly
AT-272
6. High clutch
AT-317
7. Brake band
AT-333
8. Forward clutch
AT-320
9. Overrun clutch
AT-320
1. Engine idling rpm
EC-792
1. Engine idling rpm
EC-792
2. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
AT-154
3. Control valve assembly
AT-272
OFF vehicle
4. Torque converter
AT-286
ON vehicle
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Reverse clutch
AT-314
3. Low & reverse brake
AT-324
4. High clutch
AT-317
5. Low one-way clutch
AT-328
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Brake band
AT-333
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Overrun clutch
AT-320
3. Forward one-way clutch
AT-330
4. Reverse clutch
AT-314
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
Vehicle braked
when shifting into
R position.
OFF vehicle
NOT USED
Excessive creep.
Engine stops
when shifting
lever into R, D, 2
and 1.
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
Vehicle braked by
gear change from
OFF vehicle
D1 to D2.
Vehicle braked by ON vehicle
gear change from
OFF vehicle
D2 to D3.
ON vehicle
Vehicle braked by
gear change from
OFF vehicle
D3 to D4.
AT-92
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)
Items
Symptom
Condition
Diagnostic Item
Reference Page
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment
AT-275
3. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-174
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-178
5. Control valve assembly
AT-272
6. Reverse clutch
AT-314
7. High clutch
AT-317
8. Brake band
AT-333
9. Low & reverse brake
AT-324
10. Oil pump
AT-297
11. Torque converter
AT-286
ON vehicle
1. Fluid level
AT-61
ON vehicle
2. Torque converter
AT-286
1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment
AT-275
2. Manual control linkage adjustment
AT-275
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, 200
5. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-174
6. Control valve assembly
AT-272
7. Overrun clutch solenoid valve
AT-188
8. Overrun clutch
AT-320
9. Low & reverse brake
AT-324
ON vehicle
Maximum speed
not attained.
Acceleration poor.
MA
OFF vehicle
NOT USED
Transmission
noise in D, 2, 1
and R positions.
Engine brake
does not operate
in “1” position.
AT-254
ON vehicle
GI
OFF vehicle
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-93
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)
Items
Symptom
Condition
ON vehicle
Transmission
overheats.
Diagnostic Item
Reference Page
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Engine idling rpm
EC-792
3. Accelerator pedal position sensor
(throttle position sensor)
AT-182
4. Line pressure test
AT-64
5. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-168
6. Control valve assembly
AT-272
7. Oil pump
AT-297
8. Reverse clutch
AT-314
9. High clutch
AT-317
10. Brake band
AT-333
11. Forward clutch
AT-320
12. Overrun clutch
AT-320
13. Low & reverse brake
AT-324
14. Torque converter
AT-286
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Reverse clutch
AT-314
3. High clutch
AT-317
4. Brake band
AT-333
5. Forward clutch
AT-320
6. Overrun clutch
AT-320
7. Low & reverse brake
AT-324
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Torque converter
AT-286
3. Oil pump
AT-297
4. Reverse clutch
AT-314
5. High clutch
AT-317
6. Brake band
AT-333
7. Forward clutch
AT-320
8. Overrun clutch
AT-320
9. Low & reverse brake
AT-324
1. Fluid level
AT-61
2. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
AT-154
3. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-178
4. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-174
5. Control valve assembly
AT-272
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
NOT USED
ATF shoots out
during operation.
White smoke
emitted from
exhaust pipe during operation.
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
Offensive smell at
fluid charging
OFF vehicle
pipe.
Engine is stopped
at R, D, 2 and 1
ON vehicle
positions.
AT-94
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
TCM Terminals and Reference Value
TCM Terminals and Reference Value
=NAAT0027
PREPARATION
쐌
GI
NAAT0027S01
Measure voltage between each terminal and terminal 25 or 48
by following “TCM INSPECTION TABLE”.
MA
EM
LC
AAT475A
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT217JB
TCM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUTNAAT0027S02
TCM INSPECTION TABLE
NAAT0027S03
(Data are reference values.)
Terminal
No.
1
2
Wire color
GY
BR/Y
Item
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
Condition
Line pressure
solenoid valve
PD
When releasing accelerator pedal after warm1.5 - 3.0V
ing up engine.
AX
When depressing accelerator pedal fully after
warming up engine.
SU
0V
When releasing accelerator pedal after warm5 - 14V
ing up engine.
Line pressure
solenoid valve
(with dropping
resistor)
TF
When depressing accelerator pedal fully after
warming up engine.
0V
When A/T performs lock-up.
8 - 15V
When A/T does not perform lock- up.
0V
BR
ST
3
G/OR
Torque converter
clutch solenoid
valve
5
L
CAN (high)
6
R
CAN (low)
—
—
—
—
or
10
W/R
RS
BT
When turning ignition switch to “ON”.
Battery voltage
HA
When turning ignition switch to “OFF”.
0V
SC
Power source
EL
IDX
AT-95
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
TCM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
Terminal
No.
11
12
19
20
25
26
Wire color
L/W
L/R
W/R
L/B
B
L/Y
Item
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
Condition
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
(When driving in “D1” or “D4”.)
Shift solenoid
valve A
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.
0V
(When driving in “D2” or “D3”.)
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
(When driving in “D1” or “D2”.)
Shift solenoid
valve B
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.
0V
(When driving in “D3” or “D4”.)
Power source
Same as No. 10
Overrun clutch
solenoid valve
When overrun clutch solenoid valve operates.
Battery voltage
When overrun clutch solenoid valve does not
operate.
0V
—
0V
Ground
When setting selector lever to “1” position.
PNP switch “1”
position
Battery voltage
When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V
27
G/W
When setting selector lever to “2” position.
PNP switch “2”
position
Battery voltage
When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V
28
29
R/Y
W
Power source
(Memory back-up)
W
Data link connector (RX)
31*
L
Data link connector (TX)
32
P/B
Battery voltage
When turning ignition switch to “ON”.
Battery voltage
When vehicle cruises at 30 km/h (19 MPH).
1V or more
Voltage rises
gradually in
response to
vehicle speed.
When vehicle parks.
0V
or
Revolution sensor
(Measure in AC
range)
30*
When turning ignition switch to “OFF”.
or
—
—
—
—
Ignition switch “ON”.
4.5 - 5.5V
Ignition switch “OFF”.
0V
Sensor power
AT-96
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
TCM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
Terminal
No.
34
Wire color
L
Item
PNP switch “D”
position
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
Condition
When setting selector lever to “D” position.
Battery voltage
35
Y
When setting selector lever to “R” position.
MA
EM
When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V
PNP switch “R”
position
GI
Battery voltage
LC
When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V
36
38
P
W
PNP switch “N” or
“P” position
Turbine revolution
sensor (Measure
in AC range)
When setting selector lever to “N” or “P” posi- Battery volttion.
age
EC
When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V
FE
When engine is running at 1,000 rpm
1.2V
Voltage rises
gradually in
response to
engine speed.
CL
MT
39
W/B
Engine speed
signal
Refer to EC-149, “ECM INSPECTION
TABLE”.
—
TF
W/L
Vehicle speed
sensor
When moving vehicle at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2
MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more.
Voltage varies
between less
than 1.0V and
more than
4.5V.
41
P/L
When depressing accelerator pedal slowly
after warming up engine.
(Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle
position.)
Fully-closed
throttle:
0.5V - 0.7V
Fully-open
throttle:
4V
AX
Accelerator pedal
position sensor
(throttle position
sensor)
42
B
Sensor ground
—
0V
BR
46
W/G
Transfer control
unit
Refer to TF section, “Transfer Control Unit
Terminals and Reference Value”.
47
R
40
48
B
A/T fluid temperature sensor
—
When ATF temperature is 20°C (68°F).
1.5V
When ATF temperature is 80°C (176°F).
0.5V
Ground
—
0V
PD
SU
ST
RS
BT
*: These terminals are connected to the Data link connector for CONSULT-II.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-97
CAN COMMUNICATION
System Description
System Description
NAAT0234
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many
electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with
2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Unit
NAAT0235
Go to CAN system, when selecting your car model from the following table.
Body type
Axle
Wide/Wagon
4WD (All-mode)
4WD (Part time)
Engine
2WD
4WD (Part time)
VQ35DE
Brake control
VDC
ABS
CAN communication unit
ECM
X
X
X
X
TCM
X
X
X
X
Transfer control unit
X
Steering angle sensor
X
X
X
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
X
X
X
Combination meter
X
X
X
X
CAN communication type (Reference
page)
Type 1 (EL-447)
Type 2 (EL-447)
Type 3 (EL-447)
CAN system trouble diagnosis (Reference
page)
Type 1 (EL-447)
Type 2 (EL-447)
Type 3 (EL-447)
X: Applicable
TYPE 1
System Diagram
NAAT0235S01
NAAT0235S0101
SEL683Y
AT-98
CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN Communication Unit (Cont’d)
Input/Output Signal Chart
NAAT0235S0102
GI
T: Transmit R: Receive
Signals
ECM
TCM
Transfer
control unit
ABS actuaSteering
tor and elec- Combination
angle sensor
tric unit
meter
(control unit)
Engine speed signal
T
R
R
Accelerator pedal position signal
T
R
R
Closed throttle position signal
T
R
Wide open throttle position signal
T
R
VDC operation signal
R
R
T
TCS operation signal
R
R
T
ABS operation signal
R
R
T
Output shaft revolution signal
R
ETC fail signal
T
During shifting signal
R
T
EM
R
LC
EC
FE
CL
R
R
T
R
Steering angle sensor signal
Wheel speed sensor signal
R
MT
R
T
Stop lamp switch signal
MA
R
T
R
T
MIL signal
T
R
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
R
Fuel consumption signal
T
R
T
R
Vehicle speed signal
R
T
Lock-up prohibition signal
T
R
Lock-up signal
R
T
TF
PD
AX
SU
Neutral range switch signal
R
T
Parking range switch signal
R
T
Overdrive control switch signal
R
T
A/C compressor feedback signal
T
R
Fuel level sensor signal
R
T
A/T position indicator signal
T
R
O/D OFF indicator signal
T
R
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-99
CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN Communication Unit (Cont’d)
TYPE 2
System Diagram
NAAT0235S02
NAAT0235S0201
SEL682Y
Input/Output Signal Chart
NAAT0235S0202
T: Transmit R: Receive
Signals
ECM
TCM
Steering angle
sensor
ABS actuator
and electric
unit (control
unit)
Combination
meter
R
Engine speed signal
T
R
Accelerator pedal position signal
T
R
Closed throttle position signal
T
R
Wide open throttle position signal
T
R
VDC operation signal
R
T
TCS operation signal
R
T
ABS operation signal
R
T
Steering angle sensor signal
T
R
MIL signal
T
R
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
R
Fuel consumption signal
T
R
T
R
Vehicle speed signal
R
T
Stop lamp switch signal
R
Lock-up prohibition signal
T
R
Lock-up signal
R
T
T
Neutral range switch signal
R
T
Parking range switch signal
R
T
Overdrive control switch signal
R
T
A/C compressor feedback signal
T
R
Fuel level sensor signal
R
T
A/T position indicator signal
T
R
O/D OFF indicator signal
T
R
AT-100
CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN Communication Unit (Cont’d)
TYPE 3
System Diagram
NAAT0235S03
GI
NAAT0235S0301
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL684Y
FE
Input/Output Signal Chart
NAAT0235S0302
T: Transmit R: Receive
Signals
ECM
TCM
Engine speed signal
T
Closed throttle position signal
T
R
Wide open throttle position signal
T
R
Stop lamp switch signal
Combination meter
CL
R
R
Lock-up prohibition signal
T
R
Lock-up signal
R
T
MT
T
TF
Neutral range switch signal
R
T
Parking range switch signal
R
T
Overdrive control switch signal
R
T
MIL signal
T
R
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
R
Fuel consumption signal
T
R
Vehicle speed signal
R
T
A/C compressor feedback signal
T
R
Fuel level sensor signal
R
T
A/T position indicator signal
T
R
O/D OFF indicator signal
T
R
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-101
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN
Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN
NAAT0185
MAT311B
AT-102
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN (Cont’d)
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0185S01
GI
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
10
Wire color
W/R
Item
W/R
When turning ignition switch to “ON”.
Battery voltage
When turning ignition switch to “OFF”.
0V
Power source
or
19
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
Condition
Power source
MA
EM
LC
Same as No. 10
EC
25
B
Ground
—
0V
FE
When turning ignition switch to “OFF”.
28
R/Y
Power source
(Memory back-up)
or
When turning ignition switch to “ON”.
48
B
Battery voltage
Ground
—
Battery voltage
CL
MT
0V
TF
PD
AX
SU
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAAT0223
BR
CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 1
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M119, M120 terminals 10, 19, 28 and ground.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT611J
SC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
EL
IDX
AT-103
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2
CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 2
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M120 terminal 28 and ground.
SAT612JC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
3
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
쐌 Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM harness connector M119, M120 terminals 10, 19 and 28
(Main harness)
쐌 Ignition switch and 10A or 7.5A fuse [No. 18 or 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
Refer to EL-11, “Schematic”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
4
CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Check continuity between TCM harness connector M120 terminals 25, 48 and ground. Refer to wiring diagram — AT —
MAIN.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
AT-104
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Description
Description
쐌
쐌
NAAT0028
The PNP switch assemble includes a transmission range
switch.
The transmission range switch detects the selector position
and sends a signal to the TCM.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT136K
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0028S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
26
Wire color
L/Y
Item
PNP switch “1”
position
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
Condition
When setting selector lever to “1” position.
G/W
PNP switch “2”
position
When setting selector lever to “2” position.
PD
Battery voltage
AX
When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V
27
TF
Battery voltage
SU
When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V
34
L
PNP switch “D”
position
When setting selector lever to “D” position.
Battery voltage
When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V
35
Y
PNP switch “R”
position
When setting selector lever to “R” position.
ST
Battery voltage
When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V
36
P
PNP switch “N” or
“P” position
BR
When setting selector lever to “N” or “P” posi- Battery volttion.
age
RS
BT
When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: PNP SW/CIRC
: P0705
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal from the switch based on the
gear position.
HA
NAAT0028S03
Check item (Possible cause)
SC
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The PNP switch circuit is open or
shorted.)
쐌 PNP switch
EL
IDX
AT-105
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Description (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0028S01
SAT014K
PBIB2308E
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULTII.
3) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least
5 consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.3V
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON” or “OFF”)
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
AT-106
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW
Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW
NAAT0186
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT312B
AT-107
IDX
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAAT0029
CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out “P”, “R”, “N”, “D”, “2” and “1” position switches moving selector lever to each position. Check the signal of the
selector lever position is indicated properly.
SAT643J
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
2
CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M120 terminals 26, 27, 34, 35, 36 and ground while moving selector
lever through each position.
MTBL0205
SAT517J
Does battery voltage exist (B) or non-existent (0)?
Yes
䊳
GO TO 4.
No
䊳
GO TO 3.
AT-108
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
쐌 PNP switch
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-109.
쐌 Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch (Main harness)
쐌 Harness for short or open between PNP switch and TCM (Main harness)
쐌 Diode (P, N position)
쐌 Ignition switch and 10A fuse [No. 18, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
Refer to EL-11, “Schematic”.
MA
EM
LC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
4
EC
FE
CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-106.
CL
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
5
MT
CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
TF
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
PD
AX
SU
Component Inspection
NAAT0030
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
1.
Lever position
SAT517GB
NAAT0030S02
Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2 and between terminals 3 and 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 while moving manual shaft through
each position.
BR
ST
Terminal No.
P
1-2
R
3-5
N
1-2
D
3-7
2
3-8
1
3-9
3-4
RS
3-6
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT843BG
AT-109
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Component Inspection (Cont’d)
2.
3.
If NG, check again with manual control linkage disconnected
from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to step 1.
If OK on step 2, adjust manual control linkage. Refer to AT-275.
SAT807B
4.
5.
6.
If NG on step 2, remove PNP switch from A/T and check continuity of PNP switch terminals. Refer to step 1.
If OK on step 4, adjust PNP switch. Refer to AT-275.
If NG on step 4, replace PNP switch.
SAT386HC
AT-110
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Description
Description
NAAT0031
The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature
and sends a signal to the TCM.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT342HA
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT021J
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR
MODE
NAAT0031S04
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Condition
Specification
Cold [20°C (68°F)]
"
Hot [80°C (176°F)]
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Approximately 1.5V
"
Approximately 0.5V
Approximately 2.5 kΩ
"
Approximately 0.3 kΩ
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Wire color
42
B
47
R
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
Condition
—
0V
When ATF temperature is 20°C (68°F).
1.5V
When ATF temperature is 80°C (176°F).
0.5V
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
: P0710
AX
SU
Item
Throttle position
sensor
(Ground)
PD
NAAT0031S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
TF
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM receives an excessively low or high
voltage from the sensor.
BR
ST
RS
NAAT0031S03
BT
Check item (Possible cause)
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
쐌 A/T fluid temperature sensor
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-111
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Description (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0031S01
SAT014K
PBIB2308E
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least
10 minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to maintain continuously.)
CMPS·RPM (REF): 450 rpm or more
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
AT-112
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS
Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS
NAAT0187
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT313B
AT-113
IDX
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAAT0032
INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
GO TO 6.
2
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITH CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”.
Voltage:
Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)]:
Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V
SAT614J
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
3
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following item:
쐌 Harness for short to ground or short to power or open between TCM, ECM and terminal cord assembly (Main harness)
쐌 Ground circuit for ECM.
Refer to EC-165, “Wiring Diagram”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-114
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector on the right side of transfer assmebly.
3. Check resistance between terminals 8 and 9 when A/T is cold [20°C (68°F)].
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT697I
Is resistance approx. 2.5 kΩ?
Yes
䊳
GO TO 7.
No
䊳
GO TO 5.
5
CL
MT
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 A/T fluid temperature sensor
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-116.
쐌 Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
TF
OK or NG
PD
AX
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
6
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)
SU
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M120 terminal 47 and ground while warming up A/T.
Voltage:
Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)]:
Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT518J
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
SC
EL
IDX
AT-115
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-112.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 8.
8
CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection
NAAT0033
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
쐌
쐌
NAAT0033S01
For removal, refer to AT-272.
Check resistance between terminals 8 and 9 while changing
temperature as shown at left.
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance
20 (68)
Approximately 2.5 kΩ
80 (176)
Approximately 0.3 kΩ
SAT687I
AT-116
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Description
Description
NAAT0034
The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the out put shaft
parking pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal
is sent to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT136K
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0034S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
29
Wire color
W
Item
Revolution sensor
(Measure in AC
range)
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
Condition
TF
PD
When vehicle cruises at 30 km/h (19 MPH).
1V or more
Voltage rises
gradually in
response to
vehicle speed.
AX
When vehicle parks.
0V
SU
BR
42
B
Sensor ground
—
0V
ST
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT
: P0720
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM does not receive the proper voltage
signal from the sensor.
NAAT0034S03
Check item (Possible cause)
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
쐌 Revolution sensor
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-117
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Description (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0034S01
SAT014K
SCIA5358E
SAT014K
CAUTION:
쐌 Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
쐌 Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the
tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
2) Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE·MTR”
value.
If the check result is NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,
AT-203.
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
3) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULTII.
4) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least
5 consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
Driving pattern: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine
load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this
test.
If the check result is NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,
AT-120.
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
5) Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive
seconds.
CMPS·RPM (REF): 3,500 rpm or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
Driving pattern: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine
load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this
test.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
PBIB2308E
AT-118
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T
NAAT0188
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT314B
AT-119
IDX
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAAT0035
INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 2.
No (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 5.
2
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITH CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” while driving.
Check the value changes according to driving speed.
SAT614J
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
3
CHECK REVOLUTION SENSOR
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-121.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace revolution sensor.
4
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
쐌 Harness for short or open between TCM and revolution sensor.
쐌 Harness for short or open between revolution sensor and ECM.
쐌 Ground circuit for ECM
Refer to EC-165, “WIRING DIAGRAM”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-120
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
GI
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M120 terminal 29 and ground while driving.
(Measure with AC range.)
Voltage:
At 0 km/h (0 MPH):
0V
At 30 km/h (19 MPH):
1V or more
(Voltage rises gradually in response to vehicle speed.)
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT519J
MT
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
6
TF
CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-118.
PD
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
7
AX
SU
CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
BR
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
ST
RS
BT
Component Inspection
NAAT0036
REVOLUTION SENSOR
쐌
쐌
For removal, refer to AT-272.
Check resistance between terminals 1, 2 and 3.
Terminal No.
2
500 - 650Ω
2
3
No continuity
1
3
No continuity
AT-121
SC
Resistance
1
SAT210IA
HA
NAAT0036S01
EL
IDX
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
Description
Description
NAAT0037
The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM.
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0037S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
Wire color
Item
39
W/G
Engine speed signal
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
Condition
Refer to EC-149, “ECM INSPECTION
TABLE”.
—
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: ENGINE SPEED SIG
: P0725
Malfunction is detected when ...
NAAT0037S03
Check item (Possible cause)
TCM does not receive the proper voltage 쐌 Harness or connectors
signal from ECM.
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0037S01
SAT014K
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least
10 consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
PBIB2308E
AT-122
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS
Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS
NAAT0189
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT315B
AT-123
IDX
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAAT0038
CHECK DTC WITH ECM
쐌 Check P code with CONSULT-II.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-102, “DESCRIPTION”.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 2.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Check ignition signal circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-748, “Component Description”.
2
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITH CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “ENGINE SPEED”.
Check engine speed changes according to throttle position.
SAT645J
Refer to EC-149, “ECM INSPECTION TABLE”.
Yes
䊳
GO TO 5.
No
䊳
GO TO 3.
3
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
쐌 Harness for short or open between TCM and ECM
쐌 Resistor
쐌 Ignition coil
Refer to EC-748, “Component Description”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-124
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M120 terminal 39 and ground.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT520J
Refer to EC-149, “ECM INSPECTION TABLE”.
Yes
䊳
GO TO 5.
No
䊳
GO TO 3.
5
FE
CL
MT
CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-122.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
6
TF
CHECK TCM INSPECTION
PD
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
AX
SU
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-125
DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
Description
Description
쐌
쐌
쐌
NAAT0039
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM
self-diagnosis.
This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into
first gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused
by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by
mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking,
improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
Gear position
1
2
3
4
Shift solenoid valve A
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
Shift solenoid valve B
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0039S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
11
Wire color
L/W
12
L/R
Item
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
Condition
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
(When driving in “D1” or “D4”.)
Shift solenoid
valve A
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.
0V
(When driving in “D2” or “D3”.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
(When driving in “D1” or “D2”.)
Shift solenoid
valve B
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.
0V
(When driving in “D3” or “D4”.)
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
NAAT0039S03
This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque
converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is higher than the position (1st) supposed
by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio
exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when either shift solenoid valve A
is stuck open or shift solenoid valve B is stuck open.
Gear position supposed by TCM
1
2
3
4
In case of gear position with no malfunctions
1
2
3
4
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck open
2*
2
3
3
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck open
4*
3
3
4
*: P0731 is detected.
Diagnostic trouble code
: A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
: P0731
Malfunction is detected when ...
A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear
position even if electrical circuit is good.
AT-126
Check item (Possible cause)
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
Each clutch
Hydraulic control circuit
DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
GI
PROCEDURE
NAAT0039S01
SAT014K
SCIA5358E
SAT021J
CAUTION:
쐌 Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
쐌 Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the
tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
TESTING CONDITIONS:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of
test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT-II
1) Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT-II.
2) Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor
is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm
up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down
the fluid).
3) Select “1ST GR FNCTN P0731” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”.
4) Accelerate vehicle to 10 to 20 km/h (6 to 12 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8 (at all times during step
4)
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
쐌 Check that “GEAR” shows “2” after releasing pedal.
5) Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 10 to 20 km/h (6
to 12 MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or
“COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to
“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-130.
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to the
following step.
쐌 Check that “GEAR” shows “1” when depressing accelerator pedal to WOT.
쐌 If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long
time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case
a 1st trip DTC other than P0731 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
6) Stop vehicle.
7) Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting
referring to the table below.)
Vehicle condition
No malfunction exists
Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when
screen is changed to 1 , 2 , 3 , 4
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
1,2,3,4
IDX
AT-127
DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)
2,2,3,3
Malfunction for P0731 exists.
4,3,3,4
8)
Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer
to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.)
Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-130.
Refer to shift schedule, AT-356.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
AT-128
DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
Wiring Diagram — AT — 1ST
Wiring Diagram — AT — 1ST
NAAT0190
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT731A
AT-129
IDX
DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAAT0040
CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-272.
2. Check shift solenoid valve operation.
쐌 Shift solenoid valve A
쐌 Shift solenoid valve B
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-131.
SAT648I
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly.
2
CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1. Disassemble control valve assembly.
Refer to “Control Valve Assembly”, AT-301.
2. Check to ensure that:
쐌 Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.
쐌 Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
쐌 Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.
쐌 Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
SAT367H
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair control valve assembly.
3
CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-127.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
AT-130
DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
Component Inspection
Component Inspection
=NAAT0041
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A AND B
쐌
NAAT0041S01
For removal, refer to AT-272.
MA
Resistance Check
쐌
NAAT0041S0101
Check resistance between terminals (3 or 2) and ground.
Solenoid valve
GI
Terminal No.
Shift solenoid valve A
3
Shift solenoid valve B
2
Ground
EM
Resistance (Approx.)
20 - 40Ω
LC
SAT649I
Operation Check
쐌
EC
NAAT0041S0102
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminals (3 or 2) and ground.
FE
CL
MT
SAT648I
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-131
DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION
Description
Description
쐌
쐌
쐌
NAAT0042
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM
self-diagnosis.
This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into
second gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not
caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but
by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking,
improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
Gear position
1
2
3
4
Shift solenoid valve A
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
Shift solenoid valve B
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0042S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
12
Wire color
L/R
Item
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
Condition
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
(When driving in “D1” or “D2”.)
Shift solenoid
valve B
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.
0V
(When driving in “D3” or “D4”.)
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
NAAT0042S03
This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque
converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is higher than the position (2nd) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the
ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck
open.
Gear position supposed by TCM
1
2
3
4
In case of gear position with no malfunctions
1
2
3
4
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B
stuck open
4
3*
3
4
*: P0732 is detected.
Diagnostic trouble code
: A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
: P0732
Malfunction is detected when ...
A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear
position even if electrical circuit is good.
AT-132
Check item (Possible cause)
쐌 Shift solenoid valve B
쐌 Each clutch
쐌 Hydraulic control circuit
DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
GI
PROCEDURE
NAAT0042S01
SAT014K
SCIA5358E
SAT021J
CAUTION:
쐌 Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
쐌 Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the
tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
TESTING CONDITIONS:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy
of test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT-II
1) Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT-II.
2) Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor
is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm
up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down
the fluid).
3) Select “2ND GR FNCTN P0732” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”.
4) Accelerate vehicle to 25 to 30 km/h (16 to 19 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8 (at all times during step
4)
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
쐌 Check that “GEAR” shows “3” or “4” after releasing pedal.
5) Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 25 to 30 km/h (16
to 19 MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or
“COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to
“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-136.
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to
following step.
쐌 Check that “GEAR” shows “2” when depressing accelerator pedal to WOT.
쐌 If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long
time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case
a 1st trip DTC other than P0732 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
6) Stop vehicle.
7) Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting
referring to the table below.)
Vehicle condition
Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when
screen is changed to 1 , 2 , 3 , 4
No malfunction exists
1,2,3,4
Malfunction for P0732 exists.
4,3,3,4
AT-133
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)
8)
Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer
to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE”, AT-136. Refer to shift schedule, AT-356.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
AT-134
DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION
Wiring Diagram — AT — 2ND
Wiring Diagram — AT — 2ND
NAAT0191
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT732A
AT-135
IDX
DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAAT0043
CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-272.
2. Check shift solenoid valve operation.
쐌 Shift solenoid valve B
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-137.
SAT650I
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly.
2
CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1. Disassemble control valve assembly.
Refer to “Control Valve Assembly”, AT-301.
2. Check to ensure that:
쐌 Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.
쐌 Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
쐌 Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.
쐌 Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
SAT367H
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair control valve assembly.
3
CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-133.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
AT-136
DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION
Component Inspection
Component Inspection
NAAT0044
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
쐌
NAAT0044S01
For removal, refer to AT-272.
MA
Resistance Check
쐌
NAAT0044S0101
Check resistance between terminal 2 and ground.
Solenoid valve
Shift solenoid valve B
GI
Terminal No.
2
Ground
EM
Resistance (Approx.)
20 - 40Ω
LC
SAT651I
Operation Check
쐌
EC
NAAT0044S0102
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 2 and ground.
FE
CL
MT
SAT650I
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-137
DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION
Description
Description
쐌
쐌
쐌
NAAT0045
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM
self-diagnosis.
This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into
third gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused
by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by
mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking,
improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning servo piston
or brake band, etc.
Gear position
1
2
3
4
Shift solenoid valve A
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
Shift solenoid valve B
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0045S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
11
Wire color
L/W
Item
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
Condition
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
(When driving in “D1” or “D4”.)
Shift solenoid
valve A
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.
0V
(When driving in “D2” or “D3”.)
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
NAAT0045S03
This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque
converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is higher than the position (3rd) supposed
by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio
exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve A is stuck
closed.
Gear position supposed by TCM
1
2
3
4
In case of gear position with no malfunctions
1
2
3
4
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A
stuck closed
1
1
4*
4
*: P0733 is detected.
Diagnostic trouble code
: A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
: P0733
Malfunction is detected when ...
A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear
position even if electrical circuit is good.
AT-138
Check item (Possible cause)
쐌 Shift solenoid valve A
쐌 Each clutch
쐌 Hydraulic control circuit
DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
GI
PROCEDURE
NAAT0045S01
SAT014K
SCIA5358E
SAT021J
CAUTION:
쐌 Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
쐌 Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the
tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
TESTING CONDITIONS:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy
of test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT-II
1) Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT-II.
2) Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor
is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm
up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down
the fluid).
3) Select “3RD GR FNCTN P0733” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”.
4) Accelerate vehicle to 35 to 45 km/h (22 to 28 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8 (at all times during step
4)
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
쐌 Check that “GEAR” shows “4” after releasing pedal.
5) Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI” from a speed of 35 to 45 km/h (22 to 28
MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to
“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-142.
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to
following step.
쐌 Check that “GEAR” shows “3” when depressing accelerator pedal with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”.
쐌 If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long
time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case
a 1st trip DTC other than P0733 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
6) Stop vehicle.
7) Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting
referring to the table below.)
Vehicle condition
Gear on actual transmission shift pattern
when screen is changed to 1 , 2 , 3 , 4
No malfunction exists.
1,2,3,4
Malfunction for P0733 exists.
1,1,4,4
AT-139
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)
8)
Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer
to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE”, AT-142.
Refer to shift schedule, AT-356.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
AT-140
DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION
Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RD
Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RD
NAAT0192
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT733A
AT-141
IDX
DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAAT0046
CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-272.
2. Check shift solenoid valve operation.
쐌 Shift solenoid valve A
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-143.
SAT653I
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly.
2
CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1. Disassemble control valve assembly.
Refer to “Control Valve Assembly”, AT-301.
2. Check to ensure that:
쐌 Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.
쐌 Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
쐌 Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.
쐌 Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
SAT367H
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair control valve assembly.
3
CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-139.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
AT-142
DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION
Component Inspection
Component Inspection
NAAT0047
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
쐌
NAAT0047S01
For removal, refer to AT-272.
MA
Resistance Check
쐌
NAAT0047S0101
Check resistance between terminal 3 and ground.
Solenoid valve
Shift solenoid valve A
GI
Terminal No.
3
Ground
EM
Resistance (Approx.)
20 - 40Ω
LC
SAT654I
Operation Check
쐌
EC
NAAT0047S0102
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 3 and ground.
FE
CL
MT
SAT653I
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-143
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Description
Description
쐌
쐌
쐌
NAAT0048
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM
self-diagnosis.
This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into
fourth gear position or the torque converter clutch does not
lock up as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical
malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid
valve operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter
clutch, etc.
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR
MODE
NAAT0048S04
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Condition
Specification
Line pressure solenoid valve
duty
Small throttle opening (Low line pressure)
"
Large throttle opening (High line pressure)
Approximately 24%
"
Approximately 95%
Gear position
1
2
3
4
Shift solenoid valve A
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
Shift solenoid valve B
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0048S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
1
2
11
12
Wire color
GY
BR/Y
L/W
L/R
Item
Line pressure
solenoid valve
Line pressure
solenoid valve
(with dropping
resistor)
Shift solenoid
valve A
Shift solenoid
valve B
Condition
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
When releasing accelerator pedal after warm1.5 - 3.0V
ing up engine.
When depressing accelerator pedal fully after
warming up engine.
0V
When releasing accelerator pedal after warm5 - 14V
ing up engine.
When depressing accelerator pedal fully after
warming up engine.
0V
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
(When driving in “D1” or “D4”.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.
0V
(When driving in “D2” or “D3”.)
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
(When driving in “D1” or “D2”.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.
0V
(When driving in “D3” or “D4”.)
AT-144
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
=NAAT0048S03
This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque
converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is much lower than the position (4th)
supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be much less than normal. In
case the ratio does not reach the specified value, TCM judges this
diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B, line
pressure solenoid valve are stuck closed and shift solenoid valve
A is stuck open.
Gear position supposed by TCM
1
2
3
4
In case of gear position with no malfunctions
1
2
3
4
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B
stuck closed
1
2
2
1*
*: P0734 is detected.
Diagnostic trouble code
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
Malfunction is detected when ...
: A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear
position even if electrical circuit is good.
: P0734
Check item (Possible cause)
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
Line pressure solenoid valve
Each clutch
Hydraulic control circuit
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-145
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0048S01
SAT014K
SCIA5358E
SAT021J
CAUTION:
쐌 Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
쐌 Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the
tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
TESTING CONDITIONS:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy
of test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT-II
1) Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT-II.
2) Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor
is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm
up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down
the fluid).
3) Select “4TH GR FNCTN P0734” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”.
4) Accelerate vehicle to 55 to 65 km/h (34 to 40 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 5.5/8 (at all times during step
4)
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
쐌 Check that “GEAR” shows “3” after releasing pedal.
5) Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI” from a speed of 55 to 65 km/h (34 to 40
MPH) until “TESTING” has turned to “STOP VEHICLE” or
“COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to
“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-149.
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to
following step.
쐌 Check that “GEAR” shows “4” when depressing accelerator pedal with 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”.
쐌 If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long
time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case
a 1st trip DTC other than P0734 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
6) Stop vehicle.
7) Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting
referring to the table below.)
Vehicle condition
Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when
screen is changed to 1 , 2 , 3 , 4
No malfunction exists
1,2,3,4
Malfunction for P0734 exists.
1,2,2,1
AT-146
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)
8)
Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer
to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE”, AT-149.
Refer to shift schedule, AT-356.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-147
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Wiring Diagram — AT — 4TH
Wiring Diagram — AT — 4TH
NAAT0193
MAT912A
AT-148
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAAT0049
GI
CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4)
MA
During “Cruise test — Part 1”, AT-73.
Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed?
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT988H
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 9.
No
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
CL
MT
CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Perform line pressure test. Refer to AT-64.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-149
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK SOLENOID VALVES
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-272.
2. Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-153.
SAT158J
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Replace solenoid valve assembly.
4
CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-301.
2. Check to ensure that:
쐌 Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.
쐌 Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
쐌 Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.
쐌 Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
SAT367H
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair control valve.
AT-150
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
GI
CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4)
Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed?
MA
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 9.
No
䊳
Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
6
EM
CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
LC
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-272.
2. Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-153.
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SAT158J
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Replace solenoid valve assembly.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-151
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-301.
2. Check line pressure circuit valves for sticking.
쐌 Pressure regulator valve
쐌 Pilot valve
쐌 Pressure modifier valve
SAT367H
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Repair control valve.
8
CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4)
Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed?
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
9
CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-146.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Perform “Cruise test — Part 1” again and return to the start point of this flow chart.
AT-152
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Component Inspection
Component Inspection
NAAT0050
SOLENOID VALVES
쐌
NAAT0050S01
For removal, refer to AT-272.
MA
Resistance Check
쐌
NAAT0050S0101
Check resistance between terminals (3, 2 or 6) and ground.
Solenoid valve
GI
Terminal No.
Shift solenoid valve A
3
Shift solenoid valve B
2
Line pressure solenoid valve
6
EM
Resistance (Approx.)
20 - 40Ω
LC
2.5 - 5Ω
EC
Ground
FE
CL
MT
SAT159J
Operation Check
쐌
NAAT0050S0102
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminals (3, 2 or 6) and ground.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT158J
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-153
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Description
Description
NAAT0051
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the
gear in “D4”, by the TCM in response to signals sent from the
vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. Lock-up piston operation will then be controlled.
Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 2/8) in lock-up
condition, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is
a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
SAT342HA
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR
MODE
NAAT0051S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Torque converter clutch
solenoid valve duty
Condition
Specification
Lock-up “OFF”
"
Lock-up “ON”
Approximately 4%
"
Approximately 94%
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0051S03
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
3
Wire color
Item
G/OR
Torque converter
clutch solenoid
valve
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
Condition
When A/T performs lock-up.
8 - 15V
When A/T does not perform lock-up.
0V
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: TCC SOLENOID/CIRC
: P0740
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM detects an improper voltage drop
when it tires to operate the solenoid
valve.
AT-154
NAAT0051S04
Check item (Possible cause)
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
쐌 Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Description (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
GI
PROCEDURE
NAAT0051S01
SAT014K
PBIB2308E
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II and wait at least 1 second.
3) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least
5 consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 80 km/h (50 MPH) or more
THROTTLE POSI: 0.5/8 - 1.0/8
Selector lever: D position
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-155
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV
NAAT0194
MAT735A
AT-156
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAAT0052
GI
CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE
MA
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector on the right side of transfer assembly.
3. Check resistance between terminal 7 and ground.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT156J
Is resistance approx. 10 - 20Ω?
Yes
䊳
GO TO 3.
No
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
MT
CHECK VALVE OPERATION
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-272.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-158.
쐌 Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
TF
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3
PD
AX
SU
CHECK RESISTANCE
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 7 and TCM harness connector terminal 3. Refer to wiring diagram — AT — TCV.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
4. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4
CL
BR
ST
RS
BT
CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-155.
HA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
SC
EL
IDX
AT-157
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection
NAAT0053
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVENAAT0053S01
쐌
For removal, refer to AT-272.
Resistance Check
쐌
NAAT0053S0101
Check resistance between terminal 7 and ground.
Solenoid valve
Torque converter clutch
solenoid valve
Terminal No.
7
Ground
Resistance (Approx.)
10 - 20Ω
SAT160J
Operation Check
쐌
NAAT0053S0102
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 7 and ground.
SAT161J
AT-158
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Description
Description
쐌
쐌
쐌
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
NAAT0054
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM
self-diagnosis.
This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into
fourth gear position or the torque converter clutch does not
lock up as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical
malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid
valve operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter
clutch, etc.
Specification
Torque converter clutch
solenoid valve duty
Lock-up “OFF”
"
Lock-up “ON”
Approximately 4%
"
Approximately 94%
Line pressure solenoid
valve duty
Small throttle opening (Low line pressure)
"
Large throttle opening (High line pressure)
Approximately 24%
"
Approximately 95%
2
GY
BR/Y
Item
Line pressure
solenoid valve
Line pressure
solenoid valve
(with dropping
resistor)
LC
EC
MT
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
1
EM
CL
NAAT0054S03
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Wire color
MA
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR
MODE
NAAT0054S02
FE
Condition
Terminal
No.
GI
Condition
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
TF
PD
When releasing accelerator pedal after warm1.5 - 3.0V
ing up engine.
AX
When depressing accelerator pedal fully after
warming up engine.
SU
0V
When releasing accelerator pedal after warm5 - 14V
ing up engine.
When depressing accelerator pedal fully after
warming up engine.
0V
When A/T performs lock-up.
8 - 15V
When A/T does not perform lock- up.
0V
BR
ST
3
G/OR
Torque converter
clutch solenoid
valve
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
RS
NAAT0054S04
This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque
converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is much lower than the position (4th)
supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be much less than normal. In
case the ratio does not reach the specified value, TCM judges this
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-159
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Description (Cont’d)
diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B, line
pressure solenoid valve and torque converter clutch solenoid valve
are stuck closed.
Gear position supposed by TCM
1
2
3
4
In case of gear position with no malfunctions
1
2
3
4
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck closed
1
2
2
1*
*: P0744 is detected.
Diagnostic trouble code
Malfunction is detected when ...
: A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good.
: P0744
Check item (Possible cause)
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
쐌
Line pressure solenoid valve
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Each clutch
Hydraulic control circuit
Shift solenoid valve B
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0054S01
SAT014K
SCIA5358E
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT-II
1) Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT-II.
2) Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor
is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm
up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down
the fluid).
3) Select “TCC S/V FNCTN P0744” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”.
4)
SAT021J
쐌
쐌
Accelerate vehicle to more than 67 to 100 km/h (42 to 62 MPH)
and maintain the following condition continuously until “TESTING” has turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately
30 seconds after “TESTING” shows.)
THROTTLE POSI: 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 (at all times during step 4)
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
TCC S/V DUTY: More than 94%
VHCL/S SE·A/T: Constant speed of more than 67 to 100
km/h (42 to 62 MPH)
Check that “GEAR” shows “4”.
For shift schedule, refer to SDS, AT-356.
AT-160
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Description (Cont’d)
쐌
If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long
time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. In case a 1st trip DTC
other than P0744 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
5) Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer
to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.)
Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-163.
Refer to shift schedule, AT-356.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-161
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG
NAAT0195
MAT913A
AT-162
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
=NAAT0055
GI
CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4)
MA
During “Cruise test — Part 1”, AT-73.
Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed?
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT988H
CL
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
쐌 GO TO 10.
쐌 And check for proper lock-up.
No
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
MT
CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Perform line pressure test. Refer to AT-64.
TF
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
3
PD
AX
CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-301.
2. Check to ensure that:
쐌 Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.
쐌 Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
쐌 Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.
쐌 Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT367H
HA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair control valve.
SC
EL
IDX
AT-163
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4)
Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 5.
No
䊳
Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
5
CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-160.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
쐌 GO TO 10.
쐌 And check for proper lock-up.
6
CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-272.
2. Check line pressure solenoid valve operation. Refer to AT-167.
SAT158J
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Replace solenoid valve assembly.
AT-164
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
GI
CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-301.
2. Check line pressure circuit valves for sticking.
쐌 Pressure regulator valve
쐌 Pilot valve
쐌 Pressure modifier valve
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT367H
CL
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Repair control valve.
8
MT
CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4)
Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed?
TF
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 9.
No
䊳
Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
9
PD
AX
CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-160.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
쐌 GO TO 10.
쐌 And check for proper lock-up.
SU
BR
ST
10
CHECK LOCK-UP CONDITION
During “Cruise test — Part 1”, AT-73.
Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed?
RS
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Perform “Cruise test − Part 1” again and return to the start point of this flow chart.
No
䊳
GO TO 11.
BT
HA
11
CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-272.
2. Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve operation.
Refer to AT-167.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 12.
NG
䊳
Replace solenoid valve assembly.
AT-165
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
12
CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-301.
2. Check control valves for sticking.
쐌 Torque converter clutch control valve
쐌 Torque converter clutch relief valve
SAT367H
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 13.
NG
䊳
Repair control valve
13
CHECK LOCK-UP CONDITION
Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 14.
No
䊳
Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
14
CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-160.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Perform “Cruise test — Part 1” again and return to the start point of this flow chart.
AT-166
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Component Inspection
Component Inspection
NAAT0056
SOLENOID VALVES
쐌
NAAT0056S01
For removal, refer to AT-272.
MA
Resistance Check
쐌
NAAT0056S0101
Check resistance between terminals (6 or 7) and ground.
Solenoid valve
Line pressure solenoid valve
Torque converter clutch
solenoid valve
GI
Terminal No.
6
EM
Resistance (Approx.)
2.5 - 5Ω
LC
Ground
7
10 - 20Ω
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT159J
Operation Check
쐌
NAAT0056S0102
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminals (6 or 7) and ground.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT158J
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-167
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Description
Description
NAAT0057
The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge
pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent
from the TCM.
The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the
closed throttle position switch is “ON”. To confirm the line
pressure duty cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle)
should be open until the closed throttle position switch is
“OFF”.
SAT341H
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR
MODE
NAAT0057S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Line pressure solenoid
valve duty
Condition
Specification
Small throttle opening (Low line pressure)
"
Large throttle opening (High line pressure)
Approximately 24%
"
Approximately 95%
NOTE:
The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the closed throttle position switch is “ON”. To confirm the line pressure duty
cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle) should be open until the closed throttle position switch is “OFF”.
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0057S03
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
1
2
Wire color
Item
GY
Line pressure
solenoid valve
BR/Y
Line pressure
solenoid valve
(with dropping
resistor)
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
Condition
When releasing accelerator pedal after warm1.5 - 3.0V
ing up engine.
When depressing accelerator pedal fully after
warming up engine.
0V
When releasing accelerator pedal after warm5 - 14V
ing up engine.
When depressing accelerator pedal fully after
warming up engine.
0V
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
: P0745
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM detects an improper voltage drop
when it tries to operate the solenoid
valve.
AT-168
NAAT0057S04
Check item (Possible cause)
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
쐌 Line pressure solenoid valve
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Description (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
GI
PROCEDURE
NAAT0057S01
SAT014K
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
2) Depress accelerator pedal completely and wait at least 1 second.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
PBIB2308E
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-169
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV
Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV
NAAT0196
MAT914A
AT-170
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAAT0058
GI
CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE
MA
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector on the right side of transfer assembly.
3. Check resistance between terminal 6 and ground.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT162J
Is resistance approx. 2.5 - 5Ω?
Yes
䊳
GO TO 3.
No
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
CL
MT
CHECK VALVE OPERATION
1. Remove control valve assembly.
Refer to AT-272.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 Line pressure solenoid valve
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-173.
쐌 Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
TF
PD
OK or NG
AX
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-171
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
CHECK POWER SOURCE AND DROPPING RESISTOR CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Check resistance between sub-harness connector B64 terminal 6 and TCM harness connector M119 terminal 2.
SAT522J
Is resistance approx. 11.2 - 12.8Ω?
Yes
䊳
GO TO 5.
No
䊳
GO TO 4.
4
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
쐌 Dropping resistor
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-173.
쐌 Harness for short or open between TCM harness connector M119 terminal 2 and terminal cord assembly (Main harness)
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
5
CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Check continuity between terminal 6 and TCM harness connector M119 terminal 1. Refer to wiring diagram — AT —
LPSV.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground or to power.
3. Reinstall any part removed.
Yes
䊳
GO TO 6.
No
䊳
Repair or replace harness between TCM terminal 1 and terminal cord assembly.
AT-172
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
GI
CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-169.
MA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
7
EM
CHECK TCM INSPECTION
LC
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
EC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
FE
CL
MT
Component Inspection
NAAT0059
LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
쐌
NAAT0059S01
For removal, refer to AT-272.
Resistance Check
쐌
NAAT0059S0101
Check resistance between terminal 6 and ground.
Solenoid valve
Line pressure solenoid valve
Terminal No.
6
Ground
TF
PD
Resistance (Approx.)
AX
2.5 - 5Ω
SU
SAT657I
Operation Check
쐌
NAAT0059S0102
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 6 and ground.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT658I
DROPPING RESISTOR
쐌
Check resistance between two terminals.
Resistance: 11.2 - 12.8Ω
NAAT0059S02
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT848BD
AT-173
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
Description
Description
NAAT0060
Shift solenoid valves A and B are turned “ON” or “OFF” by the TCM
in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed and
throttle position sensors. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum
position.
SAT341H
Gear position
1
2
3
4
Shift solenoid valve A
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
Shift solenoid valve B
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0060S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
11
Wire color
L/W
Item
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
Condition
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
(When driving in “D1” or “D4”.)
Shift solenoid
valve A
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.
0V
(When driving in “D2” or “D3”.)
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: SFT SOL A/CIRC
: P0750
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM detects an improper voltage drop
when it tires to operate the solenoid
valve.
NAAT0060S03
Check item (Possible cause)
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
쐌 Shift solenoid valve A
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0060S01
SAT014K
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine.
3) Drive vehicle in “D” position and allow the transmission to shift
“1” , “2” (“GEAR”).
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
PBIB2308E
AT-174
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A
NAAT0197
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT738A
AT-175
IDX
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAAT0061
CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector on the right side of transfer assembly.
3. Check resistance between terminal 3 and ground.
SAT164J
Is resistance approx. 20 - 40Ω?
Yes
䊳
GO TO 3.
No
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
CHECK VALVE OPERATION
1. Remove control valve assembly.
Refer to AT-272.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 Shift solenoid valve A
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-177.
쐌 Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
3
CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 3 and TCM harness connector terminal 11. Refer to wiring diagram — AT —
SSV/A.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
4. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4
CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-174.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
AT-176
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
GI
CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
MA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
EM
LC
EC
Component Inspection
NAAT0062
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
쐌
NAAT0062S01
For removal, refer to AT-272.
Resistance Check
쐌
NAAT0062S0101
Check resistance between terminal 3 and ground.
Solenoid valve
Shift solenoid valve A
FE
Terminal No.
3
Ground
CL
Resistance (Approx.)
20 - 40Ω
MT
SAT654I
Operation Check
쐌
NAAT0062S0102
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 3 and ground.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT653I
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-177
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
Description
Description
NAAT0063
Shift solenoid valves A and B are turned “ON” or “OFF” by the TCM
in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed and
throttle position sensors. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum
position.
SAT341H
Gear position
1
2
3
4
Shift solenoid valve A
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
Shift solenoid valve B
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0063S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
12
Wire color
L/R
Item
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
Condition
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
(When driving in “D1” or “D2”.)
Shift solenoid
valve B
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.
0V
(When driving in “D3” or “D4”.)
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: SFT SOL B/CIRC
: P0755
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM detects an improper voltage drop
when it tires to operate the solenoid
valve.
NAAT0063S03
Check item (Possible cause)
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
쐌 Shift solenoid valve B
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0063S01
SAT014K
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
2) Drive vehicle in “D” position and allow the transmission to shift
1 , 2 , 3 (“GEAR”).
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
PBIB2308E
AT-178
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B
NAAT0198
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT739A
AT-179
IDX
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAAT0064
CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector on the right side of transfer assembly.
3. Check resistance between terminal 2 and ground.
SAT166J
Is resistance approx. 20 - 40Ω?
Yes
䊳
GO TO 3.
No
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
CHECK VALVE OPERATION
1. Remove control valve assembly.
Refer to AT-272.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 Shift solenoid valve B
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-181.
쐌 Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
3
CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 2 and TCM harness connector terminal 12. Refer to wiring diagram — AT —
SSV/B.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
4. Reinstall any part removed.
Is resistance approx. 0Ω?
Yes
䊳
GO TO 4.
No
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4
CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-178.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
AT-180
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
GI
CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
MA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
EM
LC
EC
Component Inspection
NAAT0065
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
쐌
NAAT0065S01
For removal, refer to AT-272.
Resistance Check
쐌
NAAT0065S0101
Check resistance between terminal 2 and ground.
Solenoid valve
Shift solenoid valve B
FE
Terminal No.
2
Ground
CL
Resistance (Approx.)
20 - 40Ω
MT
SAT651I
Operation Check
쐌
NAAT0065S0102
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 2 and ground.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT650I
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-181
DTC P1705 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR (THROTTLE
POSITION SENSOR)
Description
Description
NAAT0236
The accelerator pedal position sensor is part of the system that
controls throttle position. Accelerator pedal position signal is sent
to the ECM. And the signal is also sent to TCM as throttle valve
position signal.
SAT516KA
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR
MODE
NAAT0236S01
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Accelerator pedal position
sensor (throttle position sensor)
Condition
Specification
Fully-closed throttle
Approximately 0.5V
Fully-open throttle
Approximately 4V
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0236S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
Wire color
32
R
41
P/L
42
B
Item
Condition
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
Ignition switch ON.
4.5 - 5.5V
Ignition switch OFF.
0V
When depressing accelerator pedal slowly
after warming up engine.
(Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle
position.)
Fully-closed
throttle: 0.5V
Fully-open
throttle: 4V
Sensor power
Accelerator pedal
position sensor
(throttle position
sensor)
Sensor ground
—
AT-182
0V
DTC P1705 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR (THROTTLE
POSITION SENSOR)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
On Board Diagnosis Logic
=NAAT0237
Diagnostic trouble code TP SEN/CIRC A/T with CONSULT-II or
P1705 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM receives an
excessively low or high voltage from the ECM.
GI
MA
EM
LC
Possible Cause
EC
NAAT0239
Check the following items.
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
쐌 Accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor)
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-183
DTC P1705 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR (THROTTLE
POSITION SENSOR)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation
Procedure
NAAT0240
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before
conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
SAT014K
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
SCIA5358E
2)
3)
SAT014K
4)
NAAT0240S01
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Accelerator pedal condition
Accelerator pedal position sensor
(THRTL POS SEN)
Fully released
Less than 4.7V
Partially depressed
0.1 - 4.6V
Fully depressed
1.9 - 4.6V
If the check result is NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,
AT-224.
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least
3 consecutive seconds. Then release accelerator pedal completely.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN (electric throttle control actuator):
Approximately 3V or less
Selector lever: D position
If the check result is NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,
AT-224.
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 3 consecutive
seconds. Then release accelerator pedal completely.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
Accelerator pedal: Wide open throttle
Selector lever: D position
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
PBIB2308E
AT-184
NAAT0240S02
DTC P1705 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR (THROTTLE
POSITION SENSOR)
Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS
Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS
NAAT0199
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT316B
AT-185
IDX
DTC P1705 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR (THROTTLE
POSITION SENSOR)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAAT0241
CHECK DTC WITH ECM
쐌 Check P code with CONSULT-II “ENGINE”.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-174, “Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”.
OK or NG
OK (with CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 2.
OK (without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Check accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor) circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-603, “DTC P0226 APP SENSOR”.
2
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (With CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “THRTL POS SEN”.
Voltage:
Fully-closed throttle:
Approximately 0.5V
Fully-open throttle:
Approximately 4V
SAT614J
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Check harness for short or open between ECM and TCM regarding accelerator pedal
position sensor (throttle position sensor) circuit. (Main harness)
AT-186
DTC P1705 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR (THROTTLE
POSITION SENSOR)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (Without CONSULT-II)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M120 terminals 41 (P/L) and 42 (B) while accelerator pedal is
depressed slowly.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT349JB
Voltage:
Fully-closed throttle valve:
Approximately 0.5V
Fully-open throttle valve:
Approximately 4V
(Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle position.)
CL
MT
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Check harness for short or open between ECM and TCM regarding accelerator pedal
position sensor (throttle position sensor) circuit. (Main harness)
4
TF
PD
CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-205.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
5
AX
SU
CHECK TCM INSPECTION
BR
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-187
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Description
Description
NAAT0068
The overrun clutch solenoid valve is activated by the TCM in
response to signals sent from the park/neutral position (PNP)
switch, overdrive control switch, vehicle speed and throttle position
sensors. The overrun clutch operation will then be controlled.
SAT341H
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0068S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
20
Wire color
L/B
Item
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
Condition
Overrun clutch
solenoid valve
When overrun clutch solenoid valve operates.
Battery voltage
When overrun clutch solenoid valve does not
operate.
0V
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC
: P1760
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM detects an improper voltage drop
when it tries to operate the solenoid
valve.
NAAT0068S03
Check item (Possible cause)
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
쐌 Overrun clutch solenoid valve
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0068S01
SAT014K
SCIA5358E
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve accuracy of
test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine.
3) Accelerate vehicle to a speed of more than 10 km/h (6MPH)
in “D” position (OD “ON”).
4) Release accelerator pedal completely in “D” position (OD
“OFF”).
AT-188
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Description (Cont’d)
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-189
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV
Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV
NAAT0200
MAT741A
AT-190
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAAT0069
GI
CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE
MA
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector on the right side of transfer assembly.
3. Check resistance between terminal 4 and ground.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT170J
Is resistance approx. 20 - 40Ω?
Yes
䊳
GO TO 3.
No
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
CL
MT
CHECK VALVE OPERATION
1. Remove control valve assembly.
Refer to AT-272.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 Overrun clutch solenoid valve
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-192.
쐌 Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
TF
PD
OK or NG
AX
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
SU
3
CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 4 and TCM harness connector terminal 20. Refer to wiring diagram — AT —
OVRCSV.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
4. Reinstall any part removed.
BR
ST
RS
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4
BT
HA
CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-188.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
SC
EL
IDX
AT-191
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5
CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection
NAAT0070
OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
쐌
NAAT0070S01
For removal, refer to AT-272.
Resistance Check
쐌
NAAT0070S0101
Check resistance between terminal 4 and ground.
Solenoid valve
Overrun clutch solenoid valve
Terminal No.
4
Ground
Resistance (Approx.)
20 - 40Ω
SAT139K
Operation Check
쐌
NAAT0070S0102
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 4 and ground.
SAT688I
AT-192
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
Description
Description
NAAT0172
The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature
and sends a signal to the TCM.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT342HA
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT021J
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR
MODE
NAAT0172S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Condition
A/T fluid temperature
sensor
Specification
Cold [20°C (68°F)]
"
Hot [80°C (176°F)]
Approximately 1.5V
"
Approximately 0.5V
Approximately 2.5 kΩ
"
Approximately 0.3 kΩ
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
10
19
28
Wire color
W/R
W/R
R/Y
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
Condition
When turning ignition switch to “ON”.
Battery voltage
When turning ignition switch to “OFF”.
0V
Power source
Same as No. 10
or
B
Throttle position
sensor
(Ground)
47
R
A/T fluid temperature sensor
BR
ST
RS
When turning ignition switch to “OFF”.
Battery voltage
When turning ignition switch to “ON”.
Battery voltage
Power source
(Memory back-up)
42
AX
SU
Item
Power source
PD
NAAT0172S03
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
TF
BT
HA
—
0V
When ATF temperature is 20°C (68°F).
1.5V
When ATF temperature is 80°C (176°F).
0.5V
SC
EL
IDX
AT-193
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
Description (Cont’d)
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN
: 8th judgement flicker
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM receives an excessively low or high
voltage from the sensor.
NAAT0172S04
Check item (Possible cause)
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
쐌 A/T fluid temperature sensor
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0172S01
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT-II
1) Start engine.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D” position, vehicle speed higher than 20
km/h (12 MPH).
SAT014K
SCIA5358E
No Tools
Start engine.
Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D” position, vehicle speed higher than 20
km/h (12 MPH).
3) Perform self-diagnosis.
Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools),
AT-48.
1)
2)
SAT674I
AT-194
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS
Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS
NAAT0201
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT317B
AT-195
IDX
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAAT0173
INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
GO TO 6.
2
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITH CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”.
Voltage:
Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)]:
Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V
SAT614J
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
3
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
쐌 Harness for short to ground or short to power or open between TCM, ECM and terminal cord assembly (Main harness)
쐌 Ground circuit for ECM.
Refer to EC-165, “Wiring Diagram”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-196
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector on the right side of transfer assmebly.
3. Check resistance between terminals 8 and 9 when A/T is cold [20°C (68°F)].
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT697I
Is resistance approx. 2.5 kΩ?
Yes
䊳
GO TO 7.
No
䊳
GO TO 5.
5
CL
MT
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 A/T fluid temperature sensor
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-116.
쐌 Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
TF
OK or NG
PD
AX
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
6
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)
SU
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M120 terminal 47 and ground while warming up A/T.
Voltage:
Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)]:
Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT518J
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
SC
EL
IDX
AT-197
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7
CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 1
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M119, M120 terminals 10, 19, 28 and ground.
SAT611J
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
GO TO 9.
8
CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 2
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M120 terminal 28 and ground.
SAT612JC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
GO TO 9.
9
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
쐌 Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 10, 19 and 28 (Main harness)
쐌 Ignition switch and 10A or 7.5A fuse [No. 18 or 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
Refer to EL-11, “Schematic”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 10.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-198
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
10
GI
CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Check continuity between TCM terminals 25, 48 and ground. Refer to wiring diagram — AT — MAIN.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
MA
EM
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 11.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
11
LC
EC
CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-112.
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 12.
12
CL
MT
CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
TF
PD
AX
SU
Component Inspection
NAAT0174
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
쐌
쐌
NAAT0174S01
For removal, refer to AT-272.
Check resistance between terminals 8 and 9 while changing
temperature as shown at left.
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance
20 (68)
Approximately 2.5 kΩ
80 (176)
Approximately 0.3 kΩ
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT687I
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-199
DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR
Description
Description
NAAT0071
The vehicle speed sensor·MTR is built into the speedometer
assembly. The sensor functions as an auxiliary device to the revolution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will then use a
signal sent from the vehicle speed sensor·MTR.
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0071S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
40
Wire color
W/L
Item
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
Condition
Vehicle speed
sensor
When moving vehicle at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2
MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more.
Voltage varies
between less
than 1V and
more than
4.5V
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR
: 2nd judgement flicker
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM does not receive the proper voltage
signal from the sensor.
NAAT0071S03
Check item (Possible cause)
쐌 Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
쐌 Vehicle speed sensor
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0071S01
SAT014K
CAUTION:
쐌 Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
쐌 If conducting this “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”
again, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
5 seconds before continuing.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine and accelerate vehicle from 0 to 25 km/h (0 to 6
MPH).
SCIA5358E
AT-200
DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR
Description (Cont’d)
No Tools
Start engine.
Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D” position and vehicle speed higher than 25
km/h (16 MPH).
3) Perform self-diagnosis.
Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools),
AT-48.
1)
2)
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT668I
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-201
DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR
NAAT0202
MAT318B
AT-202
DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAAT0072
GI
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL.
MA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·MTR” while driving.
Check the value changes according to driving speed.
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT614J
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M120 terminal 40 and ground while driving at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2
MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more.
MT
TF
PD
AX
SAT528J
Does battery voltage vary between less than 1V and more than 4.5V?
Yes
䊳
GO TO 3.
No
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
BR
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
쐌 Vehicle speed sensor and ground circuit for vehicle speed sensor
Refer to EL-35, “Component Parts and Harness Connector Location”.
쐌 Harness for short or open between TCM and vehicle speed sensor (Main harness)
쐌 Harness for short or open between ABS actuator and electrical unit and combination meter
HA
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-200.
OK or NG
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
RS
BT
䊳
OK
ST
OK or NG
OK
3
SU
SC
EL
IDX
AT-203
DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-204
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Description
Description
NAAT0242
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for
real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication
line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a
vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN
communication, control units are connected with 2 communication
lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information
transmission with less wiring. Each control units transmits/receives
data but selectively reads required data only.
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0242S01
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
Terminal
No.
Wire color
5
L
CAN (high)
—
—
—
6
R
CAN (low)
—
—
—
Item
Condition
FE
CL
MT
*: This terminal is connected to the ECM.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NAAT0243
Diagnostic trouble code CAN COMM CIRCUIT or U1000 with
CONSULT-II or 12th judgement flicker without CONSULT-II is
detected when TCM cannot communicate to other control unit.
TF
PD
AX
SU
Possible Cause
Check harness or connector.
(CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
NAAT0244
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-205
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation
Procedure
NAAT0245
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
SAT014K
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1)
2)
3)
NAAT0245S01
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 6 seconds or start engine and wait for at least 6
seconds.
NAAT0245S02
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Wait at least 6 seconds or start engine and wait at least 6
seconds.
Perform self-diagnosis.
Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO
TOOLS), AT-48.
SCIA5358E
SAT683K
AT-206
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN
Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN
NAAT0246
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT320B
AT-207
IDX
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAAT0247
CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. The “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” is detected.
PCIA0061E
Yes or No?
Yes
䊳
Print out CONSULT-II screen, go to EL-447, “CAN Communication Unit”.
No
䊳
INSPECTION END
AT-208
DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR
Description
Description
NAAT0224
The turbine revolution sensor detects input shaft rpm (revolutions
per minute). It is located on the input side of the automatic transmission. The vehicle speed sensor A/T (Revolution sensor) is
located on the output side of the automatic transmission. With the
two sensors, input and output shaft rpms are accurately detected.
The result is optimal shift timing during deceleration and improved
shifting.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT136K
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0224S01
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
38
Wire color
W
Item
Turbine revolution
sensor
(Measure in AC
range)
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
Condition
When engine is running at 1,000 rpm
1.2V
Voltage rises
gradually in
response to
engine speed.
TF
PD
AX
SU
42
B
Sensor ground
—
0V
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: TURBINE REV
: 10th judgement flicker
Malfunction is detected when ...
BR
ST
NAAT0224S02
Check item (Possible cause)
쐌 Harness or connectors
TCM does not receive the proper voltage
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
signal from the sensor.
쐌 Turbine revolution sensor
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-209
DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR
Description (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0224S03
SAT014K
SCIA5358E
CAUTION:
쐌 Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
쐌 If conducting this “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”
again, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
5 seconds before continuing.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT-II
1) Start engine.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D”, vehicle speed higher than 40 km/h (25
MPH), engine speed higher than 1,500 rpm, throttle opening
greater than 1.0/8 of the full throttle position and driving for
more than 5 seconds.
No Tools
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D”, vehicle speed higher than 40 km/h (25
MPH), engine speed higher than 1,500 rpm, throttle opening
greater than 1/8 of the full throttle position and driving for more
than 5 seconds.
3) Perform self-diagnosis.
Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools),
AT-48.
SAT635I
AT-210
DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR
Wiring Diagram — AT — TRSA/T
Wiring Diagram — AT — TRSA/T
NAAT0225
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT319B
AT-211
IDX
DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
NAAT0226
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “TURBINE REV”. Check the value changes according to engine speed.
SAT740J
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M120 terminal 38 and ground. (Measure in AC range.)
SAT140K
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check harness for short or open between TCM and turbine revolution sensor.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
3
CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-210.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
AT-212
DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminal for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
MA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
EM
LC
EC
Component Inspection
NAAT0227
TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR
쐌
NAAT0227S01
Check resistance between terminals 1, 2 and 3.
Terminal No.
FE
Resistance (Approx.)
1
2
2.4 - 2.8 kΩ
1
3
No continuity
2
3
No continuity
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT141K
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-213
DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)
Description
Description
NAAT0207
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the A/T.
SAT574J
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: CONTROL UNIT (RAM)
: CONTROL UNIT (ROM)
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM memory (RAM) or (ROM) is malfunctioning.
NAAT0207S01
Check item (Possible cause)
TCM
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0207S02
SAT014K
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
for A/T with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine.
3) Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
SCIA5358E
AT-214
DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
=NAAT0208
GI
CHECK DTC
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II.
2. Touch “ERASE”.
PERFORM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE.
See previous page.
Is the “CONTROL UNIT (RAM) or CONTROL UNIT (ROM)” displayed again?
Yes
䊳
Replace TCM.
No
䊳
INSPECTION END
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-215
DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM)
Description
Description
NAAT0215
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the A/T.
SAT574J
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: CONT UNIT (EEP ROM)
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM memory (EEP ROM) is malfunctioning.
NAAT0215S01
Check item (Possible cause)
TCM
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0215S02
SAT014K
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
for A/T with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine.
3) Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
SCIA5358E
AT-216
DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1
=NAAT0216
GI
CHECK DTC
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II.
2. Move selector lever to “R” position.
3. Depress accelerator pedal (Full throttle position).
4. Touch “ERASE”.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” position for 10 seconds.
PERFORM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE.
See previous page.
Is the “CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM)” displayed again?
Yes
䊳
Replace TCM.
No
䊳
INSPECTION END
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-217
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC
NAAT0203
MAT321B
AT-218
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT241B
IDX
AT-219
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC (Cont’d)
MAT229B
AT-220
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On
O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On
NAAT0073
SYMPTOM:
O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on for about 2 seconds
when turning ignition switch to “ON”.
1
CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 1
GI
MA
EM
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M119, M120 terminals 10, 19, 28 and ground.
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT611J
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
2
MT
TF
CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 2
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M120 terminal 28 and ground.
PD
AX
SU
BR
SAT612JC
ST
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 3.
3
RS
BT
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
쐌 Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM harness connector M119, M120 terminals 10, 19 and 28
(Main harness)
쐌 Ignition switch and 10A or 7.5A fuse [No. 18 or 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
Refer to EL-11, “Schematic”.
HA
SC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
EL
IDX
AT-221
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On (Cont’d)
4
CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Check continuity between TCM harness connector M120 terminals 25, 48 and ground. Refer to wiring diagram — AT —
MAIN.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5
CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
쐌 Fuse
쐌 O/D OFF indicator lamp
쐌 Harness for short or open between ignition switch and O/D OFF indicator lamp
쐌 Harness for short or open between O/D OFF indicator lamp and TCM
OK or NG
Yes
䊳
GO TO 6.
No
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
6
CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
7
CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-222
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N” Position
Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N”
Position
GI
=NAAT0074
SYMPTOM:
Engine cannot be started with selector lever in “P” or “N”
position.
Engine cannot be started with selector lever in “P”Engine can
be started with selector lever in “D”, “2”, “1” or “R” position.
1
CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
MA
EM
LC
With CONSULT-II
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit?
EC
Without CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit?
FE
CL
MT
SAT367J
TF
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705”, AT-105.
No
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
PD
CHECK PNP SWITCH INSPECTION
AX
Check for short or open of PNP switch 2-pin connector. Refer to “Components Inspection”, AT-109.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SAT838BB
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace PNP switch.
3
BT
HA
CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
Check starting system. Refer to SC-10, “System Description”.
SC
OK or NG
EL
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
IDX
AT-223
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed
In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or
Backward When Pushed
=NAAT0075
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle moves when it is pushed forward or backward with
selector lever in “P” position.
1
CHECK PARKING COMPONENTS
Check parking components.
Refer to “Parking Pawl Components”, AT-337.
SAT133B
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-224
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves
In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves
=NAAT0076
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting “N” position.
1
CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
GI
MA
EM
With CONSULT-II
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit?
LC
Without CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit?
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT367J
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705”, AT-105.
No
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
TF
CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE
PD
Check control linkage. Refer to AT-275.
AX
SU
BR
SAT032G
ST
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-275.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-225
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves (Cont’d)
3
CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level again.
SAT638A
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Refill ATF.
4
CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
SAT171B
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
1. Disassemble A/T.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 Forward clutch assembly
쐌 Overrun clutch assembly
쐌 Reverse clutch assembly
5
CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
AT-226
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Large Shock. “N” → “R” Position
Large Shock. “N” → “R” Position
=NAAT0077
SYMPTOM:
There is large shock when changing from “N” to “R” position.
1
GI
MA
CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to A/T fluid temperature sensor, line pressure solenoid valve or accelerator pedal position sensor circuit?
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT579IC
CL
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Check damaged circuit. Refer to “DTC P0710, DTC P0745 or DTC P1705”, AT-111, 168
or 182.
No
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR (THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR)
MT
TF
Check accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Refer to EC section.
PD
AX
SU
BR
SAT516KA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor).
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-227
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Large Shock. “N” → “R” Position (Cont’d)
3
CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to “LINE PRESSURE TEST”, AT-64.
SAT494G
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-272.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot
valve and pilot filter)
쐌 Line pressure solenoid valve
4
CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
AT-228
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position
Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R”
Position
GI
=NAAT0078
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not creep backward when selecting “R” position.
1
CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
MA
EM
Check A/T fluid level again.
LC
EC
FE
SAT638A
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Refill ATF.
2
CL
MT
CHECK STALL TEST
TF
Check stall revolution with selector lever in “1” and “R” positions.
Refer to AT-356.
PD
AX
SU
BR
SAT493G
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
OK in “1” position, NG in
“R” position
䊳
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE”, AT-272.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot
valve and pilot filter)
쐌 Line pressure solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
쐌 Oil pump assembly
쐌 Torque converter
쐌 Reverse clutch assembly
쐌 High clutch assembly
NG in both “1” and “R”
positions
䊳
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
GO TO 6.
EL
IDX
AT-229
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position (Cont’d)
3
CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “R” position. Refer to “LINE PRESSURE TEST”, AT-64.
SAT494G
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE”, AT-272.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot
valve and pilot filter)
쐌 Line pressure solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
쐌 Oil pump assembly
4
CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
SAT171B
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
5
CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
AT-230
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position (Cont’d)
6
GI
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE”, AT-272.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
쐌 Line pressure solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
쐌 Oil pump assembly
쐌 Torque converter
쐌 Reverse clutch assembly
쐌 High clutch assembly
쐌 Low & reverse brake assembly
쐌 Low one-way clutch
䊳
MA
EM
LC
EC
Repair or replace damaged parts.
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-231
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position
Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or
“1” Position
=NAAT0079
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting “D”, “2” or “1”
position.
1
CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level again.
SAT638A
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Refill ATF.
2
CHECK STALL TEST
Check stall revolution with selector lever in “D” position.
Refer to “STALL TEST”, AT-61.
SAT493G
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
AT-232
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “R” position.
Refer to “LINE PRESSURE TEST”, AT-64.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT494G
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
1. Remove control valve assembly.
Refer to AT-272.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot
valve and pilot filter)
쐌 Line pressure solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
쐌 Oil pump assembly
4
CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SAT171B
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
5
RS
BT
CHECK SYMPTOM
HA
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
SC
EL
IDX
AT-233
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position (Cont’d)
6
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE”, AT-272.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
쐌 Line pressure solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
쐌 Oil pump assembly
쐌 Forward clutch assembly
쐌 Forward one-way clutch
쐌 Low one-way clutch
쐌 Low & reverse brake assembly
쐌 Torque converter
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-234
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1
Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1
=NAAT0080
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle cannot be started from D1 on Cruise test — Part 1.
1
GI
MA
CHECK SYMPTOM
Is “Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position” OK?
EM
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
Go to “Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position”, AT-229.
2
LC
EC
CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), shift solenoid valve A, B or vehicle
speed sensor·MTR after cruise test?
FE
CL
MT
SAT686I
TF
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Check damaged circuit. Refer to “DTC P0720, DTC P0750, DTC P0755 or VEHICLE
SPEED SENSOR. MTR”, AT-117, 174, 178 or 200.
PD
No
䊳
GO TO 3.
AX
3
CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR (THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR)
SU
Check accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Refer to EC section.
BR
ST
RS
SAT516KA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor).
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-235
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 (Cont’d)
4
CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Check line pressure at stall point with selector lever in “D” position.
Refer to “LINE PRESSURE TEST”, AT-64.
SAT494G
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 8.
5
CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
SAT171B
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 8.
6
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve assembly.
Refer to AT-272.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 Shift valve A
쐌 Shift valve B
쐌 Shift solenoid valve A
쐌 Shift solenoid valve B
쐌 Pilot valve
쐌 Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-236
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 (Cont’d)
7
GI
CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
8
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
EC
1. Remove control valve assembly.
Refer to AT-272.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 Shift valve A
쐌 Shift valve B
쐌 Shift solenoid valve A
쐌 Shift solenoid valve B
쐌 Pilot valve
쐌 Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
쐌 Forward clutch assembly
쐌 Forward one-way clutch
쐌 Low one-way clutch
쐌 High clutch assembly
쐌 Torque converter
쐌 Oil pump assembly
FE
CL
MT
TF
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-237
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2
A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not
Kickdown: D4 → D2
=NAAT0081
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from D1 to D2 at the specified speed.
A/T does not shift from D4 to D2 when depressing accelerator
pedal fully at the specified speed.
1
CHECK SYMPTOM
Are “Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position” and “Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1” OK?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
Go to “Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position” and “Vehicle Cannot
Be Started From D1”, AT-232, 235.
2
CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit?
Without CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit?
SAT705K
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705”, AT-105.
No
䊳
GO TO 3.
3
CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T AND VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR CIRCUIT
Check vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR circuit. Refer to “DTC P0720 and
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR”, AT-117, 200.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed
sensor·MTR circuits.
AT-238
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 (Cont’d)
4
GI
CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR (THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR)
Check accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Refer to EC section.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT516KA
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor).
5
CL
CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
MT
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
TF
PD
AX
SAT171B
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
GO TO 8.
6
SU
BR
ST
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve. Refer to AT-272.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 Shift valve A
쐌 Shift solenoid valve A
쐌 Pilot valve
쐌 Pilot filter
RS
BT
OK or NG
HA
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
SC
EL
IDX
AT-239
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 (Cont’d)
7
CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
8
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve. Refer to AT-272.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 Shift valve A
쐌 Shift solenoid valve A
쐌 Pilot valve
쐌 Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
쐌 Servo piston assembly
쐌 Brake band
쐌 Oil pump assembly
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-240
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3
A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3
=NAAT0082
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed.
1
GI
MA
CHECK SYMPTOM
Are “Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position” and “Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1” OK?
EM
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
Go to “Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position” and “Vehicle Cannot
Be Started From D1”, AT-232, 235.
LC
EC
2
CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
FE
With CONSULT-II
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit?
Without CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit?
CL
MT
TF
SAT705K
PD
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705”, AT-105.
No
䊳
GO TO 3.
AX
SU
3
CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR (THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR)
BR
Check accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Refer to EC section.
ST
RS
BT
SAT516KA
HA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor).
SC
EL
IDX
AT-241
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 (Cont’d)
4
CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
SAT171B
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
5
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve Assembly. Refer to AT-272.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 Shift valve B
쐌 Shift solenoid valve B
쐌 Pilot valve
쐌 Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
6
CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
AT-242
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 (Cont’d)
7
GI
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve Assembly. Refer to AT-272.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 Shift valve B
쐌 Shift solenoid valve B
쐌 Pilot valve
쐌 Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
쐌 Servo piston assembly
쐌 High clutch assembly
쐌 Oil pump assembly
MA
EM
LC
EC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-243
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4
A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4
=NAAT0083
SYMPTOM:
쐌 A/T does not shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed.
쐌 A/T must be warm before D3 to D4 shift will occur.
1
CHECK SYMPTOM
Are “Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position” and “Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1” OK?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
GO TO 2.
No
䊳
Go to “Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position” and “Vehicle Cannot
Be Started From D1”, AT-232, 235.
2
CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
With CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis, after cruise test, show damage to any of the following circuits?
쐌 Inhibitor switch
쐌 Overdrive control switch
쐌 A/T fluid temperature sensor
쐌 Revolution sensor
쐌 Shift solenoid valve A or B
쐌 Vehicle speed sensor
SAT580I
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Check damaged circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705, P0710, P0720, P0750, P0755 or VHCL
SPEED SEN·MTR”, AT-105, 111, 117, 174, 178 or 200.
No
䊳
GO TO 3.
AT-244
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR (THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR)
Check accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Refer to EC section.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT516KA
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor).
4
CL
CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
MT
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
TF
PD
AX
SAT171B
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 7.
5
SU
BR
ST
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve Assembly. Refer to AT-272.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 Shift valve B
쐌 Overrun clutch control valve
쐌 Shift solenoid valve B
쐌 Pilot valve
쐌 Pilot filter
RS
BT
OK or NG
HA
SC
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
EL
IDX
AT-245
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 (Cont’d)
6
CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
7
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve Assembly. Refer to AT-272.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 Shift valve B
쐌 Overrun clutch control valve
쐌 Shift solenoid valve B
쐌 Pilot valve
쐌 Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
쐌 Servo piston assembly
쐌 Brake band
쐌 Torque converter
쐌 Oil pump assembly
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-246
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up
A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up
=NAAT0084
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not perform lock-up at the specified speed.
1
GI
MA
CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit after cruise test?
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT581I
CL
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit. Refer to “DTC P0740”, AT-154.
No
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
MT
CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR (THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR)
Check accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Refer to EC section.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT516KA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor).
3
BR
ST
RS
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve. Refer to AT-272.
2. Check following items:
쐌 Torque converter clutch control valve
쐌 Torque converter relief valve
쐌 Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
쐌 Pilot valve
쐌 Pilot filter
BT
HA
OK or NG
SC
EL
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
IDX
AT-247
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up (Cont’d)
4
CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
AT-248
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition
A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition
=NAAT0085
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds.
1
GI
MA
CHECK DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to engine speed signal circuit after cruise test?
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT582I
CL
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Check engine speed signal circuit. Refer to “DTC P0725”, AT-122.
No
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
MT
CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT171B
BR
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
GO TO 5.
ST
RS
3
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-272.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 Torque converter clutch control valve
쐌 Pilot valve
쐌 Pilot filter
BT
HA
OK or NG
SC
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
EL
IDX
AT-249
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition (Cont’d)
4
CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
5
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-272.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 Torque converter clutch control valve
쐌 Pilot valve
쐌 Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check torque converter and oil pump assembly.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-250
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Lock-up Is Not Released
Lock-up Is Not Released
=NAAT0086
SYMPTOM:
Lock-up is not released when accelerator pedal is released.
1
GI
MA
CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to closed throttle position switch circuit?
EM
Without CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis show damage to closed throttle position switch circuit?
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT705K
MT
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Check accelerator pedal position sensor circuit. Refer to “DTC P1705”, AT-182.
No
䊳
GO TO 2.
TF
2
CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
PD
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-251
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3)
Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light
Braking D4 → D3)
=NAAT0087
SYMPTOM:
쐌 Engine speed does not smoothly return to idle when A/T
shifts from D4 to D3.
쐌 Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when turning
overdrive control switch OFF.
쐌 Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting
A/T from “D” to “2” position.
1
CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit after cruise test?
SAT583I
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Check overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit. Refer to “DTC P1760”, AT-188.
No
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR (THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR)
Check accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Refer to EC section.
SAT516KA
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor).
AT-252
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3) (Cont’d)
3
GI
CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT171B
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 4.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
4
CL
MT
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-272.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 Overrun clutch control valve
쐌 Overrun clutch reducing valve
쐌 Overrun clutch solenoid valve
TF
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
PD
AX
5
CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
SU
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
6
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
BR
ST
RS
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-272.
2. Check the following items:
쐌 Overrun clutch control valve
쐌 Overrun clutch reducing valve
쐌 Overrun clutch solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
쐌 Overrun clutch assembly
쐌 Oil pump assembly
BT
HA
SC
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
EL
IDX
AT-253
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Vehicle Does Not Start From D1
Vehicle Does Not Start From D1
NAAT0088
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not start from D1 on Cruise test — Part 2.
1
CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), shift solenoid valve A, B or vehicle
speed sensor·MTR after cruise test?
SAT686I
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Check damaged circuit. Refer to “DTC P0720, P0750, P0755 or VHCL SPEED
SEN·MTR”, AT-117, 174, 178 or 200.
No
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
Go to “Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1”, AT-235.
NG
䊳
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
AT-254
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3, When Overdrive Control Switch “ON” → “OFF”
A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3, When Overdrive
Control Switch “ON” → “OFF”
GI
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from D4 to D3 when changing overdrive
control switch to “OFF” position.
MA
=NAAT0089
1
EM
CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to overdrive control switch circuit?
LC
Without CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis show damage to overdrive control switch circuit?
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT705K
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Check overdrive control switch circuit. Refer to AT-258.
No
䊳
Go to “A/T Does Not Shift: D2 , D3”, AT-241.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-255
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22, When Selector Lever “D” → “2” Position
A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22, When Selector
Lever “D” → “2” Position
=NAAT0090
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from D3 to 22 when changing selector lever
from “D” to “2” position.
1
CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit?
Without CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit?
SAT705K
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705”, AT-105.
No
䊳
Go to “A/T Does Not Shift: D1 , D2
Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 , D2”, AT-238.
AT-256
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11, When Selector Lever “2” → “1” Position
A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11, When Selector
Lever “2” → “1” Position
GI
=NAAT0091
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from 22 to 11 when changing selector lever
from “2” to “1” position.
1
MA
EM
CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit?
LC
Without CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit?
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT705K
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705”, AT-105.
No
䊳
GO TO 2.
2
TF
PD
CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SAT778B
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-257
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake
Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake
NAAT0092
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting
from 22 (12) to 11.
1
CHECK SYMPTOM
Is “Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position” OK?
Yes or No
Yes
䊳
Go to “Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 , D3)”, AT-252.
No
䊳
Go to “Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position”, AT-229.
TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP,
Overdrive Control and Accelerator Pedal
Position Sensor Circuit Checks)
NAAT0204
SYMPTOM:
O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on in TCM self-diagnostic procedure even the lamp circuit is good.
DESCRIPTION
쐌
쐌
쐌
NAAT0204S01
PNP switch
The PNP switch assemble includes a transmission range
switch. The transmission range switch detects the selector
position and sends a signal to the TCM.
Overdrive control switch
Detects the overdrive control switch position (ON or OFF) and
sends a signal to the TCM.
Closed throttle position signal and wide-open throttle position
signal
ECM judges throttle opening based on a signal from accelerator pedal position sensor, and sends the signal via CAN communication to TCM.
SAT136K
SAT341I
SAT516KA
AT-258
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
=NAAT0204S03
NOTE:
The diagnostic procedure includes inspections for the overdrive
control and throttle position switch circuits.
1
GI
MA
INSPECTION START
EM
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 2.
No (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 3.
2
LC
EC
CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (With CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out “P”, “R”, “N”, “D”, “2” and “1” position switches moving selector lever to each position. Check the signal of the
selector lever position is indicated properly.
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
SAT643J
AX
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-259
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)
3
CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (Without CONSULT-II)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M120 terminals 26, 27, 34, 35, 36 and ground while moving selector
lever through each position.
MTBL0205
SAT517J
Does battery voltage exist (B) or non-existent (0)?
Yes
䊳
GO TO 6.
No
䊳
GO TO 4.
4
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
쐌 PNP switch
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-263.
쐌 Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch (Main harness)
쐌 Harness for short or open between PNP switch and TCM (Main harness)
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-260
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)
5
GI
CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out “OVERDRIVE SWITCH”. Check the signal of the overdrive control switch is indicated properly.
(Overdrive control switch “ON” displayed on CONSULT-II means overdrive “OFF”.)
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT645J
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
GO TO 6.
6
CL
MT
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
쐌 Overdrive control switch
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-263.
쐌 Harness for short or open between TCM and overdrive control switch (Main harness)
쐌 Harness for short or open of ground circuit for overdrive control switch (Main harness)
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)
䊳
GO TO 7.
OK (Without CONSULTII)
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-261
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)
7
CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT (With CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Apply vacuum to the throttle opener, then check the following. Refer to steps 1 and 2 of “Preparation”, “TCM SELFDIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, AT-48.
4. Read out “CLOSED THL/SW” and “W/O THRL/P-SW” depressing and releasing accelerator pedal.
Check the signal of throttle position switch is indicated properly.
MTBL0011
SAT646J
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
GO TO 8.
8
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
쐌 Accelerator pedal position sensor
쐌 Harness for short or open between ignition switch and accelerator pedal position sensor (Main harness)
쐌 Harness for short or open between accelerator pedal position sensor and ECM (Main harness)
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 9.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
9
CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-262
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Overdrive Control Switch
쐌
NAAT0204S04
GI
NAAT0204S0401
Check continuity between two terminals.
Continuity:
Switch position “ON”:
No
Switch position “OFF”:
Yes
MA
EM
LC
SAT144K
EC
Park/Neutral Position Switch
1.
Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2 and between terminals 3 and 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 while moving manual shaft through
each position.
Lever position
SAT517GB
NAAT0204S0402
Terminal No.
P
1-2
R
3-5
N
1-2
D
3-7
2
3-8
1
3-9
FE
CL
3-4
MT
3-6
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT843BG
2.
3.
If NG, check again with manual control linkage disconnected
from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to step 1.
If OK on step 2, adjust manual control linkage. Refer to AT-275.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT807B
4.
5.
6.
If NG on step 2, remove PNP switch from A/T and check continuity of PNP switch terminals. Refer to step 1.
If OK on step 4, adjust PNP switch. Refer to AT-275.
If NG on step 4, replace PNP switch.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT386HC
AT-263
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)
A/T Fluid Temperature Switch
1.
2.
3.
SAT251JA
NAAT0204S0404
Make sure the A/T fluid warning lamp lights when the key is
inserted and turned to “ON”.
Make sure the A/T fluid warning lamp goes off when turning the
ignition switch to “ON”.
Check resistance between terminal 10 and ground while
changing temperature as shown at left.
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance
140 (284) or more
Yes
140 (284) or less
No
AT-264
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Description
Description
쐌
쐌
NAAT0093
The mechanical key interlock mechanism also operates as a
shift lock:
With the key switch turned to “ON”, the selector lever cannot
be shifted from “P” (parking) to any other position unless the
brake pedal is depressed.
With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted
from “P” to any other position.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed
in “P”.
The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by
the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock solenoid and by the
operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key
cylinder, respectively.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
SAT710K
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-265
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — SHIFT —
Wiring Diagram — SHIFT —
NAAT0094
MAT323B
AT-266
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
NAAT0095
SYMPTOM 1:
쐌 Selector lever cannot be moved from “P” position with key
in “ON” position and brake pedal applied.
쐌 Selector lever can be moved from “P” position with key in
“ON” position and brake pedal released.
쐌 Selector lever can be moved from “P” position when key
is removed from key cylinder.
SYMPTOM 2:
Ignition key cannot be removed when selector lever is set to
“P” position.
Ignition key can be removed when selector lever is set to any
position except “P”.
1
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CHECK KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
Check key interlock cable for damage.
CL
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 2.
NG
䊳
Repair key interlock cable. Refer to “Key Interlock Cable”, AT-270.
2
MT
CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION
Check selector lever position for damage.
OK or NG
TF
OK
䊳
GO TO 3.
NG
䊳
Check selector lever. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE — PNP Switch and Manual Control Linkage Adjustment”, AT-275 and AT-275.
3
PD
AX
CHECK POWER SOURCE
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between A/T device harness terminal 7 (G/W) and ground.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SAT684KB
BT
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
GO TO 4.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-267
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4
DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
1. 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
2. Ignition switch (Refer to EL-11, “Schematic”.)
3. Harness for short or open between battery and stop lamp switch harness connector 3 (G/W)
4. Harness for short or open between stop lamp switch harness connector 4 (G/W) and A/T device harness connector 7
(G/W)
5. Diode
6. Stop lamp switch
a. Check continuity between connector terminals 3 and 4.
SCIA1569E
Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal — refer to BR-13, “Adjustment”.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 5.
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
5
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Disconnect A/T device harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T device harness connector terminal 6 (B) and ground. Refer to wiring diagram — SHIFT
—.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 6.
NG
䊳
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
AT-268
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
6
GI
CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH
쐌 Check continuity between A/T device harness connector B59 terminal 6 and park position switch harness connctor
M508 terminal 1.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT713K
FE
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 7.
NG
䊳
Replace park position switch.
7
CL
MT
CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
쐌 Check operation by applying battery voltage shift lock solenoid harness connctor terminals 1 and 3.
TF
PD
AX
SAT762J
OK or NG
OK
䊳
GO TO 8.
NG
䊳
Replace shift lock solenoid.
8
SU
BR
ST
CHECK SHIFT LOCK OPERATION
1. Reconnect shift lock harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch from OFF to ON position. (Do not start engine.)
3. Recheck shift lock operation.
RS
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
GO TO 9.
BT
HA
9
CHECK A/T DEVICE INSPECTION
1. Perform A/T device input/output signal inspection test.
2. If NG, recheck harness connector connection.
OK or NG
OK
䊳
INSPECTION END
NG
䊳
Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-269
SC
EL
IDX
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
Components
Components
NAAT0097
SAT352I
CAUTION:
쐌 Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be
damaged by sharp bends, twists or interference with adjacent parts.
쐌 After installing key interlock cable to control device, make
sure that casing cap and bracket are firmly secured in
their positions. If casing cap can be removed with an
external load of less than 39.2 N (4.0 kg, 8.8 lb), replace
key interlock cable with new one.
Removal
NAAT0098
Unlock slider from adjuster holder and remove rod from cable.
SAT353I
AT-270
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
Installation
Installation
1.
2.
3.
NAAT0099
Set key interlock cable to steering lock assembly and install
lock plate.
Clamp cable to steering column and fix to control cable with
band.
Set selector lever to P position.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT354I
4.
Insert interlock rod into adjuster holder.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT355I
5.
6.
Install casing cap to bracket.
Move slider in order to fix adjuster holder to interlock rod.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT356I
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-271
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators
Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators
REMOVAL
NAAT0100
NAAT0100S01
1.
2.
Remove exhaust front tube.
Remove oil pan and gasket and drain ATF.
3.
4.
Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor if necessary.
Remove oil strainer.
SAT359I
SAT073BA
5.
Remove control valve assembly by removing fixing bolts and
disconnecting harness connector.
Bolt length and location
Bolt symbol
mm (in)
A
33 (1.30)
B
45 (1.77)
6.
7.
Remove solenoids and valves from valve body if necessary.
Remove terminal cord assembly if necessary.
8.
Remove accumulator A, B, C and D by applying compressed
air if necessary.
Hold each piston with rag.
Reinstall any part removed.
Always use new sealing parts.
SAT353B
쐌
9.
쐌
SAT074BA
AT-272
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Revolution Sensor Replacement
Revolution Sensor Replacement
— 4WD MODEL —
1.
SAT360IA
2.
3.
4.
쐌
GI
NAAT0210S01
Remove rear engine mounting member from side member
while supporting A/T with transfer case with jack. Tighten rear
engine mounting member to the specified torque. Refer to
EM-61, “Rear Engine Mounting”.
Lower A/T with transfer case as much as possible.
Remove revolution sensor from A/T.
Reinstall any part removed.
Always use new sealing parts.
— 2WD MODEL —
쐌
쐌
NAAT0210
MA
EM
LC
EC
NAAT0210S02
Remove revolution sensor from A/T.
Always use new sealing parts.
FE
CL
MT
SAT661I
Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement
1.
2.
3.
쐌
NAAT0231
Remove A/T assembly, Refer to “Removal”, AT-276.
Remove turbine revolution sensor from A/T assembly upper
side.
Reinstall any part removed.
Always use new sealing parts.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT136K
Rear Oil Seal Replacement
— 4WD MODEL —
1.
2.
쐌
3.
쐌
4.
NAAT0211
HA
NAAT0211S01
Remove transfer case from vehicle. Refer to TF-156, “Removal”.
Remove rear oil seal.
Do not remove oil seal unless it is to be replaced.
Install rear oil seal.
Apply ATF before installing.
Reinstall any part removed.
SC
EL
IDX
SAT035E
AT-273
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Rear Oil Seal and Companion Flange Oil Seal Replacement
Rear Oil Seal and Companion Flange Oil Seal
Replacement
NAAT0212
— 2WD MODEL —
SAT544J
SAT546J
NAAT0212S01
NOTE:
Replace rear extension assembly as a single unit because it cannot be disassembled.
1. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PD-5, “Components”.
2. Remove exhaust mounting and mounting bracket.
3. Disconnect revolution and speedometer sensor harness connector.
4. Support A/T assembly with a jack.
5. Remove rear engine mounting member. Tighten rear engine
mounting member to the specified torque. Refer to EM-61,
“Rear Engine Mounting”.
6. Remove rear extension assembly.
a. Remove parking gear and needle bearing.
CAUTION:
Insert your hand between rear extension and transmission
case. Detach rear extension assembly while holding parking
gear and needle bearing by hand.
7. Reinstall any part removed.
쐌 Always use new sealing parts.
Parking Components Inspection
— 4WD MODEL —
NAAT0213
NAAT0213S01
1.
2.
3.
Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PD-5, “Components”.
Remove transfer case from vehicle. Refer to TF-156, “Removal”.
Remove A/T control cable bracket from transmission case.
4.
5.
6.
7.
쐌
Support A/T assembly with a jack.
Remove adapter case from transmission case.
Replace parking components if necessary.
Reinstall any part removed.
Always use new sealing parts.
SAT083J
SAT078B
AT-274
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Parking Components Inspection (Cont’d)
— 2WD MODEL —
1.
2.
3.
NAAT0213S02
Remove propeller shaft from vehicle. Refer to PD-5, “Components”.
Support A/T assembly with a jack.
Remove rear engine mounting member. Tighten rear engine
mounting member to the specified torque. Refer to EM-61,
“Rear Engine Mounting”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT551J
4. Remove rear extension assembly.
a. Remove parking gear and needle bearing.
CAUTION:
Insert your hand between rear extension and transmission
case. Detach rear extension assembly while holding parking
gear and needle bearing by hand.
5. Replace parking components if necessary.
6. Reinstall any part removed.
쐌 Always use new sealing parts.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT546J
Park/Neutral Position Switch Adjustment
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
SAT081B
NAAT0104
Remove manual control linkage from manual shaft of A/T
assembly.
Set manual shaft of A/T assembly in “N” position.
Loosen PNP switch fixing bolts.
Insert pin into adjustment holes in both PNP switch and
manual shaft of A/T assembly as near vertical as possible.
Reinstall any part removed.
Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to “Components
Inspection”, AT-109.
Manual Control Linkage Adjustment
TF
PD
AX
SU
NAAT0105
Move selector lever from “P” position to “1” position. You should be
able to feel the detents in each position.
If the detents cannot be felt or the pointer indicating the position is
improperly aligned, the linkage needs adjustment.
1. Place selector lever in “P” position.
2. Loosen lock nuts.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT361I
3.
4.
5.
Tighten turn buckle until aligns with inner cable, pulling selector lever toward “R” position side without pushing button.
Back off turn buckle 1 turn and tighten lock nuts to the specified torque.
Lock nut:
: 4.4 - 5.9 N·m (0.45 - 0.60 kg-m, 39.1 - 52.1 in-lb)
Move selector lever from “P” position to “1” position. Make sure
that selector lever can move smoothly.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT032G
AT-275
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
Removal
NAAT0214
SAT362IA
CAUTION:
When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove
the crankshaft position sensor (OBD) from the A/T assembly
lower side.
Be careful not to damage sensor edge.
— 4WD MODEL —
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
쐌
쐌
8.
9.
NAAT0214S01
Remove battery negative terminal.
Remove exhaust front and rear tubes.
Remove fluid charging pipe from A/T assembly.
Remove oil cooler pipe from A/T assembly.
Plug up openings such as the fluid charging pipe hole, etc.
Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PD-5, “Components”.
Remove transfer control linkage from transfer. Refer to TF-156,
“Removal”.
Insert plug into rear oil seal after removing rear propeller
shaft.
Be careful not to damage spline, sleeve yoke and rear oil
seal.
Remove A/T control cable from A/T assembly.
Disconnect A/T solenoid, PNP switch, turbine revolution, revolution and speedometer sensor harness connectors.
SAT163K
10. Remove starter motor. Refer to SC-19, “Removal and Installation”.
11. Remove bolts securing torque converter to drive plate.
쐌 Remove the bolts by turning crankshaft.
SAT148K
AT-276
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal (Cont’d)
12. Support A/T and transfer assembly with a jack.
13. Remove rear engine mounting member from body and A/T
assembly. Tighten rear engine mounting member to the specified torque. Refer to EM-61, “Rear Engine Mounting”.
14. Remove bolts securing A/T assembly to engine.
쐌 Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.
쐌 Secure A/T assembly to a jack.
15. Lower A/T assembly with transfer.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT801C
— 2WD MODEL —
SAT553J
EC
NAAT0214S02
CAUTION:
쐌 Do not attach lifting cable to or place supporting fixture
under companion flange at rear of A/T (shown in the figure at left) when lifting/lowering A/T.
쐌 Be sure to attach lifting cable to rear engine mounting or
dynamic damper location when lifting/lowering A/T.
1. Remove battery negative terminal.
2. Remove exhaust front and rear tubes.
3. Remove fluid charging pipe from A/T assembly.
4. Remove oil cooler pipe from A/T assembly.
5. Plug up openings such as the fluid charging pipe hole, etc.
6. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PD-5, “Components”.
7. Remove A/T control cable from A/T assembly.
8. Disconnect A/T and speedometer sensor harness connectors.
9. Remove starter motor. Refer to SC-19, “Removal and Installation”.
10. Remove gusset and rear plate cover securing engine to A/T
assembly.
11. Remove bolts securing torque converter to drive plate.
쐌 Remove the bolts by turning crankshaft.
12. Support A/T assembly with a jack.
13. Remove rear engine mounting member from body and A/T
assembly. Tighten rear engine mounting member to the specified torque. Refer to EM-61, “Rear Engine Mounting”.
14. Remove bolts securing A/T assembly to engine.
15. Pull A/T assembly backwards.
쐌 Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.
쐌 Secure A/T assembly to a jack.
16. Lower A/T assembly.
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT544J
Installation
쐌
NAAT0107
Drive plate runout
Maximum allowable runout:
Refer to EM-73, “FLYWHEEL/DRIVE PLATE RUNOUT”.
If this runout is out of specification, replace drive plate with ring
gear.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT977H
AT-277
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Installation (Cont’d)
쐌
When connecting torque converter to transmission, measure
distance “A” to be certain that they are correctly assembled.
Distance “A”:
25.0 mm (0.984 in) or more
쐌
쐌
Install converter to drive plate.
After converter is installed to drive plate, rotate crankshaft
several turns and check to be sure that transmission
rotates freely without binding.
쐌
Tighten bolts securing transmission.
SAT017B
SAT148K
Bolt No.
Tightening torque
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
Bolt length “”
mm (in)
1
70 - 80 (7.1 - 8.2, 52 - 59)
65 (2.56)
2
29 - 39 (3.0 - 4.0, 22 - 29)
40 (1.57)
3
70 - 80 (7.1 - 8.2, 52 - 59)
55 (2.17)
쐌
Reinstall any part removed.
쐌
쐌
Check fluid level in transmission.
Move selector lever through all positions to be sure that transmission operates correctly.
With parking brake applied, rotate engine at idling. Move selector lever through “N” to “D”, to “2”, to “1” and to “R” positions.
A slight shock should be felt by hand gripping selector each
time transmission is shifted.
Perform road test. Refer to “ROAD TEST”, AT-65.
SAT149K
쐌
SAT638A
AT-278
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Installation (Cont’d)
AIR BREATHER HOSE
NAAT0107S01
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
SAT662K
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SAT206KA
AT-279
IDX
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Installation (Cont’d)
SAT153K
AT-280
OVERHAUL
Components
Components
NAAT0108
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SAT712K
AT-281
IDX
OVERHAUL
Components (Cont’d)
SAT671KA
AT-282
OVERHAUL
Components (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SAT672KA
IDX
AT-283
OVERHAUL
Oil Channel
Oil Channel
NAAT0109
SAT185B
AT-284
OVERHAUL
Locations of Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings
Locations of Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers
and Snap Rings
GI
NAAT0110
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SAT140JB
AT-285
IDX
NAAT0111
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Drain ATF through drain plug.
Remove turbine revolution sensor.
Remove torque converter by holding it firmly and turning while
pulling straight out.
4.
a.
b.
Check torque converter one-way clutch.
Insert Tool into spline of one-way clutch inner race.
Hook bearing support unitized with one-way clutch outer race
with suitable wire.
Check that one-way clutch inner race rotates only clockwise
with Tool while holding bearing support with wire.
SAT018B
c.
SAT521G
5.
Remove PNP switch from transmission case.
6.
쐌
Remove oil pan.
Always place oil pan straight down so that foreign particles
inside will not move.
7.
Place transmission into Tool with the control valve facing up.
SAT021BB
SAT754I
SAT522G
AT-286
DISASSEMBLY
8.
쐌
Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine cause of
malfunction. If the fluid is very dark, smells burned, or contains
foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may
need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and
clutches to stick and may inhibit pump pressure.
If frictional material is detected, replace radiator after
repair of A/T. Refer to LC-21, “REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION”.
GI
Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve and A/T fluid
temperature sensor connectors.
Be careful not to damage connector.
EC
MA
EM
LC
SAT171B
9.
쐌
FE
CL
MT
SAT024BC
10. Remove oil strainer.
a. Remove oil strainer from control valve assembly.
Then remove O-ring from oil strainer.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT008B
b.
Check oil strainer screen for damage.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT025B
11. Remove control valve assembly.
a. Straighten terminal clips to free terminal cords then remove
terminal clips.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT009B
AT-287
DISASSEMBLY
b.
Remove bolts A and B, and remove control valve assembly
from transmission.
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
A
33 (1.30)
B
45 (1.77)
SAT353B
c.
쐌
Remove solenoid connector.
Be careful not to damage connector.
d.
Remove manual valve from control valve assembly.
SAT026B
SAT127B
12. Remove terminal cord assembly from transmission case while
pushing on stopper.
쐌 Be careful not to damage cord.
쐌 Do not remove terminal cord assembly unless it is damaged.
SAT128B
AT-288
DISASSEMBLY
13. Remove converter housing from transmission case.
쐌 Be careful not to scratch converter housing.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT999A
14. Remove O-ring from input shaft.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT995A
15. Remove oil pump assembly.
a. Attach Tool to oil pump assembly and extract it evenly from
transmission case.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT027B
b.
c.
쐌
Remove O-ring from oil pump assembly.
Remove traces of sealant from oil pump housing.
Be careful not to scratch pump housing.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT028B
d.
Remove needle bearing and thrust washer from oil pump
assembly.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT108B
AT-289
DISASSEMBLY
16. Remove input shaft and oil pump gasket.
SAT988A
17. Remove brake band and band strut.
a. Loosen lock nut and remove band servo anchor end pin from
transmission case.
SAT029B
b.
Remove brake band and band strut from transmission case.
c.
Hold brake band in a circular shape with clip.
SAT986A
SAT655
18. Remove front side clutch and gear components.
a. Remove clutch pack (reverse clutch, high clutch and front sun
gear) from transmission case.
SAT030B
AT-290
DISASSEMBLY
b.
c.
Remove front bearing race from clutch pack.
Remove rear bearing race from clutch pack.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT113B
d.
Remove front planetary carrier from transmission case.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT031B
e.
f.
Remove front needle bearing from front planetary carrier.
Remove rear bearing from front planetary carrier.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT968A
g.
Remove rear sun gear from transmission case.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT974A
19. Remove rear extension assembly (2WD model only).
a. Remove rear extension assembly.
b. Remove parking gear and needle bearing.
CAUTION:
Insert your hand between rear extension and transmission
case. Detach rear extension assembly while holding parking
gear and needle bearing by hand.
c. Remove rear extension gasket.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT546J
AT-291
DISASSEMBLY
20. Remove adapter case (4WD model only).
a. Remove adapter case from transmission case.
b. Remove adapter case gasket from transmission case.
SAT755I
c.
쐌
쐌
Remove oil seal from adapter case.
Be careful not to scratch adapter case.
Do not remove oil seal unless it is to be replaced.
SAT756I
21. Remove revolution sensor from rear extension or adapter
case.
a. Remove O-ring from revolution sensor.
SAT556J
22. Remove output shaft and parking gear (4WD model only).
a. Remove rear snap ring from output shaft.
SAT960A
b.
쐌
c.
Slowly push output shaft all the way forward.
Do not use excessive force.
Remove snap ring from output shaft.
SAT957A
AT-292
DISASSEMBLY
d.
e.
Remove output shaft and parking gear as a unit from transmission case.
Remove parking gear from output shaft.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT109B
f.
Remove needle bearing from transmission case.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT033B
23. Remove rear side clutch and gear components.
a. Remove front internal gear.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT954A
b.
Remove bearing race from front internal gear.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT110B
c.
Remove needle bearing from rear internal gear.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT111B
AT-293
DISASSEMBLY
d.
Remove rear internal gear, forward clutch hub and overrun
clutch hub as a set from transmission case.
e.
f.
Remove needle bearing from overrun clutch hub.
Remove overrun clutch hub from rear internal gear and forward clutch hub.
g.
Remove thrust washer from overrun clutch hub.
h.
Remove forward clutch assembly from transmission case.
SAT951A
SAT148G
SAT036B
SAT037B
24. Remove band servo and accumulator components.
a. Remove band servo retainer from transmission case.
SAT038B
AT-294
DISASSEMBLY
b.
쐌
c.
Apply compressed air to oil hole until band servo piston comes
out of transmission case.
Hold piston with a rag and gradually direct air to oil hole.
Remove return springs.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT039B
d.
e.
쐌
Remove springs from accumulator pistons B, C and D.
Apply compressed air to each oil hole until piston comes out.
Hold piston with a rag and gradually direct air to oil hole.
Identification of accumulator pistons
A
B
C
D
Identification of oil holes
a
b
c
d
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT040BA
f.
Remove O-ring from each piston.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT523GA
25. Remove manual shaft components, if necessary.
a. Hold width across flats of manual shaft (outside the transmission case) and remove lock nut from shaft.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT041B
b.
Remove retaining pin from transmission case.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT042B
AT-295
DISASSEMBLY
c.
While pushing detent spring down, remove manual plate and
parking rod from transmission case.
d.
Remove manual shaft from transmission case.
e.
Remove spacer and detent spring from transmission case.
f.
Remove oil seal from transmission case.
SAT935A
SAT043B
SAT934A
SAT044B
AT-296
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Oil Pump
Oil Pump
COMPONENTS
GI
NAAT0112
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT648AF
DISASSEMBLY
1.
NAAT0113
Loosen bolts in numerical order and remove oil pump cover.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT649A
2.
쐌
Remove rotor, vane rings and vanes.
Inscribe a mark on back of rotor for identification of foreaft direction when reassembling rotor. Then remove rotor.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT650A
3.
쐌
While pushing on cam ring remove pivot pin.
Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT651A
AT-297
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Oil Pump (Cont’d)
4.
쐌
쐌
While holding cam ring and spring lift out cam ring spring.
Be careful not to damage oil pump housing.
Hold cam ring spring to prevent it from jumping.
5.
Remove cam ring and cam ring spring from oil pump housing.
6.
Remove pivot pin from control piston and remove control piston assembly.
7.
쐌
Remove oil seal from oil pump housing.
Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing.
SAT652A
SAT653A
SAT654A
SAT655A
INSPECTION
NAAT0114
Oil Pump Cover, Rotor, Vanes, Control Piston, Side
Seals, Cam Ring and Friction Ring
NAAT0114S01
쐌
Check for wear or damage.
SAT656A
AT-298
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Oil Pump (Cont’d)
Side Clearances
쐌
쐌
SAT657A
쐌
Seal Ring Clearance
쐌
쐌
NAAT0114S02
Measure side clearances between end of oil pump housing
and cam ring, rotor, vanes and control piston. Measure in at
least four places along their circumferences. Maximum measured values should be within specified positions.
Before measurement, check that friction rings, O-ring,
control piston side seals and cam ring spring are
removed.
Standard clearance (Cam ring, rotor, vanes and control
piston):
Refer to SDS, AT-360.
If not within standard clearance, replace oil pump assembly
except oil pump cover assembly.
NAAT0114S03
Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove.
Standard clearance:
0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)
Wear limit:
0.25 mm (0.0098 in)
If not within wear limit, replace oil pump cover assembly.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT658A
ASSEMBLY
1.
쐌
NAAT0115
Drive oil seal into oil pump housing.
Apply ATF to outer periphery and lip surface.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT081E
2.
a.
쐌
쐌
b.
Install cam ring in oil pump housing by the following
Install side seal on control piston.
Pay attention to its direction — Black surface goes toward
control piston.
Apply petroleum jelly to side seal.
Install control piston on oil pump.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT654A
c.
쐌
Install O-ring and friction ring on cam ring.
Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT660A
AT-299
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Oil Pump (Cont’d)
d.
Assemble cam ring, cam ring spring and spring seat. Install
spring by pushing it against pump housing.
e.
While pushing on cam ring install pivot pin.
3.
쐌
Install rotor, vanes and vane rings.
Pay attention to direction of rotor.
4.
a.
Install oil pump housing and oil pump cover.
Wrap masking tape around splines of oil pump cover assembly to protect seal. Position oil pump cover assembly in oil
pump housing assembly, then remove masking tape.
Tighten bolts in a criss-cross pattern.
SAT661A
SAT651A
SAT662A
b.
SAT649A
5.
쐌
쐌
Install new seal rings carefully after packing ring grooves with
petroleum jelly. Press rings down into jelly to a close fit.
Seal rings come in two different diameters. Check fit carefully in each groove.
Small dia. seal ring:
No mark
Large dia. seal ring:
Yellow mark in area shown by arrow
Do not spread gap of seal ring excessively while installing. It may deform ring.
SAT663A
AT-300
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly
Control Valve Assembly
COMPONENTS
GI
NAAT0116
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SAT156KA
AT-301
IDX
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)
DISASSEMBLY
1.
a.
NAAT0117
b.
Remove solenoids.
Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve and side plate
from lower body.
Remove O-ring from solenoid.
c.
d.
Remove line pressure solenoid valve from upper body.
Remove O-ring from solenoid.
e.
f.
Remove 3-unit solenoid assembly from upper body.
Remove O-rings from solenoids.
2.
a.
Disassemble upper and lower bodies.
Place upper body facedown, and remove bolts, reamer bolts
and support plates.
Remove lower body, separator plate as a unit from upper body.
Be careful not to drop pilot filter, orifice check valve,
spring and steel balls.
SAT194B
SAT667A
SAT043G
b.
쐌
SAT195B
c.
d.
Place lower body facedown, and remove separator plate.
Remove pilot filter, orifice check valve and orifice check spring.
SAT670A
AT-302
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)
e.
Check to see that steel balls are properly positioned in upper
body. Then remove them from upper body.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT671A
INSPECTION
Lower and Upper Bodies
쐌
EC
NAAT0118
NAAT0118S01
Check to see that there are pins and retainer plates in lower
body.
FE
CL
MT
SAT672A
쐌
쐌
Check to see that there are pins and retainer plates in upper
body.
Be careful not to lose these parts.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT673A
쐌
쐌
Check to make sure that oil circuits are clean and free from
damage.
Check tube brackets and tube connectors for damage.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT674A
Separator Plate
쐌
NAAT0118S02
Make sure that separator plate is free of damage and not
deformed and oil holes are clean.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT675A
AT-303
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)
Pilot Filter
쐌
NAAT0118S03
Check to make sure that filter is not clogged or damaged.
SAT676A
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve
쐌
쐌
Line Pressure Solenoid Valve
쐌
쐌
NAAT0118S04
Check that filter is not clogged or damaged.
Measure resistance. Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-158.
NAAT0118S05
Check that filter is not clogged or damaged.
Measure resistance. Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-173.
SAT149G
3-Unit Solenoid Assembly (Overrun Clutch Solenoid
Valve and Shift Solenoid Valves A and B)
NAAT0118S06
쐌
Measure resistance of each solenoid. Refer to “Component
Inspection”, AT-177, AT-181 and AT-192.
SAT095B
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor and Switch
쐌
NAAT0118S07
Measure resistance. Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-116
and AT-264.
SAT096BA
ASSEMBLY
1.
a.
NAAT0119
Install upper and lower bodies.
Place oil circuit of upper body face up. Install steel balls in their
proper positions.
SAT671A
AT-304
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)
b.
Install reamer bolts from bottom of upper body.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT681A
c.
Place oil circuit of lower body face up. Install orifice check
spring, orifice check valve and pilot filter.
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT682A
d.
e.
Install lower separator plate on lower body.
Install and temporarily tighten support plates, A/T fluid temperature sensor and tube brackets.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT197B
f.
쐌
Temporarily assemble lower and upper bodies, using reamer
bolt as a guide.
Be careful not to dislocate or drop steel balls, orifice
check spring, orifice check valve and pilot filter.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT198B
AT-305
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)
g.
Install and temporarily tighten bolts and tube brackets in their
proper locations.
Bolt length and location:
Bolt symbol
Bolt length mm (in)
a
b
c
d
70 (2.76)
50 (1.97)
33 (1.30)
27 (1.06)
SAT199BA
2.
a.
Install solenoids.
Attach O-ring and install torque converter clutch solenoid valve
and side plates onto lower body.
b.
Attach O-rings and install 3-unit solenoids assembly onto
upper body.
Attach O-ring and install line pressure solenoid valve onto
upper body.
Tighten all bolts.
SAT200B
c.
3.
SAT150G
AT-306
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Upper Body
Control Valve Upper Body
COMPONENTS
GI
NAAT0120
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
SAT142JA
Apply ATF to all components before their installation.
Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in SDS on page AT-357.
EL
IDX
AT-307
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Upper Body (Cont’d)
DISASSEMBLY
NAAT0121
1.
쐌
Remove valves at parallel pins.
Do not use a magnetic hand.
a.
Use a wire paper clip to push out parallel pins.
b.
Remove parallel pins while pressing their corresponding plugs
and sleeves.
Remove plug slowly to prevent internal parts from jumping out.
SAT834A
SAT822A
쐌
SAT823A
c.
쐌
Place mating surface of valve facedown, and remove internal
parts.
If a valve is hard to remove, place valve body facedown
and lightly tap it with a soft hammer.
Be careful not to drop or damage valves and sleeves.
2.
a.
Remove valves at retainer plates.
Pry out retainer plate with wire paper clip.
쐌
SAT824A
SAT825A
AT-308
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Upper Body (Cont’d)
b.
Remove retainer plates while holding spring.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT826A
c.
쐌
쐌
Place mating surface of valve facedown, and remove internal
parts.
If a valve is hard to remove, lightly tap valve body with a
soft hammer.
Be careful not to drop or damage valves, sleeves, etc.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT827A
쐌
쐌
4-2 sequence valve and relay valve are located far back in
upper body. If they are hard to remove, carefully push them out
using stiff wire.
Be careful not to scratch sliding surface of valve with wire.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT828A
INSPECTION
Valve Springs
쐌
쐌
Measure free length and outer diameter of each valve spring.
Also check for damage or deformation.
Inspection standard:
Refer to SDS, AT-357.
Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued.
Control Valves
쐌
NAAT0122
NAAT0122S01
쐌
RS
BT
SAT829A
1.
ST
NAAT0122S02
Check sliding surfaces of valves, sleeves and plugs.
ASSEMBLY
BR
NAAT0123
Lubricate the control valve body and all valves with ATF. Install
control valves by sliding them carefully into their bores.
Be careful not to scratch or damage valve body.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT830A
AT-309
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Upper Body (Cont’d)
쐌
Wrap a small screwdriver with vinyl tape and use it to insert the
valves into proper position.
SAT831A
Pressure regulator valve
쐌 If pressure regulator plug is not centered properly, sleeve cannot be inserted into bore in upper body. If this happens, use
vinyl tape wrapped screwdriver to center sleeve until it can be
inserted.
쐌 Turn sleeve slightly while installing.
SAT832A
Accumulator control plug
쐌 Align protrusion of accumulator control sleeve with notch in
plug.
쐌 Align parallel pin groove in plug with parallel pin, and install
accumulator control valve.
SAT833A
2.
Install parallel pins and retainer plates.
쐌
While pushing plug, install parallel pin.
SAT834A
SAT823A
AT-310
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Upper Body (Cont’d)
4-2 sequence valve and relay valve
쐌 Push 4-2 sequence valve and relay valve with wire wrapped in
vinyl tape to prevent scratching valve body. Install parallel pins.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT835A
쐌
Insert retainer plate while pushing spring.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT836A
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-311
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Lower Body
Control Valve Lower Body
COMPONENTS
NAAT0124
SAT966I
Apply ATF to all components before their installation.
Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in SDS on page AT-357.
AT-312
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Lower Body (Cont’d)
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
NAAT0125
Remove valves at parallel pins.
Remove valves at retainer plates.
For removal procedures, refer to “DISASSEMBLY” of Control
Valve Upper Body.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT838A
INSPECTION
Valve Springs
쐌
쐌
쐌
NAAT0126S02
FE
CL
MT
Check sliding surfaces of control valves, sleeves and plugs for
damage.
ASSEMBLY
쐌
NAAT0126S01
Check each valve spring for damage or deformation. Also
measure free length and outer diameter.
Inspection standard:
Refer to SDS, AT-357.
Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued.
Control Valves
SAT829A
EC
NAAT0126
NAAT0127
Install control valves.
For installation procedures, refer to “ASSEMBLY” of Control
Valve Upper Body, AT-309.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT838A
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-313
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Reverse Clutch
Reverse Clutch
COMPONENTS
NAAT0128
SAT699K
DISASSEMBLY
1.
a.
b.
c.
쐌
쐌
쐌
NAAT0129
Check operation of reverse clutch.
Install seal ring onto oil pump cover and install reverse clutch.
Apply compressed air to oil hole.
Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring.
If retaining plate does not contact snap ring,
D-ring might be damaged.
Lip seal might be damaged.
Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball.
SAT841A
2.
Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate, dish plate
and snap ring.
SAT842A
AT-314
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Reverse Clutch (Cont’d)
3.
쐌
4.
Remove snap ring from clutch drum while compressing clutch
springs.
Do not expand snap ring excessively.
Remove spring retainer.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT524G
5.
쐌
6.
Install seal ring onto oil pump cover and install reverse clutch
drum. While holding piston, gradually apply compressed air to
oil hole until piston is removed.
Do not apply compressed air abruptly.
Remove D-ring and oil seal from piston.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT844A
INSPECTION
Reverse Clutch Snap Ring and Spring Retainer
쐌
NAAT0130
NAAT0130S01
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
TF
PD
AX
SU
Reverse Clutch Drive Plates
쐌
쐌
쐌
Reverse Clutch Dish Plate
쐌
NAAT0130S03
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
Measure thickness of facing.
Thickness of drive plate:
Standard value: 1.90 - 2.05 mm (0.0748 - 0.0807 in)
Wear limit: 1.80 mm (0.0709 in)
If not within wear limit, replace.
쐌
RS
BT
SAT845A
쐌
쐌
ST
NAAT0130S04
Check for deformation or damage.
Reverse Clutch Piston
BR
NAAT0130S05
Shake piston to assure that balls are not seized.
Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole opposite the return
spring. Make sure there is no air leakage.
Also apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side to
assure that air leaks past ball.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT846A
AT-315
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Reverse Clutch (Cont’d)
ASSEMBLY
NAAT0131
1.
쐌
Install D-ring and oil seal on piston.
Apply ATF to both parts.
2.
쐌
3.
Install piston assembly by turning it slowly and evenly.
Apply ATF to inner surface of drum.
Install spring retainer.
4.
Install snap ring while compressing clutch springs.
쐌
Do not align snap ring gap with spring retainer stopper.
5.
6.
Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate.
Install snap ring.
SAT847A
SAT848A
SAT524G
SAT850A
SAT842A
AT-316
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Reverse Clutch (Cont’d)
7.
Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If
not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate.
Specified clearance:
Standard
0.5 - 0.8 mm (0.020 - 0.031 in)
Allowable limit
1.2 mm (0.047 in)
Retaining plate:
Refer to SDS, AT-358.
GI
Check operation of reverse clutch.
Refer to “DISASSEMBLY” of Reverse Clutch, AT-314.
EC
MA
EM
LC
SAT852A
8.
FE
CL
MT
SAT841A
High Clutch
COMPONENTS
NAAT0132
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
SAT158KA
EL
IDX
AT-317
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
High Clutch (Cont’d)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
NAAT0133
Service procedures for high clutch are essentially the same as
those for reverse clutch, with the following exception:
SAT853A
쐌
Check of high clutch operation
쐌
Removal and installation of return spring
쐌
Inspection of high clutch return springs
Inspection standard:
Refer to SDS, AT-357.
쐌
Inspection of high clutch drive plate
Thickness of drive plate:
Standard
1.52 - 1.67 mm (0.0598 - 0.0657 in)
Wear limit
1.40 mm (0.0551 in)
SAT854A
SAT525G
SAT829A
SAT845A
AT-318
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
High Clutch (Cont’d)
쐌
Measurement of clearance between retaining plate and snap
ring
Specified clearance:
Standard
1.8 - 2.2 mm (0.071 - 0.087 in)
Allowable limit
3.2 mm (0.126 in)
Retaining plate:
Refer to SDS, AT-358.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT858A
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-319
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Forward and Overrun Clutches
Forward and Overrun Clutches
COMPONENTS
NAAT0134
SAT711K
AT-320
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Forward and Overrun Clutches (Cont’d)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
NAAT0135
Forward and overrun clutches are serviced essentially the same
way as reverse clutch is serviced. However, note the following
exceptions.
쐌 Check of forward clutch operation
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT860A
쐌
Check of overrun clutch operation
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT861A
쐌
Removal of forward clutch drum
Remove forward clutch drum from transmission case by holding snap ring.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT865A
쐌
a)
Removal of forward clutch and overrun clutch pistons
While holding overrun clutch piston, gradually apply compressed air to oil hole.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT862A
b)
Remove overrun clutch from forward clutch.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT863A
AT-321
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Forward and Overrun Clutches (Cont’d)
쐌
Removal and installation of return springs
쐌
Inspection of forward clutch and overrun clutch return springs
Inspection standard:
Refer to SDS, AT-357.
쐌
Inspection of forward clutch drive plates
Thickness of drive plate:
Standard
1.52 - 1.67 mm (0.0598 - 0.0657 in)
Wear limit
1.40 mm (0.0551 in)
쐌
Inspection of overrun clutch drive plates
Thickness of drive plate:
Standard
1.90 - 2.05 mm (0.0748 - 0.0807 in)
Wear limit
1.80 mm (0.0709 in)
쐌
a)
쐌
Installation of forward clutch piston and overrun clutch piston
Install forward clutch piston by turning it slowly and evenly.
Apply ATF to inner surface of clutch drum.
SAT526G
SAT829A
SAT845A
SAT845A
SAT866A
AT-322
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Forward and Overrun Clutches (Cont’d)
쐌
Align notch in forward clutch piston with groove in forward clutch drum.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT867A
b)
쐌
Install overrun clutch by turning it slowly and evenly.
Apply ATF to inner surface of forward clutch piston.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT868A
쐌
Measurement of clearance between retaining plate and snap
ring of overrun clutch
Specified clearance:
Standard
1.0 - 1.4 mm (0.039 - 0.055 in)
Allowable limit
2.0 mm (0.079 in)
Retaining plate:
Refer to SDS, AT-359.
PD
AX
SU
SAT869A
쐌
SAT870A
TF
Measurement of clearance between retaining plate and snap
ring of forward clutch
Specified clearance:
Standard
0.35 - 0.75 mm (0.0138 - 0.0295 in)
Allowable limit
Model 4EX16, 4EX79 (2WD)
2.15 mm (0.0846 in)
Model 4EX17, 4EX23, 4EX80, 4EX81 (4WD)
2.35 mm (0.0925 in)
Retaining plate:
Refer to SDS, AT-359.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-323
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Low & Reverse Brake
Low & Reverse Brake
COMPONENTS
NAAT0136
SAT673KA
DISASSEMBLY
1.
a.
b.
c.
쐌
쐌
쐌
NAAT0137
Check operation of low and reverse brake.
Install seal ring onto oil pump cover and install reverse clutch.
Apply compressed air to oil hole.
Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring.
If retaining plate does not contact snap ring,
D-ring might be damaged.
Oil seal might be damaged.
Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball.
SAT872A
2.
Remove snap ring, and then remove retaining plate, low and
reverse brake drive plates, driven plates, dish plate and
U-spring.
NOTE:
쐌 U-spring can be set only at the installation position shown in
component figure.
쐌 U-spring is removed when the front driven plate is removed.
SAT873A
AT-324
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Low & Reverse Brake (Cont’d)
3.
4.
5.
Remove low one-way clutch inner race, spring retainer and
return spring from transmission case.
Remove seal rings from low one-way clutch inner race.
Remove needle bearing from low one-way clutch inner race.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT382I
6.
7.
Remove low and reverse brake piston using compressed air.
Remove oil seal and D-ring from piston.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT876A
INSPECTION
NAAT0138
Low and Reverse Brake Snap Ring and Spring Retainer
NAAT0138S01
쐌
Check for deformation, or damage.
TF
PD
AX
SU
Low and Reverse Brake Return Springs
쐌
NAAT0138S02
Check for deformation or damage. Also measure free length
and outside diameter.
Inspection standard:
Refer to SDS, AT-357.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT829A
Low and Reverse Brake Drive Plates
쐌
쐌
SAT845A
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
Measure thickness of facing.
Thickness of drive plate:
Standard value
Model 4EX16, 4EX79 (2WD)
1.90 - 2.05 mm (0.075 - 0.081 in)
Model 4EX17, 4EX23, 4EX80, 4EX81 (4WD)
1.52 - 1.67 mm (0.0598 - 0.0657 in)
Wear limit
AT-325
NAAT0138S03
HA
SC
EL
IDX
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Low & Reverse Brake (Cont’d)
쐌
1.40 mm (0.0551 in)
If not within wear limit, replace.
Low One-way Clutch Inner Race
NAAT0138S04
쐌
Check frictional surface of inner race for wear or damage.
쐌
쐌
쐌
Install a new seal rings onto low one-way clutch inner race.
Be careful not to expand seal ring gap excessively.
Measure seal ring-to-groove clearance.
Inspection standard:
Standard value: 0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)
Allowable limit: 0.25 mm (0.0098 in)
If not within allowable limit, replace low one-way clutch inner
race.
SAT877A
쐌
SAT878A
ASSEMBLY
1.
쐌
NAAT0139
쐌
Install needle bearing onto one-way clutch inner race.
Pay attention to its direction — Black surface goes to rear
side.
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
2.
쐌
Install lip seal and D-ring onto piston.
Apply ATF to oil seal and D-ring.
SAT112B
SAT879AB
AT-326
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Low & Reverse Brake (Cont’d)
3.
쐌
Install piston by rotating it slowly and evenly.
Apply ATF to inner surface of transmission case.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT880A
4.
5.
6.
Install return springs, spring retainer and low one-way clutch
inner race onto transmission case.
Install dish plate, low and reverse brake drive plates, driven
plates and U-spring, and then retaining plate.
Install snap ring on transmission case.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT881A
7.
Check operation of low and reverse brake clutch piston. Refer
to “DISASSEMBLY”, AT-324.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT872A
8.
Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring.
If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate.
Specified clearance:
Standard
0.8 - 1.1 mm (0.031 - 0.043 in)
Allowable limit
2.7 mm (0.106 in)
Retaining plate:
Refer to SDS, AT-360.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT885A
9.
쐌
쐌
Install low one-way clutch inner race seal ring.
Apply petroleum jelly to seal ring.
Make sure seal rings are pressed firmly into place and
held by petroleum jelly.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT884A
AT-327
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Forward Clutch Drum Assembly
Forward Clutch Drum Assembly
COMPONENTS
NAAT0140
SAT211GA
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Remove snap ring from forward clutch drum.
Remove side plate from forward clutch drum.
3.
4.
Remove low one-way clutch from forward clutch drum.
Remove snap ring from forward clutch drum.
5.
Remove needle bearing from forward clutch drum.
SAT212G
SAT213G
SAT891A
AT-328
NAAT0141
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Forward Clutch Drum Assembly (Cont’d)
INSPECTION
Forward Clutch Drum
쐌
쐌
NAAT0142
GI
NAAT0142S01
Check spline portion for wear or damage.
Check frictional surfaces of low one-way clutch and needle
bearing for wear or damage.
MA
EM
LC
SAT892A
Needle Bearing and Low One-way Clutch
쐌
EC
NAAT0142S02
Check frictional surface for wear or damage.
FE
CL
MT
SAT893A
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
NAAT0143
Install needle bearing in forward clutch drum.
Install snap ring onto forward clutch drum.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT214G
3.
Install low one-way clutch onto forward clutch drum by pushing the roller in evenly.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT894A
쐌
Install low one-way clutch with flange facing rearward.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT895A
AT-329
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Forward Clutch Drum Assembly (Cont’d)
4.
5.
Install side plate onto forward clutch drum.
Install snap ring onto forward clutch drum.
SAT887A
Rear Internal Gear and Forward Clutch Hub
COMPONENTS
NAAT0144
SAT896AA
DISASSEMBLY
NAAT0145
1.
Remove rear internal gear by pushing forward clutch hub forward.
2.
Remove thrust washer from rear internal gear.
SAT897A
SAT898A
AT-330
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Rear Internal Gear and Forward Clutch Hub (Cont’d)
3.
Remove snap ring from forward clutch hub.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT899A
4.
EC
Remove end bearing.
FE
CL
MT
SAT900A
5.
Remove forward one-way clutch and end bearing as a unit
from forward clutch hub.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT955A
6.
Remove snap ring from forward clutch hub.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT901A
INSPECTION
Rear Internal Gear and Forward Clutch Hub
쐌
쐌
쐌
NAAT0146
HA
NAAT0146S01
Check gear for excessive wear, chips or cracks.
Check frictional surfaces of forward one-way clutch and thrust
washer for wear or damage.
Check spline for wear or damage.
SC
EL
IDX
SAT902A
AT-331
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Rear Internal Gear and Forward Clutch Hub (Cont’d)
Snap Ring and End Bearing
쐌
NAAT0146S02
Check for deformation or damage.
SAT903A
ASSEMBLY
NAAT0147
1.
2.
Install snap ring onto forward clutch hub.
Install end bearing.
3.
쐌
4.
5.
Install forward one-way clutch onto clutch hub.
Install forward one-way clutch with flange facing rearward.
Install end bearing.
Install snap ring onto forward clutch hub.
6.
쐌
쐌
Install thrust washer onto rear internal gear.
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.
Securely insert pawls of thrust washer into holes in rear
internal gear.
7.
Position forward clutch hub in rear internal gear.
SAT901A
SAT904A
SAT906A
SAT907A
AT-332
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Rear Internal Gear and Forward Clutch Hub (Cont’d)
8.
After installing, check to assure that forward clutch hub rotates
clockwise.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT905A
EC
Band Servo Piston Assembly
COMPONENTS
NAAT0148
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SAT161KA
SU
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
NAAT0149
Block one oil hole in OD servo piston retainer and the center
hole in OD band servo piston.
Apply compressed air to the other oil hole in piston retainer to
remove OD band servo piston from retainer.
Remove D-ring from OD band servo piston.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT909A
4.
Remove band servo piston assembly from servo piston
retainer by pushing it forward.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT910A
AT-333
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Band Servo Piston Assembly (Cont’d)
5.
Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing
servo piston spring retainer down, remove E-ring.
6.
Remove servo piston spring retainer, return spring C and piston stem from band servo piston.
7.
Remove E-ring from band servo piston.
SAT911A
SAT912A
SAT913A
8. Remove servo cushion spring retainer from band servo piston.
9. Remove D-rings from band servo piston.
10. Remove O-rings from servo piston retainer.
SAT914A
INSPECTION
Pistons, Retainers and Piston Stem
쐌
NAAT0150
NAAT0150S01
Check frictional surfaces for abnormal wear or damage.
SAT915A
AT-334
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Band Servo Piston Assembly (Cont’d)
Return Springs
쐌
NAAT0150S02
Check for deformation or damage. Measure free length and
outer diameter.
Inspection standard:
Refer to SDS, AT-357.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT162K
ASSEMBLY
1.
쐌
쐌
EC
NAAT0151
Install O-rings onto servo piston retainer.
Apply ATF to O-rings.
Pay attention to position of each O-ring.
FE
CL
MT
SAT917A
2.
Install servo cushion spring retainer onto band servo piston.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT918A
3.
Install E-ring onto servo cushion spring retainer.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT919A
4.
쐌
Install D-rings onto band servo piston.
Apply ATF to D-rings.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT920A
AT-335
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Band Servo Piston Assembly (Cont’d)
5.
Install servo piston spring retainer, return spring C and piston
stem onto band servo piston.
6.
Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing
servo piston spring retainer down, install E-ring.
7.
Install band servo piston assembly onto servo piston retainer
by pushing it inward.
8.
쐌
Install D-ring on OD band servo piston.
Apply ATF to D-ring.
9.
Install OD band servo piston onto servo piston retainer by
pushing it inward.
SAT912A
SAT921A
SAT922A
SAT923A
SAT924A
AT-336
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Parking Pawl Components
Parking Pawl Components
COMPONENTS
GI
NAAT0152
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SAT558JA
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
SU
NAAT0153
Slide return spring to the front of adapter case flange.
Remove return spring, parking pawl spacer and parking pawl
from adapter case.
Remove parking pawl shaft from adapter case.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT226H
4.
Remove parking actuator support from adapter case.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT228H
AT-337
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Parking Pawl Components (Cont’d)
INSPECTION
Parking Pawl and Parking Actuator Support
쐌
쐌
쐌
NAAT0209S01
Check contact surface of parking rod for wear.
Rear Extension Assembly (2WD model only)
쐌
NAAT0209
NAAT0209S02
Check for free play between companion flange and output
shaft.
Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks,
pitting or wear.
Check contact surface of output shaft for wear.
SAT998G
ASSEMBLY
NAAT0154
1.
2.
3.
Install parking actuator support onto adapter case.
Insert parking pawl shaft into adapter case.
Install return spring, pawl spacer and parking pawl onto parking pawl shaft.
4.
Bend return spring upward and install it onto adapter case.
SAT229H
SAT226H
AT-338
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1)
Assembly (1)
1.
a.
쐌
쐌
b.
NAAT0155
c.
Install manual shaft components.
Install oil seal onto manual shaft.
Apply ATF to oil seal.
Wrap threads of manual shaft with masking tape.
Insert manual shaft and oil seal as a unit into transmission
case.
Remove masking tape.
d.
Push oil seal evenly and install it onto transmission case.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT931A
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT932A
e.
Align groove in shaft with retaining pin hole, then retaining pin
into position as shown in figure at left.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT933A
f.
g.
Install detent spring and spacer.
While pushing detent spring down, install manual plate onto
manual shaft.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT901E
h.
Install lock nuts onto manual shaft.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT936A
AT-339
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1) (Cont’d)
2. Install accumulator piston.
a. Install O-rings onto accumulator piston.
쐌 Apply ATF to O-rings.
Accumulator piston O-rings
Unit: mm (in)
Accumulator
A
B
C
D
Small diameter end
29 (1.14)
32 (1.26)
45 (1.77)
29 (1.14)
Large diameter end
45 (1.77)
50 (1.97)
50 (1.97)
45 (1.77)
SAT523GA
b.
Install return spring for accumulator A onto transmission case.
Free length of return spring:
Refer to SDS, AT-357.
c.
쐌
Install accumulator pistons A, B, C and D.
Apply ATF to transmission case.
3.
a.
Install band servo piston.
Install return springs onto servo piston.
b.
쐌
Install band servo piston onto transmission case.
Apply ATF to O-ring of band servo piston and transmission case.
Install gasket for band servo onto transmission case.
SAT938A
SAT939AA
SAT941A
c.
SAT942A
AT-340
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1) (Cont’d)
d.
Install band servo retainer onto transmission case.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT940A
4.
a.
Install rear side clutch and gear components.
Place transmission case in vertical position.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT943A
b.
Slightly lift forward clutch drum assembly. Then slowly rotate it
clockwise until its hub passes fully over clutch inner race inside
transmission case.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT944A
c.
Check to be sure that rotation direction of forward clutch
assembly is correct.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT945A
d.
쐌
쐌
Install thrust washer onto front of overrun clutch hub.
Apply petroleum jelly to the thrust washer.
Insert pawls of thrust washer securely into holes in overrun clutch hub.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT946A
AT-341
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1) (Cont’d)
e.
Install overrun clutch hub onto rear internal gear assembly.
f.
쐌
Install needle bearing onto rear of overrun clutch hub.
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
g.
Check that overrun clutch hub rotates as shown while holding
forward clutch hub.
h.
Place transmission case into horizontal position.
i.
Install rear internal gear, forward clutch hub and overrun clutch
hub as a unit onto transmission case.
SAT947A
SAT948A
SAT949A
SAT527G
SAT951A
AT-342
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1) (Cont’d)
j.
쐌
Install needle bearing onto rear internal gear.
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT952A
k.
쐌
쐌
Install bearing race onto rear of front internal gear.
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.
Securely engage pawls of bearing race with holes in front
internal gear.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT953A
l.
Install front internal gear on transmission case.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT954A
5.
a.
b.
c.
d.
쐌
Install rear extension assembly on transmission case (2WD
model only).
Install revolution sensor on rear extension.
Install rear extension gasket on transmission case.
Install parking rod on transmission case.
Install parking gear and needle bearing.
Insert rear extension assembly into place while holding
parking gear and needle bearing by hand.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT546J
6.
a.
쐌
Install output shaft and parking gear (4WD model only).
Insert output shaft from rear of transmission case while slightly
lifting front internal gear.
Do not force output shaft against front of transmission
case.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT216B
AT-343
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1) (Cont’d)
b.
쐌
Carefully push output shaft against front of transmission case.
Install snap ring on front of output shaft.
Check to be sure output shaft cannot be removed in rear
direction.
SAT957A
c.
쐌
쐌
Install needle bearing on transmission case.
Pay attention to its direction — Black side goes to rear.
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
d.
Install parking gear on transmission case.
e.
쐌
Install snap ring on rear of output shaft.
Check to be sure output shaft cannot be removed in forward direction.
7.
a.
쐌
Install adapter case (4WD model only).
Install oil seal on adapter case.
Apply ATF to oil seal.
SAT217B
SAT218B
SAT960A
SAT759I
AT-344
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1) (Cont’d)
b.
쐌
c.
Install O-ring on revolution sensor.
Apply ATF to O-ring.
Install revolution sensor on adapter case.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT757I
d.
Install adapter case gasket on transmission case.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT963A
e.
Install parking rod on transmission case.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT964A
f.
Install adapter case on transmission case.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT755I
8.
a.
쐌
Install front side clutch and gear components.
Install rear sun gear on transmission case.
Pay attention to its direction.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT974A
AT-345
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1) (Cont’d)
b.
쐌
c.
쐌
쐌
Make sure needle bearing is on front of front planetary carrier.
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
Make sure needle bearing is on rear of front planetary carrier.
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing.
Pay attention to its direction — Black side goes to front.
d.
While rotating forward clutch drum clockwise, install front planetary carrier on forward clutch drum.
쐌
Check that portion A of front planetary carrier protrudes
approximately 2 mm (0.08 in) beyond portion B of forward
clutch assembly.
e.
쐌
쐌
Make sure bearing races are on front and rear of clutch pack.
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing races.
Securely engage pawls of bearing races with holes in
clutch pack.
f.
Install clutch pack into transmission case.
SAT967A
SAT969A
SAT970A
SAT971A
SAT973A
AT-346
ASSEMBLY
Adjustment
Adjustment
=NAAT0156
When any parts listed in the following table are replaced, total end
play or reverse clutch end play must be adjusted.
Part name
Total end play
Reverse clutch end play
Transmission case
쐌
쐌
Low one-way clutch inner race
쐌
쐌
Overrun clutch hub
쐌
쐌
Rear internal gear
쐌
쐌
Rear planetary carrier
쐌
쐌
Rear sun gear
쐌
쐌
Front planetary carrier
쐌
쐌
Front sun gear
쐌
쐌
High clutch hub
쐌
쐌
High clutch drum
쐌
쐌
Oil pump cover
쐌
쐌
Reverse clutch drum
—
쐌
1.
Adjust total end play.
Total end play “T1”:
0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT975A
a.
With needle bearing installed, place J34291-1 (bridge),
J34291-2 (legs) and the J34291-5 (gauging cylinder) onto oil
pump. The long ends of legs should be placed firmly on
machined surface of oil pump assembly. The gauging cylinder
should rest on top of the needle bearing. Lock gauging cylinder in place with set screw.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT976A
b.
Install J34291-23 (gauging plunger) into gauging cylinder.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT977A
AT-347
ASSEMBLY
Adjustment (Cont’d)
c.
Install original bearing race inside reverse clutch drum. Place
shim selecting gauge with its legs on machined surface of
transmission case (no gasket). Allow gauging plunger to rest
on bearing race. Lock gauging plunger in place with set screw.
d.
Remove Tool and use feeler gauge to measure gap between
gauging cylinder and gauging plunger. This measurement
should give exact total end play.
Total end play “T1”:
0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)
If end play is out of specification, decrease or increase thickness of oil pump cover bearing race as necessary.
Available oil pump cover bearing race:
Refer to SDS, AT-360.
SAT978A
쐌
SAT979A
2.
Adjust reverse clutch drum end play.
Reverse clutch drum end play “T2”:
0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 - 0.0354 in)
a.
Place J34291-1 (bridge), J34291-2 (legs) and J34291-5 (gauging cylinder) on machined surface of transmission case (no
gasket). Allow gauging cylinder to rest on front thrust surface
of reverse clutch drum. Lock cylinder in place with set screw.
b.
Install J34291-23 (gauging plunger) into gauging cylinder.
SAT980A
SAT981A
SAT982AA
AT-348
ASSEMBLY
Adjustment (Cont’d)
c.
Install original thrust washer on oil pump. Place shim setting
gauge legs onto machined surface of oil pump assembly. Allow
gauging plunger to rest on thrust washer. Lock plunger in place
with set screw.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT983A
d.
쐌
Use feeler gauge to measure gap between gauging plunger
and gauging cylinder. This measurement should give you exact
reverse clutch drum end play.
Reverse clutch drum end play “T2”:
0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 - 0.0354 in)
If end play is out of specification, decrease or increase thickness of oil pump thrust washer as necessary.
Available oil pump thrust washer:
Refer to SDS, AT-361.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT984A
Assembly (2)
1.
a.
쐌
NAAT0157
Install brake band and band strut.
Install band strut on brake band.
Apply petroleum jelly to band strut.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT985A
b.
Place brake band on periphery of reverse clutch drum, and
insert band strut into end of band servo piston stem.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT986A
c.
Install anchor end bolt on transmission case. Then, tighten
anchor end bolt just enough so that reverse clutch drum (clutch
pack) will not tilt forward.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT987A
AT-349
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (2) (Cont’d)
2.
쐌
3.
Install input shaft on transmission case.
Pay attention to its direction — O-ring groove side is front.
Install gasket on transmission case.
4.
a.
쐌
b.
쐌
Install oil pump assembly.
Install needle bearing on oil pump assembly.
Apply petroleum jelly to the needle bearing.
Install selected thrust washer on oil pump assembly.
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.
c.
Carefully install seal rings into grooves and press them into the
petroleum jelly so that they are a tight fit.
d.
쐌
Install O-ring on oil pump assembly.
Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.
e.
Apply petroleum jelly to mating surface of transmission case
and oil pump assembly.
SAT988A
SAT989A
SAT990A
SAT991A
SAT992A
AT-350
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (2) (Cont’d)
f.
쐌
Install oil pump assembly.
Install two converter housing securing bolts in bolt holes
in oil pump assembly as guides.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT993A
쐌
Insert oil pump assembly to the specified position in
transmission, as shown at left.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT994A
5.
쐌
Install O-ring on input shaft.
Apply ATF to O-rings.
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT114B
6.
a.
쐌
Install converter housing.
Apply recommended sealant (Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI section.) to outer periphery of bolt
holes in converter housing.
Do not apply too much sealant.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT397C
b.
c.
Apply recommended sealant (Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI section.) to seating surfaces of
bolts that secure front of converter housing.
Install converter housing on transmission case.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT158G
AT-351
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (2) (Cont’d)
7.
8.
a.
b.
Install turbine revolution sensor.
Adjust brake band.
Tighten anchor end bolt to specified torque.
Anchor end bolt:
: 4 - 6 N·m (0.4 - 0.6 kg-m, 35 - 52 in-lb)
Back off anchor end bolt two and a half turns.
SAT001B
c.
While holding anchor end bolt, tighten lock nut.
Ancher end bolt nut:
: 41 - 50 N·m (4.1 - 5.2 kg-m, 30 - 37 ft-lb)
9.
a.
쐌
b.
Install terminal cord assembly.
Install O-ring on terminal cord assembly.
Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.
Compress terminal cord assembly stopper and install terminal
cord assembly on transmission case.
SAT002B
SAT115B
10. Install control valve assembly.
a. Install accumulator piston return springs B, C and D.
Free length of return springs:
Refer to SDS, AT-357.
SAT004BA
b.
쐌
Install manual valve on control valve.
Apply ATF to manual valve.
SAT005B
AT-352
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (2) (Cont’d)
c.
d.
Place control valve assembly on transmission case. Connect
solenoid connector for upper body.
Install connector clip.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT006B
e.
f.
쐌
Install control valve assembly on transmission case.
Install connector tube brackets and tighten bolts A and B.
Check that terminal assembly does not catch.
Bolt symbol
EC
FE
mm (in)
A
33 (1.30)
B
45 (1.77)
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT353B
g.
쐌
h.
Install O-ring on oil strainer.
Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.
Install oil strainer on control valve.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT221B
i.
Securely fasten terminal harness with clips.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT009B
AT-353
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (2) (Cont’d)
j.
Install torque converter clutch solenoid valve and A/T fluid temperature sensor connectors.
SAT010B
11. Install oil pan.
a. Attach a magnet to oil pan.
SAT011B
b.
c.
쐌
쐌
d.
Install new oil pan gasket on transmission case.
Install oil pan and bracket on transmission case.
Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing bolts.
Before installing bolts, remove traces of sealant and oil
from mating surface and thread holes.
Tighten four bolts in a criss-cross pattern to prevent dislocation of gasket.
Tighten drain plug.
12.
a.
b.
c.
Install PNP switch.
Check that manual shaft is in “1” position.
Temporarily install PNP switch on manual shaft.
Move manual shaft to “N”.
d.
Tighten bolts while inserting 4.0 mm (0.157 in) dia. pin vertically into locating holes in PNP switch and manual shaft.
쐌
SAT365I
SAT299I
SAT014B
AT-354
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (2) (Cont’d)
13. Install torque converter.
a. Pour ATF into torque converter.
쐌 Approximately 2 liters (2-1/8 US qt, 1-3/4 Imp qt) of fluid
are required for a new torque converter.
쐌 When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount
of fluid as was drained.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT428DA
b.
Install torque converter while aligning notches and oil pump.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT016B
c.
Measure distance A to check that torque converter is in proper
position.
Distance “A”:
25.0 mm (0.984 in) or more
TF
PD
AX
SU
SAT017B
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-355
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications
General Specifications
NAAT0160
VQ35DE engine
Applied model
2WD
4WD
Automatic transmission model
RE4R01A
Transmission model code number
4EX74
4EX75, 4EX76
Stall torque ratio
2.0 : 1
Transmission gear ratio
1st
2.785
2nd
1.545
Top
1.000
OD
0.694
Reverse
2.272
Nissan Matic “D” (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Genuine Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid (Canada)*1
Recommended fluid
Fluid capacity
8.5 (9 US qt, 7-1/2 Imp qt)
*1: Refer to MA-12, “Fluids and Lubricants”.
Shift Schedule
NAAT0178
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS THROTTLE POSITION
NAAT0178S01
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
D 1 , D2
D2 , D 3
D3 , D 4
D4 , D 3
D3 , D 2
D2 , D 1
12 , 1 1
Full throttle
55 - 59
(34 - 37)
105 - 113
(65 - 70)
174 - 184
(108 - 114)
170 - 180
(106 - 112)
102 - 110
(63 - 68)
43 - 47
(27 - 29)
43 - 47
(27 - 29)
Half throttle
37 - 41
(23 - 25)
71 - 79
(44 - 49)
129 - 139
(80 - 86)
81 - 91
(50 - 57)
33 - 41
(21 - 25)
12 - 16
(7 - 10)
43 - 47
(27 - 29)
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING LOCK-UP
Throttle position
NAAT0178S02
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Overdrive control switch [Shift position]
Lock-up “ON”
Lock-up “OFF”
ON [D4]
174 - 184 (108 - 114)
170 - 180 (106 - 112)
OFF [D3]
104 - 114 (65 - 71)
101 - 111 (63 - 69)
ON [D4]
151 - 161 (94 - 100)
106 - 116 (66 - 72)
OFF [D3]
85 - 95 (53 - 59)
82 - 92 (51 - 57)
Full throttle
Half throttle
Stall Revolution
Stall revolution
NAAT0163
rpm
2,440 - 2,640
Line Pressure
NAAT0164
2
Line pressure kPa (kg/cm , psi)
Engine speed
rpm
D, 2 and 1 positions
R position
Idle
422 - 461 (4.3 - 4.7, 61 - 67)
667 - 706 (6.8 - 7.2, 97 - 102)
Stall
1,020 - 1,098 (10.4 - 11.2, 148 - 159)
1,422 - 1,500 (14.5 - 15.3, 206 - 218)
AT-356
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Return Springs
Return Springs
NAAT0165
GI
Unit: mm (in)
Item
MA
Parts
Part No.*
Free length
Outer diameter
1
Torque converter relief valve spring
31742-41X23
38.0 (1.496)
9.0 (0.354)
2
Pressure regulator valve spring
31742-41X24
44.02 (1.7331)
14.0 (0.551)
3
Pressure modifier valve spring
31742-41X19
31.95 (1.2579)
6.8 (0.268)
—
Accumulator control valve spring
—
—
—
4
Shuttle shift valve D spring
31762-41X01
25.0 (0.984)
7.0 (0.276)
5
4-2 sequence valve spring
31756-41X00
29.1 (1.146)
6.95 (0.2736)
6
Shift valve B spring
31762-41X01
25.0 (0.984)
7.0 (0.276)
7
4-2 relay valve spring
31756-41X00
29.1 (1.146)
6.95 (0.2736)
8
Shift valve A spring
31762-41X01
25.0 (0.984)
7.0 (0.276)
9
Overrun clutch control valve spring
31762-41X03
23.6 (0.929)
7.0 (0.276)
10
Overrun clutch reducing valve spring
31742-41X14
38.9 (1.531)
7.0 (0.276)
11
Shuttle shift valve S spring
31762-41X04
51.0 (2.008)
5.65 (0.2224)
12
Pilot valve spring
31742-41X13
25.7 (1.012)
9.0 (0.354)
13
Torque converter clutch control valve spring
31742-41X22
18.5 (0.728)
13.0 (0.512)
1
Modifier accumulator piston spring
31742-27X70
31.4 (1.236)
9.8 (0.386)
2
1st reducing valve spring
31756-60X00
29.5 (1.161)
7.0 (0.276)
3
3-2 timing valve spring
31742-41X06
23.0 (0.906)
6.7 (0.264)
4
Servo charger valve spring
31742-41X06
23.0 (0.906)
6.7 (0.264)
31505-41X07
—
—
Upper body
Control valve
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
Lower body
Reverse clutch
—
High clutch
10 pcs
31521-41X03
(Assembly)
24.2 (0.9528)
11.6 (0.457)
Forward clutch (Overrun clutch)
20 pcs
31521-41X04
(Assembly)
35.77 (1.4083)
9.7 (0.382)
Low & reverse brake
18 pcs
31655-41X00
(Assembly)
22.3 (0.878)
11.2 (0.441)
Spring A
31605-4AX03
45.6 (1.795)
34.3 (1.350)
Spring B
31605-41X01
29.7 (1.169)
27.6 (1.087)
Accumulator A
31605-41X02
43.0 (1.693)
18.0 (0.709)
Accumulator B
31605-41X14
47.6 (1.874)
26.5 (1.043)
Accumulator C
31605-41X09
45.0 (1.772)
29.3 (1.154)
Accumulator D
31605-41X06
58.4 (2.299)
17.3 (0.681)
PD
AX
SU
Band servo
BR
ST
RS
Accumulator
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-357
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Accumulator O-ring
Accumulator O-ring
NAAT0166
Diameter mm (in)
Accumulator
A
B
C
D
Small diameter end
29 (1.14)
32 (1.26)
45 (1.77)
29 (1.14)
Large diameter end
45 (1.77)
50 (1.97)
50 (1.97)
45 (1.77)
Clutches and Brakes
NAAT0167
REVERSE CLUTCH
Code number
NAAT0167S01
4EX74
4EX75, 4EX76
Number of drive plates
3
Number of driven plates
3
Thickness of drive
plate mm (in)
Standard
1.90 - 2.05 (0.0748 - 0.0807)
Wear limit
1.80 (0.0709)
Standard
0.5 - 0.8 (0.020 - 0.031)
Clearance mm (in)
Allowable limit
1.2 (0.047)
Thickness mm (in)
Thickness of retaining plate
4.6
4.8
5.0
5.2
5.4
Part number*
(0.181)
(0.189)
(0.197)
(0.205)
(0.213)
31537-42X20
31537-42X21
31537-42X22
31537-42X23
31537-42X24
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
HIGH CLUTCH
NAAT0167S02
Code number
4EX74
4EX75, 4EX76
Number of drive plates
5
Number of driven plates
6
Thickness of drive
plate mm (in)
Standard
1.52 - 1.67 (0.0598 - 0.0657)
Wear limit
1.40 (0.0551)
Standard
1.8 - 2.2 (0.071 - 0.087)
Clearance mm (in)
Allowable limit
3.2 (0.126)
Thickness mm (in)
Thickness of retaining plate
4.0
4.2
4.4
4.6
4.8
5.0
(0.157)
(0.165)
(0.173)
(0.181)
(0.189)
(0.197)
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
AT-358
Part number*
31537-41X63
31537-41X64
31537-41X65
31537-41X66
31537-41X67
31537-41X68
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Clutches and Brakes (Cont’d)
FORWARD CLUTCH
NAAT0167S03
Code number
4EX74
4EX75, 4EX76
Number of drive plates
7
8
Number of driven plates
7
8
Thickness of drive
plate mm (in)
Standard
1.52 - 1.67 (0.0598 - 0.0657)
Wear limit
1.40 (0.0551)
Standard
0.35 - 0.75 (0.0138 - 0.0295)
GI
MA
EM
LC
Clearance mm (in)
Allowable limit
2.15 (0.0846)
Thickness mm (in)
Thickness of retaining plate
4.6
4.8
5.0
5.2
5.4
5.6
2.35 (0.0925)
Part number*
(0.181)
(0.189)
(0.197)
(0.205)
(0.213)
(0.220)
Thickness mm (in)
31537-42X13
31537-42X14
31537-42X15
31537-4AX00
31537-4AX01
31537-4AX02
4.2
4.4
4.6
4.8
5.0
5.2
5.4
(0.165)
(0.173)
(0.181)
(0.189)
(0.197)
(0.205)
(0.213)
Part number*
31537-42X11
31537-42X12
31537-42X13
31537-42X14
31537-42X15
31537-4AX00
31537-4AX01
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
CL
NAAT0167S04
4EX74
4EX75, 4EX76
Number of drive plates
3
Number of driven plates
5
Thickness of drive
plate mm (in)
FE
MT
OVERRUN CLUTCH
Code number
EC
Standard
1.90 - 2.05 (0.0748 - 0.0807)
Wear limit
1.80 (0.0709)
Standard
1.0 - 1.4 (0.039 - 0.055)
TF
PD
Clearance mm (in)
Allowable limit
Thickness mm (in)
Thickness of retaining plate
AX
2.0 (0.079)
4.2
4.4
4.6
4.8
5.0
(0.165)
(0.173)
(0.181)
(0.189)
(0.197)
Part number*
31537-41X80
31537-41X81
31537-41X82
31537-41X83
31537-41X84
SU
BR
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-359
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Clutches and Brakes (Cont’d)
LOW & REVERSE BRAKE
NAAT0167S05
Code number
4EX74
4EX75, 4EX76
Number of drive plates
8
Number of driven plates
8
Thickness of drive
plate mm (in)
Standard
1.90 - 2.05 (0.0748 - 0.0807)
1.52 - 1.67 (0.0598 - 0.0657)
Wear limit
1.40 (0.0551)
Standard
0.8 - 1.1 (0.031 - 0.043)
Clearance mm (in)
Allowable limit
2.7 (0.106)
Thickness mm (in)
7.6
7.8
8.0
8.2
8.4
8.6
8.8
9.0
9.2
9.4
9.6
Thickness of retaining plate
Part number*
(0.299)
(0.307)
(0.315)
(0.323)
(0.331)
(0.339)
(0.346)
(0.354)
(0.362)
(0.370)
(0.378)
31667-41X07
31667-41X08
31667-41X00
31667-41X01
31667-41X02
31667-41X03
31667-41X04
31667-41X05
31667-41X06
31667-41X09
31667-41X10
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
BRAKE BAND
NAAT0167S06
Anchor end bolt nut tightening torque
40 - 51 N·m (4.1 - 5.2 kg-m, 30 - 38 ft-lb)
Anchor end bolt tightening torque
4 - 6 N·m (0.4 - 0.6 kg-m, 35 - 52 in-lb)
Number of returning revolution for anchor end bolt
2.5
Oil Pump and Low One-way Clutch
NAAT0168
Unit: mm (in)
Oil pump clearance
Cam ring — oil pump housing
Standard
0.01 - 0.024 (0.0004 - 0.0009)
Rotor, vanes and control piston — oil
pump housing
Standard
0.03 - 0.044 (0.0012 - 0.0017)
Standard
0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098)
Seal ring clearance
Allowable limit
0.25 (0.0098)
Total End Play
Total end play “T1”
NAAT0169
0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)
Thickness mm (in)
Thickness of oil pump cover bearing race
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
(0.031)
(0.039)
(0.047)
(0.055)
(0.063)
(0.071)
(0.079)
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
AT-360
Part number*
31435-41X01
31435-41X02
31435-41X03
31435-41X04
31435-41X05
31435-41X06
31435-41X07
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Reverse Clutch Drum End Play
Reverse Clutch Drum End Play
Reverse clutch drum end play “T2”
NAAT0170
GI
0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 - 0.0354 in)
Thickness mm (in)
0.9
1.1
1.3
1.5
1.7
1.9
Thickness of oil pump thrust washer
MA
Part number*
(0.035)
(0.043)
(0.051)
(0.059)
(0.067)
(0.075)
31528-21X01
31528-21X02
31528-21X03
31528-21X04
31528-21X05
31528-21X06
EM
LC
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
EC
Removal and Installation
NAAT0171
Number of returning revolutions for lock nut
2
Manual control linkage
Distance between end of converter housing and torque converter
CL
25.0 mm (0.984 in) or more
Shift Solenoid Valves
NAAT0217
Gear position
1
2
3
4
Shift solenoid valve A
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
Shift solenoid valve B
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
Resistance (Approx.)
MT
TF
Solenoid Valves
Solenoid valves
FE
4.4 - 5.9 N·m
(0.45 - 0.60 kg-m, 39.1 - 52.1 in-lb)
Lock nut tightening torque
NAAT0218
Ω
Terminal No.
Shift solenoid valve A
20 - 40
3
Shift solenoid valve B
20 - 40
2
Overrun clutch solenoid valve
20 - 40
4
Line pressure solenoid valve
2.5 - 5
6
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
10 - 20
7
PD
AX
SU
BR
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor
NAAT0219
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Condition
A/T fluid temperature
sensor
Cold [20°C (68°F)]
"
Hot [80°C (176°F)]
ST
Specification
Approximately 1.5V
"
Approximately 0.5V
Approximately 2.5 kΩ
"
Approximately 0.3 kΩ
Turbine Revolution Sensor
Terminal No.
RS
NAAT0232
BT
Resistance
1
2
2.4 - 2.8 kΩ
2
3
No continuity
1
3
No continuity
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-361
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Revolution Sensor
Revolution Sensor
NAAT0220
Terminal No.
Resistance
1
2
500 - 650Ω
2
3
No continuity
1
3
No continuity
Dropping Resistor
Resistance
NAAT0221
11.2 - 12.8Ω
AT-362